Loading...
HomeMy WebLinkAbout26 - Construction Agreements - HDR - Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Project City of Bozeman Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Project Construction Documents Project Manual Conformed Documents July 2026 HDR Project No. 10375316 Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 This page intentionally left blank. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents SEALS AND SIGNATURES 00 01 07 - 1 00 01 07 SEALS AND SIGNATURES Owner Name: City of Bozeman Facility or Site Name: Valley Center Lift Station Project Name: Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Project or Contract Designation: 10375316 Engineer: HDR Jarrett Moran, PE License No. 75162 The seal and signature to the left applies to the following Specifications divisions and sections of this project manual: • Division 01 – All Sections • Division 02 – All Sections • Division 07 – All Sections • Division 08 – All Sections • Division 09 – All Sections • Division 10 – All Sections • Division 31 – All Sections • Division 32 – All Sections • Division 33 – All Sections • Division 40 – All Sections • Division 41 – All Sections • Division 43 – All Sections Michael Kuntz, PE License No. 75318 The seal and signature to the left applies to the following Specifications divisions and sections of this project manual: • Division 03 – All Sections Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents SEALS AND SIGNATURES 00 01 07 - 2 Terry Stulc, PE License No. 63196 The seal and signature to the left applies to the following Specifications divisions and sections of this project manual: • Division 26 – All Sections Engineer’s seal and signature does not apply to the documents that comprise Division 00, Bidding and Contracting Requirements. It is a violation of applicable laws and regulations governing professional licensing and registration for any person, unless acting under the direction of the licensed and registered design professional(s) indicated above, to alter in any way the Specifications in this project manual. END OF SEALS AND SIGNATURES Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents TABLE OF CONTENTS 00 01 10 - 1 TABLE OF CONTENTS DIVISION 00 — PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS 00 01 01 - PROJECT MANUAL COVER 00 01 07 - SEALS AND SIGNATURES 00 01 10 - TABLE OF CONTENTS 00 01 11 - DIVISION 00 DIVIDER 00 11 13 - ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS 00 21 13 - INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS (EJCDC C-200-2018) 00 41 13 - BID FORM (EJCDC C-410-2018) 00 43 13 - BID BOND PENAL SUM FORM (EJCDC C-430-2018) 00 45 13 - QUALIFICATIONS STATEMENT (EJCDC C-451-2018) 00 45 31 - NONDISCRIMINATION AND EQUAL PAY AFFIRMATION 00 46 00 - NON-COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT 00 51 10 - EJCDC C-510 NOTICE OF AWARD 2018 00 52 13 - AGREEMENT (EJCDC C-520-2018) 00 61 13.13 - PERFORMANCE BOND (EJCDC C-610-2018) 00 61 13.16 - PAYMENT BOND (EJCDC C-615-2018) 00 63 13 - REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION 00 65 00 - EJCDC C-550 NOTICE TO PROCEED 2018 00 72 13 - GENERAL CONDITIONS (EJCDC C-700-2018) 00 73 01 - SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS (EJCDC C-800-2018) 00 73 46 - WAGE DETERMINATION SCHEDULE 00 94 00 - EJCDC C-940 WORK CHANGE DIRECTIVE 2018 00 94 10 - CHANGE ORDER 00 94 20 - EJCDC C-942 FIELD ORDER 2018 DIVISION 01 — GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01 00 00 - DIVISION 01 DIVIDER 01 11 00 - SUMMARY OF WORK 01 14 19 - USE OF SITE 01 21 00 - ALLOWANCES 01 22 00 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 01 25 00 - SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 01 26 00 - CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 01 29 73 - SCHEDULE OF VALUES 01 29 76 - PROGRESS PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01 31 13 - PROJECT COORDINATION 01 32 16 - CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE 01 33 00 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 41 24 - PERMIT REQUIREMENTS 01 45 33 IBC 2021 - CODE-REQUIRED SPECIAL INSPECTIONS AND PROCEDURES 01 51 05 - TEMPORARY UTILITIES 01 57 05 - TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01 61 03 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR EQUIPMENT 01 65 00 - PRODUCT DELIVERY REQUIREMENTS 01 66 00 - PRODUCT STORAGE AND HANDLING REQUIREMENTS 01 71 14 - MOBILIZATION AND DEMOBILIZATION 01 71 23 - FIELD ENGINEERING 01 71 33 - PROTECTION OF THE WORK AND PROPERTY 01 73 20 - OPENINGS AND PENETRATIONS IN CONSTRUCTION 01 73 29 - CUTTING AND PATCHING 01 74 00 - CLEANING 01 75 00 - CHECKOUT AND START-UP PROCEDURES PREVAILING WAGE RATES FOR HEAVY CONSTRUCTION SERVICES 2026 Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents TABLE OF CONTENTS 00 01 10 - 2 01 77 19 - CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS 01 78 23 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 78 36 - WARRANTIES 01 78 39 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 78 43 - SPARE PARTS AND EXTRA MATERIALS DIVISION 02 — EXISTING CONDITIONS 02 00 00 - DIVISION 02 DIVIDER 02 06 13 - GEOTECHNICAL BASELINE REPORT DIVISION 03 — CONCRETE 03 00 00 - DIVISION 03 DIVIDER 03 05 05 - CONCRETE TESTING AND INSPECTION 03 11 13 - FORMWORK 03 15 19 - ANCHORAGE TO CONCRETE 03 21 00 - REINFORCEMENT 03 31 30 - CONCRETE MATERIALS AND PROPORTIONING 03 31 31 - CONCRETE MIXING, PLACING, JOINTING, AND CURING 03 35 00 - CONCRETE FINISHING AND REPAIR OF SURFACE DEFECTS 03 41 33 - PRECAST AND PRESTRESSED CONCRETE DIVISION 07 — THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07 26 00 - UNDER SLAB VAPOR RETARDER 07 92 00 - JOINT SEALANTS DIVISION 08 — OPENINGS 08 00 00 - DIVISION 08 DIVIDER 08 31 00 - ACCESS DOORS DIVISION 09 — FINISHES 09 00 00 - DIVISION 09 DIVIDER 09 96 00 - HIGH PERFORMANCE INDUSTRIAL COATINGS DIVISION 10 — SPECIALTIES 10 00 00 - DIVISION 10 DIVIDER 10 14 00 - IDENTIFICATION DEVICES DIVISION 26 — ELECTRICAL 26 00 00 - DIVISION 26 DIVIDER 26 05 00 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 26 05 09 - MOTORS 26 05 19 - LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 26 05 26 - GROUNDING AND BONDING 26 05 33 - RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 43 - UNDERGROUND WORK FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 48 - ELECTRICAL SEISMIC RESTRAINT SYSTEMS 26 08 13 - ACCEPTANCE TESTING 26 09 13 - ELECTRICAL POWER MONITORING 26 09 16 - ELECTRICAL CONTROL COMPONENTS 26 24 16 - PANELBOARDS 26 24 19 - MOTOR CONTROL EQUIPMENT 26 27 26 - WIRING DEVICES 26 28 01 - LOW-VOLTAGE CIRCUIT PROTECTIVE DEVICES 26 28 16.13 - ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS 26 29 23 - VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES - LOW VOLTAGE 26 32 13.13 - DIESEL-ENGINE-DRIVEN GENERATOR SETS 26 35 26.16 - ACTIVE HARMONIC FILTERS 26 36 00 - TRANSFER SWITCHES VALLEY CENTER LIFT STATION GEOTECHNICAL REPORT Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents TABLE OF CONTENTS 00 01 10 - 3 26 43 13 - SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES FOR LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CIRCUITS 26 50 00 - INTERIOR AND EXTERIOR LIGHTING DIVISION 31 — EARTHWORK 31 00 00 - DIVISION 31 DIVIDER 31 10 00 - SITE CLEARING 31 22 19 - FINISH GRADING 31 23 16.43 - TEMPORARY SUPPORT OF EXCAVATIONS 31 23 19 - DEWATERING 31 23 33 - TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING DIVISION 32 — EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS 32 00 00 - DIVISION 32 DIVIDER 32 92 00 - SEEDING, SODDING AND LANDSCAPING DIVISION 33 — UTILITIES 33 00 00 - DIVISION 33 DIVIDER 33 05 31.11 - POLYVINYL CHLORIDE GRAVITY SEWER PIPE 33 05 31.16 - PVC PRESSURE PIPE (AWWA C900) 33 05 61 - PRECAST CONCRETE STRUCTURES 33 31 11 - SANITARY SEWERAGE GRAVITY PIPING 33 32 13 - PACKAGE SEWAGE PUMPING STATION DIVISION 40 — PROCESS INTERCONNECTIONS 40 00 00 - DIVISION 40 DIVIDER 40 05 01 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PROCESS PIPING 40 05 07 - PIPE SUPPORT SYSTEMS 40 05 19 - DUCTILE IRON PROCESS PIPE 40 05 31 - PIPE - PLASTIC 40 05 51 - COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR PROCESS AND UTILITY VALVES 40 05 52 - MISCELLANEOUS VALVES 40 05 62 - PLUG VALVES 40 05 63 - BALL VALVES 40 05 66 - CHECK VALVES 40 61 13 - PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 40 61 21 - PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM TESTING 40 61 43 - SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES FOR INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL EQUIPMENT 40 63 43 - PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLERS 40 66 05 - NETWORK EQUIPMENT 40 67 00 - CONTROL SYSTEM EQUIPMENT PANELS AND RACKS 40 67 63 - UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY 40 71 00 - FLOW INSTRUMENTATION 40 72 00 - LEVEL INSTRUMENTATION 40 73 00 - PRESSURE INSTRUMENTATION DIVISION 41 — MATERIAL PROCESSING AND HANDLING EQUIPMENT 41 00 00 - DIVISION 41 DIVIDER 41 22 23 - HOISTS DIVISION 43 — PROCESS GAS AND LIQUID HANDLING, PURIFICATION AND STORAGE EQUIPMENT 43 00 00 - DIVISION 43 DIVIDER 43 05 23 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PROCESS LIQUID PUMPS 43 25 13 - PUMPING EQUIPMENT - SUBMERSIBLE END-SUCTION SEWAGE PUMPS Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 This page intentionally left blank. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 DIVI SION 00 PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 This page intentionally left blank. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS 00 11 13 - 1 CITY OF BOZEMAN, MONTANA C A L L F O R B I D S NOTICE IS HEREBY GIVEN that the City of Bozeman, Montana, is accepting sealed bids for: VALLEY CENTER LIFT STATION AND FORCE MAIN PROJECT The City of Bozeman will receive online electronic sealed Bids for Construction of the Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Project until 2:00 PM (local time) on June 9th, 2026, and then publicly opened and read aloud . Project Description: The project work under this contract generally includes the installation of a new wastewater lift station with three (3) submersible pumps, a 10’-0” diameter precast wet well, access hatch, portable davit crane, emergency bypass pump connections, a packaged pump station enclosure that includes piping, valves, a combination air release valve, pressure and flow instrumentation, heaters, louvers and exhaust fan, electrical panels, pump control panels, telemetry panel, air gap panel, standby diesel generator, automatic transfer switch, generator screen wall, approximately 15 LF of 18- inch gravity sewer main, a 5’-0” diameter collection manhole, approximately 3,100 LF of 12-inch force main, associated electrical work, and associated site and grading work. For this project, bids will only be received and accepted via the online electronic bid service through QuestCDN. A contractor may view the contract documents at no cost prior to becoming a Planholder. Project bid documents and addenda must be downloaded from QuestCDN, which will add your company to the Planholder List and allow access to vBid online bidding, for the submittal of your bid. QuestCDN may be located using the link in the left-hand navigation menu on the City of Bozeman’s Bids\RFPs\RFQs page or at www.bozeman.net/QuestCDN. The specific project can be found by referencing the eBidDoc number (eBidDoc #10203005). Complete digital project bidding documents are available to download at www.questcdn.com, for a non-refundable charge of $22.00. Bidders will be charged an additional fee of $42.00 to submit a bid electronically. Contact QuestCDN Customer Support at 952-233-1632 or info@questcdn.com for assistance in membership registration, downloading digital project information and vBid online bid submittal. CONTRACTOR and any of the CONTRACTOR’S subcontractors bidding or doing work on this project will be required to be registered with the Montana Department of Labor and Industry (DLI). Forms for registration are available from the DLI, PO Box 8011, 1805 Prospect, Helena, Montana 59604-8011. Information on registration can be obtained by calling (406) 444-7734. CONTRACTOR is not required to have registered with the DLI prior to bidding on this project, but must have registered prior to execution of the Construction Agreement. All laborers and mechanics employed by CONTRACTOR or subcontractors in performance of the construction work shall be paid wages at rates as may be required by the laws of Gallatin County and the state of Montana. The City of Bozeman Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS 00 11 13 - 2 is an Equal Opportunity Employer. Discrimination in the performance of any agreement awarded under this project on the basis of race, color, religion, creed, sex, age, marital status, national origin, or actual or perceived sexual orientation, gender identity or disability is prohibited. This prohibition shall apply to the hiring and treatment of the awarded entity’s employees and to all subcontracts. As such, each entity submitting under this notice shall include a provision wherein the submitting entity, or entities, affirms in writing it will not discriminate on the basis of race, color, religion, creed, sex, age, marital status, national origin, or because of actual or perceived sexual orientation, gender identity or disability and which also recognizes the eventual contract will contain a provision prohibiting discrimination as described above and that this prohibition on discrimination shall apply to the hiring and treatment of the submitting entity’s employees and to all subcontracts. In addition, pursuant to City Commission Resolution 5169, the entity awarded a contract under this RFP and any subcontractors must abide by the Equal Pay Act of 1963 and Section 39-3-104, MCA (the Montana Equal Pay Act), and affirm it will abide by the above and that it has visited the State of Montana Equal Pay for Equal Work “best practices” website, or equivalent “best practices publication and has read the material. Each Bid or proposal must be accompanied by a Certified Check, Cashier’s Check, or Bid Bond payable to the City of Bozeman, Montana, in an amount not less than ten percent (10%) of the total amount of the Bid. Successful BIDDERS shall furnish an approved Performance Bond and a Labor and Materials Payment Bond, each in the amount of one hundred percent (100%) of the contract amount. Insurance as required shall be provided by the successful BIDDER(s) and a certificate(s) of that insurance shall be provided. No Bid may be withdrawn after the scheduled time for the public opening of bids. To request an invitation to join the bid opening, please email the project manager, Jarrett Moran at: jarrett.moran@hdrinc.com. An online optional pre-bid meeting will be held on May 22nd, 2026, at 10:30 AM (local time). To request an invitation to join the pre-bid meeting, please email the project manager, Jarrett Moran at: jarrett.moran@hdrinc.com. The City of Bozeman reserves the right to reject any or all proposals received, to waive informalities to postpone the award of the contract for a period not to exceed sixty (60) days, and to accept the lowest responsive and responsible bid which is in the best interest of the City of Bozeman. The Contractor is required to be an Equal Opportunity Employer. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS 00 11 13 - 3 DATED at Bozeman, Montana, this 16th day of May 2026. Mike Maas, Bozeman City Clerk PUBLISHED LEGAL AD, BOZEMAN, MONTANA Saturday, May 16, 2026 Saturday, May 23, 2026 Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 This page intentionally left blank. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 EJCDC® C-200, Instructions to Bidders for Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. TOC Page1 of 1 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS FOR CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT TABLE OF CONTENTS Page Article 1— Defined Terms ............................................................................................................................. 1 Article 2— Bidding Documents ..................................................................................................................... 1 Article 3— Qualifications of Bidders ............................................................................................................. 2 Article 4— Pre-Bid Conference ..................................................................................................................... 3 Article 5— Site and Other Areas; Existing Site Conditions; Examination of Site; Owner’s Safety Program; Other Work at the Site .................................................................................................................................. 3 Article 6— Bidder’s Representations and Certifications............................................................................... 5 Article 7— Interpretations and Addenda ..................................................................................................... 5 Article 8— Bid Security ................................................................................................................................. 6 Article 9— Contract Times ............................................................................................................................ 7 Article 10— Substitute and “Or Equal” Items ............................................................................................... 7 Article 11— Subcontractors, Suppliers, and Others ..................................................................................... 7 Article 12— Preparation of Bid ..................................................................................................................... 8 Article 13— Basis of Bid ................................................................................................................................ 9 Article 14— Submittal of Bid ......................................................................................................................... 9 Article 15— Modification and Withdrawal of Bid ......................................................................................... 9 Article 16— Opening of Bids ....................................................................................................................... 10 Article 17— Bids to Remain Subject to Acceptance ................................................................................... 10 Article 18— Evaluation of Bids and Award of Contract .............................................................................. 10 Article 19— Bonds and Insurance ............................................................................................................... 11 Article 20— Signing of Agreement .............................................................................................................. 11 Article 21— Sales and Use Taxes ................................................................................................................ 11 Article 22— City of Bozeman Business License .......................................................................................... 12 Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 EJCDC® C-200, Instructions to Bidders for Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. 00 21 13 - Page 1 of 12 ARTICLE 1—DEFINED TERMS 1.01 Terms used in these Instructions to Bidders have the meanings indicated in the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions. Additional terms used in these Instructions to Bidders have the meanings indicated below: A. Issuing Office—The office from which the Bidding Documents are to be issued, and which registers plan holders. ARTICLE 2—BIDDING DOCUMENTS 2.01 Bidder shall obtain a complete set of Bidding Requirements and proposed Contract Documents (together, the Bidding Documents). See the Agreement for a list of the Contract Documents. It is Bidder’s responsibility to determine that it is using a complete set of documents in the preparation of a Bid. Bidder assumes sole responsibility for errors or misinterpretations resulting from the use of incomplete documents, by Bidder itself or by its prospective Subcontractors and Suppliers. 2.02 Bidding Documents are made available for the sole purpose of obtaining Bids for completion of the Project and permission to download or distribution of the Bidding Documents does not confer a license or grant permission or authorization for any other use, nor does it grant or confer ownership or any property interest in the Bidding Documents and other documents distributed for the Project. Authorization to download documents, or other distribution, includes the right for Bidding Documents holders to print documents solely for their use, and the use of their prospective Subcontractors and Suppliers, provided the Bidding Documents holder pays all costs associated with printing or reproduction. Paper or other types of printed documents may not be re-sold under any circumstances. 2.03 Owner has established the use of a Bidding Documents Website as indicated in the Advertisement or invitation to bid. Owner recommends that Bidder register as a Bidding Documents holder with the Issuing Office at such website, and obtain a complete set of the Bidding Documents from such website. Bidders may rely that sets of Bidding Documents obtained from the Bidding Documents Website are complete, unless an omission is blatant. Registered Bidding Documents holders will receive Addenda issued by Owner or Issuing Office. 2.04 Plan rooms (including construction information subscription services, and electronic and virtual plan rooms) may distribute the Bidding Documents, or make them available for examination. Those prospective bidders that obtain an electronic (digital) copy of the Bidding Documents from a plan room are encouraged to register as Bidding Documents holders from the Bidding Documents Website or Issuing Office. Owner is not responsible for omissions in Bidding Documents or other documents obtained from plan rooms or other such sources (such as other prospective bidders), or for a Bidder’s failure to obtain Addenda from a plan room. 2.05 Electronic Documents A. When the Bidding Requirements indicate that electronic (digital) copies of the Bidding Documents are available, such documents will be made available to prospective Bidders as Electronic Documents in the manner specified. 1. Bidding Documents will be provided in Adobe PDF (Portable Document Format) (.pdf). It is the intent of the Engineer and Owner that such Electronic Documents are to be exactly representative of the paper copies of the documents. However, because the Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 EJCDC® C-200, Instructions to Bidders for Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. 00 21 13 - Page 2 of 12 Owner and Engineer cannot totally control the transmission and receipt of Electronic Documents nor any bidder’s or the Contractor’s means of reproduction of such documents, the Owner and Engineer cannot and do not guarantee that Electronic Documents and reproductions prepared from those versions are identical in every manner to the paper copies. B. Unless otherwise stated in the Bidding Documents, the Bidder may use and rely upon complete sets of Electronic Documents of the Bidding Documents, described in Paragraph 2.05.A above. However, Bidder assumes all risks associated with differences arising from transmission/receipt of Electronic Documents versions of Bidding Documents and reproductions prepared from those versions and, further, assumes all risks, costs, and responsibility associated with use of the Electronic Documents versions to derive information that is not explicitly contained in paper versions of the documents, and for Bidder’s reliance upon such derived information. C. After the Contract is awarded, the Owner will provide or direct the Engineer to provide for the use of the Contractor certain documents that were developed by Engineer as part of the Project design process, as Electronic Documents in native file formats as originally prepared by Engineer. 1. Electronic Documents that are available in native file format include: a. Drawing and Survey (AutoCAD) Files. 2. Release of such documents will be solely for the convenience of the Contractor and subject to additional requirements. No such document is a Contract Document. 3. Unless the Contract Documents explicitly identify that such information will be available to the Successful Bidder (Contractor), nothing herein will create an obligation on the part of the Owner or Engineer to provide or create such information, and the Contractor is not entitled to rely on the availability of such information in the preparation of its Bid or pricing of the Work. In all cases, the Contractor shall take appropriate measures to verify that electronic/digital information provided in Electronic Documents is appropriate and adequate for Contractor’s specific purposes. 4. In no case will Contractor be entitled to additional compensation or time for completion due to any differences between the actual Contract Documents and any related document in native file format. ARTICLE 3—QUALIFICATIONS OF BIDDERS 3.01 To demonstrate Bidder’s qualifications to perform the Work, Bidder is to submit the following information with its Bid to demonstrate Bidder’s qualifications to perform the Work: A. Written evidence establishing its qualifications such as financial data, previous experience on projects of similar scope, scale, and complexity, and present commitments. B. A written statement that Bidder is authorized to do business in the state where the Project is located, or a written certification that Bidder will obtain such authority prior to the Effective Date of the Contract. C. Bidder’s Montana contractor's registration/license number. D. Subcontractor and Supplier qualification information. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 EJCDC® C-200, Instructions to Bidders for Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. 00 21 13 - Page 3 of 12 3.02 A Bidder’s failure to submit required qualification information may disqualify Bidder from receiving an award of the Contract. 3.03 No requirement in this Article 3 to submit information will prejudice the right of Owner to seek additional pertinent information regarding Bidder’s qualifications. 3.04 Bidders shall be experienced in the kind of Work to be performed, shall have the or be able to obtain construction equipment necessary for the Work, and shall possess sufficient capital to properly perform the Work within the time allowed. Bids received from Bidders who have previously failed to complete work within the time required, or who have previously performed similar work in an unsatisfactory manner, may be rejected. A Bid may be rejected if Bidder cannot show and document to Owner’s satisfaction that Bidder has the necessary ability, facilities, equipment, and resources to commence the Work at the time prescribed and thereafter to prosecute and complete the Work at the rate or within the times specified. A Bid may be rejected if Bidder is already obligated for the performance of other work which would delay the commencement, prosecution or completion of the Work. ARTICLE 4—PRE-BID CONFERENCE 4.01 An optional pre-bid conference will be held at the time and location indicated in the Advertisement or invitation to bid. Representatives of Owner and Engineer will be present to discuss the Project. Bidders are encouraged to attend and participate in the conference; however, attendance at this conference is not required to submit a Bid. 4.02 Information presented at the pre-bid conference does not alter the Bidding Documents. Owner or Issuing Office will issue Addenda to make any changes to the Bidding Documents that result from discussions at the pre-bid conference. Information presented and statements made at the pre-bid conference will not be binding or legally effective unless incorporated in an Addendum. ARTICLE 5—SITE AND OTHER AREAS; EXISTING SITE CONDITIONS; EXAMINATION OF SITE; OWNER’S SAFETY PROGRAM; OTHER WORK AT THE SITE 5.01 Site and Other Areas A. The Site is identified in the Bidding Documents, including in Specifications Section 01 11 00 – Summary of Work. By definition, the Site includes rights-of-way, easements, and other lands furnished by Owner for the use of the Contractor. Any additional lands required for temporary construction facilities, construction equipment, or storage of materials and equipment, and any access needed for such additional lands, are to be obtained and paid for by Contractor. 5.02 Existing Site Conditions A. Subsurface and Physical Conditions; Hazardous Environmental Conditions 1. The Supplementary Conditions identify the following regarding existing conditions at or adjacent to the Site: a. Those reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at or adjacent to the Site that contain Technical Data. b. Those drawings known to Owner of existing physical conditions at or adjacent to the Site, including those drawings depicting existing surface or subsurface Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 EJCDC® C-200, Instructions to Bidders for Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. 00 21 13 - Page 4 of 12 structures at or adjacent to the Site (except Underground Facilities), that contain Technical Data. c. Reports and drawings known to Owner relating to Hazardous Environmental Conditions that have been identified at or adjacent to the Site. d. Technical Data contained in such reports and drawings. 2. Owner will make copies of reports and drawings referenced above available to any prospective Bidder on request. These reports and drawings are not part of the Contract Documents, but the Technical Data contained therein upon whose accuracy Bidder is entitled to rely, as provided in the General Conditions, has been identified and established in the Supplementary Conditions. Bidder is responsible for any interpretation or conclusion Bidder draws from any Technical Data or any other data, interpretations, opinions, or information contained in such reports or shown or indicated in such drawings. 3. If the Supplementary Conditions do not identify Technical Data, the default definition of Technical Data set forth in Article 1 of the General Conditions will apply. 4. Geotechnical Baseline Report: The Bidding Documents contain a Geotechnical Baseline Report (GBR). a. As set forth in Specifications Section 02 06 13 – Geotechnical Baseline Report, the GBR describes certain select subsurface conditions that are anticipated to be encountered by Contractor during construction in specified locations (“Baseline Conditions”). Because it is an attachment to a Specifications section, the GBR is a Contract Document. b. The Baseline Conditions in the GBR are intended to reduce uncertainty and the degree of contingency in submitted Bids. However, Bidders cannot rely solely on the Baseline Conditions. Bids should be based on a comprehensive approach that includes an independent review and analysis of the GBR, all other Contract Documents, Technical Data, other available information, and observable surface conditions. Not all potential subsurface conditions are baselined. c. Nothing in the GBR is intended to relieve Bidders of the responsibility to make their own determinations regarding construction costs, bidding strategies, and Bid prices, nor of the responsibility to select and be responsible for the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction, and for safety precautions and programs incident thereto. B. Underground Facilities: Underground Facilities are shown or indicated on the Drawings, pursuant to Paragraph 5.05 of the General Conditions, and not in the drawings referred to in Paragraph 5.02.A of these Instructions to Bidders. Information and data regarding the presence or location of Underground Facilities are not intended to be categorized, identified, or defined as Technical Data. 5.03 Owner’s Safety Program A. Site visits and work at the Site may be governed by an Owner safety program. If an Owner safety program exists, it will be indicated in the Supplementary Conditions. Where the Bidding Documents indicate an Owner’s safety program, visitors to the Site during the bidding phase and at other times shall comply with Owner’s safety programs. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 EJCDC® C-200, Instructions to Bidders for Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. 00 21 13 - Page 5 of 12 5.04 Other Work at the Site A. Reference is made to Specifications Section 01 11 00 – Summary of Work, for the identification of the general nature of other work of which Owner is aware (if any) that is to be performed at the Site by Owner or others (such as utilities and other prime contractors) and relates to the Work contemplated by these Bidding Documents. If Owner is party to a written contract for such other work, then on request, Owner will provide to each Bidder access to examine such contracts (other than portions thereof related to price and other potentially confidential matters), if any. ARTICLE 6—BIDDER’S REPRESENTATIONS AND CERTIFICATIONS 6.01 Express Representations and Certifications in Bid Form, Agreement A. The Bid Form that each Bidder will complete and submit contains express representations regarding the Bidder’s examination of Project documentation, preparation of the Bid, and certifications regarding lack of collusion or fraud in connection with the Bid. Bidder should review these representations and certifications, and assure that Bidder can make the representations and certifications in good faith, before executing and submitting its Bid. B. If Bidder is awarded the Contract, Successful Bidder (as Contractor) will make similar express representations and certifications when it signs the Agreement. ARTICLE 7—INTERPRETATIONS AND ADDENDA 7.01 Owner on its own initiative may issue Addenda to clarify, correct, supplement, or change the Bidding Documents. 7.02 Bidder shall submit all questions about the meaning or intent of the Bidding Documents to Engineer in writing. Contact information and submittal procedures for such questions are as follows: A. Jarrett Moran, PE HDR Engineering, Inc. jarrett.moran@hdrinc.com 406-577-5037 7.03 Interpretations or clarifications considered necessary by Engineer in response to such questions will be issued by Addenda delivered to all Bidding Documents holders registered with the Issuing Office. Questions received less than seven days prior to the date for opening of Bids may not be answered. 7.04 Only responses set forth in an Addendum will be binding. Oral and other interpretations or clarifications will be without legal effect. Responses to questions are not part of the Contract Documents unless set forth in an Addendum that expressly modifies or supplements the Bidding Documents. 7.05 Addenda that engineer judges to have a material or significant effect on Bidders’ preparation of pricing and other requirement element of the Bid will be transmitted via Addendum for Bidders’ receipt not less than three days prior to the scheduled date for receipt of the Bids. Clarifications or modifications that Engineer deems will not have a material or substantial effect on the Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 EJCDC® C-200, Instructions to Bidders for Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. 00 21 13 - Page 6 of 12 preparation of Bids may be transmitted for Bidders’ receipt later, for receipt prior t the deadline for receipt of Bids. ARTICLE 8—BID SECURITY 8.01 Required Form and Amount of Bid Security A. A Bid must be accompanied by bid security made payable to Owner in an amount of ten percent (10%) of Bidder’s maximum Bid price (determined by adding the base bid and all alternates) and in the form of a bid bond issued by a surety meeting the requirements of Paragraph 6.01 of the General Conditions. B. Such bid bond will be issued in the form included in the Bidding Documents. 8.02 Bid Security of Successful Bidder A. The Bid security of the apparent Successful Bidder will be retained until Owner awards the Contract to such Bidder, and such Bidder has signed the Contract, furnished the required Contract security, and met the other conditions of the Notice of Award, whereupon the Successful Bidder’s bid security will be released. B. If the Successful Bidder fails to sign and deliver the Contract and furnish the required Contract security within the number of days, indicated in Paragraph 20.01 of these Instructions to Bidders, after the Notice of Award, Owner may consider Bidder to be in default, annul the Notice of Award, and the bid security of that Bidder will be forfeited. C. Upon Successful Bidder’s default: 1. When the bid security is a penal sum bid bond, the entire penal sum amount of the bid bond will be forfeit and due Owner. 2. When the bid security is a damages form of bid bond, to the extent of Owner’s damages will be forfeit and due Owner. 3. If a type of bid security other than a bid bond is allowed and is furnished, the amount that will be forfeit and due Owner will be the same as for the form of bid bond included in the Bidding Documents. Owner will so notify the defaulting Bidder in writing of the annulment and the amount of the forfeiture, with documentation of the amount forfeited. D. Such forfeiture will be Owner’s exclusive remedy if Bidder defaults. 8.03 Bid Security of Bidders other than the Successful Bidder A. The bid security of other Bidders that Owner believes to have a reasonable chance of receiving the award may be retained by Owner until the earlier of seven days after the Effective Date of the Contract or 61 days after the Bid opening, whereupon bid security furnished by such Bidders will be released. B. Bid security of other Bidders that Owner believes do not have a reasonable chance of receiving the award will be released within seven days after the bid opening. C. Release of Bid Security: Owner may release any Bidder’s bid security by returning such bid security to the associated Bidder. When bid security is in the form of a bid bond, Owner may dispose of or destroy the bid bond and so advice the associated Bidder in writing that the bid bond has been released. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 EJCDC® C-200, Instructions to Bidders for Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. 00 21 13 - Page 7 of 12 ARTICLE 9—CONTRACT TIMES 9.01 The number of days within which, or the dates by which, the Work is to be (a) substantially completed and (b) ready for final payment, and (c) Milestones (if any), are to be achieved are set forth in the Agreement. 9.02 Provisions for liquidated and special damages, if any, for failure to timely attain a Milestone, Substantial Completion, or completion of the Work in readiness for final payment, are set forth in the Agreement. ARTICLE 10—SUBSTITUTE AND “OR EQUAL” ITEMS 10.01 The Contract for the Work, as awarded, will be on the basis of materials, equipment, and procedures specified or described in the Bidding Documents without consideration during the bidding and Contract award process of possible substitute or “or-equal” items or procedures. In cases in which the Contract allows the Contractor to request that Engineer authorize the use of a substitute or “or-equal” item of material or equipment or procedure, application for such acceptance may not be made to and will not be considered by Engineer until after the Effective Date of the Contract. 10.02 All prices that Bidder sets forth in its Bid will be based on the presumption that the Contractor will furnish the materials and equipment specified or described in the Bidding Documents, and will perform the Work in accordance with procedures indicated in the Bidding Documents, as supplemented by Addenda, if any. Assumptions regarding the possibility of post-bid approvals of “or-equal” or substitution requests are made at Bidder’s sole risk. ARTICLE 11—SUBCONTRACTORS, SUPPLIERS, AND OTHERS 11.01 A Bidder must be prepared to retain specific Subcontractors and Suppliers for the performance of the Work if required to do so in the Specifications or elsewhere in the Bidding Documents. If a prospective Bidder objects to retaining any such Subcontractor or Supplier and the concern is not relieved by an Addendum, then the prospective Bidder should not submit a Bid. 11.02 The apparent Successful Bidder, and any other Bidder so requested by Owner or Engineer, must submit to Owner (with a copy to Engineer) a list of the Subcontractors and Suppliers proposed for the following portions of the Work within five days after the bid opening: A. Earthwork. B. Electrical and Instrumentation & Controls. C. Mechanical Process, Piping, Plumbing, and Appurtenances. D. Package Pump Station. E. Submersible Pumps. F. Force Main. G. Concrete, Rebar, and Aggregates. H. Precast Structures. I. Generator Screen Wall. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 EJCDC® C-200, Instructions to Bidders for Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. 00 21 13 - Page 8 of 12 11.03 If requested by Owner or Engineer, such list must be accompanied by an experience statement with pertinent information regarding similar projects and other evidence of qualification for each such Subcontractor or Supplier. If Owner or Engineer, after due investigation, has reasonable objection to any proposed Subcontractor or Supplier, Owner may, before the Notice of Award is given, request apparent Successful Bidder to submit an acceptable substitute, in which case apparent Successful Bidder will submit a substitute, Bidder’s Bid price will be increased (or decreased) by the difference in cost occasioned by such substitution, and Owner may consider such price adjustment in evaluating Bids and awarding the Contract. 11.04 If apparent Successful Bidder declines to make a requested substitution, Owner may award the Contract to another Bidder, consistent with the basis for evaluating the Bids for award as set forth in these Instructions to Bidders, that proposes to use acceptable Subcontractors and Suppliers. Declining to make requested substitutions will constitute grounds for forfeiture of the bid security of any Bidder. Any Subcontractor or Supplier, so listed and against which Owner or Engineer makes no written objection prior to issuance of the Notice of Award will be deemed acceptable to Owner and Engineer subject to subsequent revocation of such acceptance as provided in Paragraph 7.07 of the General Conditions. ARTICLE 12—PREPARATION OF BID 12.01 The Bid Form is included with the Bidding Documents. A. All blanks on the Bid Form must be completed in ink and the Bid Form signed in ink. Erasures or alterations must be initialed in ink by the person signing the Bid Form. A Bid price must be indicated for each section, Bid item, alternate, adjustment unit price item, and unit price item listed therein. B. If the Bid Form expressly indicates that submitting pricing on a specific alternate item is optional, and Bidder elects to not furnish pricing for such optional alternate item, then Bidder may enter the words “No Bid” or “Not Applicable.” 12.02 A Bid by a corporation must be signed in the corporate name by a corporate officer (whose title must appear under the signature), accompanied by evidence of authority to sign. The corporate address and state of incorporation must be shown. 12.03 A Bid by a partnership must be executed in the partnership name and signed by a partner (whose title must appear under the signature), accompanied by evidence of authority to sign. The official address of the partnership must be shown. 12.04 A Bid by a limited liability company must be signed in the name of the firm by a member or other authorized person and accompanied by evidence of authority to sign. The state of formation of the firm and the official address of the firm must be shown. 12.05 A Bid by an individual must show the Bidder’s name and official address. 12.06 A Bid by a joint venture must be signed by an authorized representative of each joint venturer in the manner indicated on the Bid Form. The joint venture must have been formally established prior to submittal of a Bid, and the official address of the joint venture must be shown. 12.07 All names must be printed in ink below the signatures. 12.08 The Bid must contain an acknowledgment of receipt of all Addenda, the numbers of which must be filled in on the Bid Form. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 EJCDC® C-200, Instructions to Bidders for Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. 00 21 13 - Page 9 of 12 12.09 Postal and e-mail addresses and telephone number for communications regarding the Bid must be indicated on the Bid Form. 12.10 The Bid must contain evidence of Bidder’s authority to do business in the state where the Project is located, or Bidder must certify in writing that it will obtain such authority within the time for acceptance of Bids and attach such certification to the Bid. 12.11 The Bid shall contain the Non-Discrimination and Equal Pay form, see Specification Section 00 45 31. Any bid that does not contain the Non-Discrimination and Equal Pay form shall be deemed non-responsive and not read. See also Specification Section 00 41 13, Article 2 for additional bid attachment requirements. ARTICLE 13—BASIS OF BID 13.01 Lump Sum A. Bidders must submit a Bid on a lump sum basis as set forth in the Bid Form. ARTICLE 14—SUBMITTAL OF BID 14.01 A Bid shall be received electronically through QuestCDN no later than the date and time prescribed in the Advertisement for Bids. Only electronic bids will be accepted; no physical bids will be accepted. A. Proposals shall be made in accordance with the following instructions: 1. Bids shall be made on the unaltered Bid Proposal Form supplied with these documents. 2. All blank spaces must be properly filled. 3. The total bid price must be stated in both writing and in figures. In case of a discrepancy between unit price and total bid price, the unit prices or lump sum prices shall be used in computing the total bid price. 4. The proposal form shall contain no addition, conditions, stipulations, erasures, or other irregularities. 5. The proposal must acknowledge receipt of all addenda issued. 6. The proposal must be signed and display the Bidder's name, address, and correct Montana Contractor's registration/license number. 14.02 With each copy of the Bidding Documents, a Bidder is to furnish the Bid security and the other documents required to be submitted under the terms of Article 7 of the Bid Form. 14.03 Bids received after the date and time prescribed for the opening of bids, or not submitted at the correct location or in the designated manner, will not be accepted and will be returned to the Bidder unopened. ARTICLE 15—MODIFICATION AND WITHDRAWAL OF BID 16.01 A Bid may be withdrawn by an appropriate document duly executed in the same manner that a Bid must be executed and delivered to the place where Bids are to be submitted prior to the date and time for the opening of Bids. Upon receipt of such notice, the unopened Bid will be returned to the Bidder. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 EJCDC® C-200, Instructions to Bidders for Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. 00 21 13 - Page 10 of 12 16.02 If a Bidder wishes to modify its Bid prior to Bid opening, Bidder must withdraw its initial Bid in the manner specified in Paragraph 16.01 and submit a new Bid prior to the date and time for the opening of Bids. 16.03 If within 24 hours after Bids are opened any Bidder files a duly signed written notice with Owner and promptly thereafter demonstrates to the reasonable satisfaction of Owner that there was a material and substantial mistake in the preparation of its Bid, that Bidder may withdraw its Bid, and the Bid security will be returned. Thereafter, if the Work is rebid, that Bidder will be disqualified from further bidding on the Work. ARTICLE 16—OPENING OF BIDS 16.01 Bids will be opened at the time and place indicated in the Advertisement for Bids and, unless obviously non-responsive, read aloud publicly. An abstract of the amounts of the base Bids and major alternates, if any, will be made available to Bidders after the opening of Bids. ARTICLE 17—BIDS TO REMAIN SUBJECT TO ACCEPTANCE 17.01 All Bids will remain subject to acceptance for the period of time stated in the Bid Form, but Owner may, in its sole discretion, release any Bid and return the Bid security prior to the end of this period. ARTICLE 18—EVALUATION OF BIDS AND AWARD OF CONTRACT 18.01 Owner reserves the right to reject any or all Bids, including without limitation, nonconforming, nonresponsive, unbalanced, or conditional Bids. Owner also reserves the right to waive all minor Bid informalities not involving price, time, or changes in the Work. 18.02 Owner will reject the Bid of any Bidder that Owner finds, after reasonable inquiry and evaluation, to not be responsible. Owner may reject the Bid of any Bidder that fails to demonstrate appropriate qualifications, experience, and resources for the Work, in accordance with Article 3 of these Instructions to Bidders. 18.03 If Bidder purports to add terms or conditions to its Bid, takes exception to any provision of the Bidding Documents, or attempts to alter the contents of the Contract Documents for purposes of the Bid, whether in the Bid itself or in a separate communication to Owner or Engineer, then Owner will reject the Bid as nonresponsive. 18.04 Basis for Award of Contract A. If Owner awards the contract for the Work, such award will be to the responsible Bidder submitting the lowest-priced, responsive Bid that has not otherwise been disqualified. 18.05 Evaluation of Bids A. In evaluating Bids, Owner will consider whether the Bids comply with the prescribed requirements, and such alternates, unit prices, and other data, as may be requested in the Bid Form or elsewhere in the Bidding Documents, or prior to the Notice of Award. 18.06 In evaluating whether a Bidder is responsible, Owner will consider the qualifications, experience, and resources of the Bidder and may consider the qualifications, experience, and resources of Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 EJCDC® C-200, Instructions to Bidders for Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. 00 21 13 - Page 11 of 12 Subcontractors and Suppliers proposed for those portions of the Work for which the identity of Subcontractors and Suppliers must be submitted as provided in the Bidding Documents. 18.07 Owner, with or without Engineer’s assistance, may conduct such investigations as Owner deems necessary to establish the responsibility, qualifications, and financial ability of Bidders and any proposed Subcontractors or Suppliers. ARTICLE 19—BONDS AND INSURANCE 19.01 Article 6 of the General Conditions, as may be modified by the Supplementary Conditions, set forth Owner’s requirements as to performance and payment bonds, other required bonds (if any), and insurance. When the Successful Bidder delivers the signed Agreement to Owner (or Owner’s representative), it must be accompanied by required bonds and insurance documentation. 19.02 Article 8 (“Bid Security”) of these Instructions to Bidders addresses any requirements for providing bid bonds as part of the bidding process. ARTICLE 20—SIGNING OF AGREEMENT 20.01 When Owner issues a Notice of Award to the Successful Bidder, it will be accompanied by the unsigned counterparts of the Agreement, along with the other Contract Documents as identified in the Agreement. Within 15 days thereafter, Successful Bidder must execute and deliver the required number of counterparts of the Agreement and required bonds and insurance documentation (as required by the Contract Documents) to Owner. Within 10 days thereafter, Owner will deliver one fully signed counterpart of the Agreement to Successful Bidder, together with printed and electronic copies of the Contract Documents as stated in Paragraph 2.02 of the General Conditions. ARTICLE 21—SALES AND USE TAXES 21.01 All applicable laws, ordinances, and the rules and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction over construction of the project shall apply to the Contract throughout. State laws and ordinances which the Contractor must comply with include, but are not limited to, those involving workmen’s compensation insurance, Contractor registration/licensing, employment preference to Montana Contractors and Montana Residents, and gross receipts tax. 21.02 Montana Contractor Registration/Licensing Requirement: A. Title 39, Chapter 9, Part 2, MCA for registration of Contractors with the Montana Department of Labor and Industry. Bid that do not carry the Bidder’s Montana Contractor’s registration/licensing number on the bid form will not be considered. Information pertaining to this requirement and registration forms may be obtained from the Montana Department of Labor and Industry, P.O. Box 8011, 1805 Prospect, Helena, Montana 59604-8011 or by calling 406-444-7734. 21.03 Additional Contractor License Fee (Montana Contractors Gross Receipts Tax): A. In accordance with Title 15, Chapter 50, MCA, the Owner shall withhold, in addition to other amounts withheld as provided by law or specified herein, one percent (1%) of all payments due to the Contractor and shall transmit such moneys to the Montana Department of Revenue Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 EJCDC® C-200, Instructions to Bidders for Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. 00 21 13 - Page 12 of 12 ARTICLE 22—CITY OF BOZEMAN BUSINESS LICENSE 22.01 All Contractors conducting work within the City of Bozeman are required to have a current Business License. Applications for Business Licenses may be obtained at City Hall, 121 N. Rouse Avenue, Bozeman, Montana. END OF SECTION Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 This page intentionally left blank. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 This page intentionally left blank. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 List of Proposed Subcontractors: Tyler Electric Eco Concrete Montana Fence Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 40 190 Ramshorn Drive Bozeman, Montana 59718 Phone: 406-582-9841 Fax: 406-582-9843 Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 22 190 Ramshorn Drive Bozeman, Montana 59718 Phone: 406-582-9841 Fax: 406-582-9843 Resumes Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 23 190 Ramshorn Drive Bozeman, Montana 59718 Phone: 406-582-9841 Fax: 406-582-9843 Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 24 190 Ramshorn Drive Bozeman, Montana 59718 Phone: 406-582-9841 Fax: 406-582-9843 Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 25 190 Ramshorn Drive Bozeman, Montana 59718 Phone: 406-582-9841 Fax: 406-582-9843 Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 26 190 Ramshorn Drive Bozeman, Montana 59718 Phone: 406-582-9841 Fax: 406-582-9843 Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 27 190 Ramshorn Drive Bozeman, Montana 59718 Phone: 406-582-9841 Fax: 406-582-9843 Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 28 190 Ramshorn Drive Bozeman, Montana 59718 Phone: 406-582-9841 Fax: 406-582-9843 Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 29 190 Ramshorn Drive Bozeman, Montana 59718 Phone: 406-582-9841 Fax: 406-582-9843 Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 30 190 Ramshorn Drive Bozeman, Montana 59718 Phone: 406-582-9841 Fax: 406-582-9843 Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 References Name Company Title Phone # Mike DuCuennois Lone Mountain Land Company ExecuƟve Vice President - Development 406-539-5176 Clayton Peacock Lone Mountain Land Company Senior Project Manager 406-539-2016 David Gates Montana Department of TransportaƟon ConstrucƟon Engineer 406-853-6905 MaƩ Feƫg Northwestern Energy Division Manager 406-581-8805 DusƟn Workman Northwestern Energy ConstrucƟon Engineer 406-533-8118 Chris Vigness Big Sky Fire Department Fire Marshal 406-580-0719 Shawn Kohtz City of Bozeman Director of UƟliƟes 406-582-2280 Nick Pericich City of Bozeman Water & Sewer Superintendent 406-579-3684 Grant Peterson Montana State University Director of Planning, Design, and UƟliƟes 406-994-5451 Jim Waterman Montana State University Landscape and Grounds Manager 406-570-8947 MaƩ Ekstrom Morrison Maierle Engineering Market Group Leader 406-431-5819 Kyle Scarr TD&H Engineering Regional Manager 406-461-8465 Greg Benjamin Stahly Engineering President/CEO 406-580-9574 Mike Stenberg Hyalite Engineers Principal/Director of MT OperaƟons 406-580-2881 Staci Venner Robert Peccia & Associates Project Manager 406-580-4438 Phil George Four Corners Water & Sewer District General Manager 406-595-2832 Alex Cote Travelers Bond & Insurance Account ExecuƟve Office 406-595-4928 Bryan Hall First West Insurance President 406-922-6036 Tim Barth Montana Contractor CompensaƟon Fund Safety Consultant 406-380-2563 Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 Owned Equipment List Quantity Coldsmoke Proposal Skidsteers 11 Sweeps/Brooms 3 Compactor 11 Compressor 4 Dewatering Equipment Many Dozer 11 Drone 1 Dump/Rock Truck 8 Excavator 28 Fork Lift 2 Fuel Truck 2 Generators 14 GPS 8 Grader 6 Hydraulic Boring Drill 1 Pipe/Grade Laser 4 Loader 14 Mower 1 2"-8" Pumps 10 Roller 12 Saws 2 Scraper 5 Service Trucks 4 Transport Truck 3 Transport Trailer 2 Trench Box Many General Work Vehicles Many Trailers 58 Wash Truck 1 Water Truck 5 Misc (hand held compactor, chop saws)Many 190 Ramshorn Drive Bozeman, Montana 59718 Phone: 406.582.9841 Fax: 406.582.9843 Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 This page intentionally left blank. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 This page intentionally left blank. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 This page intentionally left blank. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman May 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Issued for Bid EJCDC C-510 NOTICE OF AWARD 2018 00 51 10 - 1 NOTICE OF AWARD Date of Issuance: June 10, 2026 Owner: City of Bozeman Owner’s Project No.: Engineer: HDR Engineering, Inc. Engineer’s Project No.: 10375316 Project: Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Project Contract Name: N/A Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Project Bidder: Sime Construction, Inc. Bidder’s Address: 190 Ramshorn Drive, Bozeman, MT 59718 You are notified that the Owner has accepted your Bid dated June 9, 2026, for the above Contract, and that you are the Successful Bidder and are awarded a Contract for: Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Project. The Contract Price of the awarded Contract is $1,892,731.72. Contract Price is subject to adjustment based on the provisions of the Contract, including but not limited to those governing changes, Unit Price Work, and Work performed on a cost-plus-fee basis, as applicable. Three (3) unexecuted counterparts of the Agreement accompany this Notice of Award, and one (1) copy of the Contract Documents accompanies this Notice of Award or has been transmitted or made available to Bidder electronically. ☒ Drawings will be delivered separately from the other Contract Documents. You must comply with the following conditions precedent within 15 days of the date of receipt of this Notice of Award: 1. Deliver to Owner two (2) counterparts of the Agreement, signed by Bidder (as Contractor). 2. Deliver with the signed Agreement(s) the Contract security (such as required performance and payment bonds) and insurance documentation, as specified in the Instructions to Bidders and in the General Conditions, Articles 2 and 6. Failure to comply with these conditions within the time specified will entitle Owner to consider you in default, annul this Notice of Award, and declare your Bid security forfeited. Within 10 days after you comply with the above conditions, Owner will return to you one fully signed counterpart of the Agreement, together with any additional copies of the Contract Documents as indicated in Paragraph 2.02 of the General Conditions. Owner: City of Bozeman By (signature): Name (printed): Title: Copy: Engineer Docusign Envelope ID: 03D8A0CA-33CC-807D-828F-7925BACA2B5D City Manager Chuck Winn Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 This page intentionally left blank. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 EJCDC® C-520, Agreement between Owner and Contractor for Construction Contract (Stipulated Price). Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. 00 52 13 - Page 1 of 7 AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR FOR CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT (STIPULATED PRICE) This Agreement is by and between City of Bozeman (“Owner”) and Sime Construction, Inc. (“Contractor”). Terms used in this Agreement have the meanings stated in the General Conditions and the Supplementary Conditions. Owner and Contractor hereby agree as follows: ARTICLE 1—WORK 1.01 Contractor shall complete all Work as specified or indicated in the Contract Documents. The Work is generally described as follows: Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Project ARTICLE 2—THE PROJECT 2.01 The Project, of which the Work under the Contract Documents is a part, is generally described as follows: Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Project ARTICLE 3—ENGINEER 3.01 The Owner has retained HDR Engineering, Inc. (“Engineer”) to act as Owner’s representative, assume all duties and responsibilities of Engineer, and have the rights and authority assigned to Engineer in the Contract. 3.02 The part of the Project that pertains to the Work has been designed by Engineer. ARTICLE 4—CONTRACT TIMES 4.01 Time is of the Essence A. All time limits for Milestones, if any, Substantial Completion, and completion and readiness for final payment as stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Contract. 4.02 Contract Times: Days A. The Work will be substantially complete within 210 calendar days after the date when the Contract Times commence to run as provided in Paragraph 4.01 of the General Conditions, and completed and ready for final payment in accordance with Paragraph 15.06 of the General Conditions within 240 calendar days after the date when the Contract Times commence to run. 4.03 Liquidated Damages A. Contractor and Owner recognize that time is of the essence as stated in Paragraph 4.01 above and that Owner will suffer financial and other losses if the Work is not completed and Milestones not achieved within the Contract Times, as duly modified. The parties also recognize the delays, expense, and difficulties involved in proving, in a legal or arbitration proceeding, the actual loss suffered by Owner if the Work is not completed on time. Accordingly, instead of requiring any such proof, Owner and Contractor agree that as liquidated damages for delay (but not as a penalty): Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 EJCDC® C-520, Agreement between Owner and Contractor for Construction Contract (Stipulated Price). Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. 00 52 13 - Page 2 of 7 1. Substantial Completion: Contractor shall pay Owner $500 for each day that expires after the time (as duly adjusted pursuant to the Contract) specified above for Substantial Completion, until the Work is substantially complete. 2. Completion of Remaining Work: After Substantial Completion, if Contractor shall neglect, refuse, or fail to complete the remaining Work within the Contract Times (as duly adjusted pursuant to the Contract) for completion and readiness for final payment, Contractor shall pay Owner $250 for each day that expires after such time until the Work is completed and ready for final payment. 3. Liquidated damages for failing to timely attain Milestones, Substantial Completion, and final completion are not additive, and will not be imposed concurrently. B. If Owner recovers liquidated damages for a delay in completion by Contractor, then such liquidated damages are Owner’s sole and exclusive remedy for such delay, and Owner is precluded from recovering any other damages, whether actual, direct, excess, or consequential, for such delay, except for special damages (if any) specified in this Agreement. 4.04 Special Damages A. Contractor shall reimburse Owner (1) for fines and penalties (if any) imposed on Owner as a direct result of Contractor’s failure to attain Substantial Completion according to the Contract Times, (2) for fines and penalties (if any) imposed on Owner by an authority having jurisdiction for actions or inaction of Contractor arising from Contractor’s performance of the Work (regardless of whether such event was connected with any delay in compliance with the Contract Times), and (3) for the actual costs reasonably incurred by Owner for engineering, construction observation, inspection, and administrative services needed after the time specified in Paragraph 4.02 for Substantial Completion (as duly adjusted pursuant to the Contract), until the Work is substantially complete. B. After Contractor achieves Substantial Completion, if Contractor shall neglect, refuse, or fail to complete the remaining Work within the Contract Times, Contractor shall reimburse Owner for the actual costs reasonably incurred by Owner for engineering, construction observation, inspection, and administrative services needed after the time specified in Paragraph 4.02 for Work to be completed and ready for final payment (as duly adjusted pursuant to the Contract), until the Work is completed and ready for final payment. C. The special damages imposed in this paragraph are supplemental to any liquidated damages for delayed completion established in this Agreement. 4.05 Owner reserves the right to withhold from payments due Contractor under the Contract amounts for liquidated damages (if any), special damages (if any), and performance damages (if any) in accordance with the Contract. ARTICLE 5—CONTRACT PRICE 5.01 Owner shall pay Contractor for completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, the amounts that follow, subject to adjustment under the Contract: A. Total of Lump Sum Amount (subject to final Unit Price adjustment) of One Million Eight Hundred Ninety-Two Thousand Seven Hundred Thirty-One Dollars and Seventy-Two Cents. ($ 1,892,731.72). Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 EJCDC® C-520, Agreement between Owner and Contractor for Construction Contract (Stipulated Price). Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. 00 52 13 - Page 3 of 7 ARTICLE 6—PAYMENT PROCEDURES 6.01 Submittal and Processing of Payments A. Contractor shall submit Applications for Payment in accordance with Article 15 of the General Conditions. Applications for Payment will be processed by Engineer as provided in the General Conditions. 6.02 Progress Payments; Retainage A. Owner shall make progress payments on the basis of Contractor’s Applications for Payment each month during performance of the Work as provided in Paragraph 6.02.A.1 below, provided that such Applications for Payment have been submitted in a timely manner and otherwise meet the requirements of the Contract. All such payments will be measured by the Schedule of Values established as provided in the General Conditions (and in the case of Unit Price Work based on the number of units completed) or, in the event there is no Schedule of Values, as provided elsewhere in the Contract. 1. Prior to Substantial Completion, progress payments will be made in an amount equal to the percentage indicated below but, in each case, less the aggregate of payments previously made and less such amounts as Owner may withhold, including but not limited to liquidated damages, in accordance with the Contract. a. 95% percent of the value of the Work completed (with the balance being retainage). 6.03 Final Payment A. Upon final completion and acceptance of the Work, Owner shall pay the remainder of the Contract Price in accordance with Paragraph 15.06 of the General Conditions. 6.04 Consent of Surety A. Owner will not make final payment, or return or release retainage at Substantial Completion or any other time, unless Contractor submits written consent of the surety to such payment, return, or release. 6.05 Interest A. All amounts not paid when due will bear interest at the rate of 5% percent per annum. ARTICLE 7—CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 7.01 Contents A. The Contract Documents consist of all of the following: 1. This Agreement. 2. Bonds: a. Performance bond (together with power of attorney). b. Payment bond (together with power of attorney). 3. General Conditions. 4. Supplementary Conditions. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 EJCDC® C-520, Agreement between Owner and Contractor for Construction Contract (Stipulated Price). Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. 00 52 13 - Page 4 of 7 5. Wage Determination Schedule. 6. Statutory and Funding-Financing Entity Requirements. 7. Non-Collusion Affidavit. 8. Nondiscrimination and Equal Pay Affirmation. 9. Specifications as listed in the table of contents of the project manual. 10. Drawings (not attached but incorporated by reference) consisting of 45 sheets with each sheet bearing the following general title: Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Project. 11. Addenda (numbers 1 to 3, inclusive). 12. Geotechnical Report dated June 2024. 13. The following which may be delivered or issued on or after the Effective Date of the Contract and are not attached hereto: a. Notice to Proceed. b. Work Change Directives. c. Change Orders. d. Field Orders. e. Warranty Bond, if any. B. The Contract Documents listed in Paragraph 7.01.A are attached to this Agreement (except as expressly noted otherwise above). C. There are no Contract Documents other than those listed above in this Article 7. D. The Contract Documents may only be amended, modified, or supplemented as provided in the Contract. ARTICLE 8—REPRESENTATIONS, CERTIFICATIONS, AND STIPULATIONS 8.01 Contractor’s Representations A. In order to induce Owner to enter into this Contract, Contractor makes the following representations: 1. Contractor has examined and carefully studied the Contract Documents, including Addenda. 2. Contractor has visited the Site, conducted a thorough visual examination of the Site and adjacent areas, and become familiar with the general, local, and Site conditions that may affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work. 3. Contractor is familiar with all Laws and Regulations that may affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work. 4. Contractor has carefully studied the reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at or adjacent to the Site and the drawings of physical conditions relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site that have been identified in the Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 EJCDC® C-520, Agreement between Owner and Contractor for Construction Contract (Stipulated Price). Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. 00 52 13 - Page 5 of 7 Supplementary Conditions, with respect to the Technical Data in such reports and drawings. 5. Contractor has carefully studied the reports and drawings relating to Hazardous Environmental Conditions, if any, at or adjacent to the Site that have been identified in the Supplementary Conditions, with respect to Technical Data in such reports and drawings. 6. Contractor has considered the information known to Contractor itself; information commonly known to contractors doing business in the locality of the Site; information and observations obtained from visits to the Site; the Contract Documents; and the Technical Data identified in the Supplementary Conditions or by definition, with respect to the effect of such information, observations, and Technical Data on (a) the cost, progress, and performance of the Work; (b) the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction to be employed by Contractor; and (c) Contractor’s safety precautions and programs. 7. Based on the information and observations referred to in the preceding paragraph, Contractor agrees that no further examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies, or data are necessary for the performance of the Work at the Contract Price, within the Contract Times, and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Contract. 8. Contractor is aware of the general nature of work to be performed by Owner and others at the Site that relates to the Work as indicated in the Contract Documents. 9. Contractor has given Engineer written notice of all conflicts, errors, ambiguities, or discrepancies that Contractor has discovered in the Contract Documents, and of discrepancies between Site conditions and the Contract Documents, and the written resolution thereof by Engineer is acceptable to Contractor. 10. The Contract Documents are generally sufficient to indicate and convey understanding of all terms and conditions for performance and furnishing of the Work. 11. Contractor’s entry into this Contract constitutes an incontrovertible representation by Contractor that without exception all prices in the Agreement are premised upon performing and furnishing the Work required by the Contract Documents. 8.02 Contractor’s Certifications A. Contractor certifies that it has not engaged in corrupt, fraudulent, collusive, or coercive practices in competing for or in executing the Contract. For the purposes of this Paragraph 8.02: 1. “corrupt practice” means the offering, giving, receiving, or soliciting of anything of value likely to influence the action of a public official in the bidding process or in the Contract execution; 2. “fraudulent practice” means an intentional misrepresentation of facts made (a) to influence the bidding process or the execution of the Contract to the detriment of Owner, (b) to establish Bid or Contract prices at artificial non-competitive levels, or (c) to deprive Owner of the benefits of free and open competition; Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 EJCDC® C-520, Agreement between Owner and Contractor for Construction Contract (Stipulated Price). Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. 00 52 13 - Page 6 of 7 3. “collusive practice” means a scheme or arrangement between two or more Bidders, with or without the knowledge of Owner, a purpose of which is to establish Bid prices at artificial, non-competitive levels; and 4. “coercive practice” means harming or threatening to harm, directly or indirectly, persons or their property to influence their participation in the bidding process or affect the execution of the Contract. 8.03 Standard General Conditions A. Owner stipulates that if the General Conditions that are made a part of this Contract are EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions for the Construction Contract (2018), published by the Engineers Joint Contract Documents Committee, and if Owner is the party that has furnished said General Conditions, then Owner has plainly shown all modifications to the standard wording of such published document to the Contractor, through a process such as highlighting or “track changes” (redline/strikeout), or in the Supplementary Conditions. 8.04 City of Bozeman Nondiscrimination and Equal Pay A. Contractor and any of the Contractor’s subcontractors bidding or doing work on this project will be required to be registered with the Montana Department of Labor and Industry (DLI). Forms for registration are available from the DLI, PO Box 8011, 1805 Prospect, Helena, Montana 59604-8011. Information on registration can be obtained by calling (406) 444-7734. Contractor is not required to have registered with the DLI prior to bidding on this project, but must have registered prior to execution of the Construction Agreement. All laborers and mechanics employed by Contractor or subcontractors in performance of the construction work shall be paid wages at rates as may be required by the laws of Gallatin County and the state of Montana. The City of Bozeman is an Equal Opportunity Employer. Discrimination in the performance of any agreement awarded under this project on the basis of race, color, religion, creed, sex, age, marital status, national origin, or actual or perceived sexual orientation, gender identity or disability is prohibited. This prohibition shall apply to the hiring and treatment of the awarded entity’s employees and to all subcontracts. As such, each entity submitting under this notice shall include a provision wherein the submitting entity, or entities, affirms in writing it will not discriminate on the basis of race, color, religion, creed, sex, age, marital status, national origin, or because of actual or perceived sexual orientation, gender identity or disability and which also recognizes the eventual contract will contain a provision prohibiting discrimination as described above and that this prohibition on discrimination shall apply to the hiring and treatment of the submitting entity’s employees and to all subcontracts. In addition, pursuant to City Commission Resolution 5169, the entity awarded a contract under this RFP and any subcontractors must abide by the Equal Pay Act of 1963 and Section 39-3-104, MCA (the Montana Equal Pay Act), and affirm it will abide by the above and that it has visited the State of Montana Equal Pay for Equal Work “best practices” website, or equivalent “best practices publication and has read the material. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 EJCDC® C-520, Agreement between Owner and Contractor for Construction Contract (Stipulated Price). Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. 00 52 13 - Page 7 of 7 IN WITNESS WHEREOF, Owner and Contractor have signed this Agreement. This Agreement will be effective on __________________________________________ (which is the Effective Date of the Contract). Contractor: City of Bozeman (typed or printed name of organization) (typed or printed name of organization) By: By: (individual’s signature) (individual’s signature) Date: Date: (date signed) (date signed) Name: Name: (typed or printed) (typed or printed) Title: Title: (typed or printed) (typed or printed) (If Type of Entity is a corporation, a partnership, or a joint venture, attach evidence of authority to sign.) Attest: Attest: (individual’s signature) (individual’s signature) Title: Title: (typed or printed) (typed or printed) Address for giving notices: Address for giving notices: Designated Representative: Designated Representative: Name: Bob Murray, PE Name: (typed or printed) (typed or printed) Title: Engineer III Title: (typed or printed) (typed or printed) Address: Address: 20 E Olive Street Bozeman, MT 59715 Phone: (406) 582-2269 Phone: Email: Bob.Murray@bozemanmt.gov Email: (If Type of Entity is a corporation, attach evidence of authority to sign. If Type of Entity is a public body, attach evidence of authority to sign and resolution or other documents authorizing execution of this Agreement.) License No.: (where applicable) State: Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 EVP PARKER BROWN sime construction 9/15/20269/15/2026 Assistant City Manager Jon Henderson City Clerk 9/18/2026 This page intentionally left blank. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 9/18/2026 9/18/2026 Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 9/18/2026 9/18/2026 Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION 00 63 13 - 1 SECTION 00 63 13 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing Requests for Information (RFI). B. RFI is intended for requesting clarifications and interpretations of Contract Documents due to inconsistencies, errors or omissions in Contract Documents, and unanticipated existing conditions. C. RFI is not intended for general communication, requesting substitutions, Contractor’s proposed changes, resolution of nonconforming work, and coordination between contractors or for general questions not related to Contract Documents. D. RFI process is a cooperative enterprise between Engineer and Contractor to expedite RFI response and maintain progress of Work. E. Engineer shall evaluate alternate proposed methods of processing RFI’s to that indicated within this Section for potential impact on Engineer’s services. 1. If Engineer agrees to utilize another proposed method, Engineer will be reimbursed for any special training, usage fees, extra time required to implement, maintain, utilize and administer such a system. PART 2 - EXECUTION 2.1 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION A. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: 1. Contract Documents are complementary. Before starting each portion of Work, Contractor shall carefully study and compare various Drawings, Specifications and other Contract Documents, coordination drawings, shop drawings, prior correspondence or documentation relative to that portion of Work, as well as information furnished by Owner. 2. Contractor and Subcontractors shall evaluate and take field measurements of conditions related to that portion of Work and shall observe any conditions at site affecting it. 3. These obligations are for purpose of facilitating coordination and construction by Contractor and are not for purpose of discovering errors, omissions, or inconsistencies in Contract Documents. 4. Contractor and subcontractors acknowledge that all documents pertaining to Work has been examined, have examined character of site and any existing conditions, and are satisfied with nature of Work, and other matters which can affect Work. 5. In event of inconsistency between portions of Contract Documents or within Contract Documents; provide better quality or greater quantity of Work, and comply with more stringent requirement, either or both in accordance with Engineer’s interpretation. 6. Report errors, inconsistencies or omissions discovered in Contract Documents promptly to Engineer as a properly prepared and timely RFI. 7. Contractor and Subcontractors are not required to ascertain Contract Documents are in accordance with applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, and rules and regulations, unless they bear upon construction means, methods, techniques or safety and health precautions, but the Contractor shall promptly report to Engineer any nonconformity discovered by or made known to Contractor as a RFI. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION 00 63 13 - 2 8. On condition that Contractor or Subcontractor fail to give such notice, and knowingly proceeds with Work affected by errors or omissions in Contract Documents, Contractor shall correct any such errors, inconsistencies, or omissions at no additional cost. 9. Prior to bid, Contractor shall review existing facilities related to this contract and shall be familiar with utility requirements and construction. a. Existing facility documents may be available through Owner for review. b. Perform preliminary investigations as required to ascertain extent of Work. c. Conditions which would be apparent by such investigation will not be allowed as cause for claims for extra costs. B. Contractor’s and Subcontractor’s Responsibilities: 1. Process request through Contractor when interpretation, clarification or explanation of portion of Construction Documents is needed by Contractor, Subcontractor, Vendor or Supplier. a. Review request for completeness, quality, proper referencing to drawing or specification section and reason submitted. b. In event request is not acceptable return to submitter with comments regarding reason for being returned. c. Make every attempt to validate, resolve or respond to RFI by thoroughly researching and reviewing Contract Documents and field conditions. d. Respond to RFI accordingly if review of RFI discloses a response or is related to coordination of construction or other issue not related to Contract Documents. e. If request is unclear, rewrite and state in clear, concise, correct, complete and easily understood manner. 1) Include additional information if necessary and submit to Engineer for response. 2. Submit request for interpretation, clarification or explanation of Contract Documents to Engineer through Contractor. a. List specific Contract Documents researched when seeking information being requested. b. Reference applicable Contract Drawings by sheet number, section, detail, room number, door number, etc., Specifications by section and paragraph number, and reference other relevant documents. c. The field titled "Regarding" on attached RFI form must be clear for future reference in reports or correspondence. d. Clearly state request and provide Contract Document references and any additional information needed so request can be fully understood, including sketches, photos or other reference material. e. Fully assess issues, suggest any reasonable solutions and include various factors, including potential costs, schedule impacts, if any, and recommendations which will aid in determining a solution or response. 1) In event a reasonable solution cannot be suggested, a statement to that effect should be so stated. f. Indicate reason request is being submitted. g. Clearly indicate critical RFI’s requiring a rapid response with an explanation as to why RFI is critical. h. Indicate priority for responses when multiple RFI’s are submitted within short period of time. 3. Distribute copies of responses to RFI’s to all parties affected. 4. Response to RFI shall not be considered a notice to proceed with a change that may revise the Contract Sum or Contract Time, unless authorized by Owner in writing. 5. In event response to RFI is determined incomplete, resubmit with explanation for unacceptability of response and necessary additional information within five (5) days of receipt to RFI response. 6. On condition Contractor determines or believes additional cost or time is involved due to clarifications, interpretations or instructions issued by Engineer in response to a RFI, Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION 00 63 13 - 3 resubmit RFI within five (5) days of receipt of response with reason and alternate solution or suggestion for performing work at no additional cost. a. In event no other solution is possible or desirable, submit Claim in accordance with Contract Documents within twenty-one (21) days of receipt of response to RFI. C. RFI Submittal Process: 1. Process and submit RFI’s to Engineer by Contractor utilizing email communication. a. In the event a previously submitted RFI request requires revision to provide additional information, initiate a new RFI. 1) New RFI shall be renumbered with previous submitted RFI succeeded by “.1 “ to indicate revision one of RFI (i.e.: RFI No. 34.1 for revision 1 to RFI No. 34). 2. Engineer will respond to RFI’s utilizing email communication. D. RFI Submittal Format: 1. Submit request for information to Engineer on RFI form provided at end of this section, form provided by Engineer in electronic text file format, or in similar format acceptable to Engineer. a. Electronically complete and email RFI form to Engineer’s designated representative in text file format. b. Attachments shall be in electronic text or PDF file format. c. Photo attachments may be in JPG format. 2. Assign RFIs with unique numbers in sequential order (1, 2, 3, 4, etc.). 3. Assign RFIs with assigned unique numbers in sequential order (1001, 1002, 1003, etc.) using the 1000 series numbers. 4. A resubmitted RFI or a previously answered RFI requiring revising or further clarification shall be submitted using original RFI number proceeded by “.1 IN to indicate revision one of RFI (i.e.: RFI No. 34.1 for revision 1 to RFI No. 34). E. Engineer’s Response to Request for Information (RFI): 1. Clarifications, interpretations and decisions of Engineer in response to RFI will be consistent with intent of and reasonably inferable from Contract Documents, in writing, and may be provided in form of drawings and other attachments, or both. 2. When making such interpretations and decisions, Engineer will endeavor to secure faithful performance by both Owner and Contractor, will not show partiality to either and will not be liable for results of interpretations or decisions rendered in good faith. 3. Engineer’s decisions on matters related to aesthetic effects will be final if consistent with intent expressed in Contract Documents. 4. Engineer will not undertake to settle differences between Contractor, Subcontractors, trades suppliers, fabricator or manufacturer, or act as arbiter as to which Subcontractor, trade, supplier or manufacturer is to furnish or install various items indicated or required. 5. Engineer shall provide responses to RFI’s with reasonable promptness, but will endeavor to respond within twenty-one (21) days from date of receipt. a. If multiple RFI’s are submitted on same day or within a five (5) day period, review time may be extended by mutual agreement of parties. b. Engineer will provide a written response to RFI if Engineer believes response only involves an interpretation, clarification, supplemental information or orders a minor change in Work not involving an adjustment in Contract Sum or extension of Contract Time, and is not inconsistent with intent of Contract Documents, and shall be binding. c. If Engineer believes response may result in a change to Contract Sum or Contract Time, response will indicate that a change document will be issued for the response, and appropriate change document will be issued indicating changes to Contract Documents. d. Engineer will provide any additional or supplemental drawings, specifications or other information as Engineer may deem necessary to facilitate response. 6. Engineer may return RFI without response for following reasons: a. Is considered a “Contractor Proposed Change”. b. Response is consistent with the intent of the Contract Drawings. c. Request is unclear or incomplete. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION 00 63 13 - 4 d. Is due to Contractor’s lack of adequate coordination. e. Is related to construction means, methods or techniques. f. Response is required by another party. g. Is considered a “Substitution Request.” F. If requested information is available from careful study and comparison of Contract Documents, field conditions, other Owner-provided information, coordination drawings, or prior Project correspondence or documentation, Engineer may invoice Owner as a change in services for costs involved in Engineer’s review, analysis, responding and processing of such RFI. 1. Contractor shall reimburse Owner for such costs. END OF SECTION Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION 00 63 13 - 5 REQUEST FOR INFORMATION Project: RFI Number: Project No.: (other?) Action Info Pages Regarding: References: (List specific Contract Documents researched when seeking the information being requested) Spec. No.: Dwg. No.: Request: (Provide complete description of request with document references and sketches or photos if necessary, and present status of work) Requester’s Recommended Solution: (If RFI concerns a site or construction condition, provide a recommended solution, including cost & schedule considerations) Response Priority: Normal Rush (Work in progress) Reason For Request: Existing Condition Non- conformance Clarification / Interpretation Agency Generated Other Subcontractor: Date: CM/Contractor: By: Date: Response: END OF FORM Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 This page intentionally left blank. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents EJCDC C-550 NOTICE TO PROCEED 2018 00 65 00 - 1 NOTICE TO PROCEED Owner: City of Bozeman Owner’s Project No.: Engineer: HDR Engineering, Inc. Engineer’s Project No.: 10375316 Contractor: Contractor’s Project No.: Project: Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Project Contract Name: Effective Date of Contract: Owner hereby notifies Contractor that the Contract Times under the above Contract will commence to run on ____________________ to Paragraph 4.01 of the General Conditions. On that date, Contractor shall start performing its obligations under the Contract Documents. No Work will be done at the Site prior to such date. In accordance with the Agreement: The number of days to achieve Substantial Completion is 210 calendar days from the date stated above for the commencement of the Contract Times, resulting in a date for Substantial Completion of ____________________ ; and the number of days to achieve readiness for final payment is 240 calendar days from the commencement date of the Contract Times, resulting in a date for readiness for final payment of ____________________. Owner: By (signature): Name (printed): Title: Date Issued: Copy: Engineer Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents EJCDC C-550 NOTICE TO PROCEED 2018 00 65 00 - 1 This page intentionally left blank. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. This document has important legal consequences; consultation with an attorney is encouraged with respect to its use or modification. This document should be adapted to the particular circumstances of the contemplated Project and the controlling Laws and Regulations. STANDARD GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT Prepared By Endorsed By Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers 1420 King Street, Alexandria, VA 22314-2794 (703) 684-2882 www.nspe.org American Council of Engineering Companies 1015 15th Street N.W., Washington, DC 20005 (202) 347-7474 www.acec.org American Society of Civil Engineers 1801 Alexander Bell Drive, Reston, VA 20191-4400 (800) 548-2723 www.asce.org The copyright for this EJCDC document is owned jointly by the three sponsoring organizations listed above. The National Society of Professional Engineers is the Copyright Administrator for the EJCDC documents; please direct all inquiries regarding EJCDC copyrights to NSPE. NOTE: EJCDC publications may be purchased at www.ejcdc.org, or from any of the sponsoring organizations above. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. TOC Page 1 of 5 STANDARD GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT TABLE OF CONTENTS Page Article 1—Definitions and Terminology ........................................................................................................ 1 1.01 Defined Terms ............................................................................................................................... 1 1.02 Terminology .................................................................................................................................. 6 Article 2—Preliminary Matters ..................................................................................................................... 7 2.01 Delivery of Performance and Payment Bonds; Evidence of Insurance......................................... 7 2.02 Copies of Documents .................................................................................................................... 7 2.03 Before Starting Construction ........................................................................................................ 7 2.04 Preconstruction Conference; Designation of Authorized Representatives .................................. 8 2.05 Acceptance of Schedules .............................................................................................................. 8 2.06 Electronic Transmittals ................................................................................................................. 8 Article 3—Contract Documents: Intent, Requirements, Reuse .................................................................... 9 3.01 Intent ............................................................................................................................................. 9 3.02 Reference Standards ..................................................................................................................... 9 3.03 Reporting and Resolving Discrepancies ...................................................................................... 10 3.04 Requirements of the Contract Documents ................................................................................. 10 3.05 Reuse of Documents ................................................................................................................... 11 Article 4—Commencement and Progress of the Work .............................................................................. 11 4.01 Commencement of Contract Times; Notice to Proceed ............................................................. 11 4.02 Starting the Work ........................................................................................................................ 11 4.03 Reference Points ......................................................................................................................... 11 4.04 Progress Schedule ....................................................................................................................... 12 4.05 Delays in Contractor’s Progress .................................................................................................. 12 Article 5—Site; Subsurface and Physical Conditions; Hazardous Environmental Conditions .................... 13 5.01 Availability of Lands .................................................................................................................... 13 5.02 Use of Site and Other Areas ........................................................................................................ 14 5.03 Subsurface and Physical Conditions ............................................................................................ 15 5.04 Differing Subsurface or Physical Conditions ............................................................................... 16 Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. TOC Page 2 of 5 5.05 Underground Facilities ................................................................................................................ 17 5.06 Hazardous Environmental Conditions at Site ............................................................................. 19 Article 6—Bonds and Insurance .................................................................................................................. 21 6.01 Performance, Payment, and Other Bonds .................................................................................. 21 6.02 Insurance—General Provisions ................................................................................................... 22 6.03 Contractor’s Insurance ................................................................................................................ 24 6.04 Builder’s Risk and Other Property Insurance .............................................................................. 25 6.05 Property Losses; Subrogation ..................................................................................................... 25 6.06 Receipt and Application of Property Insurance Proceeds .......................................................... 27 Article 7—Contractor’s Responsibilities ..................................................................................................... 27 7.01 Contractor’s Means and Methods of Construction .................................................................... 27 7.02 Supervision and Superintendence .............................................................................................. 27 7.03 Labor; Working Hours ................................................................................................................. 27 7.04 Services, Materials, and Equipment ........................................................................................... 28 7.05 “Or Equals” .................................................................................................................................. 28 7.06 Substitutes .................................................................................................................................. 29 7.07 Concerning Subcontractors and Suppliers .................................................................................. 31 7.08 Patent Fees and Royalties ........................................................................................................... 32 7.09 Permits ........................................................................................................................................ 33 7.10 Taxes ........................................................................................................................................... 33 7.11 Laws and Regulations .................................................................................................................. 33 7.12 Record Documents ...................................................................................................................... 33 7.13 Safety and Protection ................................................................................................................. 34 7.14 Hazard Communication Programs .............................................................................................. 35 7.15 Emergencies ................................................................................................................................ 35 7.16 Submittals ................................................................................................................................... 35 7.17 Contractor’s General Warranty and Guarantee ......................................................................... 38 7.18 Indemnification ........................................................................................................................... 39 7.19 Delegation of Professional Design Services ................................................................................ 39 Article 8—Other Work at the Site ............................................................................................................... 40 8.01 Other Work ................................................................................................................................. 40 8.02 Coordination ............................................................................................................................... 41 8.03 Legal Relationships ...................................................................................................................... 41 Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. TOC Page 3 of 5 Article 9—Owner’s Responsibilities ............................................................................................................ 42 9.01 Communications to Contractor .................................................................................................. 42 9.02 Replacement of Engineer ............................................................................................................ 42 9.03 Furnish Data ................................................................................................................................ 42 9.04 Pay When Due ............................................................................................................................. 42 9.05 Lands and Easements; Reports, Tests, and Drawings ................................................................. 43 9.06 Insurance ..................................................................................................................................... 43 9.07 Change Orders ............................................................................................................................ 43 9.08 Inspections, Tests, and Approvals ............................................................................................... 43 9.09 Limitations on Owner’s Responsibilities ..................................................................................... 43 9.10 Undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Condition ...................................................................... 43 9.11 Evidence of Financial Arrangements ........................................................................................... 43 9.12 Safety Programs .......................................................................................................................... 43 Article 10—Engineer’s Status During Construction .................................................................................... 44 10.01 Owner’s Representative .......................................................................................................... 44 10.02 Visits to Site ............................................................................................................................. 44 10.03 Resident Project Representative............................................................................................. 44 10.04 Engineer’s Authority ............................................................................................................... 44 10.05 Determinations for Unit Price Work ....................................................................................... 45 10.06 Decisions on Requirements of Contract Documents and Acceptability of Work ................... 45 10.07 Limitations on Engineer’s Authority and Responsibilities ...................................................... 45 10.08 Compliance with Safety Program ............................................................................................ 45 Article 11—Changes to the Contract .......................................................................................................... 46 11.01 Amending and Supplementing the Contract .......................................................................... 46 11.02 Change Orders ........................................................................................................................ 46 11.03 Work Change Directives .......................................................................................................... 46 11.04 Field Orders ............................................................................................................................. 47 11.05 Owner-Authorized Changes in the Work ................................................................................ 47 11.06 Unauthorized Changes in the Work ........................................................................................ 47 11.07 Change of Contract Price ........................................................................................................ 47 11.08 Change of Contract Times ....................................................................................................... 49 11.09 Change Proposals .................................................................................................................... 49 11.10 Notification to Surety .............................................................................................................. 50 Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. TOC Page 4 of 5 Article 12—Claims ....................................................................................................................................... 50 12.01 Claims ...................................................................................................................................... 50 Article 13—Cost of the Work; Allowances; Unit Price Work ...................................................................... 51 13.01 Cost of the Work ..................................................................................................................... 51 13.02 Allowances .............................................................................................................................. 55 13.03 Unit Price Work ....................................................................................................................... 55 Article 14—Tests and Inspections; Correction, Removal, or Acceptance of Defective Work .................... 56 14.01 Access to Work ........................................................................................................................ 56 14.02 Tests, Inspections, and Approvals ........................................................................................... 56 14.03 Defective Work ....................................................................................................................... 57 14.04 Acceptance of Defective Work................................................................................................ 58 14.05 Uncovering Work .................................................................................................................... 58 14.06 Owner May Stop the Work ..................................................................................................... 58 14.07 Owner May Correct Defective Work ....................................................................................... 59 Article 15—Payments to Contractor; Set-Offs; Completion; Correction Period ........................................ 59 15.01 Progress Payments .................................................................................................................. 59 15.02 Contractor’s Warranty of Title ................................................................................................ 62 15.03 Substantial Completion ........................................................................................................... 62 15.04 Partial Use or Occupancy ........................................................................................................ 63 15.05 Final Inspection ....................................................................................................................... 64 15.06 Final Payment .......................................................................................................................... 64 15.07 Waiver of Claims ..................................................................................................................... 65 15.08 Correction Period .................................................................................................................... 66 Article 16—Suspension of Work and Termination ..................................................................................... 67 16.01 Owner May Suspend Work ..................................................................................................... 67 16.02 Owner May Terminate for Cause ............................................................................................ 67 16.03 Owner May Terminate for Convenience................................................................................. 68 16.04 Contractor May Stop Work or Terminate ............................................................................... 68 Article 17—Final Resolution of Disputes .................................................................................................... 69 17.01 Methods and Procedures ........................................................................................................ 69 Article 18—Miscellaneous .......................................................................................................................... 69 18.01 Giving Notice ........................................................................................................................... 69 18.02 Computation of Times............................................................................................................. 69 Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. TOC Page 5 of 5 18.03 Cumulative Remedies ............................................................................................................. 70 18.04 Limitation of Damages ............................................................................................................ 70 18.05 No Waiver ............................................................................................................................... 70 18.06 Survival of Obligations ............................................................................................................ 70 18.07 Controlling Law ....................................................................................................................... 70 18.08 Assignment of Contract........................................................................................................... 70 18.09 Successors and Assigns ........................................................................................................... 70 18.10 Headings .................................................................................................................................. 70 Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 1 of 70 STANDARD GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT ARTICLE 1—DEFINITIONS AND TERMINOLOGY 1.01 Defined Terms A. Wherever used in the Bidding Requirements or Contract Documents, a term printed with initial capital letters, including the term’s singular and plural forms, will have the meaning indicated in the definitions below. In addition to terms specifically defined, terms with initial capital letters in the Contract Documents include references to identified articles and paragraphs, and the titles of other documents or forms. 1. Addenda—Written or graphic instruments issued prior to the opening of Bids which clarify, correct, or change the Bidding Requirements or the proposed Contract Documents. 2. Agreement—The written instrument, executed by Owner and Contractor, that sets forth the Contract Price and Contract Times, identifies the parties and the Engineer, and designates the specific items that are Contract Documents. 3. Application for Payment—The document prepared by Contractor, in a form acceptable to Engineer, to request progress or final payments, and which is to be accompanied by such supporting documentation as is required by the Contract Documents. 4. Bid—The offer of a Bidder submitted on the prescribed form setting forth the prices for the Work to be performed. 5. Bidder—An individual or entity that submits a Bid to Owner. 6. Bidding Documents—The Bidding Requirements, the proposed Contract Documents, and all Addenda. 7. Bidding Requirements—The Advertisement or invitation to bid, Instructions to Bidders, Bid Bond or other Bid security, if any, the Bid Form, and the Bid with any attachments. 8. Change Order—A document which is signed by Contractor and Owner and authorizes an addition, deletion, or revision in the Work or an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Times, or other revision to the Contract, issued on or after the Effective Date of the Contract. 9. Change Proposal—A written request by Contractor, duly submitted in compliance with the procedural requirements set forth herein, seeking an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times; contesting an initial decision by Engineer concerning the requirements of the Contract Documents or the acceptability of Work under the Contract Documents; challenging a set-off against payments due; or seeking other relief with respect to the terms of the Contract. 10. Claim a. A demand or assertion by Owner directly to Contractor, duly submitted in compliance with the procedural requirements set forth herein, seeking an adjustment of Contract Price or Contract Times; contesting an initial decision by Engineer concerning the Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 2 of 70 requirements of the Contract Documents or the acceptability of Work under the Contract Documents; contesting Engineer’s decision regarding a Change Proposal; seeking resolution of a contractual issue that Engineer has declined to address; or seeking other relief with respect to the terms of the Contract. b. A demand or assertion by Contractor directly to Owner, duly submitted in compliance with the procedural requirements set forth herein, contesting Engineer’s decision regarding a Change Proposal, or seeking resolution of a contractual issue that Engineer has declined to address. c. A demand or assertion by Owner or Contractor, duly submitted in compliance with the procedural requirements set forth herein, made pursuant to Paragraph 12.01.A.4, concerning disputes arising after Engineer has issued a recommendation of final payment. d. A demand for money or services by a third party is not a Claim. 11. Constituent of Concern—Asbestos, petroleum, radioactive materials, polychlorinated biphenyls (PCBs), lead-based paint (as defined by the HUD/EPA standard), hazardous waste, and any substance, product, waste, or other material of any nature whatsoever that is or becomes listed, regulated, or addressed pursuant to Laws and Regulations regulating, relating to, or imposing liability or standards of conduct concerning, any hazardous, toxic, or dangerous waste, substance, or material. 12. Contract—The entire and integrated written contract between Owner and Contractor concerning the Work. 13. Contract Documents—Those items so designated in the Agreement, and which together comprise the Contract. 14. Contract Price—The money that Owner has agreed to pay Contractor for completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 15. Contract Times—The number of days or the dates by which Contractor shall: (a) achieve Milestones, if any; (b) achieve Substantial Completion; and (c) complete the Work. 16. Contractor—The individual or entity with which Owner has contracted for performance of the Work. 17. Cost of the Work—See Paragraph 13.01 for definition. 18. Drawings—The part of the Contract that graphically shows the scope, extent, and character of the Work to be performed by Contractor. 19. Effective Date of the Contract—The date, indicated in the Agreement, on which the Contract becomes effective. 20. Electronic Document—Any Project-related correspondence, attachments to correspondence, data, documents, drawings, information, or graphics, including but not limited to Shop Drawings and other Submittals, that are in an electronic or digital format. 21. Electronic Means—Electronic mail (email), upload/download from a secure Project website, or other communications methods that allow: (a) the transmission or communication of Electronic Documents; (b) the documentation of transmissions, including sending and receipt; (c) printing of the transmitted Electronic Document by the Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 3 of 70 recipient; (d) the storage and archiving of the Electronic Document by sender and recipient; and (e) the use by recipient of the Electronic Document for purposes permitted by this Contract. Electronic Means does not include the use of text messaging, or of Facebook, Twitter, Instagram, or similar social media services for transmission of Electronic Documents. 22. Engineer—The individual or entity named as such in the Agreement. 23. Field Order—A written order issued by Engineer which requires minor changes in the Work but does not change the Contract Price or the Contract Times. 24. Hazardous Environmental Condition—The presence at the Site of Constituents of Concern in such quantities or circumstances that may present a danger to persons or property exposed thereto. a. The presence at the Site of materials that are necessary for the execution of the Work, or that are to be incorporated into the Work, and that are controlled and contained pursuant to industry practices, Laws and Regulations, and the requirements of the Contract, is not a Hazardous Environmental Condition. b. The presence of Constituents of Concern that are to be removed or remediated as part of the Work is not a Hazardous Environmental Condition. c. The presence of Constituents of Concern as part of the routine, anticipated, and obvious working conditions at the Site, is not a Hazardous Environmental Condition. 25. Laws and Regulations; Laws or Regulations—Any and all applicable laws, statutes, rules, regulations, ordinances, codes, and binding decrees, resolutions, and orders of any and all governmental bodies, agencies, authorities, and courts having jurisdiction. 26. Liens—Charges, security interests, or encumbrances upon Contract-related funds, real property, or personal property. 27. Milestone—A principal event in the performance of the Work that the Contract requires Contractor to achieve by an intermediate completion date, or by a time prior to Substantial Completion of all the Work. 28. Notice of Award—The written notice by Owner to a Bidder of Owner’s acceptance of the Bid. 29. Notice to Proceed—A written notice by Owner to Contractor fixing the date on which the Contract Times will commence to run and on which Contractor shall start to perform the Work. 30. Owner—The individual or entity with which Contractor has contracted regarding the Work, and which has agreed to pay Contractor for the performance of the Work, pursuant to the terms of the Contract. 31. Progress Schedule—A schedule, prepared and maintained by Contractor, describing the sequence and duration of the activities comprising Contractor’s plan to accomplish the Work within the Contract Times. 32. Project—The total undertaking to be accomplished for Owner by engineers, contractors, and others, including planning, study, design, construction, testing, commissioning, and start-up, and of which the Work to be performed under the Contract Documents is a part. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 4 of 70 33. Resident Project Representative—The authorized representative of Engineer assigned to assist Engineer at the Site. As used herein, the term Resident Project Representative (RPR) includes any assistants or field staff of Resident Project Representative. 34. Samples—Physical examples of materials, equipment, or workmanship that are representative of some portion of the Work and that establish the standards by which such portion of the Work will be judged. 35. Schedule of Submittals—A schedule, prepared and maintained by Contractor, of required submittals and the time requirements for Engineer’s review of the submittals. 36. Schedule of Values—A schedule, prepared and maintained by Contractor, allocating portions of the Contract Price to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for reviewing Contractor’s Applications for Payment. 37. Shop Drawings—All drawings, diagrams, illustrations, schedules, and other data or information that are specifically prepared or assembled by or for Contractor and submitted by Contractor to illustrate some portion of the Work. Shop Drawings, whether approved or not, are not Drawings and are not Contract Documents. 38. Site—Lands or areas indicated in the Contract Documents as being furnished by Owner upon which the Work is to be performed, including rights-of-way and easements, and such other lands or areas furnished by Owner which are designated for the use of Contractor. 39. Specifications—The part of the Contract that consists of written requirements for materials, equipment, systems, standards, and workmanship as applied to the Work, and certain administrative requirements and procedural matters applicable to the Work. 40. Subcontractor—An individual or entity having a direct contract with Contractor or with any other Subcontractor for the performance of a part of the Work. 41. Submittal—A written or graphic document, prepared by or for Contractor, which the Contract Documents require Contractor to submit to Engineer, or that is indicated as a Submittal in the Schedule of Submittals accepted by Engineer. Submittals may include Shop Drawings and Samples; schedules; product data; Owner-delegated designs; sustainable design information; information on special procedures; testing plans; results of tests and evaluations, source quality-control testing and inspections, and field or Site quality-control testing and inspections; warranties and certifications; Suppliers’ instructions and reports; records of delivery of spare parts and tools; operations and maintenance data; Project photographic documentation; record documents; and other such documents required by the Contract Documents. Submittals, whether or not approved or accepted by Engineer, are not Contract Documents. Change Proposals, Change Orders, Claims, notices, Applications for Payment, and requests for interpretation or clarification are not Submittals. 42. Substantial Completion—The time at which the Work (or a specified part thereof) has progressed to the point where, in the opinion of Engineer, the Work (or a specified part thereof) is sufficiently complete, in accordance with the Contract Documents, so that the Work (or a specified part thereof) can be utilized for the purposes for which it is intended. The terms “substantially complete” and “substantially completed” as applied to all or part of the Work refer to Substantial Completion of such Work. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 5 of 70 43. Successful Bidder—The Bidder to which the Owner makes an award of contract. 44. Supplementary Conditions—The part of the Contract that amends or supplements these General Conditions. 45. Supplier—A manufacturer, fabricator, supplier, distributor, or vendor having a direct contract with Contractor or with any Subcontractor to furnish materials or equipment to be incorporated in the Work by Contractor or a Subcontractor. 46. Technical Data a. Those items expressly identified as Technical Data in the Supplementary Conditions, with respect to either (1) existing subsurface conditions at or adjacent to the Site, or existing physical conditions at or adjacent to the Site including existing surface or subsurface structures (except Underground Facilities) or (2) Hazardous Environmental Conditions at the Site. b. If no such express identifications of Technical Data have been made with respect to conditions at the Site, then Technical Data is defined, with respect to conditions at the Site under Paragraphs 5.03, 5.04, and 5.06, as the data contained in boring logs, recorded measurements of subsurface water levels, assessments of the condition of subsurface facilities, laboratory test results, and other factual, objective information regarding conditions at the Site that are set forth in any geotechnical, environmental, or other Site or facilities conditions report prepared for the Project and made available to Contractor. c. Information and data regarding the presence or location of Underground Facilities are not intended to be categorized, identified, or defined as Technical Data, and instead Underground Facilities are shown or indicated on the Drawings. 47. Underground Facilities—All active or not-in-service underground lines, pipelines, conduits, ducts, encasements, cables, wires, manholes, vaults, tanks, tunnels, or other such facilities or systems at the Site, including but not limited to those facilities or systems that produce, transmit, distribute, or convey telephone or other communications, cable television, fiber optic transmissions, power, electricity, light, heat, gases, oil, crude oil products, liquid petroleum products, water, steam, waste, wastewater, storm water, other liquids or chemicals, or traffic or other control systems. An abandoned facility or system is not an Underground Facility. 48. Unit Price Work—Work to be paid for on the basis of unit prices. 49. Work—The entire construction or the various separately identifiable parts thereof required to be provided under the Contract Documents. Work includes and is the result of performing or providing all labor, services, and documentation necessary to produce such construction; furnishing, installing, and incorporating all materials and equipment into such construction; and may include related services such as testing, start-up, and commissioning, all as required by the Contract Documents. 50. Work Change Directive—A written directive to Contractor issued on or after the Effective Date of the Contract, signed by Owner and recommended by Engineer, ordering an addition, deletion, or revision in the Work. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 6 of 70 1.02 Terminology A. The words and terms discussed in Paragraphs 1.02.B, C, D, and E are not defined terms that require initial capital letters, but, when used in the Bidding Requirements or Contract Documents, have the indicated meaning. B. Intent of Certain Terms or Adjectives: The Contract Documents include the terms “as allowed,” “as approved,” “as ordered,” “as directed” or terms of like effect or import to authorize an exercise of professional judgment by Engineer. In addition, the adjectives “reasonable,” “suitable,” “acceptable,” “proper,” “satisfactory,” or adjectives of like effect or import are used to describe an action or determination of Engineer as to the Work. It is intended that such exercise of professional judgment, action, or determination will be solely to evaluate, in general, the Work for compliance with the information in the Contract Documents and with the design concept of the Project as a functioning whole as shown or indicated in the Contract Documents (unless there is a specific statement indicating otherwise). The use of any such term or adjective is not intended to and shall not be effective to assign to Engineer any duty or authority to supervise or direct the performance of the Work, or any duty or authority to undertake responsibility contrary to the provisions of Article 10 or any other provision of the Contract Documents. C. Day: The word “day” means a calendar day of 24 hours measured from midnight to the next midnight. D. Defective: The word “defective,” when modifying the word “Work,” refers to Work that is unsatisfactory, faulty, or deficient in that it: 1. does not conform to the Contract Documents; 2. does not meet the requirements of any applicable inspection, reference standard, test, or approval referred to in the Contract Documents; or 3. has been damaged prior to Engineer’s recommendation of final payment (unless responsibility for the protection thereof has been assumed by Owner at Substantial Completion in accordance with Paragraph 15.03 or Paragraph 15.04). E. Furnish, Install, Perform, Provide 1. The word “furnish,” when used in connection with services, materials, or equipment, means to supply and deliver said services, materials, or equipment to the Site (or some other specified location) ready for use or installation and in usable or operable condition. 2. The word “install,” when used in connection with services, materials, or equipment, means to put into use or place in final position said services, materials, or equipment complete and ready for intended use. 3. The words “perform” or “provide,” when used in connection with services, materials, or equipment, means to furnish and install said services, materials, or equipment complete and ready for intended use. 4. If the Contract Documents establish an obligation of Contractor with respect to specific services, materials, or equipment, but do not expressly use any of the four words “furnish,” “install,” “perform,” or “provide,” then Contractor shall furnish and install said services, materials, or equipment complete and ready for intended use. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 7 of 70 F. Contract Price or Contract Times: References to a change in “Contract Price or Contract Times” or “Contract Times or Contract Price” or similar, indicate that such change applies to (1) Contract Price, (2) Contract Times, or (3) both Contract Price and Contract Times, as warranted, even if the term “or both” is not expressed. G. Unless stated otherwise in the Contract Documents, words or phrases that have a well-known technical or construction industry or trade meaning are used in the Contract Documents in accordance with such recognized meaning. ARTICLE 2—PRELIMINARY MATTERS 2.01 Delivery of Performance and Payment Bonds; Evidence of Insurance A. Performance and Payment Bonds: When Contractor delivers the signed counterparts of the Agreement to Owner, Contractor shall also deliver to Owner the performance bond and payment bond (if the Contract requires Contractor to furnish such bonds). B. Evidence of Contractor’s Insurance: When Contractor delivers the signed counterparts of the Agreement to Owner, Contractor shall also deliver to Owner, with copies to each additional insured (as identified in the Contract), the certificates, endorsements, and other evidence of insurance required to be provided by Contractor in accordance with Article 6, except to the extent the Supplementary Conditions expressly establish other dates for delivery of specific insurance policies. C. Evidence of Owner’s Insurance: After receipt of the signed counterparts of the Agreement and all required bonds and insurance documentation, Owner shall promptly deliver to Contractor, with copies to each additional insured (as identified in the Contract), the certificates and other evidence of insurance required to be provided by Owner under Article 6. 2.02 Copies of Documents A. Owner shall furnish to Contractor four printed copies of the Contract (including one fully signed counterpart of the Agreement), and one copy in electronic portable document format (PDF). Additional printed copies will be furnished upon request at the cost of reproduction. B. Owner shall maintain and safeguard at least one original printed record version of the Contract, including Drawings and Specifications signed and sealed by Engineer and other design professionals. Owner shall make such original printed record version of the Contract available to Contractor for review. Owner may delegate the responsibilities under this provision to Engineer. 2.03 Before Starting Construction A. Preliminary Schedules: Within 10 days after the Effective Date of the Contract (or as otherwise required by the Contract Documents), Contractor shall submit to Engineer for timely review: 1. a preliminary Progress Schedule indicating the times (numbers of days or dates) for starting and completing the various stages of the Work, including any Milestones specified in the Contract; 2. a preliminary Schedule of Submittals; and 3. a preliminary Schedule of Values for all of the Work which includes quantities and prices of items which when added together equal the Contract Price and subdivides the Work Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 8 of 70 into component parts in sufficient detail to serve as the basis for progress payments during performance of the Work. Such prices will include an appropriate amount of overhead and profit applicable to each item of Work. 2.04 Preconstruction Conference; Designation of Authorized Representatives A. Before any Work at the Site is started, a conference attended by Owner, Contractor, Engineer, and others as appropriate will be held to establish a working understanding among the parties as to the Work, and to discuss the schedules referred to in Paragraph 2.03.A, procedures for handling Shop Drawings, Samples, and other Submittals, processing Applications for Payment, electronic or digital transmittals, and maintaining required records. B. At this conference Owner and Contractor each shall designate, in writing, a specific individual to act as its authorized representative with respect to the services and responsibilities under the Contract. Such individuals shall have the authority to transmit and receive information, render decisions relative to the Contract, and otherwise act on behalf of each respective party. 2.05 Acceptance of Schedules A. At least 10 days before submission of the first Application for Payment a conference, attended by Contractor, Engineer, and others as appropriate, will be held to review the schedules submitted in accordance with Paragraph 2.03.A. No progress payment will be made to Contractor until acceptable schedules are submitted to Engineer. 1. The Progress Schedule will be acceptable to Engineer if it provides an orderly progression of the Work to completion within the Contract Times. Such acceptance will not impose on Engineer responsibility for the Progress Schedule, for sequencing, scheduling, or progress of the Work, nor interfere with or relieve Contractor from Contractor’s full responsibility therefor. 2. Contractor’s Schedule of Submittals will be acceptable to Engineer if it provides a workable arrangement for reviewing and processing the required submittals. 3. Contractor’s Schedule of Values will be acceptable to Engineer as to form and substance if it provides a reasonable allocation of the Contract Price to the component parts of the Work. 4. If a schedule is not acceptable, Contractor will have an additional 10 days to revise and resubmit the schedule. 2.06 Electronic Transmittals A. Except as otherwise stated elsewhere in the Contract, the Owner, Engineer, and Contractor may send, and shall accept, Electronic Documents transmitted by Electronic Means. B. If the Contract does not establish protocols for Electronic Means, then Owner, Engineer, and Contractor shall jointly develop such protocols. C. Subject to any governing protocols for Electronic Means, when transmitting Electronic Documents by Electronic Means, the transmitting party makes no representations as to long- term compatibility, usability, or readability of the Electronic Documents resulting from the recipient’s use of software application packages, operating systems, or computer hardware differing from those used in the drafting or transmittal of the Electronic Documents. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 9 of 70 ARTICLE 3—CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: INTENT, REQUIREMENTS, REUSE 3.01 Intent A. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is required by one Contract Document is as binding as if required by all. B. It is the intent of the Contract Documents to describe a functionally complete Project (or part thereof) to be constructed in accordance with the Contract Documents. C. Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, if there is a discrepancy between the electronic versions of the Contract Documents (including any printed copies derived from such electronic versions) and the printed record version, the printed record version will govern. D. The Contract supersedes prior negotiations, representations, and agreements, whether written or oral. E. Engineer will issue clarifications and interpretations of the Contract Documents as provided herein. F. Any provision or part of the Contract Documents held to be void or unenforceable under any Law or Regulation will be deemed stricken, and all remaining provisions will continue to be valid and binding upon Owner and Contractor, which agree that the Contract Documents will be reformed to replace such stricken provision or part thereof with a valid and enforceable provision that comes as close as possible to expressing the intention of the stricken provision. G. Nothing in the Contract Documents creates: 1. any contractual relationship between Owner or Engineer and any Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity performing or furnishing any of the Work, for the benefit of such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity; or 2. any obligation on the part of Owner or Engineer to pay or to see to the payment of any money due any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity, except as may otherwise be required by Laws and Regulations. 3.02 Reference Standards A. Standards Specifications, Codes, Laws and Regulations 1. Reference in the Contract Documents to standard specifications, manuals, reference standards, or codes of any technical society, organization, or association, or to Laws or Regulations, whether such reference be specific or by implication, means the standard specification, manual, reference standard, code, or Laws or Regulations in effect at the time of opening of Bids (or on the Effective Date of the Contract if there were no Bids), except as may be otherwise specifically stated in the Contract Documents. 2. No provision of any such standard specification, manual, reference standard, or code, and no instruction of a Supplier, will be effective to change the duties or responsibilities of Owner, Contractor, or Engineer from those set forth in the part of the Contract Documents prepared by or for Engineer. No such provision or instruction shall be effective to assign to Owner or Engineer any duty or authority to supervise or direct the performance of the Work, or any duty or authority to undertake responsibility Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 10 of 70 inconsistent with the provisions of the part of the Contract Documents prepared by or for Engineer. 3.03 Reporting and Resolving Discrepancies A. Reporting Discrepancies 1. Contractor’s Verification of Figures and Field Measurements: Before undertaking each part of the Work, Contractor shall carefully study the Contract Documents, and check and verify pertinent figures and dimensions therein, particularly with respect to applicable field measurements. Contractor shall promptly report in writing to Engineer any conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy that Contractor discovers, or has actual knowledge of, and shall not proceed with any Work affected thereby until the conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy is resolved by a clarification or interpretation by Engineer, or by an amendment or supplement to the Contract issued pursuant to Paragraph 11.01. 2. Contractor’s Review of Contract Documents: If, before or during the performance of the Work, Contractor discovers any conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy within the Contract Documents, or between the Contract Documents and (a) any applicable Law or Regulation, (b) actual field conditions, (c) any standard specification, manual, reference standard, or code, or (d) any instruction of any Supplier, then Contractor shall promptly report it to Engineer in writing. Contractor shall not proceed with the Work affected thereby (except in an emergency as required by Paragraph 7.15) until the conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy is resolved, by a clarification or interpretation by Engineer, or by an amendment or supplement to the Contract issued pursuant to Paragraph 11.01. 3. Contractor shall not be liable to Owner or Engineer for failure to report any conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy in the Contract Documents unless Contractor had actual knowledge thereof. B. Resolving Discrepancies 1. Except as may be otherwise specifically stated in the Contract Documents, the provisions of the part of the Contract Documents prepared by or for Engineer take precedence in resolving any conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy between such provisions of the Contract Documents and: a. the provisions of any standard specification, manual, reference standard, or code, or the instruction of any Supplier (whether or not specifically incorporated by reference as a Contract Document); or b. the provisions of any Laws or Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work (unless such an interpretation of the provisions of the Contract Documents would result in violation of such Law or Regulation). 3.04 Requirements of the Contract Documents A. During the performance of the Work and until final payment, Contractor and Owner shall submit to the Engineer in writing all matters in question concerning the requirements of the Contract Documents (sometimes referred to as requests for information or interpretation— RFIs), or relating to the acceptability of the Work under the Contract Documents, as soon as possible after such matters arise. Engineer will be the initial interpreter of the requirements of the Contract Documents, and judge of the acceptability of the Work. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 11 of 70 B. Engineer will, with reasonable promptness, render a written clarification, interpretation, or decision on the issue submitted, or initiate an amendment or supplement to the Contract Documents. Engineer’s written clarification, interpretation, or decision will be final and binding on Contractor, unless it appeals by submitting a Change Proposal, and on Owner, unless it appeals by filing a Claim. C. If a submitted matter in question concerns terms and conditions of the Contract Documents that do not involve (1) the performance or acceptability of the Work under the Contract Documents, (2) the design (as set forth in the Drawings, Specifications, or otherwise), or (3) other engineering or technical matters, then Engineer will promptly notify Owner and Contractor in writing that Engineer is unable to provide a decision or interpretation. If Owner and Contractor are unable to agree on resolution of such a matter in question, either party may pursue resolution as provided in Article 12. 3.05 Reuse of Documents A. Contractor and its Subcontractors and Suppliers shall not: 1. have or acquire any title to or ownership rights in any of the Drawings, Specifications, or other documents (or copies of any thereof) prepared by or bearing the seal of Engineer or its consultants, including electronic media versions, or reuse any such Drawings, Specifications, other documents, or copies thereof on extensions of the Project or any other project without written consent of Owner and Engineer and specific written verification or adaptation by Engineer; or 2. have or acquire any title or ownership rights in any other Contract Documents, reuse any such Contract Documents for any purpose without Owner’s express written consent, or violate any copyrights pertaining to such Contract Documents. B. The prohibitions of this Paragraph 3.05 will survive final payment, or termination of the Contract. Nothing herein precludes Contractor from retaining copies of the Contract Documents for record purposes. ARTICLE 4—COMMENCEMENT AND PROGRESS OF THE WORK 4.01 Commencement of Contract Times; Notice to Proceed A. The Contract Times will commence to run on the 30th day after the Effective Date of the Contract or, if a Notice to Proceed is given, on the day indicated in the Notice to Proceed. A Notice to Proceed may be given at any time within 30 days after the Effective Date of the Contract. In no event will the Contract Times commence to run later than the 60th day after the day of Bid opening or the 30th day after the Effective Date of the Contract, whichever date is earlier. 4.02 Starting the Work A. Contractor shall start to perform the Work on the date when the Contract Times commence to run. No Work may be done at the Site prior to such date. 4.03 Reference Points A. Owner shall provide engineering surveys to establish reference points for construction which in Engineer’s judgment are necessary to enable Contractor to proceed with the Work. Contractor shall be responsible for laying out the Work, shall protect and preserve the Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 12 of 70 established reference points and property monuments, and shall make no changes or relocations without the prior written approval of Owner. Contractor shall report to Engineer whenever any reference point or property monument is lost or destroyed or requires relocation because of necessary changes in grades or locations, and shall be responsible for the accurate replacement or relocation of such reference points or property monuments by professionally qualified personnel. 4.04 Progress Schedule A. Contractor shall adhere to the Progress Schedule established in accordance with Paragraph 2.05 as it may be adjusted from time to time as provided below. 1. Contractor shall submit to Engineer for acceptance (to the extent indicated in Paragraph 2.05) proposed adjustments in the Progress Schedule that will not result in changing the Contract Times. 2. Proposed adjustments in the Progress Schedule that will change the Contract Times must be submitted in accordance with the requirements of Article 11. B. Contractor shall carry on the Work and adhere to the Progress Schedule during all disputes or disagreements with Owner. No Work will be delayed or postponed pending resolution of any disputes or disagreements, or during any appeal process, except as permitted by Paragraph 16.04, or as Owner and Contractor may otherwise agree in writing. 4.05 Delays in Contractor’s Progress A. If Owner, Engineer, or anyone for whom Owner is responsible, delays, disrupts, or interferes with the performance or progress of the Work, then Contractor shall be entitled to an equitable adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times. B. Contractor shall not be entitled to an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times for delay, disruption, or interference caused by or within the control of Contractor. Delay, disruption, and interference attributable to and within the control of a Subcontractor or Supplier shall be deemed to be within the control of Contractor. C. If Contractor’s performance or progress is delayed, disrupted, or interfered with by unanticipated causes not the fault of and beyond the control of Owner, Contractor, and those for which they are responsible, then Contractor shall be entitled to an equitable adjustment in Contract Times. Such an adjustment will be Contractor’s sole and exclusive remedy for the delays, disruption, and interference described in this paragraph. Causes of delay, disruption, or interference that may give rise to an adjustment in Contract Times under this paragraph include but are not limited to the following: 1. Severe and unavoidable natural catastrophes such as fires, floods, epidemics, and earthquakes; 2. Abnormal weather conditions; 3. Acts or failures to act of third-party utility owners or other third-party entities (other than those third-party utility owners or other third-party entities performing other work at or adjacent to the Site as arranged by or under contract with Owner, as contemplated in Article 8); and 4. Acts of war or terrorism. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 13 of 70 D. Contractor’s entitlement to an adjustment of Contract Times or Contract Price is limited as follows: 1. Contractor’s entitlement to an adjustment of the Contract Times is conditioned on the delay, disruption, or interference adversely affecting an activity on the critical path to completion of the Work, as of the time of the delay, disruption, or interference. 2. Contractor shall not be entitled to an adjustment in Contract Price for any delay, disruption, or interference if such delay is concurrent with a delay, disruption, or interference caused by or within the control of Contractor. Such a concurrent delay by Contractor shall not preclude an adjustment of Contract Times to which Contractor is otherwise entitled. 3. Adjustments of Contract Times or Contract Price are subject to the provisions of Article 11. E. Each Contractor request or Change Proposal seeking an increase in Contract Times or Contract Price must be supplemented by supporting data that sets forth in detail the following: 1. The circumstances that form the basis for the requested adjustment; 2. The date upon which each cause of delay, disruption, or interference began to affect the progress of the Work; 3. The date upon which each cause of delay, disruption, or interference ceased to affect the progress of the Work; 4. The number of days’ increase in Contract Times claimed as a consequence of each such cause of delay, disruption, or interference; and 5. The impact on Contract Price, in accordance with the provisions of Paragraph 11.07. Contractor shall also furnish such additional supporting documentation as Owner or Engineer may require including, where appropriate, a revised progress schedule indicating all the activities affected by the delay, disruption, or interference, and an explanation of the effect of the delay, disruption, or interference on the critical path to completion of the Work. F. Delays, disruption, and interference to the performance or progress of the Work resulting from the existence of a differing subsurface or physical condition, an Underground Facility that was not shown or indicated by the Contract Documents, or not shown or indicated with reasonable accuracy, and those resulting from Hazardous Environmental Conditions, are governed by Article 5, together with the provisions of Paragraphs 4.05.D and 4.05.E. G. Paragraph 8.03 addresses delays, disruption, and interference to the performance or progress of the Work resulting from the performance of certain other work at or adjacent to the Site. ARTICLE 5—SITE; SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS; HAZARDOUS ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS 5.01 Availability of Lands A. Owner shall furnish the Site. Owner shall notify Contractor in writing of any encumbrances or restrictions not of general application but specifically related to use of the Site with which Contractor must comply in performing the Work. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 14 of 70 B. Upon reasonable written request, Owner shall furnish Contractor with a current statement of record legal title and legal description of the lands upon which permanent improvements are to be made and Owner’s interest therein as necessary for giving notice of or filing a mechanic’s or construction lien against such lands in accordance with applicable Laws and Regulations. C. Contractor shall provide for all additional lands and access thereto that may be required for temporary construction facilities or storage of materials and equipment. 5.02 Use of Site and Other Areas A. Limitation on Use of Site and Other Areas 1. Contractor shall confine construction equipment, temporary construction facilities, the storage of materials and equipment, and the operations of workers to the Site, adjacent areas that Contractor has arranged to use through construction easements or otherwise, and other adjacent areas permitted by Laws and Regulations, and shall not unreasonably encumber the Site and such other adjacent areas with construction equipment or other materials or equipment. Contractor shall assume full responsibility for (a) damage to the Site; (b) damage to any such other adjacent areas used for Contractor’s operations; (c) damage to any other adjacent land or areas, or to improvements, structures, utilities, or similar facilities located at such adjacent lands or areas; and (d) for injuries and losses sustained by the owners or occupants of any such land or areas; provided that such damage or injuries result from the performance of the Work or from other actions or conduct of the Contractor or those for which Contractor is responsible. 2. If a damage or injury claim is made by the owner or occupant of any such land or area because of the performance of the Work, or because of other actions or conduct of the Contractor or those for which Contractor is responsible, Contractor shall (a) take immediate corrective or remedial action as required by Paragraph 7.13, or otherwise; (b) promptly attempt to settle the claim as to all parties through negotiations with such owner or occupant, or otherwise resolve the claim by arbitration or other dispute resolution proceeding, or in a court of competent jurisdiction; and (c) to the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, indemnify and hold harmless Owner and Engineer, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them, from and against any such claim, and against all costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to any claim or action, legal or equitable, brought by any such owner or occupant against Owner, Engineer, or any other party indemnified hereunder to the extent caused directly or indirectly, in whole or in part by, or based upon, Contractor’s performance of the Work, or because of other actions or conduct of the Contractor or those for which Contractor is responsible. B. Removal of Debris During Performance of the Work: During the progress of the Work the Contractor shall keep the Site and other adjacent areas free from accumulations of waste materials, rubbish, and other debris. Removal and disposal of such waste materials, rubbish, and other debris will conform to applicable Laws and Regulations. C. Cleaning: Prior to Substantial Completion of the Work Contractor shall clean the Site and the Work and make it ready for utilization by Owner. At the completion of the Work Contractor shall remove from the Site and adjacent areas all tools, appliances, construction equipment Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 15 of 70 and machinery, and surplus materials and shall restore to original condition all property not designated for alteration by the Contract Documents. D. Loading of Structures: Contractor shall not load nor permit any part of any structure to be loaded in any manner that will endanger the structure, nor shall Contractor subject any part of the Work or adjacent structures or land to stresses or pressures that will endanger them. 5.03 Subsurface and Physical Conditions A. Reports and Drawings: The Supplementary Conditions identify: 1. Those reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at or adjacent to the Site that contain Technical Data; 2. Those drawings of existing physical conditions at or adjacent to the Site, including those drawings depicting existing surface or subsurface structures at or adjacent to the Site (except Underground Facilities), that contain Technical Data; and 3. Technical Data contained in such reports and drawings. B. Underground Facilities: Underground Facilities are shown or indicated on the Drawings, pursuant to Paragraph 5.05, and not in the drawings referred to in Paragraph 5.03.A. Information and data regarding the presence or location of Underground Facilities are not intended to be categorized, identified, or defined as Technical Data. C. Reliance by Contractor on Technical Data: Contractor may rely upon the accuracy of the Technical Data expressly identified in the Supplementary Conditions with respect to such reports and drawings, but such reports and drawings are not Contract Documents. If no such express identification has been made, then Contractor may rely upon the accuracy of the Technical Data as defined in Paragraph 1.01.A.46.b. D. Limitations of Other Data and Documents: Except for such reliance on Technical Data, Contractor may not rely upon or make any claim against Owner or Engineer, or any of their officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, or subcontractors, with respect to: 1. the completeness of such reports and drawings for Contractor’s purposes, including, but not limited to, any aspects of the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction to be employed by Contractor, and safety precautions and programs incident thereto; 2. other data, interpretations, opinions, and information contained in such reports or shown or indicated in such drawings; 3. the contents of other Site-related documents made available to Contractor, such as record drawings from other projects at or adjacent to the Site, or Owner’s archival documents concerning the Site; or 4. any Contractor interpretation of or conclusion drawn from any Technical Data or any such other data, interpretations, opinions, or information. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 16 of 70 5.04 Differing Subsurface or Physical Conditions A. Notice by Contractor: If Contractor believes that any subsurface or physical condition that is uncovered or revealed at the Site: 1. is of such a nature as to establish that any Technical Data on which Contractor is entitled to rely as provided in Paragraph 5.03 is materially inaccurate; 2. is of such a nature as to require a change in the Drawings or Specifications; 3. differs materially from that shown or indicated in the Contract Documents; or 4. is of an unusual nature, and differs materially from conditions ordinarily encountered and generally recognized as inherent in work of the character provided for in the Contract Documents; then Contractor shall, promptly after becoming aware thereof and before further disturbing the subsurface or physical conditions or performing any Work in connection therewith (except in an emergency as required by Paragraph 7.15), notify Owner and Engineer in writing about such condition. Contractor shall not further disturb such condition or perform any Work in connection therewith (except with respect to an emergency) until receipt of a written statement permitting Contractor to do so. B. Engineer’s Review: After receipt of written notice as required by the preceding paragraph, Engineer will promptly review the subsurface or physical condition in question; determine whether it is necessary for Owner to obtain additional exploration or tests with respect to the condition; conclude whether the condition falls within any one or more of the differing site condition categories in Paragraph 5.04.A; obtain any pertinent cost or schedule information from Contractor; prepare recommendations to Owner regarding the Contractor’s resumption of Work in connection with the subsurface or physical condition in question and the need for any change in the Drawings or Specifications; and advise Owner in writing of Engineer’s findings, conclusions, and recommendations. C. Owner’s Statement to Contractor Regarding Site Condition: After receipt of Engineer’s written findings, conclusions, and recommendations, Owner shall issue a written statement to Contractor (with a copy to Engineer) regarding the subsurface or physical condition in question, addressing the resumption of Work in connection with such condition, indicating whether any change in the Drawings or Specifications will be made, and adopting or rejecting Engineer’s written findings, conclusions, and recommendations, in whole or in part. D. Early Resumption of Work: If at any time Engineer determines that Work in connection with the subsurface or physical condition in question may resume prior to completion of Engineer’s review or Owner’s issuance of its statement to Contractor, because the condition in question has been adequately documented, and analyzed on a preliminary basis, then the Engineer may at its discretion instruct Contractor to resume such Work. E. Possible Price and Times Adjustments 1. Contractor shall be entitled to an equitable adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times, to the extent that the existence of a differing subsurface or physical condition, or any related delay, disruption, or interference, causes an increase or decrease in Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 17 of 70 Contractor’s cost of, or time required for, performance of the Work; subject, however, to the following: a. Such condition must fall within any one or more of the categories described in Paragraph 5.04.A; b. With respect to Work that is paid for on a unit price basis, any adjustment in Contract Price will be subject to the provisions of Paragraph 13.03; and, c. Contractor’s entitlement to an adjustment of the Contract Times is subject to the provisions of Paragraphs 4.05.D and 4.05.E. 2. Contractor shall not be entitled to any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times with respect to a subsurface or physical condition if: a. Contractor knew of the existence of such condition at the time Contractor made a commitment to Owner with respect to Contract Price and Contract Times by the submission of a Bid or becoming bound under a negotiated contract, or otherwise; b. The existence of such condition reasonably could have been discovered or revealed as a result of any examination, investigation, exploration, test, or study of the Site and contiguous areas expressly required by the Bidding Requirements or Contract Documents to be conducted by or for Contractor prior to Contractor’s making such commitment; or c. Contractor failed to give the written notice required by Paragraph 5.04.A. 3. If Owner and Contractor agree regarding Contractor’s entitlement to and the amount or extent of any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times, then any such adjustment will be set forth in a Change Order. 4. Contractor may submit a Change Proposal regarding its entitlement to or the amount or extent of any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times, no later than 30 days after Owner’s issuance of the Owner’s written statement to Contractor regarding the subsurface or physical condition in question. F. Underground Facilities; Hazardous Environmental Conditions: Paragraph 5.05 governs rights and responsibilities regarding the presence or location of Underground Facilities. Paragraph 5.06 governs rights and responsibilities regarding Hazardous Environmental Conditions. The provisions of Paragraphs 5.03 and 5.04 are not applicable to the presence or location of Underground Facilities, or to Hazardous Environmental Conditions. 5.05 Underground Facilities A. Contractor’s Responsibilities: Unless it is otherwise expressly provided in the Supplementary Conditions, the cost of all of the following are included in the Contract Price, and Contractor shall have full responsibility for: 1. reviewing and checking all information and data regarding existing Underground Facilities at the Site; 2. complying with applicable state and local utility damage prevention Laws and Regulations; Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 18 of 70 3. verifying the actual location of those Underground Facilities shown or indicated in the Contract Documents as being within the area affected by the Work, by exposing such Underground Facilities during the course of construction; 4. coordination of the Work with the owners (including Owner) of such Underground Facilities, during construction; and 5. the safety and protection of all existing Underground Facilities at the Site, and repairing any damage thereto resulting from the Work. B. Notice by Contractor: If Contractor believes that an Underground Facility that is uncovered or revealed at the Site was not shown or indicated on the Drawings, or was not shown or indicated on the Drawings with reasonable accuracy, then Contractor shall, promptly after becoming aware thereof and before further disturbing conditions affected thereby or performing any Work in connection therewith (except in an emergency as required by Paragraph 7.15), notify Owner and Engineer in writing regarding such Underground Facility. C. Engineer’s Review: Engineer will: 1. promptly review the Underground Facility and conclude whether such Underground Facility was not shown or indicated on the Drawings, or was not shown or indicated with reasonable accuracy; 2. identify and communicate with the owner of the Underground Facility; prepare recommendations to Owner (and if necessary issue any preliminary instructions to Contractor) regarding the Contractor’s resumption of Work in connection with the Underground Facility in question; 3. obtain any pertinent cost or schedule information from Contractor; determine the extent, if any, to which a change is required in the Drawings or Specifications to reflect and document the consequences of the existence or location of the Underground Facility; and 4. advise Owner in writing of Engineer’s findings, conclusions, and recommendations. During such time, Contractor shall be responsible for the safety and protection of such Underground Facility. D. Owner’s Statement to Contractor Regarding Underground Facility: After receipt of Engineer’s written findings, conclusions, and recommendations, Owner shall issue a written statement to Contractor (with a copy to Engineer) regarding the Underground Facility in question addressing the resumption of Work in connection with such Underground Facility, indicating whether any change in the Drawings or Specifications will be made, and adopting or rejecting Engineer’s written findings, conclusions, and recommendations in whole or in part. E. Early Resumption of Work: If at any time Engineer determines that Work in connection with the Underground Facility may resume prior to completion of Engineer’s review or Owner’s issuance of its statement to Contractor, because the Underground Facility in question and conditions affected by its presence have been adequately documented, and analyzed on a preliminary basis, then the Engineer may at its discretion instruct Contractor to resume such Work. F. Possible Price and Times Adjustments 1. Contractor shall be entitled to an equitable adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times, to the extent that any existing Underground Facility at the Site that was not shown Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 19 of 70 or indicated on the Drawings, or was not shown or indicated with reasonable accuracy, or any related delay, disruption, or interference, causes an increase or decrease in Contractor’s cost of, or time required for, performance of the Work; subject, however, to the following: a. With respect to Work that is paid for on a unit price basis, any adjustment in Contract Price will be subject to the provisions of Paragraph 13.03; b. Contractor’s entitlement to an adjustment of the Contract Times is subject to the provisions of Paragraphs 4.05.D and 4.05.E; and c. Contractor gave the notice required in Paragraph 5.05.B. 2. If Owner and Contractor agree regarding Contractor’s entitlement to and the amount or extent of any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times, then any such adjustment will be set forth in a Change Order. 3. Contractor may submit a Change Proposal regarding its entitlement to or the amount or extent of any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times, no later than 30 days after Owner’s issuance of the Owner’s written statement to Contractor regarding the Underground Facility in question. 4. The information and data shown or indicated on the Drawings with respect to existing Underground Facilities at the Site is based on information and data (a) furnished by the owners of such Underground Facilities, or by others, (b) obtained from available records, or (c) gathered in an investigation conducted in accordance with the current edition of ASCE 38, Standard Guideline for the Collection and Depiction of Existing Subsurface Utility Data, by the American Society of Civil Engineers. If such information or data is incorrect or incomplete, Contractor’s remedies are limited to those set forth in this Paragraph 5.05.F. 5.06 Hazardous Environmental Conditions at Site A. Reports and Drawings: The Supplementary Conditions identify: 1. those reports known to Owner relating to Hazardous Environmental Conditions that have been identified at or adjacent to the Site; 2. drawings known to Owner relating to Hazardous Environmental Conditions that have been identified at or adjacent to the Site; and 3. Technical Data contained in such reports and drawings. B. Reliance by Contractor on Technical Data Authorized: Contractor may rely upon the accuracy of the Technical Data expressly identified in the Supplementary Conditions with respect to such reports and drawings, but such reports and drawings are not Contract Documents. If no such express identification has been made, then Contractor may rely on the accuracy of the Technical Data as defined in Paragraph 1.01.A.46.b. Except for such reliance on Technical Data, Contractor may not rely upon or make any claim against Owner or Engineer, or any of their officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, or subcontractors, with respect to: 1. the completeness of such reports and drawings for Contractor’s purposes, including, but not limited to, any aspects of the means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 20 of 70 of construction to be employed by Contractor, and safety precautions and programs incident thereto; 2. other data, interpretations, opinions, and information contained in such reports or shown or indicated in such drawings; or 3. any Contractor interpretation of or conclusion drawn from any Technical Data or any such other data, interpretations, opinions or information. C. Contractor shall not be responsible for removing or remediating any Hazardous Environmental Condition encountered, uncovered, or revealed at the Site unless such removal or remediation is expressly identified in the Contract Documents to be within the scope of the Work. D. Contractor shall be responsible for controlling, containing, and duly removing all Constituents of Concern brought to the Site by Contractor, Subcontractors, Suppliers, or anyone else for whom Contractor is responsible, and for any associated costs; and for the costs of removing and remediating any Hazardous Environmental Condition created by the presence of any such Constituents of Concern. E. If Contractor encounters, uncovers, or reveals a Hazardous Environmental Condition whose removal or remediation is not expressly identified in the Contract Documents as being within the scope of the Work, or if Contractor or anyone for whom Contractor is responsible creates a Hazardous Environmental Condition, then Contractor shall immediately: (1) secure or otherwise isolate such condition; (2) stop all Work in connection with such condition and in any area affected thereby (except in an emergency as required by Paragraph 7.15); and (3) notify Owner and Engineer (and promptly thereafter confirm such notice in writing). Owner shall promptly consult with Engineer concerning the necessity for Owner to retain a qualified expert to evaluate such condition or take corrective action, if any. Promptly after consulting with Engineer, Owner shall take such actions as are necessary to permit Owner to timely obtain required permits and provide Contractor the written notice required by Paragraph 5.06.F. If Contractor or anyone for whom Contractor is responsible created the Hazardous Environmental Condition in question, then Owner may remove and remediate the Hazardous Environmental Condition, and impose a set-off against payments to account for the associated costs. F. Contractor shall not resume Work in connection with such Hazardous Environmental Condition or in any affected area until after Owner has obtained any required permits related thereto, and delivered written notice to Contractor either (1) specifying that such condition and any affected area is or has been rendered safe for the resumption of Work, or (2) specifying any special conditions under which such Work may be resumed safely. G. If Owner and Contractor cannot agree as to entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any, of any adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times, as a result of such Work stoppage, such special conditions under which Work is agreed to be resumed by Contractor, or any costs or expenses incurred in response to the Hazardous Environmental Condition, then within 30 days of Owner’s written notice regarding the resumption of Work, Contractor may submit a Change Proposal, or Owner may impose a set-off. Entitlement to any such adjustment is subject to the provisions of Paragraphs 4.05.D, 4.05.E, 11.07, and 11.08. H. If, after receipt of such written notice, Contractor does not agree to resume such Work based on a reasonable belief it is unsafe, or does not agree to resume such Work under such special Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 21 of 70 conditions, then Owner may order the portion of the Work that is in the area affected by such condition to be deleted from the Work, following the contractual change procedures in Article 11. Owner may have such deleted portion of the Work performed by Owner’s own forces or others in accordance with Article 8. I. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Owner shall indemnify and hold harmless Contractor, Subcontractors, and Engineer, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of them, from and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals, and all court, arbitration, or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to a Hazardous Environmental Condition, provided that such Hazardous Environmental Condition (1) was not shown or indicated in the Drawings, Specifications, or other Contract Documents, identified as Technical Data entitled to limited reliance pursuant to Paragraph 5.06.B, or identified in the Contract Documents to be included within the scope of the Work, and (2) was not created by Contractor or by anyone for whom Contractor is responsible. Nothing in this Paragraph 5.06.I obligates Owner to indemnify any individual or entity from and against the consequences of that individual’s or entity’s own negligence. J. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless Owner and Engineer, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of them, from and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to the failure to control, contain, or remove a Constituent of Concern brought to the Site by Contractor or by anyone for whom Contractor is responsible, or to a Hazardous Environmental Condition created by Contractor or by anyone for whom Contractor is responsible. Nothing in this Paragraph 5.06.J obligates Contractor to indemnify any individual or entity from and against the consequences of that individual’s or entity’s own negligence. K. The provisions of Paragraphs 5.03, 5.04, and 5.05 do not apply to the presence of Constituents of Concern or to a Hazardous Environmental Condition uncovered or revealed at the Site. ARTICLE 6—BONDS AND INSURANCE 6.01 Performance, Payment, and Other Bonds A. Contractor shall furnish a performance bond and a payment bond, each in an amount at least equal to the Contract Price, as security for the faithful performance and payment of Contractor’s obligations under the Contract. These bonds must remain in effect until one year after the date when final payment becomes due or until completion of the correction period specified in Paragraph 15.08, whichever is later, except as provided otherwise by Laws or Regulations, the terms of a prescribed bond form, the Supplementary Conditions, or other provisions of the Contract. B. Contractor shall also furnish such other bonds (if any) as are required by the Supplementary Conditions or other provisions of the Contract. C. All bonds must be in the form included in the Bidding Documents or otherwise specified by Owner prior to execution of the Contract, except as provided otherwise by Laws or Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 22 of 70 Regulations, and must be issued and signed by a surety named in “Companies Holding Certificates of Authority as Acceptable Sureties on Federal Bonds and as Acceptable Reinsuring Companies” as published in Department Circular 570 (as amended and supplemented) by the Bureau of the Fiscal Service, U.S. Department of the Treasury. A bond signed by an agent or attorney-in-fact must be accompanied by a certified copy of that individual’s authority to bind the surety. The evidence of authority must show that it is effective on the date the agent or attorney-in-fact signed the accompanying bond. D. Contractor shall obtain the required bonds from surety companies that are duly licensed or authorized, in the state or jurisdiction in which the Project is located, to issue bonds in the required amounts. E. If the surety on a bond furnished by Contractor is declared bankrupt or becomes insolvent, or the surety ceases to meet the requirements above, then Contractor shall promptly notify Owner and Engineer in writing and shall, within 20 days after the event giving rise to such notification, provide another bond and surety, both of which must comply with the bond and surety requirements above. F. If Contractor has failed to obtain a required bond, Owner may exclude the Contractor from the Site and exercise Owner’s termination rights under Article 16. G. Upon request to Owner from any Subcontractor, Supplier, or other person or entity claiming to have furnished labor, services, materials, or equipment used in the performance of the Work, Owner shall provide a copy of the payment bond to such person or entity. H. Upon request to Contractor from any Subcontractor, Supplier, or other person or entity claiming to have furnished labor, services, materials, or equipment used in the performance of the Work, Contractor shall provide a copy of the payment bond to such person or entity. 6.02 Insurance—General Provisions A. Owner and Contractor shall obtain and maintain insurance as required in this article and in the Supplementary Conditions. B. All insurance required by the Contract to be purchased and maintained by Owner or Contractor shall be obtained from insurance companies that are duly licensed or authorized in the state or jurisdiction in which the Project is located to issue insurance policies for the required limits and coverages. Unless a different standard is indicated in the Supplementary Conditions, all companies that provide insurance policies required under this Contract shall have an A.M. Best rating of A-VII or better. C. Alternative forms of insurance coverage, including but not limited to self-insurance and “Occupational Accident and Excess Employer’s Indemnity Policies,” are not sufficient to meet the insurance requirements of this Contract, unless expressly allowed in the Supplementary Conditions. D. Contractor shall deliver to Owner, with copies to each additional insured identified in the Contract, certificates of insurance and endorsements establishing that Contractor has obtained and is maintaining the policies and coverages required by the Contract. Upon request by Owner or any other insured, Contractor shall also furnish other evidence of such required insurance, including but not limited to copies of policies, documentation of applicable self-insured retentions (if allowed) and deductibles, full disclosure of all relevant exclusions, and evidence of insurance required to be purchased and maintained by Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 23 of 70 Subcontractors or Suppliers. In any documentation furnished under this provision, Contractor, Subcontractors, and Suppliers may block out (redact) (1) any confidential premium or pricing information and (2) any wording specific to a project or jurisdiction other than those applicable to this Contract. E. Owner shall deliver to Contractor, with copies to each additional insured identified in the Contract, certificates of insurance and endorsements establishing that Owner has obtained and is maintaining the policies and coverages required of Owner by the Contract (if any). Upon request by Contractor or any other insured, Owner shall also provide other evidence of such required insurance (if any), including but not limited to copies of policies, documentation of applicable self-insured retentions (if allowed) and deductibles, and full disclosure of all relevant exclusions. In any documentation furnished under this provision, Owner may block out (redact) (1) any confidential premium or pricing information and (2) any wording specific to a project or jurisdiction other than those relevant to this Contract. F. Failure of Owner or Contractor to demand such certificates or other evidence of the other party’s full compliance with these insurance requirements, or failure of Owner or Contractor to identify a deficiency in compliance from the evidence provided, will not be construed as a waiver of the other party’s obligation to obtain and maintain such insurance. G. In addition to the liability insurance required to be provided by Contractor, the Owner, at Owner’s option, may purchase and maintain Owner’s own liability insurance. Owner’s liability policies, if any, operate separately and independently from policies required to be provided by Contractor, and Contractor cannot rely upon Owner’s liability policies for any of Contractor’s obligations to the Owner, Engineer, or third parties. H. Contractor shall require: 1. Subcontractors to purchase and maintain worker’s compensation, commercial general liability, and other insurance that is appropriate for their participation in the Project, and to name as additional insureds Owner and Engineer (and any other individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions as additional insureds on Contractor’s liability policies) on each Subcontractor’s commercial general liability insurance policy; and 2. Suppliers to purchase and maintain insurance that is appropriate for their participation in the Project. I. If either party does not purchase or maintain the insurance required of such party by the Contract, such party shall notify the other party in writing of such failure to purchase prior to the start of the Work, or of such failure to maintain prior to any change in the required coverage. J. If Contractor has failed to obtain and maintain required insurance, Contractor’s entitlement to enter or remain at the Site will end immediately, and Owner may impose an appropriate set-off against payment for any associated costs (including but not limited to the cost of purchasing necessary insurance coverage), and exercise Owner’s termination rights under Article 16. K. Without prejudice to any other right or remedy, if a party has failed to obtain required insurance, the other party may elect (but is in no way obligated) to obtain equivalent insurance to protect such other party’s interests at the expense of the party who was required to provide such coverage, and the Contract Price will be adjusted accordingly. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 24 of 70 L. Owner does not represent that insurance coverage and limits established in this Contract necessarily will be adequate to protect Contractor or Contractor’s interests. Contractor is responsible for determining whether such coverage and limits are adequate to protect its interests, and for obtaining and maintaining any additional insurance that Contractor deems necessary. M. The insurance and insurance limits required herein will not be deemed as a limitation on Contractor’s liability, or that of its Subcontractors or Suppliers, under the indemnities granted to Owner and other individuals and entities in the Contract or otherwise. N. All the policies of insurance required to be purchased and maintained under this Contract will contain a provision or endorsement that the coverage afforded will not be canceled, or renewal refused, until at least 10 days prior written notice has been given to the purchasing policyholder. Within three days of receipt of any such written notice, the purchasing policyholder shall provide a copy of the notice to each other insured and Engineer. 6.03 Contractor’s Insurance A. Required Insurance: Contractor shall purchase and maintain Worker’s Compensation, Commercial General Liability, and other insurance pursuant to the specific requirements of the Supplementary Conditions. B. General Provisions: The policies of insurance required by this Paragraph 6.03 as supplemented must: 1. include at least the specific coverages required; 2. be written for not less than the limits provided, or those required by Laws or Regulations, whichever is greater; 3. remain in effect at least until the Work is complete (as set forth in Paragraph 15.06.D), and longer if expressly required elsewhere in this Contract, and at all times thereafter when Contractor may be correcting, removing, or replacing defective Work as a warranty or correction obligation, or otherwise, or returning to the Site to conduct other tasks arising from the Contract; 4. apply with respect to the performance of the Work, whether such performance is by Contractor, any Subcontractor or Supplier, or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform any of the Work, or by anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable; and 5. include all necessary endorsements to support the stated requirements. C. Additional Insureds: The Contractor’s commercial general liability, automobile liability, employer’s liability, umbrella or excess, pollution liability, and unmanned aerial vehicle liability policies, if required by this Contract, must: 1. include and list as additional insureds Owner and Engineer, and any individuals or entities identified as additional insureds in the Supplementary Conditions; 2. include coverage for the respective officers, directors, members, partners, employees, and consultants of all such additional insureds; 3. afford primary coverage to these additional insureds for all claims covered thereby (including as applicable those arising from both ongoing and completed operations); Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 25 of 70 4. not seek contribution from insurance maintained by the additional insured; and 5. as to commercial general liability insurance, apply to additional insureds with respect to liability caused in whole or in part by Contractor’s acts or omissions, or the acts and omissions of those working on Contractor’s behalf, in the performance of Contractor’s operations. 6.04 Builder’s Risk and Other Property Insurance A. Builder’s Risk: Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, Contractor shall purchase and maintain builder’s risk insurance upon the Work on a completed value basis, in the amount of the Work’s full insurable replacement cost (subject to such deductible amounts as may be provided in the Supplementary Conditions or required by Laws and Regulations). The specific requirements applicable to the builder’s risk insurance are set forth in the Supplementary Conditions. B. Property Insurance for Facilities of Owner Where Work Will Occur: Owner is responsible for obtaining and maintaining property insurance covering each existing structure, building, or facility in which any part of the Work will occur, or to which any part of the Work will attach or be adjoined. Such property insurance will be written on a special perils (all-risk) form, on a replacement cost basis, providing coverage consistent with that required for the builder’s risk insurance, and will be maintained until the Work is complete, as set forth in Paragraph 15.06.D. C. Property Insurance for Substantially Complete Facilities: Promptly after Substantial Completion, and before actual occupancy or use of the substantially completed Work, Owner will obtain property insurance for such substantially completed Work, and maintain such property insurance at least until the Work is complete, as set forth in Paragraph 15.06.D. Such property insurance will be written on a special perils (all-risk) form, on a replacement cost basis, and provide coverage consistent with that required for the builder’s risk insurance. The builder’s risk insurance may terminate upon written confirmation of Owner’s procurement of such property insurance. D. Partial Occupancy or Use by Owner: If Owner will occupy or use a portion or portions of the Work prior to Substantial Completion of all the Work, as provided in Paragraph 15.04, then Owner (directly, if it is the purchaser of the builder’s risk policy, or through Contractor) will provide advance notice of such occupancy or use to the builder’s risk insurer, and obtain an endorsement consenting to the continuation of coverage prior to commencing such partial occupancy or use. E. Insurance of Other Property; Additional Insurance: If the express insurance provisions of the Contract do not require or address the insurance of a property item or interest, then the entity or individual owning such property item will be responsible for insuring it. If Contractor elects to obtain other special insurance to be included in or supplement the builder’s risk or property insurance policies provided under this Paragraph 6.04, it may do so at Contractor’s expense. 6.05 Property Losses; Subrogation A. The builder’s risk insurance policy purchased and maintained in accordance with Paragraph 6.04 (or an installation floater policy if authorized by the Supplementary Conditions), will contain provisions to the effect that in the event of payment of any loss or damage the insurer will have no rights of recovery against any insureds thereunder, or against Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 26 of 70 Engineer or its consultants, or their officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, or subcontractors. 1. Owner and Contractor waive all rights against each other and the respective officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of them, for all losses and damages caused by, arising out of, or resulting from any of the perils, risks, or causes of loss covered by such policies and any other property insurance applicable to the Work; and, in addition, waive all such rights against Engineer, its consultants, all individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions as builder’s risk or installation floater insureds, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of them, under such policies for losses and damages so caused. 2. None of the above waivers extends to the rights that any party making such waiver may have to the proceeds of insurance held by Owner or Contractor as trustee or fiduciary, or otherwise payable under any policy so issued. B. Any property insurance policy maintained by Owner covering any loss, damage, or consequential loss to Owner’s existing structures, buildings, or facilities in which any part of the Work will occur, or to which any part of the Work will attach or adjoin; to adjacent structures, buildings, or facilities of Owner; or to part or all of the completed or substantially completed Work, during partial occupancy or use pursuant to Paragraph 15.04, after Substantial Completion pursuant to Paragraph 15.03, or after final payment pursuant to Paragraph 15.06, will contain provisions to the effect that in the event of payment of any loss or damage the insurer will have no rights of recovery against any insureds thereunder, or against Contractor, Subcontractors, or Engineer, or the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, or subcontractors of each and any of them, and that the insured is allowed to waive the insurer’s rights of subrogation in a written contract executed prior to the loss, damage, or consequential loss. 1. Owner waives all rights against Contractor, Subcontractors, and Engineer, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them, for all losses and damages caused by, arising out of, or resulting from fire or any of the perils, risks, or causes of loss covered by such policies. C. The waivers in this Paragraph 6.05 include the waiver of rights due to business interruption, loss of use, or other consequential loss extending beyond direct physical loss or damage to Owner’s property or the Work caused by, arising out of, or resulting from fire or other insured peril, risk, or cause of loss. D. Contractor shall be responsible for assuring that each Subcontract contains provisions whereby the Subcontractor waives all rights against Owner, Contractor, all individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions as insureds, the Engineer and its consultants, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of them, for all losses and damages caused by, arising out of, relating to, or resulting from fire or other peril, risk, or cause of loss covered by builder’s risk insurance, installation floater, and any other property insurance applicable to the Work. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 27 of 70 6.06 Receipt and Application of Property Insurance Proceeds A. Any insured loss under the builder’s risk and other policies of property insurance required by Paragraph 6.04 will be adjusted and settled with the named insured that purchased the policy. Such named insured shall act as fiduciary for the other insureds, and give notice to such other insureds that adjustment and settlement of a claim is in progress. Any other insured may state its position regarding a claim for insured loss in writing within 15 days after notice of such claim. B. Proceeds for such insured losses may be made payable by the insurer either jointly to multiple insureds, or to the named insured that purchased the policy in its own right and as fiduciary for other insureds, subject to the requirements of any applicable mortgage clause. A named insured receiving insurance proceeds under the builder’s risk and other policies of insurance required by Paragraph 6.04 shall maintain such proceeds in a segregated account, and distribute such proceeds in accordance with such agreement as the parties in interest may reach, or as otherwise required under the dispute resolution provisions of this Contract or applicable Laws and Regulations. C. If no other special agreement is reached, Contractor shall repair or replace the damaged Work, using allocated insurance proceeds. ARTICLE 7—CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILITIES 7.01 Contractor’s Means and Methods of Construction A. Contractor shall be solely responsible for the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction. B. If the Contract Documents note, or Contractor determines, that professional engineering or other design services are needed to carry out Contractor’s responsibilities for construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures, or for Site safety, then Contractor shall cause such services to be provided by a properly licensed design professional, at Contractor’s expense. Such services are not Owner-delegated professional design services under this Contract, and neither Owner nor Engineer has any responsibility with respect to (1) Contractor’s determination of the need for such services, (2) the qualifications or licensing of the design professionals retained or employed by Contractor, (3) the performance of such services, or (4) any errors, omissions, or defects in such services. 7.02 Supervision and Superintendence A. Contractor shall supervise, inspect, and direct the Work competently and efficiently, devoting such attention thereto and applying such skills and expertise as may be necessary to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. At all times during the progress of the Work, Contractor shall assign a competent resident superintendent who will not be replaced without written notice to Owner and Engineer except under extraordinary circumstances. 7.03 Labor; Working Hours A. Contractor shall provide competent, suitably qualified personnel to survey and lay out the Work and perform construction as required by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall maintain good discipline and order at the Site. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 28 of 70 B. Contractor shall be fully responsible to Owner and Engineer for all acts and omissions of Contractor’s employees; of Suppliers and Subcontractors, and their employees; and of any other individuals or entities performing or furnishing any of the Work, just as Contractor is responsible for Contractor’s own acts and omissions. C. Except as otherwise required for the safety or protection of persons or the Work or property at the Site or adjacent thereto, and except as otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, all Work at the Site will be performed during regular working hours, Monday through Friday. Contractor will not perform Work on a Saturday, Sunday, or any legal holiday. Contractor may perform Work outside regular working hours or on Saturdays, Sundays, or legal holidays only with Owner’s written consent, which will not be unreasonably withheld. 7.04 Services, Materials, and Equipment A. Unless otherwise specified in the Contract Documents, Contractor shall provide and assume full responsibility for all services, materials, equipment, labor, transportation, construction equipment and machinery, tools, appliances, fuel, power, light, heat, telephone, water, sanitary facilities, temporary facilities, and all other facilities and incidentals necessary for the performance, testing, start up, and completion of the Work, whether or not such items are specifically called for in the Contract Documents. B. All materials and equipment incorporated into the Work must be new and of good quality, except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. All special warranties and guarantees required by the Specifications will expressly run to the benefit of Owner. If required by Engineer, Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence (including reports of required tests) as to the source, kind, and quality of materials and equipment. C. All materials and equipment must be stored, applied, installed, connected, erected, protected, used, cleaned, and conditioned in accordance with instructions of the applicable Supplier, except as otherwise may be provided in the Contract Documents. 7.05 “Or Equals” A. Contractor’s Request; Governing Criteria: Whenever an item of equipment or material is specified or described in the Contract Documents by using the names of one or more proprietary items or specific Suppliers, the Contract Price has been based upon Contractor furnishing such item as specified. The specification or description of such an item is intended to establish the type, function, appearance, and quality required. Unless the specification or description contains or is followed by words reading that no like, equivalent, or “or equal” item is permitted, Contractor may request that Engineer authorize the use of other items of equipment or material, or items from other proposed Suppliers, under the circumstances described below. 1. If Engineer in its sole discretion determines that an item of equipment or material proposed by Contractor is functionally equal to that named and sufficiently similar so that no change in related Work will be required, Engineer will deem it an “or equal” item. For the purposes of this paragraph, a proposed item of equipment or material will be considered functionally equal to an item so named if: a. in the exercise of reasonable judgment Engineer determines that the proposed item: 1) is at least equal in materials of construction, quality, durability, appearance, strength, and design characteristics; Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 29 of 70 2) will reliably perform at least equally well the function and achieve the results imposed by the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole; 3) has a proven record of performance and availability of responsive service; and 4) is not objectionable to Owner. b. Contractor certifies that, if the proposed item is approved and incorporated into the Work: 1) there will be no increase in cost to the Owner or increase in Contract Times; and 2) the item will conform substantially to the detailed requirements of the item named in the Contract Documents. B. Contractor’s Expense: Contractor shall provide all data in support of any proposed “or equal” item at Contractor’s expense. C. Engineer’s Evaluation and Determination: Engineer will be allowed a reasonable time to evaluate each “or-equal” request. Engineer may require Contractor to furnish additional data about the proposed “or-equal” item. Engineer will be the sole judge of acceptability. No “or- equal” item will be ordered, furnished, installed, or utilized until Engineer’s review is complete and Engineer determines that the proposed item is an “or-equal,” which will be evidenced by an approved Shop Drawing or other written communication. Engineer will advise Contractor in writing of any negative determination. D. Effect of Engineer’s Determination: Neither approval nor denial of an “or-equal” request will result in any change in Contract Price. The Engineer’s denial of an “or-equal” request will be final and binding, and may not be reversed through an appeal under any provision of the Contract. E. Treatment as a Substitution Request: If Engineer determines that an item of equipment or material proposed by Contractor does not qualify as an “or-equal” item, Contractor may request that Engineer consider the item a proposed substitute pursuant to Paragraph 7.06. 7.06 Substitutes A. Contractor’s Request; Governing Criteria: Unless the specification or description of an item of equipment or material required to be furnished under the Contract Documents contains or is followed by words reading that no substitution is permitted, Contractor may request that Engineer authorize the use of other items of equipment or material under the circumstances described below. To the extent possible such requests must be made before commencement of related construction at the Site. 1. Contractor shall submit sufficient information as provided below to allow Engineer to determine if the item of material or equipment proposed is functionally equivalent to that named and an acceptable substitute therefor. Engineer will not accept requests for review of proposed substitute items of equipment or material from anyone other than Contractor. 2. The requirements for review by Engineer will be as set forth in Paragraph 7.06.B, as supplemented by the Specifications, and as Engineer may decide is appropriate under the circumstances. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 30 of 70 3. Contractor shall make written application to Engineer for review of a proposed substitute item of equipment or material that Contractor seeks to furnish or use. The application: a. will certify that the proposed substitute item will: 1) perform adequately the functions and achieve the results called for by the general design; 2) be similar in substance to the item specified; and 3) be suited to the same use as the item specified. b. will state: 1) the extent, if any, to which the use of the proposed substitute item will necessitate a change in Contract Times; 2) whether use of the proposed substitute item in the Work will require a change in any of the Contract Documents (or in the provisions of any other direct contract with Owner for other work on the Project) to adapt the design to the proposed substitute item; and 3) whether incorporation or use of the proposed substitute item in connection with the Work is subject to payment of any license fee or royalty. c. will identify: 1) all variations of the proposed substitute item from the item specified; and 2) available engineering, sales, maintenance, repair, and replacement services. d. will contain an itemized estimate of all costs or credits that will result directly or indirectly from use of such substitute item, including but not limited to changes in Contract Price, shared savings, costs of redesign, and claims of other contractors affected by any resulting change. B. Engineer’s Evaluation and Determination: Engineer will be allowed a reasonable time to evaluate each substitute request, and to obtain comments and direction from Owner. Engineer may require Contractor to furnish additional data about the proposed substitute item. Engineer will be the sole judge of acceptability. No substitute will be ordered, furnished, installed, or utilized until Engineer’s review is complete and Engineer determines that the proposed item is an acceptable substitute. Engineer’s determination will be evidenced by a Field Order or a proposed Change Order accounting for the substitution itself and all related impacts, including changes in Contract Price or Contract Times. Engineer will advise Contractor in writing of any negative determination. C. Special Guarantee: Owner may require Contractor to furnish at Contractor’s expense a special performance guarantee or other surety with respect to any substitute. D. Reimbursement of Engineer’s Cost: Engineer will record Engineer’s costs in evaluating a substitute proposed or submitted by Contractor. Whether or not Engineer approves a substitute so proposed or submitted by Contractor, Contractor shall reimburse Owner for the reasonable charges of Engineer for evaluating each such proposed substitute. Contractor shall also reimburse Owner for the reasonable charges of Engineer for making changes in the Contract Documents (or in the provisions of any other direct contract with Owner) resulting from the acceptance of each proposed substitute. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 31 of 70 E. Contractor’s Expense: Contractor shall provide all data in support of any proposed substitute at Contractor’s expense. F. Effect of Engineer’s Determination: If Engineer approves the substitution request, Contractor shall execute the proposed Change Order and proceed with the substitution. The Engineer’s denial of a substitution request will be final and binding, and may not be reversed through an appeal under any provision of the Contract. Contractor may challenge the scope of reimbursement costs imposed under Paragraph 7.06.D, by timely submittal of a Change Proposal. 7.07 Concerning Subcontractors and Suppliers A. Contractor may retain Subcontractors and Suppliers for the performance of parts of the Work. Such Subcontractors and Suppliers must be acceptable to Owner. The Contractor’s retention of a Subcontractor or Supplier for the performance of parts of the Work will not relieve Contractor’s obligation to Owner to perform and complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. Contractor shall retain specific Subcontractors and Suppliers for the performance of designated parts of the Work if required by the Contract to do so. C. Subsequent to the submittal of Contractor’s Bid or final negotiation of the terms of the Contract, Owner may not require Contractor to retain any Subcontractor or Supplier to furnish or perform any of the Work against which Contractor has reasonable objection. D. Prior to entry into any binding subcontract or purchase order, Contractor shall submit to Owner the identity of the proposed Subcontractor or Supplier (unless Owner has already deemed such proposed Subcontractor or Supplier acceptable during the bidding process or otherwise). Such proposed Subcontractor or Supplier shall be deemed acceptable to Owner unless Owner raises a substantive, reasonable objection within 5 days. E. Owner may require the replacement of any Subcontractor or Supplier. Owner also may require Contractor to retain specific replacements; provided, however, that Owner may not require a replacement to which Contractor has a reasonable objection. If Contractor has submitted the identity of certain Subcontractors or Suppliers for acceptance by Owner, and Owner has accepted it (either in writing or by failing to make written objection thereto), then Owner may subsequently revoke the acceptance of any such Subcontractor or Supplier so identified solely on the basis of substantive, reasonable objection after due investigation. Contractor shall submit an acceptable replacement for the rejected Subcontractor or Supplier. F. If Owner requires the replacement of any Subcontractor or Supplier retained by Contractor to perform any part of the Work, then Contractor shall be entitled to an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times, with respect to the replacement; and Contractor shall initiate a Change Proposal for such adjustment within 30 days of Owner’s requirement of replacement. G. No acceptance by Owner of any such Subcontractor or Supplier, whether initially or as a replacement, will constitute a waiver of the right of Owner to the completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 32 of 70 H. On a monthly basis, Contractor shall submit to Engineer a complete list of all Subcontractors and Suppliers having a direct contract with Contractor, and of all other Subcontractors and Suppliers known to Contractor at the time of submittal. I. Contractor shall be solely responsible for scheduling and coordinating the work of Subcontractors and Suppliers. J. The divisions and sections of the Specifications and the identifications of any Drawings do not control Contractor in dividing the Work among Subcontractors or Suppliers, or in delineating the Work to be performed by any specific trade. K. All Work performed for Contractor by a Subcontractor or Supplier must be pursuant to an appropriate contractual agreement that specifically binds the Subcontractor or Supplier to the applicable terms and conditions of the Contract for the benefit of Owner and Engineer. L. Owner may furnish to any Subcontractor or Supplier, to the extent practicable, information about amounts paid to Contractor for Work performed for Contractor by the Subcontractor or Supplier. M. Contractor shall restrict all Subcontractors and Suppliers from communicating with Engineer or Owner, except through Contractor or in case of an emergency, or as otherwise expressly allowed in this Contract. 7.08 Patent Fees and Royalties A. Contractor shall pay all license fees and royalties and assume all costs incident to the use in the performance of the Work or the incorporation in the Work of any invention, design, process, product, or device which is the subject of patent rights or copyrights held by others. If an invention, design, process, product, or device is specified in the Contract Documents for use in the performance of the Work and if, to the actual knowledge of Owner or Engineer, its use is subject to patent rights or copyrights calling for the payment of any license fee or royalty to others, the existence of such rights will be disclosed in the Contract Documents. B. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Owner shall indemnify and hold harmless Contractor, and its officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors, from and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals, and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to any infringement of patent rights or copyrights incident to the use in the performance of the Work or resulting from the incorporation in the Work of any invention, design, process, product, or device specified in the Contract Documents, but not identified as being subject to payment of any license fee or royalty to others required by patent rights or copyrights. C. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless Owner and Engineer, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them, from and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to any infringement of patent rights or copyrights incident to the use in the performance of the Work or resulting from the incorporation in the Work of any invention, design, process, product, or device not specified in the Contract Documents. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 33 of 70 7.09 Permits A. Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, Contractor shall obtain and pay for all construction permits, licenses, and certificates of occupancy. Owner shall assist Contractor, when necessary, in obtaining such permits and licenses. Contractor shall pay all governmental charges and inspection fees necessary for the prosecution of the Work which are applicable at the time of the submission of Contractor’s Bid (or when Contractor became bound under a negotiated contract). Owner shall pay all charges of utility owners for connections for providing permanent service to the Work. 7.10 Taxes A. Contractor shall pay all sales, consumer, use, and other similar taxes required to be paid by Contractor in accordance with the Laws and Regulations of the place of the Project which are applicable during the performance of the Work. 7.11 Laws and Regulations A. Contractor shall give all notices required by and shall comply with all Laws and Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work. Neither Owner nor Engineer shall be responsible for monitoring Contractor’s compliance with any Laws or Regulations. B. If Contractor performs any Work or takes any other action knowing or having reason to know that it is contrary to Laws or Regulations, Contractor shall bear all resulting costs and losses, and shall indemnify and hold harmless Owner and Engineer, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of them, from and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to such Work or other action. It is not Contractor’s responsibility to make certain that the Work described in the Contract Documents is in accordance with Laws and Regulations, but this does not relieve Contractor of its obligations under Paragraph 3.03. C. Owner or Contractor may give written notice to the other party of any changes after the submission of Contractor’s Bid (or after the date when Contractor became bound under a negotiated contract) in Laws or Regulations having an effect on the cost or time of performance of the Work, including but not limited to changes in Laws or Regulations having an effect on procuring permits and on sales, use, value-added, consumption, and other similar taxes. If Owner and Contractor are unable to agree on entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any, of any adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times resulting from such changes, then within 30 days of such written notice Contractor may submit a Change Proposal, or Owner may initiate a Claim. 7.12 Record Documents A. Contractor shall maintain in a safe place at the Site one printed record copy of all Drawings, Specifications, Addenda, Change Orders, Work Change Directives, Field Orders, written interpretations and clarifications, and approved Shop Drawings. Contractor shall keep such record documents in good order and annotate them to show changes made during construction. These record documents, together with all approved Samples, will be available to Engineer for reference. Upon completion of the Work, Contractor shall deliver these record documents to Engineer. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 34 of 70 7.13 Safety and Protection A. Contractor shall be solely responsible for initiating, maintaining, and supervising all safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work. Such responsibility does not relieve Subcontractors of their responsibility for the safety of persons or property in the performance of their work, nor for compliance with applicable safety Laws and Regulations. B. Contractor shall designate a qualified and experienced safety representative whose duties and responsibilities are the prevention of Work-related accidents and the maintenance and supervision of safety precautions and programs. C. Contractor shall take all necessary precautions for the safety of, and shall provide the necessary protection to prevent damage, injury, or loss to: 1. all persons on the Site or who may be affected by the Work; 2. all the Work and materials and equipment to be incorporated therein, whether in storage on or off the Site; and 3. other property at the Site or adjacent thereto, including trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements, roadways, structures, other work in progress, utilities, and Underground Facilities not designated for removal, relocation, or replacement in the course of construction. D. All damage, injury, or loss to any property referred to in Paragraph 7.13.C.2 or 7.13.C.3 caused, directly or indirectly, in whole or in part, by Contractor, any Subcontractor, Supplier, or any other individual or entity directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform any of the Work, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, shall be remedied by Contractor at its expense (except damage or loss attributable to the fault of Drawings or Specifications or to the acts or omissions of Owner or Engineer or anyone employed by any of them, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, and not attributable, directly or indirectly, in whole or in part, to the fault or negligence of Contractor or any Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity directly or indirectly employed by any of them). E. Contractor shall comply with all applicable Laws and Regulations relating to the safety of persons or property, or to the protection of persons or property from damage, injury, or loss; and shall erect and maintain all necessary safeguards for such safety and protection. F. Contractor shall notify Owner; the owners of adjacent property; the owners of Underground Facilities and other utilities (if the identity of such owners is known to Contractor); and other contractors and utility owners performing work at or adjacent to the Site, in writing, when Contractor knows that prosecution of the Work may affect them, and shall cooperate with them in the protection, removal, relocation, and replacement of their property or work in progress. G. Contractor shall comply with the applicable requirements of Owner’s safety programs, if any. Any Owner’s safety programs that are applicable to the Work are identified or included in the Supplementary Conditions or Specifications. H. Contractor shall inform Owner and Engineer of the specific requirements of Contractor’s safety program with which Owner’s and Engineer’s employees and representatives must comply while at the Site. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 35 of 70 I. Contractor’s duties and responsibilities for safety and protection will continue until all the Work is completed, Engineer has issued a written notice to Owner and Contractor in accordance with Paragraph 15.06.C that the Work is acceptable, and Contractor has left the Site (except as otherwise expressly provided in connection with Substantial Completion). J. Contractor’s duties and responsibilities for safety and protection will resume whenever Contractor or any Subcontractor or Supplier returns to the Site to fulfill warranty or correction obligations, or to conduct other tasks arising from the Contract Documents. 7.14 Hazard Communication Programs A. Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating any exchange of safety data sheets (formerly known as material safety data sheets) or other hazard communication information required to be made available to or exchanged between or among employers at the Site in accordance with Laws or Regulations. 7.15 Emergencies A. In emergencies affecting the safety or protection of persons or the Work or property at the Site or adjacent thereto, Contractor is obligated to act to prevent damage, injury, or loss. Contractor shall give Engineer prompt written notice if Contractor believes that any significant changes in the Work or variations from the Contract Documents have been caused by an emergency, or are required as a result of Contractor’s response to an emergency. If Engineer determines that a change in the Contract Documents is required because of an emergency or Contractor’s response, a Work Change Directive or Change Order will be issued. 7.16 Submittals A. Shop Drawing and Sample Requirements 1. Before submitting a Shop Drawing or Sample, Contractor shall: a. review and coordinate the Shop Drawing or Sample with other Shop Drawings and Samples and with the requirements of the Work and the Contract Documents; b. determine and verify: 1) all field measurements, quantities, dimensions, specified performance and design criteria, installation requirements, materials, catalog numbers, and similar information with respect to the Submittal; 2) the suitability of all materials and equipment offered with respect to the indicated application, fabrication, shipping, handling, storage, assembly, and installation pertaining to the performance of the Work; and 3) all information relative to Contractor’s responsibilities for means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction, and safety precautions and programs incident thereto; c. confirm that the Submittal is complete with respect to all related data included in the Submittal. 2. Each Shop Drawing or Sample must bear a stamp or specific written certification that Contractor has satisfied Contractor’s obligations under the Contract Documents with respect to Contractor’s review of that Submittal, and that Contractor approves the Submittal. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 36 of 70 3. With each Shop Drawing or Sample, Contractor shall give Engineer specific written notice of any variations that the Submittal may have from the requirements of the Contract Documents. This notice must be set forth in a written communication separate from the Submittal; and, in addition, in the case of a Shop Drawing by a specific notation made on the Shop Drawing itself. B. Submittal Procedures for Shop Drawings and Samples: Contractor shall label and submit Shop Drawings and Samples to Engineer for review and approval in accordance with the accepted Schedule of Submittals. 1. Shop Drawings a. Contractor shall submit the number of copies required in the Specifications. b. Data shown on the Shop Drawings must be complete with respect to quantities, dimensions, specified performance and design criteria, materials, and similar data to show Engineer the services, materials, and equipment Contractor proposes to provide, and to enable Engineer to review the information for the limited purposes required by Paragraph 7.16.C. 2. Samples a. Contractor shall submit the number of Samples required in the Specifications. b. Contractor shall clearly identify each Sample as to material, Supplier, pertinent data such as catalog numbers, the use for which intended and other data as Engineer may require to enable Engineer to review the Submittal for the limited purposes required by Paragraph 7.16.C. 3. Where a Shop Drawing or Sample is required by the Contract Documents or the Schedule of Submittals, any related Work performed prior to Engineer’s review and approval of the pertinent submittal will be at the sole expense and responsibility of Contractor. C. Engineer’s Review of Shop Drawings and Samples 1. Engineer will provide timely review of Shop Drawings and Samples in accordance with the accepted Schedule of Submittals. Engineer’s review and approval will be only to determine if the items covered by the Submittals will, after installation or incorporation in the Work, comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents, and be compatible with the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated by the Contract Documents. 2. Engineer’s review and approval will not extend to means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or to safety precautions or programs incident thereto. 3. Engineer’s review and approval of a separate item as such will not indicate approval of the assembly in which the item functions. 4. Engineer’s review and approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample will not relieve Contractor from responsibility for any variation from the requirements of the Contract Documents unless Contractor has complied with the requirements of Paragraph 7.16.A.3 and Engineer has given written approval of each such variation by specific written notation thereof incorporated in or accompanying the Shop Drawing or Sample. Engineer will Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 37 of 70 document any such approved variation from the requirements of the Contract Documents in a Field Order or other appropriate Contract modification. 5. Engineer’s review and approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample will not relieve Contractor from responsibility for complying with the requirements of Paragraphs 7.16.A and B. 6. Engineer’s review and approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample, or of a variation from the requirements of the Contract Documents, will not, under any circumstances, change the Contract Times or Contract Price, unless such changes are included in a Change Order. 7. Neither Engineer’s receipt, review, acceptance, or approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample will result in such item becoming a Contract Document. 8. Contractor shall perform the Work in compliance with the requirements and commitments set forth in approved Shop Drawings and Samples, subject to the provisions of Paragraph 7.16.C.4. D. Resubmittal Procedures for Shop Drawings and Samples 1. Contractor shall make corrections required by Engineer and shall return the required number of corrected copies of Shop Drawings and submit, as required, new Samples for review and approval. Contractor shall direct specific attention in writing to revisions other than the corrections called for by Engineer on previous Submittals. 2. Contractor shall furnish required Shop Drawing and Sample submittals with sufficient information and accuracy to obtain required approval of an item with no more than two resubmittals. Engineer will record Engineer’s time for reviewing a third or subsequent resubmittal of a Shop Drawing or Sample, and Contractor shall be responsible for Engineer’s charges to Owner for such time. Owner may impose a set-off against payments due Contractor to secure reimbursement for such charges. 3. If Contractor requests a change of a previously approved Shop Drawing or Sample, Contractor shall be responsible for Engineer’s charges to Owner for its review time, and Owner may impose a set-off against payments due Contractor to secure reimbursement for such charges, unless the need for such change is beyond the control of Contractor. E. Submittals Other than Shop Drawings, Samples, and Owner-Delegated Designs 1. The following provisions apply to all Submittals other than Shop Drawings, Samples, and Owner-delegated designs: a. Contractor shall submit all such Submittals to the Engineer in accordance with the Schedule of Submittals and pursuant to the applicable terms of the Contract Documents. b. Engineer will provide timely review of all such Submittals in accordance with the Schedule of Submittals and return such Submittals with a notation of either Accepted or Not Accepted. Any such Submittal that is not returned within the time established in the Schedule of Submittals will be deemed accepted. c. Engineer’s review will be only to determine if the Submittal is acceptable under the requirements of the Contract Documents as to general form and content of the Submittal. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 38 of 70 d. If any such Submittal is not accepted, Contractor shall confer with Engineer regarding the reason for the non-acceptance, and resubmit an acceptable document. 2. Procedures for the submittal and acceptance of the Progress Schedule, the Schedule of Submittals, and the Schedule of Values are set forth in Paragraphs 2.03. 2.04, and 2.05. F. Owner-delegated Designs: Submittals pursuant to Owner-delegated designs are governed by the provisions of Paragraph 7.19. 7.17 Contractor’s General Warranty and Guarantee A. Contractor warrants and guarantees to Owner that all Work will be in accordance with the Contract Documents and will not be defective. Engineer is entitled to rely on Contractor’s warranty and guarantee. B. Owner’s rights under this warranty and guarantee are in addition to, and are not limited by, Owner’s rights under the correction period provisions of Paragraph 15.08. The time in which Owner may enforce its warranty and guarantee rights under this Paragraph 7.17 is limited only by applicable Laws and Regulations restricting actions to enforce such rights; provided, however, that after the end of the correction period under Paragraph 15.08: 1. Owner shall give Contractor written notice of any defective Work within 60 days of the discovery that such Work is defective; and 2. Such notice will be deemed the start of an event giving rise to a Claim under Paragraph 12.01.B, such that any related Claim must be brought within 30 days of the notice. C. Contractor’s warranty and guarantee hereunder excludes defects or damage caused by: 1. abuse, or improper modification, maintenance, or operation, by persons other than Contractor, Subcontractors, Suppliers, or any other individual or entity for whom Contractor is responsible; or 2. normal wear and tear under normal usage. D. Contractor’s obligation to perform and complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents is absolute. None of the following will constitute an acceptance of Work that is not in accordance with the Contract Documents, a release of Contractor’s obligation to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, or a release of Owner’s warranty and guarantee rights under this Paragraph 7.17: 1. Observations by Engineer; 2. Recommendation by Engineer or payment by Owner of any progress or final payment; 3. The issuance of a certificate of Substantial Completion by Engineer or any payment related thereto by Owner; 4. Use or occupancy of the Work or any part thereof by Owner; 5. Any review and approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample submittal; 6. The issuance of a notice of acceptability by Engineer; 7. The end of the correction period established in Paragraph 15.08; 8. Any inspection, test, or approval by others; or Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 39 of 70 9. Any correction of defective Work by Owner. E. If the Contract requires the Contractor to accept the assignment of a contract entered into by Owner, then the specific warranties, guarantees, and correction obligations contained in the assigned contract will govern with respect to Contractor’s performance obligations to Owner for the Work described in the assigned contract. 7.18 Indemnification A. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, and in addition to any other obligations of Contractor under the Contract or otherwise, Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless Owner and Engineer, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them, from losses, damages, costs, and judgments (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals, and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising from third-party claims or actions relating to or resulting from the performance or furnishing of the Work, provided that any such claim, action, loss, cost, judgment or damage is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease, or death, or to damage to or destruction of tangible property (other than the Work itself), including the loss of use resulting therefrom, but only to the extent caused by any negligent act or omission of Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, or any individual or entity directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform any of the Work, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable. B. In any and all claims against Owner or Engineer, or any of their officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, or subcontractors, by any employee (or the survivor or personal representative of such employee) of Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, or any individual or entity directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform any of the Work, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, the indemnification obligation under Paragraph 7.18.A will not be limited in any way by any limitation on the amount or type of damages, compensation, or benefits payable by or for Contractor or any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity under workers’ compensation acts, disability benefit acts, or other employee benefit acts. 7.19 Delegation of Professional Design Services A. Owner may require Contractor to provide professional design services for a portion of the Work by express delegation in the Contract Documents. Such delegation will specify the performance and design criteria that such services must satisfy, and the Submittals that Contractor must furnish to Engineer with respect to the Owner-delegated design. B. Contractor shall cause such Owner-delegated professional design services to be provided pursuant to the professional standard of care by a properly licensed design professional, whose signature and seal must appear on all drawings, calculations, specifications, certifications, and Submittals prepared by such design professional. Such design professional must issue all certifications of design required by Laws and Regulations. C. If a Shop Drawing or other Submittal related to the Owner-delegated design is prepared by Contractor, a Subcontractor, or others for submittal to Engineer, then such Shop Drawing or other Submittal must bear the written approval of Contractor’s design professional when submitted by Contractor to Engineer. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 40 of 70 D. Owner and Engineer shall be entitled to rely upon the adequacy, accuracy, and completeness of the services, certifications, and approvals performed or provided by the design professionals retained or employed by Contractor under an Owner-delegated design, subject to the professional standard of care and the performance and design criteria stated in the Contract Documents. E. Pursuant to this Paragraph 7.19, Engineer’s review, approval, and other determinations regarding design drawings, calculations, specifications, certifications, and other Submittals furnished by Contractor pursuant to an Owner-delegated design will be only for the following limited purposes: 1. Checking for conformance with the requirements of this Paragraph 7.19; 2. Confirming that Contractor (through its design professionals) has used the performance and design criteria specified in the Contract Documents; and 3. Establishing that the design furnished by Contractor is consistent with the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents. F. Contractor shall not be responsible for the adequacy of performance or design criteria specified by Owner or Engineer. G. Contractor is not required to provide professional services in violation of applicable Laws and Regulations. ARTICLE 8—OTHER WORK AT THE SITE 8.01 Other Work A. In addition to and apart from the Work under the Contract Documents, the Owner may perform other work at or adjacent to the Site. Such other work may be performed by Owner’s employees, or through contracts between the Owner and third parties. Owner may also arrange to have third-party utility owners perform work on their utilities and facilities at or adjacent to the Site. B. If Owner performs other work at or adjacent to the Site with Owner’s employees, or through contracts for such other work, then Owner shall give Contractor written notice thereof prior to starting any such other work. If Owner has advance information regarding the start of any third-party utility work that Owner has arranged to take place at or adjacent to the Site, Owner shall provide such information to Contractor. C. Contractor shall afford proper and safe access to the Site to each contractor that performs such other work, each utility owner performing other work, and Owner, if Owner is performing other work with Owner’s employees, and provide a reasonable opportunity for the introduction and storage of materials and equipment and the execution of such other work. D. Contractor shall do all cutting, fitting, and patching of the Work that may be required to properly connect or otherwise make its several parts come together and properly integrate with such other work. Contractor shall not endanger any work of others by cutting, excavating, or otherwise altering such work; provided, however, that Contractor may cut or alter others' work with the written consent of Engineer and the others whose work will be affected. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 41 of 70 E. If the proper execution or results of any part of Contractor’s Work depends upon work performed by others, Contractor shall inspect such other work and promptly report to Engineer in writing any delays, defects, or deficiencies in such other work that render it unavailable or unsuitable for the proper execution and results of Contractor’s Work. Contractor’s failure to so report will constitute an acceptance of such other work as fit and proper for integration with Contractor’s Work except for latent defects and deficiencies in such other work. F. The provisions of this article are not applicable to work that is performed by third-party utilities or other third-party entities without a contract with Owner, or that is performed without having been arranged by Owner. If such work occurs, then any related delay, disruption, or interference incurred by Contractor is governed by the provisions of Paragraph 4.05.C.3. 8.02 Coordination A. If Owner intends to contract with others for the performance of other work at or adjacent to the Site, to perform other work at or adjacent to the Site with Owner’s employees, or to arrange to have utility owners perform work at or adjacent to the Site, the following will be set forth in the Supplementary Conditions or provided to Contractor prior to the start of any such other work: 1. The identity of the individual or entity that will have authority and responsibility for coordination of the activities among the various contractors; 2. An itemization of the specific matters to be covered by such authority and responsibility; and 3. The extent of such authority and responsibilities. B. Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, Owner shall have sole authority and responsibility for such coordination. 8.03 Legal Relationships A. If, in the course of performing other work for Owner at or adjacent to the Site, the Owner’s employees, any other contractor working for Owner, or any utility owner that Owner has arranged to perform work, causes damage to the Work or to the property of Contractor or its Subcontractors, or delays, disrupts, interferes with, or increases the scope or cost of the performance of the Work, through actions or inaction, then Contractor shall be entitled to an equitable adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Times. Contractor must submit any Change Proposal seeking an equitable adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Times under this paragraph within 30 days of the damaging, delaying, disrupting, or interfering event. The entitlement to, and extent of, any such equitable adjustment will take into account information (if any) regarding such other work that was provided to Contractor in the Contract Documents prior to the submittal of the Bid or the final negotiation of the terms of the Contract, and any remedies available to Contractor under Laws or Regulations concerning utility action or inaction. When applicable, any such equitable adjustment in Contract Price will be conditioned on Contractor assigning to Owner all Contractor’s rights against such other contractor or utility owner with respect to the damage, delay, disruption, or interference that is the subject of the adjustment. Contractor’s entitlement to an adjustment of the Contract Times or Contract Price is subject to the provisions of Paragraphs 4.05.D and 4.05.E. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 42 of 70 B. Contractor shall take reasonable and customary measures to avoid damaging, delaying, disrupting, or interfering with the work of Owner, any other contractor, or any utility owner performing other work at or adjacent to the Site. 1. If Contractor fails to take such measures and as a result damages, delays, disrupts, or interferes with the work of any such other contractor or utility owner, then Owner may impose a set-off against payments due Contractor, and assign to such other contractor or utility owner the Owner’s contractual rights against Contractor with respect to the breach of the obligations set forth in this Paragraph 8.03.B. 2. When Owner is performing other work at or adjacent to the Site with Owner’s employees, Contractor shall be liable to Owner for damage to such other work, and for the reasonable direct delay, disruption, and interference costs incurred by Owner as a result of Contractor’s failure to take reasonable and customary measures with respect to Owner’s other work. In response to such damage, delay, disruption, or interference, Owner may impose a set-off against payments due Contractor. C. If Contractor damages, delays, disrupts, or interferes with the work of any other contractor, or any utility owner performing other work at or adjacent to the Site, through Contractor’s failure to take reasonable and customary measures to avoid such impacts, or if any claim arising out of Contractor’s actions, inactions, or negligence in performance of the Work at or adjacent to the Site is made by any such other contractor or utility owner against Contractor, Owner, or Engineer, then Contractor shall (1) promptly attempt to settle the claim as to all parties through negotiations with such other contractor or utility owner, or otherwise resolve the claim by arbitration or other dispute resolution proceeding or at law, and (2) indemnify and hold harmless Owner and Engineer, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them from and against any such claims, and against all costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to such damage, delay, disruption, or interference. ARTICLE 9—OWNER’S RESPONSIBILITIES 9.01 Communications to Contractor A. Except as otherwise provided in these General Conditions, Owner shall issue all communications to Contractor through Engineer. 9.02 Replacement of Engineer A. Owner may at its discretion appoint an engineer to replace Engineer, provided Contractor makes no reasonable objection to the replacement engineer. The replacement engineer’s status under the Contract Documents will be that of the former Engineer. 9.03 Furnish Data A. Owner shall promptly furnish the data required of Owner under the Contract Documents. 9.04 Pay When Due A. Owner shall make payments to Contractor when they are due as provided in the Agreement. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 43 of 70 9.05 Lands and Easements; Reports, Tests, and Drawings A. Owner’s duties with respect to providing lands and easements are set forth in Paragraph 5.01. B. Owner’s duties with respect to providing engineering surveys to establish reference points are set forth in Paragraph 4.03. C. Article 5 refers to Owner’s identifying and making available to Contractor copies of reports of explorations and tests of conditions at the Site, and drawings of physical conditions relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site. 9.06 Insurance A. Owner’s responsibilities, if any, with respect to purchasing and maintaining liability and property insurance are set forth in Article 6. 9.07 Change Orders A. Owner’s responsibilities with respect to Change Orders are set forth in Article 11. 9.08 Inspections, Tests, and Approvals A. Owner’s responsibility with respect to certain inspections, tests, and approvals is set forth in Paragraph 14.02.B. 9.09 Limitations on Owner’s Responsibilities A. The Owner shall not supervise, direct, or have control or authority over, nor be responsible for, Contractor’s means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of Contractor to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work. Owner will not be responsible for Contractor’s failure to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 9.10 Undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Condition A. Owner’s responsibility in respect to an undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Condition is set forth in Paragraph 5.06. 9.11 Evidence of Financial Arrangements A. Upon request of Contractor, Owner shall furnish Contractor reasonable evidence that financial arrangements have been made to satisfy Owner’s obligations under the Contract (including obligations under proposed changes in the Work). 9.12 Safety Programs A. While at the Site, Owner’s employees and representatives shall comply with the specific applicable requirements of Contractor’s safety programs of which Owner has been informed. B. Owner shall furnish copies of any applicable Owner safety programs to Contractor. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 44 of 70 ARTICLE 10—ENGINEER’S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION 10.01 Owner’s Representative A. Engineer will be Owner’s representative during the construction period. The duties and responsibilities and the limitations of authority of Engineer as Owner’s representative during construction are set forth in the Contract. 10.02 Visits to Site A. Engineer will make visits to the Site at intervals appropriate to the various stages of construction as Engineer deems necessary in order to observe, as an experienced and qualified design professional, the progress that has been made and the quality of the various aspects of Contractor’s executed Work. Based on information obtained during such visits and observations, Engineer, for the benefit of Owner, will determine, in general, if the Work is proceeding in accordance with the Contract Documents. Engineer will not be required to make exhaustive or continuous inspections on the Site to check the quality or quantity of the Work. Engineer’s efforts will be directed toward providing for Owner a greater degree of confidence that the completed Work will conform generally to the Contract Documents. On the basis of such visits and observations, Engineer will keep Owner informed of the progress of the Work and will endeavor to guard Owner against defective Work. B. Engineer’s visits and observations are subject to all the limitations on Engineer’s authority and responsibility set forth in Paragraph 10.07. Particularly, but without limitation, during or as a result of Engineer’s visits or observations of Contractor’s Work, Engineer will not supervise, direct, control, or have authority over or be responsible for Contractor’s means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of Contractor to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work. 10.03 Resident Project Representative A. If Owner and Engineer have agreed that Engineer will furnish a Resident Project Representative to represent Engineer at the Site and assist Engineer in observing the progress and quality of the Work, then the authority and responsibilities of any such Resident Project Representative will be as provided in the Supplementary Conditions, and limitations on the responsibilities thereof will be as provided in the Supplementary Conditions and in Paragraph 10.07. B. If Owner designates an individual or entity who is not Engineer’s consultant, agent, or employee to represent Owner at the Site, then the responsibilities and authority of such individual or entity will be as provided in the Supplementary Conditions. 10.04 Engineer’s Authority A. Engineer has the authority to reject Work in accordance with Article 14. B. Engineer’s authority as to Submittals is set forth in Paragraph 7.16. C. Engineer’s authority as to design drawings, calculations, specifications, certifications and other Submittals from Contractor in response to Owner’s delegation (if any) to Contractor of professional design services, is set forth in Paragraph 7.19. D. Engineer’s authority as to changes in the Work is set forth in Article 11. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 45 of 70 E. Engineer’s authority as to Applications for Payment is set forth in Article 15. 10.05 Determinations for Unit Price Work A. Engineer will determine the actual quantities and classifications of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor as set forth in Paragraph 13.03. 10.06 Decisions on Requirements of Contract Documents and Acceptability of Work A. Engineer will render decisions regarding the requirements of the Contract Documents, and judge the acceptability of the Work, pursuant to the specific procedures set forth herein for initial interpretations, Change Proposals, and acceptance of the Work. In rendering such decisions and judgments, Engineer will not show partiality to Owner or Contractor, and will not be liable to Owner, Contractor, or others in connection with any proceedings, interpretations, decisions, or judgments conducted or rendered in good faith. 10.07 Limitations on Engineer’s Authority and Responsibilities A. Neither Engineer’s authority or responsibility under this Article 10 or under any other provision of the Contract, nor any decision made by Engineer in good faith either to exercise or not exercise such authority or responsibility or the undertaking, exercise, or performance of any authority or responsibility by Engineer, will create, impose, or give rise to any duty in contract, tort, or otherwise owed by Engineer to Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any other individual or entity, or to any surety for or employee or agent of any of them. B. Engineer will not supervise, direct, control, or have authority over or be responsible for Contractor’s means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of Contractor to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work. Engineer will not be responsible for Contractor’s failure to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. C. Engineer will not be responsible for the acts or omissions of Contractor or of any Subcontractor, any Supplier, or of any other individual or entity performing any of the Work. D. Engineer’s review of the final Application for Payment and accompanying documentation, and all maintenance and operating instructions, schedules, guarantees, bonds, certificates of inspection, tests and approvals, and other documentation required to be delivered by Contractor under Paragraph 15.06.A, will only be to determine generally that their content complies with the requirements of, and in the case of certificates of inspections, tests, and approvals, that the results certified indicate compliance with the Contract Documents. E. The limitations upon authority and responsibility set forth in this Paragraph 10.07 also apply to the Resident Project Representative, if any. 10.08 Compliance with Safety Program A. While at the Site, Engineer’s employees and representatives will comply with the specific applicable requirements of Owner’s and Contractor’s safety programs of which Engineer has been informed. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 46 of 70 ARTICLE 11—CHANGES TO THE CONTRACT 11.01 Amending and Supplementing the Contract A. The Contract may be amended or supplemented by a Change Order, a Work Change Directive, or a Field Order. B. If an amendment or supplement to the Contract includes a change in the Contract Price or the Contract Times, such amendment or supplement must be set forth in a Change Order. C. All changes to the Contract that involve (1) the performance or acceptability of the Work, (2) the design (as set forth in the Drawings, Specifications, or otherwise), or (3) other engineering or technical matters, must be supported by Engineer’s recommendation. Owner and Contractor may amend other terms and conditions of the Contract without the recommendation of the Engineer. 11.02 Change Orders A. Owner and Contractor shall execute appropriate Change Orders covering: 1. Changes in Contract Price or Contract Times which are agreed to by the parties, including any undisputed sum or amount of time for Work actually performed in accordance with a Work Change Directive; 2. Changes in Contract Price resulting from an Owner set-off, unless Contractor has duly contested such set-off; 3. Changes in the Work which are: (a) ordered by Owner pursuant to Paragraph 11.05, (b) required because of Owner’s acceptance of defective Work under Paragraph 14.04 or Owner’s correction of defective Work under Paragraph 14.07, or (c) agreed to by the parties, subject to the need for Engineer’s recommendation if the change in the Work involves the design (as set forth in the Drawings, Specifications, or otherwise) or other engineering or technical matters; and 4. Changes that embody the substance of any final and binding results under: Paragraph 11.03.B, resolving the impact of a Work Change Directive; Paragraph 11.09, concerning Change Proposals; Article 12, Claims; Paragraph 13.02.D, final adjustments resulting from allowances; Paragraph 13.03.D, final adjustments relating to determination of quantities for Unit Price Work; and similar provisions. B. If Owner or Contractor refuses to execute a Change Order that is required to be executed under the terms of Paragraph 11.02.A, it will be deemed to be of full force and effect, as if fully executed. 11.03 Work Change Directives A. A Work Change Directive will not change the Contract Price or the Contract Times but is evidence that the parties expect that the modification ordered or documented by a Work Change Directive will be incorporated in a subsequently issued Change Order, following negotiations by the parties as to the Work Change Directive’s effect, if any, on the Contract Price and Contract Times; or, if negotiations are unsuccessful, by a determination under the terms of the Contract Documents governing adjustments, expressly including Paragraph 11.07 regarding change of Contract Price. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 47 of 70 B. If Owner has issued a Work Change Directive and: 1. Contractor believes that an adjustment in Contract Times or Contract Price is necessary, then Contractor shall submit any Change Proposal seeking such an adjustment no later than 30 days after the completion of the Work set out in the Work Change Directive. 2. Owner believes that an adjustment in Contract Times or Contract Price is necessary, then Owner shall submit any Claim seeking such an adjustment no later than 60 days after issuance of the Work Change Directive. 11.04 Field Orders A. Engineer may authorize minor changes in the Work if the changes do not involve an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Times and are compatible with the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated by the Contract Documents. Such changes will be accomplished by a Field Order and will be binding on Owner and also on Contractor, which shall perform the Work involved promptly. B. If Contractor believes that a Field Order justifies an adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times, then before proceeding with the Work at issue, Contractor shall submit a Change Proposal as provided herein. 11.05 Owner-Authorized Changes in the Work A. Without invalidating the Contract and without notice to any surety, Owner may, at any time or from time to time, order additions, deletions, or revisions in the Work. Changes involving the design (as set forth in the Drawings, Specifications, or otherwise) or other engineering or technical matters will be supported by Engineer’s recommendation. B. Such changes in the Work may be accomplished by a Change Order, if Owner and Contractor have agreed as to the effect, if any, of the changes on Contract Times or Contract Price; or by a Work Change Directive. Upon receipt of any such document, Contractor shall promptly proceed with the Work involved; or, in the case of a deletion in the Work, promptly cease construction activities with respect to such deleted Work. Added or revised Work must be performed under the applicable conditions of the Contract Documents. C. Nothing in this Paragraph 11.05 obligates Contractor to undertake work that Contractor reasonably concludes cannot be performed in a manner consistent with Contractor’s safety obligations under the Contract Documents or Laws and Regulations. 11.06 Unauthorized Changes in the Work A. Contractor shall not be entitled to an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Times with respect to any work performed that is not required by the Contract Documents, as amended, modified, or supplemented, except in the case of an emergency as provided in Paragraph 7.15 or in the case of uncovering Work as provided in Paragraph 14.05.C.2. 11.07 Change of Contract Price A. The Contract Price may only be changed by a Change Order. Any Change Proposal for an adjustment in the Contract Price must comply with the provisions of Paragraph 11.09. Any Claim for an adjustment of Contract Price must comply with the provisions of Article 12. B. An adjustment in the Contract Price will be determined as follows: Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 48 of 70 1. Where the Work involved is covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents, then by application of such unit prices to the quantities of the items involved (subject to the provisions of Paragraph 13.03); 2. Where the Work involved is not covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents, then by a mutually agreed lump sum (which may include an allowance for overhead and profit not necessarily in accordance with Paragraph 11.07.C.2); or 3. Where the Work involved is not covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents and the parties do not reach mutual agreement to a lump sum, then on the basis of the Cost of the Work (determined as provided in Paragraph 13.01) plus a Contractor’s fee for overhead and profit (determined as provided in Paragraph 11.07.C). C. Contractor’s Fee: When applicable, the Contractor’s fee for overhead and profit will be determined as follows: 1. A mutually acceptable fixed fee; or 2. If a fixed fee is not agreed upon, then a fee based on the following percentages of the various portions of the Cost of the Work: a. For costs incurred under Paragraphs 13.01.B.1 and 13.01.B.2, the Contractor’s fee will be 15 percent; b. For costs incurred under Paragraph 13.01.B.3, the Contractor’s fee will be 5 percent; c. Where one or more tiers of subcontracts are on the basis of Cost of the Work plus a fee and no fixed fee is agreed upon, the intent of Paragraphs 11.07.C.2.a and 11.07.C.2.b is that the Contractor’s fee will be based on: (1) a fee of 15 percent of the costs incurred under Paragraphs 13.01.B.1 and 13.01.B.2 by the Subcontractor that actually performs the Work, at whatever tier, and (2) with respect to Contractor itself and to any Subcontractors of a tier higher than that of the Subcontractor that actually performs the Work, a fee of 5 percent of the amount (fee plus underlying costs incurred) attributable to the next lower tier Subcontractor; provided, however, that for any such subcontracted Work the maximum total fee to be paid by Owner will be no greater than 27 percent of the costs incurred by the Subcontractor that actually performs the Work; d. No fee will be payable on the basis of costs itemized under Paragraphs 13.01.B.4, 13.01.B.5, and 13.01.C; e. The amount of credit to be allowed by Contractor to Owner for any change which results in a net decrease in Cost of the Work will be the amount of the actual net decrease in Cost of the Work and a deduction of an additional amount equal to 5 percent of such actual net decrease in Cost of the Work; and f. When both additions and credits are involved in any one change or Change Proposal, the adjustment in Contractor’s fee will be computed by determining the sum of the costs in each of the cost categories in Paragraph 13.01.B (specifically, payroll costs, Paragraph 13.01.B.1; incorporated materials and equipment costs, Paragraph 13.01.B.2; Subcontract costs, Paragraph 13.01.B.3; special consultants costs, Paragraph 13.01.B.4; and other costs, Paragraph 13.01.B.5) and applying to each such cost category sum the appropriate fee from Paragraphs 11.07.C.2.a through 11.07.C.2.e, inclusive. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 49 of 70 11.08 Change of Contract Times A. The Contract Times may only be changed by a Change Order. Any Change Proposal for an adjustment in the Contract Times must comply with the provisions of Paragraph 11.09. Any Claim for an adjustment in the Contract Times must comply with the provisions of Article 12. B. Delay, disruption, and interference in the Work, and any related changes in Contract Times, are addressed in and governed by Paragraph 4.05. 11.09 Change Proposals A. Purpose and Content: Contractor shall submit a Change Proposal to Engineer to request an adjustment in the Contract Times or Contract Price; contest an initial decision by Engineer concerning the requirements of the Contract Documents or relating to the acceptability of the Work under the Contract Documents; challenge a set-off against payment due; or seek other relief under the Contract. The Change Proposal will specify any proposed change in Contract Times or Contract Price, or other proposed relief, and explain the reason for the proposed change, with citations to any governing or applicable provisions of the Contract Documents. Each Change Proposal will address only one issue, or a set of closely related issues. B. Change Proposal Procedures 1. Submittal: Contractor shall submit each Change Proposal to Engineer within 30 days after the start of the event giving rise thereto, or after such initial decision. 2. Supporting Data: The Contractor shall submit supporting data, including the proposed change in Contract Price or Contract Time (if any), to the Engineer and Owner within 15 days after the submittal of the Change Proposal. a. Change Proposals based on or related to delay, interruption, or interference must comply with the provisions of Paragraphs 4.05.D and 4.05.E. b. Change proposals related to a change of Contract Price must include full and detailed accounts of materials incorporated into the Work and labor and equipment used for the subject Work. The supporting data must be accompanied by a written statement that the supporting data are accurate and complete, and that any requested time or price adjustment is the entire adjustment to which Contractor believes it is entitled as a result of said event. 3. Engineer’s Initial Review: Engineer will advise Owner regarding the Change Proposal, and consider any comments or response from Owner regarding the Change Proposal. If in its discretion Engineer concludes that additional supporting data is needed before conducting a full review and making a decision regarding the Change Proposal, then Engineer may request that Contractor submit such additional supporting data by a date specified by Engineer, prior to Engineer beginning its full review of the Change Proposal. 4. Engineer’s Full Review and Action on the Change Proposal: Upon receipt of Contractor’s supporting data (including any additional data requested by Engineer), Engineer will conduct a full review of each Change Proposal and, within 30 days after such receipt of the Contractor’s supporting data, either approve the Change Proposal in whole, deny it in whole, or approve it in part and deny it in part. Such actions must be in writing, with a copy provided to Owner and Contractor. If Engineer does not take action on the Change Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 50 of 70 Proposal within 30 days, then either Owner or Contractor may at any time thereafter submit a letter to the other party indicating that as a result of Engineer’s inaction the Change Proposal is deemed denied, thereby commencing the time for appeal of the denial under Article 12. 5. Binding Decision: Engineer’s decision is final and binding upon Owner and Contractor, unless Owner or Contractor appeals the decision by filing a Claim under Article 12. C. Resolution of Certain Change Proposals: If the Change Proposal does not involve the design (as set forth in the Drawings, Specifications, or otherwise), the acceptability of the Work, or other engineering or technical matters, then Engineer will notify the parties in writing that the Engineer is unable to resolve the Change Proposal. For purposes of further resolution of such a Change Proposal, such notice will be deemed a denial, and Contractor may choose to seek resolution under the terms of Article 12. D. Post-Completion: Contractor shall not submit any Change Proposals after Engineer issues a written recommendation of final payment pursuant to Paragraph 15.06.B. 11.10 Notification to Surety A. If the provisions of any bond require notice to be given to a surety of any change affecting the general scope of the Work or the provisions of the Contract Documents (including, but not limited to, Contract Price or Contract Times), the giving of any such notice will be Contractor’s responsibility. The amount of each applicable bond will be adjusted to reflect the effect of any such change. ARTICLE 12—CLAIMS 12.01 Claims A. Claims Process: The following disputes between Owner and Contractor are subject to the Claims process set forth in this article: 1. Appeals by Owner or Contractor of Engineer’s decisions regarding Change Proposals; 2. Owner demands for adjustments in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or other relief under the Contract Documents; 3. Disputes that Engineer has been unable to address because they do not involve the design (as set forth in the Drawings, Specifications, or otherwise), the acceptability of the Work, or other engineering or technical matters; and 4. Subject to the waiver provisions of Paragraph 15.07, any dispute arising after Engineer has issued a written recommendation of final payment pursuant to Paragraph 15.06.B. B. Submittal of Claim: The party submitting a Claim shall deliver it directly to the other party to the Contract promptly (but in no event later than 30 days) after the start of the event giving rise thereto; in the case of appeals regarding Change Proposals within 30 days of the decision under appeal. The party submitting the Claim shall also furnish a copy to the Engineer, for its information only. The responsibility to substantiate a Claim rests with the party making the Claim. In the case of a Claim by Contractor seeking an increase in the Contract Times or Contract Price, Contractor shall certify that the Claim is made in good faith, that the supporting data are accurate and complete, and that to the best of Contractor’s knowledge Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 51 of 70 and belief the amount of time or money requested accurately reflects the full amount to which Contractor is entitled. C. Review and Resolution: The party receiving a Claim shall review it thoroughly, giving full consideration to its merits. The two parties shall seek to resolve the Claim through the exchange of information and direct negotiations. The parties may extend the time for resolving the Claim by mutual agreement. All actions taken on a Claim will be stated in writing and submitted to the other party, with a copy to Engineer. D. Mediation 1. At any time after initiation of a Claim, Owner and Contractor may mutually agree to mediation of the underlying dispute. The agreement to mediate will stay the Claim submittal and response process. 2. If Owner and Contractor agree to mediation, then after 60 days from such agreement, either Owner or Contractor may unilaterally terminate the mediation process, and the Claim submittal and decision process will resume as of the date of the termination. If the mediation proceeds but is unsuccessful in resolving the dispute, the Claim submittal and decision process will resume as of the date of the conclusion of the mediation, as determined by the mediator. 3. Owner and Contractor shall each pay one-half of the mediator’s fees and costs. E. Partial Approval: If the party receiving a Claim approves the Claim in part and denies it in part, such action will be final and binding unless within 30 days of such action the other party invokes the procedure set forth in Article 17 for final resolution of disputes. F. Denial of Claim: If efforts to resolve a Claim are not successful, the party receiving the Claim may deny it by giving written notice of denial to the other party. If the receiving party does not take action on the Claim within 90 days, then either Owner or Contractor may at any time thereafter submit a letter to the other party indicating that as a result of the inaction, the Claim is deemed denied, thereby commencing the time for appeal of the denial. A denial of the Claim will be final and binding unless within 30 days of the denial the other party invokes the procedure set forth in Article 17 for the final resolution of disputes. G. Final and Binding Results: If the parties reach a mutual agreement regarding a Claim, whether through approval of the Claim, direct negotiations, mediation, or otherwise; or if a Claim is approved in part and denied in part, or denied in full, and such actions become final and binding; then the results of the agreement or action on the Claim will be incorporated in a Change Order or other written document to the extent they affect the Contract, including the Work, the Contract Times, or the Contract Price. ARTICLE 13—COST OF THE WORK; ALLOWANCES; UNIT PRICE WORK 13.01 Cost of the Work A. Purposes for Determination of Cost of the Work: The term Cost of the Work means the sum of all costs necessary for the proper performance of the Work at issue, as further defined below. The provisions of this Paragraph 13.01 are used for two distinct purposes: 1. To determine Cost of the Work when Cost of the Work is a component of the Contract Price, under cost-plus-fee, time-and-materials, or other cost-based terms; or Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 52 of 70 2. When needed to determine the value of a Change Order, Change Proposal, Claim, set-off, or other adjustment in Contract Price. When the value of any such adjustment is determined on the basis of Cost of the Work, Contractor is entitled only to those additional or incremental costs required because of the change in the Work or because of the event giving rise to the adjustment. B. Costs Included: Except as otherwise may be agreed to in writing by Owner, costs included in the Cost of the Work will be in amounts no higher than those commonly incurred in the locality of the Project, will not include any of the costs itemized in Paragraph 13.01.C, and will include only the following items: 1. Payroll costs for employees in the direct employ of Contractor in the performance of the Work under schedules of job classifications agreed upon by Owner and Contractor in advance of the subject Work. Such employees include, without limitation, superintendents, foremen, safety managers, safety representatives, and other personnel employed full time on the Work. Payroll costs for employees not employed full time on the Work will be apportioned on the basis of their time spent on the Work. Payroll costs include, but are not limited to, salaries and wages plus the cost of fringe benefits, which include social security contributions, unemployment, excise, and payroll taxes, workers’ compensation, health and retirement benefits, sick leave, and vacation and holiday pay applicable thereto. The expenses of performing Work outside of regular working hours, on Saturday, Sunday, or legal holidays, will be included in the above to the extent authorized by Owner. 2. Cost of all materials and equipment furnished and incorporated in the Work, including costs of transportation and storage thereof, and Suppliers’ field services required in connection therewith. All cash discounts accrue to Contractor unless Owner deposits funds with Contractor with which to make payments, in which case the cash discounts will accrue to Owner. All trade discounts, rebates, and refunds and returns from sale of surplus materials and equipment will accrue to Owner, and Contractor shall make provisions so that they may be obtained. 3. Payments made by Contractor to Subcontractors for Work performed by Subcontractors. If required by Owner, Contractor shall obtain competitive bids from subcontractors acceptable to Owner and Contractor and shall deliver such bids to Owner, which will then determine, with the advice of Engineer, which bids, if any, will be acceptable. If any subcontract provides that the Subcontractor is to be paid on the basis of Cost of the Work plus a fee, the Subcontractor’s Cost of the Work and fee will be determined in the same manner as Contractor’s Cost of the Work and fee as provided in this Paragraph 13.01. 4. Costs of special consultants (including but not limited to engineers, architects, testing laboratories, surveyors, attorneys, and accountants) employed or retained for services specifically related to the Work. 5. Other costs consisting of the following: a. The proportion of necessary transportation, travel, and subsistence expenses of Contractor’s employees incurred in discharge of duties connected with the Work. b. Cost, including transportation and maintenance, of all materials, supplies, equipment, machinery, appliances, office, and temporary facilities at the Site, which are Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 53 of 70 consumed in the performance of the Work, and cost, less market value, of such items used but not consumed which remain the property of Contractor. 1) In establishing included costs for materials such as scaffolding, plating, or sheeting, consideration will be given to the actual or the estimated life of the material for use on other projects; or rental rates may be established on the basis of purchase or salvage value of such items, whichever is less. Contractor will not be eligible for compensation for such items in an amount that exceeds the purchase cost of such item. c. Construction Equipment Rental 1) Rentals of all construction equipment and machinery, and the parts thereof, in accordance with rental agreements approved by Owner as to price (including any surcharge or special rates applicable to overtime use of the construction equipment or machinery), and the costs of transportation, loading, unloading, assembly, dismantling, and removal thereof. All such costs will be in accordance with the terms of said rental agreements. The rental of any such equipment, machinery, or parts must cease when the use thereof is no longer necessary for the Work. 2) Costs for equipment and machinery owned by Contractor or a Contractor-related entity will be paid at a rate shown for such equipment in the equipment rental rate book specified in the Supplementary Conditions. An hourly rate will be computed by dividing the monthly rates by 176. These computed rates will include all operating costs. 3) With respect to Work that is the result of a Change Order, Change Proposal, Claim, set-off, or other adjustment in Contract Price (“changed Work”), included costs will be based on the time the equipment or machinery is in use on the changed Work and the costs of transportation, loading, unloading, assembly, dismantling, and removal when directly attributable to the changed Work. The cost of any such equipment or machinery, or parts thereof, must cease to accrue when the use thereof is no longer necessary for the changed Work. d. Sales, consumer, use, and other similar taxes related to the Work, and for which Contractor is liable, as imposed by Laws and Regulations. e. Deposits lost for causes other than negligence of Contractor, any Subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or for whose acts any of them may be liable, and royalty payments and fees for permits and licenses. f. Losses and damages (and related expenses) caused by damage to the Work, not compensated by insurance or otherwise, sustained by Contractor in connection with the performance of the Work (except losses and damages within the deductible amounts of builder’s risk or other property insurance established in accordance with Paragraph 6.04), provided such losses and damages have resulted from causes other than the negligence of Contractor, any Subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or for whose acts any of them may be liable. Such losses include settlements made with the written consent and approval of Owner. No such losses, damages, and expenses will be included in the Cost of the Work for the purpose of determining Contractor’s fee. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 54 of 70 g. The cost of utilities, fuel, and sanitary facilities at the Site. h. Minor expenses such as communication service at the Site, express and courier services, and similar petty cash items in connection with the Work. i. The costs of premiums for all bonds and insurance that Contractor is required by the Contract Documents to purchase and maintain. C. Costs Excluded: The term Cost of the Work does not include any of the following items: 1. Payroll costs and other compensation of Contractor’s officers, executives, principals, general managers, engineers, architects, estimators, attorneys, auditors, accountants, purchasing and contracting agents, expediters, timekeepers, clerks, and other personnel employed by Contractor, whether at the Site or in Contractor’s principal or branch office for general administration of the Work and not specifically included in the agreed upon schedule of job classifications referred to in Paragraph 13.01.B.1 or specifically covered by Paragraph 13.01.B.4. The payroll costs and other compensation excluded here are to be considered administrative costs covered by the Contractor’s fee. 2. The cost of purchasing, renting, or furnishing small tools and hand tools. 3. Expenses of Contractor’s principal and branch offices other than Contractor’s office at the Site. 4. Any part of Contractor’s capital expenses, including interest on Contractor’s capital employed for the Work and charges against Contractor for delinquent payments. 5. Costs due to the negligence of Contractor, any Subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or for whose acts any of them may be liable, including but not limited to, the correction of defective Work, disposal of materials or equipment wrongly supplied, and making good any damage to property. 6. Expenses incurred in preparing and advancing Claims. 7. Other overhead or general expense costs of any kind and the costs of any item not specifically and expressly included in Paragraph 13.01.B. D. Contractor’s Fee 1. When the Work as a whole is performed on the basis of cost-plus-a-fee, then: a. Contractor’s fee for the Work set forth in the Contract Documents as of the Effective Date of the Contract will be determined as set forth in the Agreement. b. for any Work covered by a Change Order, Change Proposal, Claim, set-off, or other adjustment in Contract Price on the basis of Cost of the Work, Contractor’s fee will be determined as follows: 1) When the fee for the Work as a whole is a percentage of the Cost of the Work, the fee will automatically adjust as the Cost of the Work changes. 2) When the fee for the Work as a whole is a fixed fee, the fee for any additions or deletions will be determined in accordance with Paragraph 11.07.C.2. 2. When the Work as a whole is performed on the basis of a stipulated sum, or any other basis other than cost-plus-a-fee, then Contractor’s fee for any Work covered by a Change Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 55 of 70 Order, Change Proposal, Claim, set-off, or other adjustment in Contract Price on the basis of Cost of the Work will be determined in accordance with Paragraph 11.07.C.2. E. Documentation and Audit: Whenever the Cost of the Work for any purpose is to be determined pursuant to this Article 13, Contractor and pertinent Subcontractors will establish and maintain records of the costs in accordance with generally accepted accounting practices. Subject to prior written notice, Owner will be afforded reasonable access, during normal business hours, to all Contractor’s accounts, records, books, correspondence, instructions, drawings, receipts, vouchers, memoranda, and similar data relating to the Cost of the Work and Contractor’s fee. Contractor shall preserve all such documents for a period of three years after the final payment by Owner. Pertinent Subcontractors will afford such access to Owner, and preserve such documents, to the same extent required of Contractor. 13.02 Allowances A. It is understood that Contractor has included in the Contract Price all allowances so named in the Contract Documents and shall cause the Work so covered to be performed for such sums and by such persons or entities as may be acceptable to Owner and Engineer. B. Cash Allowances: Contractor agrees that: 1. the cash allowances include the cost to Contractor (less any applicable trade discounts) of materials and equipment required by the allowances to be delivered at the Site, and all applicable taxes; and 2. Contractor’s costs for unloading and handling on the Site, labor, installation, overhead, profit, and other expenses contemplated for the cash allowances have been included in the Contract Price and not in the allowances, and no demand for additional payment for any of the foregoing will be valid. C. Owner’s Contingency Allowance: Contractor agrees that an Owner’s contingency allowance, if any, is for the sole use of Owner to cover unanticipated costs. D. Prior to final payment, an appropriate Change Order will be issued as recommended by Engineer to reflect actual amounts due Contractor for Work covered by allowances, and the Contract Price will be correspondingly adjusted. 13.03 Unit Price Work A. Where the Contract Documents provide that all or part of the Work is to be Unit Price Work, initially the Contract Price will be deemed to include for all Unit Price Work an amount equal to the sum of the unit price for each separately identified item of Unit Price Work times the estimated quantity of each item as indicated in the Agreement. B. The estimated quantities of items of Unit Price Work are not guaranteed and are solely for the purpose of comparison of Bids and determining an initial Contract Price. Payments to Contractor for Unit Price Work will be based on actual quantities. C. Each unit price will be deemed to include an amount considered by Contractor to be adequate to cover Contractor’s overhead and profit for each separately identified item. D. Engineer will determine the actual quantities and classifications of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor. Engineer will review with Contractor the Engineer’s preliminary determinations on such matters before rendering a written decision thereon (by recommendation of an Application for Payment or otherwise). Engineer’s written decision Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 56 of 70 thereon will be final and binding (except as modified by Engineer to reflect changed factual conditions or more accurate data) upon Owner and Contractor, and the final adjustment of Contract Price will be set forth in a Change Order, subject to the provisions of the following paragraph. E. Adjustments in Unit Price 1. Contractor or Owner shall be entitled to an adjustment in the unit price with respect to an item of Unit Price Work if: a. the quantity of the item of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor differs materially and significantly from the estimated quantity of such item indicated in the Agreement; and b. Contractor’s unit costs to perform the item of Unit Price Work have changed materially and significantly as a result of the quantity change. 2. The adjustment in unit price will account for and be coordinated with any related changes in quantities of other items of Work, and in Contractor’s costs to perform such other Work, such that the resulting overall change in Contract Price is equitable to Owner and Contractor. 3. Adjusted unit prices will apply to all units of that item. ARTICLE 14—TESTS AND INSPECTIONS; CORRECTION, REMOVAL, OR ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK 14.01 Access to Work A. Owner, Engineer, their consultants and other representatives and personnel of Owner, independent testing laboratories, and authorities having jurisdiction have access to the Site and the Work at reasonable times for their observation, inspection, and testing. Contractor shall provide them proper and safe conditions for such access and advise them of Contractor’s safety procedures and programs so that they may comply with such procedures and programs as applicable. 14.02 Tests, Inspections, and Approvals A. Contractor shall give Engineer timely notice of readiness of the Work (or specific parts thereof) for all required inspections and tests, and shall cooperate with inspection and testing personnel to facilitate required inspections and tests. B. Owner shall retain and pay for the services of an independent inspector, testing laboratory, or other qualified individual or entity to perform all inspections and tests expressly required by the Contract Documents to be furnished and paid for by Owner, except that costs incurred in connection with tests or inspections of covered Work will be governed by the provisions of Paragraph 14.05. C. If Laws or Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction require any Work (or part thereof) specifically to be inspected, tested, or approved by an employee or other representative of such public body, Contractor shall assume full responsibility for arranging and obtaining such inspections, tests, or approvals, pay all costs in connection therewith, and furnish Engineer the required certificates of inspection or approval. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 57 of 70 D. Contractor shall be responsible for arranging, obtaining, and paying for all inspections and tests required: 1. by the Contract Documents, unless the Contract Documents expressly allocate responsibility for a specific inspection or test to Owner; 2. to attain Owner’s and Engineer’s acceptance of materials or equipment to be incorporated in the Work; 3. by manufacturers of equipment furnished under the Contract Documents; 4. for testing, adjusting, and balancing of mechanical, electrical, and other equipment to be incorporated into the Work; and 5. for acceptance of materials, mix designs, or equipment submitted for approval prior to Contractor’s purchase thereof for incorporation in the Work. Such inspections and tests will be performed by independent inspectors, testing laboratories, or other qualified individuals or entities acceptable to Owner and Engineer. E. If the Contract Documents require the Work (or part thereof) to be approved by Owner, Engineer, or another designated individual or entity, then Contractor shall assume full responsibility for arranging and obtaining such approvals. F. If any Work (or the work of others) that is to be inspected, tested, or approved is covered by Contractor without written concurrence of Engineer, Contractor shall, if requested by Engineer, uncover such Work for observation. Such uncovering will be at Contractor’s expense unless Contractor had given Engineer timely notice of Contractor’s intention to cover the same and Engineer had not acted with reasonable promptness in response to such notice. 14.03 Defective Work A. Contractor’s Obligation: It is Contractor’s obligation to assure that the Work is not defective. B. Engineer’s Authority: Engineer has the authority to determine whether Work is defective, and to reject defective Work. C. Notice of Defects: Prompt written notice of all defective Work of which Owner or Engineer has actual knowledge will be given to Contractor. D. Correction, or Removal and Replacement: Promptly after receipt of written notice of defective Work, Contractor shall correct all such defective Work, whether or not fabricated, installed, or completed, or, if Engineer has rejected the defective Work, remove it from the Project and replace it with Work that is not defective. E. Preservation of Warranties: When correcting defective Work, Contractor shall take no action that would void or otherwise impair Owner’s special warranty and guarantee, if any, on said Work. F. Costs and Damages: In addition to its correction, removal, and replacement obligations with respect to defective Work, Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses, and damages arising out of or relating to defective Work, including but not limited to the cost of the inspection, testing, correction, removal, replacement, or reconstruction of such defective Work, fines levied against Owner by governmental authorities because the Work is defective, and the costs of repair or replacement of work of others resulting from defective Work. Prior to final payment, if Owner and Contractor are unable to agree as to the measure of such claims, costs, Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 58 of 70 losses, and damages resulting from defective Work, then Owner may impose a reasonable set-off against payments due under Article 15. 14.04 Acceptance of Defective Work A. If, instead of requiring correction or removal and replacement of defective Work, Owner prefers to accept it, Owner may do so (subject, if such acceptance occurs prior to final payment, to Engineer’s confirmation that such acceptance is in general accord with the design intent and applicable engineering principles, and will not endanger public safety). Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses, and damages attributable to Owner’s evaluation of and determination to accept such defective Work (such costs to be approved by Engineer as to reasonableness), and for the diminished value of the Work to the extent not otherwise paid by Contractor. If any such acceptance occurs prior to final payment, the necessary revisions in the Contract Documents with respect to the Work will be incorporated in a Change Order. If the parties are unable to agree as to the decrease in the Contract Price, reflecting the diminished value of Work so accepted, then Owner may impose a reasonable set-off against payments due under Article 15. If the acceptance of defective Work occurs after final payment, Contractor shall pay an appropriate amount to Owner. 14.05 Uncovering Work A. Engineer has the authority to require additional inspection or testing of the Work, whether or not the Work is fabricated, installed, or completed. B. If any Work is covered contrary to the written request of Engineer, then Contractor shall, if requested by Engineer, uncover such Work for Engineer’s observation, and then replace the covering, all at Contractor’s expense. C. If Engineer considers it necessary or advisable that covered Work be observed by Engineer or inspected or tested by others, then Contractor, at Engineer’s request, shall uncover, expose, or otherwise make available for observation, inspection, or testing as Engineer may require, that portion of the Work in question, and provide all necessary labor, material, and equipment. 1. If it is found that the uncovered Work is defective, Contractor shall be responsible for all claims, costs, losses, and damages arising out of or relating to such uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection, and testing, and of satisfactory replacement or reconstruction (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others); and pending Contractor’s full discharge of this responsibility the Owner shall be entitled to impose a reasonable set-off against payments due under Article 15. 2. If the uncovered Work is not found to be defective, Contractor shall be allowed an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Times, directly attributable to such uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection, testing, replacement, and reconstruction. If the parties are unable to agree as to the amount or extent thereof, then Contractor may submit a Change Proposal within 30 days of the determination that the Work is not defective. 14.06 Owner May Stop the Work A. If the Work is defective, or Contractor fails to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or equipment, or fails to perform the Work in such a way that the completed Work will conform to the Contract Documents, then Owner may order Contractor to stop the Work, Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 59 of 70 or any portion thereof, until the cause for such order has been eliminated; however, this right of Owner to stop the Work will not give rise to any duty on the part of Owner to exercise this right for the benefit of Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any other individual or entity, or any surety for, or employee or agent of any of them. 14.07 Owner May Correct Defective Work A. If Contractor fails within a reasonable time after written notice from Engineer to correct defective Work, or to remove and replace defective Work as required by Engineer, then Owner may, after 7 days’ written notice to Contractor, correct or remedy any such deficiency. B. In exercising the rights and remedies under this Paragraph 14.07, Owner shall proceed expeditiously. In connection with such corrective or remedial action, Owner may exclude Contractor from all or part of the Site, take possession of all or part of the Work and suspend Contractor’s services related thereto, and incorporate in the Work all materials and equipment stored at the Site or for which Owner has paid Contractor but which are stored elsewhere. Contractor shall allow Owner, Owner’s representatives, agents and employees, Owner’s other contractors, and Engineer and Engineer’s consultants access to the Site to enable Owner to exercise the rights and remedies under this paragraph. C. All claims, costs, losses, and damages incurred or sustained by Owner in exercising the rights and remedies under this Paragraph 14.07 will be charged against Contractor as set-offs against payments due under Article 15. Such claims, costs, losses and damages will include but not be limited to all costs of repair, or replacement of work of others destroyed or damaged by correction, removal, or replacement of Contractor’s defective Work. D. Contractor shall not be allowed an extension of the Contract Times because of any delay in the performance of the Work attributable to the exercise by Owner of Owner’s rights and remedies under this Paragraph 14.07. ARTICLE 15—PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR; SET-OFFS; COMPLETION; CORRECTION PERIOD 15.01 Progress Payments A. Basis for Progress Payments: The Schedule of Values established as provided in Article 2 will serve as the basis for progress payments and will be incorporated into a form of Application for Payment acceptable to Engineer. Progress payments for Unit Price Work will be based on the number of units completed during the pay period, as determined under the provisions of Paragraph 13.03. Progress payments for cost-based Work will be based on Cost of the Work completed by Contractor during the pay period. B. Applications for Payments 1. At least 20 days before the date established in the Agreement for each progress payment (but not more often than once a month), Contractor shall submit to Engineer for review an Application for Payment filled out and signed by Contractor covering the Work completed as of the date of the Application and accompanied by such supporting documentation as is required by the Contract Documents. 2. If payment is requested on the basis of materials and equipment not incorporated in the Work but delivered and suitably stored at the Site or at another location agreed to in writing, the Application for Payment must also be accompanied by: (a) a bill of sale, invoice, copies of subcontract or purchase order payments, or other documentation Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 60 of 70 establishing full payment by Contractor for the materials and equipment; (b) at Owner’s request, documentation warranting that Owner has received the materials and equipment free and clear of all Liens; and (c) evidence that the materials and equipment are covered by appropriate property insurance, a warehouse bond, or other arrangements to protect Owner’s interest therein, all of which must be satisfactory to Owner. 3. Beginning with the second Application for Payment, each Application must include an affidavit of Contractor stating that all previous progress payments received by Contractor have been applied to discharge Contractor’s legitimate obligations associated with prior Applications for Payment. 4. The amount of retainage with respect to progress payments will be as stipulated in the Agreement. C. Review of Applications 1. Engineer will, within 10 days after receipt of each Application for Payment, including each resubmittal, either indicate in writing a recommendation of payment and present the Application to Owner, or return the Application to Contractor indicating in writing Engineer’s reasons for refusing to recommend payment. In the latter case, Contractor may make the necessary corrections and resubmit the Application. 2. Engineer’s recommendation of any payment requested in an Application for Payment will constitute a representation by Engineer to Owner, based on Engineer’s observations of the executed Work as an experienced and qualified design professional, and on Engineer’s review of the Application for Payment and the accompanying data and schedules, that to the best of Engineer’s knowledge, information and belief: a. the Work has progressed to the point indicated; b. the quality of the Work is generally in accordance with the Contract Documents (subject to an evaluation of the Work as a functioning whole prior to or upon Substantial Completion, the results of any subsequent tests called for in the Contract Documents, a final determination of quantities and classifications for Unit Price Work under Paragraph 13.03, and any other qualifications stated in the recommendation); and c. the conditions precedent to Contractor’s being entitled to such payment appear to have been fulfilled in so far as it is Engineer’s responsibility to observe the Work. 3. By recommending any such payment Engineer will not thereby be deemed to have represented that: a. inspections made to check the quality or the quantity of the Work as it has been performed have been exhaustive, extended to every aspect of the Work in progress, or involved detailed inspections of the Work beyond the responsibilities specifically assigned to Engineer in the Contract; or b. there may not be other matters or issues between the parties that might entitle Contractor to be paid additionally by Owner or entitle Owner to withhold payment to Contractor. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 61 of 70 4. Neither Engineer’s review of Contractor’s Work for the purposes of recommending payments nor Engineer’s recommendation of any payment, including final payment, will impose responsibility on Engineer: a. to supervise, direct, or control the Work; b. for the means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto; c. for Contractor’s failure to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to Contractor’s performance of the Work; d. to make any examination to ascertain how or for what purposes Contractor has used the money paid by Owner; or e. to determine that title to any of the Work, materials, or equipment has passed to Owner free and clear of any Liens. 5. Engineer may refuse to recommend the whole or any part of any payment if, in Engineer’s opinion, it would be incorrect to make the representations to Owner stated in Paragraph 15.01.C.2. 6. Engineer will recommend reductions in payment (set-offs) necessary in Engineer’s opinion to protect Owner from loss because: a. the Work is defective, requiring correction or replacement; b. the Contract Price has been reduced by Change Orders; c. Owner has been required to correct defective Work in accordance with Paragraph 14.07, or has accepted defective Work pursuant to Paragraph 14.04; d. Owner has been required to remove or remediate a Hazardous Environmental Condition for which Contractor is responsible; or e. Engineer has actual knowledge of the occurrence of any of the events that would constitute a default by Contractor and therefore justify termination for cause under the Contract Documents. D. Payment Becomes Due 1. Ten days after presentation of the Application for Payment to Owner with Engineer’s recommendation, the amount recommended (subject to any Owner set-offs) will become due, and when due will be paid by Owner to Contractor. E. Reductions in Payment by Owner 1. In addition to any reductions in payment (set-offs) recommended by Engineer, Owner is entitled to impose a set-off against payment based on any of the following: a. Claims have been made against Owner based on Contractor’s conduct in the performance or furnishing of the Work, or Owner has incurred costs, losses, or damages resulting from Contractor’s conduct in the performance or furnishing of the Work, including but not limited to claims, costs, losses, or damages from workplace injuries, adjacent property damage, non-compliance with Laws and Regulations, and patent infringement; Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 62 of 70 b. Contractor has failed to take reasonable and customary measures to avoid damage, delay, disruption, and interference with other work at or adjacent to the Site; c. Contractor has failed to provide and maintain required bonds or insurance; d. Owner has been required to remove or remediate a Hazardous Environmental Condition for which Contractor is responsible; e. Owner has incurred extra charges or engineering costs related to submittal reviews, evaluations of proposed substitutes, tests and inspections, or return visits to manufacturing or assembly facilities; f. The Work is defective, requiring correction or replacement; g. Owner has been required to correct defective Work in accordance with Paragraph 14.07, or has accepted defective Work pursuant to Paragraph 14.04; h. The Contract Price has been reduced by Change Orders; i. An event has occurred that would constitute a default by Contractor and therefore justify a termination for cause; j. Liquidated or other damages have accrued as a result of Contractor’s failure to achieve Milestones, Substantial Completion, or final completion of the Work; k. Liens have been filed in connection with the Work, except where Contractor has delivered a specific bond satisfactory to Owner to secure the satisfaction and discharge of such Liens; or l. Other items entitle Owner to a set-off against the amount recommended. 2. If Owner imposes any set-off against payment, whether based on its own knowledge or on the written recommendations of Engineer, Owner will give Contractor immediate written notice (with a copy to Engineer) stating the reasons for such action and the specific amount of the reduction, and promptly pay Contractor any amount remaining after deduction of the amount so withheld. Owner shall promptly pay Contractor the amount so withheld, or any adjustment thereto agreed to by Owner and Contractor, if Contractor remedies the reasons for such action. The reduction imposed will be binding on Contractor unless it duly submits a Change Proposal contesting the reduction. 3. Upon a subsequent determination that Owner’s refusal of payment was not justified, the amount wrongfully withheld will be treated as an amount due as determined by Paragraph 15.01.D.1 and subject to interest as provided in the Agreement. 15.02 Contractor’s Warranty of Title A. Contractor warrants and guarantees that title to all Work, materials, and equipment furnished under the Contract will pass to Owner free and clear of (1) all Liens and other title defects, and (2) all patent, licensing, copyright, or royalty obligations, no later than 7 days after the time of payment by Owner. 15.03 Substantial Completion A. When Contractor considers the entire Work ready for its intended use Contractor shall notify Owner and Engineer in writing that the entire Work is substantially complete and request that Engineer issue a certificate of Substantial Completion. Contractor shall at the same time Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 63 of 70 submit to Owner and Engineer an initial draft of punch list items to be completed or corrected before final payment. B. Promptly after Contractor’s notification, Owner, Contractor, and Engineer shall make an inspection of the Work to determine the status of completion. If Engineer does not consider the Work substantially complete, Engineer will notify Contractor in writing giving the reasons therefor. C. If Engineer considers the Work substantially complete, Engineer will deliver to Owner a preliminary certificate of Substantial Completion which will fix the date of Substantial Completion. Engineer shall attach to the certificate a punch list of items to be completed or corrected before final payment. Owner shall have 7 days after receipt of the preliminary certificate during which to make written objection to Engineer as to any provisions of the certificate or attached punch list. If, after considering the objections to the provisions of the preliminary certificate, Engineer concludes that the Work is not substantially complete, Engineer will, within 14 days after submission of the preliminary certificate to Owner, notify Contractor in writing that the Work is not substantially complete, stating the reasons therefor. If Owner does not object to the provisions of the certificate, or if despite consideration of Owner’s objections Engineer concludes that the Work is substantially complete, then Engineer will, within said 14 days, execute and deliver to Owner and Contractor a final certificate of Substantial Completion (with a revised punch list of items to be completed or corrected) reflecting such changes from the preliminary certificate as Engineer believes justified after consideration of any objections from Owner. D. At the time of receipt of the preliminary certificate of Substantial Completion, Owner and Contractor will confer regarding Owner’s use or occupancy of the Work following Substantial Completion, review the builder’s risk insurance policy with respect to the end of the builder’s risk coverage, and confirm the transition to coverage of the Work under a permanent property insurance policy held by Owner. Unless Owner and Contractor agree otherwise in writing, Owner shall bear responsibility for security, operation, protection of the Work, property insurance, maintenance, heat, and utilities upon Owner’s use or occupancy of the Work. E. After Substantial Completion the Contractor shall promptly begin work on the punch list of items to be completed or corrected prior to final payment. In appropriate cases Contractor may submit monthly Applications for Payment for completed punch list items, following the progress payment procedures set forth above. F. Owner shall have the right to exclude Contractor from the Site after the date of Substantial Completion subject to allowing Contractor reasonable access to remove its property and complete or correct items on the punch list. 15.04 Partial Use or Occupancy A. Prior to Substantial Completion of all the Work, Owner may use or occupy any substantially completed part of the Work which has specifically been identified in the Contract Documents, or which Owner, Engineer, and Contractor agree constitutes a separately functioning and usable part of the Work that can be used by Owner for its intended purpose without Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 64 of 70 significant interference with Contractor’s performance of the remainder of the Work, subject to the following conditions: 1. At any time, Owner may request in writing that Contractor permit Owner to use or occupy any such part of the Work that Owner believes to be substantially complete. If and when Contractor agrees that such part of the Work is substantially complete, Contractor, Owner, and Engineer will follow the procedures of Paragraph 15.03.A through 15.03.E for that part of the Work. 2. At any time, Contractor may notify Owner and Engineer in writing that Contractor considers any such part of the Work substantially complete and request Engineer to issue a certificate of Substantial Completion for that part of the Work. 3. Within a reasonable time after either such request, Owner, Contractor, and Engineer shall make an inspection of that part of the Work to determine its status of completion. If Engineer does not consider that part of the Work to be substantially complete, Engineer will notify Owner and Contractor in writing giving the reasons therefor. If Engineer considers that part of the Work to be substantially complete, the provisions of Paragraph 15.03 will apply with respect to certification of Substantial Completion of that part of the Work and the division of responsibility in respect thereof and access thereto. 4. No use or occupancy or separate operation of part of the Work may occur prior to compliance with the requirements of Paragraph 6.04 regarding builder’s risk or other property insurance. 15.05 Final Inspection A. Upon written notice from Contractor that the entire Work or an agreed portion thereof is complete, Engineer will promptly make a final inspection with Owner and Contractor and will notify Contractor in writing of all particulars in which this inspection reveals that the Work, or agreed portion thereof, is incomplete or defective. Contractor shall immediately take such measures as are necessary to complete such Work or remedy such deficiencies. 15.06 Final Payment A. Application for Payment 1. After Contractor has, in the opinion of Engineer, satisfactorily completed all corrections identified during the final inspection and has delivered, in accordance with the Contract Documents, all maintenance and operating instructions, schedules, guarantees, bonds, certificates or other evidence of insurance, certificates of inspection, annotated record documents (as provided in Paragraph 7.12), and other documents, Contractor may make application for final payment. 2. The final Application for Payment must be accompanied (except as previously delivered) by: a. all documentation called for in the Contract Documents; b. consent of the surety, if any, to final payment; c. satisfactory evidence that all title issues have been resolved such that title to all Work, materials, and equipment has passed to Owner free and clear of any Liens or other title defects, or will so pass upon final payment. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 65 of 70 d. a list of all duly pending Change Proposals and Claims; and e. complete and legally effective releases or waivers (satisfactory to Owner) of all Lien rights arising out of the Work, and of Liens filed in connection with the Work. 3. In lieu of the releases or waivers of Liens specified in Paragraph 15.06.A.2 and as approved by Owner, Contractor may furnish receipts or releases in full and an affidavit of Contractor that: (a) the releases and receipts include all labor, services, material, and equipment for which a Lien could be filed; and (b) all payrolls, material and equipment bills, and other indebtedness connected with the Work for which Owner might in any way be responsible, or which might in any way result in liens or other burdens on Owner's property, have been paid or otherwise satisfied. If any Subcontractor or Supplier fails to furnish such a release or receipt in full, Contractor may furnish a bond or other collateral satisfactory to Owner to indemnify Owner against any Lien, or Owner at its option may issue joint checks payable to Contractor and specified Subcontractors and Suppliers. B. Engineer’s Review of Final Application and Recommendation of Payment: If, on the basis of Engineer’s observation of the Work during construction and final inspection, and Engineer’s review of the final Application for Payment and accompanying documentation as required by the Contract Documents, Engineer is satisfied that the Work has been completed and Contractor’s other obligations under the Contract have been fulfilled, Engineer will, within 10 days after receipt of the final Application for Payment, indicate in writing Engineer’s recommendation of final payment and present the final Application for Payment to Owner for payment. Such recommendation will account for any set-offs against payment that are necessary in Engineer’s opinion to protect Owner from loss for the reasons stated above with respect to progress payments. Otherwise, Engineer will return the Application for Payment to Contractor, indicating in writing the reasons for refusing to recommend final payment, in which case Contractor shall make the necessary corrections and resubmit the Application for Payment. C. Notice of Acceptability: In support of its recommendation of payment of the final Application for Payment, Engineer will also give written notice to Owner and Contractor that the Work is acceptable, subject to stated limitations in the notice and to the provisions of Paragraph 15.07. D. Completion of Work: The Work is complete (subject to surviving obligations) when it is ready for final payment as established by the Engineer’s written recommendation of final payment and issuance of notice of the acceptability of the Work. E. Final Payment Becomes Due: Upon receipt from Engineer of the final Application for Payment and accompanying documentation, Owner shall set off against the amount recommended by Engineer for final payment any further sum to which Owner is entitled, including but not limited to set-offs for liquidated damages and set-offs allowed under the provisions of this Contract with respect to progress payments. Owner shall pay the resulting balance due to Contractor within 30 days of Owner’s receipt of the final Application for Payment from Engineer. 15.07 Waiver of Claims A. By making final payment, Owner waives its claim or right to liquidated damages or other damages for late completion by Contractor, except as set forth in an outstanding Claim, Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 66 of 70 appeal under the provisions of Article 17, set-off, or express reservation of rights by Owner. Owner reserves all other claims or rights after final payment. B. The acceptance of final payment by Contractor will constitute a waiver by Contractor of all claims and rights against Owner other than those pending matters that have been duly submitted as a Claim, or appealed under the provisions of Article 17. 15.08 Correction Period A. If within one year after the date of Substantial Completion (or such longer period of time as may be prescribed by the Supplementary Conditions or the terms of any applicable special guarantee required by the Contract Documents), Owner gives Contractor written notice that any Work has been found to be defective, or that Contractor’s repair of any damages to the Site or adjacent areas has been found to be defective, then after receipt of such notice of defect Contractor shall promptly, without cost to Owner and in accordance with Owner’s written instructions: 1. correct the defective repairs to the Site or such adjacent areas; 2. correct such defective Work; 3. remove the defective Work from the Project and replace it with Work that is not defective, if the defective Work has been rejected by Owner, and 4. satisfactorily correct or repair or remove and replace any damage to other Work, to the work of others, or to other land or areas resulting from the corrective measures. B. Owner shall give any such notice of defect within 60 days of the discovery that such Work or repairs is defective. If such notice is given within such 60 days but after the end of the correction period, the notice will be deemed a notice of defective Work under Paragraph 7.17.B. C. If, after receipt of a notice of defect within 60 days and within the correction period, Contractor does not promptly comply with the terms of Owner’s written instructions, or in an emergency where delay would cause serious risk of loss or damage, Owner may have the defective Work corrected or repaired or may have the rejected Work removed and replaced. Contractor shall pay all costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to such correction or repair or such removal and replacement (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others). Contractor’s failure to pay such costs, losses, and damages within 10 days of invoice from Owner will be deemed the start of an event giving rise to a Claim under Paragraph 12.01.B, such that any related Claim must be brought within 30 days of the failure to pay. D. In special circumstances where a particular item of equipment is placed in continuous service before Substantial Completion of all the Work, the correction period for that item may start to run from an earlier date if so provided in the Specifications. E. Where defective Work (and damage to other Work resulting therefrom) has been corrected or removed and replaced under this paragraph, the correction period hereunder with respect to such Work will be extended for an additional period of one year after such correction or removal and replacement has been satisfactorily completed. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 67 of 70 F. Contractor’s obligations under this paragraph are in addition to all other obligations and warranties. The provisions of this paragraph are not to be construed as a substitute for, or a waiver of, the provisions of any applicable statute of limitation or repose. ARTICLE 16—SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION 16.01 Owner May Suspend Work A. At any time and without cause, Owner may suspend the Work or any portion thereof for a period of not more than 90 consecutive days by written notice to Contractor and Engineer. Such notice will fix the date on which Work will be resumed. Contractor shall resume the Work on the date so fixed. Contractor shall be entitled to an adjustment in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Times directly attributable to any such suspension. Any Change Proposal seeking such adjustments must be submitted no later than 30 days after the date fixed for resumption of Work. 16.02 Owner May Terminate for Cause A. The occurrence of any one or more of the following events will constitute a default by Contractor and justify termination for cause: 1. Contractor’s persistent failure to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents (including, but not limited to, failure to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or equipment, or failure to adhere to the Progress Schedule); 2. Failure of Contractor to perform or otherwise to comply with a material term of the Contract Documents; 3. Contractor’s disregard of Laws or Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction; or 4. Contractor’s repeated disregard of the authority of Owner or Engineer. B. If one or more of the events identified in Paragraph 16.02.A occurs, then after giving Contractor (and any surety) 10 days’ written notice that Owner is considering a declaration that Contractor is in default and termination of the Contract, Owner may proceed to: 1. declare Contractor to be in default, and give Contractor (and any surety) written notice that the Contract is terminated; and 2. enforce the rights available to Owner under any applicable performance bond. C. Subject to the terms and operation of any applicable performance bond, if Owner has terminated the Contract for cause, Owner may exclude Contractor from the Site, take possession of the Work, incorporate in the Work all materials and equipment stored at the Site or for which Owner has paid Contractor but which are stored elsewhere, and complete the Work as Owner may deem expedient. D. Owner may not proceed with termination of the Contract under Paragraph 16.02.B if Contractor within 7 days of receipt of notice of intent to terminate begins to correct its failure to perform and proceeds diligently to cure such failure. E. If Owner proceeds as provided in Paragraph 16.02.B, Contractor shall not be entitled to receive any further payment until the Work is completed. If the unpaid balance of the Contract Price exceeds the cost to complete the Work, including all related claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 68 of 70 attorneys, and other professionals) sustained by Owner, such excess will be paid to Contractor. If the cost to complete the Work including such related claims, costs, losses, and damages exceeds such unpaid balance, Contractor shall pay the difference to Owner. Such claims, costs, losses, and damages incurred by Owner will be reviewed by Engineer as to their reasonableness and, when so approved by Engineer, incorporated in a Change Order. When exercising any rights or remedies under this paragraph, Owner shall not be required to obtain the lowest price for the Work performed. F. Where Contractor’s services have been so terminated by Owner, the termination will not affect any rights or remedies of Owner against Contractor then existing or which may thereafter accrue, or any rights or remedies of Owner against Contractor or any surety under any payment bond or performance bond. Any retention or payment of money due Contractor by Owner will not release Contractor from liability. G. If and to the extent that Contractor has provided a performance bond under the provisions of Paragraph 6.01.A, the provisions of that bond will govern over any inconsistent provisions of Paragraphs 16.02.B and 16.02.D. 16.03 Owner May Terminate for Convenience A. Upon 7 days’ written notice to Contractor and Engineer, Owner may, without cause and without prejudice to any other right or remedy of Owner, terminate the Contract. In such case, Contractor shall be paid for (without duplication of any items): 1. completed and acceptable Work executed in accordance with the Contract Documents prior to the effective date of termination, including fair and reasonable sums for overhead and profit on such Work; 2. expenses sustained prior to the effective date of termination in performing services and furnishing labor, materials, or equipment as required by the Contract Documents in connection with uncompleted Work, plus fair and reasonable sums for overhead and profit on such expenses; and 3. other reasonable expenses directly attributable to termination, including costs incurred to prepare a termination for convenience cost proposal. B. Contractor shall not be paid for any loss of anticipated profits or revenue, post-termination overhead costs, or other economic loss arising out of or resulting from such termination. 16.04 Contractor May Stop Work or Terminate A. If, through no act or fault of Contractor, (1) the Work is suspended for more than 90 consecutive days by Owner or under an order of court or other public authority, or (2) Engineer fails to act on any Application for Payment within 30 days after it is submitted, or (3) Owner fails for 30 days to pay Contractor any sum finally determined to be due, then Contractor may, upon 7 days’ written notice to Owner and Engineer, and provided Owner or Engineer do not remedy such suspension or failure within that time, terminate the contract and recover from Owner payment on the same terms as provided in Paragraph 16.03. B. In lieu of terminating the Contract and without prejudice to any other right or remedy, if Engineer has failed to act on an Application for Payment within 30 days after it is submitted, or Owner has failed for 30 days to pay Contractor any sum finally determined to be due, Contractor may, 7 days after written notice to Owner and Engineer, stop the Work until payment is made of all such amounts due Contractor, including interest thereon. The Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 69 of 70 provisions of this paragraph are not intended to preclude Contractor from submitting a Change Proposal for an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times or otherwise for expenses or damage directly attributable to Contractor’s stopping the Work as permitted by this paragraph. ARTICLE 17—FINAL RESOLUTION OF DISPUTES 17.01 Methods and Procedures A. Disputes Subject to Final Resolution: The following disputed matters are subject to final resolution under the provisions of this article: 1. A timely appeal of an approval in part and denial in part of a Claim, or of a denial in full, pursuant to Article 12; and 2. Disputes between Owner and Contractor concerning the Work, or obligations under the Contract Documents, that arise after final payment has been made. B. Final Resolution of Disputes: For any dispute subject to resolution under this article, Owner or Contractor may: 1. elect in writing to invoke the dispute resolution process provided for in the Supplementary Conditions; 2. agree with the other party to submit the dispute to another dispute resolution process; or 3. if no dispute resolution process is provided for in the Supplementary Conditions or mutually agreed to, give written notice to the other party of the intent to submit the dispute to a court of competent jurisdiction. ARTICLE 18—MISCELLANEOUS 18.01 Giving Notice A. Whenever any provision of the Contract requires the giving of written notice to Owner, Engineer, or Contractor, it will be deemed to have been validly given only if delivered: 1. in person, by a commercial courier service or otherwise, to the recipient’s place of business; 2. by registered or certified mail, postage prepaid, to the recipient’s place of business; or 3. by e-mail to the recipient, with the words “Formal Notice” or similar in the e-mail’s subject line. 18.02 Computation of Times A. When any period of time is referred to in the Contract by days, it will be computed to exclude the first and include the last day of such period. If the last day of any such period falls on a Saturday or Sunday or on a day made a legal holiday by the law of the applicable jurisdiction, such day will be omitted from the computation. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 70 of 70 18.03 Cumulative Remedies A. The duties and obligations imposed by these General Conditions and the rights and remedies available hereunder to the parties hereto are in addition to, and are not to be construed in any way as a limitation of, any rights and remedies available to any or all of them which are otherwise imposed or available by Laws or Regulations, by special warranty or guarantee, or by other provisions of the Contract. The provisions of this paragraph will be as effective as if repeated specifically in the Contract Documents in connection with each particular duty, obligation, right, and remedy to which they apply. 18.04 Limitation of Damages A. With respect to any and all Change Proposals, Claims, disputes subject to final resolution, and other matters at issue, neither Owner nor Engineer, nor any of their officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, or subcontractors, shall be liable to Contractor for any claims, costs, losses, or damages sustained by Contractor on or in connection with any other project or anticipated project. 18.05 No Waiver A. A party’s non-enforcement of any provision will not constitute a waiver of that provision, nor will it affect the enforceability of that provision or of the remainder of this Contract. 18.06 Survival of Obligations A. All representations, indemnifications, warranties, and guarantees made in, required by, or given in accordance with the Contract, as well as all continuing obligations indicated in the Contract, will survive final payment, completion, and acceptance of the Work or termination of the Contract or of the services of Contractor. 18.07 Controlling Law A. This Contract is to be governed by the law of the state in which the Project is located. 18.08 Assignment of Contract A. Unless expressly agreed to elsewhere in the Contract, no assignment by a party to this Contract of any rights under or interests in the Contract will be binding on the other party without the written consent of the party sought to be bound; and, specifically but without limitation, money that may become due and money that is due may not be assigned without such consent (except to the extent that the effect of this restriction may be limited by law), and unless specifically stated to the contrary in any written consent to an assignment, no assignment will release or discharge the assignor from any duty or responsibility under the Contract. 18.09 Successors and Assigns A. Owner and Contractor each binds itself, its successors, assigns, and legal representatives to the other party hereto, its successors, assigns, and legal representatives in respect to all covenants, agreements, and obligations contained in the Contract Documents. 18.10 Headings A. Article and paragraph headings are inserted for convenience only and do not constitute parts of these General Conditions. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 This page intentionally left blank. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 EJCDC® C-800, Supplementary Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. TOC Page 1 of 1 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS OF THE CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT TABLE OF CONTENTS Page Article 1— Definitions and Terminology ....................................................................................................... 1 Article 2— Preliminary Matters .................................................................................................................... 1 Article 3— Contract Documents: Intent, Requirements, Reuse ................................................................... 2 Article 4— Commencement and Progress of the Work ............................................................................... 2 Article 5— Site, Subsurface and Physical Conditions, Hazardous Environmental Conditions ...................... 2 Article 6— Bonds and Insurance ................................................................................................................... 3 Article 7— Contractor’s Responsibilities ...................................................................................................... 8 Article 8— Other Work at the Site ................................................................................................................ 9 Article 9— Owner’s Responsibilities ............................................................................................................. 9 Article 10— Engineer’s Status During Construction ..................................................................................... 9 Article 11— Changes to the Contract ......................................................................................................... 11 Article 12— Claims ...................................................................................................................................... 11 Article 13— Cost of Work; Allowances, Unit Price Work ............................................................................ 11 Article 14— Tests and Inspections; Correction, Removal, or Accceptance of Defective Work .................. 13 Article 15— Payments to Contractor, Set Offs; Completions; Correction Period ...................................... 13 Article 16— Suspension of Work and Termination .................................................................................... 13 Article 17— Final Resolutions of Disputes .................................................................................................. 14 Article 18— Miscellaneous ......................................................................................................................... 15 Exhibit A— Software Requirements for Electronic Document Exchange ...... Error! Bookmark not defined. Exhibit B— Foreseeable Bad Weather Days .................................................. Error! Bookmark not defined. Exhibit C— Geotechnical Baseline Report Supplement to the Supplementary Conditions Error! Bookmark not defined. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 Exhibit C—Geotechnical Baseline Report Supplement to the Supplementary Conditions. EJCDC® C-800, Supplementary Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 1 of 15 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS OF THE CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT These Supplementary Conditions amend or supplement EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract (2018). The General Conditions remain in full force and effect except as amended. The terms used in these Supplementary Conditions have the meanings stated in the General Conditions. Additional terms, if any, used in these Supplementary Conditions have the meanings stated below, which are applicable to both the singular and plural thereof. The paragraph address system used in these Supplementary Conditions is the same as the paragraph address system used in the General Conditions, with the prefix "SC" added—for example, “Paragraph SC-4.05.” ARTICLE 1—DEFINITIONS AND TERMINOLOGY SC-1.01.A.40 Add the following to Paragraph 1.01.A.40: Trucking, shipping, delivery firms, consultants, and entities performing testing or inspection retained by Contractor or any Subcontractor are considered to be Subcontractors. SC-1.01.A.45 Add the following to Paragraph 1.01.A.45: Entities that rent construction equipment or machinery, but are not incorporated into the Work, are considered to be Suppliers. If such rental entity furnishes both equipment and one or more personnel to operate and maintain the equipment, such entity is a Subcontractor. ARTICLE 2—PRELIMINARY MATTERS 2.01 Delivery of Bonds and Evidence of Insurance SC-2.01 Delete Paragraphs 2.01.B. and C. in their entirety and insert the following in their place: B. Evidence of Contractor’s Insurance: When Contractor delivers the signed counterparts of the Agreement to Owner, Contractor shall also deliver to Owner copies of the policies (including all endorsements, and identification of applicable self-insured retentions and deductibles) of insurance required to be provided by Contractor in this Contract. Contractor may block out (redact) any confidential premium or pricing information contained in any policy or endorsement furnished under this provision. 2.02 Copies of Documents SC-2.02 Amend the first sentence of Paragraph 2.02.A to read as follows: Owner shall furnish to Contractor one paper copy of the Contract Documents (including one fully signed counterpart of the Agreement), and one copy in electronic portable document format (PDF). Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 Exhibit C—Geotechnical Baseline Report Supplement to the Supplementary Conditions. EJCDC® C-800, Supplementary Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 2 of 15 SC-2.02 Delete Paragraph 2.02.A in its entirety and insert the following new paragraph in its place: A. Owner shall furnish to Contractor one paper copy of conformed Contract Documents incorporating and integrating all Addenda and amendments, if any, negotiated prior to the Effective Date of the Contract (including one fully signed counterpart of the Agreement), and one copy in electronic portable document format (PDF). Additional paper copies of the conformed Contract Documents will be furnished upon request at the cost of reproduction. ARTICLE 3—CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: INTENT, REQUIREMENTS, REUSE 3.01 Intent SC-3.01 Delete Paragraph 3.01.C in its entirety. SC-3.01 Add the following new paragraphs immediately after Paragraph 3.01.E: F. The Specifications and other verbal components of the Contract Documents may vary in form, format, and style. Some Specification sections are written in varying degrees of streamlined or declarative style and some Specifications sections may, in comparison, employ a more-narrative style. Omissions of such words and phrases as "Contractor shall," "in conformity with," "as shown," or "as specified" are intentional in streamlined language in the Contract Documents. Omitted words and phrases are incorporated by inference. Similar types of provisions may appear in various parts of a Specifications section or elsewhere in the Contract Documents. Contractor shall not attempt to take advantage of any variation of form, format or style in Change Proposal(s) and Claim(s). G. Cross referencing of Specification sections in a Specifications section’s heading "Related Sections includes, but are not necessarily limited to: “and elsewhere within each Specifications section is provided as an aid and convenience to Contractor. Contractor shall not rely on cross referencing indicated and is responsible for coordinating the entire Work and providing a complete Project whether or not cross referencing is provided in each Specifications section or whether or not cross referencing is complete. ARTICLE 4—COMMENCEMENT AND PROGRESS OF THE WORK 4.05 Delays in Contractor’s Progress SC-4.05.C Amend Paragraph 4.05.C by adding the following subparagraphs: 5. Weather-Related Delays a. If “abnormal weather conditions” as set forth in Paragraph 4.05.C.2 of the General Conditions are the basis for a request for an equitable adjustment in the Contract Times, such request must be documented by data substantiating each of the following: (1) that weather conditions were abnormal for the period of time in which the delay occurred, (2) that such weather conditions could not have been reasonably anticipated, and (3) that such weather conditions had an adverse effect on the Work on the critical path at the time of the delay. b. Determination of actual bad weather days during performance of the Work will be based on the weather records measured and recorded by National Weather Service Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 Exhibit C—Geotechnical Baseline Report Supplement to the Supplementary Conditions. EJCDC® C-800, Supplementary Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 3 of 15 weather monitoring station at Bozeman Yellowstone International Airport (Gallatin Airport Authority). ARTICLE 5—SITE, SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS, HAZARDOUS ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS 5.03 Subsurface and Physical Conditions SC-5.03 Add the following new paragraphs immediately after Paragraph 5.03.D: E. The following table lists the reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at or adjacent to the Site that contain Technical Data, and specifically identifies the Technical Data in the report upon which Contractor may rely: Report Title Date of Report Technical Data Valley Center Lift Station Geotechnical Report June 2024 Eight (8) Soil Borings SC-5.04.A Add the following new paragraph immediately after Paragraph 5.04.A.4: 5. Contractor encounters human remains, recognizes the existence of burial markers, archaeological sites, historical sites, artifacts of potential archaeological or historical interest, or wetlands not shown or indicated in the Contract Documents, Contractor shall immediately cease operations that may disturb such area(s) and secure the adjacent Work; and Owner shall promptly take any action necessary to obtain governmental authorization required to resume the operations (Contractor shall continue to suspend such operations until otherwise instructed by Owner but shall continue with all other operations that do not affect those remains or features). ARTICLE 6—BONDS AND INSURANCE 6.01 Performance, Payment, and Other Bonds SC-6.01 Add the following paragraphs immediately after Paragraph 6.01.A: 1. Required Performance Bond Form: The performance bond that Contractor furnishes will be in the form of EJCDC® C-610, Performance Bond (2010, 2013, or 2018 edition). 2. Required Payment Bond Form: The payment bond that Contractor furnishes will be in the form of EJCDC® C-615, Payment Bond (2010, 2013, or 2018 edition). 6.02 Insurance—General Provisions SC-6.02 Add the following paragraph immediately after Paragraph 6.02.B: 1. Contractor may obtain worker’s compensation insurance from an insurance company that has not been rated by A.M. Best, provided that such company (a) is domiciled in the state in which the Project is located, (b) is certified or authorized as a worker’s compensation insurance provider by the appropriate state agency, and (c) has been accepted to provide worker’s compensation insurance for similar projects by the state within the last 12 months. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 Exhibit C—Geotechnical Baseline Report Supplement to the Supplementary Conditions. EJCDC® C-800, Supplementary Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 4 of 15 6.03 Contractor’s Insurance SC-6.03 Supplement Paragraph 6.03 with the following provisions after Paragraph 6.03.C: D. Workers’ Compensation and Employer’s Liability: Contractor shall purchase and maintain workers’ compensation and employer’s liability insurance, including, as applicable, United States Longshoreman and Harbor Workers’ Compensation Act, Jones Act, stop-gap employer’s liability coverage for monopolistic states, and foreign voluntary workers’ compensation (from available sources, notwithstanding the jurisdictional requirement of Paragraph 6.02.B of the General Conditions). Workers’ Compensation and Related Policies Policy limits of not less than: Workers’ Compensation State Statutory Applicable Federal (e.g., Longshoreman’s) Statutory Foreign voluntary workers’ compensation (employer’s responsibility coverage), if applicable Statutory Employer’s Liability Each accident $1,500,000.00 Each employee $1,500,000.00 Policy limit $3,000,000.00 F. Commercial General Liability—Claims Covered: Contractor shall purchase and maintain commercial general liability insurance, covering all operations by or on behalf of Contractor, on an occurrence basis, against claims for: 1. damages because of bodily injury, sickness or disease, or death of any person other than Contractor’s employees, 2. damages insured by reasonably available personal injury liability coverage, and 3. damages because of injury to or destruction of tangible property wherever located, including loss of use resulting therefrom. G. Commercial General Liability—Form and Content: Contractor’s commercial liability policy must be written on a 1996 (or later) Insurance Services Organization, Inc. (ISO) commercial general liability form (occurrence form) and include the following coverages and endorsements: 1. Products and completed operations coverage. a. Such insurance must be maintained for three years after final payment. b. Contractor shall furnish Owner and each other additional insured (as identified in the Supplementary Conditions or elsewhere in the Contract) evidence of continuation of such insurance at final payment and three years thereafter. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 Exhibit C—Geotechnical Baseline Report Supplement to the Supplementary Conditions. EJCDC® C-800, Supplementary Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 5 of 15 2. Blanket contractual liability coverage, including but not limited to coverage of Contractor’s contractual indemnity obligations in Paragraph 7.18. 3. Severability of interests and no insured-versus-insured or cross-liability exclusions. 4. Underground, explosion, and collapse coverage. 5. Personal injury coverage. 6. Additional insured endorsements that include both ongoing operations and products and completed operations coverage through ISO Endorsements CG 20 10 10 01 and CG 20 37 10 01 (together). If Contractor demonstrates to Owner that the specified ISO endorsements are not commercially available, then Contractor may satisfy this requirement by providing equivalent endorsements. 7. For design professional additional insureds, ISO Endorsement CG 20 32 07 04 “Additional Insured—Engineers, Architects or Surveyors Not Engaged by the Named Insured” or its equivalent. H. Commercial General Liability—Excluded Content: The commercial general liability insurance policy, including its coverages, endorsements, and incorporated provisions, must not include any of the following: 1. Any modification of the standard definition of “insured contract” (except to delete the railroad protective liability exclusion if Contractor is required to indemnify a railroad or others with respect to Work within 50 feet of railroad property). 2. Any exclusion for water intrusion or water damage. 3. Any provisions resulting in the erosion of insurance limits by defense costs other than those already incorporated in ISO form CG 00 01. 4. Any exclusion of coverage relating to earth subsidence or movement. 5. Any exclusion for the insured’s vicarious liability, strict liability, or statutory liability (other than worker’s compensation). 6. Any limitation or exclusion based on the nature of Contractor’s work. 7. Any professional liability exclusion broader in effect than the most recent edition of ISO form CG 22 79. I. Commercial General Liability—Minimum Policy Limits Commercial General Liability Policy limits of not less than: General Aggregate $3,000,000.00 Products—Completed Operations Aggregate $3,000,000.00 Personal and Advertising Injury $2,000,000.00 Bodily Injury and Property Damage—Each Occurrence $1,500,000.00 Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 Exhibit C—Geotechnical Baseline Report Supplement to the Supplementary Conditions. EJCDC® C-800, Supplementary Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 6 of 15 J. Automobile Liability: Contractor shall purchase and maintain automobile liability insurance for damages because of bodily injury or death of any person or property damage arising out of the ownership, maintenance, or use of any motor vehicle. The automobile liability policy must be written on an occurrence basis. Automobile Liability Policy limits of not less than: Bodily Injury Each Person $1,500,000.00 Each Accident $1,500,000.00 Property Damage Each Accident $1,500,000.00 or Combined Single Limit Combined Single Limit (Bodily Injury and Property Damage) $3,000,000.00 K. Umbrella or Excess Liability: Contractor shall purchase and maintain umbrella or excess liability insurance written over the underlying employer’s liability, commercial general liability, and automobile liability insurance described in the Paragraphs above. The coverage afforded must be at least as broad as that of each and every one of the underlying policies. Excess or Umbrella Liability Policy limits of not less than: Each Occurrence $1,000,000.00 General Aggregate $3,000,000.00 L. Using Umbrella or Excess Liability Insurance to Meet CGL and Other Policy Limit Requirements: Contractor may meet the policy limits specified for employer’s liability, commercial general liability, and automobile liability through the primary policies alone, or through combinations of the primary insurance policy’s policy limits and partial attribution of the policy limits of an umbrella or excess liability policy that is at least as broad in coverage as that of the underlying policy, as specified herein. If such umbrella or excess liability policy was required under this Contract, at a specified minimum policy limit, such umbrella or excess policy must retain a minimum limit of $1,000,000.00 after accounting for partial attribution of its limits to underlying policies, as allowed above. 6.04 Builder’s Risk and Other Property Insurance SC-6.04 Supplement Paragraph 6.04 with the following provisions: F. Builder’s Risk Requirements: The builder’s risk insurance must: 1. be written on a builder’s risk “all risk” policy form that at a minimum includes insurance for physical loss or damage to the Work, temporary buildings, falsework, and materials and equipment stored and in transit, and must not exclude the coverage of the following Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 Exhibit C—Geotechnical Baseline Report Supplement to the Supplementary Conditions. EJCDC® C-800, Supplementary Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 7 of 15 risks: fire; windstorm; hail; flood; earthquake, volcanic activity, and other earth movement; lightning; riot; civil commotion; terrorism; vehicle impact; aircraft; smoke; theft; vandalism and malicious mischief; mechanical breakdown, boiler explosion, and artificially generated electric current; collapse; explosion; debris removal; demolition occasioned by enforcement of Laws and Regulations; and water damage (other than that caused by flood). a. Such policy will include an exception that results in coverage for ensuing losses from physical damage or loss with respect to any defective workmanship, methods, design, or materials exclusions. b. If insurance against mechanical breakdown, boiler explosion, and artificially generated electric current; earthquake, volcanic activity, and other earth movement; or flood, are not commercially available under builder’s risk policies, by endorsement or otherwise, such insurance will be provided through other insurance policies acceptable to Owner and Contractor. 2. cover, as insured property, at least the following: (a) the Work and all materials, supplies, machinery, apparatus, equipment, fixtures, and other property of a similar nature that are to be incorporated into or used in the preparation, fabrication, construction, erection, or completion of the Work, including Owner-furnished or assigned property; (b) spare parts inventory required within the scope of the Contract; and (c) temporary works which are not intended to form part of the permanent constructed Work but which are intended to provide working access to the Site, or to the Work under construction, or which are intended to provide temporary support for the Work under construction, including scaffolding, form work, fences, shoring, falsework, and temporary structures. 3. cover expenses incurred in the repair or replacement of any insured property (including but not limited to fees and charges of contractors, engineers, and architects). 4. extend to cover damage or loss to insured property while in temporary storage at the Site or in a storage location outside the Site (but not including property stored at the premises of a manufacturer or Supplier). 5. extend to cover damage or loss to insured property while in transit. 6. allow for the waiver of the insurer’s subrogation rights, as set forth in this Contract. 7. allow for partial occupancy or use by Owner by endorsement, and without cancellation or lapse of coverage. 8. include performance/hot testing and start-up, if applicable. 9. be maintained in effect until the Work is complete, as set forth in Paragraph 15.06.D of the General Conditions, or until written confirmation of Owner’s procurement of property insurance following Substantial Completion, whichever occurs first. 10 include as named insureds the Owner, Contractor, Subcontractors (of every tier), and any other individuals or entities required by this Contract to be insured under such builder’s risk policy. For purposes of Paragraphs 6.04, 6.05, and 6.06 of the General Conditions, and this and all other corresponding Supplementary Conditions, the parties required to be insured will be referred to collectively as “insureds. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 Exhibit C—Geotechnical Baseline Report Supplement to the Supplementary Conditions. EJCDC® C-800, Supplementary Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 8 of 15 SC-6.04 Supplement Paragraph 6.04 of the General Conditions with the following provision: G. Coverage for Completion Delays: The builder’s risk policy will include, for the benefit of Owner, loss of revenue and soft cost coverage for losses arising from delays in completion that result from covered physical losses or damage. Such coverage will include, without limitation, fixed expenses and debt service for a minimum of 12 months with a maximum deductible of 30 days, compensation for loss of net revenues, rental costs, and attorneys’ fees and engineering or other consultants’ fees, if not otherwise covered. SC-6.04 Delete Paragraph 6.04.A and substitute the following in its place: A. Installation Floater 1. Contractor shall provide and maintain installation floater insurance on a broad form or “all risk” policy providing coverage for materials, supplies, machinery, fixtures, and equipment that will be incorporated into the Work (“Covered Property”). Coverage under the Contractor’s installation floater will include loss from covered “all risk” causes (perils) to Covered Property: a. of the Contractor, and Covered Property of others that is in Contractor’s care, custody, and control; b. while in transit to the Site, including while at temporary storage sites; c. while at the Site awaiting and during installation, erection, and testing; d. continuing at least until the installation or erection of the Covered Property is completed, and the Work into which it is incorporated is accepted by Owner. 2. The installation floater coverage cannot be contingent on an external cause or risk, or limited to property for which the Contractor is legally liable. 3. The installation floater coverage will be in an amount sufficient to protect Contractor’s interest in the Covered Property. The Contractor will be solely responsible for any deductible carried under this coverage. 4. This policy will include a waiver of subrogation applicable to Owner, Contractor, Engineer, all Subcontractors, and the officers, directors, partners, employees, agents and other consultants and subcontractors of any of them. ARTICLE 7—CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILITIES 7.02 Supervision and Superintendence SC-7.02 Add the following to Paragraph 7.02, following Paragraph 7.02.B: C. Unless Owner otherwise agrees in writing, the superintendent will be Contractor’s representative at the Site and shall have authority to act on behalf of Contractor. All communications given to or received from the superintendent shall be binding on Contractor. 7.03 Labor; Working Hours Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 Exhibit C—Geotechnical Baseline Report Supplement to the Supplementary Conditions. EJCDC® C-800, Supplementary Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 9 of 15 SC-7.03 Add the following new subparagraphs immediately after Paragraph 7.03.C: 1. Regular working hours will be 7:00 AM to 7:00 PM. 2. Owner's legal holidays can be found online here: https://www.bozeman.net/services/advanced-components/basic-pages/city-of- bozeman-events SC-7.03 Add the following new paragraph immediately after Paragraph 7.03.C: D. Contractor shall be responsible for the cost of overtime (premium) pay and other expense incurred by Owner for Engineer’s services (including those of the Resident Project Representative, if any), Owner's representative, and construction observation services, occasioned by the performance of Work on Saturday, Sunday, any legal holiday, or as overtime on any regular work day. If Contractor is responsible but does not pay, or if the parties are unable to agree as to the amount owed, then Owner may impose a reasonable set-off against payments due under Article 15. 7.14 Hazard Communication Programs SC-7.14 Add the following new paragraph immediately after Paragraph 7.14.A: B Single Prime Contract: Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating exchange of safety data sheets or other hazard communication information required to be made available to or exchanged between or among employers at the Site in accordance with Laws and Regulations. Contractor shall provide a centralized location for the maintenance of the safety data sheets or other hazard communication information required to be made available by any employer on the Site. Location of the material safety data sheets or other hazard communication information shall be readily accessible to the employees of employers on the Site. ARTICLE 8—OTHER WORK AT THE SITE No Supplementary Conditions in this Article. ARTICLE 9—NO SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS IN THIS ARTICLE.OWNER’S RESPONSIBILITIES No Supplementary Conditions in this Article. ARTICLE 10—NO SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS IN THIS ARTICLE.ENGINEER’S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION 10.03 Resident Project Representative SC-10.03 Add the following new paragraphs immediately after Paragraph 10.03.B: C. The Resident Project Representative (RPR) will be Engineer's representative at the Site. RPR's dealings in matters pertaining to the Work in general will be with Engineer and Contractor. RPR's dealings with Subcontractors will only be through or with the full knowledge or approval of Contractor. The RPR will: Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 Exhibit C—Geotechnical Baseline Report Supplement to the Supplementary Conditions. EJCDC® C-800, Supplementary Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 10 of 15 1. Conferences and Meetings: Attend meetings with Contractor, such as preconstruction conferences, progress meetings, job conferences, and other Project-related meetings (but not including Contractor’s safety meetings), and as appropriate prepare and circulate copies of minutes thereof. 2. Safety Compliance: Comply with Site safety programs, as they apply to RPR, and if required to do so by such safety programs, receive safety training specifically related to RPR’s own personal safety while at the Site. 3. Liaison a. Serve as Engineer’s liaison with Contractor. Working principally through Contractor’s authorized representative or designee, assist in providing information regarding the provisions and intent of the Contract Documents. b. Assist Engineer in serving as Owner’s liaison with Contractor when Contractor’s operations affect Owner’s on-Site operations. c. Assist in obtaining from Owner additional details or information, when required for Contractor’s proper execution of the Work. 4. Review of Work; Defective Work a. Conduct on-Site observations of the Work to assist Engineer in determining, to the extent set forth in Paragraph 10.02, if the Work is in general proceeding in accordance with the Contract Documents. b. Observe whether any Work in place appears to be defective. This does not impose on either RPR or Engineer any obligation to find all, or any specific element of, defective Work, for which Contractor remains solely responsible. c. Observe whether any Work in place should be uncovered for observation, or requires special testing, inspection or approval. 5. Inspections and Tests a. Observe Contractor-arranged inspections required by Laws and Regulations, including but not limited to (1) code-required tests and special inspections, and (2) those performed by public or other agencies having jurisdiction over the Work. b. Observe specific tests, inspections, and other field quality control required by the Contract Documents and performed by Contractor, Subcontractor, Supplier, or by testing or laboratories retained by any of them, . c. Accompany visiting inspectors representing public or other agencies having jurisdiction over the Work. 6. Payment Requests: Review Applications for Payment with Contractor and advise Contractor regarding quantities or extent of the Work eligible for payment. 7. Completion a. Participate in Engineer’s visits regarding inspection for Substantial Completion. b. Assist in the augmenting or amending the punch list of items to be completed or corrected prior to final inspection. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 Exhibit C—Geotechnical Baseline Report Supplement to the Supplementary Conditions. EJCDC® C-800, Supplementary Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 11 of 15 c. Final Inspection: Participate in Engineer’s visit to the Site, in the company of Owner and Contractor, regarding completion of the Work, and prepare a final punch list (if any) of items to be completed or corrected by Contractor. d. Observe whether items on the final punch list have been completed or corrected. e. Record Documents: Periodically during the Work, review with Contractor the status of Contractor’s record documents required by the Contract Documents and advise Contractor on whether such record documents appear to comply with the Contract’s requirements for record documents. Review final record documents submitted by Contractor. D. The RPR will not: 1. Authorize any deviation from the Contract Documents or substitution of materials, equipment (including “or-equal” items), or procedures or sequences indicated in the Contract Documents. 2. Exceed limitations of Engineer’s authority as set forth in the Contract Documents. 3. Undertake any of the responsibilities of Contractor, Subcontractors, or Suppliers. 4. Advise on, issue directions relative to, or assume control or responsibility over any aspect of the means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction. 5. Advise on, issue directions regarding, or assume control over security protection, or safety practices, precautions, and programs in connection with the activities or operations of Owner or Contractor. 6. Participate in specialized field or laboratory tests or inspections conducted off-site by others except as specifically authorized by Engineer. 7. Authorize Owner to occupy the Project in whole or in part. ARTICLE 11—CHANGES TO THE CONTRACT No Supplementary Conditions in this Article. ARTICLE 12—CLAIMS No Supplementary Conditions in this Article. ARTICLE 13—COST OF WORK; ALLOWANCES, UNIT PRICE WORK 13.01 Cost of the Work SC-13.01.B.5.c.(1) Supplement Paragraph 13.01.B.5.c.(1) by adding the following subparagraphs: a) Prior to commencing Work at the Site, submit to Owner, through Engineer, copies of the equipment rental agreements for Owner’s approval. b) Should Contractor perform Work using rented construction equipment or machinery without Owner’s written approval of the associated rental agreement and the parties Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 Exhibit C—Geotechnical Baseline Report Supplement to the Supplementary Conditions. EJCDC® C-800, Supplementary Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 12 of 15 subsequently disagree on the applicable rental rates, use of such construction equipment and machinery will be compensated on the basis of the rental rate book indicated in Paragraph SC-13.01.B.5.c.(2). c) When the rental rate book is used basis for determining compensation for construction equipment and machinery leased from a rental firm, the hourly rate for such equipment shall be determined in accordance with Paragraph 13.01.B.5.(2) of the General Conditions. SC-13.01.B.5.c.(2) Supplement Paragraph 13.01.B.5.c.(2) by adding the following sentence: The equipment rental rate book that governs the included costs for the rental of machinery and equipment owned by Contractor (or a related entity) under the Cost of the Work provisions of this Contract is the most current edition of Equipment Watch’s Rental Rate Blue Book for Construction Equipment. SC-13.01.B.5.c Supplement Paragraph 13.01.B.5.c by adding the following subparagraphs: 4) Inactive Equipment and Machinery: Rental of construction equipment and machinery shall cease when the use thereof is no longer necessary for the Work. Periods of inactivity for such construction equipment or machinery will not be compensable unless agreed upon in writing by Owner, unless the costs of disassembly, removal, transportation, reassembly, and remobilization, as submitted to and accepted by Owner (with advice of Engineer) would exceed the cost of continuing to rent the item(s) during the period(s) of inactivity. Contractor is responsible for obtaining Owner’s written approval for compensation for construction equipment and machinery for periods of inactivity. Owner is not responsible for retroactively approving such inactivity. “Period of inactivity” for such items includes periods when the construction equipment or machinery is not used or necessary for the logical and efficient progression of the Work, or when other, available equipment or machinery is suitable for performing the given task. 5) Condition of Equipment and Machinery: Construction equipment and machinery will be compensable only for serviceable construction equipment and machinery capable of efficiently performing its intended function at the Site. Construction equipment and machinery not in compliance with this Paragraph SC-13.01.B.5.c.5) is not eligible for compensation. 6) Capped Compensation: Compensation paid Contractor for a given item of Contractor-owned construction equipment or machinery will be capped at, and shall not exceed, the comparable purchase price of such item of equal or comparable capacity and capability. SC-13.01.C.2 Supplement Paragraph 13.01.C.2 by adding the following definition of small tools and hand tools: a. For purposes of this paragraph, “small tools and hand tools” means items in one or more of the following categories: (1) Items that are ordinarily required for the performing worker’s job function, including but not limited to equipment which ordinarily has no associated licensing, insurance, or substantive storage costs; such as hammers, wrenches, socket tools, manual saws, power saws, chainsaws, common power tools, impact drills, threaders, benders, transits and theodolites and related equipment, and other tools transportable by hand, regardless of ownership of such items; (2) Items such Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 Exhibit C—Geotechnical Baseline Report Supplement to the Supplementary Conditions. EJCDC® C-800, Supplementary Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 13 of 15 as gang-boxes, ladders, hand carts and similar wheeled items manually operated by workers, extension cords, and similar items; (3) common testing equipment such as insulation testers (megger-testing equipment), amp meters, gas detectors, pressure gauges, and similar items; (4) A purchase price (if purchased new, at retail) of $500, although such limit is not absolute, and certain items may be deemed by Owner or Engineer as “small tools or hand tools” (and not eligible for compensation) even though such item may have a purchase price greater than the amount indicated in this Paragraph 13.01.C.2. SC-13.03 Delete Paragraph 13.03.E in its entirety and insert the following in its place: E. Adjustments in Unit Price 1. Contractor or Owner shall be entitled to an adjustment in the unit price with respect to an item of Unit Price Work if: a. the extended price of a particular item of Unit Price Work amounts to five (5) percent or more of the Contract Price (based on estimated quantities at the time of Contract formation) and the variation in the quantity of that particular item of Unit Price Work actually furnished or performed by Contractor differs by more than twenty (20) percent from the estimated quantity of such item indicated in the Agreement; and b. Contractor’s unit costs to perform the item of Unit Price Work have changed materially and significantly as a result of the quantity change. 2. The adjustment in unit price will account for and be coordinated with any related changes in quantities of other items of Work, and in Contractor’s costs to perform such other Work, such that the resulting overall change in Contract Price is equitable to Owner and Contractor. 3. Adjusted unit prices will apply to all units of that item. ARTICLE 14—TESTS AND INSPECTIONS; CORRECTION, REMOVAL, OR ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK No Supplementary Conditions in this Article. ARTICLE 15—PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR, SET OFFS; COMPLETIONS; CORRECTION PERIOD 15.03 Substantial Completion SC-15.03.B Add the following new subparagraph to Paragraph 15.03.B: 1. If some or all of the Work has been determined by Engineer not to be at a point of Substantial Completion and will require re-inspection or re-testing by Engineer or other entity retained by Owner, the cost of such re-inspection or re-testing, including the cost of time, travel and living expenses, will be paid by Contractor to Owner. If Contractor does not pay, or the parties are unable to agree as to the amount owed, then Owner may impose a reasonable set-off against payments due under this Article 15. ARTICLE 16—SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION No Supplementary Conditions in this Article. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 Exhibit C—Geotechnical Baseline Report Supplement to the Supplementary Conditions. EJCDC® C-800, Supplementary Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 14 of 15 ARTICLE 17—FINAL RESOLUTIONS OF DISPUTES 17.02 Arbitration SC-17.02 Add the following new paragraph immediately after Paragraph 17.01. SC-17.02 Arbitration A. All matters subject to final resolution under this Article will be settled by arbitration administered by the American Arbitration Association in accordance with its Construction Industry Arbitration Rules (subject to the conditions and limitations of this Paragraph SC-17.02). Any controversy or claim in the amount of $100,000 or less will be settled in accordance with the American Arbitration Association’s supplemental rules for Fixed Time and Cost Construction Arbitration. This agreement to arbitrate will be specifically enforceable under the prevailing law of any court having jurisdiction. B. The demand for arbitration will be filed in writing with the other party to the Contract and with the selected arbitration administrator, and a copy will be concurrently sent to Engineer for information. The demand for arbitration will be made within the specific time required in Article 17, or, if no specified time is applicable, within a reasonable time after the matter in question has arisen, and in no event will any such demand be made after the date when institution of legal or equitable proceedings based on such matter in question would be barred by the applicable statute of limitations. C. The arbitration will be held in the same municipality as the Owner’s principal office location. D. The arbitrator(s) must be licensed engineers, contractors, attorneys, or construction managers. Hearings will take place pursuant to the standard procedures of the Construction Arbitration Rules that contemplate in-person hearings. The arbitrator(s) will have no authority to award punitive or other damages not measured by the prevailing party's actual damages, except as may be required by statute or the Contract. Any award in an arbitration initiated under this clause will be limited to monetary damages and include no injunction or direction to any party other than the direction to pay a monetary amount. E. The Arbitrator(s) will have the authority to allocate the costs of the arbitration process among the parties, but will only have the authority to allocate attorneys' fees if a specific Law or Regulation or this Contract permits them to do so. F. The award of the arbitrator(s) must be accompanied by a reasoned written opinion and a concise breakdown of the award. The written opinion will cite the Contract provisions deemed applicable and relied on in making the award. G. The parties agree that failure or refusal of a party to pay its required share of the deposits for arbitrator compensation or administrative charges will constitute a waiver by that party to present evidence or cross-examine witness. In such event, the other party shall be required to present evidence and legal argument as the arbitrator(s) may require for the making of an award. Such waiver will not allow for a default judgment against the non-paying party in the absence of evidence presented as provided for above. H. No arbitration arising out of or relating to the Contract will include by consolidation, joinder, or in any other manner any other individual or entity (including Engineer, and Engineer’s Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 Exhibit C—Geotechnical Baseline Report Supplement to the Supplementary Conditions. EJCDC® C-800, Supplementary Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 15 of 15 consultants and the officers, directors, partners, agents, employees or consultants of any of them) who is not a party to this Contract unless: 1. the inclusion of such other individual or entity will allow complete relief to be afforded among those who are already parties to the arbitration; 2. such other individual or entity is substantially involved in a question of law or fact which is common to those who are already parties to the arbitration, and which will arise in such proceedings; 3. such other individual or entity is subject to arbitration under a contract with either Owner or Contractor, or consents to being joined in the arbitration; and 4. the consolidation or joinder is in compliance with the arbitration administrator’s procedural rules. I. The award will be final. Judgment may be entered upon it in any court having jurisdiction thereof, and it will not be subject to modification or appeal, subject to provisions of the Laws and Regulations relating to vacating or modifying an arbitral award. J. Except as may be required by Laws or Regulations, neither party nor an arbitrator may disclose the existence, content, or results of any arbitration hereunder without the prior written consent of both parties, with the exception of any disclosure required by Laws and Regulations or the Contract. To the extent any disclosure is allowed pursuant to the exception, the disclosure must be strictly and narrowly limited to maintain confidentiality to the extent possible. 17.03 Attorneys’ Fees SC-17.03 Add the following new paragraph immediately after Paragraph 17.02. SC-17.03 Attorneys’ Fees A. For any matter subject to final resolution under this Article, the prevailing party shall be entitled to an award of its attorneys’ fees incurred in the final resolution proceedings, in an equitable amount to be determined in the discretion of the court, arbitrator, arbitration panel, or other arbiter of the matter subject to final resolution, taking into account the parties’ initial demand or defense positions in comparison with the final result. ARTICLE 18—MISCELLANEOUS No Supplementary Conditions in this Article. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 ANY PROPRIETOR/PARTNER/EXECUTIVEOFFICER/MEMBER EXCLUDED? INSR ADDL SUBRLTRINSD WVD PRODUCER CONTACTNAME: FAXPHONE(A/C, No):(A/C, No, Ext): E-MAILADDRESS: INSURER A : INSURED INSURER B : INSURER C : INSURER D : INSURER E : INSURER F : POLICY NUMBER POLICY EFF POLICY EXPTYPE OF INSURANCE LIMITS(MM/DD/YYYY) (MM/DD/YYYY) AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY UMBRELLA LIAB EXCESS LIAB WORKERS COMPENSATION AND EMPLOYERS' LIABILITY DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS / LOCATIONS / VEHICLES (ACORD 101, Additional Remarks Schedule, may be attached if more space is required) AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE EACH OCCURRENCE $ DAMAGE TO RENTEDCLAIMS-MADE OCCUR $PREMISES (Ea occurrence) MED EXP (Any one person) $ PERSONAL & ADV INJURY $ GEN'L AGGREGATE LIMIT APPLIES PER:GENERAL AGGREGATE $ PRO-POLICY LOC PRODUCTS - COMP/OP AGGJECT OTHER:$ COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT $(Ea accident) ANY AUTO BODILY INJURY (Per person) $ OWNED SCHEDULED BODILY INJURY (Per accident) $AUTOS ONLY AUTOS HIRED NON-OWNED PROPERTY DAMAGE $AUTOS ONLY AUTOS ONLY (Per accident) $ OCCUR EACH OCCURRENCE CLAIMS-MADE AGGREGATE $ DED RETENTION $ PER OTH-STATUTE ER E.L. EACH ACCIDENT E.L. DISEASE - EA EMPLOYEE $ If yes, describe under E.L. DISEASE - POLICY LIMITDESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS below INSURER(S) AFFORDING COVERAGE NAIC # COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY Y / N N / A (Mandatory in NH) SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, NOTICE WILL BE DELIVERED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE POLICY PROVISIONS. THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES. LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AFFIRMATIVELY OR NEGATIVELY AMEND, EXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW. THIS CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE DOES NOT CONSTITUTE A CONTRACT BETWEEN THE ISSUING INSURER(S), AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE OR PRODUCER, AND THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. IMPORTANT: If the certificate holder is an ADDITIONAL INSURED, the policy(ies) must have ADDITIONAL INSURED provisions or be endorsed. If SUBROGATION IS WAIVED, subject to the terms and conditions of the policy, certain policies may require an endorsement. A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such endorsement(s). COVERAGES CERTIFICATE NUMBER:REVISION NUMBER: CERTIFICATE HOLDER CANCELLATION © 1988-2015 ACORD CORPORATION. All rights reserved.ACORD 25 (2016/03) CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE DATE (MM/DD/YYYY) $ $ $ $ $ The ACORD name and logo are registered marks of ACORD 8/21/2026 (406) 922-6030 (406) 587-9162 10677 Sime Construction, Inc. 190 Ramshorn Trl Bozeman, MT 59718 27960 1 A 1,000,000 X EPP 0295414 12/31/2023 12/31/2026 500,000 10,000 1,000,000 2,000,000 2,000,000 1,000,000A X EBA 0295414 12/31/2025 12/31/2026 7,000,000A X EPP 0295414 12/31/2023 12/31/2026 7,000,000 0 A Installation Floater EPP 0295414 12/31/2023 Limit 400,000 B Pollution Policy CPY G72510926 003 2/28/2025 2/28/2027 Per Act/Poll Condit 1,000,000 Pollution Liability Policy Aggregate is $2,000,000 Employers Liability Limits $1,000,000/$1,000,000/$1,000,000 - Cincinnati, 12/31/2023-2026 EPP 0295414 RE: Valley Center Lift Station City of Bozeman and State of Montana, Engineer, and Engineer's Consultants are included as Primary Non-Contributory Additional Insured on the General Liability Policy and Additional Insured on the Automobile Liability and Umbrella Liability Policy, if required by written contract or agreement, subject to the SEE ATTACHED ACORD 101 City of Bozeman PO Box 1230 Bozeman, MT 59771-1230 SIMECON-01 KVANDERHOFF First West, Inc. P.O. Box 1800 Bozeman, MT 59771 Marci Stoppel, CIC, CISR mstoppel@1stwestinsurance.com Cincinnati Insurance Company Illinois Union Insurance Company 12/31/2026 X X X X X X X X Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 ANY PROPRIETOR/PARTNER/EXECUTIVEOFFICER/MEMBER EXCLUDED? INSR ADDL SUBRLTRINSD WVD PRODUCER CONTACTNAME: FAXPHONE(A/C, No):(A/C, No, Ext): E-MAILADDRESS: INSURER A : INSURED INSURER B : INSURER C : INSURER D : INSURER E : INSURER F : POLICY NUMBER POLICY EFF POLICY EXPTYPE OF INSURANCE LIMITS(MM/DD/YYYY) (MM/DD/YYYY) AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY UMBRELLA LIAB EXCESS LIAB WORKERS COMPENSATION AND EMPLOYERS' LIABILITY DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS / LOCATIONS / VEHICLES (ACORD 101, Additional Remarks Schedule, may be attached if more space is required) AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE EACH OCCURRENCE $ DAMAGE TO RENTEDCLAIMS-MADE OCCUR $PREMISES (Ea occurrence) MED EXP (Any one person) $ PERSONAL & ADV INJURY $ GEN'L AGGREGATE LIMIT APPLIES PER:GENERAL AGGREGATE $ PRO-POLICY LOC PRODUCTS - COMP/OP AGGJECT OTHER:$ COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT $(Ea accident) ANY AUTO BODILY INJURY (Per person) $ OWNED SCHEDULED BODILY INJURY (Per accident) $AUTOS ONLY AUTOS HIRED NON-OWNED PROPERTY DAMAGE $AUTOS ONLY AUTOS ONLY (Per accident) $ OCCUR EACH OCCURRENCE CLAIMS-MADE AGGREGATE $ DED RETENTION $ PER OTH-STATUTE ER E.L. EACH ACCIDENT E.L. DISEASE - EA EMPLOYEE $ If yes, describe under E.L. DISEASE - POLICY LIMITDESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS below INSURER(S) AFFORDING COVERAGE NAIC # COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY Y / N N / A (Mandatory in NH) SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, NOTICE WILL BE DELIVERED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE POLICY PROVISIONS. THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES. LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AFFIRMATIVELY OR NEGATIVELY AMEND, EXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW. THIS CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE DOES NOT CONSTITUTE A CONTRACT BETWEEN THE ISSUING INSURER(S), AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE OR PRODUCER, AND THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. IMPORTANT: If the certificate holder is an ADDITIONAL INSURED, the policy(ies) must have ADDITIONAL INSURED provisions or be endorsed. If SUBROGATION IS WAIVED, subject to the terms and conditions of the policy, certain policies may require an endorsement. A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such endorsement(s). COVERAGES CERTIFICATE NUMBER:REVISION NUMBER: CERTIFICATE HOLDER CANCELLATION © 1988-2015 ACORD CORPORATION. All rights reserved.ACORD 25 (2016/03) CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE DATE (MM/DD/YYYY) $ $ $ $ $ The ACORD name and logo are registered marks of ACORD 8/5/2026 (406) 869-4427 15105 Sime Construction, Inc. A Member of the MCCF 190 Ramshorn Drive Bozeman, MT 59718 A Workers Compensation SP4067557 1/1/2026 Coverage A Statutory Subject to the terms and conditions of the policy as issued by the Insurance Company. Self-Insured Retention for Work Comp $1,250,000 per occurrence. Covers Montana State Resident Employees. All claims are administered by the Montana Contractor Compensation Fund (MCCF). Any And All Projects As Required By Written Contract City of Bozeman & State of Montana PO Box 1230 Bozeman, MT 59771 MONTCON-09 JMCMILLAN Billings Office Marsh McLennan Agency LLC P.O. Box 30638 Billings, MT 59107-0638 Jana McMillan Jana.McMillan@MarshMMA.com Safety National Casualty Corporation 1/1/2027 Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 FORM NUMBER: EFFECTIVE DATE: The ACORD name and logo are registered marks of ACORD ADDITIONAL REMARKS ADDITIONAL REMARKS SCHEDULE FORM TITLE: Page of THIS ADDITIONAL REMARKS FORM IS A SCHEDULE TO ACORD FORM, ACORD 101 (2008/01) AGENCY CUSTOMER ID: LOC #: AGENCY NAMED INSURED POLICY NUMBER CARRIER NAIC CODE © 2008 ACORD CORPORATION. All rights reserved. First West, Inc. SIMECON-01 SEE PAGE 1 1 SEE PAGE 1 ACORD 25 Certificate of Liability Insurance 0 SEE P 1 Sime Construction, Inc. 190 Ramshorn Trl Bozeman, MT 59718 SEE PAGE 1 KVANDERHOFF 1 Description of Operations/Locations/Vehicles: policy terms and conditions per form GA472 05-20; AA288 06-20; US 4096 10-10; available upon request. Umbrella Liability Policy is in excess of the General Liability and Automobile Liability Policy, subject to the terms and conditions of the policy per form US 101 9-20; available upon request. General Liability Coverage includes 45 Day notice of cancellation, subject to the terms and conditions of the policy per form IA4087; available upon request. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 LENDER'S LOSS PAYABLE PHONEAGENCY COMPANY(A/C, No, Ext): FAX E-MAIL (A/C, No):ADDRESS: SUB CODE: AGENCY CUSTOMER ID #: INSURED LOAN NUMBER POLICY NUMBER EFFECTIVE DATE EXPIRATION DATE THIS REPLACES PRIOR EVIDENCE DATED: LOCATION/DESCRIPTION COVERAGE / PERILS / FORMS AMOUNT OF INSURANCE DEDUCTIBLE NAME AND ADDRESS CONTINUED UNTIL TERMINATED IF CHECKED ADDITIONAL INSURED LOSS PAYEE MORTGAGEE LOAN # PERILS INSURED BASIC BROAD SPECIAL THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS EVIDENCE OF PROPERTY INSURANCE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES. LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. THIS EVIDENCE OF PROPERTY INSURANCE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE ADDITIONAL INTEREST NAMED BELOW. THIS EVIDENCE DOES NOT AFFIRMATIVELY OR NEGATIVELY AMEND, EXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW. THIS EVIDENCE OF INSURANCE DOES NOT CONSTITUTE A CONTRACT BETWEEN THE ISSUING INSURER(S), AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE OR PRODUCER, AND THE ADDITIONAL INTEREST. SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, NOTICE WILL BE DELIVERED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE POLICY PROVISIONS. PROPERTY INFORMATION COVERAGE INFORMATION REMARKS (Including Special Conditions) CANCELLATION ADDITIONAL INTEREST ACORD 27 (2016/03)© 1993-2015 ACORD CORPORATION. All rights reserved. EVIDENCE OF PROPERTY INSURANCE DATE (MM/DD/YYYY) CODE: AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE The ACORD name and logo are registered marks of ACORD 8/4/2026 Cincinnati Insurance Company PO Box 145496 Cincinnati, OH 45250-5496 First West, Inc. P.O. Box 1800 Bozeman, MT 59771 Sime Construction, Inc. 190 Ramshorn Drive Bozeman, MT 59718-8610 Special Conditions: Builder Risk - 4560 E. Valley Center Rd. Bozeman, MT 59718 Builders Risk Limit $1,892,732 Soft Costs Limit $75,000 Property at Unscheduled Storage Locations Limit $50,000 Property In Transit Limit $50,000 Deductible $10,000 City of Bozeman PO Box 1230 Bozeman, MT 59771-1230 AHERNANDEZ EBN 0783024 7/29/2026 7/29/2027 frontdesk@1stwestinsurance.com 25006 SIMECON-01 X Builders Risk x Additional Named Insured Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 THE CINCINNATI INSURANCE COMPANIES THE CINCINNATI INSURANCE COMPANY THE CINCINNATI INDEMNITY COMPANY THE CINCINNATI CASUALTY COMPANY Named Insured: Policy Number: Policy Period: to Effective Date of Change: Endorsement Number: Agency Name: Explanation of Billing A change was recently made to your policy with The Cincinnati Insurance Companies. Attached to this summary is the endorsement that amends your policy. X SIME CONSTRUCTION, INC. EBN 078 30 24 07-29-2026 07-29-2027 07-29-2026 1 FIRST WEST, INC. 25-006 BOZEMAN, MT The additional premium for this endorsement is $NONE This is for the time period of to You will receive a statement based on the payment option you have selected. Please contact your agency if you have any questions concerning your policy or statement: This is not a bill. No payment is necessary at this time. .premium 07-29-2026 07-29-2027 FIRST WEST, INC. 1905 STADIUM DR BOZEMAN, MT 59715-1799 406-587-5111 IA 4319 08 07 Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 mene NAA PY. rsEndo ONT M LICPO tAgen -NT E H toed MEE TES sus ORSND ANGH I t EGE T CN enem ec NA MEE ors End Effer CHL RSDO ofr thAll O AER N E bey Num erag GEN .ISTH Policr a / G LYUL bey Num Auto : FARE Polic te t ofpar T C I e Dativ ng rmi DA fond E R to aed ES t # hAttac ALE 1 07-29-2026 FIRST WEST, INC. 25-006 BOZEMAN, MT EBN 078 30 24 SIME CONSTRUCTION, INC. e DattiveceEffnt emersdoat EnDue NOTIARM INFOPREMIUM REFER TO IA4319 ¤ es po/Ex al Leg to eis a Cods itsLim ¤ Date ngcha asn/Cl ¤ ss ionirat e) ar atioic ines pe/Ex is (and ifs f Bue o tivec ¤x Clas¤ Lin¤ Eff¤ bytedee $ ntio nt Pla msFor ica ind po $ ripc Paymen¤ ¤ss asedhat ion Destion tres dreg Ad endam natrmi aLoc inteal ilina y is the Deteium /ty tionAddi M¤ Prem¤ per Pro ¤ e dure ec redCove clVehi nsd I d t ransu ¤ es ¤on Name¤ Inrlying tiblc ipticr s:lowgr Unde¤ Dedu¤ s/De fol as sRate ressu yEntit adrelicIt Revised Annual Installment Payment(s) Subsequent Annual Installments Increased by ALL OTHER REASON FOR CHANGE AMENDING POLICY COVERAGE ADDRESS TO READ: 4560 E VALLEY CENTER RD BOZEMAN MT 59718 AMENDING IA904 TO READ: LOC 1 - 4560 E VALLEY CENTER RD BOZEMAN MT 59718 / G foronA geuan Chato Reasge ar f O ran its, with IA c., Inefic n.es1 1 43 ioss229 u rmi pe Insof 1 ial ter ma Serv tedopyrigh cdes ic luInc MT ce Page of 08-12-2026 15:04 1 2 Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 Countersigned By: (Authorized Agent) REMOVAL PERMIT If Covered Property is removed to a new location that is described on this Policy change, you may extend this insurance to include that Covered Property at each location during the removal. Coverage at each location will apply in the proportion that the value at each location bears to the value of all Covered Property being removed. This permit applies up to 10 days after the effective date of this Policy Change; after that, this insurance does not apply at the previous location. f O ran its, with IA c., Inefic n.es1 1 43 ioss229 u rmi pe Insof 1 ial ter ma Serv tedopyrigh cdes ic luInc MT ce Page of 08-12-2026 15:04 2 2 Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 IA 904 04 04 THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY. PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY. SCHEDULE OF LOCATIONS LOC. STREET ADDRESS CITY STATE ZIP CODE 1 4560 E VALLEY CENTER RD BOZEMAN, MT 59718-9755 Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 THE CINCINNATI INSURANCE COMPANIES THE CINCINNATI INSURANCE COMPANY THE CINCINNATI INDEMNITY COMPANY THE CINCINNATI CASUALTY COMPANY Named Insured: Policy Number: Policy Period: to Effective Date of Change: Endorsement Number: Agency Name: Explanation of Billing A change was recently made to your policy with The Cincinnati Insurance Companies. Attached to this summary is the endorsement that amends your policy. X SIME CONSTRUCTION, INC. EBN 078 30 24 07-29-2026 07-29-2027 07-29-2026 2 FIRST WEST, INC. 25-006 BOZEMAN, MT The additional premium for this endorsement is $273 This is for the time period of to You will receive a statement based on the payment option you have selected. Please contact your agency if you have any questions concerning your policy or statement: This is not a bill. No payment is necessary at this time. .premium 07-29-2026 07-29-2027 FIRST WEST, INC. 1905 STADIUM DR BOZEMAN, MT 59715-1799 406-587-5111 IA 4319 08 07 Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 mene NAA PY. rsEndo ONT M LICPO tAgen -NT E H toed MEE TES sus ORSND ANGH I t EGE T CN enem ec NA MEE ors End Effer CHL RSDO ofr thAll O AER N E bey Num erag GEN .ISTH Policr a / G LYUL bey Num Auto : FARE Polic te t ofpar T C I e Dativ ng rmi DA fond E R to aed ES t # hAttac ALE 2 07-29-2026 FIRST WEST, INC. 25-006 BOZEMAN, MT EBN 078 30 24 SIME CONSTRUCTION, INC. e DattiveceEffnt emersdoat EnDue NOTIARM INFOPREMIUM REFER TO IA4319Additional ¤ es po/Ex al Leg to eis a Cods itsLim ¤ Date ngcha asn/Cl ¤ ss ionirat e) ar atioic ines pe/Ex is (and ifs f Bue o tivec ¤x Clas¤ Lin¤ Eff¤ bytedee $ ntio nt Pla msFor ica ind po $ ripc Paymen¤ ¤ss asedhat ion Destion tres dreg Ad endam natrmi aLoc inteal ilina y is the Deteium /ty tionAddi M¤ Prem¤ per Pro ¤ e dure ec redCove clVehi nsd I d t ransu ¤ es ¤on Name¤ Inrlying tiblc ipticr s:lowgr Unde¤ Dedu¤ s/De fol as sRate ressu yEntit adrelicIt Revised Annual Installment Payment(s) Subsequent Annual Installments Increased by ALL OTHER REASON FOR CHANGE AMENDING MA561 COVERAGE PROVISIONS PART A. LIMITS PER REVISED ATTACHED / G foronA geuan Chato Reasge ar f O ran its, with IA c., Inefic n.es1 1 43 ioss229 u rmi pe Insof 1 ial ter ma Serv tedopyrigh cdes ic luInc MT ce Page of 08-18-2026 09:18 1 2 Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 Countersigned By: (Authorized Agent) REMOVAL PERMIT If Covered Property is removed to a new location that is described on this Policy change, you may extend this insurance to include that Covered Property at each location during the removal. Coverage at each location will apply in the proportion that the value at each location bears to the value of all Covered Property being removed. This permit applies up to 10 days after the effective date of this Policy Change; after that, this insurance does not apply at the previous location. f O ran its, with IA c., Inefic n.es1 1 43 ioss229 u rmi pe Insof 1 ial ter ma Serv tedopyrigh cdes ic luInc MT ce Page of 08-18-2026 09:18 2 2 Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 A Stock Insurance Company BUILDERS' RISK INLAND MARINE COVERAGE PART DECLARATIONS Attached to and forming part of POLICY NUMBER: Named Insured is the same as it appears in the Common Policy Declarations COVERAGE PROVISIONSa. The Cincinnati Insurance Company EBN 078 30 24 Loc. No.DESCRIPTION Limit Ded. 1-1 4560 E VALLEY CENTER RD 1,892,732 10,000 BOZEMAN, MT 59718-9755 b.Covered property in transit $ c.Covered property at unscheduled storage locations $ d.All Covered Property in any one occurrence $ 50,000 50,000 1,892,732 X box to activate ¤ The Coinsurance Clause does not apply DEDUCTIBLE For all covered perils unless a different deductible is indicated below or elsewhere in the policy: $ Theft:$ SEE ABOVE 10,000 MORTGAGE HOLDER Loc. No.Name and Address FORMS AND/OR ENDORSEMENTS APPLICABLE TO BUILDERS' RISK INLAND MARINE COVERAGE BUILDERS' RISK INLAND MARINE SUPPLEMENTAL SCHEDULEMA4093 02/21 BUILDERS' RISK INLAND MARINE COVERAGE FORMMA112 02/21 SOFT COSTS, RENTAL INCOME AND EARNINGS ENDORSEMENTMA229 02/21 AMENDMENT OF COVERAGE - CYBER INCIDENT EXCLUSIONMA323 07/21 EXCLUSION OF LOSS DUE TO VIRUS OR BACTERIAMA324 02/25 BUILDERS' RISK INLAND MARINE FLOOD ENDORSEMENTMA214 02/21 BUILDERS' RISK INLAND MARINE EARTHQUAKE AND VOLCANIC ERUPTION ENDORSEMENT MA216 02/21 EQUIPMENT BREAKDOWN COVERAGE (EXCLUDING PRODUCTION EQUIPMENT) MA242 02/21 SPECIAL PROVISIONS (if any) MA 561 02 21 Page of Included copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office, Inc., with its permission. EBN 078 30 24 1 1 Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 IA 4443 04 25 The Cincinnati Insurance Company The Cincinnati Casualty Company The Cincinnati Indemnity Company Policy Number: Effective Date: Named Insured: For professional advice and policy questions or changes, please contact your local independent agency: Dear Policyholder: Thank you Thank you for trusting The Cincinnati Insurance Companies with your commercial insurance coverage.We recognize that locally based independent agents have the working knowledge to help you choose the right insurance company for your needs. Together with your local independent insurance agency, we are committed to providing you with the highest level of service. Please review your enclosed policy information to verify your coverage details,as well as deductibles and coverage amounts. Should your needs change, your agent is available to review and update your policy. Please promptly report claims If you experience a policy-related loss, you may report it by contacting your local professional independent agency representing The Cincinnati Insurance Companies or by directly calling us toll-free at 877-242-2544 and providing your policy number and claim-related information. Sincerely, Chet Swisher Senior Vice President -Commercial Lines EBN 078 30 24 07-29-2026 SIME CONSTRUCTION, INC. FIRST WEST, INC. 1905 STADIUM DR BOZEMAN, MT 59715-1799 406-587-5111 Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 IA 4407 03 13 NOTICE TO POLICYHOLDERS DIRECT BILL ACCOUNT CREDIT PROCEDURE This is a notice of how an account credit will be applied to your policy or to all of the policies being billed as single account. Account Credits A.If your account is comprised of a single policy and an endorsement or premium audit results in a credit (return premium), the credit is applied to that policy. If your account does not have a future installment due at the time the endorsement or audit is processed, the credit is refunded to the payor listed for your account. If you do not wish for credits to be automatically applied to future unpaid installments, please contact us to request a refund.Please note that the amount of the refund may vary based upon the date you contact us and your billing schedule. B.If your account is comprised of more than one policy and an endorsement or premium audit results in a credit (return premium), the credit is applied in the following manner: •Payments previously applied to your account are deferred. •The credit that results from the endorsement or audit is applied to the policy generating the credit. •The payments that were deferred are then reapplied to the account in order to satisfy the amount due. •Any excess payment that results from the credit is applied proportionately to your policies with a future payment or installment due. •If you do not wish for credits to be automatically applied to future unpaid installments, please contact us to request a refund. Please note that the amount of the refund may vary based upon the date you contact us and your billing schedule. •If your account does not have a future installment or payment due at the time the endorsement or audit is processed, the credit is refunded to the payor listed for your account. (Does not apply to audit return premium for payors located in New York; Does not apply to premiums due more than 30 days from the date of processing for payors located in New Hampshire. These credits are automatically refunded to the payor) To request a refund, contact us at: Mailing Address Toll free phone number Electronic mail The Cincinnati Insurance Company 877-942-2455 CinciBill@cinfin.com PO Box 14529 Cincinnati, OH 45250-0529 Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 The Cincinnati Insurance Company A Stock Insurance Company Headquarters: 6200 S. Gilmore Road, Fairfield, OH 45014-5141 Mailing address: P.O. Box 145496, Cincinnati, OH 45250-5496 www.cinfin.com n 513-870-2000 COMMON POLICY DECLARATIONS POLICY NUMBER NAMED INSURED ADDRESS (Number & Street, Town, County, State & Zip Code) Previous Policy Number: Billing Method:DIRECT BILL EBN 078 30 24 SIME CONSTRUCTION, INC. REFER TO IA905 190 RAMSHORN DR BOZEMAN, MT 59718-8610 NEW FROer: mouto EO mby nu t Aep AW Polic ge exces SS aar ager DNG Gor vl co ILUR d / an lA YA ileob VBD TNDA tomu N HOS. tion A : SDRE12: ipcr TOM: AIt d: Desess FROer: MAOy Per siny / Bu mby nu T IME Entital Polic ge RTA Leg City aar M., A yc Gor 01 Agen : d / n Aio TOM: e abil Polic FIRST WEST, INC. 25-006 BOZEMAN, MT EBN 078 30 24 ORGANIZATION (ANY OTHER) 07-29-2026 07-29-2027 OO LICY.S POTHIATDE T PROU TYIE AG,ED IN HE INSURANCE AS STL HIS ALIN VIO FAND PAYMENT OTH TF REE W WICYPO TOTECTS TOTHE F R ERMHE PREMIUM, HE TRET L SUBJURN FORMS APPLICABLE TO ALL COVERAGE PARTS: COMMON POLICY CONDITIONSIL0017 11/98 SUMMARY OF PREMIUMS CHARGEDIA102A 09/08 SCHEDULE OF LOCATIONSIA904 04/04 NAMED INSURED SCHEDULEIA905 02/98 POLICYHOLDER NOTICE TERRORISM INSURANCE COVERAGEIA4236 06/20 NOTICE OF PRIVACY PRACTICESIA4521 03/20 NOTICE OF IMPORTANT PROVISIONSIA4543MT 03/22 NOTICE TO POLICYHOLDERSIP446 08/01 WAR EXCLUSIONIA325 01/23 NUCLEAR, BIOLOGICAL, CHEMICAL AND RADIOLOGICAL HAZARDS EXCLUSIONIA327 07/23 MONTANA CHANGES - CANCELLATION AND NONRENEWALIA4163MT 09/16 MONTANA CHANGES - CONFORMITY WITH STATUTESIA4164MT 09/20 CAP ON LOSSES FROM CERTIFIED ACTS OF TERRORISMIA4238 01/15 SIGNATURE ENDORSEMENTIA4338 05/24 BUILDERS' RISK INLAND MARINE COVERAGE PART DECLARATIONSMA561 02/21 Page ofIA 509 01 12 EBN 078 30 24 1 2 07-20-2026 14:34 Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 Countersigned By (Date)(Authorized Representative) Page ofIA 509 01 12 EBN 078 30 24 2 2 07-20-2026 14:34 Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 IL 00 17 11 98 Copyright, Insurance Services Office, Inc., 1998 COMMON POLICY CONDITIONS All Coverage Parts included in this policyare subject to the following conditions. A.Cancellation 1.The first Named Insured shown in the Declarations may cancel this policy by mailing or delivering to us advance written notice of cancellation. 2.We may cancel this policy by mailing or delivering to the first Named Insured writ- ten notice of cancellation at least: a.10 days before the effective date of cancellation if we cancel for nonpay- ment of premium; or b.30 days before the effective date of cancellation if we cancel for any other reason. 3.We will mail or deliver our notice to the first Named Insured's last mailing address known to us. 4.Notice of cancellation will state the effec- tive date of cancellation. The policy pe- riod will end on that date. 5.If this policy is cancelled,we will send the first Named Insured any premium refund due. If we cancel, the refund will be pro rata. If the first Named Insured cancels, the refund may be less than pro rata. The cancellation will be effective even if we have not made or offered a refund. 6.If notice is mailed, proof of mailing will be sufficient proof of notice. B.Changes This policy contains all the agreements be- tween you and us concerning the insurance af- forded. The first Named Insured shown in the Declarations is authorized to make changes in the terms of this policy with our consent. This policy's terms can be amended or waived only by endorsement issued by us and made a part of this policy. C.Examination of Your Books and Records We may examine and audit your books and records as they relate to this policy at anytime during the policy period and up to three years afterward. D.Inspections and Surveys 1.We have the right to: a.Make inspections and surveys at any time; b.Give you reports on the conditions we find; and c.Recommend changes. 2.We are not obligated to make any inspec- tions, surveys,reports or recommenda- tions and any such actions we do under- take relate only to insurability and the premiums to be charged. We do not make safety inspections. We do not un- dertake to perform the duty of any person or organization to provide for the health or safety of workers or the public. And we do not warrant that conditions: a.Are safe or healthful; or b.Comply with laws,regulations, codes or standards. 3.Paragraphs 1.and 2.of this condition ap- ply not only to us, but also to any rating, advisory, rate service or similar organiza- tion which makes insurance inspections, surveys, reports or recommendations. 4.Paragraph 2.of this condition does not apply to any inspections, surveys, reports or recommendations we may make rela- tive to certification,under state or munici- pal statutes,ordinances or regulations, of boilers, pressure vessels or elevators. E.Premiums The first Named Insured shown in the Declara- tions: 1.Is responsible for the payment of all pre- miums; and 2.Will be the payee for any return premiums we pay. F.Transfer of Your Rights and Duties Under this Policy Your rights and duties under this policy may not be transferred without our written consent except in the case of death of an individual named insured. If you die, your rights and duties will be trans- ferred to your legal representative but only while acting within the scope of duties as your legal representative.Until your legal represen- tative is appointed, anyone having proper tem- porary custody of your property will have your rights and duties but only with respect to that property. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 ALL OTHER TERMS AND CONDITIONS REMAIN UNCHANGED IA 102 A 09 08 SUMMARY OF PREMIUMS CHARGED Attached to and forming part of POLICY NUMBER:Effective Date: Named Insured: THIS POLICY CONSISTS OF THE FOLLOWING COVERAGEPARTS FOR WHICH A PREMIUM CHARGE IS INDICATED Commercial Property Coverage Part $ Commercial General Liability Coverage Part $ Commercial Auto Coverage Part $ Commercial Umbrella / Excess Liability Coverage Part $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ Terrorism Coverage $ Installment Charge $ $ PAYMENTS First Remaining Installment Installment(s) Automobile Coverages,Employers Liability, Employment Practices Liability Coverage, Professional Liability Coverage, Terrorism Coverage and / or Wrongful Acts Coverage, if included in the policy, are subject to Annual Adjustment of rates and premium on each anniversary of the policy. Commercial Umbrella and Excess Liability, if included in the policy, may be subject to Annual Adjustment of premium on each anniversary. Refer to the Commercial Umbrella or Excess Liability Coverage Part Declarations form to see if this is applicable. EBN 078 30 24 07-29-2026 SIME CONSTRUCTION, INC. BUILDERS RISK 2,770 FULLY EARNED 25 ANNUAL TOTAL 2,795 PAY UP FRONT ** *SEE BILLING STATEMENT MAILED SEPARATELY Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 IA 904 04 04 THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY. PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY. SCHEDULE OF LOCATIONS LOC. STREET ADDRESS CITY STATE ZIP CODE 1 126 E VALLEY CENTER RD BOZEMAN, MT 59718 Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 IA 905 02 98 THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY. PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY. NAMED INSURED SCHEDULE This Schedule supplements the Declarations. SCHEDULE Named Insured: SIME CONSTRUCTION,INC. CITY OF BOZEMAN SBCONTRACTORS OF ANY TIER Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 IA 4236 06 20 Page 1 of 1 POLICYHOLDER NOTICE TERRORISM INSURANCE COVERAGE THIS ENDORSEMENT IS ATTACHED TO AND MADE PART OF YOUR POLICY IN RESPONSE TO THE DISCLOSURE REQUIREMENTS OF THE TERRORISM RISK INSURANCE ACT.THIS ENDORSEMENT DOES NOT GRANT ANY COVERAGE OR CHANGE THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF ANY COVERAGE UNDER THE POLICY. Your policy contains coverage for certain losses caused by terrorism. Premium: In accordance with the federal Terrorism Risk Insurance Act, we are required to notify you of the portion of the premium, if any, attributable to the coverage for terrorist acts certified under the Terrorism Risk Insurance Act. •Refer to the SUMMARY OF PREMIUMS CHARGED or DECLARATIONS PAGE for the portion of your premium that is attributable to coverage for terrorist acts certified under the Act. Federal Participation: The Act also requires us to provide disclosure of federal participation in payment of terrorism losses. •Under your policy, any losses caused by certified acts of terrorism would be partially reimbursed by the United States Government, Department of Treasury, under a formula established by federal law.Under this formula, the federal share equals a percentage,as specified in the Schedule below,of that portion of the amount of such insured losses that exceeds the applicable insurer retention. However,if aggregate insured losses attributable to terrorist acts certified under the Terrorism Risk Insurance Act exceed $100 billion in a calendar year, the Treasury shall not make any payment for any portion of the amount of such losses that exceeds $100 billion. •Schedule: Federal Share of Terrorism Losses Federal Share of Terrorism Losses Percentage Calendar Year Percentage Calendar Year 85%2015 80%2022 84%2016 80%2023 83%2017 80%2024 82%2018 80%2025 81%2019 80%2026 80%2020 80%2027 80%2021 Cap on Insurer Participation: If aggregate insured losses attributable to terrorist acts certified under the Terrorism Risk Insurance Act exceed $100 billion in a calendar year and we have met our insurer deductible under the Terrorism Risk Insurance Act, we shall not be liable for the payment of any portion of the amount of such losses that exceeds $100 billion, and in such case insured losses up to that amount are subject to pro rata allocation in accordance with procedures established by the Secretary of the Treasury. NOTE:IF YOUR POLICY IS A RENEWAL POLICY,THIS NOTICE IS PROVIDED TO SATISFY THE REQUIREMENTS UNDER THE TERRORISM RISK INSURANCE ACT FOR POLICYHOLDER DISCLOSURE:(1) AT THE TIME OF OUR OFFER TO RENEW THE POLICY AND (2)AT THE TIME THE RENEWAL IS COMPLETED. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 IA 4521 03 20 Page 1 of 1 NOTICE OF PRIVACY PRACTICES For additional information on our privacy policies, including state specific information, please visit https://www.cinfin.com/privacy-policy. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 IA 4543 MT 03 22 Page 1 of 1 NOTICE OF IMPORTANT PROVISIONS In accordance with Mont. Code Ann. § 33-15-334, this notice will outline important provisions within your insurance policy. Although certain provisions are highlighted below, this is not an exhaustive list of important provisions within your policy and you should read your entire policy to determine your rights, duties, coverages, and exclusions.If there are any discrepancies between the policy and this notice,the provisions of the policy govern.This notice does not alter your coverage in any way and is not part of your policy. The Declarations Page The Declarations page(s) of your policy typically provide a snapshot of basic coverage information including your specific coverage(s), limit(s) of insurance, deductible(s), and the policy period (i.e.,the time the policy is in force). Please review the declarations page(s)and, if included, summary of premiums to confirm the information is accurate, including your insurance limit(s)and premium(s). Definitions These provisions define the terms used throughout your policy that have special meaning. In order to understand the terms used in the policy, it is important to read this section. The Insuring Agreement or Coverage Section This provision outlines what is covered by the policy. Review this provision, along with the exclusions and definitions, to understand what is covered by your policy. Exclusions Exclusions and/or limitations describe what your insurance does not apply to. Exclusions and/or limitations may vary by coverage. The Conditions Conditions are provisions inserted in the policy that qualify or place limitations on the insurer’s promise to pay or perform. If the policy conditions are not met, the insurer can deny the claim.Common conditions in a policy include the requirement to file a proof of loss with the company, to protect property after a loss, and to cooperate during the company’s investigation or defense of a liability lawsuit. Endorsements and Riders Endorsements and Riders are written provisions that add to, delete, or modify provisions contained elsewhere in the policy. It is important that you read all Endorsements or Riders so you understand how your policy has been modified. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 IP 446 08 01 THE CINCINNATI INSURANCE COMPANY THE CINCINNATI CASUALTY COMPANY THE CINCINNATI INDEMNITY COMPANY NOTICE TO POLICYHOLDERS Please be advised that in your application for insurance you disclosed information to The Cincinnati Insurance Company, The Cincinnati Casualty Company and The Cincinnati Indemnity Company. The information dis- closed in the application and all information subsequently collected by any of these companies may be shared among all three. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 Includes copyrighted material of Insurance IA 325 01 23 Services Office,Inc.,with its permission.Page 1 of 2 THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY. PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY. WAR EXCLUSION This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the following: ALL COVERAGE FORMS FORMING A PART OF THE POLICY A.The following exclusion: 1.Replaces any War, War and Military Ac- tion,or War or Military Action exclusion included in any other Coverage Form, Coverage Part or endorsement forming a part of the policy to which this endorse- ment is attached; and 2.Is added to any other Coverage Form, Coverage Part, insuring agreement in- cluded therein or endorsement forming a part of the policy to which this endorse- ment is attached which does not already include a War,War and Military Action,or War or Military Action exclusion. War This insurance does not apply to: Any form of loss,damage, cost, expense or liability for damages arising directly or indirectly from: a."War"and "warlike action", including undeclared or civil "war"and "cyber hostilities"; b.Hostile action, including action in hin- dering or defending against an actual or expected attack, by any state, government, or sovereign using mili- tary personnel or other "agents"; or c.Insurrection, rebellion, revolution, usurped power,political violence or action taken by a state or govern- ment actor in hindering or defending against any of these, including "cyber hostilities"in connection with any of the foregoing. The attribution of an action will be deter- mined by relying on reasonable evidence such as, but not limited to: (1)Statements by an agency or de- partment of the United States government; (2)Statements by an international group of which the United States is a member, such as the United Nations or the North Atlantic Treaty Organization,or any member of such an international group;or (3)Statements by a "recognized commercial authority". This exclusion applies notwithstanding any- thing to the contrary in this policy or any ap- pendix or endorsement added to this policy. B.The following definitions are hereby added with respect to the exclusion in Section A.of this endorsement.: 1."Agents"means any person, entity, organ- ization or collection of persons, entities or organizations that have at any time been associated with or designated as having worked with or acted on behalf of any state, government,or sovereign. The attribution of the actors’status as "agents"will be determined by relying on reasonable evidence such as, but not lim- ited to: a.Statements by an agency or depart- ment of the United States govern- ment; b.Statements by an international group of which the United States is a mem- ber, such as the United Nations or the North Atlantic Treaty Organiza- tion, or any member of such an inter- national group;or c.Statements by a "recognized com- mercial authority". 2."Computer system"means any computer or network of computers or computer sys- tems, hardware, software, communica- tions system,electronic device (including but not limited to, smart phone, laptop, tablet,wearable device), server, cloud in- frastructure or microcontroller including any configuration of the aforementioned and including any associated input,out- put, code, program,data, data storage device, networking equipment or back up facility. 3."Cyber hostilities"means the use of a "computer system"that causes disruption or harm. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 Includes copyrighted material of Insurance IA 325 01 23 Services Office,Inc.,with its permission.Page 2 of 2 4."Recognized commercial authority" means a business that provides infor- mation technology security or forensics services,including, but not limited to: a.Symantec; b.Mandiant; c.Microsoft; d.Apple; e.Cisco; or f.IBM. 5."War"or "warlike action": a.Means physical combat, a state of armed conflict,or "cyber hostilities" engaged in by: (1)Any state, government, or sov- ereign; or (2)"Agents"of a state, government, or sovereign, against any other: (a)State, government, or sovereign, including an agency or depart- ment thereof; or (b)Person or entity targeted by such physical combat, armed conflict, or "cyber hostilities"; and b.Includes any collateral loss, damage, cost, expense or liability for damages of any nature arising out of the physi- cal combat, armed conflict,or "cyber hostilities"or any response to such physical combat, armed conflict,or "cyber hostilities". Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 Includes copyrighted material of Insurance IA 327 07 23 Services Office, Inc., with its permission.Page 1 of 1 THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY. PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY. NUCLEAR,BIOLOGICAL,CHEMICAL AND RADIOLOGICAL HAZARDS EXCLUSION This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the following: COMMERCIAL PROPERTY COVERAGE PART COMMERCIAL INLAND MARINE COVERAGE PART COMMERCIAL OUTPUT PROGRAM -PROPERTY COVERAGE PART MACHINERY AND EQUIPMENT COVERAGE PART MACHINERY AND EQUIPMENT SYSTEMS COVERAGE PART A.The exclusion under Section B. replaces any coverage, extension, limitation, or exclusion as it relates to nuclear, biological, chemical, or radiological hazards except to the extent coverage is provided: 1.For chemical hazards only in: Pollutant Clean Up and Removal Additional Coverage, Coverage Extension, Supplemental Coverage, and Endorsement “Hazardous Substance” Limitation Ammonia Contamination Limitation 2.For biological hazards only in: Fungi, Wet Rot, Dry Rot, and Bacteria - Limited Coverage Additional Coverage, Coverage Extension, and Supplemental Coverage Mold, Fungus, and Mildew Limitation 3.For biological or chemical hazards in: Mandated Decontamination Additional Coverage Product Contamination or Adulteration Endorsement Emergency Vacating Expense Coverage Extension Emergency Patient Evacuation Coverage Extension 4.For radiological hazards only in: Radioactive Contamination Endorsement B.Nuclear, Biological, Chemical and Radiological Hazards 1.We will not pay for any “loss”that is caused by, resulting from, is exacerbated by or otherwise impacted by, either directly or indirectly, any of the following: a.Nuclear Hazard -including, but not limited to nuclear reaction,nuclear detonation, nuclear radiation, radioactive contamination and all agents, materials, products or substances, whether engineered or naturally occurring, involved therein or released thereby; b.Biological Hazard -including, but not limited to any pathogenic or poisonous biological material,product or substance, whether engineered or naturally occurring, that induces or is capable of inducing physical distress, illness, or disease; c.Chemical Hazard -including, but not limited to any chemical agent, material, product or substance;or d.Radiological Hazard -including, but not limited to any electromagnetic, optical, or ionizing radiation or energy, including all generators and emitters thereof, whether engineered or naturally occurring. However, this exclusion does not apply to “loss” directly caused by a biological or chemical hazard as listed above that is part of the regular course of the insured’s business practices. 2. Only if and to the extent required by state law, the following exception to the exclusion above applies: If a hazard excluded in items 1.a., 1.b., 1.c.,or 1.d.above results in fire, we will pay for the “loss”caused by that fire, subject to all applicable policy provisions. Such coverage for fire applies only to direct “loss”by fire to Covered Property. This coverage does not apply to insurance provided under Business Income, Rental Value or Extra Expense coverage forms or endorsements that apply to those coverage forms. All other terms and conditions of this policy remain unchanged. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office, Inc., with its permission. Includes copyrighted material of ISO Commercial IA 4163 MT 09 16 Risk Services,Inc., with its permission.Page 1 of 2 THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY. PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY. MONTANA CHANGES -CANCELLATION AND NONRENEWAL This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the following: CINCINNATI CYBER DEFENSE™COVERAGE PART CINCINNATI DATA DEFENDER™COVERAGE PART CINCINNATI NETWORK DEFENDER™COVERAGE PART CLAIMS-MADE CONTRACTORS' ERRORS AND OMISSIONS COVERAGE PART CLAIMS-MADE EXCESS LIABILITY COVERAGE PART COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY COVERAGE PART COMMERCIAL INLAND MARINE COVERAGE PART COMMERCIAL PROPERTY COVERAGE PART COMMERCIAL UMBRELLA LIABILITY COVERAGE PART CONTRACTORS' LIMITED POLLUTION LIABILITY COVERAGE PART CRIME AND FIDELITY COVERAGE PART ELECTRONIC DATA LIABILITY COVERAGE PART EMPLOYEE BENEFIT LIABILITY COVERAGE PART EMPLOYMENT PRACTICES LIABILITY COVERAGE PART EXCESS LIABILITY COVERAGE PART EXCESS WORKERS COMPENSATION AND EMPLOYERS LIABILITY COVERAGE PART FARM COVERAGE PART GOLF COURSE CHEMICAL APPLICATION LIMITED LIABILITY COVERAGE PART HOLE-IN-ONE COVERAGE PART LIQUOR LIABILITY COVERAGE PART MACHINERY AND EQUIPMENT COVERAGE PART POLLUTION LIABILITY COVERAGE PART PRODUCT WITHDRAWAL COVERAGE PART PRODUCTS/COMPLETED OPERATIONS LIABILITY COVERAGE PART *This endorsement does not apply to coverage provided for employee dishonesty (Coverage Form A), for- gery or alteration (Coverage Form B), or public employee dishonesty (Coverage Forms O and P). A.Paragraph 2.of the Cancellation Common Policy Condition is replaced by the following: 2. a.Midterm Cancellation We may cancel this policy based on the provisions below, by mailing or delivering written notice to the first Named Insured at least 20 days be- fore the effective date of cancellation: (1)If this policy has been in effect for less than 60 days, except as provided in 2.a.(3)below, we may cancel for any reason. (2)If this policy has been in effect for 60 days or more,we may cancel this policy prior to the ex- piration of the agreed term or prior to one year from the effec- tive date of the policy or renewal, whichever is less,only for one or more of the following reasons: a.Failure to pay a premium when due; b.Material misrepresentation; c.Substantial change in the risk assumed,except to the extent that we should rea- sonably have foreseen the change or contemplated the risk in writing the contract; d.Substantial breaches of contractual duties, condi- tions or warranties; e.Determination by the Com- missioner of Insurance that continuation of the policy would place us in violation of the Montana Insurance Code; f.Financial impairment of us; or Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office, Inc., with its permission. Includes copyrighted material of ISO Commercial IA 4163 MT 09 16 Risk Services,Inc., with its permission.Page 2 of 2 g.Such other reasons that are approved by the Commis- sioner of Insurance. (3)If this policy has been issued for a term longer than one year,and if either the premium is prepaid or an agreed term is guaranteed for additional premium consider- ation, we may cancel this policy only for one or more of the rea- sons stated in 2.a.(2)above. b.Anniversary Cancellation We may cancel any policy with a term of more than one year by mailing or delivering to the first Named Insured written notice of cancellation at least 45 days before the anniversary date of the policy. Such cancellation will be effective on the policy's anniversary date. B.Paragraph 5.of the Cancellation Common Policy Condition is replaced by the following: 5.If this policy is cancelled,we will send the first Named Insured any premium refund due. If the first Named Insured or we can- cel, the refund will be pro rata. The can- cellation will be effective even if we have not made or offered a refund. However, when a financed insurance policy is can- celled, we will send any refund due to the premium finance company on a pro rata basis. C.Any When We Do Not Renew condition is deleted. The following When We Do Not Renew con- dition is added: 1.If we elect not to renew this Coverage Part,we will mail or deliver to the first Named Insured shown in the Declarations and agent, if any,a notice of intention not to renew at least 45 days before: a.The expiration date of this policy; or b.The anniversary date of this policy, if the policy is written for a term of more than one year. 2.We need not mail or deliver this notice if: a.You have purchased insurance else- where; b.You have accepted replacement coverage; c.You have requested or agreed to nonrenewal; or d.This policy is expressly designated as nonrenewable. D.The following Condition is added: Notification of Cancellation or Rate In- crease When we insure a person licensed in the prac- tice of medicine,dentist, registered nurse, nursing home administrator,registered physi- cal therapist, podiatrist, licensed psychologist, osteopath, chiropractor,pharmacist, optome- trist, or veterinarian, licensed under the laws of Montana,or a licensed hospital or long-term care facility as the employer of any person identified in this section against liability for er- ror,omission, professional negligence, or per- formance of services without consent, we may not cancel or alter the policy insuring the per- son or increase the premium rates on the poli- cy without first providing the insured 60 days' written notice of the insurer's intention to can- cel or alter the policy or increase the premium rates. E.The following Condition is added: Conformity with Montana Statutes The provisions of this policy or Coverage Part conform to the minimum requirements of Mon- tana law and control over any conflicting stat- utes of any state in which you reside on or af- ter the effective date of this policy or Coverage Part. Any provision of this policy or Coverage Part (including endorsements which modify the pol- icy or Coverage Part)that does not conform to the minimum requirements of a Montana stat- ute is amended to conform to such statute. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 IA 4164 MT 09 20 Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office, Inc., with its permission. THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY. PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY. MONTANA CHANGES -CONFORMITY WITH STATUTES This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the following: CLAIMS-MADE CONTRACTORS' ERRORS AND OMISSIONS COVERAGE PART CLAIMS-MADE EXCESS LIABILITY COVERAGE PART COMMERCIAL AUTO COVERAGE PART COMMERCIAL CRIME COVERAGE PART COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY COVERAGE PART COMMERCIAL INLAND MARINE COVERAGE PART COMMERCIAL PROPERTY COVERAGE PART COMMERCIAL UMBRELLA LIABILITY COVERAGE PART CONTRACTORS' LIMITED POLLUTION LIABILITY COVERAGE PART DENTIST'S PACKAGE PROGRAM EMPLOYEE BENEFIT LIABILITY COVERAGE PART EMPLOYMENT PRACTICES LIABILITY COVERAGE PART EXCESS LIABILITY COVERAGE PART EXCESS WORKERS COMPENSATION AND EMPLOYERS LIABILITY COVERAGE PART FARM COVERAGE PART GOLF COURSE CHEMICAL APPLICATION LIMITED LIABILITY COVERAGE PART HOLE-IN-ONE COVERAGE PART LIQUOR LIABILITY COVERAGE PART MACHINERY AND EQUIPMENT COVERAGE PART OWNERS AND CONTRACTORS PROTECTIVE LIABILITY COVERAGE PART POLLUTION LIABILITY COVERAGE PART PRODUCTS / COMPLETED OPERATIONS LIABILITY COVERAGE PART PROFESSIONAL LIABILITY COVERAGE PART PROFESSIONAL UMBRELLA LIABILITY COVERAGE PART PROFESSIONAL UMBRELLA LIABILITY COVERAGE PART -CLAIMS-MADE RAILROAD PROTECTIVE LIABILITY COVERAGE PART A.The following Condition is added: Conformity with Montana statutes. The provi- sions of this policy or Coverage Part conform to the minimum requirements of Montana law and control over anyconflicting statutes of any state in which you reside on or after the effec- tive date of this policy or Coverage Part. However, with respect to insurance provided under the Commercial Auto Coverage Part, while a covered "auto" is away from Montana: 1.We will increase the Limit of Insurance for Liability Coverage to meet the limits speci- fied by a compulsory or financial respon- sibility law of the jurisdiction where the covered "auto" is being used. This exten- sion does not apply to the limit or limits specified by any law governing motor car- riers of passengers or property. 2.We will provide the minimum amounts and types of other coverages, such as no- fault,required of out-of-state vehicles by the jurisdiction where the covered "auto" is being used. 3.No one will be entitled to duplicate pay- ments for the same elements of loss. B.Any provision of this policy or Coverage Part (including endorsements which modify the pol- icy or Coverage Part)that does not conform to the minimum requirements of a Montana stat- ute is amended to conform to such statute. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 Includes copyrighted material of ISO Properties, Inc. and American Association IA 4238 01 15 of Insurance Services, with their permission. THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY. PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY. CAP ON LOSSES FROM CERTIFIED ACTS OF TERRORISM This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the following: All Commercial Lines Coverage Parts, Coverage Forms, Policies and Endorsements subject to the federal Terrorism Risk Insurance Act and any amendments and extensions thereto A.The following definition is added with respect to the provisions of this endorsement: "Certified act of terrorism" means an act that is certified by the Secretary of the Treasury, in accordance with the provisions of the federal Terrorism Risk Insurance Act, to be an act of terrorism pursuant to the federal Terrorism Risk Insurance Act.The criteria contained in the Terrorism Risk Insurance Act for a "certi- fied act of terrorism" include the following: 1.The act resulted in insured losses in ex- cess of $5 million in the aggregate, attrib- utable to all types of insurance subject to the Terrorism Risk Insurance Act; and 2.The act is a violent act or an act that is dangerous to human life, property or in- frastructure and is committed by an indi- vidual or individuals, as part of an effort to coerce the civilian population of the Unit- ed States or to influence the policy or af- fect the conduct of the United States Government by coercion. B.Cap On Losses from Certified Acts of Ter- rorism If aggregate insured losses attributable to ter- rorist acts certified under the Terrorism Risk Insurance Act exceed $100 billion in a calen- dar year and we have met our insurer deducti- ble under the Terrorism Risk Insurance Act, we shall not be liable for the payment of any portion of the amount of such losses that ex- ceeds $100 billion, and in such case insured losses up to that amount are subject to pro ra- ta allocation in accordance with procedures established by the Secretary of the Treasury. C.Application of Other Exclusions The terms and limitations of any terrorism ex- clusion, or the inapplicability, omission or ab- sence of a terrorism exclusion,does not serve to create coverage for any loss which would otherwise be excluded under this Coverage Part,Coverage Form, Policy or Endorsement such as losses excluded by: 1.Exclusions that address war, warlike ac- tion, insurrection, rebellion, revolution, mil- itary action, nuclear hazard, nuclear mate- rials,nuclear reaction, radiation, or radio- active contamination; 2.Exclusions that address pollutants, con- tamination, deterioration, fungi or bacteria; or 3.Any other exclusion, regardless if the "certified act of terrorism" contributes concurrently or in any sequence to the loss. D.Sunset Clause If the federal Terrorism Risk Insurance Act ex- pires or is repealed, then this endorsement is null and void for any act of terrorism that takes place after the expiration or repeal of the Act. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 IA 4338 05 24 Page 1 of 1 SIGNATURE ENDORSEMENT IN WITNESS WHEREOF, this policy has been signed by our President and Secretary in the City of Fairfield, Ohio, but this policy shall not be binding upon us unless countersigned by an authorized representative of ours. The failure to countersign does not void coverage in Arizona, Virginia and Wisconsin. Secretary President The signature on anyform, endorsement, policy, declarations,jacket or application other than the signature of the President or Secretary named above is deleted and replaced by the above signatures. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 A Stock Insurance Company BUILDERS' RISK INLAND MARINE COVERAGE PART DECLARATIONS Attached to and forming part of POLICY NUMBER: Named Insured is the same as it appears in the Common Policy Declarations COVERAGE PROVISIONSa. The Cincinnati Insurance Company EBN 078 30 24 Loc. No.DESCRIPTION Limit Ded. 1-1 126 E VALLEY CENTER RD 1,660,932 10,000 BOZEMAN, MT 59718 b.Covered property in transit $ c.Covered property at unscheduled storage locations $ d.All Covered Property in any one occurrence $ 50,000 50,000 1,660,932 X box to activate ¤ The Coinsurance Clause does not apply DEDUCTIBLE For all covered perils unless a different deductible is indicated below or elsewhere in the policy: $ Theft:$ SEE ABOVE 10,000 MORTGAGE HOLDER Loc. No.Name and Address FORMS AND/OR ENDORSEMENTS APPLICABLE TO BUILDERS' RISK INLAND MARINE COVERAGE BUILDERS' RISK INLAND MARINE SUPPLEMENTAL SCHEDULEMA4093 02/21 BUILDERS' RISK INLAND MARINE COVERAGE FORMMA112 02/21 SOFT COSTS, RENTAL INCOME AND EARNINGS ENDORSEMENTMA229 02/21 AMENDMENT OF COVERAGE - CYBER INCIDENT EXCLUSIONMA323 07/21 EXCLUSION OF LOSS DUE TO VIRUS OR BACTERIAMA324 02/25 BUILDERS' RISK INLAND MARINE FLOOD ENDORSEMENTMA214 02/21 BUILDERS' RISK INLAND MARINE EARTHQUAKE AND VOLCANIC ERUPTION ENDORSEMENT MA216 02/21 EQUIPMENT BREAKDOWN COVERAGE (EXCLUDING PRODUCTION EQUIPMENT) MA242 02/21 SPECIAL PROVISIONS (if any) MA 561 02 21 Page of Included copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office, Inc., with its permission. EBN 078 30 24 1 1 Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 MA 4093 02 21 Page 1 of 1 BUILDERS'RISK INLAND MARINE SUPPLEMENTAL SCHEDULE ADDITIONAL COVERAGE "LIMITS" Debris Removal -Additional Amount $ Emergency Removal Number of Days days Emergency Removal Expenses $ Fire Department Service Charges $ "Pollutant"Cleanup and Removal $ Rewards $ Fire Protection Equipment Recharge $ Trees, Shrubs, Plants and Lawns "Limit" for any one tree, shrub or plant ($500 unless otherwise indicated) $ $ Construction Contract Penalty $ Expediting Expenses $ Fraud and Deceit $ Ordinance or Law Coverage for New Construction: Coverage B -Demolition Cost $ Coverage C -Increased Cost of Construction $ Valuable Papers and Records $ "Soft Costs"$ "Fungi", Wet Rot, Dry Rot and Bacteria -Limited Coverage $ Temporary Structures Expense $ Claims Preparation Expense $ 25,000 30 10,000 10,000 25,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 25,000 50,000 50,000 50,000 25,000 REFER TO MA229 15,000 10,000 10,000 Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 Includes copyrighted material with permission of American Association of Insurance Services MA 112 02 21 and Insurance Services Office, Inc.Page 1 of 17 BUILDERS'RISK INLAND MARINE COVERAGE FORM TABLE OF CONTENTS Begins on Page: A.COVERAGE............................................................................................................................................2 1.Covered Property..........................................................................................................................2 a.Buildings and Structures......................................................................................................2 b.Scaffolding and Construction Forms..................................................................................2 c.Temporary Structures, Office Trailers and Fences............................................................2 2.Property Not Covered...................................................................................................................2 3.Covered Causes of Loss..............................................................................................................2 4. Additional Coverages...................................................................................................................2 a.Transit and Storage Locations.............................................................................................3 b.Debris Removal......................................................................................................................3 c.Emergency Removal.............................................................................................................3 d.Emergency Removal Expenses ...........................................................................................3 e.Fire Department Service Charges........................................................................................3 f."Pollutant"Cleanup and Removal.......................................................................................3 g.Rewards..................................................................................................................................4 h.Fire Protection Equipment Recharge..................................................................................4 i.Trees, Shrubs, Plants and Lawns........................................................................................4 j.Construction Contract Penalty.............................................................................................4 k.Expediting Expenses ............................................................................................................5 l.Fraud and Deceit....................................................................................................................5 m.Ordinance or Law Coverage for New Construction...........................................................5 n.Valuable Papers and Records..............................................................................................6 o."Soft Costs"...........................................................................................................................6 p."Fungi", Wet Rot, Dry Rot and Bacteria -Limited Coverage ............................................6 q.Temporary Structures Expense...........................................................................................7 r.Claims Preparation Expense................................................................................................8 B.EXCLUSIONS.........................................................................................................................................8 1.a.Governmental Action....................................................................................................................8 1.b.Earth Movement............................................................................................................................8 1.c. Water ..............................................................................................................................................8 1.d. Nuclear Hazard..............................................................................................................................9 1.e. Ordinance or Law..........................................................................................................................9 1.f. Penalties .........................................................................................................................................9 1.g. War and Military Action................................................................................................................9 1.h. "Fungi", Wet Rot, Dry Rot and Bacteria ...................................................................................10 2.a. Dishonest or Criminal Acts........................................................................................................10 2.b. Freezing .......................................................................................................................................10 2.c.Loss of Use..................................................................................................................................10 2.d. Missing Property.........................................................................................................................10 2.e. "Pollutants"..................................................................................................................................10 2.f.Rain, Snow,Ice,Sleet or Frost ...................................................................................................10 2.g.Voluntary Parting........................................................................................................................10 3.a.Faulty, Inadequate, Defective, or Error or Omission...............................................................11 3.b.Electrical Current........................................................................................................................11 3.c.Mechanical Breakdown ..............................................................................................................11 3.d.Settling, Cracking, Shrinking, Bulging or Expansion .............................................................11 3.e.Temperature/Humidity................................................................................................................11 3.f.Miscellaneous Causes of Loss...................................................................................................11 C.DEDUCTIBLE.......................................................................................................................................11 D.LOSS CONDITIONS.............................................................................................................................11 E.OTHER CONDITIONS..........................................................................................................................14 F.DEFINITIONS .......................................................................................................................................16 Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 Includes copyrighted material with permission of American Association of Insurance Services MA 112 02 21 and Insurance Services Office, Inc.Page 2 of 17 BUILDERS'RISK INLAND MARINE COVERAGE FORM Various provisions in this policy restrict coverage. Read the entire policy carefully to determine rights, duties and what is and is not covered. Throughout this policy the words "you"and "your" refer to the Named Insured shown on the "Declara- tions". The words "we", "us"and "our"refer to the company providing this insurance. Other words and phrases that appear in quotation marks have special meaning. Refer to Section G. DEFINITIONS. A.COVERAGE We will pay for direct "loss"to Covered Property caused by or resulting from a Covered Cause of Loss. 1.Covered Property Covered Property means the following proper- ty while located on the premises of the build- ings or structures described on the "Declara- tions",or within 1,000 feet of such premises. a.Buildings and Structures - Buildings and structures while in the course of con- struction, erection or fabrication. This in- cludes materials and supplies which will become a permanent part of the buildings or structures. This also includes founda- tions, excavations, grading and filling that are a part of such buildings or structures. b.Scaffolding and Construction Forms - Scaffolding or construction forms,provid- ed the scaffolding or construction forms are used to service the described building or structure. c.Temporary Structures, Office Trailers and Fences -Temporary structures, of- fice trailers and fences,provided the tem- porary structures, office trailers and fenc- es are used to service the described building or structure.This includes crib- bing, falsework and shoring. 2.Property Not Covered Covered Property does not include: a. Aircraft or watercraft -Aircraft or watercraft, including drones; b.Automobiles -Automobiles, motor- cycles or any self-propelled vehicles that are designed for highway use; c.Contraband -Contraband or proper- ty in the course of illegal transporta- tion or trade; d.Existing Buildings or Structures - Existing buildings or structures to which additions, alterations, im- provements, or repairs are being made; e.Land, Water or Growing Crops - Land (including land on which Cov- ered Property is located), water, growing crops or standing timber; f.Money and Securities - Accounts, bills, currency,food stamps, or other evidences of debt, lottery tickets not held for sale, money, notes, deeds, or securities; g.Trees,Shrubs, Plants and Lawns - Trees, shrubs, plants and lawns,ex- cept as provided in A. COVERAGE, 4. Additional Coverages, i. Trees, Shrubs, Plants and Lawns; h.Waterborne Property -Property while waterborne,except while in transit in the custody of a carrier for hire; i.Machinery,Tools and Equipment - Machinery, tools and equipment that will not become a part of the building or structure, except as provided in A. COVERAGE,1. Covered Property, b. Scaffolding and Construction Forms;or j.Valuable Papers and Records - Valuable Papers and Records, ex- cept as provided in A. COVERAGE, 4. Additional Coverages, n.Valua- ble Papers and Records. 3. Covered Causes of Loss Covered Causes of Loss means direct "loss"unless the "loss"is excluded or lim- ited in this Coverage Form. 4. Additional Coverages The following Additional Coverages apply only when a "limit" is indicated below or on the "Declarations". Unless stated oth- erwise, the Limits of Insurance referenced in the following Additional Coverages are Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 Includes copyrighted material with permission of American Association of Insurance Services MA 112 02 21 and Insurance Services Office, Inc.Page 3 of 17 in addition to the "limit"shown on the "Declarations"for Covered Property. a.Transit and Storage Locations - We cover direct "loss"caused by a Covered Cause of Loss to materials and supplies which will become a permanent part of buildings or struc- tures described on the "Declarations" while they are: (1)In transit; or (2)At an unscheduled storage loca- tion. The most we will pay under this cov- erage is the "limit"indicated on the "Declarations". b.Debris Removal -We will pay the cost to remove the debris of Covered Property that is caused by a Covered Cause of Loss. Debris Removal does not apply to costs to: (1)Extract "pollutants"from land or water; or (2)Remove, restore, or replace pol- luted land or water. We will not pay any more under this coverage than 25% of the amount we pay for the direct "loss". We will not pay more for "loss"to Covered Property and debris removal com- bined than the "limit"for the dam- aged Covered Property. However,we will pay an additional amount of debris removal expense up to the "limit"indicated on the "Declarations"when the debris re- moval expense exceeds 25%of the amount we pay for direct "loss"or when the "loss"to Covered Property and debris removal combined ex- ceeds the "limit"for the damaged Covered Property. We will not pay any expenses unless they are reported to us in writing within 180 days from the date of di- rect"loss"to Covered Property. c.Emergency Removal -We will pay for "loss"to Covered Property while it is moved or being moved to prevent an actual or imminent "loss"caused by a Covered Cause of Loss at the premises described on the "Declara- tions". We will pay for any direct "loss"caused by a Covered Cause of Loss for up to the number of days in- dicated on the "Declarations"after the Covered Property is first moved. d.Emergency Removal Expenses - We will pay for your necessary ex- penses to move or store Covered Property to prevent "loss" caused by a Covered Cause of Loss.This in- cludes your necessary expenses to return Covered Property to the origi- nal premises once the threat of im- minent "loss"has passed. The most we will pay for expenses to move or store Covered Property to prevent a "loss"is the "limit"indicated on the "Declarations". e.Fire Department Service Charges - When the fire department is called to save or protect Covered Property from a Covered Cause of Loss, we will pay up to the "limit"indicated on the "Declarations"in any one occur- rence. Such "limit"is the most we will pay, regardless of the number of re- sponding fire departments or fire units, and regardless of the number or type of services performed. This Additional Coverage applies to your liability for fire department ser- vice charges: (1)Assumed by contract or agree- ment prior to loss; or (2)Required by local ordinance. No deductible applies to this Addi- tional Coverage. f."Pollutant"Cleanup and Removal - We will pay your expenses to extract "pollutants"from land or water at a location described on the "Declara- tions"if the discharge,dispersal, seepage, migration,release, escape or emission of the "pollutants"is caused by or results from a Covered Cause of Loss that occurs during the policy period. The expenses will be paid only if they are reported to us in writing within 180 days of the date on which the Covered Cause of Loss occurs. This Additional Coverage does not apply to costs to test for,monitor or assess the existence, concentration or effects of "pollutants".But we will pay for testing which is performed in the course of extracting the "pollu- tants"from land or water. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 Includes copyrighted material with permission of American Association of Insurance Services MA 112 02 21 and Insurance Services Office, Inc.Page 4 of 17 The most we will pay under this Addi- tional Coverage for each site or loca- tion is the "limit"indicated on the "Declarations"for the sum of all cov- ered expenses arising out of a Cov- ered Cause of Loss occurring during each separate 12-month period of this policy. g.Rewards -We will reimburse you for rewards paid to an eligible person for information that leads to a conviction for arson, theft, vandalism,or burgla- ry or the return of undamaged stolen Covered Property. This Additional Coverage must involve a covered "loss"caused by arson, theft,vandal- ism or burglary. An eligible person means that person designated by a law enforcement agency as the first to voluntarily pro- vide the necessary information or re- turn the stolen Covered Property, and who is not: (1)You or any family member; (2)Your employee or any of his or her family members; (3)An employee of a law enforce- ment agency; (4)An employee of a business en- gaged in property protection; (5)Any person who had custody of the Covered Property at the time of "loss"; or (6)Any person involved in this crime. The reward payment must be docu- mented.The most we will pay for "loss"in any one occurrence under this Additional Coverage is the "limit" indicated on the "Declarations". h.Fire Protection Equipment Re- charge - (1)We will pay for the expenses you incur to recharge your au- tomatic fire suppression system or portable fire extinguishers when the equipment is dis- charged: (a)To combat a covered fire to which this insurance applies; (b)As a result of another Covered Cause of Loss other than fire; or (c)As a result of an acci- dental discharge. (2)If it is less expensive to do so, we will pay your costs to replace your automatic fire suppression system or portable fire extin- guishers rather than recharge that equipment. The most we will pay in any one oc- currence under this Additional Cov- erage is the "limit" indicated on the "Declarations". i.Trees, Shrubs, Plants and Lawns - We will pay for direct "loss"to trees, shrubs, plants and lawns (including those incorporated into any vegeta- tive roof or wall systems)if the direct "loss"results from a Covered Cause of Loss. (1)The most we will pay for any one occurrence for each location is the "limit"indicated on the "Dec- larations", but not more than $500 for any one tree, shrub or plant. (2)We do not pay for "loss" caused by infestation, disease, drought, lack of moisture, insects, ani- mals,rodents, freezing, wind- storm, hail or weight of ice or snow. (3)This Additional Coverage does not apply to trees, shrubs, plants or lawns that existed at the premises prior to construction. j.Construction Contract Penalty -If the first named insured is the general contractor for the construction project described on the "Declarations", we will pay for contractual penalties im- posed by written contract between such general contractor and its cus- tomers.These penalties must: (1)Result from failure to complete the construction project on time according to contract terms; (2)Result from direct "loss"to Cov- ered Property by a Covered Cause of Loss; and (3)Have been paid by such general contractor to its customers. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 Includes copyrighted material with permission of American Association of Insurance Services MA 112 02 21 and Insurance Services Office, Inc.Page 5 of 17 The most we will pay under this Addi- tional Coverage per occurrence is the "limit"indicated on the "Declara- tions". k.Expediting Expenses -With respect to "loss"to Covered Property from a Covered Cause of Loss, we will pay for the extra cost you necessarily in- cur to: (1)Make temporary repairs; and (2)Expedite the permanent repairs or replacement of the damaged Covered Property. These costs include, but are not lim- ited to,additional wages for overtime, extra costs for express transportation and storage fees, and additional rental equipment expenses. The most we will pay in any one oc- currence for all expediting expenses is the "limit"indicated on the "Decla- rations". l.Fraud and Deceit -We will cover theft of Covered Property when you, your agents, your employees,cus- tomers, or consignees are fraudulent- ly induced to part with the Covered Property: (1)To persons who falsely repre- sent themselves as the proper persons to receive the property; (2)By the acceptance of fraudulent bills of lading or shipping re- ceipts;or (3)As a result of or directly related to the use of any electronic data processing hardware or soft- ware. The most we will pay in any one oc- currence for theft of Covered Proper- ty from fraud and deceit is the "limit" indicated on the "Declarations". m.Ordinance or Law Coverage for New Construction (1)Coverage A -Coverage for Loss to Undamaged Portion of Building If a Covered Cause of Loss oc- curs to Covered Property shown on the "Declarations", we will pay for "loss"to the undamaged portion of the building caused by enforcement of any ordinance or law that: (a)Requires the demolition of parts of the same property not damaged by a Covered Cause of Loss; (b)Regulates the construction or repair of buildings, or es- tablishes zoning or land use requirements at the de- scribed premises; and (c)Is in force at the time of "loss". Coverage A is included within the "limit"applicable to the Cov- ered Property as shown on the "Declarations".Coverage A does not increase the "limit". (2)Coverage B -Demolition Cost Coverage If a Covered Cause of Loss oc- curs to Covered Property,we will pay the cost to demolish and clear the site of undamaged parts of the Covered Property caused by enforcement of build- ing, zoning or land use ordi- nance or law. Section E. OTHER CONDI- TIONS,1. Coinsurance does not apply to Coverage B - Demolition Cost Coverage. The most we will pay under Coverage B -Demolition Cost Coverage is the lesser of the following: (a)The amount you actually spend to demolish and clear the site of the described premises; or (b)The applicable "limit"shown for Coverage B on the "Dec- larations". (3)Coverage C -Increased Cost of Construction Coverage If a Covered Cause of Loss oc- curs to Covered Property, we will pay for the increased cost to repair,rebuild or construct the Covered Propertycaused by en- forcement of building, zoning or land use ordinance or law. If the property is repaired or rebuilt, it must be intended for similar oc- Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 Includes copyrighted material with permission of American Association of Insurance Services MA 112 02 21 and Insurance Services Office, Inc.Page 6 of 17 cupancy as the current property, unless otherwise required by zoning or land use ordinance or law. However, we will not pay for the increased cost of construction if the building is not repaired or replaced. Section E. OTHER CONDI- TIONS, 1. Coinsurance does not apply to Coverage C -In- creased Cost of Construction Coverage. The most we will pay under Coverage C -Increased Cost of Construction Coverage is the lesser of: (a)The increased cost of con- struction at the same prem- ises; or (b)The applicable "limit" shown for Coverage C on the "Dec- larations". We will not pay under this Additional Coverage for: (1)Enforcement of or compliance with any ordinance or law which requires the demolition,repair, replacement, reconstruction,re- modeling or remediation of Cov- ered Property due to contamina- tion by "pollutants"or due to the presence,growth, proliferation, spread or any activity of "fungi", wet or dry rot or bacteria; or (2)The costs associated with the en- forcement or compliance with any ordinance or law which requires any insured or others to test for, monitor, clean up,remove,con- tain, treat, detoxify or neutralize, or in any way respond to,or as- sess the effects of "pollutants", "fungi", wet or dry rot or bacteria. (3)"Loss"due to any ordinance or law that: (a)You were required to comply with before the "loss", even if the building was undamaged; and (b)You failed to comply with. We will not pay under this Additional Coverage until the Covered Property is actually repaired or replaced,at the same or another premises,and we will not pay under this Additional Coverage unless the repairs or re- placement are made as soon as rea- sonably possible after the "loss", not to exceed two years. We may extend this period in writing during the two years. n.Valuable Papers and Records -We will pay your costs to research, re- place or restore the lost or damaged information on valuable papers and records for the construction project described on the "Declarations"that is caused by a Covered Cause of Loss. This includes valuable papers and records which exist on electronic or magnetic media for which dupli- cates do not exist. This additional coverage applies only to valuable papers and records while at the premises described on the "Declara- tions". Valuable papers and records means inscribed, printed or written docu- ments,including construction plans, blueprints or other construction doc- uments. The most we will pay for this Addi- tional Coverage is the "limit"indicat- ed on the "Declarations". o."Soft Costs"-We will pay for "soft costs"you sustain during the "period of delay"as a direct result of delay in completion of construction caused by a Covered Cause of Loss to Covered Property.The most we will pay for this Additional Coverage is the "limit" indicated on the "Declarations". p. "Fungi", Wet Rot, Dry Rot and Bac- teria -Limited Coverage (1)The coverage described in Para- graphs p.(2)and p.(3)of this Ad- ditional Coverage only applies when the "fungi", wet or dry rot or bacteria is the result of a Cov- ered Cause of Loss, except fire or lightning,that occurs during the policy period and only if all reasonable means were used to save and preserve the property from further damage at the time of and after that occurrence. (2)We will pay for "loss"by "fungi", wet or dry rot or bacteria. As used in this Additional Coverage, the term "loss"means: Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 Includes copyrighted material with permission of American Association of Insurance Services MA 112 02 21 and Insurance Services Office, Inc.Page 7 of 17 (a)Direct "loss"to Covered Property caused by "fungi", wet or dry rot or bacteria, including the cost of remov- al of the "fungi",wet or dry rot or bacteria; (b)The cost to tear out and re- place any part of the build- ing or other property as needed to gain access to the "fungi", wet or dry rot or bacteria; and (c)The cost of testing per- formed after removal, re- pair,replacement or resto- ration of the damaged prop- erty is completed, provided there is a reason to believe that "fungi", wet or dry rot or bacteria are present. (3)For the coverage described un- der Paragraph p.(2)of this Addi- tional Coverage, the most we will pay for "loss", regardless of the number of claims, is the "limit" indicated on the "Declarations". This "limit"is the most we will pay for the total of all "loss"aris- ing out of all occurrences that take place in a 12-month period (starting with the inception date of this policy). With respect to a particular occurrence of "loss" which results in "fungi", wet or dry rot or bacteria, we will not pay more than a total of the "lim- it"indicated on the "Declarations" even if the "fungi", wet or dry rot or bacteria continues to be pre- sent or active, or recurs,in a subsequent policy period. (4)The coverage provided under this Additional Coverage does not increase the applicable "limit" of insurance on any Covered Property. If a particular occur- rence results in "loss"by "fungi", wet or dry rot or bacteria,and other "loss",we will not pay more,for the total of all "loss", than the applicable "limit"of in- surance on the affected Covered Property. If there is covered "loss"to Cov- ered Property not caused by "fungi", wet or dry rot or bacteria, loss payment will not be limited by the terms of this Additional Coverage, except to the extent that "fungi", wet or dry rot or bac- teria causes an increase in the "loss". Any such increase in the "loss"will be subject to the terms of this Additional Coverage. (5)The following Paragraphs (5)(a) and (5)(b)apply only if "Soft Costs", "Rental Income", or "Earnings"Coverage applies and only if all terms and conditions of the applicable "Soft Costs"Cov- erage are satisfied. (a)If the "loss"which resulted in "fungi", wet or dry rot or bacteria does not in itself necessitate a delay in com- pletion, but such delay in completion is necessary due to "loss"to property caused by "fungi", wet or dry rot or bacteria, then our payment under "Soft Costs", "Rental Income", or "Earn- ings"Coverage is limited to the amount of "loss"and/or expense sustained in a pe- riod of not more than 30 days.The days need not be consecutive. (b)If a covered delay was caused by "loss"other than "fungi", wet or dry rot or bacteria but remediation of "fungi", wet or dry rot or bacteria prolongs the delay, we will pay for "loss"and/or expense sustained during the "period of delay"(re- gardless of when such a de- lay occurs during the "peri- od of delay"), but such cov- erage is limited to 30 days. The days need not be con- secutive. (6)This Additional Coverage does not apply to lawns, trees, plants or shrubs that are part of any vegetative roof. q.Temporary Structures Expense - We will pay your expense incurred to re-erect temporary structures, includ- ing falsework, cribbing,scaffolding and construction forms, due to "loss" caused by a Covered Cause of Loss to Covered Property in Paragraph A.1.a.The most we will pay under this Additional Coverage is the "limit" indicated on the "Declarations". Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 Includes copyrighted material with permission of American Association of Insurance Services MA 112 02 21 and Insurance Services Office, Inc.Page 8 of 17 r.Claims Preparation Expense -We will reimburse you for your necessary and reasonable costs incurred at our request for the preparation of claim details for "loss"to Covered Property that is caused by or results from a Covered Cause of Loss. Claim Prep- aration Expense does not include the following fees or expenses from: (1)General public adjusters; (2)Lawyers or any other legal fees; (3)Insurance agents or brokers; (4)Salary or wages of your employ- ees; or (5)Examination under oath. The most we will pay per occurrence under this Additional Coverage is the "limit" indicated on the "Declara- tions". B.EXCLUSIONS 1.We will not pay for "loss"caused directly or indirectly by any of the following, un- less otherwise provided. Such "loss"is excluded regardless of any other cause or event that contributes concurrently or in any sequence to the "loss". a.Governmental Action - Seizure or destruction of property by order of governmental authority. However,we will pay for "loss"caused by or result- ing from acts of destruction ordered by governmental authority and taken at the time of a fire to prevent its spread, if the fire would be covered under this Coverage Form. b.Earth Movement - (1)Earthquake, including tremors and aftershocks and any earth sinking,rising or shifting related to such event; (2)Landslide, including any earth sinking, rising or shifting related to such event; (3)Mine subsidence, meaning sub- sidence of a man-made mine, whether or not mining activity has ceased; (4)Earth sinking (other than "sink- hole collapse"), rising or shifting including soil conditions which cause settling,cracking or other disarrangement of foundations or other parts of realty. Soil con- ditions include contraction,ex- pansion, freezing,thawing, ero- sion,improperly compacted soil and the action of water under the ground surface. But if Earth Movement,as described in Paragraph b.(1)through (4) above, results in fire or explosion,we will pay for the "loss"caused by that fire or explosion. (5)Volcanic eruption, explosion or effusion. But if volcanic eruption, explosion or effusion results in fire, building glass breakage or Volcanic Action,we will pay for the "loss"caused by that fire, building glass breakage or Vol- canic Action. Volcanic Action means direct "loss"resulting from the eruption of a volcano when the "loss"is caused by: (a)Airborne volcanic blast or airborne shock waves; (b)Ash,dust or particulate mat- ter;or (c)Lava flow. With respect to coverage for Volcanic Action, all volcanic eruptions that occur within any 168-hour period will constitute a single occurrence. Volcanic Action does not include the cost to remove ash,dust or particulate matter that does not cause direct "loss"to the de- scribed property. This Earth Movement exclusion ap- plies regardless of whether any of the above,in Paragraphs (1)through (5), is caused by an act of nature or is otherwise caused. This exclusion does not apply to Covered Property while in transit. c.Water - (1)Flood,meaning the partial or complete inundation of normally dry land areas due to: (a)The unusual or rapid accu- mulation or runoff of rain or surface waters from any source; Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 Includes copyrighted material with permission of American Association of Insurance Services MA 112 02 21 and Insurance Services Office, Inc.Page 9 of 17 (b)Waves, tidal waters, tidal waves (including tsunami); or (c)Water from rivers,ponds, lakes, streams, or any other body of water that rises above,overflows from,or is not contained within its nat- ural or man-made bounda- ry; and all whether driven by wind or not, including storm surge; (2)Mudslides or mudflows,which are caused by flooding as de- fined above in Paragraph c.(1). Mudslide or mudflow involves a river of liquid and flowing mud on the surface of normally dry land areas as when earth is car- ried by a current of water and deposited along the path of the current; (3)Water that has entered and then backs up through and is dis- charged from a sewer,drain, septic system,sump pump sys- tem or related equipment; (4)Water under the ground surface pressing on,or flowing or seep- ing through; (a)Foundations,walls, floors or paved surfaces; (b)Basements,whether paved or not; or (c)Doors,windows or other openings; or (5)Waterborne material carried or otherwise moved by any of the water referred to in Paragraph (1), (3)or (4)above,or material carried or otherwise moved by mudslide or mudflow as de- scribed in Paragraph (2)above. This exclusion applies regardless of whether any of the above, in Para- graphs (1)through (5), is caused by an act of nature or is otherwise caused. An example of a situation to which this exclusion applies is the situation where a dam, levee, seawall or other boundary or containment system fails in whole or in part, for any reason, to contain the water. However, if any of the above,as de- scribed in Paragraphs (1)through (5), results in fire,explosion or sprin- kler leakage, we will pay for that por- tion of "loss"caused by that fire, ex- plosion or sprinkler leakage. This exclusion does not apply to Covered Property while in transit. d.Nuclear Hazard -Nuclear reaction or radiation, or radioactive contamina- tion, however caused. But if nuclear reaction or radiation, or radioactive contamination results in fire, we will pay for the direct "loss" caused by that fire if the fire would be covered under this Coverage Form. e.Ordinance or Law - Except as pro- vided in A. COVERAGE,4. Addi- tional Coverages, m.Ordinance or Law Coverage for New Construc- tion, the enforcement of or compli- ance with any ordinance or law: (1)Regulating the construction, use or repair of any building or struc- ture; or (2)Requiring the tearing down of any building or structure,includ- ing the cost of removing its de- bris. This exclusion applies whether "loss" results from: (1)An ordinance or law that is en- forced even if the building or structure has not been dam- aged;or (2)The increased costs incurred to comply with an ordinance or law in the course of construction, re- pair, renovation, remodeling or demolition of any building or structure, or removal of its de- bris, following a direct "loss"to that building or structure. f.Penalties - Penalties for non- completion or non-compliance with any contract terms or conditions,ex- cept as provided in A. COVERAGE, 4. Additional Coverages, j.Con- struction Contract Penalty. g.War and Military Action - (1)War,including undeclared or civ- il war; (2)Warlike action by a military force, including action in hinder- ing or defending against an ac- Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 Includes copyrighted material with permission of American Association of Insurance Services MA 112 02 21 and Insurance Services Office, Inc.Page 10 of 17 tual or expected attack, by any government, sovereign or other authority using military person- nel or other agents;or (3)Insurrection,rebellion, revolu- tion, usurped power, or action taken by governmental authority in hindering or defending against any of these. h."Fungi", Wet Rot,Dry Rot and Bacteria - (1)Presence,growth,proliferation, spread or any activity of "fungi", wet or dry rot or bacteria. But if "fungi", wet or dry rot or bacteria results in a "specified cause of loss", we will pay for the "loss" caused by that "specified cause of loss". (2)This exclusion does not apply: (a)When "fungi", wet or dry rot or bacteria results from fire or lightning; or (b)To the extent that coverage is provided in Section A. COVERAGE,4. Additional Coverages, p. "Fungi", Wet Rot, Dry Rot and Bac- teria -Limited Coverage with respect to "loss"from a cause of loss other than fire or lightning. Exclusions B.1.a.through B.1.h.apply whether or not the "loss"event results in widespread damage or affects a substan- tial area. 2.We will not pay for "loss" caused by or re- sulting from any of the following: a.Dishonest or Criminal Acts -Dis- honest or criminal acts (including theft) by you,any of your partners, members (if a limited liability compa- ny), officers, managers, employees (including leased workers or tempo- rary employees),directors, trustees, or authorized representatives; whether acting alone or in collusion with each other or with any other par- ty; or theft by any person to whom you entrust the property for any pur- pose, whether acting alone or in col- lusion with any other party. This exclusion applies whether or not an act occurs during the hours of op- eration. This Dishonest or Criminal Acts exclusion does not apply to acts of destruction by your employees (in- cluding leased workers or temporary employees)or by authorized repre- sentatives; except theft by employ- ees (including leased workers or temporary employees) is not cov- ered. This exclusion does not apply to Covered Property in the custody of a carrier for hire. b.Freezing -Water, other liquids,pow- der or molten material that leaks or flows from plumbing, heating,air- conditioning systems or appliances other than fire protective systems caused by or resulting from freezing. This does not apply if you used rea- sonable care to maintain heat in the building or structure or you drained the equipment and turn off the supply ifthe heat is not maintained. c.Loss of Use -Loss of use, business interruption,delay, loss of market or any other consequential loss. d.Missing Property -Property that is missing,where the only evidence of the "loss"is a shortage disclosed on taking inventory, or other instances where there is no physical evidence to show what happened to the Cov- ered Property. This exclusion does not apply to Covered Property in the custody of a carrier for hire. e."Pollutants"-Release,discharge, seepage, migration, dispersal or es- cape of "pollutants"unless the re- lease,discharge or escape is caused by a "specified cause of loss". We do pay for any resulting "loss"caused by a "specified cause of loss". f.Rain, Snow,Ice,Sleet or Frost - Rain, snow, ice,sleet or frost to property in the open which is not part of the permanent building or struc- ture. This exclusion does not apply to Covered Property in the custody of a carrier for hire. g.Voluntary Parting -Voluntary part- ing with any property by you or any- one else to whom you have entrusted the property if induced to do so by any fraudulent scheme, trick or false pretense,except as provided in A. COVERAGE, 4. Additional Cover- ages,l.Fraud and Deceit. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 Includes copyrighted material with permission of American Association of Insurance Services MA 112 02 21 and Insurance Services Office, Inc.Page 11 of 17 3.We will not pay for "loss" caused by or re- sulting from any of the following.But if "loss"by a Covered Cause of Loss re- sults, we will pay for the "loss"caused by that Covered Cause of Loss. a.Faulty, Inadequate,Defective,or Error or Omission in any: (1)Planning, sequencing,zoning, development,surveying, siting; (2)Design, specifications,work- manship, repair,construction, renovation, remodeling,grading, compaction; (3)Materials used in repair,con- struction, renovation or remodel- ing; or (4)Maintenance; of part or all of any property wherever located. b.Electrical Current - Artificially gen- erated electrical, magnetic or elec- tromagnetic energy that damages, disturbs, disrupts or otherwise inter- feres with any: (1)Electrical or electronic wire, de- vice, appliance, system or net- work; or (2)Device, appliance, system or network utilizing cellular or satel- lite technology. For the purpose of this exclusion, electrical,magnetic or electromag- netic energy includes but is not lim- ited to: (1)Electrical current, including arc- ing; (2)Electrical charge produced or conducted by a magnetic or electromagnetic field; (3)Pulse of electromagnetic energy; or (4)Electromagnetic waves or mi- crowaves. However, if fire results,we will pay for "loss"caused by that fire. c.Mechanical Breakdown -Mechani- cal breakdown including rupture or bursting caused by centrifugal force. d.Settling, Cracking,Shrinking, Bulging or Expansion - Settling, cracking, shrinking,bulging or ex- pansion of pavements, foundations, walls, floors, ceilings, glassor roofs. e.Temperature/Humidity -Dampness, dryness or changes in or extremes of temperature. f.Miscellaneous Causes of Loss - (1)Wear and tear, marring or scratching; (2)Rust or other corrosion,decay, deterioration,hidden or latent de- fect or any quality in property that causes it to damage or destroy itself; (3)Nesting or infestation, or dis- charge or release of waste prod- ucts or secretions,by insects, birds, rodents or other animals. C.DEDUCTIBLE Deductible -We will not pay for "loss"in any one occurrence until the amount of the adjust- ed "loss"before applying the applicable "limit" of insurance exceeds the Deductible shown on the "Declarations". We will then pay the amount of the adjusted "loss"in excess of the Deductible, up to the applicable "limit"of in- surance. D.LOSS CONDITIONS 1.Abandonment -There can be no aban- donment of any property to us. 2. Appraisal -If we and you disagree on the value of the property or the amount of "loss", either may make written demand for an appraisal of the "loss". In this event,each party will select a competent and impartial appraiser.The two ap- praisers will select an umpire. If they cannot agree, either may request that se- lection be made by a judge of a court hav- ing jurisdiction. The appraisers will state separately the value of the property and amount of "loss". If they fail to agree, they will submit their differences to the umpire.A decision agreed to by any two will be binding. Each party will: a.Pay its chosen appraiser; and b.Bear the other expenses of the ap- praisal and umpire equally. If there is an appraisal, we will still retain our right to deny the claim. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 Includes copyrighted material with permission of American Association of Insurance Services MA 112 02 21 and Insurance Services Office, Inc.Page 12 of 17 3.Duties in the Event of Loss or Damage - You must see that the following are done in the event of "loss"to Covered Property: a.Notify the police if a law may have been broken. b.Give us prompt notice of the "loss". Include a description of the property involved. c.As soon as possible, give us a de- scription of how,when and where the "loss"occurred. d.Take all responsible steps to protect the Covered Property from further damage.If feasible, set the damaged property aside and in the best possi- ble order for examination.Keep a record of your expenses necessary to protect the Covered Property for consideration in the settlement of the claim. This will not increase the "lim- it"of insurance.However, in no event will we pay for any subsequent "loss"resulting from a cause of loss that is not a Covered Cause of Loss. e.You will not, except at your own cost, voluntarily make a payment, assume any obligation, or incur any expense without our consent. f.As often as may be reasonably re- quired, permit us to inspect the prop- erty proving the "loss"and examine your books and records. Also permit us to take samples of damaged and undamaged property for inspection, testing and analysis, and permit us to make copies from your books and records. g.We may examine any insured under oath, while not in the presence of any other insured and at such times as may be reasonably required,about any matter relating to this insurance or the claim, including an insured's books and records.In the event of an examination,an insured's an- swers must be signed. h.Submit a signed,sworn proof of loss containing the information we request to settle the claim. You must do this within 60 days after our request. We will supply you with the necessary forms. i.Immediately send us copies of any demands, notices,summonses or le- gal papers received in connection with the claim or suit. j.Cooperate with us in the investigation or settlement of the claim. 4.Loss Payment - a.In the event of "loss"insured by this Coverage Form, at our option,we will either: (1)Pay the value of lost or dam- aged property; (2)Pay the cost of repairing or re- placing the lost or damaged property; (3)Repair, rebuild or replace the property with other property of like kind and quality;or (4)Take all or any part of the prop- erty at an agreed or appraised value. We will determine the value of lost or damaged property,or the cost of its repair or replacement, in accordance with the applicable terms of Section D. LOSS CONDITIONS,7. Valua- tion or any applicable provision that amends or supersedes this valuation condition. We will give notice of our intentions within 30 days after we receive the sworn proof of loss. b.We will not pay you more than your financial interest in the Covered Property. c.We may adjust "losses"with the owners of lost or damaged property if other than you. If we pay the owners, such payment will satisfy your claims against us for the owners'property. We will not pay the owners more than their financial interest in the Covered Property. We may elect to defend you against suits arising from claims of owners of property. We will do this at our ex- pense. d.Your Losses -We adjust all "losses" with you. Payment will be made to you unless another loss payee is named inthe policy. We will pay for insured "loss"within 30 days after we receive the sworn proof of loss if you have complied Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 Includes copyrighted material with permission of American Association of Insurance Services MA 112 02 21 and Insurance Services Office, Inc.Page 13 of 17 with all of the "terms"of this Cover- age Form; and (1)We have reached agreement with you on the amount of "loss"; or (2)An appraisal award has been made. 5.Pair,Sets or Parts - a.Pair or Set - In case of "loss"to any part of a pair or set we may: (1)Repair or replace any part to re- store the pair or set to its value before the "loss";or (2)Pay the difference between the value of the pair or set before and after the "loss". b.Parts - In case of "loss"to any part of Cov- ered Property consisting of several parts when complete, we will only pay for the value of the lost or dam- aged part. 6.Recovered Property -If either you or we recover any property after loss settlement, that party must give the other prompt no- tice. At your option, the property will be re- turned to you.You must then return to us the amount we paid to you for the property. We will pay recovery expenses and the ex- penses to repair the recovered property, subject to the "limit"of insurance. 7.Valuation -We will determine the value of Covered Property in the event of "loss"as follows: a.Replacement Cost -at replacement cost as of the time of "loss". Re- placement cost is the cost to replace Covered Property at the time of "loss"without deduction for deprecia- tion.Replacement cost includes rea- sonable overhead and profit related to the Covered Property that sustains direct "loss" if included in the "limit"of insurance.Overhead and profit will not exceed the overhead and profit provided for in the construction con- tract in force at the time of "loss". (1)You may make a claim for "loss" covered by this insurance on an actual cash value basis instead of on a replacement cost basis. In the event you elect to have "loss"settled on an actual cash value basis, you may still make a claim for the additional cover- age replacement cost provides if you notify us of your intent to do so within 180 days after the "loss". (2)We will not pay on a replace- ment cost basis for any "loss": (a)Until the lost or damaged property is actually repaired or replaced; and (b)Unless the repairs or re- placement is made as soon as reasonably possible after the "loss". Instead we will pay on an actual cash value basis. (3)We will not pay more for "loss" on a replacement cost basis than the least of (a), (b) or (c), subject to Paragraph (4) below: (a)The "limit"of insurance ap- plicable to the lost or dam- aged property; (b)The cost to replace,on the same premises,the lost or damaged property with oth- er property: 1)Of comparable material and quality; and 2)Used for the same pur- pose; or (c)The amount you actually spend that is necessary to repair or replace the lost or damaged property. If a building or structure is rebuilt at a new job site, the cost de- scribed in Paragraph (b) is lim- ited to the cost which would have been incurred if the build- ing or structure had been rebuilt at the originaljob site. (4)The cost of repair or replace- ment does not include the in- creased cost attributable to en- forcement of or compliance with any ordinance or law regulating the construction,use or repair of any property,except as provided in A. COVERAGE, 4. Additional Coverages,m.Ordinance or Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 Includes copyrighted material with permission of American Association of Insurance Services MA 112 02 21 and Insurance Services Office, Inc.Page 14 of 17 Law Coverage for New Con- struction. This Replacement Cost provision does not apply to Paragraph b.under this Loss Condition 7. b.Property in Transit -at its invoice price as indicated on the bill of lad- ing, plus any prepaid freight charges and any other shipping charges that are due since the start of transit. E.OTHER CONDITIONS 1.Coinsurance -We will not pay the full amount of any "loss" if the 100% value of Covered Property on the date of comple- tion is greater than the "limit"for the Cov- ered Property. Instead, we will determine the most we will pay using the following steps: a.Calculate 100%of the value of the Covered Property on the date of completion; b.Divide the "limit"for Covered Proper- ty by the figure determined in step a.; c.Multiply the total amount of "loss", before the application of any deducti- ble,by the figure determined in step b.; d.Subtract the deductible from the fig- ure determined in step c. We will pay the amount determined in step d.or the applicable "limit"of insur- ance, whichever is less. For the remain- der, you will either have to rely on other insurance or absorb the "loss"yourself. The Coinsurance clause will not apply if indicated as such on the "Declarations". This provision does not applyto the Addi- tional Coverages. If there is more than one "limit"indicated on the "Declarations"for this Coverage Form, this procedure applies separately to each "limit". If there is only one "limit"indicated on the "Declarations"for this coverage, this pro- cedure applies to the total of all Covered Property to which the "limit"applies. 2.Insurance Under Two or More Cover- ages -If two or more of this policy's cov- erages apply to the same "loss",we will not pay more than the actual amount of the "loss". 3.Other Insurance - a.You may have other insurance sub- ject to the same "terms"as the insur- ance under this policy.If you do, we will pay our share of the covered "loss". Our share is the proportion that the applicable "limit"under this policy bears to the "limit"of all insur- ance covering on the same basis. b.If there is other insurance covering the same "loss",other than that de- scribed in a.above,we will pay only for the amount of covered "loss"in excess of the amount due from that other insurance, whether you can col- lect on it or not. But we will not pay more than the applicable "limit". 4.No Benefit to Bailee -No person or or- ganization, other than you, having custo- dy of Covered Property will benefit from this insurance. 5.Concealment,Misrepresentation or Fraud -This coverage is void in any case of fraud by you as it relates to this Cover- age Form at any time.It is also void if you or any other insured, at any time,inten- tionally conceal or misrepresent a materi- al fact concerning: a.This Coverage Form; b.The Covered Property; c.Your interest in the Covered Proper- ty; or d.A claim under this Coverage Form. 6.Policy Period, Coverage Territory -Un- der this Coverage Form: a.We cover "loss"commencing: (1)During the policy period shown on the "Declarations";and (2)Within the coverage territory. b.The coverage territory: (1)The United States of America (including its territories and pos- sessions); (2)Puerto Rico;and (3)Canada. 7.Reinstatement of Limits After Loss - Unless otherwise indicated,"limits"will not be reduced by the payment of any claim under thiscoverage. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 Includes copyrighted material with permission of American Association of Insurance Services MA 112 02 21 and Insurance Services Office, Inc.Page 15 of 17 8.Subrogation -If any person or organiza- tion to or for whom we make payment un- der this Coverage Form has rights to re- cover damages from another,those rights are transferred to us to the extent of our payment.That person or organization must do everything necessary to secure our rights and must do nothing after direct "loss"to impair them.But you may waive your rights against another party in writ- ing: a.Prior to a direct "loss"to your Cov- ered Property. b.After a direct "loss"to your Covered Property only if, at time of direct "loss", that party is one of the follow- ing: (1)Someone insured by this insur- ance;or (2)A business firm: (a)Owned or controlled by you; or (b)That owns or controls you. However,you may not waive your rights against: a.Any architect, engineer or other party or entity responsible for any design, specification or plans for the fabrica- tion, erection or completion of the property insured with respect to any "loss"that may be caused by: (1)Fault,defect, error or omission in such design,specifications or plans;or (2)Performance of, or failure to per- form,supervisory or manage- ment functions related to the construction projects. b.Any contractor, manufacturer or sup- plier of Covered Property that has agreed to make good any "loss"un- der a guarantee or warranty. 9.Legal Action Against Us -No one may bring a legal action against us under this Coverage Form unless: a.There has been full compliance with all of the "terms"of this Coverage Form;and b.The action has been brought within two years after you first have knowledge of the "loss". 10.When Coverage Ceases -The insurance provided by this Coverage Form will end when one of thefollowing first occurs: a.This policy expires or is cancelled; b.The building or structure described on the "Declarations"is accepted by the purchaser or owner, even if the purchaser or owner is you; c.Your interest in the Covered Property ceases; d.You abandon construction with no in- tent to complete it; e.The building or structure described on the "Declarations"has been com- pleted for more than 90 days; f.The building or structure described on the "Declarations"has been oc- cupied in whole or in part,or put to its intended use for 60 days; or g.Permanent property insurance is ob- tained on the building or structure. 11.Mortgage Holders - a.The term "mortgage holder" includes trustee. b.We will pay for covered "loss"to buildings or structures to each mort- gage holder shown on the "Declara- tions"in their order of precedence,as interests may appear. c.The mortgage holder has the right to receive loss payment even if the mortgage holder has started foreclo- sure or similar action on the building or structure. d.If we deny your claim because of your acts or because you have failed to comply with the "terms"of this Coverage Form,the mortgage holder will still have the right to receive loss payment if the mortgage holder: (1)Pays any premium due under this Coverage Form at our re- quest if you have failed to do so; (2)Submits a signed, sworn proof of loss within 60 days after receiv- ing notice from us of your failure to do so; and (3)Has notified us of any change in ownership, occupancy or sub- stantial change in risk known to the mortgage holder. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 Includes copyrighted material with permission of American Association of Insurance Services MA 112 02 21 and Insurance Services Office, Inc.Page 16 of 17 All of the "terms"of this Coverage Form will then apply directly to the mortgage holder. e.If we pay the mortgage holder for any "loss",and deny payment to you be- cause of your acts or because you have failed to comply with the "terms" of this Coverage Form: (1)The mortgage holder's rights under the mortgage will be transferred to us to the extent of the amount we pay;and (2)The mortgage holder's right to recover the full amount of the mortgage holder's claim will not be impaired. At our option,we may pay to the mortgage holder the whole principal on the mortgage plus any accrued in- terest.In this event,your mortgage and note will be transferred to us and you will pay your remaining mortgage debt to us. f.If we cancel this policy,we will give written notice to the mortgage holder at least: (1)10 days before the effective date of cancellation if we cancel for your nonpayment of premium;or (2)30 days before the effective date of cancellation if we cancel for any other reason. g.If we elect not to renew this policy, we will give written notice to the mortgage holder at least 10 days be- fore the expiration date of this policy. 12.Provisional Limit -The "limit"shown on the "Declarations"is provisional. The rate and premium are based on an average amount of liability during the period of construction. At any date while this policy is in force, the actual "limit"under this Coverage Form is that proportion of the Provisional Limit that the replacement cost of the described Covered Property bears to the replacement cost at the date of completion, but shall not in any case exceed the Provisional Limit. 13.Control of Property -Any act or neglect of any person other than you beyond your direction or control will not affect this in- surance. The breach of any condition of this Cov- erage Form at any one or more locations will not affect coverage at any location where,at the time of "loss", the breach of condition does not exist. 14.Liberalization -If,within 45 days prior to the beginning of this Coverage Part or during the policy period,we make any changes to any forms or endorsements of this Coverage Part for which there is cur- rently no separate premium charge, and that change provides more coverage than this Coverage Part, the change will be considered as included until the end of the current policy period.We will make no additional premium charge for this addi- tional coverage during the interim. F.DEFINITIONS 1."Declarations"means all pages labeled Declarations, Supplemental Declarations, Schedules, or Supplemental Schedules, which pertain to this coverage. 2."Fungi"means any type or form of fungus, and includes, but is not limited to,any form or type of mold, mushroom or mildew and any mycotoxins,spores, scents or byproducts produced or released by fungi. 3."Loss"means accidental physical loss or accidental physical damage. 4."Limit"means the amount of coverage shown on the "Declarations",unless the "limit"is amended by E. OTHER CONDI- TIONS,12. Provisional Limit. 5."Period of delay"means the period of time that: a.Begins on the date the project would have been completed at the time of the "loss", had no "loss"occurred; and b.Ends on the actual date of completion of the insured project with the exer- cise of due diligence and dispatch. "Period of delay"does not mean delay in- curred prior to the date of "loss". The expiration date of this policy will not cut short the "period of delay". 6."Pollutant"means: a.Any solid, liquid,gaseous, or thermal irritant or contaminant; b.Electromagnetic (visible or invisible) or sound emission; or c.Waste, including materials to be dis- posed of as well as recycled,re- claimed or reconditioned. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 Includes copyrighted material with permission of American Association of Insurance Services MA 112 02 21 and Insurance Services Office, Inc.Page 17 of 17 7."Sinkhole collapse"means the sudden settlement or collapse of earth supporting the Covered Property into subterranean voids created by the action of water on a limestone or similar rock formation. It does not include the value of the land or the cost of filling sinkholes. 8."Soft costs"means the necessary ex- penses relating to the construction,erec- tion or fabrication of Covered Property that are over and above those costs which would have been incurred had there been no delay in completion of con- struction. These costs include the follow- ing: a.Additional interest expense on mon- ey you borrow to finance construc- tion,remodeling,renovation or repair; b.Additional realty taxes and other as- sessments which you incur; c.Additional advertising and promo- tional expenses; d.Additional costs consisting of com- missions and administrative expens- es, which result from renegotiation of leases, and expediting expenses such as overtime and additional transportation or storage costs; and e.Additional fees for accountants, ar- chitects,attorneys,consultants, en- gineers, insurance premiums, fran- chises, project administration, royal- ties and watchman or guard services. 9."Specified causes of loss"means aircraft; civil commotion;explosion; falling objects; fire; hail and windstorm; leakage from fire extinguishing equipment; lightning; riot; "sinkhole collapse"; smoke; sonic boom; vandalism; vehicles; volcanic action;wa- ter damage;and weight of ice, snow,or sleet. Falling objects does not include "loss"to personal property in the open or to the in- terior of buildings or structures,or per- sonal property inside buildings or struc- tures,unless the exterior of the roof or walls are first damaged by a falling object. Water damage means: (1)Sudden or accidental discharge or leakage of water or steam as a direct result of breaking or cracking of a part of a system or appliance (other than a sump pump system including its re- lated equipment or parts) containing the water or steam; and (2)Sudden or accidental discharge or leakage of water or waterborne mate- rial as the direct result of the breaking apart or cracking of a water or sewer pipe that is located away from the premises described on the "Declara- tions"and is part of a municipal pota- ble water supply system or municipal sanitary sewer system, if the break- age or cracking is caused by wear and tear. But water damage does not include "loss" otherwise excluded under the terms of Section B. EXCLUSIONS,1. c.Water. Therefore,for example, there is no cover- age under this Coverage Form in the sit- uation in which discharge or leakage of water results from the breaking apart or cracking of a pipe which was caused by or related to weather-induced flooding, even if wear and tear contributed to the breakage or cracking.As another exam- ple,and also in accordance with the terms of Exclusion c.Water, there is no coverage for "loss"caused by or related to weather-induced flooding which follows or is exacerbated by pipe breakage or cracking attributable to wear and tear. To the extent that accidental discharge or leakage of water falls within the criteria set forth in 9.(1) or 9.(2) of this definition of "specified causes of loss",such water is not subject to the provisions of Exclu- sion c.Water. 10."Terms"means all provisions, limitations, exclusions, conditions and definitions that apply. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 MA 229 02 21 Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office, Inc. with its permission.Page 1 of 4 THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY. PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY. SOFT COSTS,RENTAL INCOME AND EARNINGS ENDORSEMENT This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the following: BUILDERS'RISK INLAND MARINE COVERAGE PART SCHEDULE LIMIT DEDUCTIBLE (Number of Days)(Dollar) "SOFT COSTS" ITEM LOCATION (Address) $ $ $ $ "RENTAL INCOME" ITEM LOCATION (Address) $ $ $ $ "EARNINGS" ITEM LOCATION (Address) $ $ $ $ Maximum "Period of Delay":Days For those ITEMS for which a "limit"is indicated in the Schedule of this endorsement, the following applies: A.COVERAGE For the purposes of this endorsement only: 1. "Soft Costs" BUILDERS'RISK INLAND MARINE COVERAGE FORM,A.COVERAGE, 4. Additional Coverages, o. "Soft Costs" is deleted in its entirety and replaced by the following: o. "Soft Costs"-When a "limit"is indi- cated for "soft costs", we will pay for "soft costs" you sustain during the "period of delay"as a direct result of delay in com- pletion of construction caused by a Cov- ered Cause of Loss to Covered Property. The most we will pay is the "limit"shown in the Schedule of this endorsement. 2. "Rental Income" BUILDERS'RISK INLAND MARINE COVERAGE FORM,A.COVERAGE, 4. Additional Coverages is amended to in- clude the following: 1-1 REFER TO IA904 75,000 7 365 Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 MA 229 02 21 Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office, Inc. with its permission.Page 2 of 4 "Rental Income"-When a "limit"is indi- cated for "rental income", we will pay for actual loss of "rental income" you sustain during the "period of delay"as a direct re- sult of delay in completion of construction caused by a Covered Cause of Loss to Covered Property. Expenses that do not necessarily continue because of a delay will be deducted from the loss of "rental income". The most we will pay is the "lim- it"shown in the Schedule of this en- dorsement. 3. "Earnings" BUILDERS'RISK INLAND MARINE COVERAGE FORM,A.COVERAGE, 4. Additional Coverages is amended to in- clude the following: "Earnings"-When a "limit"is indicated for "earnings", we will pay for actual loss of net "earnings" you sustain during the "period of delay"as a direct result of delay in completion of construction caused by a Covered Cause of Loss to Covered Prop- erty. The most we will pay is the "limit" shown in the Schedule of this endorse- ment. We will pay only the "soft costs", loss of "rental income"and loss of "earnings" incurred within the number of days shown for the Maximum "Period of Delay"as indicated in the Schedule of this endorsement. 4.Expense to Reduce Loss BUILDERS'RISK INLAND MARINE COVERAGE FORM,A.COVERAGE, 4. Additional Coverages is amended to in- clude the following: Expense to Reduce Loss -In the event of a covered loss of "earnings", "rental in- come", or "soft costs"as described in A. COVERAGE, Paragraphs 1., 2.and 3., we will pay the necessary expenses you incur to reduce that loss. Expenses paid under this Paragraph A.4.will not in- crease the applicable "limit". We do not pay for: a.Expenses to extinguish a fire; or b.Expenses that exceed the amount by which a "loss"is reduced. If any property obtained for temporary use during the "period of delay"remains after the conclusion of the "period of delay", the amount we will pay under this Additional Coverage will be reduced by the salvage value of that property. 5.Interruption by Civil Authority BUILDERS'RISK INLAND MARINE COVERAGE FORM,A.COVERAGE, 4. Additional Coverages is amended to in- clude the following: Interruption by Civil Authority -We will pay for covered loss of "earnings", "rental income", or "soft costs"caused by order of civil authority that prohibits access to Covered Property. This order must be a result of direct "loss"to property at loca- tions other than those described in the Schedule but not more than one mile from such locations described in the Schedule, and caused by a Covered Cause of Loss. This extension is limited to 30 consecutive days from the date of the order. Expenses paid under this Paragraph A.5.will not in- crease the applicable "limit." B.EXCLUSIONS For the purposes of this endorsement only: 1.BUILDERS'RISK INLAND MARINE COVERAGE FORM,B. EXCLUSIONS, 2.c. Loss of Use is deleted in its entirety and replaced by the following: c.Loss of Use -"Loss"caused by or resulting from loss of use,business interruption, delay, or loss of market, except as provided by these Addi- tional Coverages. 2.BUILDERS'RISK INLAND MARINE COVERAGE FORM,B. EXCLUSIONS is amended to include the following: Additional Time - Any increase in "loss" resulting from additional time that is re- quired to replace or repair any part of the Covered Property due to or arising out of: (1)Ordinances or laws requiring the use of construction materials or equip- ment that are different from the type of materials and equipment used in the property that is destroyed; (2)Ordinances or laws requiring you to test, evaluate, observe, or record the existence, level, or effects of "pollu- tants"; (3)Adverse weather conditions; (4)Improvements necessary to correct deficiencies of original construction, erection, or fabrication; or (5)Alteration, additions, improvements or changes made in construction plans for contract work during repairs or replacement of lost or damaged property. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 MA 229 02 21 Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office, Inc. with its permission.Page 3 of 4 Consequential Loss -We do not pay for any increase in "loss"resulting from any other consequential loss. Lease, Contract, and License -We do not pay for any increase in "loss"resulting from the suspension, lapse, or cancella- tion of any lease, contract, or license. Strikes and other Interference -We do not pay for any increase in "loss"resulting from interference by strikers or any other person or organization interfering with the rebuilding, repairing, or replacing the Covered Property. Customs Regulations -We do not pay for any increase in "loss"resulting from import/export or customs restriction or regulation. Lack of Funds -We do not pay for any increase in "loss"resulting from non- availability of funds, other than insurance reimbursement, for the repair or replace- ment of lost or damaged property. C.DEDUCTIBLE For the purposes of this endorsement only, BUILDERS'RISK INLAND MARINE COV- ERAGE FORM, C. DEDUCTIBLE is amended to include the following: "Soft Costs", "Rental Income"or "Earn- ings" Deductible - 1.If a number of days is shown in the De- ductible section of the Schedule, the fol- lowing applies to that particular item: We pay only that part of your "soft costs", loss of "rental income"or loss of "earn- ings"that you incur after the number of days indicated in the Schedule have passed. 2.If a dollar amount is shown in the Deduct- ible section of the Schedule, the following applies to that particular item: We pay only that part of your "loss"over the Deductible amount indicated in the Schedule in any one occurrence. D.LOSS CONDITIONS For the purposes of this endorsement only, BUILDERS'RISK INLAND MARINE COV- ERAGE FORM, D. LOSS CONDITIONS is amended to include the following: Due Diligence -We only pay for "soft costs", loss of "rental income"or loss of "earnings" during the period of time that would be re- quired with due diligence and dispatch to re- build or restore the damaged Covered Proper- ty with materials of like kind and quality. You must do everything reasonably possible to minimize "soft costs", loss of "rental income" or loss of "earnings". Interference and Access - You must mini- mize any interference with the construction schedule to avoid or reduce any resulting "pe- riod of delay". You must also allow us access to the Covered Property so that we can negotiate with the contractors,manufacturers, suppliers,or other involved parties so we can: a.Establish the cause and extent of the "loss"to Covered Property, "soft costs", loss of "rental income"or loss of "earn- ings";and b.Determine and suggest methods to mini- mize or avoid the "period of delay"in con- struction, repairing, remodeling, or reno- vation. E.DEFINITIONS For the purposes of this endorsement only, BUILDERS'RISK INLAND MARINE COV- ERAGE FORM, E. DEFINITIONS is amended to include the following: 1."Earnings"means the net profit or loss (before income taxes) from the operation or use of the Covered Property, plus con- tinuing normal operating expenses (in- cluding payroll)of the operation or use of the Covered Property. 2."Period of delay"means the period of time that: a.Begins on the date the project would have been completed at the time of the "loss", had no "loss"occurred; and b.Ends on the actual date of comple- tion of the insured project with the exercise of due diligence and dis- patch. The expiration date of this policy will not cut short the "period of delay". 3."Rental income"means the total antici- pated net income from tenant occupancy of the project as a result of written lease agreements executed on or before the date of "loss", and fair rental value of any portion of the project which is to be occu- pied by you. 4."Soft costs"means the necessary ex- penses relating to the construction,erec- tion,or fabrication of Covered Property that are over and above thosecosts which would have been incurred had there been no delay in completion of construction. These costs include the following: Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 MA 229 02 21 Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office, Inc. with its permission.Page 4 of 4 a.Additional interest expense on money you borrow to finance construction, remodeling, renovation or repair; b.Additional realty taxes and other as- sessments which you incur; c.Additional advertising and promotion- al expenses; d.Additional costs consisting of com- missions and administrative expens- es, which result from renegotiation of leases, and expediting expenses such as overtime and additional transportation or storage costs;and e.Additional fees for accountants, ar- chitects,attorneys, consultants, engi- neers, insurance premiums, fran- chises,project administration, royal- ties and watchman or guard services. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 Includes copyrighted material of Insurance MA 323 07 21 Services Office,Inc., with its permission.Page 1 of 1 THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY. PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY. AMENDMENT OF COVERAGE -CYBER INCIDENT EXCLUSION This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the following: COMMERCIAL INLAND MARINE COVERAGE PART A.Cyber Incident Exclusion For the purposes of this endorsement only,the EXCLUSIONS section is amended to include the following: We will not pay for loss or damage caused directly or indirectly by a cyber incident. Such loss or damage is excluded regardless of any other cause or event that contributes concurrently or in any sequence to the loss. Cyber incident, meaning: 1.Unauthorized access to or use of any computer system (including electronic data). 2.Malicious code, virus or any other harmful code that is directed at,enacted upon or introduced into any computer system (including electronic data) and is designed to access, alter, corrupt, damage, delete, destroy,disrupt, encrypt, exploit, use or prevent or restrict access to or the use of any part of any computer system (including electronic data) or otherwise disrupt its normal functioning or operation. 3.Denial of service attack which disrupts, prevents or restricts access to or use of any computer system,or otherwise disrupts its normal functioning or operation. A cyber incident includes, but is not limited to, ransomware. However, if a cyber incident results in direct loss or damage from fire or explosion, we will pay for the resulting loss or damage caused by that fire or explosion. If Vandalism coverage is not otherwise excluded under this Coverage Part, vandalism does not include a cyber incident. B.Additional Coverage The exclusion in Paragraph A.above does not apply to the extent that coverage is provided in ELECTRONIC DATA PROCESSING EQUIPMENT COVERAGE FORM, Section I -Coverages, Coverage C -Additional Coverages. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 Includes copyrighted material of Insurance MA 324 02 25 Services Office, Inc., with its permission.Page 1 of 1 THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY. PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY. EXCLUSION OF LOSS DUE TO VIRUS OR BACTERIA This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the following: COMMERCIAL INLAND MARINE COVERAGE PART A.The exclusion set forth in Paragraph B.applies to all coverage under all forms and endorsements that comprise this Coverage Part,including but not limited to forms or endorsements that cover property damage to buildings or structures and forms or endorsements that cover "business in- come", "extra expense"or action of civil authority. B.We will not pay for "loss"caused by or resulting from any virus, bacterium or other microorganism that induces or is capable of inducing physical distress,illness or disease.This includes the ac- tual, alleged,potential, perceived or feared: 1.Presence of; 2.Exposure to; 3.Transmission of; 4.Inability to use or occupy any location due to; or 5.Suspension of operations due to; Any virus, bacterium or other microorganism. However, this exclusion does not apply to "loss" caused by or resulting from "fungi", wet rot or dry rot.Such "loss"is addressed in a separate exclu- sion, if applicable,in this Coverage Part. This exclusion amends or supersedes any such exclusion with respect to such “loss” caused by or resulting from any virus,bacterium or other microorganism provided elsewhere under this Coverage Part. C.With respect to any "loss"subject to the exclu- sion in Paragraph B., such exclusion supersedes any exclusion relating to "pollutants". D.The following provisions in this Coverage Part are hereby amended to remove reference to bac- teria: 1.Exclusion of "Fungi", Wet Rot, Dry Rot,and Bacteria; and 2.Additional Coverages -"Fungi", Wet Rot, Dry Rot, and Bacteria -Limited Coverage, includ- ing any endorsement increasing the scope or amount of coverage. E.The terms of the exclusion in Paragraph B., or the inapplicability of this exclusion to a particular "loss", do not serve to create coverage for any "loss"that would not otherwise be covered or be excluded under this Coverage Part. F.For the purposes of this endorsement, the follow- ing definition is added if it is not provided else- where under forms and endorsements that com- prise this Coverage Part: 1.“Fungi” means any type or form of fungus, and includes, but is not limited to, any form or type of mold,mushroom or mildew and any mycotoxins, spores, scents or byprod- ucts produced or released by fungi. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 Includes copyrighted material of Insurance MA 214 02 21 Services Office, Inc.,with its permission.Page 1 of 2 THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY. PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY. BUILDERS' RISK INLAND MARINE FLOOD ENDORSEMENT This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the following: BUILDERS' RISK INLAND MARINE COVERAGE PART SCHEDULE A.Coverage and Coverage Locations –Coverage applies for Flood at the Locations scheduled below: ITEM LOCATION (address)"LIMIT"DEDUCTIBLE B.Flood Annual Aggregate -The most we will pay for "loss"from flood shall not exceed: $in each 12 month period, regardless of the number of floods. A.COVERED CAUSES OF LOSS For the purposes of this endorsement only, 1.BUILDERS'RISK INLAND MARINE COVERAGE FORM, B. EXCLUSIONS, 1.c. Water, Paragraphs (1),(2), (4)and (5) are deleted in their entirety. 2.BUILDERS'RISK INLAND MARINE COVERAGE FORM A.COVERAGE, 3. Covered Causes of Loss is amended to include the following: (1)Flood, meaning the partial or com- plete inundation of normally dry land areas due to: (a)The unusual or rapid accumula- tion or runoff of rain or surface waters from any source;or (b)Waves, tidal waters, tidal waves (including tsunami);or (c)Water from rivers, ponds, lakes, streams, or any other body of water that rises above, overflows from, or is not contained within its natural or man-made bounda- ry; and All whether driven by wind or not, in- cluding storm surge. (2)Water under the ground surface pressing on, or flowing or seeping through; (a)Foundations, walls, floors or paved surfaces; (b)Basements,whether paved or not; or (c)Doors,windows or other open- ings. (3)Mudslides or mudflows,which are caused by flooding as defined in Par- 1-1 REFER TO IA904 750,000 50,000 Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 Includes copyrighted material of Insurance MA 214 02 21 Services Office, Inc.,with its permission.Page 2 of 2 agraph (1)above.Mudslide or mud- flow involves a river of liquid and flowing mud on the surface of nor- mally dry land areas as when earth is carried by a current of water and de- posited along the path of the current. (4)Waterborne material carried or oth- erwise moved by any of the water re- ferred to in Paragraphs (1) or (2) above, or material carried or other- wise moved by mudslide or mudflow as described in Paragraph (3)above. B.EXCLUSIONS For the purposes of this endorsement only, BUILDERS'RISK INLAND MARINE COV- ERAGE FORM,B.EXCLUSIONS is amended to include the following: We do not payfor loss caused by or resulting from: (a)Fire, explosion or theft; or (b)Any flood that begins before the inception of this insurance. C.DEDUCTIBLE For the purposes of this endorsement only, BUILDERS'RISK INLAND MARINE COV- ERAGE FORM, C. DEDUCTIBLE is deleted in its entirety and replaced by the following: C.DEDUCTIBLE Deductible -We pay only that part of your loss over the deductible amount indi- cated in the Schedule of this endorsement in any one occurrence. D.LIMIT OF INSURANCE (1)The "limit"in the Schedule of this en- dorsement is not an additional amount of insurance and will not increase the "limit" applicable to each item on the "Declara- tions", nor will the "limit"on the "Declara- tions"for COVERAGE PROVISIONS, d. All Covered Property in any one occur- rence be increased by this endorsement. (2)The "limit"in the Schedule of this en- dorsement indicates the most we will pay for loss or damage caused by flood in any one occurrence.If there is more than one flood in a policy period, the most we will pay for the total of all "loss"sustained dur- ing each separate 12 month period of that policy and caused by flood is the amount that is identified as the Flood Annual Ag- gregate as shown in the Schedule of this endorsement. If the "limit"and the Flood Annual Aggre- gate amount are the same,then the "limit" is the most we will pay for the total of all "loss"that is caused by flood in each 12 month period of this policy,even if there is more than one occurrence of flood during that 12 month period. Thus,if the first flood does not exhaust the applicable "limit",then the balance of that "limit"is available for subsequent floods. If a single occurrence of flood begins dur- ing one 12 month period of this policy and ends during the following 12 month period of this policy (or portion thereof if any pe- riod is less than 12 months), any "limit"or Flood Annual Aggregate applicable to the following policy period will not apply to that flood. E.OTHER CONDITION For the purposes of this endorsement only, BUILDERS'RISK INLAND MARINE COV- ERAGE FORM,E. OTHER CONDITIONS, 1. Coinsurance does not apply. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 Includes copyrighted material with permission MA 216 02 21 of American Association of Insurance Services.Page 1 of 2 THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY. PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY. BUILDERS' RISK INLAND MARINE EARTHQUAKE AND VOLCANIC ERUPTION ENDORSEMENT This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the following: BUILDERS' RISK INLAND MARINE COVERAGE PART SCHEDULE ITEM LOCATION (address)"LIMIT"DEDUCTIBLE A.COVERED CAUSES OF LOSS For the purposes of this endorsement only, 1. BUILDERS'RISK INLAND MARINE COVERAGE FORM, B. EXCLUSIONS, 1.b. Earth Movement, Paragraphs (1) and (5)are deleted in their entirety. 2.BUILDERS'RISK INLAND MARINE COVERAGE FORM, A.COVERAGE, 3. Covered Causes of Loss is amended to include the following: a.Earthquake, including tremors and af- tershocks and any earth sinking, rising or shifting related to such event;and b.Volcanic Eruption, explosion or effu- sion. We will pay up to the "limit"indicated in the Schedule of this endorsement for that par- ticular item. All earthquake shocks or vol- canic eruptions that occur within any 168- hour period will constitute a single earth- quake or volcanic eruption. The expiration of this policy will not reduce the 168-hour period. B.EXCLUSIONS For the purposes of this endorsement only, BUILDERS'RISK INLAND MARINE COV- ERAGE FORM,B.EXCLUSIONS is amended to include the following: We will not pay for "loss"caused by or result- ing from any Earthquake or Volcanic Eruption that begins before the inception date of this endorsement. We will not pay for "loss"caused directly or in- directly by tidal wave or tsunami, even if at- tributable to an Earthquake or Volcanic Erup- tion. C.DEDUCTIBLE For the purposes of this endorsement only, BUILDERS'RISK INLAND MARINE COV- ERAGE FORM, C. DEDUCTIBLE is deleted in its entirety and replaced by the following: C.DEDUCTIBLE Deductible -We pay only that part of your loss over the deductible amount indi- 1-1 REFER TO IA904 1,660,932 10% Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 Includes copyrighted material with permission MA 216 02 21 of American Association of Insurance Services.Page 2 of 2 cated in the Schedule of this endorsement in any one occurrence. If a percentage deductible is indicated in the Schedule of this endorsement, the deductible amount is that percentage of the actual cash value(s)of the Covered Property at the time of “loss”. D.LIMIT OF INSURANCE 1.The "limit"in the Schedule of this en- dorsement indicates the most we will pay for loss or damage caused by earthquake or volcanic eruption. 2.The "limit"in the Schedule of this en- dorsement is not an additional amount of insurance and will not increase the "limit" applicable to each item on the "Declara- tions", nor will the "limit"on the "Declara- tions"for COVERAGE PROVISIONS, d. All Covered Property in any one occur- rence be increased by this endorsement. E.OTHER CONDITION For the purposes of this endorsement only, BUILDERS'RISK INLAND MARINE COV- ERAGE FORM, E. OTHER CONDITIONS, 1. Coinsurance does not apply. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 Includes copyrighted material of Insurance MA 242 02 21 Services Office, Inc.,with its permission. THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY. PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY. EQUIPMENT BREAKDOWN COVERAGE (EXCLUDING PRODUCTION EQUIPMENT) This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the following: BUILDERS'RISK INLAND MARINE COVERAGE PART A.For the purposes of this endorsement only, BUILDERS'RISK INLAND MARINE COV- ERAGE FORM, A.COVERAGE is amended as follows: 1.For those locations with buildings indicat- ed in the Schedule of this endorsement, Paragraph 2.i.is deleted in its entirety and replaced by the following: i. Machinery, Tools and Equipment - Machinery, tools and equipment other than "covered equipment",and except as provided in A.COVERAGE,1. Covered Property, b.Scaffolding and Construction Forms. 2.Paragraph 3. Covered Causes of Loss is amended to include the following: We will pay for direct damage to Covered Property caused by or resulting from an "accident". At the time an "accident"occurs, it must become apparent by physical damage that requires repair or replacement of the "covered equipment"or part thereof, in order for a Covered Cause of Loss to have occurred. 3.Paragraph 4. Additional Coverages is amended as follows: The following Additional Coverages are added, subject to the following: All other "terms"of this policy, including "limits"and deductibles, apply to these Additional Coverages. If "limits"are indi- cated in the following Additional Coverag- es, they are included in, and are not in addition to, the "limits"shown on the "Declarations"as applicable to the Cov- ered Property.These "limits"apply to di- rect "loss"only. Drying Out -If electrical equipment included in Covered Property re- quires "drying out"as a result of a "flood", the reasonable expense in- curred for the "drying out"will be cov- ered. This Additional Coverage is in- cluded within the "limit"shown on the "Declarations". Expediting Expenses -With respect to an "accident"covered by this en- dorsement, we will pay the reasona- ble extra cost to: (1)Make temporary repairs; (2)Expedite permanent repairs;and (3)Expedite permanent replace- ment. This Additional Coverage is included within the "limit"shown on the "Decla- rations". Hazardous Substance Limitation - This Additional Coverage only applies to loss or damage covered by this endorsement. The following applies despite the op- eration of BUILDERS'RISK INLAND MARINE COVERAGE FORM, B. EXCLUSIONS, 1.e.Ordinance or Law.This limitation does not apply to damage, contamination or pollution caused by ammonia. If Covered Property is damaged, con- taminated or polluted by a "hazard- ous substance"other than ammonia as a result of an "accident"to Cov- ered Property covered by this en- dorsement, the most we will pay for any additional expenses incurred by you for clean up, repair, replacement or disposal of that property is $50,000. As used here, additional expenses mean expenses incurred beyond those for which we would be liable if no "hazardous substance" had been involved. Ammonia Contamination Limita- tion -If Covered Property is contam- inated by ammonia as a result of an "accident"to Covered Property, the most we will pay for this kind of dam- age, including salvage expense, is $50,000. Page of 1 3 Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 Includes copyrighted material of Insurance MA 242 02 21 Services Office, Inc.,with its permission. B.BUILDERS'RISK INLAND MARINE COV- ERAGE FORM, B. EXCLUSIONS is amended as follows: The following is added to 1.c.Water, 3.a. Faulty, Inadequate or Defective, 3.b. Elec- trical Current and 3.c. Mechanical Break- down: However, this exclusion does not apply if these causes of loss are caused by, or result from an "accident"to Covered Property. C.BUILDERS'RISK INLAND MARINE COV- ERAGE FORM, C. DEDUCTIBLE is amended as follows: The following is added with respect to "loss" caused by an "accident"to Covered Property: The Deductible applicable to "loss"covered by this endorsement is $500, or the Deductible indicated on the "Declarations"as being appli- cable to the lost or damaged Covered Proper- ty, whichever is greater. D.BUILDERS'RISK INLAND MARINE COV- ERAGE FORM,E.OTHER CONDITIONS, 3. Other Insurance is deleted in its entirety and replaced by the following: 3.Other Insurance - a.You may have other insurance sub- ject to the same "terms"as the insur- ance under this policy.If you do, we will pay our share of the covered "loss". Our share is the proportion that the applicable "limit"under this policy bears to the "limit"of all insurance covering on the same basis. b.If you have other insurance, which in- cludes warranties (express or implied) from equipment manufacturers or maintenance contracts,covering the same loss as the insurance under this Coverage Part, we will pay only the excess over what you should have received from the other insurance. We will pay the excess whether you can collect on the other insurance or not. E.BUILDERS'RISK INLAND MARINE COV- ERAGE FORM,F.DEFINITIONS is amended to include the following: 1."Accident": a.Means a sudden and accidental breakdown of "covered equipment". b.Does not include: (1)Depletion,deterioration, corro- sion or erosion, wear and tear; (2)Leakage at any valve, fitting, shaft seal,gland packing, joint or connection; (3)The functioning of any safety or protective device; (4)The breakdown of any structure or foundation supporting "cov- ered equipment"or any of its parts; (5)Any condition that can be rea- sonably remedied by normal maintenance such as: (a)Replacing expendable parts; (b)Recharging batteries;or (c)Rebooting, reloading or up- dating software or firmware; or (6)Any condition caused by or re- lated to: (a)Incompatibility of "covered equipment"or part thereof with any software or equip- ment installed, introduced or networked within the prior 30 days;or (b)Programming error,pro- gramming limitation, com- puter virus,malicious code, loss of data, loss of access, or other condition within or involving data or media of any kind. 2."Covered equipment": a.Means: (1)Any boiler; (2)Any fired or unfired pressure vessel subject to vacuum or in- ternal pressure other than the static pressure of its contents; (3)Any piping and its accessory equipment; (4)Any refrigeration or air condition- ing system; or (5)Any mechanical or electrical ma- chine or apparatus used for gen- eration, transmission or utiliza- tion of mechanical or electrical power; which will become a permanent part of the buildings or structures de- scribed on the "Declarations"and on- ly while located on the premises of Page of 2 3 Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 those buildings or structures,or with- in 1,000 feet of such premises. b.Does not include: (1)Any sewer piping,underground gas piping, or piping forming a part of a sprinkler system; (2)Water piping other than boiler feed water piping, boiler conden- sate return piping or water piping forming a part of a refrigeration or air conditioning system; (3)Insulating or refractory material; (4)Media used with any electronic data processing equipment; (5)Vehicle, elevator, escalator,con- veyor, hoist or crane; (6)Machine or apparatus that is used for research,medical, di- agnostic, surgical, dental or pathological purposes; (7)Production equipment meaning any production or processing machinery or equipment that processes, forms,cuts, shapes, grinds or conveys raw materials, materials in process or finished products, and any electronic da- ta processing equipment, data or media which controls or operates production equipment; or (8)Any other property not specifical- ly described in Paragraph 2.a. above. 3."Drying out"means restoration of electri- cal equipment to service following a "flood"by removal of excess moisture from that equipment including: a.Application of heat or controlled elec- trical current, circulation of air, or use of dehumidification equipment, after rinsing the electrical equipment with clean fresh water if necessary to flush away"flood"debris. b."Drying out"can be done in place or equipment can be disconnected and removed to a repair facility for drying if necessary. c."Drying out"does not include or apply to: (1)Replacement or repair of any electrical equipment or parts thereof; or (2)Any expense related to decon- struction, demolition, or recon- struction of any building compo- nent, structure or part thereof to gain access to electrical equip- ment. 4."Flood"means a general and temporary condition of partial or complete inundation of normally dry land areas due to: a.The overflow of inland or tidal waters; b.The unusual or rapid accumulation or runoff of surface waters from any source; or c.Mudslides or mudflows, which are caused by flooding as defined above in Paragraph 4.b.For the purposes of this Covered Cause of Loss, a mud- slide or mudflow involves a river of liquid and flowing mud on the surface of normally dry land areas as when earth is carried by a current of water and deposited along the path of the current. All flooding in a continuous or protracted event will constitute asingle "flood". 5."Hazardous substance"means a sub- stance declared to be hazardous to health by a governmental agency. AddressLocation Number SCHEDULE 1-1 126 E VALLEY CENTER RD BOZEMAN, MT 59718 Includes copyrighted material of Insurance MA 242 02 21 Services Office, Inc.,with its permission.Page of 3 3 Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents WAGE DETERMINATION SCHEDULE 00 73 46 - 1 00 73 46 WAGE DETERMINATION SCHEDULE Montana Department of Labor and Industry Prevailing Wages – Project Rates (Comprised of Montana Prevailing Wage Rates for Heavy Construction Services 2026 pages plus this cover page) Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 This page intentionally left blank. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 Employment Standards Division Montana Department of Labor and Industry P. O. Box 8011 Helena, MT 59604 Phone 406-444-6543 The department welcomes questions, comments, and suggestions from the public. In addition, we’ll do our best to provide information in an accessible format, upon request, in compliance with the Americans with Disabilities Act. MONTANA PREVAILING WAGE REQUIREMENTS The Commissioner of the Department of Labor and Industry, in accordance with Sections 18-2-401 and 18-2-402 of the Montana Code Annotated (MCA), has determined the standard prevailing rate of wages for the occupations listed in this publication. The wages specified herein control the prevailing rate of wages for the purposes of Section 18-2-401, et seq., MCA. Each employer is required to pay (as a minimum) the rate of wages, including fringe benefits, travel allowance, zone pay and per diem applicable to the classification under which the work is being performed as provided in the attached wage determinations. All Montana Prevailing Wage Rates are available on the department’s website at https://erd.dli.mt.gov/labor-standards/state- prevailing-wage- rates or by contacting the department at (406) 444-6543. In addition, this publication provides general information concerning compliance with Montana’s Prevailing Wage Law and the payment of prevailing wages. For detailed compliance information relating to public works contracts and payment of prevailing wage rates, please consult the regulations on the department's website at https://erd.dli.mt.gov/labor-standards/public-contracts-prevailing-wage-law/ or contact the department at (406) 444-6543. SARAH SWANSON Commissioner Department of Labor and Industry State of Montana MONTANA PREVAILING WAGE RATES FOR HEAVY CONSTRUCTION SERVICES 2026 Effective: April 25, 2026 These revised rates supersede the previously posted 2026 rates. Greg Gianforte, Governor State of Montana Sarah Swanson, Commissioner Department of Labor & Industry To obtain copies of prevailing wage rate schedules, or for information relating to public works projects and payment of prevailing wage rates, visit ESD at erd.dli.mt.gov/labor-standards or contact: Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 2 TABLE OF CONTENTS MONTANA PREVAILING WAGE REQUIREMENTS: WAGE RATES: A.Date of Publication ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….……. 3 B.Definition of Heavy Construction …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..…............. 3 C.Definition of Public Works Contract ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….... 3 D.Prevailing Wage Schedule ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….………… 3 E.Rates to Use for Projects ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..…………… 3 F.Wage Rate Adjustments for Multiyear Contracts ……………………………………………………………………………………………….………… 3 G.Fringe Benefits ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 4 H.Dispatch City ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….……. 4 I.Zone Pay …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 4 J.Computing Travel Benefits ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………….………………………… 4 K.Per Diem …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 4 L.Apprentices ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..……………………….. 4 M.Posting Notice of Prevailing Wages ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 5 N.Employment Preference …………………………………………………………………………………………………………….…………………………....... 5 O.Projects of a Mixed Nature ............................................................................................................................................................ 5 P.Occupations Definitions Website ................................................................................................................................................... 5 Q.Welder Rates ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 5 R.Foreman Rates …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..……. 5 S Proper Classification for Pipefitter and Laborer/Pipelayer Work on Water and Wastewater Treatment Plants ……………..… 5 BOILERMAKERS ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..………………….. 6 BRICK, BLOCK, AND STONE MASONS ……………………………………………………………………………………….......................................... 6 CARPENTERS …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 6 CEMENT MASONS AND CONCRETE FINISHERS …………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 6 CONSTRUCTION EQUIPMENT OPERATORS OPERATORS GROUP 1 ………………………………………………………………………………………………………….............................................. 7 OPERATORS GROUP 2 ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 7 OPERATORS GROUP 3 ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 8 OPERATORS GROUP 4 ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 8 OPERATORS GROUP 5 ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 8 OPERATORS GROUP 6 ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 8 OPERATORS GROUP 7 ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 9 CONSTRUCTION LABORERS LABORERS GROUP 1 ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 9 LABORERS GROUP 2 ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 9 LABORERS GROUP 3 ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 10 LABORERS GROUP 4 ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 10 DIVERS ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 10 DIVER TENDERS ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 11 ELECTRICIANS …………………………………………......................................................................................................................................... 11 INSULATION WORKERS - MECHANICAL (HEAT AND FROST) ………………………………………………………………............................ 11 IRONWORKERS - STRUCTURAL STEEL AND REBAR PLACERS …………………………………………………………………………………. 12 LINE CONSTRUCTION EQUIPMENT OPERATORS …………………………………………………………………………………..........…………………………………………………. 12 GROUNDMAN ………………………………………………………………………………………………...........……………………………………………………….. 12 LINEMAN ……………………………………………………………………………………………...........………………………………………………………………….. 12 MILLWRIGHTS …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 13 PAINTERS ……………………………………………………………………………..............….......................................................................................... 13 PILE BUCKS ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 13 PLUMBERS, PIPEFITTERS, AND STEAMFITTERS …………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 13 SPRINKLERFITTERS …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………............................................... 14 TRUCK DRIVERS ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 14 Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 3 A.Date of Publication April 25, 2026 B.Definition of Heavy Construction The Administrative Rules of Montana (ARM), 24.17.501(4) – (4)(b), states “Heavy construction projects include, but are not limited to, those projects that are not properly classified as either ‘building construction’, or ‘highway construction.’ Heavy construction projects include, but are not limited to, antenna towers, bridges (major bridges designed for commercial navigation), breakwaters, caissons (other than building or highway), canals, channels, channel cut-offs, chemical complexes or facilities (other than buildings), cofferdams, coke ovens, dams, demolition (not incidental to construction), dikes, docks, drainage projects, dredging projects, electrification projects (outdoor), fish hatcheries, flood control projects, industrial incinerators (other than building), irrigation projects, jetties, kilns, land drainage (not incidental to other construction), land leveling (not incidental to other construction), land reclamation, levees, locks and waterways, oil refineries (other than buildings), pipe lines, ponds, pumping stations (prefabricated drop-in units – not buildings), railroad construction, reservoirs, revetments, sewage collection and disposal lines, sewers (sanitary, storm, etc.), shoreline maintenance, ski tows, storage tanks, swimming pools (outdoor), subways (other than buildings), tipples, tunnels, unsheltered piers and wharves, viaducts (other than highway), water mains, waterway construction, water supply lines (not incidental to building), water and sewage treatment plants (other than buildings) and wells.” C.Definition of Public Works Contract Section 18-2-401(11)(a), MCA defines “public works contract” as “…a contract for construction services let by the state, county, municipality, school district, or political subdivision or for nonconstruction services let by the state,county, municipality, or political subdivision in which the total cost of the contract is in excess of $25,000...”. D.Prevailing Wage Schedule This publication covers only Heavy Construction occupations and rates in the specific localities mentioned herein. These rates will remain in effect until superseded by a more current publication. Current prevailing wage rate schedules for Building Construction, Highway Construction and Nonconstruction Services occupations can be found on the department's website at https://erd.dli.mt.gov/labor-standards/state-prevailing-wage-rates/ or by contacting the department at (406) 444-6543. E.Rates to Use for Projects ARM, 24.17.127(1)(c), states “The wage rates applicable to a particular public works project are those in effect at the time the bid specifications are advertised.” F.Wage Rate Adjustments for Multiyear Contracts Section 18-2-417, MCA states:“(1) Any public works contract that by the terms of the original contract calls for more than 30 months to fullyperform must include a provision to adjust, as provided in subsection (2), the standard prevailing rate of wages to be paid to the workers performing the contract. (2) The standard prevailing rate of wages paid to workers under a contract subject to this section must be adjusted 12 months after the date of the award of the public works contract. The amount of the adjustment must be a 3% increase. The adjustment must be made and applied every 12 months for the term of the contract. (3) Any increase in the standard rate of prevailing wages for workers under this section is the sole responsibility of the contractor and any subcontractors and not the contracting agency.” Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 4 G. Fringe Benefits Section 18-2-412, MCA states: “(1) To fulfill the obligation...a contractor or subcontractor may: (a) pay the amount of fringe benefits and the basic hourly rate of pay that is part of the standard prevailing rate of wages directly to the worker or employee in cash; (b) make an irrevocable contribution to a trustee or a third person pursuant to a fringe benefit fund, plan, or program that meets the requirements of the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974 or that is a bona fide program approved by the U. S. department of labor; or (c) make payments using any combination of methods set forth in subsections (1)(a) and (1)(b) so that the aggregate of payments and contributions is not less than the standard prevailing rate of wages, including fringe benefits and travel allowances, applicable to the district for the particular type of work being performed. (2) The fringe benefit fund, plan, or program described in subsection (1)(b) must provide benefits to workers or employees for health care, pensions on retirement or death, life insurance, disability and sickness insurance, or bona fide programs that meet the requirements of the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974 or that are approved by the U. S. department of labor.” Fringe benefits are paid for all hours worked (straight time and overtime hours). However, fringe benefits are not to be considered a part of the hourly rate of pay for calculating overtime, unless there is a collectively bargained agreement in effect that specifies otherwise. H.Dispatch City Section 18-2-411(6),MCA, defines dispatch city as “...the courthouse in the city from the following list which is closest to the center of the job: Billings, Bozeman, Butte, Great Falls, Helena, Kalispell, Miles City, Missoula and Sidney.” I.Zone Pay Zone pay is not travel pay. ARM, 24.17.103(25), defines zone pay as “...an amount added to the base pay; the combined sum then becomes the new base wage rate to be paid for all hours worked on the project. Zone pay must be determined by measuring the road miles one way over the shortest practical maintained route from the dispatch city to the center of the job.” See section H above for a list of dispatch cities. J.Computing Travel Benefits ARM, 24.17.103(23), states “‘Travel pay,’ also referred to as ‘travel allowance,’ is and must be paid for travel both to and from the job site, except those with special provisions listed under the classification. The rate is determined by measuring the road miles one direction over the shortest practical maintained route from the dispatch city or the employee's home, whichever is closer, to the center of the job.” See section H above for a list of dispatch cities. K.Per DiemARM, 24.17.103(19), states “‘Per diem’ typically covers costs associated with board and lodging expenses. Per diem is paid when an employee is required to work at a location outside the daily commuting distance and is required to stay at that location overnight or longer.” L.Apprentices Wage rates for apprentices registered in approved federal or state apprenticeship programs are contained in those programs. Additionally, Section 18-2-416(2), MCA states, “…The full amount of any applicable fringe benefits must be paid to the apprentice while the apprentice is working on the public works contract.” Apprentices not registered in approved federal or state apprenticeship programs will be paid the appropriate journey level prevailing wage rate when working on a public works contract. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 5 M. Posting Notice of Prevailing Wages Section 18-2-406, MCA, provides that contractors, subcontractors, and employers who are “…performing work or providing construction services under public works contracts, as provided in this part, shall post in a prominent andaccessible site on the project or staging area, not later than the first day of work and continuing for the entire duration of the project, a legible statement of all wages and fringe benefits to be paid to the employees.” N. Employment Preference Sections 18-2-403 and 18-2-409, MCA require contractors to give preference to the employment of bona fide Montana residents in the performance of work on public works contracts. O. Projects of a Mixed Nature Section 18-2-418, MCA states: “(1) The contracting agency shall determine, based on the preponderance of labor hours to be worked, whether the public works construction services project is classified as a highway construction project, a heavy construction project, or a building construction project. (2)Once the project has been classified, employees in each trade classification who are working on that project must be paid at the rate for that project classification” P.Occupations DefinitionsYou can find definitions for these occupations on the following Bureau of Labor Statistics website: http://www.bls.gov/oes/current/oes_stru.htm Q.Welder Rates Welders receive the rate prescribed for the craft performing an operation to which welding is incidental. R.Foreman Rates Rates are no longer set for foremen. However, if a foreman performs journey level work, the foreman must be paid at least the journey level rate. S.Proper Classification for Pipefitter and Laborer/Pipelayer Work on Water and Wastewater Treatment Plants The proper classification for the following work is Pipefitter, when it is performed inside a building structure or performed at a location which will later be inside of a building: Joining steel pipe larger than 12 inches in diameter with bolted flange connections that has been pre-fabricated off site and does not require any modification such as cutting, grinding, welding, or other fabrication in order to be installed. All other work previously classified as pipefitter remains in that classification. The proper classification for that work when it is at a location that will always be outside a building is Pipelayer, which is under the Laborer Group 3 classification. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 6 WAGE RATES BOILERMAKERS Wage Benefit $41.25 $29.65 Duties Include: Construct, assemble, maintain, and repair stationary steam boilers, boiler house auxiliaries, process vessels, pressure vessels and penstocks. Bulk storage tanks and bolted steel tanks. ↑ Back to Table of Contents BRICK, BLOCK, AND STONE MASONS Wage Benefit $32.32 $16.78 ↑ Back to Table of Contents CARPENTERS Wage Benefit $38.05 $16.33 ↑ Back to Table of Contents CEMENT MASONS AND CONCRETE FINISHERS Wage Benefit $31.13 $6.31 Duties Include: Smooth and finish surfaces of poured concrete, such as floors, walks, sidewalks, or curbs. Align forms for sidewalks, curbs, or gutters. ↑ Back to Table of Contents Zone Pay: 0-30 mi. free zone >30-60 mi. + $4.00/hr. >60mi. + $6.00/hr. Zone Pay: 0-30 mi. free zone >30-60 mi. + $2.95/hr. >60mi. + $4.75/hr. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 7 CONSTRUCTION EQUIPMENT OPERATORS GROUP 1 Wage Benefit $35.97 $18.10 This group includes but is not limited to: Air Compressor; Auto Fine Grader; Belt Finishing; Boring Machine (Small); Cement Silo; Crane, A-Frame Truck Crane; Crusher Conveyor; DW-10, 15, and 20 Tractor Roller; Farm Tractor; Forklift; Form Grader; Front-End Loader, under 1 cu. yd; Oiler, Herman Nelson Heater; Mucking Machine; Oiler, All Except Cranes/Shovels; Pumpman. ↑ Back to Table of Contents CONSTRUCTION EQUIPMENT OPERATORS GROUP 2 Wage Benefit $37.32 $18.10 This group includes but is not limited to: Air Doctor; Backhoe\Excavator\Shovel, up to and incl. 3 cu. yds; Bit Grinder; Bituminous Paving Travel Plant; Boring Machine, Large; Broom, Self-Propelled; Concrete Travel Batcher; Concrete Float & Spreader; Concrete Bucket Dispatcher; Concrete Finish Machine; Concrete Conveyor; Distributor; Dozer, Rubber-Tired, Push, & Side Boom; Elevating Grader\Gradall; Field Equipment Serviceman; Front-End Loader, 1 cu. yd up to and incl. 5 cu. yds; Grade Setter; Heavy Duty Drills, All Types; Hoist\Tugger, All; Hydralift Forklifts & Similar; Industrial Locomotive; Motor Patrol (except finish); Mountain Skidder; Oiler, Cranes\Shovels; Pavement Breaker, EMSCO; Power Saw, Self-Propelled; Pugmill; Pumpcrete\Grout Machine; Punch Truck; Roller, other than Asphalt; Roller, Sheepsfoot (Self- Propelled); Roller, 25 tons and over; Ross Carrier; Rotomill, under 6 ft; Trenching Machine; Washing /Screening Plant ↑ Back to Table of Contents Per Diem: >60 mi. $150/day Per Diem: >60 mi. $150/day Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 8 CONSTRUCTION EQUIPMENT OPERATORS GROUP 3 Wage Benefit $37.91 $18.10 This group includes but is not limited to: Asphalt Paving Machine; Asphalt Screed; Backhoe\Excavator\Shovel, over 3 cu. yds; Cableway Highline; Concrete Batch Plant; Concrete Curing Machine; Concrete Pump; Cranes, Creter; Cranes, Electric Overhead; Cranes, 24 tons and under; Curb Machine\Slip Form Paver; Finish Dozer; Front-End Loader, over 5 cu. yds; Mechanic\Welder; Pioneer Dozer; Roller Asphalt (Breakdown & Finish); Rotomill, over 6 ft; Scraper, Single, Twin, or Pulling Belly-Dump; YO-YO Cat Haul Truck, Articulating Trucks, Vac Truck. ↑ Back to Table of Contents CONSTRUCTION EQUIPMENT OPERATORS GROUP 4 Wage Benefit $38.98 $18.10 This group includes but is not limited to: Asphalt\Hot Plant Operator; Cranes, 25 tons up to and incl. 44 tons; Crusher Operator; Finish Motor Patrol; Finish Scraper. ↑ Back to Table of Contents CONSTRUCTION EQUIPMENT OPERATORS GROUP 5 Wage Benefit $40.07 $18.10 This group includes but is not limited to: Cranes, 45 tons up to and incl. 74 tons. ↑ Back to Table of Contents CONSTRUCTION EQUIPMENT OPERATORS GROUP 6 Wage Benefit $41.15 $18.10 This group includes but is not limited to: Cranes, 75 tons up to and incl. 149 tons; Cranes, Whirley (All). ↑ Back to Table of Contents Per Diem: >60 mi. $150/day Per Diem: >60 mi. $150/day Per Diem: >60 mi. $150/day Per Diem: >60 mi. $150/day Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 9 CONSTRUCTION EQUIPMENT OPERATORS GROUP 7 Wage Benefit $42.23 $18.10 This group includes but is not limited to: Cranes, 150 tons up to and incl. 250 tons; Cranes, over 250 tons—add $1.00 for every 100 tons over 250 tons; Crane, Tower (All); Crane Stiff-Leg or Derrick; Helicopter Hoist. ↑ Back to Table of Contents CONSTRUCTION LABORERS GROUP 1/FLAG PERSON FOR TRAFFIC CONTROL No Rate Established ↑ Back to Table of Contents CONSTRUCTION LABORERS GROUP 2 Wage Benefit $27.96 $10.82 This group includes but is not limited to: General Labor; Asbestos Removal; Burning Bar; Bucket Man; Carpenter Tender; Caisson Worker; Cement Mason Tender; Cement Handler (dry); Chuck Tender; Choker Setter; Concrete Worker; Curb Machine-lay Down; Crusher and Batch Worker; Heater Tender; Fence Erector; Landscape Laborer; Landscaper; Lawn Sprinkler Installer; Pipe Wrapper; Pot Tender; Powderman Tender; Rail and Truck Loaders and Unloaders; Riprapper; Sign Erection; Guardrail and Jersey Rail; Spike Driver; Stake Jumper; Signalman; Tail Hoseman; Tool Checker and Houseman. ↑ Back to Table of Contents Per Diem: >60 mi. $150/day Zone Pay: 0-30 mi. free zone >30-60 mi. + $3.05/hr. >60 mi. + $4.85/hr. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 10 CONSTRUCTION LABORERS GROUP 3 Wage Benefit $30.62 $11.89 This group includes but is not limited to: Concrete Vibrator; Dumpman (Grademan); Equipment Handler; Geotextile and Liners; High-Pressure Nozzleman; Jackhammer (Pavement Breaker) Non-Riding Rollers; Pipelayer; Posthole Digger (Power); Power Driven Wheelbarrow; Rigger; Sandblaster; Sod Cutter-Power and Tamper. ↑ Back to Table of Contents CONSTRUCTION LABORERS GROUP 4 This group includes but is not limited to: Hod Carrier; Water Well Laborer; Blaster; Wagon Driller; Asphalt Raker; Cutting Torch; Grade Setter; High-Scaler; Power Saws (Faller & Concrete); Powderman; Rock & Core Drill; Track or Truck Mounted Wagon Drill and Welder incl. Air Arc ↑ Back to Table of Contents DIVERS Stand-By Diving Wage Benefit $55.24 $17.28 $110.48 $17.28 Zone Pay: 0-30 mi. free zone 31-60 mi. + $4.00/hr. >61 mi.+ $6.00/hr. ↑ Back to Table of Contents Wage Benefit $25.55 $13.44 Zone Pay: 0-30 mi. free zone >30-60 mi. + $3.05/hr. >60 mi. + $4.85/hr. Zone Pay: 0-30 mi. free zone >30-60 mi. + $3.05/hr. >60 mi. + $4.85/hr. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 11 DIVER TENDERS ↑ Back to Table of Contents ELECTRICIANS Wage Benefit $41.92 $16.32 ↑ Back to Table of Contents INSULATION WORKERS - MECHANICAL (HEAT AND FROST) Duties Include: Insulate pipes, ductwork or other mechanical systems. ↑ Back to Table of Contents Wage Benefit $54.24 $17.28 Wage Benefit $45.51 $22.94 Zone Pay: 0-30 mi. free zone 31-60 mi. + $4.00/hr. >61 mi. + $6.00/hr. Duties Include: Electrical wiring; equipment and fixtures; streetlights; electrical control systems. Installation and/or adjusting of building automation controls also during testing and balancing, commissioning and retro-commissioning. Travel Pay: 0-30 mi. free 31-40 mi. $30/day >40-50 mi. $40/day >50-60 mi. $55/day >60 mi. $65/day, plus: $0.66 for each mile over 60, up to $400 unless: •Employee traveling in employee’s vehicle on employer’s time, then rate changes to $0.20/mi., only for miles over 60. •Employee traveling in company-provided vehicle with company-paid fuel, no additional travel pay mileage required. Zone Pay: 0-30 mi. free 31-40 mi. $3.75/hr. >40-50 mi. $5.00/hr. >50-60 mi. $6.88/hr. >60 mi. $8.13/hr. only if employee is commuting, if employee is staying over, Per Diem applies instead. Per Diem: 60+ mi. $130/day; or, employer pays for lodging + $35/day for meals. Per Diem: 60+ mi. $90/day Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 12 IRONWORKERS – REINFORCING IRON AND REBAR WORKERS Wage Benefit $48.00 $25.78 Duties Include: Position and secure steel bars or mesh in concrete forms in order to reinforce concrete. Use a variety of fasteners, rod-bending machines, blowtorches, and hand tools. Includes rod busters. ↑ Back to Table of Contents IRONWORKERS – STRUCTURAL IRON AND STEEL WORKERS Wage Benefit $43.32 $25.78 Duties Include: Structural steel erection; assemble prefabricated metal buildings; cut, bend, tie, and place rebar; energy producing windmill type towers; metal bleacher seating; handrail fabrication and ornamental steel. LINE CONSTRUCTION – EQUIPMENT OPERATORS No Rate Established Duties Include: All work on substations ↑ Back to Table of Contents LINE CONSTRUCTION – GROUNDMAN Benefit Wage Duties Include All work on substations ↑ Back to Table of Contents LINE CONSTRUCTION – LINEMAN $18.22 Benefit Wage $19.96 ↑ Back to Table of Contents $30.33 $55.94 Duties Include: All work on substations ↑ Back to Table of Contents Per Diem: 0-45 mi. free 45-85 mi. + $100/day >85 mi.+ $150/day Per Diem: 0-45 mi. free 45-85 mi. + $100/day >85 mi.+ $150/day Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 13 MILLWRIGHTS Wage Benefit $45.26 $23.71 ↑ Back to Table of Contents PAINTERS Wage $25.00 Benefit No Rate Established ↑ Back to Table of Contents PILE BUCKS Wage Benefit $38.05 $16.33 Duties Include: Set up crane; set up hammer; weld tips on piles; set leads; ensure piles are driven straight with the use of level or plum bob. Give direction to crane operator as to speed, and direction of swing. Cut piles to grade. ↑ Back to Table of Contents PLUMBERS, PIPEFITTERS, AND STEAMFITTERS $46.95 $19.47 Duties Include: Assemble, install, alter, and repair pipelines or pipe systems that carry water, steam, air, other liquids or gases. Testing of piping systems, commissioning and retro- commissioning. Workers in this occupation may also install heating and cooling equipment and mechanical control systems. ↑ Back to Table of Contents Wage Benefit Zone Pay: 0-30 mi. free zone>30-60 mi. + $4.00/hr. >60 mi. + $6.00/hr. Per Diem: $110/day or employer pays for single occupancy lodging Zone Pay: 0-30 mi free zone >30-60 mi. + $4.00/hr. >60 mi. + $6.00/hr. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 14 SPRINKLER FITTERS No Rate Established Duties Include but not limited to: Any and all fire protection systems: Installation, dismantling, inspection, testing, maintenance, repairs, adjustments, and corrections of all fire protection and fire control systems, including both overhead and underground water mains, all piping, fire hydrants, standpipes, air lines, tanks, and pumps used in connection with sprinkler and alarm systems. ↑ Back to Table of Contents No Rate Established Benefit TRUCK DRIVERS Pilot Car Driver Truck Driver $32.56 $8.50 Truck drivers include but are not limited to: Combination Truck and Concrete Mixer and Transit Mixer; Dry Batch Trucks; Distributor Driver; Dumpman; Dump Trucks and similar equipment; Dumpster; Flat Trucks; Lumber Carriers; Lowboys; Pickup; Powder Truck Driver; Power Boom; Serviceman; Service Truck/Fuel Truck/Tireperson; Truck Mechanic; Trucks with Power Equipment; Warehouseman, Partsman, Cardex and Warehouse Expeditor; Water Trucks. ↑ Back to Table of Contents Wage Zone Pay: 0-30 mi. free zone >30-60 mi. + $3.05/hr. >60 mi. + $4.85/hr. Special Provision: Zone pay only applies to the Truck Driver classification. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents EJCDC C-940 WORK CHANGE DIRECTIVE 2018 00 94 00 - i WORK CHANGE DIRECTIVE NO.: Owner: City of Bozeman Owner’s Project No.: Engineer: HDR Engineering, Inc. Engineer’s Project No.: 10375316 Contractor: Contractor’s Project No.: Project: Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Project Contract Name: Date Issued: Effective Date of Work Change Directive: Contractor is directed to proceed promptly with the following change(s): Description: Attachments: Purpose for the Work Change Directive: Directive to proceed promptly with the Work described herein, prior to agreeing to change in Contract Price and Contract Time, is issued due to: Notes to User—Check one or both of the following: ☐ Non-agreement on pricing of proposed change. ☐ Necessity to proceed for schedule or other reasons. Estimated Change in Contract Price and Contract Times (non-binding, preliminary): Contract Price: $ [increase] [decrease] [not yet estimated]. Contract Time: days [increase] [decrease] [not yet estimated]. Basis of estimated change in Contract Price: ☐ Lump Sum ☐ Unit Price ☐ Cost of the Work ☐ Other Recommended by Engineer Authorized by Owner By: Title: Date: Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents EJCDC C-940 WORK CHANGE DIRECTIVE 2018 00 94 00 - i This page intentionally left blank. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents CHANGE ORDER 00 94 10 - 1 CHANGE ORDER No. DATE OF ISSUANCE EFFECTIVE DATE OWNER CONTRACTOR Contract: Project: OWNER's Contract No. ENGINEER ENGINEER's Contract No. You are directed to make the following changes in the Contract Documents: Description: Reason for Change Order: Attachments: (List documents supporting change) CHANGE IN CONTRACT PRICE: CHANGE IN CONTRACT TIMES: Original Contract Price $ Original Contract Times: Substantial Completion: Ready for final payment: (days or dates) Net Increase (Decrease) from previous Change Orders No. to : $ Net change from previous Change Orders No. to No. : Substantial Completion: Ready for final payment: (days) Contract Price prior to this Change Order: $ Contract Times prior to this Change Order: Substantial Completion: Ready for final payment: (days or dates) Net increase (decrease) of this Change Order: $ Net increase (decrease) this Change Order: Substantial Completion: Ready for final payment: (days) Contract Price with all approved Change Orders: $ Contract Times with all approved Change Orders: Substantial Completion: Ready for final payment: (days or dates) Contractor certifies and agrees that there are no additional costs or claims for extra work, additional time, delays or omitted items, of any nature whatsoever, associated with the subject change order items, except as identified and set forth herein and unless expressly stated otherwise in the Change Order. And further, that the price agreed-upon herein represents the full cost and value for the subject work performed and the materials supplied under the terms of the contract and that the work quantities and value were properly determined and are correct. CONTRACTOR (Authorized Signature) Date RECOMMENDED BY: APPROVED BY: (ENGINEER - Signature) Date OWNER (Authorized Signature) Date EJCDC 1910-8-B (1996 Edition Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents CHANGE ORDER 00 94 10 - 2 Prepared by the Engineers Joint Contract Documents Committee and endorsed by The Associated General Contractors of America and the Construction Specifications Institute. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents CHANGE ORDER 00 94 10 - 3 CHANGE ORDER INSTRUCTIONS A. GENERAL INFORMATION This document was developed to provide a uniform format for handling contract changes that affect Contract Price or Contract Times. Changes that have been initiated by a Work Change Directive must be incorporated into a subsequent Change Order if they affect Price or Times. Changes that affect Contract Price or Contract Times should be promptly covered by a Change Order. The practice of accumulating Change Orders to reduce the administrative burden may lead to unnecessary disputes. If Milestones have been listed in the Agreement, any effect of a Change Order thereon should be addressed. For supplemental instructions and minor changes not involving a change in the Contract Price or Contract Times, a Field Order should be used. PART 1 - B. COMPLETING THE CHANGE ORDER FORM Engineer normally initiates the form, including a description of the changes involved and attachments based upon documents and proposals submitted by Contractor, or requests from Owner, or both. Once Engineer has completed and signed the form, all copies should be sent to Owner or Contractor for approval, depending on whether the Change Order is a true order to the Contractor or the formalization of a negotiated agreement for a previously performed change. After approval by one contracting party, all copies should be sent to the other party for approval. Engineer should make distribution of executed copies after approval by both parties. If a change only applies to price or to times, cross out the part of the tabulation that does not apply. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 This page intentionally left blank. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents EJCDC C-942 FIELD ORDER 2018 00 94 20 - i FIELD ORDER NO.: Owner: City of Bozeman Owner’s Project No.: Engineer: HDR Engineering, Inc. Engineer’s Project No.: 10375316 Contractor: Contractor’s Project No.: Project: Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Project Contract Name: Date Issued: Effective Date of Field Order: Contractor is hereby directed to promptly perform the Work described in this Field Order, issued in accordance with Paragraph 11.04 of the General Conditions, for minor changes in the Work without changes in Contract Price or Contract Times. If Contractor considers that a change in Contract Price or Contract Times is required, submit a Change Proposal before proceeding with this Work. Reference: Specification Section(s): Drawing(s) / Details (s): Description: Attachments: Issued by Engineer By: Title: Date: Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents EJCDC C-942 FIELD ORDER 2018 00 94 20 - i This page intentionally left blank. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 DIVI SION 01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 This page intentionally left blank. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents SUMMARY OF WORK 01 11 00 - 1 SECTION 01 11 00 SUMMARY OF WORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Location and description of Work and prior uses of the Site. 2. Construction Contracts for this Project. 3. Others retained by Owner for the Project. 4. Work by others under Owner’s control on other projects. 5. Work by others not under Owner’s control. 6. Work by Owner. 7. Sequence and progress of Work. 8. Contractor’s use of the Site. 9. Easements and rights-of-way. 10. Partial utilization by Owner. 11. Utility owners. B. Related Requirements: 1. Include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Section 01 14 09 - Use of Site. b. Section 01 71 33 - Protection of the Work and Property. 1.2 LOCATION AND DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. The Work is located in an area northwest of City of Bozeman, near the intersection of East Valley Center Road and Valley Spur Road. B. Work to be performed under this Contract includes, but is not limited to, the installation of a new wastewater lift station with three (3) submersible pumps, a 12’-0” diameter precast wet well, access hatches, portable davit crane, emergency bypass pump connections, a packaged pump station enclosure that includes piping, valves, a combination air release valve, pressure and flow instrumentation, heaters, louvers and exhaust fan, electrical panels, pump control panel, telemetry panel, air gap panel, standby diesel generator, automatic transfer switch, generator screen wall, approximately 15 LF of gravity sewer main, a 5’-0” collection manhole, approximately 3,100 LF of force main, associated electrical work, and associated site and grading work. C. Contracting Method: The Project will be constructed under a single prime construction Contract. 1.3 CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTS FOR THIS PROJECT A. Single Prime Construction Contract: The Contract requires all the Work for the Project not expressly allocated to Owner or others in the Contract Documents. 1.4 OTHERS RETAINED BY OWNER FOR THE PROJECT A. Engineer: 1. Engineer is identified in the Agreement. 2. Engineer’s responsibilities for the Project, relative to Contractor, are indicated throughout the Contract Documents. 3. Whether the Engineer will furnish the services of a Resident Project Representative (RPR) for the Project is indicated in the Supplementary Conditions. 1.5 WORK BY OTHERS NOT UNDER OWNER’S CONTROL A. Work by Utility Owners and Transportation Facility Owners: Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents SUMMARY OF WORK 01 11 00 - 2 1. Owner is aware of the work indicated below, to be performed at or adjacent to the Site, by utility owners (not under Owner’s control) or owners of transportation facilities (not under Owner’s control). a. Location: Valley Center Lift Station Site. b. Utility: Northwestern Energy Regulating Station. c. Dates of Work: Unknown. 1.6 SEQUENCE AND PROGRESS OF WORK A. Sequencing: 1. Incorporate sequencing of the Work into the Progress Schedule. 1.7 CONTRACTOR'S USE OF SITE A. Use of Site - General: 1. Limits on Contractor’s use of the Site are indicated in Section 01 14 19 - Use of Site, and as may be shown on the Drawings. 2. Contractors shall share use of the Site with other contractors and others specified in Articles 1.3 through 1.6 (inclusive) of this Section. 3. Relocate stored materials and equipment that interfere with operations of Owner, other contractors, and others performing work for Owner. 4. Comply with restrictions set forth in Section 01 14 19 - Use of Site. 1.8 EASEMENTS AND RIGHTS-OF-WAY A. Easements and Rights-of-Way - General: 1. Easements and rights-of-way required for the permanent improvements included in the Work will be provided by Owner in accordance with the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions. 2. Confine construction operations within Owner’s property, public rights-of-way, easements obtained by Owner, and limits shown, and property for which Contractor has made arrangements directly with property owner(s). 3. Use care in placing construction tools, machinery and equipment, excavated materials, and materials and equipment to be incorporated into the Work to avoid damaging property and interfering with traffic. 4. Do not enter private property outside the construction limits without permission from the owner of the property. 1.9 UTILITY OWNERS A. Utilities known to Engineer and that may have Underground Facilities or other facilities in the vicinity of the Work are: 1. Northwestern Energy: a. Power. b. 121 E Griffin Dr, Bozeman, MT 59715. c. Telephone: (888) 467-2669. 2. Yellowstone Fiber: a. Fiber Optic. b. 77A Nugget Ln, Belgrade, MT 59714 c. Telephone: (406) 312-5777 B. Utilities and their owners indicated in the Contract Documents are for Contractor’s convenience. Neither Owner nor Engineer will be liable to Contractor or any utility owner for failure to indicate utility, its owner, or complete and correct contact information in the Contract Documents where Contractor’s reasonable and ordinarily-exercised diligence would reveal the presence of the utility and its owner. Nothing in the Contract mitigates Contractor’s responsibilities under the General Conditions, Section 01 71 33 - Protection of the Work and Property, and Laws and Regulations, including “call before you dig” regulations. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents SUMMARY OF WORK 01 11 00 - 3 PART 2 - PRODUCTS - (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION - (NOT USED) END OF SECTION Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 This page intentionally left blank. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents USE OF SITE 01 14 19 - 1 SECTION 01 14 19 USE OF SITE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Scope: 1. Contractor shall provide all labor, materials, equipment, tools, and incidentals shown, specified, and required to comply with restrictions on Contractor’s use of the Site and other areas. 2. Comply with requirements of the General Conditions, as may be modified by the Supplementary Conditions, regarding the Contractor’s use of the Site and other areas. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Shop Drawings: a. Site plan showing proposed location of field offices, storage trailers, staging and laydown areas, temporary sanitary facilities, fuel and oil storage, fueling location, bottle gas storage facilities, and other areas Contractor proposes to occupy. B. Informational Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Notices of Condition: a. Notice of condition of Owner’s existing hoisting equipment that Contractor proposes to use, together with written evaluation of condition of equipment including condition of equipment’s safety devices. If corrective work is necessary or advisable, transmit concurrently with the Submittal Contractor’s Change Proposal for remedial work, in accordance with Section 01 26 00 - Contract Modification Procedures. 2. Hoist Manufacturer’s Reports: Submit written report of results of each visit to Site by equipment manufacturer’s service technician, including purpose and time of visit, tasks performed, and results obtained. 3. Qualifications Statements: a. Identification by name, and qualifications and experience of, person Contractor proposes as Contractor’s operator of Owner’s hoisting equipment. 1.3 USE OF PREMISES A. Limit use of premises at the Site to work areas shown or indicated on the Drawings and as specified in this Section. Do not disturb portions of the Site beyond areas of the Work. 1. Limits: a. Confine construction operations to the following areas: 1) See Drawings – Sheet C101. b. Confine storage of materials and equipment, and locations of temporary facilities to the following areas: 1) See Drawings – Sheet C101. 2) Contractor’s gang boxes and storage containers for tools in active use in the Work may be kept in reasonable quantity in the work areas as long as such items do not obstruct access to the facilities by Owner or occupants. 3) Do not store items of any sort, whether temporarily or otherwise, in stairways and ramps, whether existing or under construction. 2. Prohibitions: a. Do not use the Site for the following: 1) Conducting Contractor’s business not related to the Project or other work for Owner. 2) Overnight lodging or other, non-work use of the Site by workers or others for whom Contractor is responsible, whether housed in recreational vehicles, other Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents USE OF SITE 01 14 19 - 2 vehicles, tents, quarters in field offices or Contractor-furnished temporary structures, or in work areas, is unacceptable. 3. Access to Site, Access Roads, Parking Areas, and Haul Routes: a. Entrance off East Valley Center Road. B. Promptly repair damage to premises, including existing structures, finishes, equipment, and other features, caused by construction operations. Upon completion of the Work, restore premises to specified condition; if condition is not specified, restore to pre-construction condition. PART 2 - PRODUCTS - (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION - (NOT USED) END OF SECTION Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents ALLOWANCES 01 21 00 - 1 SECTION 01 21 00 ALLOWANCES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Administrative and procedural requirements for: a. Contingency allowances. B. Related Requirements: 1. Include but are not necessarily limited to the following: a. Section 01 26 00 - Contract Modification Procedures. b. Section 01 29 73 - Schedule of Values. c. Section 01 32 16 - Construction Progress Schedule. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Terminology: 1. Terminology indicated below are not defined terms and are not indicated with initial capital letters, but when used in this section have the following meanings: a. “Allowance authorization” or “authorization”, whether singular or plural, are Owner’s written and signed approval for using a specific allowance item, in a specific authorized amount, for a specific construction task or activity. Allowance authorizations include all associated attachments at the time of Owner’s signature and as delivered to Contractor. b. “Cash allowance” is a stipulated amount included in the Contract Price, controlled by Owner, for Owner’s sole use to upgrade materials or equipment to be furnished by Contractor under the Contract, to be higher-quality or that offer more features for Owner. c. “Contingency allowance” is a stipulated amount included in the Contract Price, controlled by Owner, for Owner’s sole use to cover unanticipated costs and costs for Work authorized by Owner that is not part of any other bid/pay item in the Contract. d. “Quantity allowance” is an item of Unit Price Work that is included in the Contract Price but the location of which is not shown or indicated on the Drawings or other Contract Documents at the time Bids were opened. When authorized, quantity allowances are to be performed at locations to be indicated by Owner or Engineer. Quantity allowances are controlled by Owner and are for Owner’s sole use. The terms “quantity allowance”, “extra work item”, “extra work unit price item”, and the like have the same meaning. 1.3 ALLOWANCES – GENERAL A. This Article applies to all allowance types and all authorized allowance Work performed in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. All allowances in the Contract are Owner-controlled and for Owner’s sole use. Contractor has no right or entitlement to any allowance or part thereof without express, written authorization from Owner. C. Authorization of Allowances: 1. Only Owner can authorize use of an allowance. No other entity, including Engineer, Resident Project Representative (RPR, if any), Owner’s Site Representative (OSR, if any), or others may authorize use of allowances in place of Owner. 2. Allowance Authorization Mechanism: a. To be binding and enforceable, allowance authorizations must be in writing, signed by one of the Owner’s employees indicated immediately above. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents ALLOWANCES 01 21 00 - 2 b. Allowance authorization form is attached to this Section. c. Allowance authorizations issued in accordance with the procedures set forth in this Section, are binding and enforceable under the Contract, unless promptly contested in writing by Contractor in accordance with this Section. d. Oral authorizations, authorizations without an appropriate signature, and authorizations not on the proper form, will not be binding or enforceable. 3. Allowance authorizations duly signed by Owner’s authorized person may be delivered to Contractor by Engineer, RPR, OSR, or other Owner-authorized representative, and shall be binding and enforceable when so delivered (unless properly contested). 4. Do not perform Work presumed for compensation under an allowance without first obtaining Owner’s allowance authorization. 5. Work presumed by Contractor to be under an allowance and performed without: (a) written authorization duly signed by Owner, or (b) Change Order, or (c) Work Change Directive, is not be eligible for payment. D. Contract Times: 1. Allowance authorizations do not have any effect on, and do not change, the Contract Times. The Contract Times can be changed only via a duly authorized Change Order. 2. Should the Work included in an allowance authorization adversely affect Contractor’s ability to comply with the Contract Times, promptly submit Change Proposal (including appropriate supporting documentation), in accordance with the Contract Documents, indicating the associated, specific, proposed effect on each of the Contract Times. E. Payment for Work Under an Allowance Authorization: 1. Work duly authorized by Owner under an allowance is eligible for payment upon performance of the associated Work, in accordance with the Contract Documents and the associated allowance authorization. 2. When applying for payment for Work under an allowance authorization, the Application for Payment shall include a copy of the associated allowance authorization(s) signed by Owner. 3. When requested by Owner or Engineer, amend the Schedule of Values to indicate Work authorized under contingency allowances or cash allowances. F. Compensation for Bonds and Insurance: 1. Contractor is not eligible for compensation under an allowance, or for an increase in the Contract Price, for costs associated with insurance, performance bond, payment bond, or warranty bond (when such bond is required by the Contract). Compensation for such costs is included elsewhere in the Contract Price, under other (non-allowance) bid/pay items. G. Change Orders: 1. A Change Order is not required for authorization of an allowance that is already included in the Contract. 2. Prior to final payment, all allowances with funds remaining (not yet authorized) shall be reduced to the total amount authorized by Owner for that allowance item, via a Change Order. 1.4 CONTINGENCY ALLOWANCES A. Provisions on contingency allowance(s) are set forth in the General Conditions, as may be modified by the Supplementary Conditions, and in this Section. B. Owner may authorize use of all or part of a contingency allowance included in the Contract for Work not otherwise covered under one or more other bid/pay items already in the Contract. C. Procedure for Using Contingency Allowances: 1. Prior to Work being authorized under a contingency allowance, Contractor shall submit complete Change Proposal for the associated Work, in accordance with the Contract Documents. 2. Compensation proposed via the Change Proposal for the contemplated allowance Work shall be complete and sufficient for the entire scope of the contemplated allowance Work, Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents ALLOWANCES 01 21 00 - 3 unless expressly indicated otherwise in the Change Proposal or an associated, Owner- or Engineer-issued Proposal Request. 3. Compensation eligible under a contingency allowance includes: a. Materials and equipment furnished to Owner or incorporated into the Work; labor; construction equipment and machinery; services, incidentals, and related costs, in accordance with the Contract Documents’ provisions for Contract modifications. b. Overhead and profit for the associated Work, for Contractor and Subcontractors. c. Other costs and expense mutually agreeable to Owner and Contractor. 4. Excluded are costs not mutually agreeable to the parties and costs excluded in accordance with Article 1.3 of this Section. 5. Should Change Proposal indicate, and Owner accept that, change in the Contract Times is necessary, Owner (or Engineer, on Owner’s behalf) will issue an appropriate Change Order for signature by the parties, upon mutual agreement to the changed Contract Times. 6. Upon receipt of contingency allowance authorization, when Contractor does not reject or disagree with the authorization, Contractor shall sign allowance authorization form indicating acceptance and return signed form to Owner and Engineer within two days of receipt. 7. Commence performing the allowance Work promptly upon receipt of allowance authorization. 8. Application for Payment for the associated Work may be made in accordance with Article 1.3 of this Section and the Contract’s provisions governing progress payments. PART 2 - PRODUCTS - (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 ATTACHMENTS A. The following, bound after this Specifications Section’s “End of Section” designation, are part of this Specifications Section: 1. Forms: a. Allowance Authorization Form, (one page). END OF SECTION Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents ALLOWANCES 01 21 00 - 4 ALLOWANCE AUTHORIZATION Project: Authorization Number: From: To: Date: Engineer Project No.: Re: Contract For: Contractor is authorized to perform the following item(s) of Work and to be eligible to apply for payment under the designated Contract allowance(s) indicated below for the amount indicated below for each item: 1. Allowance Title / Title of Change: This instrument is not a Change Order and does not modify the Contract Price, nor does it modify the Contract Times. Original Allowance ............................................................................................................... $ Allowance Expenditures prior to this Authorization ............................................................. $ Allowance Balance prior to this Authorization ..................................................................... $ Allowance will be decreased by this Authorization .............................................................. $ New Allowance Balance ....................................................................................................... $ RECOMMENDED BY OWNER APPROVAL HDR Engineer Owner By Date By Date CONTRACTOR ACCEPTANCE Contractor By Date ☐ Attachments Copies: ☐ Owner ☐ Contractor ☐ Consultants ☐ ☐ ☐ ☐ File Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 01 22 00 - 1 SECTION 01 22 00 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. General requirements applicable to all bid/pay items. 2. General provisions on unit prices and quantities. 3. General provisions on lump sums. 4. Listing of the various bid/pay items in the Project, together with criteria for measuring Unit Price Work for payment. B. Related Requirements: Include, but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Section 01 26 00 - Contract Modification Procedures. 2. Section 01 29 76 - Progress Payment Procedures. 1.2 REQUIREMENTS APPLICABLE TO ALL BID/PAY ITEMS A. In this Section and elsewhere in the Contract Documents, the terms “bid item”, “pay item”, “bid/pay item”, “Item” followed by a number designation, “this item”, and the like all have the same meaning, and refer to one or more specific elements of the Contract, established for pricing and payment, as indicated in the Bid Form and in the Agreement (or exhibit to the Agreement) at the time the Contract was signed by the parties. B. This Article applies to all bid/pay items in the Contract. C. Prices – General: 1. The bid/pay items listed starting with Article 1.5 of this Section refer to and are the same bid items listed in the Bid Form and included in the Contract, and constitute all bid/pay items for the Work at the time the Contract was signed by the parties. 2. No direct or separate payment will be made, outside of the bid/pay items in the Contract, for the following: providing miscellaneous temporary or accessory materials or equipment, temporary works, temporary construction facilities, Contractor’s project management, superintendence, and similar costs for Subcontractors or Suppliers; insurance; schedules and schedule updates; coordination (with: Owner’s operations (including, but not limited to, lockout/tag-out procedures), other contractors, utility owners, owners of transportation facilities, adjacent property owners and occupants, authorities having jurisdiction, Subcontractors and Suppliers, and others with whom Contractor is to coordinate the Work); information technology systems required by the Contract Documents; Submittals; photographic documentation; Project meetings; Contractor’s hazard communication program; Contractor’s compliance with environmental procedures for Constituents of Concern (including spill control and countermeasures plans and implementation); professional services (required for Contractor’s means and methods of construction, and for delegated designs required by the Contract Documents); obtaining and complying with permits and licenses; temporary utilities (including electric power, water supply and disposal, fuel, and communications); temporary lighting; temporary fire protection; temporary enclosures and HVAC; temporary sanitary facilities; temporary first-aid facilities and services; Contractor’s field offices and sheds, Engineer’s field offices (when required elsewhere in the Contract Documents); temporary vehicular access and parking (including access to the Site, temporary access roads and parking, onsite traffic controls for construction traffic, and offsite haul routes); traffic control of non-construction vehicular and pedestrian traffic; temporary controls (including temporary erosion and sediment controls, noise control, control of storm water, surface water, and groundwater, pollution controls (including solid waste control, water pollution control, and control of atmospheric pollution), dust control, pest and rodent controls, odor controls, and other temporary Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 01 22 00 - 2 controls required by the Contract Documents); temporary security for the Work; temporary barriers; Project signage (when required elsewhere in the Contract Documents); delivering, handling, and storing materials and equipment to be incorporated into the Work; layouts and surveys for the Work; construction equipment, machinery, tools, and vehicles; safety and protection; Site maintenance during construction; cleaning and removal and disposal of waste and debris; checkout and startup; testing and other quality control activities required by the Contract Documents; record documents, operation and maintenance data; warranties; spare parts and extra materials required by the Contract Documents; instruction of facility personnel as required by the Contract Documents; commissioning (when required elsewhere in the Contract Documents); Contractor’s correction period, Contractor’s general warranty and guarantee; Contractor’s indemnification obligations; other labor, cost, or effort required by the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions, Division 01 Specifications, and other requirements of the Contract Documents. 3. Price Escalation: a. Unless expressly indicated otherwise in the Contract Documents, Owner is not obligated to change the stipulated prices (including lump sums, unit prices, and allowances) that are all or part of the Contract Price because of escalation of costs when there is no corresponding change in the Contract Times. b. Changes in the Contract Times do not necessarily entitle Contractor to a change in Contract Price due to escalation. 4. Compensation for all services, labor, materials, and equipment shall be included in prices stipulated for the lump sum bid/pay items in the Contract. 5. Each lump sum in the Contract shall include an amount considered by Contractor as sufficient for all overhead and profit for each separately identified bid/pay item. D. Contract Price, Payment Procedures, and Related Matters: 1. Contract Price: The Contract Price, as apportioned among bid/pay items in the Contract, is indicated in the Agreement and may be modified by Change Order. 2. Payments to Contractor: Refer to the General Conditions (as may be modified by the Supplementary Conditions), the Agreement (including provisions on retainage, if any), and Section 01 29 76 - Progress Payment Procedures, among other applicable Contract Documents. 3. Schedule of Values: Refer to the General Conditions (as may be modified by the Supplementary Conditions) and Section 01 29 73 - Schedule of Values. 4. Procedures for Changes in Contract Price: Refer to the General Conditions (as may be modified by the Supplementary Conditions) and Section 01 26 00 - Contract Modification Procedures. 5. Defective Work is not eligible for payment. 1.3 GENERAL PROVISIONS ON UNIT PRICES AND QUANTITIES A. Quantities: 1. Quantities of Unit Price Work indicated in the Bid Form and in the Contract (at the time the Agreement was signed by the parties) are estimates for purposes of pricing and comparison of Bids. 2. Owner does not represent, either expressly or by implication, or agree that the nature of materials encountered below ground surface or in concealed areas, or actual quantities of Unit Price Work required, will correspond with the quantities in the Contract at the time the Agreement was signed by the parties. Owner reserves the right to increase or decrease quantities, and to eliminate quantities, as Owner may deem necessary or as may be necessary due to Site conditions encountered. 3. Adjustment of Unit Prices Due to Variation in Quantities: a. Provisions, if any, regarding adjustment of unit prices due to variations in actual quantities (eligible for payment) from the estimated quantities in the Contract (including quantities at the time the Agreement was signed by the parties and as subsequently modified by Change Order) are in the General Conditions, as may be modified by the Supplementary Conditions. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 01 22 00 - 3 1) Engineer’s review for possible unit price adjustment, when provision for such adjustment is expressly indicated in the Contract, will be at a time Engineer deems reasonable and proper. 2) When the Supplementary Conditions establish that, to be eligible for an adjustment in the unit price, a pay item of Unit Price Work must have a total computed, extended price (at the time the Agreement was signed by the parties) equal to or greater than a specified percentage (stipulated in the Supplementary Conditions) of the total Contract Price (at the time the Agreement was signed by the parties), and the total extended price of such pay item does not exceed the stipulated percentage of the Contract Price, then the associated pay item will be paid at the unit price in the Contract without adjustment for variations in actual quantity. 4. Quantities eligible for payment will be actual quantities furnished and installed (as applicable) in accordance with the Contract Documents, within the pay limits shown or indicated, as measured by Engineer (or other entity so empowered in the Contract Documents) and recommended for payment by Engineer. 5. At Contractor’s expense, Contractor may independently verify quantities measured by Engineer for payment. Should Contractor disagree with quantities measured and recommended for payment by Engineer, submit appropriate Change Proposal (appealing Engineer’s measurements) indicating the specific reasons for Contractor’s appeal, with detailed reasons therefor and associated calculations and estimates, in accordance with the Contract Documents. 6. Quantity Overruns: a. When the quantity of a pay item of Unit Price Work eligible for payment exceeds the pay item’s quantity included in the Contract, Owner will pay for quantities that exceed those in the Contract only while the estimated total payments to Contractor under the Contract will not exceed the Contract Price. Otherwise, a Change Order is required to modify the associated quantity in the Contract, thus changing the Contract Price. B. Measuring for Payment: 1. At Engineer’s option, Engineer may delegate to Resident Project Representative (RPR) (if any), some or all of Engineer’s responsibilities for measuring Unit Price Work eligible for payment. 2. Unless expressly indicated otherwise in the Contract Documents, measurements will be in United States standard measurements. 3. Unless indicated otherwise elsewhere in the Contract Documents, quantities of Unit Price Work eligible for payment will be rounded to the nearest whole number. 4. In the event of conflict between this Section and the measurement criteria in the Specifications of Divisions 02-49, the measurement criteria in this Section will govern. Typical intent when measurement criteria are in both this Section and the associated Division 02-49 Specifications section, is for the criteria to be interpreted together. 5. Assistance with Measurements: a. Comply with Section 01 71 23 - Field Engineering. b. Assist Engineer and Resident Project Representative (RPR) (if any), by providing measuring equipment, labor, and survey personnel necessary to measure quantities eligible for payment. 6. Quantities eligible for payment can be adjusted by Engineer to correct quantities included in Contractor’s prior payment requests, and for incomplete or defective Unit Price Work. Such corrections are at Engineer’s sole discretion. 1.4 GENERAL PROVISIONS ON LUMP SUM ITEMS A. Progress payments for Work paid on a lump sum basis will be based on Engineer’s estimate of the Work (in accordance with the Contract Documents) performed through the end of the associated pay period, based on the Schedule of Values accepted by Engineer in accordance with the Contract Documents. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 01 22 00 - 4 B. At its sole discretion, Engineer may correct amounts of lump sum Work included in prior payment requests based on improved data or information available to Engineer, or Engineer’s knowledge or reasonable belief that Work is incomplete or defective. 1.5 BID/PAY ITEMS - GENERAL CONTRACT A. Item 1 - General Construction: 1. Measurement: As set forth in the Contract’s provisions regarding the Schedule of Values and progress payment procedures. 2. Payment: Lump sum payment for this item will be full compensation for completing the Work, as shown and indicated in the Contract Documents not included under other bid/pay items. B. Item 2 - Contingency Allowance: 1. Measurement: As indicated in the Agreement and Section 01 21 00 - Allowances, the Contract includes in this item a stipulated amount available as reserve for sole use by Owner, for costs authorized by Owner during construction, for Work not included under other bid/pay items. 2. Payment: Payment for Work authorized in accordance with Section 01 21 00 - Allowances, and performed under this item will be full compensation for providing all Work authorized under this allowance, complete as shown, indicated, or directed by Engineer in accordance with the associated allowance authorizations. PART 2 - PRODUCTS - (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION - (NOT USED) END OF SECTION Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 01 25 00 - 1 SECTION 01 25 00 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Requirements applicable to all substitution requests. 2. Provisions specific to Contractor’s substitution requests for: a. Materials and equipment to be incorporated into the Work. b. Methods, procedures, and sequences indicated in the Contract Documents. B. Scope: 1. Contractor shall provide all labor, materials, equipment, tools, services, and incidentals, and pay all costs associated with requests for approval of substitutes. 2. Where the Contract Documents expressly indicate that substitutes are not allowed, are unacceptable, or time-barred, do not submit substitution requests for such items or procedures. 3. Requirements for Contractor’s proposal of “or-equals”, where allowed by the Contract, and the General Conditions, as may be modified by the Supplementary Conditions. C. Related Requirements: 1. Include, but are not necessarily limited to: a. Section 01 26 00 - Contract Modification Procedures. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Terminology: 1. The following terminology, although not indicated with initial capital letters, has the following meaning in this Section: a. “Or-equal” and “or equal” each means material or equipment items to be incorporated into the completed Work as a functioning whole, or method, procedure, or sequence that, in Engineer’s sole opinion, are equivalent to that shown or indicated in the Contract Documents. b. “Substitute” means a proposed materials or equipment to be incorporated into the completed Work as a functioning whole, or a proposed construction method, procedure, or sequence that is not, in Engineer’s sole opinion, equivalent to the associated, similar material or equipment item or method, procedure, or sequence shown or indicated in the Contract Documents, but accomplishes the same or similar purpose. Unless expressly indicated otherwise in the Contract Documents, Contractor’s proposals for “value engineering” (and similar terms) are substitutes. c. “Substitution request” means Contractor’s written request for Engineer’s approval of a proposed substitute, in accordance with this Section. Substitution requests are separate from Shop drawings and other Submittals required by the Contract Documents. 1.3 SUBSTITUTES - GENERAL A. This Article applies to all substitutes and substitution requests, whether for substitute materials or equipment, or for substitute methods, procedures, or sequences. B. This Section expands on the provisions on substitutes in the General Conditions, as may be modified by the Supplementary Conditions. C. Time Limits for Submitting Substitution Requests: 1. Where the Contract allows Contractor’s substitution requests, such proposals will be considered by Engineer only during a period of 60 days after the date the Contract Times start to run, unless otherwise indicated. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 01 25 00 - 2 2. Substitution requests will be accepted for consideration by Engineer after the time limit indicated in the paragraph above this, when materials or equipment shown or indicated, and all associated “or-equals”, are either: a. Unavailable; or b. Despite Contractor’s due diligence, are unavailable in time for the Work to be completed within the Contract Times. 3. The foregoing notwithstanding, substitutes will not be approved when received by Engineer after Contractor has commenced the associated Work at the Site, where approval of the substitute would require rework or removing Work already installed. D. Design Professional: 1. Engineer is responsible for design of the completed Project as a functioning whole and has responsible charge of the Project except for Work for which design responsibility is expressly delegated by the Contract Documents. 2. Do not retain services of any third-party design professional to prepare modifications of Engineer’s design of the completed Project as a functioning whole without Engineer’s express, written consent via an appropriate Contract modification setting forth appropriate performance and design criteria for delegating the design of the substitute. E. Contractor’s Representations: 1. In submitting each substitution request, Contractor represents that: a. Contractor has read and understands the Contract’s provisions on substitutes, as indicated in the General Conditions, as may be modified by the Supplementary Conditions, this Section, and elsewhere in the Contract Documents. b. Substitution request is complete and includes all documents and information required by the Contract Documents. c. Contractor certifications required by the General Conditions, as may be modified by the Supplementary Conditions, and this Section are valid and made with Contractor’s full knowledge, information, and belief. d. Contractor will provide the same or better guarantees and warranties for substitute as for the specified materials, equipment, methods, procedures, and sequences (as applicable). e. Contractor waives all rights for increasing the Contract Price or extending the Contract Times, related to the substitute, that subsequently may become apparent to Contractor after issuance of the associated Contract modification instrument approving such substitute, except for those associated with differing subsurface or physical conditions or discovery of a previously unforeseen Hazardous Environmental Condition associated with the Work involving the approved substitute. F. Submittal of Substitution Requests - General: 1. Substitution requests must be submitted by Contractor. Engineer will not accept or review substitution requests from prospective or bona-fide Subcontractors or Suppliers. 2. Submit separate substitution request for each proposed substitute. 3. Submit substitution requests in accordance with requirements for Shop Drawings and other Submittals, as indicated in the General Conditions, as may be modified by the Supplementary Conditions, Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures. 4. Do not submit substitution requests as any of the following (such substitution requests will be returned by Engineer without review): a. Shop Drawing, Sample, or other Submittal. b. Request for approval of an “or-equal”. c. Request for interpretation (RFI) or clarification. d. Change Proposal without all other, required substitution request elements indicated below. e. Other oral or written communication not in accordance with this Section. 5. Each substitution request shall include: a. Transmittal letter (one per substitution request) expressly indicating the communication is a substitution request. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 01 25 00 - 3 b. Completed substitution request form, on the form attached to this Section. c. Change Proposal, submitted in accordance with the Contract Documents, including Section 01 26 00 - Contract Modification Procedures. Clearly indicate the proposed changes in Contract Price and Contract Times if substitute is approved; if none, clearly so indicate on the Change Proposal. d. Certifications and written representations required by the Contract Documents to accompany substitution requests. e. Other information: (1) required elsewhere in this Section and in other elements of the Contract Documents, and (2) deemed appropriate by Contractor to support Contractor’s substitution request. 6. When Engineer requires additional information to evaluate a substitution request, furnish such information within five days of receipt of Engineer’s request, unless additional time is granted by Engineer, in writing. 7. Engineer and Owner have the right to rely upon the completeness and accuracy of information, documents, certifications, and representations in Contractor’s substitution request. Contractor accepts full responsibility for completeness and accuracy of substitution requests (except for Engineer’s professional liability). G. Engineer’s Review of Substitution Requests: 1. Engineer has no obligation to approve any substitute. 2. Substitutes will not be approved unless all of the following are satisfied for the associated substitute: a. The Contract supports submittal of such substitution request; and b. Substitute is reasonably consistent with Engineer’s design intent for the Project as a completed, functioning whole; and c. As indicated in Paragraph 1.3.A.3 of this Section. d. Substitute will not have an adverse effect on the work of other contractors, or existing or proposed construction; and e. Substitution request is complete in accordance with the Contract Documents and Engineer’s requests, and f. Owner agrees to the substitute; and g. Associated changes in Contract Price and Contract Times, if any, are acceptable to Owner. 3. Engineer is not obligated to approve any substitute where such approval is conditioned on an increase in the Contract Price, the Contract Times, or both. 4. Timeliness of Engineer’s Review: a. Allow not less than 21 days for Engineer’s review of each substitute. Allow longer for larger, more-complex substitutes. b. Engineer will endeavor to perform timely review of substitution requests. However, Contractor is responsible for complying with the Contract Times, regardless of whether the substitute is approved. c. Where approval of a substitute would necessitate other changes to the Project’s design, additional time, beyond that indicated above, will be necessary for Engineer’s preparation of revisions to the design. 5. When Design Changes are Required with Approval of Substitute: a. Engineer will advise Contractor promptly following Engineer’s review (and Owner’s comment, if any) on substitution request to indicate whether the substitute will be acceptable. Engineer’s advisory to Contractor will indicate whether changes in Engineer’s design are necessary and include a preliminary estimate of Engineer’s fee and time required for modifying the design and preparing an associated Proposal Request to Contractor. b. Engineer’s preliminary estimates of fee and time for design modifications will be prepared in good faith, but are not binding on Owner or Engineer. c. Contractor shall reimburse Owner for costs incurred by Owner for design modifications necessitated by approval of substitute. Owner may deduct such amounts, as one or more set-offs, from payments due Contractor under the Contract. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 01 25 00 - 4 d. Upon Contractor’s receipt of Engineer’s estimate of fee and time for design modifications, contractor shall advise Engineer, in writing, within three days whether Contractor will continue pursing approval of the substitute. e. Request to Contractor. f. Engineer may reject a substitute that would require substantial changes in the Project’s design. H. Approval of Substitutes: 1. Substitutes are approved only via issuance of an appropriate Field Order or Change Order in accordance with Section 01 26 00 - Contract Modification procedures, and the General Conditions, as may be modified by the Supplementary Conditions. 2. Approval of a substitute does not relieve Contractor from obligation to comply with the Contract Documents, including submitting Shop Drawings, Samples, and other Submittals in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1.4 SUBSTITUTE MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. In addition to other requirements of this Section and elsewhere in the Contract Documents, substitution requests for substitute materials or equipment shall include: 1. Manufacturer and Location: a. Name and address of manufacturer of the proposed substitute. Indicate country where manufacturer is incorporated and owned. b. Companies and brands owned by or affiliated with manufacturer. c. Name of manufacturers of principal component items, such as motors, bearings, and similar items. d. Location where the items would be manufactured, including country and address. Indicate the total percentage of the items’ value that will be manufactured outside of the United States and its territories. e. Name, address, and driving distance from the Site of: 1) Manufacturer’s sales representative. 2) Nearest service center offering full array of service capabilities. 3) Warehouse or other location where spare parts for the proposed substitute are available. f. Number of years that manufacturer has actively participated the North American market. 2. Proposed Materials and Equipment: a. Model designation and quantity of each proposed for the Work. b. Manufacturer’s literature for proposed substitute, with description of the materials and equipment. c. Performance information and representative test data. d. Indication of reference standards with which materials and equipment comply. e. Preliminary process and instrumentation diagrams (P&ID), where applicable. f. Identification of hazardous materials, including Constituents of Concern, used in the materials and equipment, and associated permitting or licensing required. g. Manufacturer’s standard warranty and applicable, proposed special or extended warranties, including indication of specific entities that will be beneficiary of such warranties. h. Complete list of proposed deviations from requirements of the Contract Documents. i. Itemized comparison of specified materials and equipment and proposed substitute, indicating: 1) Size (physical dimensions) when: item is in use, when not in use, and space required for routine and major maintenance. 2) Weight and loading at supports, when item is full and empty. Materials of construction. 3. Operation requirements, including: a. Anticipated consumption of each item of: Electricity, other energy sources, water, chemicals (indicate each), and other needs for operation at the Site. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 01 25 00 - 5 b. Typical labor required for operation and associated skill level. c. Description of remote monitoring and control capabilities, as applicable. 4. Maintenance requirements, including: a. Anticipated life in the service and environment required. b. Frequency and general scope of routine and major maintenance typically necessary. c. Typical labor requirements and general qualifications of personnel performing routine maintenance. d. Major, associated equipment necessary for routing and major maintenance, including hoisting equipment type and capacity (when applicable). e. Availability, scope, cost, and general conditions of service and maintenance contracts, if any. 5. References for similar projects on which the materials and equipment were used. Indicate for each: a. Project owner name, name of facility where installed, and name of project. b. City, state, and country of installation. c. Model number/size and quantity furnished and installed. d. Year of installation. e. Contact information for owner and design professional, including telephone numbers. 6. Other information required by the Contract Documents. 7. Other information reasonably requested by Engineer. 1.5 SUBSTITUTE CONSTRUCTION METHODS, PROCEDURES, OR SEQUENCES A. Provisions of the General Conditions, as may be modified by the Supplementary Conditions, regarding substitutes of materials and equipment are hereby extended to apply to substitute methods, procedures, and sequences as shown or indicated in the Contract Documents. B. In addition to other requirements of this Section and elsewhere in the Contract Documents, substitution requests for substitute methods, procedures, or sequences shall include: 1. Clear identification of the method, procedure, or sequence shown or indicated in the Contract Documents for which substitute is requested. 2. Detailed description of proposed substitute method, procedure, sequence, or combination thereof. 3. Reasons why substitute is proposed and benefits to the Project should the substitute be approved. 4. Detailed list of how the proposed substitute deviates from associated method, procedure, or sequence shown or indicated in the Contract Documents. 5. Impact of the substitute, if approved, on Owner’s or facility manager’s operations, when the Work is at an existing facility. 6. Effect on other contractors working at the Site, if substitute is approved. 7. Description of temporary equipment and temporary facilities needed, should the substitute be approved, including quantity of items, capacities, performance characteristics, permitting and approvals required by authorities having jurisdiction, and proposed location at the Site. 8. Written evaluation of how substitute method, procedure, or sequence complies with Laws and Regulations. 9. Drawings illustrating method, procedure, or sequence. 10. Materials to be used that contain Constituents of Concern or that have potential to cause or exacerbate a Hazardous Environmental Condition. 11. Other information and data required by the Contract Documents. 12. Other information reasonably required by Engineer. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 01 25 00 - 6 PART 2 - PRODUCTS - (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 ATTACHMENTS A. The following, bound after this Section’s “End of Section” designation, are part of this Specifications Section: 1. Exhibit A - Substitution Request Form (one page). END OF SECTION Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 01 25 00 - 1 EXHIBIT A Substitution Request Form (One Item per each Form) Project: Date: Substitution Requestor: Contractor: Specification Section No: Paragraph No. (i.e. 2.1.A.1.c): Specified Item: Proposed Substitution: Provide Product Data Sheets, Manufacturer’s written installation instructions, drawings, diagrams, or any other information as an attached to this Form that will demonstrate the proposed substitution is an Approved Equal. State differences between proposed substitutions and specified item. Differences include but are not limited to interrelationship with other items; materials, equipment, function, utility, life cycle costs, applied finished, appearances, and quality. ____________________________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________________________ Document how the proposed substitution is compatible with or modifies other systems, parts, equipment or components of the Project and Work under the Contract ____________________________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________________________ Describe what effect the proposed substitution has on dimensions indicated on the Drawings and previously reviewed Shop Drawings? ____________________________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________________________ Describe what effect the proposed substitution has on the Construction Schedule and Contract Time. ____________________________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________________________ Describe what effect the proposed substitution has on the Contract Price. This includes all direct, indirect, impact and delay costs. ____________________________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________________________ Manufacturer’s guarantees of the proposed and specified items are: ☐ Same ☐ Different (explain on attachment) The undersigned state that the function, utility, life cycle costs, applied finishes, appearance and quality of the proposed substitution are equal or superior to those of the specified item. For use by Engineer: ☐ Accepted – eligible for approval via Change Order ☐ Accepted as Noted – approval via Change Order ☐ Not Accepted __________________ _______________ Date (Telephone): _________________________________ Signature of PE, RA, or PG in Responsible Charge ______________________________________________ (Contractor’s Signature) ______________________________________________ (Contractor’s Firm) ______________________________________________ (Firms Address) ______________________________________________ (Telephone) Comments: Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 01 25 00 - 2 Copyright 2020 HDR Engineering, Inc. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 01 26 00 - 1 SECTION 01 26 00 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. This Specifications section expands upon provisions of the General Conditions, as may be modified by the Supplementary Conditions, and includes: a. Requests for interpretation. b. Written clarifications. c. Minor changes in the Work and Field Orders. d. Work Change Directives. e. Proposal Requests. f. Change Proposals. g. Change Orders. 1.2 GENERAL – APPLICABLE TO ALL PROVISIONS OF THIS SECTION A. Submit Contract modification documents to Engineer, addressed to the contact person and contact information indicated in Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures. B. Retain at Contractor’s office and at the Site complete copy of each Contract modification document, all interpretations and clarifications, related documents, and Engineer’s response. 1.3 REQUESTS FOR INTERPRETATION A. General. 1. Transmit written requests for interpretation to Engineer. Contractor and Owner may prepare and transmit requests for interpretation. 2. Prepare and transmit request for interpretation to obtain clarifications or interpretations of the Contract Documents. Report conflicts, errors, ambiguities, and discrepancies in the Contract Documents by requesting an interpretation. 3. Do not transmit request for interpretation when other form of communication is appropriate, such as Submittals, requests for approvals of substitutes, notices, ordinary correspondence, or other form of communication. Improperly prepared or inappropriate requests for interpretation will be returned without response or action by Engineer. 4. Do not submit request for interpretation or clarification when: a. answer may be obtained by observations at the Site; or. b. required information is clearly indicated in the Contract Documents; or. c. required information is included in industry standards referenced in the Contract Documents or Supplier’s instructions that are consistent with the Contract Documents; or. d. are reasonably inferable from any of foregoing. 5. Engineer will return requests for interpretation without response for any of the following reasons: a. Request is regarding one of the items addressed in Paragraphs 1.3.A.3 and 4 of this Specifications section. b. Request is unclear or incomplete. c. Request was answered in Engineer’s response to a prior request for interpretation. d. Request is related to construction means, methods, techniques, procedures, or sequences of construction that are not required by the Contract Documents. e. Request is related to safety and protection matters that are solely Contractor’s responsibility. f. Request resulted in whole or in part to lack of adequate coordination by Contractor, including coordination of Subcontractors and Suppliers. g. Requests that are otherwise frivolous or unnecessary. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 01 26 00 - 2 6. Should requests be categorized by Engineer as within the limits of Paragraphs 1.3.A.3, 4, or 5 of this Specifications Section, Engineer may recommend and Owner may withhold from payments due Contractor under the Contract set-off(s) sufficient to cover Owner’s costs of Contractor’s submittal of invalid, frivolous, unnecessary, or inappropriate requests for interpretation or clarification.. 7. Contractor shall have sole financial responsibility for Contractor’s costs for requests for interpretation or clarification that are submitted late, out of sequence, or that are unnecessary. B. Procedure. 1. Transmit requests for interpretation in accordance with requirements of this Specifications section. Include with each request for interpretation a separate letter of transmittal. 2. Transmit one (1) original and one (1) electronic copy of each request for interpretation. Include with each request for interpretation a separate letter of transmittal. 3. If Engineer requests additional information to make an interpretation, entity requesting the interpretation shall transmit the information requested within 10 days, unless Engineer allows additional time, via correspondence referring to request for interpretation number. 4. Engineer will review and respond to requests for interpretation with reasonable promptness. Allow sufficient time for review and response. 5. Engineer will maintain log of requests for interpretation. Upon request, copy of log will be transmitted to requestor. 6. Engineer’s response to requests for interpretation will be transmitted in accordance with requirements of this Specifications section. Each response to a request for interpretation will include a separate letter of transmittal. 7. Engineer will transmit one copy of response to each request for interpretation to the recipients indicated below. Each response to a request for interpretation will include a separate letter of transmittal. 8. Engineer’s response to each request for interpretation will be distributed to: a. Contractor. b. Owner. c. Engineer. 9. If Contractor desires to appeal Engineer's interpretation or clarification, comply with the appeals procedure set forth in the General Conditions, as may be modified by the Supplementary Conditions. 10. Interpretations that One or Both Parties Believes Entails a Change to the Contract: a. If Contractor or Owner believes that a change in the Contract Price or Contract Times or other change to the Contract is required as a result of Engineer’s interpretation, so advise Engineer in writing before proceeding with the Work associated with the request for interpretation. b. If, after this initial communication, either Owner or Contractor believes that change in Contract Price, Contract Times, both, or other relief with respect to the terms of the Contract is necessary, recourse shall be in accordance with the Contract Documents. C. Preparation of Requests for Interpretation: 1. Prepare each request for interpretation on the “Request for Interpretation” form included with this Specifications section, or other form acceptable to Engineer. 2. Number each request for interpretation as follows: Numbering system shall be the Contract number and designation followed by a hyphen and three-digit sequential number. Example: First request for interpretation on the general contract for project titled, “Contract WWTP09” would be, “RFI No. WWTP09-GC-001”. 3. In space provided on form, describe the interpretation requested. Provide additional sheets as necessary. Include text and sketches as required in sufficient detail to describe the need for interpretation. 4. When applicable, request for interpretation shall include Contractor’s recommended resolution. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 01 26 00 - 3 1.4 WRITTEN CLARIFICATIONS A. General: 1. Written clarifications, when required, will be initiated and issued by Engineer. 2. Written clarifications do not change the Contract Price or Contract Times, and do not alter the Contract Documents. 3. Written clarifications will be issued as correspondence or using clarification notice form acceptable to Engineer, with additional information as required. B. Procedure. 1. Engineer’s written clarifications will be transmitted in accordance with requirements of this Specifications section. 2. Engineer will transmit one copy of each written clarification to the recipients indicated below. 3. Each written clarification will be distributed to: a. Contractor. b. Owner. c. Engineer. 4. If Contractor desires to appeal Engineer's interpretation or clarification, comply with the appeals procedure set forth in the General Conditions, as may be modified by the Supplementary Conditions. 5. Written Clarifications that One or Both Parties Believes Entails a Change to the Contract: a. If Contractor or Owner believe that a change in the Contract Price or Contract Times or other change to the Contract is required as a result of Engineer’s written clarification, so advise Engineer in writing before proceeding with the Work associated with the written clarification. b. If, after this initial communication, either Owner or Contractor believes that change in the Contract Price, Contract Times, both, or other relief with respect to the terms of the Contract is necessary, recourse shall be in accordance with the Contract Documents. 6. If Engineer’s written clarification is unclear, prepare and transmit a request for interpretation in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1.5 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK AND FIELD ORDERS A. General: 1. Field Orders, when required, will be initiated and issued by Engineer. 2. Field Orders authorize minor changes in the Work but do not change the Contract Price or Contract Times. 3. Field Orders will be in the form of Engineers Joint Contract Documents Committee document EJCDC C-942, “Field Order”. 4. Engineer will maintain a log of Field Orders issued. Copy of Engineer’s log of Field Orders will be transmitted to Contractor or Owner upon request. B. Procedure: 1. Field Orders will be transmitted in accordance with requirements of this Specifications section. Each Field Order will include a separate letter of transmittal. 2. Engineer will transmit one copy of each Field Order to the recipients indicated below. Each Field Order will include a separate letter of transmittal. 3. Each Field Order will be distributed to the following: a. Contractor. b. Owner. c. Resident Project Representative (RPR). d. Engineer. 4. Field Orders that One or Both Parties Believes Entails a Change to the Contract Price or Contract Times: a. If Contractor or Owner believes that a change in the Contract Price or Contract Times or other change to the Contract is required as a result of a Field Order, so advise Engineer in writing before proceeding with the Work associated with the Field Order. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 01 26 00 - 4 b. If, after this initial communication, Contractor believes that change in Contract Price, Contract Times, both, or other relief with respect to the terms of the Contract is necessary, recourse shall be in accordance with the Contract Documents. 5. If the Field Order is unclear, submit request for interpretation. 6. If Owner disagrees with the Field Order, Engineer may issue a revised or amended Field Order, or a Change Order or Work Change Directive may be issued. 1.6 WORK CHANGE DIRECTIVES A. General: 1. Work Change Directives, when issued, order additions, deletions, or revisions to the Work. When issued, Contractor shall promptly implement the changes ordered in the associated work Change Directive. 2. Work Change Directives do not change the Contract Price or Contract Times but are evidence that the parties to the Contract expect that the change ordered or documented by the Work Change Directive will be incorporated in subsequently issued Change Order following agreement by the parties as to the Work Change Directive’s effect, if any, on the Contract Price, Contract Times, or both. 3. Work Change Directives will be in the form of EJCDC C-940, “Work Change Directive”. B. Procedure. 1. Work Change Directives signed by Owner and Engineer will be transmitted in accordance with requirements of this Specifications section. Each Work Change Directive will include a separate letter of transmittal. Signed Work Change Directives will be transmitted to: a. Contractor. b. Owner. c. Engineer. d. Resident Project Representative. e. Contractor: One original. f. Owner: One original. g. Engineer: One original. h. Resident Project Representative (RPR): One copy. 2. Documentation of Costs: a. Promptly following receipt of the Work Change Directive: 1) Advise Engineer and Owner in writing of the anticipated quantity and types of construction equipment and machinery required or anticipated for the associated Work. 2) Advise Engineer and Owner in writing of which construction equipment and machinery is owned by the Contractor or Subcontractor and which is, or will be, rented from an equipment rental firm. 3) When construction equipment and machinery is rented from a rental firm, transmit to Engineer and Owner copy of the associated rental agreements(s) pertinent to the Work ordered by the Work Change Directive. 4) For all construction equipment and machinery, indicate to Engineer and Owner whether each item is required only for the Work ordered by the Work Change Directive and whether each item is being, or will be, used for other Work on the Project or other projects for Owner. 5) Advise Engineer and Owner in writing of information on anticipated temporary materials (including items such as temporary support of excavations, scaffolding, temporary barriers, temporary plates covering excavations, and other temporary materials) to the same extent as that required for construction equipment and machinery. b. When basis of payment for Work ordered under a Work Change Directive will be paid as Cost of the Work plus a fee, or when otherwise required by Engineer, document for the Work performed under each separate Work Change Directive, for each day, the following: Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 01 26 00 - 5 1) Number and labor classifications of workers employed and hours worked each day on the Work ordered via the Work Change Directive. 2) Construction equipment used, including manufacturer, model, and year of manufacture, and number of hours such equipment was onsite and used each day for the Work under the Work Change Directive. Indicate where the equipment was used for other Work under the Contract and idle time. 3) Temporary materials; furnish the same information as required for construction equipment and machinery. Where rental costs of such items approaches the purchase cost of such item, or when otherwise requested by Engineer, furnish evidence, satisfactory to Engineer, of the purchase price of such temporary materials. 4) Consumables and similar materials used. 5) Suppliers’ receipts, bills, or invoices for and descriptions of materials and equipment incorporated into the Work. 6) Invoices and labor and equipment breakdowns for Subcontractors. 7) Other information required by Owner or Engineer. 8) Transmit such documentation as a Change Proposal promptly after such documentation is available to Contractor. Actively pursue Subcontractors and Suppliers for required documentation to promptly furnish required documentation to Engineer. c. Separately track and document Work performed in accordance with each Work Change Directive and Work performed under stipulated price methods of compensation (including lump sums and Unit Price Work). d. Submit such information in a format acceptable to Engineer. 3. Documentation of Time: a. General: 1) Contractor will be entitled to change of Contract Times Work ordered by a Work Change Directive in accordance with the requirements of the General Conditions, as may be modified by the Supplementary Conditions. 2) Contractor will be entitled to a change in Contract Times only when the Work ordered by the Work Change Directive is implemented promptly and affects the Contractor’s ability to comply with the Contract Times. b. Requirement Documentation: Submit the following as part of the Change Proposal documenting price-related impact of the Work ordered by the Work Change Directive: 1) Statement on whether the subject Work affected Contractor’s ability to comply with the Contract Times. 2) If Contractor’s ability to comply with the Contract Times was so affected, indicate the effect on each of the relevant Contract Times. 3) Document that Contractor acted promptly and properly upon receipt of the Work Change Directive to promptly implement the Work ordered thereby. 4) Time impact analysis for the affected Work, in accordance with Section 01 32 16 - Construction Progress Schedule. 5) Other time-related documentation required by Engineer. 1.7 PROPOSAL REQUESTS A. General: 1. Proposal Requests may be initiated by Engineer or Owner. 2. Proposal Requests are for requesting the effect on the Contract Price and the Contract Times and other information relative to contemplated changes in the Work. Proposal Requests do not authorize changes or variations in the Work, and do not change the Contract Price or Contract Times or terms of the Contract. 3. Proposal Requests will be furnished using the “Proposal Request” form included with this Specifications section. B. Procedure: Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 01 26 00 - 6 1. Proposal Requests will be transmitted in accordance with requirements of this Section. Each Proposal Requests will include a separate letter of transmittal. 2. Each signed Proposal Request will be transmitted to the following: a. Contractor. b. Owner. c. Resident Project Representative (RPR). d. Engineer. 3. Transmit request for interpretation to obtain clarification of conflicts, errors, ambiguities, and discrepancies in Proposal Request. 4. Upon receipt of Proposal Request, Contractor shall prepare and transmit to Engineer a Change Proposal, in accordance with the Contract Documents, for the proposed Work described in the Proposal Request. 1.8 CHANGE PROPOSALS A. General: 1. Prepare and transmit written Change Proposal to Engineer in response to each Proposal Request; or when Contractor believes a change in the Contract Price, Contract Times, both, or other change to the terms of the Contract is required; or to appeal an initial decision by Engineer concerning the requirements of the Contract Documents or relating to the acceptability of the Work under the Contract Documents; contest a set-off against payment due; or seek other relief under the Contract. B. Procedure: 1. Prepare and transmit Change Proposals within time limits indicated in the General Conditions, as may be modified by the Supplementary Conditions. 2. Submit only one Change Proposal for each change issue, unless Engineer requires additional information or clarification. Do not submit repeated Change Proposals for the same change issue. Rather, when Contractor is dissatisfied with Engineer’s decision on a Change Proposal, recourse is set forth in the General Conditions, as may be modified by the Supplementary Conditions, and elsewhere in this Article. 3. Transmit Change Proposals in accordance with requirements of this Specifications section. Include with each Change Proposal all required supporting documentation and a separate letter of transmittal. 4. Engineer’s Review and Requests for Additional Information: a. Engineer will review and act on each Change Proposal in accordance with, and within the time limits indicated in, the General Conditions, as may be modified by the Supplementary Conditions. b. When, Engineer requests additional information to render a decision, submit required information within five days of receipt of Engineer’s request, unless Engineer allows more time. Submit the required information via correspondence that refers to the specific Change Proposal number. c. Owner shall transmit to Engineer such comments, if any, that Owner has on the Change Proposal, within 10 days of Owner’s receipt of the Change Proposal. d. Engineer will render a written decision on the Change Proposal or take other action in accordance with the General Conditions, as may be modified by the Supplementary Conditions. e. Engineer’s response to Change Proposals will be transmitted in accordance with requirements of this Specifications section, the General Conditions, and the Supplementary Conditions. 5. Engineer’s response to each Change Proposal will be distributed to: a. Contractor. b. Owner. c. Resident Project Representative (RPR). d. Engineer. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 01 26 00 - 7 6. If Change Proposal is recommended for approval by Engineer and is approved by Owner, a Change Order will be issued or, when applicable, an appropriate use of an allowance (already included in the Contract Price) will be authorized by Owner. 7. If parties do not agree on terms for the change, Owner or Contractor may file a Claim against the other, in accordance with the General Conditions, as may be modified by the Supplementary Conditions. C. Preparation of Change Proposals: 1. Each Change Proposal shall be submitted on the “Change Proposal” form included with this Specifications section, or other form acceptable to Engineer. 2. Number each Change Proposal as follows: Numbering system shall be the Contract number and designation followed by a hyphen and three-digit sequential number. Example: First Change Proposal for the general contract for project named “Contract No. 8” would be, “Change Proposal No. 8-GC-001”. 3. In space provided on Change Proposal form: a. Describe scope of each proposed change. Include text and sketches on additional sheets as required to provide detail sufficient for Engineer’s review and response. If a change item is submitted in response to Proposal Request, write in as scope, “In accordance with Proposal Request No.” followed by the Proposal Request number. Submit written clarifications, if any, to scope of change. b. Submit justification for each proposed change. If change is in response to proposal request, write in as justification, “In accordance with Proposal Request No.” followed by the Proposal Request number. c. Indicate the total change in the Contract Price and Contract Times for each separate change item included in the Change Proposal. 4. Proposed Effect on Contract Price: Unless otherwise directed by Engineer, attach to the Change Proposal detailed breakdowns of pricing (Contractor’s cost and Contractor’s fee) including: a. List of Work tasks to accomplish the change. b. For each task, labor cost breakdown including labor classification, total hours per labor classification, and hourly cost rate for each labor classification. Where overtime is included, indicate the overtime hours, labor classifications, and associated overhead rates. c. Construction equipment and machinery to be used, including manufacturer, model, and year of manufacture, and number of hours for each. Indicate whether the construction equipment or machinery is owned by Contractor, Subcontractor, or leased from a rental firm; if leased, include with the Change Proposal a copy of the rental agreement. Indicate whether the construction equipment and machinery is already onsite and used for other activities, or whether it is required solely for the Work in the contemplated change. Indicate overtime hours budgeted, if any, and the associated cost rate for overtime compared with the straight-time rate. d. Indicate temporary materials required, including description of extent, scope, and quality, and associated cost. Temporary materials include items such as temporary sheeting for support of excavations, scaffolding, temporary plates to cover open excavations, temporary barriers, and other temporary items. Indicate ownership or source of such items. Include copy of rental agreement if rented from a third-party rental firm in which neither Contractor nor any Subcontractor has a financial interest. Indicate intended duration of use for such items and purchase cost of such items. e. Detailed breakdown of cost of materials and equipment to be incorporated into the Work, including quantities, unit costs, and total cost, with Supplier’s written quotations. When requested by Engineer, submit quotes by multiple prospective Suppliers. f. Breakdowns of each Subcontractors’ pricing, including labor, construction equipment and machinery, temporary materials, and materials and equipment incorporated into the Work, other costs, and Subcontractor fees (e.g., overhead and profit). Breakdown of Subcontractors’ pricing shall be the same level of detail as that for Contractor. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 01 26 00 - 8 g. Breakdown of other costs eligible, in accordance with the General Conditions and the Supplementary Conditions under “Cost of the Work” provisions. h. Other information required by Engineer. i. Contractor’s fees (overhead and profit) applied to eligible Contractor costs and eligible Subcontractor costs. 5. Proposed Effect on Contract Times: Unless otherwise directed by Engineer, attach to the Change Proposal detailed information substantiating the proposed change in Contract Times, including: a. Time impact analysis required by Section 01 32 16 - Construction Progress Schedule. b. Indication of whether the Work associated with the contemplated change will affect Contractor’s ability to comply with the Contract Times. c. Other time-related information requested by Engineer. 1.9 CHANGE ORDERS A. General: 1. Change Orders will be recommended by Engineer (when required by the General Conditions) and will be signed by Owner and Contractor (subject to the General Conditions related to a party withholding its signature from a contractually-required Change Order)), to authorize additions, deletions, or revisions to the Work, changes to the Contract Price, changes in the or Contract Times, changes to the terms of the Contract, or a combination thereof. 2. Change Orders will be in the form of EJCDC C-941, “Change Order”. B. Procedure. 1. Change Orders for signature by Contractor will be transmitted in accordance with requirements of this Specifications section. Each Change Order will include a separate letter of transmittal. Contractor shall print three originals of Change Order for Contractor’s signature. 2. Contractor shall promptly sign each original Change Order and, within five days of receipt, deliver all originals to Engineer. 3. Engineer will sign each original Change Order and forward them to Owner. 4. After approval and signature by Owner, original Change Orders will be distributed as indicated below. 5. Original, signed Change Orders will be distributed as follows: a. Contractor: One original. b. Owner: One original. c. Engineer: One original. d. Resident Project Representative (RPR): One copy. 6. Upon Contractor’s receipt of the fully-signed Change Order, promptly perform the Work ordered thereby in accordance with the Contract Documents and the Progress Schedule accepted by Engineer. PART 2 - PRODUCTS - (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 ATTACHMENTS A. The forms listed below and bound following this Specifications section’s “End of Section” designation, are part of this Specifications section: 1. Request for Interpretation form (one page). 2. Proposal Request form (one page). 3. Change Proposal form (one page). END OF SECTION Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 01 26 00 - 9 Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 01 26 00 - 10 REQUEST FOR INTERPRETATION Owner: ______________________________________________________________________________ Project Name: _________________________________________________________________________ Contractor: _______________________________________________________________ RFI No. _____ Date Transmitted: ____________________________________________________ Date Received: _____ Date Response Requested: ___________________________________ Date Response Transmitted: _____ Subject: _________________________________________________________________________ _____ Specification Section and Paragraph: _______________________________________________________ Drawing References: ___________________________________________________________________ INTERPRETATION REQUESTED: Signature: Date: _____ ENGINEER’S RESPONSE: Signature: Date: _____ Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 01 26 00 - 11 PROPOSAL REQUEST Owner: ______________________________________________________________________________ Project Name: ________________________________________________________________________ Proposal Request No.: Date: _____ Contract Name and No.: ________________________________________________________________ Contractor: ___________________________________________________________________________ Other Contracts Involved in Proposed Change: ______________________________________________ TO CONTRACTOR: Please submit a complete Change Proposal for the proposed modifications described below. If the associated Change Proposal is approved, a Change Order or allowance authorization will be issued to authorize adjustment so the Contract. This Proposal Request is not a Change Order, Work Change Directive, Field Order, or an authorization to proceed with the proposed Work described below. SCOPE OF PROPOSED CHANGE(S) IN THE WORK: Attachments to this Proposal Request: Proposal requested by: __________________________________________________________________ HDR (Engineer) Signature of Requestor: _________________________________________________________________ Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 01 26 00 - 12 CHANGE PROPOSAL Owner: ______________________________________________________________________________ Project Name: ________________________________________________________________________ Change Proposal No.: Date: _____ Submitted in Response to Proposal No.: ____________________________________________________ Contractor Name and No.: ________________________________________________________________ Contractor: ___________________________________________________________________________ Subject: _____________________________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________________________________ The following changes to the Contract are proposed: SCOPE OF PROPOSED CHANGE TO CONTRACT: (attach supporting information as required) JUSTIFICATION: PROPOSED CHANGES IN CONTRACT PRICE AND CONTRACT TIMES: We propose that the Contract Price and Contract Times be changed as follows: For Contract Price, attach detailed cost breakdowns for Contractor and Subcontractors, Supplier quotations, and other information required. For the Contract Times, state increase, decrease, or no change to Contract Times for Substantial Completion, readiness for final payment, and Milestones, if any. If increase or decrease, state specific number of days for changes to the Contract Times. Submit supporting data, including time impact analysis for the Progress Schedule. Contract Times (days) Description Amount Substantial Final 1. $0.00 0 0 2. $0.00 0 0 Total This Change Proposal $0.00 0 0 Changes to Milestones, if any: __________ Contractor represents that supporting data attached to this Change Proposal are accurate and complete. The requested time or price adjustment indicated in this Change Proposal is the entire adjustment to which Contractor believes it is entitled as a result of the proposed change(s) indicated herein. Change Proposal by: ___________________________________________________________________ Signature of Proposer: __________________________________________________________________ Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents SCHEDULE OF VALUES 01 29 73 - 1 SECTION 01 29 73 SCHEDULE OF VALUES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Requirements for the Schedule of values, including: a. Applicability. b. General provisions for Schedules of Values. c. Format, organization, and content of Schedule of Values. B. Related Requirements: Include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Section 01 22 00 - Measurement and Payment. 2. Section 01 29 76 - Progress Payment Procedures. 3. Section 01 32 16 - Construction Progress Schedule. 1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Schedule of Values and Payment – General: 1. Contractor shall prepare and submit to Engineer for acceptance Schedule of Values that presents (as applicable): (a) an appropriate, detailed breakdown of the price of lump sum bid/pay items, and (b) an appropriate, detailed breakdown of the price of Work compensated on the basis of Cost of the Work plus a fee, and (c) lists bid/pay items of Unit Price Work. The total of all Work among the various bid/pay items shall equal the Contract Price. 2. For each item of lump sum Work and Work compensated on the basis of Cost of the Work plus a fee, the Schedule of Values shall, establish in detail the portion of the Contract Price allocated to each component of such Work. 3. Upon request of Engineer, promptly furnish data and information that substantiates and supports the amounts indicated in the Schedule of Values. 4. Submit preliminary Schedule of Values to Engineer for initial review. Contractor shall incorporate Engineer’s comments into the Schedule of Values and resubmit to Engineer. Engineer may require corrections and re-submittals until Schedule of Values is acceptable. 5. Schedule of Values may be used, where appropriate, as a basis for negotiating price of changes, if any, in the Work. 6. Coordinate the Schedule of Values with cost-loaded Progress Schedule required in Section 01 32 16 - Construction Progress Schedule. Earned value indicated in cost-loaded Progress Schedule updates will be basis for amounts of Contractor’s progress payment requests. B. Applicability: 1. Lump Sum Work: a. For Work paid on a lump sum basis, progress payments will be on the basis of Work performed in accordance with the Contract Documents, for each line item in the Schedule of Values, as recommended to Owner by Engineer.. 2. Work Compensated on the Basis of Cost of the Work Plus a Fee: a. Such Work will be paid, based on Engineer’s recommendation to Owner, based on documentation of eligible costs submitted by Contractor with progress payment requests, in accordance with the General Conditions (as may be modified by the Supplementary Conditions) and Section 01 29 76 - Progress Payment Procedures. b. Schedule of Values accepted by Engineer will be used by Engineer in evaluating reasonableness of Contractor’s progress payment requests. c. While the actual Cost of the Work plus applicable fee for a given line item in the Schedule of Values may vary somewhat from the scheduled amount of such line item, where actual Cost of the Work (plus fee) for such line item differs substantially from the scheduled amount of such line item indicated in the Schedule of Values, Engineer Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents SCHEDULE OF VALUES 01 29 73 - 2 may refuse to recommend further payment for such line item, in accordance with the Contract Documents. d. Nothing in the Schedule of Values accepted by Engineer changes the Guaranteed Maximum Price, if any. 3. Unit Price Work: a. Breakdown of unit prices (whether in a Schedule of Values or elsewhere) into detailed cost or price components is not required. b. Unit Price Work will be measured for payment in accordance with the Contract Documents, including Section 01 22 00 - Measurement and Payment. 1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE PROCEDURES A. General Provisions for Schedules of Values: 1. This Section augments requirements for the Schedule of Values, indicated in the General Conditions, as may be augmented by the Supplementary Conditions. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Informational Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Submit to Engineer the Schedule of Values in the form and quantity required in Section 01 33 00 - Submittals. 2. Content of Schedule of Values Submittals shall be in accordance with this Section. 3. Timing of Submittals: a. Preliminary Schedule of Values: 1) Submit preliminary Schedule of Values within time limit indicated in the General Conditions. b. Initial Acceptable Schedule of Values: 1) Revise the preliminary Schedule of Values in accordance with Engineer’s comments. 2) Contractor will not be eligible for progress payment until acceptable Schedule of Values is submitted in accordance with the Contract Documents. 3) Submit the Schedule of Values acceptable to Engineer in accordance with the General Conditions. c. Updates: Submit updated Schedule of Values when: 1) The Contract Price has changed. 2) Requested by Engineer 1.5 FORMAT, ORGANIZATION, AND CONTENT OF SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. Organization and Major Elements of Schedule of Values. 1. Prepare Schedule of Values on the “progress estimate” or “continuation sheets”, as applicable, of the Application for Payment form indicated in Section 01 29 76 - Progress Payment Procedures. 2. Include in Schedule of Values itemized list of Work for each major work area included in the Work, for each lump sumpayment item included in the Contract. 1) Contractor will not be eligible for progress payment until acceptable Schedule of Values is submitted in accordance with the Contract Documents. 2) Contractor will not be eligible for progress payment until acceptable Schedule of Values is submitted in accordance with the Contract Documents. 3. In addition, list either in the Schedule of Values or on a separate worksheet included with Applications for Payment all Unit Price Work bid/pay items in the Contract. The balance of this Article applies to lump sum Work and Work compensated on the basis of Cost of the Work plus a fee. 4. Organization in Accordance with Specification Sections: a. Within each work area, organize the Schedule of Values by the various Specifications section numbers and titles included in the Contract Documents. b. Label each row in the Schedule of Values with the appropriate Specifications section number. Include an amount for each row in the Schedule of Values. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents SCHEDULE OF VALUES 01 29 73 - 3 c. List sub-items of major materials, equipment, or systems, as appropriate or when requested by Engineer. B. Requirements for both the preliminary Schedule of Values Submittal and the Schedule of Values Submittal for Engineer’s acceptance are: 1. Subcontracted Work: a. Schedule of Values shall indicate division of Work between Contractor and each Subcontractor. b. Line items for Work to be performed by each Subcontractor shall include the word, “(SUBCONTRACTED)” and the name of the Subcontractor once the associated subcontract is signed and effective. 2. Apportionment between Materials and Equipment, and Installation: Schedule of Values shall include separate apportionment of costs for: a. Cost of materials and equipment to be incorporated into the completed construction. b. Cost of delivery, handling, and storage of materials and equipment to be incorporated into the completed construction. c. Cost of temporary materials (such as excavation supports, scaffolding, and other temporary materials), and their associated delivery, handling, and storage costs, if any. d. Cost of rentals of construction equipment and machinery, whether owned by Contractor or Subcontractor or leased from a third-party equipment rental entity. e. Cost of installing materials and equipment. f. Travel and subsistence costs, if any. g. Other costs used in preparing the Bid by Contractor and each Subcontractor. 3. Sum of individual line item amounts indicated on the Schedule of Values shall equal the total of associated bid/pay item. Sum of bid/pay item totals in the Schedule of Values, plus the sum of any separate listing of Unit Price Work items, shall equal the total Contract Price. 4. Overhead and Profit: a. Include in each line item a directly proportional amount of Contractor’s overhead and profit in the Contract Price. b. Do not include overhead and profit as separate line item(s). 5. Allowances: Include separate line item for each allowance. 6. Unit Price Work: Separately indicate items of Unit Price Work in the overall Schedule of Values. Where the required form (in accordance with Section 01 29 76 - Progress Payment Procedures) includes a separate worksheet or page for Unit Price Work, indicate all items of Unit Price Work on such worksheet or page of the form. 7. Bonds and Insurance Costs: a. When greater than the amount stipulated immediately above is proposed by Contractor in the Schedule of Values, submit to Engineer documentation substantiating the proposed amounts. Submit to Engineer such documentation when otherwise requested by Engineer. b. When Contractor has furnished performance and payment bonds and evidence of insurance acceptable to Owner and in accordance with the Contract Documents, entire amount for bonds and insurance may be applied for in the first Application for Payment. 8. Construction Support, Project Management, and Administrative Cost Elements: a. Costs under this category are sometimes informally referred to as “field overhead”, but are Project costs rather than costs related to Contractor’s general business operations. b. Include in the Schedule of Values relevant line items and amounts for work and services required by the General Conditions and specific Division 01 Specifications sections, such as: 1) Project management costs. 2) Onsite superintendence and supervision costs. 3) Itemized list of Work by work area, as applicable, for costs associated with coordination with the Owner’s operations, including required sequencing, as set forth in the Contract Documents. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents SCHEDULE OF VALUES 01 29 73 - 4 4) Updating the construction Progress Schedule, preparing time impact analyses, and preparing recovery schedules. Preparation of preliminary Progress Schedule and the initial (“baseline”) Progress Schedule acceptable to Engineer are part of mobilization. 5) Construction progress photographic documentation. Preconstruction photographic documentation and final photographic documentation are, respectively, part of mobilization and demobilization. 6) Updates of the Schedule of Submittals. 7) Contractor’s safety representative and ongoing implementation of Contractor’s Site-specific health and safety plan (SSHASP). Establishing the SSHASP is part of mobilization. 8) Ongoing compliance with permits (when applicable). Contractor’s securing of required work permits is part of mobilization. 9) Ongoing cost for temporary utilities and temporary facilities. Establishing such services and facilities is part of mobilization. 10) Ongoing costs for temporary security . 11) Field offices (monthly rental and maintenance) and storage facilities (excluding costs of establishment and removal, which are part of mobilization and demobilization). 12) Ongoing site maintenance, such as temporary controls (dust, air pollution, water pollution, solid waste control, pest and rodent control, temporary erosion and sediment controls, and others), snow and ice removal, and similar activities. 13) Field engineering and surveying. 14) Progress cleaning and cleaning for Substantial Completion. 15) Record documents (preparation, maintenance, and submittal). a) If adequate record documents are maintained, up to 50 percent of the value of the record documents line item will be eligible for payment, spread evenly over those progress payments in which construction at the Site is performed. b) Remainder of Project record documents line item will be eligible for payment when complete record documents are submitted in accordance with the Contract Documents. c) If record documents submitted are unsatisfactory to Engineer, amount may be reduced via set-offs in accordance with the Contract Documents. 16) Other items required by Engineer. c. Include such items in Applications for Payment on payment schedule acceptable to Engineer. d. Such line items in the Schedule of Values shall exclude any and all costs associated with Contractor’s permanent place(s) of business, personnel stationed at permanent office(s), salaries and bonuses of executive and administrative personnel not directly performing work on the Project, and general business expenses, all of which are part of Contractor’s overhead costs. 9. Mobilization and Demobilization: Include all associated costs in the separate bid/pay item for mobilization and demobilization. The scope of such bid/pay item is indicated in Section 01 22 00 – Measurement and Payment. 10. Mobilization and Demobilization: a. Include separate line items under each appropriate lump sum bid/pay item for mobilization and demobilization. b. Document for Engineer the activities included in mobilization and demobilization line items. c. Mobilization includes: 1) Obtaining Owner’s acceptance of proposed Subcontractors and Suppliers and entering into subcontracts and purchase orders needed to start the Work. 2) Preparing and obtaining Engineer’s approval of Shop Drawings required in Section 01 14 19 - Use of Site. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents SCHEDULE OF VALUES 01 29 73 - 5 3) Preparing and obtaining Engineer’s acceptance of schedules, including Progress Schedule, Schedule of Submittals, and Schedule of Values. 4) Preconstruction conference(s) required by the Contract Documents. 5) Preconstruction photographic documentation. 6) Establishing Contractor’s Site-specific health and safety plan, preconstruction activities needed to start implementing Contractor’s safety programs, and verifying status of training of construction workers and personnel and condition of construction equipment, machinery, and tools. 7) Submitting acceptable emergency contact information 8) Obtaining required permits needed to start the Work. 9) Initial establishment of temporary utilities and temporary facilities. 10) Establishing Contractor’s storage areas, staging and laydown areas, and other areas necessary to perform the Work. 11) Initial establishment of construction vehicular access to the Site, parking needed for construction, and offsite haul routes. 12) Establishing construction equipment, machinery, and tools at the Site. 13) Providing initial temporary controls. 14) Establishing temporary security needed to start Work at the Site. 15) Other mobilization acceptable to Engineer. d. Mobilization will be limited to five percent (5%) of the Contract Price, and will be paid in two (2) payments, each of fifty percent (50%) of total amount for mobilization. Should Contractor propose mobilization in an amount greater than the limit indicated in this paragraph or on an alternative schedule from that indicated in this paragraph, submit to Engineer for acceptance information and documentation sufficient to support and substantiate the proposed amount and payment schedule for mobilization. a. Demobilization includes: 1) Removal from the Site and adjacent areas of excess materials and equipment. 2) Removal of temporary controls, temporary facilities, temporary barriers, and similar materials and equipment. 3) Removal of temporary access roads and parking areas not part of permanent pavement or otherwise allowed to remain by Owner, including temporary traffic controls established for construction vehicles and equipment. 4) Removal of all field office and sheds, storage areas, staging and laydown areas, and other areas needed to perform the Work and restoration of such areas. 5) Removal from the Site of all construction equipment, machinery, tools, Contractor’s containers, temporary fuel storage tanks, and similar items. 6) Closeout of permits on which Contractor is a permittee or co-permittee. 7) Final cleaning. 8) Furnishing required closeout documents. 9) Other costs and effort by Contractor for demobilization. b. Demobilization shall be not less than one percent (1%) of the Contract Price and shall be included with the Application for Payment following Substantial Completion, or other schedule acceptable to Engineer. 11. Costs for Submittals, field quality control activities, and training of operations and maintenance personnel shall be as follows, unless otherwise accepted by Engineer: a. Submittals: Up to eight percent (8%) of cost (including all associated overhead and profit) of each equipment item, exclusive of transportation and installation costs associated therewith, may be allocated to preparation of Shop Drawings, Samples ,and other Submittals required for release for purchase, fabrication, or delivery (as applicable) and may be included in the Application for Payment following Engineer’s approval of Shop Drawings (and acceptance of other Submittals, as applicable) required for fabricating or purchasing for that item for the Work. b. Field Quality Control: Up to three percent (3%) of total cost of each item (including all associated overhead and profit), including materials and equipment, and installation, may be apportioned to specified or required field quality control activities (including Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents SCHEDULE OF VALUES 01 29 73 - 6 required testing and inspections) and included in the Application for Payment following Engineer’s acceptance of the associated written field quality control report Submittal(s). c. O&M Manual Submittals and Training: Up to a total of four percent (4%) of equipment cost (including all associated overhead and profit), exclusive of transportation and installation costs, may be apportioned to operations and maintenance manuals and training of operations and maintenance personnel, which may be included in the Application for Payment following completion of training for the associated item. PART 2 - PRODUCTS - (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION - (NOT USED) END OF SECTION Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents PROGRESS PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01 29 76 - 1 SECTION 01 29 76 PROGRESS PAYMENT PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Administrative and procedural requirements for Contractor’s progress payments. B. Scope: 1. Contractor’s requests for payment shall be in accordance with the Agreement, General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions, and the Specifications. 2. Form: Applications for Payment shall be the Engineers Joint Contract Documents Committee (EJCDC) document EJCDC C-620, “Contractor’s Application for Payment” (2018 edition or later) or other form acceptable to the Owner and Engineer. 1.2 CONTENT AND PROCEDURE FOR REQUESTING PROGRESS PAYMENTS A. Procedure: 1. Review with Resident Project Representative (RPR) quantities and the Work proposed for inclusion in each progress payment request. Application for Payment shall cover only the Work and quantities recommended by the RPR. 2. Contractor will review with Engineer or RPR the status of Project record documents, in connection with Engineer’s review of each Application for Payment. Failure to maintain record document current will be cause for Engineer to recommend a reduction in payment for record documents in accordance with Section 01 29 73 - Schedule of Values, and will entitle Owner to set-offs in accordance with the Contract Documents. 3. Submit to Engineer, an electronic copy, each with Contractor’s signature, of each complete Application for Payment and other documents to accompany the Application for Payment. 4. Engineer will act on request for payment in accordance with the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions. B. Content: Each request for payment shall include: 1. Completed Application for Payment form, including summary/signature page, progress estimate sheets, and stored materials summary. Progress estimate sheets shall have the same level of detail as the Schedule of Values. 2. Documentation for Stored Materials and Equipment: a. For materials and equipment not incorporated in the Work but suitably stored, submit documentation in accordance with the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions. b. UCC-1 Financial Statement: 1) For each lot or delivery of stored materials and equipment for which payment is requested prior to installation of the item(s) at the Site, complete UCC-1, “Financial Statement” form. On UCC-1 form, indicate Owner as “security party”; indicate Supplier as “debtor” when stored item(s) are in Supplier’s custody, and indicate Contractor as “debtor” when stored item(s) are in Contractor’s custody; and clearly indicate in detail all stored item(s) included in the filing as “collateral” on the form. Include attachments to the form when necessary to clearly and fully indicate in detail the associated “collateral”. 2) File completed UCC-1 form with the secretary of state in the state where the subject item(s) are stored. 3) Include with Application for Payment the completed UCC-1 form together with evidence of filing with the required state(s). Submit UCC-1 form and related documentation once for each lot or delivery of stored items. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents PROGRESS PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01 29 76 - 2 c. Photographs of the stored items at the storage location. Submit photographs sufficient to clearly indicate each stored item, clearly showing marking of Owner’s property in accordance with Paragraph 1.3.C of this section. For each month that such item(s) are stored, take and submit monthly new photographs of each stored item, with date-stamp on each photograph. d. Legibly indicate on invoice or bill of sale the specific stored materials or equipment included in the payment request and corresponding bid/payment item number for each and the Supplier price for each item. 3. Listing of Subcontractors and Suppliers: a. In accordance with the General Conditions, submit not less than monthly updated listing of all Subcontractors and Suppliers known to Contractor, whether or not such entities have a contract directly with Contractor. b. Submit complete information using the form attached to this Specifications section. 4. Allowance Work: a. For payment requests that include payment for Work under an allowance, include with the progress payment request copy of Owner’s authorization of the associated allowance Work, in accordance with Section 01 21 00 - Allowances. 5. Partial Release or Reduction of Retainage: a. For each Application for Payment where Contractor requests partial release or reduction of retainage in any amount (other than request for final payment), submit with associated progress payment request consent of surety to partial release or reduction of retainage, duly completed by Contractor and surety. b. Acceptable form includes AIA G707A, “Consent of Surety to Reduction in or Partial Release of Retainage” (1994 or later edition), or other form acceptable to Owner. c. For payment requests that include reduction in or payment of retainage in an amount greater than that required by the Contract Documents, obtain Owner’s concurrence for partial release or reduction in retainage prior to submitting such Application for Payment. C. Final Payment: 1. Requirements for request for final payment are in the General Conditions, as may be modified by the Supplementary Conditions, and Section 01 77 19 - Closeout Requirements. 1.3 ADDITIONAL PROCEDURES FOR PAYMENT FOR STORED MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. Restrictions: 1. Provisions of the General Conditions, as may be modified by the Supplementary Conditions, notwithstanding, only the following items of materials or equipment will be eligible for payment when suitably stored, prior to incorporation into the Work: a. Package Pump Station Enclosure. b. Submersible Pumps. c. Force Main Piping. d. Electrical Power and Control Panels. B. Observation of Stored Materials and Equipment as Condition Precedent to Eligibility for Payment: 1. General: a. Prior to materials or equipment suitably stored but not yet incorporated into the Work can be eligible for payment, Engineer or Resident Project Representative (RPR) shall visit the storage location and verify the extent, condition, and storage environment of the stored items. b. When the same material or equipment item is stored for more than two months, such visits to storage location shall be not less than once every two months. 2. Cost Responsibility for Observations: Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents PROGRESS PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01 29 76 - 3 a. When storage location is less than 20 miles from the Site or less than 20 miles from Engineer’s office, Contractor is not responsible for reimbursing Owner for cost of Engineer’s time and expenses for observing stored materials and equipment. b. When storage location is more than 20 miles from the Site and more than 20 miles from Engineer’s office, Contractor shall reimburse Owner, via a set-off under the Contract Documents, for reasonable cost of Engineer’s time and expenses, including travel time, to visit the storage location and observe the stored materials and equipment. C. Other Requirements for Stored Items: Regardless of storage location, perform the following for stored materials and equipment for which payment is sought: 1. Clearly mark each stored container, crate, or item as follows: “Property of City of Bozeman” using permanent marking. Such marking shall not blemish or deface the finish of items that will be exposed to view after installation at the Site. PART 2 - PRODUCTS - (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 ATTACHMENTS A. The forms listed below, following this Specifications section’s “End of Section” designation, are part of this Specifications section: 1. List of Subcontractors and Suppliers form (two pages). END OF SECTION Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents PROGRESS PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01 29 76 - 4 LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS AND SUPPLIERS Owner: ________________________ Project Name: ___________________ Contractor: Date: _______________ Contract Designation: Indicate below complete information for each Subcontractor and Supplier known to Contractor, regardless of whether the firm has a direct contract with Contractor. Include all lower-tier Subcontractors and associated Suppliers. Copy and paste the paragraphs below as required to indicate all Subcontractors and Suppliers. SUBCONTRACTORS 1. Subcontractor Name: • Address: • Contact Person: • Telephone No.: • E-mail Address: • Work Under Specifications Section Nos.: • Brief Description of Work: • Current Subcontract Price: • Approximate Subcontract Start Date: • Approximate Subcontract End Date: 2. Subcontractor Name: • Address: • Contact Person: • Telephone No.: • E-mail Address: • Work Under Specifications Section Nos.: • Brief Description of Work: • Current Subcontract Price: • Approximate Subcontract Start Date: • Approximate Subcontract End Date: 3. Subcontractor Name: • Address: • Contact Person: • Telephone No.: • E-mail Address: • Work Under Specifications Section Nos.: • Brief Description of Work: • Current Subcontract Price: • Approximate Subcontract Start Date: • Approximate Subcontract End Date: Total of Subcontract Prices for all subcontracts equals approximately ______ percent of the Contract Price (Contractor to fill in blank monthly) Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents PROGRESS PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01 29 76 - 5 SUPPLIERS 1. Supplier Name: • Address: • Contact Person: • Telephone No.: • E-mail Address: • Furnishing Items Under Specifications Section Nos.: • Brief Description of Items: • Current Purchase Order Amount: • Approximate Purchase Order Date: • Approximate Purchase Order End Date: 2. Supplier Name: • Address: • Contact Person: • Telephone No.: • E-mail Address: • Furnishing Items Under Specifications Section Nos.: • Brief Description of Items: • Current Purchase Order Amount: • Approximate Purchase Order Date: • Approximate Purchase Order End Date: 3. Supplier Name: • Address: • Contact Person: • Telephone No.: • E-mail Address: • Furnishing Items Under Specifications Section Nos.: • Brief Description of Items: • Current Purchase Order Amount: • Approximate Purchase Order Date: • Approximate Purchase Order End Date: Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 This page intentionally left blank. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents PROJECT COORDINATION 01 31 13 - 1 SECTION 01 31 13 PROJECT COORDINATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. General requirements for: a. Project coordination when the Project is implemented using a single prime construction Contract. b. Coordination meetings. c. Coordination drawings and layout drawings. B. Scope: 1. Contractor shall coordinate the Work, whether performed by Contractor’s employees or by Subcontractors, Suppliers, or others for whom Contractor is responsible, to provide Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 2. Coordinate the Work with testing entities and inspectors (whether hired by Contractor, Owner, or others) employed on the Project, forces of Owner and facility manager (if other than Owner), and other contractors retained by Owner or facility manager, and other entities with which the Work needs to be coordinated. C. Related Requirements: 1. Include, but are not necessarily limited to, the following: a. Section 01 11 00 - Summary of Work. 1.2 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: 1. Coordination – General: a. In accordance with the General Conditions as may be modified by the Supplementary Conditions, and Section 01 11 00 - Summary of Work, Contractor shall coordinate the Work with, and cooperate with, other contractors, utility owners and their contractors, owners of transportation facilities and their contractors, Owner’s and facility manager’s workers at the Site, and other entities working at or adjacent to the Site. 2. Advise other contractors (if any) of schedule for the Work to allow other contractors sufficient time to perform their work that must be performed prior to the Work. Coordinate and communicate with other contractors and other entities when the Work must be performed prior to the work of others and make good-faith efforts to avoid delaying work of others. 3. Coordination, Inspection, and Observation to Ensure Quality: a. Contractor shall continuously inspect the Work throughout the Project to ensure that the Work complies with the Contract Documents. b. Inspect (including testing, where required or necessary) substrates and surfaces on which the Work will be constructed, applied, adhered, or attached, to ensure substrate and surface conditions are appropriate for providing Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 4. Contractor is not responsible for, or liable for, damage or loss unless damage or loss resulted from action, inaction, or negligence of Contractor, or Subcontractor(s), Supplier(s), or other entity for whom Contractor is responsible. This provision does not mitigate or reduce Contractor’s responsibility for security for the Work, in accordance with the Contract. B. Coordination Meetings: 1. Contractor’s Coordination Meetings: Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents PROJECT COORDINATION 01 31 13 - 2 a. Schedule, attend, chair, and actively participate in coordination meetings deemed appropriate by Contractor for purposes of coordinating the Work of Contractor’s employees, Subcontractors, Suppliers, and others for whom Contractor is responsible. b. Frequency, location, date, time, and duration of Contractor’s coordination meetings are at Contractor’s discretion. Record and distribute to attendees and other members of Contractor’s team a record of topics discussed, decisions made, and other relevant matters at Contractor’s coordination meetings. c. Engineer, Resident Project Representative (if any), Owner, and Owner’s Site Representative (if any) will not attend Contractor’s coordination meetings. 2. Coordination Meetings with Other Contractors: a. When Section 01 11 00 - Summary of Work, indicates that others, whether or not under Owner’s control, will be performing work at or adjacent to the Site, coordination meetings between the separate contractors may be necessary. When such meetings are deemed necessary by Owner, either Owner or Engineer will advise Contractor in writing of the location, date, time, duration, and frequency of such coordination meetings. b. Such coordination meetings, when held, are anticipated to be once per month or less- often, and held either at the Site or in reasonable proximity to the Site. During periods when increased coordination among the separate projects is necessary, such as when adjacent contractors are in close proximity to each other, the potential exists that more- frequent coordination meetings may be necessary, although such increased frequency is not anticipated to be for extended periods. c. Contractor’s project manager and site superintendent shall attend such coordination meetings required by Owner. d. Purpose of such coordination meetings will be to discuss scheduling and coordination of work by separate contractors and others as appropriate, sharing of space at the Site, and other coordination matters. e. Owner and others deemed appropriate by Owner will attend such coordination meetings. f. Owner or others for whom Owner is responsible will chair the meetings and prepare and distribute to participants a record of the topics discussed and decisions made at such meetings. C. Coordination Drawings and Layout Drawings: 1. Maintain sufficient, competent personnel; drafting implements; computer-aided drafting/design (CAD) or building information modeling (BIM) equipment, software, systems; and supplies at Contractor’s office and at the Site (as deemed appropriate by Contractor) for preparing layout drawings and coordination drawings. 2. With the Contract Documents and Shop Drawings, use coordination drawings and layout drawings for coordinating the Work of various trades. 3. Where such coordination drawings or layout drawings are to be prepared by Subcontractors such as structural-architectural, plumbing, HVAC, civil-site, process-mechanical, or other Subcontractors, ensure that each such Subcontractor maintains required personnel, implements, equipment, and systems at Subcontractor’s office and at the Site (as deemed appropriate by Contractor). PART 2 - PRODUCTS - (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION - (NOT USED) END OF SECTION Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE 01 32 16 - 1 SECTION 01 32 16 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Administrative and procedural requirements for Contractor’s construction Progress Schedules and related Submittals, including: a. Administrative requirements regarding progress Schedules. b. Qualifications of Progress Schedule preparer and related personnel. c. Submittals of Progress Schedules and associated schedule-related Submittals.. d. Initial Progress Schedules. e. Look-ahead schedules. f. Progress Schedule updates. g. Narrative reports. h. Time impact analyses. i. Recovery schedules. B. Scope: 1. Contractor shall prepare and submit to Engineer required Progress Schedules and related Submittals, as required by this Section and elsewhere in the Contract Documents. Maintain and update Progress Schedules and related Submittals throughout the Project. 2. Owner, facility manager (if other than Owner), Engineer, and others involved with the Project have the right to rely on accuracy of Contractor-prepared Progress Schedule. 3. Engineer’s review or acceptance of the Progress Schedule or related Submittals, and Engineer’s comments on and expressed opinions concerning activities in the Progress Schedule and related Submittals, and progress of the Work, does not control Contractor’s independent judgment concerning construction means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures, unless the associated means, method, technique, sequence, or procedure is required by the Contract Documents. Contractor is solely responsible for complying with the Contract Times. C. Related Requirements: Include, but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Section 01 11 00 - Summary of Work. 2. Section 01 26 00 - Contract Modification Procedures. 1.2 REFERENCES. A. Defined Terms and Terminology: 1. Defined terms, indicated with initial capital letters, are indicated in the General Conditions, as may be modified by the Supplementary Conditions. 2. Terminology: The following are not defined terms and are not indicated with initial capital letters but, when used in this Section, have the meaning indicated below, whether applied to the singular or plural thereof. a. “Activity” is an element of the Work that has the following specific characteristics: consumes time, requires resources, has a definable start and finish, is assignable, and is measurable. b. “Baseline Progress Schedule” means, in addition to the General Conditions’ definition of “Progress Schedule”, the version of the Progress Schedule (for the entire Project) initially accepted by the Engineer. In the event of subsequent modifications to the Project, Contractor and Engineer may mutually agree that a subsequent revision of the Progress Schedule constitutes a new baseline Progress Schedule that supersedes the prior baseline Progress Schedule. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE 01 32 16 - 2 c. “Constraint” means an imposed date on the Progress Schedule or an imposed time between activities. The Contract Times are constraints. d. “CPM Progress Schedule” means, in addition to the General Conditions’ definition of “Progress Schedule”, a computerized Progress Schedule in critical path method (CPM) format, for the entire Work, indicating interrelationships between elements of the Work; indicates sequences, dates, and durations for Work performed to date; indicates sequences, dates, and duration for incomplete Work yet to be performed; indicates constraints; and indicates the critical path for the Work. e. “Critical path” is the continuous chain of activities, from start to completion of the Work, with the longest duration for completion within the Contract Times. f. “Early finish” means the earliest date an activity can finish according to the assigned relationships among the activities in the Progress Schedule. g. “Early start” means the earliest possible date an activity can start according to the assigned relationships among activities in the Progress Schedule. h. “Float” means the time difference between the calculated duration of an activity chain on the Progress Schedule and the critical path. i. “Late finish” means the latest date an activity on the Progress Schedule can finish without extending the Contract Times. j. “Late start” means the latest date an activity on the Progress Schedule can start without extending the Contract Times. k. “Network diagram” means a time-scaled logic diagram showing the durations and relationships of the activities on the Progress Schedule. l. “Schedule date” (and similar terms, whether used in this Section or Project communications related to Progress Schedules) mean the “early start” and “early finish” date for the associated activity. “Late start” and “late finish” dates are for determining float and do not represent the schedule dates. m. “Total float” means the total number of days an activity (or chain of activities) on the Progress Schedule can be delayed without affecting the Contract Times. n. “Work areas” and “work system” means a logical breakdown of the Work elements or a group of activities which, when collectively assembled, are readily identifiable on the Project (for example: yard piping, a structure or building, a treatment process, or other logical grouping). 1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. General Provisions on Progress Schedules: 1. This Section augments requirements for the Progress Schedule, and Contractor’s control of the Work, indicated in the General Conditions, as may be augmented by the Supplementary Conditions.. B. Use of Float: 1. Float belongs to the Project and may be used by Contractor or Owner to accommodate changes in the Work, or to mitigate the effect of events delaying the Work or compliance with the Contract Times. 2. Changes or delays that influence activities that have float and do not extend the critical path do not justify changes in the Contract Times.. 3. Float Suppression: Pursuant to float sharing requirements of this Section, use of float suppression techniques in Progress Schedules, such as preferential sequencing logic, special lead/lag logic restraints, and extended activity durations are unacceptable. C. Factors Affecting the Progress Schedule: a. In preparing and updating the Progress Schedule, take into consideration: preparing and signing subcontracts and purchase orders, complying with Submittal requirements and Submittal review times, fabricating materials and equipment, source quality control (including required shop tests and inspections), shipping and deliveries, field quality control (including required field tests and inspections at the Site), Work by Subcontractors, coordination with others (such as other contractors including those Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE 01 32 16 - 3 indicated in Section 01 11 00 – Summary of Work, utility owners, and owners of transportation facilities), compliance with Laws and Regulations and permits, availability of construction equipment and machinery, abilities of workers, weather conditions, condition of the Site, seasonal restrictions, restrictions in operations at the Site and coordination with Owner’s (or facility manager’s) operations, training of facility operation and maintenance personnel, checkout, startup, adjusting and balancing, and other factors that have the potential to affect completion of the Work within the Contract Times. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Informational Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Qualifications Statements: a. Submit qualifications of Progress Schedule preparer, and other personnel that will assist Progress Schedule preparer in preparing and updating the Progress Schedule. b. Obtain Engineer’s acceptance of qualifications prior to starting preparation of preliminary Progress Schedule.. 2. Planned Work Schedule: a. Submit initial and updated (as necessary) planned work schedule, in accordance with this Section’s “Progress Schedule” Article. 3. Progress Schedule: a. Preliminary Progress Schedule with associated narrative report. b. Acceptable Progress Schedule (“baseline Progress Schedule”) with associated narrative report. 4. Look-Ahead Schedules: a. Submit 30-day look-ahead schedule at each construction progress meeting, in accordance with this Section’s “Look-Ahead Schedules” Article. 5. Progress Schedule Updates: a. Progress Schedule updates shall comply with requirements of this Section, and shall include updated Progress Schedule and narrative report. b. Submit updated Progress Schedule prior to each associated construction progress meeting. When a Progress Schedule remains unchanged from one construction progress meeting to the next, submit written statement expressly so stating. In addition to monthly Progress Schedule update Submittals.. 6. Time Impact Analyses: Submit in accordance with this Section. 7. Recovery Schedules: Submit in accordance with this Section. 1.5 INITIAL PROGRESS SCHEDULES A. Applicability of this Article: 1. This Article addresses the initial Progress Schedules and selected, related Submittals required at the outset of the Project’s construction phase, through Engineer’s acceptance of the Progress Schedule and its related Submittals. 2. Subsequent Progress Schedule Submittals, including Progress Schedule updates, recovery schedules, and other schedule-related Submittals, shall comply with software, type, organization, content, and similar requirements of this Article. B. Type and Organization of Progress Schedules: 1. Prepare Progress Schedules using Oracle Primavera P6 software, unless other scheduling software is acceptable to Engineer. 2. Sheet Size: 22 inches by 34 inches, unless otherwise accepted by Engineer. 3. Time Scale: Indicate first date of each work week. 4. Activity Assignments and Designations: a. Limit activities, where possible, excluding fabrication of materials and equipment, to durations not longer than 20 days. Activities shall be definable and measurable. For example, an activity described only as “Concrete” will likely be unacceptable. b. Assign to each activity an appropriate, unique numerical designation and description. c. Numerical designation shall incorporate the associated Specifications section number. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE 01 32 16 - 4 d. Activity description shall include sufficient detail to clearly communicate the intended activity. Descriptions shall include identifiers for physical locations of work area or work system, such as (where appropriate): column lines, stationing (for linear projects), and elevations. Indicate unique description for each activity. e. Group deliveries of materials and equipment into a separate sub-schedule that is part of the Progress Schedule. f. Group construction into work area sub-schedules (that are part of the Progress Schedule) by activity. g. Clearly indicate, as activities separate from installation, necessary and required curing periods. 5. Organization of Progress Schedules: a. Indicate interfaces and dependencies with preceding, concurrent, and follow-on activities, including those associated with the Work, other contractors at the Site, Owner and facility manager, Owner’s consultants (including Engineer), authorities having jurisdiction, and others as appropriate. Clearly indicate activities not under Contractor’s control. b. Progress Schedules shall be CPM Progress Schedules. c. Indicate on the separate Schedule of Submittals dates for submitting and reviewing Shop Drawings, product data Submittals, Samples, and other required Submittals. Coordinate Progress Schedule with the Schedule of Submittals. d. Clearly indicate the critical path on the Progress Schedule. C. Planned Work Schedule: 1. Within 30 days of the Effective Date of the Contract, indicate to Engineer the work days and hours proposed by Contractor. Also indicate planned non-work days, such as Contractor’s holidays, weekends, and the like. 2. Enforce Subcontractors’ and Suppliers’ (when at the Site) compliance with Contractor’s work schedule submitted to Engineer. 3. In the event of changes, submit to Engineer revised work schedule. Furnish such Submittal not less than three (3) days prior to changing Contractor’s work schedule, except in event of unanticipated emergency. D. Preliminary Progress Schedule: 1. Within ten (10) days after the Contract Times commence running, Contractor shall submit to Engineer the preliminary Progress Schedule covering the entire Project, with associated schedule-related Submittals required in this Section’s “Submittals” Article. 2. Submit preliminary Progress Schedule in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures. Also submit preliminary Progress Schedule in its native (executable) format generated by the scheduling software. 3. Engineer will perform timely review of the preliminary Progress Schedule. 4. Preliminary Progress Schedule shall comply with the Contract Documents relative to Progress Schedules. E. Initial Acceptance of Progress Schedule: 1. Not less than ten (10) days before submission of the first Application for Payment, a scheduling conference attended by Contractor, Progress Schedule preparer, Engineer, and others as appropriate will be held to review for acceptability to Engineer the preliminary Progress Schedule and associated schedule-related Submittals. Following the scheduling conference, Contractor shall have five (5) days to make corrections and adjustments and to complete and resubmit the Progress Schedule and associated schedule-related Submittals. Contractor will not be eligible for first progress payment until acceptable Progress Schedule and associated schedule-related Submittals are submitted to Engineer and are acceptable to Engineer. 2. Submit acceptable Progress Schedule, together with associated schedule-related Submittals in accordance with this Section’s “Submittals” Article and Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures. Also submit acceptable form of Progress Schedule in its native (executable) format generated by the scheduling software. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE 01 32 16 - 5 3. The Progress Schedule will be acceptable to Engineer if it provides an orderly progression of the Work to completion within the Contract Times, in accordance with the Contract Documents. 4. Initially-accepted Progress Schedule shall be identified as the baseline Progress Schedule. F. Planned Completion Different from the Contract Times: 1. If the Progress Schedule accepted by Engineer indicates completion date(s) different than the Contract Times, the Contract Times are not thereby changed. 2. Where the Progress Schedule accepted by Engineer indicates date(s) by which the Work, or designated portion thereof, will (a) achieve a Contractually stipulated Milestone, or (b) be substantially complete, or (c) all the Work will be complete and ready for final payment, earlier than the Contract Times (“early completion date”), Contractor shall, not less than 180 days prior to the associated Contract Time, prepare and submit a Change Proposal setting forth Contractor’s request to modify the Contract Times to an earlier date, which may or may not be the same as the scheduled early completion date. The Contract Times can be modified only via a Change Order. 3. In the event the Progress Schedule accepted by Engineer indicates one or more early completion dates and the Contract Times have not been reduced, Owner may, at Owner’s option, use available float without Owner being liable for Contractor’s costs to remain onsite, mobilized, and working (whether on the original scope of the Work or for modified Work) beyond the scheduled early completion date(s), as long as the Work will be completed within the Contract Times. 4. When the Work will not be completed within the Contract Times, the Contract Documents’ provisions concerning delays and changes in the Contract Times govern. 1.6 LOOK-AHEAD SCHEDULES A. Look-Ahead Schedules – General: 1. Look-ahead schedules are short-duration, often more-detailed, time-based schedules for the Work to be performed during the coming month or other required span of the look-ahead schedule. 2. Purpose of look-ahead schedules is to present , for Project stakeholders, including Owner, facility manager (if other than Owner), Engineer, Owner-hired testing and inspection entities, other contractors working at or adjacent to the Site, utility owners, transportation facility owners, and others as necessary, Contractor’s detailed, time-based plan for performing the Work during the period covered by the timespan of the look-ahead schedule. 3. This Section’s “Submittals” Article indicates the required span and frequency of look-ahead schedules.. 4. Each look-ahead schedule shall be fully coordinated and consistent with the current Progress Schedule update. 5. Submit look-ahead schedules concurrent with construction progress meetings. Also submit look-ahead schedules in native (executable) format. B. Organization and Content of Look-Ahead Schedules: 1. Look-ahead schedules shall be prepared from the current Progress Schedule update, of the same type, using the same software, content, and organization required in this Section for initial Progress Schedules. 2. Activity designations on look-ahead schedules shall incorporate the associated activity designations from the Progress Schedule. 3. Sheet Size: Format look-ahead schedules to sheet size of 11 inches by 17 inches, unless other sheet size is acceptable to Engineer. 4. Look-ahead schedules should generally be more-detailed than the Progress Schedule. Activity durations on look-ahead schedules should not exceed five (5) days. 1.7 PROGRESS SCHEDULE UPDATES A. Updates – General: Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE 01 32 16 - 6 1. Update the Progress Schedule not less-often than once per month. If during progress of the Work events develop that necessitate changes in the initially accepted Progress Schedule (baseline Progress Schedule), identify updated Progress Schedules sequentially as “Progress Schedule Revision “1”, “2”, “3”, and continuing in sequence as required. Number the Progress Schedule submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures. 2. Progress Schedule updates shall comply with this Section’s requirements for initial progress Schedule, relative to type, required software, organization, content, and related matters. 3. Starting with first Progress Schedule update, and continuing with each subsequent update, indicate on the Progress Schedule the actual start and finish dates of each activity that is completed or is currently underway. Inaccurate representation of completed or in-progress activities will be grounds for Engineer’s non-acceptance of the Progress Schedule update. 4. Contractor’s Progress Schedule update shall include a narrative report in accordance with this Section. Narrative report shall include description of: progress achieved to date and status of each work area of the Project, planned progress for the upcoming period, identification of the critical path, current or potential delays, Change Orders (pending and approved since the previous Progress Schedule update), and other problems associated with performing the Work in accordance with the baseline Progress Schedule and complying with the Contract Documents, including the Contract Times. Indicate in the narrative report delays that have occurred since the previous updated Progress Schedule. 5. The update to the Progress Schedule shall be based on retained logic. Progress override logic is not allowed. 6. Submit to Engineer updated Progress Schedule, together with associated schedule-related Submittals, in accordance with this Section’s “Submittals” Article and Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures. B. Monthly Schedule Meeting: 1. During the month, utilizing the previous month’s look-ahead schedule. Contractor shall record the percent complete, start and finish dates of each scheduled activity with the remaining duration for each activity started but not completed, including activities associated with procurement of materials and equipment. 2. On the same day each month, not less than one week prior to a progress meeting, Contractor, Progress Schedule preparer, Engineer (or Resident Project Representative), and others as appropriate shall meet at the Site to tour the Work to review and recommend updates to the Progress Schedule and progress information gathered by Contractor during the month. After discussion of Contractor’s current progress information and attendees’ review of the current status of the Work, Progress Schedule preparer shall appropriately and accurately update the Progress Schedule. 1.8 NARRATIVE REPORTS A. Narrative Reports – General: 1. Prepare and include with the preliminary Progress Schedule Submittal and each subsequent Progress Schedule Submittal, written narrative report describing the schedule-related constraints required by the Contract Documents and Contractor’s plan and schedule for complying with such requirements. Narrative reports shall also include required content indicated above in this Section’s “Progress Schedule Updates” Article. 2. Narrative report shall describe the methods of sequencing and operation, resources to be employed, time frames for the construction of each of the major work area or work system on the Project, and time frames for complying with the Contract Times and Contractor’s interim schedule milestones. 3. Prepare narrative reports on Contractor’s company letterhead and clearly indicate the Progress Schedule revision and date associated with the narrative report. 4. Narrative reports shall be written in English and typed. Use clear, concise, complete, and accurate language in narrative reports. Clearly indicate in narrative report the name of person preparing the narrative report and date of preparation 5. Narrative report Submittals do not constitute contractual Change Proposals, nor are they notice of a Claim. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE 01 32 16 - 7 6. Engineer’s receipt, review, and acceptance of narrative reports does not mitigate or reduce Contractor’s obligations to furnish contractually required notices. 1.9 TIME IMPACT ANALYSIS A. Time Impact Analyses – General: 1. Prepare and submit time impact analysis when one or more of the following occurs: (a) Change Proposal is prepared; (b) Work Change Directive is issued that will affect the Progress Schedule; or (c) when delays occur. 2. Time impact analysis shall illustrate influence of each Change Order, Work Change Directive, allowance authorization, or delay, as applicable, on Contractor’s ability to comply with the Contract Times and Progress Schedule constraints. 3. In performing time impact analysis, use Progress Schedule having revision date closest to and prior to the event giving rise to the delay or other change in the Work. 4. Indicate in time impact analysis activities on the Project’s critical path prior to the event giving rise to the delay or other Change in the Work; activities added, extended, or deleted as a result of the delay or change in the Work; and impact of such changes on the Project’s critical path activities. 5. Indicate in time impact analysis activities not within Contractor’s control. 6. Time impact analysis shall demonstrate the time impact, based on date the Change Order, Work Change Directive, or allowance authorization was given to Contractor or, as applicable, date the delay started to occur; the status of the Work at that time; and activity duration of affected activities. Activity duration used in time impact analysis shall be those included in most recent Progress Schedule update accepted by Engineer, closest to start of the delay or start of the Change Order, Work Change Directive, or allowance authorization as adjusted by mutual, written agreement of the parties and Engineer. 7. Timing of Time Impact Analysis: a. Submit time impact analysis with Change Proposal, in accordance with Section 01 26 00 - Contract Modification procedures. b. When time impact analysis is not part of a Change Proposal, submit each time impact analysis within fifteen (15) days after the following, as applicable: 1) Start of the delay. 2) After Contractor’s receipt of Work Change Directive. c. When Contractor does not submit time impact analysis for a specific change or delay, within the specified period for such submittal, such non-submittal will indicate extension of the Contract Times is not needed. B. Evaluation by Engineer and Acceptance: 1. Engineer’s evaluation of each time impact analysis comprised of complete information will be completed in timely manner (in accordance with the Contract Documents) after Engineer’s receipt. 2. When time impact analysis is incomplete or otherwise inappropriate, Engineer will furnish comments to Contractor. When time impact analysis is complete and apparently appropriate, its acceptability will be indicated by associated Contract modification or allowance authorization. 3. Changes in the Contract Times will be made only by Change Order. 4. When mutual agreement is reached between the parties on effect of the change or delay in the Project, incorporate into the next Progress Schedule update the associated fragnets illustrating the influence of changes and delays. 1.10 RECOVERY SCHEDULES A. Recovery Schedules – General: 1. When updated Progress Schedule indicates the ability to comply with the Contract Times falls fourteen (14) days or more behind schedule, and there is no excusable delay, Change Order, or Work Change Directive to support an extension of the Contract Times, Contractor shall prepare and submit to Engineer Contractor’s recovery schedule. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE 01 32 16 - 8 2. Recovery schedule is a Progress Schedule demonstrating Contractor’s plan to accelerate the Work to achieve compliance with the Contract Times. If achieving the Contract Times is not feasible, Contractor’s recovery schedule shall indicate Contractor’s plan to recover as much of the lost time as possible to complete the Work as close as possible to the Contract Times. 3. Submit recovery schedule within ten (10) days after submittal of updated Progress Schedule where need for recovery schedule is indicated. B. Recovery Schedule Report: 1. With each recovery schedule Submittal, include recovery schedule narrative report, manually prepared by Contractor, on Contractor’s company letterhead, indicating name of person responsible for preparing the recovery schedule and report. 2. Recovery schedule report shall verbally indicate Contractor’s plan for accelerating the Work and recovering lost time, and shall indicate the total number of days expected to be recovered by Contractor’s implementation of the recovery schedule. Clearly indicate how the intended actions will recover lost time. 3. Contractor is fully responsible for complying with the Contract Documents, including the contract Times. C. Implementation of Recovery Schedule: 1. At no additional cost to Owner, do one or more of the following, as appropriate: (a) furnish additional labor, (b) provide additional construction equipment and machinery, (c) provide suitable materials to accelerate the Work, (d) employ additional work shifts, (e) expedite procurement of materials and equipment to be incorporated into the Work or otherwise expedite delivery of such items, (f) provide other needed resources, and (g) provide other measures necessary to complete the Work within the Contract Times. 2. Upon acceptance of recovery schedule by Engineer, incorporate recovery schedule into the next Progress Schedule update. D. Contractor’s Failure to Recover Lost Time: 1. Contractor’s refusal, failure, or neglect to take appropriate measures to recover lost time, or to submit a recovery schedule, shall constitute reasonable evidence that Contractor is not prosecuting the Work, or designated part of the Work, with diligence to ensure completion in accordance with the Contract Times. Such action or inaction by Contractor shall constitute sufficient basis for Owner to exercise remedies available to Owner under the Contract Documents. PART 2 - PRODUCTS - (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION - (NOT USED) END OF SECTION Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00 - 1 SECTION 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Definition of various types of Submittals. 2. Coordination requirements for Submittals. 3. General provisions concerning Submittals. 4. Schedule of Submittals. 5. Contractor’s preparation of Submittals, including: a. Numbering. b. Marking. c. Organization and content. d. Proposed “or-equals”, substitutes, and deviations from Contract requirements. e. Electronic Documents Submittals. f. Contractor’s review and approval of each Submittal. g. Resubmittals. 6. Contractor’s transmittal of Submittals, including transmittal letters, transmittal and delivery method, and delivery of Samples, Closeout Submittals, and Maintenance Materials Submittals. 7. Engineer’s review, including: a. Timing. b. Meaning of Engineer’s Submittal action code(disposition) assigned. c. Delivery of Engineer’s responses on Submittals. B. Scope: 1. Contractor shall provide all labor, materials, equipment, tools, services, incidentals, and other effort necessary to furnish Shop Drawings, product data Submittals, Samples, and other Submittals in accordance with the Contract Documents. 2. This Section’s Article, “General Provisions Concerning Submittals” includes a summary of the Contract Documents’ locations of Submittals requirements. 3. Shop Drawings, product data Submittals, Samples, and other Submittals, whether or not approved or accepted by Engineer, are not Contract Documents. Engineer’s approval or acceptance, as applicable, of a Submittal does not alter or modify the Contract Documents. 4. Engineer and Owner have the right to rely on Contractor’s representations and certifications made regarding each Submittal. C. Related Requirements: Include but are not limited to: 1. Section 01 25 00 - Substitution Procedures. 2. Section 01 32 16 - Construction Progress Schedule. 1.2 REFERENCES A. References – Introduction: 1. This Article presents definitions and terminology used in this Section and throughout the Contract Documents. 2. Applicability of the Term “Submittals”: Where reference is made to Shop Drawings, product data Submittals, Samples, or other Submittals in this Section and elsewhere in the Contract Documents, the term “Submittals”, as defined in the Contract Documents, is intended. The foregoing applies regardless of whether such term is indicated with an initial capital letter, unless context of the subject provision clearly indicates otherwise. 3. Types of Submittals: Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00 - 2 a. Submittal types are classified as follows: (1) Action Submittals, (2) Informational Submittals, (3) Closeout Submittals, and (4) Maintenance Materials Submittals. b. Type of each required Submittal is indicated in the associated Specifications section. When Submittal type is not clearly indicated in the associated Specifications section, Submittal will be classified as indicated in this Article. Submit request for interpretation when Contractor is uncertain of required Submittal type. B. Action Submittals: 1. Action Submittals require an explicit, written approval or other appropriate action by Engineer (or other entity to whom the Submittal is required to be furnished, in accordance with the Contract Documents) before Contractor may release the associated item(s) for raw materials procurement, fabrication, production, and shipping. 2. Unless otherwise indicated in the Contract Documents, Action Submittals include the following: a. Shop Drawings. b. Product data. c. Samples. d. Testing plans for quality control activities required by the Contract Documents. e. Delegated Designs: Delegated design professional’s “instruments of service” Submittals required by the Contract Documents. 3. General Conditions’ requirements for Shop Drawings and Samples hereby apply to all Action Submittals. C. Informational Submittals: 1. Informational Submittals are so indicated in the Contract Documents. Unless otherwise indicated, Informational Submittals include certifications, evaluation reports, results of source quality control activities, results of field quality control activities, Supplier instructions, reports of Suppliers’ visits to the Site, sustainable design Submittals (that are not Closeout Submittals), delegated design Submittals that are not “instruments of service” Submittals, qualifications statements, and others. 2. Informational Submittals, when submitted in accordance with the Contract and indicating full compliance with the Contract Documents, do not require explicit response from Engineer (or other entity to whom the Submittal is to be delivered); Engineer’s (or other entity’s) acceptance thereof will be indicated in the Engineer’s Submittals log. Copy of Engineer’s Submittals log is available to Contractor upon Contractor’s written request. 3. When Informational Submittal does not indicate full compliance with the Contract Documents, Engineer (or other entity to which Submittal is to be delivered) will indicate the non-compliance in a written response to Contractor. D. Closeout Submittals: 1. Closeout Submittals are so indicated in the Contract Documents and are, in general, required before the associated Work is completed, unless earlier submittal is required by the Contract Documents. 2. Unless indicated otherwise in the Contract Documents, Closeout Submittals include maintenance contracts, operation and maintenance data, warranties, bonds (other than performance and payment bonds required prior to the start of construction), record documents, sustainable design closeout Submittals, software, keys, and others. 3. Closeout Submittals are processed in the same manner as described above for Informational Submittals. E. Maintenance Materials Submittals: 1. Maintenance materials include spare parts, extra materials, tools, and similar items required to be furnished in accordance with the Contract Documents. 2. Furnish required physical maintenance materials, delivered to Owner or facility manager (if other than Owner), as applicable, at the location(s) indicated in the Contract Documents, for the corresponding required Maintenance Materials Submittals. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00 - 3 3. Maintenance Materials Submittals are documentation of delivery to Owner’s or facility manager, and their acceptance of, required physical maintenance materials. 4. Maintenance Materials Submittals are processed in the same manner as described above for Informational Submittals. F. Additional Terms: 1. The following terms have the meanings indicated below, regardless of whether such terms are indicated using initial capital letters, and apply to singular and plural of each: a. “Product data” means illustrations, standard schedules, performance charts, Supplier’s published instructions, brochures, diagrams, and other information furnished by Contractor to illustrate or describe materials or equipment for some portion of the Work. In general, product data are manufacturers’ pre-published information on the items proposed to be incorporated into the Work. Product data includes manufacturer’s catalog pages and similar documents with contractor-made markings and indications of proposed products and proposed options. b. The term “Shop Drawings”, defined in the General Conditions, is supplemented by the following: Shop Drawings include: (1) fabrication and assembly drawings, usually having a title block, or (2) schedules, prepared specifically for the Project. Here, “schedules” means a Project-specific summary of systems and components, such as a schedule of HVAC equipment, schedules of doors and door hardware, or windows, or a schedule of paint systems by room and surface, or other, similar Project information in a tabular format. In contrast, construction Progress Schedules, Schedules of Submittals, and Schedules of Values are not Shop Drawings. Unless expressly required otherwise in the Contract Documents, Shop Drawings shall not be prepared from, or on, the Drawings or any other component of the Contract Documents. 1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: 1. Furnish Submittals well in advance of need for the associated material or equipment, or procedure (as applicable), in the Work and with ample time necessary for delivery of materials and equipment and to implement procedures following Engineer’s approval or acceptance of the associated Submittal. 2. Work covered by a Submittal will not be included in payments by Owner until approval or acceptance (as applicable) of related Submittals has been obtained in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1.4 GENERAL PROVISIONS CONCERNING SUBMITTALS A. Locations of Requirements: 1. Requirements concerning Submittals are generally located as follows: a. General Conditions, as may be modified by the Supplementary Conditions, applicable to the Project. b. This Section, which presents general requirements for Submittals applicable to the Project. c. Other Division 01 Specifications that include general requirements for certain types of Submittals, such as Section 01 78 23 - Operation and Maintenance Data, etc. d. The “Submittals” Article of the various Specifications sections, which indicates the required Submittals for the associated Work. Furnish all Submittals required by the Contract Documents regardless of whether explicitly indicated in the associated Specifications’ “Submittals” Article. B. This Section augments and supplements the requirements of the General Conditions, as may be modified by the Supplementary Conditions, relative to Submittals. 1.5 SCHEDULE OF SUBMITTALS A. Informational Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Schedule of Submittals: Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00 - 4 a. Timing: 1) Furnish Schedule of Submittals within time frames indicated in the General Conditions, as may be modified by the Supplementary Conditions. 2) Submit updated Schedule of Submittals with each submittal of the updated Progress Schedule. b. Content: In accordance with the General Conditions, as may be modified by the Supplementary Conditions, and this Section. Requirements for content of preliminary Schedule of Submittals and subsequent Submittals of the Schedule of Submittals are identical. Identify on Schedule of Submittals all Submittals required in the Contract Documents. Updates of Schedule of Submittals shall show scheduled dates and actual dates for completed tasks. Clearly indicate Submittals that are on the Project’s critical path. Indicate the following for each Submittal: 1) Date by which Submittal will be received by Engineer. 2) Whether Submittal will be for a substitution or “or-equal”. 3) Date by which Engineer’s response is required. Allow not less than 14 days for Engineer’s review, starting on Engineer’s actual receipt of each Submittal. Allow increased time for large or complex Submittals. 4) For Submittals for materials or equipment, date by which material or equipment must be at the Site to avoid delaying the Work and to avoid delaying the work of others (if any). c. Prepare Schedule of Submittals using same software, and in same format, specified for Progress Schedules in Section 01 32 16 - Construction Progress Schedule. d. Coordinate Schedule of Submittals with the Progress Schedule. e. Schedule of Submittals that is not compatible with the Progress Schedule, or that does not indicate Submittals on the Project’s critical path, or that places extraordinary demands on Engineer for time and resources, is unacceptable. Do not include Submittals not required by the Contract Documents. f. In preparing Schedule of Submittals: 1) Considering the nature and complexity of each Submittal, allow sufficient time for reviews and revisions. 2) Allow reasonable time for: Engineer’s review and processing of Submittals, for Submittals to be revised and resubmitted, and for returning Submittals to Contractor. 3) Identify and accordingly schedule Submittals that are expected to have long anticipated review times. 1.6 PREPARATION OF SUBMITTALS A. Prior to Submittal Preparation: 1. The General Conditions, as may be modified by the Supplementary Conditions, address Contractor’s responsibility for submitting for Owner’s acceptance identification of Subcontractors and Suppliers. Obtain Owner’s acceptance before entering into subcontracts and purchase orders for the Work. 2. Comply with the Contract Documents relative to terms and conditions of subcontracts and purchase orders for the Work. 3. Contractor’s responsibilities for the following are set forth in the General Conditions, as may be modified by the Supplementary Conditions, and as may be augmented elsewhere in the Contract Documents: a. Obtaining field measurements and dimensions. b. Determining and verifying required quantities. c. Verifying compatibility of materials. d. Apportioning the Work among Subcontractors, Suppliers, and Contractor. e. Reconciling required materials, equipment, and other Contract requirements with Contractor’s means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction and with Contractor’s safety and protection programs and precautions incident thereto. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00 - 5 f. Reviewing applicable provisions of the Contract Documents and obtaining from Engineer necessary interpretations or clarifications. B. Submittal Identification: 1. Submittal Number: Shall be a unique number assigned to each individual Submittal. Assign Submittal numbers as follows: a. First part of Submittal number shall be the applicable Specifications section number, followed by a hyphen. b. Second part of Submittal number shall be a three-digit number (sequentially numbered from 001 through 999) assigned to each separate Submittal furnished under the associated Specifications section. c. Example: Submittal number for the third Submittal furnished for Section 10 14 00 - Signage, would be “10 14 00-003”. 2. Review Cycle Number: Each resubmittal of a given Submittal shall be indicated with a lower-case letter designation: a. No letter designation for initial (first) submittal of the Submittal number. b. “a” shall indicate first resubmittal of the Submittal number. c. “b” shall indicate second resubmittal of the Submittal number. 3. Examples: Example Description Submittal Identification Submittal No. Review Cycle Initial (first) review cycle of the third Submittal furnished under Section 10 14 00 – Signage 10 14 00-003- Second review cycle (first resubmittal) of third Submittal furnished under Section 10 14 00 - Signage 10 14 00-003- a C. Marking of Submittals: 1. Mark on each page of each Submittal and each individual component submitted with Submittal number and applicable Specifications paragraph. 2. Mark each page of each Submittal with the Submittal page number. 3. Each Shop Drawing sheet shall have title block with complete identifying information satisfactory to Engineer. 4. For product data Submittals, operation and maintenance data Submittals, and other Submittals: a. Mark options to be furnished using broad, dark arrows or “clouds” clearly drawn around the relevant text or diagrams. Do not use highlighter for indicating options and features. b. Indicate options and features not furnished using clear strikeouts through the text or diagrams. D. Submittal Organization and Content – General: 1. Page or Sheet Size; Furnish Submittals with one or more of the following page or sheet sizes: (a) 8.5 inches by 11 inches; (b) 11 inches by 17 inches; (c) 22 inches by 34 inches; unless another sheet size is acceptable to Engineer. 2. Language: All parts of each Submittal shall be in the English language. 3. Units of Measurement: Clearly indicate units of measurement on Shop Drawings, product data Submittals, record documentation, and operation and maintenance data Submittals. 4. Organize each Submittal logically to facilitate ease of understanding and review. 5. To the extent practicable, arrange Submittal information in same order as requirements are written in the associated Specifications section. 6. Each Submittal shall cover Work under only one Specifications section. 7. To the extent practicable, package together Submittals for the same Specifications section. Do not furnish required information piecemeal. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00 - 6 8. For large or complex Submittals, include a title page and table of contents. 9. Include appropriately labeled fly sheets to separate distinct parts of each Submittal. 10. Ensure legibility of all pages in each Submittal. 11. Minimize extraneous and unnecessary information in Submittals for materials and equipment. Do not submit information not relevant to the Submittal and associated requirements of the Contract Documents. 12. Contractor’s, Subcontractor’s, and Supplier’s written comments on Shop Drawings and product data diagrams shall be colored green 13. Do not submit under Specifications sections with title that includes either, “Common Work Results for” or, “Basic Requirements”, unless the subject material or equipment is specified, in total, in a Specifications section with the words, “Common Work Results for” or, “Basic Requirements” in its title. E. Electronic Documents Submittals: 1. Format: Electronic Documents Submittals shall be “portable document format” (.PDF) files unless expressly required otherwise by applicable provisions of the Contract Documents. 2. Electronic Documents Submittals must be electronically searchable when delivered to Engineer and other recipients. 3. Organization and Content: a. Each Electronic Documents Submittal shall be one file; do not divide individual Submittals into multiple Electronic Documents files each unless file size will exceed 20 MB. b. When Submittal is large or contains multiple parts, furnish PDF file with suitably titled electronic bookmark for each section of the Submittal. c. Content shall be identical to paper or other original Submittal. First page of each Electronic Documents Submittal shall be transmittal letter required in this’s Paragraph 1.7.A. 4. Quality and Legibility: Electronic Documents Submittal files shall be made from the original and shall be clear and legible. Markings applied by Contractor, Subcontractor, or Supplier shall be clear, distinct, and readily apparent. Electronic Documents file shall be full size of original documents. Properly orient all pages for convenient reading on a computer display; do not furnish pages sideways or upside-down.. 5. Provide sufficient internet service, software, and systems for Contractor with capability appropriate for transmitting the necessary files and receiving responses from Engineer or other entities. 6. Check not less than once per day for distribution of Electronic Documents Submittals responses and related Electronic Documents correspondence. F. Proposed “Or-Equals”, Substitutes, and Deviations from Contract Requirements: 1. “Or-Equals”: a. The meaning of “or-equal” is addressed in Section 01 25 00 - Substitution Procedures. b. Contractor’s request for approval of “or-equals” is to be presented via the associated Action Submittal(s) and shall include the information required in provisions governing “or-equals”. c. Expressly and prominently indicate, “Proposed Or-Equal” on the associated Action Submittals when Submittal is for an “or-equal”. d. Submittals requesting approval of an “or-equal” but not accompanied by the required, supplemental information will be deemed incomplete by Engineer and returned to Contractor without approval. 2. Substitutes: a. The meaning of “substitute” is indicated in Section 01 25 00 - Substitution Procedures. b. Requests for approval of substitutes shall comply with Section 01 25 00 - Substitution procedures, and other relevant provisions of the Contract Documents. c. Contractor’s request for approval of substitute is separate from the associated Action Submittal(s). Action Submittals that request approval of a substitute when a separate, formal substitution request (furnished in accordance with the Contract Documents) was Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00 - 7 not previously furnished to Engineer, followed by formal approval in via an appropriate contract modification (typically either a Field Order or Change Order), will be deemed by Engineer as non-compliant with the Contract Documents and will be returned to Contractor without approval. d. Contractor is solely responsible for delays incurred due to substitutes proposed via Submittals that have not been previously duly approved via an appropriate Contract modification. e. Action Submittals for items or procedures approved via an appropriate Contract modification shall include a copy of the Contract modification in which the substitute was approved. 3. Submittals with Proposed Deviations from Contract Requirements: a. When Submittal proposes deviations from requirements of the Contract Documents, the Submittal shall clearly and expressly indicate each proposed deviation. b. Also comply with this Section’s provision, in the Article below, on Contractor’s transmittal letter expressly alerting Engineer to the proposed deviations. c. Comply with requirements of the Contract regarding substitutes and “or-equals”. d. When deviation is proposed, also appropriately revise text of Contractor’s approval, from that required below in this Article. e. When Submittal includes deviations from Contract requirements and either the Submittal itself, Contractor’s transmittal letter, or both, do not comply fully with Contract requirements for indicating deviations in Submittals and giving separate written notice thereof, Engineer’s approval of such deviations will be deemed null and void unless Engineer’s written response to the Submittal has expressly acknowledged such deviation and indicated Engineer’s approval thereof. f. Contractor is solely responsible for delays and costs incurred due to any and all Submittals with deviations from Contract requirements that were not properly, expressly indicated and approved in accordance with the Contract Documents. Deviations not duly approved in accordance with the Contract Documents may be deemed defective Work. Contractor is solely responsible for remedying defective Work and all associated cost and time impacts. G. Contractor’s Approval of Submittals: 1. Contractor’s Review: Before transmitting Submittals to Engineer, review each Submittal to: a. Ensure proper coordination of the Work. b. Determine that each Submittal is in accordance with Contractor’s desires. c. Verify that Submittal contains sufficient information for Engineer to determine compliance with the Contract Documents. 2. Incomplete or inadequate Submittals will be returned without detailed review by Engineer. 3. Contractor’s Approval Stamp and Signature: a. Each Submittal furnished shall bear Contractor’s approval stamp (or facsimile thereof) and signature, as evidence that the Submittal has been reviewed and approved by Contractor and verified as complete and in accordance with the Contract Documents. b. Submittals without Contractor’s approval and signature (as required by the contract Documents) will be returned to Contractor without further review by Engineer and deemed incomplete. c. Engineer reserves the right to reject as incomplete Submittals where Contractor’s approval signature appears computer-generated or reproduced without the active involvement or review of Contractor’s signatory. d. Contractor’s approval shall contain the following text: Project Name: Contractor’s Name: Contract Designation: Date: ------------------ Reference --------------------- Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00 - 8 Submittal Title: Specifications: Section: Page No.: Paragraph No.: Drawing No.: _________ of _______ Location of Work: Submittal No. and Review Cycle: Coordinated by Contractor with Submittal Nos.: I hereby certify that Contractor has satisfied Contractor’s obligations under the Contract Documents relative to Contractor’s review and approval of this Submittal, including: (1) reviewed and coordinated the Submittal with other Submittals and with the requirements of the Work and the Contract Documents; (2) determined and verified all: field measurements, quantities, dimensions, specified performance and design criteria, installation requirements, materials, catalog numbers, and similar information with respect to the Submittal, (b) the suitability of all materials and equipment offered with respect to the indicated application, fabrication, shipping, handling, storage, assembly, and installation pertaining to the performance of the Work, and (c) all information relative to Contractor’s responsibilities for means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction, and safety precautions and programs incident thereto; (3) confirmed the Submittal is complete with respect to all related data included in the Submittal; and (4) clearly and expressly indicated all proposed deviations (if any) from the requirements of the Contract Documents both in the Submittal itself and in the Submittal’s transmittal letter. Accordingly, this Submittal is hereby approved for Contractor by: Approved for Contractor by: H. Resubmittals: 1. Refer to the General Conditions, as may be modified by the Supplementary Conditions, for requirements regarding resubmitting required Submittals. 2. In addition to limits on the quantity of resubmittals, as indicated in the General Conditions, Contractor shall furnish Submittals with such completeness, accuracy, and compliance with the Contract Documents to obtain Engineer’s approval or acceptance, as applicable, without the total quantity of Submittals furnished, including all initial Submittals and all resubmittals, exceeding 125% of the number of Submittals indicated on the Schedule of Submittals initially accepted by Engineer, plus a corresponding percentage of the quantity of Submittals required by Change Orders, Work Change Directives, and Field Orders. 3. Do not increase the scope of prior review cycle of the same Submittal. 4. Indicate on Contractor’s transmittal letter how Submittal was revised from previous review cycle of the Submittal and where the revisions or corrections are located within the resubmittal. 5. Expressly address and provide response for all components previously transmitted by Engineer on prior review cycles of the subject Submittal. Where resubmittal lacks complete response to Engineer’s prior comments, Engineer may deem such resubmittal as incomplete and return it to Contractor without further review. 6. Where part of the Submittal’s prior review cycle was expressly approved or accepted, as applicable, by Engineer, do not include such items in subsequent resubmittals. 7. Indicate, “Not Yet Resolved—To Be Resubmitted at a Later Date” for any items not approved in prior review cycle of the Submittal for items not included in the subject resubmittal. Engineer reserves the right to deem incomplete Submittals “Not Approved” or “Revise and Resubmit”. Furnishing incomplete or partial resubmittals is discouraged. 8. Resubmittal of Previously Approved or Accepted Items: Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00 - 9 a. Do not resubmit on a given item previously approved or accepted, as applicable, by Engineer, without Engineer’s advance consent. Consent will be given for bona-fide unavailability of a previously approved or accepted item where Contractor has acted in good faith in a timely manner with due diligence to comply with the Contract Times. b. Destroy or conspicuously mark “SUPERSEDED” on all documents having previously received Engineer’s approval or acceptance, as applicable, that are superseded by a resubmittal. 1.7 TRANSMITTAL OF SUBMITTALS BY CONTRACTOR A. Contractor’s Transmittal Letters for Submittals: 1. Furnish separate transmittal letter with each Submittal. Use transmittal form attached to this Section (as Exhibit 01 33 00-A) unless other transmittal form is acceptable to Engineer at the start of the Project’s construction. 2. When transmittal form other than this Section’s Exhibit 01 33 00-A is acceptable to Engineer, at beginning of each transmittal, include a reference heading indicating: Contractor’s name, Owner’s name, Project designation, Contract designation, transmittal number, and Submittal number (with review cycle). 3. “Or-Equals”: When the Submittal is proposing an “or-equal”, expressly so indicate on transmittal form submitted by Contractor. 4. Proposed Deviations from Contract Requirements: When the Submittal proposes deviations from requirements of the Contract Documents, transmittal letter shall specifically describe each proposed deviation. B. Submittal Delivery Method: 1. This provision presents general requirements for delivery or all Submittals unless otherwise required elsewhere in the Contract Documents. 2. Furnish Submittals as Electronic Documents. 3. Furnish Submittals to Engineer and each other entity indicated in the Contract Documents as receiving a Submittal directly from Contractor. 4. Address Submittals to Engineer as follows: HDR, 2150 Analysis Drive, Suite A, Bozeman, MT 59718; to attention of Jarrett Moran, jarrett.moran@hdrinc.com. C. Closeout Submittals –Transmittal and Delivery: 1. Furnish the following Closeout Submittals in accordance with general requirements for transmitting and delivering Submittals, indicated above in this Article: maintenance contracts; warranty bonds (when required) and other bonds required for specific materials, equipment, or systems; warranty documentation; and sustainable design closeout documentation (when required). On documents such as maintenance contracts and bonds, include on each document furnished original (“wet”) signature of entity issuing said document. When original “wet” signatures are required, furnish such Submittals to Engineer both on original paper and as Electronic Documents, and to other entities furnish as indicated above in this Article for general requirements for Submittals. 2. Operations and Maintenance Manuals: Submit in accordance with Section 01 78 23 - Operation and Maintenance Data. 3. Record Documents: Submit in accordance with Section 01 78 39 - Project Record Documents. 4. Software: In addition to software installed on Owner’s computer system, furnish number of copies of software required in the Specifications section where the software is specified. Preferred means of transmittal is via secure file transfer directly to Owner (or facility manager, if other than Owner) via secure file transfer method mutually acceptable to software developer and the receiving entity. When secure file transfer is used, submit to Engineer documentation signed or electronically acknowledged by Owner that the files were received. Where such software is available only on the software developer's portable media, furnish such software on software developer’s original, portable media, sealed in software developer’s original, unopened, clearly labeled packaging. D. Maintenance Materials Submittals – Delivery: Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00 - 10 1. Deliver physical maintenance materials required by the Contract Documents in accordance with applicable provisions of the Contract, including Section 01 78 43 - Spare Parts and Extra Materials. 2. Submit documentation of delivery of (Maintenance Materials Submittals) in accordance with general requirements for Submittals as indicated in this Section. 1.8 ENGINEER’S REVIEW OF SUBMITTALS A. This Article applies to review of all Submittals by Engineer or other entity to whom the Contract Documents require such Submittal be furnished. B. Timing: 1. Timing of Engineer’s review will be in accordance with the Schedule of Submittals accepted by Engineer. 2. When Submittal is delivered to Engineer on a date other than that indicated in the Schedule of Submittals accepted by Engineer, duration of Engineer’s review may differ from that indicated in the Schedule of Submittals, based on Engineer’s availability and resources. Engineer will make good-faith effort to furnish responses to Submittals in a timely manner. 3. Contractor is responsible for communicating to Engineer when a Submittal is on the Project’s critical path. C. Engineer’s Review: 1. Markings: a. Comments or responses marked directly on Submittal by Engineer (or other entity reviewing Submittal) will be colored red. b. Engineer may also present narrative comments on a comment sheet inserted by Engineer into the Submittal or included on Engineer’s transmittal letter for the Submittal. Such comments will be in black text. When a separate comment sheet is included by Engineer, such sheet will be clearly identified as Engineer’s comments. 2. Engineer’s review and disposition assigned to Submittal are subject to the following: a. Submittal disposition is subject to: Engineer’s comments on the Submittal; disclaimer language on Engineer’s Submittal transmittal letter; Engineer’s Submittal review stamp (when used) or equivalent (when used); and this provision. b. Engineer’s review is only for general compatibility with the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated by the Contract Documents, and for general compliance with the information given in the Contract Documents. c. Contractor shall be solely responsible for complying with the Contract Documents, as well as with Supplier instructions consistent with the Contract Documents, Owner’s directions, and Laws and Regulations. Contractor is solely responsible for obtaining, correlating, confirming, and correcting dimensions at the Site; quantities; information and choices pertaining to fabrication processes; means, methods, sequences, procedures, and techniques of construction; safety precautions and programs incident thereto; and for coordinating the work of all trades. d. Engineer is not responsible for resubmittals not yet furnished by Contractor or tracking Contractor’s progress on resubmittals. 3. Documents not required by the Contract Documents but nonetheless furnished by Contractor as submittals will not be reviewed by Engineer. D. Meaning of Submittal disposition Assigned by Engineer: 1. Action Submittals: a. “Approved” (Action Code A): Upon return of Submittal marked “Approved”, order, ship, or fabricate materials and equipment included in the Submittal (pending Engineer’s approval or acceptance, as applicable, of production-related qualifications statements and certifications, and required source quality control Submittals) or otherwise proceed with the Work in accordance with the Submittal and the Contract Documents. b. “Approved as Noted” (Action Code B): Upon return of Submittal marked “Approved as Noted”, order, ship, or fabricate materials and equipment included in the Submittal Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00 - 11 (pending Engineer’s approval or acceptance, as applicable, of production-related qualifications statements and certifications, and required source quality control Submittals) or otherwise proceed with the Work in accordance with the Submittal and the Contract Documents, and in accordance with Engineer’s comments and notes indicated in Engineer’s Submittal response c. “Revise and Resubmit” (Action Code C): Upon return of Submittal marked “Revise and Resubmit”, make the revisions necessary and indicated and resubmit to Engineer for approval. d. “Not Approved” (Action Code D): This disposition indicates material or equipment that cannot be approved. “Not Approved” disposition may also be applied to Submittals that are incomplete. Upon return of Submittal marked “Not Approved”, repeat initial submittal procedure utilizing approvable material or equipment, with a complete Submittal clearly indicating all information required. 2. Informational, Closeout, and Maintenance Materials Submittals: a. “Accepted” (Action Code F): Information included in Submittal complies with the applicable requirements of the Contract Documents and is acceptable. No further action by Contractor is required relative to such Submittal, and the Work covered by the Submittal may proceed. Materials and equipment with Submittals with this disposition may be shipped or operated, as applicable. Submittals assigned “Accepted” by Engineer (or other reviewing entity) does not indicate Engineer’s acceptance of the associated Work, which is indicated only as set forth in the General Conditions and Section 01 77 19 – Closeout Requirements. b. “Not Acceptable” (Action Code G): Submittal, or part thereof, does not indicate full compliance with applicable requirements of the Contract Documents and is not acceptable. Provide labor, materials, equipment, services, and incidentals necessary to properly and accurately revise Submittal and resubmit to indicate acceptability and compliance with the Contract Documents 3. Other: a. “Submittal Not Reviewed” (Action Code E): Documents so marked by Engineer are not required by the Contract Documents. Submittals may also be marked with this disposition when information in the document was previously reviewed and approved or accepted by Engineer, as applicable. E. Distribution of Engineer’s Responses: 1. Unless otherwise indicated in the Contract Documents, Engineer will distribute written responses (as Electronic Documents) to Submittals to the following: a. Contractor. b. Owner. c. Engineer’s file. 2. Engineer’s acceptance of Informational Submittals, Closeout Submittals, and Maintenance Materials Submittals will be recorded in Engineer’s Submittal log. Copy of Engineer’s Submittals log is available from Engineer upon written request of Owner or Contractor. If no such request is received by Engineer, Engineer will distribute copy of Engineer’s Submittals log once per month (when Submittals have been received or acted on by Engineer). Engineer may distribute copy of Engineer’s Submittals log as an Electronic Document or as handout at construction progress meetings. 3. Paper copies of Engineer’s Submittal responses will not be distributed unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents or otherwise agreed to by Engineer. 4. Contractor is responsible for forwarding Engineer’s Submittals responses to Subcontractors and Suppliers as appropriate, and for coordinating the Work of all trades. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00 - 12 PART 2 - PRODUCTS - (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 ATTACHMENTS A. The documents listed below, following this Section’s “End of Section” designation, are part of this Specifications Section: 1. “Exhibit 01 33 00-A – Transmittal for Submittal No. ##” (one page). END OF SECTION Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00 - 13 Exhibit 01 33 00-A Transmittal for Submittal No. _____-_____ Project Name: Date Received: Project Owner: Checked By: Contractor: HDR Engineering, Inc. Log Page: Address: Address: HDR No.: Spec Section: Drawing/Detail No.: Attn (Contractor): Attn (HDR): Review Cycle Date Transmitted by Contractor: Date of Engineer’s Response Transmittal: Item No. Submittal No. Description (indicate number of copies where paper copies of physical Samples are returned) Manufacturer Supplier Dwg or Data No. Engineer’s Disposition (Action Code) * 1 2 3 4 Contractor’s Remarks (insert text): Engineer’s Remarks (insert text): : * Legend for Action Code indicated above, assigned by Engineer: Action Submittal: A – Approved B – Approved as Noted C – Revise and Resubmit D – Not Approved E – Submittal Not Reviewed Informational, Closeout, or Maintenance Materials Submittal: F – Accepted (this code normally recorded in Engineer’s Submittals log). G – Not Acceptable Engineer’s Disclaimer (for Submittals that do not involve delegated design): a. Submittal action code is subject to: Engineer’s comments on the Submittal, comment sheets (if any), and this transmittal letter; disclaimer language on Engineer’s Submittal review stamp or equivalent; and Specifications Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures. b. Engineer’s review is only for general compatibility with the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated by the Contract Documents, and for general compliance with the information given in the Contract Documents. c. Contractor shall be solely responsible for complying with the Contract Documents, as well as with Supplier instructions consistent with the Contract Documents, Owner’s directions, and Laws and Regulations. Contractor is solely responsible for obtaining, correlating, confirming, and correcting dimensions at the Site; quantities; information and choices pertaining to fabrication processes; means, methods, sequences, procedures, and techniques of construction; safety precautions and programs incident thereto; and for coordinating the work of all trades. d. Engineer is not responsible for resubmittals or tracking progress of resubmittals. Reviewed for HDR by: Date of Engineer’s Review: Distribution: Contractor File Field Owner Other Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 This page intentionally left blank. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents PERMIT REQUIREMENTS 01 41 24 - 1 SECTION 01 41 24 PERMIT REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. General requirements relative to permitting of which Owner and Engineer are aware that apply to the Work. 2. Required municipal permits and licenses of which Owner and Engineer are aware. 3. Erosion and sediment control permits. 4. Electrical Permit. B. Scope: 1. Contractor shall provide labor, materials, equipment, tools, and incidentals shown, specified, and required to obtain required permits and comply with required permits and licenses. 2. Obtain, pay for, and comply with required permits and licenses whether or not indicated in this Specifications section or elsewhere in the Contract Documents. 1.2 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: 1. Coordinate compliance with permit and license requirements with Work under other Specifications sections and with other contractors, if any, working at the Site. 2. Coordinate with the Progress Schedule the time required to apply for and obtain required permits and licenses and to comply with requirements thereof. Changes in Contract Times or Contract Price will not be authorized because of timing and costs associated with obtaining permits and licenses required for the Work. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Informational Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Copy of each of the following permits, as applicable to the Work: a. Electrical Permit (City) b. Building Permit (City) c. Construction Stormwater Permit (City) d. General Permit for Storm Water Discharges Associated with Construction Activity (State) 1.4 STATE AND MUNICIPAL PERMITS AND LICENSES A. Permits: 1. Electrical, Building, and Construction Stormwater Permits are required for this project and shall be obtained and paid for by the Contractor. 2. This project will be subject to Montana Department of Environmental Quality General Permit for Storm Water Discharges Associated with Construction Activity. All Storm Water Management and Erosion Control shall comply with the requirements set forth in the General Permit which can be obtained from Montana DEQ. Contractor shall be responsible for all storm water management and erosion control, which shall include all labor, equipment, materials and permit fees necessary to provide erosion control best management practices (BMP). Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents PERMIT REQUIREMENTS 01 41 24 - 2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS - (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION - (NOT USED) END OF SECTION Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents CODE-REQUIRED SPECIAL INSPECTIONS AND PROCEDURES 01 45 33.IBC2021 - 1 SECTION 01 45 33.IBC2021 CODE-REQUIRED SPECIAL INSPECTIONS AND PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Contractor responsibilities for code-required Special Inspections and testing. 2. Special Inspection program and reporting requirements. 3. Attachment A to this Section includes requirements for submittal of Special Inspections. 4. Attachment B to this Section includes Special Inspector qualifications, reporting requirements, and material specific Special Inspections and tests. a. Attachments A and B are for the Contractor’s reference only and are not part of the Contract Documents. b. Attachments A and B are included to assist Contractor in understanding the Owner- provided services so the effect of such services may be factored into the Contractor’s pricing and Progress Schedule. c. The Testing Agency and Special Inspector(s) performing the Owner-furnished services will be identified following the Effective Date of the Contract, unless otherwise identified in Section 01 11 00 - Summary of Work. B. Purpose: 1. This Section and its attachments were developed to address the requirements of the 2021 edition of the International Building Code, IBC section 1704.1 and applicable amendments, if any, by authorities having jurisdiction. a. One or more Special Inspectors will be retained by Owner or Owner’s consultant to perform Special Inspections on the types of Work addressed by the applicable building code under Section 1704. 2. One or more Special Inspectors or Testing Agencies will be retained by Owner or Owner’s consultant to perform Special Inspections and tests for the types of Work indicated in the building code. 3. A Statement of Special Inspections will be submitted to the Building Code Official as a condition for issuance of applicable permit. This statement is included as Attachment A to this Section. Attachment B indicates a complete list of materials and Work requiring Special Inspections, required Special Inspections and the minimum qualifications of the Testing Agencies and Special Inspectors. 4. Special Inspections performed by entities retained by Owner or and entity for whom Owner is responsible are for benefit of Owner, Engineer, RDPRC, and Building Code Official. Contractor, together with Subcontractors and Suppliers, are not intended beneficiary of Special Inspections. C. Related Requirements: Include, but are not necessarily limited to, the following: 1. Section 03 05 05 - Concrete Testing and Inspection. 2. Section 03 15 19 - Anchorage to Concrete. 3. Section 03 31 31 - Concrete Mixing, Placing, Jointing, and Curing. 4. Section 03 41 33 - Precast and Prestressed Concrete. 5. Section 26 05 48 - Electrical Seismic Restraint Systems. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Definitions: 1. The following defined terms, indicated in this section with initial capital letters, have the meaning assigned below, which apply to the singular and plural thereof: Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents CODE-REQUIRED SPECIAL INSPECTIONS AND PROCEDURES 01 45 33.IBC2021 - 2 a. “Building Code Official” means officer (or their subordinate) having appropriate jurisdiction and authority charged with ministering and enforcing the building code in effect at the Site, or their duly authorized representative. b. “Geotechnical Special Inspector or Consultant” or “Soils Consultant” means a Special Inspector engaged for the specific purpose of performing specialized Special Inspections relative to subgrade conditions, fill, special foundations, or a combination of these. “Geotechnical Special Inspector or Consultant” or “Soils Consultant”, when used relative to Special Inspections, is an entity separate from Engineer. Relative to the Division 31 Specifications, for the purposes of Special Inspection, “Geotechnical Special Inspector or Consultant”, "Soils Consultant," and "Special Inspector" have the same meaning. c. “Registered Design Professional in Responsible Charge” (RDPRC) means the licensed and registered design professional who is responsible for reviewing and coordinating submittal documents prepared by others, including phased and deferred submittal items, for compatibility with the design of the facility. d. “Special Inspections” means inspection of specific elements of the Work requiring the expertise of an appropriate special inspector for compliance with the building code and the Contract Documents. Elements requiring special inspection are identified within this Section or elsewhere in the Contract Documents. Materials, mechanical, performance, and other testing required by the contract in other Specification sections, but not listed in this Section, are not part of the special inspections program. e. “Special Inspector” means representative of Owner-approved inspection entity designated for that portion of the Work. f. “Statement of Special Inspections” means document provided to Building Code Official outlining special inspections and tests to be done on the Project and frequency of required tests. g. “Testing Agency” means appropriate entity, not affiliated with or hired by Contractor, and responsible for materials testing requirements of the Project including but not limited to concrete cylinder breaks, soils testing, and masonry materials testing. Testing Agency does not include any testing entity or laboratory retained by Contractor, Subcontractor, or Supplier either for tests that are Contractor’s responsibility in accordance with the Contract Documents but are not required by the building code, or test performed for Contractor’s convenience and information. 1.3 CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILITIES REGARDING SPECIAL INSPECTIONS A. Contractor’s Responsibilities Regarding Special Inspections – General. 1. Coordinate and cooperate with Testing Agency personnel, Special Inspectors, and employees and agents of Building Code Official. 2. Provide storage facilities for testing agencies exclusive use as described in the Contract Documents. 3. Special Inspection is Owner’s independent quality control. Special Inspections do not, in any way, reduce or mitigate Contractor’s responsibilities for quality assurance, quality control, workmanship, complying with the Contract Documents, correction period or warranties. Contractor’s own personnel shall review all Work requiring Special Inspections for compliance with the Contract prior to calling for the inspection. B. Advising Testing Agency and Special Inspectors of Need for Services: 1. Not less than 24 hours prior to the need for Special Inspection or code-required testing or sampling, advise Testing Agency or Special Inspector, as applicable, in writing of Work for which Special Inspections or testing is required, indicating approximate time the Work will be ready for such inspection, testing, or sampling. 2. When Special Inspection, testing, or sampling is necessary on a Monday or day following a holiday, furnish such written advisory not later than the prior business day. C. Work for which Special Inspections are required shall remain accessible and exposed for the purposes of Special Inspections until completion of required Special Inspections. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents CODE-REQUIRED SPECIAL INSPECTIONS AND PROCEDURES 01 45 33.IBC2021 - 3 D. Work to be inspected shall be complete at time of Testing Agency’s or Special Inspector's, as applicable, arrival at the Site. E. Work that is defective shall be corrected and re-inspected. Such portions of the Work shall not be covered or concealed until authorized by Engineer. F. Payment for Special Inspection services will be in accordance with the following: 1. Payment indicated below is for the Testing Agency and Special Inspector costs and does not include the Contractor’s costs listed in Paragraph 1.4 A of this Section. 2. Work is Satisfactory: After Contractor notification of Testing Agency or Special Inspector, as applicable, inspector arrives at the Site and performs inspection within the timeframe indicated in Paragraph 1.4.F.4 below, and inspection reveals work is satisfactory, then Owner will pay for the associated Special Inspection. Contractor’s eligibility for payment for the associated Work shall be in accordance with the Contract Documents. 3. Work initially defective but remedied in timely manner: After Contractor notification of Testing Agency or Special Inspector, as applicable, inspector arrives at the Site and performs inspection within the timeframe indicated in Paragraph 1.4.F.4 below, and inspection reveals work is defective, and the defective Work is remedied in accordance with the Contract within the period indicated in Paragraph 1.4.F.4, below, and the subject work is re-inspected and subsequently determined to be in accordance with the Contract, then Owner will pay for the associated Special Inspection. Contractor’s eligibility for payment for the associated Work shall be in accordance with the Contract Documents. 4. Work not ready for inspection upon Special Inspector arrival: After Contractor notification of Testing Agency or Special Inspector, as applicable, inspector arrives at the Site and the Work is not ready for the associated inspection when inspector arrives, then inspector will remain on-site for a maximum of two hours awaiting the completion of the Work. If the subject Work is not ready for inspection at the end of this period, inspector will be dismissed until Contractor requests re-inspection. All costs associated with this inspection trip, including onsite time and travel time and expenses, will be Contractor’s responsibility. Owner may set-off such amounts from payments due Contractor under the Contract. 5. Work initially defective and attempted remedy is also defective: After Contractor notification of Testing Agency or Special Inspector, as applicable, inspector arrives at the Site and performs the inspection within the period indicated in Paragraph 1.4.F.4 of this Section, but inspection reveals defective Work, and Contractor attempts remedy and requests re-inspection within two hours, and the reinspection also reveals defective Work, inspector will be dismissed until Contractor requests re-inspection. All costs associated with this inspection trip, including onsite time and travel time and expenses, will be Contractor’s responsibility. Owner may set-off such amounts from payments due Contractor under the Contract. 6. Work determined to be defective is ineligible for payment by Owner. Contractor is fully responsible for costs and time impacts of performing remedies so that the Work complies with the Contract Documents. Unless otherwise indicated in the Contract Documents, when re-inspection is necessary, Contractor is responsible for re-inspection costs, including onsite time, travel time and expenses, and other associated costs, if any. Owner may set-off such amounts from payments due Contractor under the Contract. 1.4 REPORTING DUTIES AND AUTHORITY A. Reporting: 1. Testing Agency and Special Inspectors will furnish to RDPRC and Engineer written results of Special Inspections promptly after performance of such tests and inspections. When acceptable results are indicated, Contractor may obtain copies thereof from Engineer. 2. Reporting of Defective Work: a. Testing Agency and Special Inspectors will report defective Work to Contractor, Engineer, and RDPRC promptly. b. Defective Work that has been covered up or concealed prior to re-inspection will be reported by RPDRC to Engineer and Building Code Official. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents CODE-REQUIRED SPECIAL INSPECTIONS AND PROCEDURES 01 45 33.IBC2021 - 4 B. Limitations on Authority of Special Inspectors and Testing Agencies: 1. Special Inspector and Testing Agencies expressly do not have authority for: a. Ordering, stopping, or suspending the Work. b. Modifying the requirements of the Contract Documents. c. Accepting defective Work. d. Directing the Contractor's, means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction. e. Directing or advising on Contractor’s safety programs or measures for safety and protection. PART 2 - PRODUCTS - (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 ATTACHMENTS A. Attachments: The following, bound after this Section’s “End of Section” designation, are furnished for Contractor’s reference but are expressly not part of the Contract Documents. 1. Attachment A - Submittal of Special Inspections. 2. Attachment B - Special Inspections, Inspector Qualifications and Reporting Requirements. END OF SECTION Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents CODE-REQUIRED SPECIAL INSPECTIONS AND PROCEDURES 01 45 33.IBC2021 - 5 ATTACHMENT A TO SECTION 01 45 33 SUBMITTAL OF SPECIAL INSPECTIONS Statement Date: 3/19/2026 Project Name: Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Site Coordinates: 45.728901, -111.092521 Owner: City of Bozeman Registered Design Professional in Responsible Charge (RDPRC): Michael Kuntz, PE The Statement of Special Inspections (Statement) is submitted as a condition for permit issuance in accordance with the Special Inspection requirements of the building code. The Special Inspection program is outlined in Specifications Section 01 45 33 – Code-Required Special Inspections and Procedures, including its Attachments A and B. A detailed explanation of the requirements for Special Inspections and Testing are indicated in Specifications Section 01 45 33 in conjunction with Specifications for each material and construction work result governed by the applicable building code. Bi-weekly Special Inspection reports will be submitted to the RDPRC and the Building Code Official. Apparent defective Work will be brought to the immediate attention of the Contractor for correction. If the defective Work is not corrected, the defective Work will be brought to the attention of the RDPRC and Engineer. Only documents that are prepared and signed or sealed by the Special Inspectors (SI) are valid. The SI is responsible for verifying all information on each document prior to signing or sealing and directly forwarding it to the RDPRC and Engineer. The RDPRC will furnish to Building Code Official results of Special Inspections indicating acceptable results, unless Building Code Official directs that reports indicating unacceptable results also be furnished to the Building Code Official. The SI is responsible for verifying all inspectors under its supervision maintain current, valid certifications for the duration of the Project’s construction. At the conclusion of each individual Special Inspection type, the SI will complete a Final Report. The Special Inspection program does not relieve the Contractor or any other entity of any contractual duties, including quality control, quality assurance, or safety and protection. The Contractor is solely responsible for construction means, methods, techniques, procedures and sequences and associated safety and protection, and for complying with the Contract Documents. Failure to comply with the SI program as outlined herein may result in a stop work notice being issued by the Building Code Official. Respectfully submitted, Design Professional in Responsible Charge, Michael Kuntz, PE ___________________________________ Type or Print Name Montana License # PEL-PE-LIC-75318 Expires: 6/30/2026 ___________________________________ _________________ Signature Date END OF ATTACHMENT A Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents CODE-REQUIRED SPECIAL INSPECTIONS AND PROCEDURES 01 45 33.IBC2021 - 6 Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents CODE-REQUIRED SPECIAL INSPECTIONS AND PROCEDURES 01 45 33.IBC2021 - 7 ATTACHMENT B TO SECTION 01 45 33 SPECIAL INSPECTIONS, INSPECTOR QUALIFICATIONS AND REPORTING REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - ATTACHMENT B 1.1 QUALIFICATIONS A. Qualifications stated here are the minimum recommended by the RDPRC. If the Building Code Official has more stringent qualifications, the more stringent qualifications will take precedence. B. All Special Inspections and testing will be done under the direction of a professional engineer or registered architect licensed and registered in the State of Montana herein referred to as Registered Professional for Special Inspections (RPSI), who will be employed by or retained by Testing Agency or other entity furnishing Special Inspectors. C. Soil, concrete, masonry, mortar, grout, steel and aluminum related testing. 1. The Testing Agency shall have a minimum of 10 years experience in the testing of the materials indicated. 2. The Testing Agency’s technician(s) performing such testing: a. Shall have a minimum of five years experience in the testing of soil, concrete, mortar, grout, steel and aluminum as appropriate. 3. Concrete Related Work: a. International Code Council certification for Reinforced Concrete and American Concrete Institute Concrete Field Testing Technician – Grade 1. D. Structural Special Inspections: 1. Professional engineers or architects, licensed and registered in theState of Montana, may perform Special Inspections in accordance with their licensure. 2. Other individuals, working under the direct supervision of a licensed, registered, professional engineer or architect and possessing the following qualifications, may perform Special Inspections. 3. Soils Related Work: a. NICET Level II Certification in geotechnical engineering technology/construction; or b. Professional geologist licensed and registered in the same jurisdiction as the Site; or c. Engineer intern, also known as an Engineer in Training (EIT) (i.e., a person who has successfully passed the EIT exam that is part of the overall process of becoming a licensed, registered professional engineer, serving under the direct supervision of professional engineer licensed and registered in the same jurisdiction as the Site). 4. Concrete Related Work: a. International Code Council certification for Reinforced Concrete Special Inspector or American Concrete Institute Concrete Construction Special Inspector. b. Alternatively, may be an engineer intern/EIT under the direct supervision of a professional engineer licensed and registered in the same jurisdiction as the Site. 5. Precast Concrete Erection Related Work: a. Engineer intern/EIT under the direct supervision of a professional engineer licensed and registered in the same jurisdiction as the Site. b. Welding: 1) American Welding Society Certified Welding Inspector; or 2) International Code Council Structural Steel and Welding Certification and American Welding Society-qualified, and one year of related experience; or 3) Non-Destructive Testing (NDT) Level II or III Certificate (for non-destructive testing only). 6. Section 1705.2 of the applicable building code, and AISC 360 Chapter NOther equivalent certifications are unacceptable unless approved by Engineer. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents CODE-REQUIRED SPECIAL INSPECTIONS AND PROCEDURES 01 45 33.IBC2021 - 8 1.2 REPORTING DUTIES AND AUTHORITY A. Reporting requirements for Special Inspector in accordance with the applicable building code for Building System Related Work. 1. Comply with requirements of applicable building code Section 1704.2.4. 2. Provide written documentation of all inspections and testing, including results, performed by Testing Agency and Special Inspectors. a. Indicate exact location of the subject Work. b. If testing of specimens is performed, include detailed information on storage and curing of specimens prior to testing. 3. Furnish inspection and test reports to Contractor, RDPRC, and Engineer. a. Expressly indicate whether the Work inspected was performed in accordance with the Contract Documents. b. Immediately report defective Work to Contractor, RDPRC, and Engineer. c. If the defective Work is not remedied promptly, notify RDPRC and Engineer. 4. Issue a report, as an Electronic Document, summarizing all inspections, corrective action notifications and resolution of defective Work every 14 days. a. Furnish reports to: 1) Engineer’s project manager. 2) Owner. 3) Building Code Official. 4) Contractor. 5. Prior to requesting inspection for Substantial Completion, the RDPRC shall compile all test reports for each inspected material and work result for each Special Inspector and summarize in a single Electronic Document (as a PDF file) and submit to Engineer and Building Code Official. a. Final summary report shall be sealed and signed by the RDPRC, who shall be licensed and registered in the same jurisdiction as the Site, for Special Inspections, stating: 1) The required Special Inspections have been performed. 2) All defective Work has been remedied to comply with the Contract Documents except as specifically indicated in the summary report. B. Special Inspector shall report all defective Work to Contractor, RDPRC, and Engineer promptly. 1. Defective Work that has been covered up or concealed prior to re-inspection shall be reported to Engineer and RDPRC. C. Special Inspector does not have authority to order stopping or suspending the Work or modify the requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.3 MATERIAL SPECIFIC SPECIAL INSPECTIONS AND TESTS A. Material specific requirements for Special Inspection and testing are indicated in the Specifications listed below. Special Inspection and testing requirements are indicated in the associated Specifications section under "Source Quality Control", "Field Quality Control" or "Quality Assurance" as appropriate for each material. 1.4 SOILS A. Special Inspections will be performed in accordance with applicable building code Section 1705.6 as required to determine that subgrades were prepared in accordance with the Contract Documents, and to verify the allowable soil bearing pressure, materials, compaction densities, trenching and backfill and compliance with the Contract Documents. B. Inspection and testing requirements are indicated separately in the Division 31 Specifications and are indicated as being performed by the Geotechnical Special Inspector or Consultant (which may potentially not be indicated using initial capital letters in the referenced Specifications), Testing Agency, or Special Inspector. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents CODE-REQUIRED SPECIAL INSPECTIONS AND PROCEDURES 01 45 33.IBC2021 - 9 1.5 CONCRETE A. Special Inspection and testing will be performed in accordance with applicable building code Table 1705.3. Inspection is required for material verification, reinforcing steel size and layout, reinforcing steel mechanical splices, embedded bolts, concrete tests, concrete placement and curing, and waterstop installation. 1. Inspections of welding of reinforcing shall be in accordance with AWS D1.4 and special inspector shall be qualified under AWS D1.4. B. Inspection and testing requirements are indicated in Specifications Section 03 05 05 - Concrete Testing and Inspection, and Specifications Section 03 31 31 - Concrete Mixing, Jointing, Placing and Curing, and are indicated as services to be performed by the Special Inspector or Testing Agency. 1.6 PRECAST CONCRETE A. Special Inspections and testing will be performed in accordance with applicable building code Table 1705.3 Items 10 through 12. Inspection and testing is required for connection embedments and placement, connection welding, and proper panel detailing prior to installation. B. Inspection requirements are indicated in Specifications Section 03 41 33 - Precast and Prestressed Concrete, and are indicated as the responsibility of the Special Inspector. END OF ATTACHMENT B Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 This page intentionally left blank. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents TEMPORARY UTILITIES 01 51 05 - 1 SECTION 01 51 05 TEMPORARY UTILITIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Temporary electricity. 2. Temporary sanitary facilities. B. Scope: 1. Contractor shall provide all temporary utilities and temporary facilities required for the Project, including those indicated in this Specifications section. 2. Make all arrangements with utility owners for temporary utilities and with others as appropriate for temporary facilities. Obtain required permits and approvals for temporary utilities and temporary facilities. 3. Pay all service costs for utilities and facilities indicated in this Specifications section as Contractor’s responsibility, including cost of electricity, fuel, and other utility services and temporary facilities required for the Work. 4. Continuously maintain adequate temporary utilities and temporary facilities for all purposes for the Project, until removal of temporary utilities and temporary facilities. At minimum, provide and maintain temporary utilities and temporary facilities through Substantial Completion and removal of temporary field offices and sheds unless otherwise approved in writing by Engineer. 5. Should Owner occupy part of the Work prior to Substantial Completion of the entire Work, cost of utilities consumed via temporary utilities serving the portion occupied by Owner will be shared proportionately by Owner and Contractor as mutually agreed to by the parties. 6. Maintain, including cleaning, temporary utilities and temporary facilities, and continuously provide consumables as necessary. 7. Temporary utilities and temporary facilities shall be adequate for personnel using the Site and the needs of the Project. 8. Provide temporary utilities and temporary facilities in compliance with Laws and Regulations and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and, when applicable, requirements of utility owners. 1.2 REQUIREMENTS FOR TEMPORARY UTILITIES AND TEMPORARY FACILITIES A. Temporary Electricity: 1. Provide temporary electric service necessary for the Work, including continuous power for temporary field offices and sheds. Provide temporary outlets with circuit breaker protection and ground fault protection. B. Temporary Sanitary Facilities: 1. Provide suitably-enclosed chemical or self-contained toilets for Contractor’s employees, Subcontractors, Suppliers, Engineer, and visitors to the Site. Location of temporary toilets shall be acceptable to Owner and Engineer. 2. Provide suitable temporary washing facilities for employees and visitors. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. Materials and equipment for temporary utilities and temporary facilities: 1. may be new or used but, if used, shall be in good condition; 2. shall be adequate for purposes intended; Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents TEMPORARY UTILITIES 01 51 05 - 2 3. shall not create unsafe or unsanitary conditions; and 4. shall comply with Laws and Regulations. B. Provide required materials, equipment, and facilities, including piping, cabling, supports, controls, and appurtenances. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install temporary utilities and temporary facilities in neat, orderly, manner, and make structurally, mechanically, and electrically sound throughout. B. Location of Temporary Utilities and Temporary Facilities: 1. Locate temporary systems for proper function and service. 2. Temporary systems shall not interfere with or provide hazards or nuisances to: the Work under this and other contracts, movement of personnel, traffic areas, materials handling, hoisting systems, storage areas, finishes, and work of utility owners and others. 3. Do not install temporary utilities on the ground, with the exception of temporary extension cords, hoses, and similar systems in place for short durations. C. Modify and extend temporary systems as required by progress of the Work. 3.2 USE A. Maintain temporary systems to provide safe, continuous service as necessary and as required. B. Properly supervise operation of temporary systems: 1. Enforce compliance with Laws and Regulations. 2. Enforce safe practices. 3. Prevent abuse of services. 4. Prevent nuisances and hazards caused by temporary systems and their use. 5. Prevent damage to finishes. 6. Ensure that temporary systems and equipment do not interrupt continuous progress of construction. C. At end of each work day, check temporary systems and verify that sufficient consumables are available to maintain operation until work is resumed at the Site. Provide additional consumables if the supply on hand is insufficient for continuous operation. 3.3 REMOVAL A. Completely remove temporary utilities, temporary facilities, equipment, and materials when no longer required. Repair damage caused by temporary systems and their removal and restore the Site to condition required by the Contract Documents; if restoration of damaged areas is not otherwise specified, restore to preconstruction conditions. END OF SECTION Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01 57 05 - 1 SECTION 01 57 05 TEMPORARY CONTROLS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Requirements for temporary controls during construction, including: a. Temporary erosion and sediment controls. b. Noise control. c. Dust control. d. Temporary pest and rodent controls. e. Water control, including storm water, surface water, and groundwater. f. Pollution control, including solid waste, water pollution, atmospheric pollution, and other types of pollution. B. Scope: 1. Contractor shall provide and maintain materials, equipment, labor, services, and temporary construction as necessary and required to control environmental conditions at the Site and adjacent areas during construction. 2. Contractor shall pay all costs, including fines and civil penalties, if any, for failure to implement and maintain temporary controls in accordance with the Contract Documents and Laws and Regulations. Contractor is not eligible for increase in Contract Price or Contract Times due to failure to comply with requirements for temporary controls. 3. Maintain temporary controls until no longer necessary or required. Provide temporary controls at all times when Contractor is working at the Site. C. Related Requirements: 1. Include, but are not necessarily limited to, the following: 2. Section 01 74 00 - Cleaning. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Comply with applicable provisions and recommendations of the following: a. Montana Department of Environmental Quality (DEQ). b. Montana Public Works Standard Specifications (MPWSS). c. City of Bozeman Design Standards which may include, but not be limited to: 1) City of Bozeman Best Management Practice (BMP) Manual for Construction Sites. 2) City of Bozeman's Stormwater Design Standards. 3) Montana Post-Construction Stormwater BMP Design Guidance Manual. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Submit the following: a. Shop Drawings: 1) Plan for construction staging and maintenance of the Site relative to erosion and sediment controls. Indicate on a site plan approximate areas of planned disturbance of soils and soil cover over time during the Project. For areas not indicated in the Contract Documents as being disturbed and that Contractor proposes to disturb, Shop Drawing shall include proposed erosion and sediment control measures for the additional areas. 2) Location and details of each temporary settlement basin. b. Product Data: 1) Silt fencing materials. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01 57 05 - 2 2) Other materials proposed for temporary erosion and sediment controls, when requested by Engineer. B. Informational Submittals: 1. Submit the following: a. Procedural Submittals: 1) Proposed dust control measure, when Submittal is requested by Engineer. b. Field Quality Control: 1) When requested by Engineer, promptly obtain and submit results of field measurements and field test data substantiating compliance of Contractor’s temporary controls with the Contract Documents. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS FOR TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROLS A. Materials for temporary erosion and sediment controls shall be as shown or indicated on the Drawings. 2.2 MATERIALS FOR TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROLS A. Temporary Erosion and Sediment Control Materials – General: 1. Materials utilized for temporary erosion and sediment controls shall be in accordance with applicable regulatory requirements indicated in this Section’s “Quality Assurance” Article, unless otherwise shown or indicated in the Contract Documents. B. Silt Fencing Materials: 1. Filter Cloth: a. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: 1) Atlantic Construction Fabrics (ACF) Environmental “Silt Fence”. 2) Cherokee Manufacturing “Silt Fence”. 3) Hanes Geo Components “Silt Fence”. 4) Or equal. b. Height: Not less than two feet. c. Securely fasten filter cloth to wire mesh using ties spaced at maximum intervals of 2 feet on centers, at top and mid-height of wire mesh. 2. Wire Mesh: Support filter cloth with wire mesh complying with the following: a. Woven wire mesh, 14-gage steel wire, maximum mesh 6 inches x 6 inches. b. Height: Same as filter cloth height. c. Fasten wire mesh to fence supports with wire ties or staples. d. In lieu of wire mesh, Contractor may propose using purpose-manufactured silt fence system with appropriate reinforcing other than wire mesh. 3. Fence Support Posts: a. Length: Not less than 3 feet each. b. Material: Metal or other acceptable, reasonably durable material with "U", “T”, or "I" cross section, or hardwood measuring not less than 1.25 inches by 1.25 inches in cross- section. C. Straw Bale Dike Materials: 1. Bales shall be firmly-packed, non-rotted straw bound firmly with baling wire. Cross- sectional area on the small end of each bale shall be approximately 12 inches by 12 inches or larger. 2. Posts shall comply with requirements for silt fencing support posts, or may be suitable reinforcing steel rods. D. Mulch Materials and Soil Stabilization Materials: 1. Mulch shall be non-rotted straw or salt hay. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01 57 05 - 3 2. Soil stabilization emulsions, when used, shall be an inert, eco-friendly chemical manufactured for the specific purpose of erosion control and soil stabilization, applied with mulch or stabilization fibers. 3. Wood-fiber or paper-fiber, when used, shall be 100% natural and biodegradable. 4. Erosion control mat or netting shall be biodegradable. Acceptable materials include jute, excelsior, straw, or coconut fiber, and cotton. E. Materials for Protection of Storm Water Drainage Inlets and Catch Basins: 1. Inlet Filter Bag: a. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following for each drainage inlet and catch basin to be protected: 1) Atlantic Construction Fabrics (ACF) Environmental, “Silt Sack”. 2) Mutual Industries, Inc. “Silt Sack”. 3) Or equal. b. Inlet filter bag permeability shall be not less than 40 GAL/SQFT of bag area exposed to the flow. Fabric shall be woven polypropylene with double stitching to prevent bursting. c. Inlet filter bags shall: 1) Fit inside the drainage inlet or catch basin and shall be secured by the structure’s grate or by other acceptable means. 2) Have means of removing inlet filter bag and the silt and sediment collected therein without dumping filter bag’s contents into the drainage inlet or catch basin. 3) Provide sufficient spare inlet filter bags for replacement as indicated in this Section’s “Part 3 – Execution”. F. Filter Bag on Dewatering Pump Discharge – Materials: 1. Provide filter bag on discharge of each dewatering pump drawing from an excavation. Filter bag is not required on pumps drawing from dewatering wells. 2. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following on each excavation dewatering pump discharge: a. Dirtbag, by Atlantic Construction Fabrics (ACF) Environmental. b. Dewatering (Filter) Bag, by Indian Valley Industries, Inc. c. UltraTech Ultra-Dewatering Sediment Filter Bag, by Interstate Products, Inc. d. Mesh Filter Bag, by Pall Corporation. e. Or equal. 3. Size filter bags for maximum flow of the associated pump. Filter bags shall be specifically fabricated for use as a dewatering pump filter bag. 4. Provide sufficient spare filter bags for continuous dewatering operations. G. Temporary Stone Construction Entrance Materials: 1. Stone: a. Tough, hard, durable stone complying with the following graduation: Gradation for Temporary Stone Construction Entrance Sieve Size Total Percent Passing 4-IN (100 mm) 100 3.5-IN (90 mm) 90 to 100 2.5-IN (65 mm) 25 to 60 1.5-IN (37.5 mm) Zero to 15 2. Geotextile Separation Fabric Material: a. Geotextile fabric specifically manufactured for use in separating roadway materials from subgrade, sufficiently durable for the Project. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01 57 05 - 4 b. As recommended by geotextile manufacturer for separating stone from subgrade, for the vehicle weight and traffic frequency anticipated for the construction entrance. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 NOISE CONTROL A. Noise Control – General: 1. Contractor’s vehicles, construction equipment, and machinery shall minimize noise emissions to greatest degree practicable. When necessary, provide mufflers and silencers on construction equipment, machinery, and vehicles, and provide temporary sound barriers sound-absorbing blankets, sound-reducing enclosures, modified backup alarms, and other mitigation measures when necessary. 2. Noise threshold levels shall comply with Laws and Regulations, including (a) OSHA requirements and recommendations, and (b) local ordinances or other Laws or Regulations. 3. Noise emissions shall not interfere with the work of Owner, facility manager (if other than Owner), or others. The use of noise-producing signals, including horns, whistles, alarms, and bells shall be for safety warning and emergency purposes only. 4. Music or entertainment systems, including personal and vehicle radios, media players, and the like, when used, shall not be audible at the property line and shall not disturb others at the Site. 5. Field Quality Control of Noise: a. If Owner or Engineer believes potential exists that allowable noise levels are being exceeded, Contractor will be required to, and shall promptly perform, appropriate noise monitoring in presence of Owner or Engineer and shall submit written results to Engineer. b. Owner and Engineer reserve the right to perform independent noise monitoring at any time during the Work. 6. If noise level exceeds allowable maximum, Contractor shall immediately cease the activity emitting the excessive noise and promptly implement noise-mitigating measures to comply with noise limitations. 3.2 DUST CONTROL A. Dust Control – General: 1. Control objectionable dust caused by Contractor's operation of vehicles and construction equipment and machinery, site clearing, demolition, cleaning, and other actions. To minimize airborne dust, apply water or use other methods subject to acceptance of Engineer and approval of authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Contractor shall prevent blowing and movement of dust from exposed soil surfaces and access roads to reduce onsite and off-Site damage, inconvenience, nuisances, and health hazards associated with dust emissions from Contractor’s activities. B. Dust Control Methods: 1. Dust control may be accomplished by irrigation in which the dust-prone work activity or area of the Site is sprinkled with water until the surface is moist. 2. Apply dust controls as frequently as necessary or required without creating inconveniences, nuisances, or hazards, such as excessive mud and ponding of water at or adjacent to the Site. Do not use water for dust control when water will cause hazardous or objectionable conditions such as ice, mud, ponds, and pollution. 3. Provide dust control that is non-polluting and does not contribute to tracking-out of dirt, mud, and dust onto pavement. 4. Do not allow water used for dust control to discharge to storm water drainage system or surface waters. 5. Where appropriate, reduce travel speed of construction vehicles and construction equipment to reduce the potential for dust emissions arising from vehicle and equipment passage. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01 57 05 - 5 6. Where appropriate, apply gravel or other appropriate binder to access roads and parking areas. C. Removal of Dust and Dirt from Pavement and Other Travelled Ways: 1. Remove dust, mud, and dirt from roads, parking areas, and other travelled ways not less than the frequency indicated in Section 01 74 00 - Cleaning. 2. Perform dust and dirt removal from travelled ways by mechanical wet vacuum sweeping or other method acceptable to Engineer. 3. Remove mud from roads, parking areas, and other travelled ways by appropriate means, including scraping. Avoid damaging surface of travelled way. Remedy damage to roads, parking areas, and travelled ways resulting from mud removal activities. D. Removal of Dust and Dirt from Buildings and Structures: 1. When dust and dirt from Contractor’s activities has accumulated to a noticeable or objectionable extent (compared with preconstruction conditions) on buildings or structures, remove the dust and dirt caused by Contractor’s operations by appropriate methods, including power-washing using mild detergent. Remedy damage caused by dust, dirt, and power-washing. 2. Dust in sensitive equipment, such as electrical and control panels, instruments, HVAC systems and other equipment shall be cleaned by a Subcontractor specializing in cleaning such items. 3. During the Project, remove objectionable and noticeable dust, dirt, and mud in areas occupied by Owner or facility manager, and Contractor’s work areas, resulting from Contractor’s activities. Owner and facility manager will take reasonable measures to avoid tracking dust, dirt, and mud into their occupied areas. 4. Comply with Section 01 74 00 - Cleaning. 3.3 WATER CONTROL A. Water Control – General: 1. During the Project. provide methods to appropriately control storm water, surface water, water from excavations and structures, groundwater flows altered by Contractor’s activities, and groundwater discharges from the Site, to prevent damage to the Work, the Site, adjacent properties, and downstream properties. 2. Control trenching, filling, and grading to direct water away from excavations, pits, tunnels and other construction areas, and prevent water from entering existing buildings and structures. 3. Properly manage and control storm water, surface water, and groundwater entering the Site from upstream, where such flows or discharges have potential to affect the Work or to be exacerbated by Contractor’s activities. 4. Avoid ponding of water onsite, except in specially-designated, temporary settlement basins. Where water ponding occurs during construction, perform rough grading to eliminate ponding. 5. Prevent water from discharging onto roads, parking areas, paved or finished areas, and other travelled ways. Prevent storm water runoff from discharging across access roads and parking areas. B. Materials, Equipment, and Facilities for Water Control: 1. Provide, operate, and maintain materials, equipment, and facilities of adequate size, materials, and capacity to control storm water, surface water, groundwater, and discharges from tanks. C. Discharge and Disposal of Water during Construction: 1. Discharge storm water, surface water, and groundwater from the Site, and discharges of clean water from tanks, to proper discharge locations, in accordance with Laws and Regulations and the Contract Documents. 2. Prevent damage and nuisances arising from water discharges on the Site and discharges from the Site. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01 57 05 - 6 3. Dispose of water in manner that avoids flooding, erosion, sediment transport, and other damage, in accordance with Laws and Regulations. 4. Avoid overland discharges from the Site and construction activities to adjacent properties, 5. Water discharges from the Site and construction activities shall be via a storm water drainage route or conduit with sufficient capacity for the flow under associated weather and flow conditions and in accordance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction 6. Do not discharge storm water, surface water, groundwater, or clean water from tanks, into sanitary sewers. Obtain consent of sewerage system owner before discharging such flows into existing combined sewers. 7. Obtain sewerage system owner’s consent and approval before discharging polluted water to sewerage system. 3.4 POLLUTION CONTROL A. Pollution Control – General: 1. Provide means, methods, and facilities necessary and required to prevent contamination of soil, water, and atmosphere caused by accumulation or discharge of substances and materials that are either noxious, polluting, or both, from or caused by construction and related activities. 2. Construction equipment and machinery shall comply with Laws and Regulations. B. Spills and Contamination: 1. Perform emergency containment, cleanup, and remedy of spills and contamination resulting from construction and related activities. Promptly remove and properly dispose of contaminated soils and liquids. 2. Excavate contaminated material and properly dispose of off-Site, and replace with suitable compacted fill and appropriate cover. 3. Comply with Owner’s and facility manager’s (if other than Owner) hazard control procedures as indicated in the Supplementary Conditions. C. Protection of Surface Water and Groundwater: 1. Provide and maintain appropriate, temporary measures to prevent harmful substances from entering surface water, groundwater, and drinking water. Prevent disposal of wastes, effluents, chemicals, and the like into or adjacent to groundwater, surface water, drainage routes (including swales, ditches, and storm sewers) and drinking water. 2. Obtain sewerage system owner’s consent and approval prior to discharging into sanitary sewers or combined sewers. Do not discharge pollutants not in accordance with Laws and Regulations into combined sewers, or sewers tributary to combined sewers, when wet weather overflows to receiving waters may occur. D. Atmospheric Pollutants: 1. Provide and maintain temporary controls for atmospheric pollutants resulting from construction and related activities, whether to outdoor or indoor atmospheres. 2. Prevent harmful dispersal of pollutants into atmosphere. 3. Do not discharge exhaust from internal combustion engines or combustion operations into buildings, structures, or near ventilation intakes for buildings or structures. 4. Prevent toxic and noxious concentrations of chemicals, fumes, and vapors. E. Solid Waste: 1. Provide and maintain temporary controls for managing solid waste related to the Work. 2. Prevent solid waste from: a. Becoming airborne or blowing in the wind. b. Being inadvertently transmitted to adjacent, offsite properties, and areas of the Site not part of the Project. c. Being deposited in or discharging to surface waters and/or drainage routes. 3. Properly handle and dispose of solid waste. Burning or burying solid waste, including unused materials, at the Site or adjacent areas is prohibited. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01 57 05 - 7 4. Cleaning and Disposal of Debris: Comply with applicable requirements of the General Conditions, as may be modified by the Supplementary Conditions, and Section 01 74 00 - Cleaning. 5. Do not mix or store in the same container solid waste containing Constituents of Concern (and constitutes, or may constitute, a Hazardous Environmental Condition) with solid waste that does not contain Constituents of Concern. 6. Store solid waste in appropriate, covered, containers. 7. Promptly, and at regular intervals, remove solid waste from the Site for transport and disposal in accordance with Laws and Regulations. 3.5 EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROLS A. Installation and Maintenance of Temporary Erosion and Sediment Controls – General: 1. General Provisions: a. Provide temporary erosion and sediment controls as shown and indicated on the Drawings and as indicated in this Section and elsewhere in the Contract Documents, and as necessary for compliance with Laws and Regulations. b. Provide erosion and sediment controls as the Work progresses into areas where ground cover was previously undisturbed. c. Use necessary and required methods to appropriately control erosion and sediment transport in storm water runoff, including using soil conservation-oriented construction practices (including scheduling and sequencing), vegetative measures, and temporary physical controls. d. Use best management practices (BMP) in accordance with Laws and Regulations, and regulatory requirements indicated in this Section‘s “Quality Assurance” Article (unless more-stringent requirement are shown or indicated in the Contract Documents), to control erosion and sediment transport in storm water runoff during the Project. e. Plan and execute disturbances of soils and soil cover, and earthwork by methods to control storm water runoff from exposed soil (including stockpiles, borrow areas, and spoil disposal areas), banks of surface waters affected by the Work, and discharges of groundwater, to prevent erosion and sediment transport. f. Where areas must be cleared for storage of materials or equipment, or for temporary facilities, provide measures for regulating storm water discharges and controlling erosion and sediment transport. Where Owner is a co-permittee with Contractor for applicable permits, or when plans for temporary erosion and sediment controls were sealed and signed by Engineer, such methods are subject to Engineer’s approval or acceptance, as applicable. g. Provide erosion and sediment controls, including stabilization of soils, at the end of each workday. 2. Coordination: a. Coordinate temporary erosion and sediment controls with this Section's requirements on water control.. b. Coordinate temporary erosion and sediment controls with construction of permanent drainage facilities, permanent erosion controls and soil stabilization (if any), and other Work, to the extent necessary for effective and continuous erosion and sediment controls. 3. Before commencing activities that will disturb soil or soil cover at the Site or other areas to be occupied by Contractor during the Project, provide all appropriate temporary erosion and sediment controls required by the Contract Documents for the areas where soil or soil cover will be disturbed. 4. Vegetation Removal and Disturbance: a. Remove only those shrubs, grasses, trees, and other vegetation that must be removed for construction. b. Protect undisturbed vegetation. Do not wantonly or unnecessarily drive construction vehicles and equipment over undisturbed vegetation and soil cover. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01 57 05 - 8 c. Promptly stabilize exposed soil where vegetation or soil cover was unnecessarily disturbed. Fill and restore ruts and damage to vegetation and soil cover caused by wanton or unnecessary passage of construction vehicles and equipment. 5. Access Roads and Parking Areas: a. When possible, locate and construct temporary access roads and parking areas to avoid adverse effects on the environment. b. Provide measures to regulate drainage, avoid erosion and sediment transport in storm water runoff, and minimize damage to vegetation and soil cover. 6. Earthwork and Temporary Controls: a. Perform excavation, fill, and related activities in accordance with Section 31 23 05.Long form - Excavation and Backfill, 31 23 33.Utilities – Trenching and Backfilling and Section 31 23 19 - Dewatering. b. Temporary erosion and sediment control measures may include, but are not limited to, using berms, swales and ditches, silt fencing, straw bale sediment barriers, gravel or crushed stone, mulching and soil stabilization, slope drains, and other methods. Apply such temporary measures to erodible soils and other erodible materials exposed by construction activities. c. Minimize areas of bare soil exposed at one time. Provide fills and spoil areas by selectively placing fill and spoil materials to reduce or eliminate exposed erodible soils. d. Exercise special care on and above steep slopes, where disturbance of vegetation and soil cover shall be minimized to greatest extent reasonably practicable. e. Protect stockpile storage not in active use by providing suitable, durable covering prevent sediment transport in storm water runoff and windblown transport. Covering shall be suitable for outdoor exposure. 7. Inspection and Maintenance: a. Periodically inspect areas of non-stabilized, erodible soils, including all areas of soil cover disturbance and stockpiles, for evidence of start of erosion and sediment transport. Promptly implement corrective action as necessary and appropriate to control erosion and sediment transport. Continue inspections and corrective action until soils are permanently stabilized and permanent vegetation has been appropriately established. b. Inspect not less often than once per week and after each precipitation event of 0.5 inches of water or greater. c. Repair or replace damaged erosion and sediment controls within 24 hours of Contractor becoming aware of such damage. d. Periodically remove sediment that has accumulated in or behind sediment and erosion controls. Remove sediment not less often than when sediment is at approximately one- half of storage capacity of associated control element, unless more-frequent interval is indicated elsewhere in the Contract Documents Properly dispose of sediment. 8. Duration of Temporary Erosion and Sediment Controls: a. Maintain temporary erosion and sediment controls in effective, working condition until soil cover of the associated storm water drainage area has been permanently stabilized. 9. Work Stoppage: a. If the Work is temporarily stopped or suspended for any reason, Contractor shall provide additional temporary controls necessary to prevent environmental damage to the Site and adjacent areas while the Work is stopped or suspended. b. When temporary erosion and sediment controls remain in place during periods of stopped or suspended Work, continue to perform Contractor’s obligations relative to periodic inspection and maintenance of temporary erosion and sediment controls, including removal of accumulated sediment. 10. Failure to Provide Adequate Temporary Erosion and Sediment Controls: a. If Contractor repeatedly fails to satisfactorily control erosion and sediment transport in storm water runoff, Owner reserves the right to use Owner's own forces or employ a third-party contractors for temporary erosion and sediment control. Owner’s costs for Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01 57 05 - 9 such work, including engineering and inspection costs, will be deducted from amounts due Contractor, as set-offs in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. Silt Fencing: 1. Provide and maintain silt fencing in a vertical plane, at the locations shown or indicated in the Contract Documents and where necessary or required. 2. Locations of Temporary Silt Fencing: a. Where possible, provide silt fencing along contour lines, so each run of silt fencing is at the same elevation. b. On slopes, provide temporary silt fencing at intervals that do not exceed the maximum indicated in the following table: Silt Fence Spacing on Slopes Slope (percent) Maxim Allowable Length of Slope Above Each Silt Fence (feet) 2 and less 150 2.1 to 5 100 5.1 to 10 50 10.1 to 20 25 20.1 to 25 20 25.1 to 40 15 40.1 to 50 10 c. Provide temporary silt fencing around perimeter of each stockpile of topsoil, general fill material, and excavated spoil material. Install silt fencing before expected soil is subject to precipitation. Maintain until stockpile is removed. d. Do not install temporary silt fencing at the following types of locations: 1) Area of concentrated storm water flows such as ditches, swales, or channels. 2) Where rock or rocky soils prevent full and uniform anchoring of silt fencing. 3) Across upstream or discharge ends of storm water conduits. 3. Installation: a. Securely fasten wire mesh to posts, and securely fasten filter cloth to wire mesh. b. When two sections of filter cloth are adjacent to each other, fold over edges and overlap by not less than 6 inches and securely fasten to wire mesh. c. Embed posts in the ground to the depth necessary for proper controls; embed posts to not less than 16 inches below ground. d. Filter cloth and wire mesh shall extend not less than 8 inches below ground and not less than 16 inches above ground. e. Remove accumulated sediment from behind silt fencing as necessary or required. Repair and reinstall silt fencing as necessary or required. 4. Maintenance: a. Do not allow formation of concentrated storm water flows on slopes above temporary silt fencing unless so shown or indicated in the Contract Documents. If unauthorized concentrated storm water flows occur, stabilize the slope via other appropriate stabilization methods as necessary and required to prevent flow of concentrated storm water flows toward temporary silt fencing. C. Straw Bale Dike. 1. Provide temporary straw bale dikes where shown or indicated and where necessary or required, including in swales, along contours, and along toe of slopes. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01 57 05 - 10 2. Provide temporary straw bales in shallow excavation as wide as the bale and approximately 4 to 6 inches below surrounding grade. 3. Ends of straw bales shall tightly abut ends of adjacent straw bales. 4. Securely install each straw bale using two support posts, driven into the ground not less than 1.5 to 2 feet below bottom of straw bale. Top of post shall be flush with top of straw bale. Angle first post for each straw bale toward the previously-installed straw bale. 5. Frequently inspect straw bales and repair or replace as required. Remove accumulated sediment and debris from behind straw bales. D. Mulching and Soil Stabilization: 1. Use mulching to temporarily stabilize exposed soil, including spoil and fill materials. a. Immediately following final grading, provide mulch and stabilize with mats or netting, or sprayed soil stabilization emulsion with fiber additive. b. Application of mulching for soil stabilization shall be as follows. 1) Non-Rotted Straw or Salt Hay: Provide 1.5 to two tons per acre. 2) Soil stabilization emulsions, when used, shall be applied in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, and shall be applied with mulch or stabilization fibers. 3) Wood-Fiber or Paper-Fiber Application: Provide 1,500 pounds per acre, installed by hydroseeding. c. Where mats or netting are used: 1) Cover entire area to be stabilized with mats or netting. 2) Provide anchoring trenches at the top and bottom of slopes to receive mats or netting. Bury at least the top and bottom ends of mat or netting, 4 inches or more wide, at top and bottom of slope. Ensure that mesh or netting is secure and will not wash out over time. Tamp trench full of soil. 4 inches from trench, secure mat or netting with appropriate staples at intervals of 10 inches. 3) Overlap adjacent strips of mat or netting by not less than 4 inches. E. Protection of Storm Water Drainage Inlets and Catch Basins: 1. Protect each drainage inlet and catch basin that has potential to receive storm water runoff from exposed soils and does not discharge into a storm water settlement basin. 2. Provide temporary inlet filter bags inside of drainage inlet or catch basin in accordance with inlet filter bag manufacturer's instructions. Secure inlet filter bag with the structure's grate or by other acceptable means. 3. Inlet filter bags shall not pose any obstruction, above the preconstruction elevation of the drainage inlet or catch basin grate that would necessitate or require temporary barricades or warning lights. 4. When removing sediment from inlet filter bags, do not dump filter bag's contents into the drainage inlet or catch basin. Promptly remove from drainage inlets and catch basins sediment accidentally dumped into the structure. 5. Remove sediment from inlet filter bags, or replace inlet filter bags, when inlet filter bag is not more than half-full. F. Filter Bag on Dewatering Pump Discharge: 1. Provide dewatering of excavations in compliance with Section 31 23 05.Long Form - Excavation and Backfill and Section 31 23 19 - Dewatering. 2. Locate filter bags and temporary pump discharge lines to avoid interfering with the public, use of private and public property, and Owner's and facility manager’s operations. Relocate filter bags and appurtenances when necessary or required. 3. Filter bag discharge shall be directed to appropriate storm water drainage route. Do not discharge into roads, driveways, access roads, parking areas, other travelled ways, or overland. When temporary settlement basin is used, locate filter bags to discharge to temporary settlement basin when practicable. 4. Provide filter bag on discharge of each dewatering pump drawing from an excavation or other area with exposed soil. 5. Securely attach filter bag to pump discharge pipe or hose. 6. Maintain, clean out, and replace filter bags as necessary or required. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01 57 05 - 11 G. Temporary Stone Construction Entrance: 1. Where shown on the Drawings, and where construction vehicles will regularly transition to paved surfaces from unstabilized surfaces, provide temporary stone construction entrance. Contractor vehicles and mobile construction equipment and machinery shall use temporary stone construction entrances. 2. Provide temporary stone construction entrances of the width, length, and thickness shown or indicated on the Drawings. When not shown or indicated on the Drawings, temporary stone construction entrance shall be not less than 50 feet long, by 20 feet wide, by 8 inches deep. 3. Installation: a. Ensure that subgrade under each temporary stone construction entrance is suitably dense for the intended purpose and dry. Suitably prepare subgrade as necessary for temporary stone construction entrance. b. Provide on subgrade a layer of geotextile separation fabric, installed in accordance with geotextile separation fabric manufacturer's recommendations for separation. c. Provide stone on installed geotextile separation fabric. Grade the stone for passage of vehicles. 4. Maintenance: a. Maintain temporary stone construction entrance at not less than the minimum required thickness. Add stone as required to maintain thickness. b. When upper layer of temporary stone construction entrance becomes contaminated with soil, mud, or other material, remove the contaminated material and replace with clean stone. c. Using water to wash down temporary construction entrance or paved areas onto which soil material has been tracked is unacceptable. 3.6 REMOVAL OF TEMPORARY CONTROLS A. Removals – General: 1. Unless otherwise indicated elsewhere in this Section in requirements for respective temporary controls, upon completion of the associated Work and when temporary controls are no longer necessary, remove temporary controls and restore the Site to condition in accordance with the Contract Documents; if condition is not shown or indicated, restore the Site to pre-construction condition. 2. After soils are permanently stabilized, remove from the Site temporary erosion and sediment controls. END OF SECTION Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 This page intentionally left blank. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR EQUIPMENT 01 61 03 - 1 SECTION 01 61 03 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Requirements of this Specification Section apply to all equipment provided on the Project including those found in other Divisions even if not specifically referenced in individual "Equipment" Articles of those Specification Sections. B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Section 03 15 19 - Anchorage to Concrete. 2. Section 03 31 30 - Concrete, Materials and Proportioning. 3. Section 07 92 00 - Joint Sealants. 4. Section 09 96 00 - High Performance Industrial Coatings. 5. Section 10 14 00 - Identification Devices. 6. Section 26 05 09 - Motors. 7. Section 26 29 23 - Variable Frequency Drives - Low Voltage. 8. Section 40 05 01 - Common Work Results for Process Piping. 9. Section 40 61 13 - Process Control System General Requirements. 10. Section 40 67 00 - Control System Equipment Panels and Racks. 11. Section 40 73 00 - Pressure Instrumentation 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards: 1. American Bearing Manufacturers Association (ABMA). 2. American Gear Manufacturers Association (AGMA). 3. American Petroleum Institute a. API 686 - Recommended Practice for Machinery Installation and Installation Design 4. ASTM International (ASTM): a. E1934, Standard Guide for Examining Electrical and Mechanical Equipment with Infrared Thermography. b. F593, Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex Cap Screws, and Studs. 5. Hydraulic Institute (HI): a. 9.6.4, Rotodynamic Pumps for Vibration Measurements and Allowable Values. 6. International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC). 7. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (IEEE). 8. International Organization for Standardization (ISO): a. 1940, Mechanical Vibration - Balance Quality Requirements for Rotors in a Constant (Rigid) State - Part 1: Specification and Verification of Balance Tolerances. b. 21940-11, Mechanical Vibration - Rotor Balancing - Part 11: Procedures and Tolerances for Rotors with Rigid Behavior. 9. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): a. 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum). b. ICS 6, Enclosures for Industrial Control and System. c. MG 1, Motors and Generators. 10. InterNational Electrical Testing Association (NETA): a. ATS, Acceptance Testing Specification for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems. 11. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): a. 70, National Electrical Code (NEC): 12. National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies (NICET). 13. National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST). Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR EQUIPMENT 01 61 03 - 2 14. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA): a. 29 CFR 1910, Occupational Safety and Health Standards, referred to herein as OSHA Standards. 15. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL). a. 508, Standard for Safety Industrial Control Equipment. b. 508A, Standard for Safety Industrial Control Panels. c. 698A, Standard for Industrial Control Panels Relating to Hazardous (Classified) Locations. 16. Vibration Institute. B. Supplier’s Vibration Analyst: 1. Supplier’s vibration analyst shall prepare pre-Shop Drawing vibration analysis of equipment. 2. Where required, Supplier’s vibration analyst shall be either equipment manufacturer’s qualified employee or independent business entity whose sole business, or principal part of its business, is evaluating and determining natural frequencies of rotating equipment. 3. Shall possess not less than 10 years’ relevant experience. 4. Supplier’s Vibration Analyst’s Professional Engineer: a. Vibration analysis shall be performed by, or under the direct, personal supervision of, professional engineer licensed and registered in the same jurisdiction as the Site experienced in preparing finite element analyses, rotordynamic analyses, and experimental modal analysis similar to that required for the Work. b. Professional engineer shall possess not less than five years’ combined experience in field testing and data analysis for vibration analysis. c. Vibration analysis professional engineer’s seal and signature, with indication of date seal and signature were applied to the subject document, shall clearly appear on all results and reports furnished as Submittals. C. Field Vibration Testing Subcontractor: 1. Field vibration testing Subcontractor shall, where required by the Contract Documents, perform vibration testing of equipment installed at the Site and perform associated vibration analyses. 2. Vibration testing Subcontractor shall be an independent entity that has performed as its sole business, or principal part of its business, for not less than 10 years, inspection, testing, calibrating, adjusting equipment and systems, and performing vibration testing of equipment. 3. Entities whose principal business is one or more of the following are not considered independent vibration testing entities and, therefore, shall not be field vibration testing Subcontractor: a. Motor sales, service, or repairs. b. Process equipment sales, service, or repairs. 4. Acceptable entities include, but are not necessarily limited to:: a. AVS Engineering: https://www.avsengineering.net/ b. Engineering Testing Services: https://etestinc.com/ c. Maritech, LLC: http://www.maritech-llc.com/contact.html d. Mechanical Solution, Inc. (MSI) www.mechsol.com e. Or equal. 5. Field vibration testing Subcontractor must have an established program for monitoring and testing equipment calibration, with accuracy traceable in an unbroken chain, in accordance with NIST requirements. 6. Field Personnel: Each person employed for field vibration testing on the Work shall possess not less than the following qualifications: a. Three years’ field experience covering all phases of field vibration testing and data gathering. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR EQUIPMENT 01 61 03 - 3 b. Current, valid Vibration Category II certification from Vibration Institute or a licensed, registered professional engineer who need not be licensed and registered in the same jurisdiction as the Site. 7. Analysis Personnel: Personnel performing analysis for field vibration testing Subcontractor shall possess not less than the following qualifications: a. Five years’ combined field testing and data analysis experience. b. Current, valid Vibration Category III certification from the Vibration Institute or a professional engineer licensed and registered in in the same jurisdiction as the Site. Where required by Laws and Regulations, field vibration analysis report shall be sealed, signed, and dated by professional engineer who personally prepared, or exercised personal, supervisory control over subordinates in preparing, the field vibration analysis report. 8. Analysis Equipment: Field vibration testing Subcontractor shall have access to and use, where appropriate, the following testing equipment, properly maintained and calibrated: a. Impact Hammer: 1) Frequency Range: 1 kHz. 2) Range (5v output) 5,000 pounds-force (22,200 newtons). 3) Hammer sensitivity (approx.) 1mV/lbf (0.23 mV/N) b. Analyzer: 1) Frequency Range: 1 Hz to 10,000Hz. 2) Frequency Accuracy: 0.02 percent. 3) Non-Integrated Spectral Amplitude Accuracy: 5 percent, 3 Hz to 65 Hz. 4) Single Integrated Spectral Amplitude Accuracy: 5 percent, 10 Hz to 20 Hz. 5) Supports measurements of acceleration, velocity, and displacement. c. Vibration Sensor: 1) Sensitivity: ±5 percent = 100 mV/g 2) Acceleration Range: ±5 g. 3) Amplitude Nonlinearity: ±1 percent 4) Frequency Response: ±10Hz to 7kHz (±3 dB) d. Data logging equipment for simultaneous recording of the following data points: 1) Vibration in the X, Y, and axial planes (for all pumps pursuant to ANSI/HI Standard). 2) Digital tachometer recording RPM. 3) Discharge Pressure Transmitter a) Accuracy: 0.3 percent of range b) Fluid Temperature Range: 32 to 100 DegF 4) Suction Pressure Transmitter (when other than submersible pump or vertical turbine (suspended) pump. a) Accuracy 0.35 percent of range. b) Fluid Temperature Range: 32 to 100 DegF. c) For submersible pumps and vertical turbine (suspended) type pumps, suction liquid surface level signal from Site’s monitoring and control system (e.g., plant PLC/SCADA system). 5) For pumps, pumping rate (flow) signal from Site’s monitoring and control system (e.g., plant PLC/SCADA system) 6) Equipment/motor bearing temperature signal from Site’s monitoring and control system (e.g., plant PLC/SCADA system)). 7) Pump/motor vibration signal from Site’s monitoring and control system (e.g., plant PLC/SCADA system). D. Infrared Thermography Testing Program: 1. Testing firm: a. An independent firm performing, as the sole or principal part of its business for a minimum of 10 years, the inspection, testing, calibration, and adjusting of systems. b. Must have an established monitoring and testing equipment calibration program with accuracy traceable in an unbroken chain, according to NIST. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR EQUIPMENT 01 61 03 - 4 2. Field personnel: a. Minimum of one year field experience covering all phases of field thermography testing and data gathering. b. Supervisor certified by NETA or NICET. 3. Analysis personnel: a. Minimum three years combined field testing and data analysis experience. b. Supervisor certified by NETA or NICET. E. Electrical Equipment and Connections Testing Program: 1. Qualification requirements as specified in section 26 08 13 - Acceptance Testing. F. Miscellaneous: 1. A single manufacturer of a "product" shall be selected and utilized uniformly throughout Project even if: a. More than one manufacturer is listed for a given "product" in Specifications. b. No manufacturer is listed. 2. Equipment, electrical assemblies, related electrical wiring, instrumentation, controls, and system components shall fully comply with specific NEC requirements related to area classification and to NEMA 250 and NEMA ICS 6 designations shown on Electrical Power Drawings and defined in the Electrical specifications. 3. Variable speed equipment applications: The driven equipment manufacturer shall have single source responsibility for coordination of the equipment and VFD system and verify their compatibility. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Product: Manufactured materials and equipment. B. Major Equipment Supports - Supports for Equipment: 1. Located on or suspended from elevated slabs with supported equipment weighing 2000 pounds or greater, or; 2. Located on or suspended from roofs with supported equipment weighing 500 pounds or greater, or; 3. Located on slab-on-grade or earth with supported equipment weighing 5000 pounds or more. C. Equipment: 1. One or more assemblies capable of performing a complete function. 2. Mechanical, electrical, instrumentation or other devices requiring an electrical, pneumatic, electronic or hydraulic connection. 3. Not limited to items specifically referenced in "Equipment" articles within individual Specifications. D. Installer or Applicator: 1. Installer or applicator is the person actually installing or applying the product in the field at the Project site. 2. Installer and applicator are synonymous. E. Baseplate or equipment base plate or machine base 1. Are fabricated frames of structural shapes and plates with enough strength and sturdiness to serve as the surface to which other equipment is attached to and supported by. Baseplates can be directly mounted and grouted to concrete equipment support bases or machined and bolted to a sole plate. F. Sole plate 1. A thick steel machined plate that is attached to and grouted to a concrete equipment support base. 2. Base plates are bolted to a sole plate when a sole plate is specified and/or provide. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR EQUIPMENT 01 61 03 - 5 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. General for all equipment: a. Data sheets that include manufacturer's name and complete product model number. 1) Clearly identify all optional accessories that are included. b. Acknowledgement that products submitted comply with the requirements of the standards referenced. c. Manufacturer's delivery, storage, handling, and installation instructions. d. Equipment identification utilizing numbering system and name utilized in Drawings. e. Equipment installation details: 1) Location of anchorage. 2) Anchorage setting templates. 3) Manufacturer's installation instructions. f. Equipment area classification rating. g. Shipping and operating weight. h. Equipment physical characteristics: 1) Dimensions (both horizontal and vertical). 2) Materials of construction and construction details. i. Equipment factory primer and paint data. j. Manufacturer's recommended spare parts list. k. Equipment lining and coatings. l. Equipment utility requirements include air, natural gas, electricity, and water. m. Ladders and platforms provided with equipment: 1) Certification that all components comply fully with OSHA requirements. 2) Full details of construction/fabrication. 3) Scaled plan and sections showing relationship to equipment. 2. Mechanical and process equipment: a. Operating characteristics: 1) Technical information including applicable performance curves showing specified equipment capacity, rangeability, and efficiencies. 2) Brake horsepower requirements. 3) Copies of equipment data plates. b. Piping and duct connection size, type and location. c. Equipment bearing life certification. d. Equipment foundation data: 1) Equipment center of gravity. 2) Criteria for designing vibration, special or unbalanced forces resulting from equipment operation. 3) Type, size, and materials of construction of anchorage. 4) Data required by Section 03 15 19 Anchorage to Concrete for anchor rod design. 3. Electric motor: a. Motor manufacturer and model number. b. Complete motor nameplate data. c. Weight. d. NEMA design type. e. Enclosure type. f. Frame size. g. Winding insulation class and temperature rise. h. Starts per hour. i. Performance data: 1) Motor speed-torque curve superimposed over driven machine speed-torque curve during start-up acceleration and at rated terminal voltage a minimum permissible or specified terminal voltage for all motors. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR EQUIPMENT 01 61 03 - 6 2) Time-current plots with acceleration versus current and thermal damage curves at the operating and ambient temperatures and at rated terminal voltage and minimum permissible or specified terminal voltage for all motors. 3) Guaranteed minimum efficiencies at 100 percent, 75 percent, and 50 percent of full load. 4) Guaranteed minimum power factor at 100 percent, 75 percent, and 50 percent of full load. 5) Locked rotor and full load current at rated terminal voltage and minimum permissible or specified terminal voltage. 6) Starting, full load, and breakdown torque at rated terminal voltage and minimum permissible or specified terminal voltage. j. Bearing data and lubrication system. k. Natural frequency calculations for: 1) Completed assembly including but not limited to the equipment base, rotating piece of equipment, and the rotating piece of equipment driver. 2) Individual piece of rotating equipment. 3) Equipment driver and connected gear reducer, if applicable. l. Thermal protection system including recommended alarm and trip settings for winding and bearing RTD’s. m. Maximum permissible capacitor (kVAC) that can be connected to the motor. n. Recommended size of power factor correction capacitors to improve power factor to 0.95 lagging when operated at full load. o. Fabrication and/or layout drawings: 1) Dimensioned outlined drawing. 2) Connection diagrams including accessories (strip heaters, thermal protection, etc.). p. Certifications: 1) When utilized with a reduced voltage starter, certify that motor and driven equipment are compatible. 2) When utilized with a variable frequency controller, certify motor is inverter duty and the controller and motor are compatible. a) Include minimum speed at which the motor may be operated for the driven machinery. q. Electrical gear: 1) Unless specified in a narrow-scope Specification Section, provide the following: a) Equipment ratings: Voltage, continuous current, kVa, watts, short circuit with stand, etc., as applicable. 2) Control panels: a) Panel construction. b) Point-to-point ladder diagrams. c) Scaled panel face and subpanel layout. d) Technical product data on panel components. e) Panel and subpanel dimensions and weights. f) Panel access openings. g) Nameplate schedule. h) Panel anchorage. i) Short Circuit Current Rating (SCCR) nameplate marking per NFPA 70. Include any required calculations. 4. Systems schematics and data: a. Provide system schematics where required in system specifications. 1) Acknowledge all system components being supplied as part of the system. 2) Utilize equipment, instrument and valving tag numbers defined in the Contract Documents for all components. 3) Provide technical data for each system component showing compliance with the Contract Document requirements. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR EQUIPMENT 01 61 03 - 7 4) For piping components, identify all utility connections, vents and drains which will be included as part of the system. 5. For factory painted equipment, provide paint submittals in accordance with Section 09 96 00. 6. Qualifications for: a. Natural frequency analysis firm and personnel. b. Vibration testing firm and personnel. c. Infrared thermography testing firm and personnel. d. Electrical equipment and connections testing firm and personnel. 7. Equipment Monitoring and Testing plans, in accordance with PART 3 of this Specification Section: a. Natural frequency analysis and calculations. b. Vibration testing. c. Thermography testing. d. Electrical equipment and connection testing. B. Factory Test Reports: 1. Natural frequency bump test reports where required for rotating equipment. a. Minimum characteristics of impact hammer. 1) Frequency Range 1 kHz. 2) Range (5v output) 5,000 pounds-force (22,200 N). 3) Hammer Sensitivity (7pprox.) 1 mV/lbf (0.23 mV/N). 4) Resonant Frequency 12 kHz 2. Motor, equipment and final assembled equipment including motor. a. Determine natural frequency of assembled motor prior to shipping to equipment manufacturer or job site. 1) Individual motor fastened to an “infinitely rigid” mass at the same bolt circle as the final assembled equipment. b. Determine natural frequency of the pump. 1) Pump fastened to an “infinitely rigid” mass at the same bolt circle as the final assembled equipment. c. Determine natural frequency of the pump/motor assembly. 1) Pump/motor assembly fastened to an “infinitely rigid” mass at the same bolt circle as the final field assembled equipment. d. For this use, the "infinitely rigid" mass shall be at least 10 times the weight of the equipment being tested. 3. Submit natural frequency report(s) for approval prior to shipment. 4. Equipment performance tests. a. As listed in individual equipment specifications. C. Contract Closeout Information: 1. Operation and Maintenance Data: a. See Section 01 78 23 for requirements for the mechanics, administration, and the content of Operation and Maintenance Manual submittals. D. Informational Submittals: 1. Notification, at least one week in advance, that testing will be conducted at factory. 2. Certification from equipment manufacturer that all manufacturer-supplied control panels that interface in any way with other controls or panels have been submitted to and coordinated with the supplier/installer of those interfacing systems. 3. Submit sample Manufacturer's Field Service Report (MFSR). Report shall use manufacturer’s standard report or use the form in the Exhibits and have at least the following information: a. Certification that equipment has been installed properly, has been initially started up, has been calibrated and/or adjusted as required, and is ready for operation. b. Certification for major equipment supports that equipment foundation design loads shown on the Drawings or specified have been compared to actual loads exhibited by Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR EQUIPMENT 01 61 03 - 8 equipment provided for this Project and that said design loadings are equal to or greater than the loads produced by the equipment provided. c. Motor test reports. d. Field noise testing reports if such testing is specified. e. Preliminary field quality control testing format to be used as a basis for final field quality control reporting. f. Provide three bound final written reports documenting natural frequency testing, vibration monitoring and testing for specified equipment. 1) Include the acceptance criteria of all equipment tested. 2) Provide individual tabbed sections for information associated with each piece of tested equipment. g. Certification prior to Project closeout that electrical panel drawings for manufacturer- supplied control panels truly represent panel wiring including any field-made modifications. h. Testing and monitoring reports in accordance with PART 3 of this Specification Section. i. Certification that driven equipment and VFD are compatible. 4. Submit completed Manufacturer's Field Service Report (MFSR) for each piece of equipment supplied. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Motors: a. ABB Baldor-Reliance. b. General Electric. c. Hyundai Heavy Industries. d. Marathon Electric. e. Siemens. f. TECO-Westinghouse. g. Toshiba U.S. h. U.S. Motors, Nidec Motor Corporation. i. WEG. 2. Mechanical variable speed drives: a. Reeves. b. U.S. Motors (VariDrive). 2.2 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Electric Motors: 1. Where used in conjunction with adjustable speed AC or DC drives, provide motors that are fully compatible with the speed controllers. 2. Design for frequent starting duty equivalent to duty service required by driven equipment. 3. Design for full voltage starting. 4. Design bearing life based upon actual operating load conditions imposed by driven equipment. 5. Size for altitude of Project. 6. Furnish with stainless steel nameplates which include all data required by NEC Article 430. 7. For vertical pump motors provide solid shaft (VSS) unless a hollow shaft (VHS) is specifically required in the narrow scope pump specifications. 8. Use of manufacturer's standard motor will be permitted on integrally constructed motor driven equipment specified by model number in which a redesign of the complete unit would be required in order to provide a motor with features specified. 9. AC electric motors less than 1/3 hp: Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR EQUIPMENT 01 61 03 - 9 a. Single phase, 60 Hz, designed for the supply voltage shown on the Drawings. b. Permanently lubricated sealed bearings conforming to ABMA standards. c. Built-in manual reset thermal protector or integrally mounted manual motor starter with thermal overload element with stainless steel enclosure. 10. AC electric motors 1/3 to 1 hp: a. Single or 3 PH, 60 Hz, designed for the supply voltage shown on the Drawings. b. Permanently lubricated sealed bearings conforming to ABMA standards. 1) For single phase motors, provide built-in manual reset thermal protector or integrally mounted manual motor starter with thermal overload element. 11. AC electric motors 1-1/2 to 10 hp: a. Single or 3 PH, 60 Hz, designed for the supply voltage shown on the Drawings. b. Permanently lubricated sealed bearings conforming to ABMA standards. c. For vertical motors provide 15 year, average-life thrust bearings conforming to ABMA standards. 12. AC electric motors greater than 10 hp: a. Single or 3 PH, 60 Hz, designed for the supply voltage shown on the Drawings. b. Oil or grease lubricated antifriction bearings conforming to ABMA standards. 1) Design bearing life for 90 percent survival rating at 50,000 hours of operation for motors up to and including 100 hp. 2) For motors greater than 100 hp, design bearing life for 90 percent survival rating at 100,000 HRS of operation. c. For vertical motors provide 15 year, average-life thrust bearings conforming to ABMA standards. 1) Provide steady bushing when a vertical hollow shaft (VHS) motor is specified in the narrow scope specifications. d. Thermal protection: 1) For motors 50 hp and above controlled from a variable frequency drive and for all other motors 100 hp and above, provide one of the following: a) Integral thermal detectors (thermostat) per phase with normally closed contacts wired in series that will open on overtemperature b) Resistance type temperature detector (RTD) complete with monitor and alarm panel having a normally closed contact that will open on overtemperature. (1) Two thermal sensing devices per phase in each phase hot-spot location. (2) Monitor and alarm panel: (a) For constant speed motors, install panel in and energize from the motor starter equipment. (b) For variable speed motors, install panel in and energize from the variable speed drive equipment. 13. Severe duty motor to have the following minimum features: a. All cast iron construction. b. Gasketed conduit box. c. Epoxy finish for corrosion protection. d. Hydroscopic varnish on windings for corrosion protection. e. Drain plug and breather. B. NEMA Design Squirrel Cage Induction Motors: 1. Provide motors designed and applied in compliance with NEMA and IEEE for the specific duty imposed by the driven equipment. 2. Motors to meet NEMA MG 1 (NEMA Premium). 3. Do not provide motors having a locked rotor kVA per HP exceeding the NEMA standard for the assigned NEMA code letter. 4. For use on variable frequency type adjustable speed drives, provide: a. Induction motors that are in compliance with NEMA MG 1, Part 31. b. Nameplate identification meeting NEMA MG 1 Part 31 requirements. c. Insulated drive end bearing on all motors. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR EQUIPMENT 01 61 03 - 10 d. Insulated non-drive end bearings, at a minimum, on all motors with horizontal shaft 100 hp and larger. e. An insulated bearing carrier on the non-drive end for vertical shaft motors 100 hp and larger. f. Shaft grounding ring on all motors: 1) Factory installed, maintenance free, circumferential, bearing protection ring with conductive microfiber shaft contacting material. 2) Electro Static Technology AEGIS SGR Bearing Protection Ring or approved equal. g. Have the following minimum turndown ratio without the use of additional cooling, such as a blower, to provide continuous supply of cooling air over the motor. 1) Variable torque: 10:1. 2) Constant torque: 6:1. 5. Design motor insulation in accordance with NEMA standards for Class F insulation with Class B temperature rise above a 40 degrees C ambient. 6. Design motors for continuous duty. 7. Size motors having a 1.0 service factor so that nameplate HP is a minimum of 15 percent greater than the maximum HP requirements of the driven equipment over its entire operating range. a. As an alternative, furnish motors with a 1.15 service factor and size so that nameplate HP is at least equal to the maximum HP requirements of the driven equipment over its entire operating range. 8. Motor enclosure and winding insulation application: a. The following shall apply unless modified by specific Specification Sections: MOTOR LOCATION MOTOR ENCLOSURE / WINDING INSULATION Unclassified Indoor Areas TEFC, Standard Insulation Wet indoor Areas TEFC, Standard Insulation Wet outdoor Areas TEFC, Extra Dip and Bake for Moisture Class I, Division 1 Areas Explosion Proof, Approved for Class I Division 1 Locations Class II, Division 1 Areas Explosion Proof, Approved for Class II Division 1 Locations Class I or Class II, Division 2 Areas Explosion Proof, Approved for Division 1 Locations or TEFC with maximum external frame temperature compatible with the gas or dust in the area NOTE: Provide TENV motors in the smaller horsepower ratings where TEFC is not available. 9. Provide oversize conduit box complete with clamp type grounding terminals inside the conduit box. 10. Balance motors to ISO G2.5 level. a. Submit prior to shipping to equipment manufacturer or job site. C. Submersible Motors: Refer to individual narrow-scope Specification Sections for submersible motor requirements. D. Vibration Isolators: 1. Provide all equipment subject to vibration with restrained spring type vibration isolators or pads according to the manufacturer's written recommendation. E. Space Heaters: 1. Silicone rubber strip type, 120 V rated. 2. Provided on: a. All motors 10 hp and larger mounted outdoors. b. Indoor motors in humid environments as indicated. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR EQUIPMENT 01 61 03 - 11 2.3 COMPONENTS A. Gear Drives and Drive Components: 1. Size drive equipment capable of supporting full load including losses in speed reducers and power transmission. 2. Provide nominal input horsepower rating of each gear or speed reducer at least equal to nameplate horsepower of drive motor. 3. Design drive units for 24 hour continuous service, constructed so oil leakage around shafts is precluded. 4. Utilize gears, gear lubrication systems, gear drives, speed reducers, speed increasers and flexible couplings meeting applicable standards of AGMA. 5. Gear reducers: a. Provide gear reducer totally enclosed and oil lubricated. b. Utilize antifriction bearings throughout. c. Provide worm gear reducers having a service factor of at least 1.20. d. Furnish other helical, spiral bevel, and combination bevel-helical gear reducers with a service factor of at least 1.50. 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Guards: 1. Provide each piece of equipment having exposed moving parts with full length, easily removable guards, meeting OSHA requirements. 2. Interior applications: a. Construct from expanded galvanized steel rolled to conform to shaft or coupling surface. b. Utilize non-flattened type 16 GA galvanized steel with nominal 1/2 inches spacing. c. Connect to equipment frame with hot-dip galvanized bolts and wing nuts. 3. Exterior applications: a. Construct from 16 GA stainless steel or aluminum. b. Construct to preclude entrance of rain, snow, or moisture. c. Roll to conform to shaft or coupling surface. d. Connect to equipment frame with stainless steel bolts and wing nuts. B. Anchorage: 1. Cast-in-place anchorage: a. Provide ASTM F593, Type 316 stainless steel anchorage for all equipment. b. Configuration and number of anchor bolts shall be per manufacturer's recommendations. c. Provide two nuts for each bolt. 2. Drilled anchorage: a. Adhesive anchors per Section 03 15 19. b. Epoxy grout per Section 03 31 30. c. Threaded rods same as cast-in-place. C. Data Plate: 1. Attach a stainless steel data plate to each piece of rotary or reciprocating equipment. 2. Permanently stamp information on data plate including manufacturer's name, equipment operating parameters, serial number and speed. D. Gages: 1. Provide gages in accordance with Section 40 73 00. 2. Provide at the following locations: a. Inlet and outlet of all reciprocating, centrifugal and positive displacement mechanical and process equipment. b. At locations identified on Drawings. 3. Utilize tapping sleeves for mounting per Section 40 05 01. E. Lifting Eye Bolts or Lugs: Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR EQUIPMENT 01 61 03 - 12 1. Provide on all equipment 50 pounds or greater. 2. Provide on other equipment or products as specified in the narrow-scope Specification Sections. 2.5 FABRICATION A. Design, fabricate, and assemble equipment in accordance with modern engineering and shop practices. B. Manufacture individual parts to standard sizes and gages so that repair parts, furnished at any time, can be installed in field. C. Furnish like parts of duplicate units to be interchangeable. D. Ensure that equipment has not been in service at any time prior to delivery, except as required by tests. E. Furnish equipment which requires periodic internal inspection or adjustment with access panels which will not require disassembly of guards, dismantling of piping or equipment or similar major efforts. 1. Quick opening but sound, securable access ports or windows shall be provided for inspection of chains, belts, or similar items. F. Provide common, lipped base plate mounting for equipment and equipment motor where said mounting is a manufacturer's standard option. 1. Provide drain connection for 3/4 inches PVC tubing. G. Machine the mounting feet of rotating equipment. H. Fabricate equipment which will be subject to Corrosive Environment in such a way as to avoid back to back placement of surfaces that cannot be properly prepared and painted. 1. When such back to back fabrication cannot be avoided, provide continuous welds to seal such surfaces from contact with corrosive environment. 2. Where continuous welds are not practical, after painting seal the back to back surfaces from the environment in accordance with Section 07 92 00. I. Natural frequency/critical Speed: 1. All rotating parts accurately machined and in as near perfect rotational balance as practicable. 2. Excessive vibration is sufficient cause for equipment rejection. 3. Ratio of all rotative speeds to natural frequency/critical speed of a unit or components: Greater than 1.2. J. Equipment Base 1. Adequate grout and vent openings to allow grout to flow under entire base. K. Control Panels Engineered and Provided with the Equipment by the Manufacturer: 1. Manufacturer’s standard design for components and control logic unless specific requirements are specified in the specific equipment Specification Section. 2. NEMA or IEC rated components are acceptable, whichever is used in the manufacturer’s standard engineered design, unless specific requirements are required in the specific equipment Specification Section. 3. Affix entire assembly with a UL 508A or UL 698A label "Listed Enclosed Industrial Control Panel" prior to delivery. a. Control panels without an affixed UL 508A or UL 698A label shall be rejected. 4. Provide equipment or control panels with Short Circuit Current Rating (SCCR) labeling as required by NFPA 70 and other applicable codes. a. Determine the SCCR rating by one of the following methods: 1) Method 1: SCCR rating meets or exceeds the available fault current of the source equipment when indicated on the Drawings. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR EQUIPMENT 01 61 03 - 13 2) Method 2: SCCR rating meets or exceeds the source equipment’s Amp Interrupting Current (AIC) rating as indicated on the Drawings. 3) Method 3: SCCR rating meets or exceeds the calculated available short circuit current at the control panel. b. The source equipment is the switchboard, panelboard, motor control center or similar equipment where the control panel circuit originates. c. For Method 3, provide calculations justifying the SCCR rating. Utilize source equipment available fault current or AIC rating as indicated on the Drawings. 2.6 SHOP OR FACTORY PAINT FINISHES A. Electrical Equipment: 1. Provide factory-applied paint coating system(s) for all electrical equipment components except those specified in Section 09 96 00 to receive field painting. a. Field painted equipment: See Section 09 96 00 for factory applied primer/field paint compatibility requirements. B. Field paint other equipment in accordance with Section 09 96 00. 1. See Section 09 96 00 for factory applied primer/field paint compatibility requirements. 2.7 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Motor Tests: 1. Test motors in accordance with NEMA and IEEE standards. 2. Provide routine test for all motors. 3. The Owner reserves the right to select and have tested, either routine or complete, any motor included in the project. a. The Owner will pay all costs, including shipping and handling, for all motors successfully passing the tests. b. Pay all costs, including shipping and handling, for all motors failing the tests. c. If two successive motors of the same manufacturer fail testing, the Owner has the right to reject all motors from that manufacturer. B. Balance: 1. Unless specified otherwise, for all equipment 10 hp or greater, all rotating elements in motors, pumps, blowers, and centrifugal compressors shall be fully assembled, including coupling hubs, before being statically and dynamically balanced. Balance all rotating elements to the following criteria, per ISO 21940-11: 𝑈𝑝𝑒𝑟= 𝐺 𝑥 6.015 𝑥 𝑊/2 𝑁 Where: Uper = Permissible residual unbalance for each correction plane in ounce- inches (OZ-IN). See ISO 21940-11 for acceptable values. G = ISO Balance Quality Grade Number, per ISO 21940-11 W = Rotor weight in pounds N = Maximum continuous operating RPM a. Where specified, balancing reports, demonstrating compliance with this requirement, shall be submitted as product data. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install equipment as shown on the Drawings and other Contract Documents, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, and in accordance with Laws and Regulations. Where the Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR EQUIPMENT 01 61 03 - 14 Contract Documents, manufacturer’s written instructions, or Laws and Regulations conflict, obtain interpretation or clarification from Engineer before proceeding. B. Utilize appropriate templates for anchorage placement for equipment installed on concrete. C. Equipment Drainage Discharges: 1. For equipment having drainage requirements, such as seal water, provide 3/4-inch copper, PVC, or clear plastic tubing from drainage discharge at equipment base to nearest floor drain or equipment drain. Do not discharge liquid across floors. 2. Furnish and install bell up at each equipment base. 3. Route equipment drainage piping clear of major traffic areas, to discharge to locations approved by Engineer. To extent practical, avoid creating tripping hazards. D. Coordination of Equipment Supports and Bases with Structures: 1. Do not construct foundations until major equipment supports are approved by Engineer. E. Equipment Lubrication Points: 1. Extend all non-accessible or difficult-to-access lubrication fittings to reasonably accessible locations to facility operation and maintenance personnel without use of ladders or elevating devices, by providing stainless steel tubing (of appropriate wall thickness for the service and application) to a location which allows easy access of fittings from closest operating floor level. F. Concrete Equipment Support Bases: 1. Install level in both directions, with acceptable vertical tolerance of 1/4-inch±. 2. At anchorage locations, install bases flat and level. G. Machine Bases / Sole Plates: 1. Grease or tape anchorages and jack screws to inhibit grout from adhering to bolts and other anchors. a. Jack screws number and size by equipment manufacturer. 1) Jack screw a) 304 Stainless Steel minimum b) 0.5 inches diameter minimum 2) Jack Screw Pad a) 2 inch diameter minimum b) Anchored in place with a structural epoxy adhesive. 2. Install machine base of rotating equipment on equipment base. 3. Level in both directions using jack screws, with a machinist level, according to machined surfaces on base. Base shall be level within vertical tolerance of the lesser of (a) 0.005 inch per foot with no more than 0.0005 inches difference between any two points, or (b) equipment manufacturer’s written instructions. 4. Level machine base on equipment base and align couplings between driver and driven equipment. H. Couplings for Rotating Equipment: 1. Align in annular and parallel positions. a. For equipment rotating at 1200 rpm or less, align both annular and parallel within 0.001 inch tolerance for couplings four-inch size and smaller. b. Couplings larger than four-inch size: Increase tolerance 0.0005 inch per inch of coupling diameter above four-inch; for example: for six-inch coupling, tolerance is 0.002 inch. For 10 inch coupling, required tolerance is 0.004 inch. c. For equipment rotating at speeds greater than 1200 rpm, tolerance for both annular and parallel positions shall be rate of 0.00025 inch (or less) per inch of coupling diameter. 2. If equipment is furnished by manufacturer as mounted unit , verify factory alignment after installation at the Site. Realign if as necessary, in accordance with equipment manufacturers' written instructions, to provide required factory tolerance.. 3. Inspect surfaces for runout before attempting to trim or align units. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR EQUIPMENT 01 61 03 - 15 I. Grouting: 1. Level onto equipment base with jack screws in accordance with the Contract Documents, provide a dam or formwork around base to contain grout between equipment base and equipment support pad. 2. Preparation: a. Extend dam or formwork to cover leveling shims and blocks. b. Anchor sleeves: 1) Required for equipment (Pumps, Mixers, Blowers) greater than 50 hp 2) If anchor sleeves were used, fill voids in anchor sleeves with foam or room temperature vulcanizing (RTV) silicone to keep grout from filling sleeves. c. Do not use nuts below the machine base to level the unit. d. Saturate top of roughened concrete surface with water before grouting. 3. Grout Installation: a. Install grout until entire space under machine base is completely filled to underside of base. Voids are unacceptable. b. Puddle grout by working a stiff wire through the grout and vent holes, to ensure grout is installed properly and to release air entrained in grout or base cavity. 4. After Grout Installation: a. When grout is sufficiently hardened, remove dam or formwork and finish exposed grout surface to fine, smooth surface. b. Completely cover exposed grout surfaces with wet burlap and keep covering sufficiently wet to prevent too-rapid evaporation of water from grout. c. Check for voids by tapping along the top deck of the mounting plate. A solid thud indicates grout-filled areas while a drum-like hollow sound indicates a void requiring filling. 1) Void areas are to be filled by drilling 1/8 inches NPT holes in opposite corners of each void area. Grout to be pumped into one void with a grout gun until grout emerges from the other vent hole. d. When grout is fully hardened (after not less than seven days), remove jack screws, and tighten nuts on anchor bolts and similar anchors to required torque. e. Inspect and verify levelness of machine base and, if not in accordance with requirements, remedy by removing base and reinstalling in accordance with the Contract Documents. f. Inspect driver-driven equipment for proper alignment. When not in accordance with requirements, remedy so that the Work is not defective. 3.2 INSTALLATION CHECKS A. For all equipment specifically required in detailed specifications, secure services of experienced, competent, and authorized representative(s) of equipment manufacturer to visit site of work and inspect, check, adjust and approve equipment installation. 1. In each case, representative(s) shall be present during placement and start-up of equipment and as often as necessary to resolve any operational issues which may arise. B. Secure from equipment manufacturer's representative(s) a written report certifying that equipment: 1. Has been properly installed and lubricated. 2. Is in accurate alignment. 3. Is free from any undue stress imposed by connecting piping or anchor bolts. 4. Has been operated under full load conditions and that it operated satisfactorily. a. Secure and deliver a field written report to Owner immediately prior to leaving jobsite. C. No separate payment shall be made for installation checks. 1. All or any time expended during installation check does not qualify as Operation and Maintenance training or instruction time when specified. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR EQUIPMENT 01 61 03 - 16 3.3 IDENTIFICATION OF EQUIPMENT AND HAZARD WARNING SIGNS A. Identify equipment and install hazard warning signs in accordance with Section 10 14 00. 3.4 FIELD PAINTING AND PROTECTIVE COATINGS A. For required field painting and protective coatings, comply with Section 09 96 00, High Performance Industrial Coatings. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. General: 1. Furnish equipment manufacturer’s field quality control services and testing as specified in the individual equipment Specification Sections. 2. Execute pre-demonstration requirements in accordance with Section 01 75 00. 3. Perform and report on all tests required by the equipment manufacturer’s Operation and Maintenance Manual. 4. Provide testing for all equipment furnished or installed as part of the Work. 5. Repair or replace equipment shown to be out of range of the acceptable tolerance until the equipment meets or exceeds acceptable standards. 6. Equip testing and analysis personnel with all appropriate project related reference material required to perform tests, analyze results, and provide documentation including, but not limited to: a. Contract Drawings and Specifications. b. Related construction change documentation. c. Approved Shop Drawings. d. Approved Operation and Maintenance Manuals. e. Other pertinent information as required. B. Equipment Monitoring and Testing Plans: 1. Approved in accordance with Shop Drawing submittal schedule. 2. Included as a minimum: a. Qualifications of firm, field personnel, and analysis personnel doing the Work. b. List and description of testing and analysis equipment to be utilized. c. List of all equipment to be testing, including: 1) Name and tag numbers identified in the Contract Documents. 2) Manufacturer’s serial numbers. 3) Other pertinent manufacturer identification, C. Instruments Used in Equipment and Connections Quality Control Testing: 1. Minimum calibration frequency: a. Field analog instruments: Not more than 6 months. b. Field digital instruments: Not more than 12 months. c. Laboratory instruments: Not more than 12 months. d. If instrument manufacturer’s calibration requirements are more stringent, those requirements shall govern. 2. Carry current calibration status and labels on all testing instruments. 3. See individual testing programs for additional instrumentation compliance requirements. D. Testing and Monitoring Program Documentation: 1. Provide reports with tabbed sections for each piece of equipment tested. 2. Include all testing results associated with each piece of equipment under that equipment’s tabbed section. a. Include legible copies of all forms used to record field test information. 3. Prior to start of testing, submit one copy of preliminary report format for Engineer review and comment a. Include data gathering and sample test report forms that will be utilized. 4. In the final report, include as a minimum, the following information for all equipment tested: Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR EQUIPMENT 01 61 03 - 17 a. Equipment identification, including: 1) Name and tag numbers identified in the Contract Documents. 2) Manufacturer’s serial numbers. 3) Other pertinent manufacturer identification, b. Date and time of each test. c. Ambient conditions including temperature, humidity, and precipitation. d. Visual inspection report. e. Description of test and referenced standards, if any, followed while conducting tests. f. Results of initial and all retesting. g. Acceptance criteria. h. "As found" and "as left" conditions. i. Corrective action, if required, taken to meet acceptance. j. Verification of corrective action signed by the Contractor, equipment supplier, and Owner’s representative. k. Instrument calibration dates of all instruments used in testing. 5. Provide three (3) bound final reports prior to Project final completion. E. Electrical Equipment and Connections Testing Program: 1. Perform testing on Electrical equipment, connections, and motors in accordance with 26 08 13 - Acceptance Testing. F. Other Testing: 1. Perform tests and inspections not specifically listed but required to assure equipment is safe to energize and operate. 2. Subbase that supports the equipment base and that is made in the form of a cast iron or steel structure that has supporting beams, legs, and cross members that are cast, welded, or bolted shall be tested for a natural frequency of vibration after equipment is mounted. a. The ratio of the natural frequency of the structure to the frequency of the disturbing force shall not be between 0.5 and 1.5. G. Infrared Thermography Testing Program: 1. Perform infrared thermography testing for equipment specified in other Divisions during the Equipment Demonstration Period. a. Perform on all rotating and reciprocating equipment having drivers 25 hp or greater. 2. Additional requirements for infrared thermography monitoring and testing equipment: a. Temperature range: -10 to 350 degrees C. b. Accuracy: ±2 percent or 2 degrees C, whichever is greater. c. Repeatability: ±1 percent or 1 degree C, whichever is greater. d. Temperature indication resolution: 0.1 degrees C. e. Minimum focus distance: 0.3 meters. f. Output in color palettes: JPEG, BMP, or other digital format compatible with Windows. 3. Perform inspection per ASTM E1934. a. Operate VFD driven equipment at 100 percent speed during thermographic inspection. 4. Acceptability of electrical connections and components based on temperature comparison between components and ambient air temperatures not greater than 10 degrees C per ASTM E1934. 5. Acceptability of motors and equipment bearings based on temperature rise not greater than 5 DEGC above the equipment and/or bearing manufacturers published criteria. H. Equipment Field Vibration Monitoring and Testing Program: 1. Perform vibration monitoring and testing for equipment specified in other Divisions during the Equipment Demonstration Period. 2. Perform field vibration testing on each item of rotating and reciprocating equipment having driver 50 HP and greater 3. Acceptability of equipment conditions, except pumps, based on ISO 1940-1 Balance Quality Grade G6.3 criteria. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR EQUIPMENT 01 61 03 - 18 4. Acceptability of pumping equipment to be based on current ANSI/HI criteria: a. ANSI/HI 11.6-2012 for Submersible Pumps in a Wet-pit or Dry-pit configuration. b. ANSI/HI 9.6.4-2016 for all other centrifugal pumps. 5. Utilize an Engineer approved 3rd party testing agency to perform vibration monitoring and testing on equipment. 6. For variable speed equipment provide vibration testing at no more than 3 percent increments of maximum speed throughout entire operating range. 7. Provide machinery condition diagnosis based on an acceptable machinery vibration severity guide or machinery fault guide analysis provided by the testing agency. 8. Tolerances for pumping equipment shall be per HI published standards. 9. Repair or replace equipment shown to be out of range of the specified tolerance until the equipment meets the specified normal operation range required in the machinery fault guide analysis. 10. Document testing with written report. a. Report to include initial testing results, acceptance criteria, corrective action taken to meet acceptance, verification of corrective action and acceptance report and baseline. b. Natural frequency of installed equipment utilizing an impact hammer. c. Report to include graphical plots of vibration signature for each test point at a scale which illustrates all vibration levels greater than 0.025 ips RMS. 3.6 DEMONSTRATION A. Demonstrate equipment in accordance with Section 01 75 00. END OF SECTION Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR EQUIPMENT 01 61 03 - 19 EXHIBIT A MANUFACTURER FIELD SERVICE REPORT This field service report is generic in nature. An electronic copy of this form will be furnished upon request from the Engineer. This report is to reflect that all requirements of the Operations and Maintenance Manual and the individual equipment specification requirements have been performed for the installation and operation and also to provide a baseline for amperage draw for each phase, vibration readings, rotation, alignment and all other applicable tests required to insure that the equipment has been installed properly. A MFSR will be required for each individual piece of equipment requiring a MFSR. Definitions of Reports: Initial service report: Required for construction preparations. Equipment delivered to site is in good condition and conforms to specification requirements. Anchor bolts, hardware and ancillary items (piping, flanges, conduits, fuel/power supply) are compatible with equipment. Interim service report: Required for equipment installation onto base or foundation. Piping connections, electrical and control connections or structural attachment are complete. For equipment stored on site over four weeks, interim service report will document that manufacturer’s long-term storage procedures have been incorporated and equipment has not been damaged, nor coatings deteriorated. Final service report is to be completed when equipment can be started, electrical amperage and voltage draw measured, cold and hot alignments performed, vibration testing and monitoring performed and the equipment is found to be in compliance with Manufacturer’s operating parameters and the requirements of the individual equipment specifications. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR EQUIPMENT 01 61 03 - 20 PROJECT: __________________________________________________________________________ Report Status: Initial Service Report completed and submitted on _______________________ Interim Service Report completed and submitted on ______________________ Final Service Report completed and submitted on ________________________ Commencement of Warranty ________________________________________ I Description A. Equipment Name and Identification: ______________________________ ____________________________________________________________ B. Serial Number: _______________________________________________ C. Specification Section Number: __________________________________ D. Manufacturer: ________________________________________________ E. Representative: _______________________________________________ F. Type of Service: Initial[_____ Interim _____ Final _____ II General Review A. The above referenced equipment/material/supplies have been inspected, checked, and adjusted. Yes _____ No _____ Summary: _________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________________ B. The above referenced equipment/material/supplies were placed upon properly prepared or suitable substrate. N/A _____ Yes _____ No _____ Summary: _________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________________ C. The above referenced equipment/material/supplies are free from any undue stress imposed by any connected piping, anchor bolts or any other load. N/A _____ Yes _____ No _____ Summary: _________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________________ Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR EQUIPMENT 01 61 03 - 21 D. The above referenced equipment/material/supplies have operated under design conditions. N/A _____ Yes _____ No _____ Summary: _________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________________ E. The above referenced equipment/material/supplies have been installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and the Procurement Documents, require no corrective work, and are hereby approved. Yes _____ No _____ Summary: _________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________________ F. The above referenced equipment/material/supplies are acceptable to the manufacturer as installed providing the following corrective action(s) are performed: 1. ______________________________________________________________________ 2. ______________________________________________________________________ 3. ______________________________________________________________________ 4. ______________________________________________________________________ 5. ______________________________________________________________________ III O&M Manuals A. The O&M manual as presented contains all information required for proper operation, maintenance, and instruction of this system. N/A _____ Yes _____ No _____ Summary: _________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________________ IV Preventive Maintenance A. The preventive maintenance summary outlined in the O&M manual is acceptable for operation of the system throughout the warranty period. N/A _____ Yes _____ No _____ Summary: _________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________________ V Operator Training/Classroom Instruction A. Training and instruction have been performed in accordance with the requirements of the Procurement Documents. N/A _____ Yes _____ No _____ B. Final Training/Classroom Instruction Completed on: _______________________________ Summary: _________________________________________________________________ Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR EQUIPMENT 01 61 03 - 22 __________________________________________________________________________ VI Remarks ______________________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________________ VII Certification I hereby certify, that I, ______________, am a duly authorized representative of the manufacturer, that I am empowered by the manufacturer to inspect, approve, and operate his equipment, and that I am authorized to make recommendations required to assure that the equipment furnished by the manufacturer is complete and operational, except as modified herein. I also certify that all information contained herein is true and accurate. By: ____________________________________________________________ (Authorized Representative) For: ___________________________________________________________ Date: __________________________________________________________ VIII Acknowledgments By: ____________________________________________________________ For: ___________________________________________________________ (Contractor) Date: __________________________________________________________ By: ____________________________________________________________ For: ___________________________________________________________ (Engineer) Date: __________________________________________________________ Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR EQUIPMENT 01 61 03 - 23 Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 This page intentionally left blank. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents PRODUCT DELIVERY REQUIREMENTS 01 65 00 - 1 SECTION 01 65 00 PRODUCT DELIVERY REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. General requirements for: a. Coordination of deliveries. b. Preparing materials and equipment for shipping from the production or fabrication facility, including packaging. c. Shipment. d. Delivery of materials and equipment to the Site. e. Inspection upon delivery and remedy of damaged, deteriorated, or otherwise defective items, and remedy of missing or lost items. B. Scope: 1. Contractor shall make all arrangements for packaging, shipping, delivering, inspecting upon delivery, and unloading upon delivery materials and equipment necessary and required for the Work. 2. Contractor shall provide all labor, materials, equipment, tools, incidentals, and services necessary to have materials and equipment properly packaged, shipped, and delivered to the Site, and all related Work required by the Contract Documents. C. Related Requirements: Include but are not limited to: 1. Section 01 66 00 - Product Storage and Handling Requirements. 1.2 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: 1. To extent practicable, coordinate shipping and delivery of materials and equipment with anticipated shipping requirements, such as allowing sufficient time for customs inspections on international shipments, availability of shipping services and facilities, and seasonal concerns (such as shipments that may be influenced by major tropical storms and predictable, typical weather). 2. Coordinate shipping and delivery of materials and equipment to the Site and other locations where such items may be stored prior to delivery to the Site. Coordinate such shipments and deliveries with the progress of the Work and status of adequate facilities, whether temporary storage or permanent installation locations, necessary to properly store and safeguard materials and equipment to be incorporated into the Work. 3. Where possible, deliver to the Site materials and equipment as close as possible to when such items will be incorporated into appropriately protected, permanent installation location. 1.3 PREPARATION FOR SHIPMENT A. Factory Assembly: 1. When practical, factory-assemble materials and equipment. Mark or tag separate parts and assemblies to facilitate field assembly. B. Temporary Protection: 1. Appropriately cover, with strippable, protective coating or other material, machined parts and unpainted, uncoated, or unprotected surfaces subject to damage or deterioration caused by weather elements or environment, 2. To extent practical, strippable, removable, disposable protective materials shall be recyclable. 3. To extent practical, strippable, removable, and disposable protective items shall be type resulting in minimum waste and cleanup upon removal. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents PRODUCT DELIVERY REQUIREMENTS 01 65 00 - 2 4. Protection of Electrical Equipment, Instrumentation and Controls, Items with Computer Chips Solid-State Devices, and Other Electronics: a. Provide appropriate temporary protection of electrical equipment, microprocessors, and other electronics from humidity, moisture, and corrosion by appropriate packaging, protection, desiccants, and volatile corrosion inhibitor (VCI) blocks. b. Immediately prior to shipment, provide new, fresh desiccants and ensure integrity of other protective materials. C. Packaging: 1. Package materials and equipment to facilitate handling, and protect materials and equipment from damage during shipping, handling, and storage. 2. Mark, label, or tag, on outside of each package, crate, and container, to indicate associated: a. Purchase order number. b. Bill of lading number. c. Delivery address (including facility name, where applicable). d. Owner’s contract designation or Project name. e. Contractor name. f. Purchasing Subcontractor’s name (as applicable). g. Contents by name and designation within the Work (for example, “Influent Pump No. 1”), h. Approximate weight of container, crate, package, including packaging. i. Special instructions for handling and protection during shipment and unloading. 3. The Site may be listed as the “ship to” or “delivery” address; but Owner or facility manager shall not be listed as recipient of shipment unless otherwise directed in writing by Engineer. 4. Truthfully and accurately mark, label, or tag items for shipment and delivery. 5. Include complete packing lists and bills of materials with each shipment. 6. Protect materials and equipment with appropriate, temporary packaging or protection when such items may rotate or move during shipment. 7. Protect materials and equipment from exposure to weather elements, adverse environments, and keep thoroughly dry and dust-free. Protect painted surfaces against impact, abrasion, discoloration, and other damage and deterioration. 8. Lubricate bearings and other items requiring lubrication, in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions. 1.4 SHIPPING A. Notification of Shipments: 1. Keep Engineer, and Owner, informed of delivery of all materials and equipment to be incorporated into the Work. 2. Upon receipt of Supplier’s advance notice of shipment, not less than seven days prior to delivery of materials and equipment at the Site or Contractor’s storage location, furnish Engineer written notice of anticipated delivery date and specific location (at the Site or Contractor’s storage location, as applicable) of the following: a. Package Pump Station Enclosure. B. Do not ship materials and equipment until: 1. Related Shop Drawings, product data, Samples, shop testing plan Submittals, and other Submittals required by the Contract Documents are approved by Engineer, including, but not necessarily limited to, all Action Submittals associated with the materials and equipment being delivered. 2. Manufacturer’s written instructions for handling, storing, and installing the associated materials and equipment have been submitted to and accepted by Engineer, in accordance with the Specifications. 3. Results of source quality control activities (factory testing and inspections), when required by the Contract Documents for the subject materials or equipment, have been submitted to and accepted by Engineer. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents PRODUCT DELIVERY REQUIREMENTS 01 65 00 - 3 4. Facilities required for handling materials and equipment, in accordance with the Contract Documents and manufacturer’s instructions, are in place and available at the delivery location. 5. Required storage facilities and protection measures have been provided. C. Loss or Damage During Shipment: 1. Unless otherwise indicated in the Contract Documents (whether expressly or in provisions regarding builder’s risk insurance), Contractor is responsible for all loss, damage, and deterioration to materials and equipment incurred during shipment and delivery. 2. Contractor is not eligible for additional Contract Times or increase in the Contract Price due to delays or costs incurred due to loss, damage, or deterioration during shipment, unless Owner was responsible for shipping the subject materials or equipment to the Site or other delivery location. 1.5 DELIVERY A. Scheduling and Timing of Deliveries: 1. Arrange deliveries of materials and equipment in accordance with the Progress Schedule accepted by Engineer and in ample time to facilitate inspection and observation prior to installation. 2. Schedule deliveries to minimize space required for, and duration of, storage of materials and equipment at the Site or other delivery location, as applicable. 3. Coordinate deliveries to avoid conflicting with the Work and conditions at the Site, and to accommodate the following: a. Work of other contractors at or adjacent to the Site, Owner, , and others. b. Storage space limitations. c. Availability of appropriate construction equipment and machinery, tools, and qualified personnel for inspecting, unloading, and handling materials and equipment. d. Owner’s use of premises. 4. Deliver materials and equipment to the Site during regular working hours. 5. Deliver materials and equipment to avoid delaying the Work and the Project. B. Deliveries: 1. Provide Contractor’s telephone number to shipper; do not provide Owner’s telephone number to shipper or carrier. 2. Arrange for deliveries while Contractor’s personnel are at the Site. Contractor shall receive and coordinate shipments upon delivery. Shipments delivered to the Site when Contractor is not present will be refused by Owner, and Contractor shall be responsible for the associated delays and costs, including demurrage. C. Containers and Marking: 1. Have materials and equipment delivered in manufacturer’s original, unopened, labeled containers. 2. Clearly mark partial deliveries of component parts of materials and equipment to identify materials and equipment, to allow easy accumulation of parts, and to facilitate assembly. D. Inspection of Materials and Equipment Upon Delivery: 1. Immediately upon delivery, visually but critically inspect shipment to verify that: a. Materials and equipment comply with the Contract Documents and approved or accepted (as applicable) Submittals. b. Quantities are correct. c. Materials and equipment are undamaged and of required quality. d. Containers and packages are intact and labels are complete and legible. 2. Eligibility for Payment: a. Materials and equipment are not eligible for payment until duly inspected and determined to be in accordance with the Contract Documents and Engineer-approved Submittals, without damage or deterioration. b. No payment can be made for damaged, deteriorated, or otherwise defective items. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents PRODUCT DELIVERY REQUIREMENTS 01 65 00 - 4 c. No payment can be made for missing or lost items. d. Other provisions of the Contract Documents may establish other preconditions for payment for delivered material and equipment, including Section 01 29 76 – Progress Payment Procedures. 3. Damaged, Deteriorated, and Otherwise Defective Items: a. Promptly remove from the Site damaged, deteriorated, or defective materials and equipment and expedite delivery of new, undamaged materials and equipment. b. Promptly remedy incomplete or lost materials and equipment. c. Furnish materials and equipment in accordance with the Contract Documents, to avoid delaying progress of the Work. d. Promptly advise Engineer in writing: (1) when damaged, deteriorated, incomplete, or otherwise defective materials and equipment are delivered, and (2) associated impact on the Progress Schedule. E. Handling of Materials and Equipment Upon Delivery: 1. Provide construction equipment and machinery, tools, and qualified personnel necessary to unload and handle materials and equipment, including those furnished by Owner, by methods that prevent damaging, defacing, and soiling materials and equipment and packaging. 2. Comply with Section 01 66 00 – Product Storage and Handling Requirements. 3. Provide additional protection during unloading and handling as necessary to prevent scraping, marring, and otherwise damaging materials and equipment and adjacent surfaces. 4. Unload and handle materials and equipment by methods that prevent bending, warping, and overstressing. 5. Lift heavy components only at designated lifting points. 6. Unload and handle materials and equipment in safe manner and as recommended by manufacturer to prevent damage. Do not drop, roll, or skid materials and equipment off delivery vehicles or at other times during unloading and handling. PART 2 - PRODUCTS - (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION - (NOT USED) END OF SECTION Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents PRODUCT STORAGE AND HANDLING REQUIREMENTS 01 66 00 - 1 SECTION 01 66 00 PRODUCT STORAGE AND HANDLING REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. General requirements for: a. Payment considerations for stored materials and equipment. b. Handling of materials and equipment. c. Storage of materials and equipment, including: 1) General provisions for storage. 2) Storage locations. 3) Protection of stored items. 4) Storage of items containing Constituents of Concern. 5) Outdoor, uncovered storage. 6) Outdoor, covered storage. 7) Fully-protected storage. 8) Removal of temporary storage facilities and restoration of storage areas. d. Maintenance of storage. B. Scope: 1. Contractor shall provide all labor, materials, equipment, tools, services, lands, and incidentals necessary and required to store and handle materials and equipment to be incorporated into the Work, and other materials and equipment at the Site, adjacent areas, and offsite storage areas. 2. Comply with Section 01 71 33 - Protection of the Work and Property, relative to handling and storing materials and equipment. C. Related Requirements: Include but are not limited to: 1. Section 01 29 76 - Progress Payment Procedures. 2. Section 01 57 05 - Temporary Controls. 3. Section 01 65 00 - Product Delivery Requirements. 4. Section 01 71 33 - Protection of the Work and Property. 1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and Payment: 1. Materials and equipment delivered but not suitably stored and protected will not be eligible for payment. 2. Engineer may recommend reduction in payment, and Owner may reduce payments to Contractor (“set-offs”) by an appropriate amount when stored items are subsequently revealed to be improperly stored or protected. 3. Payment for Suitably Stored Items: a. Requirements for payment for materials and equipment delivered and suitably stored, but not yet incorporated into the Work, are in the General Conditions, as may be modified by the Supplementary Conditions, and Section 01 29 76 - Progress Payment Procedures. b. Materials and equipment delivered and suitably stored, but not yet incorporated into the Work, will not be eligible for payment until the inspection upon delivery, required in Section 01 65 00 - Product Delivery Requirements, is completed and Engineer concurs that such items generally appear to be in good condition, in accordance with the Contract Documents, and are of the required quality and quantity. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents PRODUCT STORAGE AND HANDLING REQUIREMENTS 01 66 00 - 2 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Informational Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Affidavits of Inspection and Maintenance Performed on Mechanical and Electrical Equipment in Long-Term Storage: a. Submit in accordance with requirements of Article 3.1 of this Section. 2. Other Records of Inspection and Maintenance of Stored Materials and Equipment: a. Establish and maintain such records as required by this Section. b. Submit to Engineer or Owner (as applicable) within three days of Contractor’s receipt of such request. 1.4 HANDLING A. Handling of Materials and Equipment – General: 1. Handle materials and equipment to be incorporated into the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents and manufacturer’s written instructions. 2. During handling and assembling of materials and equipment: a. Maintain validity of manufacturers’ warranties. b. Comply with: 1) Section 01 65 00 - Product Delivery Requirements. 2) Section 01 71 33 - Protection of the Work and Property. c. Do not drop, drag (without appropriate rollers or skids), or scrape materials and equipment. d. Use proper construction equipment and machinery, and tools, operated by sufficient number of qualified personnel. e. Maintain materials and equipment in neutral position. f. Do not exert undue stress on materials and equipment. g. Do not deform, bend, or damage materials and equipment. h. Do not deform or mar shafts, bearings, or other parts. B. Additional Requirements for Hoisting and Lifting: 1. When lifting or hoisting, support materials and equipment from appropriate lifting points using proper hooks and suitable nylon lifting straps, chains, and cables. Do not mar or scrape surfaces of materials and equipment during handling. 2. Do not support rigging from building or structure without written approval of Engineer. 1.5 STORAGE A. Storage – General: 1. Contractor shall make all arrangements and provide all measures necessary and required for, and pay all costs associated with, storing materials and equipment. 2. Store materials and equipment in accordance with the Contract Documents and manufacturer’s written instructions. In event of conflict between the Contract Documents and manufacturer’s written instructions regarding storage and protection, comply with the more-stringent, more-protective requirements. 3. Comply with Section 01 71 33 - Protection of the Work and Property. 4. Records: a. Establish and maintain up-to-date account of materials and equipment in storage, to facilitate preparation of progress payment requests, if the Contract Documents provide for payment for materials and equipment not incorporated in the Work but delivered and suitably stored at the Site or at another location agreed to in writing. 5. Arrange stored materials and equipment to allow easy access for observation or inspection by Owner, Engineer, and authorities having jurisdiction. 6. Inspect and maintain stored materials and equipment in accordance with this Section’s Article 3.1 (“Maintenance of Storage”). B. Storage Location: 1. Area(s) available at the Site for storing materials and equipment are addressed in Section 01 14 19 - Use of Site. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents PRODUCT STORAGE AND HANDLING REQUIREMENTS 01 66 00 - 3 2. When onsite storage is insufficient, Contractor shall provide additional lands for storage facilities as necessary and required for the Work. 3. Restrictions on Storage Locations: a. Do not store materials or equipment in structures being constructed unless approved by Engineer in writing. b. Do not use lawns, landscaped areas, or private property for storage without written permission of property owner. c. Comply with: 1) Section 01 14 19 - Use of Site. 2) Section 01 71 33 - Protection of the Work and Property. C. Protection of Stored Items – General: 1. Store materials and equipment indicated below to ensure preservation of quality and fitness for intended uses in the Work, including proper protection against damage and deterioration resulting from: water (including precipitation, flood, and other), moisture, humidity, wind, dust, freezing, and outdoor ambient air high temperature as high as 100 degrees F. Temperature and humidity inside crates, containers, storage structures, and packaging may be significantly higher than outdoor ambient air temperature. 2. Store in indoor, climate-controlled storage all materials and equipment subject to damage or deterioration by water, moisture, humidity, heat, cold, and other elements, unless otherwise acceptable to Owner and Engineer. 3. Do not open manufacturer’s crates, containers, and packaging until time of installation, unless recommended by the manufacturer or otherwise required in the Contract Documents. 4. Store all materials and equipment off the ground (or floor) on raised supports such as skids or pallets. 5. Electrical Equipment, Instrumentation and Controls, Items Containing Computer Chips, Solid-State Devices, and Other Electronics: a. Contractor shall obtain, coordinate, and comply with specific temperature, humidity, and environmental limitations on materials and equipment, because temperature inside cabinets and components stored in warm temperatures can approach 200 degrees F. b. Protect from water, moisture, humidity, dust, heat, cold, and other potentially harmful elements and environments. Space heaters provided in equipment shall be connected and operating at all times until equipment is connected to active, permanent, electrical power. c. Provide inside each electrical panel, control panel, and other enclosures with electronic device(s) each of the following: (1) desiccant, (2) volatile corrosion inhibitor (VCI) blocks, (3) moisture indicator, and (4) maximum- and minimum-indicating thermometer. d. Check panels and equipment not less than once per month. Replace desiccant, VCI, and moisture indicator the earlier of: (1) as often as necessary, or (2) every six months. e. Establish and maintain certified record of daily maximum and minimum temperature and humidity in storage facility. Such records shall be available for Engineer’s and Owner’s inspection upon request. Certified record of monthly inspection, noting maximum and minimum temperature for month, condition of desiccant, VCI, and moisture indicator, shall be available to Engineer and Owner upon request.. 6. Finished Surfaces: a. Protect finished surfaces against impact, abrasion, discoloration, and other damage. b. Remedy, in accordance with requirements of item manufacturer and finishing system manufacturer damaged, marred, or deteriorated finishes, to Engineer’s satisfaction. 7. Contractor is fully responsible for loss, damage, and deterioration, including theft and vandalism, to stored materials and equipment. D. Storage of Materials or Equipment Containing Constituents of Concern: 1. Prevent contamination of personnel, storage areas, the Site, and adjacent areas. E. Uncovered Storage: Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents PRODUCT STORAGE AND HANDLING REQUIREMENTS 01 66 00 - 4 1. The following materials may be stored outdoors without cover on supports, so there is no contact with the ground: a. Reinforcing steel. b. Precast concrete materials. c. Structural steel. d. Metal stairs. e. Handrails and railings. f. Grating. g. Checker plate. h. Metal access hatches, such as floor doors, roof hatches, and the like. i. Castings. j. Fiberglass items. k. Rigid electrical conduit, except PVC-coated conduit. l. Fencing intended for permanent, outdoor installation. m. Piping, except PVC or chlorinated PVC (CPVC) pipe. F. Covered Storage: 1. The following materials and equipment may be stored outdoors on supports and completely covered with covering impervious to water: a. Grout and mortar materials. b. Masonry units. c. Metal decking. d. Rough lumber. e. Soil materials and granular materials such as aggregate. f. PVC and CPVC pipe. g. PVC-coated electrical conduit. h. Filter media. 2. Properly and fully secure covers against coming loose in strong winds. 3. Install coverings properly sloped to prevent accumulation of water. 4. Loose Soil Material and Loose Granular Material: a. Store such materials in well-drained areas. b. Prevent mixing of such materials with foreign matter. Provide underlying separation layer or store on solid, impervious surface, where appropriate. c. Provide temporary erosion and sediment controls for stockpiled soil materials in accordance with Section 01 57 05 - Temporary Controls. G. Fully-Protected Storage: 1. Store all materials and equipment not indicated in the provisions above regarding uncovered storage and covered storage on supports, in buildings, trailers, or other suitable temporary storage facility with concrete or wood flooring, solid and impervious roof, and fully closed walls on all sides. 2. Covering with visqueen plastic sheeting or similar material in storage space without floor, roof, and walls is unacceptable. 3. Provide heated storage for materials and equipment that could be damaged or deteriorate by low temperatures or freezing. 4. Provide air-conditioned storage for materials and equipment that could be damaged or deteriorate by high temperature or humidity. 5. Protect mechanical and electrical equipment from being contaminated by dust, dirt, and moisture. 6. Maintain temperature and humidity at levels recommended by materials and equipment manufacturers. 7. Prevent infestation of stored items by pests and rodents. Promptly and properly remedy such infestation when apparent. H. Removal of Temporary Storage Facilities and Restoration of Storage Areas: 1. Completely remove temporary storage facilities when no longer necessary for the Work. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents PRODUCT STORAGE AND HANDLING REQUIREMENTS 01 66 00 - 5 2. Restore areas used for storage and areas occupied by temporary storage facilities, in accordance with the Contract Documents, including Section 01 71 33 - Protection of the Work and Property. PART 2 - PRODUCTS - (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 MAINTENANCE OF STORAGE A. On a scheduled basis, periodically inspect stored materials and equipment to ensure that: 1. Condition and status of storage facilities is adequate to provide required storage conditions. 2. Required environmental conditions are maintained on continuing basis. 3. Materials and equipment exposed to weather elements or other environment are not adversely affected. B. Mechanical and Electrical Equipment in Long-Term Storage: 1. Meaning of the term “long-term storage’ is as established in written instructions of manufacturer of associated materials or equipment. 2. Mechanical and electrical equipment requiring long-term storage shall have complete manufacturer’s written instructions for servicing each item, with notice of enclosed instructions shown on exterior of crate, container, or packaging. 3. Frequency of inspections and maintenance of stored items shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions. 4. For mechanical equipment with bearings and shafts, manually rotate shaft during inspection and maintenance, as recommended by equipment manufacturer. 5. Space heaters that are part of electrical equipment shall be connected and operated continuously until equipment is connected to permanent electrical power supply. 6. Other requirements for maintenance during storage of electrical equipment, instrumentation and controls, items with computer chips, solid-state devices and other electronics are in this Section’s provision on general protection during storage. C. Affidavits: 1. Submit to Engineer affidavit for each time maintenance and inspection was performed on materials and equipment in long-term storage. Affidavit shall be signed by Contractor and entity performing the inspection and maintenance on the stored items. 2. Indicate on affidavit: a. Date of inspection. b. Personnel involved and employer of each. c. Condition of storage environment. d. Specific stored items inspected, equipment condition, problems observed, problems corrected, maintenance tasks performed, and other relevant information. e. Signature of Contractor’s person responsible for the inspection and maintenance. f. Signed and notarized statement by items’ manufacturer indicating whether storage conditions and tasks performed are suitable for continued compliance with manufacturer’s warranties. 3. Submit each affidavit, complete, not later than seven days after performing associated inspection and maintenance. END OF SECTION Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 This page intentionally left blank. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents MOBILIZATION AND DEMOBILIZATION 01 71 14 - 1 SECTION 01 71 14 MOBILIZATION AND DEMOBILIZATION GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Construction mobilization and demobilization. B. Scope: 1. Contractor shall provide all labor, materials, equipment, tools, services, and incidentals to perform mobilization and demobilization for the Work. 2. This Section is general and does not necessarily indicate all activities required for mobilization and demobilization, which may be indicated in other parts of the Contract Documents., C. Related Requirements: Include, but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Section 01 14 19 - Use of Site. 2. Section 01 22 00 - Measurement and Payment. 3. Section 01 29 73 - Schedule of Values. 4. Section 01 57 05 - Temporary Controls. 5. Section 01 71 33 - Protection of the Work and Property. 6. Section 01 74 00 - Cleaning. 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and Payment: 1. Where costs of mobilization and demobilization are to be included in a specific bid/pay item, such item is indicated in the Contract, including Section 01 22 00 - Measurement and Payment. 2. Where the Contract does not expressly require costs for mobilization and demobilization are to be under specific bid/pay item(s), Contractor may allocate such costs among bid/pay items as Contractor deems appropriate. 3. Where mobilization and demobilization is to be part of a larger lump sum bid/pay item, limitations on eligibility for payment of mobilization and demobilization costs are indicated in Section 01 29 73 - Schedule of Values. B. If costs for mobilization, demobilization, or both change as a result of Contract modifications, include the total cost of such changes to mobilization and demobilization in Change Proposal submitted for each associated change. Make no subsequent claim, whether via Change Proposal, Claim, or dispute, for additional compensation for mobilization, demobilization, or both. 1.03 MOBILIZATION AND DEMOBILIZATION - GENERAL A. Do not commence mobilization at the Site or other areas until: 1. The Contract is signed by both parties and is effective. 2. Required insurance documentation, performance bond, and payment bond have been submitted by Contractor and accepted by Owner, and builder’s risk insurance complying with the Contract Documents is furnished and in place, and documentation thereof accepted by the parties. 3. Conditions, if any, of Owner-issued Notice to Proceed, if any, have been complied with by the applicable party. 4. Preconstruction conference(s), including items on agenda for site mobilization matters, is completed. 5. Preconstruction photographic documentation is obtained and submitted in accordance with the Contract Documents. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents MOBILIZATION AND DEMOBILIZATION 01 71 14 - 2 B. Mobilization Work includes, but is not limited to: 1. Establishing temporary controls in accordance with Section 01 57 05 - Temporary Controls. 2. Establishing Contractor’s staging and laydown areas, in accordance with Section 01 14 19 - Use of Site. 3. Establishing temporary utilities and temporary facilities in accordance with the Contract Documents. 4. Establishing required and necessary temporary project signage. 5. Other mobilization Work required by the Contract Documents, including Section 01 22 00 - Measurement and Payment, and Section 01 29 73 - Schedule of Values. C. Demobilization Work includes, but is not limited to: 1. Removing from the Site and other areas Contractor’s temporary utilities, temporary facilities, temporary signage, temporary security measures; construction equipment, machinery, and tools; ,unused items of materials and equipment; and other items. 2. Final restoration and repair of damage caused by Contractor, in accordance with Section 01 71 33 - Protection of the Work and Property. 3. Final cleaning in accordance with Section 01 74 00 - Cleaning. 4. Other demobilization Work required by the Contract Documents, including Section 01 22 00 - Measurement and Payment, and Section 01 29 73 - Schedule of Values. PRODUCTS (NOT USED) EXECUTION - (NOT USED) Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents FIELD ENGINEERING 01 71 23 - 1 SECTION 01 71 23 FIELD ENGINEERING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Requirements for Contractor’s onsite recordkeeping. 2. Contractor’s field engineering. 3. Contractor’s surveying and layouts, and associated requirements. 4. This section supplements the General Conditions’ provisions on reference points and other matters. B. Scope: 1. Contractor shall provide onsite recordkeeping, field engineering (not related to design of the completed Work), surveying and layout services, and professional services of the types indicated for the Project, including: a. Furnishing civil, structural, geotechnical, electrical, and other professional engineering and geology services, whether required by the Contract Documents or necessary in Contractor’s judgment, to perform Contractor’s means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction. Such services do not include professional services associated with delegation of professional design responsibility, which (when required as part of the Work) is addressed elsewhere in the Contract Documents. b. Developing and making all detail surveys and measurements required for construction; including slope stakes, batter boards, and all other working lines, elevations, and cut sheets. c. Providing materials required for Contractor’s benchmarks, control points, batter boards, grade stakes, structure and pipeline elevation stakes, and other items. d. Keeping a transit, theodolite, or total station (i.e., theodolite with electronic distance measurement device); leveling instrument; and related implements such as survey rods and other measurement devices, at the Site at all times, and having a skilled instrument person available when necessary for laying out the Work and verifying lines, grades, and elevations. e. Being solely responsible for all locations, dimensions, and levels of the Work. No data other than Change Order, Work Change Directive, or Field Order shall justify departure from dimensions and levels required by the Contract Documents. f. Rectifying all Work improperly installed because of not maintaining, not protecting, or removing without authorization established reference points, stakes, marks, and monuments. g. Providing such facilities and assistance necessary for Engineer and Resident Project Representative (if any) or Owner’s Site Representative (if any) to check lines and grade points placed by Contractor. 1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Unit Price Work: 1. Do not perform excavation or embankment work until all cross-sectioning necessary for determining payment quantities for Unit Price Work have been completed and accepted by Engineer. 1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: 1. Review requirements of this and other Specifications sections and coordinate other elements of the Work with field engineering, surveying, and layout Work and recordkeeping obligations set forth in this Specifications Section. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents FIELD ENGINEERING 01 71 23 - 2 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Informational Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Certificates: a. When requested by Engineer following completion of the Work or a part thereof, submit certificate signed by professional engineer or professional surveyor, as applicable, indicating that elevations and locations of the Work comply with the Contract Documents. Explain each discrepancy, if any, from the requirements of the Contract Documents. 2. Contractor’s Daily Reports and Field Engineering Records: a. Submit daily reports as indicated in this Specification Section. b. When requested by Engineer, submit documentation verifying accuracy of field engineering. 3. Contractor’s Surveying Plan and Records: a. Complete plan for performing surveying Work, submitted not less than 10 days prior to beginning surveying Work. b. Example of proposed surveying field books to be maintained by Contractor’s surveyor. Example surveying field book shall have sufficient information and detail, including example calculations and notes, to demonstrate that surveying field books will be organized and maintained in a professional manner in accordance with the Contract Documents. c. Submit original surveying field books within two days after completing surveying Work. d. Submit certified survey in accordance with this Specifications’ section. 4. Qualifications Statements: a. Field Engineer: Name, employer, and professional address. When requested by Engineer, submit qualifications, including detailed resume’. b. Surveyor: Name, employer, professional address of firm, and detailed resumes of each professional land surveyor and crew chief that will be engaged in surveying Work. Submit not less than 10 days prior to beginning surveying Work. During the Project, submit detailed resume’ for each new registered, licensed land surveyor and crew chief employed by or retained by Contractor not less than 10 days prior to starting on the surveying Work. 1.5 CONTRACTOR’S SURVEYOR A. Qualifications: 1. Employ or retain the services, as needed, at the Site a surveyor with experience and capability of performing surveying and layout tasks required in the Contract Documents and as required for the Work. Comply with Laws and Regulations governing land surveying. 2. Contractor’s surveyor shall possess not less than five years of experience performing duties similar in scope and complexity to those required of Contractor’s surveyor on this Project. B. Responsibilities of Contractor’s Surveyor: 1. Providing required surveying equipment, including transit, theodolite, or total station; level; stakes; and surveying accessories. 2. Establishing required lines and grades for constructing all facilities, structures, pipelines, and site improvements, including outdoor electrical equipment and feeders. 3. Preparing and maintaining professional-quality, accurate, well-organized, legible notes of all measurements and calculations made while surveying and laying out the Work. 4. Prior to backfilling operations, survey, locate, and record on a copy of the Drawings accurate representation of buried Work and Underground Facilities provided and encountered. 5. Locating on a site plan of the Site the actual location of above-ground work to be indicated on record documents. 6. Complying with requirements of the Contract Documents relative to surveying and related Work, including requirements of this Specification section’s Articles 1.6 and 3.1. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents FIELD ENGINEERING 01 71 23 - 3 1.6 RECORDS A. Records – General: 1. Maintain at the Site: a. Contractor’s field engineer’s daily reports, with information and submitted in accordance with Article 1.5 of this Specification Section. b. Information and documents required by Section 01 78 39 - Project Record Documents. c. Complete and accurate log of control and survey Work as such Work progresses. d. Other records deemed by Contractor to be necessary or appropriate. B. Field Books and Records: 1. Survey data and records shall be in accordance with recognized professional surveying standards, Laws and Regulations, and prevailing standard of care in the locality where the Site is located. 2. Original field notes, calculations, and other surveying data shall be recorded by Contractor’s surveyor in Contractor-furnished hard-bound field books. 3. Completeness and accuracy of surveying Work, and completeness and accuracy of surveying records, including field books, shall be responsibility of Contractor. 4. Unacceptable Records of Contractor’s Surveyor: a. Failure to organize and maintain survey records in an appropriate manner that allows reasonable and independent verification of calculations, and to allow identification of elevations, lines, locations, dimensions, and grades of the Work, shall be cause for rejecting the surveying records, including field books. b. Illegible notes or data, and erasures on any page of field books, are unacceptable. Do not submit copied notes or data. Corrections by ruling or lining out errors will be unacceptable unless initialed by the surveyor. Violation of these requirements may require re-surveying the data questioned by Engineer. c. Other provisions of the Contract notwithstanding, Contractor shall have sole responsibility for uncovering, re-surveying, and restoring uncovered Work should survey data be unacceptable to Engineer. C. Survey of Surface Structures: 1. Upon completion of foundation walls and major site improvements, prepare a survey showing or indicating dimensions, locations, angles and elevations of construction and locations and elevations of Underground Facilities installed and encountered during the Work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS - (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SURVEYING A. Reference Points: 1. Refer to the General Conditions, as may be modified by the Supplementary Conditions, for requirements regarding reference points. 2. Owner’s established reference points that are damaged or destroyed by Contractor will be re-established by Owner at Contractor’s expense. Owner may deduct from payments due Contractor such amounts as set-offs in accordance with the Contract Documents. 3. From Owner-established reference points, establish lines, grades, and elevations necessary to control the Work. Obtain measurements required for performing the Work to tolerances indicated in the Contract Documents. 4. Establish, place, and replace as necessary and required, such additional stakes, markers, and other reference points necessary for controlling the Work and verifying accuracy and compliance with the Contract Documents. B. Surveys to Determine Quantities for Payment: Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents FIELD ENGINEERING 01 71 23 - 4 1. For each application for progress payment, perform such surveying and calculations necessary to determine quantities of Work performed or placed, including Unit Price Work. Perform surveying necessary for Engineer to determine final quantities of Work in place. 2. Comply with additional requirements, elsewhere in the Contract Documents for measurement for payment for specific types of Work. 3. Advise Engineer, Resident Project Representative (if any), and Owner’s Site Representative (if any) not less than 24 hours before performing surveying services for determining quantities to be included in Application for Payment. Unless waived in writing by Engineer, perform quantity surveys in presence of Engineer or Resident Project Representative (if any). C. Construction Surveying: Comply with the following: 1. Structure: Stake-out structures, including elevations, and check prior to and during construction. D. Accuracy: 1. Establish Contractor's temporary survey reference points for Contractor’s use to order of accuracy appropriate for Contractor’s purposes while complying with the contract Documents. Construction staking used as a guide for the Work shall be 1:5,000 for all the Work. Not withstanding the foregoing, provide the Work within the tolerances indicated below. 2. Tolerances: a. Horizontal tolerances for easement staking shall be plus or minus 0.1 feet. b. Accuracy of other staking shall be plus or minus 0.04 feet horizontally and plus or minus 0.01 feet vertically, except that a tolerance of 0.1 feet vertically applies to earthwork and grading, riprap, and installation of buried piping for-inch diameter and less. c. Tolerances for measurement for payment for selected types of the Work shall be as indicated elsewhere in the Contract Documents, including Specifications for the associated Work. d. Provide the permanent Work within the tolerances indicated for staking in this Article. 3. Survey calculations shall include an error analysis sufficient to demonstrate required accuracy. END OF SECTION Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents PROTECTION OF THE WORK AND PROPERTY 01 71 33 - 1 SECTION 01 71 33 PROTECTION OF THE WORK AND PROPERTY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. General requirements for protecting the Work and property, including: a. Accessing or entering property. b. Responsibility to remedy damaged property. c. Protecting natural habitats, including trees, plants, lawns and meadows, and wildlife. d. Protecting Underground Facilities. e. Protecting floors, walls, and roofs. f. Protecting other installed items and landscaping. B. Scope: 1. This Section augments requirements of the General Conditions as may be modified by the Supplementary Conditions regarding protection of the Work and property, including Underground Facilities. 2. Contractor shall provide all labor, materials, equipment, tools, services, and incidentals necessary and required for protecting the Work and property in accordance with the Contract Documents. C. Related Requirements: Include, but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Section 01 57 05 - Temporary Controls. 2. Section 01 65 00 - Product Delivery Requirements. 3. Section 01 66 00 - Product Storage and Handling Requirements. 4. Section 01 71 23 - Field Engineering. 5. Section 01 74 00 - Cleaning. 1.2 PROTECTION - GENERAL A. Contractor shall provide all precautions and programs and perform all actions necessary to protect personnel health and safety, and to protect the Work and all public and private property and facilities from damage, in accordance with the Contract Documents, Laws and Regulations, and other applicable requirements. B. To prevent damage, injury, and loss, Contractor’s actions shall include the following: 1. Providing measures for safety of all personnel at and adjacent to the Site, whether engaged in performing the Work, operating or maintaining the facility, or performing other functions for Owner or others. 2. Storing construction equipment, machinery, tools, and similar items, materials and equipment to be incorporated into the Work, supplies, and other items in an orderly, safe manner that does not unduly interfere with progress of the Work or work of others, including Owner and facility manager (if other than Owner). 3. Suitably storing materials and equipment to be incorporated into the Work, in accordance with the Contract Documents, including Section 01 66 00 - Product Storage and Handling Requirements. 4. Placing upon the Work or any part thereof only loads consistent with the safety and integrity of that portion of the Work and existing construction and facilities. 5. Frequently removing and disposing of rubbish, scrap materials, and debris, in accordance with the Contract Documents, including Section 01 74 00 - Cleaning, resulting from Contractor’s operations. 6. Providing temporary controls, including controlling pests and rodents, in accordance with the Contract Documents, including Section 01 57 05 - Temporary Controls. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents PROTECTION OF THE WORK AND PROPERTY 01 71 33 - 2 PART 2 - EXECUTION 2.1 ACCESSING OR ENTERING PROPERTY A. Accessing or Entering Property - General: 1. Use and occupy only lands and easements furnished by Owner, unless appropriate consent from property owner and occupants is obtained by Contractor. 2. The foregoing applies to personnel, construction equipment and machinery, tools, vehicles, materials or equipment to be incorporated into the Work, supplies, temporary facilities, and other items or obstructions. 2.2 RESPONSIBILITY TO REMEDY DAMAGED PROPERTY A. Contractor to Remedy Damage: 1. Contractor has full responsibility for preserving public and private property and facilities on and adjacent to the Site. 2. Direct or indirect damage done by, or on account of, any act, omission, neglect (including inadvertent acts), or misconduct by Contractor (including any person or entity for whom contractor is responsible) in performing the Work, shall be promptly remedied by Contractor, at Contractor’s expense, in accordance with the Contract Documents. 3. If the Contract Documents do not show or indicate the required restoration, or remedy, restore or remedy the damage to condition equal or better than that existing before damage was done. B. Owner May Remedy: 1. Should Contractor fail to protect and safeguard property and the Work after requests from Engineer or Owner, Owner reserves the right to implement measures to protect property and the Work. 2. Cost of such Owner-implemented measures shall be paid by Contractor. Owner may deduct from payments due Contractor such amounts as set-offs in accordance with the Contract Documents. 3. Such right, however, does not obligate Owner or Engineer to continuously monitor or have responsibility for protection of property and the Work, which responsibility is exclusively Contractor’s. 4. In exercising its rights under this provision, Owner will endeavor to give Contractor sufficient notice to allow Contractor to remedy the damage or defect within a reasonable time. However, if Owner or Engineer deems that the situation requires prompt remedy, Owner may act as quickly as Owner deems appropriate, without infringing on or mitigating Owner’s rights under this provision and elsewhere in the Contract Documents 2.3 PROTECTION OF NATURAL HABITATS A. Tree and Plant Protection – General: 1. Protect existing trees, shrubs, and plants on or adjacent to the Site, shown or designated to remain in place, against unnecessary cutting, breaking, damage, and skinning of trunk, branches, bark, and roots. 2. Protect irrigation servicing existing trees, shrubs, and plants on or adjacent to the Site that remain in place. 3. Do not store materials or equipment or park construction equipment, machinery, or vehicles within foliage drip lines. 4. In areas subject to traffic, provide temporary fencing or temporary barricades to protect trees and plants. 5. Burning is not allowed at or adjacent to the Site, including burning, in open fires or otherwise, trees, plants, debris, or other combustible materials. 6. Within the limits of the Work, water trees and plants that are to remain, to maintain their health during construction operations. 7. Cover exposed roots with burlap, and keep such burlap continuously wet. Cover exposed roots with earth as soon as possible. Protect root systems from mechanical damage and damage by storm water runoff, erosion, flooding, and noxious materials in solution. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents PROTECTION OF THE WORK AND PROPERTY 01 71 33 - 3 B. Coordinate the Work in this Article with the following Specifications: 1. Section 31 10 00 - Site Clearing. C. Remedy of Damaged Trees: 1. If branches are damaged, prune branches immediately and protect as indicated below. 2. If bark on trunk or major branches is scraped or damaged, using a sharp knife or other suitable cutting implement, clean the edge of the wound, leaving the bark smooth and tight against the wood. Avoid exposing more live tissue and do not remove too much healthy bark. Apply material indicated below. 3. After pruning and cutting back damaged wood and bark, protect cut or damaged wood by applying emulsified asphaltic sealant specifically manufactured for sealing pruned and damaged trees. Apply sealant in accordance with sealant manufacturer’s instructions, in manner acceptable to Engineer and tree owner. 4. When directed by Engineer, remove and dispose of (at location away from the Site) damaged trees and plants (and parts thereof) that die or suffer permanent injury, and replace each such damaged tree and plant with new tree or plant of equal or better species and quality. D. Protection of Lawns and Meadows: 1. Protect lawns and meadows from unnecessary damage during performance of the Work. 2. To extent practicable, do not drive vehicles, construction equipment, machinery, or wheeled items such as carts and wheelbarrows, across lawns and meadows. 3. When existing lawn or meadow areas are disturbed, promptly stabilize exposed soil in accordance with Section 01 57 05 - Temporary Controls. 4. Remedy damaged lawns and meadows in accordance with the Contract Documents. If not otherwise addressed in the Contract Documents, restore to preconstruction condition or better with the same or substantively similar species. E. Protection of Wildlife: 1. To extent practicable, avoid harming wildlife and damaging or destroying wildlife habitats, except for areas where the Work is to be located. 2. In the event a threatened or endangered species is discovered at the Site for which provisions was not otherwise provided, stop work in the vicinity and immediately orally advise Engineer by telephone or in-person, promptly followed by written notice in accordance with the Contract’s provisions for notice for differing Site conditions. If species is not threatened or endangered, promptly resume work; no change in Contract Price or Contract Times is due for misidentification of threatened or endangered species. 3. Contractor is not responsible for wholesale inventorying or Site-wide evaluation of wildlife at the Site, except as indicated in the paragraph immediately above this paragraph. 2.4 PROTECTION OF UNDERGROUND FACILITIES A. Underground Facilities – General: 1. Underground Facilities known to Owner and Engineer, except laterals or services to individual structures or properties, such as water, wastewater, storm water, gas and fuel, hydronic, steam, electric, and communications laterals or services, are shown on the Drawings. Information shown for Underground Facilities is the best available to Engineer but, in accordance with the General Conditions, as may be modified by the Supplementary Conditions, is not guaranteed to be correct or complete. 2. Comply with Laws and Regulations regarding notification of utility owners prior to performing the Work, including necessary “call before you dig” notifications. 3. Contractor shall explore ahead of trenching and excavating Work and shall sufficiently uncover Underground Facilities that will or may interfere with the Work to determine their location, to prevent damage to Underground Facilities, and to prevent service interruption to structures and properties served by Underground Facilities. 4. If Contractor damages an Underground Facility, Contractor shall promptly restore the damaged Underground Facility in accordance with requirements of the owner of the Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents PROTECTION OF THE WORK AND PROPERTY 01 71 33 - 4 damaged facility and the Contract Documents. If the Contract Documents do not address repair or remedy of the damaged facility, restore to not less than preconstruction condition. 5. Necessary changes in the location of the Work may be directed by Engineer to avoid Underground Facilities not shown or indicated on the Contract Documents. 6. If permanent relocation of an existing Underground Facility is required and is not otherwise shown or indicated in the Contract Documents, Contractor may be directed in writing to perform the required work. When such relocation Work results in a change in the Contract Price, Contract Times, or both, the associated Contract modification procedures and payment for such Work shall be in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. Protection of Underground Facilities under Roads and Parking Areas: 1. Provide temporary, heavy-duty steel roadway plates to protect existing manholes, handholes, valve boxes, vaults, and other Underground Facilities near to, or visible at, the ground surface. 2. Avoid imparting heavy loads, especially transitory loading (such as heavy truck traffic), vibration forces, and impact loads on Underground Facilities that are close to the ground surface and below-grade work areas. Provide temporary bridging or other appropriate protection where traffic must pass over Underground Facilities in close proximity to the ground surface. C. Temporary Support of Underground Facilities: 1. Where Contractor exposes or excavates around or under one or more existing Underground Facilities, provide appropriate and adequate temporary supports for the associated Underground Facilities. 2. Do not allow Underground Facilities exposed by Contractor’s operations to remain exposed without temporary support necessary to properly protect the Underground Facility. Where joint of Underground Facility is exposed by excavation, provide temporary support for each exposed joint and other temporary support as necessary. 3. Design of Temporary Supports: a. Where necessary or where expressly required by the Contract Documents, retain services of professional engineer, in accordance with Section 01 71 23 - Field Engineering, to design the temporary supports. Such professional engineer shall be experienced with the type and size of subject Underground Facility, structural engineering, and geotechnical engineering sufficient for the foundations of the temporary supports. b. Temporary supports are not delegation of professional design responsibility unless expressly so indicated in the Contract Documents. c. Responsibilities of Contractor’s professional engineer shall include, but are not necessarily limited to, the following: 1) Advising Contractor on investigations necessary to obtain information for design of temporary supports. Reviewing and considering results of such investigations in the design of temporary supports. 2) Visiting the Site to make personal observations as needed. 3) Identify appropriate design criteria for temporary supports. 4) Preparing necessary calculations, design drawings, and design specifications (sealed and signed when required by Contract or Laws or Regulations), appropriately based on the associated soil conditions and subsurface conditions, considering the consequences of failure of the temporary supports and associated potential for damage or failure of the existing subject Underground Facility. 5) Design temporary supports with a safety factor of not less than 2.0. 6) Review and approve or take other appropriate action on submittals of shop drawings and product data for the temporary supports and related materials. 7) Make periodic visits to the Site during erection of the temporary supports and at appropriate intervals thereafter to inspect the temporary supports during performance of other, adjacent Work. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents PROTECTION OF THE WORK AND PROPERTY 01 71 33 - 5 8) Issue to Contractor written recommendations for repairs and improvements necessary for the proper protection of the associated Underground Facility. 9) Submit to Contractor detailed, written recommendations for backfilling the excavation underneath and adjacent to the Underground Facility and for removing the temporary supports. d. Contractor shall comply with the professional engineer’s design of the temporary supports. e. Owner may require and, in such event, Contractor shall submit, design documents, shop drawings, product data, and reports by Contractor-hired professional engineer. Do not submit such documents to Engineer. When such documents are furnished to Owner, the Owner has no obligation to perform any review of such documents and Owner’s possession of such documents does not impart on Owner or Engineer any responsibility for or professional liability associated with design of such temporary supports and consequences of implementing such designs. Owner and Engineer are not obligated in any way to implement recommendations of Contractor’s professional engineer. 2.5 PROTECTION OF FLOORS, WALLS, AND ROOFS A. Protection of Floors, Walls, and Roofs – General: 1. Use proper protective covering when moving equipment, handling materials or other loads, when painting, handling mortar or grout, and when cleaning walls, ceilings, or structure contents. 2. Use metal pans to collect oil and cuttings from piping, conduits, and rod threading machines, and under metal cutting machines. 3. Maintain at the Site and use spill kits and absorbent pads for remedying spills. 4. Do not load concrete floors less than 28 days after concrete placement without Engineer’s written permission. 5. Do not load slabs, floors, walls, or roofs in excess of design loading. 6. Do not load roofs without Engineer’s written permission. 7. Restrict access to roofs, and keep Contractor’s workers and personnel off existing roofs, except as necessary for the Work. 8. If access to roofs is necessary, roofing, parapets, openings, and all other construction on or adjacent to roof shall be protected with suitable plywood, barricades, or other appropriate means. 2.6 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED MATERIALS, EQUIPMENT, AND LANDSCAPING A. General: 1. Protect existing facilities and installed Work to prevent damage from subsequent operations. 2. Remove protective items when no longer needed, prior to Substantial Completion of the associated Work. 3. Where work will continue in adjacent area(s) after Substantial Completion of a portion of the Work, protect the substantially completed Work until all work in the area is complete. B. Control traffic (foot traffic, wheeled items such as carts, vehicles, and other traffic) to prevent damage to equipment, materials, and surfaces. C. Coverings: 1. Provide temporary coverings to protect materials and equipment from damage. 2. Cover: projections, wall corners and jambs, sills, and soffits of openings, in areas used for traffic and for passage of materials and equipment in subsequent work. 3. Fasten protective items without harming the Work. Use tape or adhesives that do not leave residue when removed. END OF SECTION Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 This page intentionally left blank. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents OPENINGS AND PENETRATIONS IN CONSTRUCTION 01 73 20 - 1 SECTION 01 73 20 OPENINGS AND PENETRATIONS IN CONSTRUCTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Methods of installing and sealing openings and penetrations in construction. B. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Section 07 92 00 - Joint Sealants. 2. Section 09 96 00 - High Performance Industrial Coatings. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards: 1. ASTM International (ASTM): a. A36, Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel. b. A53, Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless. c. A269, Standard Specification for Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing for General Service. d. A312, Standard Specification for Seamless, Welded, and Heavily Cold Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipes. e. A351, Standard Specification for Castings, Austenitic, for Pressure-Containing Parts. f. A554, Standard Specification for Welded Stainless Steel Mechanical Tubing. g. A653, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process. h. A666, Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar. i. A995, Castings, Austenitic-Ferritic (Duplex) Stainless Steel, for Pressure-Containing Parts. 2. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): a. 70, National Electrical Code (NEC): 1) Article 501, Class 1 Locations. b. 90A, Standard for Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems. c. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association (SMACNA). 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Corrosive Areas: For the purpose of this specification section, the following areas are defined as corrosive: 1. Wet well. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. For each structure provide dimensioned or scaled (minimum 1/8 inches = 1 foot) plan view drawings containing the following information: a. Vertical and horizontal location of all required openings and penetrations. b. Size of all openings and penetrations. c. Opening type. d. Seal type. 2. Manufacturer's installation instructions for standard manufactured products. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents OPENINGS AND PENETRATIONS IN CONSTRUCTION 01 73 20 - 2 1.5 SITE CONDITIONS A. For purposes of this Project, water table level is elevation 4587.10 (November 30th, 2023). PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Pipe Sleeves: 1. Areas listed as Corrosive Areas in PART 1: a. Stainless steel, Type 316L. b. Penetrations 24 inches diameter or less: ASTM A269, ASTM A312 or ASTM A554, Schedule 40. c. Penetrations larger than 24 inches diameter: Stainless steel, ASTM A666, Minimum 1/4 inches thickness. 2. All other Areas: a. Steel, Hot-dipped galvanized after fabrication. b. Penetrations 24 inches diameter or less: ASTM A53, Schedule 40. c. Penetrations larger than 24 inches diameter: ASTM A36, Minimum 1/4 inches thickness. B. Backing Rod and Sealant: See Specification Section 07 92 00. C. Modular Mechanical Seals: 1. Products and Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following items and manufacturers are acceptable in the Work: a. Link-Seal, by Garlock. b. Or equal. 2. Materials: a. Modular Links: EPDM rubber. b. Hardware: 316 Type stainless steel. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 FABRICATION A. Provide waterstop plate/anchor flange for piping, ducts, castings and sleeves cast-in-place in concrete. 1. For fabricated units, weld plate to sleeve, pipe, or ductwork. 2. For commercial castings, cast water stop/anchor with wall pipe. 3. Plate is to be same thickness as sleeve, pipe, casting or ductwork. 4. For fabricated units, diameter of plate or flange to be 4 inches larger than outside diameter of sleeve, pipe or ductwork. 5. For commercial castings, waterstop/anchor size to be manufacturer standard. 6. Provide continuous around entire circumference of sleeve, pipe, or ductwork. B. Factory or shop-coat painted components in accordance with Specification Section 09 96 00. 3.2 INSTALLATION AND APPLICATION A. Seal openings and penetrations in non-fire-resistance-rated construction in accordance with Specification Section 07 92 00. B. Obtain prior approval from Engineer when any opening larger than 100 square inches must be made in existing or newly completed construction. C. Perform electrical penetrations in accordance with NFPA 70, Article 501. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents OPENINGS AND PENETRATIONS IN CONSTRUCTION 01 73 20 - 3 D. When mechanical or electrical work cannot be installed as structure is being erected, provide and arrange for building-in of boxes, sleeves, insets, fixtures or devices necessary to permit installation later. 1. Lay out chases, holes or other openings which must be provided in masonry, concrete or other work. E. Where pipes, conduits or ducts pass through floors, install sleeves with ends flush with finished surfaces. F. Size sleeves, blockouts and cutouts which will receive sealant seal such that free area to receive sealant is minimized and seal integrity may be obtained. G. For insulated piping and ducts, size sleeves, blockouts and cutouts large enough to accommodate full thickness of insulation. H. Do not cut into or core drill any beams, joists, or columns. I. Do not install sleeves in beams, joists, or columns. J. Do not install recesses in beams, joists, columns, or slabs. K. Field Cutting and Coring: 1. Saw or core drill with non-impact type equipment. 2. Mark opening and drill small 3/4 inches or less holes through structure following opening outline. 3. Sawcut opening outline on both surfaces. a. Knock out within sawcuts using impact type equipment. b. Do not chip or spall face of surface to remain intact. c. Do not allow any overcut with saw kerf. L. Use full depth expanding foam sealant for seal applications where single or multiple pipes, conduits, etc., pass through a single sleeve. M. Modular Mechanical Seals: 1. Utilize one seal for concrete thickness less than 8 inches and two seals for concrete, 8 inches thick or greater. 2. Utilize two seals for piping 16 inches diameter and larger if concrete thickness permits. 3. Install seals such that bolt heads are located on the most accessible side of the penetration. N. Backer Rod and Sealant: 1. Install in accordance with Specification Section 07 92 00. 2. Provide backer rod and sealant for modular mechanical seal applications. a. Apply on top side of slab penetrations and on interior, dry side wall penetrations. 3.3 SCHEDULES A. General Schedule of Penetrations through Floors, Roofs, Foundation Base Slabs, Foundation Walls, Foundation Footings, Partitions and Walls for Ductwork, Piping, and Conduit: 1. Provide the following opening and penetration types: a. Type A - Block out 2 inches larger than outside dimensions of duct, pipe, or conduits. b. Type B - Saw cut or line-drill opening. Place new concrete with integrally cast sheet metal or pipe sleeve. c. Type C - Fabricated sheet metal sleeve or pipe sleeve cast-in-place. Provide pipe sleeve with water ring for wet and/or washdown areas. d. Type D - Commercial type casting or fabrication. e. Type E - Saw cut or line-drill opening. Place new concrete with integrally cast pipe, duct or conduit spools. f. Type F - Integrally cast pipe, duct or conduit. g. Type G - Saw cut or line-drill and remove area 1 inch larger than outside dimensions of duct, pipe or conduit. h. Type H - Core drill. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents OPENINGS AND PENETRATIONS IN CONSTRUCTION 01 73 20 - 4 i. Type I - Block out area. At later date, place new concrete with integrally cast sheet metal or pipe sleeve. j. Type J - Grating Banding for any field cut openings. 2. Provide seals of material and method described as follows. a. Category 1 - Modular Mechanical Seal. b. Category 3 - 12 GA sheet metal drip sleeve set in bed of silicon sealant with backing rod and sealant used in sleeve annulus. c. Category 4 - Backer rod and sealant. d. Category 5 - Full depth compressible sealant with escutcheons on both sides of opening. e. Category 6 - Full depth compressible sealant and flanges on both sides of opening. Flanges constructed of same material as duct, fastened to duct and minimum 1/2 inches larger than opening. f. Category 7 - Full depth compressible sealant and finish sealant or full depth expanding foam sealant depending on application. g. Category 8 - Banding for all grating openings and banding and cover plate of similar materials for abandoned openings. 3. Furnish openings and sealing materials through new floors, roofs, grating, partitions and walls in accordance with Schedule A, Openings and Penetrations for New Construction. 4. Furnish openings and sealing materials through existing floors, grating, roofs, partitions and walls in accordance with Schedule B, Openings and Penetrations for Existing Construction. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents OPENINGS AND PENETRATIONS IN CONSTRUCTION 01 73 20 - 5 SCHEDULE A. OPENINGS AND PENETRATIONS SCHEDULE FOR NEW CONSTRUCTION APPLICATIONS DUCTS PIPING CONDUIT OPENING TYPE SEAL CATEGORY OPENING TYPE SEAL CATEGORY OPENING TYPE SEAL CATEGORY Through floors with bottom side a hazardous location C F I 7 Not Req 7 D F I (1) Not Req Not Req 7 C F 7 Not Req Through floors on grade above water table C F I 4 Not Req 4 C F I (1) 7 Not Req 7 C F I (1) 4 Not Req 7 Through slab on grade below water table F Not Req F Not Req F Not Req Through floors in washdown areas C I 4 4 C H (2) I (1) 4 3 4 F H (2) I (1) Not Req 3 7 Through walls where one side is a hazardous area C F I 7 Not Req 7 D F I (1) Not Req Not Req 7 C F 7 Not Req Through exterior wall below grade above water table C F I 7 Not Req 7 C D F I (1) 1 Not Req Not Req 1 F I (1) Not Req 7 Through wall from tankage or wet well (above high water level) to dry well or dry area C F I 7 Not Req 7 C D F H (2) 1 Not Req Not Req 1 C F H (2) I (1) 7 Not Req 7 7 Through wall from tankage or wet well (below high water level) to dry well or dry area F Not Req F Not Req F Not Req Through exterior wall above grade A B C 6 6 6 A B D H (2) 5 5 Not Req 5 C H (2) 5 4 Roof penetrations A 2 A 2 A 2 Through interior walls and slabs not covered by the above applications A C 4 4 A C 4 4 A C F 4 4 Not Req Grating openings and penetrations J 8 J 8 J 8 Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents OPENINGS AND PENETRATIONS IN CONSTRUCTION 01 73 20 - 6 SCHEDULE B. OPENINGS AND PENETRATIONS SCHEDULE FOR EXISTING CONSTRUCTION APPLICATIONS DUCTS PIPING CONDUIT OPENING TYPE SEAL CATEGORY OPENING TYPE SEAL CATEGORY OPENING TYPE SEAL CATEGORY Through floors with bottom side a hazardous location B E 7 Not Req B (1) E (3) H (2) 7 Not Req 7 B (1) E (3) H (2) 7 Not Req 7 Through floors on grade above water table B 7 B 7 B 7 Through slab on grade below water table E Not Req E Not Req E Not Req Through floors in washdown areas G 3 G H (2) 3 3 G H (2) 3 3 Through walls where one side is a hazardous area B E 7 Not Req B (1) B (3)_ E H (2) 7 1 Not Req 7 B (1) (3) E H (2) 7 Not Req 7 Through exterior wall below grade above water table B 7 B (1) B (3) H (2) 7 1 7 B (1) (3) H (2) 7 7 Through wall from tankage or wet well (above high water level) to dry well or dry area B E 7 Not Req B E H (2) 1 Not Req 1 B (1) (3) E H (2) 7 Not Req 7 Through wall from tankage or wet well (below high water level) to dry well or dry area E Not Req E Not Req E Not Req Through exterior wall above grade G 6 G (1) (3) H (2) 5 5 G (1) (3) H (2) 5 7 Roof penetrations G 2 G (1) (3) H (2) 2 G 2 Through interior walls and slabs not covered by the above applications G 4 G (1) (3) H (2) 4 4 G (1) (3) H (2) 4 4 Grating openings and penetrations J 8 J 8 J 8 (1) Multiple piping 3 inches and smaller or multiple conduits. (2) Single pipe 3 inches and smaller or single conduit. (3) Single pipe or conduit larger than 3 inches. END OF SECTION Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents OPENINGS AND PENETRATIONS IN CONSTRUCTION 01 73 20 - 7 Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 This page intentionally left blank. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents CUTTING AND PATCHING 01 73 29 - 1 SECTION 01 73 29 CUTTING AND PATCHING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. General requirements for cutting and patching Work. B. Scope: 1. Contractor shall perform cutting and coring, and rough and finish patching of holes and openings in existing construction. 2. Provide cutting, coring, fitting, and patching, including attendant excavation and fill, required to complete the Work, and to: a. remove and replace defective Work; b. remove samples of installed Work as specified or required for testing; c. remove construction required to perform required alterations or additions to existing construction; d. uncover the Work for Engineer’s observation of covered Work, testing, or inspection by testing entities, or observation by authorities having jurisdiction; e. connect to completed Work not performed in proper sequence; f. remove or relocate existing utilities and piping that obstruct the Work in locations where connections are to be made; g. make connections or alterations to existing or new facilities. C. Related Requirements: 1. Section 03 31 30 - Concrete, Materials and Proportioning. 2. Section 03 35 00 - Concrete Finishing and Repair of Surface Defects. 3. Section 09 96 00 - High Performance Industrial Coatings. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Cutting and Patching Request: a. Submit written request to Engineer, well in advance of executing cutting or alteration that affects one or more of the following: 1) Design function or intent of Project. 2) Work of Owner or other contractors retained by Owner. 3) Structural capacity or integrity of an element of the Project, building, or structure. 4) Integrity or effectiveness of weather-exposed or moisture-resistant elements or systems. 5) Efficiency, operational life, maintenance, or safety of operational elements. 6) Visual qualities of elements that will be exposed to view after completion of the Work. b. Request shall include: 1) Identification of Project and Contract designation. 2) Description of affected Work of Contractor and work of others (if any) retained by Owner. 3) Necessity for cutting. 4) Effect on work or operations of Owner and other contractors (if any) retained by Owner, and on structural and weatherproof integrity of Project, building, or structure. 5) Description of proposed Work, indicating: scope of cutting and patching; trades that will execute the cutting and patching Work; materials and equipment to be Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents CUTTING AND PATCHING 01 73 29 - 2 used; extent of refinishing; schedule of operations; alternatives (if any) to cutting and patching, and net effect on aesthetics following completion of finishing Work. 6) Indication of entity responsible for cost of cutting and patching, when applicable. 7) Written permission of other prime contractors (if any) whose work will or may be affected. 2. Recommendation Regarding Cutting and Patching: a. Should conditions of work or schedule indicate a change of materials or specified methods, furnish Submit written recommendation to Engineer including: 1) Conditions indicating change. 2) Recommendations for alternative materials or alternatives to specified methods. 3) Material manufacturer’s printed recommendations for the proposed product and recommendations of manufacturer’s technical representative for the specific application(s). The latter shall be on technical representative’s letterhead and shall explicitly indicate the Project and specific cutting and patching application(s) to which the recommendation(s) apply. 4) Items required with request for approval of substitute, in accordance with the substitution request requirements of the Contract Documents. 3. Product Data: a. Submit manufacturer’s published data for the protective compound to be applied to core-drilled surfaces and cut concrete surfaces. b. When not required under other Specifications sections, submit manufacturer’s published data on materials to be used for finishing around the cut or patched area(s), together with indication of the location(s) where each is proposed for use. c. Furnish Submittals for patching materials under the associated Specifications section. Submittal to include letter of recommendation from product manufacturer’s technical representative indicating on technical representative’s letterhead, explicitly indicating: 1) Project name and facility name; 2) specific cutting and patching application(s) to which the recommendations apply; 3) that product manufacturer’s technical representative has personally observed and is familiar with conditions in the work area(s) of the subject cutting and patching; 4) materials that are the subject of the Submittal are appropriate for the condition(s) of the proposed patch and will remain durable in the patch’s final exposure upon Substantial Completion; and. 5) patching material manufacturer’s technical representative’s recommendations for surface preparation, installation of patching material(s), and curing. B. Informational Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Written Notification of Cutting and Patching: a. Furnish as a Submittal written indication designating the day and time that the construction associated with cutting and patching will be uncovered to allow for observation. Do not begin cutting or patching operations until submittal is accepted by Engineer. 2. X-ray Investigations: a. Proposed method of investigation. Submit and obtain Engineer’s acceptance prior to performing x-ray inspections. b. Report of x-ray evaluation of slabs, floors, and walls to be cut or core-drilled. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Materials – General: 1. Provide materials that comply with the Contract Documents. 2. If not shown or indicated in the Contract Documents, use materials identical to existing materials affected by cutting and patching Work. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents CUTTING AND PATCHING 01 73 29 - 3 3. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match existing adjacent surfaces to fullest extent possible. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, provide materials whose installed performance will equal or surpass that of existing materials. 4. Replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during cutting and patching operations, using materials that do not void required or existing warranties. B. Compound Applied to Core-Drilled Surfaces and Cut Concrete Surfaces: 1. After core-drilling or sawcutting (as applicable) and before installing the utility or equipment through the penetration, coat exposed concrete and exposed steel with solvent- free, two-component, protective, epoxy resin coating. 2. Color shall approximate the finish color of the existing surface to be coated. 3. Product and Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following products and manufacturers are acceptable: a. Sikagard 62, by Sika Corporation. b. Or equal. C. Grout Materials: 1. Comply with Section 03 31 30 - Concrete, Materials and Proportioning. D. Epoxy Bonding Adhesive: 1. Provide two-component, moister-insensitive adhesive manufactured for the purpose of bonding fresh concrete to hardened concrete. 2. Comply with Section 03 31 30 - Concrete, Materials and Proportioning. 3. Product and Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following products and manufacturers are acceptable: a. Euco No.452 MV by Euclid Chemical Co. b. Sikadur 32, Hi-Mod by Sika Corporation. c. Or equal. E. Epoxy Patch Material: 1. Engage the manufacturer’s representative to observe and recommend a suitable patching material of the actual construction conditions. 2. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following products and manufacturers are acceptable: a. Depth of patch greater than 3/4 inches: 1) Five Star MP Epoxy Patch. 2) Or equal. b. Depth of patch between 1/8 inches and 3/4 inches: 1) Five Star Fluid Epoxy. 2) Or equal PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examination and Assessment – General: 1. Examine surfaces to be cut or patched, and conditions under which cutting or patching will be performed before starting cutting or patching Work. 2. Report unsatisfactory or questionable conditions to Engineer in writing. 3. Do not proceed with cutting or patching Work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. B. Non-Destructive Investigation: 1. In advance of cutting or coring through existing slabs or walls, use x-ray or other non- destructive methods accepted by Engineer to determine location of reinforcing steel, electrical conduits, and other items embedded in slabs and walls. 2. Submit to Engineer written report of findings of evaluation. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents CUTTING AND PATCHING 01 73 29 - 4 3. Perform x-ray investigation and submit results to Engineer sufficiently in advance of cutting Work to allow time to identify and implement alternatives, if changes to the Work are necessary because of conduit or other features in floor or wall. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Provide temporary support required to maintain structural integrity of facilities, to protect adjacent work from damage during cutting, and to support the element(s) to be cut. B. Protection of Existing Construction during Cutting and Patching: 1. Protect existing construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of the Project and facility that will be exposed during cutting and patching operations. 2. Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas. 3. Do not cut existing pipe, conduit, ductwork, or other utilities serving facilities scheduled to be removed or relocated until provisions have been made to bypass them. 3.3 CUTTING AND PATCHING – GENERAL A. Perform cutting and coring in such manner that limits extent of patching required. B. Structural Elements: 1. Do not cut or patch structural elements in manner that would change the element’s structural load-carrying capacity as load deflection ratio. C. Operating Elements: 1. Do not cut or patch operating elements in manner that would reduce their capacity to perform as intended. 2. Do not cut or patch operating elements or related components in manner that would increase maintenance requirements or decrease operational life or safety. D. Replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during cutting and patching operations, using methods that do not void required or existing warranties. E. Provide adequate temporary covering over openings (whether cut or core-drilled) where not in use. Avoid creating tripping hazards for openings provided in floors and slabs. 3.4 CORING A. Use core-drilling to make penetrations through concrete and masonry walls, slabs, or arches, unless otherwise accepted by Engineer in writing. B. Coring: 1. Perform coring with non-impact rotary tool using diamond core-drills. Size holes for pipe, conduit, sleeves, equipment or mechanical seals, as required, to be installed through the penetration. 2. Do not core-drill through electrical conduit or other utilities embedded in walls or slabs without approval of Engineer. To extent possible, avoid cutting reinforcing steel in slabs and walls. C. Protection: 1. Protect existing equipment, utilities, and adjacent areas from water and other damage caused by or resulting from core-drilling operations. 2. After core-drilling and before installing the utility or equipment through the penetration, coat exposed concrete and steel with protective coating material indicated in Paragraph 2.1.B of this Specification Section. Apply protective coating in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. D. Cleaning: 1. After core-drilling, vacuum or otherwise remove slurry and tailings from the work area. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents CUTTING AND PATCHING 01 73 29 - 5 3.5 CUTTING A. Cutting – General: 1. Cut existing construction using methods least-likely to damage elements retained and adjoining construction and that provide proper surfaces to receive subsequent installation or repair. 2. In general, use hand tools or small power tools suitable for sawing or grinding. When possible, avoid using hammering and avoid chopping. Carefully chip out concrete where necessary and as indicated in the Contract Documents. 3. Cut holes and slots as small as possible, neatly to the size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. 4. Prior to starting cutting, provide adequate bracing of area to be cut. 5. To avoid marring existing finished surfaces, cut or drill from exposed or finished side into concealed side. 6. Use equipment of adequate size to remove the cut panel or “coupon”. B. Cutting – Concrete and Masonry: 1. Cut through concrete and masonry using concrete wall saw with diamond saw blades. 2. On both sides of the element being cut, provide for control of slurry generated during sawing. 3. Concrete Cutting: a. Make openings by sawing through existing concrete. Core drill with 6 inches diameter core at the corners of openings to avoid overcutting at corners. b. When the cut-out concrete or “coupon” cannot be removed in one piece, or where concrete is too thick for saw to penetrate fully, break out concrete after initial saw cuts. c. Where saw cutting is not possible: 1) Make openings by drilling holes around perimeter of required opening and subsequently carefully chip out concrete. 2) Holes shall be sufficient in quantity to prevent damage to remaining concrete. 4. Sizing and Repair of Cut Concrete Surfaces: a. Where reinforcing steel is cut, for openings indicated on the Drawings, remove existing reinforcing steel back to 1.5 inches below concrete surface. When using heat or torching to remove ends of reinforcing steel, remove adjacent, heat-damaged concrete prior to patching. Sides of resulting hole to be patched shall be approximately perpendicular to finished concrete surface. Provide bonding adhesive on surfaces of resulting holes and fill resulting holes with non-shrink grout in accordance with the Contract Documents. b. Oversize required openings in existing concrete by one inch on all sides and build back to required opening size by providing epoxy grout bonded to existing concrete. c. Where oversizing the cut opening by one inch is not possible, cut the opening to the required dimensions. After cutting concrete and before installing subsequent construction on or through the opening, coat exposed concrete and steel with protective coating material indicated in Paragraph 2.1.B of this Specifications Section. Apply protective coating in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. d. Where indicated, finish remaining surfaces as indicated in Section 03 35 00 - Concrete Finishing and Repair of Surface Defects. 3.6 PATCHING A. Patching – General: 1. Patch large openings to be filled with concrete in accordance with the Contract Documents. Before installing new concrete, apply bonding adhesive indicated in Paragraph 2.1.C of this Specifications section in accordance with manufacture’s recommendations. 2. Where large openings to be filled with concrete are indicated on the Drawings as requiring reinforcing steel, provide reinforcing steel as shown and indicated in the Contract Documents. Where openings in existing reinforced concrete are larger than 2 feet in diameter or 2 feet by 2 feet and the Drawings or elsewhere in the Contract Documents do Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents CUTTING AND PATCHING 01 73 29 - 6 not expressly require reinforcing steel for the opening, submit a request for interpretation to Engineer and obtain Engineer’s response before proceeding. 3. Where concrete infill or grout repair materials are not used, patch using epoxy patch material indicated in Paragraph 2.1.D of this section unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. 4. Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing-up, and similar operations following performance of other Work. 5. Patch with durable seams that are as inconspicuous as possible. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements indicated in the Contract Documents and the published installation instructions of the material’s manufacturer. 6. Patch to provide airtight and watertight connections to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations through surfaces. 7. Where feasible, test patched areas to demonstrate integrity of installation. B. Restoration: 1. Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in manner that eliminates evidence of patching and refinishing. 2. For continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection. 3. For an assembly, refinish the entire unit that was patched. 4. Patch, repair, or rehang existing ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane surface of uniform appearance. 3.7 CLEANING A. Cleaning and Restoration: 1. Perform cleaning promptly after associated cutting, coring, and patching. 2. Clean areas and spaces where cutting, coring, or patching were performed. 3. Clean piping, conduit, and similar constructions before applying paint or other finishing materials. 4. Restore damaged coverings of pipe and other utilities to original condition. END OF SECTION Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents CLEANING 01 74 00 - 1 SECTION 01 74 00 CLEANING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Requirements for keeping the Site free of accumulations of waste materials during construction (“progress cleaning”). 2. Cleaning for Substantial Completion and prior to final inspection (collectively, “closeout cleaning”). B. Scope: 1. Contractor shall perform cleaning during the Project, including progress cleaning, as condition precedent to Substantial Completion, upon completion of the Work, and as required by the General Conditions, as may be modified by the Supplementary Conditions, this Specifications section, and elsewhere in the Contract Documents. 2. Maintain in a clean manner the Site, the Work, and areas adjacent to or affected by the Work. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards: 1. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): a. 241, Safeguarding Construction, Alteration, and Demolition Operations. PART 2 - PRODUCTS - (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PROGRESS CLEANING A. Progress Cleaning – General: 1. Clean the Site, work areas, and other areas occupied by Contractor not less than weekly. Dispose of waste materials in accordance with the General Conditions, as may be modified by the Supplementary Conditions, and the following: a. Comply with NFPA 241 for removing combustible waste materials and debris. b. Do not hold non-combustible materials at the Site more than three days if the ambient air temperature is expected to rise above 80 degrees F. When ambient air temperature is less than 80 degrees F, dispose of non-combustible materials within seven days of their generation. c. Provide suitable containers for storage of waste materials and debris. Avoid generation of odors and creation of nuisances. d. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Mark containers appropriately. B. Progress Cleaning – Site: 1. Keep outdoor, dust-generating areas wetted down or otherwise control dust emissions. 2. Not less than weekly, brush-sweep roadways and paved areas at the Site and adjacent areas used by construction vehicles or otherwise affected by construction activities. 3. Comply with dust control requirements of Section 01 57 05 - Temporary Controls. C. Progress Cleaning – Work Areas: 1. Clean areas where the Work is in progress to maintain an extent of cleanliness necessary for proper execution of the Work and safety of personnel. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents CLEANING 01 74 00 - 2 2. Remove liquid spills promptly. Where spills may have harmful effects on health, safety, protection of facilities, or the environment, immediately report spills to Owner, Engineer, and authorities having jurisdiction, in accordance with the Contract Documents and Laws and Regulations. 3. Where dust would impair proper execution of or quality of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum entire work area, as necessary. 4. Concealed Spaces: Remove waste material and debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space. D. Progress Cleaning – Installed Work: 1. Keep installed Work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of installed materials and equipment, using only cleaning agents and methods specifically recommended by material or equipment Supplier. 2. If Supplier does not recommend specific cleaning agents or methods, use cleaning agents and methods that are not hazardous to health and property and that will not damage or mar exposed surfaces. E. Progress Cleaning – Exposed Surfaces: 1. Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration until Substantial Completion. F. Progress Cleaning – Cutting and Patching: 1. Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Completely remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, trailings and cuttings, and similar materials. 2. Comply with Section 01 73 29 - Cutting and Patching, regarding cleaning during and after cutting and patching Work. 3. Thoroughly clean piping, ductwork, conduits, and similar features before applying patching material, paint, or other finishing materials. 4. Restore damaged insulation and coverings on piping, cutwork, and similar items to its pre- construction condition. G. Cleaning of Hydraulic Structures: 1. Clean hydraulic structures that will contain fluid, such as tanks and channels, in accordance with this Specifications section. . 2. Do not perform field quality control activities such as testing tanks, channels, and other hydraulic structures for leakage or disinfecting (where applicable), and do not apply for inspection for Substantial Completion for hydraulic structures, until the associated hydraulic structures are clean and free of all waste materials, and ready for intended use. H. Waste Disposal: 1. Properly dispose of waste materials (including surplus materials, debris, rubbish, and other waste) off the Site. 2. Do not burn or bury waste materials at the Site. 3. Remove waste material and rubbish from excavations before backfilling. 4. Do not discharge volatile or hazardous substances, such as mineral spirits, oil, or paint thinner, into storm sewers, gutters, sanitary sewers, or other location in the environment. Dispose of such materials in accordance with Laws and Regulations. 5. Do not discharge wastes to surface waters, drainage routes, or groundwater. 6. Contractor is solely responsible for complying with Laws and Regulations regarding storing, transporting, and disposing of waste generated by Contractor’s operations or brought to the Site by Contractor. I. During handling and installation of materials and equipment, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials and equipment already in place. Apply protective covering where necessary or required for protection from damage or deterioration, until Substantial Completion. J. Clean completed construction as frequently as necessary throughout the construction period. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents CLEANING 01 74 00 - 3 3.2 CLOSEOUT CLEANING A. Complete the following prior to requesting inspection for Substantial Completion: 1. Clean and remove from the Site waste material (including rubbish and debris) and other foreign and undesirable items and substances. 2. Sweep broom-clean paved areas suitable for access by vehicles. 3. Remove spills and stains or petroleum, oils, solvents, other chemicals, and other foreign and undesirable deposits. 4. Hose-clean sidewalks and loading areas. 5. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even-textured surface. 6. Surface waterways and drainage routes (including storm sewers, gutters, and ditches) shall be open and clean. 7. Repair pavement, roads, sod, and other areas affected by construction operations and restore to specified condition; if condition is not specified, restore to preconstruction condition. 8. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to dirt-free condition, free of spatter, grease, stains, fingerprints, films, and similar foreign and undesirable substances. 9. Clean, wax, and polish wood, vinyl, and painted floors. 10. Remove waste material and surface dust from limited-access spaces, including roofs, plenums, shafts, trenchway, equipment vaults, manholes, and similar spaces. 11. In unoccupied spaces, sweep concrete floors broom-clean. 12. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glazing in doors and windows. Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials. Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials. 13. Remove non-permanent tags and labels. 14. Surface Finishes: a. Touch-up and otherwise repair and restore chipped, scratched, dented or otherwise marred surfaces to specified finish and match adjacent surfaces. b. Do not paint over “UL” or similar labels, including mechanical and electrical nameplates. 15. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment, and similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint, and mortar droppings, and other foreign or undesirable substances. 16. Clean plumbing fixtures to sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains resulting from water exposure. 17. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills. 18. Clean lighting fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency. Replace temporary lamps provided in permanent fixtures. Replace existing lighting fixture components that are burned out or noticeably dimmed from use during construction. Replace defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for new fixtures. 19. Leave the Site clean, and in neat, orderly condition, satisfactory to Owner and Engineer. B. Complete the following prior to requesting final inspection: 1. After Substantial Completion of all the Work, following completion of items of incomplete or damaged Work (“punch list Work”), clean “punch list Work areas in accordance with Paragraph 3.2.A of this Specifications Section. 2. Remove field offices, Contractor’s storage sheds, and remaining stockpiles and clean all such areas in accordance with Paragraph 3.2.B of this Specifications Section, and in accordance with Contract Documents for landscaping and restoration. END OF SECTION Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 This page intentionally left blank. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents CHECKOUT AND START-UP PROCEDURES 01 75 00 - 1 SECTION 01 75 00 CHECKOUT AND START-UP PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Administrative and procedural requirements for checkout and startup of equipment, systems, and facilities. B. Scope: 1. Contractor shall initially check out, start up, and place equipment and systems installed under the Contract into successful operation, in accordance with the material and equipment manufacturers’ written instructions, Suppliers’ recommendations at the Site, and the Contract Documents. 2. Provide the following: a. All labor, tools, materials, and equipment required to complete equipment and system checkout and startup. b. Chemicals, lubricants, and other required operating fluids necessary for checkout, startup, and initial operation of the Work. c. Filters and other temporary or consumable items necessary for checkout, startup, and initial operation of the Work. d. Fuel, electricity, water, and other temporary utilities and temporary facilities necessary for checkout and startup of equipment and systems, unless otherwise specified. 3. The General Conditions, as may be modified by the Supplementary Conditions, and Section 01 77 19 - Closeout Requirements, address requirements for documenting Substantial Completion. C. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Section 01 78 23 - Operation and Maintenance Data 2. Section 01 61 03 - Common Work Results for Equipment. 3. Section 01 77 19 - Closeout Requirements. 4. Section 40 61 13 - Process Control Systems - General Requirements. 1.2 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: 1. Coordinate checkout and startup with other contractors, as necessary. 2. Do not start up equipment or system(s) for continuous operation until all components of that equipment item or system, including instrumentation and controls, have been tested to the extent practicable and proven to be operable as intended by the Contract Documents. 3. Subject to the constraints of this Specifications section, Owner will furnish sufficient personnel to assist Contractor in starting up equipment and system(s), but responsibility for proper operation of the Work is Contractor’s. 4. Supplier shall be present during checkout, startup, and initial operation, unless otherwise acceptable to Engineer or otherwise required by the Contract Documents. 5. For startup of heating equipment, air conditioning equipment, and other equipment and systems that provide temperature control, that are dependent upon the time of year, return to the Site at beginning of next heating or cooling season (as applicable) to recheck and start the appropriate equipment and system(s). 6. Do not start up equipment and system(s), without submitting acceptable preliminary operations and maintenance manuals by Contractor in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. Checkout and Startup Planning Meeting: Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents CHECKOUT AND START-UP PROCEDURES 01 75 00 - 2 1. Contractor, with appropriate Subcontractors and Suppliers, shall attend and participate in a meeting with Owner, facility manager, and Engineer to discuss planning, scheduling, and coordination of checkout and startup activities. 2. Meeting shall be held by the earlier of: (1) not less than sixty 60 days prior to first scheduled training session for the equipment and system(s) to be checked out and started- up, and (2) not less than sixty 60 days prior to the checkout and startup of the associated equipment and system(s). 3. Attend meeting prepared to knowledgably and effectively discuss: a. Status of the Work and schedule-to-complete for requirements prerequisite to checkout and startup. b. Schedule for and status of training required for each equipment item and system. c. Schedule for checkout, startup, and field quality control activities for the subject Work. d. Status and quantities of required consumables, lubricants, and utility services necessary for checkout and startup. C. Scheduling: 1. Progress Schedule: a. Clearly indicate in the Progress Schedule planned and actual dates for checkout, startup, and field quality control activities, including all demonstration testing activities addressed in this Specifications section and elsewhere in the Contract Documents. Separately indicate checkout, startup, and field quality control activities for each equipment item and system. b. Perform startup and field quality control activities on the associated, scheduled dates, unless otherwise acceptable to Owner, facility manager, and Engineer. 2. Restrictions for Scheduling: a. Checkout of materials, equipment, and systems by Contractor that do not involve or require Owner’s or facility manager’s personnel may be performed at any time during normal working hours. Where required by the Contract Documents or requested by Engineer, perform checkout in the presence of Engineer or Resident Project Representative (RPR). b. Startup, including initial operation of materials, equipment, and systems, shall not be initiated on: Monday, Friday, Saturday, Sunday, Owner’s holidays, the day immediately prior to a holiday, or the day immediately following a holiday, unless otherwise acceptable to Owner, facility manager, and Engineer. c. Unless otherwise indicated in the Contract Documents or acceptable to Owner, facility manager, and Engineer, perform all startup during normal working hours of the day shift. d. To the extent practicable, where extended-duration startup or field quality control activities are required by the Contract, avoid having such activities extend into evening, night, weekend, or holiday hours. e. Owner reserves the right to require a minimum seven (7) days' notice of rescheduled startup when Contractor cannot perform the associated activities as scheduled. 3. Operation and Maintenance Data: a. Comply with Section 01 78 23 - Operation and Maintenance Data. b. A preliminary copy of all operation and maintenance manuals shall be received by Engineer prior to the start of the demonstration period. 4. Spare Parts, Tools, and Extra Materials. a. Comply with Section 01 78 43 - Spare Parts and Extra Materials, for furnishing spare parts, tools, and extra materials to Owner and for documenting Owner’s or facility manager’s (as applicable) receipt of such items. b. Deliver to Owner or facility manager (as applicable) all required spare parts, tools, and extra materials prior to commencing the demonstration period, unless earlier delivery is required elsewhere in the Contract Documents. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents CHECKOUT AND START-UP PROCEDURES 01 75 00 - 3 1. Do not start up equipment or systems or place into initial operation until required operating permits are obtained from authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Where Owner (with or without assistance of Engineer) has applied for and obtained initial approvals or permits necessary for operation, Contractor shall furnish information and assistance to Owner or Engineer for Owner to secure final approvals from authorities having jurisdiction for required operating permits. B. Qualifications: 1.4 DEFINITIONS A. The following defined terms are used in this Specifications Section: 1. Instrumentation Supplier: Entity retained by Contractor, Subcontractor, or Supplier to furnish instrumentation or controls that will be part of the completed Work, including manufacturers, manufacturer representatives, wholesalers, retailers, and others, including entities retained to perform systems integration Work. 2. Pre-Demonstration Period: The period of time, of unspecified duration after initial construction and installation activities during which Contractor, with assistance from manufacturer's representatives, performs in the following sequence: a. Finishing type construction work to ensure the Project has reached a state of Substantial Completion. b. Equipment start-up. c. Personnel training. 3. Demonstration Period: A period of time, of specified duration, following the Pre- Demonstration Period, during which the Contractor initiates process flowthrough the facility and starts up and operates the facility, without exceeding specified downtime limitations, to prove the functional integrity of the mechanical and electrical equipment and components and the control interfaces of the respective equipment and components comprising the facility as evidence of Substantial Completion. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Data collection and reporting log for each required Demonstration Period. B. Informational Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Progress Schedules indicating dates for checkout, startup, and field quality control activates. 2. Completed checkout and startup log required in Paragraph 3.2.C of this Specifications section. 3. Manufacturer's installation check letters (also known as Manufacturer’s Field Services Report) required in Paragraph 3.2.C of this Specifications section. 4. Instrumentation Supplier’s Instrumentation Installation Certificate, required in Paragraph 3.2.C of this Specifications section. 5. Letter verifying completion of all pre-demonstration startup activities, required in Paragraph 3.2.C of this Specifications section. 6. Report of data collected during each required Demonstration Period. PART 2 - PRODUCTS - (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CHECKOUT AND STARTUP – GENERAL A. Facility Startup Divided into Two Periods: 1. Pre-Demonstration Period including: a. Obtain Engineer’s approval or acceptance (as applicable) of Submittals required prior to checkout and startup, including all Shop Drawings, Samples, source quality control (shop testing) Submittals, preliminary operation and maintenance manuals, and other Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents CHECKOUT AND START-UP PROCEDURES 01 75 00 - 4 Submittals required by the Contract Documents, other than Submittals that cannot be furnished until after startup. b. Complete the Work to a point ready for checkout and startup, including operation available in all manual, automatic, and other modes. c. Checkout and initial field quality control activities that can be performed prior to startup of the equipment or system. d. Startup of the associated Work. e. Field quality control activities for the subject Work as indicated elsewhere in the Specifications and other Contract Documents, other than this section. f. Training of operations and maintenance personnel. 2. Demonstration Period, including: a. Demonstration of functional integrity of equipment, system, or PCS. 3.2 PRE-DEMONSTRATION PERIOD A. Prior to the Pre-Demonstration Period, complete the Work to the point where it is ready for checkout and startup. B. Checkout. 1. Comply with Section 01 61 03 - Common Work Results for Equipment, including provisions concerning installation checks C. Startup: 1. Comply with requirements for startup of materials, equipment, and systems indicated in the associated Specification sections and elsewhere in the Contract Documents. 2. Prepare the Work so it will operate properly and safely and be ready to demonstrate functional integrity during the Demonstration Period. 3. Perform startup to extent possible without introducing process flow. 4. Procedures include but are not necessarily limited to the following: a. Test or check and correct deficiencies of: 1) Power, control, and monitoring circuits for continuity prior to connection to power source. 2) Voltage of all circuits. 3) Phase sequence. 4) Cleanliness of connecting piping systems. 5) Alignment of connected machinery. 6) Vacuum and pressure of all closed systems. 7) Lubrication. 8) Valve orientation and position status for manual operating mode. 9) Tankage for integrity using clean water. 10) Pumping equipment using clean water. 11) Instrumentation and control signal generation, transmission, reception, and response. a) Comply with Section 40 61 13 - Process Control System General Requirements. 12) Tagging and identification systems. 13) Proper connections, alignment, calibration and adjustment. b. Calibrate safety equipment. c. Manually rotate or move moving parts to assure freedom of movement. d. “Bump-start” electric motors to verify proper rotation. e. Perform other tests, checks, and activities required to make the Work ready for Demonstration Period. f. Checkout and Startup Log: 1) Prepare a log showing each equipment item and system requiring checkout and startup. Indicate in the log activities to be accomplished during checkout and startup. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents CHECKOUT AND START-UP PROCEDURES 01 75 00 - 5 2) Provide a place for Contractor to record date and person performing required checkout and startup. Indicate associated date(s), personnel, and employer of each. 3) Submit completed checkout and startup log to Engineer and obtain Engineer’s acceptance. 5. Obtain Suppliers’ certifications of the installed and operational Work, without restrictions, and submit to Engineer: a. Manufacturer's installation check letters (sometimes referred to as Manufacturer’s Field Services Report). b. Instrumentation Supplier's Instrumentation Installation Certificate. 6. Letter verifying completion of all pre-demonstration startup activities including receipt of all specified items from Suppliers as final item prior to initiation of Demonstration Period. 7. Personnel Training: 3.3 DEMONSTRATION PERIOD A. Demonstration Period – General: 1. Demonstrate the operation and performance of mechanical, electrical, instrumentation, and control interfaces of the Work undergoing the Demonstration Period, in accordance with the Contract Documents. 2. Duration of Demonstration Period: 120 consecutive hours. 3. If, during the Demonstration Period, the aggregate time used for repair, alteration, or unscheduled adjustments to any part of the Work that renders the affected Work inoperative or operation outside of recommended ranges exceeds 10% of the Demonstration Period, the demonstration of operation and performance will be deemed unacceptable and Contractor shall provide appropriate adjustments and remedies and re-perform the Demonstration Test, at no additional cost to Owner or facility manager, until acceptable results are obtained. Re- performance of the Demonstration Period shall comply with the same requirements as the original Demonstration Period. 4. Perform the demonstration of operation and performance of the Work under full operational conditions. 5. Owner’s or Facility Manager’s Personnel: a. Owner or facility manager (as applicable) will make available operations personnel to make process decisions affecting facility performance and compliance with applicable operating permits. b. Owner's or facility manager’s assistance will be available only for process decisions. c. Contractor will perform all other functions associated with the Demonstration Period including but not limited to equipment operation and maintenance until successful completion of the Demonstration Period in accordance with the Contract Documents. 6. Owner or facility manager reserves the right to simulate operational variables, equipment failures, routine maintenance scenarios, and similar actions and events during the Demonstration Period to verify the operation and performance of the Work in automatic, manual, and other types of operating modes, backup systems, and alternate operating modes. 7. Prior to Starting Demonstration Period: a. Prepare data collection and reporting log for sampling, analytical data, and data to be obtained by manually recording data from field or panel indicators. Not less than 30 days prior to the start of the Demonstration Period, submit the data collection and reporting log to Engineer for acceptance. 8. Timing of Start and End of Demonstration Period: a. Schedule the end of the Demonstration Period at a convenient time such as midnight, so the Owner or facility manager can assume operational responsibility on a new day beginning immediately after completion of the Demonstration Period. b. Time of beginning and ending Demonstration Period shall be agreed upon by Contractor, Owner (and facility manager, if other than Owner), and Engineer in advance of initiating Demonstration Period. B. Demonstration Period, Evaluation, and Acceptance: Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents CHECKOUT AND START-UP PROCEDURES 01 75 00 - 6 1. Throughout the Demonstration Period, provide knowledgeable personnel to answer Owner's or facility manager’s questions, provide final field instruction on select systems (where appropriate) and to respond to problems or failures of the Work. 2. Responsibilities for Sampling and Data Collection: a. Use the data collection and reporting log format accepted by Engineer. Indicate data clearly and legibly. 3. Responsibilities for Data Reporting: a. Submit data collected to Engineer for evaluation of acceptability of results. 4. Data Evaluation: a. Engineer, in consultation with Owner and facility manager (as applicable) as necessary, will evaluate the data collected during the Demonstration Period and other information obtained during the Demonstration Period for compliance with the Contract Documents. b. Engineer will advise Contractor in writing of whether the data and information obtained indicate that the Demonstration Period was successfully completed. END OF SECTION Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS 01 77 19 - 1 SECTION 01 77 19 CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Administrative and procedural requirements for: 1. Substantial Completion. 2. Final inspection. 3. Request for final payment and acceptance of the Work. 1.2 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION A. Substantial Completion – General: 1. Prior to requesting inspection for Substantial Completion, perform the following for the substantially completed Work: a. Materials and equipment for which Substantial Completion is requested shall be fully ready for their intended use, including full operating and monitoring capability in automatic, manual, and other operating modes set forth in the Contract Documents. b. Permanent provisions for safety and protection, shown and indicated in the Contract Documents and associated with the substantially completed Work or for personnel accessing and using the substantially completed Work, shall be in place and ready for their intended use. c. Complete field quality control Work, including inspections and testing at the Site, indicated in Specifications sections for individual materials and equipment items and related Contract Documents. Submit results of, and obtain Engineer’s acceptance of, field quality control tests and inspections required by the Contract Documents. d. Complete checkout and startup in accordance with Section 01 75 00 - Checkout and Startup Procedures, requirements of the Specifications for the various materials and equipment in the substantially completed Work, and related Contract Documents. e. Cleaning for Substantial Completion shall be completed in accordance with Section 01 74 00 - Cleaning. f. Submit and obtain Engineer’s acceptance of final operations and maintenance manuals in accordance with Section 01 78 23 - Operation and Maintenance Data. g. Obtain and submit to Engineer all required permits, inspections, and approvals of authorities having jurisdiction for the substantially completed Work to be occupied and used by Owner. h. Complete other tasks that the Contract requires be completed prior to Substantial Completion. 2. Procedures for requesting and documenting Substantial Completion are in the General Conditions, as may be modified by the Supplementary Conditions. 3. Sample letter for Contractor’s request for inspection for Substantial Completion is attached to this Specifications section. Use the model language of the sample letter, modified to suit the Project and the needs of Contractor’s request. 4. Unless decided otherwise by Owner and Engineer, form of certificate of Substantial Completion will be EJCDC C-625, “Certificate of Substantial Completion” (2018 edition or later), prepared by Engineer. 1.3 FINAL INSPECTION A. Final Inspection – General: 1. Prior to requesting final inspection, verify that all the Work is fully complete and ready for final payment. Partial checklist for this purpose is attached to this Specifications section. 2. Sample letter for Contractor to request final inspection is attached to this Specifications section. Use the model language of the sample letter, modified to suit the Project. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS 01 77 19 - 2 3. Procedures for requesting and documenting the final inspection are in the General Conditions, as may be modified by the Supplementary Conditions, and as augmented in this Specifications section. 1.4 REQUEST FOR FINAL PAYMENT AND ACCEPTANCE OF THE WORK A. Procedure: 1. After successful completion of the final inspection, submit request for final payment in accordance with the Agreement and General Conditions, as may be modified by the Supplementary Conditions, and using procedure specified in Section 01 29 76 - Progress Payment Procedures, and this Specifications section. 2. Acceptance of the Work: a. Upon Engineer’s concurrence that the Work is complete and ready for final payment (as a result of the final inspection and other communications between the parties and Engineer) and receipt of the final Application for Payment, accompanied by other required Contract closeout documentation, all in accordance with the Contract Documents, Engineer will issue to Owner and Contractor a notice of acceptability of the Work, in accordance with the General Conditions, as may be modified by the Supplementary Conditions. b. Unless decided otherwise by Owner and Engineer, form of acceptance will be EJCDC C-626, “Notice of Acceptability of Work”, (2018 edition or later). c. Nothing other than receipt of such notice of acceptability from Engineer constitutes acceptance of the Work. d. Receipt of Engineer’s notice of acceptability of the Work does not relieve Contractor of Contractor’s continuing obligations under the Contract, including correction period obligations, warranty obligations, indemnification obligations, insurance requirements, and Contractor’s other obligations following acceptance of the Work by Engineer and final payment. Such obligations shall commence and remain in effect as indicated elsewhere in the Contract Documents. B. Request for final payment shall include: 1. Documents required in the General Conditions, as may be modified by the Supplementary Conditions. 2. List, on Contractor’s letterhead, of all Change Proposals, Claims, and disputes that Contractor believes are unsettled. If there are no such Change Proposals, Claims, or disputes, so indicate in writing. 3. Consent of Surety to Final Payment: a. Acceptable form includes AIA G707, “Consent of Surety to Final Payment” (1994 or later edition), or other form acceptable to Owner. 4. Releases of Liens: a. Submit complete and legally effective releases (satisfactory to Owner) of all Liens filed in connection with the Work, regardless of whether such Lien was filed by Contractor, Subcontractor, or Supplier. b. Each release of Lien shall be signed by an authorized representative of the entity submitting the release of Lien, and shall include Contractor’s, Subcontractor’s, or Supplier’s (as applicable) corporate seal, when applicable. PART 2 - PRODUCTS - (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 ATTACHMENTS A. The documents listed below, following this Specification section’s “End of Section” designation, are part of this Specifications section: Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS 01 77 19 - 3 1. Sample letter for Contractor’s use in requesting inspection for Substantial Completion (two pages). 2. Sample partial checklist to identify readiness for final inspection (four pages). 3. Sample letter for Contractor’s use in requesting final inspection (one page). B. In the model language of the attached sample letters for Contractor to request inspection for Substantial Completion and the final inspection, italicized language in brackets, e.g., “insert date” indicates instructions to the drafter of the letter and often indicates specific information to be inserted by Contractor; do not include bracketed, italicized text in the final version of the letter(s) prepared for the Project. Non-italicized language in brackets is optional language; use the appropriate language to complete the actual letter for the Project and edit where required to suit the specific circumstances. END OF SECTION Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS 01 77 19 - 4 SAMPLE LETTER FOR CONTRACTOR’S USE IN REQUESTING INSPECTION FOR SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION SENT VIA E-MAIL AND U.S. CERTIFIED MAIL/RETURN RECEIPT REQUESTED Date Name of Engineer’s contact person HDR Street address City, state, postal code Subject: Project name, Contract designation Request for Inspection for Substantial Completion Dear addressee: In our opinion, all of or a portion of the Work under the above-referenced Contract is substantially complete as of insert month, day, year on which Substantial Completion was achieved. The specific portion of the Work that we believe is substantially complete is insert identification of that portion of the Work that is substantially complete. Enclosed is our listing of uncompleted Work items (“punch list”). In accordance with Paragraph 15.03.A of the General Conditions, we hereby request: (1) That the Engineer schedule and perform the inspection for Substantial Completion as soon as possible, and (2) Issuance of the certificate of Substantial Completion. In accordance with Paragraph 15.03.D of the General Conditions, upon Substantial Completion, we propose the following relative to apportionment of responsibilities between the Owner and the Contractor: 1. Security, Protection, Insurance: a. Site Security: insert proposal; address whether Owner or Contractor will be responsible for security of the Site. b. Protection of the Substantially Completed Work: insert proposal; address whether Owner or Contractor will be responsible for protection. c. Property Insurance: insert proposal; typically, Owner assumes responsibility for property insurance upon Substantial Completion. 2. Operation and Maintenance: a. Operation: insert proposal; address whether Owner or Contractor will be responsible for operating the substantially completed Work. b. Maintenance: insert proposal; address whether Owner or Contractor will be responsible for maintaining the substantially completed Work. 3. Utilities: for each of the following, indicate whether Owner or Contractor will be responsible for utilities and services, or whether responsibility will be shared; if shared, indicate proposed cost-sharing a. Electricity: insert proposal. b. Natural Gas/Fuel/Heating: insert proposal. c. Water Supply: insert proposal. d. Wastewater: insert proposal. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS 01 77 19 - 5 e. Communications (Telephone, Internet, Video): insert proposal. In accordance with Paragraph 15.08.A of the General Conditions, we understand that the Contract’s correction period for the Work covered by the certificate of Substantial Completion commences on the Substantial Completion date documented in said certificate. Drafter: Also see Paragraph 15.04 (“Partial Utilization”) of the General Conditions and, where necessary, edit this paragraph of the letter accordingly. Should you have questions or comments regarding this notice, please contact the undersigned or insert other contact person’s name, at insert telephone number and e-mail address. Sincerely, Contractor’s company name Signatory name Signatory’s title Attachments: Preliminary list of uncompleted Work items (“punch list”; ## pages) Copies: Owner’s project manager Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS 01 77 19 - 6 SAMPLE PARTIAL CHECKLIST TO IDENTIFY READINESS FOR FINAL INSPECTION Project: Contract: Contractor: Item No./Description Completed/Date In Progress Not Started Not Applicable Target Date Responsible Entity/Person 1. All Submittals, including all Shop Drawings and Samples, approved or accepted by Engineer Remarks: 1. Final services completed by Suppliers, including submittal of “Manufacturer Field Service Report” in Section 01 61 03 - Common Work Results for Equipment Remarks: 2. Final Work completed by Subcontractors Remarks: 3. Permits closed out and regulatory compliance transitioned from construction to operations Remarks: 4. All outstanding change issues are addressed and all Change Proposals submitted Remarks: Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS 01 77 19 - 7 Item No./Description Completed/Date In Progress Not Started Not Applicable Target Date Responsible Entity/Person 5. All Change Proposals and Claims are resolved Remarks: 6. All defective Work of which Contractor is aware has been corrected in accordance with the Contract Documents Remarks: 7. Issues related to Constituents of Concern and potential Hazardous Environmental Condition have been fully addressed Remarks: 8. All spare parts, tools, and extra materials have been furnished in accordance with the Contract Documents, and documentation thereof submitted to Engineer Remarks: 9. All final operations & maintenance manuals have been submitted and accepted by Engineer Remarks: 10. Manufacturer warranties and software license(s) furnished Remarks: 11. Instruction and training of operations and maintenance Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS 01 77 19 - 8 Item No./Description Completed/Date In Progress Not Started Not Applicable Target Date Responsible Entity/Person personnel is complete and records of training submitted Remarks: 12. MBE/WBE/DBE/VBE compliance report(s) submitted (when applicable) Remarks: 13. All field engineering Submittals, including survey data, furnished Remarks: 14. All Work on “punch list” is complete in accordance with the Contract Documents Remarks: 15. All record documents submitted to and accepted by Engineer Remarks: 16. Contractor is fully demobilized from the Site Remarks: 17. All Site restoration is complete Remarks: 18. Final cleaning of all work areas is complete Remarks: Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS 01 77 19 - 9 Item No./Description Completed/Date In Progress Not Started Not Applicable Target Date Responsible Entity/Person 19. Releases of Liens and waivers of Lien rights (or acceptable alternative) obtained from Subcontractors and Suppliers Remarks: 20. Evidence of Contractor liability insurance furnished for correction period Remarks: 21. All other required Contract closeout documents obtained Remarks: Remarks: 22. All other Work and documentation required prior to final payment is complete and provided in accordance with the Contract Documents Remarks: Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS 01 77 19 - 10 SAMPLE LETTER FOR CONTRACTOR’S USE IN REQUESTING FINAL INSPECTION SENT VIA E-MAIL AND U.S. CERTIFIED MAIL/RETURN RECEIPT REQUESTED Date Name of Engineer’s contact person HDR Street address City, state, postal code Subject: Project name, Contract designation Request for Final Inspection Dear addressee: The Work under the above-referenced Contract is complete and ready for final payment as of insert month, day, year on which final completion was achieved. In accordance with Paragraph 15.05 of the General Conditions, we hereby request that the Engineer schedule and perform the final inspection as soon as possible. Upon successful completion of the final inspection, we will submit our final Application for Payment accompanied by the required Contract closeout documentation in accordance with the Contract Documents. Should you have questions or comments regarding this notice, please contact the undersigned or insert other contact person’s name, at insert telephone number and e-mail address. Sincerely, Contractor’s company name Signatory name Signatory’s title Attachments: None Copies: Owner’s project manager Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 78 23 - 1 SECTION 01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Requirements for Contractor-furnished, manufacturers’ operation and maintenance (O&M) data, including: a. Required operation and maintenance data groupings into operation and data manuals and timing of such Submittals. b. Requirements for paper copies of operation and maintenance data and related Electronic Documents. c. Content of operation and maintenance data Submittals. B. Scope: 1. Contractor shall submit operation and maintenance data, and related information, in accordance with this Section and requirements elsewhere in the Contract Documents, as instructional and reference information for use by: (a) Owner’s operation and maintenance personnel, and (b) others retained by or working for Owner. 2. In addition to operation and maintenance data expressly required elsewhere in the Contract Documents, also submit operation and maintenance data for: a. All equipment and systems, including facility equipment, conveying equipment, fire suppression systems, plumbing equipment, HVAC equipment, electrical equipment, communications equipment, electronic safety and security systems, utility equipment, transportation equipment, waterway and marine equipment, and process equipment, and other equipment. b. Valves, gates, actuators, and related accessories. c. Instrumentation and control devices and systems. d. Building materials, systems, and finishes that need post-construction troubleshooting, cleaning, or maintenance, such as roofing, doors, windows, louvers, flooring, paint and coatings, other finishes, and other items. C. Related Requirements: 1. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures. 2. Section 01 75 00 - Checkout and Startup Procedures. 3. Section 01 78 36 - Warranties. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Closeout Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Operation and Maintenance Data: a. Submit operation and maintenance data, required by the Contract Documents, grouped into operation and maintenance manual Submittals indicated in Table 01 78 23-A. b. Where operation and maintenance data required by the Contract Documents, is not expressly indicated in table 01 78 23-A, obtain written clarification or interpretation from Engineer prior to preparing and transmitting such Submittal. c. For each required operation and maintenance manual Submittal, furnish preliminary Submittal and final Submittal. Timing of preliminary and final operation and maintenance manual Submittals, and differences between preliminary and final Submittals, are indicated in this Section. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 78 23 - 2 Table 01 78 23-A Required Groupings of Operation and Maintenance Data Submittals Name of O&M Manual/Data For Materials or Equipment Specified in Section(s) B. Timing of Submittals and Quantity Required: 1. Preliminary Operation and Maintenance Manual Submittals: a. Paper Copies: Three copies, exclusive of copies required for Contractor’s use. b. Electronic Documents: Portable document format (“.pdf”) files. c. Submit to entity indicated in Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures, by the earlier of: 90 days following approval of Shop Drawings and product data Submittals, or 14 days prior to starting training of operation and maintenance personnel, or 14 days prior to field quality control testing at the Site. d. Do not perform checkout, startup, and training without Engineer’s acceptance of preliminary operation and maintenance data Submittals for the associated Work. 2. Final Operation and Maintenance Manual Submittals: Furnish final Submittal prior to Substantial Completion of the associated Work, unless submittal is required prior to an interim Milestone. a. Paper Copies: Three copies, exclusive of copies required for Contractor’s use. b. Electronic Documents: Portable document format (“.pdf”) files. c. Work will not be eligible for Substantial Completion until associated, required final operation and maintenance data Submittals are accepted by Engineer. d. If Contractor (whether or not via Subcontractor or Supplier), revises program code or configuration files between acceptance of Submittal by Engineer and end of the Contract’s correction period and Contractor’s general warranty obligation, furnish updated program code and configuration files to Owner. Before modifying program code and configuration files after Substantial Completion, verify with facility manager that Owner- or facility manager modifications of program code or configuration files were incorporated into the modified files, subject to the provisions of this Section. 1.3 PAPER COPIES OF O&M MANUALS A. Binding and Cover: 1. Bind each operation and maintenance manual in durable, permanent, stiff-cover binder(s), comprising one or more volumes per copy, as necessary. 2. Binders shall be not less than one inch wide and maximum of three inches wide. Binders for each copy of each volume shall be same size and color. 3. Binders shall be locking three-ring (”D”-ring) type, or three-post type. Three-ring binders shall be riveted to back cover and include plastic sheet lifter (page guard) at front and back of each volume. 4. Do not overfill binders. 5. Covers shall be oil-, moisture-, and wear-resistant, including identifying information on cover and spine of each volume. 6. Indicate the following information on cover of each volume: a. Title: “OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS”. For submittal of preliminary operation and maintenance data, include the word, “PRELIMINARY” in the title. b. Name or type of material or equipment covered in the manual. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 78 23 - 3 c. Volume number, if more than one volume is submitted, listed as “Volume of ___ ”, with appropriate volume-designating numbers filled in. d. Name of Project and, when applicable, Contract name and number. e. Name of building or structure, as applicable. 7. Provide the following information on spine of each volume: a. Title: “OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS”. For submittal of preliminary operation and maintenance data, include the word, “PRELIMINARY” in the title. b. Name or type of material or equipment covered in the manual. c. Volume number, when more than one volume is submitted, listed as “Volume of ___ ”, with appropriate volume-designating numbers filled in. d. Project name and building or structure name. B. Pages: 1. Print pages in paper copies of operation and maintenance manuals on 30-pound (minimum) paper, 8.5-inch by 11-inch size. 2. Reinforce binding holes in each individual paper sheet with plastic, cloth, or metal. When published, separately-bound booklets or pamphlets are part of manuals, reinforcing of pages within booklet or pamphlet is not required. 3. Furnish each page with binding margin not less than 3/4-inch wide. 4. Properly punch each paper page with holes suitable for associated binding. Provide not less than 3/8-inch of paper between outer edge of punched holes and edge of paper. Manuals with improperly punched holes will be returned to Contractor as unacceptable. 5. In paper copies of manuals, each page in each copy shall be properly bound-through by the binder’s rings or posts. Paper manuals where some pages are not so bound will be returned to Contractor as unacceptable. C. Drawings: 1. Bind into operation and maintenance manuals drawings, diagrams, and illustrations up to and including 11-inch by 17-inch size, with reinforcing and punched holes specified for paper pages. 2. Drawings or sheets larger than 11-inch by 17-inch shall be: a. Paper Copies: Neatly folded and inserted into clear plastic pockets bound into the manual. Neatly and permanently label each pocket with printed text indicating content and drawing numbers. Include not more than two drawings or sheets per pocket. b. Electronic Documents Copies: Included in electronic file at appropriate location. D. Copy Quality and Document Clarity: 1. Provide original-quality copies. Documents in operation and maintenance manuals shall be either original manufacturer-printed documents or first-generation photocopies indistinguishable from originals. If original is in color, copies shall be in color. Manuals with copies that are unclear, not completely legible, off-center, skewed, or where text or drawings are cut by binding holes, are unacceptable. Pages that contain approval or date stamps, comments, or other markings that cover text or drawing are unacceptable. 2. Clearly mark, using ink, to indicate all components of materials and equipment on catalog pages for ease of identification. In standard or pre-printed documents, indicate options furnished and cross out inapplicable content. Using highlighters to so indicate options furnished is unacceptable. E. Organization: 1. Indexed tabs between major categories of information, such as operating instructions, preventive maintenance instructions, and other major subdivisions of data in each manual. 1.4 ELECTRONIC DOCUMENTS O&M MANUALS A. Electronic Documents of Operation and Maintenance Manuals: 1. Each Electronic Document copy of operation and maintenance data shall include all information included in the corresponding paper copy. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 78 23 - 4 2. Submit Electronic Documents operation and maintenance data in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures. 3. File Format: a. Unless otherwise required, operation and maintenance data Electronic Documents shall be “portable document format” (PDF) files. b. Electronic Documents shall be electronically searchable upon delivery. c. Electronic Documents shall not be password-protected and shall not be protected against Owner’s or facility manager’s copying and printing such files for Owner’s or facility manager’s use in operating and maintaining the facility. d. Electronic Documents shall open to its first page. e. Submit each operation and maintenance manual as a single Electronic Document file, unless file size is over-large, in which case divide into as few separate files, each with similar filename, as possible. f. Within each Electronic Document, provide bookmarks for the following: 1) Each chapter and subsection indicated in the corresponding printed copy document’s table of contents. 2) Each figure. 3) Each table. 4) Each appendix and attachment. 1.5 CONTENT OF OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Operation and Maintenance Manual Content – General: 1. Prepare each operation and maintenance manual specifically for the Project. Include in each manual all pertinent instructions, as-constructed drawings as applicable, bills of materials, technical information, installation and handling requirements, maintenance and repair instructions, and other information required for complete, accurate, and comprehensive data for safe and proper operation, maintenance, and repair of materials and equipment furnished for the Project. Include in manuals specific information required in the Specification Section for the material or equipment, data required by Laws and Regulations, and data required by authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Provisions of this Article were written for equipment. Where operation and maintenance data are required for building products, such as finishes, openings, thermal and moisture protection, and similar items, comply with this Article to the extent practical and reasonable for the associated item. 3. Completeness and Accuracy: a. Operation and maintenance manuals that include language stating or implying that the manual’s content may be insufficient or stating that the manual’s content is not guaranteed to be complete and accurate are unacceptable. b. Operation and maintenance manuals shall be complete and accurate. c. Operation and maintenance manuals shall indicate the specific alternatives and features furnished, and the specific operation and maintenance provisions for the material or equipment furnished. 4. Provide dividers and Include manufacturer’s information, diagrams, schematics, and equipment cutaways. Avoid submitting catalog excerpts unless they are the only document available showing identification or description of particular component of the equipment. Where published documents, included in operation and maintenance data, pertain to multiple models or types, mark the literature to indicate specific material or equipment supplied. Marking may be in the form of checking, arrows, or underlining to indicate pertinent information, or by crossing out or other means of obliterating information that does not apply to the materials and equipment furnished. 5. Identify each equipment item consistent with names and identification numbers shown or indicated in the Contract Documents, rather than manufacturer’s model numbers. 6. Neatly type data not furnished in computer-printed text. Handwriting, except for strikeouts, arrows, and the like, is unacceptable. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 78 23 - 5 7. Include copy of warranty in accordance with the Contract Documents, including Section 01 78 36 - Warranties. 8. Include copy of proposed service contract, when applicable. 9. When copyrighted material is used in operation and maintenance manuals, obtain¬ copyright holder’s written permission to use such material in the operation and maintenance manual. B. Differences Between Preliminary and Final Operation and Maintenance Manuals: 1. In preliminary operation and maintenance manuals, include flysheet or placeholder for information to be included in final operation and maintenance manual Submittal. 2. In final operation and maintenance manuals, include information such as the following, as applicable for the associated materials and equipment: a. Equipment data that requires collection after startup, for example: (1) system and equipment balancing reports, including those for HVAC systems; and (2) final settings for electrical switchgear, automatic transfer switches, and circuit breakers: and (3) materials and equipment field testing results. b. Equipment startup reports and Suppliers’ field service reports (the latter on form in Section 01 75 00 - Checkout and Startup Procedures). C. Initial Documents in Operation and Maintenance Manuals: 1. Table of Contents: a. Provide table of contents in each volume of each operation and maintenance manual. b. In table of contents and not less than once in each chapter or section, identify materials and equipment by their functional names. Thereafter, abbreviations and acronyms may be used if their meaning is clearly indicated in a table bound at or near beginning of each volume. Using material or equipment model or catalog designations for identifying items is unacceptable. 2. Equipment Record: a. Provide “Equipment Record” section of operation and maintenance manual immediately following the table of contents. “Equipment Record” section is not required for operation and maintenance data for other than equipment (such as building materials and finishes). b. Provide “Equipment Record” on forms included as this Section’s Attachments 1, 2, and 3. c. For instrumentation and control equipment, International Society of Automation (ISA) data sheets are acceptable in lieu of the forms included as this Section’s Attachments 1, 2, and 3. d. This Section’s Attachments 1, 2, and 3 are available from Engineer as “fillable PDF forms”. e. Complete in detail each section of “Equipment Record”. Merely referencing the associated equipment’s operation and maintenance data for nameplate, maintenance, spare parts, lubricants, or other required information, is unacceptable. f. For equipment or systems with multiple, separate components (for example, motor and gearbox), fully completed “Equipment Record” is required for each component. g. Operation and maintenance data Submittals without complete and accurate “Equipment Record” sheets are unacceptable. 3. Supplier’s Field Service Reports: a. Include in final operation and maintenance manuals copies of associated Supplier’s field services reports in accordance with Section 01 75 00 - Checkout and Startup Procedures. b. Include Supplier’s completed field service reports in operation and maintenance manual in section immediately following “Equipment Record” section. D. Operation and Maintenance Instructions: 1. Safety Considerations: a. Submit written descriptions of safety considerations relating to operation and maintenance procedures for materials and equipment. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 78 23 - 6 b. Describe safety devices and alarms provided with materials and equipment and proper operation and use. c. Indicate procedures for proper, safe operating and maintenance of materials and equipment furnished, including manufacturer’s recommended personal protection equipment, apparatus, and devices not furnished under the Contract. d. Describe recommended safety-related training for personnel operating and maintaining the subject materials or equipment. e. Include in appendix to operation and maintenance manual manufacturers’ relevant “safety data sheets” (SDS), formerly “material safety data sheets” (MSDS). f. Engineer’s review of operation and maintenance data expressly does not extend to adequacy, completeness, and accuracy of SDS or other safety and protection practices and procedures indicated in the operation and maintenance data. 2. Operation: a. Include in operation and maintenance data Submittals complete, detailed written operating instructions for each material or equipment item including: function; operating characteristics; limiting conditions; and regulation and control. Also include, as applicable, written descriptions of alarms generated by equipment and proper responses to such alarm conditions. b. Include pre-startup instructions and checklists and complete startup instructions for each material and equipment item. c. Indicate recommended operating instructions for all operating modes and conditions, with associated recommendations for safe operation. d. Explain available controls and instrumentation and associated function(s). e. Indicate required shutdown checklists and procedures for: normal shutdown, emergency shutdown, and long-term shutdowns. f. Troubleshooting instructions. 3. Maintenance – General: a. Include in operation and maintenance data complete, written instructions for necessary and recommended maintenance, including mechanical maintenance and electrical/instrumentation and controls maintenance, as applicable. b. Include in operation and maintenance data complete instructions for necessary assembly, disassembly, installation, re-installation, storage, and shipping for materials and equipment. c. Tools: Include list of required maintenance tools and equipment. d. Spare Parts and Extra Materials: 1) Submit complete instructions for ordering replaceable parts, including reference numbers (such as shop order number or serial number) that will expedite the ordering process. 2) Submit manufacturer’s recommended inventory levels for spare parts, extra stock materials, and consumable supplies for the initial two years of operation. Consumable supplies are items consumed or worn by operation of materials or equipment, and items used in maintaining the operation of material or equipment, including items such as lubricants, seals, reagents, and testing chemicals used for calibrating or operating the equipment. Include estimated delivery times, shelf life limitations, and special storage requirements. 3) Also refer to this Article’s provision, “Bills of Materials”, below, for additional requirements regarding ordering replacement parts. 4. Routine and Preventative Maintenance: a. Submit complete, detailed, written instructions for routine and preventive maintenance including all information and instructions to keep materials, equipment, and systems properly lubricated, adjusted, and maintained so that materials, equipment, and systems function economically throughout their expected service life. Instructions shall include: 1) Written explanations with illustrations for each routine and preventive maintenance task such as inspection, adjustment, anchor bolt torque checks, lubrication, calibration, cleaning, replacement of filters, and the like. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 78 23 - 7 2) Recommended schedule for each routine and preventive maintenance task. 3) Lubricants: a) Provide lubrication charts indicating recommended types of lubricants, frequency of application or change, and where each lubricant is to be used or applied. b) Table of alternative lubricants. 5. Major Maintenance: a. Include detailed, written instructions and illustrations for required periodic (non- routine, non-preventative) maintenance. b. Indicate relative level of training and expertise required to perform such maintenance and recommended tools and equipment. 6. Special Maintenance: a. Include maintenance instructions for long-term shutdowns and storage. E. Bills of Materials: 1. Include in operation and maintenance manuals complete bills of material or parts lists for materials and equipment furnished. Lists or bills of material may be furnished on a per- drawing or per-equipment assembly basis. Bills of material shall indicate: 2. Manufacturer’s name, physical address, telephone number, internet website address. 3. Manufacturer’s local service representative’s or local parts supplier’s name, physical address, telephone number, internet website address, and e-mail addresses. 4. Manufacturer’s shop order and serial number(s) for materials, equipment or assembly furnished. 5. For each part or piece include the following information: a. Parts cross-reference number. Cross-reference number shall be used to identify the part on assembly drawings, Shop Drawings, or other type of graphic illustration where the part is clearly shown or indicated. b. Part name or description. c. Manufacturer’s part number. d. Quantity of each part used in each assembly. e. Current unit price of the part at the time the operation and maintenance manual is submitted. Price list shall be dated. F. Record Copy of Shop Drawings, Product data, and Other Previously Approved and Accepted Submittals: 1. Submit original-quality copies of each approved and accepted (as applicable) Shop Drawing, product data Submittal, written results of source quality control activities, and other Submittals, updated to indicate as-installed condition. Do not include prior Submittals that were not approved or were not accepted. Reduced drawings are acceptable only when reduction is to not less than one-half original size and all lines, dimensions, lettering, and text are completely legible on the reduction. G. Electrical Schematics, Diagrams, and Information: 1. Submit complete electrical schematics and wiring diagrams, including complete point-to- point wiring and wiring numbers or colors between all terminal points. 2. Include as-constructed drawings of layouts of electrical panels (such as switchgear and motor control centers) and control panels. H. NFPA 70 (National Electric Code) Documentation: 1. Include in operation and maintenance manuals for electrically-powered equipment documented calculations of: (1) arc-fault current, equipment available fault current and (2) short-circuit current rating (SCCR), provided as part of equipment Submittals. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 78 23 - 8 PART 2 - PRODUCTS - (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 ATTACHMENTS A. The following, bound after this Section’s “End of Section” designation, are part of this Section: 1. Attachment 1 - Equipment Data and Spare Parts Summary form (one page) 2. Attachment 2 - Recommended Maintenance Summary form (one page) 3. Attachment 3 - Lubrication Summary form (one page) END OF SECTION Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 78 23 - 9 Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 78 23 - 10 ATTACHMENT 1 Equipment Record Equipment Data and Spare Parts Summary Project Name Specification Section: Equipment Name Year Installed: Project Equipment Tag No(s). Equipment Manufacturer Project/ Order No. Address Phone Website Web Site E-mail Local Representative/Service Center Address Phone Website E-mail MECHANICAL NAMEPLATE DATA Equip. Serial No. Make Model No. ID No. Frame No. HP RPM Cap. Size TDH Imp. Size CFM PSI Other: ELECTRICAL NAMEPLATE DATA Equip. Serial No. Make Model No. ID No. Frame No. HP V. Amp. Hertz PH RPM SF Duty Code Ins. Cl. Type NEMA C Amb. Temp. Rise Rating Other: SPARE PARTS PROVIDED PER CONTRACT Part No. Part Name Quantity RECOMMENDED SPARE PARTS Part No. Part Name Quantity (Jun 1990; Revised Oct 2001, Revised Nov 2007, Revised 2013) Copyright 1991-2014 HDR Engineering, Inc. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 78 23 - 11 ATTACHMENT 2 Equipment Record Recommended Maintenance Summary Equipment Description Project Equip. Tag No(s). RECOMMENDED BREAK-IN MAINTENANCE (FIRST OIL CHANGES, ETC.) INITIAL COMPLETION * FOLLOWING START-UP D W M Q S A RT Hours RECOMMENDED PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PM TASK INTERVAL * D W M Q S A RT Hours * D = Daily W = Weekly M = Monthly Q = Quarterly S = Semiannual A = Annual Hours = Run Time Interval (Jun 1990; Revised Oct 2001, Revised Nov 2007, Revised 2013) Copyright 1991-2014 HDR Engineering, Inc. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 78 23 - 12 ATTACHMENT 3 Equipment Record Lubrication Summary Equipment Description Project Equip. Tag No(s). Lubricant Point Lubricant Type Manufacturer Product AGMA # SAE # ISO 1 2 3 4 5 Lubricant Point Lubricant Type Manufacturer Product AGMA # SAE # ISO 1 2 3 4 5 Lubricant Point Lubricant Type Manufacturer Product AGMA # SAE # ISO 1 2 3 4 5 Lubricant Point Lubricant Type Manufacturer Product AGMA # SAE # ISO 1 2 3 4 5 Lubricant Point Lubricant Type Manufacturer Product AGMA # SAE # ISO 1 2 3 4 5 Lubricant Point Lubricant Type Manufacturer Product AGMA # SAE # ISO 1 2 3 4 5 (Jun 1990; Revised Oct 2001, Revised Nov 2007, Revised 2013) Copyright 1991-2014 HDR Engineering, Inc. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents WARRANTIES 01 78 36 - 1 SECTION 01 78 36 WARRANTIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. General requirements for warranties required in the various Specifications. 2. Provisions addressing: a. Suppliers’ standard warranties. b. Suppliers’ special or extended warranties. c. Implied warranties. d. Commencement and duration of warranties. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. General: 1. For each item of equipment furnished under the Contract, submit Supplier’s standard warranty, regardless of whether such warranty or Submittal thereof is required by the associated Specifications for that item. Submit such warranties for materials where such Submittal is required in the Specifications for the material. 2. For each item of material or equipment where Supplier’s special (or extended) warranty is required by the Contract Documents, submit appropriate special warranty that complies with the Contract Documents. 3. Supplier’s warranties shall be specifically endorsed to Owner, Contractor, and the entity purchasing the item (if other than Contractor) by the entity issuing such warranty. 4. Submit Suppliers’ standard warranties and special warranties as Submittals in accordance with the Schedule of Submittals accepted by Engineer. 1.3 CONTRACTOR’S GENERAL WARRANTY AND CORRECTION PERIOD OBLIGATIONS A. Contractor’s General Warranty and Guarantee: Comply with requirements of the General Conditions, as may be modified by the Supplementary Conditions. B. Contractor’s Warranty of Title: Comply with requirements of the General Conditions, as may be modified by the Supplementary Conditions. C. Correction Period: Comply with requirements of the General Conditions, as may be modified by the Supplementary Conditions. 1.4 SUPPLIERS’ WARRANTIES FOR MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. Warranty Types: 1. Required by the General Conditions: a. Warranties specified for materials and equipment shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, Contractor’s general warranty and guarantee and requirements for the Contract’s correction period. b. Disclaimers and limitations in specific materials and equipment warranties do not limit Contractor’s general warranty and guarantee, nor does such affect or limit Contractor’s performance obligations under the correction period. 2. Material or equipment manufacturer’s standard warranty is pre-printed, written warranty published by item’s manufacturer and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to the entities indicated in this Specifications Section’s Article 1.2. 3. Special warranty is written warranty that either extends the duration of material or equipment manufacturer’s standard warranty or provides other, increased rights to Owner and other beneficiaries (if any) of such warranty. Where the Contract Documents indicate Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents WARRANTIES 01 78 36 - 2 specific requirements for warranties that differ from the manufacturer’s standard warranty for that item, special warranty is implied. B. Requirements for Special Warranties: 1. Submit written special warranty document that contains appropriate provisions and identification, ready for signature by material or equipment manufacturer, Owner, and other beneficiaries indicated in Article 1.2 of this Specifications Section. Submit draft warranty with Submittals required prior to fabrication and shipment of the item from the Supplier’s facility. 2. Manufacturer’s Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and properly signed by product manufacturer and other entities as appropriate. 3. Specified Form: When specified forms for special warranties are included in the Contract Documents, prepare written document, properly signed by item manufacturer, Owner, and other beneficiaries indicated in Article 1.2 of this Specifications Section, using the required form. 4. Refer to the Specifications for content and requirements for submitting special warranties. 1.5 IMPLIED WARRANTIES A. Warranty of Title and Intellectual Property Rights: 1. Except as may be otherwise indicated in the Contract Documents, implied warranty of title required by Laws and Regulations is applicable to the Work and to materials and equipment incorporated therein. 2. Provisions on intellectual property rights, including patent fees and royalties, are in the General Conditions, as may be modified by the Supplementary Conditions. B. Warranty of Merchantability: 1. Notwithstanding any other provision of the Contract to the contrary, implied warranties of merchantability required by Laws and Regulations apply to the materials and equipment incorporated into the Work. C. Warranty of Fitness-for-Purpose: 1. Implied warranty of fitness-for-purpose for materials and equipment to be incorporated into the Work, for which specific material or features are indicated in the Contract Documents, is hereby disclaimed by Owner and Contractor. 1.6 COMMENCEMENT AND DURATION OF WARRANTIES A. Commencement of Warranties: 1. Contract correction period and Contractor’s general warranty commence as indicated in the General Conditions, as may be modified by the Supplementary Conditions. 2. Suppliers’ standard warranties and special warranties commence running on the date that the associated item is certified by Engineer as substantially complete in accordance with the Contract Documents. In no event shall special warranties commence running prior to Engineer’s review and acceptance of special warranty Submittal for the item. 3. Implied warranties commence in accordance with Laws and Regulations. B. Duration of Warranties: 1. Duration of correction period is set forth in the General Conditions, as may be modified by the Supplementary Conditions. 2. Duration of Contractor’s general warranty and guarantee is in accordance with Laws and Regulations. 3. Duration of Suppliers’ standard warranties is in accordance with the applicable standard warranty document accepted for the Project by Engineer. 4. Duration of required Suppliers’ special warranties shall be in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents for the subject item. 5. Duration of implied warranties shall be in accordance with Laws and Regulations. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents WARRANTIES 01 78 36 - 3 PART 2 - PRODUCTS - (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION - (NOT USED) END OF SECTION Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 This page intentionally left blank. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 78 39 - 1 SECTION 01 78 39 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Requirements for Project record documents, to supplement record documents requirements of the General Conditions, as may be modified by the Supplementary Conditions. B. Scope: 1. Contractor shall provide all labor, materials, equipment, and services to establish, maintain, continuously update, and submit to Engineer Project record documents in accordance with the Contract Documents. C. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Section 01 29 73 - Schedule of Values. 2. Section 01 29 76 - Progress Payment Procedures. 3. Section 01 71 23 - Field Engineering. 1.2 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: 1. Obtain necessary field measurements and record all data required for Project record documents before covering up the Work or building on subsequent phases of the Work. 2. Promptly after obtaining measurements and information, record the data and information on Project record documents. 3. Where a licensed, registered professional land surveyor is retained on the Project, whether by Contractor or others, to perform field measurements and record other data for as- constructed Project or Site conditions, coordinate with such entity and schedule and perform the Work accordingly. Allow surveyor sufficient timte and proper conditions for performing surveyor’s work. Assist the surveyor as necessary in performance of surveyor’s responsibilities. B. Monthly Status Evaluation: 1. Not less than once per month, as a condition precedent to submitting Application for Payment, Contractor’s site superintendent will meet with either Engineer or Resident Project Representative (RPR) at the Site to review status of Contractor’s Project record documents. 2. When Engineer or RPR directs corrections to Project record documents, promptly make such corrections on the Project record documents. Engineer’s or RPR’s directions or lack thereof do not in any way relieve or mitigate Contractor’s sole responsibility for the accuracy, completeness, and clarity of Project record documents. 3. Requirements for review of record documents status as a condition precedent to progress payments is in Section 01 29 73 - Schedule of Values, and Section 01 29 76 - Progress Payment Procedures. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Samples: a. Sample of field-recorded project record documents from prior projects, in accordance with this Specifications section’s “Quality Assurance” Article, to establish quality and style for markups of Project record documents. Submit within 15 days of the date the Contract Times commence running. B. Informational Submittals: Submit the following: Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 78 39 - 2 1. Qualifications Statements: a. When requested by Engineer, submit qualifications of proposed recorder of changes and field conditions for Project record documents at Contractor’s field office at the Site. Qualifications shall comply with the “Quality Assurance” Article of this Specifications section. C. Closeout Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Record Documentation: a. Prior to readiness for final payment, submit to Engineer one copy of Project’s final record documents and obtain Engineer’s acceptance of same. Submit complete record documents; do not make partial Submittals without Engineer’s concurrence. b. Submit the following Project record documents: 1) Record Drawings, including those issued via Addenda, Change Orders, Work Change Directives, Field Orders, and allowance authorizations. c. Submit record documents with transmittal letter on Contractor’s letterhead in accordance with requirements in Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures. 2. Certifications: a. Record documents Submittal shall include certification, with original signature of official authorized to sign legally-binding contracts on behalf of Contractor, reading as follows: 1) (Contractor’s legal/contractual entity name) has maintained, continuously updated, and submitted Project record documentation in accordance with the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions, Section 01 78 39 - Project Record Documents, and other elements of Contract Documents, for the Owner’s organization’s name and Site name and Project name. We certify that each record document submitted is complete, accurate, and legible relative to the Work performed under our Contract, and that the record documents comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents. By: _______ (signature) Print Name: _______ Title: _______ 1.4 MAINTENANCE OF RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Maintain in Contractor’s field office, in clean, dry, legible condition, complete sets of the following record documents: 1. Drawings, Specifications, and Addenda; 2. Shop Drawings, Samples, and other Submittals, including records of test results, approved or accepted as applicable, by Engineer; 3. Change Orders, Work Change Directives, Field Orders, allowance authorizations; 4. copies of all interpretations and clarifications issued; 5. photographic documentation; 6. survey data; and 7. all other documents pertinent to the Work. B. Provide files and racks for proper storage and easy access to Project record documents. File record documents in accordance with the edition of the Construction Specification Institute’s MasterFormat used for organizing the project manual, unless otherwise accepted by Engineer or RPR. C. Promptly make Project record documents available for observation and review upon request of Engineer, RPR, or Owner. D. Do not use Project record documents for any purpose other than serving as Project record. Do not remove Project record documents from Contractor’s field office without Engineer’s approval. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 78 39 - 3 1.5 RECORDING INFORMATION ON PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Recording Changes, Field Conditions, and Other Information – General: 1. At the start of the Project, label each record document to be submitted as, “PROJECT RECORD” using legible, printed letters. Letters on record copy of the Drawings shall be two inches high. 2. Keep record documents current consistent with the progress of the Work. Make entries on record documents within two working days of receipt of information required to record the change, field condition, or other pertinent information. 3. Do not permanently conceal the Work until required information has been recorded for Project record documents. 4. Accuracy of record documents shall be such that future searches for items shown on the record documents may rely reasonably on information obtained from Engineer-accepted Project record documents. 5. Marking of Entries: a. Use erasable, colored pencils (not ink or indelible pencil) for marking changes, revisions, additions, and deletions to Project record documents. b. Clearly describe the change by graphic line and make notations as required. Use straight-edge to mark straight lines. Writing shall be legible and sufficiently dark to allow scanning of record documents into legible electronic files in “portable document format” (.PDF) files. c. Date each entry on record documents. d. Indicate changes by drawing a “cloud” around the change(s) indicated. e. Mark initial revisions in red. In the event of overlapping changes, use different colors for subsequent changes. B. Drawings: 1. Record changes on copy of the Drawings. Submittal of Contractor-originated or -produced drawings as a substitute for recording changes on a copy of the Drawings is unacceptable. 2. Record changes on plans, sections, elevations, schematics, schedules, and details as required for clarity, accuracy, and completeness, making reference dimensions and elevations (to Project datum) for complete record documentation. 3. Record actual construction including: a. Depths of various elements of foundation relative to Project datum. b. Horizontal and vertical location of Underground Facilities referenced to permanent surface improvements and Project elevation datum. For each Underground Facility, including pipe fittings, show and indicate dimensions to not less than two permanent, visible surface improvements. c. Location of exposed utilities and appurtenances concealed in construction, referenced to visible and accessible features of structure and, where applicable, to Project elevation datum. d. Changes in structural and architectural elements of the Work, including changes in reinforcing. e. Field changes of dimensions, arrangements, and details. f. Changes made in accordance with Addenda, Change Orders, Work Change Directives, Field Orders, and allowance authorizations. g. Changes in details on the Drawings. Submit additional details prepared by Contractor when required to document such changes. 4. Recording Changes for Schematic Layouts: a. In some cases on the Drawings, arrangements of conduits, circuits, piping, ducts, and similar items are shown schematically and are not intended to portray physical layout. For such cases, the final physical arrangement shall be determined by Contractor subject to acceptance by Engineer. b. Record on the Project record documents all revisions to schematics on the Drawings, including: piping schematics, ducting schematics, process and instrumentation diagrams, control and circuitry diagrams, electrical one-line diagrams, motor control Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 78 39 - 4 center layouts, and other schematics when included in the Drawings. Show and indicate actual locations of equipment, lighting fixtures, in-place grounding system, and other pertinent data. c. When dimensioned plans and dimensioned sections or elevations on the Drawings show the Work schematically, indicate on the Project record documents, by dimensions accurate to within one inch in the field, centerline location of items of Work such as conduit, piping, ducts, and similar items 1) Clearly identify each item of the Work by accurate notations such as “cast iron drain”, “rigid electrical conduit”, “copper waterline”, and similar descriptions. 2) Show by symbol or by note the vertical location of each item of the Work; for example, “embedded in slab”, “under slab”, “in ceiling plenum”, “exposed”, and similar designations. For piping not embedded, also indicate elevation dimension relative to Project elevation datum. 3) Descriptions shall be sufficiently detailed to be related to the Specifications. d. Engineer may furnish written waiver of requirements relative to schematic layouts shown on plans, sections, and elevations when, in Engineer’s judgment, dimensioned layouts of Work shown schematically will serve no useful purpose. Do not rely on such waiver(s) being issued. 5. Supplemental Drawings: a. In some cases, drawings produced during construction by Engineer or Contractor supplement the Drawings and shall be included with Project record documents submitted by Contractor. Supplemental record drawings shall include drawings or sketches that are part of Change Orders, Work Change Directives, Field Orders, and allowance authorizations and that cannot be incorporated into the Drawings because of space limitations. b. Supplemental drawings submitted with record drawings shall be integrated with the Drawings and include necessary cross-references between drawings. Supplemental record drawings shall be on sheets the same size as the Drawings. c. When supplemental drawings developed by Contractor using computer-aided drafting/design (CAD), building information models (BIM), or civil information models (CIM) software are to be included in record drawings, submit electronic files for such drawings as part of record drawing Submittal. Label such files, “Supplemental Record Drawings”, including with Contractor’s name, Project name, and Contract designation. C. Specifications and Addenda: 1. Mark each Specifications section to record: a. Manufacturer, trade name, catalog number, and Supplier of each material and equipment item actually furnished. b. Changes made by Addendum, Change Orders, Work Change Directives, Field Orders, and allowance authorizations. 1.6 ELECTRONIC DOCUMENTS FURNISHED BY ENGINEER A. CAD, BIM, or CIM files of the Drawings will be furnished by Engineer upon the following conditions: 1. Contractor shall submit to Engineer a letter on Contractor letterhead requesting CAD, BIM, or CIM files of the Drawings and indicating specific definition(s) or description(s) of how such Electronic Documents will be used by Contractor, and specific description of benefits to Owner (including credit proposal, if applicable) if the request is granted. 2. Engineer does not guarantee that Electronic Documents are available in the format(s) requested by Contractor. Some projects may have Drawings developed using only CAD software instead of BIM or CIM software. Engineer will not create BIM or CIM files for Contractor if such files do not already exist. 3. Contractor shall sign Engineer’s standard agreement with Contractor for for release of Electronic Documents and shall abide by the provisions of such agreement for release of Electronic Documents. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 78 39 - 5 4. Layering system incorporated in CAD, BIM, and CIM files shall be maintained as transmitted by Engineer. CADD, BIM, and CIM files transmitted by Engineer containing cross-referenced files shall not be bound by Contractor. Drawing cross-references and paths shall be maintained. If Contractor alters layers or cross-reference files, Contractor shall restore all layers and cross-references prior to submitting Project record documents to Engineer. 5. Contractor shall submit Project record drawings to Engineer in same CAD, BIM, or CIM format that files were furnished to Contractor.. B. Microsoft Word files of Specifications: 1. Requirements for Engineer’s potential release of word processing files of the Specifications or other written documents in native format are the same as those for Drawings. 2. When Specifications are released in native format, Contractor shall submit record specifications in the same format, with all changes tracked using Microsoft Word’s “track changes” feature. 3. Do not modify the formatting of the native files furnished by Engineer. If formatting changes are made without Engineer’s authorization, remedy the formatting to the same condition and status as when the files were first delivered to Contractor. Such remedy shall be at Contractor’s expense. 4. Comply with all requirements of this Specifications section regarding record specifications. 5. After delivery of record specifications Submittal to Engineer, delete from Contractor’s files the native word processing files. Contractor may retain a PDF version of such files for Contractor’s records. PART 2 - PRODUCTS - (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION - (NOT USED) END OF SECTION Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 This page intentionally left blank. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents SPARE PARTS AND EXTRA MATERIALS 01 78 43 - 1 SECTION 01 78 43 SPARE PARTS AND EXTRA MATERIALS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Administrative and procedural requirements for furnishing spare parts, extra materials, maintenance supplies, and special tools required for maintenance (collectively, “spare parts and extra materials”) required by the Contract Documents. B. Scope: 1. Contractor shall furnish spare parts, extra materials, and associated information, for materials and equipment furnished in accordance with the Contract Documents. Furnish such items in accordance with the requirements of this Specifications section and the Specifications sections in which such items are indicated. 2. Contractor is fully responsible for loss and damage to spare parts and extra materials until such items are received by Owner’s facility manager. 3. Promptly replace spare parts and extra materials furnished by Owner to Contractor for use in remedying defective Work. C. List of Spare Parts and Extra Materials: 1. With the Shop Drawings and product data Submittals for each Specifications section, submit a complete listing of spare parts and extra materials necessary for maintenance for two years of operation, together with unit prices in current United States funds, and source(s) of supply for each. 2. Also include listing of spare parts and extra materials, with pricing and sources, in the operations and maintenance data submitted in accordance with Section 01 78 23 - Operation and Maintenance Data. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Material Submittals: Furnish and submit the following: 1. Spare Parts and Extra Materials: a. Furnish to Owner or facility manager in accordance with requirements of this Specifications section, and the Specifications section in which the spare parts and extra materials are specified. 2. Transfer Documentation: For each delivery of spare parts and extra materials, submit to Engineer the following: a. Submit, on Contractor’s letterhead, a letter of transmittal for spare parts and extra materials furnished under each Specifications section. Letter of transmittal shall accompany spare parts and extra materials. Do not furnish letter of transmittal separate from associated spare parts and extra materials. b. Furnish three original, identical, signed letters of transmittal for each delivery of spare parts and extra materials furnished under each Specifications section. Upon delivery of specified quantities and types of spare parts and extra materials to Owner or facility manager, designated person from Owner or facility manager will countersign each original letter of transmittal indicating Owner’s or facility manager’s receipt of spare parts and extra materials in the quantity, type, and quality required by the Contract Documents. Owner or facility manager will retain one fully-signed original, Contractor shall submit one fully-signed original to Engineer. Contractor shall retain one fully- signed original for Contractor’s records. c. Letter of transmittal shall include the following: 1) Information required for letters of transmittal in Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents SPARE PARTS AND EXTRA MATERIALS 01 78 43 - 2 2) Transmittal shall list spare parts and extra materials furnished under the associated Specifications section. Indicate each individual part, material, equipment item, tool, and product and the associated quantity furnished. 3) Include space for countersignature by Owner or facility manager as follows: space for signature, space for printed name, space for signatory’s title, and date. 1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Packaging and Labeling of Spare Parts and Extra Materials: 1. Furnish spare parts and extra materials in manufacturer’s unopened cartons, boxes, crates, or other original, protective covering suitable for preventing corrosion and deterioration. 2. Protect and package spare parts and extra materials for maximum shelf life normally anticipated by manufacturer. 3. Packaging of spare parts and extra materials shall be clearly marked and identified with name of manufacturer, applicable material or equipment, part number, part description, and part location in the equipment or system. B. Storage Prior to Delivery to Owner: 1. Prior to furnishing spare parts and extra materials to Owner or facility manager, store spare parts and extra materials in accordance with the Contract Documents and manufacturers’ written recommendations. C. Procedure for Delivery to Owner or Facility Manager: 1. Deliver spare parts and extra materials to Owner’s or facility manager’s permanent storage rooms at the Site or area(s) at the Site designated by Owner or facility manager. 2. When spare parts and extra materials are delivered, Contractor and Owner (or facility manager) will mutually inventory the spare parts and extra materials delivered to verify compliance with the Contract Documents regarding quantity, part numbers, and quality. 3. Additional procedures for delivering spare parts and extra materials to Owner or facility manager, if required, will be developed by Engineer and complied with by Contractor. 4. Contractor shall reimburse Owner for all costs and expenses incurred by Owner and facility manager, including professional services, for delivery of inadequate, incorrect, or defective spare parts and extra materials. Owner may withhold such amounts from payments due Contractor via set-offs in accordance with the Contract Documents. D. Delivery Time and Eligibility for Payment: 1. Deliver to Owner or facility manager spare parts and extra materials prior to date of Substantial Completion for materials and equipment associated therewith. 2. Do not deliver spare parts and extra materials before commencing startup for associated material or equipment. 3. Spare parts and extra materials are not eligible for payment until delivered to Owner or facility manager and Contractor’s receipt of Owner’s or facility manager’s countersignature on letter of transmittal as required in this Specifications section. PART 2 - PRODUCTS - (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION - (NOT USED) END OF SECTION Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 DIVI SION 02 EXISTING CONDITIONS Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 This page intentionally left blank. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents GEOTECHNICAL BASELINE REPORT 02 06 13 - 1 SECTION 02 06 13 GEOTECHNICAL BASELINE REPORT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. The Project’s Geotechnical Baseline Report (GBR), which is attached to this Specifications section. 2. Contractual requirements associated with the GBR and related documents and information. B. Provisions of the Geotechnical Baseline Report apply to all contractors engaged by Owner under the Project. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Definitions: The following terms are defined for use in this Specifications section and are indicated herein using initial capital letters. The terms have the associated meaning regardless of whether indicated in singular or plural: 1. Baseline Conditions: Has the meaning indicated in Paragraph 1.3.E of this Specifications Section. 2. Geotechnical Baseline Report (GBR): The interpretive report prepared by or for Owner regarding subsurface conditions at the Site, and containing specific baseline geotechnical conditions that may be anticipated or relied upon for bidding and contract administration purposes, subject to the controlling provisions of the Contract Documents, including the GBR’s own terms. The GBR is a Contract Document. 3. Technical Data: For this Specifications section, the term “Technical Data” has the same meaning as set forth in the General Conditions, as may be modified by the Supplementary Conditions. 1.3 SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS A. Reliance by Contractor on Technical Data Authorized: 1. Contractor may rely upon the accuracy of the Technical Data expressly identified in Paragraph 1.3.A of this Specifications section with respect to such reports and drawings, but such reports and drawings are not Contract Documents. 2. If no such express identification has been made, then Contractor may rely upon the accuracy of the Technical Data as defined in the General Conditions. B. Limitations of Other Data and Documents: Except for such reliance on Technical Data, Contractor may not rely upon or make any claim against Owner or Engineer, or any of their officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, or subcontractors, with respect to: 1. the completeness of such reports and drawings for Contractor’s purposes, including, but not limited to, any aspects of the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction to be employed by Contractor, and safety precautions and programs incident thereto; or. 2. other data, interpretations, opinions, and information contained in such reports or shown or indicated in such drawings; or. 3. the contents of other Site-related documents made available to Contractor, such as record drawings from other projects at or adjacent to the Site, or Owner’s archival documents concerning the Site; or. 4. any Contractor interpretation of or conclusion drawn from any Technical Data or any such other data, interpretations, opinions, or information. C. Geotechnical Baseline Report: Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents GEOTECHNICAL BASELINE REPORT 02 06 13 - 2 1. This Contract includes a Geotechnical Baseline Report (“GBR”), identified as follows: Valley Center Lift Station Geotechnical Report, dated June 2024, prepared by Pioneer Technical Services, Inc., Helena, Montana. 2. The GBR is incorporated as Contract Documents as attachments to this Specifications section. Use the GBR in conjunction with other Contract Documents, including the Drawings and Specifications. 3. GBR describes certain, select subsurface conditions that are anticipated to be encountered by Contractor during construction in specified locations (referred to in this Specifications section as “Baseline Conditions”). These may include ground, geological, groundwater, and other subsurface geotechnical conditions, and baselines of anticipated Underground Facilities or subsurface structures. 4. Baseline Conditions will be used to assist in administration of the Contract’s differing site conditions clause at locations where subsurface conditions have been baselined. If a condition is baselined in the GBR, then only the pertinent Baseline Conditions will be used to determine whether there is a differing site condition; and no other indication of that condition in the Contract Documents or Technical Data, or of a condition that describes, quantifies, or measures a similar characteristic of the subsurface, will be used for the differing site condition determination. 5. Baseline Conditions will not be used to make differing site conditions determinations at locations that have not been baselined in the GBR, or at any location with respect to subsurface conditions that Baseline Conditions do not address. If Underground Facilities or Hazardous Environmental Conditions are expressly addressed in Baseline Conditions, then comparison to such Baseline Conditions will be the primary means of determining (a) whether an Underground Facility was shown or indicated with reasonable accuracy, as provided in the General Conditions, or (b) whether a Hazardous Environmental Condition was shown or indicated in the Contract Documents as indicated in the General Conditions. 6. Descriptions of subsurface conditions in the GBR are based on geotechnical investigations, laboratory tests, interpretation, interpolation, extrapolation, and analyses. Neither Owner, Engineer, nor any geotechnical or other consultant or subcontractor warrants or guarantees that actual subsurface conditions will be as described in the GBR, nor is the GBR intended to warrant or guarantee the use of specific means, methods, procedures, techniques, or sequences of construction. 7. Behavior of the ground during construction depends substantially upon Contractor’s selected means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction. If ground behavior conditions are baselined in GBR, they are based on stated assumptions regarding construction means, methods, procedures, techniques, and sequences of construction. 8. GBR will not reduce or relieve Contractor of Contractor’s responsibility for planning, selection, and implementation of safety precautions and programs incident to Contractor’s means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction, or to the Work. 1.4 DIFFERING SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS A. Notice: If Contractor believes that any subsurface condition that is uncovered or revealed at the Site: 1. differs materially from conditions shown or indicated in GBR; or. 2. differs materially from conditions shown or indicated in the Contract Documents other than the GBR, to the extent the GBR is inapplicable; or. 3. to the extent the GBR is inapplicable, is of such a nature as to establish that any Technical Data on which Contractor is entitled to rely as provided in Paragraph 1.3.A of this Specification section is materially inaccurate; or. 4. to the extent the GBR is inapplicable, is of such a nature as to require a change in the Drawings or Specifications; or. 5. to the extent the GBR is inapplicable, is of an unusual nature, and differs materially from conditions ordinarily encountered and generally recognized as inherent in work of the character provided for in the Contract Documents; or. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents GEOTECHNICAL BASELINE REPORT 02 06 13 - 3 6. Contractor encounters human remains, recognizes the existence of burial markers, archaeological sites, historical sites, artifacts of potential archaeological or historical interest, or wetlands not shown or indicated in the Contract Documents, Contractor shall immediately cease operations that may disturb such area(s) and secure the adjacent Work; and Owner shall promptly take any action necessary to obtain governmental authorization required to resume the operations (Contractor shall continue to suspend such operations until otherwise instructed by Owner but shall continue with all other operations that do not affect those remains or features); 7. then Contractor shall, promptly after becoming aware thereof and before further disturbing the subsurface conditions or performing any Work in connection therewith (except in an emergency as required by the General Conditions), notify Owner and Engineer in writing about such condition. Contractor shall not further disturb such condition or perform any Work in connection therewith (except with respect to an emergency) until receipt of a written statement permitting Contractor to do so. B. Engineer’s Review: 1. After receipt of written notice as required by Paragraph 1.4.A of this Specifications Section, Engineer will promptly: a. review the subsurface or physical condition in question; b. determine the necessity of Owner’s obtaining additional exploration or tests with respect to the condition; c. conclude whether the condition falls within any one or more of the differing site condition categories in Paragraph 1.4.A of this Specifications section; d. obtain any pertinent cost or schedule information from Contractor; e. prepare recommendations to Owner regarding the Contractor’s resumption or continuation of Work in connection with the subsurface or physical condition in question and the need for any change in the Drawings or Specifications; and f. advise Owner in writing of Engineer’s findings, conclusions, and recommendations. C. Owner’s Statement to Contractor Regarding Site Condition: After receipt of Engineer’s written findings, conclusions, and recommendations, Owner shall issue a written statement to Contractor (with a copy to Engineer) regarding the subsurface or physical condition in question, addressing the resumption or continuation of Work in connection with such condition, indicating whether any change in the Drawings or Specifications will be made, and adopting or rejecting Engineer’s written findings, conclusions, and recommendations, in whole or in part. D. Early Resumption of Work: If at, any time, Engineer determines that Work in connection with the subsurface or physical condition in question may resume prior to completion of Engineer’s review or Owner’s issuance of its statement to Contractor, because the condition in question has been adequately documented, and evaluated on a preliminary basis, then Engineer may, at Engineers’ discretion, instruct Contractor to resume such Work. E. Possible Price and Times Adjustments: 1. Contractor shall be entitled to an equitable adjustment in Contract Price, Contract Times, or both to the extent that the existence of a differing subsurface or physical condition, or any related delay, disruption, or interference, causes an increase or decrease in Contractor’s cost of, or time required for, performance of the Work; subject, however, to the following: a. such condition must fall within any one or more of the categories described in Paragraph 1.4.A of this Specifications Section; b. with respect to Work that is paid for on a unit price basis, any adjustment in Contract Price will be subject to the provisions of the General Conditions; and. c. Contractor’s entitlement to an adjustment of the Contract Times is subject to the provisions of the General Conditions. 2. Contractor shall not be entitled to any adjustment in either the Contract Price or Contract Times with respect to a subsurface or physical condition if: Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents GEOTECHNICAL BASELINE REPORT 02 06 13 - 4 a. Contractor knew of the existence of such condition at the time Contractor made a commitment to Owner with respect to Contract Price and Contract Times by the submission of a Bid or becoming bound under a negotiated contract, or otherwise; or. b. the existence of such condition reasonably could have been discovered or revealed as a result of any examination, investigation, exploration, test, or study of the Site and contiguous areas expressly required by the Bidding Requirements or Contract Documents to be conducted by or for Contractor prior to Contractor’s making such commitment; or. c. Contractor failed to give the written notice as required by Paragraph 1.4.A of this Specifications section. 3. If Owner and Contractor agree regarding Contractor’s entitlement to and the amount or extent of any adjustment in the Contract Price, Contract Times, or both, then any such adjustment shall be set forth in a Change Order. 4. Contractor may submit a Change Proposal regarding its entitlement to or the amount or extent of any adjustment in the Contract Price, Contract Times, or both, not later than 30 days after Owner’s issuance of the Owner’s written statement to Contractor regarding the subsurface or physical condition in question. F. Underground Facilities; Hazardous Environmental Conditions: The General Conditions governs rights and responsibilities regarding the presence or location of Underground Facilities. The General Conditions governs rights and responsibilities regarding Hazardous Environmental Conditions. The provisions of Articles 1.3 and 1.4 of this Specifications section are not applicable to the presence or location of Underground Facilities, or to Hazardous Environmental Conditions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS - (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 ATTACHMENTS A. The documents listed below, and attached following this Specification section’s “End of Section” designation, are part of this Specifications section. 1. Geotechnical Baseline Report, titled, Valley Center Lift Station Geotechnical Report, comprised of 45 pages. END OF SECTION Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 Valley Center Lift Station Geotechnical Report Bozeman, Montana Prepared for: HDR, Inc. 2150 Analysis Drive Suite A Bozeman, Montana 59718 Prepared by: Pioneer Technical Services, Inc. 3241 Colonial Drive Helena, Montana 59601 June 2024 RESTORING OUR ENVIRONMENT  DESIGNING OUR FUTURE Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 Geotechnical Report Valley Center Lift Station Page i of ii Table of Contents 1 INTRODUCTION .................................................................................................. 1 2 INVESTIGATION .................................................................................................. 1 2.1 Site Description ............................................................................................................... 1 2.2 Geotechnical Investigation ............................................................................................. 1 2.2.1 Soil Lithology ...................................................................................................... 1 2.2.2 Groundwater Conditions .................................................................................... 2 2.3 Laboratory Testing .......................................................................................................... 2 2.3.1 Index Properties ................................................................................................. 2 2.3.2 Chemical Properties ........................................................................................... 3 3 ANALYSES AND RECOMMENDATIONS ...................................................................... 3 3.1 Proposed Construction ................................................................................................... 3 3.2 Site Grading and Earthwork ............................................................................................ 4 3.2.1 Site Preparation ................................................................................................. 4 3.2.2 Excavations ......................................................................................................... 4 3.2.3 Subgrade Preparation ........................................................................................ 4 3.2.4 Fill Materials and Placement .............................................................................. 5 3.3 Shallow Foundations ....................................................................................................... 6 3.4 Lateral Loads ................................................................................................................... 7 3.5 Moisture Protection and Surface Drainage .................................................................... 7 3.6 Seismic Considerations ................................................................................................... 8 3.7 Underground Utilities and Trench Stability .................................................................... 8 3.8 Shrink/Swell Characteristics ........................................................................................... 9 4 EARTHWORK TESTING ......................................................................................... 9 5 BASIS OF RECOMMENDATIONS ............................................................................ 10 6 REFERENCES .................................................................................................... 11 Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 Geotechnical Report Valley Center Lift Station Page ii of ii List of Figures Figure 1. Borehole Locations List of Tables Table 1: Laboratory Index Data Table 2: Corrosivity Testing Table 3: Structural Fill Table 5: Seismic Coefficients Table 6: Compaction Testing Frequency Table 7: Required Relative Compaction List of Appendices Appendix A Borehole Logs Appendix B Photograph Log Appendix C Laboratory Data Appendix D Seismic Data Revision No. Author Version Description Date Rev 0 Sean Harris Draft Internal Review January 2024 Rev 1 Jeff Riedel Final Client Submittal June 24, 2024 Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 Geotechnical Report Valley Center Lift Station Page 1 of 11 1 INTRODUCTION HDR, Inc. (HDR) contracted Pioneer Technical Services, Inc. (Pioneer) to complete a geotechnical investigation for the proposed wastewater lift station in Bozeman, Montana. HDR, Inc. is the project civil engineer representing the City of Bozeman. The purpose of the geotechnical investigation was to explore subsurface conditions at the site and provide information on soil characteristics, foundation recommendations, soil bearing capacity, lateral earth loads, soil corrosivity characteristics, seismic zone, and groundwater conditions. This report provides conclusions of the investigation, results of laboratory testing and analyses, and design recommendations. 2 INVESTIGATION 2.1 Site Description The property is located immediately south of Valley Center Road running parallel along the length between Valley Spur Road and Davis Lane in Bozeman, MT. The site is currently undeveloped. Overall, the site grades downward from east to west. The legal description of the site is Lot 2-A of the Streeter Bros Minor Subdivision located in the Northeast ¼ of the Northeast ¼ of Section 27, Township 01 South, Range 05 East. 2.2 Geotechnical Investigation Pioneer subcontracted O’Keefe Drilling to complete eight boreholes (BH-01 through BH-08) to depths between 15 feet and 50 feet below the ground surface at locations shown on Figure 1. The drilling work was performed on November 30th, December 1st, December 18th, and December 19th, 2023. The boreholes were advanced using a Mobile B60x truck-mounted drill rig with hollow stem auger drilling. An engineer from Pioneer logged the borehole lithology and collected samples for laboratory testing. In-situ strengths were collected via Standard Penetration Tests (SPTs) using a 2-inch outside diameter split-spoon sampler which was driven into the soil using a standard 140-pound safety hammer falling from a height of 30 inches. Geotechnical samples were collected from each SPT interval and field classified in general accordance with ASTM International D2488 (Standard Practice for Description and Identification of Soils [Visual – Manual Procedure]). 2.2.1 Soil Lithology Geologically the site is in a Quaternary alluvium of a former braid plain (previous riverbed) (Gravel, unstratified with sandy silt matrix) (MBMG, 2014). This was generally consistent with the exploration as clay, sand and gravels were logged during the drilling investigation. The subsurface consisted of 2 – 10 feet of Lean Clay (CL) underlain by Poorly Graded Gravel (GP) with some locations having claying Gravel with sand. The Lean Clay generally thinned to Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 Geotechnical Report Valley Center Lift Station Page 2 of 11 the east across the site. Appendix A contains the detailed borehole logs while Appendix B presents photographs of the investigation and soil samples. The stratification lines shown on the borehole logs represent the approximate boundary between soil types as observed within the boreholes. The actual in-situ transition is variable because of the nature and depositional characteristics of natural soil. Interpolation of subsurface conditions beyond the location of the boreholes may be unreliable as soil conditions can change rapidly in both lateral and vertical directions. Borehole ID Ground Elevation Top of Gravel Groundwater BH-01 4600.5 4594.7 4587.1 BH-02 4605.7 4595.7 4588.2 BH-03 4607.1 4596.8 NA BH-04 4608.8 4598.8 4593.3 BH-05 4611.6 4603.1 4597.6 BH-06 4610.2 4605.2 4607.7 BH-07 4613.8 4608.3 4606.5 BH-08 4611.3 4608.3 4606.3 2.2.2 Groundwater Conditions Groundwater was encountered in all 8 boreholes during the investigation. At the time of the investigation, ground water varied between 2 to 17.5 feet below ground surface. Piezometers were installed in boreholes BH-02, BH-04 and BH-08. Groundwater became closer to the ground surface to the east as the site elevation decreased. Review of local well logs on the Montana Bureau of Mines and Geology (MBMG) Ground-Water Information Center website showed groundwater depths in nearby wells varied from 15 feet to 25 feet. Groundwater likely varies seasonally. The wet well invert is proposed to be near elevation 4,602 feet , which is approximately 18 below ground surface. Dewatering efforts may be required during the construction of the lift station and trench excavation. 2.3 Laboratory Testing Collected field samples were transported and analyzed at Pioneer’s materials testing laboratory located in Bozeman, Montana. The samples were collected from select depths and were tested for their index (physical) and chemical properties. 2.3.1 Index Properties A summary of the laboratory testing results is presented in Table 1. Appendix C provides the complete laboratory testing results. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 Geotechnical Report Valley Center Lift Station Page 3 of 11 Table 1: Laboratory Index Data BORE HOLE NO. DEPTH (feet) USCS SYMBOL LIQUID LIMIT (%) PLASTIC LIMIT (%) PLASTICITY INDEX (%) GRADATION ANALYSIS GRAVEL (%) SAND (%) FINES (%) BH-05 7.5-8.5 CL 33 19 14 0.0 12.7 87.3 USCS: Unified Soil Classification System. Moisture content from the sample tested from BH-05 was 14.7%. A consolidation test was completed in this sample. Upon the saturating the sample, it collapsed by 1.1% of its original height. 2.3.2 Chemical Properties Corrosivity testing (soluble sulfate, pH, and conductivity) was conducted to determine if the native soil may potentially be corrosive to buried concrete or metal associated with the proposed construction. The pH and soluble sulfate testing were subcontracted to Alpine Analytical, Inc. located in Helena, Montana. A summary of corrosivity testing results is presented in Table 2. Table 2: Corrosivity Testing BORE HOLE NO. DEPTH (feet) pH (s.u.) CONDUCTIVITY (mmohm/cm) RESISTIVITY (ohm-cm) SOLUBLE SULFATE (%) BH-02 10-10.5 7.98 0.18 5,556 0.0030 BH-04 2.5-9.0 7.70 0.16 6.250 0.0050 ohm-cm: ohm-centimeter. s.u.: Standard Unit. Criteria from the American Water Works Association and by the Portland Cement Association (PCA) were used to evaluate soil corrosiveness (PCA, 2007). The native site soil is considered corrosive to buried metallic elements. Cathodic protection should be used for on-site metallic utilities. Alternatively, use of high-density polyethylene (HDPE) or polyvinyl chloride (PVC) utility pipes and culverts is recommended in lieu of metallic products. The sulfate testing results indicate the on-site soil has a negligible exposure to concrete sulfate attack. Type I or Type I/II cements are acceptable for all cast-in-place structural concrete exposed to the native soil. 3 ANALYSES AND RECOMMENDATIONS 3.1 Proposed Construction The proposed construction will include a new lift station with subsequent conduits. The proposed building will be constructed with a combination of spread footings and a slab-on-grade floor system. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 Geotechnical Report Valley Center Lift Station Page 4 of 11 3.2 Site Grading and Earthwork This section lists recommendations for site preparation, excavation, subgrade preparation, and placement of engineered fill on the project. The section also outlines the recommendations for design and construction of earth-supported elements including foundations and slabs. 3.2.1 Site Preparation Prior to placing any fill, all vegetation, topsoil, pavements, concrete, possible fill materials, and any otherwise unsuitable materials should be removed from the construction areas. Exposed surfaces should be free of mounds and depressions, which could prevent uniform compaction. Stripped materials consisting of vegetation and organic materials should be removed from the site or used to revegetate landscaped areas or exposed slopes after grading operations are complete. 3.2.2 Excavations During construction, the sides of the excavations will contain loose material; consequently, the areas should be monitored by workers and loose material should be removed. All excavations should be conducted to Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) approved slopes. Excavation activities for any purpose should not remove lateral support from any footing or foundation without first underpinning or protecting the footing or foundation against settlement or lateral translation. Over-excavation areas and utility trenches should be laid back to safe slopes or properly shored. Excavations and shoring operations should be conducted in accordance with the most recent versions of the OSHA Construction Standards for Excavations, Part 1926, Subpart P and Montana Public Works Standard Specifications (MPWSS). Safety of construction personnel is the responsibility of the contractor. Excavations for utilities should be shored if the proper slope cannot be maintained. The depth and thickness of the individual layers of materials may be different from what was observed in the borehole. This variability may alter the necessary depth of the excavation at different locations of the proposed footprint. 3.2.3 Subgrade Preparation The surface of the excavation should be monitored to detect pockets of soft or loose soil. The bottom of the excavation should be probed to verify all deleterious materials or loose soils have been removed. Where possible, proof-rolling should be performed to aid in locating loose or soft areas. Unstable soil (pumping) should be removed or moisture conditioned and compacted in place prior to placing fill. When loose or disturbed native soil depth is greater than 1 foot, it may be necessary to remove and stock pile the upper loose soils to achieve compaction of all loose or disturbed soils within a foundation excavation. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 Geotechnical Report Valley Center Lift Station Page 5 of 11 At a minimum, all excavations for footings or slab must be over excavated through the upper lean clay material to the Poorly Graded Gravels. Excavation must extend vertically 1 foot below the bottom of the footing, then backfilled with compacted structural fill. For fills required beneath the footing or slab, the excavation should extend beyond the edge of the footing a distance equal to the depth of the fill placed below the footing. The bearing surfaces of all native soils must be compacted with heavy vibratory equipment before placing the structural fill. The subgrade in all areas to receive structural fill should be compacted to at least 98% of the maximum laboratory dry density as determined by ASTM Test Method D-698 (Standard Proctor). Subgrade material shall not be frozen, contain frozen water or ice chucks when compacted. Subgrade shall not be allowed to freeze after compaction. If the subgrade temperature is measure at or below 32 degrees F, it is considered frozen. 3.2.4 Fill Materials and Placement All fill materials should be inorganic soils free of vegetation, debris, and fragments larger than 6 inches in size. Structural backfill beneath the foundation and slab in any area requiring fill should meet the gradation specifications listed in Table 3. If compacted, the fill material will provide a strong, free draining and non-frost susceptible foundation that will not settle over time. Pea gravel and other similar non-cementitious, poorly graded materials should not be used as fill or backfill without the prior approval of the geotechnical engineer. Table 3: Structural Fill (MPW 3-inch Minus Sub-Base Course) SIEVE SIZE PERCENT PASSING 3 -inch 100 No. 4 25 - 60 No. 40 10 - 30 No. 200 2 - 10 Structural fills should be placed on native soils that have been compacted as specified previously in Section 3.2.3. All fill should be compacted to a minimum of 98% of the maximum dry unit weight as obtained by ASTM Test Method D-698 (Standard Proctor). Fill materials should not be placed, spread, or compacted while the ground is frozen or during unfavorable weather conditions. The excavation must be kept free of standing water at all times. If water is allowed to pond in excavations, all soils impacted by the standing water should be removed, moisture conditioned, and replaced to a minimum density of 98% of the maximum dry unit weight as obtained by ASTM Test Method D-698 (Standard Proctor). Fill materials should be at the proper moisture content prior to compaction and should contain no frozen soil. Fill materials shall not contain any frozen water, snow, frost, ice or any other indications suggesting the material is frozen. When site grading is interrupted by heavy Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 Geotechnical Report Valley Center Lift Station Page 6 of 11 precipitation, filling operations should not resume until a geotechnical engineer approves the moisture and density conditions of the previously placed fill. 3.3 Shallow Foundations Lower gravelly site soils are suitable to support the proposed wet well and the building’s shallow foundations provided the native soils are properly compacted in accordance with the recommendations presented herein. The build and wet well should both be founded on the gravelly materials to limit differential settlement between the two structures. All surfaces to receive fill, mat slab, or spread footing should be excavated flat before placement of any structural fill, and the structural fill should be placed in horizontal layers and compacted in accordance with recommendations for structural fill. Placing the foundations partially on fill and partially on cut is not recommended. This can lead to differential settlement and cause long-term cracking of the foundations. For a heated structure a minimum of 4 feet of fill should be placed over the bottom of the footing. For an unheated structure, a minimum of 5 feet of fill should be placed over the bottom of the footing. This can be reduced if rigid polystyrene is placed beneath and around the exterior of the foundation to limit frost penetration. Reducing the depth of frost penetration should be evaluated on a case-by-case basis according to American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE) Design and Construction of Frost-Protected Shallow Foundations guidelines (ASCE, 2001). Net allowable bearing capacities of 3,000 pounds per square foot (psf) can be accepted for structural fills if the soils beneath the footings are compacted as described previously and the depth is a minimum of 4 feet below finished grade. This allowable bearing capacity is based on limiting potential long-term settlement. Failure to compact native soils that underlie foundations could result in excessive foundation settlement. A documented testing program should be conducted to verify that compaction requirements were achieved. The net allowable soil pressure includes dead load plus maximum live load. These recommendations assume a minimum depth of burial of the footing of 5 feet and that a maximum total settlement of 1 inch can be tolerated. Provided the compaction operations are properly conducted and at least 98% relative compaction is met, the slabs can be designed using a modulus of subgrade reaction, k, of 350 pounds per square inch per inch of deflection (pci). Based on theory of elasticity, total and differential settlement are anticipated to be less than 1 inch and ½ inch, respectively. Ensure there is positive drainage away from the open footing excavations to keep all surface water from draining into the excavations. This also applies to final grading, where positive drainage must be incorporated around the entire structure perimeter. For a slab-on-grade floor system, Pioneer recommends the following: 1. Over-excavate 8 inches beneath the slab. 2. Moisture condition subgrade soil to plus or minus 2% of optimum moisture content and compact the excavation surface to a standard relative compaction of at least 95%. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 Geotechnical Report Valley Center Lift Station Page 7 of 11 3. Place structural fill meeting the gradation specifications listed in Table 3 to the slab-on-grade elevation. Place in 8-inch (maximum) loose lifts and compact each lift to a standard relative compaction of at least 95%. 4. From a geotechnical perspective, a vapor barrier is not required. Vapor barriers are used to prevent moisture and gas vapors (typically radon) from migrating through the floor slab. Some floor coverings are moisture-sensitive and are intended for use with vapor barriers. The project architect should determine the need for a vapor barrier based on the floor coverings and moisture and gas vapor control requirements. If a vapor barrier is to be installed, Pioneer recommends placing a 15-mil polyolefin vapor barrier. Per PCA’s Concrete Floors on Ground (PCA, 2008), the vapor barrier should be installed over the structural fill prior to pouring the concrete slab if the slab is being placed without a watertight roofing system in place. The vapor barrier can be installed under the structural fill if the slab is being placed with a watertight roofing system in place. For structural design of the concrete slab, Pioneer recommends using a subgrade modulus of 250 pounds per square inch per inch (pci). 3.4 Lateral Loads Lateral loads may be resisted by friction between the footing base and supporting soil and lateral bearing pressure against the side of the footings. To calculate the resistance to sliding, a value of 0.36 should be used as the ultimate coefficient of friction between the footing and the underlying structural fill. For design purposes, earth pressures are listed on a per-foot basis. Compacting site material as backfill will offer an internal angle of friction (φ) of at least 32°, and a moist unit weight (γm) of at least 120 pounds per cubic foot. For soil pressures in psf against the slab with a level backfill, the following equations can be used: Active Pressure: 18 x H2 Passive Pressure: 195 x H2 At-rest Pressure: 28 x H2 Where H = height of retaining wall or slab height in feet. The recommended design lateral earth pressures do not include a factor of safety and do not provide for possible hydrostatic pressure on walls. The excavated Poorly Graded Gravels soil is suitable for backfill against the foundation stem walls assuming it is free of organics and largely free of debris. Place the backfill in 8-inch (maximum) loose lifts and compact each lift to a standard relative compaction of at least 95%. 3.5 Moisture Protection and Surface Drainage It is important to prevent infiltration of the surface waters to the soils beneath the foundation. Therefore, precautions should be taken during and after construction to provide positive drainage and surface water control near the new foundation. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 Geotechnical Report Valley Center Lift Station Page 8 of 11 The recommended slope for landscape areas and areas adjacent to the foundations should be a minimum of 3%. A cap consisting of 12 inches of clayey soils will assist in preventing infiltration of these waters near the foundation perimeter. Positive surface drainage will provide the greatest insurance against infiltration of surface waters. Infiltration of large quantities of water could lead to soil movement due to settlement or piping of foundation soils if foundations are not properly prepared. All utility trenches within the pad and extending 5 feet beyond the structural footings should be backfilled with structural fill compacted to a relative compaction of 95% of the maximum dry unit weight as obtained by ASTM Test Method D-698 (Standard Proctor). Surface water drainage should not be concentrated in a gully that will affect property below the development area. The site investigation did not evaluate surface drainage. 3.6 Seismic Considerations The seismic coefficients were estimated using ASCE7-22 and Risk Category II (ASCE7-22 is based on the 2020 International Building Code). The seismic coefficients values are presented in Table 5. The seismic coefficients data sheet is included in Table 9. Table 4: Seismic Coefficients Site Class Definition D Seismic Design Category D Mapped Spectral Response Acceleration Parameter, SS for 0.2 second 0.68g Mapped Spectral Response Acceleration Parameter, S1 for 1.0 second 0.19g Adjusted Maximum Considered Earthquake Spectral Response Acceleration Parameter, SMS 0.89g Adjusted Maximum Considered Earthquake Spectral Response Acceleration Parameter, SM1 0.49g Design Spectral Response Acceleration Parameter, SDS 0.60g Design Spectral Response Acceleration Parameter, SD1 0.33g 3.7 Underground Utilities and Trench Stability For utility trench excavations, the trench soil meets the Occupational Safety and Health Administration’s 29 CFR Part 1926 requirements for Type C soil. The steepest unsupported slope within Type C soil is set at 1.5H:1V. Soil type should be verified by a competent person prior to working in the excavation. Use Type I bedding soil beneath and up to 6 inches above the top of the pipe. Type I bedding soil is ¾-inch minus granular soil having a soluble sulfate content less than 0.1% and a resistivity greater than 3,000 ohm-centimeters. The on-site soil can be reused as trench backfill above the bedding soil. Soil compaction in utility trenches deeper than 5 feet should be performed using a remote trench compactor or a Felco-style bucket on an excavator and observed by an inspector. Perform compaction testing on each lift from a depth of 5 feet to the top of the trench. Place the trench Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 Geotechnical Report Valley Center Lift Station Page 9 of 11 soil in 8-inch (maximum) loose lifts and compact to a standard relative compaction of at least 95%. 3.8 Shrink/Swell Characteristics The volume change potential of upper Lean Clay site soil is considered ‘moderate’ based on the physical properties of the soil and the results of the consolidation test presented earlier. Pioneer recommends the following be incorporated into the design: 1. All structural footings should be set directly above the underlying poorly graded gravels, where lean clay has been removed and replaced with compacted structural fill. 2. Roof runoff water is to be collected in a gutter/downspout system and routed away from the foundations. 3. Grades (minimum 2%) should be designed and constructed to promote positive drainage away from the building perimeter. 4. Avoid placing irrigation systems immediately adjacent to the building. 4 EARTHWORK TESTING Pioneer recommends that a qualified inspector perform compaction testing for subgrade, structural fill, base course, backfill, and asphalt. Table 6 lists the suggested minimum compaction testing frequency. Table 5: Compaction Testing Frequency LOCATION FREQUENCY Beneath Strip Footings 1 test per 25 linear feet of footing per lift Beneath Column Footings 1 test per footing per lift Beneath Slab-On-Grade 1 test per 400 square feet per lift Foundation Wall Backfill 1 test per 50 linear feet per lift Table 7 summarizes the material compaction specifications presented in other sections of this report. Compaction testing should be performed on subgrade, structural fill, base course, backfill, and asphalt. Frozen soil, ice particles, and soil with organics, debris, or deleterious materials are not suitable for use as fill. Appropriate winter construction techniques must be used, as warranted, to protect subgrade, fill, and cast concrete from frost and freezing. Fill cannot be placed on top of frozen soil (soil measured to have temperature at or below 32 degrees F). Maximum loose lift thickness is 8 inches. Table 6: Required Relative Compaction LOCATION REQUIRED MINIMUM RELATIVE COMPACTION STANDARD Beneath Foundation Footings 98% ASTM D698 Beneath Slab-On-Grade 95% ASTM D698 Foundation Wall Backfill 95% ASTM D698 Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 Geotechnical Report Valley Center Lift Station Page 10 of 11 Concrete testing frequency should be performed in accordance with project specifications and/or structural engineer requirements. 5 BASIS OF RECOMMENDATIONS The analyses and recommendations submitted in this report are based upon the boreholes completed during the subsurface investigation and with general site familiarity. Often, variations occur within the subgrade, the nature and extent of which do not become evident until additional exploration or construction is conducted. Pioneer recommends geotechnical involvement be continued throughout the project to ascertain the recommendations presented herein (Geotechnical Report) have been properly interpreted both during design and construction. These services will reduce potential for misinterpretation of geotechnical design recommendations. Pioneer also recommends a geotechnical engineer be notified during the foundation excavation construction phase to evaluate the foundation soil and verify its resemblance to those encountered during the site investigation. This report is based on Pioneer’s understanding of the preliminary design location associated with the proposed infrastructure. If the location or proposed elevation profile changes, please consult Pioneer to verify that these recommendations are still applicable. This report is for the exclusive use of the HDR and their design team. In the absence of Pioneer’s written approval, Pioneer makes no representation and assumes no responsibility to other parties regarding this report. The data, analyses, and recommendations may not be appropriate for other structures or purposes. Other parties contemplating other structures or purposes should contact Pioneer. Services performed by Pioneer’s personnel for this project have been conducted with the level of care and skill ordinarily exercised by members of the profession currently practicing in this area under similar budget and time restraints. No warranty, expressed or implied, is made. Professional Certification I hereby certify that this report was prepared by me and that I am a duly Licensed Professional Engineer under the laws of the State of Montana. Jeffery Riedel, P.E. Sean Harris, E.I. Geotechnical Engineer Staff Geotechnical Engineer Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 Geotechnical Report Valley Center Lift Station Page 11 of 11 6 REFERENCES MBMG, 2014. Geologic Map of the Bozeman 30’ x 60’ Quadrangle, Southwestern Montana, Bureau of Mines and Geology, Susan M. Vuke, et. Al. 2014. PCA, 2008. Concrete Floors on Ground, Fourth Edition, Portland Cement Association, Scott M. Tarr and James A. Farny. PCA, 2007. Concrete Technology, Effects of Substances on Concrete and Guide to Protective Treatments. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 Geotechnical Report FIGURES Figure 1. Borehole Locations Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 BH-01 BH-02 BH-03 BH-04 BH-05 BH-06 BH-07 BH-08 VA L L E Y C E N T E R R D US I - 9 0 DAVIS LNZ:\SHARED\ACTIVE PROJECTS\GEOTECH\BH LOCATION FIGURES\VALLEY CENTER LIFT STATION.DWG DATE: FIGURE DATUM: UNITS: DISPLAYED AS: COORD SYS/ZONE: SOURCE: TECHNICAL SERVICES, INC.IONEERP 4/25/2024 3:46:25 PM 1 VALLEY CENTER LIFT STATION GEOTECHNICAL SITE PLAN 4/25/2024 MSP NAD83 International Feet Pioneer HELENA, MT 3241 COLONIAL DRIVE (406) 457-8252 BOREHOLE LOCATION MARKER Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 Geotechnical Report Appendix A Borehole Logs Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 TOPSOIL, Poorly-Graded SAND with silt (SP),brown (7.5YR 4/3). Lean CLAY (CL), soft, moist, dark brown (7.5YR3/2). Medium plasticity, trace organics. Poorly-Graded GRAVEL with sand (GP), mediumdense to very dense, dry to moist, brown (7.5YR5/2), rounded. Trace cobbles. Clayey GRAVEL with sand (GC), very dense, moistto wet, brown (7.5YR 4/2), subrounded to rounded.Low to medium plastic fines, occasional lean clay seams. 56 6 50 56 60 94 100 100 Rough drilling, cobbly Rough driling, 4" minusgravels, smashed cobbleon spoon 5 - 2 - 3 3 - 2 - 1 8 - 7 - 9 10 - 18 - 12 50/0.4ft 8 - 11 - 55 50/0.5ft 50/0.3ft 2.0 5.8 15.0 LOG OF BORING Lithology4081.0 4076.0 4071.0 4066.0 4061.0 4056.0 Material Description OperationSample TypeRecovery (%)RQD (%)Township Range and Section:MC (%)LLPL-200 (%)DDRemarks andOther Tests Blow CountLocationSource:RTK GNSS Depth (ft) Depth(ft) Elev. (ft) 5 10 15 20 25 30 201 E Broadway Ste CHelena, MT 59601 Phone: 406-457-8252Fax: 442-1158 (2) MDT LOG OF BORING - MDT_REVISED_2009+(CPT_IMPORT).GDT - 5/20/24 15:49 - C:\USERS\SHARRIS\PIONEER TECHNICAL SERVICES\PIONEER GEOTECH - VALLYCTRLIFTSTATION\LOGS\VALLEY CENTER LIFT STATION_BH LOGS.GPJRemarks:Water Level Observations AfterDrilling: DuringDrilling:13.4 ftAfterDrilling: Driller:B. O'Keefe Logger:J. Riedel Project Number: Valley Center Lift StationProject: Date Started:11/30/23 Date Finished:11/30/23 UPN:Datum:NAD83 System:MT S.P. (E) Abandonment Method:Backfilled with Cuttings DrillingFluid:None Boring Diameter:8" Hammer:Auto Rig:Mobile B60X Sheet 1 of 2 Station:Offset: Top of Boring Elevation:4086 ft ElevationSource:Surveyed Boring LocationCoordinates:N 543,323.8 ftE 1,562,023.3 ft Boring BH-01 Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 Boring Depth: 49.5 ft, Elevation: 4036.5 ft 100 100 100 100 15" of heave Upper 6" slough Upper 6" slough Upper 6" slough Refusal at 49.5 feet 6 - 50/0.3ft 4 - 38 - 40 3 - 28 - 38 4 - 37 - 50/0.2ft 49.5 LOG OF BORING Lithology4051.0 4046.0 4041.0 Material Description OperationSample TypeRecovery (%)RQD (%)Township Range and Section:MC (%)LLPL-200 (%)DDRemarks andOther Tests Blow CountLocationSource:RTK GNSS Depth (ft) Depth(ft) Elev. (ft) 35 40 45 201 E Broadway Ste CHelena, MT 59601 Phone: 406-457-8252Fax: 442-1158 (2) MDT LOG OF BORING - MDT_REVISED_2009+(CPT_IMPORT).GDT - 5/20/24 15:49 - C:\USERS\SHARRIS\PIONEER TECHNICAL SERVICES\PIONEER GEOTECH - VALLYCTRLIFTSTATION\LOGS\VALLEY CENTER LIFT STATION_BH LOGS.GPJRemarks:Water Level Observations AfterDrilling: DuringDrilling:13.4 ftAfterDrilling: Driller:B. O'Keefe Logger:J. Riedel Project Number: Valley Center Lift StationProject: Date Started:11/30/23 Date Finished:11/30/23 UPN:Datum:NAD83 System:MT S.P. (E) Abandonment Method:Backfilled with Cuttings DrillingFluid:None Boring Diameter:8" Hammer:Auto Rig:Mobile B60X Sheet 2 of 2 Station:Offset: Top of Boring Elevation:4086 ft ElevationSource:Surveyed Boring LocationCoordinates:N 543,323.8 ftE 1,562,023.3 ft Boring BH-01 Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 TOPSOIL, Poorly-Graded SAND with silt (SP),brown (7.5YR 4/3). Lean CLAY (CL), soft to medium stiff, dry to moist,dark brown (7.5YR 3/2). Medium plasticity. Poorly-Graded GRAVEL with sand (GP), verydense, moist, very dark brown (7.5YR 2.5/3), fine tocoarse grained, rounded to subrounded. Trace nonplastic fines. Clayey GRAVEL with sand (GC), very dense, moistto wet, dark grayish brown (10YR 4/2) to brown (10YR 5/3), fine to coarse grained, subrounded to subangular. Low to medium plasticity. 50 33 72 94 78 100 66 66 Smooth drilling Smooth drilling Cobbles, approximately 4"diameter Cobbly drilling Smooth drilling 6 - 3 - 4 3 - 3 - 2 3 - 1 - 1 3 - 2 - 4 18 - 30 - 31 19 - 50/0.4ft 19 - 30 - 50/0.3ft 22 - 45 - 50 0.5 10.0 18.0 LOG OF BORING Lithology4995.0 4990.0 4985.0 4980.0 4975.0 4970.0 Material Description OperationSample TypeRecovery (%)RQD (%)Township Range and Section:MC (%)LLPL-200 (%)DDRemarks andOther Tests Blow CountLocationSource:RTK GNSS Depth (ft) Depth(ft) Elev. (ft) 5 10 15 20 25 30 201 E Broadway Ste CHelena, MT 59601 Phone: 406-457-8252Fax: 442-1158 (2) MDT LOG OF BORING - MDT_REVISED_2009+(CPT_IMPORT).GDT - 5/20/24 15:49 - C:\USERS\SHARRIS\PIONEER TECHNICAL SERVICES\PIONEER GEOTECH - VALLYCTRLIFTSTATION\LOGS\VALLEY CENTER LIFT STATION_BH LOGS.GPJRemarks:Water Level Observations AfterDrilling: DuringDrilling:17.5 ftAfterDrilling: Driller:B. O'Keefe Logger:J. Riedel Project Number: Valley Center Lift StationProject: Date Started:12/1/23 Date Finished:12/1/23 UPN:Datum:NAD83 System:MT S.P. (E) Abandonment Method:Backfilled with Cuttings DrillingFluid:None Boring Diameter:8" Hammer:Auto Rig:Mobile B60X Sheet 1 of 2 Station:Offset: Top of Boring Elevation:5000 ft ElevationSource:Surveyed Boring LocationCoordinates:N 543,323.1 ftE 1,562,172.8 ft Boring BH-02 Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 Boring Depth: 51.0 ft, Elevation: 4949.0 ft 89 22 100 100 100 Smooth drilling Piezometer 3/4" PVC.TOC = 4608.89 feet.Screen 20-30 feet bgs.Total Depth is 30 feet, nosand, borehole too muddy. 18 - 27 - 23 29 - 45 - 46 30 - 50/0.4ft 49 - 50/0.3ft 33 - 50/0.5ft 51.0 LOG OF BORING Lithology4965.0 4960.0 4955.0 4950.0 Material Description OperationSample TypeRecovery (%)RQD (%)Township Range and Section:MC (%)LLPL-200 (%)DDRemarks andOther Tests Blow CountLocationSource:RTK GNSS Depth (ft) Depth(ft) Elev. (ft) 35 40 45 50 201 E Broadway Ste CHelena, MT 59601 Phone: 406-457-8252Fax: 442-1158 (2) MDT LOG OF BORING - MDT_REVISED_2009+(CPT_IMPORT).GDT - 5/20/24 15:49 - C:\USERS\SHARRIS\PIONEER TECHNICAL SERVICES\PIONEER GEOTECH - VALLYCTRLIFTSTATION\LOGS\VALLEY CENTER LIFT STATION_BH LOGS.GPJRemarks:Water Level Observations AfterDrilling: DuringDrilling:17.5 ftAfterDrilling: Driller:B. O'Keefe Logger:J. Riedel Project Number: Valley Center Lift StationProject: Date Started:12/1/23 Date Finished:12/1/23 UPN:Datum:NAD83 System:MT S.P. (E) Abandonment Method:Backfilled with Cuttings DrillingFluid:None Boring Diameter:8" Hammer:Auto Rig:Mobile B60X Sheet 2 of 2 Station:Offset: Top of Boring Elevation:5000 ft ElevationSource:Surveyed Boring LocationCoordinates:N 543,323.1 ftE 1,562,172.8 ft Boring BH-02 Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 TOPSOIL, Poorly-Graded SAND with silt (SP),brown (7.5YR 4/3). Lean CLAY (CL), soft to medium stiff, moist, lightbrown (10YR 6/2). Low plasticity, trace organics. Poorly-Graded GRAVEL with sand (GP), verydense, moist, very dark brown (10YR 2/2) to darkgrayish brown (10YR 4/2), fine to coarse grained, subrounded to subangular. Boring Depth: 15.8 ft, Elevation: 4985.2 ft 75 66 96 78 78 100 Top 2-3" are frozen Smooth drilling Smooth drilling Gravels at 10'3" Broken cobbles in spoon, drill bouncing Hammer bouncing afterfirst 4 blows, crushedcobbles in spoon, Refusal 10 - 5 - 4 4 - 3 - 2 3 - 2 - 1 1 - 2 - 3 23 - 32 - 20 26 - 50/0.3ft 1.0 10.3 15.8 LOG OF BORING Lithology4996.0 4991.0 4986.0 Material Description OperationSample TypeRecovery (%)RQD (%)Township Range and Section:MC (%)LLPL-200 (%)DDRemarks andOther Tests Blow CountLocationSource:RTK GNSS Depth (ft) Depth(ft) Elev. (ft) 5 10 15 201 E Broadway Ste CHelena, MT 59601 Phone: 406-457-8252Fax: 442-1158 (2) MDT LOG OF BORING - MDT_REVISED_2009+(CPT_IMPORT).GDT - 5/20/24 15:49 - C:\USERS\SHARRIS\PIONEER TECHNICAL SERVICES\PIONEER GEOTECH - VALLYCTRLIFTSTATION\LOGS\VALLEY CENTER LIFT STATION_BH LOGS.GPJRemarks:Water Level Observations AfterDrilling: DuringDrilling:Not EncounteredAfterDrilling: Driller:B. O'Keefe Logger:J. Riedel Project Number: Valley Center Lift StationProject: Date Started:12/18/23 Date Finished:12/18/23 UPN:Datum:NAD83 System:MT S.P. (E) Abandonment Method:Backfilled with Cuttings DrillingFluid:None Boring Diameter:8" Hammer:Auto Rig:Mobile B60X Sheet 1 of 1 Station:Offset: Top of Boring Elevation:5001 ft ElevationSource:Surveyed Boring LocationCoordinates:N 543,246.4 ftE 1,562,548.0 ft Boring BH-03 Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 TOPSOIL, Poorly-Graded SAND with silt (SP),brown (7.5YR 4/3). Lean CLAY with sand (CL), soft to medium stiff,moist, light brown (7.5YR 6/3), fine to coarsegrained. Low to medium plasticity. Poorly-Graded GRAVEL with sand (GP), verydense, dry to wet, reddish brown (2.5YR 5/4), fine tocoarse grained, subangular to subrounded. Clayey GRAVEL with sand (GC), very dense, wet,brown (7.5YR 5/3), fine to coarse grained,subangular to subrounded. Low plasticity fines. Boring Depth: 26.5 ft, Elevation: 4975.5 ft 56 33 50 89 56 45 100 83 Frozen soil at surface Gravelly at 10 feet Slow drilling Especially gravelly at 23feetPiezometer 3/4" PVC.TOC = 4611.4 feet.Screen 20-25 feet bgs. Total Depth is 25 feet, nosand, borehole too muddy. 6 - 5 - 6 4 - 3 - 2 3 - 2 - 1 1 - 2 - 2 15 - 40 - 50 23 - 50/0.4ft 9 - 36 - 30 9 - 25 - 46 1.0 10.0 23.0 26.5 LOG OF BORING Lithology4997.0 4992.0 4987.0 4982.0 4977.0 Material Description OperationSample TypeRecovery (%)RQD (%)Township Range and Section:MC (%)LLPL-200 (%)DDRemarks andOther Tests Blow CountLocationSource:RTK GNSS Depth (ft) Depth(ft) Elev. (ft) 5 10 15 20 25 201 E Broadway Ste CHelena, MT 59601 Phone: 406-457-8252Fax: 442-1158 (2) MDT LOG OF BORING - MDT_REVISED_2009+(CPT_IMPORT).GDT - 5/20/24 15:49 - C:\USERS\SHARRIS\PIONEER TECHNICAL SERVICES\PIONEER GEOTECH - VALLYCTRLIFTSTATION\LOGS\VALLEY CENTER LIFT STATION_BH LOGS.GPJRemarks:Water Level Observations AfterDrilling: DuringDrilling:15.5 ftAfterDrilling: Driller:B. O'Keefe Logger:S. Harris Project Number: Valley Center Lift StationProject: Date Started:12/19/23 Date Finished:12/19/23 UPN:Datum:NAD83 System:MT S.P. (E) Abandonment Method:Backfilled with Cuttings DrillingFluid:None Boring Diameter:8" Hammer:Auto Rig:Mobile B60X Sheet 1 of 1 Station:Offset: Top of Boring Elevation:5002 ft ElevationSource:Surveyed Boring LocationCoordinates:N 543,068.4 ftE 1,562,877.5 ft Boring BH-04 Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 TOPSOIL, Poorly-Graded SAND with silt (SP),brown (7.5YR 4/3). Lean CLAY with sand (CL), soft to stiff, moist, palebrown (10YR 6/3). Low to medium plasticity, traceorganics. Poorly-Graded GRAVEL with sand (GP), very dense, moist, dark yellowish brown (10YR 3/4), fine to coarse grained, subangular to subrounded. Boring Depth: 15.9 ft, Elevation: 4987.1 ft 44 39 33 100 44 100 Smooth drilling Shelby tube from 7.5-8.5feet, could only push 1foot, shelby bent ongravels Gravelly drilling Hammer bouncing ongravels, refusal 9 - 6 - 4 4 - 1 - 2 3 - 2 - 3 20 - 26 - 50 33 - 50/0.4ft 1.0 8.5 15.9 LOG OF BORING Lithology4998.0 4993.0 4988.0 Material Description OperationSample TypeRecovery (%)RQD (%)Township Range and Section:MC (%)LLPL-200 (%)DDRemarks andOther Tests Blow CountLocationSource:RTK GNSS Depth (ft) Depth(ft) Elev. (ft) 5 10 15 201 E Broadway Ste CHelena, MT 59601 Phone: 406-457-8252Fax: 442-1158 (2) MDT LOG OF BORING - MDT_REVISED_2009+(CPT_IMPORT).GDT - 5/20/24 15:49 - C:\USERS\SHARRIS\PIONEER TECHNICAL SERVICES\PIONEER GEOTECH - VALLYCTRLIFTSTATION\LOGS\VALLEY CENTER LIFT STATION_BH LOGS.GPJRemarks:Water Level Observations AfterDrilling: DuringDrilling:14.0 ftAfterDrilling: Driller:B. O'Keefe Logger:J. Riedel Project Number: Valley Center Lift StationProject: Date Started:12/18/23 Date Finished:12/18/23 UPN:Datum:NAD83 System:MT S.P. (E) Abandonment Method:Backfilled with Cuttings DrillingFluid:None Boring Diameter:8" Hammer:Auto Rig:Mobile B60X Sheet 1 of 1 Station:Offset: Top of Boring Elevation:5003 ft ElevationSource:Surveyed Boring LocationCoordinates:N 542,790.9 ftE 1,563,258.9 ft Boring BH-05 Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 TOPSOIL, Poorly-Graded SAND with silt (SP),brown (7.5YR 4/3). Lean CLAY with sand (CL), very soft to medium stiff,moist, dark gray (10YR 4/1). Low to mediumplasticity, trace organics. Poorly-Graded GRAVEL with sand (GP), dense tovery dense, moist, grayish brown (10YR 5/2), fine to coarse grained, subangular to subrounded. Boring Depth: 15.8 ft, Elevation: 4988.2 ft 78 94 78 78 45 70 Shelby attmepted at 5feet, sample refusal 8" of heave Rocky drilling, heave inauger, 12" of heave inspoon 5 - 3 - 3 WH - WH - WH 20 - 20 - 25 17 - 18 - 16 10 - 26 - 50/0.3ft 22 - 50/0.3ft 1.0 5.0 15.8 LOG OF BORING Lithology4999.0 4994.0 4989.0 Material Description OperationSample TypeRecovery (%)RQD (%)Township Range and Section:MC (%)LLPL-200 (%)DDRemarks andOther Tests Blow CountLocationSource:RTK GNSS Depth (ft) Depth(ft) Elev. (ft) 5 10 15 201 E Broadway Ste CHelena, MT 59601 Phone: 406-457-8252Fax: 442-1158 (2) MDT LOG OF BORING - MDT_REVISED_2009+(CPT_IMPORT).GDT - 5/20/24 15:49 - C:\USERS\SHARRIS\PIONEER TECHNICAL SERVICES\PIONEER GEOTECH - VALLYCTRLIFTSTATION\LOGS\VALLEY CENTER LIFT STATION_BH LOGS.GPJRemarks:Water Level Observations AfterDrilling: DuringDrilling:2.5 ftAfterDrilling: Driller:B. O'Keefe Logger:J. Riedel Project Number: Valley Center Lift StationProject: Date Started:12/18/23 Date Finished:12/18/23 UPN:Datum:NAD83 System:MT S.P. (E) Abandonment Method:Backfilled with Cuttings DrillingFluid:None Boring Diameter:8" Hammer:Auto Rig:Mobile B60X Sheet 1 of 1 Station:Offset: Top of Boring Elevation:5004 ft ElevationSource:Surveyed Boring LocationCoordinates:N 542,426.5 ftE 1,563,712.6 ft Boring BH-06 Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 TOPSOIL, Poorly-Graded SAND with silt (SP),brown (7.5YR 4/3). Lean CLAY with sand (CL), soft, moist, very darkgray (10YR 3/1). Low to medium plasticity, traceorganics. Poorly-Graded GRAVEL with sand (GP), dense tovery dense, moist, very dark gray (10YR 3/1), fine to coarse grained, subangular to subrounded. Boring Depth: 16.5 ft, Elevation: 4988.5 ft 100 92 33 11 66 78 Shelby tube from 2.5-4.5 feet, tip bent Rocky drilling 4" of heave Cobble in spoon tip 4 - 3 - 1 43 - 39 - 22 41 - 45 - 24 14 - 17 - 14 21 - 41 - 50 1.0 4.5 16.5 LOG OF BORING Lithology5000.0 4995.0 4990.0 Material Description OperationSample TypeRecovery (%)RQD (%)Township Range and Section:MC (%)LLPL-200 (%)DDRemarks andOther Tests Blow CountLocationSource:RTK GNSS Depth (ft) Depth(ft) Elev. (ft) 5 10 15 201 E Broadway Ste CHelena, MT 59601 Phone: 406-457-8252Fax: 442-1158 (2) MDT LOG OF BORING - MDT_REVISED_2009+(CPT_IMPORT).GDT - 5/20/24 15:49 - C:\USERS\SHARRIS\PIONEER TECHNICAL SERVICES\PIONEER GEOTECH - VALLYCTRLIFTSTATION\LOGS\VALLEY CENTER LIFT STATION_BH LOGS.GPJRemarks:Water Level Observations AfterDrilling: DuringDrilling:7.3 ftAfterDrilling: Driller:B. O'Keefe Logger:J. Riedel Project Number: Valley Center Lift StationProject: Date Started:12/18/23 Date Finished:12/18/23 UPN:Datum:NAD83 System:MT S.P. (E) Abandonment Method:Backfilled with Cuttings DrillingFluid:None Boring Diameter:8" Hammer:Auto Rig:Mobile B60X Sheet 1 of 1 Station:Offset: Top of Boring Elevation:5005 ft ElevationSource:Surveyed Boring LocationCoordinates:N 542,139.0 ftE 1,564,086.9 ft Boring BH-07 Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 TOPSOIL, Poorly-Graded SAND with silt (SP),brown (7.5YR 4/3). Lean CLAY with sand (CL), soft, moist, very darkgray (10YR 3/1), fine grained. Low to mediumplasticity, trace organics. Poorly-Graded GRAVEL with sand (GP), dense tovery dense, moist, very dark brown (10YR 2/2), fineto coarse grained, subangular to subrounded. Trace fines. Boring Depth: 26.5 ft, Elevation: 4979.5 ft 89 89 38 100 78 82 78 78 3" of heave Piezometer 3/4" PVC.TOC = 4616.01 feet.Screen 20-25 feet bgs.Total Depth is 25 feet, nosand, borehole too muddy. 5 - 2 - 2 3 - 13 - 20 25 - 22 - 35 16 - 24 - 24 24 - 32 - 33 21 - 50/0.4ft 27 - 46 - 19 10 - 29 - 39 1.0 3.0 26.5 LOG OF BORING Lithology5001.0 4996.0 4991.0 4986.0 4981.0 Material Description OperationSample TypeRecovery (%)RQD (%)Township Range and Section:MC (%)LLPL-200 (%)DDRemarks andOther Tests Blow CountLocationSource:RTK GNSS Depth (ft) Depth(ft) Elev. (ft) 5 10 15 20 25 201 E Broadway Ste CHelena, MT 59601 Phone: 406-457-8252Fax: 442-1158 (2) MDT LOG OF BORING - MDT_REVISED_2009+(CPT_IMPORT).GDT - 5/20/24 15:49 - C:\USERS\SHARRIS\PIONEER TECHNICAL SERVICES\PIONEER GEOTECH - VALLYCTRLIFTSTATION\LOGS\VALLEY CENTER LIFT STATION_BH LOGS.GPJRemarks:Water Level Observations AfterDrilling: DuringDrilling:5.0 ftAfterDrilling: Driller:B. O'Keefe Logger:S. Harris Project Number: Valley Center Lift StationProject: Date Started:12/19/23 Date Finished:12/19/23 UPN:Datum:NAD83 System:MT S.P. (E) Abandonment Method:Backfilled with Cuttings DrillingFluid:None Boring Diameter:8" Hammer:Auto Rig:Mobile B60X Sheet 1 of 1 Station:Offset: Top of Boring Elevation:5006 ft ElevationSource:Surveyed Boring LocationCoordinates:N 541,854.4 ftE 1,564,367.8 ft Boring BH-08 Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 Geotechnical Report Appendix B Photograph Log Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 Valley Center Lift Station Geotechnical Investigation Page 1 of 1 Picture # 1: Typical drill rig setup Picture # 2: Typical surficial SPT in topsoil Picture # 3: Typical lean clay observed between 1 and 10 feet. Picture # 4: Typical poorly-graded gravel observed below the lean clay Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 Geotechnical Report Appendix C Laboratory Data Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 Tested By: T0 Checked By: TS CONSOLIDATION TEST REPORT Coefficients of Consolidation and Secondary Consolidation No.Load (psf) Cv(ft.2/day)Ca No.Load (psf) Cv(ft.2/day)Ca No.Load (psf) Cv(ft.2/day)Ca 6 2000 0.060 10 1000 0.060 11 4000 0.056 12 8000 0.096 13 16000 0.086Change In Height - in.-0.17 -0.15 -0.13 -0.11 -0.09 -0.07 -0.05 -0.03 -0.01 0.01 0.03 Applied Pressure - psf 100 1000 10000 Water Added Natural Dry Dens.LL PI Sp. Overburden eo Swell Press.Heave %CsSat. Moist. (pcf)Gr. (psf)(psf) 40.6 % 14.1 % 86.1 33 14 2.65 0.922 -1.1 0.02 lean clay CL A-6(11) Gallatin County Valley Center Lift Station Specific gravity is assumed at 2.65. MATERIAL DESCRIPTION USCS AASHTO Project No.Client:Remarks: Project: Source of Sample: BH05 Depth: 7.5-8.5'Sample Number: G24051 Pioneer Technical Services, Inc. 106 Pronghorn Trail, Suite A - Bozeman, MT 59718 Ph. 406-388-8578 - Fax 406-388-8579 Figure Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 Dial Reading vs. Time Project No.: Project: Source of Sample: BH05 Depth: 7.5-8.5'Sample Number: G24051 Load No.= Load= D0 = D90 = D100 = T90 = Cv @ T90 0.060 ft.2/day Load No.= Load= D0 = D90 = D100 = T90 = Cv @ T90 0.060 ft.2/day Valley Center Lift Station 6 2000 psf 0.0858 0.0896 0.0900 20.06 min. 10 1000 psf 0.0928 0.0931 0.0931 19.95 min.Dial Reading (in.)0.0990 0.0975 0.0960 0.0945 0.0930 0.0915 0.0900 0.0885 0.0870 0.0855 0.0840 Square Root of Elapsed Time (min.) 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 t90 Dial Reading (in.)0.0936 0.0935 0.0934 0.0933 0.0932 0.0931 0.0930 0.0929 0.0928 0.0927 0.0926 Square Root of Elapsed Time (min.) 0 4 8 12 16 20 24 28 32 36 40 t90 FigurePioneer Technical Services, Inc. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 Dial Reading vs. Time Project No.: Project: Source of Sample: BH05 Depth: 7.5-8.5'Sample Number: G24051 Load No.= Load= D0 = D90 = D100 = T90 = Cv @ T90 0.056 ft.2/day Load No.= Load= D0 = D90 = D100 = T90 = Cv @ T90 0.096 ft.2/day Valley Center Lift Station 11 4000 psf 0.1054 0.1123 0.1131 20.19 min. 12 8000 psf 0.1342 0.1459 0.1472 10.76 min.Dial Reading (in.)0.125 0.123 0.121 0.119 0.117 0.115 0.113 0.111 0.109 0.107 0.105 Square Root of Elapsed Time (min.) 0 4 8 12 16 20 24 28 32 36 40 t90 Dial Reading (in.)0.168 0.164 0.160 0.156 0.152 0.148 0.144 0.140 0.136 0.132 0.128 Square Root of Elapsed Time (min.) 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 t90 FigurePioneer Technical Services, Inc. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 Dial Reading vs. Time Project No.: Project: Source of Sample: BH05 Depth: 7.5-8.5'Sample Number: G24051 Load No.= Load= D0 = D90 = D100 = T90 = Cv @ T90 0.086 ft.2/day Valley Center Lift Station 13 16000 psf 0.1754 0.1865 0.1877 10.70 min.Dial Reading (in.)0.212 0.208 0.204 0.200 0.196 0.192 0.188 0.184 0.180 0.176 0.172 Square Root of Elapsed Time (min.) 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 t90 FigurePioneer Technical Services, Inc. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 Tested By: JC Checked By: NG Particle Size Distribution Report PERCENT FINER0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 GRAIN SIZE - mm. 0.0010.010.1110100 % +3"Coarse % Gravel Fine Coarse Medium % Sand Fine % Fines 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 2.0 10.7 87.36 in.3 in.2 in.1½ in.1 in.¾ in.½ in.3/8 in.#4#10#20#30#40#60#100#140#200SIEVE SIZE PERCENT SPEC.*PASS? OR DIAMETER FINER PERCENT (X=NO) Soil Description Atterberg Limits Coefficients Classification Remarks Source of Sample: BH05 Depth: 7.5-8.5' Sample Number: G24051 Date: Client: Project: Project No:Figure lean clay #10 #20 #40 #60 #100 #140 #200 0.0369 mm. 0.0282 mm. 0.0213 mm. 0.0156 mm. 0.0118 mm. 0.0084 mm. 0.0061 mm. 0.0044 mm. 0.0031 mm. 0.0012 mm. 100.0 98.9 98.0 96.0 93.2 90.9 87.3 66.5 55.0 43.6 37.2 32.0 29.2 23.4 21.8 19.5 15.3 19 33 14 0.0942 0.0673 0.0316 0.0251 0.0092 CL A-6(11) Gallatin County Valley Center Lift Station PL=LL=PI= D90=D85=D60= D50=D30=D15= D10=Cu=Cc= USCS=AASHTO= *(no specification provided) Pioneer Technical Services, Inc. 106 Pronghorn Trail, Suite A - Bozeman, MT 59718 Ph. 406-388-8578 - Fax 406-388-8579 Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 Tested By: TO Checked By: NG LIQUID AND PLASTIC LIMITS TEST REPORT PLASTICITY INDEX0 10 20 30 40 50 60 LIQUID LIMIT 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 CL-ML CL or OLCH or OHML or OL MH or OH Dashed line indicates the approximate upper limit boundary for natural soils 47 SOIL DATA SYMBOL SOURCE NATURAL USCSSAMPLE DEPTH WATER PLASTIC LIQUID PLASTICITY NO.CONTENT LIMIT LIMIT INDEX (%)(%)(%)(%) Pioneer Technical Services, Inc. 106 Pronghorn Trail, Suite A - Bozeman, MT 59718 Ph. 406-388-8578 - Fax 406-388-8579 Client: Project: Project No.:Figure Gallatin County Valley Center Lift Station BH05 G24051 7.5-8.5'19 33 14 CL Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 Project:Valley Center Lift Station Client: Sample ID:G24051 Lab Number: Date of Testing:1/12/2024 Tested By:FK Sample Length (in.):6.848 Weight (grams)1658.7 Sample Diameter (in.):2.85 Area (in.2):6.38 Volume (in3):43.69 Wet Unit Weight (pcf):144.6 Water Content (%):14.12 Dry Unit Weight (pcf):126.7 Tare # Wet Soil + Tare 1398.70 Dry Soil + Tare 1284.40 Tare Weight 475.00 Water Content 14.12 Water Content Determination Soil Density from Liner Sample Pioneer Technical Services 106 Pronghorn Trail Ste A Bozeman, MT 59718 Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 1315 Cherry, Helena, MT 59601 (406)449-6282 Client:Pioneer Technical Services Date Reported:28-Feb-24 Sample ID:BH-02, 10-10.5 Project ID:Valley Center Chain of Custody #:333 Laboratory ID:06B267 Date / Time Sampled:None Given Sample Matrix:Soil Date / Time Received:26-Feb-24 @ 14:12 Method Parameter Result PQL Date/Time By Reference Soluble Sulfate, %0.0030 0.00005 28-Feb-24 @ 12:02 CE EPA 300.0 pH, s.u.7.98 0.01 28-Feb-24 @ 12:15 CE MT 232-04 Comments: PQL - Practical Quantitation Limit References: Methods for Chemical Analysis of Water and Wastes, US EPA, 600/4-79-020 Method of Sampling and Testing MT232-04, Soil Corrosion Test (Montana Method). Reviewed by: Analyzed Page 1 of 3 Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 1315 Cherry, Helena, MT 59601 (406)449-6282 Client:Pioneer Technical Services Date Reported:28-Feb-24 Sample ID:BH-04, 2.5-4, 5-6.5, 7.5-9 Project ID:Valley Center Chain of Custody #:333 Laboratory ID:06B268 Date / Time Sampled:None Given Sample Matrix:Soil Date / Time Received:26-Feb-24 @ 14:12 Method Parameter Result PQL Date/Time By Reference Soluble Sulfate, %0.0050 0.00005 28-Feb-24 @ 12:18 CE EPA 300.0 pH, s.u.7.70 0.01 28-Feb-24 @ 12:15 CE MT 232-04 Comments: PQL - Practical Quantitation Limit References: Methods for Chemical Analysis of Water and Wastes, US EPA, 600/4-79-020 Method of Sampling and Testing MT232-04, Soil Corrosion Test (Montana Method). Reviewed by: Analyzed Page 2 of 3 Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 Geotechnical Report Appendix D Seismic Data Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 ASCE Hazards Report Address: No Address at This Location Standard:ASCE/SEI 7-22 Latitude:45.728576 Risk Category:II Longitude:-111.091052 Soil Class:D - Stiff Soil Elevation:4605.2997290625 ft (NAVD 88) Page 1 of 4https://ascehazardtool.org/Wed Feb 21 2024 Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 PGA M : 0.35 SMS : 0.89 SM1 : 0.49 SDS : 0.6 SD1 : 0.33 TL : 6 SS : 0.68 S1 : 0.19 VS30 : 260 Seismic Design Category: D Multi-Period Design Spectrum S (g) vs T(s)a Multi-Period MCE SpectrumR S (g) vs T(s)a Two-Period Design Spectrum S (g) vs T(s)a Two-Period MCE SpectrumR S (g) vs T(s)a Design Vertical Response Spectrum Vertical ground motion data has not yet been made available by USGS. MCE Vertical Response SpectrumR Vertical ground motion data has not yet been made available by USGS. Seismic D - Stiff SoilSite Soil Class: Results: Page 2 of 4https://ascehazardtool.org/Wed Feb 21 2024 Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 Data Accessed: Wed Feb 21 2024 Date Source: USGS Seismic Design Maps based on ASCE/SEI 7-22 and ASCE/SEI 7-22 Table 1.5-2. Additional data for site-specific ground motion procedures in accordance with ASCE/SEI 7-22 Ch. 21 are available from USGS. Page 3 of 4https://ascehazardtool.org/Wed Feb 21 2024 Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 The ASCE Hazard Tool is provided for your convenience, for informational purposes only, and is provided “as is” and without warranties of any kind. The location data included herein has been obtained from information developed, produced, and maintained by third party providers; or has been extrapolated from maps incorporated in the ASCE standard. While ASCE has made every effort to use data obtained from reliable sources or methodologies, ASCE does not make any representations or warranties as to the accuracy, completeness, reliability, currency, or quality of any data provided herein. Any third-party links provided by this Tool should not be construed as an endorsement, affiliation, relationship, or sponsorship of such third-party content by or from ASCE. ASCE does not intend, nor should anyone interpret, the results provided by this Tool to replace the sound judgment of a competent professional, having knowledge and experience in the appropriate field(s) of practice, nor to substitute for the standard of care required of such professionals in interpreting and applying the contents of this Tool or the ASCE standard. In using this Tool, you expressly assume all risks associated with your use. Under no circumstances shall ASCE or its officers, directors, employees, members, affiliates, or agents be liable to you or any other person for any direct, indirect, special, incidental, or consequential damages arising from or related to your use of, or reliance on, the Tool or any information obtained therein. To the fullest extent permitted by law, you agree to release and hold harmless ASCE from any and all liability of any nature arising out of or resulting from any use of data provided by the ASCE Hazard Tool. Page 4 of 4https://ascehazardtool.org/Wed Feb 21 2024 Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 This page intentionally left blank. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 DIVI SION 03 CONCRETE Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 This page intentionally left blank. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents CONCRETE TESTING AND INSPECTION 03 05 05 - 1 SECTION 03 05 05 CONCRETE TESTING AND INSPECTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Contractor requirements for testing of concrete and grout. 2. Definition of Owner provided testing. 3. Acceptance criteria for concrete. B. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Section 03 21 00 - Reinforcement. 2. Section 03 31 30 - Concrete, Materials and Proportioning. 3. Section 03 31 31 - Concrete Mixing, Placing, Jointing and Curing. 4. Section 03 41 33 - Precast and Prestressed Concrete. 1.2 RESPONSIBILITY AND PAYMENT A. Owner will hire an independent Testing Agency/Service Provider to perform the following testing and inspection and provide test results to the Engineer and Contractor. 1. Testing and inspection of concrete and grout produced for incorporation into the work during the construction of the Project for compliance with the Contract Documents. 2. Additional testing or retesting of materials occasioned by their failure, by test or inspection, to meet requirements of the Contract Documents. 3. Strength testing on concrete required by the Engineer or Special Inspector when the water- cement ratio exceeds the water-cement ratio of the typical test cylinders. 4. In-place testing of concrete as may be required by Engineer when strength of structure is considered potentially deficient. 5. Other testing services needed or required by Contractor such as field curing of test specimens and testing of additional specimens for determining when forms, form shoring or reshoring may be removed. 6. Owner will pay for services defined in Paragraph 1.2A.1. B. Hire a qualified testing agency to perform the following testing and provide test results to the Engineer. 1. Testing of materials and mixes proposed by the Contractor for compliance with the Contract Documents and retesting in the event of changes. 2. Additional testing and inspection required because of changes in materials or proportions requested by Contractor. 3. Pay for services defined in Paragraphs 1.2B.1. and 1.2B.2. 4. Reimburse Owner for testing services defined in Paragraphs 1.2A.2., 1.2A.3., 1.2A.4. and 1.2A.5. C. Duties and Authorities of Testing Agency/Service Provider: 1. Any Testing Agency/Service Provider or agencies and their representatives retained by Contractor or Owner for any reason are not authorized to revoke, alter, relax, enlarge, or release any requirement of Contract Documents, nor to reject, approve or accept any portion of the Work. 2. Testing Agency/Service Provider shall inform the Contractor and Engineer regarding acceptability of or deficiencies in the work including materials furnished and work performed by Contractor that fails to fulfill requirements of the Contract Documents. 3. Testing Agency to submit test reports and inspection reports to Engineer and Contractor immediately after they are performed. a. All test reports to include exact location in the work at which batch represented by a test was deposited. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents CONCRETE TESTING AND INSPECTION 03 05 05 - 2 b. Reports of strength tests to include detailed information on storage and curing of specimens prior to testing. 4. Owner retains the responsibility for ultimate rejection or approval of any portion of the Work. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards: 1. American Concrete Institute (ACI): a. 318, Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete. 2. ASTM International (ASTM): a. ASTM Cement and Concrete Reference Laboratory (CCRL). b. C31, Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field. c. C39, Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens. d. C42, Standard Test Method for Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed Beams of Concrete. e. C94, Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete. f. C143, Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic-Cement Concrete. g. C172, Standard Practice for Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete. h. C1019, Standard Test Method for Sampling and Testing Grout. i. C1218, Standard Test Method for Water-Soluble Chloride in Mortar and Concrete. j. E329, Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged in Construction Inspection, Testing, or Special Inspection. B. Qualifications: 1. Contractor’s Testing Agency: a. Meeting requirements of ASTM E329 and ASTM C94. b. Provide evidence of recent inspection by CCRL of NBS, and correction of deficiencies noted. C. Use of Testing Agency and approval by Engineer of proposed concrete mix design shall in no way relieve Contractor of responsibility to furnish materials and construction in full compliance with Contract Documents. 1.4 DEFINITIONS A. Testing Agency/Service Provider: An independent professional testing/inspection firm or service hired by Contractor or by Owner to perform testing, inspection or analysis services as directed, and as provided in the Contract Documents. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. Product technical data including: a. Concrete materials and concrete mix designs proposed for use. 1) Include results of all testing performed to qualify materials and to establish mix designs. 2) Place no concrete until approval of mix designs has been received in writing. 3) Submittal for each concrete mix design to include: a) Sieve analysis and source of fine and coarse aggregates. b) Test for aggregate organic impurities. c) Proportioning of all materials. d) Type of cement with mill certificate for the cement. e) Brand, quantity and class of fly ash proposed for use along with other submittal data as required for fly ash by Specification Section 03 31 30. f) Slump. g) Brand, type and quantity of air entrainment and any other proposed admixtures. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents CONCRETE TESTING AND INSPECTION 03 05 05 - 3 h) Shrinkage test results. i) Total water soluble chloride ion concentration in hardened concrete from all ingredients determined per ASTM C1218. j) 28-day compression test results and any other data required by Specification Section 03 31 30 to establish concrete mix design. 2. Certifications: a. Testing Agency qualifications. PART 2 - EXECUTION 2.1 TESTING SERVICES TO BE PERFORMED SERVICE PROVIDER/TESTING AGENCY A. The following concrete testing will be performed by the Service Provider/Testing Agency: 1. Concrete strength testing: a. Secure concrete samples in accordance with ASTM C172. 1) Obtain each sample from a different batch of concrete on a random basis, avoiding selection of test batch other than by a number selected at random before commencement of concrete placement. b. For each strength test, mold and cure cylinders from each sample in accordance with ASTM C31. 1) Record any deviations from requirements on test report. 2) Cylinder size: Per ASTM C31. a) 4 inches cylinders shall not be used for concrete mixes with maximum aggregate size larger than 1 inch. b) Use the same size cylinder for all tests for each concrete mix. 3) Quantity: a) 6 inches diameter by 12 inches high: Four cylinders. b) 4 inches diameter by 8 inches high: Six cylinders. c. Field cure one cylinder for the seven day test. 1) Laboratory cure the remaining. d. Test cylinders in accordance with ASTM C39. 1) 6 inches diameter cylinders: a) Test two cylinders at 28 days for strength test result and the one field cured sample at seven days for information. b) Hold remaining cylinder in reserve. 2) 4 inches diameter cylinders: a) Test three cylinders at 28 days for strength test result and the one field cured cylinder at seven days for information. b) Hold remaining cylinders in reserve. e. Strength test result: 1) Average of strengths of two, 6 inches diameter cylinders or three, 4 inches diameter cylinders from the same sample tested at 28 days. 2) If one cylinder in a test manifests evidence of improper sampling, molding, handling, curing, or testing, discard and test reserve cylinder(s); average strength of remaining cylinders shall be considered strength test result. 3) Should all cylinders in any test show any of above defects, discard entire test. f. Frequency of tests: 1) Concrete sand cement grout: One strength test for each 4 hour period of grout placement or fraction thereof. a) Test grout in accordance with ASTM C1019. 2) Concrete topping, concrete fill and lean concrete: One strength test for each 60 CUYD of each type of concrete or fraction thereof placed. 3) Precast concrete: Frequency per Specification Section 03 41 33. 4) All other concrete: a) One strength test to be taken not less than once a day, nor less than once for each 60 cubic yards or fraction thereof placed in any one day. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents CONCRETE TESTING AND INSPECTION 03 05 05 - 4 b) Once for each 5000 square feet of slab or wall surface area placed each day c) If total volume of concrete on Project is such that frequency of testing required in above paragraph will provide less than five strength tests for each concrete mix, tests shall then be made from at least five randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five batches are provided. 2. Slump testing: a. Determine slump of concrete sample for each strength test. 1) Determine slump in accordance with ASTM C143. b. If consistency of concrete appears to vary, the Engineer or Owner’s Representative shall be authorized to require a slump test for each concrete truck. 1) This practice shall continue until three consecutive batches are determined to be consistent and meet the slump requirements specified. 3. Air content testing: Determine air content of concrete sample for each strength test in accordance with ASTM C231 , ASTM C173 , or ASTM C138. 4. In-place concrete testing (if required). 2.2 SPECIAL INSPECTIONS A. See Section 01 45 33 IBC 2021: 1. Special Inspections listed are for the Contractor reference only and is not part of the Contract Documents. 2. It is included to assist the Contractor in understanding the Owner-provided Services so that those services may be factored into the Contractor’s pricing and schedule. B. Formwork Special Inspections: 1. Shape, location, and dimensions. a. Inspect in accordance with dimensions and details on Drawings. b. Frequency: Inspect prior to each concrete pour. C. Reinforcing Special Inspections: 1. Reinforcing size, spacing, lap length and concrete cover. a. Inspect in accordance with Drawings and Specification. b. Frequency: Inspect prior to each concrete pour. 2. Reinforcing adhesive anchoring system: a. Inspect in accordance with ICC-ES report. b. Frequency: 1) Inspect all adhesive anchors for the first 4 hours of installation. 2) Inspect approximately 25% of adhesive anchors thereafter. 3) Additional inspection will be required for different installer or if the quality of installation appears to vary. D. Mixing, Placing, Jointing, and Curing Special Inspections: 1. Perform concrete tests per the requirements of this Specification Section. 2. Verification of proper mix design. a. Frequency: Periodically, prior to each concrete pour. 3. Proper concrete placement techniques. a. Inspect per requirements of Section 03 31 31. b. Frequency: During each concrete pour. 4. Proper curing temperature and techniques. a. Inspect per requirements of Section 03 31 31. b. Frequency: Periodically, but not less than every third day. 5. Joints: a. Inspect joints for proper joint type, dimensions, reinforcing, dowel alignment, surface preparation and location. b. Frequency: Prior to each concrete pour. 6. Waterstops: a. Visually inspect waterstops for proper location, continuity, installation to prevent displacement, cleanliness and damage to waterstop. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents CONCRETE TESTING AND INSPECTION 03 05 05 - 5 b. Frequency: 1) Prior to each concrete pour. E. Anchorage to Concrete Special Inspection: 1. Post installed anchors as required by the building code, ICC-ES Evaluation Reports, and as specified by the Engineer. a. Frequency: Per ICC-ES Report. 2. Cast-in-place concrete anchors, including anchor size, embedment, material and location. a. Frequency: Prior to each concrete pour. 2.3 SAMPLING ASSISTANCE AND NOTIFICATION FOR OWNER A. To facilitate testing and inspection, perform the following: 1. Furnish any necessary labor to assist Testing Agency in obtaining and handling samples at site. 2. Provide and maintain for sole use of Testing Agency adequate facilities for safe storage and proper curing of test specimens on site for first 24 hours as required by ASTM C31. 3. Take samples at point of placement into concrete member. B. Notify Engineer and Owner's Testing Agency sufficiently in advance of operations (minimum of 24 hours) to allow for assignment of personnel and for scheduled completion of quality tests. 2.4 ACCEPTANCE A. Completed concrete work which meets applicable requirements will be accepted without qualification. B. Completed concrete work which fails to meet one or more requirements but which has been repaired to bring it into compliance will be accepted without qualification. C. Completed concrete work which fails to meet one or more requirements and which cannot be brought into compliance may be accepted or rejected as provided in these Contract Documents. 1. In this event, modifications may be required to assure that concrete work complies with requirements. 2. Modifications, as directed by Engineer, to be made at no additional cost to Owner. D. Dimensional Tolerances: 1. Formed surfaces resulting in concrete outlines smaller than permitted by tolerances shall be considered potentially deficient in strength and subject to modifications required by Engineer. 2. Formed surfaces resulting in concrete outlines larger than permitted by tolerances may be rejected and excess material subject to removal. a. If removal of excess material is permitted, accomplish in such a manner as to maintain strength of section and to meet all other applicable requirements of function and appearance. 3. Concrete members cast in wrong location may be rejected if strength, appearance or function of structure is adversely affected or misplaced items interfere with other construction. 4. Inaccurately formed concrete surfaces exceeding limits of tolerances and which are exposed to view, may be rejected. a. Repair or remove and replace if required. 5. Finished slabs exceeding tolerances may be required to be repaired provided that strength or appearance is not adversely affected. a. High spots may be removed with a grinder, low spots filled with a patching compound, or other remedial measures performed as permitted or required. E. Appearance: 1. Concrete surfaces exposed to view with defects which, in opinion of Engineer, adversely affect appearance as required by specified finish shall be repaired by approved methods. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents CONCRETE TESTING AND INSPECTION 03 05 05 - 6 2. Concrete not exposed to view is not subject to rejection for defective appearance unless, in the opinion of the Engineer, the defects impair the long-term strength or function of the member. F. High Water-Cement Ratio: 1. Concrete with water in excess of the specified maximum water-cement ratio will be rejected. 2. Remove and replace concrete with high water-cement ratio or make other corrections as directed by Engineer. G. Strength of Structure: 1. Strength of structure in place will be considered potentially deficient if it fails to comply with any requirements which control strength of structure, including but not necessarily limited to following: a. Low concrete strength: 1) Test results for standard molded and cured test cylinders to be evaluated separately for each mix design. a) Such evaluation shall be valid only if tests have been conducted in accordance with specified quality standards. b) For evaluation of potential strength and uniformity, each mix design shall be represented by at least three strength tests. c) A strength test shall be the average of two, 6 inches diameter cylinders or three, 4 inches diameter cylinders from the same sample tested at 28 days. 2) Acceptance: a) Strength level of each specified compressive strength shall be considered satisfactory if both of the following requirements are met: (1) Average of all sets of three consecutive strength tests equal or exceed the required specified 28 day compressive strength. (2) No individual strength test falls below the required specified 28 day compressive strength by more than 500 psi. b. Reinforcing steel size, configuration, quantity, strength, position, or arrangement at variance with requirements in Specification Section 03 21 00 or requirements of the Contract Drawings or approved Shop Drawings. c. Concrete which differs from required dimensions or location in such a manner as to reduce strength. d. Curing time and procedure not meeting requirements of this Specification Section. e. Inadequate protection of concrete from extremes of temperature during early stages of hardening and strength development. f. Mechanical injury, construction fires, accidents or premature removal of formwork likely to result in deficient strength. g. Concrete defects such as voids, honeycomb, cold joints, spalling, cracking, etc., likely to result in deficient strength or durability. 2. Structural analysis and/or additional testing may be required when strength of structure is considered potentially deficient. 3. In-place testing of concrete may be required when strength of concrete in place is considered potentially deficient. a. Testing by impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be permitted by Engineer to determine relative strengths at various locations in the structure or for selecting areas to be cored. 1) Such tests shall not be used as a basis for acceptance or rejection. b. Core tests: 1) Where required, test cores will be obtained in accordance with ASTM C42. a) If concrete in structure will be dry under service conditions, air dry cores (temperature 60 to 80 degrees F, relative humidity less than 60%) for seven days before test then test dry. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents CONCRETE TESTING AND INSPECTION 03 05 05 - 7 b) If concrete in structure will be wet or subjected to high moisture atmosphere under service conditions, test cores after immersion in water for at least 40 hours and test wet. c) Testing wet or dry to be determined by Engineer. 2) Three representative cores may be taken from each member or area of concrete in place that is considered potentially deficient. a) Location of cores shall be determined by Engineer so as least to impair strength of structure. b) If, before testing, one or more of cores shows evidence of having been damaged subsequent to or during removal from structure, damaged core shall be replaced. 3) Concrete in area represented by a core test will be considered adequate if average strength of three cores is equal to at least 85% of specified strength and no single core is less than 75% of specified strength. 4) Fill core holes with non-shrink grout and finish to match surrounding surface when exposed in a finished area. 4. If core tests are inconclusive or impractical to obtain or if structural analysis does not confirm safety of structure, load tests may be required and their results evaluated in accordance with ACI 318, Chapter 27. 5. Correct or replace concrete work judged inadequate by structural analysis or by results of core tests or load tests with additional construction, as directed by Engineer, at Contractor's expense. 6. Contractor to pay all costs incurred in providing additional testing and/or structural analysis required. END OF SECTION Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 This page intentionally left blank. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents FORMWORK 03 11 13 - 1 SECTION 03 11 13 FORMWORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Formwork requirements for concrete construction. B. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Section 03 05 05 - Concrete Testing and Inspection. 2. Section 03 31 31 - Concrete Mixing, Placing, Jointing, and Curing. 3. Section 03 35 00 - Concrete Finishing and Repair of Surface Defects. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards: 1. American Concrete Institute (ACI): a. CT-13, Concrete Terminology. b. 117, Specification for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials. c. 347R, Guide to Formwork for Concrete. B. Qualifications: 1. Formwork, shoring and reshoring to be designed by a licensed professional engineer currently registered or having a minimum of three years of experience in this type of design work. a. Above qualifications apply to slabs and beams not cast on the ground. C. Miscellaneous: 1. Design and engineering of formwork, shoring and reshoring as well as its construction is the responsibility of the Contractor. 2. Design requirements: a. Design formwork for loads, lateral pressures and allowable stresses outlined in ACI 347R and for design considerations, wind loads, allowable stresses and other applicable requirements of the controlling local building code. 1) Where conflicts occur between the above two standards, the more stringent requirements shall govern. b. Design formwork to limit maximum deflection of form facing materials reflected in concrete surfaces exposed to view to 1/240 of span between structural members. 3. For slabs and beams not cast on the ground, develop a procedure and schedule for removal of shores and installation of reshores and for calculating the loads transferred to the structure during this process in accordance with ACI 347R. a. Perform structural calculations as required to prove that all portions of the structure in combination with remaining forming and shoring system has sufficient strength to safely support its own weight plus the loads placed thereon. Calculations shall be performed by a licensed professional engineer. b. When developing procedure, schedule and structural calculations, consider the following at each stage of construction: 1) The structural system that exists. 2) Effects of all loads during construction. 3) Strength of concrete. 4) The influence of deformations of the structure and shoring system on the distribution of dead loads and construction loads. 5) The strength and spacing of shores or shoring systems used, as well as the method of shoring, bracing, shore removal, and reshoring including the minimum time intervals between the various operations. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents FORMWORK 03 11 13 - 2 6) Any other loading or condition that affects the safety or serviceability of the structure during construction. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Words and terms used in these Specifications are defined in ACI CT-13. B. SCC: Self-Consolidating Concrete. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. Product technical data including: a. Manufacturer and type of proposed form ties. b. Manufacturer and type of proposed form release material. B. Samples: 1. A 12 inches SQ sample of each of the following form finishes. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Forms for Surfaces Exposed to View: 1. Wood forms: a. 5/8 or 3/4 inches 5-ply structural plywood of concrete form grade. b. Built-in-place or prefabricated type panel. 2. Metal forms: a. Metal forms may be used except for aluminum in contact with concrete. b. Forms to be tight to prevent leakage, free of rust and straight without dents to provide members of uniform thickness. B. Forms for Surfaces Not Exposed to View: 1. Wood or metal sufficiently tight to prevent leakage. 2. Do not use aluminum forms. 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Form Ties: 1. Commercially fabricated for use in form construction. a. Field fabricated ties are unacceptable. 2. Constructed so that ends or end fasteners can be removed without causing spalling at surfaces of the concrete. 3. Embedded portion of ties to be not less than 1-1/2 inches from face of concrete after ends have been removed. 4. Cone size: a. 3/4 inches minimum diameter cones on both ends. b. Depth of cone not to exceed the concrete reinforcing cover. 5. Provide ties with built-in waterstops in all walls that will be in contact with process liquid during plant operation. 6. Through-wall ties that are designed to be entirely removed are not allowed in all walls that will be in contact with liquids during plant operation. B. Form Release Material: 1. If project contains self-consolidating concrete, provide reactive, vegetable based product, not barrier type. C. Void Forms: 1. Material: Corrugated paper or corrugated plastic. Where void forms may reasonably be subjected to damp conditions, such as precipitation, groundwater, surface water, or other Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents FORMWORK 03 11 13 - 3 source of moisture, provide void forms impervious to moisture. Capable of resisting moisture with no loss of load carrying strength or change in depth or configuration. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Form Surface Treatment: 1. Before placing of reinforcing steel or concrete, cover surfaces of forms with an approved release material that will effectively prevent absorption of moisture and prevent bond with concrete, will not stain concrete or prevent bonding of future finishes. a. A field applied form release agent or sealer of approved type or a factory applied nonabsorptive liner may be used. 2. Do not allow excess form release material to stand in puddles in forms nor in contact with hardened concrete against which fresh concrete is to be placed. B. Apply form release material to minimize bugholes and pinholes. Follow manufacturer’s printed installation instructions specific to the form facing material. C. Provide temporary openings at base of column and wall forms and at other points where necessary to facilitate cleaning and observation immediately before concrete is placed, and to limit height of free fall of concrete to prevent aggregate segregation. 1. Temporary openings to limit height of free fall of concrete shall be spaced no more than 8 feet apart. D. Clean surfaces of forms, reinforcing steel and other embedded materials of any accumulated mortar or grout from previous concreting and of all other foreign material before concrete is placed. 3.2 ERECTION A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Tolerances: 1. Conform to ACI 117. 2. Variation from plumb: a. In lines and surfaces of columns, piers, walls, and in risers. 1) Maximum in any 10 feet of height: 1/4 inches. 2) Maximum for entire height: 1/2 inches. b. For exposed corner columns, control-joint grooves, and other exposed to view lines: 1) Maximum in any 20 feet length: 1/4 inches. 2) Maximum for entire length: 1/2 inches. 3. Variation from level or from grades specified: a. In slab soffits, ceilings, beam soffits and in arises, measured before removal of supporting shores. 1) Maximum in any 10 feet of length: 1/4 inches. 2) Maximum in any bay or in any 20 feet length: 3/8 inches. 3) Maximum for entire length: 3/4 inches. b. In exposed lintels, sills, parapets, horizontal grooves, and other exposed to view lines: 1) Maximum in any bay or in 20 feet length: 1/4 inches. 2) Maximum for entire length: 1/2 inches. 4. Variation of linear structure lines from established position in plan and related position of columns, walls, and partitions: a. Maximum in any bay: 1/2 inches. b. Maximum in any 20 feet of length: 1/2 inches. c. Maximum for entire length: 1 inch. 5. Variation in sizes and location of sleeves, floor openings, and wall openings: Maximum of +1/2 inches. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents FORMWORK 03 11 13 - 4 6. Variation in horizontal plan location of beam, column and wall centerlines from required location: Maximum of +1/2 inches. 7. Variation in cross sectional dimensions of columns and beams and in thickness of slabs and walls: Maximum of -1/4 inches, +1/2 inches. 8. Footings and foundations: a. Variations in concrete dimensions in plan: -1/2 inches, +2 inches. b. Misplacement or eccentricity: 1) 2% of footing width in direction of misplacement but not more than 2 inches. c. Thickness: 1) Decrease in specified thickness: 5%. 2) Increase in specified thickness: No limit except that which may interfere with other construction. 9. Variation in steps: a. In a flight of stairs: 1) Rise: +1/8 inches. 2) Tread: +1/4 inches. b. In consecutive steps: 1) Rise: +1/16 inches. 2) Tread: +1/8 inches. 10. Establish and maintain in an undisturbed condition and until final completion and acceptance of Project, sufficient control points and benchmarks to be used for reference purposes to check tolerances. 11. Regardless of tolerances listed allow no portion of structure to extend beyond legal boundary of Project. 12. To maintain specified tolerances, camber formwork to compensate for anticipated deflections in formwork prior to hardening of concrete. C. Make forms sufficiently tight to prevent loss of mortar from concrete. D. Place 3/4 inches chamfer strips in exposed to view corners of forms to produce 3/4 inches wide beveled edges. E. At construction joints, overlap contact surface of form sheathing for flush surfaces exposed to view over hardened concrete in previous placement by at least 1 inch. 1. Hold forms against hardened concrete to prevent offsets or loss of mortar at construction joint and to maintain a true surface. 2. Where possible, locate juncture of built-in-place wood or metal forms at architectural lines, control joints or at construction joints. F. Where circular walls are to be formed and forms made up of straight sections are proposed for use, provide straight lengths not exceeding 2 feet wide. 1. Brace and tie formwork to maintain correct position and shape of members. G. Construct wood forms for wall openings to facilitate loosening, if necessary, to counteract swelling. H. Anchor formwork to shores or other supporting surfaces or members so that movement of any part of formwork system is prevented during concrete placement. I. Provide runways for moving equipment with struts or legs, supported directly on formwork or structural member without resting on reinforcing steel. J. Provide positive means of adjustment (wedges or jacks) of shores and struts and take up all settlement during concrete placing operation. 1. Securely brace forms against lateral deflection. 2. Fasten wedges used for final adjustment of forms prior to concrete placement in position after final check. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents FORMWORK 03 11 13 - 5 3.3 REMOVAL OF FORMS A. No construction loads shall be supported on, nor any shoring removed from, any part of the structure under construction except when that portion of the structure in combination with remaining forming and shoring system has sufficient strength to safely support its weight and loads places thereon. B. When required for concrete curing in hot weather, required for repair of surface defects or when finishing is required at an early age, remove forms as soon as concrete has hardened sufficiently to resist damage from removal operations or lack of support. C. Remove top forms on sloping surfaces of concrete as soon as concrete has attained sufficient stiffness to prevent sagging. 1. Perform any needed repairs or treatment required on such sloping surfaces at once, followed by curing specified in Specification Section 03 31 31. D. Loosen wood forms for wall openings as soon as this can be accomplished without damage to concrete. E. Formwork for columns, walls, sides of beams, and other parts not supporting weight of concrete may be removed as soon as concrete has hardened sufficiently to resist damage from removal. F. Where no reshoring is planned, leave forms and shoring used to support weight of concrete in place until concrete has attained its specified 28-day compressive strength. 1. Where a reshoring procedure is planned, supporting formwork may be removed when concrete has reached the concrete strength required by the formwork designer's structural calculations. G. When shores and other vertical supports are so arranged that non-load-carrying form facing material may be removed without loosening or disturbing shores and supports, facing material may be removed when concrete has sufficiently hardened to resist damage from removal. 3.4 RESHORING A. No construction loads shall be supported on, nor any shoring removed from, any part of the structure under construction except when that portion of the structure in combination with remaining forming and shoring system has sufficient strength to safely support its weight and loads placed thereon. B. While reshoring is underway, no superimposed dead or live loads shall be permitted on the new construction. C. During reshoring do not subject concrete in structural members to combined dead and construction loads in excess of loads that structural members can adequately support. D. Place reshores as soon as practicable after stripping operations are complete but in no case later than end of working day on which stripping occurs. E. Tighten reshores to carry their required loads without overstressing. F. Shoring, reshoring and supporting formwork may be removed when concrete has reached the concrete strength required by the formwork designer's structural calculations. G. For floors supporting shores under newly placed concrete leave original supporting shores in place or reshore. 1. Reshoring system shall have a capacity sufficient to resist anticipated loads. 2. Locate reshores directly under a shore position above. H. In multi-story buildings, extend reshoring over a sufficient number of stories to distribute weight of newly placed concrete, forms, and construction live loads in such a manner that design superimposed loads of floors supporting shores are not exceeded. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents FORMWORK 03 11 13 - 6 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Special Inspection: 1. See Section 45 33 IBC 2021. 2. See Section 03 05 05. END OF SECTION Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents ANCHORAGE TO CONCRETE 03 15 19 - 1 SECTION 03 15 19 ANCHORAGE TO CONCRETE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Requirements for anchorages in concrete, including: cast-in-place anchor bolts, anchor rods, reinforcing anchorage adhesive, and post-installed concrete anchors required for the Project but not specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents. 2. Delegated design requirements for concrete anchors not expressly shown or indicated on the Drawings or elsewhere in the Contract Documents, including, but not limited to, anchorages in concrete for the following structural and nonstructural components: a. Structural members and accessories. b. Metal, wood, and plastic fabrications. c. Architectural Work, including building components, finishes, specials, facility equipment and conveying equipment, furnishings, and special construction Work. d. Mechanical and electrical Work, including process-mechanical Work, site and infrastructure Work, electrical Work, communications Work, electronic safety and security systems Work, and others. e. Fire suppression, plumbing, and HVAC Work. f. Other components requiring anchorages to concrete. B. Related Requirements: Include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Section 03 05 05 - Concrete Testing and Inspection. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Definitions and Terminology: 1. This provision presents definitions and terminology, which have the meanings indicated in this provision, applied to the singular or plural thereof, and without regard to use of initial capital letters. a. Adhesive Anchors: 1) Post-installed anchors developing their strength primarily from chemical bond between the concrete and the anchor. 2) Includes anchors using acrylics, epoxy and other similar adhesives. b. Anchor Bolt: Any cast-in-place anchorage that is made of a headed (i.e. bolt) material. c. Anchor Rod: Any cast-in-place or post-installed anchorage made from unheaded, threaded, rod or deformed bar material. d. Concrete Anchor: Generic term for either an anchor bolt or an anchor rod. e. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanizing in accordance with ASTM A123, ASTM A153 or ASTM F2329 with minimum coating of 2.0 ounces of zinc per square foot of metal (average of specimens) unless noted otherwise or dictated by reference standard. f. Hardware: As defined in. g. MPII: Manufacturer’s printed installation instructions. h. Mechanical Anchors: 1) Post-installed anchors developing their strength from attachment other than thru adhesives or chemical bond to concrete. 2) Includes expansion anchors, expansion sleeve, screw anchors, undercut anchors, specialty inserts and other similar types of anchorages. 3) Drop-in anchors and other similar non-ICC ES approved anchors are unacceptable. i. Post-Installed Anchor: Adhesive or mechanical anchor installed into previously placed and adequately cured concrete. B. Reference Standards: Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents ANCHORAGE TO CONCRETE 03 15 19 - 2 1. American Concrete Institute (ACI): a. 318, Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary. 2. American Concrete Institute/Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (ACI-CRSI): a. Adhesive Anchor Installation Certification Program: Adhesive Anchor Installer. 3. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC): a. 303, Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges. b. 355.2, Seismic Testing of Post-Installed Concrete and Masonry Anchors in Cracked Concrete. c. 355.4, Qualification of Post-Installed Adhesive Anchors in Concrete. 4. ASTM International (ASTM): a. A36, Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel. b. A108, Standard Specification for Steel Bar, Carbon and Alloy, Cold-Finished. c. A123, Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. d. A153, Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. e. A307, Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 PSI Tensile Strength. f. A496, Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Deformed, for Concrete Reinforcement. g. A563, Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts. h. A780, Standard Practice for Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas of Hot-Dip Galvanized Coatings. i. F436, Standard Specification for Hardened Steel Washers. j. F593, Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex Cap Screws, and Studs. k. F594, Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Nuts. l. F1554, Standard Specification for Anchor Bolts, Steel, 36, 55, and 105-ksi Yield Strength. m. F2329, Standard Specification for Zinc Coating, Hot-Dip, Requirements for Application to Carbon and Alloy Steel Bolts, Screws, Washers, Nuts, and Special Threaded Fasteners 5. International Code Council Evaluation Service (ICC-ES): a. AC193, Acceptance Criteria for Mechanical Anchors in Concrete Elements. b. AC308, Acceptance Criteria for Post-Installed Adhesive Anchors in Concrete Elements. c. ESR-1917, Hilti Kwik Bolt TZ Carbon and Stainless Steel Anchors in Cracked and Uncracked Concrete. d. ESR-2582, Dewalt AC100+ Gold Adhesive Anchor System in Uncracked Concrete. e. ESR-2713, Titen HD Screw Anchor and Titen HD Rod Hanger for Cracked and Uncracked Concrete. f. ESR-2818, Dewalt Power-Stud+ SD1 Expansion Anchors for Cracked and Uncracked Concrete. g. ESR-3814, Hilti HIT-RE500 V3 Adhesive Anchors and Post-Installed Reinforcing Bar Connections in Cracked and Uncracked Concrete. h. ESR-3889, Dewalt Screw-Bolt+ Screw Anchors and Hangermate+ Rod Screw Anchors in Cracked and Uncracked Concrete. i. ESR-4057, Simpson Strong-Tie SET-3G Epoxy Adhesive Anchors for Cracked and Uncracked Concrete. 1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: 1. For post-installed anchors and other anchorages installed in existing concrete, comply with Section 01 73 29 - Cutting and Patching. B. Pre-Design Conference: 1. Pre-design conference for anchorages to concrete (where such anchorages are delegated design Work) is not required. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents ANCHORAGE TO CONCRETE 03 15 19 - 3 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Code-required Special Instructions: a. Special Inspection is required in accordance with the building code for all concrete anchorages. b. Notify the Special Inspector that an inspection is required prior to concrete placement (or during post-installed anchorage installation). c. See the “Field Quality Control” Article in “Part 3 – Execution” of this Section for additional requirements. B. Qualifications: 1. Installer: a. Installer for post-installed anchors shall be trained by the manufacturer or certified by a training program approved by the Engineer. b. Installer for adhesive anchors installed in horizontal, upward incline, or overhead applications shall be certified by ACI-CRSI Adhesive Anchor Installation Certification Program. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Shop Drawings: a. Submit schedule (table or listing) of types, sizes (diameter, length, embedment length), material, finish, and proposed manufacturers of anchorages to concrete to be provided. Apportion by Project-specific application (for example, “Anchorages for cooling water pumps in basement”) and indicate where anchorages are fully-designed by Engineer and those for which final design was prepared by delegated design professional. b. Engineer’s approval of such Shop Drawing will be only for anchorages fully designed by Engineer. For anchorages for which final design is by delegated design professional, include on such Shop Drawing delegated design professional’s approval stamp. 2. Product Data: Submit as Action Submittals product data for anchorages to concrete fully designed by Engineer. For anchorages to concrete for which final design is by delegated design professional, submit as Informational Submittals bearing approval stamp of delegated design professional. a. Manufacturer’s express, written acknowledgement that proposed items comply with referenced standards indicated in this Section and, as applicable, by delegated design professional. b. Manufacturer published data and information for each anchor. 1) Clearly indicate items that are proposed for the Work. Neatly strike out or obscure materials and products not proposed. c. Manufacturer's published installation instructions and instructions for code-required special inspections and tests. d. Post-Installed Anchors: In addition, submit for each post-installed anchor system current ICC-ES report , indicating the following: 1) Manufacturer’s certification that anchors comply with requirements indicated in the Contract Documents. 2) Performance data indicating that anchor is approved by its manufacturer for use in cracked concrete. 3) Seismic design categories for which anchor system is approved by ICC-ES report. e. Anchorage layout drawings and details: 1) Drawings showing location, configuration, spacing and edge distance. 3. Samples: a. Submit representative Samples of anchorages to concrete, when requested by Engineer. Engineer’s approval of Samples will be for type and finish only. B. Informational Submittals: Submit the following: Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents ANCHORAGE TO CONCRETE 03 15 19 - 4 1. Shop Drawings and Product Data Approved by Delegated Design Professional: a. Submit with delegated design professional’s approval stamp those Shop Drawings and product data Submittals indicated in this Article but for which final design was performed by delegated design professional. 2. Calculations by Delegated Design Professional: a. Submit sealed and signed calculations for sizing and determining embedment length of anchorages to concrete not fully designed by Engineer. b. Post-Installed Anchors Designed by Delegated Design Professional: In addition, also submit design calculations: 1) Indicate design load to each anchor. 2) When design load is not indicated on the Drawings, include calculations to develop anchor forces based on performance and design criteria indicated in this Section. 3. Supplier’s Instructions: a. Submit manufacturer’s published instructions for installation. 4. Field Quality Control Submittals: a. Submit written results of required field quality control activities indicated in this Section. 5. Reports of Supplier’s Visits to Site: a. Submit each written report of visit to the Site by Supplier’s factory trained representative and delegated design professional. For each, indicate date and time of visit, purpose of visit, observations made, decisions made, problems encountered, and other pertinent information. 6. Qualifications Statements: a. Delegated design professional. b. Each installer. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS – ALL ANCHORAGES A. Materials – General: 1. This Article applies to all anchorages to concrete, regardless of whether fully designed by Engineer or delegated design professional. Requirements for delegated designs are in the following Article. 2. Additional requirements for anchorages fully designed by Engineer are indicated in the Article following requirements for delegated design anchorages. 3. For structural applications, do not use powder actuated fasteners and other types of bolts or fasteners not specified in this Section unless approved by Engineer or otherwise required by the Contract Documents. B. Description: 1. Provide anchorages to concrete, of the types shown or indicated, to secure to concrete materials, equipment, and appurtenances installed as part of the Work. 2. Locations where anchorages are required are generally shown or indicated on the Drawings. Where not shown or indicated on the Drawings provide anchorages or the types required for materials, equipment, and systems where such materials, equipment, and systems are shown on the Drawings. 3. Anchorages required include those for materials, equipment, and systems shown on the structural Drawings and Drawing other than the structural Drawings. 4. Design loads for concrete anchorages are shown or indicated on the Drawings for anchorages where design responsibility is delegated to Contractor’s delegated design professional. For such anchorages, embedment depths are not shown or indicated. C. Cast-in-place Concrete Anchors: 1. Buildings, non-building structures, and equipment, unless otherwise specified: a. ASTM F1554, Grade 36 or Grade 55 with weldability supplement S1 for galvanized threaded rods. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents ANCHORAGE TO CONCRETE 03 15 19 - 5 b. ASTM A307, Grade A for galvanized headed bolts. 2. All other cast-in-place concrete anchors: a. Stainless steel with matching nut and washer. b. Submerged application: ASTM F593, Type 316, minimum yield strength of 45,000 psi. c. Non-submerged application: ASTM F593, Type 304 or Type 316, minimum yield strength of 45,000 psi. D. Post-Installed Mechanical and Adhesive Concrete Anchors: 1. Submerged application: ASTM F593, Type 316, minimum yield strength of 45,000 psi with matching nut and washer. 2. Non-submerged application: ASTM F593, Type 304 or Type 316, minimum yield strength of 45,000 psi with matching nut and washer. 3. Post-installed anchors and related materials shall be listed by ICC-ES or Engineer-approved equivalent. E. Reinforcing: Comply with Section 03 21 00 - Reinforcement. F. Headed Studs: ASTM A108 with a minimum yield strength of 50,000 psi and a minimum tensile strength of 60,000 psi. G. Deformed Bar Anchors: ASTM A496 with minimum yield strength of 70,000 psi and a minimum tensile strength of 80,000 psi. H. Washers: 1. ASTM F436 unless indicated otherwise, finish to match bolt. 2. When stainless steel anchorage is provided for cast-in-place anchorages, provide washers of the same material and alloy as in the associated anchorage. 3. Plate washers: Minimum 1/2 inch thick fabricated ASTM A36 square plates as required. 4. Comply with manufacturer’s written instructions for all post-installed anchorages. I. Nuts: 1. ASTM A563 for cast-in-place anchorages. 2. When stainless steel anchorages are provided for cast-in-place anchorages, nuts shall comply with ASTM F594 and shall match material and alloy of the associated anchorage. 3. Follow manufacturer’s requirements if using post-installed anchorage. J. Galvanizing Repair Paint: 1. High zinc dust content paint for regalvanizing welds and abrasions. 2. ASTM A780. 3. Zinc content: Minimum 92 percent in dry film. 4. Products and Manufacturers: "ZRC Cold Galvanizing", by ZRC; or "High Performance Zinc Spray", by Clearco; or equal. K. Dissimilar Materials Protection: Comply with Section 09 96 00 - High-Performance Industrial Coatings. 2.2 DELEGATED DESIGN ANCHORAGES TO CONCRETE A. Manufacturers: 1. Post-installed anchor systems for indicated manufacturers are acceptable only when a current ICC-ES evaluation report is furnished as a Submittal and the subject anchorage system is approved by delegated design professional. a. Hilti. b. Dewalt. c. Simpson Strong-Tie. d. Or equal. B. Description: Perform delegated design for anchorages when one or more of the following applies: 1. Design load for concrete anchorage is shown or indicated on the Drawings and anchorage embedment depth is not shown or indicated. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents ANCHORAGE TO CONCRETE 03 15 19 - 6 2. When specifically required by the Contract Documents. 3. When an anchorage is necessary but is not shown or indicated on the Drawings. 4. Anchorages shown on the Drawings other than the structural Drawings. C. Performance and Design Criteria for Delegated Design Anchorages: 1. Determine design loads, including wind and seismic loads, in accordance with applicable building code and other Laws and Regulations. 2. For anchorage of equipment and non-structural components, use actual dead load and operating loads obtained by Contractor or delegated design professional from manufacturer. Design loads shall include operating conditions when equipment or element of the Work is in operation, dynamic loads, and other loads as appropriate or required by the building code or other Laws or Regulations. 3. Design assuming cracked concrete. 2.3 ANCHORAGES FULLY DESIGNED BY ENGINEER A. When size, length, and details of anchorage are shown or indicated on the structural Drawings, such anchorages are considered as fully designed by Engineer and delegated design of such anchorage is not required. B. Manufacturers: 1. For post-installed anchor systems regardless of whether proposed manufacturer is indicated below, furnish as Submittal current evaluation agency report and anchor system is certified by ICC-ES for cracked concrete conditions. 2. Mechanical Anchors: a. Hilti: 1) Kwik Bolt TZ (ICC-ES ESR-1917). b. Dewalt: 1) Power-Stud+ SD1 (ICC-ES ESR-2818). c. Simpson Strong-Tie: 1) Strong-Bolt 2 (ICC-ES ESR-3037). d. Or equal. 3. Adhesive Anchors for Concrete: a. Hilti: 1) HIT RE 500 V3 (ICC ESR-3814). b. Dewalt: 1) PURE110+ (ICC-ES ESR-3298). c. Simpson Strong-Tie: 1) SET-3G (ICC ES 4057) d. Or equal. 4. Screw Anchors for Concrete: a. Hilti: 1) Kwik HUS-EZ Screw (ICC-ES ESR-3027). b. Dewalt: 1) Screw-Bolt+ (ICC-ES ESR-3889). c. Simpson Strong-Tie: 1) Titen HD (ICC-ES ESR-2713). d. Or equal. 5. Requests, if any, for Engineer’s approval of “or-equals” or substitutes shall indicate proposed anchor has at least the same tension and shear strength as the associated anchorage products indicated by name in this Article. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. For cast-in-place concrete anchorages, allow adequate time for proper installation, inspection, and observation prior to placing concrete. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents ANCHORAGE TO CONCRETE 03 15 19 - 7 B. Prior to installation, inspect and verify areas and conditions under which concrete anchorages will be installed. 1. Notify Engineer of conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of the Work. 2. Do not proceed with the Work until unsatisfactory conditions are properly remedied. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Installation Requirements - General: 1. Install items in accordance with the Contract Documents, manufacturer’s written instructions, and Laws and Regulations. Where such requirements conflict, obtain interpretation or clarification from Engineer prior to commencing the associated Work. 2. Perform the following unless shown or indicated otherwise: a. Provide stainless steel anchorages for connecting aluminum and steel members to concrete and masonry. Provide dissimilar materials protection in accordance with Section 09 96 00 – High-Performance Industrial Coatings. b. Provide washers for all anchorages. c. Where exposed, extend threaded anchorage a maximum of 0.75 inch and a minimum of 0.5 inch above top of fully-engaged nut. If anchorage is cut off to required maximum height, dress the threads to allow nuts to be removed without damage to nuts. 3. Tightening of nuts: Do the following after nuts are snug-tightened down: a. Upset anchorage threads to prevent nuts from backing off. Provide double nut or lock nut in lieu of upset threads for items that may require future removal. b. For cast-in-place anchorages (excluding post-installed anchorages), tighten nuts an additional 1/8 turn beyond snug tight to prevent nuts from backing off. c. When two nuts are used per concrete anchor above the base plate, tighten top nut an additional 1/8 turn to "lock" the two nuts together. d. For post-installed anchorages, comply with MPII. 4. Secure architectural components to avoid aesthetic distortion and to avoid overstressing fasteners from expansion, contraction, or installation. B. Cast-in-Place Anchorages: 1. Provide where anchor rods or anchor bolts are indicated on the Drawings, unless another anchor type is approved by Engineer. 2. Provide concrete anchorages as shown on the Drawings or as required to secure the Work to concrete. 3. Tie cast-in-place anchorage in position to embedded reinforcing steel using wire. 4. Tack welding of anchorage is prohibited. 5. Chase threads as required and coat projected portion of carbon steel anchors and nut threads with a heavy coat of clean grease after concrete has cured. 6. Anchorage location Tolerance: in accordance with AISC 303. 7. Provide steel or durable wood templates for all column and equipment anchorages. Place templates above top of concrete; do not impede proper concrete placement and consolidation. C. Mechanical Anchorages: 1. Use only where specifically indicated on the Drawings or when approved for use by the Engineer. 2. Do not use where subjected to vibration. 3. May be used in overhead applications. 4. Contact Engineer for clarification when anchors will not be installed in compliance with manufacturer's printed installation requirements. D. Post-installed Anchorages: 1. For post-installed anchors, comply with MPII regarding hole diameter and depth required to fully develop the tensile strength of anchor or reinforcing bar. 2. Use hammer drills to create holes. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents ANCHORAGE TO CONCRETE 03 15 19 - 8 3. Properly clean out holes in accordance with the associated ICC-ES report using non- metallic, fiber bristle brush and compressed air, or as otherwise necessary to remove all loose material from each hole prior to installing anchor in the presence of Special Inspector. 4. Adhesive Anchorages: a. Provide only where specifically indicated on the Drawings or when approved for use by Engineer. b. May be provided where subjected to vibration or at buried or submerged locations. c. Do not install for overhead applications or sustained tension loading conditions such as utility hangers. d. Install adhesive anchors in concrete aged not less than 21 days. E. Finishes: 1. Coat aluminum surfaces in contact with dissimilar materials in accordance with Section 09 96 00 – High-Performance Industrial Coatings. 2. Repair of damaged galvanized surfaces: a. Prepare damaged surfaces by abrasive blasting or power sanding. b. Repair damaged galvanized surfaces in accordance with ASTM A780. c. Apply galvanizing repair paint to not less than 6 mils dry film thickness in accordance with galvanizing repair material manufacturer's instructions and ASTM A780. F. Ensure that embedded items are protected from damage and are not filled in with concrete or related materials. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field Tests and Inspections: 1. Special Inspections: Comply with Section 01 45 33 IBC 2021 - Code-Required Special Inspections and Procedures. 2. Comply with Section 03 05 05 - Concrete Testing and Inspection. 3. Tests and inspections of anchorages shall comply with ACI 355.2 and/or ACI 355.4 as applicable. 4. Owner reserves the right to inspect and test completed anchorages at a minimum of to 100 percent of provided anchorages. B. Supplier’s services: 1. Post-installed anchor manufacturer’s representative shall demonstrate and observe the proper installation procedures for the post-installed anchors. C. Defective Work: 1. Anchorages that do not successfully pass required field tests and inspections or that are otherwise deemed defective by Engineer shall be remedied, in accordance with the Contract Documents, at no cost to Owner. 3.4 CLEANING A. After concrete has been placed, remove protection and clean all anchorage of all concrete, dirt, and other foreign matter. B. Provide surface acceptable to receive field applied paint coatings when specified in Specification Section 09 96 00. END OF SECTION Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents REINFORCEMENT 03 21 00 - 1 SECTION 03 21 00 REINFORCEMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Reinforcing bar requirements for concrete construction. B. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Section 03 05 05 - Concrete Testing and Inspection. 2. Section 03 15 19 - Anchorage to Concrete. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards: 1. American Concrete Institute (ACI): a. SP 66, ACI Detailing Manual. b. 117, Specification for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials. c. 315, Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete Structures. d. 318, Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete. 2. ASTM International (ASTM): a. A36, Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel. b. A276, Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes. c. A615, Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. d. A706, Standard Specification for Low-Alloy Steel Deformed and Plain Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. e. A970, Standard Specification for Headed Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. f. A1064, Standard Specification for Steel Wire and Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain and Deformed, for Concrete. 3. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI): a. Manual of Standard Practice. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. Product technical data including: a. Acknowledgement that products submitted meet requirements of standards referenced. b. Manufacturer's installation instructions. c. Mill certificates for all reinforcing. d. Manufacturer and type of proprietary reinforcing mechanical splices. 2. Qualifications of welding operators, welding processes and procedures. 3. Reinforcing number, sizes, spacing, dimensions, configurations, locations, mark numbers, lap splice lengths and locations, concrete cover and reinforcing supports. 4. Sufficient reinforcing details to permit installation of reinforcing. 5. Reinforcing details in accordance with ACI SP 66 and ACI 315. 6. Locations where proprietary reinforcing mechanical splices are required or proposed for use. 7. Shop Drawings shall be in sufficient detail to permit installation of reinforcing without reference to Contract Drawings. a. Shop Drawings shall not be prepared by reproducing the plans and details indicated on the Contract Drawings but shall consist of completely redrawn plans and details as necessary to indicate complete fabrication and installation of all reinforcing steel. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents REINFORCEMENT 03 21 00 - 2 b. Where multiple types of supports for reinforcing steel (such as chairs, runners, bolsters, and other types of supports) will be used in the Work, clearly indicate on the Shop Drawings the support types and materials of supports. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Support and store all reinforcing above ground. B. Ship to jobsite with attached plastic or metal tags with permanent mark numbers which match the Shop Drawing mark numbers. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURES A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Reinforcing adhesive anchors: a. See Specification Section 03 15 19. 2. Reinforcing mechanical splices: a. Lenton Rebar Splicing by Erico, Inc. b. Richmond dowel bar splicer system by Richmond Screw and Anchor Co., Inc. c. Bar-Grip Systems by Barsplice Products, Inc. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A615, grade 60, deformed. B. Reinforcing Bars to be Welded: ASTM A706, Grade 60, deformed. C. Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A1064. D. Smooth Dowel Bars: 1. Water containing structures: ASTM A276, Type 316. 2. All other locations: ASTM A36, with metal end cap to allow longitudinal movement equal to joint width plus 1 inch. E. Proprietary Reinforcing Mechanical Splices: To develop in tension and compression a minimum of 125% of the yield strength of the reinforcing bars being spliced. F. Headed Deformed Bars: 1. ASTM A970, Class. G. Reinforcing Adhesive Anchors: 1. See Specification 03 15 19. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Chairs, Runners, Bolsters, Spacers, Hangers, and Other Reinforcing Supports: 1. Metal fabrications with plastic-coated tips in contact with forms. a. Plastic coating meeting requirements of CRSI Manual of Standard Practice. 2. All plastic construction meeting the requirements of CRSI Manual of Standard Practice. a. 100% non-metallic, non-corrosive. b. Required for all walls and elevated construction exposed to liquid containing structures. B. Protective plastic caps at mechanical splices. 2.4 FABRICATION A. Tolerances: 1. Conforms to ACI 117, expect as modified herein. 2. Sheared lengths: +1 inches. 3. Overall dimensions of stirrups, ties and spirals: +1/2 inches. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents REINFORCEMENT 03 21 00 - 3 4. All other bends: +0 inches, -1/2 inches. B. Minimum diameter of bends measured on the inside of the reinforcing bar to be as indicated in ACI 318 Paragraph 7.2. C. Ship reinforcing to jobsite with attached plastic or metal tags. 1. Place on each tag the mark number of the reinforcing corresponding to the mark number indicated on the Shop Drawing. 2. Mark numbers on tags to be so placed that the numbers cannot be removed. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Tolerances: 1. Conform to ACI 117, except as modified herein. 2. Reinforcing placement: a. Clear distance to formed surfaces: +1/4 inches. b. Minimum spacing between bars: -1/4 inches. c. Top bars in slabs and beams: 1) Members 8 inches deep or less: +1/4 inches. 2) Members between 8 inches and 2 feet deep: -1/4 inches, +1/2 inches. 3) Members more than 2 feet deep: -1/4 inches, +1 inches. d. Crosswise of members: Spaced evenly within +1 inches. e. Lengthwise of members: +2 inches. 3. Minimum clear distances between reinforcing bars: a. Beams, walls and slabs: Distance equal to bar diameter or 1 inch, whichever is greater. b. Columns: Distance equal to 1-1/2 times the bar diameter or 1-1/2 inches, whichever is greater. c. Beam and slab reinforcing shall be threaded through the column vertical rebars without displacing the column vertical bars and still maintaining the clear distances required for the beam and slab reinforcing bars. B. Minimum concrete protective covering for reinforcement: As shown on Drawings. C. Unless indicated otherwise on Drawings, provide splice lengths for reinforcing as follows: 1. For reinforcing: Class B splice meeting the requirements of ACI 350. 2. For welded wire reinforcement: a. Splice lap length measured between outermost cross wires of each fabric sheet shall not be less than one spacing of cross wires plus 2 inches, nor less than 1.5 x development length nor less than 6 inches. b. Development length shall be as required for the yield strength of the welded wire reinforcement in accordance with ACI 350. 3. Provide splices of reinforcing not specifically indicated or specified subject to approval of Engineer. a. Mechanical proprietary splice connectors may only be used when approved or indicated on the Contract Drawings. D. Welding: 1. Welding reinforcing is not permitted. E. Placing Reinforcing: 1. Assure that reinforcement at time concrete is placed is free of mud, oil or other materials that may affect or reduce bond. 2. Reinforcement with rust, mill scale or a combination of both will be accepted as being satisfactory without cleaning or brushing provided dimensions and weights including heights of deformations on a cleaned sample is not less than required by applicable ASTM specification that governs for the reinforcing supplied. 3. Reinforcing support: Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents REINFORCEMENT 03 21 00 - 4 a. Uncoated reinforcing: 1) Support reinforcing and fasten together to prevent displacement by construction operations. a) Locate and support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. b) Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces. c) Reinforcement shown on the Contract Documents may not be repositioned for use a support for reinforcement. Additional drop bars may be provided for support of reinforcing, 2) Reinforcing supported on ground: a) Slab on grade and other members with only one mat of reinforcing: (1) Provide metal bar supports with bottom plate. (2) Do not use concrete blocks to support slab-on-grade reinforcing. b) All other members: Provide supporting concrete blocks or metal bar supports with bottom plate. 3) Reinforcing supported on formwork: a) Concrete surfaces in contact with or over process liquid: All-Plastic chairs, runners and bar supports. b) All other formed surfaces: (1) Provide plastic-coated metal chairs, runners, bolsters, spacers, hangers and other reinforcing support. (2) Only tips in contact with the forms need to be plastic coated. 4. Support reinforcing over cardboard void forms by means of concrete supports which will not puncture or damage the void forms during construction nor impair the strength of the concrete members in any way. 5. Where parallel horizontal reinforcement in beams is indicated to be placed in two or more layers, bars in the upper layers shall be placed directly above bars in the bottom layer with clear distance between layers to be 1 inch. a. Place spacer bars at 3 feet maximum centers to maintain the required 1 inch clear distance between layers. 6. Extend reinforcement to within 2 inches of concrete perimeter edges. a. If perimeter edge is formed by earth, extend reinforcement to within 3 inches of the edge. 7. To assure proper placement, furnish templates for all column vertical bars and dowels. 8. Do not bend reinforcement after embedding in hardened concrete unless approved by Engineer. a. Do not bend reinforcing by means of heat. 9. Do not tack weld reinforcing. 10. Embed reinforcing into hardened concrete utilizing adhesive anchor system specifically manufactured for such installation: a. See Specification Section 03 15 19. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Reinforcement Congestion and Interferences: 1. Notify Engineer whenever the specified clearances between bars cannot be met. 2. Do not place any concrete until the Engineer submits a solution to reinforcing congestion problem. 3. Reinforcing may be moved as necessary to avoid interference with other reinforcing steel, conduits, or embedded items. 4. If bars are moved more than one bar diameter, obtain Engineer's approval of resulting arrangement of reinforcing. 5. No cutting of reinforcing shall be done without written approval of Engineer. B. Special Inspection: 1. See Section 01 45 33 IBC 2021. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents REINFORCEMENT 03 21 00 - 5 2. See Section 03 05 05. END OF SECTION Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 This page intentionally left blank. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents CONCRETE MATERIALS AND PROPORTIONING 03 31 30 - 1 SECTION 03 31 30 CONCRETE MATERIALS AND PROPORTIONING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Requirements for concrete materials, including: a. Materials, including various types of grout, admixtures, cement, sand, aggregate, and other materials. b. Concrete strength and proportioning, including design mixes for: 1) Normal weight concrete. 2) Grout. B. Scope: 1. Unless shown or indicated otherwise in the Contract Documents, concrete Work shall comply with: a. ACI 301. b. Laws and Regulations, including applicable building code. 2. In this Section, material is apportioned into the following grouting types: a. Base plates for columns and equipment. b. As otherwise shown or indicated in the Contract Documents. 3. This Section addresses materials for concrete. Other Specifications sections present other requirements for complete concrete Work, including, but not necessarily limited to: a. Section 03 05 05 - Concrete Testing and Inspection. b. Section 03 11 13 - Formwork. c. Section 03 21 00 - Reinforcement. d. Section 03 31 31 - Concrete Mixing, Placing, Jointing, and Curing. e. Section 03 35 00 - Concrete Finishing and Repair of Surface Defects. f. Others as indicated in the Contract Documents. C. Related Requirements: Include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Section 03 05 05 - Concrete Testing and Inspection. 2. Section 03 15 19 - Anchorage to Concrete. 3. Section 03 21 00 - Reinforcement. 4. Section 03 31 31 - Concrete Mixing, Placing, Jointing, and Curing. 5. Section 03 41 33 - Precast and Prestressed Concrete. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Abbreviations and Terminology: 1. Abbreviations: The following abbreviations are used in this Section: a. “AAR” means deleterious “alkali-aggregate reaction”, resulting from either alkali-silica reactive (ASR) or alkali-carbonate reactive (ACR) aggregates. b. “SCM” means “supplementary cementitious materials”, with the meaning indicated below. c. “CLSM” means controlled low strength material in accordance with requirements of this Section. 2. Terminology: Terminology indicated below are not defined terms and are not indicated with initial capital letters, but when used in this Section have the meanings indicated below: a. “Supplementary cementitious materials” (SCM) means fly ash, silica fume, and GGBFS. b. “Water-bearing concrete” is concrete surface to be in contact (whether continuously or intermittently) with water, process liquid, or slurries during intended operation of the Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents CONCRETE MATERIALS AND PROPORTIONING 03 31 30 - 2 facility, including, but not limited to, concrete tanks, channels, wet wells, distribution chambers, and secondary containment structures. c. Independent Laboratory: 1) Testing shall be performed by an independent laboratory complying with requirements of the generally recognized accrediting entity for the jurisdiction where the Site is located. 2) Testing laboratory shall obtain all concrete samples and waterproofing product samples from the manufacturer of the associated product or material. B. Reference Standards: 1. American Concrete Institute (ACI): a. CT-13, Concrete Terminology. b. 117, Specification for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials. c. 211.1, Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight, and Mass Concrete. d. 212.3R, Chemical Admixtures for Concrete. e. 232.2R, Use of Fly Ash in Concrete. f. 301, Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings. 2. ASTM International (ASTM): a. C33, Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates. b. C39, Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens. c. C94/C94M, Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete. d. C125, Terminology Relating to Concrete and Concrete Aggregates. e. C150, Standard Specification for Portland Cement. f. C157, Standard Test Method for Length Change of Hardened Hydraulic-Cement, Mortar, and Concrete. g. C192, Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Laboratory. h. C260, Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete. i. C494, Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete. j. C595, Standard Specification for Blended Hydraulic Cements. k. C618, Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use in Concrete. l. C1107, Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout (Non- shrink). m. C1116, Standard Specification for Fiber-Reinforced Concrete. n. C1399, Standard Test Method for Obtaining Average Residual-Strength of Fiber- Reinforced Concrete. o. C1609, Standard Test Method for Flexural Performance of Fiber-Reinforced Concrete (Using Beam With Third-Point Loading). p. C1602, Standard Specification for Mixing Water Used in the Production of Hydraulic Cement Concrete. q. C1778, Standard Guide for Reducing Risk of Deleterious Alkali-Aggregate Reaction in Concrete. 3. Steel Deck Institute (SDI): a. Design Manual for Composite Decks, Form Decks and Roof Decks. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Shop Drawings: a. Schedule (table) of concrete materials proposed, listed by each specified grouping of concrete Work, including, but not limited to, aggregates, sand, cement (by type), SCM, admixtures, synthetic fibers, grouts, and other materials. For each separate material and product, indicate manufacturer and type of material. b. Mix Designs: Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents CONCRETE MATERIALS AND PROPORTIONING 03 31 30 - 3 1) Proposed mix design for each concrete grouping required. For each, indicate concrete designation (type) indicated in the Contract Documents, proposed materials and proportioning, and intended special uses, such as concrete intended for placement in cold weather or warm weather, concrete to be placed by pumping, concrete intended for specific locations in the Work, and others. 2) Engineer’s approval of mix design Shop Drawing is only for limited purposes indicated in the Contract Documents, including the General Conditions, and in no way reduces or mitigates Contractor’s responsibility for construction means, methods, techniques, procedures, and sequences. 2. Product Data: a. Written affidavit stating materials proposed comply with requirements of reference standards indicated in this Section and, where applicable, compliance with state department of transportation standard specifications for highway and bridge construction in the jurisdiction of the Site. Clearly indicate specific reference standards and department of transportation standard specifications item designation applicable to each specific material. b. For aggregate and sand, indicate source (quarry) and gradation of materials proposed for use. Indicate the specific concrete mix design(s) proposed for each. c. For cement and SCM, indicate material source and submit manufacturer’s technical data (except safety data sheets). d. For each proposed admixture and type of grout material (including non-shrink grouts, epoxy grout, and grout cure/seal compound), submit manufacturer’s published technical data (except safety data sheets). B. Informational Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Certifications: Submit concurrent with, but separate from, associated Shop Drawings and product data Submittals: a. Certification of standard deviation, in units of pounds per square inch, for ready mix plant furnishing concrete. b. SCM: Certification that SCM complies with quality requirements of this Section, and SCM Supplier’s certified test reports of SCM delivered to concrete Supplier. c. ASTM C33: Certification that class of coarse aggregate complies with ASTM C33 for type and location of concrete Work. d. Aggregate: 1) Certification of aggregate gradation. 2) Certification of coarse aggregate impurities relative to alkali-aggregate reactivity in accordance with ASTM C1778. e. Certification of shrinkage test results. 2. Test Reports: a. Cement and SCM mill certificates for all materials to be supplied. b. Test results for AAR impurities of coarse aggregates within proposed mixes, in accordance with ASTM standards cited in this Section. 3. Supplier’s Instructions: Submit concurrent with, but separate from, associated product data Submittals: a. Manufacturer’s written instructions on proper storage, handling, mixing, and use of materials furnished. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Storage of Materials: 1. Admixtures: a. Store admixtures in manner that avoids contamination, evaporation, and damage. b. For admixtures used in form of suspensions or non-stable solutions, perform agitating as recommended by manufacturer to ensure uniform distribution of ingredients. c. Protect liquid admixtures from freezing and temperature changes that adversely affect admixture characteristics and performance. 2. Cement and SCM: Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents CONCRETE MATERIALS AND PROPORTIONING 03 31 30 - 4 a. Store cement and SCM in containers in weathertight space that prevent contamination with moisture and other contaminants. 3. Aggregates: a. Store and access aggregates in manner avoiding excessive segregation and preventing contamination with other materials and other sizes of like aggregate. b. Do not use frozen or partially frozen aggregate. 4. Sand: Allow natural sand to drain until sand has relatively uniform moisture content, prior to use. 5. If stockpiled materials contact the ground, unless such materials are stored on a clean, firm, reasonably impervious surface such as concrete or asphalt paving, do not use in the concrete Work bottom six inches of stockpiled materials. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Cement: 1. Provide ASTM C150 ASTM C595, Type I/II cement, unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents. 2. Cement type provided shall match cement type used in associated approved mix design. B. SCM: 1. Fly Ash: a. ASTM C618, Class F. b. Non-staining. c. Appropriate for providing hardened concrete of uniform, light-gray color. d. Compatible with all other concrete ingredients. Fly ash shall have no deleterious effect on hardened concrete Work. e. Produced by source approved, by state department of transportation in the same jurisdiction as the Site, for use in concrete for highway bridges. f. Evaluate and use in accordance with ACI 232.2R. 2. SCM type used shall match SCM type used in associated approved mix design. C. Admixtures: 1. Admixtures – General: a. Provide admixtures of same type, manufacturer and quantity as used in establishing required concrete proportions in mix design approved by Engineer. b. Provide admixtures certified by manufacturers as compatible with other admixtures proposed. 2. Air Entraining Admixtures: Comply with ASTM C260. 3. Water Reducing Admixtures: a. Provide water-reducing admixtures in all concrete mixes to provide and maintain required water-to-cement ratio without additional cement. b. Water Reducing, Retarding and Accelerating: Comply with ASTM C494 Types A through E, and ACI 212.3R. c. High Range Water Reducers (Superplasticizers): 1) Required for pumped concrete. 2) Comply with ASTM C494 Types F and G. 4. Hydration Stabilizer: a. Comply with ASTM C494 Type D. 5. Admixture Chlorides – General: a. Provide chloride-free admixtures. b. Do not use calcium chloride. D. Crystalline Cementitious Waterproofing: 1. Products and Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following are acceptable. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents CONCRETE MATERIALS AND PROPORTIONING 03 31 30 - 5 a. Xypex Chemical Corporation, C-500. b. Kryton International Inc, Krystol Internal Membrane (KIM). c. Euclid Chemical Company, Eucon Vandex AM-10. d. Or equal. 2. Description: Factory blended dry powder compound consisting of Portland cement, treated aggregate, and active chemicals. 3. Dosage rate shall be not less than 2 percent by weight of cementitious materials or additional as necessary to comply with the performance requirements indicated below. 4. Required Locations: Provide crystalline cementitious waterproofing admixture in concrete as follows: all water bearing concrete. 5. Performance Criteria: a. Mix waterproofing material in proportions recommended by manufacturer. b. Submit to Engineer, together with product data Submittal, results of tests (previously performed for manufacturer) by independent third-party testing entity. c. Crystalline cementitious waterproofing material, identical to that proposed for use in the Work, shall have been tested in accordance with the following: 1) DIN 1048/ EN 12390, Water Impermeability of Concrete: a) Prepare and test untreated samples (“control samples”) and treated samples, all of the same concrete mix design. Test not less than three control samples and three treated samples. b) Each sample shall be not less than 120 mm thick. c) Subject samples to test pressure of water not less than design hydrostatic pressure to which concrete will be subject after Substantial Completion, for test duration of not less than 72 hours. However, test duration and pressure shall be sufficient for control samples to have not less than 100 mm of water penetration (average for all control samples tested). d) Treated samples shall demonstrate not less than 90 percent reduction in depth of water penetration (average of all treated samples tested compared with average of all untreated control samples tested). 2) Permeability: Supplier shall retain independent testing entity to perform permeability testing in accordance with USCOE CRD-C48 - Mod Permeability of Concrete. a) Test samples of concrete, of identical mix design, using mix design similar to that used for the Work. Test untreated samples (“control samples”) and samples treated with the admixture. b) Samples shall each be not greater than two inches thick. c) Subject samples to water at test pressure of 150 psi. d) When compared with control samples, the treated samples shall exhibit no measurable leakage. Control samples shall exhibit full saturation and measurable leakage. E. Macro Synthetic Fibers: 1. Manufacturers and Products: Subject to compliance with the Contract documents, the following are acceptable: a. Master Builders Solutions, MasterFiber MAC Series. b. GCP Applied Technologies, Strux 90/40. c. Euclid Chemical Company, Tuf-Strand SF. d. Or equal. 2. Comply with ASTM C1116. 3. Provide dosage to obtain average residual strength (at net deflection of L/150) of not less than 170 psi, in accordance with ASTM C1609 and ASTM C1399. F. Micro Synthetic Fibers: 1. Manufacturers and Products: Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following are acceptable: a. Master Builders Solutions, MasterFiber F or M Series. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents CONCRETE MATERIALS AND PROPORTIONING 03 31 30 - 6 b. Euclid Chemical Company, Fiberstrand. c. GPC Applied Technologies, Gilco Fibers. d. Or equal. 2. Comply with ASTM C1116. 3. Provide average residual strength (at net deflection of L/150) of not greater than: 170 psi, in accordance with ASTM C1609. G. Water: 1. Potable in accordance with Laws and Regulations. 2. Clean and free from deleterious substances. 3. Free of oils, acids, and organic matter. Comply with ASTM C1602. H. Aggregates for Normal Weight Concrete: 1. Comply with ASTM C33. 2. Fine aggregates and coarse aggregates are separate ingredients. 3. Provide aggregates acceptable for bridge construction in accordance with the third-party standard specifications indicated below in this provision. 4. Blended aggregates are unacceptable 5. Coarse Aggregate: a. Material shall be well-graded, washed aggregate, free of organic material. b. Gradation: In accordance with Table 03 31 30-A in this section’s “Mixes” Article. c. Mass Concrete: 1) Specific Gravity not less than 2.57. 2) Limestone or granite. 6. Alkali-Reactive Aggregates: a. Aggregates that may be deleteriously reactive, when combined with alkalis in cement, are unacceptable. b. Evaluate proposed aggregates for potential deleterious alkali-aggregate reaction in concrete in accordance with ASTM C1778. 1) Submit to Engineer results of source quality control testing for alkali-aggregate reactivity presenting the following: a) Analysis and classification of aggregates in accordance with ASTM C1778 b) Results of source quality control analysis of aggregates. c) Include the flow from Figure 1 of ASTM C 1778 indicating test results sequence. d) Field performance history alone shall not be submitted to document acceptable aggregate performance. e) Size and exposure condition of the Work in Table 2 of ASTM C 1778: humid, buried, or immersed. f) Structure class for use in Table 3 of ASTM C1778: Class SC3. I. Maximum total water-soluble chloride ion content for concrete mix including all ingredients measured as weight percent of cement in accordance with ASTM C1218: 1. Prestressed concrete: 0.06. 2. All other concrete: 0.10. J. Sand Cement Grout (termed “Grout” on the Drawings): 1. Description: Typical use is for filling keyways in precast construction, and as otherwise required by the Contract Documents. 2. Performance Criteria: a. Minimum 28 day compressive strength: b. 3,000 PSI. c. Strength shall be not less than strength of adjacent concrete to which grout is applied. 3. Materials: a. Provide sand cement grout as approximately three parts sand to one part Portland cement, 4.5 percent to 7.5 percent entrained air and water to provide slump allowing grout to completely fill required spaces and surround adjacent reinforcing. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents CONCRETE MATERIALS AND PROPORTIONING 03 31 30 - 7 b. Provide sand in accordance with requirements for fine aggregate for concrete. K. Non-shrink Grout: 1. Manufacturers and Products: Subject to compliance with the contract Documents, the following are acceptable: a. Master Builders Solutions, Masterflow, 713. b. Euclid Chemical Company, NS Grout. c. Sika, Sika Grout 212. d. Or equal. 2. Description: a. This provision requires non-shrink, non-metallic grout. Unless otherwise shown or indicated in the Contract Documents, references to “non-shrink grout” refer to non- shrink, non-metallic grout required by this provision. 3. Performance Criteria: a. Non-shrink grout shall produce a positive but controlled expansion. b. Mass expansion shall not be created by gas liberation or by other means. c. Minimum 28-day Compressive Strength: 7,000 PSI. 4. Material: a. Provide material that is non-shrink, non-metallic, non-corrosive, and non-staining. b. Comply with ASTM C1107, Grade B. c. Premixed with water only. Add water in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions. L. Epoxy Grout: 1. Manufacturers and Products: Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following are acceptable: a. Master Builders Solutions, Masterflow 648. b. Five Star Products, DP Five Start Epoxy Grout. c. Euclid Chemical Company, E3 Flowable. d. Sika, Sikadur 42, Grout Pak. e. Or equal. f. One manufacturer shall furnish both aggregate and adhesive. 2. Description: a. Three-component epoxy resin system, comprised of two liquid epoxy components and one inert aggregate filler component. b. Indication of locations where epoxy grout is required are indicated in the grout schedule in Section 03 31 31 - Concrete Mixing, Placing, Jointing, and Curing. c. Furnish each component in separate package for mixing at the Site. 3. Performance Criteria: a. Minimum 28-day Compressive Strength: 13,000 psi. 4. Materials: a. Aggregate shall be compatible with adhesive. 2.2 MIXES A. Mixes - General: 1. Provide concrete capable of: (a) being placed without segregation of aggregate from other components, and (b) developing all properties necessary and required. 2. Provide ready-mix concrete in accordance with ASTM C94/C94M. 3. Batching and other tolerances shall be in accordance with ACI 117. 4. All concrete shall be normal weight concrete, unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents. Normal weight concrete shall weigh approximately 145 to 150 pounds per cubic foot (without reinforcing steel), measured 28 days after placing. B. Concrete Mixes: 1. Mix design requirements are indicated in this Section’s Table 03 31 30-A, below. C. Air Entrainment: Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents CONCRETE MATERIALS AND PROPORTIONING 03 31 30 - 8 1. Provide air entrainment in concrete providing total air content, expressed as percent by volume, in accordance with this Section’s Table 03 31 30-A, below. 2. Adjust dosage rate as necessary to compensate for shrinkage reducing admixtures and concrete placing method. D. Slump: 1. Slump – General: a. Measure slump at point of discharge of wet concrete into final location. b. Compensate for slump loss due to placing method. c. Concrete with slump less than minimum required may be used provided such concrete can be properly placed and consolidated. d. Slump of Concrete to be Placed by Pumping: 1) Provide water or water-reducing admixture at ready-mix plant for concrete to be placed by pumping, to allow for slump loss due to pumping. 2) Provide additional water sufficient only so that slump of concrete at discharge end of pump hose does not exceed: (a) maximum allowable slump indicated, and (b) maximum specified water-to-cement ratio. e. Slump Adjustment at the Site: 1) Slump may be adjusted at the Site by providing water reducers. 2) Dosing shall be performed by experienced quality control technician employed by concrete Supplier. Concrete mixing thereafter shall be directed by the same technician. f. Slump tolerances shall comply with ACI 117. 2. Concrete for Walls and Columns: a. 8 inches maximum; 4 inches minimum. b. Slump shall be obtained by use of mid-range or high-range water reducer complying with ASTM C494. 3. All Other Members: a. Concrete using water reducer in accordance with ASTM C494: 8 inches maximum; 4 inches minimum. b. Concrete without water reducer in accordance with ASTM C494: 5 inches maximum, one inch minimum. E. Proportioning: 1. Proportioning - General: a. Proportion components of concrete to provide mixture that can be placed: (a) into corners and angles of forms, and around reinforcing, by placing and consolidation methods employed, (b) without component materials becoming segregated, and (c) without excessive, free water to collecting on concrete surface or other surfaces. b. Proportion component elements of concrete to provide proper concrete Work, including concrete durability, strength, and other necessary and required properties. 2. Normal Weight Concrete: a. Normal weight concrete target cementitious materials contents and maximum water to- cementitious ratios shall be in accordance with this Section’s Table 03 31 30-A, below. b. Target cementitious materials contents indicated in the Contract Documents are intended to provide crack-free, durable, finished concrete Work, rather than concrete Work of excessive strength. 3. SCM: a. SCM – General: 1) Based on results of AAR testing by Supplier (performed in accordance with ASTM C1778) and alkali content of cement, SCM content (in accordance with this Section) may be adjusted in lieu of the indicated percentages to reduce risk associated with AAR. 2) Use only one type of SCM in a given mix unless expressly required or approved by Engineer. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents CONCRETE MATERIALS AND PROPORTIONING 03 31 30 - 9 3) Water-to-cementitious (i.e, total of SCM plus cement) ratio shall not exceed required maximum water-to-cement ratio indicated in this Section. b. Fly Ash: 1) For cast-in-place concrete only, maximum of 25 percent by weight of Portland cement content, per cubic yard, may be fly ash, at rate of one pound fly ash for one pound cement. 2) Do not use fly ash in concrete required in Section 03 41 33 - Precast and Prestressed Concrete, and. 4. Water-Reducing, Water-Retarding, and Water-Accelerating Admixtures: a. Provide in accordance with admixture manufacturer’s written instructions. b. Add to mix at ready-mix plant. c. Use hydration stabilizer admixture, or AAR-inhibiting admixture, in concrete, as necessary and required, for placing and workability. 1) Water reducers are required to maintain required maximum water-to-cement ratios. 5. High Range Water Reducers (Superplasticizers): a. Superplasticizers are required in: 1) Concrete to be pumped, except slabs-on-grade and mats. 2) Concrete for water-bearing structures. 3) Other concrete Work at Contractor’s option. b. Maximum concrete slump, before addition of admixture, shall be three inches. Maximum slump after addition of superplasticizer admixture shall be eight inches. c. Comply with Section 03 31 31 - Concrete Mixing, Placing, Jointing, and Curing, relative to superplasticizers. 6. Normal Weight Concrete Mix Proportioning: a. Method 1: 1) Use Method 1 when combination of concrete component materials and mixes will be evaluated and selected via trial-and-error. 2) Provide mixes with suitable proportions and properties in accordance with ACI 211.1, using not less than three different water-to-cementitious ratios providing a range of concrete compressive strengths, including required average compressive strength. 3) Trial mixes shall have slump within 0.75 inches of maximum allowed in the Contract Documents. For air-entrained concrete, air content of trial batches shall be within 0.5 percent of air entrainment required by the Contract Documents. 4) For each water-to-cementitious ratio: a) Provide not less than three trial compressive strength tests for concrete test age required, and cure in accordance with ASTM C192. b) Cylinder Size: In accordance with ASTM C31. c) Test for compressive strength at 28 days, in accordance with ASTM C39. (1) Quantity of cylinders shall comply with one of the following trial strength test: (a) 6-inch diameter cylinders: Two. (b) 4-inch diameter cylinders: Three. 5) From results of such required tests, plot curve showing relationship between water- to-cementitious ratio and compressive strength. 6) Based on required curve, select water-to-cementitious ratio for the Work, that will provide concrete of required average compressive strength. 7) Provide cementitious content and mixture proportions so maximum water cement ratio is not exceeded when slump is equal to maximum allowed in the Contract Documents. 8) Required average compressive strength is indicated below in this Section. b. Method 2: 1) In lieu of trial mixes required by Method 1, field test results from prior projects, for concrete made using identical or substantively identical concrete component materials and proportioning, may be used by concrete supplier in determining Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents CONCRETE MATERIALS AND PROPORTIONING 03 31 30 - 10 proposed mix proportions, provided the test results are within a year of project start date. 2) Use of proposed concrete mix proportions based on field test results from prior projects are subject to approval by Engineer. Engineer’s decision will be based on information in such Submittals and demonstrated ability, of such concrete successfully provided on such prior projects, to provide required average compressive strength. 3) Requirements for Submittals of Concrete Test Results from Prior Projects: a) Submittals of field test results from prior projects shall clearly indicate all materials, proportions, and conditions, and clearly indicate where such matters are similar to those required for the concrete Work on the Project. b) Changes in the materials, proportions, and conditions within submitted test results from prior projects shall have been not more restricted than those for the subject, proposed concrete mix. c) Field test reports from prior projects shall be in accordance with ACI 318, Paragraph 5.3. 4) Concrete proportions for the concrete Work may be determined from test results of prior projects via interpolation (by Contractor and concrete Supplier) between compressive strengths and proportions of two or more test results from prior projects, each in accordance with requirements of the Contract Documents for this Project. 7. Required average compressive strength shall exceed required 28-day compressive strength by the extent determined in accordance with ACI 318, Chapter 5 using the standard deviation of concrete ready-mix plant proposed for the Work as described in ACI 318, Chapter 5. F. Controlled Low-Strength Material (CLSM): 1. Provide mixture of cement, SCM, fine sand, water, and air, with consistency allowing flow under a very low pressure (low head). 2. Approximate quantities of each component per cubic yard of mixed material: a. Cement (Type I or Type II): 50 pounds. b. SCM: 200 pounds. c. Fine Sand: 2,700 pounds. d. Water (approximate): 420 pounds. e. Air Content (approximate): 10 percent. 3. Adjust actual quantities to provide yield of one cubic yard with materials used. 4. Approximate compressive strength shall be 85 to 175 psi. 5. Sand Gradation: Fine sand shall be evenly graded material with not less than 95 percent passing No. 4 sieve and not more than five percent passing No. 200 sieve. G. Allowable Shrinkage: 1. Provide in accordance with Table 03 31 30-A of this Section, tested in accordance with ASTM C157 at 28 days. 2. Continue testing for 64 weeks in accordance with ASTM C157 and submit results to Engineer as Informational Submittals. 3. Perform for concrete Work for all water bearing or basement structures unless expressly indicated otherwise in the Contract Documents. TABLE 03 31 30-A Type of Concrete 28-day Compressive Strength Max. W/C Ratio Target Total Cement (pounds) SCM ASTM C33 Size No. Air Content (%) Allowable Shrinkage Limit Normal weight precast concrete 5000 PSI 0.42 611 57 4.5 to 7.5 NA Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents CONCRETE MATERIALS AND PROPORTIONING 03 31 30 - 11 Normal weight all other concrete 4000 PSI 0.45 564 Note 1 57 4.5 to 7.5 0.048 percent Table 03 31 30-A Notes: 1. If fly ash is proposed for use, the weight of fly ash plus weight of Portland cement shall be used to comply with total target cement content. 2. Unless otherwise indicated, larger aggregate (No. 467) is required for concrete slabs or foundations on grade; optional elsewhere. 3. SCM is required for all water bearing concrete. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field Testing and Inspections: 1. Code-Required Tests and Special Inspections: a. Section 01 45 33 IBC 2021 - Code-Required Special Inspections and Procedures, indicates testing scope for code-required testing and special inspections by testing entity retained by Owner or entity for whom Owner is responsible. b. Section 03 05 05 - Concrete Testing and Inspection, indicates required testing for concrete Work. 2. Contractor-Performed Field Testing and Inspections: a. Where concrete testing and inspection is required by the Contract Documents and is not part of the code-required tests and special inspections by Owner or other entity for whom Owner is responsible, such tests and inspections shall be by Contractor. b. Perform concrete testing and inspections in accordance with Section 03 05 05 - Concrete Testing and Inspection. c. Aggregates and Other Stockpiled Materials: To ensure stockpiles at the concrete mixing location are not contaminated and otherwise comply with Contract requirements, perform tests on such materials at the concrete ready-mix plant. d. Perform strength test on all concrete to which water or superplasticizer, above the amount stated in concrete mix design Submittal approved by Engineer, has been added. 1) Perform sampling after water or superplasticizer has been added and additional mixing has been performed. END OF SECTION Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 This page intentionally left blank. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents CONCRETE MIXING, PLACING, JOINTING, AND CURING 03 31 31 - 1 SECTION 03 31 31 CONCRETE MIXING, PLACING, JOINTING, AND CURING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Mixing, placing, jointing, and curing of concrete construction. B. Related Requirements: Include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Section 03 05 05 - Concrete Testing and Inspection. 2. Section 03 11 13 - Formwork. 3. Section 03 21 00 - Reinforcement. 4. Section 03 31 30 - Concrete, Materials and Proportioning. 5. Section 03 35 00 - Concrete Finishing and Repair of Surface Defects. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Terminology: 1. Terminology: Terminology indicated below are not defined terms and are not indicated with initial capital letters, but when used in this Section have the meanings indicated below: a. Unless obviously meant or intended otherwise, certain words and terms used in this Section have meanings indicated in ACI CT-13. b. “Water-bearing concrete” means concrete surface to be in contact (whether continuously or intermittently) with water, process liquid, or slurries during intended operation of the facility, including, but not limited to, concrete tanks, channels, wet wells, distribution chambers, and secondary containment structures. B. Reference Standards: Standards referenced in this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, the following: 1. American Concrete Institute (ACI): a. CT-13, Concrete Terminology. b. 117, Specification for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials. c. 304R, Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and Placing Concrete. d. 304.2R, Placing Concrete by Pumping Methods. e. 305R, Guide to Hot Weather Concreting. f. 305.1, Specification for Hot Weather Concreting. g. 306R, Guide to Cold Weather Concreting. h. 306.1, Standard Specification for Cold Weather Concreting. i. 308.1, Specification for Curing Concrete. j. 309R, Guide for Consolidation of Concrete. k. 318, Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary. l. 360R, Guide to Design of Slabs-on-Ground. 2. ASTM International (ASTM): a. C94/C94M, Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete. b. C309, Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete. c. C1315, Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds Having Special Properties for Curing and Sealing Concrete. d. D994, Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete (Bituminous Type). e. D1056, Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials-Sponge or Expanded Rubber. f. D1751, Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous Types). Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents CONCRETE MIXING, PLACING, JOINTING, AND CURING 03 31 31 - 2 3. National Ready Mixed Concrete Association (NRMCA): a. Checklist for Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities. 4. United States Army Corps of Engineers (USACE): a. CRD-C572, Specifications for Polyvinylchloride Waterstop. 1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: 1. Coordinate concrete placement Work with other Work, and work of other contractors (if any), that must be installed prior to placement of concrete. 2. Inform other contractors, if any, affected by the concrete Work of intended date(s) of placement of concrete. Provide sufficient advance notice to allow other contractors to perform their work that is to be completed prior to placing of concrete. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. Concrete Supplier: a. Ready-mix concrete batch plant shall be certified by NRMCA. b. Ready mix plant shall comply with NRMCA Checklist for Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Shop Drawings: a. Scaled (minimum 1/8 inch per foot) drawings showing proposed locations of construction joints, control joints, expansion joints (as applicable) and joint profile dimensions for each joint type. b. Drawing indicating location, size and type of prefabricated waterstop joints. 2. Product Data including: a. Manufacturers and types: 1) Joint fillers. 2) Curing agents. 3) Construction joint bonding adhesive. 4) Prefabricated waterstops. b. Acknowledgement that products submitted meet requirements of standards referenced. 3. Samples: a. Sample of each type of prefabricated waterstop proposed for the Work, when requested by Engineer. 4. Monitoring Procedures: B. Informational Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Delivery Tickets: a. Copies of concrete delivery tickets. 2. Supplier Instructions: a. Procedure for adding high-range water reducer at the Site. b. Instructions for handling and installing products approved by Engineer. 3. Field Quality Control Submittals: a. Results of tests, inspections, and other quality control activities required by the Contract Documents, including Section 03 05 05 - Concrete Testing and Inspections, and this Section’s “Field Quality Control” Article performed at the Site. 4. Supplier Site Visit Reports: a. Report of each visit to the Site by Supplier, summarizing purpose of visit, activities while onsite, problems encountered, advice given to Contractor or Subcontractor, and actions taken. 5. Special Procedure Submittals: a. Description of proposed curing methods. 6. Qualifications: Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents CONCRETE MIXING, PLACING, JOINTING, AND CURING 03 31 31 - 3 a. Ready-mix plant certification, in accordance with this Section’s “Quality Assurance” Article. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Concrete Delivery: 1. Prepare a delivery ticket for each load of ready mixed concrete. 2. Truck operator shall hand ticket to Contractor at the time of delivery. 3. Ticket to show: a. Mix identification. b. Quantity delivered. c. Quantity of material in each batch. d. Outdoor temperature in the shade at location of concrete placement. e. Time at which cement was added. f. Time of delivery. g. Time of discharge. h. Quantity of water that may be added at the site without exceeding the specified water- cement ratio. i. Quantity of any water added at the Site. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Adjust concrete mix design when material characteristics, job conditions, weather, strength test results or other circumstances warrant. 1. Do not use revised concrete mixes until submitted to and approved by Engineer. 1.8 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Do not begin concrete production until proposed concrete mix design has been approved by Engineer. 1. Engineer’s approval of concrete mix design does not relieve Contractor of responsibility to provide concrete that meets the requirements of the Contract Documents. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCTS A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the manufacturers listed in this article are acceptable. B. Neoprene Expansion Joint Fillers: 1. Acceptable manufacturers: a. Permaglaze. b. Rubatex. c. Williams Products. d. Or equal. 2. Materials: a. Closed cell neoprene. b. ASTM D1056, Type 2, Class A or C. c. Grade: Compression deflection as required to limit deflection to 25 percent of joint thickness under pressure from concrete pour height. C. Asphalt Expansion Joint Fillers: 1. Acceptable manufacturers: a. W.R Meadows. b. J and P Petroleum Products. c. Or equal. 2. Materials: ASTM D994. D. Fiber Expansion Joint Fillers: Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents CONCRETE MIXING, PLACING, JOINTING, AND CURING 03 31 31 - 4 1. Materials: ASTM D1751. E. Waterstops, PVC Type: 1. Acceptable manufacturers: a. Sika Greenstreak Plastic Products. b. W.R Meadows. c. Vinylex Corporation. d. Bometals, Inc. e. Or equal. 2. Materials: a. Virgin polyvinyl chloride compound not containing scrap or reclaimed materials or pigment. b. Cast-in-place type: USACE CRD-572. 3. Approved profiles as listed. a. Construction joints: 1) Ribbed: 6 inches wide by 3/8 inch. 2) Sika Greenstreak Plastic Products Style #679, or equal. b. Control joints: 1) 6-inch wide by 3/8 inch thick with ribs and center bulb. 2) Sika Greenstreak Plastic Products Style #705, or equal. c. Expansion joint: 1) 9 inches wide by 3/8 inch thick center bulb two inch outside diameter. 2) Sika Greenstreak Plastic Products Style #739, or equal. d. 4. Provide factory-made waterstop fabrications at all changes in direction, intersections and transitions, leaving only straight butt splices for the field. Butt welds to be a minimum six inches clear of the intersection. 5. Factory prepunched (less than 1.5 feet on centers, each edge, staggered) for wire supports. a. Provide hog rings or grommets at all punched holes along the length of the waterstop. 6. See Drawings for application and other requirements. F. Waterstops, Preformed Strip Type: 1. Acceptable manufacturers: a. Sika Greenstreak Plastics, Inc. (Hydrotite). b. Adeka Ultra Seal USA (MC-2010MN). c. DeNeef (Swellseal 2010). d. Or equal. e. 2. Hydrophilic, non-bentonite composition. 3. Manufactured solely for the purpose of preventing water from traveling through construction joints. 4. Volumetric expansion limited to three times maximum. 5. See the Drawings for locations, applications, and other requirements. G. Water Swelling Sealant: 1. Required adhesive for use with strip-type waterstop. 2. Compatible with strip-type waterstop. 3. Single component, gun applied. 4. Moisture cured. 5. Minimum 70 percent volumetric expansion swelling capability. a. H. Curing Materials shall comply with one or more of the following: 1. Absorbent Covers. 2. Moisture Retaining Covers. 3. Dissipating curing compound: a. Fugitive dye, waterborne, membrane-forming. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents CONCRETE MIXING, PLACING, JOINTING, AND CURING 03 31 31 - 5 b. ASTM C309, Type 1D, Class A or B, shall be composed of hydrocarbon resins, and dissipating agents that begin to break down upon exposure to UV light, and traffic, approximately four to six weeks after applications, providing a film that is removable with standard degreasing agents, and mechanized scrubbing actions to not impair the later addition and performance of applied finishes. c. Products and Manufacturers: 1) Dayton Superior Corporation; Day Chem Rez Cure (J-11-WD). 2) Euclid Chemical Company; Kurez DR VOX. 3) L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; L&M Cure R. 4) Or equal. 4. Clear, water or solvent-borne, membrane-forming curing and sealing compound: a. ASTM C1315, Type 1, Class A. b. Moisture loss shall be not more than 0.40 kilograms per square meter when applied at 300 square feet per gallon. c. Manufacturer's certification is required. d. Subject to Project requirements, provide one of the following products: 1) Solvent-based: a) Euclid Chemical Company; Super Diamond Clear, Luster Seal 300 (exterior), Super Rez-Seal (interior). b) L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; Lumiseal Plus. c) W.R. Meadows, Inc.; CS-309/30. d) Or equal. 2) Water-based: a) Euclid Chemical Company; Super Diamond Clear VOX. b) L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; Lumiseal WB Plus. c) W.R. Meadows, Inc.; Vocomp-30. d) Or equal. I. Sand cement grout, non-shrink grout and epoxy grout: Comply with Section 03 31 30 - Concrete Materials and Proportioning. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Installing the Work constitutes Contractor’s approval of underlying work, substrates, and field conditions prevailing at the time of the Work. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Preparation – General: 1. Materials and construction shall comply with the tolerances as specified in ACI 117. 2. Complete formwork. a. Perform formwork in accordance with Section 03 11 13 - Formwork. 3. Remove earth, snow, ice, water, foreign matter, and other extraneous materials from areas that will receive concrete. 4. Secure reinforcement in place. a. Provide reinforcing in accordance with Section 03 21 00 - Reinforcement. 5. Provide expansion joint material, anchors and other embedded items. 6. Do not place concrete during rain, sleet, snow, or other adverse ambient or environmental conditions unless adequate protection is provided by Contractor and such placement is acceptable to Engineer. a. Provide sufficient quantity of competent, experienced workers with due regard for effects of concrete temperature and atmospheric conditions on rate of hardening of concrete as required to obtain good surfaces and avoid unplanned cold joints. b. Do not allow precipitation or storm water runoff to increase mixing water nor to damage surface finish. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents CONCRETE MIXING, PLACING, JOINTING, AND CURING 03 31 31 - 6 7. Remove hardened concrete and foreign materials from inner surfaces of conveying equipment and formwork. 8. Provide slabs and beams of minimum indicated required depth when sloping structural foundation base slabs and elevated slabs to drains. a. For floor slabs on grade, slope top of subgrade to provide slab of required uniform thickness. B. Edge Forms and Screeds: 1. Set accurately to produce designated elevations and contours of finished surface. 2. Sufficiently strong to support vibrating screeds or roller pipe screeds, if required. 3. Use strike off templates, or acceptable vibrating type screeds, to align concrete surfaces to contours of screed strips. 3.3 CONCRETE MIXING A. Concrete Mixing - General: 1. Provide concrete materials from one ready-mix batch plant qualified in accordance with this Section’s “Quality Assurance” Article. 2. Batch, mix, and transport in accordance with ASTM C94/C94M. B. Control of Admixtures: 1. Control at ready-mix plant: a. Admixtures shall be introduced at the ready-mix plant in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. b. Charge admixtures into mixer as solutions. 1) Measure by means of an appropriate mechanical dispensing device. 2) Liquid considered a part of mixing water. 3) Admixtures that cannot be added in solution may be weighed or measured by volume if so recommended by manufacturer. c. Add separately, when two or more admixtures are used in concrete, to avoid possible interaction that might interfere with efficiency of either admixture, or adversely affect concrete. d. Complete performing addition of retarding admixtures within one minute after addition of water to cement has been completed, or prior to beginning of last three quarters of required mixing, whichever occurs first. 2. Control of Admixtures at the Site: a. Additional quantities of admixtures (with the exception of retarders) may be added at the Site provided: 1) Addition of admixtures shall be under the supervision of the ready-mix plant’s quality control representative. 2) Addition of each admixture shall be documented on the delivery ticket. 3) Provide additional mixing in accordance with ASTM C94. C. Tempering and Control of Mixing Water: 1. Mix concrete only in quantities for immediate use. 2. Discard concrete which has set. 3. Discharge concrete from ready-mix delivery vehicles within time limit stated in ASTM C94. 4. Addition of water at the Site: a. Comply with Section 03 31 30 - Concrete Materials and Proportioning, for specified water cement ratio and slump. b. Do not exceed maximum specified water cement ratio or slump. c. Incorporate water by additional mixing equal to at least half of total mixing required. 3.4 PLACING OF CONCRETE A. Placing of Concrete - General: 1. Place concrete as a rate such that concrete, which is being integrated with fresh concrete, is “workable”. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents CONCRETE MIXING, PLACING, JOINTING, AND CURING 03 31 31 - 7 a. Provide sufficient, competent, skilled workers for timely delivery of concrete into forms to avoid unintended cold joints and placement consolidation issues. 2. Comply with ACI 304R,ACI 304.2R, and ACI 301. 3. Do not begin placing concrete during rain, sleet, snow, or other adverse weather or environmental conditions that may be detrimental to concrete placement. a. Protect fresh concrete from ensuing inclement weather. 4. Time between concrete batching and final placement shall not exceed 90 minutes, unless indicated otherwise by the ready-mix plant or noted on the delivery ticket. a. Selection of time limit to end of discharge should consider ambient conditions, types of cementitious materials and admixtures used, placement procedures, and projected transportation time between ready-mix plant and the point of delivery. b. If discharge is acceptable after more than 90 minutes have elapsed since batching, verify that air content of air-entrained concrete, slump, and temperature of concrete are as specified. 5. Do not deposit concrete which has partially hardened or has been contaminated by foreign materials. 6. Begin work only when work of other trades affecting concrete is complete. 7. When pumping concrete, do not use excess grout or mortar to lubricate concrete conveyance piping. 8. Do not use excess water for workability or any reason when placing concrete by freefall. 9. Deposit concrete continuously to avoid cold joints. 10. Provide construction joints at locations shown or indicated in the Contract Documents, unless otherwise approved by Engineer via Shop Drawing or Contract modification. a. Plan size of crews with due regard for effects of concrete temperature and ambient conditions to avoid unplanned cold joints. 11. Spreaders: a. Temporary: Remove as soon as concrete placing renders their function unnecessary. b. Embedded: 1) Obtain approval of Engineer for their use. 2) Materials: Concrete or metal. 3) Ends of metal spreaders coated with plastic coating two inches from each end. 12. Deposit concrete as nearly as practicable in its final position to avoid segregation. a. Maximum free fall: 4 feet. b. Place concrete by means of hopper, “elephant trunk” or tremie pipe extending to within four feet of surface. 13. Perform the following operations before bleeding water has an opportunity to collect on surface: a. Spread. b. Consolidate. c. Straightedge. d. Darby or bull float. 14. No water shall be added to the concrete surface to ease finishing operation. 15. Do not discharge water into forms. 16. Consider use of form vibrators for certain placement situations. B. Cold Weather Concrete Placement: 1. Comply with ACI 306.1. 2. Do not place concrete on forms or subgrades that are below 32 degrees F or contain frozen material. 3. Maintain all materials, forms, reinforcement, subgrade and any other items which concrete will come in contact with free of frost, ice or snow at time of concrete placement. 4. Temperature of concrete when discharged at site: in accordance with ACI 306.1. 5. Heat subgrade forms, embedments and reinforcement with a cross section area greater than four square inches to between 45 and 70 degrees F, when temperature of surrounding air is 32 degrees F or below, at time concrete is placed. a. Remove frost from subgrade, forms and reinforcement before concrete is placed. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents CONCRETE MIXING, PLACING, JOINTING, AND CURING 03 31 31 - 8 6. Combine water with aggregate in mixer before cement is added, if water or aggregate is heated above 90 degrees F. 7. Do not mix cement with water or with mixtures of water and aggregate having a temperature greater than 90 degrees F. 8. Comply with ACI 306R for specific requirements dealing with elevated steel troweled slabs that will be exposed to freeze-thaw cycles. C. Hot Weather Concrete Placement: 1. Comply with ACI 305.1. 2. Cool ingredients before mixing, or add flake ice or well crushed ice of a size that will melt completely during mixing for all or part of mixing water if high temperature, low slump, flash set, cold joints, or shrinkage cracks are encountered. 3. Temperature of concrete at point of delivery (i.e. delivery vehicle discharge) when placed: a. Not to exceed 90 degrees F. b. Not so high as to cause: 1) Shrinkage cracks. 2) Difficulty in placement due to loss of slump. 3) Flash set. 4. Temperature of forms and reinforcing when placing concrete: a. Not to exceed 90 degrees F. b. May be reduced by spraying with water to cool below 90 degrees F. 1) Leave no standing water to contact concrete being placed. 5. Prevent plastic shrinkage cracking, slab curling, or both due to evaporation. D. Consolidating: 1. Consolidate in accordance with ACI 309R except as modified herein. 2. Consolidate by vibration so that concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement, embedded items and into corners of forms. a. Ensure no displacement of reinforcing or other embeds from final position. b. Eliminate: 1) Air or stone pockets. 2) Honeycombing, pitting, or both. 3) Planes of weakness. 3. Use suitable form vibrators located just below top surface of concrete, where internal vibrators cannot be used in areas of congested reinforcing. a. Size and coordinate external vibrators to specifically match forming system used. 4. Internal vibrators: a. Minimum frequency of 8000 vibrations per minute. b. Insert and withdraw at points approximately 1.5 feet apart. 1) Allow sufficient duration at each insertion to consolidate concrete but not sufficient to cause segregation. c. Use in: 1) Beams and girders of framed slabs. 2) Columns and walls. 3) Vibrating concrete around all waterstops. d. Size of vibrators shall be in accordance with ACI 309R, Table 5.1.5. 5. Obtain consolidation of slabs with internal vibrators, vibrating screeds, roller pipe screeds, or other appropriate means. 6. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete within forms. 7. When placing self-consolidating concrete, the use of form or pencil vibrators is acceptable, provided such methods do not cause aggregate segregation, or otherwise adversely affect the quality of the Work. 8. Provide sufficient spare vibrators at the Site during all concrete placing operations to ensure continuous vibration. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents CONCRETE MIXING, PLACING, JOINTING, AND CURING 03 31 31 - 9 9. Bring a full surface of mortar against form by vibration supplemented if necessary by spading to work coarse aggregate back from formed surface, where concrete is to have an as-cast finish. 10. Prevent construction equipment and machinery, construction operations, and personnel from introducing vibrations into freshly placed concrete after the concrete has been placed and consolidated. E. Handle concrete from mixer to place of final deposit by methods which will prevent segregation or loss of ingredients and in a manner which will assure that required quality of concrete is maintained. 1. Use truck mixers, agitators, and non-agitating units in accordance with ASTM C94. 2. Temporary horizontal belt conveyors: a. Mount at a slope which will not cause segregation or loss of ingredients. b. Protect concrete against undue drying or rise in temperature. c. Use an arrangement at discharge end to prevent segregation. d. Do not allow mortar to adhere to return length of belt. e. Discharge conveyor runs into equipment specially designed for spreading concrete. 3. Temporary metal or metal lined chutes: a. Slope not exceeding 1 vertical to 2 horizontal and not less than 1 vertical to 3 horizontal. b. Chutes more than 20 feet long and chutes not meeting slope requirements may be used provided they discharge into a hopper before distribution. c. Provide end of each chute with a device to prevent segregation. 4. Temporary pumping or pneumatic conveying equipment: a. Designed for concrete application and having adequate pumping capacity. b. Control pneumatic placement so segregation is avoided in discharged concrete. c. Loss of slump in pumping or pneumatic conveying equipment shall not exceed 1.5 inches. d. Do not convey concrete through pipe of aluminum or aluminum alloy. e. Provide pumping equipment without Y sections. F. Placing of Concrete on Metal Deck: 1. Prior to concrete placement, the metal deck shall be free of soil, debris, standing water, loose mill scale, and other foreign matter. 2. Care shall be exercised when placing concrete so that the deck will not be subject to construction loads or impact that exceed the design capacity of the deck. 3. Concrete shall be placed in a uniform manner and spread toward the center of the deck span. 4. If buggies are used to place concrete, runways shall be planked, and buggies shall only operate on planking. a. Planks shall be of adequate stiffness to transfer loads to the steel supports without damaging the deck. 5. Deck damage caused by careless placement of concrete shall be repaired or replaced. 6. Pour concrete to the thickness shown or indicated on the Drawings. 3.5 JOINTS AND EMBEDDED ITEMS A. Construction Joints - General: 1. Provide joints at locations as shown or indicated on the Drawings or as shown on approved Shop Drawings approved by Engineer or in an appropriate Contract modification. a. Where construction joint spacing shown on the Drawings exceeds the joint spacing indicated in Paragraph B. below, submit proposed construction joint location in conformance with this Section. 2. Unplanned construction joints are unacceptable. a. If concrete cannot be completely placed between planned construction joints, then it must be removed. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents CONCRETE MIXING, PLACING, JOINTING, AND CURING 03 31 31 - 10 3. In general, locate joints near middle of spans of slabs, beams and girders unless a beam intersects a girder at this point, in which case, offset joint in girder a distance equal to twice the width of the beam. 4. Locate joints in walls and columns at underside of floors, slabs, beams, or girders, and at tops of foundations or floor slabs, unless shown otherwise. a. At Contractor's option, beam pockets may be formed into concrete walls. b. Size pockets to allow beam reinforcing to be placed as detailed on the Drawings. 5. Place beams, girders, column capitals and drop panels at same time as slabs. 6. Place corbels monolithically with their supporting members. a. Locate wall vertical construction joints midway between corbels. b. Where only a single corbel is located, place it also monolithically with wall and locate wall vertical construction joint a minimum of three feet from face of corbel. 7. Make joints perpendicular to main reinforcement with all reinforcement continuous across joints. 8. Provide the following joints unless shown or indicated otherwise on the Drawings: a. Roughen joints: horizontal construction joints. b. Keyed joints: vertical construction joints. 9. Roughen construction joints: a. Clean the previously hardened concrete interface and remove all laitance. b. Intentionally roughen the interface to a full amplitude of 0.25 inch. 10. Keyways: a. Construction joint keyways shall have the following dimensions, unless shown or indicated otherwise on the Drawings or as directed by Engineer. b. Wall keys: 1) Keyway width, not less than one-third and not more than one-half the wall thickness measured perpendicular to wall faces. 2) Keyway depth shall be not less than 1.5 inches. 3) Continuous along length of wall. 4) Place keyway in wall center unless otherwise shown or indicated on the Drawings. c. Keyways in footings, foundations, base slabs, and structural or elevated slabs: 1) Keyway height not less than one-third and not more than one-half the footing or slab thickness. 2) Keyway depth not less than 1.5 inches. 3) Continuous along footing or slab. 4) Keyway in footing or slab center unless shown otherwise on the Drawings. d. Beam keyways: 1) Full width of beam. 2) Keyway height not less than 5.5 inches. 3) Keyway depth not less than 1.5 inches. 4) Keyway located in initial beam pour, directly above the bottom reinforcing, unless shown otherwise on the Drawings. 11. Minimum time before placement of adjoining concrete construction: a. All other concrete: 48 hours, unless otherwise noted. B. Construction Joints - Spacing Unless Otherwise Specified: 1. Structures not intended to contain liquid: a. Wall vertical construction joints: 1) 50 feet maximum on centers. 2) At wall intersections, four feet minimum from corner. b. Base slab, floor, and roof slab construction joints: 1) Placements to be approximately square and not to exceed 4,000 square feet. 2) Maximum side dimension of a slab pour shall be 90 feet. 2. Water bearing structures: a. Wall vertical construction joints: 1) 30 feet maximum on centers. 2) At wall intersections, 10 feet minimum from corner. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents CONCRETE MIXING, PLACING, JOINTING, AND CURING 03 31 31 - 11 b. Wall horizontal construction joints: 18 feet on centers. c. Floor slab, construction joints: 1) Placements to be approximately square and not to exceed 2,000 square feet. 2) Maximum side dimension of a slab pour to be less than: a) Twice the length of the short side. b) 60 feet. C. Construction Joints - Bonding: 1. Obtain bond between concrete pours at construction joints by thoroughly cleaning and removing all laitance from construction joints. 2. Before new concrete is placed, all construction joints shall be coated with cement grout, or dampened, as indicated below: 3. Roughen construction joints: a. Roughen the surface of the concrete to expose the coarse aggregate uniformly with 0.25 inch minimum amplitude. 1) Remove laitance, loosened particles of aggregate or damaged concrete at the surface. 4. Keyed construction joints: a. Thoroughly clean construction joints and remove all laitance. b. Dampen the hardened concrete immediately prior to placing of fresh concrete. D. Slab On Grade Joints: 1. Locate construction and control joints in slabs on grade as shown or indicated on the Drawings. 2. Time cutting properly with set of concrete, if saw cut joints are required or allowed. a. Start cutting as soon as concrete has hardened sufficiently to prevent aggregates being dislodged by saw. b. Complete before shrinkage stresses become sufficient to produce cracking. E. Expansion Joints: 1. Do not allow reinforcement or other embedded metal items bonded to concrete (except smooth dowels bonded on only one side of joint) to extend continuously through an expansion joint. 2. Use neoprene expansion joint fillers, unless shown or indicated otherwise on the Drawings. F. Waterstops - General: 1. Waterstop shall be continuous with splices in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and create water tight joints. 2. Do not mix different types of waterstop materials in the same structure without approval from the Engineer unless shown or indicated on the Drawings. 3. Preformed strip type: a. Locate waterstop at center of wall, unless shown or indicated otherwise on the Drawings. 1) Maintain at least three inches from edge of concrete or as recommended by manufacturer. b. Install in a bed of swelling sealant on smooth surface of hardened concrete by use of nails, adhesive or other means as recommended by manufacturer to prevent movement of waterstop during placement of concrete. c. Roughened joints shall be specially prepared during concrete placement to provide smooth surface for proper water stop installation. d. Use in joints against existing concrete where shown or indicated on the Drawings. 4. PVC waterstops: a. Pre-position waterstop accurately in joints, with adequate clearance from all reinforcing. Do not push waterstop into wet concrete. b. Secure waterstops in correct position using hog rings or grommets spaced no more than 1.5 feet maximum staggered along each edge full length and passed through the edge of the waterstop. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents CONCRETE MIXING, PLACING, JOINTING, AND CURING 03 31 31 - 12 1) Tie wire to adjacent reinforcing. c. Hold horizontal waterstops in place with continuous supports. d. Install according to manufacturer's instructions. 1) Do not displace reinforcement from required location. e. Splice ends and intersections with perpendicular butt splice using electrical splicing iron in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1) Use factory fabricated "T" and corner intersection fittings. 2) Field splice straight runs of material. f. Unless otherwise noted, provide for construction joints in new construction for all structures indicated on the Drawings. G. Other Embedded Items: 1. Place sleeves, inserts, anchors, and embedded items required for adjoining work or for its support, prior to initiating concreting. 2. Do not route electrical conduit, drains, or pipes in concrete slabs, walls, columns, foundations, beams or other structural members unless approved by Engineer. H. Placing Embedded Items: 1. Support against displacement. 2. Fill voids in sleeves, inserts and anchor slots temporarily with readily removable material to prevent entry of concrete into voids. 3. Provide adequate means for anchoring waterstop in concrete. a. Provide means to prevent waterstops in the forms from being folded over by the concrete as it is placed. 3.6 FINISHING A. Comply with Section 03 35 00 - Concrete Finishing and Repair of Surface Defects. B. Coordinate mixing and placing with finishing. 3.7 INSTALLATION OF GROUT A. Grout Schedule: 1. Sand cement grout: a. Fill keyways in precast HCU. b. Construction joint bedding (base of wall pours with comparable compressive strength to wall). c. General use. d. As shown or indicated on the Drawings. 2. Non-shrinking non-metallic grout: a. Filling form tie holes. b. Under column and beam base plates. c. Other uses shown or indicated on the Drawings. 3. Epoxy grout: a. Patching cavities in concrete. b. Grouting of dowels and anchor bolts into existing concrete. c. Grouting of rotating or oscillating equipment base plates where driving motor is 500 horsepower and above. d. As shown or indicated on the Drawings. B. Grout Installation: 1. Sand cement grout: a. Fill wetted keyways between precast concrete hollow core slabs with sand cement grout. b. Consolidate grout by rodding or by other means to assure complete filling of keyways. c. Cure grout by one of methods specified. 2. Non-shrink non-metallic grout: a. Clean concrete surface to receive grout. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents CONCRETE MIXING, PLACING, JOINTING, AND CURING 03 31 31 - 13 b. Saturate concrete with water for 24 hours prior to grouting. c. Mix in a mechanical mixer. d. Use no more water than necessary to produce flowable grout. e. Place in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. f. Provide under beam, column, and equipment base plates, in joints between precast concrete and cast-in-place slabs, and in other locations shown or indicated on the Drawings. g. Completely fill spaces and cavities below the top of base plates. h. Provide forms where base plates and bed plates do not confine grout. i. Where exposed to view, finish grout edges smooth. j. Except where a slope is shown or indicated on the Drawings, finish edges flush at the base plate, bed plate, member or piece of equipment. k. Coat exposed edges of grout with cure or seal compound recommended by the grout manufacturer. 3. Epoxy grout: a. Mix and place in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. b. Apply only to clean, dry, sound surface. c. Completely fill cavities and spaces around dowels and anchors without voids. d. Grout base and bed plates as specified for non-shrinking, non-metallic grout. e. Obtain manufacturer's field technical assistance as necessary to ensure proper placement. 3.8 CURING AND PROTECTION A. Protect concrete from premature drying, excessively hot or cold temperatures, and mechanical damage immediately after placement, and maintain with minimal moisture loss at relatively constant temperature for period necessary for hydration of cement, hardening, and compressive strength gain. 1. Comply with ACI 308.1 except as modified herein. 2. Do not impose loads by foot traffic, wheeled traffic, and other loads until concrete has sufficiently cured to carry imposed loads without adversely affecting the concrete. In no event shall concrete be subject to loading or traffic during initial 48 hours of curing, unless otherwise approved by Engineer. B. Apply one of the following curing procedures immediately after completion of placement and finishing (surfaces not in contact with forms). 1. Application of Moisture Retaining Cover sheet materials. a. Place as soon as possible after final finishing and without marring the surface. b. Minimum lap: 12 inches. c. Seal edges to make water-tight. d. Place Moisture Retaining Cover in intimate contact with the concrete surface, without wrinkles and weighted to hold in place. e. Hold cover and edges in place as necessary to prevent wind from displacing the cover. f. Moisture Retaining Fabric: 1) Install in accordance with manufacturer’s written recommendations. 2) Saturate concrete surface and fabric side of cover immediately prior to placing. g. Monitor continuously during the curing period: 1) Repair holes, tears or displaced cover. 2) Rewet as necessary to keep concrete moist under cover. 2. Application of other moisture retaining covering acceptable to Engineer. 3. Water used for curing shall be within 20 degrees F of the concrete temperature. 4. Application of a curing compound. a. Apply curing compound in accordance with manufacturer's written recommendations immediately after any water sheen, which may develop after finishing, has disappeared from concrete surface. b. Do not use on surface against which additional concrete or other material is to be bonded unless it is proven that curing compound will not prevent bond. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents CONCRETE MIXING, PLACING, JOINTING, AND CURING 03 31 31 - 14 c. Where a vertical surface is cured with a curing compound, the vertical surface shall be covered with a minimum of two coats of the curing compound. 1) Apply the first coat of curing compound to a vertical surface immediately after form removal. 2) The vertical concrete surface at the time of receiving the first coat shall be damp with no free water on the surface. 3) Allow the preceding coat to completely dry prior to applying the next coat. 4) A vertical surface: Any surface steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal. 5. Surfaces In Contact with Forms: a. Formed surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces utilizing final curing methods per ACI 308.1, including underside of beams, supported slabs, and other similar surfaces, 1) See Section 03 11 13 - Formwork. b. Minimize moisture loss from and temperature gain of concrete placed in forms exposed to heating by sun by keeping forms wet and cool until they can be safely removed. c. Make provisions to keep concrete wall moist while stripping forms and until curing measures are in place. d. After form removal, cure concrete until end of time prescribed. e. Use one of the methods listed above. f. Forms left in place shall not be used as a method of curing in hot weather. g. The term "hot weather", where used in these Specifications, is defined in ACI 305.1. h. In hot weather, remove forms from vertical surfaces as soon as concrete has gained sufficient strength so that the formwork is no longer required to support the concrete. C. Curing Period: 1. Continue curing for at least seven days for all concrete except Type III, high early strength concrete for which period shall be at least three days. a. If one of curing procedures indicated above is used initially, it may be replaced by one of other procedures indicated any time after concrete is two days old, provided concrete is not permitted to become surface dry during transition. D. Cold Weather: 1. Comply with of ACI 306.1. 2. Maintain temperature of concrete in accordance with ACI 306.1 for a minimum of 72 hours after concrete is placed, when outdoor temperature is 40 degrees F, or less. a. Maximum temperature rate of decrease: In accordance with ACI 306.1. 3. Provide temporary heating, covering, insulating, or housing of the concrete Work to maintain required temperature without damage due to concentration of heat. 4. Do not use combustion heaters unless precautions are taken to prevent exposure of concrete to exhaust gases which contain carbon dioxide. 5. Interior slabs in areas intended to be heated shall be adequately protected so that frost does not develop in the supporting subgrade. E. Hot Weather: 1. Comply with ACI 305.1 and ACI 308.1. 2. Provide as necessary cooling forms, reinforcement and concrete, windbreaks, shading, fog spraying, sprinkling, ponding, or wet covering with a light colored material. 3. Provide protective measures as quickly as concrete hardening and finishing operations will allow. 4. Maximum temperature rate of decrease: In accordance with ACI 305.1. F. Rate of Temperature Change: 1. Maintain temperature of air immediately adjacent to concrete as uniform as possible, during and immediately following curing. G. Protection from Mechanical Damage: 1. Protect concrete from damage of all types, whether or not mechanically imparted including load stresses, heavy shock, and excessive vibration. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents CONCRETE MIXING, PLACING, JOINTING, AND CURING 03 31 31 - 15 2. Protect finished concrete surfaces from all types of damage, including damage by construction equipment and machinery, construction means and methods, precipitation, and running water. 3. Do not load self-supporting structures in such a way as to overstress concrete. 3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Tests and Inspections: 1. Special Inspections in accordance with building code: a. Comply with Section 01 45 33 IBC 2021 - Code-Required Special Inspections and Procedures, and 03 05 05 - Concrete Testing and Inspection. b. Special Inspection is required for: 1) Concrete tests in accordance with Section 03 05 05 - Concrete Testing and Inspection. 2) Verification of proper mix design. a) Frequency: Periodically, prior to each concrete pour. 3) Proper reinforcing installation in accordance with Section 03 21 00 - Reinforcement and the Drawings. 4) Proper concrete placement techniques. a) Inspect in accordance with this Section. b) Inspect mass concrete in accordance with thermal monitoring plan approved by Engineer. c) Frequency: During each concrete pour. 5) Proper curing temperature and techniques. a) Inspect in accordance with this Section. b) Frequency: Periodically, but not less than every third day. 6) Cast-in-place anchors: In accordance with Section 03 15 19 - Reinforcement. B. Supplier’s Onsite Services: 1. Waterstop manufacturer's representative shall provide on-site training of waterstop installation, field splicing, welding and inspection procedures prior to construction. END OF SECTION Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 This page intentionally left blank. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents CONCRETE FINISHING AND REPAIR OF SURFACE DEFECTS 03 35 00 - 1 SECTION 03 35 00 CONCRETE FINISHING AND REPAIR OF SURFACE DEFECTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Concrete finishing and repair of surface defects. 2. Chemical Sealers. 3. Resurfacing Mortar. B. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Section 03 11 13 - Formwork. 2. Section 03 31 30 - Concrete, Materials and Proportioning. 3. Section 03 31 31 - Concrete Mixing, Placing, Jointing and Curing. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards: 1. American Concrete Institute (ACI): a. CT, Concrete Terminology. b. 117, Specification for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials. c. 303R, Guide to Cast-in-Place Architectural Concrete Practice. d. 308, Standard Practice for Curing Concrete. 2. ASTM International (ASTM): a. C109, Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement Mortars (Using 2-in. or 50-mm Cube Specimens). b. C150, Standard Specification for Portland Cement. c. C157, Standard Test Method for Length Change of Hardened Hydraulic-Cement Mortar and Concrete. d. C309, Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete. e. C666, Standard Test Method for Resistance of Concrete to Rapid Freezing and Thawing. f. C779, Standard Test Method for Abrasion Resistance of Horizontal Concrete Surfaces. g. C1315, Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds Having Special Properties for Curing and Sealing Concrete. h. D4258, Standard Practice for Surface Cleaning Concrete for Coating. i. D4259, Standard Practice for Abrading Concrete. j. E1155, Standard Test Method for Determining F(F) Floor Flatness and F(L) Floor Levelness Numbers. k. E1486, Standard Test Method for Determining Floor Tolerances Using Waviness, Wheel Path and Levelness Criteria. 3. International Concrete Repair Institute (ICRI): a. 310.2R, Selecting and Specifying Concrete Surface Preparation for Sealers, Coatings, and Polymer Overlays. 4. National Council Highway Research Program (NCHRP): a. 244, Concrete Sealers for the Protection of Bridge Structures. 5. The Society for Protective Coatings/NACE International (SSPC/NACE): a. SP 13/NACE No. 6, Surface Preparation of Concrete. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Vertical Surface Defects: 1. Any void in the face of the concrete deeper than 1/8 inches, such as: a. Tie holes. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents CONCRETE FINISHING AND REPAIR OF SURFACE DEFECTS 03 35 00 - 2 b. Air pockets (bug holes). c. Honeycombs. d. Rock holes. 2. Scabbing: a. Scabbing is defect in which parts of the form face, including release agent, adhere to concrete. 3. Foreign material embedded in face of concrete. 4. Fins 1/16 inches or more in height. B. Installer or Applicator: 1. Installer or applicator is the person actually installing or applying the product in the field at the Project site. 2. Installer and applicator are synonymous. C. Other words and terms used in this Specification Section are defined in ACI CT. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. Product technical data including: a. Acknowledgement that products submitted meet requirements of standards referenced. b. Manufacturer's installation instructions. 2. Certifications: a. Certification of aggregate gradation. b. Certification of manufacturer experience qualifications and performance history. c. Certification of applicator's qualifications. 1) Refer to Qualifications paragraph. 2) Provide manufacturer's written approval of applicators. 3) Provide references substantiating specialty experience. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations and requirements for materials used. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Bonding Agents: a. Master Builders Solutions. b. Euclid Chemical Co. c. Laticrete - L&M Construction Chemicals. 2. Chemical Sealers: a. Master Builders Solutions. b. Euclid Chemical Co. c. Laticrete - L&M Construction Chemicals. d. Tnemec Chemprobe. 3. Polymer Modified Cementitious Coating: a. Aquafin International. b. Master Builders Solutions. c. Euclid Chemical Co. 4. Patching Mortar: a. Master Builders Solutions. b. Euclid Chemical Co. c. Laticrete - L&M Construction Chemicals. d. Sika Corporation. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents CONCRETE FINISHING AND REPAIR OF SURFACE DEFECTS 03 35 00 - 3 2.2 MATERIALS A. Chemical Sealer CS-1: 1. High solids, water-based solution containing acrylic copolymers. a. ASTM C1315, Type I, Class A. b. Non-yellowing UV resistant. c. VOC Content: <200 G/L. 2. USDA approved as a concrete floor sealer. 3. Euclid Chemical Super Diamond Clear VOX. B. Chemical Sealer CS-2: 1. Water based chemical solution containing a blend of silicate and siliconate polymers designed to seal, harden and dustproof concrete floors. 2. VOC Content: 0 G/L. 3. Performance of treated concrete floor: a. Coefficient of Friction: 1) Dry: 0.81. 2) Wet: 0.72. b. Liquid repellency, RILEM Method 11.4: 1) ≥ 1 mL. 4. Euclid Chemical Euco Diamond Hard. C. Chemical Sealer CS-3: 1. Clear, penetrating, breathable, waterborne silane-siloxane solution. 2. VOC content: ≤50 G/L. 3. Odorless. 4. Flash point: >200 degrees F. 5. Water absorption: 85% reduction per NCHRP 244. 6. Chloride penetration: 82% reduction per NCHRP 244. 7. Euclid Chemical Baracade WB 244. D. Patching Mortar: Trowelable cementitious repair mortar for vertical, overhead, and horizontal repairs. 1. Portland cement-based, rapid set repair mortar for interior or exterior use. 2. Compressive Strength, ASTM C109: a. Minimum 3000 psi at 7 days. b. Minimum 5000 psi at 28 days. 3. Freeze Thaw Durability, ASTM C666: 96.75% at 300 Cycles. 4. Shrinkage, ASTM C157: 0.069%. 5. Euclid Chemical Speed Crete Red Line. E. Bonding Agents: 1. For use only on concrete surfaces not receiving liquid water repellent coating: a. High solids acrylic latex base liquid for interior or exterior application as a bonding agent to improve adhesion and mechanical properties of concrete patching mortars. 1) Master Builders MasterEmaco A 660. 2) Euclid Chemical Co. Flex-Con. 3) Laticrete L&M Everbond. 2. For use only on concrete surface receiving liquid water repellent: a. Non-acrylic base liquid for interior or exterior application as a bonding agent to improve adhesion and mechanical properties of concrete patching mortars. F. Cement: 1. ASTM C150, Type II Portland for areas exposed to sewage. 2. ASTM C150, Type I Portland elsewhere. G. Aggregate: 1. Sand: Maximum size #30 mesh sieve. 2. For exposed aggregate finish surfaces: Same as surrounding wall. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents CONCRETE FINISHING AND REPAIR OF SURFACE DEFECTS 03 35 00 - 4 H. Water: Potable. I. Standard grayNonshrink Grout: See Specification Section 03 31 30 and Specification Section 03 31 31. 2.3 MIXES A. Bonding Grout: One part cement to one part aggregate. B. Patching Mortar: 1. One part cement to 2-1/2 parts aggregate by damp loose volume. a. Substitute white Portland cement for a part of gray Portland cement to produce color matching surrounding concrete. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. For methods of curing, see Specification Section 03 31 31. B. Surface Preparation: 1. Clean surfaces in accordance with ASTM D4258 to remove dust, dirt, form oil, grease, or other contaminants prior to abrasive blasting, chipping, grinding or wire brushing. 2. Prepare surfaces in accordance with ASTM D4259 and SSPC SP 13/NACE No. 6 to completely open defects down to sound concrete and remove laitance. a. Provide concrete surface profile (CSP) in accordance with ICRI 310.2: 1) Areas to receive Repair Mortar: a) Areas larger than 1 SF or deeper than 1/4 inches Abrasive blast, scarify or needle scale to CSP No. 6-8. b. If additional chipping or wire brushing is necessary, make edges perpendicular to surface or slightly undercut. c. No featheredges will be permitted. d. Rinse surface with clean water to remove all dust, dirt, debris, loosened concrete, laitance, and other contaminants. C. Preparation of Bonding Grout Mixture: 1. Mix cement and aggregate. 2. Mix bonding agent and water together in separate container in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3. Add bonding agent/water mixture to cement/aggregate mixture. 4. Mix to consistency of thick cream. 5. Bonding agent itself may be used as bonding grout if approved by manufacturer and Engineer. D. Preparation of Patching Mortar Mixture: 1. Mix specified patching mortar per manufacturer’s published recommendations. 2. For repairs exceeding 2 inches in depth, mix with clean, pre-dampened 3/8 inches pea gravel in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. E. Polymer modified cementitious coating: 1. Mix in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations using bonding agent acceptable to coating manufacturer. 3.2 INSTALLATION AND APPLICATION A. Do not repair surface defects or apply wall or floor finishes when temperature is or is expected to be below 50 degrees F. 1. If necessary, enclose and heat area to between 50 and 70 degrees F during repair of surface defects and curing of patching material. a. Use only clean fuel, indirect fired heating apparatus. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents CONCRETE FINISHING AND REPAIR OF SURFACE DEFECTS 03 35 00 - 5 b. Exhaust combustion byproducts outside of work area. B. Chemical Sealer Application: 1. General: a. Immediately prior to Substantial Completion, thoroughly clean floor in accordance with ASTM D4258 and prepare to receive chemical sealer. 1) Remove previously applied membrane curing compounds. 2) Remove soil, oils, stains, discoloration, or any other imperfection having a negative impact on the appearance of the finished floor. b. Apply product to floor areas indicated on the Drawings. c. Apply in accordance with manufacturer's published installation instructions. 2. Chemical Sealer (CS-1): a. Apply two uniform coats at rate recommended by manufacturer. 1) Apply using manufacturer’s recommended equipment with a fan-tip nozzle. 2) Do not allow material to puddle. b. Allow first coat to completely dry before applying second coat. c. Spotted or mottled appearances will not be accepted. 3. Chemical Sealer (CS-2): a. Apply two uniform coats at rate recommended by manufacturer. 1) Scrub the material into the floor using a mechanical scrubber. a) Keep the surface wet for not less than 30 minutes. b) Continue scrubbing in accordance with manufacturer’s application instructions. c) After material has thickened, but not more than 60 minutes after application, remove all excess liquid. 2) Thoroughly rinse with clean water to remove all residue. a) Damp mop with clean water to remove any streaks. b) Do not allow residue to dry on floor surface. 3) Do not track material onto untreated surfaces. b. After rinsing, allow floor to dry completely and apply second coat following the same procedures. c. Final floor finish shall have uniform sheen without streaking, stains or white residue. 4. Chemical Sealer (CS-3): a. Apply uniform coats at rate recommended by manufacturer. 1) Apply with fine, uniform spray or microfiber pad. b. Allow floor to dry completely and remove any dried residue using hot water and mild citric acid. c. Final floor finish shall be uniform, free of residue, and shall repel water. d. Apply additional coat(s) as necessary to achieve water repellent finish. C. Repairing Surface Defects: 1. This method is to be used on vertical concrete surfaces as indicated in the Concrete Finishes for Vertical Wall Surfaces paragraph of this Specification Section and similar concrete surfaces not otherwise specified to receive another finish or coating. a. For surfaces indicated to receive finish or coating other than those specified herein; refer to the applicable Specification Section for surface preparation requirements: 1) High Performance Industrial Coatings: See Specification Section 09 96 00. 2. Fill and repair surface defects and tie-holes using patching mortar mix specified in the MATERIALS Article in PART 2. a. Prime exposed reinforcing steel, embeds or other steel surfaces with primer as recommended by patching mortar manufacturer. b. Scrub bond coat: 1) Wet substrate to a saturated surface dry (SSD) condition. 2) Mix patching mortar to a scrub coat or slurry consistency per manufacturer’s published recommendations and apply to entire area. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents CONCRETE FINISHING AND REPAIR OF SURFACE DEFECTS 03 35 00 - 6 c. As an alternate to the scrub bond coat, concrete may be primed with manufacturer’s recommended epoxy primer. d. Patching Mortar Application: 1) Mix and apply Patching Mortar per manufacturer’s recommendations within the open time of the product scrub coat or any bonding agents. 2) Finish to level of surrounding concrete surface utilizing techniques recommended by manufacturer. 3. Consolidate patching mortar into place and strike off so as to leave patch slightly higher than surrounding surface. 4. Leave undisturbed until mortar has stiffened before finishing level with surrounding surface. a. Do not use steel tools in finishing a patch in a formed wall which will be exposed to view. 5. Cure patching mortar in accordance with ACI 308. D. Concrete Finishes for Vertical Wall Surfaces: 1. General: a. Give concrete surfaces finish as specified below after removal of formwork and repair of surface defects. b. Finish numbers not listed are "Not Used". 2. Finish #1 - As cast rough form finish: a. Selected forming materials are not required. b. Prepare surface in accordance with the PREPARATION Article in PART 3 of this Specification Section. c. Repair the following surface defects using patching mortar specified in PART 2: 1) Tie holes. 2) Honeycombs deeper than 1/4 inches. 3) Air pockets deeper than 1/4 inches. 4) Rock holes deeper than 1/4 inches. d. Chip or rub off fins exceeding 1/4 inches in height. e. Provide at unexposed surfaces such as: 1) Foundations. 2) Below-grade walls not to be waterproofed. E. Related Unformed Surfaces (Except Slabs): 1. Strike smooth and level tops of walls or buttresses, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces occurring adjacent to formed surfaces after concrete is placed. 2. Float surface to a texture consistent with that of formed surfaces. a. If more than one finish occurs immediately adjacent to unformed surface, provide surface with most stringent formed surface requirement. 3. Continue treatment uniformly across unformed surfaces. F. Concrete Finishes for Horizontal Slab Surfaces: 1. General: a. Tamp concrete to force coarse aggregate down from surface. b. Screed with straightedge, eliminate high and low places, bring surface to required finish elevations; slope uniformly to drains. c. Dusting of surface with dry cement or sand during finishing processes not permitted. 2. Unspecified slab finish: a. When type of finish is not indicated, use following finishes as applicable: 1) Surfaces intended to receive bonded applied cementitious applications: Scratched finish. 2) Surfaces intended to receive roofing or waterproofing membranes: Floated finish. 3) Floors: Troweled finish. 4) Exterior slabs, sidewalks, platforms, steps and landings, and ramps, not covered by other finish materials: Broom finish. 5) All slabs to receive a floated finish before final finishing. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents CONCRETE FINISHING AND REPAIR OF SURFACE DEFECTS 03 35 00 - 7 3. Scratched slab finish: After concrete has been placed, consolidated, struck off, and leveled to a Class B tolerance, roughen surface with stiff brushes or rakes before final set. 4. Floated finish: a. After concrete has been placed, consolidated, struck off, and leveled to a Class B tolerance, do no further work until ready for floating. b. Begin floating when water sheen has disappeared and surface has stiffened sufficiently to permit operations. 1) Use wood or cork float. c. During or after first floating, check planeness of entire surface with a 10 feet straightedge applied at not less than two different angles. 5. Cut down all high spots and fill all low spots to produce a surface with Class B tolerance throughout. a. Refloat slab immediately to a uniform texture. 6. Troweled finish: a. Float finish surface to true, even plane. b. Power trowel, and finally hand trowel. c. First troweling after power troweling shall produce a smooth surface which is relatively free of defects, but which may still show some trowel marks. d. Perform additional trowelings by hand after surface has hardened sufficiently. e. Final trowel when a ringing sound is produced as trowel is moved over surface. f. Thoroughly consolidate surface by hand troweling. g. Finish in accordance with the FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Article in PART 3 of this Specification Section. 1) Leave finished surface essentially free of trowel marks, uniform in texture and appearance. h. On surfaces intended to support floor coverings, remove any defects that would show through floor covering. 7. Broom Finish: a. Provide broom finish for the following concrete surfaces: 1) Concrete surfaces subject to precipitation, including concrete paving that will be transited by vehicles, stoops, stairs, landings, horizontal concrete surfaces intended for pedestrian traffic (including surfaces that will feature handrails, railings, or guardrails), sidewalks, and horizontal surfaces of cast-in-place concrete retaining walls. 2) . b. Immediately after required float finish is provided, provide scored texture of concrete surface by drawing coarse, stiff-bristled broom across surface. c. Provide broomed finish in transverse direction to intended traffic, unless expressly required otherwise elsewhere in the Contract Documents. d. Amplitude: 1/16-inch to 1/8-inch. e. Uniform spacing. Noticeable spacing between broom strokes is unacceptable. 8. Underside of concrete slab finish: a. Match finish as specified for adjacent vertical surfaces. b. If more than one finish occurs immediately adjacent to underside of slab surface, provide surface with most stringent formed surface requirement. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Tolerances: 1. Finished floor slabs: a. Provide Floor Flatness (FF) and Floor Levelness (FL) in accordance with ACI 117. 1) Measure in accordance with ASTM E1155. b. Slabs not indicated to be sloped: 1) FF: Equal or greater than 35. 2) FL: Equal or greater than 25. c. Slabs indicated to be sloped or curved: Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents CONCRETE FINISHING AND REPAIR OF SURFACE DEFECTS 03 35 00 - 8 1) Measure in accordance with ASTM E1486. 2) Provide slopes or curves as indicated on the Drawings. d. Slabs indicated to receive polished concrete floor: 1) FF: Equal or greater than 45. 2) FL: Equal or greater than 35. 3) Refer to Room Finish Schedule on Drawings. 2. Horizontal surfaces other than finished floor slabs, including but not limited to, top of footings, top of walls, concrete fill in tankage, channels and similar applications: a. Gap between a 10 feet straightedge placed anywhere and the finished surface shall not exceed: 1) Class A tolerance: 1/4 inches. 2) Class B tolerance: 3/8 inches. 3) Class C tolerance: 1/2 inches. b. Accumulated deviation from intended true plane of finished surface shall not exceed 1/2 inches. B. Unacceptable finishes shall be replaced or, if approved in writing by Engineer, may be corrected provided strength and appearance are not adversely affected. 1. High spots to be removed by grinding and/or low spots filled with a patching compound or other remedial measures to match adjacent surfaces. C. Provide services of manufacturer's technical representative: 1. A certified manufacturer's representative experienced in the use of the products used shall be present on a full-time basis to observe and oversee all operations associated with the installation. 2. Contractor, along with manufacturer, shall be fully responsible for the proper application, including all means and methods incidental thereto necessary for a sound, secure and complete installation. 3. Manufacturer's representative shall be present for installation of: a. Dry-shake Hardener. b. Heavy-duty Metallic Aggregate Topping. 3.4 PROTECTION A. All horizontal slab surfaces receiving chemical sealer shall be kept free of traffic and loads for minimum of 72 hours following installation of sealer. END OF SECTION Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents PRECAST AND PRESTRESSED CONCRETE 03 41 33 - 1 SECTION 03 41 33 PRECAST AND PRESTRESSED CONCRETE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Precast and prestressed concrete. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 09 96 00 - High Performance Industrial Coatings. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards: 1. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO): a. HB, Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges. 2. American Concrete Institute (ACI): a. 211.2, Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Structural Lightweight Concrete. b. 318, Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete. 3. ASTM International (ASTM): a. A36, Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel. b. A108, Standard Specification for Steel Bar, Carbon and Alloy, Cold-Finished. c. A416, Standard Specification for Steel Strand, Uncoated Seven-Wire for Prestressed Concrete. d. A496, Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Deformed, for Concrete Reinforcement. e. A1064, Standard Specification for Steel Wire and Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain and Deformed, for Concrete. f. C33, Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates. g. C150, Standard Specification for Portland Cement. h. C330, Standard Specification for Lightweight Aggregates for Structural Concrete. i. D2240, Standard Test Method for Rubber Property-Durometer Hardness. j. E329, Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged in Construction Inspection and/or Testing. 4. American Welding Society (AWS): a. A5.1/A5.1M, Specification for Carbon Steel Electrodes for Shielded Metal Arc Welding. b. A5.5/A5.5M, Specification for Low-Alloy Steel Electrodes for Shielded Metal Arc Welding. c. D1.1, Structural Welding Code - Steel. d. D1.4, Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel. e. D1.6, Structural Welding Code – Stainless Steel. 5. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA). 6. Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute (PCI): a. MNL 116, Manual for Quality Control for Plants and Production of Precast and Prestressed Concrete Products. b. MNL 120, Design Handbook - Precast and Prestressed Concrete. B. Qualifications: 1. Provide precast and prestressed concrete units produced by an active member of PCI. 2. Plant to be certified by the Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute, Plant Certification Program, as applicable: a. Certification Code C1: Precast Concrete Products. b. Certification Code C2: Precast Hollow Core and Repetitive Products. c. Certification Code C3: Prestressed Straight Strand Structural Members. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents PRECAST AND PRESTRESSED CONCRETE 03 41 33 - 2 d. Certification Code C4: Prestressed Deflected Strand Structural Members. e. Plant shall have been certified within past year from bid date. 3. Plant shall be certified by IAS and shall be acceptable to the Building Code Official to assure compliance with approved fabricator Special Inspection requirements in accordance with the building code. a. Plants that are not certified by IAS or not acceptable to the Building Code Official may be acceptable to work on the Project, provided: 1) Plant meets all remaining qualifications. 2) Contractor reimburses the Owner the cost of Special Inspection services. 4. Provide units manufactured by plant which has regularly and continuously engaged in manufacture of units of same type as those required for a minimum of three years. 5. Assure manufacturer's testing facilities meet requirements of ASTM E329. 6. Welding operators and processes to be qualified in accordance with: a. AWS D1.1 for welding steel shapes and plates. b. AWS D1.4 for welding reinforcing bars. 7. Welding operators to have passed qualification tests for type of welding required during the previous 12 months prior to commencement of welding. 8. Engineer for all precast or prestressed members: Professional Engineer licensed in the State of Montana. a. Engineer to have minimum five years of experience in design of precast and prestressed members with scope similar to this Project. 9. Precast erector: a. Minimum three years of experience with projects of similar size and complexity. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Slabs: May refer to hollow core slabs or solid flat slabs, prestressed or non-prestressed. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. Product technical data including: a. Acknowledgement that products submitted meet requirements of standards referenced. b. Manufacturer's installation instructions. c. Sizes, types and manufacturer of bearing pads. d. Hardware to be utilized to support suspended appurtenances. 2. Shop Drawings and erection plans for precast units, their connections and supports showing: a. Member size and location. b. Size, configuration, location and quantity of reinforcing bars and prestressing strands. c. Initial prestress forces. d. Size and location of openings verified by Contractor. e. Size, number, and locations of embedded metal items and connections. f. Required concrete strengths. g. Identification of each unit using same standard marking numbers as used to mark actual units. 3. Calculations for members and connections designed by fabricator. a. Calculations to be sealed by a professional Structural Engineer registered in the State in which the Project is constructed. b. Perform calculations using the dead load of the members plus the superimposed uniform and concentrated loads shown on the Drawings and indicated in this Section. c. Indicate the following: 1) Design for maximum moment, maximum shear and maximum torsion. 2) Final top and bottom flexural stresses resulting from the stresses due to maximum moment and prestress force. 3) Ultimate moment capacity. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents PRECAST AND PRESTRESSED CONCRETE 03 41 33 - 3 4) Final top and bottom flexural stresses, ultimate moment capacity, and ultimate shear capacity, if affected, for members with reduced cross sections due to openings or penetrations. 5) When required on Drawings, a check for no tension in top and bottom of members due to prestress force and member dead load plus superimposed loads indicated on Drawings and in this Section. 6) Column design for maximum axial load and maximum moment. 4. Submit test results, when so required on Drawings, showing that embedded connection items will adequately support the indicated loads. a. Connection items to have an ultimate load capacity of at least two times the required indicated load. 5. Concrete mix design(s) including submittal information defined in Section 03 05 05. 6. Fabricator's quality control documentation for special inspections as required by the building code Chapter 17. 7. Copies of source quality control tests. 8. Certification of manufacturer's testing facility qualifications. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Headed studs and deformed bar anchors: a. Nelson Stud Welding Div., TRW, Inc. b. KSM Division, Omark Industries. 2. Bearing pads: a. JVI, Inc. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Embedded Steel Plates and Shapes: 1. ASTM A36. B. Cement: 1. Comply with ASTM C150, Type I or III. 2. Type II cement to be used in the following precast units: a. Precast weir troughs. C. Aggregates for Normal Weight Concrete: 1. ASTM C33 with coarse aggregate meeting the gradation for Size 67 as stated in ASTM C33. 2. Provide aggregates approved for bridge construction by the State Highway Department in the state where the precast units are fabricated or in the state where the Project is located. 3. All fine aggregate to be natural not manufactured. D. Water: 1. Potable, clean. 2. Free of oils, acids, and organic matter. E. Maximum total chloride ion content contributed from all ingredients of concrete including water, aggregates, cement and admixtures measured as a weight percent of cement to not exceed 0.06 for prestressed concrete and 0.10 for all other precast concrete. F. Reinforcing Steel and Welded Wire Reinforcement: See Section 03 21 00. G. Headed Studs: 1. ASTM A108. 2. Minimum yield strength: 50,000 psi. 3. Minimum tensile strength: 60,000 psi. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents PRECAST AND PRESTRESSED CONCRETE 03 41 33 - 4 H. Deformed Bar Anchors: 1. ASTM A496 or ASTM A1064. 2. Minimum tensile strength: 80,000 psi. 3. Minimum yield strength: 70,000 psi. I. Electrodes: 1. E70 series conforming to AWS A5.1/A5.1M or AWS A5.5/A5.5M for welding steel shapes and plates. 2. E90 series conforming to AWS A5.5/A5.5M for welding rebar. 2.3 DESIGN A. General Design Requirements: 1. Design units and connections in strict accordance with ACI 318 and the PCI MNL 120. 2. Design units for spans, dead load of members, dead and live loads indicated on the Drawings with concentrated loads placed in their actual locations. a. Verify weights and locations of concentrated loads. 3. Design units taking into account reduced cross section at openings and penetrations. 4. Provide all reinforcing in units as indicated. a. Where not indicated, design and provide all reinforcing and prestressing strands subject to approval of Engineer. 5. Due to presence of corrosive atmosphere, design prestressed members where indicated on Drawings for no tension in top and bottom of members resulting from loads indicated on Drawings and in this Section. 6. Design connections to allow rotation and/or movement as appropriate to avoid damage to connections, supporting members, joint sealants and other building components. 7. Design double tee flanges to carry all dead and live loads to be placed thereon. a. Do not place concentrated equipment loads on flanges but support the loads on the double tee legs. 2.4 MIXES A. See Section 03 31 30. B. Do not begin fabrication of units until concrete mix design(s) have been approved by Engineer. 2.5 FABRICATION A. Do not fabricate units until Shop Drawings have been approved by Engineer and returned to Contractor and support locations have been field verified by Contractor. B. Manufacture, quality, dimensional and erection tolerances of all units to be in accordance with both PCI MNL 116 and PCI MNL 120. C. Cast all members in smooth rigid forms which will provide straight, true members of uniform thickness and uniform color and finish. D. Use sand cement grout mixture to fill all air pockets and voids, and to repair chipped edges. E. Finish all repairs smooth and to match adjacent surface texture and color. F. Where units are to receive concrete topping, provide units having heavy broom finish on top surface for bond. 1. Provide roughness of top surface to provide bond with topping and design for horizontal shear at topping and unit interface in accordance with requirements of ACI 318, Horizontal Shear Strength paragraph. 2. Make all other surfaces smooth. G. Incorporate embedded plates, angles, and flange welding strips into members at time of manufacture. 1. Provide embedded items as shown on the Drawings unless prior approval is received from Engineer to do otherwise. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents PRECAST AND PRESTRESSED CONCRETE 03 41 33 - 5 2. Provide flange welding strips on all flanged edges of all double tee units as indicated on Drawings. 3. Space strips as shown on Drawings. 4. Cast lifting handles into units at or near support points. a. Remove lifting handles after units are erected. H. Cast openings larger than 6 inches SQ or 6 inches diameter in units at time of manufacture. 1. Make smaller openings by neat cutting or neat drilling by trades requiring them. 2. Coordinate sizes and locations of all openings before fabrication of units. I. Automatically weld headed studs and deformed bar anchors to members to provide full penetration weld between studs, bar anchors and members they are attached to. J. Weld steel shapes and plates per AWS D1.1 D1.6 and reinforcing steel per AWS D1.4. K. Minimum concrete compressive strength at time of strand release: 3500 psi. L. Mark each unit as indicated on the erection plans. 1. Place mark on non-exposed-to-view surface. M. Coat or finish ends of exposed prestressing strands to prevent rusting. N. Fabricate the following types of precast and prestressed units (all units to be made with normal weight concrete unless noted otherwise on Drawings): 1. Precast items shown on Drawings including but not limited to: a. Splash blocks. 2.6 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. During production of precast concrete units, conduct strength tests of concrete placed in units as required in Section 03 05 05 for concrete placed during fabrication. 1. Results of strength tests to be sent immediately to Engineer, Contractor and Owner. 2. Test reports to indicate units they represent. B. When approved by Engineer, strength tests may be made by precast manufacturer after he has submitted certification that his testing facilities meet the requirements of ASTM E329. C. Conduct tests on precast concrete using the following procedures: 1. If the precast manufacturer’s quality control program requires more frequent or more stringent testing requirements, the manufacturer’s quality control program will take precedence over the specific type of test. a. Precast manufacturer to employ services of an independent testing laboratory to perform concrete testing for manufacturer’s production procedures (not listed below) and quality control program. 2. If the precast fabrication plant is not certified by IAS and acceptable to the Building Code Official, Owner will employ and pay for precast concrete production special inspection. a. Coordinate with Owner’s special inspector. 1) Provide minimum 7 calendar days notice prior to the start of fabrication. 2) Provide minimum 24 hours notice prior to fabrication of any precast members. 3. If precast fabrication plant is certified by IAS and acceptable to the Building Code Official, perform concrete tests as specified in Section 03 05 05. Frequency of tests: Per PCI MNL- 116 or PCI MNL-117 as applicable. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Verify acceptability and location of supports to receive units. 1. Check bearing surfaces to determine that they are level and uniform. B. Verify compressive strengths of concrete and masonry supports. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents PRECAST AND PRESTRESSED CONCRETE 03 41 33 - 6 1. Do not start erection of units until supports have reached their 28 day required compressive strengths. 3.2 ERECTION A. Sequence erection to provide a balance of loads across beams and columns. B. Give consideration to possible lack of stability or capacity of partially completed frame or structure. C. Contractor to be responsible for guying, shoring, and bracing of frame, walls and individual members as necessary to resist forces due to wind, erection, or any other source that may occur before structure is completed. D. Use only erection equipment adequate for placing units at lines and elevations indicated on Drawings. 1. Do not damage units or existing construction during erection. 2. Erect units using lifting handles cast into the units. E. Place each leg of all double tees on a 3/8 inches thick bearing pad held 1 inch back from edge of support. 1. Pad dimensions equal to length of bearing -1 inches x bearing width +2 inches. F. Place slabs on continuous 1/4 inches thick Korolath bearing strips so that width equals bearing length -1 inches. G. Provide a 1/2 inches thick bearing pad on the top of all precast concrete columns. H. Pad to cover entire top surface of column except hold pad back 1 inch from face of column all around. I. Weir Trough: 1. Anchor weir troughs to supports as indicated on Drawings. 2. Provide continuous 3/8 inches thick bearing pad under troughs at support. 3. Hold back pads 1 inch from edge of support. J. After erection, verify that there is no direct contact between bottom of units and supporting members. 1. Where direct contact occurs, install additional layers of bearing material to raise units off supports. K. Lintels: 1. Length of lintel bearing on supports to be as indicated on Drawings. a. If not indicated, minimum length of lintel bearing to be 8 inches. 2. Fill masonry cells under lintel bearing with masonry grout and reinforce cells as indicated. 3. Provide minimum 3/8 inches thick full bed joint of masonry mortar between underside of lintel and top surface of grouted masonry for complete lintel bearing length. L. Weld steel shapes and plates per AWS D1.1 and reinforcing steel per AWS D1.4. M. Fill all keyways between slabs with concrete sand cement grout. 1. See Section 03 31 30. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing and Special Inspections: See Section 01 45 33. B. Causes for rejection of units include, but are not necessarily limited to the following: 1. Cracked units. 2. Chipped, broken, or spalled edges. 3. Units not within allowable casting tolerances. 4. Voids or air pockets which, in opinion of Engineer, are too numerous or too large. 5. Non-uniform finish or appearance. 6. Low concrete strength. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents PRECAST AND PRESTRESSED CONCRETE 03 41 33 - 7 7. Improperly placed embedded items and/or openings. 8. Exposed wire mesh, reinforcing or prestressing strands. END OF SECTION Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 This page intentionally left blank. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents UNDER SLAB VAPOR RETARDER 07 26 00 - 1 SECTION 07 26 00 UNDER SLAB VAPOR RETARDER PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Under slab vapor retarder. B. Related Requirements: 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards: 1. American Concrete Institute (ACI): a. 302.2R, Guide for Concrete Slabs that Receive Moisture-Sensitive Flooring Materials. 2. ASTM International (ASTM): a. E1643, Standard Practice for Selection, Design, Installation, and Inspection of Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Earth or Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs. b. E1745, Standard Specification for Plastic Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Soil or Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. Product technical data including: a. Acknowledgement that products submitted meet requirements of standards referenced. b. Product data sheet on vapor retarder sheet and vapor retarder tape. c. All accessories proposed for use. d. Manufacturer's installation instructions. B. Samples: 1. Provide two, 6 inches x 6 inches samples of vapor retarder material taped together using the vapor retarder tape proposed. 2. Provide two samples of all accessories proposed for use. C. Informational Submittals: Manufacturer's recommendation on vapor retarder tape. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Vapor retarder: a. Fortifiber Building Systems Group, Inc. by Henry Company. b. Layfield Group, Ltd. c. ISI Building Products. d. Raven Industries, Inc. e. Reef Industries, Inc. f. Stego Industries, LLC. g. W.R. Meadows, Inc. 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Vapor Retarder: 1. ASTM E1745, Class A. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents UNDER SLAB VAPOR RETARDER 07 26 00 - 2 2. Thickness: Minimum 15 mil. 3. Water vapor permeance: 0.02 maximum. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Pipe Boots: Manufacturer's standard boot fabricated to maintain the integrity of the vapor retarder system. B. Vapor Retarder Tape: As recommended by vapor retarder manufacturers. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Base material over which vapor retarder is to be installed shall be level, compacted and free of debris, foreign objects or other deleterious materials. B. Surfaces at perimeter and penetrations of vapor barrier shall be clean, smooth and free of sharp objects, fins or projections. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, ASTM E1643 and ACI 302.2R. B. Provide vapor retarder where indicated on the Drawings. 1. Place continuous vapor retarder above granular fill subgrade material, unless noted otherwise. C. Lap minimum 6 inches and seal in accordance with ASTM E1643 and manufacturer's recommendations. D. Extend to extremities of area and seal to adjacent elements. E. Seal all penetrations: Provide pipe boot for all pipes or conduit penetrating the floor slab. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Ensure proper precautions are implemented to prevent damage to installed vapor retarder membrane prior to and during pouring of concrete floor slab. B. Inspect vapor retarder immediately prior to placement of concrete. 1. Patch all punctures, tears, holes, etc. a. Patch small punctures with vapor retarder tape as allowed by ASTM E1643 and manufacturer's recommendations. b. Repair larger damage with additional layer of vapor retarder. 1) Lap repairs minimum 6 inches beyond extent of damage in all directions. 2) Seal perimeter of patch with vapor retarder tape or as recommended by manufacturer. END OF SECTION Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00 - 1 SECTION 07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Sealing all joints which will permit penetration of dust, air or moisture. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 09 96 00 - High Performance Industrial Coatings. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards: 1. American Concrete Institute (ACI): a. 302.1R, Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction. 2. ASTM International (ASTM): a. C834, Standard Specification for Latex Sealants. b. C920, Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants. c. C1521, Standard Practice for Evaluating Adhesion of Installed Weatherproofing Sealant Joints. 3. NSF International (NSF): a. 61, Drinking Water System Components -- Health Effects. 4. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL). B. Qualifications: Sealant applicator shall have minimum five years experience using products specified on projects with similar scope. C. Mock-Ups: 1. Before sealant work is started, a mock-up of each type of joint shall be sealed where directed by the Engineer. a. The approved mock-ups shall show the workmanship, bond, and color of sealant materials as specified or selected for the work and shall be the minimum standard of quality on the entire project. b. Each sample shall cure for a minimum of seven days at which time the sealant manufacturer's authorized factory representative shall perform adhesion tests on each sample joint. 1) Perform adhesion tests per ASTM C1521. 2) If mock-up is not acceptable or if adhesion test fails, provide additional mock-up and adhesion testing as required until acceptable to Engineer. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Corrosive Areas Include: Wet Well. B. Defect(ive): Failure of watertightness or airtightness. C. Finish sealant: Sealant material per this specification applied over face of compressible sealant or expanding foam sealant specified, to provide a finished, colored sealant joint. D. Installer or Applicator: 1. Installer or applicator is the person actually installing or applying the product in the field at the Project site. 2. Installer and applicator are synonymous. E. "Seal," "sealing" and "sealant": Joint sealant work. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00 - 2 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. Product technical data including: a. Acknowledgement that products submitted meet requirements of standards referenced. b. Manufacturer's installation instructions. c. Manufacturer's recommendations for joint cleaner, primer, backer rod, tooling and bond breaker. 2. Certification from sealant manufacturer stating product being used is recommended for and is best suited for joint in which it is being applied. 3. Certification of applicator qualification. B. Test Results: 1. Provide adhesion test results for each sealant sample including adhesion results compared to adhesion requirements. 2. Manufacturer's authorized factory representative recommended remedial measures for all failing tests. C. Samples: 1. Cured sample of each color for Engineer's color selection. 2. Color chart not acceptable. D. Informational Submittals: 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver material in manufacturer's original unopened containers with labels intact: Labels shall indicate contents and expiration date on material. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Schedule installation of sealant work after completion of penetrating item installation but prior to covering or concealing of openings. B. Verify existing conditions and substrates before starting work. Correct unsatisfactory conditions before proceeding. C. Do not proceed with the installation of sealant materials when the ambient temperature is outside the manufacturer’s recommended limitations for installation and curing times as printed on the product label and product data sheet. D. During installation provide masking and drop cloths to prevent sealant materials from contaminating any adjacent surfaces. E. Perimeter of, and all penetrations through, walls separating unclassified rooms and rooms classified per NFPA 820, shall be gas-tight to meet the definition of “Physically Separated”. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Compressible sealant: a. Schul International Company, LLC. b. Emseal by Sika. c. Norton. d. Sandell Moisture Protection Systems. 2. Expanding foam sealant: a. M-D Building Products, Inc. b. DAP Products, Inc. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00 - 3 c. FAI International, Inc. d. Power Fasteners. 3. Polyether sealants: a. Master Builders Solutions. b. Chem Link. c. Tremco Commercial Sealants & Waterproofing. 4. Polysulfide rubber sealant: a. Pecora Corporation. b. Master Builders Solutions. c. PolySpec by ITW Polymers Sealants. 5. Polyurea joint filler: a. Dayton Superior Corporation. b. Euclid Chemical Company. c. L&M by LATICRETE International, Inc. d. Master Builders Solutions. 6. Polyurethane sealants: a. Pecora Corporation. b. Sika. c. Master Builders Solutions. d. Tremco Commercial Sealants & Waterproofing. 7. Silicone sealants: a. Chem Link. b. GE Silicones. c. Dow. d. Tremco Commercial Sealants & Waterproofing. 8. Backer rod, compressible filler, primer, joint cleaners, bond breaker: a. As recommended by sealant manufacturer. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Sealants - General: 1. Provide colors matching materials being sealed. 2. Where compound is not exposed to view in finished work, provide manufacturer's color which has best performance. 3. Nonsagging sealant for vertical and overhead horizontal joints. 4. Sealants for horizontal joints: Self-leveling pedestrian/traffic grade. 5. Joint cleaner, primer, bond breaker: As recommended by sealant manufacturer. 6. Sealant backer rod and/or compressible filler: a. Closed cell polyethylene, polyethylene jacketed polyurethane foam, or other flexible, nonabsorbent, non-bituminous material recommended by sealant manufacturer to: 1) Control joint depth. 2) Break bond of sealant at bottom of joint. 3) Provide proper shape of sealant bead. 4) Serve as expansion joint filler. B. Compressible Sealant: 1. For joints exposed to wastewater fumes or vapor: a. Closed cell ethylene vinyl acetate (EVA) foam with epoxy adhesive. b. Schul "HydroStop". 2. For all other applications: Foamed polyurethane strip saturated with polymerized polybutylene waterproofing coated on front face with nonreactive release agent that will act as bond breaker for applied sealant. a. Schul "Sealtite B". 3. Adhesive: As recommended by sealant manufacturer. C. Expanding Foam Sealant: 1. One or two component moisture cured expanding urethane. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00 - 4 2. Shall not contain formaldehyde. 3. Density: Minimum 1.5 pcf. 4. Closed cell content: Minimum 70%. 5. R-value: Minimum 5.0/IN. 6. Flame spread: Less than 25. 7. Smoke developed: Less than 25. D. Polyether Sealant: 1. Silyl-terminated polyether polymer. 2. ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 50, Use NT, M, A, and O. a. Master Builders Solutions MasterSeal 150. b. Chem Link DuraLink. c. Tremco Dymonic FC. E. Polysulfide Rubber Sealant: 1. One or two component. 2. Meet ASTM C920. a. Pecora Synthacalk GC2+. b. PolySpec THIOKOL 2235. F. Polyurea Joint Filler: 1. Two component, semi-rigid material for filling formed or saw-cut control joints in interior concrete slabs. a. Dayton Superior Corporation "Joint Fill, Joint Seal, Joint Saver II" as required for condition and recommended by manufacturer. b. Euclid Chemical Company "EUCO QWIK" joint. c. L&M "Joint Tite 750". d. Master Builders Solutions MasterSeal “CR100" control joint filler. 2. Comply with ACI 302.1R performance recommendations regarding control and construction joints. 3. Color: Gray. G. Polyurethane Sealant: 1. One or two components. 2. Paintable. 3. Meet ASTM C920 Type S or Type M, Grade NS or P, Class 25, Use NT, T, M, A and O. a. Pecora Dynatrol-IXL, Dynatrol II, Urexpan NR-200, NR-201. b. Sika Chemical Corporation Sikaflex-1a, Sikaflex-2C NS/SL. c. Master Builders Solutions MasterSeal NP-1, NP-II, SL-1 SL-2. d. Tremco Dymonic or Dymeric, Vulkem 116,227,45,245. H. Silicone Sealant: 1. One component. 2. Meet ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT, G, A, O. a. Chem Link DuraSil. b. GE Silpruf, Silglaze II. c. GE Sanitary 1700 sealant for sealing around plumbing fixtures. d. Dow 786 for sealing around plumbing fixtures. e. Dow 7565, 790, 791, 795. f. Tremco Spectrem 1, Spectrem 3, Tremsil 600. 3. Mildew resistant for sealing around plumbing fixtures. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Before use of any sealant, investigate its compatibility with joint surfaces, fillers and other materials in joint system. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00 - 5 B. Use only compatible materials. C. Where required by manufacturer, prime joint surfaces. 1. Limit application to surfaces to receive sealant. 2. Mask off adjacent surfaces. D. Provide joint depth for joints receiving polyurea joint filler in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and UL requirements. B. Clean all joints. C. Make all joints water and airtight. D. At changes in direction of joints, joint intersections and where sealant joints interface with other construction, install continuous sealant as necessary to ensure a weather-tight seal. E. Make depth of sealing compounds, except expanding foam and polyurea sealant, not more than one-half width of joint, but in no case less than 1/4 inches nor more than 1/2 inches unless recommended otherwise by the manufacturer. F. Provide correctly sized backer rod, compressible filler or compressible sealant in all joints to depth recommended by manufacturer: 1. Take care to not puncture backer rod and compressible filler. 2. Provide joint backer rod as recommended by the manufacturer for polyurea joint filler. G. Apply bond breaker where required. H. Tool sealants using sufficient pressure to fill all voids. I. Upon completion, leave sealant with smooth, even, neat finish. J. Where piping, conduit, ductwork, etc., penetrate wall, seal each side of wall opening. K. Install compressible sealant to position at indicated depth. 1. Size so that width of material is twice joint width. 2. Take care to avoid contamination of sides of joint. 3. Protect side walls of joint (to depth of finish sealant). 4. Install with adhesive faces in contact with joint sides. 5. Install finish sealant where indicated. L. Install expanding foam sealant to minimum 4 inches depth or thickness of wall being penetrated if less than 4 inches or as indicated on Drawings. 1. Provide adequate backing material as necessary. 2. Hold material back from exposed face of wall as necessary to allow for installation of backer rod and finish sealant. a. Allow expanding foam sealant to completely cure prior to installing backer rod and finish sealant. 3. Trim off excess material flush with surface of the wall if not providing finished sealant. 3.3 SEALANT WORK A. General: 1. Work includes but is not limited to: Sealing all joints which will permit penetration of dust, air, or moisture. 2. Refer to SCHEDULE for materials to be used. B. Concrete joints: 1. Flooring joints. 2. Isolation joints. 3. Joints between paving or sidewalks and building. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00 - 6 4. Construction, control and expansion joints. 5. Joints between precast roof units and between precast roof units and walls. 6. Joints between precast wall panels. 7. Precast panel bearing joints: a. At panels bearing at or above grade, seal both sides of panel base joint. b. At panels bearing below grade: 1) Seal exterior panel base joint prior to backfilling and/or placement of site paving. 2) Provide compressible filler and sealant or backer rod and sealant as appropriate for interior slab condition. C. Masonry: 1. Masonry control joints. 2. Brick expansion joints. 3. Cast stone coping and sill head joints. 4. Glass masonry joints. 5. Between masonry and other materials. D. Flashing, reglets and retainers. E. Wood siding and trim. F. Exterior Insulation and Finish System joints. G. Openings: 1. Perimeters of door and window frames, louvers, grilles, etc. 2. Door thresholds shall be set in a full bed of sealant. H. Interior finishes: 1. Perimeter and penetrations of sound insulated walls. 2. Expansion and control joints in tile work. I. Plumbing fixtures. J. Penetrations of walls, floors and decks. K. Other joints where sealant, expanding foam sealant or compressible sealant is indicated. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Adhesion Testing: 1. Perform adhesion tests in accordance with ASTM C1521 per the following criteria: a. Water bearing structures: One test per every 1000 linear foot of joint sealed. b. Exterior precast concrete wall panels: One test per every 2000 linear foot of joint sealed. c. Chemical containment areas: One test per every 1000 linear foot of joint sealed. d. Building expansion joints: One test per every 500 linear foot of joint sealed. e. All other type of joints except butt glazing joints: One test per every 3000 linear foot of joint sealed. f. Manufacturer's authorized factory representative shall recommend, in writing, remedial measures for all failing tests. 3.5 SCHEDULE A. Furnish sealant as indicated for the following areas: 1. Exterior areas: a. Above grade: Polyurethane. b. Below grade: Polyurethane. 2. Interior areas: a. Noncorrosive areas: 1) Wet exposure: Silicone. 2) Dry exposure: Polyether, Polyurethane or Silicone. b. Corrosive areas: Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00 - 7 1) Wet exposure: Polysulfide. 2) Dry exposure: Polyurethane. c. Sealant exposed to or having the potential of being exposed to concentrated chlorine gas or chlorine liquid: Polysulfide. d. Casework, countertops and solid surface materials: Silicone. 1) Sinks, fixtures or other areas subject to potential splash, spillage or condensation: Mildew Resistant Silicone. 3. Immersion: a. Prolonged contact with or immersion in: 1) Wastewater or sewage: Polysulfide. 4. Exterior wall penetrations: Expanding urethane foam, with finish sealant. a. Finish sealant: 1) Exterior side: a) Above grade: Polyether. b) Below grade: Polyurethane. 2) Interior side: a) Noncorrosive area: (1) Wet exposure: Polyurethane. (2) Dry exposure: Polyurethane, unless noted otherwise. b) Corrosive area: (1) Wet exposure: Polyurethane. (2) Dry exposure: Polyurethane. 5. Interior concrete slab formed or saw-cut control joints: Polyurea joint filler. END OF SECTION Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 This page intentionally left blank. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 DIVI SION 08 OPENINGS Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 This page intentionally left blank. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents ACCESS DOORS 08 31 00 - 1 SECTION 08 31 00 ACCESS DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Access doors. B. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Specification Section 09 96 00 - High Performance Industrial Coatings. 2. Specification Section 40 05 01 - Common Work Results for Process Piping. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards: 1. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO). 2. ASTM International (ASTM): a. A123/A123M, Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. b. A153/A153M, Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. c. A240/A240M, Standard Specification for Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General Applications. d. A480/A480M, Standard Specification for General Requirements for Flat-Rolled Stainless and Heat-Resisting Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip. e. A653/A653M, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process. f. A666, Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar. g. B209, Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate. h. B221, Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Clear Opening Size: Space within the opening having no obstructions. Furnish model that will provide the minimum clear opening indicated. B. Standard Duty: Will support live load of 150 psf. C. Heavy Duty: Will support live load of 300 psf. D. H-20 loading: As defined in AASHTO Guidelines. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. Product technical data including: a. Acknowledgement that products submitted meet requirements of standards referenced. b. Manufacturer's installation instructions. B. Contract Closeout Information: 1. Operation and Maintenance Data: a. See Specification Section 01 78 23 for requirements for the mechanics, administration, and the content of Operation and Maintenance Manual submittals. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents ACCESS DOORS 08 31 00 - 2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Floor access doors: a. The BILCO Company. b. Halliday Products. c. Or approved equal. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Aluminum: 1. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B209. 2. Extruded shapes: ASTM B221. B. Steel: 1. Sheet Metal: G90 Galvanized, ASTM A653/A653M. 2. Fabrications: Hot-Dip Galvanized, ASTM A123/A123M. 3. Hardware: Hot-Dip Galvanized, ASTM A153/A153M. C. Stainless Steel: ASTM A240/A240M or A666. 2.3 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. General: 1. All access doors shall be provided by the same manufacturer when possible. 2. Coat all aluminum components in contact with concrete or masonry with manufacturer's standard bituminous coating. B. H-20 Loading Doors: 1. Frame: 1/4 inches mill finish aluminum channel with anchor tabs. a. 1-1/2 inches diameter drain coupling. 2. Cover: a. 1/4 inches mill finished diamond plate aluminum. b. Reinforce cover with aluminum stiffeners. 1) Reinforced for AASHTO H-20 wheel loading for use in off street applications. 2) Deflection: Maximum 1/150 of span. 3. Hardware: a. All hardware to be stainless steel. b. Positive hold open arm that engages automatically when door reaches full 90 degree open position. c. Slam lock and removable key handle. 1) Provide removable threaded plug. d. Recessed padlock hasp with hinged cover. 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Secondary Fall Protection System: 1. Design and install system such that when in the open position, no part of the system obstructs the clear opening size listed in the SCHEDULES Article in PART 3 of this Specification Section. 2. Platform: Design grating to meet OSHA 29 CFR 1910 requirements for protection for floor openings. 3. Finish: a. Powder coated. b. Color: Safety Orange or Safety Yellow. 4. Hardware: a. Stainless steel Type 316. b. Tamper proof Type 316 stainless steel bolts. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents ACCESS DOORS 08 31 00 - 3 5. Provide positive latch to hold grating in upright position. 6. Size: Allow 6 inches clear space on each unhinged side for visual observation. 7. Provide padlock hasp for Owner provided padlock. 8. Double leaf openings: a. Provide two individual grating platforms independent from one another. 1) Provide each platform with a padlock hasp and positive latch to hold grating in upright position. 9. Install secondary fall protection system at the factory. B. Load Rating Plates: 1. Minimum 18 GA Type 316 stainless steel, ASTM A666. 2. Engraved with maximum design live load allowed for unit on which it will be mounted. 3. Display load in English units as well as metric units. 4. Size as required for text as needed. 5. Text: a. Font: Helvetica Narrow, all caps. b. Size: 1/4 inches height. c. Depth of engraving: 3 mils. 6. Finish: a. Text: 1) Black epoxy baked on paint. 2) Plate to have finish conductive to paint application. b. Coat entire plate with baked on clear coat on front and back side. 7. Attach to top of all floor access doors using stainless steel screws in location determined by manufacturer. a. Provide a neoprene gasket under the plate to separate the stainless steel from the aluminum cover or frame. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.2 SCHEDULES A. Vault Access Door Schedule: DOOR NO. DRAWING NO. LOCATION CLEAR OPENING SIZE (a) TYPE REMARKS H-01 D101, D501 WET WELL 4’ x 8’ DOUBLE LEAF b 1. Notes: a. See definition of Clear Opening Size in the DEFINITIONS Article in PART 2 of this Specification Section. b. Provide secondary fall protection system. END OF SECTION Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 This page intentionally left blank. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 DIVI SION 09 FINISHES Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 This page intentionally left blank. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents HIGH PERFORMANCE INDUSTRIAL COATINGS 09 96 00 - 1 SECTION 09 96 00 HIGH PERFORMANCE INDUSTRIAL COATINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. High performance industrial coatings (HPIC). 2. Any other coating, thinner, accelerator, inhibitor, etc., specified or required as part of a complete System specified in this Specification Section. 3. Minimum surface preparation requirements. B. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Section 01 61 03 - Common Work Results for Equipment. 2. Division 26 - Electrical. 3. Division 40 - Process Interconnections. 4. Section 40 05 01 - Common Work Results for Process Piping. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards: 1. ASTM International (ASTM): a. B499, Standard Test Method for Measurement of Coating Thicknesses by the Magnetic Method: Nonmagnetic Coatings on Magnetic Basis Metals. b. D3359, Standard Test Methods for Rating Adhesion by Tape Test. c. D4258, Standard Practice for Surface Cleaning Concrete for Coating. d. D4259, Standard Practice for Abrading Concrete. e. D4261, Standard Practice for Surface Cleaning Concrete Masonry Units for Coating. f. D4262, Standard Test Method for pH of Chemically Cleaned or Etched Concrete Surfaces. g. D4263, Standard Test Method for Indicating Moisture in Concrete by the Plastic Sheet Method. h. D4414, Standard Practice for Measurement of Wet Film Thickness by Notch Gages. i. D4541, Standard Test Method for Pull-Off Strength of Coatings Using Portable Adhesion Testers. j. D6132, Standard Test Method for Nondestructive Measurement of Dry Film Thickness of Applied Organic Coatings Using an Ultrasonic Gage. k. D6677, Standard Test Method for Evaluating Adhesion by Knife. l. D7091, Standard Practice for Nondestructive Measurement of Dry Film Thickness of Nonmagnetic Coatings Applied to Ferrous Metals and Nonmagnetic, Nonconductive Coatings Applied to Non-Ferrous Metals. m. D7234, Standard Test Method for Pull-Off Adhesion Strength of Coatings on Concrete Using Portable Pull-Off Adhesion Testers. n. E337, Standard Test Method for Measuring Humidity with a Psychrometer (the Measurement of Wet- and Dry-Bulb Temperatures). o. F1869, Standard Test Method for Measuring Moisture Vapor Emission Rate of Concrete Subfloor Using Anhydrous Calcium Chloride. p. F2170, Standard Test Method for Determining Relative Humidity in Concrete Floor Slabs Using in situ Probes. 2. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 3. International Concrete Repair Institute (ICRI): a. 310.2, Selecting and Specifying Concrete Surface Preparation for Sealers, Coatings, Polymer Overlays, and Concrete Repair. 4. NACE International (NACE). 5. National Association of Pipe Fabricators (NAPF): Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents HIGH PERFORMANCE INDUSTRIAL COATINGS 09 96 00 - 2 a. 500-03, Surface Preparation Standard for Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings in Exposed Locations Receiving Special External Coatings and/or Special Internal Linings: 1) 500-03-04, Abrasive Blast Cleaning for Ductile Iron Pipe. 2) 500-03-05, Abrasive Blast Cleaning for Cast Ductile Iron Fittings. 6. The Society for Protective Coatings (SSPC): a. PA 2, Procedure for Determining Conformance to Dry Coating Thickness Requirements. b. SP 1, Solvent Cleaning. c. SP 2, Hand Tool Cleaning. d. SP 3, Power Tool Cleaning. e. SP 16, Brush-off Blast Cleaning of Coated and Uncoated Galvanized Steel, Stainless Steels, and Non-Ferrous Metals. 7. The Society for Protective Coatings/ NACE International (SSPC/ NACE): a. SP 5/ NACE No. 1, White Metal Blast Cleaning b. SP 6/ NACE No. 3, Commercial Blast Cleaning. c. SP 7/ NACE No. 4, Brush-off Blast Cleaning. d. SP 10/ NACE No. 2, Near-White Blast Cleaning. e. SP 13/ NACE No. 6, Surface Preparation of Concrete. B. Qualifications: 1. Coating manufacturer's technical representative shall be a NACE Certified Coatings Inspector, Level 3 minimum. 2. Applicators shall have minimum of 10 years of experience in application of similar products on similar project. a. Provide references for minimum of three different projects completed in last five years with similar scope of work. b. Include name and address of project, size of project in value (coating) and contact person. C. Miscellaneous: 1. Furnish coating through one manufacturer unless noted otherwise. D. Deviation from specified MIL thickness or product type is not allowed without written authorization of Engineer. E. Material shall not be thinned unless approved, in writing, by coating manufacturer's technical representative. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Applicator: 1. Applicator is the person actually installing or applying the product in the field, at the Project site, or at an approved shop facility. B. Approved Factory Finish: Finish on a product in compliance with the finish specified in the Specification Section where the product is specified or in Specification Section 01 61 03. C. Appurtenant Surface: Accessory or auxiliary surface attached to or adjacent to a surface indicated to be coated. D. Corrosive Environment: 1. Immersion in or subject to: a. Condensation, spillage or splash of a corrosive material such as water, wastewater or chemical solution. b. For purposes of this Specification Section, corrosive environments include: 1) Wet Well. E. Outdoor Atmosphere or Surface: Outdoor atmosphere or surface exposed to weather and/or direct sunlight. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents HIGH PERFORMANCE INDUSTRIAL COATINGS 09 96 00 - 3 F. Finished Area: A room or area that is listed in or has finish called for on Room Finish Schedule or is indicated on Drawings to be coated. G. Holiday: 1. A void, crack, thin spot, foreign inclusion, or contamination in the coating that significantly lowers the dielectric strength of the coating. 2. May also be identified as a discontinuity or pinhole. H. HPIC: High performance industrial coatings. 1. Epoxies, urethanes, vinyl ester, waterborne vinyl acrylic emulsions, acrylates, silicones, alkyds, acrylic emulsions and any other coating listed as a HPIC. I. Indoor Atmosphere or Surface: Indoor atmosphere or surface not exposed to weather and/or direct sunlight. J. Immersion Service: 1. Any surface immersed in water or some other liquid. 2. Surface of any pipe, valve, or any other component of the piping system subject to frequent wetting. 3. Surfaces within two feet above high water level in water bearing structures. K. Piping System: Pipe, valves, fittings and accessories. L. Surface Hidden from View: 1. Within pipe chases. 2. Between top side of ceilings and underside of floor or roof structures above. M. Vapor Space: Interior space within tankage, closed structures, or similar elements that is above the low liquid line and subject to the accumulation of fumes, vapor and/or condensation. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Certifications: 1. Applicator experience qualifications. a. No submittal information will be reviewed until Engineer has received and approved applicator qualifications. 2. Certification that High Performance Coating Systems proposed for use have been reviewed and approved by a NACE Certified Coatings Inspector employed by the coating manufacturer. a. Submittals not including this certification will be returned without review. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Product technical data including: a. Acknowledgement that products submitted meet requirements of standards referenced. b. Manufacturer's surface preparation instructions. c. Manufacturer's application instructions. d. If products being used are manufactured by Company other than listed in the MATERIALS Article of this Specification Section, provide complete individual data sheet comparison of proposed products with specified products including: 1) Application procedure. 2) Coverage rates. 3) Certification that product is designed for intended use and is equal or superior to specified product. e. Contractor's written plan of action for containing airborne particles created by blasting operation and location of disposal of spent contaminated blasting media. f. Coating manufacturer's recommendation on abrasive blasting. g. Coating manufacturer's technical representative's written statement attesting that applicator has been instructed on proper preparation, mixing and application procedures for coatings specified. h. Manufacturer's recommendation for universal barrier coat. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents HIGH PERFORMANCE INDUSTRIAL COATINGS 09 96 00 - 4 i. Manufacturer's recommendation for providing temporary or supplemental heat or dehumidification or other environmental control measures. 2. Manufacturer's statement regarding applicator instruction on product use. C. Samples: 1. Manufacturer's full line of colors for Engineer's preliminary color selection. 2. After preliminary color selection by Engineer provide two, 3 x 5 inches samples of each final color selected. D. Informational Submittals: 1. Approval of application equipment. 2. Applicator's daily records: a. Submit daily records at end of each week in which coating work is performed unless requested otherwise by Engineer's on-site representative. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver in original containers, labeled as follows: 1. Name or type number of material. 2. Manufacturer's name and item stock number. 3. Contents, by volume, of major constituents. 4. Warning labels. 5. VOC content. B. Store materials in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 degrees F. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Verify that atmosphere in area where coating is to take place is within coating manufacturer's acceptable temperature, humidity and sun exposure limits. 1. Provide temporary heating, shade and/or dehumidification as required to bring area within acceptable limits. a. Provide temporary dehumidification equipment properly sized to maintain humidity levels required by coating manufacturer. b. Provide clean heat with heat exchanger type equipment sufficient in size to maintain temperature on a 24 hour basis. 1) Vent exhaust gases to outdoor environment. 2) No exhaust gases shall be allowed to vent into the space being coated or any adjacent space. 2. Do not apply coatings in snow, rain, fog or mist. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. High Performance Industrial Coatings: a. Carboline Protective Coatings. b. PPG. c. The Sherwin-Williams Company. d. Tnemec. e. AkzoNobel. B. "Or-Equal" Submittals: 1. Materials by other manufacturers are acceptable provided that they are established as being compatible with and of equal quality to the coatings of the manufacturers listed. 2. Provide satisfactory documentation from the proposed "or-equal" manufacturer that proposed materials meets or exceeds the following: Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents HIGH PERFORMANCE INDUSTRIAL COATINGS 09 96 00 - 5 a. Is of the same generic resin. b. Requires comparable surface preparation. c. Has comparable application requirements. d. Meets the same VOC levels or better. e. Provides the same finish and color options. f. Is suitable for the intended service. g. Resistance to abrasion and physical damage. h. Resistance to chemical attack. i. Resistance to UV exposure. j. Ability to recoat in future. k. Dry film thickness per coat. 1) Where manufacturer’s product data sheet indicates a minimum MIL thickness per coat that is greater than specified herein, MIL thickness for entire coating system shall be increased proportionately. l. Minimum and Maximum time between coats. m. Compatibility with other coatings. n. Temperature limitations in service and during application. o. Type and quality of recommended undercoats and topcoats. p. Ease of application. q. Ease of repairing damaged areas. r. Stability of colors. 3. The cost of all testing and analyzing of the proposed substitute materials shall be borne by the CONTRACTOR. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Coatings used for indoor finishes shall meet the requirements of the building code. B. Coatings shall comply with the VOC limits of EPA. C. For unspecified materials such as thinner, provide manufacturer's recommended products. D. High Performance Industrial Coatings: COATING CODE GENERIC DESCRIPTION MANUFACTURER TNEMEC SHERWIN WILLIAMS AAE Acrylic/Acrylate Emulsion Series 180 WB Tneme-Crete Cement Plex 875 AREC Abrasion-Resistant Epoxy Coating Series 435 Perma-Glaze Duraplate 5900 AAP Aliphatic Acrylic Polyurethane Series 1095 Endurashield Acrolon Ultra AP Acrylic Polymer Series 1029 Enduratone Pro Industrial Acrylic Coating CRM Cementitious Repair Mortar Series 217 MortarCrete Cemtec Silatec MSM CRU Corrosion Resistant Urethane Series 290 CRU Polylon HP DFA Dry-fall Acrylic Series 115 Uni-Bond DF DFA Dry Fall Acrylic EBF Epoxy Block Filler Series 1254 Epoxoblock WB Kem Cati Coat HS ESF Epoxy Surfacer/Filler Series 215 Surfacing Epoxy Steel Seam FT 910 Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents HIGH PERFORMANCE INDUSTRIAL COATINGS 09 96 00 - 6 COATING CODE GENERIC DESCRIPTION MANUFACTURER TNEMEC SHERWIN WILLIAMS EMM Epoxy Modified Cementitious Mortar Series 218 MortarClad Duraplate 2300 EF Epoxy Flooring Series 237 Power-Tread GP3746 GFRE Glass Flake Reinforced Epoxy Series 142 Sher-Glass FF HRE H2S-Resistant Epoxy Series 132 Protuff Mastic Duraplate 235 HREM H2S-Resistant Epoxy Mortar Series 434 Perma-Shield H2S Duraplate 5900 Mortar MIO MIO Polyurethane Series 1 Omnithane Corothane 1 milesO MPE Multi-Purpose Epoxy Series N69 Hi-Build Epoxoline II Macropoxy 646 MTEP Moisture-Tolerant Epoxy Primer Series 201 Epoxoprime Corobond 100 PVA PVA Drywall Primer Series 51 PVA Sealer ProMar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex Primer SCN Secondary Containment Novolac Series 282 Cor Cote HCR SCE Secondary Containment Epoxy Series 237SC Chembloc Cor Cote HP SCEP Secondary Containment Epoxy Primer Series 206SC Chembloc GP3552 STEP Surface-Tolerant Epoxy Primer Series 135 Chembuild Macropoxy 646 UHSE Ultra-High Solids Epoxy (NSF 61) Series 22 Epoxoline Duraplate UHS VEP Vinyl Ester Primer Series 251SC Chembloc Corobond Vinyl Ester Primer VESC Vinyl Ester Secondary Containment Series 252SC Chembloc Cor Cote VEN FF PVA PVA Drywall Primer Series 51 PVA Sealer ProMar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex Primer SCN Secondary Containment Novolac Series 282 Cor Cote HCR ZRU Zinc-Rich Urethane Series 94-H20 Hydro-Zinc Corothane 1 Galvapak Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents HIGH PERFORMANCE INDUSTRIAL COATINGS 09 96 00 - 7 2.3 COATING SYSTEMS: A. The following tables indicate coating systems by material and environment unless a specific application is indicated. B. Ductile Iron Piping: Environment/ Application Surface Preparation Prime Coat Intermediate Coats Finish Coat Indoor atmospheric Pipe: NAPF 500-03-04 Fittings: NAPF 500-03-05 3.0 to 4.0 mil MPE 3.0 to 4.0 mil MPE 3.0 to 4.0 mil MPE Immersion - Wastewater Pipe: NAPF 500-03-04 Fittings: NAPF 500-03-05 3.0 to 4.0 mil HRE 3.0 to 4.0 mil HRE 12 to 16 mil HRE Outdoor atmospheric Pipe: NAPF 500-03-04 Fittings: NAPF 500-03-05 3.0 to 4.0 mil MPE 3.0 to 4.0 mil MPE 2.5 to 3.5 mil AAP PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 ITEMS TO BE COATED A. Outdoor Surfaces, including but not limited to: 1. Piping, valves, fittings, hydrants and supports: a. As scheduled in Specification Section 40 05 01. 2. Appurtenant surfaces attached to or adjacent to a surface indicated to be coated: a. Conduit, boxes, covers and supports. B. Indoor Areas: 1. Piping, valves, fittings, hydrants and supports: a. Do not coat piping scheduled to be insulated. 3.2 ITEMS NOT TO BE COATED A. General: Do not coat items listed in this Article, unless noted otherwise. B. Items with Approved Factory Finish: These items may require repair of damaged coated areas or coating of welded connections. C. Electrical Equipment. D. Moving parts of mechanical and electrical units where coating would interfere with the operation of the unit. E. Code labels, equipment identification or rating plates and similar labels, tagging and identification. F. Contact surfaces of friction-type structural connections. G. Stainless Steel Surfaces, except: 1. Dissimilar metals in immersion service. 2. Piping where specifically noted to be coated. 3. Banding as required to identify piping. H. Aluminum Surfaces, except: Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents HIGH PERFORMANCE INDUSTRIAL COATINGS 09 96 00 - 8 1. Where specifically shown in the Contract Documents. 2. Where in contact with concrete. 3. Where in contact with dissimilar metals. 4. Appurtenant surfaces as described in the ITEMS TO BE COATED article. I. Fiberglass Surfaces, except: 1. Fiberglass piping where specifically noted to be coated. 2. Piping supports where specifically noted to be coated. 3. Appurtenant surfaces as described in the ITEMS TO BE COATED article. J. Mechanical piping scheduled to be insulated. K. Interior of Pipe, Ductwork, and Conduits. 1. See Division 40 for pipe linings. L. Galvanized Steel Items, unless specifically noted to be coated. M. Architectural Finishes: 1. Outdoor concrete indicated to receive another finish. 2. Precast concrete surfaces, unless specifically indicated to be coated. 3. Prefinished masonry surfaces: a. Pre-colored masonry (outdoor face). 1) Interior face shall be coated where scheduled. b. Burnished (ground face) concrete masonry. c. Prefaced masonry. d. Face brick. e. Glass masonry. 4. Plastic laminate. 5. Solid surface material. 6. Standing and running trim. 7. Fiberglass fabrications. 8. Anodized aluminum. 9. PVDF coated metals. 10. Factory finished doors and frames. 11. Aluminum windows, curtainwall and storefront framing systems. 12. Finish hardware. 13. Glass and glazing. 14. Ceramic, porcelain, quarry tile or natural stone. 15. Acoustical materials. 16. Building specialties. 17. Louvers. 18. Casework and countertops. 19. Pipe insulation and jacketing. 20. Standing seam metal roof, fascia, trim, soffit and accessories. 3.3 PREPARATION A. General: 1. Prepare surfaces to be coated in accordance with coating manufacturer's instructions and this Specification Section unless noted otherwise in this Specification Section. a. Where discrepancy between coating manufacturer's instructions and this Specification Section exists, the more stringent surface preparation shall be provided unless approved otherwise, in writing, by the Engineer. 2. Remove all dust, grease, oil, compounds, dirt and other foreign matter which would prevent bonding of coating to surface. 3. Adhere to manufacturer's recoat time surface preparation requirements. a. Surfaces that have exceeded coating manufacturer's published recoat time and/or have exhibited surface chalking shall be prepared prior to additional coating in accordance with manufacturer's published recommendations. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents HIGH PERFORMANCE INDUSTRIAL COATINGS 09 96 00 - 9 1) Minimum SSPC-SP 7/ NACE No. 4 unless otherwise approved by Engineer. B. Protection: 1. Protect surrounding surfaces not to be coated. 2. Remove and protect hardware, accessories, plates, fixtures, finished work, and similar items; or provide ample in-place protection. 3. Protect code labels, equipment identification or rating plates and similar labels, tagging and identification. C. Prepare and coat before assembly all surfaces which are inaccessible after assembly. 3.4 APPLICATION A. General: 1. Thin, mix and apply coatings by brush, roller, or spray in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. a. Application equipment must be inspected and approved in writing by coating manufacturer. 2. Temperature and weather conditions: a. Do not coat surfaces when surface temperature is below 50 degrees F unless product has been formulated specifically for low temperature application and application is approved in writing by Engineer and coating manufacturer's technical representative. b. Avoid coating surfaces exposed to hot sun. c. Do not coat damp surfaces. d. Apply coating to concrete or masonry surfaces in descending temperatures, in accordance with coating manufacturer's application instructions. 3. Apply materials under adequate illumination. 4. Provide complete coverage to MIL thickness specified. a. Thickness specified is dry MIL thickness. 5. Evenly spread to provide full, smooth coverage. a. All coating systems are "to cover." 1) In situations of discrepancy between manufacturer's square footage coverage rates and MIL thickness, MIL thickness requirements govern. b. When color or undercoats show through, apply additional coats until coating is of uniform finish and color. c. Finished coating system shall be uniform and without voids, bugholes, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller marks, runs, sags or other imperfections. 6. If so directed by Engineer, do not apply consecutive coats until Engineer has had an opportunity to observe and approve previous coats. 7. Work each application of material into corners, crevices, joints, and other difficult to work areas. 8. Provide coating manufacturer’s recommended details at all terminations, penetrations, embedments, cracks, joints and changes in substrate direction. 9. Avoid degradation and contamination of blasted surfaces and avoid inter-coat contamination. a. Clean contaminated surfaces before applying next coat. b. Intercoat surface cleanliness shall be inspected and approved by the Engineer prior to application of each coat. 10. Smooth out runs or sags immediately, or remove and recoat entire surface. 11. Allow preceding coats to dry before recoating. a. Recoat within time limits specified by coating manufacturer. b. If recoat time limits have expired re-prepare surface in accordance with coating manufacturer's printed recommendations. 12. Allow coated surfaces to cure prior to allowing traffic or other work to proceed. 13. Coat all aluminum in contact with dissimilar materials. 14. When coating rough surfaces which cannot be backrolled sufficiently, hand brush coating to work into all recesses provided that the maximum DFT is not exceeded. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents HIGH PERFORMANCE INDUSTRIAL COATINGS 09 96 00 - 10 15. Backroll surfaces if coatings are spray applied. B. Employ services of coating manufacturer's technical representative to ensure that field-applied coatings are compatible with factory-applied or existing coatings. 1. Certify through material data sheets. 2. Perform test patch. a. Prepare existing coating surface to receive specified coating system. b. Apply coating to a minimum 1 square feet area and allow to cure in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. c. Evaluate adhesion to existing coating: 1) Concrete or Masonry substrates: ASTM D4541. 2) All other substrates: ASTM D6677 and ASTM D3359 (X-cut method). 3. If field-applied coating is found to be not compatible, require the coating manufacturer's technical representative to recommend, in writing, product to be used as barrier coat, thickness to be applied, surface preparation and method of application. a. Perform test patch as described above. 4. At Contractor's option, coatings may be removed, surface re-prepared, and new coating applied using appropriate coating system listed in the MATERIALS Article, Coating Systems paragraph of this Specification Section. a. All damage to surface as result of coating removal shall be repaired to original condition or better by Contractor at no additional cost to Owner. C. Prime Coat Application: 1. Apply structural steel and miscellaneous steel prime coat in the factory. a. Finish coats shall be applied in the field. b. Prime coat referred to here is prime coat as indicated in this Specification. 1) Prime coating applied in factory (shop) as part of Fabricator's standard rust inhibiting and protection coating is not acceptable as replacement for specified prime coating. 2. Prime all surfaces indicated to be coated. a. Apply prime coat in accordance with coating manufacturer's written instructions and as written in this Specification Section. 3. Prime ferrous metals embedded in concrete to minimum of 1 inch below exposed surfaces. 4. Apply zinc-rich primers while under continuous agitation. 5. Brush or spray bolts, welds, edges and difficult access areas with primer prior to primer application over entire surface. 6. Touch up damaged primer coats prior to applying finish coats. a. Restore primed surface equal to surface before damage. 7. All surfaces of steel lintels and steel components of concrete lintels used in wall construction shall be completely coated with both prime and finish coats prior to placing in wall. D. Finish Coat Application: 1. Apply finish coats in accordance with coating manufacturer's written instructions and in accordance with this Specification Section; manufacturer instructions take precedent over these Specifications. 2. Touch up damaged finish coats using same application method and same material specified for finish coat. a. Prepare damaged area in accordance with the PREPARATION Article of this Specification Section. 3.5 COLOR CODING A. Color code piping in accordance with the SCHEDULE Article of this Specification Section. 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Application Deficiencies: Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents HIGH PERFORMANCE INDUSTRIAL COATINGS 09 96 00 - 11 1. Surfaces showing runs, laps, brush marks, telegraphing of surface imperfections or other defects will not be accepted. 2. Surfaces showing evidence of fading, chalking, blistering, delamination or other defects due to improper surface preparation, environmental controls or application will not be accepted. a. Epoxy surfaces showing evidence of chalking or amine blush shall be prepared and recoated as follows: 1) Solvent clean surfaces in accordance with SSPC-SP1 and abrasive blast in accordance with SSPC-SP7/ NACE No. 4. 2) Recoat with intermediate and finish coats in accordance with coating system specified herein. B. Provide protection for coated surfaces. 1. Surfaces showing soiling, staining, streaking, chipping, scratches, or other defects will not be accepted. C. Contractor Performed Testing: 1. Provide ongoing testing and inspection, including but not limited to the following: a. Measurement and recording of environmental conditions as specified herein. b. Measurement and recording of substrate conditions as specified herein. c. Thickness Testing: 1) Wet film thickness during application in accordance with ASTM D4414. 2) Dry Film Thickness (DFT) in accordance with SSPC-PA 2. 3) Engineer may measure coating thickness at any time during project to assure conformance with these Specifications. D. Instrumentation: 1. Provide instrumentation as necessary to measure and record atmospheric and substrate conditions, including but not limited to: a. Dry Film Thickness Gauge: 1) Ultrasonic: ASTM D6132. 2) Magnetic: ASTM B499. b. Wet Film Thickness Gauge: ASTM D4414. c. Sling Psychrometer: ASTM E337. d. Surface Temperature Gauge. e. Anemometer. f. Moisture Meter. g. Adhesion test apparatus: 1) Steel: ASTM D4541. 2) Concrete: ASTM D7234. E. Maintain Daily Records: 1. Record the following information during application: a. Date, starting time, end time, and all breaks taken by applicators. b. Air temperature. c. Relative humidity. d. Dew point. e. Moisture content and pH level of concrete or masonry substrates prior to coating. f. Surface temperature of substrate. g. Provisions utilized to maintain work area within manufacturer's recommended application parameters including temporary heating, ventilation, cooling, dehumidification and provisions utilized to mitigate wind-blown dust and debris from contaminating the wet coating. h. For outdoor coating, also record: 1) Sky condition. 2) Wind speed and direction. i. Record environmental conditions, substrate moisture content and surface temperature information not less than once every 4 hours during application. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents HIGH PERFORMANCE INDUSTRIAL COATINGS 09 96 00 - 12 1) Record hourly when temperatures are below 50 degrees F or above 100 degrees F. 2. Record the following information daily for the coating manufacturer's recommended curing period: a. Date and start time of cure period for each item or area. b. For outdoor coating, also record: 1) Sky conditions. 2) Wind speed and direction. 3) Air temperature. a) Dry Bulb. b) Wet Bulb. 4) Relative humidity. 5) Dew point. 6) Surface temperatures. c. Record environmental conditions not less than once every 4 hours. 1) Record hourly when temperatures are below 50 degrees F or above 100 degrees F. d. Provisions utilized to protect each item or area and to maintain areas within manufacturer's recommended curing parameters. 3. Format for daily record to be computer generated. F. Provide wet paint signs. 3.7 CLEANING A. Clean coating spattered surfaces. 1. Use care not to damage finished surfaces. B. Upon completion of coating, replace hardware, accessories, plates, fixtures, and similar items. C. Remove surplus materials, scaffolding, and debris. 3.8 COLOR SCHEDULE A. Piping: 1. Refer to Specification Section 10 14 00 for the piping system and banding material and refer to this Specification Section and this Schedule for the banding colors. 2. Building Piping Color Schedule: System Color Raw Sewage (RS) Light Brown Force Main (FM) Light Brown PVC Pressure Pipe Force Main (FM) Green (From Manufacturer) PVC Gravity Sewer (SS) Green (From Manufacturer) Vent (VT) Gray END OF SECTION Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 DIVI SION 10 SPECIALTIES Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 This page intentionally left blank. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents IDENTIFICATION DEVICES 10 14 00 - 1 SECTION 10 14 00 IDENTIFICATION DEVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Tag, tape and stenciling systems for equipment, piping, valves, pumps, ductwork and similar items. 2. Hazard and safety signs. B. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards: 1. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME): a. A13.1, Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems. 2. The International Society of Automation (ISA). 3. National Electrical Manufacturers Association/American National Standards Institute (NEMA/ANSI): a. Z535.1, Safety Color Code. b. Z535.2, Environmental and Facility Safety Signs. c. Z535.3, Criteria for Safety Symbols. d. Z535.4, Product Safety Signs and Labels. 4. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): a. 70, National Electrical Code (NEC). b. 704, Standard System for the Identification of Hazards of Materials for Emergency Response. 5. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA): a. 29 CFR 1910.145, Specification for Accident Prevention Signs and Tags. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. Product technical data including: a. Catalog information for all identification systems. b. Acknowledgement that products submitted meet requirements of standards referenced. 2. Identification register, listing all items in PART 3 of this Specification Section to be identified, type of identification system to be used, lettering, location and color. 3. Schedule of Hazard and Safety Signage indicating text and graphics. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. W.H. Brady Co. 2. Panduit. 3. Seton. 4. National Band and Tag Co. 5. Carlton Industries, Inc. 2.2 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Type A1 - Round Metal Tags: Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents IDENTIFICATION DEVICES 10 14 00 - 2 1. Materials: a. Aluminum or stainless steel. b. Stainless steel shall be used in corrosive environments. 2. Size: a. Diameter: 1-1/2 inches minimum. b. Thickness: 0.035 inches (20 GA) minimum. 3. Fabrication: a. 3/16 inches minimum mounting hole. b. Legend: Stamped and filled with black coloring. 4. Color: Natural. B. Type A2 - Rectangle Metal Tags: 1. Materials: Stainless steel. 2. Size: a. 3-1/2 inches x 1-1/2 inches minimum. b. Thickness: 0.036 inches (20 GA) minimum. 3. Fabrication: a. 3/16 inches minimum mounting hole. b. Legend: Stamped and filled with black coloring. 4. Color: Natural. C. Type A3 - Metal Tape Tags: 1. Materials: Aluminum or stainless steel. 2. Size: a. Width 1/2 inches minimum. b. Length as required by text. 3. Fabrication: a. 3/16 inches minimum mounting hole. b. Legend: Embossed. 4. Color: Natural. D. Type B1- Square Nonmetallic Tags: 1. Materials: Fiberglass reinforced plastic. 2. Size: a. Surface: 2 x 2 inches minimum. b. Thickness: 100 mils. 3. Fabrication: a. 3/16 inches mounting hole with metal eyelet. b. Legend: Preprinted and permanently embedded and fade resistant. 4. Color: a. Background: Manufacturer standard or as specified. b. Lettering: Black. E. Type B2 - Nonmetallic Signs: 1. Materials: Fiberglass reinforced or durable plastic. 2. Size: a. Surface: As required by text. b. Thickness: 60 mils minimum. 3. Fabrication: a. Rounded corners. b. Drilled holes in corners with grommets. c. Legend: Preprinted, permanently embedded and fade resistant for a 10 year minimum outdoor durability. 4. Color: a. Background: Manufacturer standard or as specified. b. Lettering: Black. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents IDENTIFICATION DEVICES 10 14 00 - 3 5. Standards for OSHA signs: NEMA/ANSI Z535.1, NEMA/ANSI Z535.2, NEMA/ANSI Z535.3, NEMA/ANSI Z535.4, OSHA 29 CFR 1910.145. F. Type C - Laminated Name Plates: 1. Materials: Phenolic or DR (high impact) acrylic. 2. Size: a. Surface: As required by text. b. Thickness: 1/16 inches. 3. Fabrication: a. Outdoor rated and UV resistant when installed outdoors. b. Two layers laminated. c. Legend: Engraved through top lamination into bottom lamination. d. Two drilled side holes, for screw mounting. 4. Color: Black top surface, white core, unless otherwise indicated. G. Type D - Self-Adhesive Tape Tags and Signs: 1. Materials: Vinyl tape or vinyl cloth. 2. Size: a. Surface: As required by text. b. Thickness: 5 mils minimum. 3. Fabrication: a. Indoor/Outdoor grade. b. Weather and UV resistant inks. c. Permanent adhesive. d. Legend: Preprinted. e. Wire markers to be self-laminating. 4. Color: White with black lettering or as specified. 5. Standards for OSHA signs: NEMA/ANSI Z535.1, NEMA/ANSI Z535.2, NEMA/ANSI Z535.3, NEMA/ANSI Z535.4, OSHA 29 CFR 1910.145. H. Type E - Heat Shrinkable Tape Tags: 1. Materials: Polyolefin. 2. Size: As required by text. 3. Fabrication: a. Legend: Preprinted. 4. Color: White background, black printing. I. Type F - Underground Warning Tape: 1. Materials: Polyethylene. 2. Size: a. 6 inches wide (minimum). b. Thickness: 3.5 mils. 3. Fabrication: a. Legend: Preprinted and permanently imbedded. b. Message continuous printed. c. Tensile strength: 1750 psi. 4. Color: As specified. J. Type G - Stenciling System: 1. Materials: a. Exterior type stenciling enamel. b. Either brushing grade or pressurized spray can form and grade. 2. Size: As required. 3. Fabrication: a. Legend: As required. 4. Color: Black or white for best contrast. K. Underground Tracer Wire: Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents IDENTIFICATION DEVICES 10 14 00 - 4 1. Materials: a. Wire: 1) 12 GA AWG. 2) Solid. b. Wire nuts: Waterproof type. c. Split bolts: Brass. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners: 1. Bead chain: #6 brass, aluminum or stainless steel. 2. Plastic strap: Nylon, urethane or polypropylene. 3. Screws: Self-tapping, stainless steel. 4. Adhesive, solvent activated. 2.4 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Where stenciled markers are provided, clean and retain stencils after completion and include in extra stock, along with required stock of paints and applicators. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION A. Install identification devices at specified locations. B. All identification devices to be printed by mechanical process, hand printing is not acceptable. C. Attach tags to equipment with sufficient surface or body area with solvent activated adhesive applied to back of each tag. D. Attach tags with 1/8 inches round or flat head screws to equipment without sufficient surface or body area, or porous surfaces. 1. Where attachment with screws should not or cannot penetrate substrate, attach with plastic strap. E. Single items of equipment enclosed in a housing or compartment to be tagged on outside of housing. 1. Several items of equipment mounted in housing to be individually tagged inside the compartment. F. Tracer Wire: 1. Attach to pipe at a maximum of 10 feet intervals with tape or tie-wraps. 2. Continuous pass from each valve box and above grade at each structure. 3. Coil enough wire at each valve box to extend wire a foot above the ground surface. 4. 1,000 feet maximum spacing between valve boxes. 5. If split bolts are used for splicing, wrap with electrical tape. 6. If wire nuts are used for splicing, knot wire at each splice point leaving 6 inches of wire for splicing. 7. Use continuous strand of wire between valve box where possible. a. Continuous length shall be no shorter than 100 feet. 3.2 SCHEDULES A. Hazard and Safety Signage: 1. Permit Required Confined Space signage: a. Tag Type: Type B2 - Nonmetallic Signs. b. Fastener: Screw or adhesive. c. Size: 10 inches x 14 inches. d. Location: As indicated on Drawings. e. Location: Field located as directed by Engineer. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents IDENTIFICATION DEVICES 10 14 00 - 5 1) Allowance: Provide 10 signs. f. Legend: 1) OSHA Danger sign. 2) Description of hazard: “PERMIT REQUIRED CONFINED SPACE DO NOT ENTER”. B. Process Systems: 1. General: a. Provide arrows and markers on piping. 1) At 20 feet maximum centers along continuous lines. 2) At changes in direction (route) or obstructions. 3) At valves, risers, "T" joints, machinery or equipment. 4) Where pipes pass through floors, walls, ceilings, cladding assemblies and like obstructions provide markers on both sides. b. Position markers on both sides of pipe with arrow markers pointing in flow direction. 1) If flow is in both directions use double headed arrow markers. c. Apply tapes and stenciling in uniform manner parallel to piping. 2. Trenches with piping: a. Tag type: Type F - Underground Warning Tape b. Location: Halfway between top of piping and finished grade. c. Letter height: 1-1/4 inches minimum. d. Storm and sanitary sewer lines: 1) Color: Green with black letters. 2) Legend: a) First line: “CAUTION CAUTION CAUTION” b) Second line: “BURIED SEWER LINE BELOW” 3. Valves and slide gates: a. Tag type: 1) Outdoor locations: Type B1 - Square Nonmetallic Tags. 2) Indoor noncorrosive: a) Type A1 - Round Metal Tags. b) Type B1 - Square Nonmetallic Tags. 3) Indoor corrosive: a) Stainless steel Type A1 - Round Metal Tags. b) Type B1 - Square Nonmetallic Tags. b. Fastener: 1) Type A1: Chain of the same material. 2) Type B1: Stainless steel chain. c. Color: Per ASME A13.1 corresponding to the piping system. d. Legend: 1) Letter height: 1/4 inches minimum. 2) Valve designation as indicated on the Drawings (e.g., “V-xxx”). 4. Process equipment (e.g., pumps, pump motors, blowers, air compressors, bar screens, clarifier drive mechanism, etc.): a. Tag type: 1) Type B2 - Nonmetallic Signs. 2) Type D - Self-Adhesive Tape Tags and Signs. 3) Type G - Stenciling System. b. Fastener: 1) Self. 2) Screws. 3) Adhesive. c. Legend: 1) Letter height: 1/2 inches minimum. 2) Equipment designation as indicated on the Drawings (e.g., “Primary Sludge Pump P-xxx”). Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents IDENTIFICATION DEVICES 10 14 00 - 6 5. Piping systems: a. Tag type: 1) Outdoor locations: Type G - Stenciling System. 2) Indoor locations: a) Type D - Self-Adhesive Tape Tags and Signs. b) Type G - Stenciling System. b. Fastener: Self. c. Color: Per ASME A13.1. d. Legend: 1) Letter height: Manufacturers standard for the pipe diameter. 2) Mark piping in accordance with ASME A13.1. 3) Use piping designation as indicated on the Drawings. 4) Arrow: Single arrow. 6. Equipment that starts automatically: a. Tag type: 1) Type B2 - Nonmetallic Signs. 2) Type D - Self-Adhesive Tape Tags and Signs. b. Fastener: 1) Type B2 - Screw or adhesive. 2) Type D - Self. c. Size: 5 inches x 7 inches d. Location: Equipment name. e. Legend: 1) OSHA Warning Sign. 2) Description of Warning: “THIS MACHINE STARTS AUTOMATICALLY”. C. Instrumentation Systems: 1. Instrumentation Equipment (e.g., flow control valves, primary elements, etc.): a. Tag type: 1) Outdoor locations: Type B1 - Square Nonmetallic Tags. 2) Indoor noncorrosive: a) Type A1 - Round Metal Tags. b) Type B1 - Square Nonmetallic Tags. 3) Indoor corrosive: a) Stainless steel Type A1 - Round Metal Tags. b) Type B1 - Square Nonmetallic Tags. b. Fastener: 1) Type A1: Chain of the same material. 2) Type B1: Stainless steel chain. c. Legend: 1) Letter height: 1/4 inches minimum. 2) Equipment ISA designation as indicated on the Drawings (e.g., “FIT-xxx”). 2. Enclosure for instrumentation and control equipment, (e.g., PLC control panels, etc.): a. Tag type: Type C - Phenolic Name Plates. b. Fastener: Screws. c. Legend: 1) Letter height: 1/2 inches minimum. 2) Equipment name (e.g., "PLC CONTROL PANEL PCP-xxx"). 3. Components inside equipment enclosure, (e.g., PLC’s, control relays, contactors, and timers): a. Tag type: Type D - Self-Adhesive Tape Tags. b. Fastener: Self. c. Legend: 1) Letter height: 3/16 inches minimum. 2) Description or function of component (e.g., "PLC-xxx” or “CR-xxx"). Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents IDENTIFICATION DEVICES 10 14 00 - 7 4. Through enclosure door mounted components (e.g., selector switches, controller digital displays, etc.): a. Tag type: Type C - Phenolic Name Plates. b. Fastener: Screws. c. Legend: 1) Letter height: 1/4 inches minimum. 2) Component ISA tag number as indicated on the Drawings (e.g., “HS-xxx”). D. HVAC Systems: 1. General: a. Provide arrows and markers on ducts. 1) At 20 feet maximum centers along continuous lines. 2) At changes in direction (route) or obstructions. 3) At dampers, risers, branches, machinery or equipment. 4) Where ducts pass through floors, walls, ceilings, cladding assemblies and like obstructions provide markers on both sides. b. Position markers on both sides of duct with arrow markers pointing in flow direction. 1) If flow is in both directions use double headed arrow markers. c. Apply tapes and stenciling in uniform manner parallel to ducts. 2. HVAC Equipment (e.g., unit heaters, exhaust fans, air handlers, etc.): a. Tag type: 1) Type B2 - Nonmetallic Signs. 2) Type C - Phenolic Name Plates. b. Fastener: Screws. c. Legend: 1) Letter height: 1 inch minimum. 2) Equipment designation as indicated on the Drawings (e.g., "EF-xxx"). 3. Enclosure for instrumentation and control equipment, (e.g., fan control panels, etc.): a. Tag type: Type C - Phenolic Name Plates. b. Fastener: Screws. c. Legend: 1) Letter height: 1/2 inches minimum. 2) Equipment designation as indicated on the Drawings (e.g., "FAN CONTROL PANEL FCP-xxx"). 4. Wall mounted thermostats: a. Tag type: Type D - Self-Adhesive Tape Tags and Signs. b. Fastener: Self. c. Legend: 1) Letter height: 3/16 inches minimum. 2) Description of equipment controlled (e.g., "UH-xxx" or AHU-xxx"). 5. Components inside equipment enclosure, (e.g., controller’s, control relays, contactors, and timers): a. Tag type: Type D - Self-Adhesive Tape Tags and Signs. b. Fastener: Self. c. Legend: 1) Letter height: 3/16 inches minimum. 2) Description or function of component (e.g., "CR-xxx"). 6. Through enclosure door mounted equipment (e.g., selector switches, controller digital displays, etc.): a. Tag type: Type C - Phenolic Name Plates. b. Fastener: Screws. c. Legend: 1) Letter height: 1/4 inches minimum. 2) Component tag number as indicated on the Drawings or as defined by contractor (e.g., “HS-xxx”). Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents IDENTIFICATION DEVICES 10 14 00 - 8 E. Electrical Systems: 1. Trenches with ductbanks, direct-buried conduit, or direct-buried wire and cable. a. Tag type: Type F - Underground Warning Tape. b. Letter height: 1-1/4 inches minimum. c. Location: 1) Where trench is 12 inches or more below finished grade: In trench 6 inches below finished grade. 2) Where trench is less than 12 inches below finished grade: In trench 3 inches below finished grade. d. Electrical power (e.g., low and medium voltage): 1) Color: Red with black letters. 2) Legend: a) First line: “CAUTION CAUTION CAUTION”. b) Second line: “BURIED ELECTRIC LINE BELOW”. e. Communications (e.g., telephone, instrumentation, LAN, SCADA): 1) Color: Orange with black letters. 2) Legend: a) First line: “CAUTION CAUTION CAUTION”. b) Second line: “BURIED COMMUNICATION LINE BELOW”. 2. Switchgear, switchboards and motor control centers: a. Tag type: Type C - Phenolic Name Plates. b. Fastener: Screws. c. Main equipment legend: 1) Letter height: a) First line: 1 inch minimum. b) Subsequent lines: 3/8 inches minimum. 2) First line: Equipment name (e.g., "MAIN SWITCHBOARD MSBxxx"). 3) Second line: a) Source of power (e.g., "FED FROM MCCxxx LOCATED IN ROOM xxx"). b) Include the building name or number if the source is in another building. 4) Third line: System voltage and phase (e.g., “480/277 V, 3PH”). 5) Fourth line: Date installed (e.g., “INSTALLED JULY 20xx”). d. Main and feeder device legend: 1) Letter height: 3/8 inches minimum. 2) Description of load (e.g., “MAIN DISCONNECT”, "PUMP Pxxx" or "PANELBOARD HPxxx"). 3. Panelboards and transformers: a. Tag type: Type C - Phenolic Name Plates. b. Fastener: Screws. c. Legend: 1) Letter height: a) First line: 3/8 inches minimum. b) Subsequent lines: 3/16 inches minimum. 2) First line: Equipment name (e.g., "PANELBOARD LPxxx" or "TRANSFORMER Txxx"). 3) Second line (panelboards only): System voltage and phase (e.g., “208/120V, 3PH”). 4) Third line: a) Source of power (e.g., "FED FROM MCCxxx LOCATED IN ROOM xxx"). b) Include the building name or number if the source is in another building. 5) Fourth line: Date installed (e.g., “INSTALLED JULY 20xx”). 4. Transfer switches: a. Tag type: Type C - Phenolic Name Plates. b. Fastener: Screws. c. Legend: Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents IDENTIFICATION DEVICES 10 14 00 - 9 1) Letter height: a) First line: 3/8 inches minimum. b) Subsequent lines: 3/16 inches minimum. 2) First line: Equipment name (e.g., "AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH ATSxxx"). 3) Second line: Normal source of power (e.g., "NORMAL SOURCE FED FROM MCCxxx"). 4) Third line: Emergency source of power (e.g., "EMERGENCY SOURCE FED FROM SGENxxx"). 5) Fourth line: Date installed (e.g., “INSTALLED JULY 20xx”). 5. Safety switches, separately mounted circuit breakers and motor starters, VFD’s, etc.: a. Tag type: Type C - Phenolic Name Plates. b. Fastener: Screws. c. Legend: 1) Letter height: 1/4 inches minimum. 2) First line: Description of load equipment is connected to (e.g., "PUMP Pxxx"). 3) Second line: a) Source of power (e.g., "FED FROM MCCxxx LOCATED IN ROOM xxx"). b) The source of power room number is only required when there are multiple electrical rooms, if the source is in another building, the building name or number shall be used. 6. Enclosure for instrumentation and control equipment, (e.g., lighting control panels, etc.): a. Tag type: Type C - Phenolic Name Plates. b. Fastener: Screws. c. Legend: 1) Letter height: 1/2 inches minimum. 2) Equipment name (e.g., "LIGHTING CONTROL PANEL LCPxxx"). 7. Components inside equipment enclosures (e.g., circuit breakers, fuses, control power transformers, control relays, contactors, timers, etc.): a. Tag type: Type D - Self-Adhesive Tape Tags and Signs. b. Fastener: Self. c. Legend: 1) Letter height: 3/16 inches minimum. 2) Description or function of component (e.g., "M-xxx”, “CR-xxx” or “TR-xxx"). 8. Through enclosure door mounted equipment (e.g., selector switches, controller digital displays, etc.): a. Tag type: Type C - Phenolic Name Plates. b. Fastener: Screws. c. Legend: 1) Letter height: 1/4 inches minimum. 2) Component tag number as indicated on the Drawings or as defined by contractor (e.g., “HS-xxx”). 9. Conductors in control panels and in pull or junction boxes where multiple circuits exist. a. Tag type: Type D - Self-Adhesive Tape Tags b. Fastener: Self. c. Tag conductor at both ends. d. Legend: 1) Letter height: 1/8 inches minimum. 2) Circuit number or wire number as scheduled on the Drawings or as furnished with the equipment. 10. Conductors in handholes and manholes. a. Tag type: Type A3 - Metal Tape Tags. b. Fastener: Nylon strap. c. Tag conductor at both ends. d. Legend: Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents IDENTIFICATION DEVICES 10 14 00 - 10 1) Letter height: 1/8 inches minimum. 2) Circuit number or wire number as scheduled on the Drawings. 11. Grounding conductors associated with grounding electrode system in accordance with the following: a. Tag type: Type D - Self-Adhesive Tape Tags. b. Fastener: Self. c. Legend: 1) Letter height: 1/8 inches minimum. 2) Function of conductor (e.g., "MAIN BONDING JUMPER", "TO GROUND RING", "TO MAIN WATER PIPE"). 12. Flash protection for switchboards, panelboards, industrial control panels and motor control centers: a. Tag type: Type D - Self-Adhesive Tape Signs. b. Fastener: Self. c. Legend: Per NFPA 70. 13. Equipment where more than one voltage source is present: a. Tag type: 1) Type B2 - Nonmetallic Signs. 2) Type D - Self-Adhesive Tape Signs. b. Fastener: 1) Screw or adhesive. 2) Self. c. Size: 1-3/4 inches x 2-1/2 inches. d. Location: Exterior face of enclosure or cubical. e. Legend: 1) OSHA Danger Sign. 2) Description of Danger: “MULTIPLE VOLTAGE SOURCES”. END OF SECTION Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 DIVI SION 26 ELECTRICAL Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 This page intentionally left blank. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 26 05 00 - 1 SECTION 26 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Basic requirements for electrical systems. B. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Section 01 61 03 - Common Work Results for Equipment. 2. Section 10 14 00 - Identification Devices. 3. Section 26 05 19 - Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables. 4. Section 26 05 33 - Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Definitions 1. For the purposes of providing materials and installing electrical work the following definitions shall be used. a. Outdoor area: Exterior locations where the equipment is normally exposed to the weather and including below grade structures, such as vaults, manholes, handholes and in-ground pump stations. b. Architecturally finished interior area: Offices, laboratories, conference rooms, restrooms, corridors and other similar occupied spaces. c. Non-architecturally finished interior area: Pump, chemical, mechanical, electrical rooms and other similar process type rooms. d. Highly corrosive and corrosive area: Areas identified on the Drawings where there is a varying degree of spillage or splashing of corrosive materials such as water, wastewater or chemical solutions; or chronic exposure to corrosive, caustic or acidic agents, chemicals, chemical fumes or chemical mixtures. e. Hazardous areas: Class I, II or III areas as defined in NFPA 70. f. Shop fabricated: Manufactured or assembled equipment for which a UL test procedure has not been established. B. Referenced Standards: 1. Aluminum Association (AA): a. ADM, Aluminum Design Manual. 2. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC): a. Steel Construction Manual. 3. American National Standards Institute (ANSI). 4. ASTM International (ASTM): a. A36/A36M, Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel. b. A123/A123M, Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. c. A153/A153M, Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. 5. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (IEEE): a. C2, National Electrical Safety Code (NESC). 6. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): a. 70, National Electrical Code (NEC). 7. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): 8. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL). C. Products to be listed by a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) in accordance with applicable product standards. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 26 05 00 - 2 1. Applicable product standards including, but not limited to, ANSI, FM, IEEE, NEMA and UL. 2. NRTL includes, but is not limited to, CSA Group Testing and Certification (CS), FM Approvals LLC (FM), Intertek Testing Services NA, Inc. (ETL), and Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL). 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. See Specification Section 01 61 03 and individual specification sections for submittal requirements for products defined as equipment. 2. General requirements: a. Provide manufacturer's technical information on products to be used, including product descriptive bulletin. b. Include data sheets that include manufacturer's name and product model number. 1) Clearly identify all optional accessories. c. Acknowledgement that products are NRTL listed or are constructed utilizing NRTL recognized components. d. Manufacturer's delivery, storage, handling and installation instructions. e. Product installation details. f. Short Circuit Current Rating (SCCR) nameplate marking per NFPA 70, include any required calculations. g. See individual specification sections for any additional requirements. 3. Fabrication and/or layout drawings: a. Concrete and reinforcing steel, per Division 03 requirements. B. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: 1. See Specification Section 01 78 23 for requirements for: a. The mechanics and administration of the submittal process. b. The content process of Operation and Maintenance Manuals. C. When a Specification Section includes products specified in another Specification Section, each Specification Section shall have the required Shop Drawing transmittal form per Specification Section 01 33 00 and all Specification Sections shall be submitted simultaneously. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect nameplates on electrical equipment to prevent defacing. 1.5 AREA DESIGNATIONS A. Designation of an area will determine the NEMA rating of the electrical equipment enclosures, types of conduits and installation methods to be used in that area. 1. Outdoor areas: a. Wet. b. Also, corrosive and/or hazardous when specifically designated on the Drawings or in the Specifications. 2. Indoor areas: a. Dry. b. Also, wet, corrosive and/or hazardous when specifically designated on the Drawings or in the Specifications. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, refer to specific Electrical Specification Sections and specific material paragraphs below for acceptable manufacturers. B. Provide all components of a similar type by one (1) manufacturer. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 26 05 00 - 3 2.2 MATERIALS A. Electrical Equipment Support Pedestals and/or Racks: 1. Manufacturers: a. Modular strut: 1) Unistrut Building Systems. 2) B-Line by Eaton. 3) Globe Strut. 4) Superstrut by Thomas & Betts. 2. Material requirements: a. Modular strut: 1) Galvanized steel: ASTM A123/123M or ASTM A153/A153M. 2) Stainless steel: AISI Type 316. 3) PVC coated galvanized steel: ASTM A123/A123M or ASTM A153/A153M and 20 mil PVC coating. 4) Aluminum: AA Type 6063-T6. b. Structural members (e.g., I beams, L and C channels): 1) Galvanized steel: ASTM A36/A36M steel with galvanizing per ASTM A123/A123M. 2) Aluminum: AA Type 6061-T6 or 6063-T6. c. Mounting plates: 1) Galvanized steel: ASTM A36/A36M steel with galvanizing per ASTM A123/A123M. 2) Aluminum: AA Type 6063-T6. d. Mounting hardware: 1) Galvanized steel. 2) Stainless steel. e. Anchorage per Specification Section 03 15 19. f. Concrete and reinforcing steel: See Division 03 specifications. B. Equipment pads (interior and exterior): 1. Concrete and reinforcing steel: See Division 03 specifications. C. Field touch-up of galvanized surfaces. 1. Zinc-rich primer. a. One coat, 3.0 mils, ZRC by ZRC Products. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install and wire all equipment, including pre-purchased equipment, and perform all tests necessary to assure conformance to the Drawings and Specification Sections and ensure that equipment is ready and safe for energization. B. Install equipment in accordance with the requirements of: 1. NFPA 70. 2. IEEE C2. 3. The manufacturer's instructions. C. In general, conduit routing is not shown on the Drawings. 1. The Contractor is responsible for routing all conduits including those shown on one-line and control block diagrams and home runs shown on floor plans. 2. Conduit routings and stub-up locations that are shown are approximate; exact routing to be as required for equipment furnished and field conditions. D. When complete branch circuiting is not shown on the Drawings: Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 26 05 00 - 4 1. A homerun indicating panelboard name and circuit number will be shown and the circuit number will be shown adjacent to the additional devices (e.g., light fixture and receptacles) on the same circuit. 2. The Contractor is to furnish and install all conduit and conductors required for proper operation of the circuit. 3. The indicated home run conduit and conductor size shall be used for the entire branch circuit. 4. See Section 26 05 19 for combining multiple branch circuits in a common conduit. E. Do not use equipment that exceed dimensions or reduce clearances indicated on the Drawings or as required by the NFPA 70. F. Install equipment plumb, square and true with construction features and securely fastened. G. Install electrical equipment, including pull and junction boxes, minimum of 6 inches from process, gas, air and water piping and equipment. H. Install equipment so it is readily accessible for operation and maintenance, is not blocked or concealed and does not interfere with normal operation and maintenance requirements of other equipment. I. Device Mounting Schedule: 1. Unless indicated otherwise on the Drawings, mounting heights are as indicated below: a. Light switch (to center): 46 inches. b. Receptacle in architecturally finished areas (to center): 18 inches. c. Receptacle on exterior wall of building (to center): 18 inches. d. Receptacle in non-architecturally finished areas (to center): 46 inches. e. Separately mounted motor starter (to center of operating handle): 54 inches. f. Pushbutton or selector switch control station (to center): 46 inches. g. Panelboard (to top): 72 inches. J. Avoid interference of electrical equipment operation and maintenance with structural members, building features and equipment of other trades. 1. When it is necessary to adjust the intended location of electrical equipment, unless specifically dimensioned or detailed, the Contractor may make adjustments of up to 6 inches in equipment location with the Engineer's approval. K. Provide electrical equipment support system per the following area designations: 1. Dry areas: a. Galvanized system consisting of galvanized steel channels and fittings, nuts and hardware. b. Field touch-up cut ends and scratches of galvanized components with the specified primer during the installation, before rust appears. 2. Wet areas: a. Galvanized system consisting of galvanized steel channels and fittings, nuts and hardware. b. Field touch-up cut ends and scratches of galvanized components with the specified primer during the installation, before rust appears. L. Provide all necessary anchoring devices and supports rated for the equipment load based on dimensions and weights verified from approved submittals, or as recommended by the manufacturer. 1. See Specification Section 03 15 19. 2. Do not cut, or weld to, building structural members. 3. Do not mount safety switches or other equipment to equipment enclosures, unless enclosure mounting surface is properly braced to accept mounting of external equipment. M. Provide non-metallic corrosion resistant spacers to maintain 1/4 inches separation between metallic equipment and/or metallic equipment supports and mounting surface in wet areas, on below grade walls and on walls of liquid containment or processing areas such as wet wells, etc. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 26 05 00 - 5 N. Do not place equipment fabricated from aluminum in direct contact with earth or concrete. O. Screen or seal all openings into equipment mounted outdoors to prevent the entrance of rodents and insects. P. Do not use materials that may cause the walls or roof of a building to discolor or rust. Q. Identify electrical equipment and components in accordance with Specification Section 10 14 00. R. Provide field markings and/or documentation of available short-circuit current (available fault current) and related information for equipment as required by the NFPA 70 and other applicable codes. S. Provide equipment or control panels with Short Circuit Current Rating (SCCR) labeling as required by NFPA 70 and other applicable codes. 1. Determine the SCCR rating by one of the following methods: a. Method 1: SCCR rating meets or exceeds the available fault current of the source equipment when indicated on the Drawings. b. Method 2: SCCR rating meets or exceeds the source equipment’s Amp Interrupting Current (AIC) rating as indicated on the Drawings. c. Method 3: SCCR rating meets or exceeds the calculated available short circuit current at the control panel. 2. The source equipment is the switchboard, panelboard, motor control center or similar equipment where the equipment or control panel circuit originates. 3. For Method 3, provide calculations justifying the SCCR rating. Utilize source equipment available fault current or AIC rating as indicated on the Drawings. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Verify exact rough-in location and dimensions for connection to electrified equipment, provided by others. 1. See Specification Section 01 73 20 for openings and penetrations in structures. B. Replace equipment and systems found inoperative or defective and re-test. C. Cleaning: 1. See Specification Section 01 74 00. D. The protective coating integrity of support structures and equipment enclosures shall be maintained. 1. Repair galvanized components utilizing a zinc rich paint. 2. Repair painted components utilizing touch up paint provided by or approved by the manufacturer. 3. Repair surfaces which will be inaccessible after installation prior to installation. 4. See Specification Section 26 05 33 for requirements for conduits and associated accessories. E. Replace nameplates damaged during installation. 3.4 DEMONSTRATION A. Demonstrate equipment in accordance with Specification Section 01 75 00. END OF SECTION Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 This page intentionally left blank. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents MOTORS 26 05 09 - 1 SECTION 26 05 09 MOTORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Induction motors. B. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Section 01 61 03 - Common Work Results for Equipment. 2. Section 26 05 26 - Grounding. 3. Section 26 08 13 - Acceptance Testing. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards: 1. American Bearing Manufacturers Association (ABMA). 2. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (IEEE): 3. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): a. MG 1, Motors and Generators. 4. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): a. 70, National Electrical Code (NEC). 5. Underwriters Laboratories (UL): a. 674, Electric Motors and Generators for Use in Hazardous (Classified) Locations. b. 1836, Outline of Investigation for Electric Motors and Generators for Use in Class I, Division 2, Class I, Zone 2, Class II, Division 2 and Zone 22 Hazardous (Classified) Locations. B. Miscellaneous: 1. When motors are furnished with driven equipment, the driven equipment supplier shall be responsible for assembling the motor and driven equipment as a complete unit, correctly aligned and coupled with the coupling or sheave specified on the driven equipment data sheet, and designing for vibration, special, or unbalanced forces resulting from equipment operation. a. See Specification Section 01 61 03 for requirements. 2. Variable speed equipment applications: The driven equipment manufacturer shall have single source responsibility for coordination of the equipment and VFD system and ensure their compatibility. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Inverter Duty Motor: An AC induction motor complying with all requirements of NEMA MG 1 Part 31 for definite-purpose inverter-fed motors. B. Abbreviations: 1. DPFG - Dripproof Fully Guarded. 2. ODP - Open Dripproof. 3. RTD - Resistance Temperature Detector. 4. TEFC - Totally Enclosed Fan Cooled. 5. TENV - Totally Enclosed Non-ventilated. 6. WP-I - Weather Protected Type I. 7. WP-II - Weather Protected Type II. 8. Motor controllers: a. FVNR - Full Voltage Non-Reversing. b. RVSS - Reduced Voltage Solid State. c. VFD - Variable Frequency Drive. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents MOTORS 26 05 09 - 2 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. Product technical data: a. Identify each motor by driven machine identification. b. Motor manufacturer and model number. c. Complete motor nameplate data. d. Weight. e. NEMA design type. f. Enclosure type. g. Frame size. h. Winding insulation class and temperature rise. i. Starts per hour. j. Performance data: k. Thermal protection system including recommended alarm and trip settings for winding and bearing RTDs. 2. Fabrication drawings: a. Dimensioned outline Drawing. b. Connection diagrams including accessories (strip heaters, thermal protection, etc.). 3. Certifications: a. When utilized with a VFD or reduced voltage starter, certify that motor and driven equipment are compatible. 4. Test reports: a. Motor test reports for all testing required in this Specification Section. B. Contract Closeout Information: 1. Operation and Maintenance Data: a. See Specification Section 01 78 23 for requirements for the mechanics, administration, and the content of Operation and Maintenance Manual submittals. 2. Installation instructions. 3. Operation and maintenance instructions. 4. Recommended spare parts list. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect equipment during shipment, handling, and storage by suitable boxes, crates, or other complete enclosures. 1. Protect equipment from exposure to elements and keep thoroughly dry. B. Protect painted surfaces against impact, abrasion, discoloration, and other damage. 1. Repaint damaged painted surfaces to satisfaction of Engineer. C. Store all motors in a clean and dry indoor location until final installation. D. Where space heaters are provided in motors, provide temporary electrical power and operate heaters during storage and after motors are installed in permanent location until equipment is placed in service. E. For storage longer than one month, see manufacturer's storage instructions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. ABB Baldor-Reliance. 2. Marathon. 3. Siemens. 4. TECO-Westinghouse Motor Company. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents MOTORS 26 05 09 - 3 5. Toshiba U.S. 6. Toshiba Mitsubishi-Electric Industrial Systems Corporation (TMEIC). 7. U.S. Motors by Nidec Motor Corporation. 8. WEG. 2.2 EQUIPMENT A. General Requirements: 1. Standards: NEMA MG 1. 2. Identify each motor by the driven machine identification. 3. An embossed or engraved stainless steel nameplate, with the required NFPA 70 and NEMA data, to be permanently attached to the motor. 4. Maximum motor loading shall not exceed motor nameplate horsepower rating, exclusive of service factor. 5. All motors shall be sized to carry continuously all loads, which may be imposed through their full range of operation. 6. Altitude: For applications above 3300 feet, motors to be specifically designed and certified for operation at the specified altitude. 7. NEMA MG 1, Design B (unless otherwise required), constant speed squirrel-cage induction type having normal starting torque with low starting current. 8. Suitable for the starting method indicated (e.g., full voltage, autotransformer, solid state reduced voltage, VFD, etc.). 9. Where frequent starting occurs, design for frequent starting duty equivalent to duty service required by driven equipment. 10. Lifting devices: Motors weighing 265 pounds or more shall have suitable lifting eyes for installation and removal. 11. Grounding: a. Lug suitable to terminate ground wire in terminal box, sized as indicated on the Drawings. b. Frame ground pad on medium voltage induction motors. 12. Stator windings: Copper. 13. Rotor cage: Aluminum or copper. 14. Motor leads shall be non-wicking with permanent identifiers. 15. Totally enclosed motor to have one-way breather drains. 16. Efficiency: a. Meet NEMA MG 1 (NEMA Premium) efficiencies. b. If motor type, horsepower or speed is not included in the NEMA requirements for NEMA Premium, provide manufacturers "premium energy efficient" design. 17. Power factor: a. Minimum of 80% lagging at full load, except on motors with speed slower than 900 rpm. b. Power factor correction capacitors to be utilized when indicated on the Drawings. 18. Service factor: a. 100 hp or less: 1.15. b. Inverter duty: 1.0. 19. Standards: NEMA MG 1 UL 674 2.3 FRACTIONAL INDUCTION MOTORS A. Electrical Ratings: 1. Appropriate for the voltage system indicated, single phase, 60 Hz. 2. Dual voltage rated motors (e.g., 115/230 V) are acceptable, provided all leads are brought out to the terminal box and permanently marked. B. Enclosure: TENV or TEFC, rolled steel enclosure permitted. C. Bearings: Lubricated-for-Life ball bearings. D. Insulation: Class F insulation with temperature rise not to exceed the insulation class. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents MOTORS 26 05 09 - 4 E. Thermal Protection: Integral manual or automatic reset thermal protector. 2.4 INDUCTION MOTORS, 600 VOLT AND LESS A. Horizontal Shaft: 1. Electrical rating: a. Appropriate for the voltage system indicated, 3 PH, 60 Hz. b. Dual voltage rated motors (e.g., 230/460 V) are acceptable, provided all leads are brought out to the terminal box and permanently marked. 2. Enclosure: a. Cast iron (exception: fan covers can be steel). b. Type: DPFG, TEFC, WP-I or WP-II as indicated in the schedule. 3. Terminal box: a. Gasketed. b. Diagonally split. c. Field adjustable in 90 degrees increments. d. Oversized to accept the required conductors and conduits. e. Located on “F1” side unless specifically indicated to be on the “F2” side. f. Separate terminal box with terminal blocks for winding thermal protection devices (RTD and thermocouples). 4. Bearings: a. 5 hp and less: Lubricated-for-Life ball bearings. b. Greater than 5 hp: 1) Relubricatable. 2) Antifriction. 3) Minimum rated ABMA L-10 life of 10 years or 100,000 hours. 5. Insulation: a. Class F insulation with Class B temperature rise. b. Two cycles of vacuum pressure impregnated (VPI) with epoxy resin. 6. Accessories: See the ACCESSORIES Article in PART 2 and the SCHEDULES Article in PART 3. 7. Modifications: a. Inverter duty: 1) At a minimum, applied to motors connected to a VFD. 2) Windings insulated for 1600 peak volts and voltage rise times of 0.1 microseconds. 3) Nameplate identification of meeting NEMA MG 1 Part 31 requirements. 4) Have the following minimum turndown ratio without the use of a blower to provide continuous supply of cooling air over the motor. a) Variable torque: 10:1. b) Constant torque: 6:1. 5) Insulated drive end bearing on all motors. 6) Motors 100 hp and larger, insulted non-drive and bearings. 7) Shaft grounding ring on all motors: a) Factory installed, maintenance free, circumferential, bearing protection ring with conductive microfiber shaft contacting material. b) Electro Static Technology AEGIS SGR Bearing Protection Ring or approved equal. b. Severe duty: 1) Standard: IEEE 841. 2) All cast iron enclosure. 3) Terminal box threaded and gasketed. 4) Internal and external epoxy base paint system. 5) Drain and breather. B. Vertical Solid or Hollow Shaft: 1. Electrical rating: a. Appropriate for the voltage system indicated, 3 PH, 60 Hz. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents MOTORS 26 05 09 - 5 b. Dual voltage rated motors (e.g., 230/460 V) are acceptable, provided all leads are brought out to the terminal box and permanently marked. 2. Enclosure: a. Cast iron. b. Type: DPFG, TEFC, WP-I or WP-II as indicated in the schedule. 3. Terminal box: a. Gasketed. b. Diagonally split. c. Oversized to accept the required conductors and conduits. d. Separate terminal box with terminal blocks for winding thermal protection devices. 4. Bearings (Solid Shaft): a. Relubricatable. b. Antifriction. c. Minimum rated AMBA L-10 life of 10 years or 100,000 hours. 5. Bearings (Hollow Shaft): a. Relubricatable. b. Antifriction. c. Oil or grease lubricated thrust bearings. d. Grease lubricated guide bearings. e. Minimum rated ABMA L-10 life of 10 years or 100,000 hours. 6. Insulation: a. Class F insulation with Class B temperature rise. 7. Accessories: See the ACCESSORIES Article in PART 2 and the SCHEDULES Article in PART 3. 8. Modifications: a. Inverter duty: 1) At a minimum, applied to motors connected to a VFD. 2) Windings insulated for 1600 peak volts and voltage rise times of 0.1 microseconds. 3) Nameplate identification of meeting NEMA MG 1 Part 31 requirements. 4) Have the following minimum turndown ratio without the use of a blower to provide continuous supply of cooling air over the motor. a) Variable torque: 10:1. b) Constant torque: 6:1. 5) Insulated drive end bearing on all motors. 6) Motors 100 hp and larger the non-drive end shall have an insulted bearing carrier. 7) Shaft grounding ring on all motors: a) Factory installed, maintenance free, circumferential, bearing protection ring with conductive microfiber shaft contacting material. b) Electro Static Technology AEGIS SGR Bearing Protection Ring or approved equal. b. Severe duty: 1) Standard: IEEE 841. 2) All cast iron enclosure. 3) Terminal box threaded and gasketed. 4) Internal and external epoxy base paint system. 5) Drain and breather. 2.5 INDUCTION MOTORS, GREATER THAN 600 VOLT A. Same as Induction Motors, 600 Volt and Less except for the following: 1. Windings: Form wound. 2. Insulation: a. Vacuum Pressure Impregnation (VPI) or Continuous Resin Flow Impregnation (CRFI). b. Epoxy encapsulated. 3. NEMA MG 1 Type II terminal housing suitable for shielded cable terminations. 4. Bearing RTDs. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents MOTORS 26 05 09 - 6 5. Bearing vibration detectors. 6. Accessory leads wired to separate terminal boxes. a. Separate terminal boxes or boxes with a barrier shall be used to separate accessories leads of 50 V and less and accessories leads of higher voltages. 2.6 ACCESSORIES A. Thermal Protection: 1. Thermostats: a. One winding thermostat per phase for shutdown. b. Two bearing oil thermostats for alarm and shutdown. c. Snap action, bi-metallic, temperature-actuated switch type. d. Normally closed, wired in series. e. Automatic reset. f. Switch point shall be pre-calibrated by the manufacturer. 2. Thermistors: a. One winding thermostat per phase for shutdown mounted in end turns. b. Positive temperature coefficient type. c. Normally closed, wired in series. d. 115 V rated. 3. RTDs: a. Two winding RTDs per phase. b. Two bearing RTD per bearing. c. 100 OHM platinum. B. Space Heaters: 1. Silicone rubber strip type, 120 V rated. 2. Provided on: a. All motors 10 hp and larger mounted outdoors. b. Indoor motors in humid environments as indicated. 2.7 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Test motors in accordance with NEMA, IEEE and manufacturer procedures. 1. The test shall include but not necessarily be limited to the following: a. Routine test: 1) No-load current and speed at rated voltage and frequency. 2) Locked rotor current. 3) Winding resistance. 4) Vibration check. 5) High potential. b. Complete test (in addition to the routine tests): 1) Rated load temperature rise. 2) Winding resistance. 3) Slip test, measured in percent slip. 4) Locked rotor amperes (3 PH, full voltage). 5) Locked rotor torque. 6) Breakdown torque. 7) Efficiencies tabulated at 100, 75, and 50% of full load. 8) Power factor tabulated at 100, 75, and 50% of full load. B. Motors to be tested: 1. As indicated in the schedule. 2. All motors, at a minimum, to receive a routine test. C. The Owner reserves the right to select and have tested any motor included within the project. 1. If motor passes testing requirements, the Owner shall be responsible for any shipping and testing costs incurred. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents MOTORS 26 05 09 - 7 2. Costs shall be determined by current freight rates and manufacturer's published rates at the time of the test. 3. If motor fails test, Supplier shall be responsible for all costs incurred. 4. If two successive motors fail the test, the Owner has the right to reject any or all motors from that manufacturer. 5. Notify the Owner a minimum of 14 days in advance of the testing. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Ground all motors in accordance with Specification Section 26 05 26. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Acceptance Testing: See Specification Section 01 61 03. END OF SECTION Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 This page intentionally left blank. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 26 05 19 - 1 SECTION 26 05 19 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Material and installation requirements for: a. Building wire. b. Power cable. c. Control cable. d. Shielded VFD cable. e. Instrumentation cable. f. Fiber optic cable. g. Wire connectors. h. Insulating tape. i. Pulling lubricant. B. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Section 26 05 00 - Common Work Results for Electrical. 2. Section 26 08 13 - Acceptance Testing. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards: 1. Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA): a. S-58-679, Standard for Control Cable Conductor Identification. 2. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): a. ICS 4, Industrial Control and Systems: Terminal Blocks. 3. National Electrical Manufacturers Association/Insulated Cable Engineers Association (NEMA/ICEA): a. WC 57/S-73-532, Standard for Control Cables. b. WC 70/S-95-658, Non-Shielded Power Cables Rated 2000 Volts or Less for the Distribution of Electrical Energy. 4. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): a. 70, National Electrical Code (NEC). b. 262, Standard Method of Test for Flame Travel and Smoke of Wires and Cables for Use in Air-Handling Spaces. 5. Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic Industries Alliance/American National Standards Institute (TIA/EIA/ANSI): a. 568, Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard. 6. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): a. 44, Standard for Safety Thermoset-Insulated Wires and Cables. b. 83, Standard for Safety Thermoplastic-Insulated Wires and Cables. c. 467, Standard for Safety Grounding and Bonding Equipment. d. 486A, Standard for Safety Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs for use with Copper Conductors. e. 486C, Standard for Safety Splicing Wire Connections. f. 510, Standard for Safety Polyvinyl Chloride, Polyethylene and Rubber Insulating Tape. g. 1277, Standard for Safety Electrical Power and Control Tray Cables with Optional Optical-Fiber Members. h. 1581, Standard for Safety Reference Standard for Electrical Wires, Cables, and Flexible Cords. i. 2250, Standard for Safety Instrumentation Tray Cable. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 26 05 19 - 2 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Cable: Multi-conductor, insulated, with outer sheath containing either building wire or instrumentation wire. B. Instrumentation Cable: 1. Multiple conductor, insulated, twisted or untwisted, with outer sheath. 2. The following are specific types of instrumentation cables: a. Analog signal cable: 1) Used for the transmission of low current (e.g., 4-20mA DC) or low voltage (e.g., 0- 10 VDC) signals, using No. 16 AWG and smaller conductors. 2) Commonly used types are defined in the following: a) TSP: Twisted shielded pair. b) TST: Twisted shielded triad. b. Digital signal cable: Used for the transmission of digital signals between computers, PLC's, RTU's, etc. C. Power Cable: Multi-conductor, insulated, with outer sheath containing building wire, No. 8 AWG and larger. D. Shielded VFD Cable: Multi-conductor, insulated, with shield, drain wire and building wires, No. 12 and larger. E. Control Cable: Multi-conductor, insulated, with outer sheath containing building wires, No. 14, No. 12 or No. 10 AWG. F. Building Wire: Single conductor, insulated, with or without outer jacket depending upon type. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. Product technical data: a. Provide submittal data for all products specified in PART 2 of this Specification Section except: 1) Wire connectors. 2) Insulating tape. 3) Cable lubricant. b. See Section 26 05 00 for additional requirements. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. See Section 26 05 00. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Building wire, power and control cable: a. Aetna Insulated Wire. b. Alphawire. c. Cerrowire. d. Encore Wire Corporation. e. General Cable. f. Okonite Company. g. Southwire Company. 2. Shielded VFD cable: a. Belden Inc. b. General Cable. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 26 05 19 - 3 c. Okonite Company. d. Olfex Wire and Cable, Inc. e. Priority Wire and Cable (Prysmian). f. Rockbestos-Surprenant Cable Corp. g. Southwire Company. 3. Instrumentation cable: a. Analog cable: 1) Alphawire. 2) Belden Inc. 3) General Cable. 4. Wire connectors: a. Burndy Corporation. b. Buchanan. c. Ideal. d. Ilsco. e. 3M Co. f. Teledyne Penn Union. g. Thomas and Betts. h. Phoenix Contact. 5. Insulating and color coding tape: a. 3M Co. b. Plymouth Bishop Tapes. c. Red Seal Electric Co. 2.2 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Building Wire: 1. Conductor shall be copper with 600 V rated insulation. 2. Conductors shall be stranded, except for conductors used in lighting and receptacle circuits which may be stranded or solid. 3. Surface mark with manufacturer's name or trademark, conductor size, insulation type and UL label. 4. Conform to NEMA/ICEA WC 70/S-95-658 and UL 83 for type THHN/THWN and THHN/THWN-2 insulation. 5. Conform to NEMA/ICEA WC 70/S-95-658 and UL 44 for type XHHW-2 insulation. B. Power Cable: 1. Conductor shall be copper with 600 V rated insulation. 2. Surface mark with manufacturer's name or trademark, conductor size, insulation type and UL label. 3. Conform to NEMA/ICEA WC 70/S-95-658 and UL 83 and UL 1277 for type THHN/THWN insulation with an overall PVC jacket. 4. Conform to NEMA/ICEA WC 70/S-95-658 and UL 44 and UL 1277 for type XHHW-2 insulation with an overall PVC jacket. 5. Number of conductors as required, including a bare ground conductor. 6. Individual conductor color coding: a. ICEA S-58-679, Method 4. b. See PART 3 of this Specification Section for additional requirements. 7. Conform to NFPA 70 Type TC and IEEE 1202 or CSA FT-4. C. Control Cable: 1. Conductor shall be copper with 600 V rated insulation. 2. Surface mark with manufacturer's name or trademark, conductor size, insulation type and UL label. 3. Conform to NEMA/ICEA WC 57/S-73-532 and UL 83 and UL 1277 for type THHN/THWN insulation with an overall PVC jacket. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 26 05 19 - 4 4. Conform to NEMA/ICEA WC 57/S-73-532 and UL 44 and UL 1277 for type XHHW-2 insulation with an overall PVC jacket. 5. Number of conductors as required, provided with or without bare ground conductor of the same AWG size. a. When a bare ground conductor is not provided, an additional insulated conductor shall be provided and used as the ground conductor (e.g., 6/c No. 14 w/g and 7/c No. 14 are equal). 6. Individual conductor color coding: a. ICEA S-58-679, Method 1, Table E-2. b. See PART 3 of this Specification Section for additional requirements. 7. Conform to NFPA 70 Type TC and IEEE 1202, CSA FT-4 or NFPA 262. D. Electrical Equipment Control Wire: 1. Conductor shall be copper with 600 V rated insulation. 2. Conductors shall be stranded. 3. Surface mark with manufacturer's name or trademark, conductor size, insulation type and UL label. 4. Conform to UL 44 for Type SIS insulation. 5. Conform to UL 83 for Type MTW insulation. E. Shielded VFD Cable: 1. Conductor shall be copper, stranded with 600 V rated insulation. 2. Surface mark with manufacturer's name or trademark, conductor size, insulation type and UL label. 3. Cables No. 1 AWG and less: a. Conform to NEMA/ICEA WC 70/S-95-658 and UL 44 and UL 1277 for type RHW-2 or XHHW-2 insulation with an overall PVC jacket. b. Shielding: 85% tinned copper braid, full size tinned copper drain wire and 100% foil shield. c. Number of conductors: 3 PH and 1 full size ground. 4. Cables No. 12 through 750 kcmil: a. Conform to NEMA/ICEA WC 70/S-95-658 and UL 44 type XHHW-2 insulation. b. Number of conductors: 3 PH and 3 equally spaced ground conductors. 5. Individual conductor color coding: a. ICEA S-58-679, Method 4. b. See PART 3 of this Specification Section for additional requirements. 6. When installed exposed outdoors, UL listed and marked as sunlight resistant. 7. For continuously corrugated cable, use manufacturer approved fittings. 8. Conform to NFPA 70, Type TC and IEEE 1202 or CSA FT-4. F. Instrumentation Cable: 1. Surface mark with manufacturer's name or trademark, conductor size, insulation type and UL label. 2. Analog cable: a. Tinned copper conductors. b. 300 V or 600 V PVC insulation with PVC jacket. c. Twisted with 100% foil shield coverage with drain wire. d. Six (6) twists per foot minimum. e. Individual conductor color coding: ICEA S-58-679, Method 1, Table E-2. f. Conform to IEEE 1202 or CSA FT-4 or NFPA 262, UL 2250, UL 1581 and NFPA 70 Type ITC. 3. Digital cable: a. As recommended by equipment (e.g., PLC) manufacturer. b. Horizontal voice and data cable: 1) Category 6 per TIA/EIA/ANSI 568. 2) Cable shall be label-verified. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 26 05 19 - 5 3) Cable jacket shall be factory marked at regular intervals indicating verifying organization and performance level. 4) Conductors: No. 24 AWG solid untinned copper. 5) Rated CMP per NFPA 70. c. Conform to IEEE 1202 or CSA FT-4 or NFPA 262 and NFPA 70 Type ITC. 4. Thermocouple extension wire: a. Extension wire shall match the thermocouple type. 1) Twisted with 100% shield coverage with drain wire. 2) XLPE insulation with PVC jacket. b. Conform to IEEE 1202 or CSA FT-4 or NFPA 262, ISA MC96.1, UL 13, UL 1581 and NFPA 70 Type PLTC. G. Fiber Optic Cable: 1. Design and fabrication - Multi-mode: a. Type: 1) Indoor: Tight buffered or loose tube with a dry gel water blocking system. 2) Outdoor: Loose tube with a wet or dry gel water blocking system. b. Number of fibers: As indicated on the Drawings. c. Fiber size: 62.5/125 micrometer (core diameter/cladding diameter). d. Glass fiber core. e. Step index. f. Maximum attenuation: 1) At 850 nm: 3.75 dB/km. 2) At 1300 nm: 1.5dB/km. g. Minimum bandwidth: 1) At 850 nm: 160 MHz/km. 2) At 1300 nm: 500 MHz/km. h. Maximum tensile load: 1) Installation: 225 pounds. 2) Long term: 67 pounds. i. Cable jacket material: 1) In rigid steel conduit: PVC, or polyethylene. 2) In plenum or riser: Flame retardant material, PVC not allowed. a) Plenum applications: Cable materials shall pass NFPA 262 requirements. b) Riser applications: Cable materials shall pass UL 1666 requirements. 3) In cable tray: Polyethylene or equivalent; PVC not allowed. a) Meet vertical flame tray test requirements of NFPA 262. j. Cables shall be listed and marked in accordance with the requirements of NFPA 70. k. Optical fiber cable type utilized shall be in accordance with NFPA 70. l. Utilize LC type connectors: 1) Tip material: Ceramic or ceramic/glass composite. 2) Utilize connectors which do not require adhesive, epoxy, or polish. 2. Design and fabrication - Single-mode: a. Type: 1) Outdoor: Loose tube with a wet or dry gel water blocking system. b. Number of fibers: As indicated on the Drawings. c. Fiber size: Non-dispersion shifted, 9/125 micrometer (core diameter/cladding diameter). d. Glass fiber core. e. Step index. f. Maximum attenuation: 1) At 850 nm: 0.5 dB/km. 2) At 1300 nm: 0.4 dB/km. g. Minimum bandwidth: 1) At 850 nm: 160 MHz/km. 2) At 1300 nm: 500 MHz/km. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 26 05 19 - 6 h. Maximum tensile load: 1) Installation: 600 pounds. 2) Long term: 200 pounds. i. Cable jacket material: 1) In conduit: PVC, or polyethylene. j. Cables shall be listed and marked in accordance with the requirements of NFPA 70. k. Optical fiber cable type utilized shall be in accordance with NFPA 70. l. Fiber shall conform to TIA/EIA 492AAAA Class IVa. m. Fiber color code shall conform to TIA/EIA 598-C. n. Utilize FC type connectors: 1) Tip material: Ceramic or ceramic/glass composite. 2) Utilize connectors which do not require adhesive, epoxy, or polish. H. Wire Connectors: 1. Twist/screw on type: a. Insulated pressure or spring type solderless connector. b. 600 V rated. c. Ground conductors: Conform to UL 486C and/or UL 467 when required by local codes. d. Phase and neutral conductors: Conform to UL 486C. 2. Compression and mechanical screw type: a. 600 V rated. b. Ground conductors: Conform to UL 467. c. Phase and neutral conductors: Conform to UL 486A. 3. Terminal block type: a. High density, screw-post barrier-type with white center marker strip. b. 600 V and ampere rating as required, for power circuits. c. 600 V, 20 ampere rated for control circuits. d. 300 V, 15 ampere rated for instrumentation circuits. e. Conform to NEMA ICS 4 and UL 486A. I. Insulating and Color Coding Tape: 1. Pressure sensitive vinyl. 2. Premium grade. 3. Heat, cold, moisture, and sunlight resistant. 4. Thickness, depending on use conditions: 7, 8.5, or 10 mil. 5. For cold weather or outdoor location, tape must also be all-weather. 6. Color: a. Insulating tape: Black. b. Color coding tape: Fade-resistant color as specified herein. 7. Comply with UL 510. J. Pulling Lubricant: Cable manufacturer's standard containing no petroleum or other products which will deteriorate insulation. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Permitted Usage of Insulation Types: 1. Type XHHW-2: a. Building wire and power and control cable in architectural and non-architectural finished areas. b. Building wire and power and control cable in conduit in outdoor areas and below grade. c. Building wire and power and control cable in cable tray in outdoor areas. 2. Type THHN/THWN and THHN/THWN-2: Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 26 05 19 - 7 a. Building wire and power and control cable No. 8 AWG and smaller in architectural and non-architectural finished areas. 3. Type SIS and MTW: a. For the wiring of control equipment within control panels and field wiring of control equipment within switchgear, switchboards, motor control centers. B. Shielded VFD Cable: 1. For wiring between a VFD and motor when routing in cable trays or conduit other than RGS or RAC. C. Conductor Size Limitations: 1. Feeder and branch power conductors shall not be smaller than No. 12 AWG unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. 2. Control conductors shall not be smaller than No. 14 AWG unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. 3. Instrumentation conductors shall not be smaller than No. 18 AWG unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. D. Color Code All Wiring as Follows: 1. Building wire: 240 V, 208 V, 240/120 V, 208/120 V 480 V, 480/277 V Phase 1 Black Brown Phase 2 Red * Orange Phase 3 Blue Yellow Neutral White White or Gray Ground Green Green * Orange when it is a high leg of a 120/240 V Delta system. a. Conductors No. 6 AWG and smaller: Insulated phase, neutral and ground conductors shall be identified by a continuous colored outer finish along its entire length. b. Conductors larger than No. 6 AWG: 1) Insulated phase and neutral conductors shall be identified by one of the following methods: a) Continuous colored outer finish along its entire length. b) 3 inches of colored tape applied at the termination. 2) Insulated grounding conductor shall be identified by one of the following methods: a) Continuous green outer finish along its entire length. b) Stripping the insulation from the entire exposed length. c) Using green tape to cover the entire exposed length. 3) The color coding shall be applied at all accessible locations, including but not limited to: Junction and pull boxes, wireways, manholes and handholes. 2. Power cables ICEA S-58-679, Method 4 with: a. Phase and neutral conductors identified with 3 inches of colored tape, per the Table herein, applied at the terminations. b. Ground conductor: Bare. 3. Shielded VFD cable ICEA S-58-679, Method 4 with: a. Phase conductors identified with 3 inches of colored tape, per the Table herein, applied at the terminations. b. Ground conductor: Green color insulation or bare. 4. Control cables ICEA S-58-679, Method 1, Table E-2: a. When a bare ground is not provided, one of the colored insulated conductors shall be re-identified by stripping the insulation from the entire exposed length or using green tape to cover the entire exposed length. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 26 05 19 - 8 b. When used in power applications the colored insulated conductors used as phase and neutral conductors may have to be re-identified with 3 inches of colored tape, per the Table herein, applied at the terminations. E. Install all wiring in raceway unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. F. Feeder, branch, control and instrumentation circuits shall not be combined in a raceway, cable tray, junction or pull box, except as permitted in the following: 1. Where specifically indicated on the Drawings. 2. Where field conditions dictate and written permission is obtained from the Engineer. 3. Control circuits shall be isolated from feeder and branch power and instrumentation circuits but combining of control circuits is permitted. a. The combinations shall comply with the following: 1) 12 VDC, 24 VDC and 48 VDC may be combined. 2) 125 VDC shall be isolated from all other AC and DC circuits. 3) AC control circuits shall be isolated from all DC circuits. 4. Instrumentation circuits shall be isolated from feeder and branch power and control circuits but combining of instrumentation circuits is permitted. a. The combinations shall comply with the following: 1) Analog signal circuits may be combined. 2) Digital signal circuits may be combined but isolated from analog signal circuits. 5. Multiple branch circuits for similar loads may be combined in a common raceway, such as multiple lighting circuits or multiple receptacle circuits or other 120Vac circuits. Do not combine lighting and receptacle circuits. a. Do not combine control device circuits with lighting or receptacle circuits. b. Contractor is responsible for making the required adjustments in conductor and raceway size, in accordance with all requirements of the NFPA 70, including but not limited to: 1) Up sizing conductor size for required ampacity de-ratings for the number of current carrying conductors in the raceway. 2) The neutral conductors may not be shared. 3) Up sizing raceway size for the size and quantity of conductors. G. Ground the drain wire of shielded instrumentation cables at one end only. 1. The preferred grounding location is at the load (e.g., control panel), not at the source (e.g., field mounted instrument). H. Splices and terminations for the following circuit types shall be made in the indicated enclosure type using the indicated method. 1. Feeder and branch power circuits: a. Device outlet boxes: 1) Twist/screw on type connectors. b. Junction and pull boxes and wireways: 1) Twist/screw on type connectors for use on No. 8 and smaller wire. 2) Compression, mechanical screw or terminal block or terminal strip type connectors for use on No. 6 AWG and larger wire. c. Motor terminal boxes: 1) Twist/screw on type connectors for use on No. 10 AWG and smaller wire. 2) Insulated mechanical screw type connectors for use on No. 8 AWG and larger wire. d. Manholes or handholes: 1) Twist/screw on type connectors pre-filled with epoxy for use on No. 8 AWG and smaller wire. 2) Watertight compression or mechanical screw type connectors for use on No. 6 AWG and larger wire. 2. Control circuits: a. Junction and pull boxes: Terminal block type connector. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 26 05 19 - 9 b. Manholes or handholes: Twist/screw on type connectors pre-filled with epoxy. c. Control panels and motor control centers: Terminal block or strips provided within the equipment or field installed within the equipment by the Contractor. 3. Instrumentation circuits can be spliced where field conditions dictate and written permission is obtained from the Engineer. a. Maintain electrical continuity of the shield when splicing twisted shielded conductors. b. Junction and pull boxes: Terminal block type connector. c. Control panels and motor control centers: Terminal block or strip provided within the equipment or field installed within the equipment by the Contractor. 4. Non-insulated compression and mechanical screw type connectors shall be insulated with tape or hot or cold shrink type insulation to the insulation level of the conductors. I. Insulating Tape Usage: 1. For insulating connections of No. 8 AWG wire and smaller: 7 mil vinyl tape. 2. For insulating splices and taps of No. 6 AWG wire or larger: 10 mil vinyl tape. 3. For insulating connections made in cold weather or in outdoor locations: 8.5 mil, all weather vinyl tape. J. Color Coding Tape Usage: For color coding of conductors. K. Fiber Optic Cable: 1. Unless indicated otherwise, install all fiber optic cable in conduit. a. In cable trays, the cable(s) shall be installed in an innerduct that is placed in the tray for protection of the cable. 2. Splicing: a. Optical fibers shall not be spliced. 3. Utilize dust tight wall-mounted interconnect center to provide the following: a. Interconnect fiber optic cable to jumper cable assemblies for connection to the opto- electronic interface. 4. Where exposed to contact with electric light or power conductors, the noncurrent carrying metallic members (if applicable) of optical fiber cables entering buildings shall be grounded as close to the point of entrance as practicable in accordance with NFPA 70. 5. Install cables in accordance with the requirements of NFPA 70. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Acceptance Testing: 1. See Specification Section 26 08 13. END OF SECTION Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 This page intentionally left blank. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents GROUNDING AND BONDING 26 05 26 - 1 SECTION 26 05 26 GROUNDING AND BONDING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Material and installation requirements for grounding and bonding system(s). B. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Section 10 14 00 - Identification Devices. 2. Section 26 05 00 - Common Work Results for Electrical. 3. Section 26 05 19 - Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables. 4. Section 26 05 33 - Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems. 5. Section 26 08 13 - Acceptance Testing. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards: 1. ASTM International (ASTM): a. B8, Standard Specification for Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper Conductors, Hard, Medium-Hard, or Soft. 2. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (IEEE): a. 837, Standard for Qualifying Permanent Connections Used in Substation Grounding. 3. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): a. 70, National Electrical Code (NEC). 4. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): a. 467, Grounding and Bonding Equipment. B. Assure ground continuity is continuous throughout the entire Project. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. Product technical data. a. Provide submittal data for all products specified in PART 2 of this Specification Section except: 1) Grounding clamps, terminals and connectors. 2) Exothermic welding system. b. See Section 26 05 00 for additional requirements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Ground rods and bars and grounding clamps, connectors and terminals: a. ERICO by Pentair. b. Harger Lightning & Grounding. c. Heary Bros. Lightning Protection Co. Inc.. d. Burndy by Hubbell. e. Robbins Lightning, Inc. f. Blackburn by Thomas & Betts. g. Thompson Lightning Protection, Inc. 2. Exothermic weld connections: Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents GROUNDING AND BONDING 26 05 26 - 2 a. ERICO by Pentair - Cadweld. b. Harger Lightning & Grounding - Ultraweld. c. Burndy by Hubbell - Thermoweld. d. FurseWELD by Thomas & Betts. 2.2 COMPONENTS A. Wire and Cable: 1. Bare conductors: Soft drawn stranded copper meeting ASTM B8. 2. Insulated conductors: Color coded green, per Section 26 05 19. B. Conduit: As specified in Section 26 05 33. C. Ground Bars: 1. Solid copper: a. 1/4 inches thick. b. 2 or 4 inches wide. c. 24 inches long minimum in main service entrance electrical rooms, 12 inches long elsewhere. 2. Predrilled grounding lug mounting holes. 3. Stainless steel or galvanized steel mounting brackets. 4. Insulated standoffs. D. Ground Rods: 1. 3/4 inches x 10 feet. 2. Copper-clad: a. 10 mil minimum uniform coating of electrolytic copper molecularly bonded to a rigid steel core. b. Corrosion resistant bond between the copper and steel. c. Hard drawn for a scar-resistant surface. E. Grounding Clamps, Connectors and Terminals: 1. Mechanical type: a. Standards: UL 467. b. High copper alloy content. 2. Compression type for interior locations: a. Standards: UL 467. b. High copper alloy content. c. Non-reversible. d. Terminals for connection to bus bars shall have two bolt holes. 3. Compression type suitable for direct burial in earth or concrete: a. Standards: UL 467, IEEE 837. b. High copper alloy content. c. Non-reversible. d. Factory filled with oxide inhibiting compound. F. Exothermic Weld Connections: 1. Copper oxide reduction by aluminum process. 2. Molds properly sized for each application. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 2. Size grounding conductors and bonding jumpers in accordance with NFPA 70, Article 250, except where larger sizes are indicated on the Drawings. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents GROUNDING AND BONDING 26 05 26 - 3 3. Remove paint, rust, or other non-conducting material from contact surfaces before making ground connections. After connection, apply manufacturers approved touch-up paint to protect metallic surface from corrosion. 4. Where ground conductors pass through floor slabs or building walls provide nonmetallic sleeves and install sleeve per Specification Section 01 73 20. a. Seal the sleeve interior to stop water penetration. 5. Do not splice grounding electrode conductors except at ground rods. 6. Install ground rods and grounding electrode conductors in undisturbed, firm soil. a. Provide excavation required for installation of ground rods and conductors. b. Use driving studs or other suitable means to prevent damage to threaded ends of sectional rods. c. Unless otherwise specified, connect conductors to ground rods with compression type connectors or exothermic weld. d. Provide sufficient slack in conductor to prevent conductor breakage during backfill or due to ground movement. e. Backfill excavation completely, thoroughly tamping to provide good contact between backfill materials and ground rods and conductors. 7. Do not use exothermic welding if it will damage the structure the grounding conductor is being welded to. B. Grounding Electrode System: 1. Provide a grounding electrode system in accordance with NFPA 70, Article 250 and as indicated on the Drawings. a. All grounding electrode conductors terminate on a main ground bar located adjacent to the service entrance equipment. 2. Grounding electrode conductor terminations: a. Ground bars mounted on wall: Use a two-hole compression type conductor terminal and bolt it to the ground bar with two bolts. b. Ground bars in electrical equipment: Use compression type conductor terminal and bolt it to the ground bar or manufacture's provided mechanical type termination device. c. Piping systems: Use mechanical type connections. d. Building steel, below grade and encased in concrete: Use compression type connector or exothermic weld. e. Building steel, above grade: Use a two-hole compression type conductor terminal and bolt to the steel with two bolts or exothermic weld. f. Ground rod: Compression type or exothermic weld, unless otherwise specified. g. At all above grade terminations, the conductors shall be labeled per Specification Section 10 14 00. 3. Ground ring grounding system: a. Ground ring consists of ground rods and a conductor looped around the structure. b. Placed at a minimum of 10 feet from the structure foundation and 2 feet-6 inches below grade. c. Provide a minimum of four ground rods placed at the corners of the structure and additional rods so that the maximum distance between ground rods does not exceed 50 FT. d. Building/Structure grounding: 1) Bond building/structure metal support columns to the ground ring at all corners of the structure. e. Grounding conductor: Bare conductor, size as indicated on the Drawings. 4. Triad grounding system: a. Triad consists of three ground rods arranged in a triangle separated by 20 feet and a conductor interconnecting each ground rod. b. Place first ground rod a minimum of 10 feet from the structure foundation and 2 FT-6 IN below grade. c. Grounding conductor: Bare conductor, size as indicated on the Drawings. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents GROUNDING AND BONDING 26 05 26 - 4 C. Supplemental Grounding Electrode: 1. Provide the following grounding in addition to the equipment ground conductor supplied with the feeder conductors whether or not shown on the Drawings. a. See Grounding Electrode System paragraph for conductor termination requirements. 2. Metal light poles: a. Connect metal pole and pole base reinforcing steel to a ground rod. b. Grounding conductor: Bare #6 AWG minimum. 3. Equipment support rack and pedestals mounted outdoors: a. Connect metallic structure to a ground rod. b. Grounding conductor: #6 AWG minimum. D. Transformer Separately Derived Grounding System: 1. Install the System Bonding Jumper at the transformer. At the first disconnect, ensure the neutral is isolated from ground. 2. Structures with a single electrical room/area: a. Connect grounding electrode conductor to the Grounding Electrode System main ground bar. 3. Structures with multiple electrical rooms/areas: a. Provide a ground bar mounted in each electrical room/area. b. Interconnect all ground bars in a daisy chain or radial fashion to the main ground bar as indicated on the Drawings. c. Connect grounding electrode conductor to the electrical room/area ground bar. 4. See Grounding Electrode System paragraph for conductor termination requirements. E. Raceway Bonding/Grounding: 1. Install all metallic raceway so that it is electrically continuous. 2. Provide an equipment grounding conductor in all raceways with insulation identical to the phase conductors, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. 3. NFPA 70 required grounding bushings shall be of the insulating type. 4. Provide double locknuts at all panels. 5. Bond all conduits, at entrance and exit of equipment, to the equipment ground bus or lug. 6. Provide bonding jumpers if conduits are installed in concentric knockouts. 7. Make all metallic raceway fittings and grounding clamps tight to ensure equipment grounding system will operate continuously at ground potential to provide low impedance current path for proper operation of overcurrent devices during possible ground fault conditions. F. Equipment Grounding: 1. Ground all utilization equipment with an equipment grounding conductor. G. Manhole and Handhole Grounding: 1. Provide a ground rod and ground bar, when indicated or as needed, in each manhole and handhole with exposed metal parts. a. Expose a minimum of 4 inches of the rod above the floor for field connections to the rod. 2. Connect all exposed metal parts (e.g., conduits and cable racks) to the ground rod. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Leave grounding system uncovered until observed by Owner. B. Acceptance testing: 1. See Specification Section 26 08 13. END OF SECTION Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33 - 1 SECTION 26 05 33 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Material and installation requirements for: a. Conduits. b. Conduit fittings. c. Conduit supports. d. Wireways. e. Outlet boxes. f. Pull and junction boxes. B. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Section 26 05 00 - Common Work Results for Electrical. 2. Section 26 05 43 - Underground Work for Electrical Systems. 3. Section 26 27 26 - Wiring Devices. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards: 1. Aluminum Association (AA). 2. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI). 3. ASTM International (ASTM): a. A123/A123M, Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. b. A153/A153M, Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. c. D2564, Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Piping Systems. 4. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): a. 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum). b. RN 1, Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Externally Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit and Intermediate Metal Conduit. c. TC 2, Electrical Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Tubing and Conduit. d. TC 3, Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing. e. TC 14.AG, Aboveground Reinforced Thermosetting Resin Conduit and Fittings. f. TC 14.BG, Belowground Reinforced Thermosetting Resin Conduit and Fittings. 5. National Electrical Manufacturers Association/American National Standards Institute (NEMA/ANSI): a. C80.1, Electric Rigid Steel Conduit (ERSC). b. C80.3, Steel Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT). c. C80.5, Electrical Aluminum Rigid Conduit (ERAC). d. OS 1, Sheet-Steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers, and Box Supports. 6. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): a. 70, National Electrical Code (NEC). 7. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): a. 1, Standard for Flexible Metal Conduit. b. 6, Electrical Rigid Metal Conduit - Steel. c. 50, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Non-Environmental Considerations. d. 360, Standard for Liquid-Tight Flexible Metal Conduit. e. 467, Grounding and Bonding Equipment. f. 514A, Metallic Outlet Boxes. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33 - 2 g. 514B, Conduit, Tubing, and Cable Fittings. h. 651, Standard for Schedule 40, 80, Type EB and A Rigid PVC Conduit and Fittings. i. 797, Electrical Metallic Tubing - Steel. j. 870, Standard for Wireways, Auxiliary Gutters, and Associated Fittings. k. 1203, Standard for Explosion-Proof and Dust-Ignition-Proof Electrical Equipment for Use in Hazardous (Classified) Locations. l. 2420, Belowground Reinforced Thermosetting Resin Conduit (RTRC) and Fittings. m. 2515, Aboveground Reinforced Thermosetting Resin Conduit (RTRC) and Fittings. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. Product technical data: a. Provide submittal data for all products specified in PART 2 of this Specification Section except: 1) Conduit fittings. 2) Support systems. b. See Section 26 05 00 for additional requirements. 2. Fabrication and/or layout drawings: a. Identify dimensional size of pull and junction boxes to be used. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. See Section 26 05 00. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Rigid metal conduits and electrical metallic tubing: a. Allied Tube and Conduit. b. Western Tube and Conduit Corporation. c. Wheatland Tube. d. Patriot Aluminum Products, LLC. 2. PVC coated rigid metal conduits: a. Robroy Industries. b. Atkore - Calbond 3. Rigid nonmetallic conduit: a. Prime Conduit. b. Cantex, Inc. c. Osburn Associates, Inc. 4. Flexible conduit: a. AFC Cable Systems. b. Anamet, Inc. c. Electri-Flex Company. d. International Metal Hose Company. e. Southwire Company, LLC. 5. Wireway: a. Hoffman Engineering. b. Wiegmann by Hubbell. c. Square D by Schneider Electric. 6. Conduit fittings and accessories: a. Appleton by Emerson Electric Co. b. Carlon by Thomas & Betts. c. Cantex, Inc. d. Crouse-Hinds by Eaton. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33 - 3 e. Killark by Hubbell. f. Osburn Associates, Inc. g. O-Z/Gedney by Emerson Electric Co. h. Raco by Hubbell. i. Steel City by Thomas & Betts. j. Thomas & Betts. 7. Support systems: a. Unistrut by Atkore International, Inc. b. B-Line by Eaton. c. Kindorf by Thomas & Betts. d. Minerallac Company. e. CADDY by Pentair. f. Superstrut by Thomas & Betts. 8. Outlet, pull and junction boxes: a. Appleton by Emerson Electric Co. b. Crouse-Hinds by Eaton c. Killark by Hubbell. d. O-Z/Gedney by Emerson Electric Co. e. Steel City by Thomas & Betts. f. Raco by Hubbell g. Bell by Hubbell. h. Hoffman Engineering. i. Wiegmann by Hubbell. j. B-Line by Eaton. k. Adalet. l. RITTAL North America LLC. m. Stahlin by Robroy Enclosures. 2.2 RIGID METAL CONDUITS A. Rigid Galvanized Steel Conduit (RGS): 1. Mild steel with continuous welded seam. 2. Metallic zinc applied by hot-dip galvanizing or electro-galvanizing. 3. Threads galvanized after cutting. 4. Internal coating: Baked lacquer, varnish or enamel for a smooth surface. 5. Standards: NFPA 70 Type RMC, NEMA/ANSI C80.1, UL 6. B. PVC-Coated Rigid Steel Conduit (PVC-RGS): 1. Nominal 40 mil Polyvinyl Chloride Exterior Coating: a. Coating: Bonded to hot-dipped galvanized rigid steel conduit conforming to NEMA/ANSI C80.1. b. The bond between the PVC coating and the conduit surface: Greater than the tensile strength of the coating. 2. Nominal 2 mil, minimum, urethane interior coating. 3. Urethane coating on threads. 4. Conduit: Epoxy prime coated prior to application of PVC and urethane coatings. 5. Female Ends: a. Have a plastic sleeve extending a minimum of one pipe diameter or 2 inches, whichever is less beyond the opening. b. The inside diameter of the sleeve shall be the same as the outside diameter of the conduit to be used with it. 6. Pass high temperature water PVC coating adhesion test and be ETL Verified PVC-001. 7. Standards: NFPA 70 Type RMC, NEMA/ANSI C80.1, UL 6, NEMA RN 1. C. Rigid Aluminum Conduit (RAC): 1. AA Type 6063 aluminum alloy, T-1 temper. 2. Maximum copper content of 0.10%. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33 - 4 3. Extruded, seamless. 4. Standards: NFPA 70 Type RMC, NEMA/ANSI C80.5, UL 6. 2.3 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT) A. Mild steel with continuous welded seam. B. Metallic zinc applied by hot-dip galvanizing or electro-galvanizing. C. Internal coating: Baked lacquer, varnish, or enamel for a smooth surface. D. Standards: NFPA 70 Type EMT, NEMA/ANSI C80.3, UL 797. 2.4 RIGID NONMETALLIC CONDUIT A. Schedules 40 (PVC-40) and 80 (PVC-80): 1. Polyvinyl-chloride (PVC) plastic compound which includes inert modifiers to improve weatherability and heat distribution. 2. Rated for direct sunlight exposure. 3. Fire retardant and low smoke emission. 4. Shall be suitable for use with 90 degrees C wire and shall be marked "maximum 90 degrees C". 5. Standards: NFPA 70 Type PVC, NEMA TC 2, UL 651. 2.5 FLEXIBLE CONDUIT A. Flexible Galvanized Steel Conduit (FLEX): 1. Formed of continuous, spiral wound, hot-dip galvanized steel strip with successive convolutions securely interlocked. 2. Standard: NFPA 70 Type FMC, UL 1. B. PVC-Coated Flexible Galvanized Steel (liquid-tight) Conduit (FLEX-LT): 1. Core formed of continuous, spiral wound, hot-dip galvanized steel strip with successive convolutions securely interlocked. 2. Extruded PVC outer jacket positively locked to the steel core. 3. Liquid and vaportight. 4. Standard: NFPA 70 Type LFMC, UL 360. 2.6 WIREWAY A. General: 1. Suitable for lay-in conductors. 2. Designed for continuous grounding. 3. Covers: a. Hinged or removable in accessible areas. b. Non-removable when passing through partitions. 4. Finish: Rust inhibiting primer and manufacturer's standard paint inside and out except for stainless steel type. 5. Standards: UL 870, NEMA 250. B. General Purpose (NEMA 1 rated) Wireway: 1. 14 or 16 gage steel without knockouts. 2. Cover: Solid, non-gasketed and held in place by captive screws. C. Raintight (NEMA 3R) Wiring Trough: 1. 14 or 16 GA galvanized steel without knockouts. 2. Cover: Non-gasketed and held in place by captive screws. D. Watertight (NEMA 4X rated) Wireway: 1. 14 GA Type 304 or 316 stainless steel bodies and covers without knockouts and 10 GA stainless steel flanges. 2. Cover: Fully gasketed and held in place with captive clamp type latches. 3. Flanges: Fully gasketed and bolted. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33 - 5 E. Dusttight (NEMA 12 rated) Wireway: 1. 14 GA steel bodies and covers without knockouts and 10 GA steel flanges. 2. Cover: Fully gasketed and held in place with captive clamp type latches. 3. Flanges: Fully gasketed and bolted. 2.7 CONDUIT FITTINGS AND ACCESSORIES A. Fittings for Use with RGS and IMC and RAC: 1. General: a. In hazardous locations listed for use in Class I, Groups C and D locations. 2. Locknuts: a. Threaded steel or malleable iron. b. Gasketed or non-gasketed. c. Grounding or non-grounding type. 3. Bushings: a. Threaded, insulated metallic. b. Grounding or non-grounding type. 4. Hubs: Threaded, insulated and gasketed metallic for raintight connection. 5. Couplings: a. Threaded straight type: Same material and finish as the conduit with which they are used on. b. Threadless type: Gland compression or self-threading type, concrete tight. 6. Unions: Threaded galvanized steel or zinc plated malleable iron. 7. Conduit bodies (ells and tees): a. Body: Zinc plated cast iron or cast copper free aluminum with threaded hubs. b. Standard and mogul size. c. Cover: 1) Clip-on type with stainless steel screws. 2) Gasketed or non-gasketed galvanized steel, zinc plated cast iron or cast copper free aluminum. 8. Conduit bodies (round): a. Body: Zinc plated cast iron or cast copper free aluminum with threaded hubs. b. Cover: Threaded screw on type, gasketed, galvanized steel, zinc plated cast iron or cast copper free aluminum. 9. Sealing fittings: a. Body: Zinc plated cast iron or cast copper free aluminum with threaded hubs. b. Standard and mogul size. c. With or without drain and breather. d. Fiber and sealing compound: UL listed for use with the sealing fitting. 10. Hazardous location flexible coupling (HAZ-FLEX): a. Liquid tight and arc resistant. b. Electrically conductive so no bonding jumper is required. c. Dry and wet areas: 1) Bronze braided covering over flexible brass core. 2) Bronze end fittings. 3) Zinc-plated steel or malleable iron unions and nipples. d. Corrosive areas: 1) Stainless steel braided covering over flexible stainless steel core. 2) Stainless steel end fittings. 3) Aluminum unions and nipples. 11. Service entrance head: a. Malleable iron, galvanized steel or copper free aluminum. b. Insulated knockout cover for use with a variety of sizes and number of conductors. 12. Expansion couplings: a. 2 inches nominal straight-line conduit movement in either direction. b. Galvanized steel with insulated bushing. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33 - 6 c. Gasketed for wet locations. d. Internally or externally grounded. 13. Expansion/deflection couplings: a. 3/4 inches nominal straight-line conduit movement in either direction. b. 30 degrees nominal deflection from the normal in all directions. c. Metallic hubs, neoprene outer jacket and stainless steel jacket clamps. d. Internally or externally grounded. e. Watertight, raintight and concrete tight. 14. Standards: UL 467, UL 514B, UL 1203. B. Fittings for Use with PVC-RGS: 1. The same material and construction as those fittings listed under paragraph "Fittings for Use with RGS and IMC and RAC" and coated as defined under paragraph "PVC Coated Rigid Steel Conduit (PVC-RGS)." C. Fittings for Use with EMT: 1. Connectors: a. Straight, angle and offset types furnished with locknuts. b. Zinc plated steel. c. Insulated gland compression type. d. Concrete and raintight. 2. Couplings: a. Zinc plated steel. b. Gland compression type. c. Concrete and raintight. 3. Conduit bodies (ells and tees): a. Body: Copper free aluminum with threaded hubs. b. Standard and mogul size. c. Cover: 1) Screw down type with steel screws. 2) Gasketed or non-gasketed galvanized steel or copper free aluminum. 4. Standard: UL 514B. D. Fittings for Use with FLEX: 1. Connector: a. Zinc plated malleable iron. b. Squeeze or clamp-type. 2. Standard: UL 514B. E. Fittings for Use with FLEX-LT and FLEX-NM: 1. Connector: a. Straight or angle type. b. Metal construction, insulated and gasketed. c. Composed of locknut, grounding ferrule and gland compression nut. d. Liquid tight. 2. Standards: UL 467, UL 514B. F. Fittings for Use with Rigid Nonmetallic PVC Conduit: 1. Coupling, adapters and conduit bodies: a. Same material, thickness, and construction as the conduits with which they are used. b. Homogeneous plastic free from visible cracks, holes or foreign inclusions. c. Bore smooth and free of blisters, nicks or other imperfections which could damage the conductor. 2. Solvent cement for welding fittings shall be supplied by the same manufacturer as the conduit and fittings. 3. Standards: ASTM D2564, NEMA TC 3, UL 651, UL 514B. G. Weather and Corrosion Protection Tape: Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33 - 7 1. PVC based tape, 10 mils thick. 2. Protection against moisture, acids, alkalis, salts and sewage and suitable for direct bury. 3. Used with appropriate pipe primer. 2.8 ALL RACEWAY AND FITTINGS A. Mark Products: 1. Identify the nominal trade size on the product. 2. Stamp with the name or trademark of the manufacturer. 2.9 OUTLET BOXES A. Metallic Outlet Boxes: 1. Hot-dip galvanized steel. 2. Conduit knockouts and grounding pigtail. 3. Styles: a. 2 inches x 3 inches rectangle. b. 4 inches square. c. 4 inches octagon. d. Masonry/tile. 4. Accessories: a. Flat blank cover plates. b. Barriers. c. Extension, plaster or tile rings. d. Box supporting brackets in stud walls. e. Adjustable bar hangers. 5. Standards: NEMA/ANSI OS 1, UL 514A. B. Cast Outlet Boxes: 1. Zinc plated cast iron or die-cast copper free aluminum with manufacturer's standard finish. 2. Threaded hubs and grounding screw. 3. Styles: a. "FS" or "FD". b. "Bell". c. Single or multiple gang and tandem. d. "EDS" or "EFS" for hazardous locations. 4. Accessories: 40 mil PVC exterior coating and 2 mil urethane interior coating. 5. Standards: UL 514A, UL 1203. C. See Specification Section 26 27 26 for wiring devices, wallplates and coverplates. 2.10 PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES A. NEMA 1 Rated: 1. Body and cover: 14 GA minimum, galvanized steel or 14 GA minimum, steel finished with rust inhibiting primer and manufacturers standard paint inside and out. 2. With or without concentric knockouts on four sides. 3. Flat cover fastened with screws. B. NEMA 4 Rated: 1. Body and cover: 14 GA steel finished with rust inhibiting primer and manufacturers standard paint inside and out. 2. Seams continuously welded and ground smooth. 3. No knockouts. 4. External mounting flanges. 5. Hinged or non-hinged cover held closed with stainless steel screws and clamps. 6. Cover with oil resistant gasket. C. NEMA 4X Rated (metallic): 1. Body and cover: 14 GA Type 304 or 316 stainless steel. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33 - 8 2. Seams continuously welded and ground smooth. 3. No knockouts. 4. External mounting flanges. 5. Hinged door and stainless steel screws and clamps. 6. Door with oil-resistant gasket. D. NEMA 7 and NEMA 9 Rated: 1. Cast gray iron alloy or copper-free aluminum with manufacturer's standard finish. 2. Drilled and tapped openings or tapered threaded hub. 3. Cover bolted-down with stainless steel bolts or threaded cover with neoprene gasket. 4. External mounting flanges. 5. Grounding lug. 6. Accessories: 40 mil PVC exterior coating and 2 mil urethane interior coating. E. NEMA 12 Rated: 1. Body and cover: a. 14 GA steel finished with rust inhibiting primer and manufacturers standard paint inside and out. b. Type 5052 H-32 aluminum, unpainted. 2. Seams continuously welded and ground smooth. 3. No knockouts. 4. External mounting flanges. 5. Non-hinged cover held closed with captivated cover screws threaded into sealed wells or hinged cover held closed with stainless steel screws and clamps. 6. Flat door with oil resistant gasket. F. Miscellaneous Accessories: 1. Rigid handles for covers larger than 9 square feet or heavier than 25 pounds. 2. Split covers when heavier than 25 pounds. 3. Weldnuts for mounting optional panels and terminal kits. 4. Terminal blocks: Screw-post barrier-type, rated 600 volt and 20 ampere minimum. G. Standards: NEMA 250, UL 50. 2.11 SUPPORT SYSTEMS A. Multi-conduit Surface or Trapeze Type Support and Pull or Junction Box Supports: 1. Material requirements. a. Galvanized steel: ASTM A123/A123M or ASTM A153/A153M. b. Stainless steel: AISI Type 316. c. PVC coat galvanized steel: ASTM A123/A123M or ASTM A153/A153M and 20 mil PVC coating. B. Single Conduit and Outlet Box Support Fasteners: 1. Material requirements: a. Zinc plated steel. b. Stainless steel. c. Malleable iron. d. PVC coat malleable iron or steel: 20 mil PVC coating. e. Steel protected with zinc phosphate and oil finish. 2.12 OPENINGS AND PENETRATIONS IN WALLS AND FLOORS A. Sleeves, smoke and fire stop fitting through walls and floors: 1. See Specification Section 01 73 20. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33 - 9 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 RACEWAY INSTALLATION - GENERAL A. Shall be in accordance with the requirements of: 1. NFPA 70. 2. Manufacturer instructions. B. Size of Raceways: 1. Raceway sizes are shown on the Drawings, if not shown on the Drawings, then size in accordance with NFPA 70. 2. Unless specifically indicated otherwise, the minimum raceway size shall be: a. Conduit: 3/4 inches. b. Wireway: 2-1/2 inches x 2-1/2 inches. C. Field Bending and Cutting of Conduits: 1. Utilize tools and equipment recommended by the manufacturer of the conduit, designed for the purpose and the conduit material to make all field bends and cuts. 2. Do not reduce the internal diameter of the conduit when making conduit bends. 3. Prepare tools and equipment to prevent damage to the PVC coating. 4. Degrease threads after threading and apply a zinc rich paint. 5. Debur interior and exterior after cutting. D. Male threads of conduit systems shall be coated with an electrically conductive anti-seize compound. E. The protective coating integrity of conduits, fittings, outlet, pull and junction boxes and accessories shall be maintained. 1. Repair galvanized components utilizing a zinc rich paint. 2. Repair painted components utilizing touch up paint provided by or approved by the manufacturer. 3. Repair PVC coated components utilizing a patching compound, of the same material as the coating, provided by the manufacturer of the conduit; or a self-adhesive, highly conformable, cross-linked silicone composition strip, followed by a protective coating of vinyl tape. a. Total nominal thickness: 40 mil. 4. Repair surfaces which will be inaccessible after installation prior to installation. F. Remove moisture and debris from conduit before wire is pulled into place. 1. Pull mandrel with diameter nominally 1/4 inches smaller than the interior of the conduit, to remove obstructions. 2. Swab conduit by pulling a clean, tight-fitting rag through the conduit. 3. Tightly plug ends of conduit with tapered wood plugs or plastic inserts until wire is pulled. G. Only nylon or polyethylene rope shall be used to pull wire and cable in conduit systems. H. Where portions of a raceway are subject to different temperatures and where condensation is known to be a problem, as in cold storage areas of buildings or where passing from the interior to the exterior of a building, the raceway shall be sealed to prevent circulation of warm air to colder section of the raceway. I. Fill openings in walls, floors, and ceilings and finish flush with surface. 1. See Specification Section 01 73 20. 3.2 RACEWAY ROUTING A. Raceways shall be routed in the field unless otherwise indicated. 1. Conduit and fittings shall be installed, as required, for a complete system that has a neat appearance and is in compliance with all applicable codes. 2. Run in straight lines parallel to or at right angles to building lines. 3. Do not route conduits: Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33 - 10 a. Through areas of high ambient temperature or radiant heat. b. In suspended concrete slabs. c. In concrete members including slabs, slabs on grade, beams, walls, and columns unless specifically located and detailed on structural Drawings.. 4. Locate sleeves or conduits penetrating floors, walls, and beams so as not to significantly impair the strength of the construction. Do not place conduit penetrations in columns. 5. Conduit shall not interfere with, or prevent access to, piping, valves, ductwork, or other equipment for operation, maintenance and repair. 6. Provide pull boxes or conduit bodies as needed so that there is a maximum of 360 degrees of bends in the conduit run or in long straight runs to limit pulling tensions. B. All conduits within a structure shall be installed exposed except as follows: 1. As indicated on the Drawings. 2. Concealed above gypsum wall board or acoustical tile suspended ceilings. 3. Conduits in architecturally finished areas shall be concealed. C. Maintain minimum spacing between parallel conduit and piping runs in accordance with the following when the runs are greater than 30 feet: 1. Between instrumentation and telecommunication: 1 inch. 2. Between instrumentation and 125 V, 48 V and 24 VDC, 2 inches. 3. Between instrumentation and 600 V and less AC power or control: 6 inches. 4. Between instrumentation and greater than 600 VAC power: 12 inches. 5. Between telecommunication and 125 V, 48 V and 24 VDC, 2 inches. 6. Between telecommunication and 600 V and less AC power or control: 6 inches. 7. Between telecommunication and greater than 600 VAC power: 12 inches. 8. Between 125 V, 48 V and 24 VDC and 600 V and less AC power or control: 2 inches. 9. Between 125 V, 48 V and 24 VDC and greater than 600 VAC power: 2 inches. 10. Between 600 V and less AC and greater than 600 VAC: 2 inches. 11. Between process, gas, air and water pipes: 6 inches. D. Conduits shall be installed to eliminate moisture pockets. 1. Where water cannot drain to openings, provide drain fittings in the low spots of the conduit run. E. Conduit shall not be routed on the exterior of structures except as specifically indicated on the Drawings. F. Where sufficient room exists within the housing of roof-mounted equipment, the conduit shall be stubbed up inside the housing. G. Provide all required openings in walls, floors, and ceilings for conduit penetration. 1. See Specification Section 01 73 20. 3.3 RACEWAY APPLICATIONS A. Permitted Raceway Types Per Wire or Cable Types: 1. Power wire or cables: All raceway types. 2. Control wire or cables: All raceway types. 3. Instrumentation cables: Metallic raceway except nonmetallic may be used underground. 4. Motor leads from a VFD: RGS, RAC or shielded VFD cables in all other raceways. 5. Telecommunication cables: All raceway types. B. Permitted Raceway Types Per Area Designations: 1. Dry areas: a. RGS. b. RAC. 2. Wet areas: a. RGS. b. RAC. 3. Corrosive areas: Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33 - 11 a. PVC-RGS. b. RAC. 4. Highly corrosive areas: a. PVC-RGS. b. PVC-80. 5. NFPA 70 hazardous areas: a. RGS. b. RAC when required by other area designations. C. Permitted Raceway Types Per Routing Locations: 1. In stud framed walls: a. EMT. 2. In concrete block or brick walls: a. PVC-40. 3. Above acoustical tile ceilings: a. EMT. b. NEMA 1 rated wireway. 4. Embedded in poured concrete walls and floors: a. PVC-40. b. PVC-RGS when emerging from concrete into areas designated as wet, corrosive or highly corrosive. 5. Beneath floor slab-on-grade: a. PVC-40. 6. Through floor penetrations, see Specification Section 01 73 20: a. PVC-RGS in areas designated as wet, corrosive or highly corrosive. 7. Direct buried conduits and ductbanks: a. PVC-80. b. 90 degrees elbows for transitions to above grade: 1) PVC-RGS. c. Long sweeping bends greater than 15 degrees: 1) PVC-RGS. 8. Concrete encased ductbanks: a. PVC-40. b. PVC-EB. c. 90 degree elbows for transitions to above grade: 1) PVC-RGS. d. Long sweeping bends greater than 15 degrees: 1) RGS for sizes 2 inches and larger. D. FLEX conduits shall be installed for connections to light fixtures, HVAC equipment and other similar devices above the ceilings. 1. The maximum length shall not exceed: a. 6 feet to light fixtures. b. 3 feet to all other equipment. E. FLEX-LT and FLEX-NM conduits shall be installed as the final conduit connection to light fixtures, dry type transformers, motors, electrically operated valves, instrumentation primary elements, and other electrical equipment that is liable to vibrate. 1. The maximum length shall not exceed: a. 6 feet to light fixtures. b. 3 feet to motors. c. 2 feet to all other equipment. F. HAZ-FLEX coupling shall be installed as the final conduit to motors, electrically operated valves, instrumentation primary elements and electrical equipment that is liable to vibrate. 1. The maximum length shall not exceed: a. 3 feet to motors. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33 - 12 b. 2 feet to all other equipment. G. NEMA 1 Rated Wireway: 1. Surface mounted in electrical rooms. 2. Surface mounted above removable ceilings tiles of an architecturally finished area. H. NEMA 3R Wiring Trough: 1. Surface mounted in exterior locations. I. NEMA 4X Rated Wireway: 1. Surface mounted in areas designated as wet and or corrosive. J. NEMA 12 Rated Wireway: 1. Surface mounted in areas designated as dry in architecturally and non-architecturally finished areas. K. Underground Conduit: See Specification Section 26 05 43. 3.4 CONDUIT FITTINGS AND ACCESSORIES A. Conduit Seals: 1. Installed in conduit systems located in hazardous areas as required by the NFPA 70. 2. Fill plug and drain shall be accessible. 3. Pour the conduit seals in a two-step process. a. Pour the seal and leave cover off. b. After seal is dry, inspect for proper sealing, install cover and mark (for example, paint or permanent marker) as complete. B. Rigid nonmetallic conduit and fittings shall be joined utilizing solvent cement. 1. Immediately after installation of conduit and fitting, the fitting or conduit shall be rotated 1/4 turn to provide uniform contact. C. Install Expansion Fittings: 1. Where conduits are exposed to the sun and conduit run is greater than 200 feet. 2. Elsewhere as identified on the Drawings. D. Install Expansion/Deflection Fittings: 1. Where conduits enter a structure. a. Except electrical manholes and handholes. b. Except where the ductbank is tied to the structure with rebar. 2. Where conduits span structural expansions joints. 3. Elsewhere as identified on the Drawings. E. Threaded connections shall be made wrench-tight. F. Conduit joints shall be watertight: 1. Where subjected to possible submersion. 2. In areas classified as wet. 3. Underground. G. Terminate Conduits: 1. In metallic outlet boxes: a. RGS and IMC and RAC: 1) Conduit hub and locknut. 2) Insulated bushing and two locknuts. 3) Use grounding type locknut or bushing when required by NFPA 70. b. EMT: Compression type connector and locknut. 2. In NEMA 1 rated enclosures: a. RGS and IMC and RAC: 1) Conduit hub and locknut. 2) Insulated bushing and two locknuts. 3) Use grounding type locknut or bushing when required by NFPA 70. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33 - 13 b. EMT: Compression type connector and locknut. 3. In NEMA 12 rated enclosures: a. Watertight, insulated and gasketed hub and locknut. b. Use grounding type locknut or bushing when required by NFPA 70. 4. In NEMA 4 and NEMA 4X rated enclosures: a. Watertight, insulated and gasketed hub and locknut. 5. In NEMA 7 and NEMA 9 rated enclosures: a. Into an integral threaded hub. 6. When stubbed up through the floor into floor mount equipment: a. With an insulated grounding bushing on metallic conduits. b. With end bells on nonmetallic conduits. H. Threadless couplings shall only be used to join new conduit to existing conduit when the existing conduit end is not threaded and it is not practical or possible to cut threads on the existing conduit with a pipe threader. 3.5 CONDUIT SUPPORT A. Permitted multi-conduit surface or trapeze type support system per area designations and conduit types: 1. Dry or wet and/or hazardous areas: a. Galvanized system consisting of: Galvanized steel channels and fittings, nuts and hardware and conduit clamps. b. Aluminum system consisting of: Aluminum channels, fittings and conduit clamps with stainless steel nuts and hardware. 2. Corrosive areas: a. Aluminum system consisting of: Aluminum channels, fittings and conduit clamps with stainless steel nuts and hardware. b. PVC coated steel system consisting of: PVC coated galvanized steel channels and fittings and conduit clamps with stainless steel nuts and hardware. 3. Highly corrosive areas: a. PVC coated steel system consisting of: PVC coated galvanized steel channels and fittings and conduit clamps with stainless steel nuts and hardware. 4. Conduit type shall be compatible with the support system material. a. Galvanized steel system may be used with RGS and EMT. b. Stainless steel system may be used with RGS and PVC-RGS and RAC. c. Aluminum system may be used with RAC and PVC-RGS. B. Permitted single conduit support fasteners per area designations and conduit types: 1. Architecturally finished areas: a. Material: Zinc plated steel, or steel protected with zinc phosphate and oil finish. b. Types of fasteners: Spring type hangers and clips, straps, hangers with bolts, clamps with bolts and bolt on beam clamps. c. Provide anti-rattle conduit supports when conduits are routed through metal studs. 2. Dry or wet and/or hazardous areas: a. Material: Zinc plated steel, stainless steel and malleable iron. b. Types of fasteners: Straps, hangers with bolts, clamps with bolts and bolt on beam clamps. 3. Corrosive areas: a. Material: Stainless steel and PVC coat malleable iron or steel. b. Types of fasteners: Straps, hangers with bolts, clamps with bolts and bolt on beam clamps. 4. Highly corrosive areas: a. Material: PVC coat malleable iron or steel. b. Types of fasteners: Straps, hangers with bolts, clamps with bolts and bolt on beam clamps. 5. Conduit type shall be compatible with the support fastener material. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33 - 14 a. Zinc plated steel, steel protected with zinc phosphate and oil finish and malleable iron fasteners may be used with RGS and EMT. b. Stainless steel system may be used with RGS and PVC-RGS and RAC. c. PVC coated fasteners may be used with PVC-RGS, RAC, PVC-40 and PVC-80. d. Nonmetallic fasteners may be used with PVC-40, PVC-80. C. Conduit Support General Requirements: 1. Maximum spacing between conduit supports per NFPA 70. 2. Support conduit from the building structure. 3. Do not support conduit from process, gas, air or water piping; or from other conduits. 4. Provide hangers and brackets to limit the maximum uniform load on a single support to 25 LBS or to the maximum uniform load recommended by the manufacturer if the support is rated less than 25 pounds. a. Do not exceed maximum concentrated load recommended by the manufacturer on any support. b. Conduit hangers: 1) Continuous threaded rods combined with struts or conduit clamps: Do not use perforated strap hangers and iron bailing wire. c. Do not use suspended ceiling support systems to support raceways. d. Hangers in metal roof decks: 1) Utilize fender washers. 2) Not extend above top of ribs. 3) Not interfere with vapor barrier, insulation, or roofing. 5. Conduit support system fasteners: a. Use sleeve-type expansion anchors as fasteners in masonry wall construction. b. Do not use concrete nails and powder-driven fasteners. 3.6 OUTLET, PULL AND JUNCTION BOX INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 2. See Section 26 05 00 and the Drawings for area classifications. 3. Fill unused punched-out, tapped, or threaded hub openings with insert plugs. 4. Size boxes to accommodate quantity of conductors enclosed and quantity of conduits connected to the box. B. Outlet Boxes: 1. Permitted uses of metallic outlet boxes: a. Housing of wiring devices: 1) Recessed in all stud framed walls and ceilings. 2) Recessed in poured concrete, concrete block and brick walls of architecturally finished areas and exterior building walls. b. Pull or junction box: 1) Above gypsum wall board or acoustical tile ceilings. 2) Above 10 feet in an architecturally finished area where there is no ceiling. 2. Permitted uses of cast outlet boxes: a. Housing of wiring devices surface mounted in non-architecturally finished dry, wet, corrosive, highly corrosive and hazardous areas. b. Pull and junction box surface mounted in non-architecturally finished dry, wet, corrosive and highly corrosive areas. 3. Mount device outlet boxes where indicated on the Drawings and at heights as scheduled in Section 26 05 00. 4. Set device outlet boxes plumb and vertical to the floor. 5. Outlet boxes recessed in walls: a. Install with appropriate stud wall support brackets or adjustable bar hangers so that they are flush with the face of the wall. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33 - 15 b. Locate in ungrouted cell of concrete block with bottom edge of box flush with bottom edge of block and flush with the face of the block. 6. Place barriers between switches in boxes with 277 V switches on opposite phases. 7. Back-to-back are not permitted. 8. When an outlet box is connected to a PVC coated conduit, the box shall also be PVC coated. C. Pull and Junction Boxes: 1. Install pull or junction boxes in conduit runs where indicated or required to facilitate pulling of wires or making connections. a. Make covers of boxes accessible. 2. Permitted uses of NEMA 1 enclosure: a. Pull or junction box surface mounted above removable ceiling tiles of an architecturally finished area. 3. Permitted uses of NEMA 4 enclosure: a. Pull or junction box surface mounted in areas designated as wet. 4. Permitted uses of NEMA 4X metallic enclosure: a. Pull or junction box surface mounted in areas designated as wet and/or corrosive. 5. Permitted uses of NEMA 7 enclosure: a. Pull or junction box surface mounted in areas designated as Class I hazardous. 1) Provide PVC coating in corrosive and highly corrosive areas when PVC coated conduit is used. 6. Permitted uses of NEMA 12 enclosure: a. Pull or junction box surface mounted in areas designated as dry. END OF SECTION Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 This page intentionally left blank. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents UNDERGROUND WORK FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 43 - 1 SECTION 26 05 43 UNDERGROUND WORK FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Material and installation requirements for: a. Manholes. b. Handhole. c. Underground conduits and ductbanks. B. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Section 10 14 00 - Identification Devices. 2. Section 26 05 26 - Grounding. 3. Section 26 05 33 - Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards: 1. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO): a. HB-17, Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges. 2. ASTM International (ASTM): a. A536, Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings. 3. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): a. 70, National Electrical Code (NEC). 4. Society of Cable Telecommunications Engineers (SCTE): a. 77, Specifications for Underground Enclosure Integrity. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Direct-Buried Conduit(s): 1. Individual (single) underground conduit. 2. Multiple underground conduits, arranged in one or more planes, in a common trench. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. Product technical data: a. Provide submittal data for all products specified in PART 2 of this Specification Section. b. Provide signed and sealed design computations for manholes and handholes indicating compliance with design load rating. 2. Fabrication and/or layout drawings: a. Provide dimensional drawings of each manhole and handhole indicating all specified accessories and conduit entry locations. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Prefabricated composite handholes: a. Armorcast Products Company. b. Quazite by Hubbell. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents UNDERGROUND WORK FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 43 - 2 c. Synertech by Oldcastle Enclosure Solutions. 2. Precast manholes and handholes: a. Lister Industries Ltd. b. Oldcastle Enclosure Solutions. c. Jensen Precast and Utility Concrete Products. 3. Manhole and handhole and ductbank accessories: a. Cantex, Inc. b. Condux International, Inc. c. Neenah Enterprises, Inc. d. Prime Conduit. e. Thomas and Betts. f. Underground Devices, Inc. g. Unistrut by Atkore International, Inc. 2.2 MANHOLES AND HANDHOLES A. Prefabricated Composite Material Handholes: 1. Handhole body and cover: Fiberglass reinforced polymer concrete conforming to all test provisions of SCTE 77. 2. Minimum load ratings: SCTE 77 Tier 8 3. Open bottom. 4. Stackable design as required for specified depth. 5. Cover: a. Engraved legend of "ELECTRIC" or "COMMUNICATIONS". b. Non-gasketed bolt down with stainless steel penta head bolts. c. Lay-in non-bolt down, when cover is over 100 pounds. d. One or multiple sections so the maximum weight of a section is 125 pounds. 6. Cover lifting hook: 24 inches minimum in length. B. Precast Manholes and Handholes: 1. Fiberglass reinforced polymer concrete or steel reinforced cement concrete structures: 2. AASHTO live load rating: H-20 for full deliberate vehicle traffic. 3. Mating edges: Tongue and groove type. 4. Open bottom. 5. Cable pulling eyes opposite all conduit entrances. a. Coordinate exact location with installation contractor. 2.3 CONCRETE MANHOLE AND HANDHOLE ACCESSORIES A. Cover and Frame: 1. Cast ductile iron: ASTM A536. 2. AASHTO live load rating: H-20. 3. Diameter: 30 inches. 4. Cast the legend "ELECTRICAL" or "COMMUNICATIONS" into manhole and handhole covers. B. Cable Racks and Hooks: 1. Material: Heavy-duty nonmetallic (glass reinforced nylon). 2. Hook loading capacity: 400 pounds minimum. 3. Rack loading capacity: Four hooks maximum. 4. Hook deflection: 0.25 inches maximum. 5. Hooks: Length, as required, with positive locking device to prevent upward movement. 6. Mounding hardware: Stainless steel. C. Cable Pulling Irons: 1. 7/8 inches diameter hot-dipped galvanized steel. 2. 6000 pound minimum pulling load. D. Ground Rods and Grounding Equipment: See Specification Section 26 05 26. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents UNDERGROUND WORK FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 43 - 3 2.4 UNDERGROUND CONDUIT AND ACCESSORIES A. Conduit: See Specification Section 26 05 33. B. Duct Spacers/Supports: 1. High density polyethylene or high impact polystyrene. 2. Interlocking web or mesh design. 3. Provide 3 inches minimum spacing between conduits. 4. Accessories, as required: a. Hold down bars. b. Ductbank strapping. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS - GENERAL A. Drawings indicate the intended location of manholes and handholes and routing of direct buried conduit. 1. Field conditions may affect actual routing. B. Manhole and Handhole Locations: 1. Approximately where shown on the Drawings. 2. As required for pulling distances. 3. As required to keep pulling tensions under allowable cable tensions. 4. As required for number of bends in ductbank routing. 5. Shall not be installed in a swale or ditch. 6. Determine the exact locations after careful consideration has been given to the location of other utilities, grading, and paving. 7. Locations are to be approved by the Engineer prior to excavation and placement or construction of manholes and handholes. C. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. D. Install manholes and handholes in conduit runs where indicated or as required to facilitate pulling of wires or making connections. 3.2 MANHOLES AND HANDHOLES A. Prefabricated Composite Material Handholes: 1. For use in areas subjected to occasional non-deliberate vehicular traffic. 2. Provide handhole on six inch compacted layer of fill material in accordance with Division 3 and six inches larger than handholes footprint on all sides. 3. Provide concrete encasement ring around handhole per manufacturers installation instructions (minimum of 10 inches wide x 12 inches deep). 4. Install so that the surrounding grade is 1 inch lower than the top of the handhole. 5. Size: As indicated on the Drawings or as required for the number and size of conduits. 6. Provide cable rails and pulling eyes as needed. B. Precast Manholes and Handholes: 1. For use in vehicular and non-vehicular traffic areas. 2. Construction: a. Grout or seal all joints, per manufacturer's instructions. b. Support cables on walls by cable racks: 1) Provide a minimum of two racks, install symmetrically on each wall of manholes and handholes. a) Provide additional cable racks, as required, so that both ends of cable splices will be supported horizontally. 2) Equip cable racks with adjustable hooks: Quantity of cable hooks as required by the number of conductors to be supported. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents UNDERGROUND WORK FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 43 - 4 c. In each manhole and handhole, drive 3/4 inches x 10 feet long copper clad ground rod into the earth with approximately 6 inches exposed above finished floor. 1) Drill opening in floor for ground rod. 2) Connect all metallic components to ground rod by means of #8 AWG minimum copper wire and approved grounding clamps. 3) Utilize a ground bar in the manhole or handhole if the quantity of ground wires exceeds three. a) Connect ground bar to ground rod with a #2/0 AWG minimum copper wire. 3. Provide manholes and handholes on six inch compacted layer of fill material in accordance with Division 3 and six inches larger than manholes and handholes footprint on all sides. 4. Install so that the top of cover is 1 inch above finished grade. a. Where existing grades are higher than finished grades, install sufficient number of courses of curved segmented concrete block between top of handhole and manhole frame to temporarily elevate manhole cover to existing grade level. 5. After installation is complete, provide and compact required fill materials around manholes and handholes. 6. Handhole size: a. As indicated on the Drawings or as required for the number and size of conduits entering or as indicated on the Drawings. b. Minimum floor dimension of 4 feet x 4 feet and minimum depth of 4 feet. 7. Manhole size: a. As indicated on the Drawings or as required for the number and size of conduits entering or as indicated on the Drawings. b. Minimum floor dimension of 6 feet x 6 feet and a minimum depth of 6 feet. 3.3 UNDERGROUND CONDUITS A. General Installation Requirements: 1. Ductbank types per location: a. Direct-buried conduit(s): 1) As indicated in the Ductbank Schedule. 2. During construction and after conduit installation is complete, plug the ends of all conduits. 3. Provide conduit supports and spacers. a. Place supports and spacers for rigid nonmetallic conduit on maximum centers as indicated for the following trade sizes: 1) 1 inches and less: 3 feet. 2) 1-1/4 to 3 inches: 5 feet. 3) 3-1/2 to 6 inches: 7 feet. b. Place supports and spacers for rigid steel conduit on maximum centers as indicated for the following trade sizes: 1) 1 inches and less: 10 feet. 2) 1-1/4 to 2-1/2 inches: 14 feet. 3) 3 inches and larger: 20 feet. c. Securely anchor conduits to supports and spacers to prevent movement during placement of concrete or other required fill materials. 4. Stagger conduit joints at intervals of 6 inches vertically. 5. Make conduit joints watertight and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 6. Accomplish underground changes in direction of runs exceeding a total of 15 degrees by long sweep bends having a minimum radius of 10 feet. a. Sweep bends may be made up of one or more curved or straight sections or combinations thereof. 7. Furnish manufactured elbows at end of runs as the conduit transitions to above grade. a. Minimum radius of 18 inches for conduits less than 3 inches trade size and 36 inches for conduits 3 inches trade size and larger. 8. Field cuts requiring tapers shall be made with the proper tools and shall match factory tapers. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents UNDERGROUND WORK FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 43 - 5 9. After the conduit run has been completed: a. Prove joint integrity and test for out-of-round duct by pulling a test mandrel through each conduit. 1) Test mandrel: a) Length: Not less than 12 inches. b) Diameter: Approximately 1/4 inches less than the inside diameter of the conduit. b. Clean the conduit by pulling a heavy duty wire brush mandrel followed by a rubber duct swab through each conduit. 10. Transition from rigid nonmetallic conduit to rigid metallic conduit, per Specification Section 26 05 33, prior to entering a structure or going above ground. a. Except rigid nonmetallic conduit may be extended directly to manholes, handholes, pad mounted transformer boxes and other exterior pad mounted electrical equipment where the conduit is concealed within the enclosure. b. Terminate rigid PVC conduits with end bells. c. Terminate steel conduits with insulated bushings. 11. Place warning tape in trench directly over ductbanks, direct-buried conduit, and direct- buried wire and cable in accordance with Specification Section 10 14 00. 12. Placement of conduits stubbing into handholes and manholes shall be located to allow for proper bending radiuses of the cables. B. Direct-Buried Conduit(s): 1. Install so that the top of the uppermost conduit, at any point: a. Is not less than 30 inches below grade. b. Is below pavement sub-grading. 2. Provide a uniform minimum clearance of 3 inches between conduits or as required in Specification Section 26 05 33 for different cabling types. END OF SECTION Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 This page intentionally left blank. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents ELECTRICAL SEISMIC RESTRAINT SYSTEMS 26 05 48 - 1 SECTION 26 05 48 ELECTRICAL SEISMIC RESTRAINT SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. The design and installation of seismic bracing and anchorage required for electrical equipment, conduit, cable tray, and bus ducts. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards: 1. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE): a. 7, Minimum Design Loads and Associated Criteria for Buildings and Other Structures. 2. ASTM International (ASTM): a. A36/A36M, Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel. b. A307, Standard Specification Carbon Steel Bolts, Studs, and Threaded Rod, 60,000 psi Tensile Strength. c. A500/A500M, Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes. d. A588/A588M, Standard Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy Structural Steel, up to 50 ksi (345 MPa) Minimum Yield Point, with Atmospheric Corrosion Resistance. e. A992/A992M, Standard Specification for Structural Steel Shapes. f. F1554, Standard Specification for Anchor Bolts, Steel, 36, 55, and 105 ksi Yield Strength. 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Contractor is responsible for design and installation of seismic bracing and anchorage systems. B. Description of Systems: 1. Transverse and longitudinal bracing for seismic forces on suspended electrical systems including conduit, cable tray, bus duct, and equipment. 2. Anchorage of floor and roof mounted electrical equipment. C. Seismic Design Requirements: 1. Seismic design criteria: Provide bracing and anchoring for equipment, conduit, cable tray, bust duct, designed, constructed, and installed to resist stresses produced by lateral forces. D. Design and install seismic anchorage and bracing for all floor or roof mounted equipment weighing 400 pounds or more and all suspended or wall mounted equipment weighing 20 pounds or more. E. The following components are exempt from the requirements of this Specification Section: 1. Electrical components in structures assigned to Seismic Design Category C provided that the importance factor (Ip) is equal to 1.0. 2. Electrical components in Seismic Design Categories D, E, and F where Ip = 1.0 and flexible connections between the components and associated conduit are provided and that are mounted at 4 feet (1.22 M) or less above a floor level and weigh 400 LBS (1780 N)or less. 3. Electrical components in Seismic Design Categories D, E, and F weighing 20 pounds (95 N) or less where Ip = 1.0 and flexible connections between the components and conduit are provided, or for distribution systems, weighing 5 pounds/FT (7 N/M) or less. F. Seismic forces shall be presumed to act through the center of mass of the equipment in a direction that will produce the largest single anchor force. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents ELECTRICAL SEISMIC RESTRAINT SYSTEMS 26 05 48 - 2 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. Product technical data: a. Seismic control devices. 2. Fabrication and/or layout drawings: a. Layout and mounting detail drawings showing system and proposed brace locations for all systems including pre-engineered systems. b. The specific detail for each type of brace or anchor must be referenced on a plan that identifies the required location. 1) Supplying a book of details without referencing the proper detail to a specific location on a plan is not acceptable. c. Structural calculations for required lateral force level for each component. d. All submittals, including pre-approved systems, shall be signed and sealed by a licensed engineer, licensed in the state in which the project is located. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Pre-engineered suspended bracing systems: a. International Seismic Application Technology (ISAT) “Engineered Seismic Bracing of Suspended Utilities”. b. Unistrut by Atkore International, Inc. c. TOLCO by Eaton. d. B-Line by Eaton. 2. Custom engineered systems designed using specified criteria and common building materials. 2.2 EQUIPMENT ANCHORS AND SUPPORTS A. Drilled-in-place concrete anchors shall have an approved ICBO Evaluation Services Report. B. Cast-in-place anchors shall comply with ASTM A36, ASTM A307, or ASTM F1554, 36 ksi. C. Anchors permanently exposed to weather or corrosive environments shall be stainless steel or hot-dipped galvanized. D. Structural steel for supports: ASTM A36, A588, A992 or A500. E. Cold formed metal and connection material: Unistrut, or equal. F. Any details provided are based on assumed equipment and arrangement. 1. The Contractor shall be responsible for design and acquiring approval for support and anchorage of equipment and arrangement which varies from equipment and arrangement assumed in detail provided. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Every run which requires bracing shall have a minimum of two transverse braces and one longitudinal brace. 1. A "run" is defined as suspended pipe, conduit, cable tray, bus ductor trapeze rack having a minimum 10 feet straight run length. B. Brace spacing shall not exceed the maximum allowable brace spacing as engineered by the manufacturer or custom bracing designer. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents ELECTRICAL SEISMIC RESTRAINT SYSTEMS 26 05 48 - 3 C. Bracing may be omitted from conduit, cable tray and bus duct runs less than 10 feet in length. D. Bracing may be omitted from conduit, cable tray and bus duct runs where rod hung supports of less than 12 inches. (305 mm) in length are required. 1. All unbraced suspended utility systems having 2 inches conduit and larger or systems weighing more then 5 pounds/FT shall be installed with a minimum 6 inches clearance to suspended ceiling vertical hanger wires. 2. The conduit, cable tray, or bus duct shall be installed such that the lateral motion of the members will not cause damaging impact with other systems or structural members or loss of vertical support. E. A longitudinal brace at a 90 degrees change in direction may act as a transverse brace if it is located within 2 feet of the change in direction. F. A transverse brace may act as a longitudinal brace if it is located within 2 feet of a change in direction and if the brace arm and anchorage have been sized to meet or exceed the requirements of the longitudinal brace. G. When bracing equipment or a utility system that is suspended from an overhead deck, brace back to the overhead deck or to the supporting structure supporting the deck. 1. Do not brace to another element of the structure which may respond differently during a seismic event. H. Obtain approval from the Structural Engineer prior to attaching any brace elements to structural steel or wood framing. I. When utilizing cable bracing, tension the cable to remove slack without inducing uplift of the suspended element. 1. Tension seismic bracing system prior to system start-up and adjust if necessary after equipment start-up. J. As a general rule, do not mix rigid bracing with cable bracing in the same run. 1. However, once bracing has transitioned a 90 degrees change in run direction, the bracing may switch from rigid to cable or vice versa if required due to a significant change in overhead deck elevation or to provide an implementable bracing scheme in a congested area. K. Install brace members at an angle of 45 degrees from horizontal within a tolerance of +2- 1/2 DEG or -45 degrees provided the brace length is accounted for in design. 1. Brace angle may be increased to 60 degrees provided the brace spacing is reduced to 1/2 that required for a 45 degrees brace. L. Seismic bracing may not pass through a building separation joint. 1. Utility systems that pass through a separation joint must be seismically restrained no greater than 5 feet from the point of connection. 2. Any hardware designed to accommodate seismic movement across the span of the separation joint shall be installed per manufacturer's installation and listing instructions. M. With approval of the Structural Engineer, utility systems that are suspended from the overhead deck may be braced to load bearing concrete or CMU (concrete masonry) walls provided that the walls and the overhead decks will respond similarly during a seismic event. N. Each layer of a multiple layer trapeze rack shall be braced individually based on the weight of the individual layer. O. Conduit, cable tray, or bus duct constructed of non ductile material (plastic or fiberglass), shall have brace spacing reduced to 1/2 of the spacing allowed for ductile materials. P. Where brace elements are through-bolted, the mounting hole in the element is to be no more than 1/16 inches in diameter larger then the bolt or threaded rod. Q. Seismic braces shall directly brace the support and not the hanger. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents ELECTRICAL SEISMIC RESTRAINT SYSTEMS 26 05 48 - 4 3.2 SUSPENDED ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS A. Install seismic bracing for all conduit 2-1/2 inches trade size or greater. B. All trapeze assemblies supporting conduits, cable trays or bus ducts shall be braced considering the total weight of the elements on the trapeze. 1. For the purposes of calculating weight, all conduits are to be treated as full. C. Brace all trapeze racks which support conduit 2-1/2 inches trade size or larger. 1. Brace all other conduit rack, cable tray or bus duct trapezes having a minimum weight in excess of 10 pounds/LF. 2. Include a minimum 10% additional capacity for future additions. D. Seismic bracing may be omitted from cable trays, conduit and bus ducts suspended by rod hung supports 12 inches or less in length form the top of the element to the bottom of the structural attachment of the hanger provided lateral motion will not cause damaging impacts to other systems or loss of system vertical support. E. For steel and aluminum bus ducts, conduit and cable trays: 1. Provide transverse bracing at 40 feet maximum spacing unless otherwise noted. 2. Provide longitudinal bracing at 80 feet maximum spacing unless otherwise noted. F. All vertical risers involving conduit 2-1/2 inches in diameter or larger shall include lateral restraint at maximum 30 feet intervals and at the top and bottom of the riser. G. Make provisions to eliminate seismic impact between components. 3.3 FLOOR OR ROOF MOUNTED EQUIPMENT A. Provide one anchor on each leg or corner. 1. Support with a minimum of three 3/8 inches diameter anchors. B. Friction shall be neglected when designing anchors for shear. C. Vertical seismic forces, when required, shall be presumed to act concurrently with horizontal seismic forces. D. Batteries on racks or for generators shall have wrap around restrains to ensure that the batteries will not slide laterally. Spacers shall be used between the restraints and cases to prevent damage to the cases. E. Electrical cabinet design shall comply with the applicable NEMA standards. Cutouts in the lower shear panel that have not been made by the manufacturer and reduce significantly the strength of the cabinet shall be specifically evaluated. END OF SECTION Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents ACCEPTANCE TESTING 26 08 13 - 1 SECTION 26 08 13 ACCEPTANCE TESTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Basic requirements for acceptance testing. B. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Section 01 61 03 - Common Work Results for Equipment. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards: 1. InterNational Electrical Testing Association (NETA): a. ATS, Standard for Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electric Power Equipment and Systems. 2. Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL). 3. Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic Industries Alliance/American National Standards Institute (TIA/EIA/ANSI): a. 455-78-B, Optical Fibres - PART 1-40: Measurement Methods and Test Procedures - Attenuation. B. Qualifications: 1. Testing firm: a. An independent firm performing, as the sole or principal part of its business for a minimum of 10 years, the inspection, testing, calibration , and adjusting of systems. b. Must have an established monitoring and testing equipment calibration program with accuracy traceable in an unbroken chain, according to NIST. 2. Field personnel: a. Minimum of one year field experience covering all phases of electrical equipment inspection, testing, and calibration. b. Relay test technician having previous experience with testing and calibration of relays of the same manufacturer and type used on project and proficient in setting and testing the types of protection elements used. c. Supervisor certified by NETA or NICET. 1) As an alternative, supervising technician may be certified by the equipment manufacturer 3. Analysis personnel: a. Minimum three years combined field testing and data analysis experience. b. Supervisor certified by NETA or NICET. 1) As an alternative, supervising technician may be certified by the equipment manufacturer. C. Phasing Diagram: 1. Coordinate with Utility Company for phase rotations and Phase A, B and C markings. a. Create a phasing diagram showing the coordinated phase rotations with generators and motors through the transformers. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. Equipment Monitoring and Testing Plan. B. Informational Submittals: 1. Prior to energizing equipment: Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents ACCEPTANCE TESTING 26 08 13 - 2 a. Coordinated phasing diagram. b. Photocopies of all continuity tests. 2. Within two weeks after successful completion of Demonstration Period (Commissioning Period): a. Single report containing information including: 1) Summary of Project. 2) Information from pre-energization testing. 3) Testing and monitoring reports. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FACTORY QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide Electrical equipment with all factory tests required by the applicable industry standards or NRTL. B. Factory testing will not be accepted in lieu of specified field acceptance testing requirements. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. General: 1. Complete electrical testing in three phases: a. Pre-energization testing phase. b. Equipment energized with no load. c. Equipment energized under load. 2. Perform testing in accordance with this Specification Section and NETA ATS. 3. Provide field setting and programming of all adjustable protective devices and meters to settings as determined by the approved coordination study. 4. Equip testing and analysis personnel with all appropriate project related reference material required to perform tests, analyze results, and provide documentation including, but not limited to: a. Contract Drawings and Specifications. b. Related construction change documentation. c. Approved Shop Drawings. d. Approved Operation and Maintenance Manuals. e. Other pertinent information as required. B. Equipment Monitoring and Testing Plan: 1. Approved in accordance with Shop Drawing submittal schedule. 2. Included as a minimum: a. Qualifications of firm, field personnel, and analysis personnel doing the Work. b. List and description of testing and analysis equipment to be utilized. c. List of all equipment to be testing, including: 1) Name and tag numbers identified in the Contract Documents. 2) Manufacturer’s serial numbers. 3) Other pertinent manufacturer identification, C. Instruments Used in Equipment and Connections Quality Control Testing: 1. Minimum calibration frequency: a. Field analog instruments: Not more than 6 months. b. Field digital instruments: Not more than 12 months. c. Laboratory instruments: Not more than 12 months. d. If instrument manufacturer’s calibration requirements are more stringent, those requirements shall govern. 2. Carry current calibration status and labels on all testing instruments. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents ACCEPTANCE TESTING 26 08 13 - 3 3. See individual testing programs for additional instrumentation compliance requirements. D. Testing and Monitoring Program Documentation: 1. Provide reports with tabbed sections for each piece of equipment tested. 2. Include all testing results associated with each piece of equipment under that equipment’s tabbed section. a. Include legible copies of all forms used to record field test information. 3. Prior to start of testing, submit one copy of preliminary report format for Engineer review and comment a. Include data gathering and sample test report forms that will be utilized. 4. In the final report, include as a minimum, the following information for all equipment tested: a. Equipment identification, including: 1) Name and tag numbers identified in the Contract Documents. 2) Manufacturer’s serial numbers. 3) Other pertinent manufacturer identification, b. Date and time of each test. c. Ambient conditions including temperature, humidity, and precipitation. d. Visual inspection report. e. Description of test and referenced standards, if any, followed while conducting tests. f. Results of initial and all retesting. g. Acceptance criteria. h. "As found" and "as left" conditions. i. Corrective action, if required, taken to meet acceptance. j. Verification of corrective action signed by the Contractor, equipment supplier, and Owner’s representative. k. Instrument calibration dates of all instruments used in testing. 5. Provide three (3) bound final reports prior to Project final completion. E. Electrical Equipment and Connections Testing Program: 1. See individual Division 26 Specification Sections for equipment specific testing requirements. 2. Test all electrical equipment. a. Perform all required NETA testing. b. Perform all required NETA testing plus the optional testing identified with each specific type of equipment in Article 3.2 of this Specification Section. 3.2 SPECIFIC EQUIPMENT TESTING REQUIREMENTS A. Switchgear and Switchboards: 1. Perform inspections and tests per NETA ATS 7.1. 2. Components: Test all components per applicable paragraphs of this Specification Section and NETA ATS. B. Transformers - Small Dry Type: 1. Perform inspections and tests per NETA ATS 7.2.1.1. 2. Perform the following additional tests: a. Record phase-to-phase, phase-to-neutral, and neutral-to-ground voltages at no load after energizing, and at operating load after startup. 3. Adjust tap connections as required to provide secondary voltage within 2-1/2% of nominal under normal load after approval of Engineer. 4. Record as-left tap connections. C. Transformers - Large Dry Type: 1. Perform inspections and tests per NETA ATS 7.2.1.2. 2. Components: Test all components per applicable paragraphs of this Specification Section and NETA ATS. 3. Perform the following additional tests: Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents ACCEPTANCE TESTING 26 08 13 - 4 a. Record phase-to-phase, phase-to-neutral, and neutral-to-ground voltages at no load after energizing, and at operating load after start-up. 4. Adjust tap connections as required to provide secondary voltage within 2-1/2% of nominal under normal load. 5. Record as-left tap connections. D. Transformers - Liquid Filled: 1. Perform inspections and tests per NETA ATS 7.2.2. 2. Components: Test all components per applicable paragraphs of this Specification Section and NETA ATS. 3. Perform the following additional tests: a. Record phase-to-phase, phase-to-neutral, and neutral-to-ground voltages at no load after energizing, and at operating load after start-up. 4. Adjust tap changer setting as required to provide secondary voltage within 2-1/2% of nominal under normal load after approval of Engineer. 5. Record as-left tap changer setting. E. Cable - Low Voltage: 1. Perform inspections and tests per NETA ATS 7.3.2. a. Insulation resistance testing is limited to conductors #8 AWG and larger. F. Cable - Optical Fiber: 1. Perform inspections on tests per TIA/EIA/ANSI 455-78-B, including: a. Optical time domain reflectometer test. b. Power attenuation test. c. Gain margin test. G. Low Voltage Molded Case Circuit Breakers: 1. Perform inspections and tests per NETA ATS 7.6.1.1. 2. Components: a. Test all components per applicable paragraphs of this Specification Section and NETA ATS. b. Thermal magnetic breakers: Visual and mechanical inspection per NETA ATS only. c. Solid state trip type: Visual and mechanical inspection and electrical tests per NETA ATS. 3. Record as-left settings. H. Instrument Transformers: 1. Perform inspections and tests per NETA ATS 7.10. 2. Components: Test all components per applicable paragraphs of this Specification Section and NETA ATS. 3. Perform the following optional tests per NETA ATS: a. Dielectric withstand test on potential transformers. I. Metering: 1. Perform inspections and tests per NETA ATS 7.11. 2. Components: Test all components per applicable paragraphs of this Specification Section and NETA ATS. J. Grounding: 1. Perform inspections and tests per NETA ATS 7.13. 2. Components: Test all components per applicable paragraphs of this Specification Section and NETA ATS. K. Motors: 1. Perform inspections and tests per NETA ATS 7.15. L. Motor Controllers: 1. Perform inspections and tests per NETA ATS 7.16. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents ACCEPTANCE TESTING 26 08 13 - 5 2. Components: Test all components per applicable paragraphs of this Specification Section and NETA ATS. M. Generators: 1. Perform inspections and tests per NETA ATS 7.15.2. 2. Components: Test all components per applicable paragraphs of this Specification Section and NETA ATS. N. Control System Functional Test: 1. Perform test upon completion of equipment acceptance tests. 2. The test is to prove the correct interaction of all sensing, processing and action devices. 3. Develop a test plan and parameters for the purpose of evaluating the performance of the system. 4. Perform the following tests: a. Verify the correct operation of all interlock safety devices for fail-safe functions in addition to design function. b. Verify the correct operation of all sensing devices, alarms and indicating devices. END OF SECTION Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 This page intentionally left blank. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents ELECTRICAL POWER MONITORING 26 09 13 - 1 SECTION 26 09 13 ELECTRICAL POWER MONITORING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Digital metering equipment. B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Section 26 05 00 – Common Work Results for Electrical. 2. Section 26 08 13 - Acceptance Testing. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards: 1. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): a. 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum). 2. National Electrical Manufacturers Association/American National Standards Institute (NEMA/ANSI): a. C12.20, For Electricity Meter - 0.2 and 0.5 Accuracy Classes. 3. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): a. 508, Standard for Safety Industrial Control Equipment. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. Product technical data including: a. Provide submittal data for all products specified in PART 2 of this Specification: b. See Section 26 05 00 for additional requirements. 2. Fabrication and/or layout drawings. a. Electrical wiring/connection diagrams. B. Contract Closeout Information: 1. Operation and Maintenance Data: a. See Specification Section 01 78 23 for requirements for the mechanics, administration, and the content of Operation and Maintenance Manual submittals. b. Content of Operation and Maintenance Manual: 1) Data sheet of the meters electrical parameters, configuration and characteristics including a complete model number and associated equipment connected too. 2) Operating instructions of the meter(s) supplied. 3) Operating instructions of the Power Management software. 4) Maintenance instructions. 5) As-constructed electrical wiring/connection diagrams. 6) Acceptance testing data. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Allen-Bradley. 2. Eaton. 3. Electro Industries. 4. ABB. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents ELECTRICAL POWER MONITORING 26 09 13 - 2 5. Power Measurement. 6. Square D Company. 7. Siemens. 2.2 DIGITAL METERING DEVICES A. General: 1. Direct reading metered or calculated values. 2. Microprocessor based. 3. Integral LED or LCD display. 4. Current and potential transformers as required. 5. Integral fusing. 6. Operating temperature: 0 degrees F to 150 degrees F. 7. Standards: a. NEMA/ANSI C12.20. b. UL 508. B. Type 'B' Midrange Meter: 1. Display the following minimum electrical parameters (accuracy): a. RMS current per phase (+0.3% full scale). b. RMS voltage line-to-line and line-to-neutral (+0.3% full scale). c. Real power (W): 3 PH total (+0.6% full scale). d. Apparent power (VA): 3 PH total (+0.6% full scale). e. Reactive power (VAR): 3 PH total (+0.6% full scale). f. Power factor (+1.0%). g. Frequency (+0.17%). h. Percent current total harmonic distortion (31st). i. Percent voltage total harmonic distortion (31st). 2. Data logging: a. 128 KB. b. Selectable for parameters listed above for display. c. Software for configuration, retrieval, and trending. 3. Communication ports and protocols: Ethernet TCP/IP. 4. Supply voltage: 120 VAC. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Power Management and Control Software: 1. Manufacturer’s standard, see Part 3 for minimum functionality. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install as indicated and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and instructions. 1. Provide all equipment as necessary to provide a complete and functioning system. 2. Coordinate with the Owner on final computer screen layouts, trending requirements and printouts. B. Meter Type Application: 1. Type B meters: Integral to equipment as indicated on the Drawings. C. Communication Configuration: 1. As indicated on the Drawings. D. Computer Screen Configuration: 1. Each meter shall have a data screen with the following minimum data as applicable for the capabilities of that type of meter: a. Voltage line-to-line for each phase and an average. b. Voltage line-to-neutral for each phase and an average. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents ELECTRICAL POWER MONITORING 26 09 13 - 3 c. Current for each phase, neutral and average and peak demands. d. Kilowatts (kW) for each phase, total, demand and peak demand. e. Kilovolt-amperes (kVA) for each phase, total, demand and peak demand. f. Kilovolt-amperes reactive (kVAR) for each phase, total, demand and peak demand. g. Power factor for each phase and total. h. Frequency. i. Voltage total harmonic distortion for each phase. j. Current total harmonic distortion for each phase. k. Energy (kWhr) for each phase and total. l. A seven day kW, kVA and kVAR trend average. m. Peak demands shall be resettable by the operator. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Acceptance Testing: See Section 26 08 13. 3.3 TRAINING A. A qualified factory-trained manufacturer's representative shall provide the Owner with 8 hours of on-site training in the operation and maintenance of the metering system and its components. END OF SECTION Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 This page intentionally left blank. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents ELECTRICAL CONTROL COMPONENTS 26 09 16 - 1 SECTION 26 09 16 ELECTRICAL CONTROL COMPONENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Operator control devices (selector switches, pushbuttons, indicator lights, etc.). 2. Control devices (timers, relays, contactors, etc.). 3. Industrial Control Panels. 4. Operator Control Stations. B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Section 26 05 00 - Common Work Results for Electrical. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards: 1. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): a. 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum). b. ICS 2, Industrial Control and System Controllers, Contactors and Overload Relays Rated 600 Volts. c. ICS 5, Control Circuit and Pilot Devices. 2. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): a. 508, Standard for Safety Industrial Control Equipment. b. 508A, Standard for Industrial Control Panels. c. 698A, Standard for Industrial Control Panels Relating to Hazardous (Classified) Locations. 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. This Specification specifies components used within other equipment as referenced in other technical specifications. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. Product technical data: a. Provide submittal data for all products specified in PART 2 of this Specification: 1) When components are used within equipment specified in another Section, submittal data for components specified herein shall be included with the submittal for the equipment the components are used in. b. Industrial Control Panel bill of material. c. See Section 26 05 00 for additional requirements. 2. Fabrication and/or layout drawings. a. Industrial Control Panel: 1) Interior and exterior layout. 2) Wiring/connection diagrams. 3) Copy of the UL 508A label. 4) Short Circuit Current Rating (SCCR) nameplate marking per NFPA 70. Include any required calculations. B. Informational Submittals: 1. Functional Test Plan. C. Contract Closeout Information: 1. Operation and Maintenance Data: Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents ELECTRICAL CONTROL COMPONENTS 26 09 16 - 2 a. See Section 01 78 23 for requirements for the mechanics, administration, and the content of Operation and Maintenance Manual submittals. b. Content of Operation and Maintenance Manual: 1) Product technical data of components used within Industrial Control Panels. 2) As-constructed wiring/connection diagrams for Industrial Control Panels. 3) Functional Test Report. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Pilot devices, relays, contactors, and termination equipment: a. Allen-Bradley by Rockwell Automation, Inc. b. ATC Diversified Electronics by Bellofram Group of Companies. c. ASCO by Emerson Electric Co. d. Eaton. e. ABB. f. IDEC Corporation. g. Phoenix Contact. h. Potter and Brumsfield (P&B) by TE Connectivity. i. Schneider Electric. j. Siemens Corporation. 2. Alarm devices: a. Edwards Signaling by United Technologies Corp. b. Federal Signal Corporation. 3. Enclosures: a. Hoffman Engineering. b. Wiegmann by Hubbell. c. B-Line by Eaton. d. Adalet. e. Stahlin by Robroy Enclosures. 2.2 PILOT DEVICES A. General Requirements: 1. Standards: NEMA ICS 5, UL 508. 2. Heavy-duty NEMA 4/13 watertight/oiltight. 3. Heavy-duty NEMA 4/4X corrosion resistant. 4. Heavy-duty factory sealed, explosion-proof and dust ignition-proof (Class I and II). 5. Mounting hole: 30.5 mm. 6. Contact blocks: 10 amp, NEMA A600 rated, number as required to fulfill functions shown or specified. 7. Legend plate marked as indicated on Drawings or specified. B. Selector Switches: 1. Two, three- or four-position rotary switch as required to fulfill functions shown or specified. 2. Maintained contact type. 3. Knob or lever type operators. C. Pushbuttons: 1. Non-illuminated type: a. Protective boot. b. Momentary contact. c. Standard flush and mushroom operators. d. color for STOP or OFF. e. Emergency stop pushbuttons: Mushroom head operator and maintained contact. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents ELECTRICAL CONTROL COMPONENTS 26 09 16 - 3 2. Illuminating type: a. Protective boot. b. Momentary contact. c. Standard flush operator. d. Serves as both pushbutton control and indicating light. e. Resistor-type full voltage light unit with lens and panel gasket. D. Indicating Lights: 1. Allowing replacement of bulb without removal from control panel. 2. Lamp: LED, 120 V or 24 V as required. 3. Full voltage type. 4. Push-to-test indicating lights. 5. Plastic lens. 2.3 RELAYS A. General Requirements: 1. Standards: NEMA ICS 5, UL 508. B. Control Relays: 1. General purpose (ice cube) type: a. Plug-in housing. b. Clear polycarbonate dust cover with clip fastener. c. Coil voltage: 120 VAC or as required. d. Contacts: 1) 10 amp continuous. 2) Silver cadmium oxide. 3) Minimum of 3 SPDT contacts. e. Sockets: DIN rail mounted. f. Internal neon or LED indicator is lit when coil is energized. g. Manual operator switch. 2. Industrial type: a. Coil voltage: 120 VAC or as required. b. Contacts: 1) 10 amp, NEMA A600 rated. 2) Double break, silver alloy. 3) Convertible from normally open to normally closed or vice versa, without removing any wiring. 4) Expandable from 2 poles to 12 poles. c. Provide contacts for all required control plus two spares. C. Time Delay Relays: 1. General purpose type: a. Timing modes: On and Off delay, interval, one shot and repeat cycle. b. Plug-in housing. c. Polycarbonate dust cover with clip fastener. d. Coil voltage: 120 VAC or as required. e. Contacts: 1) 10 amp continuous. 2) Silver cadmium oxide. 3) Two normally open and two normally closed DPDT contacts. f. Sockets: DIN rail mounted. g. External timing adjustment knob. h. Timing ranges: 0.05 seconds to 16.65 hours. i. Repeat accuracy: +1%. 2. Solid State industrial type: a. Timing modes: On and Off delay and repeat cycle. b. Industrial housing. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents ELECTRICAL CONTROL COMPONENTS 26 09 16 - 4 c. Coil voltage: 120 VAC or as required. d. Contacts: 1) 5 amp, NEMA B150 rated. 2) Silver alloy. 3) Convertible On Delay and Off Delay contacts. 4) One normally open and one normally closed timed contacts. 5) One normally open and one normally closed instantaneous contacts. e. Furnish with "on" and "timing out" indicators. f. External timing adjustment knob. g. Timing ranges: 0.05 seconds to 10 hours. h. Repeat accuracy: +1%. 3. Mechanical industrial type: a. Timing modes: On and Off delay. b. Coil voltage: 120 VAC or as required. c. Contacts: 1) 10 amp, NEMA A600 rated. 2) Double break, silver alloy. 3) Convertible On Delay and Off Delay contacts. 4) Convertible normally open and normally closed timed contacts. 5) Convertible normally open instantaneous contacts. d. External timing adjustment knob. e. Timing ranges: 0.2 - 60 seconds or 5 - 180 seconds. f. Repeat accuracy: Greater than +10%. 2.4 CONTACTORS A. General Requirements: 1. Standards: NEMA ICS 2, UL 508. B. Definite Purpose: 1. Coil voltage: 120 VAC or as required. 2. Contacts: Totally enclosed, double-break silver-cadmium-oxide. 3. Resistive load and horsepower rated. 4. Number of poles, continuous ampere rating and voltage, as indicated on Drawings or as specified. 5. Auxiliary contacts, as indicated on Drawings or as specified. 2.5 PHOTOCELLS A. Photocells: 1. Weatherproof enclosure. 2. Adjustable turn-on range, initially set at 1.0 foot-candles. a. Turn-off level approximately three times turn-on. 3. Provide time delay device to eliminate nuisance switching. 4. Voltage, amperage and/or wattage ratings as required for the application. 2.6 ALARM DEVICES A. Alarm Horns: 1. Vibrating horn type. 2. PLC compatible as required. 3. Heavy-duty die cast housing with corrosion resistant finish. 4. Adjustable volume: 78 to 103 dB at 10 feet. 5. Voltage: 120 VAC or as required. 6. Enclosures/mountings: a. Flush wall or panel mounting in dry areas. b. NEMA 4X panel mounting in wet areas. c. Surface mounting in dry areas. d. NEMA 4X surface mounting in wet areas. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents ELECTRICAL CONTROL COMPONENTS 26 09 16 - 5 e. NEMA 4X, hazardous location surface mounting in wet and hazardous areas. 1) Fixed volume: 97 dB at 10 feet. B. Alarm Lights: 1. Panel mounted: a. Strobe type. b. Shatter resistant polycarbonate lens and base. c. Lens color as indicated on Drawings. d. NEMA 4X enclosure. e. PLC compatible. f. Voltage: 120 VAC. 2. Wall mounted: a. Heavy-duty strobe type. b. Weatherproof shatter resistant polycarbonate lens and cast base. c. Optically designed fresnel lens with color as indicated on Drawings. d. Immune to shock and vibration, no moving parts. e. Xenon flash tube providing a minimum of 65 single flashes per minute. f. Mounting: Wall or corner wall brackets. 3. Hazardous and corrosive locations: a. Heavy-duty strobe type. b. Weatherproof and rated for the indicated hazardous location. c. Body: Zinc plated cast iron or cast copper free aluminum and/or coated with 20 mils of PVC. d. High impact glass dome with guard. e. Shatter resistant polycarbonate lens with color as indicated on Drawings. f. Immune to shock and vibration, no moving parts. g. Xenon flash tube providing a minimum of 65 single flashes per minute. h. Mounting: Wall bracket or pendant. 2.7 MISCELLANEOUS DEVICES A. Run Time Meters: 1. Six-digit wheels including a 1/10 digit. 2. Non-reset type. 3. Time range in hours. 4. Automatic recycle at zero. 5. Accuracy: 1%. 6. Sealed against dirt and moisture. 7. Tamperproof. 2.8 TERMINATION EQUIPMENT A. General Requirements: 1. Modular type with screw compression clamp. 2. Screws: Stainless steel. 3. Current bar: Nickel-plated copper alloy. 4. Thermoplastic insulation rated for -40 to +90 degrees C. 5. Wire insertion area: Funnel-shaped to guide all conductor strands into terminal. 6. End sections and end stops at each end of terminal strip. 7. Machine-printed terminal markers on both sides of block. 8. Spacing: 6 mm. 9. Wire size: 22-12 AWG. 10. Rated voltage: 600 V. 11. DIN rail mounting. B. Standard-Type Block: 1. Rated current: 30 A. 2. Color: Gray body. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents ELECTRICAL CONTROL COMPONENTS 26 09 16 - 6 C. Bladed-Type Disconnect Block: 1. Terminal block with knife blade disconnect which connects or isolated the two sides of the block. 2. Rated current: 10 A. 3. Color: a. Panel control voltage leaves enclosure - normal: Gray body, orange switch. b. Foreign voltage entering enclosure: Orange body, orange switch. D. Grounded-Type Block: 1. Electrically grounded to mounting rail. 2. Terminal ground wires and analog cable shields. 3. Color: Green and yellow body. E. Fuse Holders: 1. Blocks can be ganged for multi-pole operation. 2. Spacing: 9.1 mm. 3. Wire size: 30-12 AWG. 4. Rated voltage: 300 V. 5. Rated current: 12 A. 6. Fuse size: 1/4 x 1-1/4. 7. Blown fuse indication. 8. DIN rail mounting. 2.9 ENCLOSURES A. Industrial Control Panels: 1. NEMA 4 rated: a. Seams continuously welded and ground smooth. b. No knockouts. c. External mounting flanges. d. Hinged or non-hinged cover held closed with stainless steel screws and clamps. e. Cover with oil resistant gasket. 2. NEMA 4X rated: a. Body and cover: 14 GA Type 304 or 316 stainless steel. b. Seams continuously welded and ground smooth. c. No knockouts. d. External mounting flanges. e. Hinged door and stainless steel screws and clamps. f. Door with oil-resistant gasket. 3. NEMA 12 enclosure: a. Body and cover: 14 GA steel finished with rust inhibiting primer and manufacturers standard paint inside and out. b. No knockouts. c. External mounting flanges. d. Non-hinged stainless steel cover held closed with captivated cover screws threaded into sealed wells or hinged cover held closed with stainless steel screws and clamps. e. Flat door with oil resistant gasket. 4. Control panel miscellaneous accessories: a. Back plane mounting panels: Steel with white enamel finish or Type 304 stainless steel. b. Interiors shall be white or light gray in color. c. Wire management duct: 1) Bodies: PVC with side holes. 2) Cover: PVC snap-on. 3) Size as required. d. Rigid handles for covers larger than 9 square feet or heavier than 25 pounds. e. Split covers when heavier than 25 pounds. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents ELECTRICAL CONTROL COMPONENTS 26 09 16 - 7 f. Floor stand kits made of same material as the enclosure. g. Weldnuts for mounting optional panels and terminal kits. h. Ground bonding jumper from door, across hinge, to enclosure body. 5. Standards: NEMA 250, UL 508. 2.10 FABRICATION A. Supplier of Industrial Control Panels shall build control panel under the provisions of UL 508A or UL 698A. 1. Entire assembly shall be affixed with a UL 508A or UL 698A label "Listed Enclosed Industrial Control Panel" prior to shipment to the jobsite. 2. Provide equipment or control panels with Short Circuit Current Rating (SCCR) labeling as required by NFPA 70 and other applicable codes. a. Determine the SCCR rating by one of the following methods: 1) Method 1: SCCR rating meets or exceeds the available fault current of the source equipment when indicated on the Drawings. 2) Method 2: SCCR rating meets or exceeds the source equipment’s Amp Interrupting Current (AIC) rating as indicated on the Drawings. 3) Method 3: SCCR rating meets or exceeds the calculated available short circuit current at the control panel. b. The source equipment is the switchboard, panelboard, motor control center or similar equipment where the control panel circuit originates. 3. For Method 3, provide calculations justifying the SCCR rating. Utilize source equipment available fault current or AIC rating as indicated on the Drawings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install as indicated and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and instructions. B. Control Panels: 1. Size as required to mount the equipment. 2. Permitted uses of NEMA 4 enclosure: a. Surface mounted in areas designated as wet. 3. Permitted uses of NEMA 4X enclosure: a. Surface mounted in areas designated as wet and/or corrosive or highly corrosive. 4. Permitted uses of NEMA 12 enclosure: a. Surface mounted in areas designated as dry and/or dusty architecturally or non- architecturally finished areas. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. See Section 26 05 00. B. Industrial Control Panel(s) Functional Test: 1. The test is to prove the correct interaction of all sensing, processing and action devices. 2. Develop a test plan and parameters for the purpose of evaluating the performance of the system. a. Plan shall have witness signature lines for the contractor and owner and submitted when system pass the test. 3. Perform the following tests: a. Verify functionality of all control states. b. Verify the correct operation of all interlock safety devices for fail-safe functions c. Verify the correct operation of all sensing devices, alarms and indicating devices. 3.3 TRAINING A. A qualified supplier representative shall provide the Owner with on-site training in the operation and maintenance of the Industrial Control Panel(s) and its components. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents ELECTRICAL CONTROL COMPONENTS 26 09 16 - 8 END OF SECTION Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents PANELBOARDS 26 24 16 - 1 SECTION 26 24 16 PANELBOARDS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Branch circuit panelboards. 2. Distribution panelboards. B. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Section 10 14 00 – Identification Devices. 2. Section 26 05 00 - Common Work Results for Electrical. 3. Section 26 28 01 - Low-Voltage Circuit Protective Devices. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards: 1. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): a. 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum). b. PB 1, Panelboards. 2. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): a. 70, National Electrical Code (NEC). 3. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): a. 50, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Non-Environmental Considerations. b. 67, Standard for Panelboards. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Branch Circuit Panelboard: Bus rating of 400A and less or where labeled as Branch Circuit Panelboard on the Drawings. B. Distribution Panelboard: Bus rating of 400A and greater. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. Product technical data. a. Provide submittal data for all products specified in PART 2 of this Specification Section. b. See Section 26 05 00 for additional requirements. 2. Fabrication and/or layout drawings: a. Panelboard layout with alphanumeric designation, branch circuit breakers size and type, as indicated in the panelboard schedules. B. Contract Closeout Information: 1. Operation and Maintenance Data: a. See Specification Section 01 78 23 for requirements for the mechanics, administration, and the content of Operation and Maintenance Manual submittals. 2. Panelboard schedules with as-built conditions. C. Informational Submittals: 1. Service equipment marking and documentation. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents PANELBOARDS 26 24 16 - 2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Eaton. 2. Square D by Schneider Electric. 3. Siemens Corporation. 2.2 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Standards: NEMA PB 1, NFPA 70, UL 50, UL 67. B. Ratings: 1. Current, voltage, number of phases, number of wires as indicated on the Drawings. 2. Short Circuit Current Rating (SCCR) and/or Ampere Interrupting Current (AIC) ratings equal to or greater than the interrupting rating indicated on the Drawings or in the schedule. a. Series rating is not acceptable. b. When fault current or minimum interrupting rating is not indicated, use rating of upstream equipment or infinite bus calculation of transformer secondary. 3. Service Entrance Equipment rated when indicated on the Drawings or when shown to be fed from a utility source. C. Construction: 1. Interiors factory assembled and designed such that switching and protective devices can be replaced without disturbing adjacent units and without removing the main bus connectors. 2. Main lugs: Solderless type approved for copper and aluminum wire. D. Bus Bars: 1. Main bus bars: a. Tin plated copper sized to limit temperature rise to a maximum of 65 degrees C above an ambient of 40 degrees C. b. Drilled and tapped and arranged for sequence phasing of the branch circuit devices. 2. Ground bus and isolated ground bus, when indicated on the Drawings: Solderless mechanical type connectors. 3. Neutral bus bars: Insulated 100% rated or 200% rated, when indicated on the Drawings and with solderless mechanical type connectors. E. Overcurrent and Short Circuit Protective Devices: 1. Main overcurrent protective device: a. Molded case circuit breaker. 2. Branch overcurrent protective devices: a. Molded case circuit breaker. 3. See Specification Section 26 28 01 for overcurrent and short circuit protective device requirements. F. Enclosure: 1. Boxes: Code gage galvanized steel, furnish without knockouts. 2. Trim assembly: Code gage steel finished with rust inhibited primer and manufacturers standard paint inside and out. 3. Branch circuit panelboard: a. Trims supplied with hinged door-in-door construction. 1) Outer door: a) Allows access to the interior of the enclosure. b) Hinged to the enclosure. c) Opened by removal of screws or by operating a mechanical latch located behind the inner door. 2) Inner door: a) Allows access to breakers (non-live parts). Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents PANELBOARDS 26 24 16 - 3 b) Hinged to outer door. c) Opened by operation of a keyed corrosion resistant chrome-plated combination lock and catch. Locks for all branch circuit panelboards keyed alike. b. Trims for surface mounted panelboards, same size as box. c. Trims for flush mounted panelboards, overlap the box by 3/4 inches on all sides. d. Nominal 20 inches wide and 5-3/4 inches deep with gutter space in accordance with NFPA 70. e. Clear plastic cover for directory card mounted on the inside of each door. f. Where NEMA 3R or NEMA 12 rating is indicated: Door gasketed. 4. Distribution panelboard: a. Trims cover all live parts with switching device handles accessible. b. Minimum 8 inches deep and less than or equal to 12 inches deep with gutter space in accordance with NFPA 70. c. Clear plastic cover for directory card mounted front of enclosure. d. Where NEMA 3R or NEMA 12 rating is indicated: Doors gasketed and lockable with corrosion resistant chrome-plated combination lock and catch, all locks keyed alike, or provisions for padlocks. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install as indicated on the Drawings, in accordance with the NFPA 70, and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Support panelboard enclosures from wall studs or modular channels support structure, per Section 26 05 00. C. Provide NEMA rated enclosure as indicated on the Drawings. Where enclosure type is not indicated, provide enclosure rating suitable for the atmosphere where equipment is installed. D. Equipment Marking and Documentation: 1. Provide labeling per NFPA 70 and other applicable codes. 2. Service equipment: a. Arc-flash hazard warning label. (Ref. NFPA 70 Article 110.16(A) and (B)) b. Available fault current label and documentation of the calculations made for compliance with marking requirements. (Ref. NFPA 70 Article 110.24) 3. Other than service equipment: a. Arc-flash hazard warning label. (Ref. NFPA 70 Article 110.16(A)) b. Available fault current label. (Ref. NFPA 70 Article 408.6) 4. Identify (tag) all equipment and equipment components. 5. Provide labels and tags in accordance with Section 10 14 00. 6. Available fault current and other required label data from Coordinated Power System Study as required by the contract documents. E. Provide each panelboard with a typed directory: 1. Identify all circuit locations in each panelboard with the load type and location served. 2. Use Owner-furnished mechanical equipment designation if different than designation indicated on the Drawings. 3. Use final building room names and numbers as identified by the Owner if different than designation indicated on the Drawings. 4. Identify spare overcurrent devices. END OF SECTION Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 This page intentionally left blank. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents MOTOR CONTROL EQUIPMENT 26 24 19 - 1 SECTION 26 24 19 MOTOR CONTROL EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Separately mounted motor starters (including those supplied with equipment). 2. Manual motor starters. B. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Section 26 05 00 - Common Work Results for Electrical. 2. Section 26 29 23 - Variable Frequency Drives - Low Voltage. 3. Section 26 28 01 - Low-Voltage Circuit Protective Devices. 4. Section 26 43 13 - Surge Protection Devices for Low-Voltage Electrical Power Circuits. 5. Section 26 09 13 - Electrical Power Monitoring. 6. Section 26 09 16 - Electrical Control Components. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards: 1. International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC). 2. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): a. 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volt Maximum). b. ICS 2, Controllers, Contactors and Overload Relays Rated 600 V. c. ICS 18, Motor Control Centers. 3. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): a. 508, Standard for Industrial Control Equipment. B. Miscellaneous: 1. Verify motor horsepower loads, other equipment loads, and controls from approved shop drawings and notify Engineer of any discrepancies. 2. Verify the required instrumentation and control wiring for a complete system and notify Engineer of any discrepancies. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. Product technical data: a. Provide submittal data for all products specified in PART 2 of this Specification Section. b. See Section 26 05 00 for additional requirements. 2. Fabrication and/or layout drawings: a. Motor control panels: 1) Elevation drawing with overall dimensions. 2) Starter and component schedule. 3) Location of incoming line terminals. 4) Mounting dimensions. 5) Available conduit entrance areas. 6) Nameplate schedule. 7) Assembly ratings (amps, volts, short circuit, etc.). 8) Ladder logic wiring for each motor circuit depicting electrical interlocking and wiring between components and identification of terminals where field devices or remote control signals are to be terminated (NEMA ICS 18 Class II-S) including industry standard symbology of the field devices as indicated on the Drawings, product specification and/or loop descriptions. Drawings indicate basic control Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents MOTOR CONTROL EQUIPMENT 26 24 19 - 2 functionality, provide diagrams for the manufacturer’s product(s) meeting the required functionality. B. Contract Closeout Information: 1. Operation and Maintenance Data: a. See Specification Section 01 78 23 for requirements for the mechanics, administration, and the content of Operation and Maintenance Manual submittals. b. Fabrication and/or layout drawings updated with as-built conditions. C. Informational Submittals: 1. Equipment marking and documentation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Allen-Bradley by Rockwell Automation, Inc. 2. Eaton. 3. Square D by Schneider Electric. 4. Siemens Corporation. 2.2 MOTOR CONTROL PANELS A. Ratings: 1. 600 V class, 3 PH, 60 Hz with operating voltage and number of wires as indicated on the Drawings. 2. Short circuit current and interrupting device rating as indicated on the Drawings. B. Construction: 1. Fabricate of not less than 14 GA steel with 16 GA steel doors in standardized units. 2. Enclosure: a. NEMA 12: 1) Dust-tight and drip-proof. 2) Gasketed material round all doors, door cutouts, cover plates, side, top and back sheets. 3) Gasketed bottom plate. b. NEMA 3R non-walk-in: 1) Rainproof and sleet resistant. 2) NEMA 1 gasketed enclosure with an outdoor house erected around it. c. Operating handle: 1) With the unit stabs engaged and door closed the handle mechanism allows complete ON/OFF control of the unit disconnect and clear indication of the disconnect status. 2) Circuit breaker and MCP operators includes a separate TRIPPED position. 3) Mechanical interlock to prevent the opening of the door when the disconnect is in the ON position with a defeater mechanism. 4) Mechanical interlock to prevent the placement of the disconnect in the ON position with the door open with a defeater mechanism. 5) Non-defeatable interlock to prevent the installation or removal of a unit unless the disconnect is in the OFF position. 6) Padlockable in the OFF position. d. Control panel: 1) Provide control devices (selector switch, indicating devices, etc.) as indicated on the Drawings per Specification Section 26 09 16. e. Control power: 1) Control power transformer: Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents MOTOR CONTROL EQUIPMENT 26 24 19 - 3 a) 120 V secondary. b) Fused on primary and secondary side. c) Sized for 140% of required load. 3. Finish: Rust inhibited primer and manufacturer's standard paint inside and out. 4. Provide ample unrestricted space for conduit entry from the bottom. 5. Wiring: NEMA ICS 18 Class II, Type B-D. C. Overcurrent and Short Circuit Protective Devices: 1. Main device: a. Molded case circuit breaker. b. Fusible switch. 2. Feeder devices: a. Molded case circuit breaker. b. Fusible switch. 3. Motor protection with full voltage starters: a. Motor circuit protector. b. Molded case circuit breaker. c. Class RK-1 fuse. 4. See Specification Section 26 28 01 for overcurrent and short circuit protective device requirements. 5. Factory installed. D. Motor Starters: See requirements within this Specification Section. E. Surge Protective Device: Integrally mounted, see Specification Section 26 43 13. F. Power Monitor Metering: 1. Separate compartment. 2. See Specification Section 26 09 13 for meter requirements. G. Miscellaneous: 1. See Drawings for items provided by other but factory installed (e.g., submersible motor temperature/leak controller, control system gateways or switches). 2.3 SEPARATELY MOUNTED COMBINATION STARTERS A. Standards: 1. NEMA 250, NEMA ICS 2. 2. UL 508. B. Enclosure: 1. NEMA 4 rated: a. Body and cover: Sheet steel finished with rust inhibiting primer and manufacturer's standard paint inside and out. b. No knockouts, external mounting flanges, hinged and gasketed door. 2. NEMA 12 rated: a. Body and cover: Sheet steel finished with rust inhibiting primer and manufacturer's standard paint inside and out. b. No knockouts, external mounting flanges, hinged and gasketed door. C. Operating Handle: 1. With the door closed the handle mechanism allows complete ON/OFF control of the unit disconnect and clear indication of the disconnect status. 2. Circuit breaker and MCP operators includes a separate TRIPPED position. 3. Mechanical interlock to prevent to prevent the opening of the door when the disconnect is in the ON position with a defeater mechanism for use by authorized personnel. 4. Mechanical interlock to prevent the placement of the disconnect in the ON position with the door open with a defeater mechanism for use by authorized personnel. 5. Padlockable in the OFF position. 6. Exceptions: NEMA 7 and NEMA 9 enclosures. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents MOTOR CONTROL EQUIPMENT 26 24 19 - 4 D. External mounted overload relay pushbutton. E. Control Devices: 1. Provide control devices as indicated on the Drawings per Specification Section 26 09 16. 2. Devices will be accessible with the door closed. F. Control Power Transformer: 1. 120V secondary. 2. Fused on primary and secondary side. 3. Sized for 140% of required load. G. Fault Current Withstand Rating: Equal to the rating of the electrical gear from which it is fed. H. Motor Starters: See requirements within this Specification Section. I. Disconnect Switch, Overcurrent and Short Circuit Protective Devices: 1. Motor circuit protector. 2. See Specification Section 26 28 01 for overcurrent and short circuit protective device requirements. 3. Factory installed. 2.4 MOTOR STARTERS A. Variable Frequency Drives: See Specification Section 26 29 23. 2.5 MANUAL MOTOR STARTERS A. Standards: 1. NEMA 250, NEMA ICS 2. 2. UL 508. B. Quick-make, quick-break toggle mechanism that is lockable in the OFF position. C. Types: 1. Horsepower rated, for ON/OFF control. 2. Horsepower rated, for ON/OFF control and thermal overload protection. a. Switch to clearly indicate ON, OFF, and TRIPPED position. D. Voltage and current ratings and number of poles as required for the connected motor. E. Enclosures: 1. NEMA 4 rated: a. Sheet steel finished with rust inhibiting primer and manufacturer's standard paint inside and out or cast gray iron alloy or copper-free aluminum with manufacturer's standard finish. b. No knockouts, external mounting flanges. 2. NEMA 12 rated: a. Body and cover: Sheet steel finished with rust inhibiting primer and manufacturer's standard paint inside and out. b. No knockouts, external mounting flanges. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install as indicated on the Drawings and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and instructions. B. Mounting height for surface mounted equipment: See Section 26 05 00. C. Equipment Marking and Documentation: 1. Provide labeling per NFPA 70 and other applicable codes. 2. Other than service equipment: Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents MOTOR CONTROL EQUIPMENT 26 24 19 - 5 a. Arc-flash hazard warning label. (Ref. NFPA 70 Article 110.16(A)) b. Available fault current label. (Ref. NFPA 70 Article 408.6) 3. Identify (tag) all equipment and equipment components. 4. Provide labels and tags in accordance with Section 10 14 00. 5. Available fault current and other required label data from Coordinated Power System Study as required by the contract documents. D. Provide separately mounted combination starters with Short Circuit Current Rating (SCCR) labeling as required by NFPA 70 and other applicable codes. 1. Determine the SCCR rating by one of the following methods: a. Method 1: SCCR rating meets or exceeds the available fault current of the source equipment when indicated on the Drawings. b. Method 2: SCCR rating meets or exceeds the source equipment’s Amp Interrupting Current (AIC) rating as indicated on the Drawings. c. Method 3: SCCR rating meets or exceeds the calculated available short circuit current at the control panel. 2. The source equipment is the switchboard, panelboard, motor control center or similar equipment where the equipment or control panel circuit originates. 3. For Method 3, provide calculations justifying the SCCR rating. Utilize source equipment available fault current or AIC rating as indicated on the Drawings. E. Overload Heaters: 1. Size for actual motor full load current of the connected motor. 2. For motors with power factor correction capacitors, size to compensate for the capacitors effect on load current. F. Combination and Manual Starter Enclosures: 1. Permitted uses of NEMA 4 enclosure: a. Surface mounted in areas designated as wet. 2. Permitted uses of NEMA 12 enclosure: a. Surface mounted in areas designated as dry. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Acceptance Testing: See Specification Section 26 08 13. END OF SECTION Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 This page intentionally left blank. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents WIRING DEVICES 26 27 26 - 1 SECTION 26 27 26 WIRING DEVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Material and installation requirements for: a. Wall switches. b. Receptacles. c. Device wallplates and coverplates. B. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Section 26 05 00 - Common Work Results for Electrical. 2. Section 26 05 33 - Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems. 3. Section 26 24 19 - Motor Control Equipment. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards: 1. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): a. 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum). b. WD 1, General Color Requirements for Wiring Devices. c. WD 6, Wiring Devices - Dimensional Requirements. 2. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): a. 20, General-Use Snap Switches. b. 498, Standard for Attachment Plugs and Receptacles. c. 514A, Metallic Outlet Boxes. d. 943, Ground-Fault Circuit-Interrupters. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. Product technical data: a. Provide submittal data for all products specified in PART 2 of this Specification Section. b. See Section 26 05 00 for additional requirements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Wall switches and receptacles: a. Bryant Electric. b. Cooper Wiring Devices by Eaton. c. Hubbell Incorporated Wiring Device-Kellems. d. Leviton Manufacturing Company. e. Legrand/Pass & Seymour. f. Eaton Crouse-Hinds. g. Appleton Electric Co. h. Hubbell Killark. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents WIRING DEVICES 26 27 26 - 2 2.2 WALL SWITCHES A. Basic requirements unless modified in specific requirements paragraph of switches per designated areas or types: 1. Industrial Specification Grade. 2. Quiet action, snap switch. 3. Self-grounding with grounding terminal. 4. Back and side wired. 5. Solid silver cadmium oxide contacts. 6. Rugged thermoplastic and/or nylon housing and one-piece switch arm. 7. Ratings: 20 A, 120/277 VAC. 8. Switch handle type: Toggle. 9. Switch handle color: White. 10. Types as indicated on the Drawings: a. Single-pole. b. Double-pole. c. 3-way. d. 4-way. e. Momentary contact. 11. Standards: UL 20, UL 514A, NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6. B. Dry Non-architecturally Finished Area Specific Requirements: 1. Coverplate for use on surface mounted outlet boxes: a. Raised steel, galvanized. b. Single or multiple gang as required. 2. Wallplate for use on recessed outlet boxes: a. Steel, galvanized. b. 302 or 304 brushed finish stainless steel. c. Single or multiple gang as required. C. Dry and Dusty Non-Architecturally Finished Area Specific Requirements: 1. Coverplate: a. Cast aluminum, gasketed, stainless steel hardware, natural, lacquer, or factory painted finish. b. Operator type: 1) Side mounted rocker type handle to operate snap switch. 2) Front mounted lever type handle to operate snap switch. 3) Push/pull operator to operate snap switch. 4) Spring type door to cover snap switch. c. Single or multiple gang as required. D. Wet or Damp Non-Architecturally Finished or Exterior Area Specific Requirements: 1. Coverplate: a. Cast aluminum, gasketed, stainless steel hardware, natural, lacquer, or factory painted finish. b. Operator type: 1) Side mounted rocker type handle to operate snap switch. 2) Front mounted lever type handle to operate snap switch. 3) Push/pull operator to operate snap switch. 4) Spring type door to cover snap switch. c. Wet location rated. d. Single or multiple gang as required. E. Corrosive and Dry Area Specific Requirements: 1. Corrosion resistant nickel plated metal parts. 2. Coverplate for use on metallic outlet boxes: a. Cast aluminum, stainless steel hardware, natural, lacquer, or factory painted finish. b. Single or multiple gang as required. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents WIRING DEVICES 26 27 26 - 3 3. Coverplate for use on non-metallic outlet boxes: a. High impact thermoplastic or nylon, color to match handle, stainless steel screws. b. Single or multiple gang as required. F. Corrosive and Wet or Damp Area Specific Requirements: 1. Corrosion resistant nickel plated metal parts. 2. Coverplate for use on metallic outlet boxes: a. Cast aluminum, gasketed, stainless steel hardware, natural, lacquer, or factory painted finish. b. Operator type: 1) Front mounted lever to operate snap switch. 2) Push/pull operator to operate snap switch. 3) Spring type door to cover snap switch. c. Wet location rated. d. Single or multiple gang as required. 3. Coverplate for use on non-metallic outlet boxes: a. High impact thermoplastic, gasketed, stainless steel screws. 1) Front mounted lever to operate snap switch. 2) Spring type door to cover snap switch. b. Wet location rated. c. Single or multiple gang as required. 2.3 RECEPTACLES A. Basic requirements unless modified in specific requirements paragraph of receptacles and per designated areas: 1. Industrial Specification Grade. 2. Straight blade. 3. Brass triple wipe line contacts. 4. One-piece grounding system with double wipe brass grounding contacts and self-grounding strap with grounding terminal. 5. Back and side wired. 6. Rating: 20 A, 125 VAC. 7. High impact nylon body. 8. Receptacle body color: a. Normal power: White. 9. Duplex or simplex as indicated on the Drawings. 10. Configuration: NEMA 5-20R. 11. Standards: UL 498, UL 514A, NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6. B. Receptacle Type Specific Requirements: 1. Basic receptacles: a. Weather-resistant when located in exterior locations or interior damp or wet areas as indicated on the Drawings. 1) Identification: Letters “WR” on face of receptacle. 2. Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter (GFCI): a. Specification Grade. b. Class A protection. c. Feed through type. d. Test and reset buttons. e. Self-testing. f. Visual indicator light. g. Weather-resistant when located in exterior locations or interior damp or wet areas as indicated on the Drawings. 1) Identification: Letters “WR” on face of receptacle. h. Tamper resistant. i. Additional standards: UL 943. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents WIRING DEVICES 26 27 26 - 4 C. Dry Non-Architecturally Finished Areas Specific Requirements: 1. Coverplate for use on surface mounted outlet boxes: a. Raised steel, galvanized. b. Single or multiple gang as required. 2. Wallplate for use on recessed outlet boxes: a. Steel, galvanized. b. Single or multiple gang as required. D. Dry and Dusty Non-Architecturally Finished Areas Specific Requirements: 1. Coverplate: a. Cast aluminum, gasketed, self-closing cover, stainless steel hardware, natural, lacquer or factory painted finish. b. Single or multiple gang, as required. E. Damp Non-Architecturally Finished Areas Specific Requirements: 1. Coverplate: a. Cast aluminum, gasketed, self-closing cover, stainless steel hardware, natural, lacquer or factory painted finish. b. Weatherproof when receptacle is covered. c. Single or multiple gang as required. F. Wet Non-architecturally Finished Areas Specific Requirements: 1. Coverplate: a. Extra-duty rated, weatherproof (NEMA 3R) while in use, gasketed, stainless steel hardware, copper-free aluminum, 3.2 inches minimum cover depth for #12 AWG cords. G. Exterior Locations Specific Requirements: 1. Coverplate: a. Extra-duty rated, weatherproof (NEMA 3R) while in use, gasketed, stainless steel hardware, copper-free aluminum, 3.2 inches minimum cover depth for #12 AWG cord. H. Corrosive and Dry Area Specific Requirements: 1. Corrosion resistant nickel plated metal parts. 2. Coverplate for use on metallic outlet boxes: a. Cast aluminum, stainless steel hardware, natural, lacquer or factory painted finish. b. Single or multiple gang as required. 3. Coverplate for use on non-metallic outlet boxes: a. Single or multiple gang as required. I. Corrosive and Wet or Damp Area Specific Requirements: 1. Corrosion resistant nickel plated metal parts. 2. Weather-resistant. a. Identification: Letters “WR” on face of receptacle. 3. Coverplate for use on metallic outlet boxes: a. Extra-duty rated, weatherproof (NEMA 3R) while in use, gasketed, stainless steel hardware, copper-free aluminum, 3.2 inches minimum cover depth for #12 AWG cord. 4. Coverplate for use on non-metallic outlet boxes: a. Extra-duty rated, weatherproof (NEMA 3R) while in use, gasketed, stainless steel hardware, flame retardant, UV stabilized polycarbonate, 3.2 inches minimum cover depth for #12 AWG cords. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS WIRING DEVICES A. Manual Motor Starters: Horsepower rated with or without thermal overloads, see Specification Section 26 24 19. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents WIRING DEVICES 26 27 26 - 5 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Mount devices where indicated on the Drawings and as scheduled in Section 26 05 00. C. See Specification Section 26 05 33 for device outlet box requirements. D. Where more than one receptacle is installed in a room, they shall be symmetrically arranged. E. Provide blank plates for empty outlets. F. Momentary contact switches shall be installed and connected such that the up position is 'on only' and the down position is 'off only.’ END OF SECTION Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 This page intentionally left blank. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents LOW-VOLTAGE CIRCUIT PROTECTIVE DEVICES 26 28 01 - 1 SECTION 26 28 01 LOW-VOLTAGE CIRCUIT PROTECTIVE DEVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Low voltage circuit breakers. B. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Section 26 05 00 - Common Work Results for Electrical. 2. Section 26 08 13 - Acceptance Testing. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards: 1. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (IEEE): a. C37.13, Standard for Low-Voltage AC Power Circuit Breakers Used in Enclosures. b. C37.16, Low-Voltage Power Circuit Breakers and AC Power Circuit Protectors - Preferred Ratings, Related Requirements, and Application Recommendations. c. C37.17, Trip Devices for AC and General Purpose DC Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers. 2. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): a. 70, National Electrical Code (NEC). 3. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): a. 489, Standard for Safety Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Molded-Case Switches, and Circuit-Breaker Enclosures. b. 943, Standard for Safety for Ground-Fault Circuit-Interrupters. c. 1066, Standard for Low-Voltage AC and DC Power Circuit Breakers Used in Enclosures. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. Product technical data including: a. Provide submittal data for all products specified in PART 2 of this Specification Section. b. See Section 26 05 00 for additional requirements. B. Contract Closeout Information: 1. Operation and Maintenance Data: a. See Specification Section 01 78 23 for requirements for the mechanics, administration, and the content of Operation and Maintenance Manual submittals. C. Informational Submittals: 1. Reports: a. As-left condition of all circuit breakers that have adjustable settings. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Circuit breakers: a. Eaton. b. ABB. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents LOW-VOLTAGE CIRCUIT PROTECTIVE DEVICES 26 28 01 - 2 c. Square D Company. d. Siemens. 2.2 CIRCUIT BREAKERS A. Molded Case Type: 1. General: a. Standards: UL 489. b. Unit construction. c. Over-center, toggle handle operated. d. Quick-make, quick-break, independent of toggle handle operation. e. Manual and automatic operation. f. All poles open and close simultaneously. g. Three position handle: On, off and tripped. h. Molded-in ON and OFF markings on breaker cover. i. One-, two- or three-pole as indicated on the Drawings. j. Current and interrupting ratings as indicated on the Drawings. 2. Thermal magnetic type: a. Inverse time overload and instantaneous short circuit protection by means of a thermal magnetic element. b. Frame size 150 amp and below: 1) Non-interchangeable, non-adjustable thermal magnetic trip units. c. Frame sizes 225 to 400 amp (trip settings less than 400A): 1) Interchangeable and adjustable instantaneous thermal magnetic trip units. d. Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter (GFCI) Listed: 1) Standard: UL 943. 2) One- or two-pole as indicated on the Drawings. 3) Class A ground fault circuit. 4) Trip on 5 mA ground fault (4-6 mA range). 3. Solid state trip type: a. Inverse time overload, instantaneous short circuit and ground fault protection by means of a solid state trip element, associated current monitors and flux shunt trip mechanism. b. Frame size 400 amp to 1200 amp (trip settings between 400 and 1200A): 1) Standard rating. 2) Interchangeable current sensor or rating plug. 3) Adjustable long time pick-up setting. a) Adjustable from 50 to 100% of the current sensor or rating plug. 4) Adjustable short time pick-up setting. 5) Adjustable instantaneous pick-up. 6) Fixed ground fault pick-up, when indicated on the Drawings. c. Adjustable arc energy-reducing maintenance system. 1) Frame size 1200A or when indicated on the Drawings for less than 1200A frame size. 2) Activate and deactivate without opening door and exposing operators to energized parts. 3) System status indicator adjacent to activation switch. 4. Motor circuit protector: a. Adjustable instantaneous short circuit protection by means of a magnetic or solid state trip element. b. Sized for the connected motor. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Current and interrupting ratings as indicated on the Drawings. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents LOW-VOLTAGE CIRCUIT PROTECTIVE DEVICES 26 28 01 - 3 B. Series rated systems not acceptable. C. Devices shall be ambient temperature compensated. D. Circuit Breakers: 1. Molded case circuit breakers shall incorporate the following, unless indicated otherwise on the Drawings: a. Frame sizes 400 amp and less with trip setting less than 400A shall be thermal magnetic type. b. Motor circuit protectors sized for the connected motor. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Adjustable Circuit Breakers: 1. Set all circuit breaker adjustable taps as defined on the Drawings, except adjust motor circuit protectors per the motor nameplate and NFPA 70 requirements. a. to the circuit breaker. B. Testing: 1. Acceptance testing: See Specification Section 26 08 13. END OF SECTION Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 This page intentionally left blank. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS 26 28 16.13 - 1 SECTION 26 28 16.13 ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Separately mounted circuit breakers. B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Section 26 05 00 - Common Work Results for Electrical. 2. Section 26 28 01 - Low-Voltage Circuit Protective Devices. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards: 1. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): a. 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum). 2. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): a. 489, Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Molded Case Switches, and Circuit Breaker Enclosures. b. 1203, Standard for Explosion-Proof and Dust-Ignition-Proof Electrical Equipment for Use in Hazardous (Classified) Locations. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. Product technical data: a. Provide submittal data for all products specified in PART 2 of this Specification Section. b. Provide a table that associates equipment model number with equipment tag number. c. See Section 26 05 00 for additional requirements. B. Contract Closeout Information: 1. Operation and Maintenance Data: a. See Specification Section 01 78 23 for requirements for the mechanics, administration, and the content of Operation and Maintenance Manual submittals. 2. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Eaton. 2. GE by ABB. 3. Square D by Schneider Electric. 4. Siemens Corporation. 5. Appleton by Emerson Electric Co. 6. Crouse-Hinds by Eaton. 7. Killark by Hubbell. 2.2 COMPONENTS A. Ratings: Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS 26 28 16.13 - 2 1. Voltage, number of phases, number of wires, and current rating as indicated on the Drawings. 2. Assembly short circuit current and interrupting device rating as indicated on the Drawings. 3. Service Entrance Equipment rated when indicated on the Drawings. 4. 100% rated when 100% rated breakers are installed. B. Standards: UL 489 C. Overcurrent and short circuit protective devices: 1. Molded case circuit breaker. 2. See Section 26 28 01 for overcurrent and short circuit protective device requirements. 3. Factory installed. D. NEMA 1 rated: 1. Body and cover: Sheet steel finished with rust inhibiting primer and manufacturers standard paint inside and out. 2. With or without knockouts, hinged or unhinged cover. 3. Breaker is front operable and padlockable in the OFF position. 4. Suitable for service entrance. E. NEMA 4 rated: 1. Body and cover: Sheet steel finished with rust inhibiting primer and manufacturers standard paint inside and out. 2. No knockouts, external mounting flanges, hinged and gasketed door. 3. Front operating handle padlockable in the OFF position and interlocked to prevent door from opening when the breaker is ON. 4. Suitable for service entrance. F. NEMA 4X rated: 1. Body and cover: Type 304 or 316 stainless steel. 2. No knockouts, external mounting flanges, hinged and gasketed door. 3. Front operating handle padlockable in the OFF position and interlocked to prevent door from opening when the breaker is ON. 4. Suitable for service entrance. G. NEMA 7 and 9 rated: 1. Cast gray iron alloy or copper-free aluminum with manufacturer's standard finish. 2. Drilled and tapped openings or tapered threaded hub. 3. Gasketed cover bolted-down with stainless steel bolts. 4. External mounting flanges. 5. Front operating handle padlockable in the OFF position. 6. Suitable for service entrance. H. NEMA 12 rated: 1. Body and cover: Sheet steel finished with rust inhibiting primer and manufacturers standard paint inside and out. 2. No knockouts, external mounting flanges, hinged and gasketed door. 3. Front operating handle padlockable in the OFF position and interlocked to prevent door from opening when the breaker is ON. 4. Suitable for service entrance. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install as indicated and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and instructions. B. Permitted uses of NEMA 1 enclosure: 1. Surface or flush mounted in areas designated dry in architecturally finished areas. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS 26 28 16.13 - 3 C. Permitted uses of NEMA 4 enclosure: 1. Surface mounted in areas designated as wet. D. Permitted uses of NEMA 4X enclosure: 1. Surface mounted in areas designated as wet and/or corrosive. E. Permitted uses of NEMA 7 enclosure: 1. Surface mounted in areas designated as Class I hazardous. F. Permitted uses of NEMA 9 enclosure: 1. Surface mounted in areas designated as Class II hazardous. G. Permitted uses of NEMA 12 enclosure: 1. Surface mounted in areas designated as dry in non-architecturally finished areas. H. Equipment Marking and Documentation: 1. Provide labeling per NFPA 70 and other applicable codes. 2. Service equipment: a. Arc-flash hazard warning label. (Ref. NFPA 70 Article 110.16(A) and (B)) b. Available fault current label and documentation of the calculations made for compliance with marking requirements. (Ref. NFPA 70 Article 110.24) 3. Other than service equipment: a. Arc-flash hazard warning label. (Ref. NFPA 70 Article 110.16(A)) b. Available fault current label. (Ref. NFPA 70 Article 408.6) 4. Identify (tag) all equipment and equipment components. 5. Provide labels and tags in accordance with Section 10 14 00. 6. Available fault current and other required label data from Coordinated Power System Study as required by the contract documents. END OF SECTION Added a requirement fire pump applications as optional text. Changed section number and title from “26 28 17 - SEPARATELY MOUNTED CIRCUIT BREAKERS” to “26 28 16.13 - ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS”, for improved conformance with CSI MasterFormat. Removed cyber security language. Removed the PVC coating paragraphs for large enclosures. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 This page intentionally left blank. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES - LOW VOLTAGE 26 29 23 - 1 SECTION 26 29 23 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES - LOW VOLTAGE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Variable frequency drives (VFDs) for operation of inverter duty motors. B. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Section 01 61 03 - Common Work Results for Equipment. 2. Section 10 14 00 - Identification Devices. 3. Section 26 05 00 - Common Work Results for Electrical. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards: 1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI). 2. ETL Testing Laboratories (ETL). 3. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (IEEE): a. 399, Recommended Practice for Industrial and Commercial Power Systems Analysis. b. 519, Recommended Practices and Requirements for Harmonic Control in Electrical Power Systems. c. C62.41, Recommended Practice for Surge Voltages in Low-Voltage AC Power Circuits. 4. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA): a. 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum). b. MG 1, Motors and Generators. 5. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): a. 70, National Electrical Code (NEC): 1) Article 430, Motors Motor Circuits, and Controllers.. 6. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA). 7. Underwriters Laboratory, Inc. (UL): a. 508, Standard for Industrial Control Equipment. b. 508A, Standard for Industrial Control Panels. B. Qualifications: 1. Provide drives that are listed and labeled by UL, ETL, or other Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) as defined by OSHA regulations, or that have been inspected and subsequent field-labeled by such NRTL. 2. Where listed drives and other components are installed in a common enclosure, the assembly shall be listed and labeled per UL 508 and UL 508A or equivalent NRTL standard. a. Entire assembly shall be affixed with a UL 508A label "Listed Enclosed Industrial Control Panel" or equivalent NRTL label prior to shipment to the jobsite. 3. VFD Supplier shall maintain an authorized service organization within 300 miles of the Project Site. C. Coordination: 1. The intent of this Specification Section is to allow the VFD manufacturer to provide the best solution for the harmonic and motor protection outlined herein. a. This solution shall include, but not be limited to, all aspects of the distribution system including standby generation, motor feeder cable type and available floor space. 2. Motor and VFD coordination: See Specification Section 01 61 03 and Specification Section 26 05 09. 3. VFD shall be supplied complete with all required control components. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES - LOW VOLTAGE 26 29 23 - 2 a. Provide control as indicated: 1) On the electrical drawings. 2) As specified in this Specification Section. b. VFD manufacturer shall review the application and provide, at no additional cost to the Owner, the hardware and software necessary to allow the VFD to control the driven equipment motor over its required operating range. 1) These may include, but are not limited to, analog and digital interface modules, communication interface modules, switches, lights and other devices. c. Coordinate control devices with devices furnished with driven equipment such as vibration switches, thermal sensors, leak detectors, etc. 4. Verify plan dimensions with equipment space requirements as indicated on the Drawings. a. Equipment which exceeds the allotted maximum dimensions may not be acceptable. b. Equipment which reduces clear work space below the minimums established by the NFPA 70 will not be acceptable. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Variable Torque (VT): 1. Defines a load characteristic in which the torque delivered from the motor to the load is reduced as speed is reduced below full rated. 2. This type of load permits the VFD and the motor to operate at reduced output current at reduced speed. B. Constant Torque (CT): 1. Defines a load characteristic in which the torque delivered from the motor to the load remains constant as speed is varied. 2. This type of load requires the VFD to be able to continuously deliver rated output current over the entire speed range. C. Constant Horsepower: 1. Defines a load characteristic in which the torque delivered from the motor to the load is reduced as the speed is increased. 2. This characteristic is required for operation of the VFD and motor above rated frequency to maintain output current within the rated value. D. Inverter Duty Motor: An AC induction motor complying with all requirements of NEMA MG 1 Part 31 for definite-purpose inverter-fed motors. E. Standard Motor: An AC induction motor that fails to comply with one or more requirements of NEMA MG 1 Part 31. F. Low Voltage: 600 VAC or less. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. Provide a schedule for each VFD including the following information: a. Equipment Tag Number. b. VFD Complete Catalog Number. c. VFD Amp Frame Size. d. Variable or Constant Torque Rating Basis. e. Rated Input Current. f. Rated Continuous Output Current. g. Rated Short Circuit Current. h. VFD cable type specified (shielded or non-shielded). i. VFD Maximum Motor Lead Length for the type of cable used. j. Motor Manufacturer. k. Motor Frame Size. l. Motor Full Load Amps. m. Motor Service Factor. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES - LOW VOLTAGE 26 29 23 - 3 n. As installed motor Lead Length. o. VFD options provided to meet harmonic or motor protection specifications. 2. Submit VFD Shop Drawings concurrently with driven equipment and motor Shop Drawings. 3. Product technical data: a. Complete electrical ratings and performance specifications confirming compliance with specified ratings and performance. b. Maximum rate of heat rejection from VFD and all related components and associated cooling requirements. c. Manufacturer’s installation instructions. d. Manufacturer’s programming and operating instructions. e. See Section 26 05 00 for additional requirements. 4. Fabrication and/or layout drawings: a. Top, front and side exterior views, with details showing maximum overall dimensions of enclosure, mounting provisions and conduit/cable entry provisions. b. Identify minimum clearances from other VFDs or electrical equipment required for proper cooling at top, bottom, side and back of enclosure. c. Three-line diagrams showing AC schematic of VFD, input, output and bypass devices including device ratings. d. Interior layout drawings showing location of all components within enclosure, field wiring terminal boards, and power and grounding connections. e. Field wiring diagrams showing locations and sizes of all electrical connections, ground terminations, and requirements for shielded wire usage or any other special installation considerations. f. Short Circuit Current Rating (SCCR) nameplate marking per NFPA 70, include any required calculations. 5. Certifications: a. Submit with Shop Drawings: 1) Identification and location of closest authorized service organization. 2) Harmonic analysis at each PCC per Harmonic Protection Requirements Article. b. Submit prior to shipment: 1) Certified factory test reports confirming compliance with specified requirements. c. Submit after installation: 1) Certified field service reports showing: a) Each VFD is operational. b) Each VFD and its driven equipment motor are compatible. c) Each VFD responds correctly to the input control signals. d) Critical frequencies of the drive system and that the VFD has been set to lockout these frequencies. e) Measured harmonic levels per Harmonic Protection Requirements Article. f) Measured motor terminal peak voltages per Motor Protection Requirements Article. B. Contract Closeout Information: 1. Operation and Maintenance Data: a. See Specification Section 01 78 23 for requirements for the mechanics, administration, and the content of Operation and Maintenance Manual submittals. 2. Approved copy of VFD schedule per Submittals Article. 3. Manufacturer’s instruction manuals. 4. Troubleshooting procedures with a cross-reference between symptoms and corrective recommendations. 5. Connection data to permit removal and installation of recommended smallest field- replaceable parts. 6. Recommended spare parts list. 7. Commissioning sheets showing “as-left” values of all user-programmable or adjustable drive parameters. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES - LOW VOLTAGE 26 29 23 - 4 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Allen Bradley. 2. ABB. 3. Eaton. 4. Danfoss. 5. Siemens/Robicon. 6. Siemens. 7. Square D Company. 8. Toshiba. 9. Yaskawa. 2.2 GENERAL A. VFDs shall consist of a rectifier-DC bus-inverter combination producing a sine-coded pulse- width-modulated (PWM) output voltage waveform. B. VFDs, whether installed in motor control center (MCC) construction or separately mounted, shall constitute a complete combination motor controller per NFPA 70, Article 430 and shall provide the following per the requirements of that article without the addition of any external components or devices. 1. Motor control. 2. Motor overload protection. 3. Motor and motor branch circuit short circuit and ground fault protection. 4. Motor and controller disconnecting means. C. It is the intent of this Specification that VFDs shall be an “engineered” or “configured” drive package in which the VFD chassis, all input, output and bypass power devices, VFD accessories, ancillary switches, contactors, relays, and related control devices are selected, furnished, factory- assembled and -tested by the VFD manufacturer in a single enclosure requiring only connection of the power supply circuit, motor branch circuit, and external control wiring in the field. 2.3 PERFORMANCE AND DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Application: 1. VFD(s) shall be of sufficient capacity and shall provide a quality of output waveform for stepless motor control from 10 to 100% of base speed of the driven equipment. 2. VFDs shall be compatible with: a. Inverter duty induction motors. 3. VFDs shall be suitable for Constant Torque (CT) or Variable Torque (VT) applications. a. VFD manufacturer shall coordinate with the manufacturer of the driven equipment to identify CT and VT applications. 4. VFDs shall be designed to operate successfully under the following site conditions: a. Ambient: 1) Temperature: 0-40 degrees C. 2) 95% non-condensing relative humidity. b. Elevation: Less than 3,300 feet above MSL. c. Power supply characteristics: 1) 480Vac, 3 PH, 60 Hz, 3 wire, (±10%). 2) Effectively grounded. B. Ratings and Performance Specifications: 1. Voltage rating: a. Nominal: 480 VAC, 3 PH, 60 Hz. b. Range for continuous full load operation: ±10% of nominal. c. Voltage imbalance tolerance for full load operation: 3% minimum. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES - LOW VOLTAGE 26 29 23 - 5 2. Current ratings: a. Continuous: 1) Equal to or greater than the motor nameplate full load. b. Short-term overload: 1) VT: 110% for 1 minute. 2) CT: 150% for 1 minute. 3) Permissible for 1 minute every 10 minutes continuously. c. Short circuit: 1) 22,000 A RMS SYM, minimum. 2) Where specified short circuit rating indicates additional input impedance is required to protect semiconductors, provide input AC line reactors, whether required to meet harmonic performance specifications or not. 3. Efficiency: a. 97%, minimum, at full speed and full load. b. 93%, minimum at 1/2 speed and full load. 4. Displacement power factor: a. 95%, minimum from 50% to 100% speed and load. 5. Efficiency and power factor criteria apply from the input terminals to the output terminals of the VFD alone, excluding losses of input and output power circuit accessories. 6. Frequency drift: a. +0.5% of set frequency. 7. Speed regulation (motor dependent): 3%. 8. Speed range: 10:1. 9. Control type: a. Volts/Hertz ratio; constant over the entire operating range of the VFD except: 1) When operating under voltage boost. 2) At frequencies over 60 Hz. C. Operational Features: 1. Insensitive to input phase sequence. 2. Continued operation with momentary voltage dips of 25% of rated voltage, or single phase condition: 4 seconds, minimum. 3. Controls power loss ride-through: 500 MSEC, minimum. 4. Electronic reversing. 5. DC injection braking. 6. Anti-windmilling: Synchronization of VFD starting frequency with spinning or coasting load, forward or reverse. 7. Critical frequency band lockout: a. Minimum of three settings. b. Adjustable bandwidth, 1 - 5 Hz. 8. Capable of operating without the motor connected for start-up and troubleshooting. D. The VFD shall be provided with the following minimum user-programmable parameters: 1. Carrier frequency. 2. Independent maximum and minimum speeds for forward and reverse operation. 3. Start frequency and hold time. 4. Independent linear acceleration and deceleration time. 5. Preset “jog” speed. 6. Three critical frequency bands. 7. One preset speed selectable by logic input. 8. Volts/Hertz ratio. 9. Voltage boost, magnitude and frequency range. 10. Process controller gain, offset and bias. 11. Current limit. 12. Overcurrent pickup. 13. Overcurrent delay. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES - LOW VOLTAGE 26 29 23 - 6 14. Ground fault pickup. 15. DC injection level and time. E. The VFD shall be designed such that the power circuit components are fully protected from line side disturbances and load side faults: 1. General: a. Shutdown conditions associated with supply circuit conditions which can be corrected external to the VFD-motor system shall be provided with automatic reset, with shutdown cause logged in memory: 1) Input under voltage. 2) Input over voltage. 3) Input under frequency. 4) Input over frequency. 5) Input Phase loss. 6) DC Bus under voltage. b. Shutdown conditions which indicate overload or fault within the VFD, the output circuit, or the motor shall require local manual reset at the VFD, requiring operator intervention. 1) Over temperature. 2) Blown fuse. 3) Component failure. 4) Overload. 5) Short circuit. 6) Ground fault. 7) DC Bus over voltage. 8) External safety input (e.g., motor thermal protection). 9) Logic fault. c. When automatic shutdown occurs, VFD shall restart only when remote run signal is removed and reapplied. d. VFD shall hold cause of trip data for a minimum of four shutdowns in memory. 1) Data to be accessible through the keypad, local communication link and remotely. 2. Input protection: a. Input circuit breaker or current-limiting fuses with externally operable disconnect. 1) Fault current interrupting rating equal to or greater than the specified withstand rating of the VFD. 2) Handle padlockable in the OFF position. b. Provide full protection for semiconductors integral to the VFD; units requiring current- limiting fuses or circuit breakers in the supply circuit are not acceptable. c. Incoming line transient suppression. 1) 6000V peak per IEEE C62.41. 2) Phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground protection. d. Sustained over voltage trip. 3. Internal protection: a. Surge suppression and power device snubbers. b. Power devices rated at 2.5 times line voltage. c. Instantaneous over current trip. d. DC bus over voltage trip. e. Power device over temperature trip. f. Control logic circuit malfunction trip. 4. Output protection: a. Inverse-time overload trip: 1) UL Class 10 characteristic. b. Over voltage trip. c. Over frequency trip. d. Short circuit trip. 1) Line to line and line to ground. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES - LOW VOLTAGE 26 29 23 - 7 e. Ground fault trip. 2.4 OPERATOR AND REMOTE CONTROL INTERFACE A. Drive controls shall be microprocessor-based with on-board human machine interface and both local and remote digital communications capability. 1. All monitoring and control functions, other than those shutdowns specified to be manual reset only, shall be available both locally and remotely. B. Control circuits shall be 120 VAC or 24 VAC or 24 VDC. 1. 120 VAC supplied by CPT in the VFD. a. CPT shall have minimum additional capacity of 60 VA greater than that required by control devices. b. CPT shall have two fuses on the primary side and one fuse on the secondary side. c. CPT shall have surge protection on the primary side independent of any other surge protection in the VFD. 2. 24 VAC or 24 VDC supplied by Class 2 power supply in the VFD. a. Power supply shall have minimum additional capacity of 33% greater than that required by control devices. b. Provide two current-limiting fuses on the AC supply to the power supply. c. Power supply shall have surge protection on the primary side independent of any other surge protection in the VFD. C. Operator Interface: 1. Door mounted sealed keypad, membrane type with LED or LCD display. a. Messages shall be in English and engineering units. b. Drive operating parameters shall be programmable. c. Menu driven. d. Password security. e. Display fault and diagnostic data. f. Operating parameters, fault and diagnostic data maintained in non-volatile memory with historic log of fault and diagnostic data. g. Gold plated plug-in contacts. 2. Provide indication and control interface, integral in the keypad, as required in the sequence of operation and Drawings. a. Minimum indications: 1) Run. 2) Stop. 3) Ready. 4) Alarm. 5) Fault. 6) Local control. 7) Remote control. 8) Control source local. 9) Control source remote. 10) Speed indication. b. Minimum control functions: 1) Local/Remote switch. 2) Stop button. 3) Start button. 4) Reset button. 5) Speed control buttons. 3. Diagnostic indicators located externally on the face of the drive shall show the type of fault responsible for drive warning, shutdown or failure. a. On occurrence of more than one condition, each shall be recorded or indicated by the diagnostics. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES - LOW VOLTAGE 26 29 23 - 8 2.5 HARMONIC PROTECTION REQUIREMENTS A. All VFDs shall be capable of satisfactory operation from a source having voltage distortion and notch characteristics identified as acceptable for a “dedicated system” in IEEE 519 Table 10.2. B. With all VFDs operating under worst-case harmonic current conditions, and the facility supplied from either or both the utility and generator sources, the VFDs shall not produce harmonic effects in excess of the following limits at any point of common coupling (PCC). 1. Voltage distortion and notch characteristics: IEEE 519 Table 10.2 for General System. 2. Current distortion: IEEE 519 Table 10.3 based on calculated ISC/IL at each PCC. C. PCC shall be considered: 1. Building service entrance. D. VFD manufacturer shall determine, for their proposed equipment, uncorrected harmonic distortion levels and mitigation techniques required to meet the specified limits and shall furnish the VFD types and all accessory items and equipment necessary to do so, whether specified herein or not. E. VFD manufacturer shall provide a harmonic analysis of the distribution system based on their proposed specific equipment characteristics and mitigation techniques confirming that the specified levels are not exceeded. 1. Analysis shall be based on the methodology of IEEE 519 and IEEE 399. 2. Power system data for analysis shall be taken from the electrical drawings and approved equipment submittals. a. VFDs provided in a package with equipment specified elsewhere, shall be included in the analysis. DESCRIPTION ESTIMATED VALUE Utility 3-PH Short Circuit Current Utility X/R ratio Service transformer kVA Service transformer impedance Generator Rated Kva Generator Transient Reactance Generator Subtransient Reactance F. Following start-up, with facility at full load operation, provide measurement of harmonic voltage, current and notch characteristics at each PCC according to the requirements of IEEE 519 Section 9. 1. Values in excess of specified limits require correction by contractor and re-measurement. 2. Provide certification of compliant measurements as part of Field Service Engineer’s final report. 2.6 MOTOR PROTECTION REQUIREMENTS A. The VFD shall produce a quality of output waveform adequate to allow the motor to produce rated torque at rated RPM continuously without exceeding the temperature rise given in NEMA MG 1 Table 31-2. B. Provide motor overload, short circuit and ground fault protection integral to drive electronics. C. The VFD shall not produce voltage spikes in excess of the following values at the motor terminals when operated with the feeder types shown on the Drawings and the actual installed feeder lengths. 1. If unmitigated voltage peaks exceed the specified limits, provide output line reactors, filters, or other devices as required to meet the specified limits: a. Inverter duty motors: 1280 V. b. Rise time shall be greater than or equal to 0.1 microsecond. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES - LOW VOLTAGE 26 29 23 - 9 c. Motor lead length and data shall be determined by the Contractor based on the actual routing of the conductors. D. Following start-up, provide measurement of peak voltage at the terminals of each motor, unless the lead lengths are 10% shorter than the manufacturers published literature for maximum lead length for the type of cable installed. 1. Values in excess of specified limits require correction by contractor and re-measurement. 2. Provide certification of compliant measurements as part of Field Service Engineer’s final report. 2.7 EQUIPMENT CONSTRUCTION A. Fabrication and Assembly: 1. Each VFD system shall be factory-assembled, and shall utilize interchangeable plug-in printed circuit boards and power conversion components wherever possible. a. Factory assembly shall be performed by the VFD manufacturer or authorized agent. b. Systems fabricated or assembled in whole or in part by parties other than the VFD manufacturer or authorized agent will not be acceptable. 2. Reactors and/or filters, where required, shall be mounted within or in an ancillary enclosure adjacent to the drive enclosure, or with the Engineer's permission may be mounted in a separate enclosure. 3. Cooling fans, as required, shall be provided to run when drive is running. 4. Enclosures for separately mounted VFD's: a. NEMA Type 12 for installation in other unclassified areas. B. Wiring: 1. The wiring in the VFD shall be neatly installed in wire ways or with wire ties where wire ways are not practical. a. Where wire ties are used, the wire bundles are to be held at the back panel with a screw-mounted wire tie mounting base. b. Bases with a self-sticking back will not be allowed. 2. All plug-in contacts shall be gold-plated. 3. Provide terminal boards for all field wiring and inter-unit connections, including analog signals. a. Provide terminals for shield continuity where required. 4. Terminal blocks shall be complete with marking strip, covers and pressure connectors. a. Non-brittle, interlocking, track-mounted type. b. Screw terminals will not be allowed. c. A terminal for each conductor of external circuits plus one ground for each shielded cable. d. For free-standing panels, 8 inches of clearance shall be provided between terminals and the panel base for conduit and wiring space. e. Not less than 25% spare terminals shall be provided. f. Terminals shall be labeled to agree with identification indicated on the suppliers submittal drawings. g. Individually fuse each control loop or system and all fuses or circuit breakers shall be clearly labeled and located for easy maintenance. 5. All grounding wires shall be attached to the enclosure sheet metal with a ring tongue terminal. a. The surface of the sheet metal shall be prepared to assure good conductivity and corrosion protection. 6. Wiring shall not be kinked or spliced and shall have markings on both ends or be color coded. a. Markings or color code shall match the manufacturer's drawings. 7. With the exception of electronic circuits, all interconnecting wiring and wiring to terminals for external connections shall be stranded copper, type MTW or SIS, insulated for not less Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES - LOW VOLTAGE 26 29 23 - 10 than 600 V, with a moisture-resistant and flame-retardant covering rated for not less than 90 DegC. C. Nameplates: 1. All devices mounted on the face of the drive shall be provided with a suitable nameplate as specified in Specification Section 10 14 00. 2. Push buttons, selector switches, and pilot lights shall have the device manufacturer's standard legend plate. 3. Relays, terminals and special devices inside the control enclosure shall have permanent markings to match identification used on manufacturer's wiring diagrams. D. Painting: Enclosure, after being phosphate washed, shall be thoroughly cleaned and given at least one (1) coat of rust-inhibiting primer on all inner surfaces prior to fabrication. 2.8 COMPONENTS AND ACCESSORIES A. Reactors: 1. Impedance: As required. 2. Continuous current: Not less than drive rating. 3. Current overload: 150% for 1 minute. 4. Insulation temperature rating: 180 degrees C. 5. Copper windings. 6. Saturation current rating: 3.5 to 5 times rated current. 7. Hi-potential rating: 2500 VAC line to ground and line to line, for 1 minute. 8. Noise reduction features: a. Epoxy over cast coil. b. Extra dips and bakes of varnish over continuous wound coil. 2.9 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Factory Tests: 1. Conduct all standard tests in accordance with NEMA and ANSI standards to ensure conformance to Specification requirements. 2.10 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Provide manufacturer's recommended renewable spare parts (e.g., power and control fuses). B. Spare parts utilized during pre-start-up or start-up and demonstration testing shall be immediately restocked, at no cost to the Owner. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and as indicated on the Drawings. B. Provide separately mounted VFD enclosure with Short Circuit Current Rating (SCCR) labeling as required by NFPA 70 and other applicable codes. 1. Determine the SCCR rating by one of the following methods: a. Method 1: SCCR rating meets or exceeds the available fault current of the source equipment when indicated on the Drawings. b. Method 2: SCCR rating meets or exceeds the source equipment’s Amp Interrupting Current (AIC) rating as indicated on the Drawings. c. Method 3: SCCR rating meets or exceeds the calculated available short circuit current at the control panel. 2. The source equipment is the switchboard, panelboard, motor control center or similar equipment where the equipment or control panel circuit originates. 3. For Method 3, provide calculations justifying the SCCR rating. Utilize source equipment available fault current or AIC rating as indicated on the Drawings. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES - LOW VOLTAGE 26 29 23 - 11 C. Verify the installed motor nameplate electrical requirements do not exceed the VFD capacity. D. Provide services of manufacturer's representative to perform start-up services. E. The selection of input and output harmonic and voltage spike protection shall also be made on the available physical space. 1. The space available on the Drawings shall not be exceeded. 3.2 START UP A. Pre-start-up Services: 1. Shall be completed a minimum of 30 days prior to the start-up and demonstration period described in Specification Section 01 75 00. 2. Shall consist of: a. Physical and electrical installation check. b. Final adjustments and calibration of drive parameters. c. VFD operation from simulated input signals. 3. Shall be complete when VFD(s) are fully operational. B. Field Quality Control: 1. Perform field measurement of harmonics at each PCC per Harmonic Protection Requirements Article. a. For each individual VFD. b. For the maximum number of VFDs that will be operational at the same time. c. When all loads are at 75% load minimum. d. Duration: 1 hour minimum. 2. Perform field measurement of the maximum voltage peak at the terminals of each motor fed from a VFD per Motor Protection Requirements Article. a. Use a high speed oscilloscope to produce a plot of Voltage (Y axis) versus Time (X axis). 1) Time shall be measured in microseconds. b. Tests shall be performed at full: 1) Full voltage and speed. 2) Loaded to 75% minimum. 3) Duration: 1 hour minimum. 3. Record all data necessary for the preparation of required test reports. C. Start-up and Demonstration Services: 1. Supervise start-up of all units including recheck of settings made during the pre-start-up tests. a. Perform all work in the presence of the Owner's designated representatives. 2. Setup all VFDs with carrier frequency at minimum value consistent with proper operation; inform Engineer of carrier frequencies set in excess of 5 kHz and reason for setting. 3. Simulate operation of the VFD and its associated control and instrumentation system in both the manual and automatic modes. a. Ensure compatibility of VFD with associated control and instrumentation signals. 4. Simulate VFD failures and demonstrate troubleshooting aids. D. Instruct Owner's designated personnel: 1. Minimum of 8 hours at the jobsite. 2. Include both field and classroom instruction. 3. Instructions shall include proper operation and maintenance procedures including, but not limited to: a. Lubrication. b. Troubleshooting. c. Repair and replacement. d. Parts inventory. e. Maintenance records. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES - LOW VOLTAGE 26 29 23 - 12 END OF SECTION Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents DIESEL-ENGINE-DRIVEN GENERATOR SETS 26 32 13.13 - 1 SECTION 26 32 13.13 DIESEL-ENGINE-DRIVEN GENERATOR SETS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Engine generator equipment. 2. Fuel storage tanks. 3. Engine generator enclosures and accessories. 4. Access stairs and platforms, including performance and design criteria for required delegated design services. B. Related Requirements: Include, but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Section 26 05 00 - Common Work Results for Electrical. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards: 1. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA): a. 40 CFR Part 60, Subpart IIII, Protection of Environment, Standards of Performance for New Stationary Sources, Standards for Performance for Stationary Compression Ignition Internal Combustion Engines. 2. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): a. 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum). b. MG 1, Motors and Generators. 3. National Fire Protection association (NFPA): a. 70, National Electrical Code (NEC): 1) Article 701, Legally Required Standby Systems. 4. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): a. 2200, Standard for Stationary Engine Generator Assemblies. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. Supplier: a. The engine generator equipment manufacturer or other authorized Supplier has unit responsibility for furnishing all components of required engine generator systems and proper, initial operation of systems required by this Section. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Shop Drawings: a. Schedule: Where the Work includes furnishing more than one engine generator system, submit schedule of engine generator systems, indicating for each engine generator system: identification or tag number, engine generator size, location, enclosure type, fuel storage tank capacity, and other pertinent data. b. Dimensioned plan, elevation, sections, and detail drawings for engine generator equipment, enclosures, and other components furnished by engine generator manufacturer. c. Fuel storage tank. d. Wire interconnection drawings. e. Control panel layout drawings and internal wiring diagrams. 2. Product Data: a. Manufacturer’s literature and published data for all components and accessories of engine generator systems. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents DIESEL-ENGINE-DRIVEN GENERATOR SETS 26 32 13.13 - 2 b. Comply with Section 26 05 00 - Common Work Results for Electrical, regarding required Submittals. c. Engine/generator performance curves. 3. Testing Plans, Procedures, and Testing Limitations: a. Testing procedure, apparatus, and limitations of apparatus and procedure, for: 1) Source quality control activities indicated in this Section. 2) Field quality control activities indicated in this Section. B. Informational Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Certificates: a. Generator equipment manufacturer’s documentation of engine USEPA certification including USEPA family name and generator equipment model designation. 2. Supplier Instructions: a. Serial numbers of items furnished, equipment nameplate information, and similar information for all items furnished. b. Instructions for handling, installing, and startup. 3. Source Quality Control Submittals: a. Results of tests, inspections, and other quality control activities required by the Contract Documents and performed at the place of production or fabrication. 4. Field Quality Control Submittals: a. Results of tests, inspections, and other quality control activities required by the Contract Documents and performed at the Site. 5. Supplier Site Visit Reports: a. Report of each visit to the Site by Supplier, summarizing purpose of visit, activities while onsite, problems encountered, advice given to Contractor or Subcontractor, and actions taken. 6. Qualifications: a. Contractor’s, Subcontractor’s, or Supplier’s delegated design professional. C. Closeout Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Operation and Maintenance Data: a. Submit in accordance with Section 01 78 23 - Operation and Maintenance Data. 2. Post-Startup Statement: a. Equipment installation, startup, and operational statement for each engine generator system provided. 3. Keying: a. Upon Substantial Completion, furnish to Owner or facility manager (if any) not less than two sets of keys for locks on generator system enclosures. D. Maintenance Material Submittals: 1. Furnish the following items and submit documentation of delivery to and acceptance of such items by Owner or facility manager (if any), in accordance with Section 01 78 43 - Spare Parts and Extra Materials: a. Spare Parts and Extra Materials: 1) Furnish spare parts and extra materials sufficient for one year of operation as recommended by generator system manufacturer, for each generator system furnished. 1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Ambient Conditions: 1. Ambient Air Temperature: 2. Minimum: -20 degrees F. 3. Maximum: 110 degrees F. B. Existing Conditions: 1. Site Elevation: 3300 feet above sea level. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents DIESEL-ENGINE-DRIVEN GENERATOR SETS 26 32 13.13 - 3 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Engine generator unit: a. Caterpillar. b. Cummins. c. d. Kohler. 2. Silencers: a. Generator equipment manufacturer’s standard. b. Or equal. 3. Battery charger: a. Generator equipment manufacturer’s standard. 4. Governor: a. Generator equipment manufacturer’s standard. b. Or equal. 5. Radiator: a. Generator equipment manufacturer’s standard. 6. Vibration isolators: a. Generator equipment manufacturer’s standard. b. Or equal. 2.2 DESCRIPTION A. Engine generators will be used and rated for: 1. Standby power during a utility power outage, NFPA 70, Article 701. 2.3 EQUIPMENT A. Emissions Requirements: 1. Each generator system’s exhaust emissions shall comply with Laws and Regulations. Federal, State and Local government requirements, including but not limited to: a. Environmental Protection Agencies (USEPA) New Source Performance Standards (NSPS), 40 CFR Part 60, Subpart IIII. 2.4 COMPONENTS A. Engine Generator Unit General: 1. Diesel engine direct-connected to alternating current generator mounted on suitable rigid steel skid supports. 2. Mount unit on skid suitable for installation on concrete foundation. 3. Base rating on operation at rated RPM when equipped with all operating accessories. 4. Standards: UL 2200. B. Engine: 1. Four-cycle, full compression ignition, single acting, solid-injection unit, either vertical or V- type pistons either naturally aspirated o turbo charged with inner and after cooling. 2. Fuel supply: No. 2 Diesel. 3. Removable full wet-type cylinder liners of close grained alloy iron, heat treated for proper hardness to obtain maximum life. 4. Capable of operating at idle or light loads for extended periods of time. C. Injection Pumps and Valves: 1. Type not requiring adjustment in service, which may be individually removed and replaced. 2. Individual injection pump and valve for each cylinder. 3. Fuel injection pumps: Positive action, constant-stroke, actuated by cam driven by gears from engine crankshaft. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents DIESEL-ENGINE-DRIVEN GENERATOR SETS 26 32 13.13 - 4 4. Fuel lines between injection pumps and valves: Heavy seamless steel tubing. 5. Flexible fuel line connectors for supply and return connections at pump. D. Oil Pump: 1. Gear-type lubricating oil pump to supply oil under pressure to main bearings, crank pin bearings, pistons, timing gears, camshaft bearings and valve rocker mechanism. 2. Spray cool and lubricate pistons. 3. Oil filters so located that lubricating oil is continuously filtered, except during periods when oil is automatically by-passed to protect vital parts when filters are clogged. 4. Filter elements accessible and easily removable. 5. Filter elements: Effective full flow, replaceable resin-impregnated cellulose type. 6. Equip filter system with spring-loaded by-pass valve. 7. Oil cooler: Water-cooled, engine-mounted. E. Fuel System: 1. Equip fuel system with replaceable fuel filter elements arranged for easy removal without breaking any fuel line connections or disturbing fuel pumps or any other part of engine. 2. Locate all fuel filters in an accessible housing, ahead of injection pumps to thoroughly filter fuel before it reaches the pump. 3. Use no screens or filters requiring cleaning or replacement of injection pumps or valve assemblies. F. Governor: Fully enclosed electronic type governor with actuator capable of providing accurate speed control within 1% of rated speed, complete with panel-mounted electronic assembly with ramp generator and speed-sensing modules. G. Air Cleaners: Engine-mounted, dry type air cleaners of sufficient capacity. H. Electric Starting System: 1. Sufficient capacity to crank at speed which will start engine under normal operating conditions. 2. Controls to provide automatic cranking of engine when generator is called to start. 3. Prevent excessive cranking which could damage cranking motor. 4. Automatic stop controls. 5. Starter motors with positive-engagement feature. I. Cooling System: 1. Capacity for cooling engine at the specified operating conditions. 2. Engine driven, centrifugal type water circulating pump and thermostatic valve to maintain the engine at recommended temperature level. 3. Unit mounted radiator. a. Core guard flexible duct adapter. b. Site glass at top of unit. c. Engine driven blower fan. d. Low water level cutoff switch. 4. Provide fan guards. J. Heater: 1. Thermostatically controlled jacket water heater(s) to maintain cooling jacket at the manufacturer's recommended temperature at the specified low ambient temperature. 2. 120VAC, single phase. K. Silencer: 1. Suitable type for residential silencing. 2. Seamless, stainless steel, flexible, exhaust adapter for exhaust outlet to silencer. L. Engine Instruments and Controls: 1. Engine-mounted instruments: a. Oil pressure gage. b. Water temperature gage. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents DIESEL-ENGINE-DRIVEN GENERATOR SETS 26 32 13.13 - 5 c. Run time meter. d. Battery voltage meter. 2. Automatic cycle cranking and over-crank protection. 3. Safety controls: Equip engine with automatic safety controls to shut down engine in event of low lubricating oil pressure, high jacket water temperature, overspeed or overcrank. 4. Auxiliary control devices: Either integral with specified engine instruments, control, and safety devices or as separate devices as required to operate various signal circuits specified for remote annunciator panel. 5. Three NO auxiliary contacts for interface with louvers, fans or other miscellaneous equipment. a. Contacts shall close when generator is started. M. Fuel Tank: 1. Double wall sub-base day tank mounted underneath engine generator unit. 2. Steel construction, top and bottom baffles, steel channel side supports, weatherproof secondary containment, rust preventive interior coating, rust proofed and finish painted exterior. 3. Tank connections: Fuel level gauge, fuel lines to generator, fill, vent, drain and pressure relief. 4. Manual overfill protection. 5. Low level warning with contacts for remote alarm. a. Set to alarm at 50% of capacity. 6. Critical low level shutoff with contacts for remote alarm. 7. Leak detection alarm with contacts for remote alarm. 8. Capacity: 24 hours at full load. N. Batteries: 1. Lead acid type. 2. Furnish electrolyte separately for use when installation is complete and unit is ready for testing. O. Battery Charger: 1. Output current rating of at least 1/20th of ampere hour capacity of battery and capable of automatically switching between low rate (float) mode and high rate (equalize) mode. 2. Solid state rectifiers, DC voltmeter and ammeter, fuse input and output, and 115 VAC input. 3. Malfunction alarm contacts (minimum): low and high battery voltage, weak battery and charger failure. P. Generator: 1. Brushless, 4-pole drip-proof revolving field type with permanent magnet, 2/3 pitch stator, direct-coupled rotor, Class H insulation. 2. Minimum continuous standby ratings: a. As indicated on the Drawings, substantiated by manufacturer's standard published curves and conform to NEMA MG 1 specification. b. Special ratings or maximum ratings are not acceptable. 3. Rated to serve up to 50% non-linear load without exceeding rated temperature rise. 4. Minimum efficiency: 92% at 50 to 110% of nominal standby rating, less than 30% instantaneous voltage dip at full load and rated power factor and suitable for simultaneous operation with other future units connected in parallel. 5. Stator and rotor: 130 degrees C temperature rise with minimum Class H insulated with 100 percent epoxy impregnation and overcoat of resilient insulating material to reduce possible fungus and/or abrasive deterioration. 6. Directly connect stator to engine flywheel housing. 7. Drive rotor through semiflexible driving flange to ensure permanent alignment. 8. Self-ventilating with suitable blower, air inlet and outlet openings. 9. Provide terminal box of adequate size for entrance of conduit and termination of conductors. 10. Generator drive free from critical torsional vibration within operating range. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents DIESEL-ENGINE-DRIVEN GENERATOR SETS 26 32 13.13 - 6 11. Provide generator mounted main circuit breaker: a. Solid state molded case type. b. Ratings as indicated. Q. Voltage Regulator: 1. SCR type, to maintain 2% voltage regulation from 0 to full load with steady state modulation not exceeding plus 1/2% including cross-current compensation to provide maximum of 5% unbalance in kVA load sharing between this unit and possible future generators. 2. Automatic protection against short circuits on system. 3. Permit unit to operate at no load below rated frequency for engine start up and shut down procedures. 4. Provide voltage level and gain controls for normal operating adjustments. 5. Provide voltage level control with minimum range of plus or minus 5% from rated voltage. 6. Mount regulator, volts per hertz type, in generator housing on suitable vibration isolators. R. Generator Instruments and Controls: 1. Generator mounted NEMA 1 type, illuminated vibration isolated instrument and control panel(s). 2. AC voltmeter and phase selector switch. 3. AC ammeter and phase selector switch. 4. Frequency meter. 5. Run-off-auto engine, start-stop control switch. 6. Emergency stop. 7. Run time meter. 8. Governor control rheostat. 9. Voltage level adjustment rheostat. 10. Cool down time delay 0-15 minute adjustable. 11. Cycle cranking control. 12. Minimum red shut down indicating lights as follows: a. Overcrank. b. Overspeed. c. Low lubricating oil pressure. d. High engine water temperature. 13. Minimum amber alarm indicator lights as follows: a. Control switch not in auto position. b. Low engine water temperature (less than 70 degrees F). c. Low fuel in day tank. d. Day tank leak. e. Battery charger malfunctioning. f. Low battery voltage. 14. Minimum amber prealarm indicator lights as follows: a. High engine water temperature. b. Low lubricating oil pressure. 15. Common dry contact and audible alarm to indicate when one or more alarm or prealarm conditions exist. S. Vibration Isolators: Vibration system shall consist of engine and generator mount isolators with or without additional mechanical spring isolators rubber pads to control both high and low frequency vibrations between major components, sub-base and structural foundation and to provide required vibration isolation for the seismic zone of the Project. 2.5 ACCESSORIES A. Provide interposing relays (24 VDC to 120 VAC) as required for interfacing with customer's 120 Vac monitoring system. B. Generator set non-walk-in weather protective enclosure: Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents DIESEL-ENGINE-DRIVEN GENERATOR SETS 26 32 13.13 - 7 1. Sheet steel with side servicing panels, air intake louvers and rear control panel access door. 2. Side servicing panels shall have two locking points; all panels and doors shall be key lockable. 3. Completely install enclosure on generator set mounting base. 2.6 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Individually test each prime mover. 1. Apply derating factors for the proposed site to test data. 2. Continuously test for a period not less than two hours. 3. Test procedure shall be as follows: a. Start prime mover and upon reaching rated RPM, pick up 100 percent of nameplate KW rating at rated power factor in one step. b. Observe and record the cranking time(s) required to start and run for each prime mover. c. Observe and record the time required to come up to operating speed for each prime mover. d. Record voltage and frequency overshoot for each prime mover. e. Record voltage, frequency and amperes. f. Record oil pressure, water temperature where applicable and battery charge rate at first load acceptance and at 15 minute intervals thereafter for each prime mover. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install all components as indicated and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and instructions. B. Fill cooling system with solution of 50-50 water and ethylene glycol anti-freeze to prevent freezing at temperatures as low as minus 30 degrees F. C. Provide fuel for a full day tank. D. Install all wiring to engine in conduit. 1. Control wiring on engine may be factory installed in high temperature loom. E. Provide control wiring in conduit between generator control panel and remote devices as described under generator instrument and controls paragraph and remote annunciator paragraph of this Specification. F. Mount on concrete pad utilizing vibration/seismic isolators, see structural drawings for pad detail. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field Tests and Inspections: 1. Provide two load tests and one cycle crank test. 2. Tests one and two shall be for continuous period of no less than two hours each. 3. Engineer and Owner shall be notified seven days prior to testing. 4. Test number one: a. With prime mover(s) in a "cold start" condition and emergency load at normal operating level, initiate a normal power failure by opening all switches or breakers supplying normal power to facility. b. Observe and record the time delay on engine start. c. Observe and record the cranking time(s) required to start and run for each prime mover. d. Observe and record the time required to come up to operating speed for each prime mover. e. Record voltage and frequency overshoot for each prime mover. f. Observe and record time required to achieve steady-state condition with all switches transferred to emergency position. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents DIESEL-ENGINE-DRIVEN GENERATOR SETS 26 32 13.13 - 8 g. Record voltage, frequency and amperes. h. Record oil pressure, water temperature where applicable and battery charge rate at 5- minute intervals for the first 15 minutes and at 15 minute intervals thereafter for each prime mover. i. Return normal power to facility, record time delay on retransfer to normal for each switch and cooldown time delay for each prime mover. 5. Test number two: a. Immediately after completion of test number one, start prime mover and upon reaching rated RPM, pick up 100% of nameplate KW rating in one step. 1) Unity power factor is acceptable for on-site testing b. Observe and record the cranking time(s) required to start and run for each prime mover. c. Observe and record the time required to come up to operating speed for each prime mover. d. Record voltage and frequency overshoot for each prime mover. e. Observe and record time required to achieve steady-state condition. f. Record voltage, frequency and amperes. g. Record oil pressure, water temperature where applicable and battery charge rate at first load acceptance and at 15 minute intervals thereafter for each prime mover. 6. Cycle crank test: a. Perform test for each prime mover. 1) Utilize any method recommended by manufacturer to prevent prime mover(s) from running. 2) Put control switch into "run" position to cause prime mover to crank. b. A complete cranking cycle shall consist of an automatic crank period of approximately 15 seconds duration followed by a rest period of approximately 15 seconds duration. 1) Upon starting and running of the prime mover, further cranking shall cease. 2) Two means of cranking termination shall be utilized so that one will act as a backup to the other to prevent inadvertent starter engagement. 3) Cranking limiter time shall be 75 seconds for cycle crank. 7. Furnish load banks of required ratings necessary for tests. 8. Record engine fuel consumption by means of test equipment. 9. Test all safeties specified for generator instruments and controls as recommended by manufacturer and as required to verify proper operation. 10. The Contractor shall be responsible for fuel and all consumables use during the test. B. Supplier’s onsite services: Employ and pay for services of equipment manufacturer's field service representative(s) to: 1. Inspect equipment covered by this Specification Section. 2. Supervise pre-startup adjustments and installation checks. 3. Conduct initial startup of equipment and perform operational checks. 4. Provide Owner written statement that manufacturer's equipment has been installed properly, started up, tested, and is ready for operation by facilities operations and maintenance personnel. END OF SECTION Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents ACTIVE HARMONIC FILTERS 26 35 26.16 - 1 SECTION 26 35 26.16 ACTIVE HARMONIC FILTERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Active harmonic correction equipment. B. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Section 26 05 00 - Common Work Results for Electrical. 2. Section 26 08 13 - Acceptance Testing. 3. Section 26 09 16 - Electrical Control Components. 4. Section 26 24 19 - Motor Control Equipment. 5. Section 26 29 23 - Variable Frequency Drives - Low Voltage. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards: 1. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE): a. C62.41, Recommended Practice on Surge Voltages in Low-Voltage AC Power Circuits. b. 519, Recommended Practices and Requirements for Harmonic Control in Electrical Power Systems. 2. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): a. 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum). 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. General: 1. Voltage: 480 V, 3 PH, 3-wire, plus ground. 2. Output Load Capacity: Rated capacity shall be the specified current capacity at the voltage required as indicated within this Specification and shown on the respective Electrical Drawings included within this Document. 3. Current Transducers: a. Split core type current transducers shall be installed as defined herein and shown in the Electrical Drawings contained in these Documents. b. Two current transducers per power correction system location are required and mounted on Phases A & B. c. Current ratings of the current transducers shall be according to full load current of the circuit on which installed. d. Current transducers rated for 400 Hz shall be used. B. Modes of Operation: 1. The power correction system shall be designed to electronically inject harmonic current to cancel load produced harmonic current such that the upstream power harmonic current and voltage are reduced. Refer to Drawings herein for specific locations. 2. Reactive current compensation (aka displacement power factor correction) shall be activated via a digital keypad/display mounted on the door of the enclosure. When reactive current compensation is activated, the power correction system shall first perform harmonic current correction and then use the remaining capacity to inject reactive current compensation to attain the specified level. C. Performance Requirements: 1. Input Power: a. Voltage: 480V, 3 PH plus ground. b. Voltage Tolerance: ±10% of nominal. c. Frequency: 60 Hz, ±3 Hz. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents ACTIVE HARMONIC FILTERS 26 35 26.16 - 2 d. Surge Withstand Capability: IEEE C62.41-1991 without damage. e. Input Fuses: Rated at 200,000 AIC (amperes interrupting capacity), Class T. 2. Output Performance: a. Performance of the power correction system shall be independent of the impedance of the power source. All performance levels shall be attained whether on the AC lines, backup generator, or output of UPS. b. Harmonic Correction: 1) Limit the 2nd through 50th order harmonic current to < 5% TDD each installed location indicated herein. Harmonic levels for individual harmonic orders shall comply with respective levels established in IEEE 519-1992, Table 10.3. 2) Limit the THD(V) added to the electrical system immediately upstream of the power correction system location(s) to less than or equal to 5%. The power correction system shall not correct for utility supplied voltage distortion levels. 3) Reactive Current Compensation: To 0.95 lagging displacement power factor. Leading power factor is not permitted. 3. Current Transducers: a. Current transducers shall be rated for the total rated rms current of the total load at each installed location or higher. b. Two current transducers, mounted on Phases A and B, are to be installed per location. c. Each current transducer shall have a current output of 5 amperes. Current capacity of each current transducer shall be as required for the electrical system where installed. d. Each current transducer shall be rated for 400 Hz. 4. Environmental Conditions: a. The power correction system shall be able to withstand the following environmental conditions without damage or degradation of operating characteristics or life: 1) Operating Ambient Temperature: 0 degrees C to 40 degrees C. 2) Storage Temperature: -40 degrees C to 65 degrees C. 3) Relative Humidity: 0 to 95%, non-condensing. 4) Audible Noise: Generated by power correction system not to exceed 65 dbA measured 1 meter from surface of unit. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: B. Contract Closeout Information: 1. Operation and Maintenance Data: a. See Specification Section 01 78 23 for requirements for the mechanics, administration, and the content of Operation and Maintenance Manual submittals. C. Approval Submittals: 1. Submittals for approvals shall include: a. System configuration in a single line diagram. b. Size and weights of shipping units to be handled by installer. c. Dimensional drawings with installed weight and heat dissipation for each size provided. d. Detailed layouts of customer power and control connections. e. Detailed installation drawings including all terminal locations. f. Technical brochure detailing the standard features of the power correction system. D. Certifications: a. Submit with Shop Drawings: 1) Compliance with IEEE 519. 2) Compliance with "Factory Tests". 2. Prior to shipment, the manufacturer shall fully test the performance at full current and voltage while functioning as a harmonic correction device to assure compliance with equipment specifications defined herein. A certified report shall be provided to the Owner of successful completion of performance tests. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents ACTIVE HARMONIC FILTERS 26 35 26.16 - 3 E. Programmed Settings: 1. For each device with programmable requirements, provide the final "as-built" settings for all devices. 2. Submit on 8.5 inches x 11 inches sheets in 3-ring binders. 3. Provide in accordance with the submittals section. F. Software: 1. Provide two copies of unrestricted software for each equipment type. 2. Provide software license for Owner’s usage. 3. Provide two cables of each type for connection from each equipment type to a laptop computer. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. See Section 26 05 00. 1.6 WARRANTY A. The power correction system manufacturer shall warrant products against defects in material and workmanship for a period of two years from date of shipment. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Eaton, Cutler-Hammer. 2. Square D Company. B. Submit request for substitution in accordance with Specification Section 01640. 2.2 EQUIPMENT, PERFORMANCE AND DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Enclosure: 1. Each power correction unit shall be provided in a NEMA Type 1 enclosure. 2. Units rated 100 amperes and under for total output current shall be designed for wall mounting with cable entry through the bottom, or placed within a Motor Control Center line-up. Units rated greater than 100 amperes for total output current shall be freestanding for mounting to the floor with cable entry though the top. 3. Freestanding units shall include a door-interlocked disconnect that provides power interruption when the door is opened. Disconnect shall be lockable in the power-off position. Wall mount units shall be disconnected from the power source by a disconnect device or circuit breaker contained in the power distribution center. 4. Freestanding units shall include lifting provisions by forklift truck and lifting lugs. Wall mount units weighing more than 80 pounds shall have lifting lugs. 5. All units shall include 200,000 AIC rated fuses with Class T actuation. 6. All units shall be provided with a grounding lug. Grounding by the Contractor is to be performed according to local and national standards. 7. The paint shall be the manufacturer’s standard type and color. B. Operator and Controls and Interface: 1. All units shall include a digital interface model (DIM) that includes an alphanumeric display consisting of 2 lines with 20 characters per line. All information shall be in English. Display shall be easily viewed under all lighting conditions, including sunlight, as found inside buildings. 2. Operators include run, stop, setup, enter, and up/down scroll. 3. The display shall provide operating data while functioning. Standard operating parameters available for display are AC line voltage, total rms load current, harmonic current of load, reactive current of load, output harmonic and reactive current of power correction system. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents ACTIVE HARMONIC FILTERS 26 35 26.16 - 4 4. When the output of the power correction unit is at full rated capacity, the display shall indicate at-maximum capacity and actuate an at-maximum capacity relay. 5. All fault conditions shall be displayed as they occur. Diagnostic information shall be provided in English and clearly indicate the nature of the fault. 6. The run pushbutton shall include a green LED. LED shall be lighted when unit is operating. 7. Contacts shall be provided for operator information for power-on, run, fault and at- maximum capacity. One form C contact shall be provided for each relay. 8. A RS485 serial communication port shall be provided for remote control and diagnostic information. C. Design: 1. All power correction units shall be defined as a power electronic device consisting of power semiconductors that switch into the AC lines to modulate its output to cancel detrimental harmonic and/or reactive currents. A DC bus shall store power for power semiconductor switching. A microprocessor shall control the operation of the power converter. 2. Each unit shall be designed with a current limiting function to protect the semiconductors. When this level is attained, a message shall be displayed indicating the output capacity is at- maximum capacity and actuate the at-maximum capacity relay. Operation shall continue indefinitely at this level without trip off or destruction of the power correction unit. 3. Each unit shall incorporate an over-temperature output roll back that reduces the total output current in order to maintain maximum current correction within the electrical system. 4. Two distinct levels of faults shall be employed. Non-critical level faults will provide automatic restart and a return to normal operation upon automatic fault clearance. Critical level faults stop the function of the unit and await operator action. a. Faults such as AC line over voltage, AC line under-voltage, AC line power loss, and AC line phase imbalance shall be automatically restarted. Upon removal of these fault conditions, the power correction system shall restart without user action. Automatic restart will not occur if 5 faults have occurred in less than 5 minutes. During the fault condition, except line loss, the display shall state the type of fault and indicate that automatic restart will occur. The run relay and run LED shall be disabled. The fault relay shall not be enabled unless time out occurs. Upon AC line loss, the power-on relay shall be disabled and no display shall be provided. b. All other types of faults shall be considered critical and stop the power correction system. The display shall indicate the fault condition and “stop.” The run LED and relay shall be disabled and the fault relay enabled. User shall be required to initiate a power reset (turn power off and on) to restart the power correction system. 5. The logic of the power correction system shall monitor the load current by utilizing two current transducers (CTs) mounted on Phases A and B to direct the function of the power electronic converter. The ratio of the CTs must be entered into the logic via the digital keypad/display to calibrate the operation of the power correction system. The output of the current transducers shall be 5 amperes. 6. Up to five power correction units may be installed in parallel to inject current according to the information received from one set of CTs. The units will function independently. If one unit is stopped or faulted, the remaining units will adjust accordingly to maintain optimum harmonic cancellation levels up to the capacity of the remaining units. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. The following inspections and test procedures shall be performed by factory trained field service personnel during startup: 1. Visual Inspection: a. Inspect equipment for signs of damage. b. Verify installation per Drawings. c. Verify ground conductors are properly sized and configured. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents ACTIVE HARMONIC FILTERS 26 35 26.16 - 5 d. Verify current transducer orientation and wiring to power correction system. e. Verify logic setup corresponds to performance specifications defined herein. 2. Mechanical Inspection: a. Check all control wiring connections for tightness. b. Check all power wiring connections for tightness. c. Check all terminal screws, nuts, and/or spade lugs for tightness. 3. Electrical Inspection: a. Check all fuses for continuity. b. Confirm input voltage and verify unit match. c. Check current transducers for proper phase location and orientation. B. Provide training of Owner’s personnel as specified in Specification Section 01 75 00. C. Startup and Site Testing: The manufacturer shall provide field test personnel to initialize all equipment. A 3-phase harmonic analyzer shall be used to measure TDD and THD(V) levels to verify performance to the specifications defined herein. Test reports shall be prepared for each point of test. Test reports shall be documented, signed, and dated. All tests shall be submitted to the site manager. D. Testing shall be included in the overall testing requirements as defined in Section 26 29 23. END OF SECTION Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 This page intentionally left blank. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents TRANSFER SWITCHES 26 36 00 - 1 SECTION 26 36 00 TRANSFER SWITCHES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Manual transfer switches. 2. Automatic transfer switches. B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Section 26 05 00 - Common Work Results for Electrical. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards: 1. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): a. 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum). b. KS 1, Enclosed and Miscellaneous Distribution Equipment Switches (600 Volts Maximum). 2. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): a. 98, Standard for Safety Enclosed and Dead-Front Switches. b. 1008, Standard for Safety Switch Equipment. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. Product technical data: a. Provide submittal data for all products specified in PART 2 of this Specification: b. See Section 26 05 00 for additional requirements. B. Contract Closeout Information: 1. Operation and Maintenance Data: a. See Specification Section 01 78 23 for requirements for the mechanics, administration, and the content of Operation and Maintenance Manual submittals. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. See Section 26 05 00. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the listed manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Automatic transfer switches: a. Automatic Switch Company. b. Kohler. c. Onan. d. Russelectric. e. ABB Zenith. 2.2 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH A. Construction: 1. Electrically operated mechanically held, double throw, air-break type. 2. Silver-surface main contacts and protect by arcing contacts. 3. Switch shall have provisions for visual inspection of switch blades and contacts. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents TRANSFER SWITCHES 26 36 00 - 2 4. Mechanical design will positively open all ungrounded conductors from normal source before connection is made to alternate source and will positively open alternate source before connection is made to normal source. 5. Mechanical interlock to ensure the switch cannot be readily disabled, disconnected, improperly adjusted, removed or otherwise made inoperative. 6. Make all contacts and coils readily accessible for replacement from front of panel without major disassembly. 7. Ratings: a. Continuous duty in both normal and emergency. b. Three-phase. c. Voltage and current ratings as indicated on the Drawings. d. Short circuit withstand rating equal to or greater than the normal source electrical gear. 8. Standards: UL 1008. B. Operation: 1. Microprocessor based control module. 2. Open transition. 3. Red and green indicating lights with fuses, identification nameplates, and test switch on front to simulate normal power failure at switch. 4. Engine starting contacts and all other auxiliary contacts and accessory devices for functions to be performed. 5. Supervisory voltage relays on each phase of normal source and single phase supervisory voltage and frequency relay for emergency source. a. Normal source voltage sensing. 1) Adjustable pickup from 85-100% of rated voltage, factory set 90%. 2) Adjustable dropout from 75-98% of pickup setting, factory set 85%. b. Emergency source voltage and frequency sensing: 1) Adjustable pickup from 85-100% of rated voltage, factory set 90%. 2) Fixed voltage dropout at 85% of pickup setting. 3) Adjustable pickup from 90-100% of rated frequency, factory set 95%. 4) Fixed frequency dropout at 88% of pickup setting. 6. Time delays: a. Engine start, adjustable from 0 to 10 seconds, factory set at 4 seconds, to avoid unnecessary starting caused by short time outages. b. Transfer to generator, adjustable from 0 to 120 seconds, factory set at 10 seconds. c. Retransfer to normal, adjustable from 2 to 30 minutes, factory set at 15 minutes to avoid erratic operation caused by short time reestablishment of normal source. 1) Automatically bypassed when emergency source fails and normal source is available. d. Generator cool down, adjustable from 0 to 60 minutes, factory set at 10 minutes. 7. Exerciser timer: a. Enable and disable function. b. Selectable to exercise with or without transferring load. c. Adjustable exercise duration from 1 minute to 24 hours, factory set at 15 minutes. d. Adjustable day of the week exercise setting, factory set for Monday. 8. Inphase monitor: a. Compare the phase relationship and frequency difference between the normal and emergency sources and permit transfer the first time the sources are within 15 electrical degrees and only if transfer can be accomplished within 60 electrical degrees as determined by monitoring the frequency differences. b. Inphase transfer accomplished if both sources are within 2 Hz of rated frequency and 70% or more of rated voltage. C. Enclosure: 1. NEMA 1 rated. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents TRANSFER SWITCHES 26 36 00 - 3 2. Body and cover: Sheet steel finished with a rust inhibiting primer and manufacturers standard paint inside and out. 3. No knockouts, hinged and lockable door. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install as indicated and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and instructions. B. Connect as indicated in one-line diagram. C. Mounting of automatic transfer switches: 1. Wall-mounted or floor mounted on 4 inches high concrete pad. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Automatic Transfer Switch Testing: 1. Simulate power outage by opening normal source overcurrent device. a. Verify engine generator starts and switch transfers in the specified time. 2. Close normal source overcurrent device to simulate the return of normal power. a. Verify the switch retransfers and engine generator shuts down in the specified time. 3. Perform a manual transfer and retransfer. 4. Verify the indicator lights function properly. END OF SECTION Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 This page intentionally left blank. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES FOR LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CIRCUITS 26 43 13 - 1 SECTION 26 43 13 SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES FOR LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CIRCUITS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Type PC1 SPD - High exposure locations (switchgear, switchboard, panelboard or motor control center), integrally mounted. 2. Type PC3 SPD - Medium exposure locations (switchboard, panelboard and motor control center), integrally mounted. 3. Type PC5 SPD - Medium or low exposure locations at individual equipment locations, external, parallel connection. B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards: 1. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (IEEE): a. C62.41, Recommended Practice for Surge Voltages in Low-Voltage AC Power Circuits. b. C62.41.1, Guide on the Surge Environment in Low-Voltage (1000V and Less) AC Power Circuits. c. C62.41.2, Recommended Practice on Characterization of Surges in Low-Voltage (1000 V and Less) AC Power Circuits. d. C62.45, Recommended Practice on Surge Testing For Equipment Connected to Low- Voltage (1000V and Less) AC Power Circuits. 2. Military Standard: a. MIL-STD-220B, Method of Insertion Loss Measurement. 3. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): a. 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum). 4. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): a. 70, National Electrical Code (NEC). 5. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): a. 1283, Standard for Electromagnetic Interference Filters. b. 1449, Standard for Surge Protective Devices. B. Qualifications: 1. Provide devices from a manufacturer who has been regularly engaged in the development, design, testing, listing and manufacturing of SPDs of the types and ratings required for a period of 10 years or more and whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service. a. Upon request, suppliers or manufacturers shall provide a list of not less than three customer references showing satisfactory operation. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Clamping Voltage: 1. The applied surge shall be induced at the 90 degrees phase angle of the applied system frequency voltage. 2. The voltage measured at the end of the 6 inches output leads of the SPD and from the zero voltage reference to the peak of the surge. B. Let-Through Voltage: Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES FOR LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CIRCUITS 26 43 13 - 2 1. The applied surge shall be induced at the 90 degrees phase angle of the applied system frequency voltage. 2. The voltage measured at the end of the 6 inches output leads of the SPD and from the system peak voltage to the peak of the surge. C. Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage (MCOV): The maximum steady state voltage at which the SPD device can operate and meet its specification within its rated temperature. D. Maximum Surge Current: 1. The maximum 8 x 20 microsecond surge current pulse the SPD device is capable of surviving on a single-impulse basis without suffering either performance degradation or more than 10% deviation of clamping voltage at a specified surge current. 2. Listed by mode, since number and type of components in any SPD may very by mode. E. Protection Modes: This parameter identifies the modes for which the SPD has directly connected protection elements, i.e., line-to-neutral (L-N), line-to-line (L-L), line-to-ground (L- G), neutral-to-ground (N-G). F. Surge Current per Phase: 1. The per phase rating is the total surge current capacity connected to a given phase conductor. a. For example, a wye system surge current per phase would equal L-N plus L-G; a delta system surge current per phase would equal L-L plus L-G. b. The N-G mode is not included in the per phase calculation. G. System Peak Voltage: The electrical equipment supply voltage sine wave peak (i.e., for a 480/277 V system the L-L peak voltage is 679V and the L-N peak voltage is 392 V). 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. Product technical data including: a. Manufacturer's qualifications. b. Standard catalog cut sheet. c. Electrical and mechanical drawing showing unit dimensions, weights, mounting provisions, connection details and layout diagram of the unit. d. Testing procedures and testing equipment data. e. Create a Product Data Sheet for each different model number of SPD provided (i.e., Model XYZ with disconnect and Model XYZ without disconnect, each require a Product Data Sheet). 1) Data in the Product Data Sheet heading: a) SPD Type Number per PART 2 of the Specification. b) Manufacturer’s Name. c) Product model number. 2) Data in the Product Data Sheet body: a) Column one: Specified value/feature of every paragraph of PART 2 of the Specification. b) Column two: Manufacturer’s certified value confirming the product meets the specified value/feature. c) Name of the nationally recognized testing laboratory that preformed the tests. d) Warranty information. 3) Data in the Product Data Sheet closing: a) Signature of the manufacturer’s official (printed and signed). b) Title of the official. 4) Date of signature. B. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: 1. See Specification Section 01 78 23 for requirements for: a. The mechanics and administration of submittal process. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES FOR LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CIRCUITS 26 43 13 - 3 b. The content of the Operation and Maintenance Manuals. 2. Warranty. 1.5 WARRANTY A. Minimum of a five year Warranty from date of shipment against failure when installed in compliance with applicable national/local electrical codes and the manufacturer's installation, operation and maintenance instructions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Standards: IEEE C62.41.1, IEEE C62.41.2, IEEE C62.45, MIL-STD 220B, UL 1283, UL 1449. 2.2 TYPE PC1 SPD A. Product: 1. Integrally mounted in switchgear, switchboards or MCCs. 2. Hybrid solid-state high performance suppression system. a. Do not use a suppression system with gas tubes, spark gaps or other components which might short or crowbar the line resulting in interruption of normal power flow to connected loads. 3. Do not connect multiple SPD modules in series to achieve the specified performance. 4. Designed for parallel connection. 5. Field connection: Use mechanical or compression lugs for each phase, neutral and ground that will accept bus bar or #10 through #1/0 conductors. 6. Device monitor: a. Long-life, solid state, externally visible indicators and Form C dry contact(s) that monitors the on-line status of each mode of the units suppression filter system and power loss in any of the phases. b. A fuse status only monitor system is not acceptable. B. Operating Voltage: The nominal unit operating voltage and configuration as indicated on Drawings. C. Modes of Protection: All modes. 1. Three phase (delta): L-L, L-G. 2. Three phase (wye): L-N, L-L, L-G and N-G. 3. Single phase (2-pole): L-L, L-N, L-G and N-G. 4. Single phase: L-N, L-G and N-G. D. Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage: Less than 130% of system peak voltage. E. Operating Frequency: 45 to 65 Hz. F. Short Circuit Rating: Equal to or greater than rating of equipment SPD is connected to. G. Maximum Surge Current: 240,000 A per phase, 120,000 A per mode minimum. H. Minimum Repetitive Surge Current Capacity: 4000 IEEE C High waveform impulses with no degradation greater than 10% deviation of the clamping voltage. I. SPD Protection: 1. Integral unit level and/or component level overcurrent fuses and sustained overvoltage thermal cutout device. 2. An IEEE C High waveforms shall not cause the fuse to open and render the SPD inoperable. J. Maximum Clamping Voltages: Dynamic test at the 90 degree phase angle including 6 inches lead length and measured from the zero voltage reference: Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES FOR LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CIRCUITS 26 43 13 - 4 System Voltage Test Mode IEEE C62.41 UL 1449 C High V & I Wave B Combination Wave L-L < 250 V L-N < 150 V L-L 1470 V 1000 V 800 V L-N 850 V 600 V 500 V L-G 1150 V 800 V 600 V N-G 1150 V 800 V 600 V L-L > 250 V L-N > 150 V L-L 2700 V 2000 V 1800 V L-N 1500 V 1150 V 1000 V L-G 2000 V 1550 V 1200 V N-G 2000 V 1550 V 1200 V K. EMI-RFI Noise Rejection: Attenuation greater than 30 dB for frequencies between 100 kHz and 100 MHz. 2.3 TYPE PC3 SPD A. Product: 1. Integrally mounted in a switchboard, panelboards or motor control centers. 2. Hybrid solid state high performance suppression system. a. Do not use gas tubes, spark gaps or other components in suppression system which might short or crowbar the line resulting in interruption of normal power flow to connected loads. 3. Do not connect multiple SPD modules in series to achieve the specified performance. 4. Designed for parallel connection. 5. Field connection: Use mechanical or compression lugs for each phase, neutral and ground that will accept bus bar or #10 through #1/0 conductors. 6. Device monitor: a. Long-life, solid state, externally visible indicators and Form C contact(s) that monitor the on-line status of each mode of the units suppression filter system or power loss in any of the phases. b. A fuse status only monitor system is not acceptable. B. Operating Voltage: The nominal unit operating voltage and configuration as indicated on the Drawings. C. Modes of Protection: All modes. 1. Three phase (delta): L-L, L-G. 2. Three phase (wye): L-N, L-L, L-G and N-G. 3. Single phase (2 pole): L-L, L-N, L-G and N-G. 4. Single phase: L-N, L-G and N-G. D. Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage: Less than 130% of system peak voltage. E. Operating Frequency: 45 to 65 Hz. F. Short Circuit Rating: Equal to or greater than rating of equipment SPD is connected to. G. Maximum Surge Current: 160,000 A per phase, 80,000 A per mode minimum. H. Minimum Repetitive Surge Current Capacity: 4000 IEEE C High or B combination waveform impulses with no degradation of more than 10% deviation of the clamping voltage. I. SPD Protection: Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES FOR LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CIRCUITS 26 43 13 - 5 1. Integral unit level and/or component level overcurrent fuses and sustained overvoltage thermal cutout device. 2. An IEEE B combination wave shall not cause the fuse to open and render the SPD inoperable. J. Maximum Clamping Voltages: Dynamic test at the 90 degrees phase angle including 6 inches lead length and measured from the zero voltage reference: System Voltage Test Mode IEEE C62.41 UL 1449 B Comb. Wave B3 Ring Wave L-L < 250 V L-N < 150 V L-L 1000 V 700 V 800 V L-N 600 V 400 V 500 V L-G 800 V 550 V 600 V N-G 800 V 550 V 600 V L-L > 250 V L-N > 150 V L-L 2000 V 1400 V 1800 V L-N 1150 V 800 V 1000 V L-G 1550 V 1000 V 1200 V N-G 1550 V 1000 V 1200 V K. EMI-RFI Noise Rejection: Attenuation greater than 30 dB for frequencies between 100 kHz and 100 MHz. 2.4 TYPE PC5 SPD A. Product: 1. Externally mounted next to equipment or internally to control panel for point-of-use loads. 2. Hybrid solid state high performance suppression system. a. Do not use gas tubes, spark gaps or other suppression system components which might short or crowbar the line resulting in interruption of normal power flow to connected loads. 3. Designed for parallel connection. 4. Enclosure: a. Metallic NEMA 4 or 12 for interior locations. b. Metallic NEMA 4 or 4X for exterior locations. 5. Field connection: a. Mechanical or compression lugs for each phase, neutral and ground that will accept #10 through #1/0 conductors, or preinstalled lead conductors: Size per manufacturer, length as required with a maximum of 2 feet. 6. Device monitor: a. Long-life, solid state, externally visible indicators and Form C dry contact(s) that monitor the on-line status of each mode of the units suppression filter system or power loss in any of the phase. b. A fuse status only monitor system is not acceptable. 7. Accessories (when specifically specified): Unit mounted disconnect switch. B. Operating Voltage: Nominal unit operating voltage and configuration as indicated on the Drawings. C. Modes of Protection: All modes. 1. Three phase (delta): L-L, L-G. 2. Three phase (wye): L-N, L-L, L-G and N-G. 3. Single phase (2 pole): L-L, L-N, L-G and N-G. 4. Single phase: L-N, L-G and N-G. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES FOR LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CIRCUITS 26 43 13 - 6 D. Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage: Less than 130% of system peak voltage. E. Operating Frequency: 45 to 65 Hz. F. Short Circuit Rating: Equal to or greater than rating of equipment SPD is connected to. G. Maximum Surge Current: 120,000 A per phase, 60,000 A per mode minimum. H. Minimum Repetitive Surge Current Capacity: 4000 IEEE C High or B combination waveform impulses with no degradation of more than 10% deviation of the clamping voltage. I. SPD Protection: 1. Integral unit level and/or component level overcurrent fuses and sustained overvoltage thermal cutout device. 2. An IEEE B combination wave shall not cause the fuse to open and render the SPD inoperable. J. Maximum Clamping Voltages: Dynamic test at the 90 degrees phase angle including 6 inches lead length and measured from the zero voltage reference: System Voltage Test Mode IEEE C62.41 UL 1449 B Comb. Wave B Ring Wave L-L < 250 V L-N < 150 V L-L 1000 V 700 V 800 V L-N 600 V 400 V 500 V L-G 800 V 550 V 600 V N-G 800 V 550 V 600 V L-L > 250 V L-N > 150 V L-L 2000 V 1400 V 1800 V L-N 1150 V 8000 V 1000 V L-G 1550 V 1000 V 1200 V N-G 1550 V 1000 V 1200 V K. EMI-RFI Noise Rejection: Attenuation greater than 30 dB for frequencies between 100 kHz and 100 MHz. 2.5 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. SPD approvals and ratings shall be obtained by manufacturers from nationally recognized testing laboratories. B. The SPD are to be tested as a complete SPD system including: 1. Integral unit level and/or component level fusing. 2. Neutral and ground shall not be bonded during testing. 3. 6 inches lead lengths. 4. Integral disconnect switch when provided. C. The “as installed” SPD system including the manufacturers recommended circuit breaker, the SPD is connected to, will not open when tested with a IEEE C3 combination waveform. D. Tests to be performed in accordance with IEEE C62.45: 1. Clamping voltage performance testing using IEEE C62.41 Category waveforms. 2. Single pulse surge current capacity test. 3. Repetitive surge current capacity testing. 4. Spectrum analysis for EMI-RFI noise rejection. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES FOR LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CIRCUITS 26 43 13 - 7 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Type PC1 and PC3 SPD: 1. Connected in parallel to the equipment. 2. Install in dedicated electrical equipment compartment, bucket or panelboard box at the factory before shipment. 3. Provide leads that are as short and straight as possible. 4. Maximum lead length: 12 inches. 5. Minimum lead size: #2 stranded AWG or bus bar. 6. Connect leads to the equipment to be protected by one of the following means: a. Through a circuit breaker or molded case switch mounted in the equipment. b. Use manufacturer recommended circuit breaker size. c. Circuit breaker or switch to be operable from the equipment exterior or from behind a hinged door. C. Type PC5 SPD: 1. Install leads as short and straight as possible. 2. Maximum lead length: 5 feet. 3. Minimum lead size: a. #10 stranded AWG. 4. When conduit connection is used, provide a minimum of four twists per foot in the lead conductors and install in NFPA 70 sized conduit. 5. Connect leads to the equipment to be protected by one of the following means: a. Through a circuit breaker or molded case switch mounted in the equipment. 1) Use manufacturer recommended circuit breaker size. b. Directly to the protected equipment bus, when SPD has integral disconnect switch. c. To the load side of field mounted equipment’s local disconnect switch. 1) Provide taps or lugs as required to provide a UL and NFPA 70 compliant connection. END OF SECTION Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 This page intentionally left blank. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents INTERIOR AND EXTERIOR LIGHTING 26 50 00 - 1 SECTION 26 50 00 INTERIOR AND EXTERIOR LIGHTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Material and installation requirements for: a. Interior building and exterior building mounted luminaires. B. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Section 26 05 00 - Common Work Results for Electrical. 2. Section 26 05 19 - Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards: 1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): a. C78.377, Specification for the Chromaticity of Solid State Lighting Products. 2. Federal Communications Commission (FCC): a. Code of Federal Regulations (CFR), 47 CFR 18, Industrial, Scientific and Medical Equipment. 3. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (IEEE): a. C62.41, Recommended Practice on Surge Voltages in Low-Voltage AC Power Circuits. 4. Illuminating Engineering Society of North America (IESNA): a. LM-79, Electrical and Photometric Measurements of Solid-State Lighting Products. b. LM-80, Measuring Luminous Flux and Color Maintenance of LED Packages, Arrays and Modules. 5. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): a. 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum). 6. National Electrical Manufacturers Association/American National Standards Institute (NEMA/ANSI): a. SSL 1, Electronic Drivers for LED Devices, Arrays or Systems. 7. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): a. 70, National Electrical Code (NEC). b. 101, Life Safety Code. 8. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): a. 248-4, Low-Voltage Fuses - Part 4: Class CC Fuses. b. 924, Standard for Emergency Lighting and Power Equipment. c. 1598, Luminaires. d. 8750, Standard for Light Emitting Diode (LED) Equipment for Use in Lighting Products. 9. United States Department of Energy (USDOE): a. EPAct, the National Energy Policy Act. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Useful Life for LED luminaire light sources: 1. The operating hours before reaching 70% of the initial rated lumen output (L70) with no catastrophic failures under normal operating conditions. 2. This is also known as 70% "Rated Lumen Maintenance Life" as defined in IESNA LM-80. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. Product technical data: Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents INTERIOR AND EXTERIOR LIGHTING 26 50 00 - 2 a. Provide submittal data for all products specified in PART 2 of this Specification Section. b. Identify luminaire by Luminaire Schedule designation. c. Luminaire data sheet: 1) Name of manufacturer. 2) Complete order information (catalog number). 3) Description of construction and optics. 4) Total input wattage. 5) Luminous efficacy (lumens/Watt). 6) Photometric performance data including candlepower distribution and coefficient of utilization (CU) table. 7) Dimensional size. 8) Weight. d. Solid state Luminaire additional data: 1) Voltage. 2) Initial and IES L70 lumens. 3) Luminous efficacy (lumens/Watt). 4) Correlated Color Temperature (CCT). 5) Color Rendering Index (CRI). 6) Total Harmonic Distortion (THD). 7) Lamp life. 8) Driver manufacturer and model number. 9) Driver life. 10) Driver type (0-10V, constant voltage, constant current). 11) Dimming range and control device compatibility. 12) Remote driver: Maximum wire length to luminaire. 13) Emergency battery driver: a) Compatibility with lighting module. b) Lumen output of lighting module in emergency operation. c) Battery life. d) Description of testing. e) Ambient operating temperature. 14) Toxicity Characteristic Leaching Procedure (TCLP) compliance. 15) DesignLights Consortium (DLC) Listing. 16) Warranty information. e. See Section 26 05 00 for additional requirements. 2. Test Reports: a. IESNA LM-79 Test Report for Solid-State Luminaire. b. IESNA LM-80 Test Report Solid-State Light Source. 3. Certifications: Solid-state Luminaire Useful Life Certificate. B. Contract Closeout Information: 1. Operation and Maintenance Data: a. See Section 01 78 23 for requirements for the mechanics, administration, and the content of Operation and Maintenance Manual submittals. b. Submittal data for each component covered by warranty. c. Warranty. 1.5 WARRANTY A. Minimum of a five year Warranty from date of manufacture against failure for solid-state luminaire including LED arrays, LED drivers and integral control devices. The solid-state product is considered defective if more than 15% of the individual light emitting diodes fail to illuminate. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents INTERIOR AND EXTERIOR LIGHTING 26 50 00 - 3 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Luminaires: Per Luminaire Schedule. 2. Solid State Light Sources: a. Cree. b. Xicato. c. Luminaire manufacturer’s proprietary system. 3. LED Driver: Luminaire manufacturer's standard. 4. Emergency ballasts: a. Iota Engineering. b. Philips Bodine. 2.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Luminaires complete with LED modules and drivers. B. When intended for use in wet areas: Mark luminaire "Suitable for wet locations." C. When intended for use in damp areas: Mark luminaire "Suitable for damp locations" or "Suitable for wet locations." 2.3 LUMINAIRES A. Standards and Listings: 1. DesignLights Consortium (DLC). 2. UL 1598. 3. UL 844 for hazardous locations. 4. NEMA LE 4 for recessed locations. B. Housings: 1. As indicated in the Luminaire Schedule and the following: a. Troffer luminaires: 1) Minimum 22 gage sheet steel. 2) Integral end plates and trim flanges to suit ceiling construction. 3) Wire way covers with captive retainers to allow access to electrical components without use of tools. b. Down Light luminaires: 1) Minimum 22 gage sheet steel, or minimum 16 gage sheet aluminum, unless noted otherwise. 2) Auxiliary junction box secured to mounting frame. c. Extruded aluminum housings, where scheduled, shall be at least 1/8 inches thick. d. Punch and form housings prior to finishing (post-paint). C. Castings: 1. As indicated in the Luminaire Schedule and the following: a. Uniform quality, free from imperfections affecting strength and appearance. b. Exterior surfaces, if not receiving a finish coat, shall be smooth and match adjacent surfaces. At least one coat of clear methacrylate lacquer shall be applied unless a painted finish is specified. D. Fasteners: 1. As indicated in the Luminaire Schedule and the following: a. Aluminum or steel luminaires: Zinc-Nickel plated, stainless steel, or equivalent. b. Stainless steel luminaires: Stainless steel. c. Bronze luminaires: Bronze or stainless steel. d. Non-metallic luminaires: Stainless steel. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents INTERIOR AND EXTERIOR LIGHTING 26 50 00 - 4 E. Finishes: 1. As indicated in the Luminaire Schedule and the following: a. Painted surfaces: 1) Manufacturer's standard metal pretreatment and baked or air-dried, light-stabilized enamel finish, acrylic, alkyd, epoxy, polyester, or polyurethane. 2) White finishes shall have minimum 85% reflectance. b. Unpainted surfaces: 1) Interior: Clear anodic coating, satin finish. 2) Exterior: Clear anodic coating. F. Lens/Louver Frames: 1. As indicated in the Luminaire Schedule and the following: a. Extruded aluminum with mitered corners. b. Hinging or other normal motion shall not cause lens or louver to drop out. c. No light leak between frame and housing. G. Lenses: 1. As Indicated in the Luminaire Schedule and the Following: a. 100% virgin, UV stabilized acrylic. b. Held securely in place but must also be removable for cleaning and servicing. c. Luminaires with directional lenses shall include a lens orientation device to ensure that lens installation provides light distribution as designed. d. No light leaks between the lens and the luminaire. H. Gaskets: 1. As Indicated in the Luminaire Schedule and the Following: a. Gaskets at face plates or frames of recessed luminaires which serve as ceiling trim and allow interior access. b. Moisture seal gaskets at exterior locations and in other designated wet areas. c. Secure frames to luminaire bodies with screws or other means, to result in tight installation, without light leaks. I. Ventilation: 1. Ventilation openings of adequate size and quantity to permit operation of driver without affecting rated output or life expectancy. Include wire mesh screens. J. Wiring: 1. Factory-wired to be compatible with the project electrical and controls systems. K. Mounting Accessories: 1. Provide appropriate mounting accessories for each luminaire, compatible with various structural conditions encountered. 2. All luminaires with adjustable beam angles shall have a locking device to ensure that the beam distribution is not effected during servicing or cleaning. 2.4 SOLID-STATE LUMINAIRES - ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS A. Standards: 1. IESNA LM-79, IESNA LM-80. 2. NEMA SSL 1. 3. UL 1012, 1310, and 8750. 4. UL 844 for hazardous locations. B. Solid state modules and driver to be provided and warrantied by luminaire manufacturer. C. Solid-State Modules: 1. Uniform color temperature of 4000K unless otherwise noted on the Luminaire schedule. a. Color temperature measurement shall have a maximum 3 SDCM on the MacAdam Ellipse for frosted lensed luminaires, and 2 SDCM for other luminaire types (ANSI C78.377). Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents INTERIOR AND EXTERIOR LIGHTING 26 50 00 - 5 2. Minimum color rendering index (CRI) of 80 for indoor and 70 for outdoor applications. 3. LED module light output and efficacy: Measured in accordance with IESNA LM-79 standards. 4. LED useful life and lumen maintenance: Measured in accordance with IESNA LM-80 standards. 5. Driver and LED module: Minimum useful life of 50,000 hours (L70). 6. Individual LEDs connected such that a failure of one LED will not result in a light output loss of the entire luminaire. D. Driver: 1. Compatible with solid-state modules and control devices specified. 2. Operate from 60 Hz input source of 120V through 277V with sustained variations of ±10% (voltage and frequency). 3. Input current Total Harmonic Distortion (THD): Less than 20% when operated at nominal line voltage. 4. Power Factor: Greater than 0.90. 5. Avoid interference with infrared devices and eliminate visible flicker. 6. Comply with ANSI C62.41 Category A for Transient protection. 7. Comply with the requirements of the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) rules and regulations, Title 47 CFR part 18, Non-Consumer (Class A) for EMI/RFI (conducted and radiated). 8. Operating temperature range must be suitable for site temperature conditions within exterior and gasketed luminaires. E. Emergency Battery Driver: 1. UL 924. 2. Confirm compatibility with LED modules utilized. 3. Consist of a high temperature, maintenance-free nickel cadmium battery, charger, and electronic circuitry. 4. A solid state charging indicator light to monitor the charger and battery. 5. Single-pole test switch. 6. The following product family shall be selected based on coordination with LED lamp type: a. Philips Bodine “BSL23C”: can operate up to 4.5W at 410mA. b. Philips Bodine “BSL26C”: can operate up to 5.1W at 265mA. c. Philips Bodine “BSL722 inches: can operate up to 23W at 770mA. d. Philips Bodine “BSL23C”: can operate up to 23W at 770mA in operating conditions ranging from -20 degrees C (-4 degrees F) to 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). e. Alternate manufacturer: Iota. F. Luminaire properly heat sinked to assure LED junction temperature ratings are not exceeded. 1. Provide ambient operating temperature range for which product is warrantied. 2.5 EXIT SIGNS AND EMERGENCY LIGHTING UNITS A. Standards: 1. UL 924. 2. NFPA 101. 3. Local State or City requirements. B. Exit Signs: 1. Housing and finish: As indicated in the Luminaire Schedule. 2. LED illuminated with integral driver. 3. AC powered or AC and battery powered: As indicated in the Luminaire Schedule. 4. Battery powered units: a. Battery type: As indicated in the Luminaire Schedule. b. Self-testing/self-diagnostic. 1) Electronic circuitry automatically test emergency lighting for a minimum of 30 seconds every 30 days and 90 minutes once a year. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents INTERIOR AND EXTERIOR LIGHTING 26 50 00 - 6 c. Consist of battery, charger, and electronic circuitry. d. Solid state charging indicator light to monitor the charger and battery. e. Single-pole test switch. f. A user selectable audible alarm. The alarm shall be engaged unless noted otherwise on the Drawings. C. Emergency Lighting Units: 1. Housing: As indicated in the Luminaire Schedule. 2. Lamps: As indicated in the Luminaire Schedule. 3. Battery type: As indicated in the Luminaire Schedule. 4. Self-testing/self-diagnostic. a. Electronic circuitry automatically test emergency lighting for a minimum of 30 seconds every 30 days and 90 minutes once a year. 5. Consist of battery, charger, and electronic circuitry. 6. Solid state charging indicator light to monitor the charger and battery. 7. Single-pole test switch. 8. A user selectable audible alarm. The alarm shall be engaged unless noted otherwise on the Drawings. 2.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Furnish a minimum of 10% of total of each type and amperage of fuses for fixtures indicated to be fused. B. Spare parts are to be stored in a box clearly labeled as to its contents. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Coordinate Luminaire Types with Ceiling Construction: 1. Provide mounting hardware for the ceiling system in which the luminaire is to be installed. B. Fasten luminaires supported by suspended ceiling systems to ceiling framing system with hold down clips. C. Provide mounting brackets and/or structural mounting support for wall-mounted luminaires. 1. Do not support luminaire from conduit system. 2. When luminaire is supported from outlet boxes, install per NFPA 70. 3. Supports for luminaire mounted on exterior walls shall not be attached to exterior face of the wall. D. Support surface mounted luminaires from the building structure and not from the ceiling suspension system. 1. Luminaires up to 4 feet wide and 4 feet long: A minimum of four supporting points, one at each corner. 2. Luminaires 8 feet long: A minimum of five support points, one at center of luminaire and one at each corner. 3. Luminaires smaller than 2 feet in length: A minimum of two supporting points. E. Mount luminaire at heights indicated in Section 26 05 00 or per Luminaire Schedule or as indicted on the Drawings. F. Install exterior luminaires so that water cannot enter or accumulate in the wiring compartment. G. Luminaires with Emergency Battery: 1. Where luminaires with emergency battery are shown controlled via switching device, connect the emergency battery to corresponding unswitched circuit so emergency battery will not operate when normal power is available and switching device turns lights off. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents INTERIOR AND EXTERIOR LIGHTING 26 50 00 - 7 Upon failure of normal power, luminaire will operate in emergency mode regardless of switch position. 2. Luminaire manufacturer to supply the emergency battery with luminaire. H. Ground luminaire. 3.2 ADJUST AND CLEAN A. See Section 01 74 00. B. Aim all emergency lighting units, so that, the path of egress is illuminated. END OF SECTION Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 This page intentionally left blank. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 DIVI SION 31 EARTHWORK Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 This page intentionally left blank. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents SITE CLEARING 31 10 00 - 1 SECTION 31 10 00 SITE CLEARING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Site clearing Work, including: a. General provisions for site clearing Work. b. Preparation for site clearing Work. c. Clearing and grubbing. d. Disposal and cleaning. e. Stripping and stockpiling of topsoil. B. Related Requirements: Include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Section 31 22 19 - Finish Grading. 2. Section 31 23 33 - Trenching and Backfilling. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Terminology: 1. Terms indicated below are not defined terms indicated with initial capital letters but, when used in this Section, have the meanings indicated below: a. “Arborist” means Subcontractor retained to perform Work requiring a specialist in trees, shrubs, brush, other vegetation of the types existing at the Site, and possessing not less than the required qualifications indicated in this Section. b. “Clearing and grubbing” means removing and disposing of all: (1) trees, brush, and other vegetation, logs, and similar items (“clearing”); and (2) stumps, roots, logs, rubbish, and debris on or in the soil (“grubbing”) after Clearing. Clearing and grubbing includes grinding and removing of stumps. When clearing and grubbing, topsoil stripping and stockpiling, is complete, the Site will be ready for grading and other new construction. c. “Demolition” means removal, whether in whole or in part, of existing human-made construction, such as removal of buildings, structures, and building systems; site work (such as pavement, curbs, sidewalks, gutters) and the like; Underground Facilities; and other existing construction. d. “Selective removal” means removal of specific trees, shrubs, brush, and other vegetation, whether as shown or indicated in the Contract Documents or as directed at the Site by Engineer. e. “Selective trimming” means removal of selected parts of trees, shrubs, brush, and other vegetation, performed by arborist, for the purpose of either: (1) allowing installation of new construction adjacent to or through the tree, shrub, brush, or vegetation, or )2) removing damaged or unhealthy growth, to allow balance of the subject tree, shrub, brush, or vegetation to continue normal, healthy growth. f. “Site clearing” means all the Work required by this Section and related Drawings. g. “Topsoil” means existing material at the Site, visible after clearing and grubbing, to be stripped, when such material is friable, clay loam, surface soil present in depth of not less than four inches. Topsoil shall be free of subsoil, clay lumps, stones, and other objects over two-inch diameter and other objectionable material. Topsoil required for planting and landscaping Work in the Specifications of Division 32 may differ from the meaning indicated in this Section. B. Reference Standards: 1. ASTM International (ASTM): Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents SITE CLEARING 31 10 00 - 2 a. C700, Standard Specification for Vitrified Clay Pipe, Extra Strength, Standard Strength, and Perforated. b. D448, Standard Classification for Sizes of Aggregate for Road and Bridge Construction. 2. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):. a. A300, Standard for Tree Care Operations – Tree, Shrub, and Other Woody Plant Maintenance – Standard Practices. 3. International Society of Arboriculture (ISA): a. Container Rootball Shaving. b. Crown Correction. c. Balled and Burlapped Root Correction. d. Container Root Correction. e. High Branched Crown Observation. f. Low Branched Crown Observation. g. Multiple Low Branches Crown Observation. h. Balled and Burlapped Root Observation. i. Container Root Observation - Tree. j. Protection Maintenance. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Shop Drawings: a. Limits of Site Clearing Work: When limits of site clearing Work are not expressly shown on the Drawings, or where Contractor proposes alternative limits of site clearing Work, submit drawings, developed from the Drawings, clearly indicating proposed limits of site clearing Work, with dimensions indicated where appropriate. b. Where proposed limits of clearing and grubbing, selective removals, and topsoil stripping are not identical with each other, clearly and expressly indicate limits of each on the Shop Drawings. . B. Informational Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Permits and Approvals: a. Submit copy of each permit required and obtained for site clearing Work, issued by authority having jurisdiction. b. Where Owner’s permission or approval is required for selected site clearing activities, submit copy of Owner’s written permission or approval for such activity. c. When approval of owner of property (other than Owner) is required for selected site clearing activity, submit to Engineer written copy of such approval. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Filter Fabric: 1. In accordance with requirements for temporary erosion and sediment controls indicated in Section 01 57 05 - Temporary Controls. B. Drainage Fill: 1. Selected crushed stone, or crushed or uncrushed gravel, washed. 2. Size 24 (in accordance with ASTM D448), with 90 to 100 percent passing 2.5-inch sieve and not more than 10 percent passing 3/4-inch sieve. C. For other materials needed for site clearing Work, such as stone, topsoil, or other, comply with requirements of the Contract Documents. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents SITE CLEARING 31 10 00 - 3 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SITE CLEARING – GENERAL A. Limits of Site Clearing Work: 1. Limits of site clearing Work are shown and indicated on the Drawings. B. General Provisions for Site Clearing: 1. Contractor shall provide all labor, materials, equipment, tools, services, and incidentals necessary and required to perform site clearing Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 2. Perform site clearing Work to avoid creating nuisances, pollution, and preventable adverse effects on the environment. 3. Comply with Section 01 71 33 - Protection of the Work and Property. 4. Excavation required for site clearing shall comply with Section 31 23 05.Long Form - Excavation and Fill. 5. Requirements of Authorities Having Jurisdiction: a. Perform site clearing Work in accordance with Laws and Regulations. b. Obtain, pay for, and comply with permits required for site clearing Work. Obtain from authorities having jurisdiction and furnish copy of each permit as a Submittal. 6. Site clearing Work shall comply with ANSI A300 and applicable ISA standards indicated in this Section’s “References” Article, unless the Contract Documents indicate more-stringent requirements. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Permits and Approvals: 1. Do not commence site clearing Work until necessary permits and approvals are obtained and copies furnished to Engineer as Submittals. B. Delineation of Limits of Site Clearing Work Areas: 1. Locate and clearly flag at the Site: a. Limits of site clearing Work. 2. Flagging: a. Flagging shall be high-visibility type. Where necessary, provide lath or stakes driven into the ground, with flagging, to clearly delineate limits. b. Provide different-colored flagging for each type of delineation required by this Article. c. Promptly replace lost, moved, or destroyed flagging until Engineer concurs that flagging is no longer needed. 3. Review with Engineer: a. Before starting site clearing Work, other than flagging, review at the Site with Engineer. b. Make corrections as necessary. C. Temporary Erosion and Sediment Controls: 1. Provide applicable temporary erosion and sediment controls before commencing clearing and grubbing and topsoil stripping Work. 2. Comply with temporary erosion and sediment control requirements of Section 01 57 05 - Temporary Controls. 3. Continue providing temporary erosion and sediment controls as clearing and grubbing and topsoil stripping and stockpiling Work progresses into previously uncleared, ungrubbed areas of the Site. 3.3 CLEARING AND GRUBBING A. Clearing and Grubbing – General: 1. Remove and dispose of all materials constituting clearing and grubbing Work within limits shown and indicated in the Contract Documents. 2. After grubbing Work is complete, properly fill holes resulting from grubbing before commencing site grading Work. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents SITE CLEARING 31 10 00 - 4 3.4 DISPOSAL AND CLEANING A. Disposal – General: 1. Dispose of matter resulting from clearing and grubbing, selective removals, and selective trimming, at appropriate offsite location, unless otherwise expressly allowed by the Contract Documents or mutual agreement of Owner and Contractor. 2. Do not use cleared, grubbed, or trimmed material as fill, backfill, or in embankments. 3. Dispose of cleared, grubbed, and trimmed material, and other materials, rubbish, and debris, in accordance with Laws and Regulations. 4. Pay all costs associated with transporting and disposing of materials and debris resulting from site clearing Work. 5. Cleared lumber and trimmings from trees are Contractor’s property and, at Contractor’s option, may be sold or salvaged offsite. B. Cleaning: 1. Perform progress cleaning and other cleaning Work, and disposal of resulting materials and debris, in accordance with Section 01 74 00 - Cleaning. C. Burning: 1. Burning of trees, shrubs, brush, other vegetation, and other materials at, or adjacent to, the Site, whether in-place or cut, is prohibited unless: (a) burning is not prohibited by Laws or Regulations, and (b) required permits, if any, are obtained by Contractor from authorities having jurisdiction and are furnished to Engineer as Submittals; and (c) written approval of Owner is obtained and furnished to Engineer as a Submittal; and (d) when burning will be performed on lands at the Site not owned by Owner, obtain and submit to Engineer as Submittals written approval of owners of such properties. 2. Before burning, alert local fire department (both orally and in writing) not less than 72 hours before burning, and provide at location of burning appropriate emergency materials, tools, and equipment to contain and extinguish fires. Use such items and furnish necessary labor to prevent fire from burning other than intended trees, shrubs, brush, and vegetation. 3. If burning is allowed, exercise appropriate care and judgement. Do not perform burning in high wind conditions. Do not perform burning when areas adjacent to burning are of dryness that will foster wildfires. 4. Promptly and fully extinguish fires before they burn unintended areas or materials, and when burning is completed. 5. Dispose of ashes and burned materials off-site at appropriate location. 3.5 TOPSOIL STRIPPING AND STOCKPILING A. Stripping: 1. Before commencing topsoil stripping: a. Perform clearing and grubbing and selective removals. b. Remove grass and other vegetation that may remain following clearing and grubbing. c. Provide necessary and required temporary erosion and sediment controls. 2. Strip topsoil to depths encountered, in manner that prevents intermingling of topsoil with underlying subsoil and other objectionable material. Remove heavy growths of grass and vegetation and material below topsoil. 3. Before stockpiling, separate objectionable material from topsoil. B. Stockpiling: 1. Construct and maintain topsoil stockpiles in accordance with Section 01 66 00 - Product Storage and Handling Requirements, at locations in accordance with Section 01 14 19 - Use of Site. C. Reuse of Stripped Topsoil: 1. Reuse in the finish grading and landscaping Work topsoil that complies with the Contract Documents for such Work. 2. Where topsoil stripped from the Site does not comply with the Contract Documents relative to quality required for use in finish grading and landscaping Work, provide appropriate soil Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents SITE CLEARING 31 10 00 - 5 amendment material, properly and fully mixed into topsoil stripped from the Site, so that amended material complies with quality requirements for topsoil required for finish grading and landscaping Work. D. Disposal of Excess Topsoil: 1. Topsoil in excess of quantity required for finished Project becomes Contractor’s property when Engineer indicates finish grading and landscaping Work is complete. Properly dispose of excess topsoil offsite. Contractor may sell excess topsoil at offsite location. END OF SECTION Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 This page intentionally left blank. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents FINISH GRADING 31 22 19 - 1 SECTION 31 22 19 FINISH GRADING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Topsoil quality and placing. 2. Finish grading. B. Related Requirements: Include, but are not necessarily limited to, the following: 1. Section 31 10 00 - Site Clearing. 2. Section 31 23 33 - Trenching and Backfilling. 3. Section 32 92 00 - Seeding, Sodding and Landscaping. 1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and Payment: 1. Perform the Work of this Section for all areas within limits of grading and all areas outside limits of grading disturbed during construction. 2. Perform the Work of this Section as part of the Lump Sum bid/pay item(s) indicated in the Contract. 1.3 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards: 1. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO): a. T194, Standard Method of Test for Determination of Organic Content of Soils by Loss on Ignition. 2. ASTM International (ASTM): a. D2974, Standard Test Methods for Moisture, Ash, and Organic Matter of Peat and Other Organic Soils. b. D4221, Standard Test Method for Dispersive Characteristics of Clay Soil by Double Hydrometer. c. D4972, Standard Test Methods for pH of Soils. d. D5268, Standard Specification for Topsoil Used for Landscaping and Construction Purposes. e. D6913, Standard Test Methods for Particle-Size Distribution (Gradation) of Soils Using Sieve Analysis. f. D7928, Standard Test Method for Particle-Size Distribution (Gradation) of Fine- Grained Soils Using the Sedimentation (Hydrometer) Analysis. g. E329, Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged in Construction Inspection, Testing, or Special Inspection. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. Contractor’s Testing Laboratory: a. Retain the services of independent testing laboratory to perform testing and determine compliance with the Contract Documents of materials specified in this Section. b. When Contractor is expressly required, by this Section’s “Quality Assurance” Article, “Source Quality Control” Article or elsewhere in the Contract Documents, to retain testing laboratory for tests required under this Section’s “Quality Assurance” Article or “Source Quality Control” Article, retain one testing laboratory for quality assurance testing and field quality control testing. c. Testing laboratory shall comply with ASTM E329. d. Testing laboratory shall be experienced in the types of testing required. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents FINISH GRADING 31 22 19 - 2 e. Selection of testing laboratory is subject to Engineer’s acceptance. Upon Engineer’s request, submit qualifications statement for testing laboratory, including name of entity, location, copies of applicable certifications, summary of entity’s experience, and names and qualifications of personnel who will perform the subject sampling and testing. B. Quality Assurance Testing: 1. Quality assurance testing, which may also be regarded as source quality control testing when topsoil to be installed will be topsoil originally stripped from the Site, is in addition to field quality control activities required by this Section’s “Field Quality Control” Article. 2. Allow free access to material stockpiles and borrow areas at all times. Tests shall be at Contractor’s cost. 3. Contractor’s Testing Laboratory Scope: a. Obtain samples and perform testing of proposed topsoil materials, whether obtained from offsite borrow sources or stockpiled topsoil originally stripped from the Site, to provide assurance that the Work will comply with the Contract Documents. 4. Required Quality Assurance Material Testing by Contractor’s Testing Laboratory: a. Perform the following quality assurance tests for every 1,000 cubic yards of topsoil, or part thereof, to be incorporated into the Work. Submit results of such tests to Engineer and obtain Engineer’s acceptance thereof prior to incorporating the subject topsoil into the Work. 1) Gradation in accordance with ASTM D6913 and D7928. 2) Clay content in accordance with ASTM D4221. 3) pH in accordance with ASTM D4972. 4) Organic content in accordance with ASTM D2974 or AASHTO T194. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Product Data: a. Borrow Soil Materials: Name and address of Supplier of borrow soil materials, gradation, and Supplier’s certification that materials are sufficiently free of Constituents of Concern so that a Hazardous Environmental Condition will not be created or exacerbated. b. If no soil materials will be obtained from any borrow location, expressly so indicate to Engineer in writing. B. Informational Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Quality Assurance Test Results Submittals: a. Submit results of quality assurance testing performed in accordance with this Section’s “Quality Assurance” Article, unless included as part of another submittal under this Section. 1) Tests on materials from onsite and borrow sources. 2. Qualifications Statements: a. Quality assurance testing laboratory, when requested by Engineer. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Topsoil: 1. All soil accepted as topsoil, whether obtained from onsite or offsite sources, shall comply with requirements of this Section. 2. Topsoil Source: Reuse surface soil stockpiled on Site, where possible. Verify suitability of stockpiled surface soil to produce topsoil, as specified. Clean surface soil of roots, plants, sod, stones, clay lumps, and other extraneous materials harmful to plant growth. a. Supplement acceptable onsite soil with manufactured topsoil from offsite sources, when quantities available on-Site are insufficient to complete the Work. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents FINISH GRADING 31 22 19 - 3 b. When existing soil material stripped from the Site and stockpiled does not comply with requirements of this Section, such soil may be provided as topsoil when addition of amendments and fertilizers will bring such soil material into compliance with this Section’s topsoil requirements. Furnish to Engineer written advisory of Contractor’s intent to amend existing soil materials to be compliant with topsoil requirements. 3. Provide fertile, friable, natural loam, surface soil, capable of sustaining vigorous plant growth; free of any admixture of subsoil, clods of hard earth, plants or roots, sticks, stones larger than one inch diameter, or other extraneous material harmful to plant growth, in compliance with ASTM D 5268. 4. Provide topsoil of the following characteristics: a. Required gradation: Sieve Size Percent Passing 3/4-inch mesh 100 No. 4-sieve 90 to 100 No. 200-sieve 0 to 10 b. Clay content of material passing No. 200-sieve shall be not greater than 60 percent, as determined by hydrometer tests. c. pH-adjusted with ferrous sulphate or ground limestone to provide pH 5.5 to 7.0 at time of installation of lawns and meadow areas, unless particular species of planting requires a different pH for optimal growth. d. Electrical conductivity of a 1:2 soil-water suspension shall not exceed 1.0 milliohm per centimeter and with less than 200 parts per million of extractable aluminum. e. Cation Exchange Capacity: 5, minimum. f. Organic content not less than five percent, as determined by ignition loss of oven-dried samples passing No. 10-sieve (Muffle Furnace Temperature: 110 plus or minus five degrees C for eight hours). g. Free of pests and pest larvae. h. Relative to Constituents of Concern, topsoil shall be in accordance with Laws and Regulations. Constituents of Concern, if any, in topsoil furnished shall not constitute or result in a Hazardous Environmental Condition. B. Topsoil Amendments and Fertilizer 1. Requirements for topsoil amendments and fertilizer, together with other planting materials, are in Section 32 92 00 - Seeding, Sodding, and Landscaping. 2. Provide planting soil by adding amendments, fertilizer, and other materials to topsoil and other suitable soil materials in accordance with Section 32 92 00 - Seeding, Sodding, and Landscaping, as necessary to support vigorous growth of required plantings. 2.2 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Tests and Inspections at Source of Supply: 1. Perform quality assurance testing, and submit results to Engineer, in accordance with the “Quality Assurance” Article in Part 1 of this Section. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Protection of In-place Conditions: 1. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities, and lawns and existing plants from damage caused by finish grading. B. Preparation – General: Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents FINISH GRADING 31 22 19 - 4 1. In accordance with Section 01 57 05 - Temporary Controls, provide temporary measures for controlling erosion and sedimentation, airborne dust, and fugitive dust emissions from the Site. 2. Topsoil stripping and stockpiling requirements are indicated in Section 31 10 00 - Site Clearing. 3. Adjust rough grading to within 0.1 foot of required elevations. Properly compact sub- grades. Rough grading shall provide for appropriate drainage in accordance with the Contract Documents. 4. Before applying topsoil: a. Remove from exposed subgrade all stones and debris over two inches in any dimension and properly dispose of such items at an appropriate, offsite location. b. Apply superphosphate fertilizer directly to subgrade before loosening. c. Loosen sub-grade surface to depth of not less than two inches. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Installation Requirements: 1. Required Depth of Topsoil: a. For areas of gardens, shrubs and similar plantings, provide finished, lightly compacted, topsoil depth of not less than 6 inches. b. For all other areas requiring topsoil, including lawns and meadows, provide finished, lightly compacted, topsoil depth of not less than 4 inches. 2. Do not place topsoil when subgrade is muddy, wet or frozen enough to cause clodding. 3. Provide finished surface smooth and true to required grades, in accordance with this Article’s “Installation Tolerances” provision. Provide finished surface of topsoil equal to required finished elevations after light rolling and natural settlement. 4. Grade topsoil to a smooth, uniform surface plane with loose, uniformly fine texture. Roll and rake, remove ridges, and fill depressions to provide required finish grades. 5. Restore topsoil if eroded or otherwise disturbed after finish grading and before planting. 6. Topsoil Quantity Differentials: a. If quantity of required topsoil exceeds the quantity, if any, of topsoil stockpiled at the Site and available for use by Contractor, provide the additional required quantity from appropriate offsite borrow sources at no additional cost to Owner. b. When quantity of topsoil obtained from offsite borrow sources exceeds the required quantity of topsoil, remove excess from the Site, unless Owner allows such excess to be stockpiled at an appropriate location at the Site. c. When quantity of required topsoil is less than quantity of onsite stockpiles, following installation of topsoil, properly grade remaining stockpile for appropriate drainage without undue erosion and seed stockpile as required for other areas of lawn restoration in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. Installation Tolerances: 1. Finish Grading Tolerance: ±0.1 foot from finish elevation required by the Contract Documents. Ensure adequate drainage. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Tests and Inspections: 1. Upon completion of topsoil installation, obtain Engineer's concurrence regarding grades and drainage. 2. Where directed by Engineer, provide test holes to demonstrate that required depth of topsoil was provided. After observation and measurement by Engineer, properly refill test holes. 3. Where insufficient depth of topsoil is revealed, remedy by providing required depth and quantity in accordance with the Contract Documents. When additional topsoil is added after initial establishment of plant growth, re-establish required plantings to provide compliance with the Contract Documents. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents FINISH GRADING 31 22 19 - 5 3.4 PROTECTION A. Commencing immediately after topsoil installation, protect installed topsoil from erosion and damage from other causes, including personnel, vehicles, and equipment. Promptly perform seeding, sodding (as applicable), mulching, and other measures to permanently stabilize soils and prevent erosion, in accordance with Section 32 92 00 - Seeding, Sodding, and Landscaping. END OF SECTION Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 This page intentionally left blank. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents TEMPORARY SUPPORT OF EXCAVATIONS 31 23 16.43 - 1 SECTION 31 23 16.43 TEMPORARY SUPPORT OF EXCAVATIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Requirements for temporary (during construction) support of excavations including: a. Qualifications of Contractor’s professional engineer (if any) retained for designing temporary support of excavations. b. Contractor’s additional investigations and evaluations necessary for designing temporary support of excavations. c. Performance criteria and general provisions for temporary support of excavations. d. General provisions for temporary support of excavations, including supports Contractor proposes remain in place following construction. e. Trench boxes. f. Maintenance and removal of temporary support of excavations. B. Related Requirements: Include, but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Section 31 23 33 - Trenching and Backfilling. 1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and Payment: 1. Temporary support of excavations is part of the Work associated with excavating and filling. Include costs for temporary support of excavations under bid/pay items for excavating and related Work. No separate payment will be made for temporary support of excavations. 2. In the event Engineer directs that temporary sheeting, shoring, or other excavation supports originally intended as temporary are to remain in place, and the Contract includes an appropriate item of Unit Price Work for permanent sheeting (or other appropriate material) to remain in place, then payment for such temporary sheeting ordered to remain by Engineer will be at the unit price indicated in the Contract. Where Engineer directs temporary sheeting, shoring, or other temporary support of excavations is to remain and the Contract does not include an appropriate item of Unit Price Work, then an appropriate price for such support of excavations will be mutually agreed upon by the parties and either an appropriate Contract modification or allowance authorization, if any, will be issued in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1.3 REFERENCES A. Terminology: 1. Terminology indicated below are not defined terms and are not indicated with initial capital letters, but when used in this section have the meaning indicated below: a. “Sheeting” means: Long, structural sections of steel with a vertical interlocking system that create a continuous wall, often used for retaining soil or water. The terms “sheet piling”, “sheeting”, and “piling” (and derivative terms, such as “piles”) have the same meaning. Certain types of soldier piles may qualify as sheeting. b. “Shoring” means: Temporary means of supporting the walls of an excavation or existing structure, that does not qualify as sheeting. Two basic types of shoring for excavations are timber shoring and aluminum hydraulic shoring; the latter is a lightweight system and equipment used for supporting trench excavations. c. “Subgrade” means: The uppermost surface of native soil material unmoved from cuts; the bottom of excavation. d. “Tie-backs” means: A method of laterally supporting sheeting or shoring when congestion within the limits of the excavation need to be minimized. Tiebacks generally Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents TEMPORARY SUPPORT OF EXCAVATIONS 31 23 16.43 - 2 consist of a central steel bar (or strand tendon), embedded in the soil, surrounded by an annulus of grout. e. “Trench box” means: A one- or two-sided shield, placed temporarily in an excavation, typically a trench, which protects workers inside the trench box in the event of collapse of the excavation wall. Trench boxes may be relocated within the excavation as the Work progresses. Trench boxes also shield workers from falling or dislodged materials. Trench boxes are not intended to shore up excavation walls or prevent collapse. The terms “trench box”, “trench shield”, and “shore shield” have the same meaning. f. “Wales” means: Beams that span across the face of sheeting or shoring distributing the earth and water pressures to either a raker or cross-strut. Struts, as used in this Section, are structural elements that transfer the load from a temporary excavation support wall to an adjacent, parallel structure. Rakers are struts that are positioned at an angle extending from a temporary excavation support wall to a foundation block or supporting substructure. In this Section, the words “wales” and “walers” have the same meaning. B. Reference Standards: Standards referenced in this section include, but are not necessarily limited to, the following: 1. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC): a. ANSI/AISC 360 - Specification for Structural Steel Buildings. 2. American Welding Society (AWS): a. D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code – Steel. 3. United States Army Corps of Engineers (USACOE) a. Engineer Manual 1110-2-2504 - Design of Sheet Pile Walls. 4. United States Department of Transportation, Federal Highway Administration (FHWA) a. FHWA-IF-99-015 Geotechnical Engineering Circular No . 4 - Ground Anchors and Anchored Systems. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. Contractor’s Professional Engineer: a. Where necessary for performing the Work in accordance with this Section and when required by Laws or Regulations governing the practice of the associated design discipline or Laws or Regulations governing excavation safety and trench safety in construction, retain the services of a professional engineer, licensed and registered in the same jurisdiction as the Site, to evaluate subsurface conditions and design systems for temporary support of excavations. b. Professional engineer shall be appropriately licensed and registered for the professional services required by this Section, and shall be appropriately experienced in evaluating subsurface conditions and excavation conditions affecting health and safety of personnel and protection of property similar to those at the Site, and in designing and evaluating systems for temporary support of excavations. c. Responsibilities shall include: 1) Evaluating existing subsurface data and information for the Site and adjacent areas, available to Contractor. 2) Advising Contractor regarding additional subsurface investigations necessary to provide temporary support of excavations as required by this Section. 3) Evaluating the potential effect on existing facilities, at and adjacent to the Site, of installing and removing temporary systems for supporting excavations. 4) Personally designing or supervising the design of temporary supports for excavations, including preparing drawings, performance requirements, and specifications for temporary support of excavations, such as temporary sheeting, shoring, bracing, wales, tie-backs, and similar systems. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents TEMPORARY SUPPORT OF EXCAVATIONS 31 23 16.43 - 3 5) Sealing and signing instruments of service developed for the Work, including calculations, evaluation reports, recommendations of a technical nature, drawings, specifications, and similar documents. 6) Assisting Contractor with obtaining permits and approvals necessary for temporary support of excavations. 7) Consulting with Contractor, including visiting the Site during construction as required by Contractor, during installation, use, and removal of temporary supports of excavations. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Informational Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Advisory on Approach for Temporary Support of Excavations: a. Furnish document regarding Contractor’s proposed approach for temporary support of excavations, indicating the following: 1) General indication of Contractor’s overall, intended approach for temporary support of excavations; for example, indicate whether excavations will be supported by a trench box, temporary sheeting, shoring, wales, tie-backs, or other method. Indicate where different approach will be used for different excavations or portions of excavations. 2) Indication of whether Contractor or Subcontractor intends to retain services of a professional engineer relative to temporary support of excavations. When such individual or entity will be so retained, indicate name of entity and specific, individual design professional-in-responsible-charge, together with indication of type of license and registration and associated license and registration number and jurisdiction. If not previously furnished with Contractor’s insurance documentation, furnish evidence that such professional engineer possesses professional liability insurance in accordance with the Contract Documents, including indication of whether required coverage limits have been eroded during the current policy by prior claims. 3) Contractor-proposed modifications to the permanent Work requested to accommodate temporary support of excavations. In the event such changes are proposed, approval, if any, of such changes will be only via an appropriate Contract modification. If no such request is submitted prior to start of the Work of this Section, Engineer will proceed on the premise that Contractor-proposed modifications are not intended. 4) Where temporary steel sheeting will be used for temporary support of excavations, indicate anticipated dates for installing such items and anticipated dates for removing such items. 5) Description of how temporary support of excavations and operations will, or may, affect Owner, facility manager (if other than Owner), and other property owners and occupants. 6) Indication of locations, if any, where temporary support of excavations are proposed to remain in place following construction and backfilling, and extent of Contractor’s proposed modifications or partial removals of such systems. 7) Indicate Project-specific sequence of installation and removal of temporary supports of excavations, including: installation and removal of wales, struts, and other supports; and locations and approximate elevations of interim (partial) backfilling against foundations, when interim (partial) backfilling is proposed. 8) Where applicable, indicate intended monitoring including monitoring of deflection of permanent construction and settlement outside of excavations. b. Engineer’s (or Owner’s) review, comments upon, acceptance, or other appropriate action on such Submittal does not, in any way, reduce or mitigate Contractor’s sole responsibility for construction means, methods, techniques, procedures, sequences, and associated safety and protection measures. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents TEMPORARY SUPPORT OF EXCAVATIONS 31 23 16.43 - 4 c. Do not include in such Submittal: calculations, evaluation reports, recommendations, drawings, or specifications developed, sealed, and signed by Contractor or Subcontractor or by professional engineer retained by Contractor or Subcontractor. However, in the event of alleged or potential effect of temporary support of excavations on facilities or property, or in the event of disagreement between the parties concerning allegedly differing subsurface or physical conditions, promptly furnish such documents to Engineer and Owner upon request. Should such request be received by Contractor, furnishing such documents to Engineer and Owner will not, in any way, reduce or mitigate Contractor’s sole responsibility for construction means, methods, techniques, procedures, sequences, or associated safety and protection measures. 1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Existing Conditions: 1. Refer to Section 02 06 13 – Geotechnical Baseline Report. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Description: 1. Provide temporary support of excavations comprised of materials and systems suitable for the intended purpose, excavation depth, subsurface conditions, other environmental factors, installation and removal methods, and duration of use. 2. Contractor shall determine necessary elements for temporary support of excavations for compliance with Laws and Regulations and the Contract Documents, while considering subsurface conditions, construction means, methods, techniques, procedures, and sequences, and associated safety and protection measures. 3. Previously-used materials, where used for temporary support of excavations, shall be in good condition and be neither damaged nor excessively pitted. 4. Steel materials and fabrications for temporary support of excavations shall be in accordance with ANSI/AISC 360 and welding shall be in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M. 5. Steel sheeting that Contractor proposes remain in place following construction shall consist of rolled sections of continuous interlocking type. Type and design of the sheeting and bracing shall comply with this Article’s requirements, above, for steel work for all temporary support of excavations. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verification, Evaluation, and Assessment of Existing Conditions: 1. Evaluate information and data available to Contractor regarding subsurface and physical conditions at the Site and adjacent areas relative to temporary support of excavations. Perform additional investigations as necessary to enable Contractor to provide appropriate temporary support of excavations required to comply with Laws and Regulations and the Contract Documents. 2. Such investigations and evaluations by Contractor may include excavating (and subsequently backfilling), test pits to visually observe subsurface conditions and groundwater, test borings, sampling, and laboratory analyses. Obtain and record data and perform evaluations necessary for Contractor to provide temporary support of excavations as required. 3. As the Work progresses, evaluate performance of temporary support of excavations as necessary and modify temporary support of excavations as appropriate to comply with Laws and Regulations and the Contract Documents. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents TEMPORARY SUPPORT OF EXCAVATIONS 31 23 16.43 - 5 B. Installing the Work constitutes Contractor’s approval of field conditions prevailing at the time of the Work and materials and design of temporary support of excavations used by Contractor. 3.2 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR TEMPORARY SUPPORT OF EXCAVATIONS A. Excavations in stable rock may be made with vertical sides without temporary support of the excavation. Under all other conditions, excavations shall be sloped and benched as appropriate for the subsurface conditions, or provided with temporary support of excavations. B. Temporary Support of Excavations - General: 1. Provide temporary sheeting, shoring, wales, tie-backs, trench boxes, cofferdams, and other excavation supports as necessary and required for the Work, in accordance with Laws and Regulations and the Contract Documents. 2. Clearances and types of temporary sheeting, shoring, wales, tie-backs, and other excavation supports, insofar as they may affect the finished character of the Work and the design of sheeting to be left in place, will be subject to Engineer’s approval; but Contractor is solely responsible for adequacy of all temporary sheeting, shoring, wales, tie-backs, cofferdams, and other excavation supports, Contractor proposes remain in place following construction. 3. Performance and Design: Design and provide temporary supports of excavations and excavation supports Contractor proposes to remain in place in conformance with USACOE Engineer Manual 1110-2-2504 and FHWA-IF-99-015 Geotechnical Engineering Circular No. 4, unless more-stringent requirements are expressly indicated in the Contract Documents or by Laws or Regulations. 4. Installation: a. Steel work for temporary support of excavations shall be in accordance with ANSI/AISC 360 and AWS D1.1/D1.1M. 5. As excavation progresses, carry down temporary supports of excavation to required elevation at or below subgrade. C. Sheeting Left in Place: 1. Temporary Excavation Supports Contractor Proposes to Remain in Place Following Construction: a. Installation: 1) Steel sheeting proposed by Contractor to remain in place shall be driven straight to lines and grades as shown, indicated, or directed. Sheeting shall penetrate into firm materials below subgrade with secure interlocking throughout pile’s entire length. Remove sheeting that is damaged or that has defective alignment and replace with acceptable sheeting. 2) Type of guide structure used and method of driving steel sheeting to remain in- place shall be determined by Contractor’s professional engineer. Line jetting is unacceptable. b. Cut off at elevation directed by Engineer, sheeting proposed by Contractor to remain in place and remove cut off pilings from the Site for proper disposal. When cut-off elevation is not otherwise directed by Engineer, remove tops of sheeting down to three feet below finished grade. c. Clean wales, braces, and all other items to be embedded in the permanent structure, and ensure that concrete surrounding the embedded element is sound and free of air pockets and harmful inclusions. Provisions shall include the cutting of holes in the webs and flanges of wales and bracing members, and welding of steel diaphragm waterstops perpendicular to the centerline of brace-ends that are to be embedded. Wales or bracing proposed to be left in place shall be coordinated and require Engineer’s express, written approval. d. Subsequent to removing the inside face forms, and when removal of bracing is allowed, cut back steel not less than two inches inside the wall face, coat with a corrosion inhibitor (in accordance with Specifications of Division 03 - Concrete), and patch opening with concrete patch mortar in accordance with Section 03 35 00 - Concrete Finishing and Repair of Surface Defects. Comply with details on the Drawings. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents TEMPORARY SUPPORT OF EXCAVATIONS 31 23 16.43 - 6 Concrete shall be thoroughly worked beneath wales and braces, around stiffeners, and at other place where voids may be formed. e. Portions of sheeting or soldier piles and breast boards that are in contact with structure foundations concrete shall be left in place, together with wales and bracing members that are cast into foundation or superstructure concrete. 3.3 TRENCH BOXES A. Installing and Using Trench Boxes: 1. Excavation of unclassified and other materials below bottom of trench box shall not exceed limits established in Laws and Regulations. 2. When using trench box for installing piping: a. Portions of trench box extending below the mid-diameter of an installed, rigid pipe, such as prestressed concrete pipe and other types of rigid pipe, shall be raised above the pipe’s mid-diameter elevation prior to relocating the trench box within the excavation for further construction. b. Bottom of trench box shall not at any time extend below mid-diameter of installed pipe that is flexible or has flexing capability, such as steel, ductile iron, PVC, CPVC, polyethylene, and other pipe that has flexing capability. 3. When using trench box for installing structures, bottom of trench box shall not extend below elevation of top of granular base material of structure. B. Removal or Relocation of Trench Boxes: 1. When removing trench box or relocating trench box within the excavation, exercise extreme care to prevent moving piping, structures, and other Underground Facilities, and prevent disturbance of bedding material for piping, structures, and other Underground Facilities. 2. When piping, structures, or other Underground Facilities are disturbed, remove and reinstall the disturbed items in accordance with the Contract Documents. 3.4 MAINTENANCE AND REMOVAL OF TEMPORARY SUPPORT OF EXCAVATIONS A. Maintenance of Temporary Support for Excavations: 1. During construction, maintain temporary support of excavations as long as necessary until removal or Engineer’s concurrence that such temporary support of excavations may remain in place following construction. 2. As necessary, promptly remedy deficiencies in temporary support of excavations. B. Removal of Temporary Support of Excavations: 1. When temporary support of excavations are no longer necessary, remove from the Site all elements of temporary systems supporting excavations unless Owner (through Engineer) approves temporary support of excavations, or part thereof, continuing existence at the Site after final payment. 2. Perform such removal in manner not injurious to buildings, structures, Underground Facilities, and other facilities, their appearance, and adjacent construction. 3. Removal of Temporary Sheeting and Bracing: a. Remove from excavations sheeting, shoring, wales, and other elements of temporary supports, unless otherwise directed by Engineer in writing. Perform removal to avoid damaging the Work and adjacent construction. Removal shall be equal on both sides of excavation to ensure no unequal loads on buildings, structures, Underground Facilities, and other facilities. b. Defer removal of sheeting, shoring, wales, and other elements, where removal may cause soil to come into contact with concrete, until the following conditions are satisfied: 1) Concrete has cured for not less than seven days, and reached full design strength as indicated in the Contract Documents. 2) Wall and floor framing, up to and including grade level floors, is in place. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents TEMPORARY SUPPORT OF EXCAVATIONS 31 23 16.43 - 7 c. When temporary support of excavations is allowed to remain in-place following construction, accurately record locations on the record drawings, in accordance with Section 01 78 39 - Project Record Documents. 4. Requirements for removing and relocating trench boxes are indicated in the “Trench Boxes” Article of this Section. 5. Restore disturbed areas in accordance with the Contract Documents. Where the Contract Documents do not indicate requirements for restoration, restore such areas in accordance with Section 01 71 33 - Protection of the Work and Property. END OF SECTION Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 This page intentionally left blank. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents DEWATERING 31 23 19 - 1 SECTION 31 23 19 DEWATERING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Requirements for temporary (during construction) dewatering of excavations including: a. Qualifications of Contractor’s design professional retained for designing temporary dewatering systems. b. Contractor’s additional investigations and evaluations necessary for designing temporary dewatering systems. c. Performance criteria and general provisions for temporary dewatering systems. d. Disposal of water discharged from temporary dewatering systems. e. Operation, maintenance, and removal of temporary dewatering systems. B. Related Requirements: Include, but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Section 31 23 33 - Trenching and Backfilling. 1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and Payment: 1. Dewatering of excavations is part of the Work associated with excavating and temporary control of water and water pollution. Include costs for dewatering of excavations under bid/pay items for excavating and related Work. No separate payment will be made for dewatering of excavations or temporary control of water and water pollution. 1.3 REFERENCES A. Terminology: 1. Terminology indicated below are not defined terms and are not indicated with initial capital letters, but when used in this section have the meaning indicated below: a. “Dewatering” means: Lowering of groundwater surface elevation and intercepting horizontal water seepage to prevent groundwater from entering excavations; removal of water accumulated within excavations; and conveyance of groundwater and water removed from excavations to proper discharge location. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Comply with Section 01 57 05 - Temporary Controls, regarding permits and approvals of authorities having jurisdiction necessary for disposal of groundwater and water removed from excavations, and temporary erosion and sediment controls. 2. When Contractor intends to use temporary pumps equipped with gasoline- or diesel-fueled engines, obtain and comply with necessary permits and Laws and Regulations, and comply with Section 01 57 05 - Temporary Controls, regarding exhaust emissions, air pollution controls, and noise controls. B. Qualifications: 1. Professional Engineer or Other Appropriate Design Professional: a. Where necessary for performing the Work in accordance with this Section and when required by Laws or Regulations governing the practice of the associated design discipline, retain the services of professional engineer or other appropriate design professional, licensed and registered in the same jurisdiction as the Site, to evaluate groundwater conditions and design temporary systems and equipment for temporary dewatering of excavations. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents DEWATERING 31 23 19 - 2 b. Professional engineer or other appropriate design professional, as applicable, shall be appropriately licensed and registered for the professional services required by this Section, and shall be appropriately experienced in evaluating groundwater conditions and conductivity in subsurface conditions similar to those at the Site, and in designing and evaluating temporary dewatering systems of the type necessary for the Work. c. Responsibilities shall include: 1) Evaluating existing subsurface data and information for the Site and adjacent areas, available to the Contractor. 2) Advising Contractor regarding additional subsurface investigations necessary to provide temporary dewatering systems that will result in dewatering of excavations as required by this Section. 3) Evaluating the potential effect of temporary dewatering system operation on existing facilities at and adjacent to the Site. 4) Personally designing or supervising the design of temporary dewatering systems necessary for the Work, including preparing drawings, performance requirements, and specifications for temporary dewatering systems such as wells, pumps, and related systems. 5) Sealing and signing instruments of service developed for the Work, including calculations, evaluation reports, recommendations of a technical nature, drawings, specifications, and similar documents. 6) Assisting Contractor with obtaining permits and approvals necessary for temporary dewatering systems. 7) Consulting with Contractor, including visiting the Site during construction as required by Contractor, during installation, operation, and removal of temporary dewatering systems. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Informational Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Advisory on Dewatering Approach: a. Furnish document regarding Contractor’s proposed approach for temporary dewatering of excavations, indicating the following: 1) General indication of Contractor’s overall, intended approach for temporary dewatering of excavations; for example, indicate whether a system of temporary wells and pumps will be provided by Contractor, whether Contractor intends or proposes using existing wells and pumps for temporary dewatering of excavations, whether temporary dewatering will be accomplished only via temporary pumps placed in or adjacent to excavations, other approaches, or a combination thereof. 2) Indication of whether Contractor or Subcontractor intends to retain services of a professional engineer or other appropriate design professional relative to temporary dewatering systems. When such individual or entity will be so retained, indicate name of entity and specific, individual design professional-in-responsible-charge, together with indication of type of license and registration and associated license and registration number and jurisdiction. If not previously furnished with Contractor’s insurance documentation, furnish evidence that such professional engineer or other appropriate design professional (as applicable) possesses professional liability insurance in accordance with the Contract Documents, including indication of whether required coverage limits have been eroded during the current policy by prior claims. 3) Contractor-proposed modifications to the permanent Work requested to accommodate temporary dewatering systems . In the event such changes are proposed, approval, if any, of such changes will be only via an appropriate Contract modification. If no such changes or modifications are requested prior to start of the Work of this Section, Engineer will proceed on the premise that Contractor-proposed modifications are not intended. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents DEWATERING 31 23 19 - 3 4) When existing facilities, such as existing wells and pumps are proposed for use by Contractor, clearly indicate the specific facilities, expected start and end dates of use, anticipated level or extent of use (such as percentage of available pumping capacity), and proposed responsibility for operating and maintenance labor, parts, and costs during such use. 5) Propose locations for discharges from temporary dewatering systems, together with indication of typical anticipated rate of discharge. Also indicate intended approximate locations of aboveground conveyance piping and how Contractor will mitigate effect on Owner, facility manager, and other property owners and occupants where such piping would restrict use or access to existing facilities or property. 6) Anticipated start and end dates for temporary dewatering operations. 7) Description of how temporary dewatering systems and operations will, or may, affect Owner, facility manager (if other than Owner), and other property owners and occupants. 8) Indication of Contractor’s proposed actions regarding temporary dewatering systems after temporary dewatering operations cease; for example, when temporary wells and pumps are provided by Contractor, indicate whether such items will remain in place and, if so, how they will be prepared for abandonment by Contractor. b. Engineer’s (or Owner’s) review, comments upon, acceptance, or other appropriate action on such Submittal does not, in any way, reduce or mitigate Contractor’s sole responsibility for construction means, methods, techniques, procedures, sequences, and associated safety and protection measures. c. Do not include in such Submittal: calculations, evaluation reports, recommendations, drawings, or specifications developed, sealed, and signed by Contractor or Subcontractor or by professional engineer or other appropriate design professional retained by Contractor or Subcontractor. However, in the event of alleged or potential effect of temporary dewatering systems on facilities or property, or in the event of disagreement between the parties concerning allegedly differing subsurface or physical conditions, promptly furnish such documents to Engineer and Owner upon request. Should such request be received by Contractor, furnishing such documents to Engineer and Owner will not, in any way, reduce or mitigate Contractor’s sole responsibility for construction means, methods, techniques, procedures, sequences, or associated safety and protection measures. 1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Existing Conditions: 1. Refer to Section 02 06 13 – Geotechnical Baseline Report. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT FOR TEMPORARY DEWATERING SYSTEMS A. Description: 1. Provide temporary dewatering systems comprised of materials and equipment suitable for the intended purpose, service environment (including subsurface and groundwater conditions), and duration of use. 2. Contractor shall determine required capacities for elements of temporary dewatering systems necessary for compliance with requirements of this Section and other relevant provisions of the Contract Documents. 3. Provide temporary dewatering system materials and equipment in accordance with Laws and Regulations and generally accepted practices in the industry for temporary systems for dewatering of excavations. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents DEWATERING 31 23 19 - 4 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verification, Evaluation, and Assessment of Existing Conditions: 1. Evaluate information and data available to Contractor regarding subsurface and physical conditions at the Site and adjacent areas relative to groundwater and temporary dewatering systems. Perform additional investigations as necessary to enable Contractor to provide appropriate temporary dewatering systems required to comply with this Section. 2. Such investigations and evaluations by Contractor may include excavating (and subsequently backfilling), test pits to visually observe subsurface conditions and groundwater, test borings, sampling and laboratory analyses, providing monitoring wells and obtaining measurements of groundwater surface elevations, performing drawdown tests using existing wells and pumping equipment, and determining capacities and operating characteristics of existing wells, pumping equipment, and related systems. Obtain and record data and perform evaluations necessary for Contractor to provide temporary dewatering systems as required. 3. As the Work progresses, evaluate performance of temporary dewatering systems as necessary and modify temporary dewatering systems as appropriate to comply with this Section and other provisions of the Contract Documents. B. Installing the Work constitutes Contractor’s approval of field conditions prevailing at the time of the Work and condition and operability of existing materials, equipment, and systems (if any) used by Contractor for temporary dewatering. 3.2 TEMPORARY DEWATERING DURING CONSTRUCTION A. Performance Criteria: 1. Provide and maintain adequate drainage and dewatering equipment to remove and dispose of all surface water and ground water entering excavations, or other parts of the Work and work areas. Keep each excavation dry during excavation, subgrade preparation, and continually thereafter until temporary dewatering system is no longer required, in accordance with Article 3.3 of this Section. 2. Temporary dewatering systems shall depress and maintain groundwater surface level three feet below bottom elevation of each excavation during the Work. 3. If, in Engineer’s opinion, groundwater surface elevations are not as required by the Contract Documents, provide additional or alternative temporary dewatering system components or elements as necessary, at no additional cost to Owner. 4. Groundwater surface elevation shall be lowered in advance of excavating for a sufficient period to allow dewatering of fine-grain soils. 5. Remove water from excavations as fast as water collects. B. Related Work: 1. Provide temporary erosion and sediment controls in accordance with Section 01 57 05 - Temporary Controls. 2. Comply with Section 01 57 05 - Temporary Controls, regarding control of surface water, storm water runoff, water pollution, air pollution, noise, and others as applicable. C. Temporary Dewatering Systems - General: 1. Design, provide, operate, and maintain temporary systems for dewatering of excavations in accordance with the Contract Documents, Laws and Regulations, and prevailing practice typical in the industry. In the event of conflict between such requirements, obtain interpretation or clarification from Engineer before proceeding. 2. Temporary dewatering systems, may include the following temporary elements: swales, sumps, pumps, hoses, piping, wells (whether dewatering wells, monitoring wells, or other wells), and similar facilities. 3. Furnish, either at the Site or within reasonably close proximity thereto, available standby items, such as pumps, piping, hoses, instrumentation, controls, and others, should elements of operating temporary dewatering system fail. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents DEWATERING 31 23 19 - 5 4. Locate elements of temporary dewatering systems to allow continuous dewatering operation without interfering with the Work, and the work of other contractors (if any), to the extent practicable. D. Disposal of Water Removed by Dewatering System: 1. Water conveyed by temporary dewatering systems that includes oils, sediments, or Constituents of Concern that will reduce the quality of surface water or groundwater downstream of the point of discharge, shall not be directly discharged. Divert such waters through temporary settling basin, or filters before discharging to surface water, groundwater, or drainage routes. 2. Temporary dewatering systems shall not discharge across roadways, driveways, parking areas, other travelled ways, sidewalks, or overland across other property adjacent to the Site. Where hoses that are part of temporary dewatering system discharge to existing gutters or swales, such discharge shall not exceed capacity of such swales and gutters especially during precipitation and runoff events. 3. Contractor’s temporary dewatering systems shall discharge to location at or adjacent to the Site acceptable to Owner and Engineer, in accordance with Laws and Regulations. 4. Convey water from excavations in closed conduits or appropriate drainage swales. Do not use trench excavations as temporary drainage ditches. 5. Dispose of water removed from excavations in a manner that does not endanger health and safety, property, the Work, and other portions of the Project. 6. Dispose of water in manner that causes no inconvenience to Owner, others involved in the Project, and adjacent and downstream property owners and occupants. 3.3 OPERATION, MAINTENANCE, AND REMOVAL OF TEMPORARY DEWATERING SYSTEMS A. Operation and Maintenance of Temporary Dewatering Systems: 1. Contractor shall operate temporary dewatering systems continuously, 24 hours per day, seven days per week, until such system is no longer necessary or required. 2. Not less than once per working day, visit and visually inspect temporary dewatering system, operating components, including pumps, instrumentation, and controls, and verify proper operation. At the same time, visually observe discharge location of temporary dewatering systems to verify operations. Establish and maintain written records of each location checked, observations made, readings and data taken or recorded (if any), and furnish copies of such records to Engineer upon request. 3. Contractor shall be responsible for condition of piping, conduits, and channels used for drainage and such piping, conduits, and channels shall be clean and free of oils, sediments, and Constituents of Concern. 4. Provide temporary electricity, temporary fuel, and other temporary facilities as necessary in accordance with Section 01 51 05 - Temporary Utilities. 5. Perform pumping of water from excavations in a manner that prevents carrying away of unsolidified concrete materials, and that avoids damaging the subgrade. 6. During construction, Contractor shall maintain all materials, equipment, and systems used for temporary dewatering regardless of whether such items were provided by Contractor or existed prior to commencement of temporary dewatering, in accordance with operating instructions and recommendations of manufacturer of the associated equipment and systems, Laws and Regulations, the Contract Documents, and practice typical in the industry. Perform routine, preventative, and troubleshooting maintenance. Where temporary dewatering system fails or becomes inoperable, immediately remedy the situation, whether by appropriate repairs or operation of standby equipment. B. Criteria for Discontinuation of Temporary Dewatering Operations: 1. Operate and maintain temporary dewatering systems until building, structure, or other facility to be constructed in the excavation is completed to a sufficient extent and has achieved structural strength and integrity sufficient for discontinuation of operation of temporary dewatering systems, and backfilling Work is reasonably complete. Facilities Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents DEWATERING 31 23 19 - 6 constructed in excavations shall be able to withstand horizontal and vertical soil and water pressures from natural groundwater prior to discontinuation of temporary dewatering. 2. Control of ground water shall continue until the permanent construction provides sufficient dead load to withstand hydrostatic uplift of the normal groundwater, until concrete has attained sufficient strength to withstand earth and hydrostatic loads, and until waterproofing Work is completed. 3. Before discontinuing dewatering operations or permanently allowing rise in groundwater surface elevation, prepare computations to demonstrate that buildings, structures, Underground Facilities, and other facilities affected by the rise in groundwater surface elevation are protected by fill or other means to sustain uplift. Use a safety factor of not less than 1.25 when preparing such calculations. Submit such calculations to Engineer upon request. Maintain temporary dewatering systems in operation until Contractor’s evaluations and calculations establish appropriate resistance of facilities against uplift and other damage caused by rising groundwater surface elevations. 4. Do not discontinue dewatering operations without first obtaining Engineer’s concurrence for such discontinuation. 5. Shut off dewatering system at such a rate to prevent quick upsurge of water that might weaken the subgrade. C. Removal of Temporary Dewatering Systems: 1. When temporary dewatering system is permanently deactivated, remove from the Site all elements of temporary dewatering system unless Owner (through Engineer) approves temporary dewatering system’s, or part thereof, continuing existence at the Site after final payment. 2. Where wells provided by Contractor (whether for dewatering, monitoring, or other purpose) or piping are allowed to remain following permanent discontinuation of dewatering operations, accurately record their locations on the record drawings, in accordance with Section 01 78 39 - Project Record Documents. 3. When a well includes power supply for electric pump, remove and disconnect electrical power supply from well casing back to source. Where wells provided by Contractor will be abandoned in place, remove the well casing to not less than two feet below finished grade and provide secure, removeable cap on well casing. Provide stake, visible at finished grade but not protruding above finished grade, indicating location of well casing. 4. Restore disturbed areas in accordance with the Contract Documents. Where the Contract Documents do not indicate requirements for restoration, restore such areas in accordance with Section 01 71 33 - Protection of the Work and Property. END OF SECTION Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING 31 23 33 - 1 SECTION 31 23 33 TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Requirements for excavating, filling, and other earth Work for linear, buried utility projects, including: a. Field conditions. b. Soil and aggregate materials. c. Test pits. d. Excavation. e. Preparation of subgrades. f. Filling and compacting. g. Rough grading. h. Disposal of excavated spoil materials. B. Related Requirements Include, but are not necessarily limited to, the following: 1. Section 31 10 00 - Site Clearing. 2. Section 31 22 19 - Finish Grading. 3. Section 31 23 16.43 - Temporary Support of Excavations. 4. Section 31 23 19 - Dewatering. 1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement: 1. Contractor shall provide all labor, materials, construction equipment and machinery, tools, and incidentals required or necessary for performing all trenching, backfilling, and related earth Work for the Contract, including all Work related to excavating, preparing subgrades, providing and stockpiling materials, filling with required materials, compacting, grading, proper disposal of excess spoil materials, and all other Work required by this Section. This Section includes trenching, backfilling, and related earth Work required for constructing: buried utilities, including piping and, where applicable, other Underground Facilities; site improvements (including pavement, sidewalks, curbs, and the like); subgrade preparation for other Work; and all other trenching, backfilling, and related earth Work required by the Contract Documents and not addressed under other Specifications sections. 2. Unless expressly indicated otherwise in the Contract Documents, such as Section 01 22 00 - Measurement and Payment, the Work of this Section is included in the various lump sum and unit price bid/pay items for the Contract. 3. All Work under this Section is unclassified and covered by this Section and the associated bid/payment item(s). No separate payment will be made for removing, handling, or disposing of rock (unless the Contract includes a separate bid/pay item specifically for rock excavation or rock removal), stones, concrete (whether or not reinforced), debris, stumps, and other material, regardless of moisture content, unless such material constitutes an unforeseen Hazardous Environmental Condition and Work associated with such Hazardous Environmental Condition is not included in the Contract. 4. Where excavation of test pits is required by the Contract Documents or Engineer, payment for such test pits will be in accordance with Paragraph 3.2.B of this Section and other applicable provisions of the Contract Documents. 1.3 REFERENCES A. Terminology: 1. The following terms are not defined and are not indicated with initial capital letters but, when used in this Section, have the following meaning: Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING 31 23 33 - 2 a. “Borrow” means material required for trenching, backfilling, and related earth Work in excess of quantity of suitable material available from required grading, cuts, and excavations at the Site. Borrow may be necessary even though not otherwise expressly required by the Contract Documents. b. “Cohesive soil” means clay (fine grained soil), or soil with a high clay content, which has cohesive strength. Cohesive soil does not crumble, can be excavated with vertical or near-vertical sideslopes, and is plastic when moist. Cohesive soil is difficult to break up when dry, and exhibits significant cohesion when submerged. Cohesive soils include clayey silt, sandy clay, silty clay, clay and organic clay. c. “Cohesionless soil” means fill material that does not clump together; its grains remain separate and apart from each other. Cohesionless soils typically have a low proportion of fine (no. 200 mesh size and less) particles and may be soil material or granular material. The terms “cohesionless soils”, “cohesionless materials”, “non-cohesive soils”, and the like have the same meaning. d. “Fill” means soil material, granular material, or other material indicated in this Section required for backfilling excavations or as material for achieving required rough grading. Unless indicated otherwise in the context of a specific provision, the terms “fill” and “backfill” have the same meaning, as do derivative terms such as, “filling” and “backfilling”. When used by itself, the term “backfill” means material required for refilling an excavation. e. “Foundations” means bottoms of manholes, chambers, vaults, and similar structures; base slabs (slabs-on-grade); bearing directly on soil, granular material, or rock. f. “Granular material” means gravel, sand, or silt, (coarse grained soil) with little or no clay content. Granular soil has no cohesive strength. Some moist granular soils exhibit apparent cohesion. Granular soil cannot be molded when moist and crumbles easily when dry. The terms “granular material”, “aggregate material”, and “granular soil” have the same meaning. Detailed requirements for specific types of granular material are indicated in Article 2.1 of this Section. g. “Rock” means: igneous, metamorphic, or sedimentary rock or stone; boulders over two cubic yards in volume in open areas and boulders over one cubic yard in volume in trenches; and mass concrete; that cannot be removed using rippers and therefore requires drilling and blasting or use of large excavator-mounted pneumatic breakers. If rock is encountered during the Work, promptly furnish notice of differing subsurface condition in accordance with the General Conditions (as may be modified by the Supplementary Conditions); when necessary, Engineer will furnish requirements for rock removal via appropriate Contract modification. The following do not qualify as rock: 1) Soft, weathered or disintegrated rock that can be removed by normal excavating equipment, including bulldozers with rippers and large trackhoes with rock teeth or rock buckets. 2) Loose or previously blasted rock. 3) Broken stone in rock fills. 4) Rock or stone that falls into the excavation from outside limits of excavation shown or indicated in the Contract Documents. 5) Boulders that can be removed without drilling, blasting, or pneumatic breakers. 6) Pavements, sidewalks, and gutters of concrete, asphalt, or masonry. h. “Subgrade” means the uppermost surface of native soil material unmoved from cuts; the bottom of excavation. i. “Trenching” means excavating for buried utilities, other Underground Facilities, and related excavation Work. In this Section, the words, “trenching” and “excavating” have the same meaning. In this Section, the word “excavation”, whether singular or plural, is general and includes trenching. j. “Unauthorized excavation” means removing materials beyond limits shown or indicated in the Contract Documents or otherwise directed by Engineer. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING 31 23 33 - 3 k. “Unclassified”, when used in referring to trenching, excavating, or excavations, means excavation and disposal of all materials, of any description whatsoever, encountered in performing the Work, unless otherwise shown or indicated in the Contract Documents. l. “Unsuitable soil materials” means soil or other materials encountered at or below subgrade elevation of insufficient strength, stiffness, or characteristics to support the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents or as determined by Engineer. The terms “unsuitable soil material”, “unsuitable soil”, and “unsuitable material” have the same meaning. B. Reference Standards: Standards referenced in this section include, but are not necessarily limited to, the following: 1. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO): a. AMRL R18 - AASHTO Accreditation Procedure Manual. 2. ASTM International (ASTM): a. C33/C33M - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates. b. D698 - Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (12,400 ft-lbf/ft3 (600 kN-m/m3)). c. D1556 - Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by Sand- Cone Method. d. D1557 - Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft-lbf/ft3 (2,700 kN-m/m3)). e. D2166 - Standard Test Method for Unconfined Compressive Strength of Cohesive Soil. f. D2216 - Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Determination of Water (Moisture) Content of Soil and Rock by Mass. g. D2434 - Standard Test Methods for Measurement of Hydraulic Conductivity of Coarse- Grained Soils. h. D2487 - Standard Practice for Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes (Unified Soil Classification System). i. D2850 - Standard Test Method for Unconsolidated-Undrained Triaxial Compression Test on Cohesive Soils. j. D3740 - Minimum Requirements for Agencies Engaged in Testing and/or Inspection of Soil and Rock as Used in Engineering Design and Construction. k. D4253 - Standard Test Methods for Maximum Index Density and Unit Weight of Soils Using a Vibratory Table. l. D4254 - Standard Test Methods for Minimum Index Density and Unit Weight of Soils and Calculation of Relative Density. m. D4318 - Standard Test Methods for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity Index of Soils. n. D6913 - Standard Test Methods for Particle-Size Distribution (Gradation) of Soils Using Sieve Analysis. o. D6938 - Standard Test Methods for In-Place Density and Water Content of Soil and Soil-Aggregate by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth). p. D7928 - Standard Test Method for Particle-Size Distribution (Gradation) of Fine- Grained Soils Using the Sedimentation (Hydrometer) Analysis. q. E329 - Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged in Construction Inspection, Testing, or Special Inspection. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. Contractor’s Testing Laboratory: a. Retain the services of independent testing laboratory to perform testing and determine compliance with the Contract Documents of materials specified in this Section. b. When Contractor is expressly required, by this Section’s “Field Quality Control” Article or elsewhere in the Contract Documents, to retain testing laboratory for tests required under this Section’s “Field Quality Control” Article, retain one testing laboratory for quality assurance testing and field quality control testing. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING 31 23 33 - 4 c. Testing laboratory shall possess current, valid accreditation from the AASHTO Materials Reference Laboratory (AMRL), in accordance with AASHTO AMRL R18, for ASTM D3740, for tests required for quality assurance testing indicated in this Article and field quality control testing indicated to be Contractor’s responsibility. d. Testing laboratory shall comply with ASTM E329. e. Testing laboratory shall be experienced in the types of testing required. f. Selection of testing laboratory is subject to Engineer’s acceptance. Upon Engineer’s request, submit qualifications statement for testing laboratory, including name of entity, location, copies of applicable certifications, summary of entity’s experience, and names and qualifications of personnel who will perform the subject sampling and testing. B. Quality Assurance Testing: 1. Quality assurance testing, which may also be regarded as source quality control testing, is in addition to field quality control testing required by this Section’s “Field Quality Control” Article. 2. Materials used in the Work may require testing and retesting, as directed by Engineer, during the Project. Allow free access to onsite material stockpiles, borrow sources, and other sources of aggregate and soil materials at all times. Tests not specifically indicated to be performed at Owner's expense (if any), including retesting of defective materials and defective Work, shall be at Contractor’s cost. 3. Contractor’s Testing Laboratory Scope for Quality Assurance Sampling and Testing: a. Obtain samples and perform testing of proposed fill materials in the laboratory, at the Site, and at borrow locations (if any) to provide assurance that the Work will comply with the Contract Documents. b. Testing laboratory shall perform testing required to obtain data for selecting moisture content for placing and compacting fill materials. c. Submit to Engineer, via Contractor, written results of each test. 4. Required Quality Assurance Material Testing by Contractor’s Testing Laboratory: a. Perform the following quality assurance tests on materials to be incorporated into the Work. Submit results of such tests to Engineer and obtain Engineer’s acceptance thereof prior to incorporating the subject materials into the Work. b. Gradation in accordance with ASTM D6913 and ASTM D7928. Perform one test for every 1,000 cubic yards of each material to be incorporated into the Work. c. Atterberg limits in accordance with ASTM D4318. Perform one test for every 1,000 cubic yards of the following types of materials to be incorporated into the Work: suitable soil material, and soil structural fill. d. Moisture/density relations for fill in accordance with ASTM D698, ASTM D1557, ASTM D4253, or ASTM D4254, as applicable. Perform one test for every 1,000 cubic yards of each material to be incorporated into the Work. e. Moisture content of stockpiled or borrow material in accordance with ASTM D2216. Perform one test for every 1,000 cubic yards of each material to be incorporated into the Work. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Shop Drawings: a. Schedule (table or written narrative) indicating, for each specific area of the Work, type of fill materials proposed, together with indication of whether source of materials is onsite or borrow source. Identification of each type of material shall employ material names/designations identical to those in the Contract Documents. 2. Product Data: a. Borrow Soil Materials: Name and address of Supplier of borrow soil materials, gradation, and Supplier’s certification that materials are sufficiently free of Constituents of Concern so that a Hazardous Environmental Condition will not be created or exacerbated. If no soil materials will be obtained from any borrow location, expressly so indicate to Engineer in writing. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING 31 23 33 - 5 b. Aggregate: Supplier’s published description of aggregate materials, including name and address of Supplier, certification of material’s compliance with AASHTO and state department of transportation standards, and gradation. B. Informational Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Procedure Submittals: a. Excavation plan indicating: 1) Excavation Method(s): Indicate high-level methods to be used for excavating, such as use of backhoe or other earth moving construction equipment, use of explosives in excavating (when allowed), trenchless excavating methods, micro-trenching, hydro-excavating (when allowed), air vacuum excavating (when allowed), or other. Where different methods will be used, indicate locations of each in the Work. Purpose of indicating high-level excavating methods is for Owner’s information regarding effect of excavating method on Owner’s or facility manager’s (if other than Owner) property and operations. 2) Copies of permits and approvals required for trenching, backfilling, and related earth Work, obtained from authorities having jurisdiction, including owners of affected utilities and transportation facilities, for excavation methods proposed. b. Compaction procedure and compaction equipment proposed for use. Where different procedures or equipment will be used for compacting different types of material or at different locations at the Site, indicate where each procedure and equipment item will be used. c. Engineer’s acceptance of excavation plan does not, in any way, modify Contractor’s sole responsibility for complying with the Contract Documents, construction means, methods, procedures, techniques, or sequences, and safety and protection measures incident thereto. 2. Quality Assurance Test Results Submittals: a. Submit results of quality assurance testing performed in accordance with this Section’s “Quality Assurance” Article, unless included as part of another submittal under this Section. Submit results for the following quality assurance testing: 1) Tests on materials from onsite and borrow sources. 2) Optimum moisture – maximum dry density curve for each type of fill material. 3. Field Quality Control Submittals: a. Submit results of testing and inspection performed in accordance with the field quality control Article in Part 3 of this Section, including: 1) Indication of soil classification in accordance with ASTM D2487. 2) Field density testing. 3) Proctor Compaction Test to determine optimum moisture for soil and maximum dry density. 4. Qualifications Statements: a. Quality assurance testing laboratory, when requested by Engineer. 1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Existing Conditions: 1. See Section 02 06 13 – Geotechnical Baseline Report. 2. Subsurface Conditions: a. Subsurface Information: The Supplementary Conditions indicate information (if any) that is Technical Data on subsurface conditions at the Site. Such information and data are not intended as a representation or warranty of continuity of conditions between soil borings or test pits, nor of groundwater levels at dates and times other than date and time when measured, nor that purpose of obtaining the information and data were appropriate for use by Contractor. Owner and Engineer are not responsible for interpretations or conclusions drawn therefrom by Contractor. b. Contractor’s Explorations: Soil borings and other exploratory operations may be made by Contractor, at no additional cost to Owner. Coordinate Contractor-performed test borings and other exploratory operations with Owner, utility owners, and owners of Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING 31 23 33 - 6 transportation facilities as appropriate. Perform such explorations without disrupting or otherwise adversely affecting operations of Owner and others. 3. Where subsurface conditions or locations of Underground Facilities and structures are unforeseen or differ substantively from that shown or indicated in the Contract Documents, comply with Contract requirements for giving notice and other actions. 4. Existing Structures and Underground Facilities: a. The Contract Documents show or indicate certain structures and Underground Facilities adjacent to the Work. Such information was obtained from existing records and is not guaranteed to be correct or complete. Contractor shall explore ahead of the excavation to determine the exact location of all existing structures and Underground Facilities. Existing structures and Underground Facilities shall be supported and protected from damage by Contractor. Immediately repair and restore existing structures and Underground Facilities damaged by Contractor without additional cost to Owner. b. Movement or operation of construction equipment and machinery over Underground Facilities shall be at Contractor’s sole risk. When required by owner of the Underground Facility, prepare and submit to owner of such Underground Facility, and obtain their acceptance, of Contractor’s plan presenting Contractor’s analysis of the loads to be imparted during construction (including transient loading by construction equipment, machinery, and vehicles) and Contractor’s proposed measures to protect structures and Underground Facilities during the Work. c. Acceptance of or approval by utility owner or Engineer of Contractor’s proposed evaluation and method(s) for protecting Underground Facilities in no way modifies or reduces Contractor’s sole responsibility for complying with the Contract Documents, means, methods, procedures, techniques, and sequences of construction, and the safety and protection measures incident thereto. d. Coordinate with utility owners for shut off of services in active piping and conduits. When required by utility owner, Owner will assist Contractor with utility owner notifications. Completely remove buried piping and conduits indicated for removal and not otherwise indicated as being abandoned or to remain in place. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Granular Under-Slab Fill: 1. Provide granular under-slab fill under foundations (slabs, manholes, wet wells, handholes, and similar Work) unless other under-slab material is required by the Contract Documents. 2. Material shall be uniformly-graded, crushed aggregate, free of organic and deleterious material, complying with the following: a. ¾-inch Minus Crushed Base Course: Sieve Sizes (Square Openings) ¾-inch No. 4 No. 10 No. 200 Liquid Limit Plasticity Index Percentage by Weight 100 40-70 25-55 2-10 0%-25% 0%-6% B. Granular Structural Fill: 1. Granular structural fill, sometimes called “select granular fill”, is required for improving subgrade (after removal of unsuitable material), as backfill for excavations in areas that, after restoration, will be subject to vehicular traffic, and at other locations shown or indicated for such material in the Contract Documents. 2. Material shall be inorganic soils free of vegetation, debris, and fragments larger than 6- inches in size. Structural backfill should meet the following gradation specifications: a. 3-inch Minus: Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING 31 23 33 - 7 Sieve Sizes (Square Openings) 3-inch No. 4 No. 40 No. 200 Percentage by Weight 100 25-60 10-30 2-10 C. Suitable Soil Material as Non-Structural Fill: 1. Provide suitable soil material as fill for the Work, unless other material is required. 2. Material shall be: a. Free of rock larger than three inches in any dimension, debris, waste, frozen materials, organic material, and other deleterious material. 3. Previously-excavated materials, reviewed and approved by the Geotechnical Engineer, may be used for suitable soil material. 4. When onsite materials are unsuitable for use as suitable soil material, provide or approved borrow material as suitable soil material. Prior to using borrow material as suitable soil material, furnish product data Submittal and quality assurance Submittal for proposed material and obtain Geotechnical Engineer’s approval and acceptance of the proposed material. 5. Remove and dispose of excavated soils that are saturated and cannot be readily conditioned or dried to be made suitable, contain deleterious materials or have characteristics that, in the opinion of the Geotechnical Engineer, render the soils unsuitable as backfill. D. Pipe Bedding Material: 1. Pipe bedding material shall be Type 1 Pipe Bedding as specified by Section 02221 of the Montana Public Works Standard Specifications (MPWSS), and in accordance with the following: a. Provide Type 1 Bedding consisting of imported sand, sandy gravel, or fine gravel having a maximum 3/4-inch size and a maximum plasticity index of 6, determined by AASHTO T89 and T90 or by ASTM D4318. E. Flowable Fill, also known as Controlled Low Strength Material (CLSM): 1. Coordinate the provision below with requirements for installing flowable fill in this Section’s “Filling and Compacting” Article in “Part 3 – Execution”. Unless expressly required otherwise by the Contract Documents, flowable fill may be used, at Contractor’s option (following Engineer’s approval), for backfilling in lieu of the following materials: granular structural fill, pipe bedding material, soil structural fill, suitable soil material used as non-structural fill, and subbase material. 2. Comply with Section 03 31 30 - Concrete Materials and Proportioning. 3. Material provided shall be excavatable by ordinary mechanical excavation equipment, such as backhoes. 2.2 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Tests and Inspections at Source of Supply: 1. Perform quality assurance testing, and submit results to Engineer, in accordance with the “Quality Assurance” Article in Part 1 of this Section. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: 1. Provide Engineer with sufficient notice and with means to examine areas and conditions under which trenching, backfilling, other related earth Work, and grading will be performed. Engineer will advise Contractor in writing when Engineer is aware of conditions that may be detrimental to proper and timely completion of the Work. Do not proceed with the Work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING 31 23 33 - 8 2. This Article, however, in no way modifies or reduces Contractor’s sole responsibility for complying with the Contract Documents, for construction means, methods, procedures, techniques, and sequences, and for the safety and protection measures incident thereto. 3. Nothing in this Article, including action by Engineer or Resident Project Representative (if any), is for benefit of Contractor. B. Installing the Work constitutes Contractor’s approval of underlying work, subgrades, and field conditions prevailing at the time of the Work. 3.2 TEST PITS A. Test Pits - General: 1. Test Pit Locations Not Shown or Indicated in the Contract Documents and Test Pits Not Part of a Dedicated Bid/Pay Item: a. In advance of other construction, excavate test pits, make observations and measurements, and promptly fill test pits. b. Purpose of test pits is to determine existing subsurface conditions and locations of Underground Facilities and structures. c. Perform all work required in connection with excavating, stockpiling, maintaining, temporarily supporting excavations, filling, and replacing pavement for test pits. Contractor is responsible for the definite location of each existing Underground Facility involved within the area of excavation for the Work. Exercise care during such location work to avoid damaging and disrupting affected Underground Facility or structure. Contractor is responsible for repairing, at Contractor’s cost, damage to Underground Facilities or structure caused during the Work. B. Payment for Test Pits: 1. All payment for test pits shown or indicated in the Contract Documents will be part of the lump sum bid/pay item Contract Price. C. Results of Test Pits: 1. Document results of all test pits excavated by Contractor. 2. Submit to Engineer written results of test pits expressly required by the Contract Documents or directed by Engineer. Furnish such Submittal within three days of excavation of associated test pit, unless Engineer allows more time. When Engineer requests written results of test pits performed for Contractor’s own use, promptly furnish such information as Informational Submittal. 3. Required documentation of test pits shall include: a. Identification of Project, Site, and Contractor. b. Date and time of test pit excavation, indication of weather conditions, and names of personnel present and employer of each. c. Detailed description of location of test pit, including, where necessary, measurements to landmarks shown on the Drawings. Where appropriate, include sketch of location from the Drawings. d. Indication of approximate dimensions of test pit, including length, width, and depth. e. Verbal (written) description of observed subsurface conditions, including apparent strata, rock (if any), groundwater conditions, and approximate depth at which each was observed. f. Verbal (written) description of unusual conditions observed, including potential existence of Hazardous Environmental Condition, if any. Include pertinent data, such as readings from instrumentation used. g. Description and sketch, with appropriate dimensions, of Underground Facilities and structures in the test pit. Sketches shall be clearly legible with clear, well-written annotations and dimensions. h. Other pertinent information and data from observations made while test pit was open. i. Brief written description of backfilling and restoration of test pit, including time operations were completed. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING 31 23 33 - 9 3.3 PREPARATION A. Site Preparation: 1. Comply with Section 31 10 00 - Site Clearing. 2. Comply with this Section’s “Erosion and Sediment Control During Construction” Article. B. Dust Control: 1. Relative to controlling dust during construction, comply with Section 01 57 05 - Temporary Controls and Section 01 74 00 - Cleaning. 3.4 EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROLS DURING CONSTRUCTION A. Temporary Erosion and Sediment Controls – General: 1. Provide temporary erosion and sediment controls in accordance with Section 01 57 05 - Temporary Controls, and other requirements of the Contract Documents. 2. When applicable, also comply with requirements of the erosion and sediment control plan approved by authorities having jurisdiction and the Project’s storm water pollution prevention plan and permit, if any. 3.5 EXCAVATION A. Excavation – General: 1. Perform all excavation Work, including trenching and backfilling, required to complete the Work as shown, specified, and required. Excavating Work includes removing, handling, and proper disposal of earth, sand, clay, expansive-type soils, other unsuitable soil materials, gravel, hardpan, soft, weathered or decomposed rock, concrete and masonry (reinforced or unreinforced), pavements, rubbish, debris, stumps, and other materials, regardless of moisture content, within the excavation limits. 2. Trenching and backfilling Work shall comply with the Contract Documents, including required grades, elevations, general dimensions, and alignment shown or indicated on the Drawings including cuts and fills, as applicable. 3. Protect existing buildings and structures against undermining and destabilization. If adjacent trenching affects foundations of one or more buildings or structures, promptly advise Engineer in writing. 4. If unsuitable material and obstructions are encountered during excavation, remove material and replace as directed by Engineer. B. Excavation Methods: 1. Traditional Excavation Methods: Excavation via traditional methods, such as backhoe, bulldozer, other earth moving construction equipment or machinery, or excavation using hand tools, is acceptable for all excavating Work. 2. Use of Explosives: a. Use of explosives is not allowed. 3. Micro-trenching: Installation of buried utilities using micro-trenching equipment and techniques is acceptable when the associated Underground Facility is of a size and depth appropriate for such construction method. Submit to Engineer request for interpretation or clarification for requirements for resin backfilling of micro-trenches. Engineer will issue such requirements via Field Order. 4. Trenchless: Where Contractor proposes trenchless construction techniques, such as directional drilling, micro-tunneling, or others, comply with the Contract Documents regarding such construction methods. When the Contract Documents do not include requirements for the proposed trenchless construction method, submit to Engineer request for interpretation or clarification to obtain appropriate requirements, which will be issued via appropriate Contract modification. 5. Hydro-excavating (also known as Hydro-Vacuum Excavating): a. Hydro-excavating is unacceptable. b. Avoid creating nuisances, unsafe conditions, and inconvenience to Owner, owners and occupants of adjacent property, and the public when hydro-excavating is allowed and used. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING 31 23 33 - 10 6. Air Vacuum Excavating: a. Air vacuum excavating is unacceptable. C. Excavation Protection: 1. Provide excavation protection system(s) in accordance with Laws and Regulations to prevent injury to persons and property, including Underground Facilities. 2. Provide safe access to excavations, including emergency exit, and safe access for construction equipment and machinery, where applicable, in accordance with laws and Regulations. 3. Comply with Section 31 23 16.43 - Temporary Support of Excavations, regarding temporary support of excavations during construction. 4. Comply with Section 31 23 19 - Dewatering, regarding dewatering of excavations and related matters. D. Excavations for Manholes, Chambers, and Vaults: 1. Refer to this Section, Section 01 22 00 - Measurement and Payment, and applicable details (if any) on the Drawings for requirements on excavation pay limits for manholes, chambers, vaults, and similar items. 2. Elevation of bottom of manholes, chambers, and vaults may be changed only via duly issued Contract modification. Such modifications may be directed by Engineer to ensure a stable bearing surface. Elevations of piping, conduit, and similar other Underground Facilities shall be as shown or indicated on the Contract Documents. 3. Extend excavations sufficiently on each side of manholes, chambers, vaults, or similar construction only as necessary for installing precast concrete structures and appurtenances, including temporary supports of excavations, observation and inspection of the Work, and safe sloping of sides of excavations, as necessary. E. Subgrades – General: 1. Provide firm, dense, thoroughly compacted, consolidated subgrades, free of mud, muck, and other soft and unsuitable materials. Subgrades shall remain firm and intact under all construction operations. Reinforce subgrade by providing granular structural fill on subgrades that are otherwise solid but become soft or muddy on top due to construction operations. Finished elevation of stabilized subgrades shall not be above subgrade elevations shown on the Drawings, unless bottom of trench is rock below required bottom elevation of pipe, manhole, chamber, or vault, and above required bottom of excavation elevation. 2. If, in Engineer’s opinion, subgrade becomes soft, muddy, or both, because of construction delays, failure to dewater properly, or other cause within Contractor’s control, excavate subgrade to firm material, trim the subgrade, and backfill with granular structural fill material at Contractor’s cost. 3. Remove unsuitable subgrade materials below foundations. Limits of required removal of unsuitable material, when not otherwise expressly shown or indicated in the Contract Documents, shall be outside exterior limits of foundations around perimeter of manhole, chamber, vault, or similar item, by not less than the greater of the following horizontal distances: a. Distance equal to depth of required removal of unsuitable material, below bottom of foundations. b. Three feet. c. cAs directed by Engineer, in consultation with geotechnical engineering consultant (if any). 4. Preparation of Subgrades for Subsequent Work: a. Level off subgrades to receive foundations or compacted fill. b. Where subgrades are to receive subsequent fill or manholes, chambers, vaults, or similar items, remove loose materials and bring subgrades into compliance with the Contract Documents. c. Where compacted fill material is required to bring subgrade up to underside of construction, scarify existing subgrade upon which fill material will be placed to depth Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING 31 23 33 - 11 of six inches and then compact to density required in this Section before fill material is placed thereon. d. Do not excavate lower than required for buried piping or foundations, unless directed otherwise by Engineer. e. Where excavation extends below required elevation without authorization, promptly advise Engineer and remedy unauthorized excavation in accordance with the Contract Documents. Corrections may include: 1) Under soil-supported foundations or soil-supported retaining walls: a) Filling entire vertical distance between excavated subgrade and material required under foundation or other structure with compacted granular structural fill. b) Concrete fill is acceptable for bringing elevations to proper position. 2) For locations other than those indicated above including slabs-on-grade: a) Backfill and compact unauthorized excavations as indicated for authorized excavations of same classification, unless otherwise directed by Engineer. 3) Contractor is not eligible for change in Contract Price or Contract Times for remedying unauthorized excavations. 5. Evaluation and Protection of Subgrade: a. Advise Engineer as soon as excavation is completed for Engineer’s observation of subgrades and, where necessary or required, inspection and testing of subgrades. b. If Engineer determines that bearing materials at required subgrade elevations are unsuitable, provide subgrade stabilization as indicated in this Article. c. Do not commence further construction until subgrade under compacted fill material, under foundations and retaining walls is acceptable (in accordance with the Contract Documents) to Engineer, who may consider results of required testing, and who may elect to consult with geotechnical consultant (if any). d. Engineer shall have sufficient opportunity to observe subgrade, after successful completion of tests and inspections required by the Contract Documents. e. Place fill material and perform subsequent construction after subgrade is acceptable in accordance with the Contract Documents. f. Protect subgrade from becoming loose, wet, frozen, or soft due to weather, construction operations, or other reasons. 6. Subgrade stabilization: a. If subgrade under foundations or fill material, is frozen, loose, wet, or soft before construction is placed thereon, remove frozen, loose, wet, or soft material and replace with approved compacted material as directed by Engineer, who may consult with geotechnical consultant. b. Loose, wet, or soft materials, when approved by Engineer, may be stabilized by a compacted working mat of well graded crushed stone. c. Stabilization shall be in accordance with the Contract Documents. Where the Contract Documents do not address subgrade stabilization, promptly submit to Engineer written request for clarification or interpretation, or other written instrument in accordance with the Contract Documents. In such event, do not proceed until response is obtained from engineer. F. Pipe Trench Preparation: 1. Not more than 150 feet of trench may be opened in advance of installing pipe in trench. 2. Trench width shall be minimized to greatest extent practical, and shall comply with the following: a. Trench width shall be sufficient to provide space for installing, jointing and inspecting piping. The Drawings show additional requirements for trenches. In no case shall trench be wider at top of pipe than pipe barrel’s outside diameter (OD) plus twofeet, unless otherwise shown or indicated. b. Enlargement of trench width at pipe joints may be made when required and approved by Engineer. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING 31 23 33 - 12 c. For excavating and backfilling for manholes, chambers, and vaults associated with buried piping, excavation at widest point of manhole, chamber, or vault shall be not wider than two feet greater than widest outside dimension (including bottom footings or flanges, if any, of precast concrete structures) of the associated manhole, chamber, or vault. d. Trench width shall be sufficient for Contractor’s means of temporarily supporting the excavation and dewatering. e. Trench width shall be sufficient to allow thorough compaction of fill adjacent to bottom half of pipe. f. Do not use construction equipment or machinery that necessitates trench to be excavated to excessive width. 3. Depth of trench shall be as shown or indicated in the Contract Documents. If required and approved by Engineer in writing (such as a duly issued Contract modification), depths may be revised. 4. Where Engineer considers existing subgrade (beneath intended bedding material) unsuitable, remove and replace such unsuitable material with granular structural fill material for full width of trench, down to suitable material. G. Freeze Protection: 1. Do not place foundations or fill material on frozen subgrade. 2. When freezing temperatures are expected, based on widely recognized, reputable source for weather forecasts at or near the Site, do not excavate to full depth indicated, unless foundations or fill material can be placed immediately after excavation has been completed and is acceptable in accordance with the Contract Documents. 3. Protect from freezing excavation, subgrade, and fill materials when subsequent Work thereon is delayed. H. Construction Traffic on Soils: 1. Furnish and use appropriate backhoe or other low-contact pressure equipment to remove existing materials. 2. Minimize construction traffic on existing materials and saturated soils and avoid soil disturbance. 3. Repair disturbed subgrade materials prior to performing subsequent Work. Remedial work shall be in accordance with the Contract Documents. When not addressed in the Contract Documents, remedial Work shall be as directed by Engineer via appropriate Contract modification. 4. Allow only minimal foot traffic on bearing soils prepared for subsequent installation of fill or foundations. 3.6 FILLING AND COMPACTING A. Filling and Compacting – General: 1. Provide and compact all fill required for the finished grades as shown and as indicated in this Section. B. Place fill as promptly as progress of the Work allows, but not until completing the following: 1. Obtaining Engineer’s concurrence, after observation by Engineer or Resident Project Representative (if any) of construction below finish grade, including removal of trash and debris from excavations, waterproofing (where required), and related Work. 2. Successful completion of required field quality control activities for Work that will be covered or concealed by filling, including field quality control testing of buried piping, conduits that will convey fluid or gas, and exfiltration testing (where performed or required) of manholes, chambers, vaults, and similar items. For manholes, chambers, and vaults, where infiltration testing or vacuum testing is performed or required, such testing may be performed following backfilling. 3. Completion of proper documentation of as-constructed conditions and existing conditions (such as locations of Underground Facilities) in accordance with Section 01 78 39 - Project Record Documents. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING 31 23 33 - 13 4. Removal of temporary supports of excavations. 5. Remove fill that includes organic materials or other unacceptable material and replace with fill material complying with the Contract Documents. C. Placement – General: 1. Place fill to the grades shown or indicated. Bring up evenly on all sides fill around manholes, chambers, vaults, and similar items, and Underground Facilities. 2. Management of Moisture Content: a. Place fill materials at moisture content and density as indicated in this Article’s requirements on compaction density. Prior to placing fill material, optimum moisture and maximum density properties for proposed material shall be obtained from Engineer, who may consult with geotechnical consultant, if any. Furnish and use construction equipment and machinery capable of adding measured amounts of water to fill materials to bring fill materials to a condition within required moisture content range. Control moisture for each lift necessary for required compaction. 1) Water from the City of Bozeman’s municipal system may only be obtained from the metered service located at the Vehicle Maintenance Facility, 1814 N. Rouse Ave. The Contractor shall reimburse the City Water Department for the cost of the water used at a rate determined by the Water Department. b. Furnish and use construction equipment and machinery capable of discing, aerating, and mixing fill materials to ensure reasonable uniformity of moisture content throughout fill materials, and to reduce moisture content of borrow materials by air drying, when necessary. c. When subgrade or fill materials requires moisture-conditioning before compaction, fill material shall be sufficiently mixed or worked on the subgrade to ensure uniform moisture content throughout the lift of material to be compacted. d. Materials at moisture content in excess of specified limit shall be dried by appropriate means, such as aeration or stockpiling for gravity drainage and air drying. 3. Compaction: a. Compaction Equipment: 1) Perform compaction with construction equipment and machinery suitable for the type of fill material placed. Unless otherwise required, compact cohesive soils using sheepsfoot compactor, and compact granular materials using pneumatic rollers, vibrators, or other construction equipment or machinery to obtain required density. 2) Select and use equipment capable of providing the minimum density required in the Contract Documents. 3) Use light compaction equipment and machinery, with equipment or machinery gross weight not exceeding 7,000 pounds within horizontal distance of 10 feet from the wall of completed, below-grade manholes, chambers, vaults, and similar items, and walls of adjacent buildings or structures. 4) Furnish and use construction equipment and machinery capable of compacting in restricted areas next to structures and around piping and Underground Facilities. b. Compaction Test Area: 1) Effectiveness of construction equipment and machinery selected by Contractor for compacting, shall be tested at start of compacted fill Work by constructing a small section of fill within the area where fill will be placed. 2) If tests on the test section of fill indicate that required compaction is not obtained, do one or more of the following: increase the quantity of coverages, decrease the lift thicknesses, or use different compactor equipment or machinery. 4. Placement of Lifts and Compaction: a. Place fill materials in horizontal, loose lifts, not exceeding specified thickness prior to compacting. b. Place fill in manner ensuring uniform lift thickness after placing. c. Preparation of surfaces for placement of fill: Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING 31 23 33 - 14 1) Before commencing placing of fill, scarify underlying material to depth of six inches. 2) Where ground surface is steeper than one vertical to four horizontal (“1V:4H”), plow surface to bench and break up surface so that fill material will bind with existing surface. For slopes steeper than 1V:4H and less than 1V:1.5H, bench shall be six feet wide. For slopes steeper than or equal to 1V:1.5H and less than 1V:0.5H, bench shall be four feet wide. d. Mechanically compact each lift, by not less than two complete coverages of compactor. One coverage is defined as the conditions reached when all portions of the fill lift have been subjected to the direct contact of compactor’s compacting surface. e. Compaction of fill materials by inundation with water is unacceptable. 5. Restrictions: a. Do not place fill materials when standing water is present on surface of area where fill will be placed. b. Do not compact fill when standing water is present on the fill to be compacted. c. Do not place or compact fill in frozen condition or on top of frozen material. d. Fill containing organic or deleterious materials or other unacceptable material previously described shall be removed and replaced prior to compaction. 6. If required densities are not obtained because of improper control of placement or compaction procedures, or because of inadequate or improperly functioning compaction equipment or machinery, perform all work necessary to provide required densities. Such work shall include, at no additional cost to Owner, complete removal of unacceptable fill areas and replacement and re-compaction until acceptable fill is provided. 7. Repair, at Contractor’s cost, observed or measured settlement. Make repairs and replacements as necessary and required within 30 days after being so advised by Engineer, unless more-timely action is necessary to avoid or reduce the potential for safety hazards or damage to property. D. Fill Placed in Pipe Trenches: 1. Piping trenches may be backfilled prior to testing of piping, unless nature of test requires observation of pipe or manholes, chambers, vaults, or similar items during testing. Do not construct building or structure over piping until piping has been successfully tested and passed. 2. Pipe Bedding: Pipe bedding material shall be as follows: a. Unless otherwise shown or indicated, install buried piping on not less than six-inch layer of aggregate pipe bedding material underneath piping. b. Pipe bedding material shall extend upward from elevation required immediately above to horizontal centerline associated buried piping. c. Pipe bedding material shall be spread and the surface graded to provide a uniform and continuous support beneath piping at all points between bell holes or pipe joints. d. Install initial layer of pipe bedding material on prepared subgrade and compact as required. Provide appropriate divot in the bedding material to accommodate each pipe bell or joint. Install piping so that pipe barrel carries the weight of each pipe segment, rather than pipe bells or joints bearing the pipe’s weight. e. Slight disturbance of installed pipe bedding material surface during withdrawal of pipe slings or other lifting tackle is acceptable. f. After each pipe’s bedding material has been graded, and the piping has been aligned, joined in accordance with the Contract Documents, and placed in final position on bedding material, provide and compact sufficient pipe trench fill material under and around each side of pipe and back of bell or end thereof to hold piping in proper position and maintain alignment during subsequent pipe jointing and embedment operations. g. Subsequent to forming pipe joint, place additional pipe bedding material, in required lifts, to required top elevation of pipe bedding material. Ensure bedding material is properly and fully placed under pipe “haunches” for proper support of piping. Compact Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING 31 23 33 - 15 lifts of pipe bedding material in accordance with this Article prior to placing subsequent backfill material. 3. Placing and Compacting Pipe Trench Fill: Unless otherwise shown, placing and compacting of pipe trench fill materials shall comply with the following: a. Deposit and compact pipe trench fill material uniformly and simultaneously on each side of piping to prevent lateral displacement of piping. b. Each layer of pipe trench fill material shall be compacted by not less than two complete coverages of all portions of surface of each lift using appropriate compaction equipment or machinery. c. Method of compaction and compaction equipment and machinery used shall be appropriate for material to be compacted and shall not transmit damaging shocks to piping. E. Installation of Flowable Fill, also known as Controlled Low Strength Material (CLSM): 1. Discharge flowable fill from ready-mix delivery vehicle into excavation, or other space to be backfilled with such material, via chutes, pumping, or hand-carried in buckets, in accordance with the Contract Documents (including the Specifications of Division 03 - Concrete) and requirements of flowable fill ready-mix Supplier. 2. Subgrade on which flowable fill is placed shall be free of disturbed or softened material and water. 3. Place flowable fill in lifts not greater than four feet depth. 4. Placing of each lift of flowable fill shall be a continuous operation, to the extent practicable. 5. Place flowable fill in manner that prevents flotation of piping or other damage to the Work, other Underground Facilities, and adjacent property. 6. Cold Weather Placing: a. Do not place flowable fill on frozen subgrade. b. Flowable fill batching, mixing, and placing may be performed when weather conditions are favorable, and ambient air temperature is 34 degrees F and rising. c. At the time of placing, flowable fill must have a temperature of not less than 40 degrees F. d. Discontinue placing flowable fill when ambient air temperature is 38 degrees F or less and falling. 7. After placing flowable fill, allow not less than 12 hours before placing subsequent lift or approved otherwise by Engineer. 8. Prevent contact with flowable fill by construction vehicles and equipment, or other traffic, for not less than 24 hours after placing, or until flowable fill is sufficiently hard to prevent rutting or other damage by vehicles and construction equipment. F. Fill Required Under Subbase for Pavement and Other Traveled Ways: 1. Where bottom of pavement or surfacing of other traveled way will be at elevation equal to or less than preconstruction ground surface, after required excavation and preparation of subgrade, provide required subbase material to required depth. At underside of pavement or other surfacing of traveled way, subbase material shall extend horizontally six inches beyond edges of pavement or other surfacing. Exterior edges of subbase material shall be placed and compacted at uniform slope of one foot vertical-to-one foot horizontal away from top edge of subbase down to subgrade. 2. Where bottom of pavement or surfacing of other traveled way will be at elevation greater than preconstruction ground surface, after required preparation of subgrade, provide required fill material and subbase material to required depth. At underside of pavement or other surfacing of traveled way, subbase material shall extend horizontally six inches beyond edges of pavement or other surfacing. Exterior edges of subbase material and fill material shall be placed and compacted at uniform slope of one foot vertical-to-one foot horizontal away from top edge of subbase down to subgrade. G. Temporary Pavement: Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING 31 23 33 - 16 1. Provide not less than 1.5 inches of temporary bituminous pavement immediately after filling excavations in paved roads and other pavement subject to vehicular traffic, where such pavement will remain permanently. 2. Maintain surface of paved area over the fill in good and safe condition during progress of the Work, and promptly fill depressions over and adjacent to the fill area caused by settlement of fill. 3. Permanent replacement pavement shall be equal to that of the existing roadways, unless otherwise shown or specified. H. Compaction Density Requirements: 1. Compaction Requirements for Sitework (including civil, grading, and underground facilities): LOCATION COMPACTION DENSITY MOISTURE CONTENT Under Pavement, Other Traveled Ways, Curbs, Gutters, Sidewalks, and Buried Utilities (including manholes, chambers, vaults, and similar items): Cohesive soils 95% per ASTM D698 -2 to +3% of optimum Cohesionless soils 75% relative density per ASTM D4253 and ASTM D4254 -2 to +3% of optimum Sitework Not Covered by the Above Category or Classification: Cohesive soils 90% of ASTM D698 -2 to +3% of optimum Cohesionless soils 65% relative density per ASTM D4253 and ASTM D4254 -2 to +3% of optimum 2. Compaction Requirements for Materials Supporting Foundations and Adjacent to Buildings and Structures: LOCATION COMPACTION DENSITY MOISTURE CONTENT Fill supporting foundations and fill adjacent to exterior of buildings and structures, adjacent to walls, piers, and columns See Geotechnical Report. -2 to +2% of optimum 3. Compaction Density and Moisture Requirements for Specific Areas: LOCATION COMPACTION DENSITY MOISTURE CONTENT Outside buildings and structures, under slabs-on-grade See Geotechnical Report. -2 to +2% of optimum 4. Fill Lift Thickness: a. Unless expressly shown or indicated otherwise, place fill in trenches, below piping, below foundations, or under paved areas in horizontal uncompacted layers not exceeding eight (8) inches deep, and thoroughly compact each before next layer is placed. b. In pipe trenches, above elevation of bottom of pipe, horizontal uncompacted layers shall be six (6) inches deep. 5. Fill Moisture Content: Fill shall be wetted and thoroughly mixed to achieve moisture content to within the required range indicated in the applicable table, above, with the following exception(s): a. On-site clayey soils: Optimum to plus three percent (moisture less than optimum is unacceptable). Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING 31 23 33 - 17 6. Replace natural, undisturbed soils or compacted soil subsequently disturbed or removed by construction operations with materials compacted as indicated. 7. Field quality control testing for density; to verify that specified density was obtained, will be performed during each day of compaction Work. Responsibility for field quality control testing is indicated in this Section’s “Field Quality Control” Article. 8. When field quality control testing indicates unsatisfactory compaction, provide additional compaction necessary to obtain the required compaction. Perform additional compaction Work at no additional cost to Owner until required compaction is achieved. Such work includes complete removal of unacceptable (as determined by Engineer) fill areas and replacement and re-compaction until acceptable fill is provided in accordance with the Contract Documents. I. Replacement of Unacceptable Excavated Materials: In cases where over-excavation to replace unacceptable soil materials is required, backfill the excavation to required subgrade with granular structural fill material and thoroughly compact in accordance with applicable table in this provision. Slope the sides of excavation in accordance with the maximum allowable inclinations specified for each element of the Work. 3.7 UNAUTHORIZED EXCAVATION A. Unauthorized Excavation – General: 1. Excavations outside lines and grades shown or indicated and that are not approved by Engineer (including excavations below required subgrade elevation, unless Engineer directs removal of unsuitable subgrade material), together with removing and disposing of the associated material, shall be at Contractor's cost and risk. 2. Fill unauthorized excavations with properly compacted granular structural fill material at Contractor’s cost. 3.8 GRADING A. Grading – General: 1. Uniformly grade areas within limits of grading under this Section, including adjacent transition areas. 2. Smooth subgrade surfaces within specified tolerances, compact with uniform levels or slopes between points where elevations are shown, or between such points and existing grades. B. Grading Outside Building Lines: 1. Grade areas adjacent to building lines to drain away from buildings and structures. 2. Grade to prevent ponding of water. Provide grades and slopes as shown on the Drawings and to allow effective drainage to proper drainage routes, such as catch basins, ditches or swales intended to convey storm water, and other storm water drainage routes. Where intended grade for effective drainage is unclear, promptly submit to Engineer request for interpretation and obtain Engineer’s interpretation or clarification before proceeding, 3. Provide final surfaces free of irregular surface changes, in accordance with the following: a. Grassed Areas and Areas Covered with Gravel, Stone, Wood Chips, or Other Special Cover: Finish areas to receive topsoil or special cover to within not more than one inch above or below required subgrade elevations. Requirements for topsoil and finish grading are in Section 31 22 19 - Finish Grading. b. Sidewalks: Shape surface of areas under sidewalks to line, grade, and cross section, with finish surface not more than one inch above or below required subgrade elevation. c. Pavement (including hard-surfaced pavement and areas with stone surfacing): Shape surface of areas under pavement to line, grade, and cross section, with finish surface not more than 0.5-inch above or below required subgrade elevation. C. Grading Surface of Fill Under Concrete Slabs-on-Grade: 1. Grade smooth and even, free of voids, compacted as specified, and to required elevation. 2. Provide final grades within tolerance of 0.5-inch when tested with a ten-foot straight edge. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING 31 23 33 - 18 3.9 DISPOSAL OF EXCAVATED SPOIL MATERIALS A. Spoil Disposal - General: 1. Contractor shall haul away excavated material that does not comply with requirements for fill, or is in excess of quantity required for fill. 2. Disposal of materials shall comply with Laws and Regulations, at no additional cost to Owner. 3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Site Tests and Inspections: 1. Testing Laboratory: a. Owner will employ a testing laboratory to perform field quality control testing. b. Testing Laboratory Scope: 1) Perform field moisture content tests (in accordance with ASTM D2216 or ASTM D6938) and density tests (in accordance with ASTM D1556 or ASTM D6938) to verify that required compaction of fill materials was provided. 2) Tests of actual unconfined compressive strength or bearing tests (in accordance with ASTM D2850 or ASTM D2166) on each stratum. 3) Furnish to Engineer and Contractor written results of each test. c. Authority and Duties of Testing Laboratory: 1) Testing laboratory representatives (“technician”) shall inspect the materials in the field, perform testing, and report findings to Engineer and Contractor. When the Work is defective, technician will direct attention of Engineer and Contractor to such defective Work. 2) Technician shall not supervise performance of any of Contractor’s Work. Technician shall not perform other duties for Contractor. 3) Work will be tested and inspected by testing laboratory as the Work progresses, but failure to detect defective Work (including defective materials) shall not, in any way, prevent later rejection when defect is discovered, nor shall it obligate Engineer for Substantial Completion or final acceptance. Technicians are not authorized to revoke, alter, relax, enlarge, or release requirements of the Contract Documents, or to approve or accept any portion of the Work. 2. Responsibilities and Duties of Contractor: a. Use of testing laboratory or geotechnical consultant in no way relieves Contractor of responsibility to provide Work in compliance with the Contract Documents. b. When Owner furnishes services of testing laboratory, geotechnical consultant, or any combination thereof, for trenching, backfilling, and related earth Work, Owner and Engineer do not represent that the sampling and testing performed by Owner-hired testing laboratory or observations by Owner-hired geotechnical consultants, is sufficient for Contractor’s purposes, or to monitor all aspects of the trenching, backfilling, and related earth Work. If additional quality control is needed to verify that the Work performed and materials delivered to the Site are in accordance with the Contract Documents, Contractor may retain its own, independent testing laboratory to perform additional sampling and testing for Contractor’s purposes. c. To facilitate testing laboratory and geotechnical consultant, Contractor shall advise testing laboratory and geotechnical consultant not less than 24 hours in advance of filling operations to allow for completion of field quality control testing and for assignment of personnel. d. Contractor shall be responsible for providing required compaction for fill and other earthwork. Contractor shall control construction operations by performing confirming tests to verify that Contractor has complied with the Contract Documents relative to compaction and moisture content. e. Contractor shall demonstrate adequacy of compaction equipment and procedures before exceeding one or more of the following quantities of earthwork. Each test location shall include tests for each layer, type, or class of fill to finish grade. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING 31 23 33 - 19 1) Trench backfill tests shall be done within the first 100 feet of a mainline trench operation and at no more than 200-foot intervals thereafter. 2) 10 cubic yards of Granular Under-Slab Fill. 3) 10 cubic yards of Granular Structural Fill. 4) 100 cubic yards of Suitable Soil Material. 3. Testing laboratory will inspect and indicate acceptable subgrades and fill layers before construction work is performed thereon. Testing of subgrades and fill layers shall be as follows: a. Trenches for Underground Facilities (including buried ductbanks): 1) In Open Fields: Two locations every 1,000 linear feet. 2) Along Dirt or Gravel Roads or Off Traveled Right-of-Way: Two locations every 500 linear feet. b. For Granular Under-Slab Fill: Once per lift for each 1,000 square feet placed and compacted. c. For Granular Structural Fill: Once per lift for each 1,000 square feet placed and compacted. d. For Soil Structural Fill: 1) For backfilling trenches directly adjacent to buildings or structures, on 30-foot intervals on all sides of the building or structure for every compacted lift, but not less than one per lift on each side of the building or structure for buildings or structures less than 60 feet long on a side. 2) For material not used as fill against buildings or structures, once per lift for each 1,000 square feet placed and compacted. e. For Suitable Soil Material: One per 1,000 square feet on every compacted lift. 4. Periodic compliance tests will be made by Engineer to verify that compaction is in accordance with the Contract Documents, at no cost to Contractor. Contractor shall remove overburden above the level at which Engineer wishes to test and shall fill and re-compact the material after testing is complete. B. Defective Work: 1. If testing laboratory reports or inspections indicate subgrade, fill, or bedding compaction less than specified density, Contractor shall remove unacceptable materials as necessary and replace with specified materials and provide additional compaction at Contractor’s cost until subgrades, bedding, and fill are acceptable. 2. Costs for retesting of subgrade, fill, or bedding materials that did not originally comply with the Contract Documents, including required density, shall be paid by Contractor. 3.11 RESTORATION A. Restoration – General: 1. Perform finish grading, including providing topsoil, in accordance with Section 31 22 19 - Finish Grading. 2. Provide replacement paving, sidewalks, curbs, gutters, and similar items in accordance with the Contract Documents including the Specifications of Division 32 - Exterior Improvements. 3. Restore landscaping including lawn and meadow areas, in accordance with the Contract Documents including the Specifications of Division 32 - Exterior Improvements. END OF SECTION Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 This page intentionally left blank. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 DIVI SION 32 EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 This page intentionally left blank. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents SEEDING, SODDING AND LANDSCAPING 32 92 00 - 1 SECTION 32 92 00 SEEDING, SODDING AND LANDSCAPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Seeding, sodding and landscape planting: a. Soil preparation. b. Native grass seeding. B. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Section 31 22 19 - Finish Grading. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards: 1. American Nursery and Landscape Association/American National Standards Institute (ANLA/ANSI): a. Z60.1, American Standard for Nursery Stock. 2. AOAC International (AOAC). 3. ASTM International (ASTM): a. D2028, Standard Specification for Cutback Asphalt (Rapid-Curing Type). b. D5276, Standard Test Method for Drop Test of Loaded Containers by Free Fall. B. Quality Control: 1. Fertilizer: a. If Engineer determines fertilizer requires sampling and testing to verify quality, testing will be done at Contractor's expense, in accordance with current methods of the AOAC. b. Upon completion of Project, a final check of total quantities of fertilizer used will be made against total area seeded. c. If minimum rates of application have not been met, Contractor will be required to distribute additional quantities to make up minimum application specified. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. Layout drawings: a. Scaled site plan (scale 1 inch = 20 feet or equal to scale of Project site plan Drawing) on reproducible Drawing to show: 1) Structures, sidewalks, pavement, and fences. 2) Limits of seeded, sodded, and mulched areas. 2. Product technical data including: a. Acknowledgement that products submitted meet requirements of standards referenced. b. Manufacturer's installation instructions. c. Signed copies of vendor's statement for seed mixture required, stating botanical and common name, place of origin, strain, percentage of purity, percentage of germination, and amount of Pure Live Seed (PLS) per bag. d. Type of herbicide to be used during first growing season to contain annual weeds and application rate. e. Source and location of sod, plants, and plant material, as per Paragraph 3.3A. 3. Certification that each container of seed delivered will be labeled in accordance with Federal and State Seed Laws and equals or exceeds Specification requirements. B. Informational Submittals: 1. Copies of invoices for fertilizer used on Project showing grade furnished, along with certification of quality and warranty. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents SEEDING, SODDING AND LANDSCAPING 32 92 00 - 2 1.4 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Installation Schedule: 1. Provide schedule showing when trees, shrubs, groundcovers and other plant materials are anticipated to be planted. 2. Show schedule of when lawn type and other grass areas are anticipated to be planted. 3. Indicate planting schedules in relation to schedule for irrigation system installation, finish grading and topsoiling. 4. Indicate anticipated dates Engineer will be required to review installation for initial acceptance and final acceptance. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS AND SUPPLIERS A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the manufacturers and suppliers listed in the applicable Articles below are acceptable. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Seed Quality: 1. Fresh, clean, new-crop seed labeled in accordance with USDA Rules and Regulations under the Federal Seed Act in effect on date of bidding. 2. Provide seed of species, proportions, and minimum percentages of purity, germination and maximum percentage of weed seed as specified. 3. Approval of all seed for use shall be based on the accumulative total of PLS specified for each phase of work. B. Native Grass Seeding: Certified seed of locally adapted strains. C. Mulch: 1. For seeded areas: a. Clean, seed-free, threshed straw of oats, wheat, barley, rye, beans, peanuts, or other locally available mulch material which does not contain an excessive quantity of matured seeds of noxious weeds or other species that will grow or be detrimental to seeding, or provide a menace to surrounding land. b. Do not use material which is fresh or excessively brittle, or which is decomposed and will smother or retard growth of grass. 2. Native grass seeded areas: Weed-free hay, excluding brome or bluegrass hay, used on slopes 4:1 or greater. D. Water: 1. Water free from substances harmful to grass or sod growth. 2. Provide water from source approved prior to use. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SOIL PREPARATION A. General: 1. Limit preparation to areas which will be planted soon after. 2. Provide facilities to protect and safeguard all persons on or about premises. 3. Verify location and existence of all underground utilities. a. Take necessary precaution to protect existing utilities from damage due to construction activity. b. Repair all damages to utility items at sole expense. 4. Provide facilities such as protective fences and/or watchmen to protect work from vandalism. a. Contractor to be responsible for vandalism until acceptance of work in whole or in part. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents SEEDING, SODDING AND LANDSCAPING 32 92 00 - 3 B. Native Grass Seeding: 1. Seeding without cover crop: a. Plow areas to be seeded to shallow depth as soon as ground can be worked without clodding. b. Leave ground fallow until weeds germinate, approximately 3 to 4 weeks later. c. Disc entire area again to turn over weeds. d. Disc at least twice prior to planting. e. Cultipack entire area immediately following final disking. 2. Seeding with cover crop: a. Plant cover crop (4 to 8 pounds per acre in rows not exceeding 42 inches width) over all areas to be seeded. (optimum planting time - June 1 through July 15). b. Allow cover crop to mature and harvest completely leaving stubble at least 18 inches in field. c. Field is then ready for seeding of native grasses. 3. Leave surface (seedbed) hard to discourage weed growth and erosion. a. Ground should be undisturbed and uncultivated. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Native Grass Seeding: 1. Planting seasons: a. Warm-season grasses: Late spring or early summer; avoid late summer or fall planting. b. Cool-season grasses: Early spring or early fall, before or after hot weather. 2. Seed with a grass drill. a. Operate drill as near to contour as practical (a Nisbet grass drill has been proven to be successful in this operation). 3. Areas of 1 acre or less may be sown by hand-broadcasting, mixing seed with generous amount of damp sand to ensure even distribution. a. Harrow or rake seed into ground following seeding to minimum 1/4 inches and maximum 1 inch depth 4. Seed grasses and forbs at rates prescribed in previous table. a. Minimum seeding rate is 20 PLS/SQFT. 5. If area is seeded without cover crop, protect newly seeded areas from erosion by mulching with weed-free straw in a continuous blanket using 2 tons per acre and anchor to ground with rolling coulter or a wheatland land packer. 6. Provide initial watering after installation as appropriate for planting conditions. 3.3 MAINTENANCE AND REPLACEMENT A. General: 1. Begin maintenance of planted areas immediately after each portion is planted and continue until final acceptance or for a specific time period as stated below, whichever is the longer. 2. Provide and maintain temporary piping, hoses, and watering equipment as required to convey water from water sources and to keep planted areas uniformly moist as required for proper growth. 3. Protection of new materials: a. Provide barricades, coverings or other types of protection necessary to prevent damage to existing improvements indicated to remain. b. Repair and pay for all damaged items. 4. Replace unacceptable materials with materials and methods identical to the original specifications unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. B. Native Grass Seeding: 1. Maintain all seeded areas for one (1) year after planting is complete. 2. Do not mow bed native grass. 3. When weeds are shading out 70% of (minimum 6 inches) native grass seed, shred weeds back to height of seedlings with a rotary shredder. 4. Do not allow weeds to exceed a height of 8 inches. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents SEEDING, SODDING AND LANDSCAPING 32 92 00 - 4 5. Herbicide (1/2 to 1 pound active ingredient per acre) may be used to control weed growth after the first year. a. Do not apply until weeds are 40% broadleaf, seedlings at least 1 inch high and 2-4 leaf stage. b. If herbicide is used, apply twice. 6. Water according to need to maintain survival of planting. 7. Regrade and replant eroded or bare areas evident at end of two year period. END OF SECTION Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 DIVI SION 33 UTILITIES Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 This page intentionally left blank. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents POLYVINYL CHLORIDE GRAVITY SEWER PIPE 33 05 31.11 - 1 SECTION 33 05 31.11 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE GRAVITY SEWER PIPE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. PVC gravity sewer pipe. B. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Section 31 23 33 - Trenching and Backfilling. 2. Section 40 05 01 - Common Work Results for Process Piping. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. See Specification Section 40 05 01. B. Referenced Standards: 1. ASTM International (ASTM): a. PVC (polyvinyl chloride) materials: 1) D1784, Standard Specification for Rigid Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Compounds and Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds. 2) D2564, Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Piping Systems 3) D2729, Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings 4) D3034, Standard Specification for Type PSM Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings. 5) D3212, Standard Specification for Joints for Drain and Sewer Plastic Pipes Using Flexible Elastomeric Seals. 6) F477, Standard Specification for Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets) for Joining Plastic Pipe. 7) F679, Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Large-Diameter Plastic Gravity Sewer Pipe and Fittings. 8) F1336, Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Gasketed Sewer Fittings 9) D2321, Standard Practice for Underground Installation of Thermoplastic Pipe for Sewers and Other Gravity-Flow Applications. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. DR: Dimension Ratio, Outside Diameter/Minimum Wall Thickness, both in inches. B. Diametral Deflection: reduction in diameter caused by earth and surcharge loads acting on the installed pipe. C. PS: Pipe Stiffness, PSI. D. SDR: Standard Dimension Ratio. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with Section 40 05 01, relative to required Submittals. B. Where an option for joint type is specified, submit jointing method(s) selected and where each will be used. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents POLYVINYL CHLORIDE GRAVITY SEWER PIPE 33 05 31.11 - 2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. JM Eagle 2. Chevron Phillips Chemical Company LP - Performance Pipe Division (DriscoPlex). 3. WL Plastics. 4. Pipeline Plastics. 5. Or Approved Equal. 2.2 SEWER PIPING A. Materials: 1. PVC pipe and fittings: rigid, unplasticized polyvinyl chloride (PVC) made of PVC plastic having a cell classification of 12454-B or 12454-C per ASTM D1784. B. Pipe: 1. ASTM D3034 a. SDR 26. 2. Ensure impact strengths and pipe stiffnesses are in full compliance to these Specifications. C. Joints 1. Elastomeric gasket joint meeting requirements of ASTM D3212. a. Gaskets (seals) per ASTM F477. D. Fittings: 1. Elastomeric Joints: Per ASTM D3034. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify each length of pipe clearly at intervals of 5 feet or less per governing ASTM Standard for each type of pipe used. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. See Section 31 23 33. B. Install pipe and fittings in accordance with ASTM D2321, the above referenced Specification Sections and as recommended by the manufacturer. C. Infiltration and Exfiltration: 1. Infiltration and Exfiltration maximum rates: See Section 40 05 01 a. Observe full instructions of the Engineer for carrying of testing procedures. b. Perform tests only during presence of the Engineer or his authorized representative. 2. Should any test on any section of pipeline disclose either infiltration rates greater than allowed or disclose air loss rate greater than that permitted, locate and repair the defective joints or pipes at no cost to Owner and retest until requirements stated are met. D. Diametral Deflection: 1. After backfilling, check each section of pipe for diametral deflection by pulling a mandrel through the pipe. 2. Pipe with deflection exceeding 3% of the inside diameter: remove and replace to provide a deflection of less than 3%. 3. Retest any repaired pipe. END OF SECTION Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents PVC PRESSURE PIPE (AWWA C900) 33 05 31.16 - 1 SECTION 33 05 31.16 PVC PRESSURE PIPE (AWWA C900) PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Pressure-rated polyvinyl chloride (PVC) pipe, including: a. AWWA C900 pipe. b. Fittings. c. Pipe joints, gaskets, proprietary restrained joints, installation of restrained joints, and appurtenances. B. Related Requirements include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Section 10 14 00 - Identification Devices. 2. Section 31 23 33 - Trenching and Backfilling. 3. Section 40 05 01 - Common Work Results for Process Piping. 1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and Payment: 1. Requirements concerning measurement and payment for buried PVC piping required by this Section are in Section 01 22 00 - Measurement and Payment. 1.3 REFERENCES A. Abbreviations: 1. Indicated below are selected abbreviations used in this Section: a. DIOD: Ductile iron outside diameter, which equals cast iron pipe outside diameter. b. DR: Dimension ratio, which equals pipes outside diameter divided by pipes minimum wall thickness, where units are in inches. c. HDB: Hydrostatic design basis in accordance with ASTM D2837. d. IPS: Iron pipe size. e. PC: Pressure class. f. SDR: Standard dimension ratio. SDR differs from DR only in that SDR is used for a specific series of preferred numbers, known as Renard Numbers. DR is more general than SDR and refers to any ratio of outside diameter to wall thickness, not necessarily following Renard Numbers. B. Reference Standards: Standards referenced in this section include, but are not necessarily limited to, the following: 1. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME): a. B1.1, Unified Inch Screw Threads (UN and UNR Thread Form). 2. ASTM International (ASTM): a. A193, Standard Specification for Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting for High Temperature or High Pressure Service and Other Special Purpose Applications. b. A194, Standard Specification for Carbon Steel, Alloy Steel, and Stainless Steel Nuts for Bolts for High Pressure or High Temperature Service, or Both. c. A307, Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts, Studs, and Threaded Rod 60,000 PSI Tensile Strength. d. B695, Standard Specification for Coatings of Zinc Mechanically Deposited on Iron and Steel. e. D1505, Standard Test Method for Density of Plastics by the Density-Gradient Technique. f. D1598, Standard Test Method for Time-to-Failure of Plastic Pipe Under Constant Internal Pressure. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents PVC PRESSURE PIPE (AWWA C900) 33 05 31.16 - 2 g. D1599, Standard Test Method for Resistance to Short-Time Hydraulic Pressure of Plastic Pipe, Tubing, and Fittings. h. D1784, Standard Classification System and Basis for Specification for Rigid Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Compounds and Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds. i. D2290, Standard Test Method for Apparent Hoop Tensile Strength of Plastic or Reinforced Plastic Pipe. j. D2837, Standard Test Method for Obtaining Hydrostatic Design Basis for Thermoplastic Pipe Materials or Pressure Design Basis for Thermoplastic Pipe Products. k. F477, Standard Specification for Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets) for Joining Plastic Pipe. 3. American Water Works Association (AWWA). a. C104 (ANSI A21.4) - Standard for Cement–Mortar Lining for Ductile-Iron Pipe and Fittings. b. C105 (ANSI A21.5) - Standard for Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile-Iron Pipe Systems. c. C110 (ANSI A21.10) - Standard for Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Fittings. d. C116 (ANSI A21.16) - Protective Fusion-Bonded Coatings for the Interior and Exterior Surfaces of Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Fittings. e. C153 (ANSI A21.53) - Standard for Ductile-Iron Compact Fittings. f. C605 - Underground Installation of Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) and Molecularly Oriented Polyvinyl Chloride (PVCO) Pressure Pipe and Fittings. g. C900, Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe and Fabricated Fittings, 4 In. Through 60 In. (100 mm Through 1,500 mm). h. C907, Injection-Molded Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Fittings, 4 In. Through 12 In. (100 mm Through 300 mm). 4. Plastic Pipe Institute (PPI): a. TR-3, Policies and Procedures for Developing Hydrostatic Design Basis (HDB), Hydrostatic Design Stresses (HDS), Pressure Design Basis (PDB), Strength Design Basis (SDB), Minimum Required Strength (MRS) Ratings, and Categorized Required Strength (CRS) for Thermoplastic Piping Materials or Pipe. 5. National Sanitation Foundation International (NSF): a. 61, Drinking Water System Components – Health Effects. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. PVC Pipe Manufacturer: a. Obtain PVC pipe and PVC fittings (when PVC fittings are allowed by this Section) from a single manufacturer, unless otherwise acceptable to Engineer. b. PVC pipe manufacturer shall be a business regularly engaged in manufacturing C900 PVC pipe of the sizes and pressure classes required for the Work. c. Upon Engineer’s request, submit documentation of manufacturer’s prior experience furnishing PVC pipe of the sizes and pressure classes required, on not less than five other, completed projects, located in the United States within five years of the Effective Date of the Contract. d. Manufacturer’s Quality Assurance and Quality Control Programs: 1) PVC pipe manufacturer shall have, and comply with, formal, written quality assurance (QA) and quality control (QC) programs as part of manufacturer’s routine business. 2) PVC pipe manufacturer shall obtain, record, and maintain, for not less than five years following manufacture, QA and QC records for the pipe and other items furnished for the Project. Promptly furnish copies of such records upon Engineer’s or Owners request. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents PVC PRESSURE PIPE (AWWA C900) 33 05 31.16 - 3 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Product Data: a. Manufacturer’s published catalog information and specifications for each size and type of PVC piping required, including pipe, fittings, jointing materials, and appurtenances. b. Clearly mark on product data Submittals proposed items and clearly indicate, via cross- outs or other method, items not proposed for the Work. c. Clearly indicate in product data Submittal the reference standards with which pipe and appurtenances comply. Submittal shall include PVC materials certification required in this Section’s “Source Quality Control” Article. d. Where couplings are required, submit coupling manufacturer’s catalog information and specifications for the specific couplings proposed. B. Informational Submittals; Submit the following: 1. Supplier Instructions: a. Submit manufacturer’s written instructions for handling, storing, and installing pipe, fittings, and other piping materials furnished. 2. Source Quality Control Submittals: a. Results of tests, inspections, and other quality control activities required by the Contract Documents and performed at the place of production or fabrication. 3. Field Quality Control Submittals: a. Results of tests, inspections, and other quality control activities required by the Contract Documents and performed at the Site. 4. Qualifications Statements: a. Piping materials manufacturer, when requested by Engineer. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Storage and Handling Requirements: 1. During handling and installation, avoid conditions where pipe bends excessively and avoid imparting kinks in the pipe. 2. Handle piping materials in manner that does not scratch, score, or damage pipe, fittings, couplings, and appurtenances. 3. During handling, do not drop pipe, fittings, or appurtenances. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Manufacturer’s: Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, products of the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. PVC Pipe and Fittings: a. JM Eagle. b. Westlake Pipe & Fittings. c. Diamond Plastics. d. Sanderson Pipe. e. Or Approved Equal. B. Description: 1. Contractor shall provide all labor, materials, equipment, construction equipment and machinery, tools, services, and incidentals necessary, required, or both, for furnishing and installing C900 PVC piping, in accordance with the Contract Documents. 2. Required locations of such piping are shown on the Drawings. C. Performance Criteria 1. Comply with piping schedule in Section 40 05 01 - Common Work Results for Process Piping. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents PVC PRESSURE PIPE (AWWA C900) 33 05 31.16 - 4 D. Materials and Fabrication: 1. Materials - General 2. Pipe: a. Comply with AWWA C900. b. PVC: Physical and chemical properties complying with ASTM D1784 cell class 12454. c. Minimum HDB of 4,000 psig at 73.4 degrees F when tested in accordance with PPI TR- 3. d. Clearly mark pipe in accordance with AWWA C900. e. Service Indication: 1) Provide integral color or longitudinal color banding at 180 degrees apart. a) Sewer: Green. f. Pipe Joints: 1) Push-on joints (gasketed bell and spigot) in accordance with ASTM D3139. Where AWWA C900 PVC pipe will connect to fittings with mechanical joints, provide adapters and restraints as necessary, required, or both for such connections. 3. Gaskets: a. Provide elastomeric gaskets that comply with ASTM F477. 4. Molded PVC fittings: a. Comply with AWWA C907. b. Provide fittings of same material and thickness as connected pipe. c. When molded PVC fittings are not available in the same DR rating required for the connected pipe, provide molded PVC fittings one DR lower (thicker) than connected pipe. d. Clearly mark fittings in accordance with AWWA C907. e. Joints of molded PVC fittings: Push-on joints (gasketed bell and spigot) in accordance with ASTM D3139. f. PVC fittings fabricated by Contractor or Subcontractor are unacceptable. PVC fittings, where allowed, must be molded fittings manufactured by entity complying with qualifications requirements of this Section. 5. The use of ductile iron mechanical joint fittings (complying with AWWA C110) will be allowed as requested. 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Products and Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following are acceptable: 1. Proprietary Joint Restraints (Push-on): a. EBAA Iron (Split Serrated Restraint Harness or Restraint Harness for AWWA C900 PVC Pipe). 2. Proprietary Joint Restraints at Mechanical Joint Ductile Iron Fittings (if elected to be used by the Contractor): a. EBAA Iron (MEGALUG). b. Or Approved Equal. B. Materials: 1. Lubricants for gaskets and jointing: a. Provide lubricant that is non-toxic, does not support bacteria growth, does not degrade gasket or other adjacent materials, and imparts no taste or odor to contents of pipe. b. For mechanical joints, provide vegetable oil as lubricant for bolts. 2. Polyethylene encasement for DI fittings: AWWA C105/A21.5. 2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Factory Tests and Inspections: 1. PVC materials delivered to pipe manufacturer: a. Inspect for density in accordance with ASTM D1505, and carbon and color containment. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents PVC PRESSURE PIPE (AWWA C900) 33 05 31.16 - 5 b. Submit certification from material Supplier that PVC materials comply with ASTM D1784 on a cell classification of 12454. c. PVC pipe manufacturer shall verify certifications prior to incorporating PVC materials into pipe and fittings. 2. Pipe manufacturing equipment: a. Qualify each extrusion line and molding machine to produce pressure rated pipe and fittings by taking representative production samples and performing sustained pressure tests in accordance with ASTM D1598. 3. PVC pipe and fittings: a. Manufacturer shall inspect for diameter, wall thickness, length, straightness, out-of- roundness, concentricity, toe-in, inside and outside surface finish, markings, and end cut. b. Tests to determine density, carbon content, and carbon dispersion. c. Test representative samples, obtained in accordance with Section 5 of AWWA C900, of the pipe furnished to determine hoop tensile strength and ductility by either quick burst in accordance with ASTM D1599 or ring tensile in accordance with ASTM D2290. 4. Factory inspection: a. PVC pipe manufacturer’s production and quality assurance facilities shall be open and available for inspection by Owner and Engineer. 5. Submit results of required factory tests and inspections, and obtain Engineer’s acceptance, prior to shipping PVC pipe and related items from the factory. B. Defective Work: 1. Do not ship from the factory, or otherwise deliver to the Site, defective materials and items. 2. Pipe, fittings, and other items delivered with scored, gouged, or otherwise marred surfaces are unacceptable. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Installing the Work constitutes Contractor’s approval of underlying work, subgrade, and field conditions prevailing at the time of the Work. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Installation Requirements: 1. Installation – General: a. Provide PVC piping in accordance with the Contract Documents, Laws and Regulations, applicable permits issued by authorities having jurisdiction, and written instructions of material manufacturers. In the event of conflict between such requirements, obtain interpretation or clarification from Engineer before performing the Work. b. Installation of AWWA C900 PVC piping shall be in accordance with AWWA C605, unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents. c. Installation requirements applicable to piping required in this Section are set forth in Section 40 05 01 - Common Work Results for Process Piping, and this Section. d. Wrap buried ductile iron fittings with polyethylene, in accordance with AWWA C105. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field Tests and Inspections: 1. “Out-of-Roundness” Deflection Testing (Mandrel Testing): a. Perform “out-of-roundness” testing for AWWA C900 PVC pipe in accordance with relevant provisions of Section 40 05 01 – Common Work Results for Process Piping. 2. Hydrostatic Testing: a. Hydrostatically test installed piping in accordance with Section 40 05 01 – Common Work Results for Process Piping, and AWWA C605. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents PVC PRESSURE PIPE (AWWA C900) 33 05 31.16 - 6 b. Provide suitable end caps, plugs, or combination thereof on each end of piping segment being tested. 3. Disinfection: a. For piping and appurtenances that will convey potable water. Disinfect in accordance with Section 40 05 01 - Common Work Results for Process Piping. 4. Water Quality Sampling and Testing: a. For piping and appurtenances that will convey potable water. Sampling and water quality testing shall be in accordance with Section 40 05 01 - Common Work Results for Process Piping. B. Defective Work: 1. Piping will be defective Work when piping is damaged or inconsistent with the Contract Documents, including failure to successfully pass required tests and inspections. 2. Field repairs of AWWA C900 piping are unacceptable, except that portions of installed, damaged straight pipe may be cut, removed, and replaced with pipe complying with the Contract Documents. 3. For mechanical joints, if joint leaks, loosen or remove fastening hardware, reset or replace gaskets, reinstall or retighten fastening hardware, and retest piping until acceptable results are achieved. END OF SECTION Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents PRECAST CONCRETE STRUCTURES 33 05 61 - 1 SECTION 33 05 61 PRECAST CONCRETE STRUCTURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Precast concrete round manhole structures and appurtenant items. B. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Section 03 21 00 - Reinforcement. 2. Section 03 31 30 - Concrete Materials and Proportioning. 3. Section 31 23 33 - Trenching and Backfilling. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards: 1. ASTM International (ASTM): a. A48/A48M, Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings. b. C150/C150M, Standard Specification for Portland Cement. c. C478, Standard Specification for Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole Sections. d. C923, Standard Specification for Resilient Connectors Between Reinforced Concrete Manhole Structures, Pipes, and Laterals. e. D1227, Standard Specification for Emulsified Asphalt Used as a Protective Coating for Roofing. f. D4586, Standard Specification for Asphalt Roof Cement, Asbestos-Free. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. Product technical data including: a. Acknowledgement that products submitted meet requirements of standards referenced. b. Manufacturer's installation instructions. 2. Fabrication and/or layout drawings: a. Include detailed diagrams of manholes showing typical components and dimensions, reinforcements and other details. b. Itemize, on separate schedule, sectional breakdown of each manhole structure with all components and refer to drawing identification number or notation. c. Indicate knockout elevations for all piping entering each manhole. 3. Buoyancy uplift and structural calculations. 4. Drawings shall be signed and sealed by a Professional Engineer registered in state corresponding to the project location. B. Unless approved prior to submittal, submit all products from this Specification Section in one complete submittal package. Include all products and accessories together. 1.4 SITE CONDITIONS A. See Section 02 06 13 – Geotechnical Baseline Report. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Manhole rings/covers:: Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents PRECAST CONCRETE STRUCTURES 33 05 61 - 2 a. D&L Foundry: 1) A-1178. b. East Jordan Iron Works: 1) 3771/3772 Series Ring Cover. c. Or Approved Equal. 2. Premolded joint compound: a. ConSeal. b. RAM-NEK. c. Or Approved Equal. 2.2 SANITARY SEWER WET WELL AND MANHOLE STRUCTURE COMPONENTS A. Wet Well Components: 1. Reinforcement: ASTM C478. 2. Valley Center Lift Station Wet Well: a. Minimum wall thickness: 12 inches. b. Minimum top slab thickness: 12 inches. c. Minimum base thickness: 18 inches d. Provide wet well sections with 120 inches inside dimensions. 3. Provide the following components: a. Base (precast) bottom section or (cast-in-place). b. Precast bottom section(s). c. Precast barrel section(s). d. Precast flat top slab. 4. Special Coatings, Joint Treatment, and Admixtures: a. Joints shall be sealed using preformed flexible joint sealants conforming to ASTM C990. The minimum bead dimension: 1 inch. 1) ConSeal CS-202. 2) RAM-NEK. 3) Or Approved Equal. b. External joints shall be waterproofed using membrane wrap conforming to ASTM C877. Minimum width: 6 inches. 1) ConSeal CS-212 2) Or Approved Equal. c. Access Door: 1) See Section 08 31 00. B. Manhole Components: 1. Reinforcement: ASTM C478 2. Minimum wall thickness: 6 inches. 3. Minimum base thickness: 12 inches. 4. Provide the following components for each manhole structure: a. Base (precast) with integral bottom section or cast-in-place. b. Precast bottom section(s). c. Precast barrel section(s). d. Precast eccentric transition section. e. Precast adjuster ring(s). 5. Cone sections shall be eccentric, unless otherwise specified. 6. Provide manhole section with 60 inch inside dimension. 7. Special Coatings and Joint Treatment: a. Joints shall be sealed using preformed flexible joint sealants conforming to ASTM C990. The minimum bead dimension: 1 inch. 1) ConSeal CS-202. 2) RAM-NEK. 3) Or Approved Equal. b. External Joints shall be waterproofed using a membrane wrap conforming to ASTM C877. Minimum width: 6 inches. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents PRECAST CONCRETE STRUCTURES 33 05 61 - 3 1) ConSeal CS-212. 2) Or Approved Equal. 8. Precast sections: a. May be provided with 3500 LB breakaway lift inserts and 4500 LB lift-eye pin bolts. b. Holes extending through wall will not be acceptable. c. Furnish manholes meeting ASTM C478,”"Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole Sections”, specifically including mandatory rejection requirements. 9. Steps 1) Furnish non-corrosive steps, 12 inches in width, of ½ inch steel rod encased with polypropylene. 2) Assure steps withstand 400 LB vertical loads and 1000 LB pull-out resistance. 3) Step spacing shall be a maximum 16 inches apart. C. Flexible Pipe to Manhole Connector: a. Selection of the proper accessories for the manhole and pipe requirement, and installation thereof, shall be in strict conformance with the recommendations of the connector manufacturer. Any dead-end pipe stubs installed in connectors shall be restrained from movement per ASTM C923. b. The connector shall be the sole element relied on to assure a flexible watertight seal of the pipe to the structure. The rubber connector shall be constructed solely of synthetic or natural rubber, shall meet/exceed the requirements of ASTM C923, and shall have a minimum tensile strength of 1600 PSI. c. Acceptable manufacturers include, but not limited to: 1) Kor-N-Seal 2) A-Lok 3) Or Approved Equal. D. Nonpressure Type Frames and Cover: 1. Cast iron frame and covers: ASTM A48/A48M, Class 35 (minimum). 2. Ductile iron frame and covers: ASTM A536. 3. Use only cast ductile iron of best quality, free from imperfections and blow holes. 4. Furnish frame and cover of heavy-duty construction a minimum total weight of 450 pounds. 5. Machine all horizontal surfaces. 6. Ensure minimum clear opening of 24 inches diameter. E. Wet Well and Manhole Concrete: 1. Provide all wet well and manholes constructed with Portland ASTM C150/C150M, Type I or II cement with a tricalcium aluminate content not to exceed 8%. 2. Mix aggregate shall comply with ASTM C478 and Section 03 41 33 – Precast and Prestressed Concrete. F. Non-shrink Grout: 1. Non-shrink grout shall conform to ASTM C1107, Grades B and C for wastewater applications. 2. Non-shrink grout shall be trowelable mix, in plastic and show no expansion after set (as tested per ASTM C827). Non-shrink grout shall develop a compressive strength not less than 3,000 PSI within 24 hours per ASTM C109. The placement time shall be not less than 45 minutes based on initial set per ASTM C191. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 WET WELL AND MANHOLE CONSTRUCTION A. General: 1. Install wet well and manhole materials in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. 2. Base (precast) bottom section or cast-in-place. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents PRECAST CONCRETE STRUCTURES 33 05 61 - 4 3. Make inverts with a semi-circular bottom conforming to the inside contour of the adjacent sewer sections. Shape inverts accurately and steel trowel finish. a. For changes in direction of the sewer and entering branches into the manhole, make a circular curve in the manhole invert using as large a radius as manhole inside diameter will permit. B. Build each manhole to dimensions shown on plans and at such elevation that pipe sections built into wall of manhole will be true extensions of line of pipe. C. Use preformed flexible joint sealant for all horizontal mating surfaces between concrete and concrete or concrete and metal, above established high groundwater elevation. D. For all horizontal mating surfaces between concrete and concrete or concrete and metal, above established high groundwater elevation shown trowel apply to clean surface black mastic joint compound to a minimum wet thickness of 1/4 inches immediately prior to mating the surfaces. E. For horizontal joints that fall below established high groundwater elevation shown, install a resilient O-ring type gasket or pre-molded joint compound. F. Seal all pipe penetrations in manhole. 1. Form pipe openings smooth and well shaped. 2. After installation, seal cracks with, non shrink grout. 3. After grout cures, wire brush smooth and apply two coats emulsified fibrated asphalt compound to minimum wet thickness of 1/8 inches to ensure complete seal. G. Set and adjust frame and cover for manhole rim elevation to match the specified ground elevations. END OF SECTION Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents SANITARY SEWERAGE GRAVITY PIPING 33 31 11 - 1 SECTION 33 31 11 SANITARY SEWERAGE GRAVITY PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Installation and testing of sewer pipes, manholes, structures and appurtenances. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 31 22 19 - Finish Grading. 2. Section 31 23 33 - Trenching and Backfilling. 3. Section 33 05 61- Precast Concrete Structures. C. Alternates: 1. The following materials may be used at Contractor’s option unless otherwise specified or shown on Drawings: 1.2 REFERENCES A. Referenced Standards: 1. ASTM International (ASTM): a. C1244, Standard Test Method for Concrete Sewer Manholes by the Negative Air Pressure (Vacuum) Test Prior to Backfill. b. F1417, Standard Practice for Installation Acceptance of Plastic Non-pressure Sewer Lines Using Low-Pressure Air. 2. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA). 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Product technical data including: a. Acknowledgement that products submitted meet requirements of standards referenced. b. Catalog data sheets for all materials. c. Details of all piping system components confirming that the pipe, fittings, and appurtenances conform to the specified requirements. d. Manufacturers’ written recommendations for material handling, delivery, storage, installation, and minor repair of materials damaged in shipping. e. Recommended details for buoyancy restraint and for manhole/pipe connections. f. Fabrication and/or layout drawings as specified in individual pipe material specifications. 2. See individual pipe material specifications for additional required submittals. B. Informational Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Submit Test Report of leakage tests results including the following: a. Test procedure. b. Pipeline segment tested. c. Length of pipe tested. d. Test pressure. e. Test duration f. Amount of leakage. g. Corrective action, if any. C. Contract Closeout Information: 1. Operation and Maintenance Data. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents SANITARY SEWERAGE GRAVITY PIPING 33 31 11 - 2 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING OF PRODUCTS A. In addition to the requirements specified in this section, see related paragraphs in individual pipe specifications. B. Deliver, handle and store products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Protect pipeline sections stored at the site from damage. D. Store all products above the ground upon platforms, pallets, skids, or other supports supplied by the Contractor. 1. Store in a way to permit ready access for identification and inspection by the Engineer. E. Keep products free from dirt and other foreign matter. F. Provide suitable quantities of all lifting equipment to handle the pipe. 1. Do not utilize any equipment that is not rated to handle the intended loading or conditions of use to which it will be subjected, or which will damage or gouge the pipe. 2. Do not drag or drop pipe. G. Place pipe lain directly on the ground prior to placement on an area free of loose stones or sharp objects. H. Repair or replace any new pipe and fittings damaged before or during installation at Contractor’s expense, before proceeding further. 1. Utilize repairs methods as recommended by the manufacturer. 2. Replace damaged materials as directed by Owner’s project representative. I. Protect PVC pipe from UV degradation if stored outside for more than 60 days. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Pipe: 1. See Section 40 05 01. B. Manholes: See Section 33 05 61. C. Fill and backfill at manholes: See Section 31 23 33. D. Embedment and bedding materials for pipelines: See Section Specification 31 23 33. E. Size mandrels to meet deflection requirements specified herein or in the individual pipe material specifications. F. Pipe joint testing equipment: 1. Utilize joint testing equipment capable of providing sufficient sealing pressure for air bladder to prevent leakage through bladder seals. 2. Include pressure gage to aid in verification of adequate applied pressure and joints ability to withstand the applied pressure without leaking. 3. Utilize joint testing equipment that encapsulates the full 360 degrees circumference of the joint and at least 6 inches each side of the joint. 4. Pipes furnished with an integral "testable" joint, consisting of two gaskets with fittings to pressure test between the two gaskets, will be tested using the test equipment and fittings recommended by the pipe manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Furnish all construction materials and equipment required for installation and backfill. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents SANITARY SEWERAGE GRAVITY PIPING 33 31 11 - 3 B. Install the pipeline complete, including bends, stop logs, and other associated work and appurtenances, as shown on the Drawings or as herein specified. C. Make all necessary connections to sewer lines shown on the Drawings and in accordance with the Specifications. D. Construct all sewer piping, manholes, and structures to be free of visible ground water inflow. 1. Install sanitary sewer manholes and structures that are watertight. a. Repair or replace any manhole or structure showing infiltration of ground water through joined surfaces, pipe to manhole/structure connections or manhole/structure wall. 2. Install pipe with water tight pipe joints. a. Repair or replace any joint showing infiltration of ground water through pipe joints or pipe to manhole connections. E. Alignment: Lay gravity sewer lines in straight alignment and uniform grade between manholes. 1. Install at grade as shown on drawings. F. Brace and protect pipe sections to prevent deformation during installation and backfill. G. Deflection: Pipe deflection after final backfill shall not exceed the specified limits detailed in the individual pipe specifications. 1. Remove and replace any pipe observed to be deflecting in excess of the specified limits. H. Perform testing in accordance with requirements of this Section. I. Provide Engineer with free access to work for inspection. 1. Such inspection shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility for performing Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 3.2 PIPELINE INSTALLATION A. Lateral shoring of the trench walls or other similar construction methods may be required. 1. Design and implement all such methods. 2. When required, install shoring in accordance with all applicable local, State and OSHA regulations. 3. Remove shoring prior to backfilling. B. Grade bottoms of trenches such that when bedding is placed between the trench bottom and the pipe, each section of pipe is installed to the specified depth or elevation with uniform support. C. Determine and fix alignment and grade or elevation of each pipeline from offset stakes or calibrated laser instruments. D. Install pipelines on the line and grade shown on the drawings. 1. Calculate required elevation of each pipe joint and survey installed elevation at each joint prior to stabbing the next joint to verify grade. 2. Relay pipe to proper grade if any joint elevation deviates from the calculation by more than 0.01 feet. E. Remove material at the bottom of the trench if determined to be unsuitable by the Engineer. 1. Backfill trench with approved subgrade material or bedding material to the specified depth or elevation as described in Section 31 23 33. F. Install only clean pipe and fittings. 1. Provide physical barriers to protect open ends of sections of pipe in place from the entrance of trench water, mud, dirt, or other foreign substances with when pipe installation is not in progress. G. Begin pipe laying at the lowest elevation with bell ends facing the direction of laying, except when reverse laying is permitted by Engineer. H. Where the drawings require concrete encasement or flowable fill embedment and backfill, anchor pipe as required to prevent floatation. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents SANITARY SEWERAGE GRAVITY PIPING 33 31 11 - 4 1. Alternatively, Contractor may place concrete or flow fill materials in staged lifts allowing each lift to reach initial set prior to placing the subsequent lift to limit buoyancy effects and prevent floatation of the pipeline. I. Pipeline may be backfilled as it is installed, provided all inspection and testing requirements are met. J. Pipe, fittings, and special pieces will be subject to inspection by Engineer, prior to installation. 1. Report all damages not detected by Engineer but discovered by Contractor during installation to Engineer for corrective action or replacement. K. Repair of pipe damaged during installation shall conform to the manufacturer’s repair procedures; with the concurrence of Engineer. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. General Testing Requirements: 1. Furnish necessary personnel, materials, and equipment, including bulkheads, restraints, anchors, temporary connections, pumps, water, pressure gauges, and other means and facilities required to perform tests. 2. Obtain Engineer’s approval of methods and the equipment used for the tests prior to testing. 3. Provide reasonable facilities and access for Engineer to inspect, test and obtain such information as required with respect to the materials used and the progress and condition of the Work and the results obtained. a. Work that is not performed in accordance with the procedure or does not comply with the requirements of the Specifications will be rejected. 4. Coordinate testing schedules with Engineer. a. Perform all specified tests under observation of Engineer. b. Provide a minimum of 24 hours advance notice prior to commencing any testing. 5. Perform testing as work progresses and as required to facilitate connections with existing sewers. 6. Obtain water for testing and cleaning at no additional cost to the Owner. 7. Test only those portions of pipes that have been installed as part of this Contract. a. Test new pipe sections prior to making final connections to existing piping. b. Furnish and install plugs, bulkheads, and restraints required to isolate new pipe sections. 8. Unsuccessful Tests: a. Where tests are not successful, correct defects or remove defective piping and appurtenances and install piping and appurtenances that comply with the specified requirements. b. Repeat testing until tests are successful at no additional cost to Owner. 9. Deflection: a. Check each section of pipe after backfilling for deflection by pulling a mandrel through the pipe. b. Conduct test after the final backfill has been in place at least 30 days. c. Maximum long term deflection: less than 5% of the initial diameter. B. Lamping: 1. Install each section of sewer line between manholes to be straight and uniformly graded. 2. Each section will be lamped by Engineer. 3. Furnish suitable assistants, materials and air monitoring to assist Engineer. C. Low Pressure Air Testing: 1. Test all gravity sewer pipes up to 30-inch diameter with a low pressure air test. a. Comply with ASTM F1417. b. Time elapsed for a 1 psi drop in air pressure: Per ASTM F1417. c. Maximum air loss: Per ASTM F1417. 2. Submit schedule to Engineer for approval prior to starting the tests. 3. Conduct air test after the final backfill has been in place for a minimum of 30 days. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents SANITARY SEWERAGE GRAVITY PIPING 33 31 11 - 5 4. Correct pipes failing air test and conduct second test after final backfill has been in place an additional 30 days. 5. If the length of sewer to be tested is fully or partially submerged in groundwater, increase test pressure as necessary to overcome the actual static pressure exerted by the groundwater. a. If a test pressure greater than 8 psi results, utilize water infiltration testing in lieu of air testing. 6. Locate leaks by testing short sections of pipe. a. Repair leaks and retest affected reach of sewer. D. Deflection Testing: Test all flexible sewer pipes for deflection. 1. Perform the mandrel test with the Engineer in observance for all pipe sizes. 2. Deflection limits: as indicated in the individual pipe sections or as specified in article titled “General Testing Requirements” above, whichever is more stringent. 3. Conduct test after the final backfill has been in place at least 30 days. 4. Correct pipes failing deflection test and conduct second test after final backfill has been in place an additional 30 days. E. Joint Testing: 1. Test all sewer pipe joints for pipe diameters 36 inches and greater. 2. Conduct test after final backfill has been in place for at least 30 days. 3. Supply pressure gages of type, calibration, accuracy acceptable to the Engineer. a. Engineer may request certification of the gages by a reliable testing firm and may compare these gages with an Owner’s gage at any time. 4. Repair or replace pipe joints that do not pass joint test and retest. a. Conduct retests after repairs have been made and final backfill has been in place for 30 days. 5. Test procedure: a. Center joint tester over joint to be tested and inflate seals. b. Apply 3.5 psig pressure to joint and allow pressure to stabilize. c. If the pressure holds or drops less than 1 psi in 30 seconds, joint is acceptable. 6. When pipe materials are provided with a “testable joint”, cap testing tube securely with a plug at testing port following successful completion of joint test and acceptance by Engineer. F. Manhole Testing: 1. Vacuum test all manholes per ASTM C1244 for leakage after installation, before epoxy lining is placed, and prior to being backfilled. 2. Visually inspect all manholes for leaks and defects prior to vacuum testing. 3. Repair all leaks, defects or cracks discovered by visual inspection prior to vacuum testing. 4. Seal all pipes entering manholes at a point outside the manhole walls so as to include testing of the pipe/manhole joints. 5. Make all necessary repairs and retest the manhole. a. Inspect exterior of the manhole during this period for visible evidence of leakage. b. All repairs will be subject to acceptance by the Engineer. END OF SECTION Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 This page intentionally left blank. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents PACKAGE SEWAGE PUMPING STATION 33 32 13 - 1 SECTION 33 32 13 PACKAGE SEWAGE PUMPING STATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Package lift station, structural components, process equipment, piping, valves, HVAC, electrical and control components, and required appurtenant items. B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Section 01 61 03 - Common Work Results for Equipment. 2. Section 03 15 19 - Anchorage to Concrete. 3. Division 26 - Electrical. 4. Division 40 - Process Interconnections. 5. Division 43 - Process Gas and Liquid Handling, Purification and Storage Equipment. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards: 1. ASTM International (ASTM): a. A36, Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel. 2. American Welding Society (AWS): a. A5.1/A5.1M, Specification for Carbon Steel Electrodes for Shielded Metal Arc Welding. b. D1.1, Structural Welding Code - Steel. 3. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): a. 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum). b. ICS 6, Industrial Control and Systems Enclosures. 4. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): a. 70, National Electrical Code (NEC). b. 820, Standard for Fire Protection in Wastewater Treatment and Collection Facilities. 5. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA). 6. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL). B. Qualifications: 1. Manufacturer shall be regularly engaged in the manufacturing of package lift stations for not less than five (5) years. 2. Structural design of the package lift station shall be accomplished by the manufacturer. C. Single Source Responsibility: 1. Provide single source responsibility for all station components and systems through supplier of package lift station. 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. The package lift station shall include, but not be limited to, the following major components: 1. Package lift station building. 2. Interior piping, valves, and pipe supports: a. 2”-VT piping will be supplied by the Contractor. 3. Emergency Bypass Pump Connection (Discharge), including: a. Building penetration/insulation seal. b. Blind flange with threaded tap and camlock (with cap). 4. Flow Meter. 5. Air Release Valve (ARV). 6. Pressure Transmitter. 7. HVAC components: Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents PACKAGE SEWAGE PUMPING STATION 33 32 13 - 2 a. Electric unit heater(s). b. Inlet louver. c. Exhaust fan. 8. Electrical and control systems: a. Pump control panel. b. Air gap panel. c. Telemetry panel (see additional information in 1.3.B). d. Automatic Transfer Switch (ATS) (see additional information in 1.3.B). e. Motor starters, circuit breakers, panelboards, lighting and electrical distribution within station and single point exterior power connection for pump station. f. Control systems for submersible pumps and HVAC. g. Required submersible pump components (see additional information in 1.3.B). B. The following items are to be designed and/or fabricated provided by Others, as required by the Contract Documents, and shipped to the Package Lift Station Supplier through a no-cost PO, for factory installation: 1. Automatic Transfer Switch (ATS); provided by Generator supplier. 2. Telemetry Panel; provided by Contractor’s I&C designer/supplier. 3. Submersible Pump Components: Flygt MiniCAS Pump Sensor Monitor, or Approved Equal; provided by Submersible Pump Supplier. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. See Section 01 61 03. 2. Scaled fabrication and/or layout drawings showing all equipment, piping, mechanical, and electrical components. 3. Information as required by other related Specification Sections. 4. Submit Shop Drawing for station and all mechanical, electrical, and instrumentation components, complete, in single, coordinated submittal. a. Provide separate tabs for each major section of work being provided. b. Short Circuit Current Rating (SCCR) nameplate marking per NFPA 70. Include any required calculations per Section 01 61 03. 5. Certifications: a. Provide Owner with a written certification that station has been installed properly and started up and is ready for operation by Owner's personnel. b. Factory checkout certification for all systems installed inside package lift station. B. Contract Closeout Information: 1. Operation and Maintenance Data: a. See Section 01 78 23 for requirements for the mechanics, administration, and the content of Operation and Maintenance Manual submittals. 1.5 SITE CONDITIONS A. Groundwater elevation for the Valley Center Lift Station Site is approximately 4587.10 ft (November 30th, 2023). See Geotechnical Report for additional information. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Provide Owner with manufacturer's warranty guaranteeing pumping station to be free from defects for 2 year(s) from date of Owner acceptance. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Package lift station: Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents PACKAGE SEWAGE PUMPING STATION 33 32 13 - 3 a. USEMCO Walk In PumpMate. b. Or Approved Equal. B. See referenced Specification Sections for acceptable manufacturers for other lift station components. 2.2 MATERIALS OF CONSTRUCTION A. See referenced Specification Sections for materials of construction for station components not defined in this Specification Section. B. Anchor Bolts, Nuts and Washers: 304 stainless steel. C. Float Switches and Switch Support: 1. Floats: Polypropylene or Teflon coated 316 stainless steel. 2. Cable jacket: PVC or neoprene. 3. Cable clamp: Polypropylene or 316 stainless steel. 4. Float support: 304 stainless steel pipe and anchor hardware. D. Conduits: Steel. 2.3 PACKAGE LIFT STATION COMPONENTS A. Package Lift Station Building: 1. Steel Base: a. The package lift station’s common base shall be fabricated from a minimum 3/8” structural grade steel plate, reinforced with adequate sized steel channels to prevent deflection due to equipment weight and stresses imposed from lifting and setting of equipment. b. Bolt on lifting eyes shall be placed about the perimeter of the equipment base to facilitate lifting and handling of the station. The lifting eyes shall be easily removable after the station has been set in place. c. The steel plate and structural employed in the base shall meet or exceed the requirement of ASTM-A36. 2. Lift Station Building: a. The package lift station building will be complete with a factory assembled modular building affixed to the steel equipment base as shown on the plans. The completed station shall be one piece when delivered and require only offloading, installation on the prescribed foundation slab, piping connections, and electrical service to complete the installation. Field erected buildings shall not be accepted. b. All sidewall and ceiling panels shall consist of interior and exterior metal skins formed with steel dies and roll-forming equipment and checked with gauges for uniformity and accuracy. Polyurethane shall be foamed-in-place (poured) and, when completely heat- cured, shall bond to the metal skins to form a rigid 4” thick insulated panel. Overall coefficient of heat transfer (“U” factor) shall be a minimum of .033 (R-30) for 4” thick walls. Panels shall contain 100 percent polyurethane insulation and have no internal wood between the skins. Panel edges must have foamed-in-place tongues and grooves with a flexible vinyl gasket also foamed-in-place on the interior and exterior of all tongue edges. c. The polyurethane foam core shall be classified by Underwriters Laboratories as having flame spread of 25 or lower and smoke generation of less than 450 when tested in accordance with UL Standard 723 (ASTM Standard E-84). d. Panels shall have cam lock joining devices. Each locking device shall consist of a cam- action, hooked locking arm placed in one panel, and a steel rod positioned in the adjoining panel, so that when the locking arm is rotated, the hook engages over the rod and draws the panel tightly together with cam action. The locking arms and steel rods shall be housed in individual steel pockets set into the panel. Pockets on one side of the panel shall be connected to pockets on the other side, in width, by the use of steel straps set into the insulation. Press fit caps shall be provided to close lock wrench holes. A Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents PACKAGE SEWAGE PUMPING STATION 33 32 13 - 4 cam lock wrench shall be supplied with the building. Wood reinforcement shall be placed inside the wall and ceiling panels where required to support the station equipment loads. Any wood reinforcement in a wall and ceiling panel shall be totally enclosed within the panel and cladded with the exterior and or interior metal skins. e. Exterior of building shall be a minimum of .026” (24 ga.) thick galvanized steel panel protected by a spray and baked tan color polyester protective coating. f. Interior of building shall be a minimum of .026” (24 ga.) thick galvanized steel panel, protected by a spray and baked white color polyester protective coating. g. Hinged entrance door shall be insulated with full 2” thick foam polyurethane insulation core. Matching metal jambs shall be furnished to fit prefab panels without the use of any interior framing. Jamb members shall attach to panels with sheet metal screws. The door shall be supplied with weather stripping and wiper gasket. The entrance opening shall be 36” x 78” clear opening size and include three tamper-proof pinned butt hinges. h. Hardware for doors shall be cylindrical lockset with satin stainless steel finish. i. The door shall include a metal shield above the door to divert rain and snow from the door opening, and an extruded aluminum sill plate shall be provided on outdoor buildings. 3. Welding: a. All welding shall be in accordance with standard AWS practices, with proper fillet section and continuity to assure a sound, watertight structure. All welds shall be sound and free from embedded scale or slag, shall have tensile strength across the weld not less than that of the thinner of the connected sections, and shall be watertight. All welds in contact with soil or water shall be tested with dye penetrant to assure the watertight integrity of the weld system. 4. Painting: a. All mill scale, rust, weld flux and other foreign matter shall be removed from all steel surfaces by shot blasting to SSPC SP-10 specification for near-white blast cleaning. Surface irregularities shall be removed by grinding. b. Interior and exterior surfaces shall receive two coats of hi-build epoxy coating. The coating materials shall show excellent resistance to immersion in seawater as well as to splash or spillage of water, petroleum products or salt solutions. The interior coatings shall be applied to 3 mils dry film thickness each coat and the exterior coatings shall be applied to 4 mils dry film thickness each coat. c. A paint touch-up kit shall be provided with the station for coating field weld joints and damaged areas. d. The floor in all working areas within the station shall be protected with floor matting. 5. Roof: a. The ceiling panels shall be covered by a hip truss roof. The roof shall have a 3:12 minimum pitch with 12" overhang on all sides. The roof peak shall run parallel to the package lift station’s longest dimension. Mounting strips shall be installed in package lift station for mounting of the roof trusses. Trusses shall be spaced on a maximum of 24" centers covered with exterior grade plywood, 30# underlayment and covered with standing seam steel interlocking sheets. b. The building shall include aluminum soffit and fascia to match the roof color. c. The roof of the building shall be standing seam metal (color: Charcoal). 6. Siding: a. The exposed portion of the exterior of the package lift station shall be covered with Hardie Plank Lap Siding (color: Mountain Sage). The siding shall have a lifetime limited fade protection warranty. 7. Lifting the Package Lift Station (By Contractor): a. A spreader bar type lifting device, built to lift the modular building from each corner of deck structure without impinging the lifting chain/cables on the modular building sidewalls, shall be provided by the Contractor. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents PACKAGE SEWAGE PUMPING STATION 33 32 13 - 5 B. Process Equipment: 1. Submersible sewage pumps provided by Others. a. Section 43 05 23 - Common Work Results for Process Liquid Pumps. b. Section 43 25 13 - Pumping Equipment - Submersible End-Suction Sewage Pumps. C. Interior Piping, Valving, and Pipe Supports: 1. Piping: a. See Section 40 05 01 - Common Work Results for Process Piping. b. See Section 40 05 07 - Pipe Support Systems. c. See Section 40 05 19 - Ductile Iron Process Pipe. d. See Section 40 05 31 - Pipe - Plastic. 2. Valving: a. See Section 40 05 51 - Common Work Results for Process and Utility Valves. b. See Section 40 05 52 - Miscellaneous Valves. c. See Section 40 05 62 - Plug Valves. d. See Section 40 05 63 - Ball Valves. e. See Section 40 05 66 - Check Valves. 3. Instrumentation: a. See Section 40 71 00 - Flow Instrumentation. b. See Section 40 72 00 - Level Instrumentation. c. See Section 40 73 00 - Pressure Instrumentation. D. HVAC Components: 1. Heater: a. Electric unit heaters with capacity to maintain minimum temperature of 50 DEGF in station with outside air temperature of -10 DEGF and with specified ventilation rate. b. Control with adjustable, wall mounted thermostat. 2. Ventilation ductwork and louvers: a. Separate weather protected screened intake and exhaust louvers located a minimum of 12 inches above grade. 3. Intake and exhaust fans: a. Sized to provide minimum six (6) air changes per hour. b. Indicating lights for ventilation equipment. E. Electrical and Control Systems: 1. See Division 26 – Electrical. 2. Lighting: a. See Drawing(s). 2.4 CORROSION PROTECTION A. Factory paint all interior equipment and piping in accordance with Section 09 96 00. 2.5 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing: 1. All components of lift station shall be given an operational test at factory to check for excessive vibration, for leaks in piping or seals, and for correct operation of automatic control system and auxiliary equipment. a. Correct all deficiencies. 2. Couple pump suction and discharge lines to a reservoir and have the pumps recirculate water for at least 1 hour under simulated service conditions. 3. Adjust automatic control to start and stop pumps at approximate levels required by job conditions. 2.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. See individual equipment Specification Sections. B. Touch up kit for coating field welds and for repair of scratches. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents PACKAGE SEWAGE PUMPING STATION 33 32 13 - 6 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Contractor is responsible for coordinating and providing for the services of a factory trained representative for a maximum period of 16 hours to perform the initial start-up of the lift station and instruct personnel who will be operating the lift station in the required maintenance and service procedures. B. Prior to acceptance, inspect interior and exterior of lift station for dirt, splashed material or damaged paint. Clean or repair accordingly. Remove from the job site all tools, surplus materials, scrap and debris. END OF SECTION Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 DIVI SION 40 PROCESS INTERCONNECTIONS Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 This page intentionally left blank. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PROCESS PIPING 40 05 01 - 1 SECTION 40 05 01 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PROCESS PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Common work results for buried and exposed process piping, including: a. Pipe saddles (for gage installation). b. General procedures for installing buried piping. c. General procedures for installing non-buried piping. d. Field testing of piping. e. Cleaning of piping. f. Disinfecting and water quality testing of piping. g. Piping System Schedules. B. Related Requirements: Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Section 08 31 00 - Access Doors . 2. Section 09 96 00 - High Performance Industrial Coatings. 3. Section 10 14 00 - Identification Devices. 4. Section 31 23 33.Utilities - Trenching and Backfilling. 5. Section 40 05 07 - Pipe Support Systems. 6. Section 40 05 51 - Common Requirements for Process and Utility Valves. 7. Section 40 73 00 - Pressure Instrumentation. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Terminology: 1. Terminology indicated below are not defined terms and are not indicated with initial capital letters, but when used in this section have the meaning indicated below: a. “Hazardous gas systems” means digester gas, chlorine gas, sulfur dioxide gas, carbon dioxide gas, lab gases. b. “HPC” means high performance coating. c. “PVDF” means polyvinylidene fluoride. B. Reference Standards: 1. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO): a. M36, Corrugated Steel Pipe, Metallic-Coated, for Sewers and Drains (Equivalent ASTM A760). b. M190, Standard Specification for Bituminous Coated Corrugated Metal Culvert Pipe and Pipe Arches. c. M252, Standard Specification for Corrugated Polyethylene Drainage Tubing. d. M294, Interim Specification for Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe 12 to 24 Inch Diameter. 2. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI). 3. American Public Health Association (APHA), American Waterworks Association (AWWA), Water Environment Federation (WEF): a. APHA/AWWA/WEF - Standard Methods for Examination of Water and Wastewater. 4. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME): a. B16.3, Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings. b. B16.5, Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings. c. B16.9, Factory-Made Wrought Steel Butt-Welding Fittings. d. B16.22, Wrought Copper and Bronze Solder - Joint Pressure Fittings. e. B16.26, Cast Copper Alloy Fittings for Flared Copper Tubes. f. B36.19, Stainless Steel Pipe. g. B40.100, Pressure Gauges and Gauge Attachments. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PROCESS PIPING 40 05 01 - 2 5. Association of Materials Protection and Performance (AMPP) (National Association of Corrosion Engineers (NACE)): a. NACE SP0286, Electrical Isolation of Cathodically Protected Pipelines. 6. ASTM International (ASTM): a. A53, Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless. b. A74, Standard Specification for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings. c. A106, Standard Specification for Seamless Carbon Steel Pipe for High-Temperature Service. d. A126, Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges, and Pipe Fittings. e. A182, Standard Specification for Forged or Rolled Alloy-Steel Pipe Flanges, Forged Fittings, and Valves and Parts for High-Temperature Service. f. A197, Standard Specification for Cupola Malleable Iron. g. A234, Standard Specification for Pipe Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and High Temperature Service. h. A269, Standard Specification for Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing for General Service. i. A312, Standard Specification for Seamless, Welded, and Heavily Cold Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipes. j. A518, Standard Specification for Corrosion-Resistant High-Silicon Iron Castings. k. A536, Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings. l. A587, Standard Specification for Electric-Resistance-Welded Low-Carbon Steel Pipe for the Chemical Industry. m. A760, Standard Specification for Corrugated Steel Pipe, Metallic-Coated for Sewers and Drains. n. A774, Standard Specification for As-Welded Wrought Austenitic Stainless Steel Fittings for General Corrosive Service at Low and Moderate Temperatures. o. A778, Standard Specification for Welded, Unannealed Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubular Products. p. B88, Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube. q. C14, Standard Specification for Concrete Sewer, Storm Drain, and Culvert Pipe. r. C76, Standard Specification for Reinforced Concrete Culvert, Storm Drain, and Sewer Pipe. s. C425, Standard Specification for Compression Joints for Vitrified Clay Pipe and Fittings. t. C443, Standard Specification for Joints for Concrete Pipe and Manholes, Using Rubber Gaskets. u. C564, Standard Specification for Rubber Gaskets for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings. v. C700, Standard Specification for Vitrified Clay Pipe, Extra Strength, Standard Strength and Perforated. w. C828, Standard Test Method for Low-Pressure Air Test of Vitrified Clay Pipe Lines. x. D1785, Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80, and 120. y. D2466, Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40. z. D2467, Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80. aa. D4101, Standard Specification for Polypropylene Plastic Injection and Extrusion Materials. bb. D4174, Standard Practice for Cleaning, Flushing, and Purification of Petroleum Fluid Hydraulic Systems. cc. F439, Standard Specification for Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PROCESS PIPING 40 05 01 - 3 dd. F441, Standard Specification for Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40 and 80. ee. F1417, Standard Practice for Installation Acceptance of Plastic Non-pressure Sewer Lines Using Low-Pressure Air. ff. F2164, Standard Practice for Field Leak Testing of Polyethylene (PE) and Crosslinked Polyethylene (PEX) Pressure Piping Systems Using Hydrostatic Pressure. 7. American Water Works Association (AWWA): a. B300, Standard for Hypochlorites. b. C200, Standard for Steel Water Pipe - 6 inches and Larger. c. C207, Standard for Steel Pipe Flanges for Waterworks Service - Sizes 4 inches through 144 inches. d. C208, Standard for Dimensions for Fabricated Steel Water Pipe Fittings. e. C606, Standard for Grooved and Shouldered Joints. f. C651, Standard for Disinfecting Water Mains. g. C655, Field Dechlorination. h. C800, Standard for Underground Service Line Valves and Fittings. 8. American Water Works Association/American National Standards Institute (AWWA/ANSI): a. C110/A21.10, Standard for Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Fittings. b. C111/A21.11, Standard for Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings. c. C115/A21.15, Standard for Flanged Ductile-Iron Pipe with Ductile-Iron or Gray-Iron Threaded Flanges. d. C151/A21.51, Standard for Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast, for Water. e. C153/A21.53, Standard for Ductile-Iron Compact Fittings for Water Service. f. C605, Underground Installation of Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) and Molecularly Oriented Polyvinyl Chloride (PVCO) Pressure Pipe and Fittings. g. Manual M9, Concrete Pressure Pipe. h. Manual M11, Steel Pipe: A Guide for Design and Installation. i. Manual M41, Ductile-Iron Pipe and Fittings. 9. Chlorine Institute, Inc. (CI): a. Pamphlet 6, Piping Systems for Dry Chlorine. 10. Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute (CISPI): a. 301, Standard Specification for Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for Sanitary and Storm Drain, Waste, and Vent Piping Applications. 11. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): a. 54, National Fuel Gas Code. b. 69, Standard on Explosion Prevention Systems. 12. Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE): a. J1227, Assessing Cleanliness of Hydraulic Fluid Power Components and Systems. 13. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL). 1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: 1. Coordinate flange dimensions and drilling between piping, valves, and equipment. 2. Completion of the Work of this Section and Engineer’s acceptance of associated field testing and inspection results is required prior to Contractor requesting inspection for Substantial Completion of the associated Work. B. Scheduling and Sequencing: 1. Perform required testing prior to installing required coatings, and insulation, unless otherwise indicated or acceptable to Engineer. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. Installer of Piping: Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PROCESS PIPING 40 05 01 - 4 a. Installer of piping shall be entity possessing not less than five years of similar, relevant experience to the piping Work required under the Contract and shall have completed not less than five projects installing substantively similar piping materials (including lining) of similar size to that required for the Work. Installer shall be able to document having installed not less than 5,000 linear feet combined total of such projects, excluding piping less than six-inch diameter and smaller. b. Foreman for installer of piping shall be person possessing not less than five years of similar, relevant experience serving as foreman or superintendent for installing the piping Work and shall have served as foreman for not less than five projects installing substantively similar piping materials (including lining) of similar size to that required for the Work. Foreman for installer shall be able to document having served as foreman or superintendent for installing not less than 5,000 linear feet combined total of such projects, excluding piping less than six-inch diameter and smaller. c. For each piping installer proposed for employment in the Work, submit documentation of compliance with qualifications requirements of this provision. For each project, indicate owner (including organization name, current contact person knowledgeable concerning installers work, city and state, telephone number, and email address), project designation, and narrative summary of quantities of piping work performed. including indication of sizes, pipe materials, and pipe lining (if any), together with other pertinent information. 2. Testing Laboratory: a. Testing for water quality shall be by laboratory possessing current, valid certification for testing the parameters required. Such certification shall be by authorities having jurisdiction. b. Testing laboratory shall be licensed to operate in the same jurisdiction as the Site. c. Testing equipment used by laboratory shall be calibrated at intervals of not more than twelve months by devices of accuracy traceable to one of the following: NIST SRM, ISO/IEC 17025, certified by state or local bureau of weights and measures, or values of natural physical constants generally accepted in the engineering and scientific community. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Shop Drawings: a. Schedule (in tabular format or narrative format)indicating each required piping system, indicating system location, service, pipe material, joint types, pipe lining (if any), pipe coating (if any), and other pertinent data. b. Fabrication and Layout Drawings: 1) Exterior yard piping drawings (minimum scale 1 inch equals 10 feet) with information including: a) Dimensions of piping lengths. b) Invert or centerline elevations of piping crossings. c) Acknowledgement of bury depth requirements. d) Details of fittings, tapping locations, thrust blocks, restrained joint segments, harnessed joint segments, hydrants, and related appurtenances. e) Acknowledge designated valve or gate tag numbers, manhole numbers, instrument tag numbers, pipe and line numbers. f) Line slopes and vents. 2) Interior piping drawings (minimum scale 1/8 inches equals 1 foot) with information including: a) Dimensions of piping from column lines or wall surfaces. b) Invert or Centerline dimensions of piping. c) Centerline elevation and size of intersecting ductwork, conduit/conduit racks, or other potential interferences requiring coordination. d) Location and type of pipe supports and anchors. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PROCESS PIPING 40 05 01 - 5 e) Locations of valves and valve actuator type. f) Details of fittings, tapping locations, equipment connections, flexible expansion joints, connections to equipment, and related appurtenances. g) Acknowledgement of valve, equipment and instrument tag numbers. h) Provisions for expansion and contraction. i) Line slopes and air release vents. j) Rough-in data for plumbing fixtures. 3) Schedule of interconnections to existing piping and method of connection. 2. Product Data: a. Submit manufacturer’s published information, including catalog excerpts, specifications, and indication of specific reference standards with which materials comply, for each item specified in this Section, unless such information is furnished as part of a Submittal under another Specifications section. Furnish such information for each size and type of item required. b. Clearly mark on product data Submittals proposed items and clearly indicate, via cross- outs or other method, items not proposed for the Work. 3. Testing Plans: a. On copy of piping schedule submitted with Shop Drawings, indicate proposed field tests for piping, together with proposed test pressures (where applicable), wetting period (when applicable), duration of pipe expansion period (when applicable), duration of timed testing period, and other pertinent information necessary to properly communicate Contractor’s intent to comply with the Contract Documents relative to field testing of piping. When applicable, clearly indicate when hydrostatic testing and disinfecting will be performed concurrently. b. Indicate proposed locations and lengths of piping segments for each test, together with indication of proposed dates for such testing. c. Submit description of proposed testing methods, procedures, and apparatus, indicating limitations of procedures and apparatus, and obtain Engineer’s approval prior to testing. d. For each test, , provide brief, narrative description of how water will be conveyed to and, where necessary, from, the piping being tested, including indication of proposed rate of water withdrawal from source, proposed rate of water discharge from piping after testing, and temporary equipment proposed for use. Where the Contract Documents establish maximum allowable flow rates, clearly indicate how monitoring such compliance will be performed. Where temporary flow meter is proposed or required, include in testing plan copy of current, valid calibration of each flow meter proposed for use. e. Where potable water will be used for testing, include in testing plan written approval of owner of water utility for use of source and indication of whether water utility or Contractor will furnish and install temporary backflow preventers. Where temporary backflow preventers will be provided by Contractor, include copy of current, valid certification (by duly certified backflow preventer technician) for backflow preventer(s) proposed for use, including indication of specific, identification data for such equipment. f. Proposed location(s) for discharge of test water, flush water, including copy of approval for such discharge from authority having jurisdiction, where applicable. g. Indication of acceptable leakage volume, in accordance with the allowable leakage rates indicated in the “Field Quality Control” Article of this Section. Indicate geometric information on each piping segment that will be tested, relevant to parameters required for determining allowable leakage, if any. h. Indication of disinfection method and sampling method proposed, in accordance with AWWA reference standards indicated in “Part 3 - Execution” of this Section. i. Indication of proposed disinfection chemical, including source of supply and indication of compliance with NSF 60. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PROCESS PIPING 40 05 01 - 6 j. Indication of name of testing laboratory that will perform water quality sampling and testing. Include copies of relevant certifications of laboratory from authority having jurisdiction. k. Locations of sampling and means of obtaining water quality samples. l. Proposed laboratory testing methods. m. Indication of acceptable water quality criteria, in accordance with Laws and Regulations. n. Include copies of forms proposed for reporting results of field testing of piping. o. Where piping will be filled with water for testing, indicate Contractor’s proposed means and locations for expelling air from piping. p. Where new piping requiring testing will connect to existing piping (when applicable), indicate means and location of isolating piping requiring testing from existing piping. q. Obtain Engineer’s approval of such Submittal not less than 48 hours before commencing testing. Submit one such Submittal for entirety of piping Work, unless otherwise allowed by Engineer. r. Engineer’s approval of such Submittal is only for the limited purposes of endeavoring to verify compliance with the Contract Documents, and Engineer’s design intent, relative to determining acceptability of the Work. Engineer’s review, comments upon (or lack thereof), and assignment of disposition to such Submittal does not, in any way, mitigate Contractor’s sole responsibility for construction means, methods, techniques, procedures, and sequences, and associated safety and protection measures. B. Informational Submittals: 1. Supplier Instructions: a. Instructions for handling, storing, installing, and placing into operation materials specified in this Section. 2. Field Quality Control Submittals: a. Results of tests, inspections, and other quality control activities required by the Contract Documents and performed at the Site. 3. Qualifications: a. Each installer of piping. C. Closeout Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Operation and Maintenance Data: a. Submit for pipe and piping system components in accordance with Section 01 78 23 - Operation and Maintenance Data. 2. Record Documentation: a. Submit record documents of piping layout Shop Drawings showing and indicating changes made during fabrication and installation, in accordance with Contract Modifications, allowance authorizations (if any), and field conditions encountered. Such Submittal is in addition to record documents required under Section 01 78 39 - Project Record Documents. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Pipe saddles (for gage installation): a. Dresser Style 91 (steel and ductile iron systems). b. Dresser Style 194 (nonmetallic systems). c. Or Approved Equal. 2.2 PIPING SYSTEMS SCHEDULE A. Piping system materials, fittings and appurtenances are subject to requirements of specific piping systems schedule at the end of “Part 3 – Execution” of this Section. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PROCESS PIPING 40 05 01 - 7 B. Description: 1. Piping Systems Organization and Definition: a. Piping services are grouped into designated systems according to the chemical and physical properties of the fluid or slurry conveyed, system pressure, piping size and materials of construction. b. Comply with the Piping Systems Schedule in “Part 3 – Execution” of this Section. 2.3 COMPONENTS AND ACCESSORIES A. Reducers: 1. Furnish appropriate size reducers and reducing fittings to mate pipe to equipment connections. 2. Connection size requirements may change from those shown on Drawings depending on equipment furnished. B. Protective Coating and Lining: 1. Include pipe, fittings, and appurtenances where coatings, linings, coating, tests and other items are specified. 2. Piping systems scheduled in the PIPING SYSTEM SCHEDULES Article of this Section that are indicated to receive HPC per Section 09 96 00 shall receive surface preparation and primer applied in the fabrication facility, at the coating applicator’s shop, or other off-site location acceptable to the Engineer. Intermediate and topcoats are to be field applied unless noted otherwise. C. Underground Warning Tape: 1. See Section 10 14 00 - Indentification Devices. D. Pressure Gages: 1. Comply with Section 01 61 03 - Common Work Results for Equipment, and Section 40 73 00 - Pressure Instrumentation. E. Valves: 1. See schematics and details for definition of manual valves used in each system under 4 inches in size. a. See Drawings and Section 40 05 51 - Common Requirements for Process and Utility Valves schedule for valve types 4 inches and above and for automatic valves used in each system. 2. See Section 40 05 51 - Common Requirements for Process and Utility Valves. 2.4 WATER A. Water for Testing: 1. Comply with reference standards indicated for required types of testing in this Section’s “Field Quality Control” Article, for associated types of pipe, unless otherwise required in the Contract Documents. 2. Sources - General: a. Where piping to be tested, does not require disinfection, unless otherwise required, water for testing may be potable water or non-potable water. 1) Non-potable water, when used, shall be one of the following: fresh (without brine) surface water, groundwater (where available in sufficient quantity), treated final effluent from a wastewater treatment facility or water reclamation facility, or other, from source acceptable to Engineer (following Engineer’s consultation with Owner or facility manager as applicable). Such water shall be of reasonable quality, free of debris and noticeable biological growth and materials. Water used for testing shall not contain Constituents of Concern in quantity that results in Hazardous Environmental Condition, permanent contamination of the piping tested, or effect detrimental to the Work and operation and maintenance of the facility. 3. Project-Specific Water Source(s): a. The following may be used as source of water for testing: Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PROCESS PIPING 40 05 01 - 8 1) Water from the City of Bozeman’s municipal system may only be obtained from the metered service located at the Vehicle Maintenance Facility, 1814 N. Rouse Ave. The Contractor shall reimburse the City Water Department for the cost of the water used at a rate determined by the Water Department. 2) Do not use water source not acceptable to Engineer (following Engineer’s consultation with Owner or facility manager, as applicable). 4. Limitations on Water Conveyance Rates: a. In addition to limitation(s), if any, on rate of water withdrawal from source, indicated above, maximum rates of water conveyance through temporary equipment and materials shall: 1) Not result in filling of piping with flow velocity greater than one foot per second. 2) Not cause damage or erosion at point of discharge. Provide appropriate energy- dissipating materials as necessary. 3) Not cause temporary equipment and materials used for conveyance to exhibit undue strain or movement during operation. 5. Temporary Equipment and Materials for Conveyance of Water for Testing: a. Provide, operate, and maintain temporary equipment and materials necessary for conveying water used for testing, including conveyance to piping and discharge from piping. b. Sizes, capacity, and materials of temporary equipment shall be suitable for the intended purpose and Contractor’s means, methods, procedures, techniques, and sequences of construction. c. Provide temporary piping, couplings, valves, pumps, and appurtenances necessary. d. Temporary Flow Meter: Provide on temporary piping used for withdrawing water from source a temporary flow meter, calibrated within the past 12 months by technician certified by flow meter manufacturer, to continuously measure and record flow rate. During water withdrawal from source, allow Engineer and Owner continuous access to temporary flow meter. Supervise and monitor water withdrawal and filling of piping. Record for each withdrawal: Time water withdrawal commenced and was completed, total volume of water withdrawn, and maximum flow rate recorded during withdrawal process. Include with Submittal of results of testing a copy of flow meter calibration and copy of conveyance monitoring data required in this paragraph. 6. Temporary Backflow Prevention: a. At each location where potable water is withdrawn for testing , install and use temporary backflow preventer on water source, to prevent contamination of the water source. b. Owner of potable water source will furnish backflow preventer, 4-inch diameter, for installation and use by Contractor. c. Contractor shall furnish temporary, reduced-pressure zone type backflow preventers as necessary and required. Each temporary backflow preventer shall have been certified, within the past 12 months, by a backflow preventer technician certified in accordance with Laws and Regulations. Include in testing plan Submittal a copy of backflow preventer certification. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 BURIED PIPING INSTALLATION A. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, provide a minimum of 6 feet and maximum of 10 feet earth cover over exterior buried piping systems and appurtenances conveying water, fluids, or solutions subject to freezing. B. Enter and exit through structure walls, floors, and ceilings by using penetrations and seals specified in Section 01 73 20 and as shown on Drawings. C. When entering or leaving structures with buried mechanical joint piping, install joint within 2 feet of point where pipe enters or leaves structure. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PROCESS PIPING 40 05 01 - 9 1. Install second joint not more than 6 feet nor less than 4 feet from first joint. D. Install expansion devices as necessary to allow expansion and contraction movement. E. Laying Pipe In Trench: 1. Perform excavation and backfilling in accordance with Section 31 23 33.Long Form - Trenching and Backfilling 2. Clean each pipe length thoroughly and inspect for compliance to specifications. 3. Grade trench bottom and excavate for pipe bell and lay pipe on trench bottom. 4. Install gasket or joint material according to manufacturer's directions after joints have been thoroughly cleaned and examined. 5. Except for first two joints, before making final connections of joints, install two full sections of pipe with earth tamped alongside of pipe or final with bedding material placed. 6. Lay pipe in only suitable weather with good trench conditions. a. Never lay pipe in water except where approved by Engineer. 7. Seal open end of line with watertight plug if pipe laying stopped. 8. Remove water in trench before removal of plug. F. Lining Up Push-On Joint Piping: 1. Lay piping on route lines shown on Drawings. 2. Deflect from straight alignments or grades by vertical or horizontal curves or offsets. 3. Observe maximum deflection values stated in manufacturer's written literature. 4. Provide special bends when specified or where required alignment exceeds allowable deflections stipulated. 5. Install shorter lengths of pipe in such length and number that angular deflection of any joint, as represented by specified maximum deflection, is not exceeded. G. Anchorage and Blocking: 1. Provide reaction blocking, anchors, joint harnesses, or other acceptable means for preventing movement of piping caused by forces in or on buried piping tees, wye branches, plugs, or bends. 2. Place concrete blocking so that it extends from fitting into solid undisturbed earth wall. a. Concrete blocks shall not cover pipe joints. 3. Provide bearing area of concrete in accordance with drawing detail. H. Install underground hazard warning tape per Section 10 14 00 - Identification Devices. I. Install insulating components where dissimilar metals are joined together. 3.2 NON-BURIED PIPING INSTALLATION A. Install piping in vertical and horizontal alignment as shown on Drawings. B. Alignment of piping smaller than 4 inches may not be shown; however, install according to Drawing intent and with clearance and allowance for: 1. Expansion and contraction. 2. Operation and access to equipment, doors, windows, hoists, moving equipment. 3. Headroom and walking space for working areas and aisles. 4. System drainage and air removal. C. Enter and exit through structure walls, floor and ceilings using penetrations and seals specified in Section 01 73 20 and as shown on the Drawings. D. Install vertical piping runs plumb and horizontal piping runs parallel with structure walls. E. Pipe Support: 1. Use methods of piping support as shown on Drawings and as required in Section 40 05 07 - Pipe Support Systems. 2. Where pipes run parallel and at same elevation or grade, they may be grouped and supported from common trapeze-type hanger, provided hanger rods are increased in size as specified for total supported weight. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PROCESS PIPING 40 05 01 - 10 a. The pipe in the group requiring the least maximum distance between supports shall set the distance between trapeze hangers. 3. Size pipe supports with consideration to specific gravity of liquid being piped. F. Locate and size sleeves and castings required for piping system. 1. Arrange for chases, recesses, inserts or anchors at proper elevation and location. G. Use reducing fittings throughout piping systems. 1. Bushings will not be allowed unless specifically approved. H. Equipment Drainage and Miscellaneous Piping: 1. Provide drip pans and piping at equipment where condensation may occur. 2. Hard pipe stuffing box leakage to nearest floor drain. 3. Avoid piping over electrical components such as motor control centers, panelboards, etc. a. If piping must be so routed, utilize 16 GA, 316 stainless steel drip pan under piping and over full length of electrical equipment. b. Hard pipe drainage to nearest floor drain. 4. Collect system condensate at drip pockets, traps and blowoff valves. 5. Provide drainage for process piping at locations shown on Drawings in accordance with Drawing details. 6. For applications defined above and for other miscellaneous piping which is not addressed by a specific piping service category in PART 1, provide 304 stainless steel piping and fittings. a. Size to handle application with 3/4 inches being minimum size provided. I. Unions: 1. Install in position which will permit valve or equipment to be removed without dismantling adjacent piping. 2. Mechanical type couplings may serve as unions. 3. Additional flange unions are not required at flanged connections. J. Install expansion devices as necessary to allow expansion/contraction movement. K. Provide full face gaskets on all systems. L. Anchorage and Blocking: 1. Block, anchor, or harness exposed piping subjected to forces in which joints are installed to prevent separation of joints and transmission of stress into equipment or structural components not designed to resist those stresses. M. Equipment Pipe Connections: 1. Equipment - General: a. Exercise care in bolting flanged joints so that there is no restraint on the opposite end of pipe or fitting which would prevent uniform gasket pressure at connection or would cause unnecessary stresses to be transmitted to equipment flanges. b. Where push-on joints are used in conjunction with flanged joints, final positioning of push-on joints shall not be made until flange joints have been tightened without strain. c. Tighten flange bolts at uniform rate which will result in uniform gasket compression over entire area of joint. 1) Provide tightening torque in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. d. Support and match flange faces to uniform contact over their entire face area prior to installation of any bolt between the piping flange and equipment connecting flange. e. Permit piping connected to equipment to freely move in directions parallel to longitudinal centerline when and while bolts in connection flange are tightened. f. Align, level, and wedge equipment into place during fitting and alignment of connecting piping. g. Grout equipment into place prior to final bolting of piping but not before initial fitting and alignment. h. To provide maximum flexibility and ease of alignment, assemble connecting piping with gaskets in place and minimum of four bolts per joint installed and tightened. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PROCESS PIPING 40 05 01 - 11 1) Test alignment by loosening flange bolts to see if there is any change in relationship of piping flange with equipment connecting flange. 2) Realign as necessary, install flange bolts and make equipment connection. i. Provide utility connections to equipment shown on Drawings, scheduled or specified. N. Provide insulating components where dissimilar metals are joined together. O. Instrument Connections: 1. See drawing details. 3.3 CONNECTIONS WITH EXISTING PIPING A. Where connection between new work and existing work is made, use suitable and proper fittings to suit conditions encountered. B. Perform connections with existing piping at time and under conditions which will least interfere with service to customers affected by such operation. C. Undertake connections in fashion which will disturb system as little as possible. D. Provide suitable equipment and facilities to dewater, drain, and dispose of liquid removed without damage to adjacent property. E. Where connections to existing systems necessitate employment of past installation methods not currently part of trade practice, utilize necessary special piping components. F. Where connection involves potable water systems, provide disinfection methods as prescribed in this Section. G. Once tie-in to each existing system is initiated, continue work continuously until tie-in is made and tested. 3.4 FACILITIES FOR ACCESSING CONCEALED PIPING A. Provide access doors or panels in walls, floors, and ceilings to permit access to valves, piping and piping appurtenances requiring service. B. Size of access panels to allow inspection and removal of items served, minimum 10 x 14 inches size. C. Comply with Section 08 31 00 - Access Doors. 3.5 PRESSURE GAGES A. Provide at locations shown on the Drawings and specified. B. Comply with Section 01 61 03 - Common Requirements for Equipment. 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field Testing of Piping - General: 1. Test at the Site, following piping installation, all piping, except as expressly indicated otherwise elsewhere in the Contract Documents. 2. When authorities having jurisdiction require that their delegate or representative witness field testing of piping, advise Engineer in writing and authorities having jurisdiction not less than 48 hours prior to the associated testing. 3. Perform testing of piping in presence of Engineer or Resident Project Representative.. 4. Temporarily remove or protect piping-mounted devices, and devices installed on, in, or inline with piping and piping system appurtenances, such as manholes or chambers subjected to piping system testing, that could be damaged by testing. Upon successful completion of field testing of piping, reinstall devices temporarily removed and remove temporary protections provided for such devices, and verify such devices are in proper operating condition. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PROCESS PIPING 40 05 01 - 12 5. Provide construction equipment and machinery, apparatus, and services necessary, required, or both, for field testing of piping, including: a. Test pumps, compressors, hoses, temporary piping, calibrated monitoring and indicating devices, meters, test containers, valves, fittings, and temporary pumping systems required to maintain facility and system operations. b. Temporary bulkheads, bracing, blocking, and thrust restraints. 6. Provide pressurized air when air testing is required and gases when gases are required. 7. Responsibility for providing electricity for field testing of piping, including operating temporary pumps and appurtenances, is addressed in Section 01 51 05 - Temporary Utilities. When fuel is needed to operate temporary pumps for testing and related operations, provide fuel as necessary. 8. Responsibility for providing water for field testing of piping and related items, such as manholes and chambers (if any), is addressed in Section 01 51 05 - Temporary Utilities. Contractor shall provide means to convey water for hydrostatic testing into piping being tested. 9. Remedy observed and apparent leaks and remedy piping failing to comply with required acceptance criteria. Retest after implementing remedies until acceptable test results are obtained. 10. Unless otherwise shown or indicated, field testing of piping shall include existing piping systems connecting to new piping being tested. Test existing piping to nearest operable valve. Piping not installed by Contractor failing testing shall be remedied upon issuance of appropriate Contract Modification or allowance authorization (if any). 11. Testing Schedules: a. Type of testing required, and test pressure (when applicable), are indicated in piping schedules in the Contract Documents, including this Section. b. Unless otherwise indicated, required test pressures are at lowest elevation of piping segment being tested. c. For piping not indicated in piping schedules in the Contract Documents: 1) Hydrostatically test piping that will convey liquid or slurry at pressure greater than five psig. Provide process air piping test for piping that will convey air or gas under pressure or vacuum, except chlorine gas, which requires separate testing. 2) Use exfiltration testing, low-pressure air testing, or vacuum testing for other piping. 3) Water quality testing (including bacteriological testing) of piping that will convey potable water or water that will be treated to become potable is required promptly following disinfection of such piping. d. Test Pressure: 1) Where piping is required to be field tested under pressure, provide test pressure in accordance with piping schedules included in the Contract Documents. 2) If test pressure is not indicated in piping schedule in the Contract Documents, or if test is required for piping not indicated in piping schedule in the Contract Documents, obtain interpretation or clarification from Engineer before proceeding. Test pressure will be determined by Engineer based on maximum anticipated sustained operating pressure and methods described in AWWA manual or reference standard applicable to such piping system. 12. Scheduling and Sequencing of Field Testing of Piping: a. Test exposed, non-insulated piping, and obtain Engineer’s acceptance of results, as condition precedent to requesting Substantial Completion of such piping.. b. Test buried piping prior to backfilling. 13. Instrumentation Used for Field Testing of Piping: a. Perform field testing of piping systems that will operate under pressure or vacuum using calibrated pressure or vacuum measuring equipment, as applicable, and calibrated volumetric measuring equipment. Such calibrations shall have been issued not more than six months prior to the testing for which they are used. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PROCESS PIPING 40 05 01 - 13 b. Required value of parameter to be measured shall be in upper half of range of the associated item of pressure-, vacuum-, volume-measurement, and other measuring instrumentation used in field testing of piping. B. Hydrostatic Testing of Piping: 1. Preparation for Testing: a. For thermoplastic pipe and fiberglass pipe, comply with procedures in Sections 7, 8, 9.1, and 9.2 of AWWA C605, and the Contract Documents. b. For polyethylene pipe, comply with procedures in ASTM F2164, and the Contract Documents. Test duration, including time to pressurize, time for initial expansion, time at test pressure, and time to depressurize, shall not exceed eight hours. If re-testing of a test section or pipeline is required, not less than eight hours shall elapse between tests. c. For steel pipe, comply with procedures in AWWA Manual M11, and the Contract Documents. Wetting period is not required for pipe without cement-lining. d. For other piping, comply with procedures in AWWA Manual M9, and the Contract Documents, except minimum wetting period required immediately prior to testing for asbestos cement pipe shall be 24 hours rather than 48 hours prescribed for concrete pipe. Wetting period is not required for pipe without cement mortar- or concrete-lining. e. Prior to testing, provide adequate thrust restraint and verify joints are properly installed. 2. Test Procedure: a. Fill piping slowly to minimize air entrapment and surge pressures. Fill rate shall not exceed one foot of pipe length per second in pipe being tested. b. Expel air from piping as necessary. Obtain Engineer’s approval prior to tapping pipe for expelling air. c. Examine exposed joints and valves and remedy to eliminate visible or otherwise apparent leakage. d. After required wetting period (if any), add water as necessary to pressurize piping to required test pressure. Maintain test pressure for stabilization period of ten minutes before beginning testing. e. Polyethylene Pipe: After filling piping, gradually pressurize pipe to test pressure and maintain required test pressure for three hours for pipe to expand. During expansion, add water to maintain required test pressure. Begin timed test period after expansion period and complying with other requirements. f. Timed test period shall not begin until after piping is filled, exposed to required wetting period (if any), air is expelled, and pressure stabilized. g. Timed Test Period: After stabilization period, maintain test pressure for not less than two hours. During timed testing period, add water as necessary to maintain pressure within five psig of required test pressure. For polyethylene pipe, after three-hour expansion period, reduce test pressure by ten psig and do not add water. Test pressure shall remain steady for one hour, indicating no leakage. h. Pump from test container to maintain test pressure. Measure volume of water pumped from test container and record on test report. Record pressure at test pump at 15-minute intervals for duration of test. 3. Allowable Leakage Rates: Leakage is defined as the quantity of water supplied to pipe segment being tested to maintain pressure within five psig of test pressure during timed test period. Allowable leakage rates for piping are: a. No Leakage: Pipe with flanged, welded, fused, threaded, soldered, or brazed joints. b. Rates based on formula or table in AWWA Manual M41: 1) Metal and fiberglass pipe joined with rubber gaskets as sealing members, including the following joint types: a) Bell and spigot and push-on joints. b) Mechanical joints. c) Bolted sleeve type couplings. d) Grooved or shouldered couplings. c. Rates based on make-up allowance in AWWA Manual M9: Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PROCESS PIPING 40 05 01 - 14 1) Prestressed concrete cylinder pipe (AWWA C301), other types of concrete pressure pipe (AWWA C300, AWWA C302, and AWWA C303), and other types of concrete pipe joined with O-ring rubber gasket sealing members. d. Rates based on formula or table in AWWA C605: 1) Plastic pipe joined with O-ring gasket sealing members. 4. Record date, time, and location of each test, indicating piping segment tested, general description of apparatus used, pressure and leakage measurements obtained, remarks concerning conditions encountered during testing of each pipe segment, whether each pipe segment successfully passed the test, and names and employers of individuals performing and witnessing such testing. Furnish such results as Submittal. 5. Pressure Testing: a. Fill piping with clean water and hydrostatically test in accordance with this Article’s “Hydrostatic Testing of Piping” provision. b. Hydrostatic test pressure shall be in accordance with this Section’s Piping System Schedule. When hydrostatic test pressure is not indicated in the Piping System Schedule, for pressure piping, Engineer will direct Contractor to use test pressure of 1.5 times maximum operating pressure to which piping may be subjected. If not otherwise indicated in the Piping System Schedule, hydrostatically test vacuum piping to not less than 25 psig. c. After hydrostatic testing, replace moisture absorbing gaskets and valve packing. 6. Record date, time, and location of each test, indicating piping segment tested, general description of apparatus used, measurements obtained, remarks concerning conditions encountered during testing of each pipe segment, whether each pipe segment successfully passed the test, and names and employers of individuals performing and witnessing such testing. Furnish such results as Submittal. C. Low Pressure Air Testing of Gravity Sewers: 1. Plug and bulkhead ends and lateral connections of piping segment to be tested. 2. Required test pressure shall be increased by number of feet of equal to groundwater surface elevation above invert of lowest point of piping segment being tested. 3. Test in accordance with requirements of authority having jurisdiction. 4. When laws, rules, regulations, codes, ordinances, or lawful orders of authorities having jurisdiction are not in effect at the Site at the time the Work is performed, comply with testing procedures indicated in the applicable reference standard, indicated below: a. PVC Pipe: ASTM F1417. 5. Record date, time, and location of each test, indicating piping segment tested, general description of apparatus used, pressure measurements obtained, remarks concerning conditions encountered during testing of each pipe segment, whether each pipe segment successfully passed the test, and names and employers of individuals performing and witnessing such testing. Furnish such results as Submittal. 3.7 LOCATION OF BURIED OBSTACLES A. Furnish exact location and description of buried utilities encountered and thrust block placement. B. Reference items to definitive reference point locations such as found property corners, entrances to buildings, existing structure lines, fire hydrants and related fixed structures. C. Include such information as location, elevation, coverage, supports, and additional pertinent information. D. Incorporate such information on Record Drawings required under Section 01 78 39 - Project Record Documents. 3.8 PIPING SYSTEM SCHEDULES A. Piping System 1 – Ductile Iron: 1. General: a. Piping symbol and service: Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PROCESS PIPING 40 05 01 - 15 1) FM – Force Main 2) RS – Raw Sewage (Emergency Bypass Piping) b. Field Tests and Inspections: 1) Hydrostatic testing. 2) Test procedures are indicated in this Section’s “Field Quality Control” Article. c. Test Requirements: 1) Test medium: Water. 2) Pressure: 125 psig. 3) Duration: 6 HRS. d. Gaskets: 1) Flanged, push-on, and mechanical joints (ductile iron): Rubber, AWWA/ANSI C111/A21.11. 2. System components: a. Pipe size 8 inches: 1) Exposed service: a) Material: (1) Flanged: Ductile iron, Class 51. b) Reference: AWWA/ANSI C115/A21.15. c) Lining: Protecto 401™ Ceramic Epoxy Lining. d) Coating: HPC; See Section 09 96 00. e) Fittings: Either AWWA/ANSI C110/A21.10 ductile or gray iron. f) Joints: AWWA/ANSI C115/A21.15 flanged joints with flanges at valves and structure penetrations. 2) Buried service: a) Material: (1) Mechanical Joint (MJ): Ductile iron, Class 51. b) Reference: AWWA/ANSI C115/A21.15. c) Lining: Protecto 401™ Ceramic Epoxy Lining. d) Coating: Bituminous. e) Fittings: (1) Either AWWA/ANSI C110/A21.10 ductile or gray iron. (2) Optional: AWWA/ANSI C153/A21.53 ductile iron compact fittings. f) Joints: Push-on with mechanical (stuffing box type) joints at fittings and valves. B. Piping System 2 – PVC Pressure Pipe: 1. General: a. Piping symbol and service: 1) FM – Force Main b. Field Tests and Inspections: 1) Hydrostatic testing. 2) Test procedures are indicated in this Section’s “Field Quality Control” Article. c. Test Requirements: 1) Test medium: Water. 2) Pressure: 125 psig. 3) Duration: 6 HRS. d. Gaskets: 1) Push-on joints (gasketed bell and spigot) in accordance with ASTM D3139. 2. System components: a. Pipe size 12 inches: 1) Buried service: a) Material: (1) C900 (DR-25). b) Reference: AWWA C900/ASTM D1784. c) Lining: None. d) Coating: None. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PROCESS PIPING 40 05 01 - 16 e) Fittings: Either molded PVC fittings (complying with AWWA C907) with the use of PVC mechanical restraint for molded or fabricated PVC fittings or restrained ductile iron mechanical joints. f) Joints: Push-on joints (gasketed bell and spigot) in accordance with ASTM F477 and ASTM D3139. C. Piping System 3 – Gravity Sewer: 1. General: a. Piping symbol and service: 1) SS – Sanitary Sewer (Gravity Sewer) b. Field Tests and Inspections: 1) Gravity Sewers: a) Low-pressure air testing. b) Test procedures are indicated in this Section’s “Field Quality Control” Article. c. Gaskets: 1) As indicated in the Specifications for required pipe material. 2. System components: a. Pipe size 18 inches: 1) Buried service: a) Material: PVC SDR 26. b) Reference: ASTM D3034. c) Lining: None. d) Coating: None. e) Fittings: Push-on (gasketed bell and spigot). f) Joints: Push-on (gasketed bell and spigot) in accordance with ASTM F477 and ASTM D3212. D. Piping System 4 – Vent Piping: a. Piping symbol and service: 1) VT - Vent. b. Test Requirements: 1) Test medium: Water. 2) Pressure: See Article 3.6. B. 3) Duration: 2 HRS. 2. System components: a. Pipe size 2 inches: 1) Exposed service. a) Material: PVC, Type 1, Grade 1, Schedule 40. b) Reference: ASTM D1785. c) Lining: None. d) Coating: None. e) Fittings: Solvent welded socket type per ASTM D2466. f) Joints: Solvent welded. 3. Vent Piping Installation: a. Provide vent piping in appropriate locations, as shown or indicated on the Drawings. END OF SECTION Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents PIPE SUPPORT SYSTEMS 40 05 07 - 1 SECTION 40 05 07 PIPE SUPPORT SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Pipe support and anchor systems. 2. Design of Pipe Support Systems as specified. B. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Section 03 15 19 - Anchorage to Concrete. 2. Section 09 96 00 - High Performance Industrial Coatings. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards: 1. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME): a. B31.3, Process Piping. 2. ASTM International (ASTM): a. A36, Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel. b. A123/123M, Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. c. A153/153M, Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. d. A276, Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes. e. A575, Standard Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon, Merchant Quality, M-Grades. f. A576, Standard Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon, Hot-Wrought, Special Quality. g. A917, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Coated by the Electrolytic Process for Applications Requiring Designation of the Coating Mass on Each Surface (General Requirements). h. A918, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Nickel Alloy Coated by the Electrolytic Process for Applications Requiring Designation of the Coating Mass on Each Surface. i. B633, Standard Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron and Steel. 3. American Welding Society (AWS): a. D1.1, Structural Welding Code - Steel. b. D1.6, Structural Welding Code - Stainless Steel. 4. Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry Inc. (MSS): a. SP-58, Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design, Manufacture, Selection, Application, and Installation. B. Responsibility: 1. Design complete support systems for piping 12 inches and smaller where supports are not shown on the Drawings. 2. Provide all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals as shown, specified, and required to design, furnish and install the system of hangers, supports, guidance, anchorage and appurtenances. 3. General piping support details may be indicated on the Drawings in certain locations for pipe 12 inches diameter and smaller. 4. Incorporate those details with requirements of this Specification Section to provide the piping support system. C. Each type of pipe hanger or support shall be the product of one manufacturer. D. Qualifications: Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents PIPE SUPPORT SYSTEMS 40 05 07 - 2 1. Pipe support designer: a. Licensed Professional Engineer registered in the state the project is located in. b. Minimum of five years experience designing pipe supports for projects of similar size and complexity. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Shop Drawings: a. Scaled drawings showing location, installation, material, loads and forces, and deflection of all hangers and supports. b. Analyze each pipe system for all loads and forces on hangers and supports and their reaction forces to the structure to which they are fastened. c. Where Contract Documents indicate contractor is to design pipe support systems, submit detail design calculations and scaled drawings signed by Pipe support designer. 2. Product data: a. Acknowledgement that products submitted meet requirements of standards referenced. b. Manufacturer's installation instructions. c. Itemized list of wall sleeves, anchors, support devices and all other items related to pipe support system. B. Informational Submittals: 1. Certifications. a. Pipe support designer qualifications PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Empire Industries, Inc. 2. ASC Engineered Solutions (ANVIL). 3. National Pipe Hanger Corp. 4. PHD Manufacturing, Inc. 5. Piping Technology & Products, Inc. 6. Atkore International (Unistrut, Powerstrut and Aickinstrut). 7. Or Approved Equal. 2.2 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. General: 1. Galvanized components: a. Hot-dip galvanized components: 1) General: ASTM 123/123M. 2) Fasteners and hardware: ASTM 153/153M. 2. Dissimilar metals protection: a. Galvanized-to-galvanized and galvanized-to-aluminum: No protection required. b. All other galvanized-to-dissimilar metal connections: Neoprene or nylon pads, shims, grommets, etc. B. Vertical Pipe Supports: 1. At base of riser. a. Material: Hot-dip galvanized steel 304 stainless steel 316 stainless steel. 2. Lateral movement: a. Clamps or brackets: 1) MSS SP-58, Type 8 or 42. 2) Similar to Empire Industries Figure 50. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents PIPE SUPPORT SYSTEMS 40 05 07 - 3 C. Pipe Support Saddle: 1. General: a. Minimum contact area: 1) 120 Degrees minimum. 2) 180 Degrees for PVC/PE greater than 12 inches 2. For pipe located 3 feet or less from floor elevation, except as otherwise indicated on Drawings. a. MSS SP-58 Type 38. b. Material: Hot-dip galvanized 304 stainless steel 316 stainless steel. c. Similar to Empire Industries Figure 426. D. Pipe Support Risers/Stanchions: 1. Schedule 40 pipe. 2. Material: match pipe support saddle. 3. Size: As recommended by saddle manufacturer. E. Pipe Support Base Plate: 1. 4 inches larger than support. 2. Collar 3/16 inches thickness, circular in shape, and sleeve type connection to pipe. 3. Collar fitted over outside of support pipe and extended 2 inches from floor plate. 4. Collar welded to floor plate. 5. Edges ground smooth. 6. Material: match pipe support saddle. 7. Assembly hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. 8. Provide low carbon stainless steel for welded fabrications. 2.3 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Supports capable of supporting the pipe for all service and testing conditions. 1. Provide 5 to 1 safety factor. B. Allow free expansion and contraction of the piping to prevent excessive stress resulting from service and testing conditions or from weight transferred from the piping or attached equipment. C. Design supports and hangers to allow for proper pitch of pipes. D. For chemical and waste piping, design, materials of construction and installation of pipe hangers, supports, guides, restraints, and anchors: 1. ASME B31.3. 2. MSS SP-58. 3. Except where modified by this Specification. E. For steam and hot and cold water process piping, design, materials of construction and installation of pipe hangers, supports, guides, restraints, and anchors: 1. ASME B31.1. 2. MSS SP-58. F. Check all physical clearances between piping, support system and structure. 1. Provide for vertical adjustment after erection. G. Support vertical pipe runs in pipe chases at base of riser. 1. Support pipes for lateral movement with clamps or brackets. H. Pipe Support Spacing: 1. General: a. Factor loads by specific weight of liquid conveyed if specific weight is greater than water. b. Locate pipe supports at maximum spacing scheduled unless indicated otherwise on the Drawings. c. Provide at least one support for each length of pipe at each change of direction and at each valve. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents PIPE SUPPORT SYSTEMS 40 05 07 - 4 2. PVC pipe support schedule: PIPE SIZES - IN MAXIMUM SPAN - FT 1-1/4 and less 3 1-1/2 thru 3 4 4 and greater 5 * Maximum fluid temperature of 120 degrees F. 3. Support each length and every fitting: a. Bell and spigot piping: 1) At least one hanger. 2) Applied at bell. b. Mechanical coupling joints: 1) Place hanger within 2 feet of each side of fittings to keep pipes in alignment. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Provide piping systems exhibiting pulsation, vibration, swaying, or impact with suitable constraints to correct the condition. 1. Included in this requirement are movements from: a. Trap discharge. b. Water hammer. c. Similar internal forces. B. Weld Supports: 1. AWS D1.1. 2. Weld anchors to pipe in accordance with ASME B31.3. 3. AWS D1.6 for stainless steel supports. C. Locate piping and pipe supports as to not interfere with open accesses, walkways, platforms, and with maintenance or disassembly of equipment. D. Anchorage to Concrete - reference Specification Section 03 15 19. E. Welding: 1. Welding rods: ASTM and AWS standards. 2. Integral attachments: a. Include welded-on ears, shoes, plates and angle clips. b. Ensure material for integral attachments is of good weldable quality. 3. Preheating, welding and postheat treating: ASME B31.3, Chapter V. F. Field Painting: 1. Comply with Specification Section 09 96 00. END OF SECTION Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents DUCTILE IRON PROCESS PIPE 40 05 19 - 1 SECTION 40 05 19 DUCTILE IRON PROCESS PIPE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Ductile iron piping, fittings, and appurtenances. B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Section 40 05 01 - Common Work Results for Process Piping. 1.2 REFERENCE A. Referenced Standards: 1. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME): a. B1.1, Unified Inch Screw Threads (UN and UNR Thread Form). b. B16.1, Gray Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: Classes 25, 125, and 250. 2. ASTM International (ASTM): a. B695, Standard Specification for Coatings of Zinc Mechanically Deposited on Iron and Steel. 3. American Water Works Association (AWWA): a. C203, Standard for Coal-Tar Protective Coatings and Linings for Steel Water Pipelines - Enamel and Tape - Hot Applied. b. C217, Microcrystalline Wax and Petrolatum Tape Coating Systems for Steel Water Pipe. c. C606, Standard for Grooved and Shouldered Joints. 4. American Water Works Association/American National Standards Institute (AWWA/ANSI): a. C105/A21.5, Standard for Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile-Iron Pipe Systems. b. C110/A21.10, Standard for Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Fittings. c. C111/A21.11, Standard for Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings. d. C115/A21.15, Standard for Flanged Ductile-Iron Pipe with Ductile-Iron or Gray-Iron Threaded Flanges. e. C150/A21.50, Standard for Thickness Design of Ductile-Iron Pipe. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. Comply with Section 40 05 01. 2. Certification of factory hydrostatic testing. 3. If mechanical coupling system is used, submit piping, fittings, and appurtenant items which will be utilized to meet system requirements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Pipe and Fittings: a. American Ductile Iron Pipe. b. McWane Ductile. c. US Pipe. d. No like, equivalent or "or-equal" item or substitution is permitted. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents DUCTILE IRON PROCESS PIPE 40 05 19 - 2 2. Restrained Flanged Coupling Adapters: a. EBAA Iron Series 2100 MEGAFLANGE (DI). b. EBAA Iron Series 2000 PV (DI to C900). c. Romac Style Alpha FC. d. Smith Blair Style 911. e. Or Approved Equal. 3. Sleeve (Bolted-Type) Couplings: a. Smith-Blair, Style 411. b. Romac, 501. c. Or Approved Equal. 4. Ceramic Epoxy Lining: a. "PROTECTO 401” by Induron. 5. Polyethylene Encasement Tape: a. Chase, Chasekote 750. b. Kendall, Polyken 900. c. 3 M, Scotchrap 50. d. V-Bio Polywrap. 6. Restrained Mechanical Joints: a. American (Flex-Ring) - 4 inches to 54 inches. b. U.S. Pipe (TR-Flex) - 4 inches to 36 inches. c. Or Approved Equal. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Ductile Iron Pipe: 1. AWWA/ANSI C115/A21.15. 2. AWWA/ANSI C150/A21.50. 3. AWWA/ANSI C151/A21.51. B. Fittings and Flanges: 1. AWWA/ANSI C110/A21.10. 2. AWWA/ANSI C115/A21.15. 3. Flanges drilled and faced per ASME B16.1 for both 125 and 250 psi applications. C. Nuts and Bolts: 1. Buried: a. Wax Tape Coatings per AWWA C217. 2. Exposed: Mechanical galvanized ASTM B695, Class 40. 3. Heads and dimensions per ASME B1.1. 4. Threaded per ASME B1.1. 5. Project ends 1/4 to 1/2 inches beyond nuts. D. Gaskets: See individual piping system requirements in Section 40 05 01. E. Polyethylene Encasement: Per AWWA/ANSI C105/A21.5. F. See Piping Schedules in Section 40 05 01. 2.3 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Couplings: 1. Flanged adaptors: a. Unit consisting of steel or carbon steel body sleeve, flange, followers, Grade 30 rubber gaskets. b. Provide units specified in the MANUFACTURERS Article. c. Supply flanges meeting standards of adjoining flanges. d. Rate entire assembly for test pressure specified on piping schedule for each respective application. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents DUCTILE IRON PROCESS PIPE 40 05 19 - 3 2.4 FABRICATION A. Furnish and install without outside coatings of bituminous material any exposed pipe scheduled to be painted. B. Furnish cast parts with lacquer finish compatible with finish coat. 2.5 LININGS AND COATINGS A. Ceramic epoxy: 1. Minimum dry film thickness: 40 mil. 2.6 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Factory Test: 1. Subject pipe to hydrostatic test of not less than 500 psi with the pipe under the full test pressure for at least 10 seconds. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Joining Method - Push-On Mechanical (Gland-Type) Joints: 1. Install in accordance with AWWA/ANSI C111/A21.11. 2. Assemble mechanical joints carefully according to manufacturer's recommendations. 3. If effective sealing is not obtained, disassemble, thoroughly clean, and reassemble the joint. 4. Do not overstress bolts. 5. Where piping utilizes mechanical joints with tie rods, align joint holes to permit installation of harness bolts. B. Joining Method - Flanged Joints: 1. Install in accordance with AWWA/ANSI C115/A21.15. 2. Extend pipe completely through screwed-on flanged and machine flange face and pipe in single operation. 3. Make flange faces flat and perpendicular to pipe centerline. 4. When bolting flange joints, exercise extreme care to ensure that there is no restraint on opposite end of pipe or fitting which would prevent uniform gasket compression or would cause unnecessary stress, bending or torsional strains to be applied to cast flanges or flanged fittings. 5. Allow one flange free movement in any direction while bolts are being tightened. 6. Do not assemble adjoining flexible joints until flanged joints in piping system have been tightened. 7. Gradually tighten flange bolts uniformly to permit even gasket compression. C. Flange Adaptors 12 inches and Less: 1. Locate and drill holes for anchor studs after pipe is in place and bolted tight. 2. Drill holes not more than 1/8 inches larger than diameter of stud projection. D. Cutting: 1. Do not damage interior lining material during cutting. 2. Use abrasive wheel cutters or saws. 3. Make square cuts. 4. Bevel and free cut ends of sharp edges after cutting. E. Support exposed pipe in accordance with Section 40 05 01. F. Install buried piping in accordance with Section 40 05 01. G. Install restrained joint systems where specified in Section 40 05 01 under specific piping system. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents DUCTILE IRON PROCESS PIPE 40 05 19 - 4 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Test piping systems in accordance with Section 40 05 01. END OF SECTION Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents PIPE - PLASTIC 40 05 31 - 1 SECTION 40 05 31 PIPE - PLASTIC PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Plastic pipe (PVC). B. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Section 40 05 01 - Common Work Results for Process Piping. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. See Specification Section 40 05 01. B. Referenced Standards: 1. ASTM International (ASTM): a. PVC (polyvinyl chloride) materials: 1) D1784, Standard Specification for Rigid Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Compounds and Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds. 2) D1785, Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) PVC Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80 and 120. 3) D2467, Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80. 4) D3034, Standard Specification for Type PSM Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings. 5) D3139, Standard Specification for Joints for Plastic Pressure Pipes Using Flexible Elastomeric Seals. 6) D3212, Standard Specification for Joints for Drain and Sewer Plastic Pipes Using Flexible Elastomeric Seals. 7) F593, Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex Cap Screws, and Studs. 8) F679, Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Large-Diameter Plastic Gravity Sewer Pipe and Fittings. 9) F794, Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Profile Gravity Sewer Pipe and Fittings Based on Controlled Inside Diameter. 10) F949, Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Corrugated Sewer Pipe with a Smooth Interior and Fittings. b. Installation: 1) D2321, Standard Practice for Underground Installation of Thermoplastic Pipe for Sewers and Other Gravity-Flow Applications. 2. American Water Works Association (AWWA): a. PVC (polyvinyl chloride) materials: 1) C900, Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe and Fabricated Fittings, 4 In. Through 60 In. b. Polyethylene (PE) materials: 1) C901, Standard for Polyethylene (PE) Pressure Pipe and Tubing, 1/2 inches through 3 IN, for Water Service. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. See Specification Section 40 05 01. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents PIPE - PLASTIC 40 05 31 - 2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PVC PIPING (EXPOSED) A. General: 1. Provide Schedule 40 pipe with Schedule 40 fittings and appurtenances to locations shown on Drawings. 2. Furnish materials in full compliance to following material specifications: a. Manufacture pipe, fittings and appurtenances from polyvinyl chloride (PVC) compound which meets the requirements of Type 1, Grade 1 (12454-B) Polyvinyl Chloride as outlined in ASTM D1784. B. Pipe: 1. Furnish pipe meeting requirements of ASTM D1785. 2. Pipe 2 inches and less to be solvent welded. 3. Pipe larger than 2 inches may be either flanged or solvent welded unless shown otherwise on Drawings. C. Fittings: Provide ASTM D2467 PVC socket type fittings having the same pressure and temperature rating as the pipe. D. Flanges/Unions: 1. Furnish flanges and unions at locations shown on Drawings. 2. Provide either flanges or unions at valves, penetrations through structures and equipment connections. 3. For pipe larger than 2 inches, provide 150 pound socket type PVC flange. 4. For pipe 2 inches and less, provide socket type PVC union with Buna O-rings. 5. Use flat, full faced natural rubber gaskets at flanged connections. a. Furnish heavy hex head bolts, each with one heavy hex nut, ASTM F593 Type 316 stainless steel. 6. Use spacers supplied by pipe manufacturer when mating raised-faced flanges to other flanges. E. Installation: 1. Field threading PVC will not be permitted. a. Perform required threaded connections or attachments by the use of factory molded socket by threaded adapters. b. Female adapters are not acceptable. 2. Employ installation and pipe support practices and solvent welding all in compliance to the manufacturer's printed recommendation. a. Continuously support PVC piping at liquid operating temperatures in excess of 100 DEGF. b. For vertical piping, band the pipe at intervals to rigidly support load of twice vertical load. c. Support riser clamps on spring hangers. d. Do not clamp PVC tightly or restrict movement for expansion and contraction. 2.2 PVC PIPING A. Materials: 1. Furnish materials in full compliance to the following material specification. 2. PVC pipe shall be rigid, unplasticized polyvinyl chloride (PVC) made of PVC plastic having a cell classification of 12454-B or 12454-C as described in specification ASTM D1784. 3. The requirements of this Specification are intended to provide for pipe and fittings suitable for non-pressure drainage of wastewater and surface water. 4. Joining systems shall consist of an elastomeric gasket joint meeting requirements of ASTM D3212. 5. Supply to the Engineer all information and sample of joining method for his evaluation. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents PIPE - PLASTIC 40 05 31 - 3 a. Only jointing methods acceptable to the Engineer will be permitted. 6. Ensure impact strengths and pipe stiffnesses in full compliance to these Specifications. B. Installation: Install pipe and fittings in accordance with ASTM D2321 and as recommended by the manufacturer. END OF SECTION Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 This page intentionally left blank. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR PROCESS AND UTILITY VALVES 40 05 51 - 1 SECTION 40 05 51 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR PROCESS AND UTILITY VALVES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Valving and valving appurtenances. B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Section 01 61 03 - Common Work Results for Equipment. 2. Section 09 96 00 - High Performance Industrial Coatings. 3. Section 40 05 01 - Common Work Results for Process Piping. 4. Section 40 05 52 - Miscellaneous Valves. 5. Section 40 05 62 - Plug Valves. 6. Section 40 05 63 - Ball Valves. 7. Section 40 05 66 - Check Valves. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Definitions: 1. The following are definitions of abbreviations used in this Specification Section or one of the individual valve sections: a. CWP: Cold water working pressure. b. SWP: Steam working pressure. c. WOG: Water, oil, gas working pressure. d. WWP: Water working pressure. B. Referenced Standards: 1. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME): a. B1.20.1, Pipe Threads, General Purpose. b. B16.1, Gray Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: Classes 25, 125, and 250. c. B16.18, Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings. 2. ASTM International (ASTM): a. A126, Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges, and Pipe Fittings. b. D256, Standard Test Methods for Determining the Izod Pendulum Impact Resistance of Plastics. c. D638, Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics. d. D648, Standard Test Method for Deflection Temperature of Plastics Under Flexural Load in the Edgewise Position. e. D695, Standard Test Method for Compressive Properties of Rigid Plastics. f. D2240, Standard Test Method for Rubber Property-Durometer Hardness. 3. American Water Works Association (AWWA): a. C207, Standard for Steel Pipe Flanges for Waterworks Service - Sizes 4 inches through 144 inches. b. C500, Standard for Metal-Seated Gate Valves for Water Supply Service. c. C504, Standard for Rubber-Seated Butterfly Valves. d. C507, Standard for Ball Valves, 6 inches through 48 inches (150 mm through 1200 mm). e. C509, Standard for Resilient-Seated Gate Valves for Water Supply Service. f. C550, Standard for Protective Coatings for Valves and Hydrants. g. C606, Standard for Grooved and Shouldered Joints. 4. American Water Works Association/American National Standards Institute (AWWA/ANSI): Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR PROCESS AND UTILITY VALVES 40 05 51 - 2 a. C111/A21.11, Standard for Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings. 5. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): a. 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum). b. MG 1, Motors and Generators. 6. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): a. 70, National Electrical Code (NEC). 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Product technical data including: a. Acknowledgement that products submitted meet requirements of standards referenced. b. Manufacturer's installation instructions. c. Valve pressure and temperature rating. d. Valve material of construction. e. Special linings. f. Valve dimensions and weight. g. Valve flow coefficient. B. Informational Submittals: 1. Test reports if required in the individual valve specification. C. Closeout Submittals: 1. Operation and Maintenance Data: a. Submit in accordance with Section 01 78 23 - Operation and Maintenance Data. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, refer to individual valve Specification Sections for acceptable manufacturers. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Refer to individual valve Specification Sections. 2.3 FABRICATION A. End Connections: 1. Provide the type of end connections for valves as shown on the Drawings. 2. Comply with the following standards: a. Threaded: ASME B1.20.1. b. Flanged: ASME B16.1, Class 125 unless otherwise noted or AWWA C207. c. Bell and spigot or mechanical (gland) type: AWWA/ANSI C111/A21.11. d. Soldered: ASME B16.18. e. Grooved: Rigid joints per Table 5 of AWWA C606. B. Refer to individual valve Specification Sections for specifications of each type of valve used on Project. C. Nuts, Bolts, and Washers: 1. Wetted or internal to be bronze or stainless steel. a. Exposed to be zinc or cadmium plated. 2. Exposed: Mechanical galvanized ASTM B695, Class 40. 3. Heads and dimensions per ASME B1.1. 4. Threaded per ASME B1.1. 5. Project ends 1/4 to 1/2 inches beyond nuts. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR PROCESS AND UTILITY VALVES 40 05 51 - 3 D. Epoxy Interior Coating: Provide epoxy interior coating for all ferrous surfaces in accordance with AWWA C550. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Painting Requirements: Comply with Section 09 96 00 for High Performance Industrial Coatings. C. Support exposed valves and piping adjacent to valves independently to eliminate pipe loads being transferred to valve and valve loads being transferred to the piping. D. For grooved coupling valves, install rigid type couplings or provide separate support to prevent rotation of valve from installed position. E. For threaded valves, provide union on one side within 2 feet of valve to allow valve removal. F. Install valves accessible for operation, inspection, and maintenance. END OF SECTION Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 This page intentionally left blank. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents MISCELLANEOUS VALVES 40 05 52 - 1 SECTION 40 05 52 MISCELLANEOUS VALVES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Air release and vacuum relief valves. a. Combination air release and vacuum valve. B. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Section 01 61 03 - Common Work Results for Equipment. 2. Section 40 05 51 - Common Requirements for Process and Utility Valves. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards: 1. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME): a. B16.1, Gray Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: Classes 25, 125, and 250. 2. American Water Works Association (AWWA): a. C512, Standard for Air-Release, Air-Vacuum, and Combination Air Valves for Waterworks Service. b. C550, Standard for Protective Interior Coatings for Valves and Hydrants. 3. Canadian Standards Association (CSA). 4. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): a. 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum). 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. See Specification Section 40 05 51. B. Contract Closeout Information: 1. Operation and Maintenance Data: a. See Specification Section 01 78 23 for requirements for the mechanics, administration, and the content of Operation and Maintenance Manual submittals. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 AIR RELEASE AND VACUUM RELIEF VALVES A. General: Conform to AWWA C512. B. Wastewater Service: 1. Combination Air Release and Vacuum Valve: a. DeZurik APCO S-440. b. VAG GA Industries, Figure 942. c. Crispin USL20B. d. Or Approved Equal. 2. Materials: a. Body and cover: Cast iron. b. Float: Stainless steel. c. Seat: Buna-N. 3. Design requirements: a. Size: As shown on the Drawings. b. Working pressure: 1 - 25 psig. c. Relief capacity: 100 SCFM at 5 psi differential from atmospheric. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents MISCELLANEOUS VALVES 40 05 52 - 2 d. Vacuum capacity: 100 SCFM at 5 psi differential from atmospheric. e. Provide control for slow release of air through valve to prevent valve slamming shut from excessive air or water velocity through valve. f. Small orifice for venting air/gas build-up when pipeline is operating full. g. Provide isolation valve, type as shown on the Drawings. h. Flush accessories: 1) Blow off valve. 2) Clear water inlet valve. 3) Hose and quick connect coupling. 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Furnish any accessories required to provide a completely operable valve. 2.3 FABRICATION A. Completely shop assemble unit including any interconnecting piping, speed control valves, control isolation valves and electrical components. B. Provide internal epoxy coating suitable for potable water for all iron body valves in accordance with AWWA C550. 2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Shop hydrostatically test to unit test pressure. 2.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Provide one set of any special tools or wrenches required for operation or maintenance for each type valve. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: See Specification Section 01 61 03 and Specification Section 40 05 51. B. Air Release, Vacuum Relief, and Pressure Relief Valves: 1. Pipe vent/drain to lift station wet well. C. Float-Operated Valves: Install baffle around float to minimize turbulence adjacent to float. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Clean, inspect, and operate valve to ensure all parts are operable and valve seats properly. B. Check and adjust valves and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and place into operation. END OF SECTION Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents PLUG VALVES 40 05 62 - 1 SECTION 40 05 62 PLUG VALVES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Plug valves. B. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Section 40 05 51 - Common Requirements for Process and Utility Valves. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards: 1. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME): a. B16.1, Gray Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: Classes 25, 125 and 250. 2. ASTM International (ASTM): a. A126, Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges and Pipe Fittings. b. A536, Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings. c. D2240, Standard Test Method for Rubber Property-Durometer Hardness. 3. American Water Works Association (AWWA): a. C517 Resilient-Seated Cast-Iron Eccentric Plug Valves 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. See Specification Section 40 05 51. B. Contract Closeout Information: 1. Operation and Maintenance Data: a. See Specification Section 01 78 23 for requirements for the mechanics, administration, and the content of Operation and Maintenance Manual submittals. 2. See Specification Section 40 05 51. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the manufacturers listed under the specific valve types are acceptable. 2.2 NON-LUBRICATED ECCENTRIC PLUG VALVES (SEWAGE APPLICATIONS) A. Manufacturers: 1. DeZurik. 2. Henry Pratt. 3. ValMatic. 4. Or Approved Equal. B. Materials: 1. Body: Cast-iron ASTM A126, Class B. 2. Plug: One or two-piece construction ductile iron, ASTM A536 65-45-12 or cast iron, ASTM A126 Class B. 3. Plug facing: Grease and/or petroleum-resistant resilient Neoprene or Buna-N compound, 70 Type A durometer hardness per ASTM D2240. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents PLUG VALVES 40 05 62 - 2 4. Shaft bearing bushings: Permanently lubricated TFE or Delrin sleeve type stainless steel or bronze. 5. Valve seats: Welded-in overlay of 90% nickel, (minimum 1/8 inches thick). 6. Stem seal: per AWWA C517, Section 4.4.7. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Refer to Drawings for type of actuator: 1. Furnish actuator integral with valve. B. Refer to Specification Section 40 05 51 for actuator requirements. 2.4 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Non-Lubricated Eccentric Plug Valves (Sewage): 1. Port area: a. 100% equivalent full pipe area. 2. Valve body: Fitted with bolted bonnet. 3. End connections: See Specification Section 40 05 51. 4. Stem seal: Adjustable and replaceable without disassembling valve or bonnet. 5. Designed for seating drip tight in any flow direction. 6. Rating: a. 1/2 through 12 inches, 175 psi working pressure. b. 14 through 36 inches, 150 psi working pressure. c. Three-way valves, 125 psi working pressure. 7. Actuator: a. Actuator gearing in enclosure suitable for running in oil with seals on shaft to prevent entry of dirt or water. b. Positive identification on actuator indicating valve position. c. Adjustable stop to set closing torque. 2.5 FABRICATION A. See Specification Section 40 05 51. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. See Specification Section 40 05 51. B. Install valves with valve stem horizontal, plug seat on inlet side and with plug rotating up into the open position for valves in horizontal lines. C. Install valve with actuator above pipe or plug centerline. END OF SECTION Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents BALL VALVES 40 05 63 - 1 SECTION 40 05 63 BALL VALVES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Ball valves. B. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Section 40 05 51 - Common Requirements for Process and Utility Valves. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards: 1. ASTM International (ASTM): a. A48, Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings. b. A126, Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges, and Pipe Fittings. c. A276, Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes. d. A351, Standard Specification for Castings, Austenitic, for Pressure-Containing Parts. 2. American Water Works Association (AWWA). 3. Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry Inc. (MSS): a. SP-110, Ball Valves; Threaded, Socket-Welding, Solder Joint, Grooved and Flared Ends. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. PVDF: Polyvinylidene fluoride. B. PTFE: Polytetrafluoroethylene. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. See Specification Section 40 05 51. 2. Test results for AWWA valves. B. Contract Closeout Information: 1. Operation and Maintenance Data: a. See Specification Section 01 78 23 for requirements for the mechanics, administration, and the content of Operation and Maintenance Manual submittals. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the manufacturers listed in the applicable Articles below are acceptable. 2.2 METALLIC BALL VALVES 1/4 TO 3 INCHES DIAMETER A. Comply with MSS SP-110. B. Manufacturers: 1. Nibco (H-x062W Series). 2. Apollo. 3. Watts. 4. Stockham. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents BALL VALVES 40 05 63 - 2 C. Materials: 1. Body: Lead-Free DZR Brass 2. Ball: Brass with Hard Chrome Plate 3. Seats: PTFE. D. Design Requirements: 1. Rated for a minimum of: a. 500 psi CWP. b. 150 psi of saturated steam. c. 29 inches vacuum. 2. Two-position lockable handle. 3. Stem with blowout-proof design. 4. Balancing stop for all applications. 5. Bodies with mounting pad for applications requiring actuators. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Refer to Drawings and valve schedule for type of actuators. 1. Furnish actuator integral with valve. B. Refer to Specification Section 40 05 51 for actuator requirements. 2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Furnish record of test. B. Product Testing: MSS SP-110. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. See Specification Section 40 05 51. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents CHECK VALVES 40 05 66 - 1 SECTION 40 05 66 CHECK VALVES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Swing check valve. B. Related Requirements: Include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Section 40 05 51 - Common Requirements for Process and Utility Valves. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Referenced Standards: 1. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME): a. B16.1, Gray Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: Classes 25, 125, and 250. 2. American Water Works Association (AWWA): a. C508, Standard for Swing-Check Valves for Waterworks Service, 2 in. through 24 in. NPS. 3. Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry Inc. (MSS): a. SP-71, Gray Iron Swing Check Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends. b. SP-80, Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle and Check Valves. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. Valve Manufacturers: a. Manufacturer shall be a business regularly engaged in manufacturing and furnishing check valves of the type required and similar equipment. b. Manufacturer shall be able to document having furnished check valves, of the type required, of size equal to or larger than those required for the Work, during the past five years. c. When requested by Engineer, submit qualifications statement indicating manufacturer’s record of manufacturing and furnishing check valves of the types and sizes required and furnish documentation of compliance with qualifications requirements of this Article. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: Submit the following: 1. In accordance with Section 40 05 51. B. Informational Submittals: Submit the following: 1. In accordance with Section 40 05 51. 2. Manufacturer’s Instructions: a. Manufacturer’s written instructions for delivery, handling, storage, installation, and startup. C. Closeout Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Operation and Maintenance Data: a. Submit in accordance with Section 01 78 23 - Operations and Maintenance Manuals. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SWING CHECK VALVES: 3 INCHES TO 24 INCHES A. Swing Check Valves (Wastewater): 1. Comply with AWWA C508. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents CHECK VALVES 40 05 66 - 2 2. Manufacturers: a. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1) Clow. 2) America Darling. 3) GA Industries. 4) Or equal. 3. Materials: a. Body and cover: Cast iron. b. Seat ring, hinge: Bronze. c. Disc: 1) 3 to 4 inches: Bronze. 2) 6 to 24 inches: Cast iron with bronze face. d. Hinge shaft: Stainless steel. e. Bearings, connecting hardware: Bronze. 4. Design requirements: a. 175 psi working pressure. b. Furnish with outside weight and lever or lever and spring. 2.2 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Factory Tests and Inspections: 1. Perform manufacturer’s standard factory tests and inspections on materials and equipment furnished. Correct defects prior to shipment to the Site. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Installation – General: 1. Provide check valves at locations shown and indicated in the Contract Documents. 2. Install in accordance with the Contract Documents and manufacturer’s written instructions. In event of conflict between the Contract Documents and manufacturer’s written instructions, obtain written interpretation or clarification from Engineer. 3. Comply with: a. Section 01 61 03 - Common Work Results for Equipment. b. Section 40 05 01 - Common Work Results for Process Piping. c. Section 40 05 51 - Common Requirements for Process and Utility Valves. 4. Before installing, ensure each check valve is clean and free of dirt and debris. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field Tests and Inspections: 1. Promptly after installing, before installing connecting pipe, verify proper and free operation of check valve. 2. Hydrostatically test check valves together with associated piping. 3. To extent practical, prior to Substantial Completion, verify proper operation of each installed check valve. END OF SECTION Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 40 61 13 - 1 SECTION 40 61 13 PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM GENERAL REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Basic requirements for complete instrumentation system for process control. 2. Requirement for Contractor to subcontract the Process Control System portion of the Work to a “Systems Integrator”. B. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Section 10 14 00 - Identification Devices. 2. Section 40 61 21 - Process Control System Testing 3. Section 40 61 43 - Surge Protection Devices for Instrumentation and Control Equipment 4. Section 40 63 43 - Programmable Logic Controllers 5. Section 40 66 05 - Network Equipment 6. Section 40 67 00 - Control System Equipment Panels and Racks 7. Section 40 67 63 - Uninterruptible Power Supply 8. Section 40 71 00 - Flow Instrumentation 9. Section 40 72 00 - Level Instrumentation 10. Section 40 73 00 - Pressure Instrumentation 1.2 REFERENCES A. Definitions 1. Calibrate: To adjust a device so that it provides a specified response to known inputs. 2. Intrinsically Safe Circuit: A circuit in which any spark or thermal effect is incapable of causing ignition of a mixture of flammable or combustible material in air under test conditions as prescribed in UL 913. 3. System Integrator: A Subcontractor who combines instrumentation, control devices, hardware, and networking products from multiple vendors to provide a fully functioning control system. B. Referenced Standards: 1. The International Society of Automation (ISA): a. S5.1, Instrumentation Symbols and Identification. b. S5.3, Graphic Symbols for Distributed Control/Shared Display Instrumentation, Logic and Computer Systems. c. S20, Standard Specification Forms for Process Measurement and Control Instruments, Primary Elements and Control Valves. d. 62443-3-3 Security for Industrial Automation and Control Systems, Part 3-3: System Security Requirements and Security Levels 2. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): a. 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum). 3. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): a. 70, National Electrical Code (NEC). 4. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): a. 913, Standard for Safety, Intrinsically Safe Apparatus and Associated Apparatus for Use in Class I, II, and III, Division 1, Hazardous (Classified) Locations. 5. National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST) a. SP 800-82, Guide to Industrial Control Systems (ICS) Security 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Control System Requirements: Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 40 61 13 - 2 1. This Specification Section provides the general requirements for the control system. 2. The control system consists of all primary elements, transmitters, switches, controllers, computers, communication devices, recorders, indicators, panels, signal converters, signal boosters, amplifiers, special power supplies, special or shielded cable, special grounding or isolation, auxiliaries, software, wiring, and other devices required to provide complete control of the facility as specified in the Contract Documents. B. Utilization of System Integrator: 1. Retain a hardware System Integrator subcontractor to provide a fully functioning control system. a. The hardware System Integrator shall be responsible for the provision of an integrated control system fully functioning in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 2. Provide all required coordination of instrumentation with other work to ensure that necessary wiring, conduits, contacts, relays, converters, and incidentals are provided in order to transmit, receive, and control necessary signals to other control elements, to control panels, and to receiving stations. C. Programming of the required Telemetry Panel PLC/OIT will be by the Owner. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Shop Drawings: a. Limit the scope of each submittal to one Specification Section. 1) Each submittal must be submitted under the Specification Section containing requirements of submittal contents. 2) Except for Qualifications Submittal, do not provide any submittals for Specification Section 40 61 13. b. Drawings, systems, and other elements are represented schematically in accordance with ISA S5.1 and ISA S5.3. 1) The nomenclature, tag numbers, equipment numbers, panel numbers, and related series identification contained in the Contract Documents shall be employed exclusively throughout submittals. 2. Product Data: a. For each product specified in related sections, product technical data including: 1) Acknowledgement that products submitted meet requirements of standards referenced. 2) Equipment catalog cut sheets. 3) Instrument data sheets: a) ISA S20 or approved equal. b) Separate data sheet for each instrument type. 4) Materials of construction. 5) Minimum and maximum flow ranges. 6) Pressure loss curves. 7) Physical limits of components including temperature and pressure limits. 8) Size and weight. 9) Electrical power requirements and wiring diagrams. 10) NEMA rating of housings and enclosures. b. Process connected instrument installation details containing the following minimum information: 1) Bill of materials providing as a minimum the following information: a) Tube material and size. b) Connection size. c) Fitting size, material, and rating. d) Valve type and material. e) Instrument description. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 40 61 13 - 3 f) Pipe stand size and material. 2) Tube slope requirements. 3) Required elevations and dimensions. B. Informational Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Provide a parameter setting summary sheet for each field configurable device. 2. Certifications: a. Documentation verifying that calibration equipment is certified with NIST traceability. b. Approvals from independent testing laboratories or approval agencies, such as UL, FM or CSA. 1) Certification documentation is required for all equipment for which the specifications require independent agency approval. 3. Testing reports: Source and Field quality control reports. 4. Qualifications Submittal: a. Documentation verifying System Integrator adherence to specified certifications and qualifications C. Closeout Submittals: Submit the following: 1. All Shop Drawings shall be modified with as-built information/corrections. 2. Operation and Maintenance Data: a. Submit in accordance with Section 01 78 23 - Operation and Maintenance Data. b. Instrumentation and Control Equipment Operation and Maintenance Manual Content: 1) Provide a printed copy of the following sheets following the Equipment Record sheets or ISA Data Sheets. a) Loop Check-out Sheet. b) Instrument Certification Sheet. c) Final Control Element Certification Sheet. 2) Provide the following detailed information: a) Use equipment tag numbers from the Contract Documents to identify equipment and system components. b) As-constructed fabrication or layout drawings and wiring diagrams. c) As-constructed network asset inventory, and physical and logical network diagrams. (1) Coordinate with the Owner or Engineer to determine the preferred method of delivery to assure security of this information. d) Software Licenses: (1) Provide a single Software Licenses submittal with documentation of the software licenses for all software provided. (2) Spreadsheet including license numbers, registration records, expirations for service contracts, expiration of leased licenses, and name of owner representative to whom each software has been registered with the OEM as the licensee. e) Software Recovery and Reconstitution Images: (1) For each control system component on which software is installed or configured under this project, provide a recovery image of the software or configuration. This image must allow for bare-metal restore such that restoration of the image is sufficient to restore system operation to the imaged state without the need for re-installation of software. 3) Password Summary Report: a) Provide a Password Summary Report documenting the administrative password for each device and describing the procedure to change the password for each device. Do not provide the Password Summary Report in electronic format. Provide two hardcopies of the Password Summary Report, each copy in its own sealed envelope. b) Provide listing of all temporary Systems Integrator usernames setup for each device. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 40 61 13 - 4 4) Additional information as required in the associated equipment or system Specification Section. 3. Warranty Documentation: a. Provide copies of warranties and list of factory authorized service agents. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. System Integrator: a. Integrated Process Solutions, Inc. (IPS) b. M.E.T. Automation & Controls c. Or City of Bozeman Approved Equal System Integrator. 2. Experience: a. Have satisfactorily provided control system integration for a minimum of five projects of similar magnitude and function. 3. Qualification: a. Regularly engaged in the design and the installation of process control and instrumentation systems and their associated subsystems as they are applied to the municipal water and wastewater industry. b. Maintains a permanent, fully staffed and equipped service facility within 500 miles of the project site with full-time employees capable of designing, documenting, fabricating, installing, calibrating, programming, configuring, providing training services, and testing the systems specified herein. c. Capable of responding to on-site problems within 12 hours of notice. Provide an on-site response within 12 hours of notification starting at two months before scheduled start up to two months after startup completion. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Do not remove shipping blocks, plugs, caps, and desiccant dryers installed to protect the instrumentation during shipment until the instruments are installed and permanent connections are made. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 NEMA TYPE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide enclosures/housing for control system components in accordance with the area designations provided on the Drawings. 1. Areas designated as wet: NEMA Type 4. 2. Areas designated as wet and/or corrosive: NEMA Type 4X. 3. Areas designated as Class I hazardous, Groups A, B, C, or D as defined in NFPA 70: a. NEMA Type 7 unless all electrical components within enclosure utilize intrinsically safe circuitry. 1) Utilize intrinsically safe circuits to the maximum extent practical and as depicted in the Contract Documents. 4. Either architecturally or non-architecturally finished areas designated as dry, noncorrosive, and nonhazardous: NEMA Type 12. 5. Areas designated to be subject to temporary submersion: NEMA 6P. 2.2 PERFORMANCE AND DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Unless stated otherwise, system operating criteria are as follows: 1. Stability: After controls have taken corrective action, as result of a change in the controlled variable or a change in setpoint, oscillation of final control element shall not exceed two cycles per minute or a magnitude of movement of 0.5% full travel. 2. Response: Any change in setpoint or change in controlled variable shall produce a corresponding corrective change in position of final control element and become stabilized within 30 seconds. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 40 61 13 - 5 3. Agreement: Setpoint indication of controlled variable and measured indication of controlled variable shall agree within 3% of full scale over a 6:1 operating range. 4. Repeatability: For any repeated magnitude of control signal, from either an increasing or decreasing direction, the final control element shall take a repeated position within 0.5% of full travel regardless of force required to position final element. 5. Sensitivity: Controls shall respond to setpoint deviations and measured variable deviations within 1.0% of full scale. 6. Performance: All instruments and control devices shall perform in accordance with manufacturer's specifications. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Provide identification devices for instrumentation system components in accordance with Specification Section 10 14 00. B. Provide corrosion resistant spacers to maintain 1/4 inches separation between equipment and mounting surface in wet areas, on below grade walls and on walls of liquid containment or processing areas such as Clarifiers, Digesters, Reservoirs, etc. 2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. See Section 40 61 21 - Process Control System Testing. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Wherever feasible, use bottom entry for all conduit entry to instruments and junction boxes. B. Install electrical components per the requirements of the Electrical design. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. See Section 01 75 00 - Checkout and Start-Up Procedures and Section 40 61 21 - Process Control System Testing. END OF SECTION Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 40 61 13 - 6 Loop Check-out Sheet Project Name: Owner’s Project No. (if applicable): Page of Project Owner: Regulatory Agency Project No. (if applicable): HDR Project No.: Date: LEAK AND TERMINATION/CONTINUITY CHECKS FIELD CONTROL CAB DESCRIPTION LEAK CHECK(1) TERM/CONT CHECK(2) TERM/CONT CHECK(2) Device Tag No. Process Conn. Signal Tube Device Tag No. Termination Ident. Device Tag No. Termination Ident. 1. Leak check for pneumatic signal tubing to be per ISA-PR7.1. 2. Termination/continuity check includes check at terminated equipment for: (a) correct polarity, (b) appropriate signal generation, transmission and reception, and (c) correct shield & ground terminations. OPERATOR INTERFACE CHECK-OUT MONITORING POINTS OBSERVED PARAMETER TYPE TAG NO. TAG NO. TAG NO. TAG NO. TAG NO. TAG NO. PROCESS VAR EQUIP STATUS ALARM POINT OPERATOR CONTROL FUNCTIONS CHECKED FUNCTION TYPE TAG NO. LOCATION TAG NO. LOCATION TAG NO. LOCATION FINAL CONFIGURED SETTINGS TAG NO. SWITCH & ALARM SP CONTROLLERS Gain Reset, rpm Deriv. (rate), min PV Set Point Describe all interlocks checked, equipment started/stopped, valves/operators stroked. Describe modes of operation checked, and location of operator interface (local/remote). I certify that the control loop referenced on this page has been completely checked and functions in accordance with applicable drawings and specifications. Certified by: Date: (Work Performed By) Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 40 61 13 - 7 Instrument Certification Sheet Project Name: Owner’s Project No. (if applicable): Project Owner: Regulatory Agency Project No. (if applicable): HDR Project No. Date: Control Loop No.: Instrument Tag No. Transmitter/gauge span: Manufacturer: Switch set-point: Model No. Switch dead band: Serial No. Switch range: TRANSMITTERS AND INDICATORS INCREASING INPUT DECREASING INPUT % OF SPAN INPUT OUTPUT ERROR (% of span) INPUT OUTPUT ERROR (% of span) 0% 25% 50% 75% 100% Other (if applicable) Other (if applicable) SWITCHES INCREASING INPUT DECREASING INPUT ACTUATION POINT INPUT OUTPUT ERROR (% of range) INPUT OUTPUT ERROR (% of range) High (Increasing input) Low (Decreasing input) Maximum allowable error (per Contract Documents): Remarks: CALIBRATION EQUIPMENT UTILIZED DEVICE TYPE MFR/MODEL NO. ACCURACY NIST TRACEABILITY? Certified by: Date Certified: Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 40 61 13 - 8 Final Control Element Certification Sheet Project Name: Owner’s Project No. (if applicable): Project Owner: Regulatory Agency Project No. (if applicable): HDR Project No. Date: Control Loop No.: Actuator: Pneumatic: Electric: Tag No. Positioner: Direct: Reverse: Description: Positioner: Input: Output: Manufacturer: I/P Converter: Input: Output: Model No. Valve to on air failure Serial No. Valve to on power failure I/P CONVERTER INCREASING INPUT DECREASING INPUT % OF SPAN INPUT OUTPUT ERROR (% of span) INPUT OUTPUT ERROR (% of span) 0% 25% 50% 75% 100% Specified I/P converter accuracy: % of span. FINAL CONTROL ELEMENT INCREASING INPUT DECREASING INPUT % OF SPAN INPUT TRAVEL ERROR (% of full travel) INPUT TRAVEL ERROR (% of full travel) 0% 25% 50% 75% 100% Remarks: CALIBRATION EQUIPMENT UTILIZED DEVICE TYPE MFR/MODEL NO. ACCURACY NIST TRACEABILITY? Certified by: Date Certified: Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 40 61 13 - 9 Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 This page intentionally left blank. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM TESTING 40 61 21 - 1 SECTION 40 61 21 PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM TESTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Requirements for testing of the Process Control System (PCS) hardware prior to shipment to the site for installation. a. Inspection. 1) System hardware operational testing. 2) System software demonstration. b. Test records. 2. Requirements for field testing of the PCS hardware and software. a. Process Control System checkout. b. Instrument calibration. c. Loop testing/checkout. d. Integrated Site Acceptance Test (SAT). e. Operational Readiness Demonstration (ORD). B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Section 40 61 13 - Process Control System General Requirements 2. Section 40 63 43 - Programmable Logic Controllers. 3. Section 40 67 00 - Control System Equipment Panels and Racks. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 40 61 13 - Process Control System General Requirements. B. Action Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Submit factory acceptance test (FAT) procedures not less than 15 calendar days prior to the scheduled start of the FAT. Include the following: a. Modular test plans and procedures to allow individual test segments to be repeated if necessary. b. Description of individual test segments and steps comprising each segment, particularly the methods and processes to be followed. c. Procedures for monitoring, correcting, and retesting variances. d. Procedures for controlling and documenting all changes made to the hardware/software after the start of testing. e. Descriptions of test equipment. f. Expected results for each segment, including pass/fail criteria. g. Documentation record forms to be used to certify results of factory testing. h. Block diagrams of the hardware test configuration, such as PLC external communication links, and any test or simulation hardware and software. 2. Submit Field Testing procedures not less than 15 calendar days prior to the scheduled start of field testing. Include the following: a. Site Acceptance Test (SAT) Plan. 1) Divide into separate sections based on process systems. 2) Each section shall include a sequential step-by-step checkout plan. b. Typical Loop Checkout Sheets, if other than the form included within contract documents. c. Typical Instrument Certification Sheets, if other than the form included within contract documents. d. Typical Final Control Element Certification Sheets, if other than the form included within contract documents. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM TESTING 40 61 21 - 2 C. Informational Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Post factory acceptance test: a. Final documentation certifying that all Factory tests have passed with satisfactory results. D. Closeout Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Site Acceptance Test (SAT) Report. 2. Completed Loop Checkout Sheets. 3. Completed Instrument Certification Sheets. 4. Completed Final Control Element Certification Sheets. 5. All system startup and checkout records, test records, recommendations and information furnished by Manufacturer’s representatives during testing and startup, and amended documentation specified herein. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FACTORY ACCEPTANCE TESTING (FAT) GENERAL: A. Utilize software-based process control simulation and hardware-based I/O simulation panel when conducting the full system test. Software based process simulation shall provide a real time, virtual environment that interfaces with the PLC system applications software and programming to mimic the behavior of the real process equipment and systems that are monitored and controlled by the PLC system, including the capability to force individual or groups of PLC system I/O. B. Demonstration of communication between processors and to remote I/O racks shall be included in the Test Procedure, where applicable. Test shall include demonstration that communication performance (speed, error rates, failure and recovery) conforms to specified requirements. C. Any tested segment or function that does not pass in accordance with agreed upon pass/fail criteria shall be retested until the segment or function passes the test. 1. Pass/fail criteria shall be in accordance with criteria set forth in an approved shop drawing submittal. 2. The Contractor shall bear all additional travel/accommodation expenses incurred by the Owner due to extension of test dates for retesting of failed segments or functions. D. Notify the Engineer in writing a minimum of 15 calendar days prior to the Factory Tests. 1. Engineer and the Owner has the option to witness all required tests. E. Testing Documentation 1. Make following documentation available at test site during the tests: a. Contract Documents. b. Factory Demonstration Testing procedures. c. List of equipment to be testing including make, model, and serial number. d. Shop Drawing submittal data for equipment being tested. 2. Engineer reserves the right to review all documentation at any time during testing. 2.2 FAT INSPECTION A. Inspect all panels, operator interface terminals and cabinets prior to conducting the FAT to verify quality of workmanship and conformance to the Contract Documents and approved Shop Drawings. Completed inspection forms shall be available for review at time of FAT. Inspection shall include, but not be limited to, the following: 1. Nameplates, warning labels, and tags including correct spelling, color and size of labeling and characters and methods of attachment. 2. Enclosure surfaces flatness, finish, and color. 3. Proper operation of doors, catches, and locks. 4. Wire and cable type, sizes, tagging, color coding and tag placement in readily viewable position/orientation. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM TESTING 40 61 21 - 3 5. Wiring runs across hinges properly installed. 6. Proper wiring routing, layout, practices, and grounding. 7. All electrical circuits checked for continuity. 8. Terminal block contact ratings and numbers. 9. Fuses and circuit breakers are correct size and type. 10. Terminal block, fuse, breaker, and other required installed spares. 11. General arrangement and space allocation, including spare usable space in panel and on panel door. 12. PLC equipment (chassis, power supply, power conditioners, processor, adapters, I/O and specialty modules, installed spares, spare usable space) is appropriate. 13. Proper placement, isolation, and labeling of intrinsic safety devices and associated wiring. 14. Equipment and devices are properly installed and secured to subpanels and doors using appropriate methods and in appropriate orientation. 15. Fans, blowers, heaters, air-conditioning units, and other environmental controls are operational, unobstructed, and installed with sufficient clearances recommended by component manufacturers. 2.3 FAT - SYSTEM HARDWARE OPERATIONAL TESTING A. Assemble and interconnect the PLC system as a network that mimics the network that is designed to be installed at the Plant site. 1. As a minimum, the test shall include the following major components: a. All control panels that interface with the control network and are provided by the System Integrator, including local control panels, remote control panels, hardwired/relay logic and PLC based panels. b. Operator Interface Terminals (OITs). c. Ethernet Networks. d. Uninterruptible Power Supplies. e. Network switches, Routers, Firewalls. f. Other network equipment and appurtenances. B. Packaged systems not present at FAT shall be simulated; communications interfaces shall be simulated to/from vendor confirmed interface registers. C. All system hardware components and equipment shall be tested to verify proper operation as standalone units. Tests shall include, but not be limited to, the following: 1. AC/DC power checks. 2. Power fail/restart tests. 3. Verification of UPS power to required components. 4. Diagnostics checks. 5. Verification that all equipment is functioning properly. 6. All electrical circuits energized simultaneously and continuously for 48 hours without failures. 7. All alarm circuits connected to simulated alarm contacts to verify operation. 8. All interlock and shutdown circuits checked for operability and proper function by means of simulated contact. 9. All hardwired input/output devices and components, and all network connected I/O shall be tested to verify operability and basic calibration. 10. Simulate operation of electronic control and receiving instruments and circuits. 11. Any other test required to place the PCS equipment in an operating state. 12. Verify all redundant components fail-over hands-free without interruption of control process. 13. Verify that all components are integrated and communicating for full simulation test including any simulation software if applicable. D. Develop and execute device failure conditions including PLC failure, OIT failure, etc. Special attention shall be given to creating failures in the middle of operator sequences and control actions such as: Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM TESTING 40 61 21 - 4 1. Failure of a major communications component. 2. Incorrect operator entry in the middle of a multi-step action. 3. OIT failure in the middle of a control action. 4. Demonstration of all required alarm processing functionality, including audible annunciation. 2.4 FAT - SYSTEM SOFTWARE DEMONSTRATION SUPPORT A. System Integrator shall provide facilities, tools, meters, signal generators, and qualified staff to assist the Owner’s programmer(s) in testing and demonstrating all system hardware and software during the FAT (e.g. process monitoring and control, HMI, OIT, historian, alarming, simulation, modeling, utility and security programs) incorporated into the system to implement the various functions and capabilities specified. B. System Integrator shall assist the Owner’s programmer(s) to demonstrate the proper operation and configuration and programming of all software based on simulation of all the analog inputs/outputs and all of the discrete inputs and outputs, as indicated on the I/O list. In addition to testing allocated I/O, all spare I/O points shall also be simulated and tested to the degree possible. 1. PLC I/O testing shall include, as a minimum, the following: a. Simulate a field digital input for each PLC input point at the terminal strip of the control panel and verify PLC response. b. Simulate a field analog input for each PLC analog input point at the terminal strip of the control panel and verify PLC response. c. Force an output for each PLC digital output point and verify the signal presence at the terminal strip in the control panel. d. Simulate an analog output for each PLC analog output point and verify signal presence at the terminal strip in the control panel. 2.5 FAT TEST RECORDS: A. Maintain records of all factory test results. As a minimum, include the following items: 1. Name of test procedure. 2. Date of the test. 3. Test results for each test segment including a passed/failed indication. 4. Signatures of individual(s) performing the test and witnesses thereof. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Maintain accurate daily log of all testing activities, calibration functions, and final set point adjustments. B. All testing may be witnessed by the Owner or Engineer. 3.2 INSTALLATION AND CHECKOUT A. Provide the following (after successful completion of the Factory Acceptance Test): 1. Check and approve the installation of all Process Control System (PCS) components (including but not limited to control panels, field instruments, networking equipment and racks, patch panels and all cable and wiring interconnects between various equipment, panels and devices) prior to placing the various processes and equipment into operation. As a minimum, include: a. Verification and documentation that all field instruments and pneumatic signals function properly and are properly calibrated. b. Testing of all final control actions. B. Provide services of authorized manufacturer’s representatives to check and verify the correctness of the installation and operation of equipment. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM TESTING 40 61 21 - 5 3.3 PRE-DEMONSTRATION PERIOD TESTING A. Instrumentation Calibration: 1. Verify and document that all instruments and control devices are calibrated to provide the performance required by the Contract Documents. 2. Factory furnished calibration certifications are acceptable for the following: a. Flow meters. b. Pressure sensors utilized with annular sleeve. c. Temperature sensors. 3. On-site calibration verification is required for all other instruments, including “smart” transmitters that have been factory calibrated. a. Provide calibration checks at 0, 25, 50, 75, and 100 percent of span for pressure transmitters and gages. 1) Check for both increasing and decreasing input signals to detect hysteresis. b. In addition to factory calibration certification, temperature sensors and gages shall be checked at a single point for conformance to required accuracy. c. Level transducers/transmitters shall be checked at two points in addition to zero. d. Analytical sensors shall be calibrated in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. e. Check operation of all switches to verify actuation occurs in accordance with manufacturer’s specified accuracy. f. Replace any instrument which cannot be properly adjusted. g. Stroke pneumatic control valves with clean dry air to verify control action, positioner settings, and solenoid functions. 4. Mark range, date, set point and calibrator's initials on each instrument by means of blue or black ink on a waterproof tag affixed to the instrument. 5. Calibration equipment shall be certified by an independent agency with traceability to NIST. a. Certification shall be up-to-date. b. Use of equipment with expired certifications shall not be permitted. 6. Calibration equipment shall be at least three times more accurate as the device being calibrated. B. Loop Testing: 1. Utilize the Loop Check-Out Sheet located at the end of Section 40 61 13 (or Engineer approved equivalent) to document on-site calibration checks. a. Utilize separate loop checkout form for each loop. 2. Minimum loop checkout requirements: a. Use actual signals where available. b. Check control signal generation, transmission, reception and response for all inputs and outputs for all control loops under simulated operating conditions by imposing a signal on the loop at the instrument connections. c. Closely observe controllers, indicators, transmitters, HMI displays, OIT displays, recorders, alarm and trip units, remote set points, ratio systems, and other components. 1) Verify that readings at all loop components are in agreement. 2) Make corrections as required. 3) Following any corrections, retest the loop. d. Stroke all control valves, cylinders, drives and connecting linkages from the local control station and from the control room operator interface. e. Check all interlocks for proper functionality. f. Record all set point and calibration changes on all affected Contract Documents and turn over to Owner. C. Integrated Site Acceptance Test (SAT): 1. Following the testing of each individual loop, perform an integrated Site Acceptance Test (SAT) to verify that all equipment and programmed software are operating as described in the Contract Documents and equipment manufacturers recommendations. Checks to include: Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM TESTING 40 61 21 - 6 a. The intended monitoring and control functions of the PCS including all vendor- furnished equipment packaged systems, communications, operator interfaces, statuses, alarms, trends and recording of historical tags. b. Integrated testing on a system by system basis as described in the submitted Site Acceptance Test (SAT) plan sequential step-by-step checkout plan. 1) Documentation with initials of the individuals who perform each test. 2. Provide minimum fifteen (15) day notice to the Owner prior to commencing the SAT. 3. Promptly address and re-test any malfunctions, issues and incompletions arising during the SAT. D. At the successful conclusion of all testing specified in this article, submit the “Instrumentation Supplier's Instrumentation Installation Certificate” required in Section 01 75 00 - Checkout and Start-up Procedures. 3.4 DEMONSTRATION PERIOD A. Demonstrate the functional integrity of the Process Control System for the entire facility in accordance with the demonstration period requirements in Section 01 75 00 - Checkout and Start-up Procedures as evidence of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES FOR INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL EQUIPMENT 40 61 43 - 1 SECTION 40 61 43 SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES FOR INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Category IC1 SPD - Dedicated 120 VAC circuit, series connection, control panel mounted. 2. Category IC2 SPD - Individual equipment plug-in device (point of use protection). 3. Category IC3 SPD - Discrete 120 VAC control signal, control panel mounted. 4. Category IC4 SPD - Analog instrumentation signal, field mounted. 5. Category IC5 SPD - Analog instrumentation signal, control panel mounted. 6. Category IC6 SPD - Combination 120 VAC circuit and analog signal, field mounted. 7. Category IC7 SPD - Discrete low voltage control signal, control panel mounted. 8. Category IC8 SPD - Data line, control panel mounted. B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Section 40 61 13 - Process Control Systems General Requirements. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards: 1. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (IEEE): a. C62.41.2, Recommended Practice on Characterization of Surges in Low-Voltage (1000 V and Less) AC Power Circuits. 2. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): a. 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum). 3. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): a. 497B, Standard for Safety Protectors for Data Communications and Fire-Alarm Circuits. b. 1283, Standard for Electromagnetic Interference Filters. c. 1363, Standard for Relocatable Power Taps. d. 1449, Standard for Surge Protective Devices. B. Qualifications: 1. Provide devices for a manufacturer who has been regularly engaged in the development, design, testing, listing and manufacturing of SPDs of the types and ratings required for a period of 10 years or more and whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service. 2. Upon request, suppliers or manufacturers shall provide a list of not less than three customer references showing satisfactory operation. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Clamping Voltage: The voltage measured at the end of the 6 inches output leads of the SPD and from the zero voltage reference to the peak of the surge when the applied surge is induced at the 90 degree phase angle of the applied system frequency voltage. B. Let-Through Voltage: The voltage measured at the end of the 6 inches output leads of the SPD and from the system peak voltage to the peak of the surge when the applied surge is induced at the 90 degree phase angle of the applied system frequency voltage. C. Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage (MCOV): The maximum steady state voltage at which the SPD device can operate and meet it specification within its rated temperature. D. Maximum Surge Current: Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES FOR INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL EQUIPMENT 40 61 43 - 2 1. The maximum 8 x 20 microsecond surge current pulse the SPD device is capable of surviving on a single-impulse basis without suffering either performance degradation or more than 10% deviation of clamping voltage at a specified surge current. 2. Listed by mode, since number and type of components in any SPD may vary by mode. E. Protection Modes: This parameter identifies the modes for which the SPD has directly connected protection elements, i.e., line-to-neutral (L-N), line-to-line (L-L), line-to-ground (L- G), neutral-to-ground (N-G). F. Surge Current per Phase: 1. The per phase rating is the total surge current capacity connected to a given phase conductor. 2. For example, a wye system surge current per phase would equal L-N plus L-G; a delta system surge current per phase would equal L-L plus L-G. a. The N-G mode is not included in the per phase calculation. G. System Peak Voltage: The electrical equipment supply voltage sine wave peak (i.e., for a 120 V system the L-N peak voltage is 170 V). 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. See Specification Section 40 61 13 for general process control system submittal requirements. B. Action Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Product data: a. For named products, submit only a catalog cut sheet. b. For all other products, submit the data required below. 1) Manufacturer’s experience. 2) Standard catalog cut sheet. 3) Electrical and mechanical drawing showing unit dimensions, weights, mounting provisions, connection details and layout diagram of the unit. 4) Create a Product Data Sheet for each different model number of SPD provided. a) Data in the Product Data Sheet heading: (1) SPD Type per PART 2 of the Specification. (2) Manufacturer’s Name. (3) Product model number. b) Data in the Product Data Sheet body: (1) Column one: Specified value/feature of every paragraph of PART 2 of the Specification. (2) Column two: Manufacturer’s certified value confirming the product meets the specified value/feature. c) Data in the Product Data Sheet closing: (1) Signature of the manufacturer’s official (printed and signed). (2) Title of the official. (3) Date of signature. 1.5 WARRANTY A. The manufacturer shall provide a minimum of a five-year Limited Warranty from date of shipment against failure when installed in compliance with applicable national/local electrical codes and the manufacturer’s installation, operation and maintenance instructions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the manufacturers model numbers listed in the individual product paragraphs below are acceptable. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES FOR INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL EQUIPMENT 40 61 43 - 3 2.2 CATEGORY IC1 SPD A. Manufacturers: 1. Eaton AGPH 12015. 2. Schneider Electric ASCO 252120NF015AN3N0. 3. Eaton Crouse-Hinds MTL MA15/D/1/SI. 4. Phoenix Contact SFP 1-20/120AC (2856702). B. Standards: UL 1449. C. Design: 1. General: a. Mounted internally to control panels for point-of-use loads. b. MOV based or multi-stage hybrid solid state high performance suppression system. c. Designed for series connection. d. Enclosure: Metallic or plastic, flange or DIN rail mounting. e. Field connection: Provide unit with external terminal screws for each phase, neutral and ground that will accept #14 through #12 conductors. f. Device monitoring: Long-life, solid state, externally visible indicators that monitors the on-line status of the units suppression filter system or power loss in any of the phases. 2. Operating voltage: 120 VAC. 3. Operating current: 15 A minimum. 4. Operating frequency: 45 to 65 Hz. 5. Modes of protection: All modes, L-N, L-G and N-G. 6. Maximum continuous operating voltage: Less than 130% of system peak voltage. 7. Maximum surge current: 20,000 A per phase, 10,000 A per mode minimum. 8. Minimum repetitive surge current capacity: 1000 impulses with no degradation of more than 10% deviation of the clamping voltage. 9. Fusing: Optional integral unit level and/or component level short circuit and/or thermal overload protection. a. External protection as recommended by manufacturer. 10. Maximum clamping voltages, dynamic test with voltages measured from the zero voltage reference and 90 degrees phase angle: System Voltage Test Mode IEEE C62.41.2 UL 1449 (3rd Edition VPRs) B Comb. Wave A Ring Wave L-N = 120 V L-N 400 V 300 V 400 V L-G 500 V 400 V 400 V N-G 500 V 400 V 500 V 2.3 CATEGORY IC2 SPD A. Manufacturers: 1. Tripp Lite by Eaton Isobar 6 Ultra. 2. Phoenix Contact EM-DUO SPD Series. B. Standards: UL 1283, UL 1363 and UL 1449. C. Design: 1. General: a. Multi-stage hybrid solid state high performance suppression system. b. Point of use protection, designed for plug-in devices. c. Enclosure: Metallic or impact resistant plastic. d. Field connection: Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES FOR INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL EQUIPMENT 40 61 43 - 4 1) The minimum line cord shall be #14 three conductors, 6 feet in length, with a single piece strain relief NEMA 5-15P plug. 2) The minimum plug-in strip shall have six single NEMA 5-15R receptacles. e. ON/OFF toggle switch. f. Device monitoring: 1) Long-life, solid state, externally visible indicators that monitor the on-line status of the units suppression filter system or power loss in any of the phases. 2) A fuse or circuit breaker status only monitor system is not acceptable. 2. Operating voltage: 120 VAC. 3. Modes of protection: All modes, L-N, L-G and N-G. 4. Maximum continuous operating voltage: Less than 130% of system peak voltage. 5. Operating frequency: 45 to 65 Hz. 6. Maximum surge current: 20,000 A per phase, 10,000 A per mode minimum. 7. Minimum repetitive surge current capacity: 1000 impulses with no degradation of more than 10% deviation of the clamping voltage. 8. Overcurrent protection: The SPD may contain internal fuses or circuit breaker, but an IEEE B3 combination wave shall not cause the fuse or circuit breaker to open and render the SPD inoperable. 9. Maximum clamping voltages, dynamic test with voltages measured from the zero voltage reference and 90 degrees phase angle: System Voltage Test Mode IEEE C62.41.2 UL 1449 B Comb. Wave A Ring Wave L-N = 120 V L-N 400 V 300 V 330 V L-G 500 V 400 V 400 V N-G 500 V 400 V 400 V 10. EMI-RFI noise rejection: Attenuation greater than 30 dB for frequencies between 100 kHz and 100 MHz. 2.4 CATEGORY IC3 SPD A. Manufacturers: 1. Eaton Crouse-Hinds MTL MA-15/D/1/SI. 2. Eaton Crouse-Hinds MTL SD-150X. 3. Phoenix Contact TTC Series. 4. Phoenix Contact PLT-SEC-T3-120-FM. B. Standards: UL 497B or UL 1449. C. Design: 1. General: a. Mounted internally to control panels for point-of-use loads. b. Multi-stage hybrid solid state high performance suppression system. c. Designed for series connection. d. Enclosure: Metallic or plastic, flange or DIN rail mounting. e. Field connection: Provide unit with external terminal screws for each phase, neutral and ground that will accept #14 through #12 conductors. f. Device monitoring: Long-life, solid state, externally visible indicators that monitors the on-line status of the units suppression filter system or power loss in any of the phases. 2. Operating voltage: 120 VAC. 3. Operating current: 3 A minimum. 4. Operating frequency: 45 to 65 Hz. 5. Modes of protection: L-N; when ground conductor is present L-G and N-G. 6. Maximum continuous operating voltage: Less than 130% of system peak voltage. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES FOR INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL EQUIPMENT 40 61 43 - 5 7. Maximum surge current: 6000 A per phase, 3000 A per mode minimum. 8. Minimum repetitive surge current capacity: a. The SPD shall meet one of the following: 1) 1000 occurrences of a 200 A, 10 x 1000 microsecond waveform. 2) 400 occurrences of a 500 A, 10 x 1000 microsecond waveform. 3) 100 occurrences of a 400 A, 10 x 700 microsecond waveform. 4) 100 occurrences of a 2000 A, 8 x 20 microsecond waveform. 9. Maximum clamping voltages, measured from the zero voltage reference: a. The SPD shall meet one of the following: 1) 400A, 10x700 microsecond waveform: 200% of system voltage. 2) IEEE B3 combination wave: 250% of system voltage. 3) IEEE B3 ring wave: 200% of system peak voltage. 4) IEEE A3 ring wave: 200% of system peak voltage. 5) Mode N-G clamping voltage may be 175% higher than the L-G levels. 2.5 CATEGORY IC4 SPD A. Manufacturers: 1. Schneider Electric Surgelogic Type SSE. 2. Eaton Crouse-Hinds MTL TP48-x-N-NDI. 3. Phoenix Contact SURGETRAB/PIPETRAB Series. B. Standards: None. C. Design: 1. General: a. For protection of field mounted equipment connected to 4-20mA analog signal loops. b. Mounted directly to an unused conduit entry on a process transmitter housing. c. Multi-stage hybrid solid state high performance suppression system. d. Designed for series connection. e. Enclosure: 1/2 inches to 3/4 inches stainless steel conduit pipe nipple. 2. Operating voltage: 24 VDC or as indicated on the Drawings. 3. Modes of protection: All modes, L-L and L-G. 4. Maximum continuous operating voltage: Less than 130% of system peak voltage. 5. Maximum surge current: 10,000 A. 6. Minimum repetitive surge current capacity: a. The SPD shall meet one (1) of the following: 1) 1000 occurrences of a 200 A, 10 x 1000 microsecond waveform. 2) 400 occurrences of a 500 A, 10 x 1000 microsecond waveform. 3) 100 occurrences of a 400 A, 10 x 700 microsecond waveform. 4) 100 occurrences of a 2000 A, 8 x 20 microsecond waveform. 5) 10 occurrences of a 10,000 A, 8 x2 0 microsecond waveform. 7. Maximum clamping voltages, L-L: a. The SPD shall meet one of the following: 1) 400 A, 10 x 700 microsecond waveform: 400% of system voltage. 2) 10,000 A, 8 x 20 microsecond waveform: 400% of system voltage. 3) IEEE B3 combination wave: 250% of system voltage. 8. Maximum clamping voltages, L-G: a. The SPD shall meet one of the following: 1) 400 A, 10 x 700 microsecond waveform: 200% of system voltage. 2) 10,000 A, 8 x 20 microsecond waveform: 200% of system voltage. 3) IEEE B3 combination wave: 300% of system voltage. 2.6 CATEGORY IC5 SPD A. Manufacturers: 1. Schneider Electric ASCO 175D043S10KLPCN0 with PCB1B base. 2. Eaton Crouse-Hinds MTL SD32 or SD32X. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES FOR INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL EQUIPMENT 40 61 43 - 6 3. Phoenix Contact TTC Series. B. Standards: UL 497B. C. Design: 1. General: a. Mounted internally to control panels for protection of equipment connected to analog signal loops. b. Multi-stage hybrid solid state high performance suppression system. c. Designed for series connection. d. Enclosure: Metallic or plastic, flange or DIN rail mounting. e. Field connection: The unit shall have external terminal screws for line and ground conductors. 2. Operating voltage: 24 VDC or as indicated on the Drawings. 3. Modes of protection: All modes, L-L and L-G. 4. Maximum continuous operating voltage: Less than 130% of system peak voltage. 5. Maximum surge current: 10,000 A. 6. Minimum repetitive surge current capacity: a. The SPD shall meet one of the following: 1) 1000 occurrences of a 200 A, 10 x 1000 microsecond waveform. 2) 400 occurrences of a 500 A, 10 x 1000 microsecond waveform. 3) 100 occurrences of a 400 A, 10 x 700 microsecond waveform. 4) 100 occurrences of a 2000 A, 8 x 20 microsecond waveform. 5) 10 occurrences of a 10,000 A, 8 x 20 microsecond waveform. 7. Maximum clamping voltages, L-L: a. The SPD shall meet one of the following: 1) 400 A, 10 x 700 microsecond waveform: 400% of system voltage. 2) 10,000 A, 8 x 20 microsecond waveform: 400% of system voltage. 3) IEEE B3 combination wave: 225% of system voltage. 8. Maximum clamping voltages, L-G: a. The SPD shall meet one of the following: 1) 400 A, 10 x 700 microsecond waveform: 200% of system voltage. 2) 10,000 A, 8 x 20 microsecond waveform: 200% of system voltage. 3) IEEE B3 combination wave: 300% of system voltage. 2.7 CATEGORY IC6 SPD A. Manufacturers: 1. Phoenix Contact BXT-N4X 4-Wire. B. Product: 1. Field mounted for protection of field mounted equipment connected to 120 V power and 4 - 20 mA analog signal loops. 2. Category IC1 and Category IC5 SPDs mounted in a common enclosure. 3. Enclosure: Metallic or nonmetallic NEMA 4X. 2.8 CATEGORY IC7 SPD A. Manufacturers: 1. Eaton Crouse-Hinds MTL SD Series. 2. Phoenix Contact: TTC Series. B. Standards: UL 497B. C. Design: 1. General: a. Mounted internally to control panels for protection of equipment connected to a discrete signal. b. Multi-stage hybrid solid state high performance suppression system. c. Designed for series connection. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES FOR INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL EQUIPMENT 40 61 43 - 7 d. Enclosure: Metallic or plastic, flange or DIN rail mounting. e. Field connection: Provide unit with external terminal screws for line and ground conductors. 2. Operating voltage: 24 VDC or 24 VAC or 120 VAC or as indicated on the Drawings. 3. Modes of protection: All modes: a. AC applications: L-N, L-G, N-G b. DC applications: Pos-Neg, Pos-Gnd, Neg-Gnd. 4. Maximum continuous operating voltage: Less than 130% of system peak voltage. 5. Maximum surge current: 10,000 A. 6. Minimum repetitive surge current capacity: a. The SPD shall meet one of the following: 1) 1000 occurrences of a 200 A, 10 x 1000 microsecond waveform. 2) 400 occurrences of a 500 A, 10 x 1000 microsecond waveform. 3) 100 occurrences of a 400 A, 10 x 700 microsecond waveform. 4) 100 occurrences of a 2000 A, 8 x 20 microsecond waveform. 5) 10 occurrences of a 10,000 A, 8 x 20 microsecond waveform. 7. Maximum clamping voltages, L-L (Pos-Neg): a. The SPD shall meet one of the following: 1) 400 A, 10 x 700 microsecond waveform: 400% of system voltage. 2) 10,000 A, 8 x 20 microsecond waveform: 400% of system voltage. 3) IEEE B3 combination wave: 250% of system voltage. 8. Maximum clamping voltages, L-G: a. The SPD shall meet one of the following: 1) 400 A, 10 x 700 microsecond waveform: 200% of system voltage. 2) 10,000 A, 8 x 20 microsecond waveform: 200% of system voltage. 3) IEEE B3 combination wave: 300% of system voltage. 2.9 CATEGORY IC8 SPD A. Manufacturers: 1. Schneider Electric ASCO 175 Series. 2. Eaton Crouse-Hinds MTL SD Series. 3. Phoenix Contact: TTC Series. B. Standards: UL 497B. C. Design: 1. General: a. Mounted internally to control panels for protection of equipment connected to data lines (RS485, RS232, telephone line, etc.). b. Multi-stage hybrid solid state high performance suppression system. c. Designed for series connection. d. Enclosure: Metallic or plastic, flange or DIN rail mounting. e. Field connection: Provide unit with external terminal screws for line and ground conductors. 2. Operating voltage: Nominal unit operating voltage and configuration as specified or as indicated on the Drawings. 3. Modes of protection: All modes. 4. Maximum continuous operating voltage: Less than 130% of system peak voltage. 5. Maximum surge current: 10,000 A. 6. Minimum repetitive surge current capacity: a. The SPD shall meet one of the following: 1) 1000 occurrences of a 200 A, 10 x 1000 microsecond waveform. 2) 400 occurrences of a 500 A, 10 x 1000 microsecond waveform. 3) 100 occurrences of a 400 A, 10 x 700 microsecond waveform. 4) 100 occurrences of a 2000 A, 8 x 20 microsecond waveform. 5) 10 occurrences of a 10,000 A, 8 x 20 microsecond waveform. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES FOR INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL EQUIPMENT 40 61 43 - 8 7. Maximum clamping voltages, L-L (Pos-Neg): a. The SPD shall meet one of the following: 1) 400 A, 10 x 700 microsecond waveform: 400% of system voltage. 2) 10,000 A, 8 x 20 microsecond waveform: 400% of system voltage. 3) IEEE B3 combination wave: 250% of system voltage. 8. Maximum clamping voltages, L-G: a. The SPD shall meet one of the following: 1) 400 A, 10 x 700 microsecond waveform: 200% of system voltage. 2) 10,000 A, 8 x 20 microsecond waveform: 200% of system voltage. 3) IEEE B3 combination wave: 300% of system voltage. 2.10 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Performance tests to be performed or independently verified by a certified testing laboratory. B. The SPD are to be tested as a complete SPD system including: Integral unit level and/or component level fusing. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Category IC1 SPD: 1. Provide on the following applications: a. Incoming 120 V power to all control panels. b. Line side of 120 V power terminals to equipment (e.g., PLCs, transmitters). 2. Connected in series with the panel's or equipment’s branch circuit. 3. Provide fuse protection as recommended by manufacturer. 4. Flange mount or DIN rail mount in control panel. 5. Connect all SPDs in the panel to the same grounding point. C. Category IC2 SPD: 1. Locate near equipment to be protected. D. Category IC3 SPD: 1. Provide on the following applications: a. 120 V discrete PLC signals into a control panel from float switches, position switches, etc., where the device is mounted outdoors or in a remote building or structure from the control panel and where the control conductors are routed above grade or underground. b. 120 V discrete PLC signals into a control panel from float switches, position switches, etc., where both the device and control panel are mounted outdoors and the control conductors are routed above grade or underground. 2. Connected in series with the equipment. 3. Provide fuse protection as recommended by manufacturer. 4. Flange mount or DIN rail mount in control panel. 5. Connect all SPDs in the panel to the same grounding point. E. Category IC4 SPD: 1. Provide on the following applications: a. Loop powered transmitter (flow, level, etc.) where the transmitter is mounted outdoors or in a remote building or structure from the control panel and the signal conductors are routed above grade or underground. b. Loop powered transmitter (flow, level, etc.) where both the transmitter and control panel are mounted outdoors and the signal conductors are mounted above grade or underground. 2. Connect in series with the equipment. 3. Attach to spare conduit entry of transmitter or inline of conduit at the transmitter. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES FOR INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL EQUIPMENT 40 61 43 - 9 4. Bond transmitter to a grounded structure or provide a ground rod. 5. Ground shield at control panel end. 6. Verify SPDs series resistance and capacitance does not interfere with the transmitters signal. F. Category IC5 SPD: 1. Provide on the following applications: a. Incoming 4-20 mA signals into a control panel from transmitters (flow, level, etc.) where the transmitter is mounted outdoors or in a remote building or structure from the control panel and the signal conductors are routed above grade or underground. b. Incoming 4-20 mA signals into a control panel from transmitters (flow, level, etc.) where both the transmitter and control panel are mounted outdoors and the signal conductors are routed above grade or underground. 2. Connect in series with the equipment. 3. Flange mount or DIN rail mount in control panel. 4. Connect all SPDs in the control panel to the same grounding point. 5. Verify SPDs series resistance and capacitance does not interfere with the transmitters signal. G. Category IC6 SPD: 1. Provide on the following applications: a. Outdoor field mounted transmitter (flow, level, etc.) that requires 120 V power and provides a 4-20 mA signal to a control panel where the conductors are routed above grace or underground. 2. Connect in series with the equipment. 3. Mounted adjacent to equipment. 4. Bond transmitter to a grounded structure or provide a ground rod. 5. Ground shield at control panel end. 6. Verify SPDs series resistance and capacitance does not interfere with the transmitters signal. H. Category IC7 SPD: 1. Provide on the following applications: a. Low voltage (e.g., 24 VAC, 24 VDC) discrete PLC signals into a control panel from float switches, position switches, etc., where the device is mounted outdoors or in a remote building or structure from the control panel and where the control conductors are routed above grade or underground. b. Low voltage (e.g., 24 VAC, 24 VDC) discrete PLC signals into a control panel from float switches, position switches, etc., where both the device and control panel are mounted outdoors and the control conductors are routed above grade or underground. 2. Connect in series with the equipment. 3. Flange mount or DIN rail mount in control panel. 4. Connect all SPDs in the control panel to the same grounding point. I. Category IC8 SPD: 1. Provide on the following applications: a. On both ends of data lines that interconnect devices that are locked outdoors or in remote buildings or structures where the conductors are routed above grade or underground. 1) PLC network (e.g., Ethernet, RS-485). 2) Fieldbus (e.g., Profibus). 3) Telephone modem. 2. Connect in series with the equipment. 3. Flange mount or DIN rail mount in control panel. 4. Connect all SPDs in the control panel to the same grounding point. 5. Verify SPDs series resistance and capacitance does not interfere with the data line signal. END OF SECTION Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES FOR INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL EQUIPMENT 40 61 43 - 10 Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLERS 40 63 43 - 1 SECTION 40 63 43 PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Programmable logic controller (PLC) control system(s), including hardware, software, documentation, and training. B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Section 01 75 00 - Checkout and Start-Up Procedures 2. Section 26 05 19 - Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables. 3. Section 40 61 13 - Process Control Systems General Requirements. 4. Section 40 67 00 - Control System Equipment Panels and Racks. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Referenced Standards: 1. The Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (IEEE): a. C37.90.2, Withstand Capability of Relay Systems to Radiated Electromagnetic Interference from Transceivers. b. C62.41.2, Recommended Practice on Characterization of Surges in Low-Voltage (1000 V and Less) AC Power Circuits. 2. International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) a. IEC 61131-3 Programmable logic controllers 3. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): a. ICS 1, Industrial Control and Systems General Requirements. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. See Specification Section 40 61 13 for general process control system submittal requirements. B. Action Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Shop Drawings: a. PLC equipment drawings. 2. Product data: a. Results of factory testing or simulation procedures. b. Bill of material c. Drawings containing the following information shall be submitted as part of Specification Section 40 67 00 (control panels) submittals: 1) Arrangement drawings for PLC system components. 2) Panel and enclosure plans, sections and details. 3) Access opening locations and required clearances for each panel and enclosure. 4) Enclosure internal wiring and terminal blocks. d. DIP Switch and Jumper Settings, if applicable. e. I/O Rack and I/O Module Layout. f. Wiring and Interconnection diagrams. 1) Power Supplies. 2) I/O Points. 3) Communications. g. Catalog cut sheets containing information on PLC components to be submitted as part of these Specification Section submittals. 3. Certifications: a. Qualifications of installation supervisor. C. Informational Submittals: Submit the following: Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLERS 40 63 43 - 2 1. Index of all training offered by PLC system equipment manufacturers including operations and maintenance. 2. List of all provided spares for maintenance purposes with each item separately priced. D. Closeout Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Operation and Maintenance Data: a. Submit in accordance with Section 01 78 23 - Operation and Maintenance Data. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. Installation supervisor shall have had experience in overseeing installation and startup of at least three similar installations within the last five years. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Rockwell Automation: Allen-Bradley. 2.2 PERFORMANCE AND DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. See Specification Section 40 61 13. B. The PLC system be capable of operating in ambient conditions of 32 to 140 degrees F temperatures and 5 to 95% relative humidity without the need for purging or air conditioning. C. Environmental Controls: 1. Furnish circulation fans in solid state control system enclosures. 2. Over-temperature switches shall be utilized to provide special cooling if required to maintain operating temperatures within the manufacturer's specified range. 3. Air conditioning applications shall include means of preventing moisture condensation. D. Where the PLC is utilized to control multiple trains of equipment and where the equipment in each train operates as a unit relatively independent of other equipment trains (e.g., facility with multiple boiler units or filter trains), the PLC components (I/O modules, power supplies, etc.) shall be designed so that the failure of any one component does not affect equipment on all trains. The following shall also apply. 1. I/O modules shall be segregated on a train basis unless required for safety reasons. 2. Where several equipment units operate in parallel, but are not considered assigned to a particular equipment train (e.g., multiple raw water pumps or chemical feed pumps all discharging into a common header), the PLC I/O modules associated with each equipment unit shall be assigned so that the failure of any one I/O module will not affect the other parallel unit/s. 2.3 HARDWARE A. Processor shall include diagnostic indicators for power, mode, low battery, communications ports, and memory and I/O errors. B. Redundant processors, if specified, shall have seamless fail-over capability. C. I/O modules shall be capable of being replaced while the PLC is on-line and operating. D. All I/O modules shall have terminal block failure or removal monitoring. E. Analog output modules shall have a resolution of at least 12 bits. F. Electrical isolation shall be provided between logical and field device. G. I/O Module field wiring shall remain undisturbed when removing or replacing an I/O module. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLERS 40 63 43 - 3 H. Fail-safe state for each I/O channel shall be capable of being defined as on, off or fail-in-place. I. Power Supply Units: a. Electrical service to PLC system shall be 120 VAC, 60 Hz. J. All PLC control system components shall be capable of meeting or exceeding electromagnetic interference tests per IEEE C37.90.2. 2.4 SOFTWARE A. All software shall be furnished and licensed to Owner. 1. At Substantial Completion, transfer all licenses and media to Owner. 2. At Substantial Completion, all software must be latest edition and licensed to the Owner. 3. Software shall be lifetime licensed and be OEM supported for at least 10 years from date of license transfer. B. Programming functionality. 1. Languages supported: All application programming in IEC 61131-3 compliant language. 2. Program PLC utilizing ladder diagram, function block, or structured text format. 3. Protect program via removable key switch or password to prevent unauthorized changes. Provide password and/or programming keys to Owner. 4. Capable of on-line and off-line programming. C. PLC System Programming: 1. Programming of the PLC shall be by the Owner. D. Manufacturer support 1. Submit a written proposal for a manufacturer support agreement for all products specified herein for a minimum of 12 months starting at final completion of the project. The cost of this manufacturer support agreement shall not be included in the Contract Price. The support agreement shall be executed in the name of, and for the benefit of, the Owner. At a minimum, this agreement shall provide the Owner with: a. 8 AM to 5 PM, 5 day per week manufacturer telephone support. b. Access to the manufacturer's technical support website. c. Software updates and patches. 2.5 COMPONENTS A. PLC System Central Processor Unit (CPU): 1. The PLC shall have the capability of communicating with other commonly specified PLC and control system protocols such as Modbus/RTU, Modbus/TCP, Profibus, Ethernet/TCP and OPC. 2. CPU shall include capability to modify logic via an Ethernet port without taking processor off line. 3. Memory: a. Battery-backed RAM. b. Non-volatile program storage via flash EEPROM: 1) Automatically download to RAM in the event RAM is corrupted. 4. Memory battery backup shall be capable of 180 days memory retention with fresh battery. a. Provide visual indication of battery status and alarm low battery voltage. b. Memory battery backup shall be capable of 28 days memory retention after the "Battery Low" indicating LED is on. 5. Plug-in card designed to allow quick field replacement of faulty devices. a. Provide unit designed for field replacement and expansion of memory without requiring rewiring or use of special tools. 6. 20% minimum spare useable memory capacity after all required programming is in place and operating. 7. Capable of executing all control functions required by the Specifications and Drawings. 8. Built-in three-mode (proportional-integral-derivative) control capabilities. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLERS 40 63 43 - 4 a. As directly selectable algorithms requiring no user knowledge of programming languages. 9. Lighted status indicators for "RUN" and "FAILURE". 10. Capable of manual or automatic control mode transfer from the operating console stations or from within the control strategy. a. Transfer shall be bumpless and balanceless. B. Input/output (I/O) Modules: 1. Provide plug-in modular-type I/O racks with cables to connect to all other required PLC system components. 2. Provide I/O system with: a. I/O solid state boards with status lights indicating I/O status. b. Electric isolation between logic and field device. c. Capability of withstanding low energy common mode transient to 1000 V without failure. d. Incorporate noise suppression design. e. Capable of meeting or exceeding electrical noise tests, NEMA ICS 1-109.60-109.66. f. Capable of being removed and inserted into the I/O rack under power, without affecting any other I/O modules in the rack. g. Install 20% spare I/O points for each type. 3. Input/output connection requirements: a. Make connections to I/O subsystem by terminating all field wiring on terminal blocks within the I/O enclosure. b. Prewire I/O modules to terminal blocks. c. Provide terminal blocks with continuous marking strip. d. Size terminals to accommodate all active data base points and spares. e. Provide terminals for individual termination of each signal shield. f. Field wiring shall not be disturbed when removing or replacing an I/O module. 4. Discrete I/O modules: a. Interface to ON/OFF devices. b. I/O status indicator on module front. c. Voltage rating to match circuit voltage. d. Output module current rating: 1) Match maximum circuit current draw. 2) Minimum 1.0 continuous A/point for 120 VAC applications. e. Isolated modules for applications where one module interfaces with devices utilizing different sources of power. 5. Discrete outputs shall be fused: a. Provide one fuse per common or per isolated output. b. Provide blown fuse indication. c. External fusing shall be provided if output module does not possess internal fusing. d. Fuses provided external to output model shall: 1) Be in accordance with module manufacturer's specifications. 2) Be installed at terminal block. 6. Analog I/O modules: a. Input modules to accept signals indicated on Drawings or Specifications. b. Minimum 12 bit resolution. c. I/O chassis supplied power for powering connected field devices. d. Differential inputs and outputs. e. User configurable for desired fault-response state. f. Provide output signals as indicated on Drawings and Specifications. g. Individual D/A converter for each output module. h. Individual A/D converter for each input module. 7. Communications Modules: a. Provide communications modules as-shown on Drawings. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLERS 40 63 43 - 5 b. Provide communications modules for each protocol required for a complete communications system as shown on drawings. c. Multi-port Ethernet modules may not be utilized as a network switch or to bridge networks. C. Power Supply Units: 1. Provide regulated power units: a. Designed to operate with PLC system and shall provide power to: 1) All components of PLC system. 2) All two-wire field instruments. 3) Other devices as indicated on Drawings or Specifications. b. Capable of supplying PLC system when all of the specified spare capacity is utilized. c. Each power supply shall be sized such that it will carry no more than 75% of capacity under normal loads. 2. Electrical service to PLC system is 120 VAC, 60 Hz. 3. Separate AC circuit breakers shall be provided for each power supply. 4. If the PLC system is field expandable beyond the specified spare capacity, and if such expansion requires power supply modification, note such requirements in the submittals and allow room for power supply modification in the PLC system enclosure. 5. Capable of meeting or exceeding electrical noise tests, NEMA ICS 1-109.60-109.66. 6. Power distribution: a. Immune to transients and surges resultant from noisy environment. b. Shall provide constant voltage level DC distribution to all devices. 7. Provide uninterruptible power supply (UPS) to sustain full power to UPS powered loads listed below for a minimum of 15 minutes following loss of primary power and to ensure that the transient power surges and dips do not affect the operation of the PLC system. a. UPS powered loads: 1) All rack mounted PLC components. 2) Local operator consoles. 3) All power supplies furnished with the PLC and associated loads. b. Input: 1) 108 to 132 VAC. 2) 57 to 63 Hz. 3) Line fuse protection. c. Output: 1) 120 VAC nominal. 2) 60 Hz. 3) Short circuit protected. 4) Instantaneous transfer time. d. IEEE C62.41 Class A voltage surges of 6000 V attenuated to less than 50 V on the output. e. Battery: Maintenance free lead acid. D. PLC System Enclosure: 1. In accordance with Specification Section 40 67 00 - Control Panels. 2. Component placement: a. Mount all controller components vertically within the enclosure to allow maximum convection cooling. b. Either install power supplies above all other equipment with at least 10 inches of clearance between the power supply and the enclosure top, or adjacent to other components, but with sufficient spacing for circulation of cooling air. c. Do not place I/O racks directly above the CPU or power supply. d. Locate incoming line devices (isolation or constant voltage transformers, local power disconnects, surge suppressors, etc.) so as to keep power wire runs within an enclosure as short as possible. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLERS 40 63 43 - 6 e. If items such as magnetic starters, contactors, relays, and other electromagnetic devices must be located within the same enclosure as the PLC system components, place a barrier with at least 6 inches of separation between the magnetic area and the control area. f. Place circulating fans close to major heat generating devices. g. Segregate input/output modules into groups of identical type. 3. Wiring and grounding to be in accordance with Specification Section 40 67 00. 4. Termination requirements: a. In accordance with Specification Section 40 67 00. b. Make connections to I/O subsystem by terminating all field wiring on terminal blocks within the enclosure. c. Prewire I/O modules to terminal blocks. d. Size terminals to accommodate all active database points and spares. e. Provide terminals for individual termination of each signal shield. f. Field wiring shall not be disturbed when removing or replacing an I/O module. 2.6 ACCESSORIES A. Provide all accessories required to install and test a complete PLC control system to accomplish the requirements of the Drawings and Specifications. B. Provide all programming cables required to configure the PLC logic. 2.7 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform Factory Acceptance Testing in accordance with Specification Section 40 61 21 - Process Control System Testing. 2.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Furnish Owner with the following extra spares: 1. One spare CPU. 2. One spare communication module. 3. One spare I/O card of each card type for every 4 cards or fraction thereof installed. 4. One spare power supply. 5. A set of spare fuses for all installed types. B. Include a complete bill of materials itemizing each line item with make and model (part) number. C. Include a complete set of all special tools required to install, maintain and test the PLCs. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 FUNCTIONALITY A. Complete System. 1. Provide all graphics and logic programming, configuration, coordination, integration, and testing required for furnishing a fully functioning system. 2. Provide interface support with all foreign device interfaces (FDI) communicating with the PLC system. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install PLC control system in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Test system in accordance with Specification Section 40 61 21 - Process Control System Testing. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLERS 40 63 43 - 7 B. Demonstrate system in accordance with Specification Section 01 75 00 - Checkout and Start-Up Procedures. 3.4 TRAINING A. Employee of the manufacturer or certified representative to provide 4hrs of operation and maintenance training at the Project site after the system has successfully undergone all field testing and acceptance procedures. B. As a minimum, training shall cover: 1. Hardware overview. 2. Documentation. 3. Maintenance. 4. Trouble shooting. 5. Operation, e.g., changing set points, passwords, etc. 3.5 DOCUMENTATION A. Update O&M manuals to reflect as-built conditions. 3.6 SUPPORT A. Provide on-call technical support for a period of one year after substantial completion. Include a minimum of two site visits to work with Owner on any final modifications to the logic. END OF SECTION Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 This page intentionally left blank. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents NETWORK EQUIPMENT 40 66 05 - 1 SECTION 40 66 05 NETWORK EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Computer network requirements, which include, but are not necessarily limited to: a. Ethernet Switches. b. Firewalls. B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Section 40 61 13 - Process Control Systems General Requirements. 2. Section 40 61 21 - Process Control System Testing. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Referenced Standards: 1. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (IEEE): a. 802.3, Information Technology - Local and Metropolitan Area Networks - Part 3: Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision Detection (CSMA/CD) Access Method and Physical Layer Specifications. 1) 802.3u: IEEE Standards for Local and Metropolitan Area Networks: Supplement to Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision Detection (CSMA/CD) Access Method and Physical Layer Specifications Media Access Control (MAC) Parameters, Physical Layer, Medium Attachment Units, and Repeater for 100 Mb/s Operation, Type 100BASE-T. 2) 802.3x: IEEE Standards for Local and Metropolitan Area Networks: Specification for 802.3 Full Duplex Operation. 2. National Institute of Standards and Technologies (NIST): a. 800-82, Guide to Industrial Control Systems (ICS) Security. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. See Specification Section 40 61 13 - Process Control System General Requirements. B. Action Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Shop Drawings: a. Network Diagrams: 1) Provide in both AUTO CAD and PDF formats. 2) Coordinate with the Owner or Engineer to determine the preferred method of delivery to assure security of information contained in Network Diagrams. 3) Logical Network Diagram(s) - Depict information flow through network(s), and include: a) Major network devices. b) Include all wireless communication devices. c) Include the following information for each networked device: (1) Device ID. (2) Device description. (3) Manufacturer/model number. (4) Ports and Protocols 4) Physical Network Diagram(s): a) Show all network components, ports, protocols, connections and cables. (1) Include all wireless communication devices. 2. Product Data: a. Network requirements verification plan. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents NETWORK EQUIPMENT 40 66 05 - 2 b. Comprehensive asset inventory of all networked components: 1) Provide in Excel spreadsheet format. 2) Coordinate with the Owner or Engineer to determine the preferred method of delivery to assure security of information contained in asset inventory. 3) Include: a) Device ID. b) Manufacturer. c) Model Number. d) Serial Number. e) Device Use description. f) Firmware. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the manufacturers listed within the following Articles are acceptable. 2.2 ETHERNET SWITCHES A. Accessories: “Stack Module” as required to create logical switches and reduce network latency. B. Provide Ethernet switches as shown on the Drawings and the Schedule herein. C. Layer 2 – Rack Mounted Ethernet Switches: 1. Manufacturers: a. Allen-Bradley/ Cisco. b. Allied Telesys. c. HP. d. Moxa. 2. Design and fabrication: a. Support Ethernet 100/1000 Mbps. b. Two backbone ports for connection to fiber via type LC connectors (ST not allowed). c. 8 100/1000 Mbps twisted pair ports (RJ45) as required for communication with devices as depicted in the Contract Documents. 1) Unless otherwise noted, provide at least two spare 100/1000 Mbps port (twisted pair) at each Ethernet switch. d. Support SNMP v3 and Web based management. e. Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol. f. IGMP (Internet Group Management Protocol) support for IP multicast filtering to enable switches to automatically route messages only to appropriate ports. g. Check all received data for validity. 1) Discard invalid and defective frames or fragments. h. Monitor connected TP/TX line segments for short-circuit or interrupt using regular link test pulses in accordance with IEEE 802.3. i. Monitor attached fiber optic lines for open circuit conditions in accordance with IEEE 802.3. j. As applicable, meet requirements of IEEE 802.3. k. Power switch with 120 VAC power input. l. Provide dual redundant power supplies. m. Provide LED status lights to indicate: 1) Power: Supply voltage present. 2) Fault. 3) Port status. n. Environmental rating: 1) Operating temperature: 32 degrees F to 122 degrees F. 2) Humidity: 95% relative humidity, non-condensing. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents NETWORK EQUIPMENT 40 66 05 - 3 3. Function in self-healing ring structure. a. If one section in the ring fails, the ring structure changes to a line structure within 0.5 seconds. 4. 19 inches Rack mount. D. Layer 2 –Panel Mounted Ethernet Switches: 1. Manufacturers: a. Hirschmann. b. N-TRON. c. Phoenix Contact. d. Allen-Bradley/Cisco. e. Moxa. 2. Design and fabrication: a. Support Ethernet 100/1000 Mbps. b. Two backbone ports for connection to fiber via type LC connectors (ST not allowed). c. 8 100/1000 Mbps twisted pair ports (RJ45) as required for communication with devices as depicted in the Contract Documents. 1) Unless otherwise noted, provide at least two spare 100/1000 Mbps port (twisted pair) at each Ethernet switch. d. Support SNMP v3 and Web based management. e. Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol. f. IGMP (Internet Group Management Protocol) support for IP multicast filtering to enable switches to automatically route messages only to appropriate ports. g. Check all received data for validity. 1) Discard invalid and defective frames or fragments. h. Monitor connected TP/TX line segments for short-circuit or interrupt using regular link test pulses in accordance with IEEE 802.3. i. Monitor attached fiber optic lines for open circuit conditions in accordance with IEEE 802.3. j. As applicable, meet requirements of IEEE 802.3. k. Power switch with 120 VAC power input. l. Provide dual redundant power supplies. m. Provide LED status lights to indicate: 1) Power: Supply voltage present. 2) Fault. 3) Port status. n. Environmental rating: 1) Operating temperature: 32 degrees F to 122 degrees F. 2) Humidity: 95% relative humidity, non-condensing. 3. Function in self-healing ring structure. a. If one section in the ring fails, the ring structure changes to a line structure within 0.5 seconds. 4. DIN Rail mounted. E. Configuration: 1. All managed switch unused ports shall be administratively disabled. Sticky MAC or similar port configuration shall be utilized to bind ports to MAC address of connected device per NIST 800-82. 2. Layer 3 switches shall be configured using static routes per NIST 800-82 best practices. Routes between VLANS shall be restricted except where required to achieve contract required functionality. 3. Change default usernames and passwords. 2.3 FIREWALLS A. Manufacturers: 1. Cisco Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents NETWORK EQUIPMENT 40 66 05 - 4 2. Avaya 3. Dell 4. Belden B. Provide Firewalls as shown on the Drawings. C. Panel Mounted – Firewalls: 1. Design and fabrication: a. Ports: 1) Minimum two – 10/100/1000 Mbps 2) Minimum two – Fiber Ethernet (FE) as shown on contract drawings 2. Configuration: a. Configure to apply host-based firewalls on end systems. b. Configuration to follow NIST 800-82 best practices for configuration to limit routes to only those required for functionality. c. Change default usernames and passwords. 2.4 ROUTERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Cisco Integrated Services Router (ISR). 2. HPE. 3. Dell. B. Provide routers as shown on the Drawings and the Schedule herein. C. Router Design Requirements: 1. Support for multiple, diverse access links: T1/E1, T3/E3, xDSL, Gigabit and 10-Gigabit Ethernet 2. Modular interfaces with online removal and insertion (OIR) for module upgrades without network disruption. 3. Provide security protection features. Including packet filtering, stateful firewall, AAA, IPSec VPN, and Auto-discovery VPN. 4. GUI based device management capability for configuring routing, firewall, VPN, WAN and LAN. 5. Built-in firewall. Systems Integrator shall configure and enable firewall in the connection to the outside world to provide controlled access policies for the sharing of data between networks. D. Configuration: 1. Configure to restrict all routes not required by contract. 2. Change default usernames and passwords. 2.5 ACCESSORIES AND MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Provide all accessories required to furnish a complete computer-based network for the control system to accomplish the requirements of the Drawings and Specifications. B. Furnish Owner with the following extra materials: 1. One spare Ethernet switch of each type utilized. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 DEMONSTRATION A. Demonstrate system in accordance with Section 01 75 00 - Checkout and Start-Up Procedures. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Verify network is configured per requirements herein. B. Submit verification plan. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents NETWORK EQUIPMENT 40 66 05 - 5 3.3 INSTALLATION AND CHECKOUT A. Provide installation and checkout in accordance with Section 40 61 13 - Process Control System General Requirements and Section 40 61 21 - Process Control System Testing. END OF SECTION Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 This page intentionally left blank. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents CONTROL SYSTEM EQUIPMENT PANELS AND RACKS 40 67 00 - 1 SECTION 40 67 00 CONTROL SYSTEM EQUIPMENT PANELS AND RACKS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Requirements for control panels and enclosures utilized as follows: a. Unless noted otherwise, all control panels and enclosures housing control components that are specified in Section 40 71 00, Section 40 72 00, Section 40 73 00, Section 40 63 43, or Section 40 61 43. b. This Section is only applicable to panels furnished with equipment specified in other specification divisions when so stated in the applicable equipment specification section. B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Section 10 14 00 - Identification Devices. 2. Section 26 05 19 - Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables. 3. Section 40 61 13 - Process Controls Systems General Requirements. 4. Section 40 61 21 - Process Control System Testing. 5. Section 40 61 43 - Surge Protection Devices for Instrumentation and Control Equipment. 6. Section 40 63 43 - Programmable Logic Controllers. 7. Section 40 71 00 - Flow Measurement. 8. Section 40 72 00 - Level Measurement. 9. Section 40 73 00 - Pressure Instrumentation. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Definitions 1. Panel: Control panels or enclosures listed in the schedule included in this Specification Section. 2. Foreign Voltages: Voltages that may be present in circuits when the panel main power is disconnected. 3. Intrinsically Safe: a. A device, instrument or component that will not produce sparks or thermal effects under normal or abnormal conditions that will ignite a specified gas mixture. b. Designed such that electrical and thermal energy limits inherently are at levels incapable of causing ignition. 4. Intrinsically Safe Circuit: A circuit in which any spark or thermal effect is incapable of causing ignition of a mixture of flammable or combustible material in air under test conditions as prescribed in UL 913. 5. Cable: Multi-conductor, insulated, with outer sheath containing either building wire or instrumentation wire. 6. Instrumentation Cable: a. Multiple conductor, insulated, twisted or untwisted, with outer sheath. b. Instrumentation cable is typically either TSP (twisted-shielded pair) or TST (twisted- shielded triad) and is used for the transmission of low current or low voltage signals. 7. Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter (GFCI): A type of device (e.g., circuit breaker or receptacle) which detects an abnormal current flow to ground and opens the circuit preventing a hazardous situation. 8. Programmable Logic Controller (PLC): A specialized industrial computer using programmed, custom instructions to provide automated monitoring and control functions by interfacing software control strategies to input/output devices. 9. Input/Output (I/O): Hardware for the moving of control signals into and/or out of a PLC. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents CONTROL SYSTEM EQUIPMENT PANELS AND RACKS 40 67 00 - 2 10. Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA): Used in process control applications, where programmable logic controllers (PLCs) perform control functions but are monitored and supervised by computer workstations. 11. Digital Signal Cable: Used for the transmission of digital communication signals between computers, PLCs, RTUs, etc. 12. Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS): A backup power unit that provides continuous power when the normal power supply is interrupted. 13. Loop Calibrator: Portable testing and measurement tool capable of accurately generating and measuring 4-20mA DC analog signals. B. Referenced Standards: 1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI). 2. ASTM International (ASTM): a. B75, Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Tube. 3. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): a. 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum). b. ICS 4, Industrial Control and Systems: Terminal Blocks. 4. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): a. 70, National Electrical Code (NEC): 1) Article 409, Industrial Control Panels. 2) Article 504, Intrinsically Safe Systems. 5. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): a. 508A, Standard for Safety Industrial Control Panels. b. 698A, Standard for Industrial Control Panels Relating to Hazardous (Classified) Locations. c. 913, Standard for Safety Intrinsically Safe Apparatus and Associated Apparatus for Use in Class I, II, and III, Division 1, Hazardous (Classified) Locations. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 40 61 13. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Table of contents sheet(s). 2. Legend and abbreviation sheets. 3. Panel exterior layout drawings. 4. Panel interior layout drawings. 5. Bill of Material for each panel. 6. Panel door weight calculation. 7. Electrical load calculations for each panel. 8. Climate control calculations for each panel. 9. Communication network drawing(s). 10. Wiring diagrams. a. Drawings containing the following information to be submitted as part of Specification Section 40 67 00 (control panels) submittals: 1) Arrangement drawings for PLC system components. 2) Panel and enclosure plans, sections and details. 3) Access opening locations and required clearances for each panel and enclosure. 4) Enclosure internal wiring and terminal blocks. C. Product Data: 1. Manufacturer catalog cut sheets for enclosure, finish, panel devices, control auxiliaries, and accessories. D. Contract Closeout Information: 1. Operation and Maintenance Data: a. See Section 01 78 23 for requirements for the mechanics, administration, and the content of Operation and Maintenance Manual submittals. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents CONTROL SYSTEM EQUIPMENT PANELS AND RACKS 40 67 00 - 3 E. Informational Submittals: 1. Unwitnessed Factory Testing confirmation of completion. 2. Record Drawings: a. Updated panel drawings delivered with the panel(s) from the Contractor’s factory. b. Drawings shall be enclosed in transparent plastic and firmly secured within each panel. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. Approved supplier of Industrial Control Panels under provisions of UL 508A or UL 698A. a. Entire assembly shall be affixed with a UL 508A or UL 698A label "Listed Enclosed Industrial Control Panel" prior to shipment to the jobsite. b. Control panel(s) without an affixed UL 508A or UL 698A label shall be rejected and sent back to the Contractor’s factory. 1.5 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Shop Drawings: 1. All panel and wiring drawings shall be provided in both hardcopy and softcopy. a. Drawings in AUTO CAD format. b. Printed on 11 by 17 inches sheets. 2. Drawings shall include a title block containing the following: a. Plant or facility name where panel(s) are to be installed. b. Drawing title. c. Drawing number. d. Revision list with revision number and date e. Drawing date. f. Drawing scale. g. Manufacturer name, address, and telephone number. 3. Cover sheet for each drawing set shall indicate the following: a. Plant or facility name. b. Project name. c. Submittal description. d. Revision number. e. Issue date. 4. Table of contents sheet(s) shall indicate the following for each drawing in the set: a. Drawing number. b. Drawing title. c. Sheet number. 5. Legend and abbreviation sheets shall indicate the following: a. Description of symbols and abbreviations used. b. Panel construction notes including enclosure NEMA rating, finish type and color, wire type, wire color strategy, conductor sizes, and wire labeling strategy. c. Confirmation that the panel(s) are to be affixed with a UL 508A or UL 698A label prior to shipment from the factory. 6. Bill of Material for each panel shall include the following component information: a. Instrument tag number. b. Quantity. c. Functional name or description. d. Manufacturer. e. Complete model number. f. Size or rating. 7. Panel exterior layout drawings to scale and shall indicate the following: a. Panel materials of construction, dimensions, and total assembled weight. 1) All dimensions shall be in inches. b. Panel access openings. c. Conduit access locations. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents CONTROL SYSTEM EQUIPMENT PANELS AND RACKS 40 67 00 - 4 1) Ensure conduit entry locations allow for sufficient bend radius of field cables entering enclosure. 2) Control panel exterior layout shall identify conduit and cable entry locations. d. Front view, side views and top view of enclosure. e. Front panel device layout. f. Nameplate layout drawings g. Nameplate schedule: 1) Nameplate location. 2) Nameplate dimensions. 3) Legend which indicates text, letter height and color, background color and nameplate material. 4) Include exterior legends as per UL requirements. 5) Short Circuit Current Rating (SCCR) marking per NFPA 70 or statement of exception. Include any required calculations. h. Alarm annunciator window engraving schedule. i. Layouts of graphic panels or mosaic displays. j. Include a statement on the drawings that indicates that the panel has been built as per UL508A or UL698A standards. 8. Panel interior layout drawings shall be drawn to scale and shall indicate the following: a. Sub-panel or mounting pan dimensions. 1) All dimensions shall be in inches. b. Interior device layouts indicating dimensioned location of devices. c. PLC/RTU general arrangement layouts. d. Wire-way locations, purpose, and dimensions. Include center line dimensions for all DIN rail and wire-way. e. Terminal strip designations. f. Location of external wiring and/or piping connections. g. Location of lighting fixtures, switches and receptacles. h. Include interior legends as per UL requirements. 9. Wiring diagrams shall consist of the following: a. Panel power distribution diagrams. b. Control and instrumentation wiring diagrams. c. PLC/RTU I/O information: 1) Model number of I/O module. 2) Description of I/O module type and function. 3) Rack and slot number. 4) Terminal number on module. 5) Point or channel number. 6) Programmed point addresses. 7) Signal function and type. d. Internal network connections diagram e. Wiring diagrams shall identify each wire as it is to be labeled. f. Wiring diagrams shall include line/ rung references. g. Relay coils and their associated contacts shall be cross referenced to each other and clearly identified on the drawings. h. Wires leaving the sheet shall clearly indicate the continuation sheet and line/ rung references. 10. Communication network drawing(s) shall include: a. Network equipment b. Interconnections between all network equipment within the panel. c. Connection to the plant network. B. Verify that panel door mounted equipment will not exceed the maximum allowed weight as per manufacturer’s specification. 1. Submit panel door weight calculation. Include weight of computer if using a laptop shelf. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents CONTROL SYSTEM EQUIPMENT PANELS AND RACKS 40 67 00 - 5 C. Electrical load calculations for each panel: 1. Panel current draw based on connected load. 2. SSCR Calculations. 3. UPS Run time calculations. 4. DC power supply load calculations. 5. Climate control calculations for each panel. 6. Verify that sufficient dissipation and/or generation of heat is provided to maintain interior panel temperatures within the rated operating temperatures of panel components. 7. Submit control panel heat release calculations (Watts or BTU/HR). Verify results with cooling/heating software. Submit heating and/or cooling equipment as required. Refer to Section 2.1. 8. Provide temperature monitoring switch when an air conditioner is required by heat release calculations. High Temperature switch shall be wired to a PLC discrete input for temperature monitoring. 9. Provide temperature monitoring switch when heater is required by heat release calculations. Low temperature switch shall be wired to a PLC discrete input for temperature monitoring. 10. Air conditioners shall have built-in temperature display. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Enclosures: a. Hoffman Engineering Co. b. Hammond Manufacturing. c. Saginaw Control and Engineering. d. Rittal 2. Panel heaters: a. Hoffman Enclosures, Inc. b. Hammond Manufacturing. c. Rittal 3. Heat exchangers and air conditioners: a. Hoffman Engineering Co. b. Hammond Manufacturing. c. Saginaw Control and Engineering. d. Rittal e. Pfannenberg. f. Kooltronic 4. Cooling fans and exhaust packages: a. Hoffman Enclosures, Inc. b. Hammond Manufacturing. c. Saginaw Control and Engineering. d. Rittal 5. Internal corrosion inhibitors: a. Hoffman Enclosures, Inc.; Model A-HCI10E b. Northern Technologies International Corporation (NTIC); Model Zerust VC. c. Cortec Corporation; Model VpCl Emitting Systems. 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Panel Nameplates and Identification: 1. See Section 10 14 00. B. Free standing enclosures containing a PLC shall be provided with an interior swing out shelf for laptop computers. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents CONTROL SYSTEM EQUIPMENT PANELS AND RACKS 40 67 00 - 6 C. Enclosures shall be provided with print pocket mounted on the interior of the door. Free standing enclosures shall have a minimum size print pocket of 12 inches. D. Enclosures containing a PLC shall include door contacts to monitor enclosure door status. Door contacts shall be wired to a PLC input for monitoring status. E. All field instrument enclosure penetrations shall be plugged using threaded conduit plugs to prevent water or contaminant entry into the enclosure during installation. 1. Instruments shall maintain manufacturer’s rating for the appropriate area designation. 2. Tape and/or plastic plugs shall not be an acceptable means of preventing water/contaminate intrusion. 2.3 FABRICATION A. General: 1. Fabricate panels with instrument arrangements and dimensions identified in the Contract Documents. 2. Provide panel(s) with the required enclosure rating per NEMA 250 to meet classifications identified in the Contract Documents. 3. Devices installed in panel openings shall have a NEMA enclosure rating at least equal to the panel enclosure rating. a. Devices that cannot be obtained with an adequate NEMA rating shall be installed behind a transparent viewing window. b. The window shall maintain the required NEMA rating of the enclosure. 4. Externally mounted components including but not limited to air conditioners, enclosed transformers, external disconnect switches and external surge protector boxes shall match the NEMA rating and be constructed of the same material as the control panel. As an illustrative example, a NEMA 3/3R external enclosed transformer shall not be mounted on a NEMA 4X stainless steel panel. 5. Panel(s) shall be completely assembled at the Contractor’s factory. a. No fabrication other than correction of minor defects or minor transit damage shall be performed on panels at the jobsite. 6. Painting: a. Panels fabricated from steel shall have their internal and external surfaces prepared, cleaned, primed, and painted. 1) Mechanically abrade all surfaces to remove rust, scale, and surface imperfections. 2) Provide final surface treatment with 120 grit abrasives or finer, followed by spot putty to fill all voids. 3) Utilize solvent or chemical methods to clean panel surfaces. 4) Apply surface conversion of zinc phosphate prior to painting to improve paint adhesion and to increase corrosion resistance. 5) Electrostatically apply polyester urethane powder coating to all inside and outside surfaces. 6) Bake powder coating at high temperatures to bond coating to enclosure surface. a) Panel interior shall be white with semi-gloss finish. b) Panel exterior shall be ANSI #61 gray with flat finish. 7) Application of alkyd liquid enamel coating shall be allowed in lieu of polyester urethane powder for wall mounted NEMA 1 or NEMA 12 rated panels. b. Panels fabricated from stainless steel, aluminum, or fiberglass shall not be painted. 7. Finish opening edges of panel cutouts to smooth and true surface conditions. a. Panels fabricated from steel shall have the opening edges finished with the panel exterior paint. 8. Panels shall meet all requirements of UL 508A or UL 698A. a. If more than one disconnect switch is required to disconnect all power within a panel or enclosure, provide a cautionary marking with the word "CAUTION" and the following or equivalent, "Risk of Electric Shock-More than one disconnect switch required to de- energize the equipment before servicing." Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents CONTROL SYSTEM EQUIPMENT PANELS AND RACKS 40 67 00 - 7 9. Provide control panel in accordance with NFPA 70, Article 409. a. In the event of any conflict between NFPA 70, Article 409 and UL 508A or UL 698A, the more stringent requirement shall apply. 10. Provide equipment or control panels with Short Circuit Current Rating (SCCR) labeling as required by NFPA 70 and other applicable codes. a. Determine the SCCR rating by one of the following methods: 1) Method 1: SCCR rating meets or exceeds the available fault current of the source equipment when indicated on the Drawings. 2) Method 2: SCCR rating meets or exceeds the source equipment’s Amp Interrupting Current (AIC) rating as indicated on the Drawings. 3) Method 3: SCCR rating meets or exceeds the calculated available short circuit current at the control panel. b. The source equipment is the switchboard, panelboard, motor control center or similar equipment where the control panel circuit originates. c. For Method 3, provide calculations justifying the SCCR rating. Utilize source equipment available fault current or AIC rating as indicated on the Drawings. B. Free-Standing Panels: 1. Welded construction. 2. Completely enclosed, self-supporting, and gasketed, dust-tight. 3. Rolled lip around all sides of enclosure door opening. 4. Seams and corners welded and ground smooth to touch and smooth in visual appearance. 5. Full height, fully gasketed flush pan doors. 6. Full length piano hinges rated for 1.5 times door plus instrument weight. 7. Doors with keyed alike locking handles and three-point catch. 8. Appropriate conduit, wiring, and instrument openings shall be provided. 9. Lifting eyebolts to allow simple, safe rigging and lifting of panel during installation. C. Wall Mounted Panels: 1. Seams continuously welded and ground smooth. 2. Rolled lip around all sides of enclosure door opening. 3. Gasketed dust tight. 4. Three-point latching mechanism operated by oil tight key-locking handle. 5. Key doors alike. 6. Continuous heavy GA hinge pin on doors. a. Hinges rated for 1.5 times door plus instrument weight. 7. Front full opening door. 8. Brackets for wall mounting. D. Internal Panel Wiring: 1. Panel wire duct shall be installed between each row of components, and adjacent to each terminal strip. a. Route wiring within the panel in wire-duct neatly tied and bundled with tie wraps. b. Size wire ducts to include a minimum of 20% spare fill capacity. c. Wire-duct shall have removable snap-on covers and perforated walls for easy wire entrance. d. Wire-duct shall be constructed of nonmetallic materials with rating in excess of the maximum voltage carried therein. 2. Lay out panel wire-duct on both sides of each terminal strip. Leave one wire-duct empty, so the field wiring has sufficient room for entry into the panel through this wire-way. Designate the other wire-duct for panel wiring. 3. Utilize fiber optic and Ethernet cable management accessories within the panel. a. Terminate Ethernet cables from the field to RJ45 punch down blocks. Connect Ethernet patch cords from the RJ45 punch down block to the Ethernet switch. b. Terminate Fiber optic cable from field in fiber optic patch panel. Terminate all fibers within the cable. Connect Fiber optic patch cords from the fiber optic patch panel to the fiber optic Ethernet switch. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents CONTROL SYSTEM EQUIPMENT PANELS AND RACKS 40 67 00 - 8 4. Wiring shall be installed such that if wires are removed from one device, source of power will not be disrupted to other devices. 5. “Daisy-chaining” of ground cables or power neutrals between equipment is not permitted. 6. Terminate all internal wiring with no more than two (2) conductors per terminal block point. For terminal strips designated for field wiring, only one side of the terminal strip shall be used for panel wiring. 7. Splicing and tapping of wires permitted only at terminal blocks. 8. Wire bundles to doors shall be secured at each end so that bending or twisting will be around longitudinal axis of wire. a. Protect bend area with sleeve. 9. Arrange wiring neatly, cut to proper length, with surplus wire removed. a. Arrange wiring with sufficient clearance. b. Provide abrasion protection for wire bundles that pass through openings or across edges of sheet metal. 10. To eliminate noise coupling or interference, AC power and control circuits shall be routed separate from analog signal cables, low voltage control circuits, and communications cables and digital signal cables. a. Separate by at least 6 inches, except at unavoidable crossover points and at device terminations. b. All wiring shall be bundled and supported by straps. 11. Separation of intrinsically safe circuit conductors and non-intrinsically safe circuit conductors: a. Secure conductors so that any intrinsically safe circuit conductor that might come loose from a terminal is unlikely to come into contact with another terminal. b. Separate non-intrinsically safe circuit conductors from intrinsically safe circuit conductors by one of the following methods: 1) Separation of non-intrinsically safe circuit conductors from intrinsically safe circuit conductors by at least 2 inches (50 mm). 2) Separation of non-intrinsically safe circuit conductors from intrinsically safe circuit conductors by use of a grounded metal partition 0.0359 inches (0.91 mm) or thicker. 3) Separation of non-intrinsically safe circuit conductors from intrinsically safe circuit conductors by use of an approved insulating partition that extends to within 0.0625 inches (1.5 mm) of the enclosure walls. 4) Where either (1) all of the intrinsically safe circuit conductors or (2) all of the non- intrinsically safe circuit conductors are in grounded metal-sheathed or metal-clad cables where the sheathing or cladding is capable of carrying fault current to ground. c. Blue wire-duct shall be used for wires carrying intrinsically safe circuit conductors. 12. Separate different intrinsically safe circuit conductors from each other by one of the following means: a. The conductors of each circuit are within a grounded metal shield. b. The conductors of each circuit have insulation with a minimum thickness of 0.01 inches (0.25 mm). 13. Provide minimum clearance of 0.125 inches (3 mm) between uninsulated parts of intrinsically safe field wiring conductors connected to terminals and grounded metal or other conducting parts. 14. Wiring to pilot devices or rotary switches shall be individually bundled and installed with a "flexible loop" of sufficient length to permit the component to be removed from panel for maintenance without removing terminations. 15. Conductors for AC and DC circuits shall be type MTW stranded copper listed for operation with 600 V at 90 degrees C. a. Conductor size shall be as required for load and 16 AWG minimum. b. Internal panel wiring color code: 1) AC circuits: Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents CONTROL SYSTEM EQUIPMENT PANELS AND RACKS 40 67 00 - 9 a) Power wiring: Black. b) Control interconnections: Red. c) Neutral: White. d) Ground: Green. 2) Low voltage DC circuits: a) Power wiring: Dark Blue(+) and White with Blue stripe. b) Control interconnections: Dark Blue. 3) Foreign voltage circuits: Yellow. 4) Annunciator circuits: Red. 5) Intrinsically safe circuits: Light Blue. 16. Analog signal cables shall be of 600 V insulation, stranded copper, twisted-shielded pairs. a. Conductor size: 18 AWG minimum. b. Terminate shield drain conductors to ground only at one end of the cable. 17. High precision 250 ohm resistors with 0.25 % accuracy shall be used where 4 - 20 mA DC analog signals are converted to 1 - 5 VDC signals. a. Resistors located at terminal strips. b. Resistors terminated using individual terminal blocks and with no other conductors. c. Resistor leads shall be un-insulated and of sufficient length to allow test or calibration equipment (e.g., HART communicator, loop calibrator) to be properly attached to the circuit with clamped test leads. 18. Analog signals for devices in separate enclosures shall not be wired in series. a. Loop isolators shall be used where analog signals are transmitted between control enclosures. 19. Wire and cable identification: a. Wire and cables numbered and tagged at each termination. b. Wire tags: 1) See Section 10 14 00 - Identification Devices. E. Grounding Requirements: 1. Equipment grounding conductors shall be separated from incoming power conductors at the point of entry. 2. Minimize grounding conductor length within the enclosure by locating the ground reference point as close as practical to the incoming power point of entry. 3. Bond electrical racks, chassis and machine elements to a central ground bus. a. Nonconductive materials, such as paint, shall be removed from the area where the equipment contacts the enclosure. 4. Bond the enclosure to the ground bus. Bonded connections shall be free of paint and debris. 5. It is imperative that good electrical connections are made at the point between the ground bus and enclosure. 6. Panel-mounted devices shall be bonded to the panel enclosure or the panel grounding system by means of locknuts or pressure mounting methods. 7. Sub-panels and doors shall be bonded to ground. 8. Associated apparatus (connected to intrinsically safe circuits) and associated cable shields: a. Ground in accordance with the associated control drawing (drawing provided for the intrinsically safe circuit and which contains manufacturer’s entity parameters). F. Termination Requirements: 1. Wiring to circuits external to the panel connected to interposing terminal blocks. 2. Terminal blocks rigidly mounted on DIN rail mounting channels. 3. Electrical connections to terminal blocks shall be terminated with a proper torque tool as per manufacturer terminal block instructions. Terminating conductors without a torque tool can result in improper and unsafe installation. 4. Terminal strips located to provide adequate space for entrance and termination of the field conductors. 5. One side of each strip of terminal blocks reserved exclusively for the termination of field conductors. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents CONTROL SYSTEM EQUIPMENT PANELS AND RACKS 40 67 00 - 10 6. Terminal block markings: a. Marking shall be the same as associated wire marking. b. Legible, machine-printed markings. c. Markings as identified in the shop drawings. d. Terminal block markings shall follow a consecutive numbering sequence. Terminal block numbers with a random numbering sequence are not acceptable. 7. Terminal block mechanical characteristics, and electrical characteristics shall be in accordance with NEMA ICS 4. 8. Terminal blocks with continuous marking strips. a. Each terminal block shall be identified with machine printed labels. 9. Terminals shall facilitate wire sizes as follows: a. 120 VAC applications: Conductor size 12 AWG minimum. b. Other: Conductor size 14 AWG minimum. 10. Analog signal cable shield drain conductors shall be individually terminated. 11. Install minimum of 20 % spare terminals. 12. Fused terminal blocks shall be used in the following circuits: a. Control voltage is used to energize a solenoid valve. b. DC power is connected to 2-wire, loop-powered instruments. 13. Fused terminal blocks shall be provided with blown fuse indicators. 14. When control circuits require more than one field conductor connected to a single wiring point, a sufficient number of terminal points shall be connected internally to allow termination of only one field conductor per terminal block. 15. DIN rail mounting channels shall be installed along full length of the terminal strip areas to facilitate future expansion. 16. Connections to devices with screw type terminals shall be made using spade-tongue, insulated, compression terminators. 17. Intrinsically safe circuit termination: a. Provide at least 0.25 inches (6 mm) clearance between two terminals for connection of field wiring of different intrinsically safe circuits, unless this clearance is permitted to be reduced by the control drawing this is provided for the intrinsically safe circuit and which contains manufacturer’s entity parameters. b. Identify intrinsically safe circuits at terminal and junction locations in a manner that is intended to prevent unintentional interference with the circuits during testing and servicing as required by NEC, Article 504. c. Terminal blocks used for intrinsically safe wires shall be blue. G. Component Mounting and Placement: 1. Components shall be installed per manufacturer instructions. 2. Mount and wire so removal or replacement may be accomplished without interruption of service to adjacent devices. 3. Locate all devices mounted inside enclosures so terminals and adjustment devices are readily accessible without use of special tools and with terminal markings clearly visible. 4. Control relays and other control auxiliaries shall be mounted on DIN rail mounting channels where practical. 5. Front panel devices shall be mounted within a range of 40 to 70 inches above the finished floor, unless otherwise shown in the Contract Documents. 6. PLC/RTU and I/O rack installation: a. Located such that the LED indicators and switches are readily visible with the panel door open. b. Located such that repair and/or replacement of component can be accomplished without the need to remove wire terminations or other installed components. 7. Locate power supplies with sufficient spacing for circulation of air. 8. Where components such as magnetic starters, contactors, relays, and other electromagnetic devices are installed within the same enclosure as the PLC/RTU system components, provide a barrier of at least 6 inches of separation between the “power area containing the electromagnetic devices” and the “control area”. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents CONTROL SYSTEM EQUIPMENT PANELS AND RACKS 40 67 00 - 11 9. Components mounted in the panel interior shall be fastened to an interior sub-panel using machine screws. a. Fastening devices shall not project through the outer surface of the panel enclosure. 10. Excess mounting space of at least 20 % for component types listed below to facilitate future expansion: a. Fuse holders. b. Circuit breakers. c. Control relays. d. Time delay relays. e. Intrinsically safe barriers and relays. 11. Components installed on sub-panels shall be provides with a minimum spacing between component and wire duct of 1 inch. a. Minimum of 2 inches separation between terminal strips and wire ducts. 12. Pneumatic tubes and appurtenances: a. Connect panel air piping and tubing penetrations with bulkhead fittings. b. Pneumatic control tubing shall be 1/4 inches OD. 1) Tubing material: Either soft annealed ASTM B75 copper or flame-resistant polyethylene. c. Main headers within panels shall be minimum 1 inch. d. Compression-type pressure fittings. e. Equip panel instrument leads with ball type isolation valve. f. Route tubing neatly and mount securely. g. Do not route tubing in front of or in wire ducting. h. Code terminal plates. i. Pneumatic devices shall be served by a dual function filter regulator. H. Power Distribution: 1. Control panels powered by voltage greater than 120 VAC (nominal) main incoming power shall be provided with a disconnect switch mounted within the enclosure. a. Disconnect switch shall be interlocked with the enclosure door(s). b. Disconnect switches that supply motor loads shall comply with NEC Code part IX of article 430. 2. Main incoming power circuits shall be protected with a thermal magnetic circuit breaker. a. Limit load to maximum of 80 % of circuit breaker rating. 3. Component types listed below shall be individually fused so that they may be individually de-energized for maintenance: a. PLC/RTU power supply modules. b. Single-loop controllers. c. Operator interface terminals/HMI. d. DC power supplies. e. Alarm annunciators. 4. Each control panel with PLC/RTU components shall be furnished with power protection in the form of a double conversion UPS. 5. Equip each panel with necessary power supplies with ratings required for installed equipment and with minimum 25 % spare capacity. 6. Constant voltage transformers, balancing potentiometers, and rectifiers as necessary for specific instrument requirements. 7. Circuit breakers and fuses shall be used to protect equipment powered inside and outside enclosure a. Circuit breakers shall be UL489. b. UL489 circuit breaker shall be finger safe. c. Fuses shall be 1/4 x 1-1/4 inches size. I. Internal Panel Lighting and Service Receptacles: 1. Panels less than or equal to 4 feet wide: a. One electrical GFCI duplex receptacle. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents CONTROL SYSTEM EQUIPMENT PANELS AND RACKS 40 67 00 - 12 b. One LED light fixture with manual switch(es). 2. Panels or panel faces greater than 4 feet wide: a. One duplex electrical GFCI receptacle per 6 feet of length. b. Continuous LED lighting strip with manual switches. J. Security Controls: 1. Provide all control panels and enclosures with door switch monitored by discrete input utilizing normally closed contacts. K. Environmental Controls: 1. Indoor panels located in a designated electrical room or control room: a. Thermostat controlled cooling fans with exhaust louvers if required to maintain temperature inside panel(s) below the maximum operating temperature rating of the internal components. b. Internal corrosion inhibitors. 2. Indoor panels not located within a designated electrical room or control room: a. Thermostat controlled heaters to maintain temperature approximately 10 degrees F above ambient for condensation prevention inside the panels. b. Automatically controlled, closed-loop heat exchangers or closed-loop air conditioners where required to maintain temperature inside each enclosure below the maximum operating temperature rating of the components inside the panel(s). c. Internal corrosion inhibitors. 3. Outdoor panels: a. Outdoor temperature range of 0 degrees F through 120 degrees F. b. Thermostat controlled heaters to maintain temperature approximately 10 degrees F above ambient dew point for condensation prevention inside the panels. c. Thermostat controlled closed-loop heat exchangers or closed-loop air conditioners if required to maintain temperature inside each enclosure below the maximum operating temperature rating of the components inside the panel. d. Internal corrosion inhibitors. 4. Environmental control components: a. Panel heaters: 1) Thermostat controlled. 2) Fan driven. 3) Components mounted in an anodized aluminum housing. 4) Designed for sub-panel mounting. 5) Powered from 120 VAC and protected with a dedicated circuit breaker. b. Cooling fans and exhaust packages: 1) Cooling fan with louver or grill and replaceable filter. 2) Designed to be mounted within a panel cutout to provide positive airflow through the panel. 3) Cooling fan and exhaust louvers shall be designed and listed to maintain a NEMA 12 enclosure rating. 4) Fitted with replaceable, high-density foam or synthetic fiber. 5) Cooling fan controlled with a separately mounted thermostat with bi-metal sensor and adjustable dial for temperature setting. 6) Powered from 120 VAC and protected with a dedicated circuit breaker. c. Heat exchangers and air conditioners: 1) Dual-loop design to isolate panel interior air from exterior air. 2) Thermostat controlled. 3) Operate from 120 VAC and protected with a dedicated circuit breaker. d. Internal corrosion inhibitors: 1) Contains chemical which vaporizes and condenses on surfaces in the enclosure. 2) Inhibitor shall be applied in accordance with manufacturer instructions for the enclosure volume. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents CONTROL SYSTEM EQUIPMENT PANELS AND RACKS 40 67 00 - 13 3) Inhibitor shall be applied in the panel(s) prior to shipment from the Contractor’s factory. 2.4 UNWITNESSED FACTORY TESTING A. Inspect and test entire panel assembly to verify readiness for shipment or readiness for the Engineer and/or Owner to attend factory testing if specified in Section 40 61 21 - Process Control System Testing. B. Location: Panel fabricator’s factory. C. Tests shall be fully documented and signed by the panel fabricator’s factory supervisor. D. The panel shop shall fully test the control panel for correct wiring. 1. Each I/O point shall be checked by measuring or connecting circuits at the field terminal blocks. E. Burn-in test: Panel(s) shall be fully energized for a minimum period of 48 hours. F. A PLC Central Processing Unit (CPU) shall be obtained and connected to the panel(s) if necessary for testing purposes. G. Testing equipment (such as digital multi-meters, analog loop calibrators, and laptop computers with PLC programming software) shall be used as required for testing. H. The following functions shall be tested as a minimum: 1. Verify functions of the panel(s) required by the Contract Documents. 2. Correctness of wiring from all panel field terminals to all I/O points and to all panel components. 3. Simulate and test each discrete signal at the field terminal strips. 4. Simulate and test each analog signal using loop calibrators. 5. Correct operation of communications between PLC system Central Processing Units (CPUs) and Remote I/O bases. 6. Correct operation of single-loop controllers (including digital communication to microprocessor based devices). 7. Correct operation of all digital communication devices. 8. Verify online and offline diagnostic tests and procedures. I. Deficiencies shall be corrected prior to requesting the Engineer and/or Owner to attend factory testing if specified, or prior to shipment from the Contractor’s factory. 2.5 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform Factory Acceptance Testing as specified in Section 40 61 21 - Process Control System Testing. 2.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Extra Materials: 1. Quantity of 25 % replacement lamps for each type installed (minimum of 12 of each type). 2. Minimum 12 replacement filters for each type installed. 3. 1 QT of exterior finish touch-up paint. 4. One complete set of replacement corrosion inhibitors in sealed packages for each panel. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install freestanding panels on 4 inches high concrete housekeeping pads. B. Anchor panels in a manner to prevent the enclosure from racking, which may cause the access doors to become misaligned. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents CONTROL SYSTEM EQUIPMENT PANELS AND RACKS 40 67 00 - 14 C. Obtain approved panel layouts prior to installation of conduits. D. Install products in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. END OF SECTION Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY 40 67 63 - 1 SECTION 40 67 63 UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Uninterruptible Power Supplies (UPS). B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Section 40 61 13 - Process Control Systems General Requirements. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Referenced Standards: 1. Federal Communications Commission (FCC): a. Code of Federal Regulations, 47 CFR 15, Radio Frequency Devices. 2. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): a. 1778, Standard for Uninterruptible Power Supply Equipment. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. See Specification Section 40 61 13 for general process control system submittal requirements. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Provide load calculations and manufacturer’s runtime chart to substantiate UPS sizing. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the manufacturers listed in the applicable Articles below are acceptable. B. Provide similar components from the same manufacturer for uniformity of appearance, operations, and maintenance. 2.2 UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLIES (UPS) A. Manufacturers: 1. APC Smart-UPS. 2. Eaton 9PX. 3. Liebert GXT5. B. Design and fabrication: 1. Double conversion, true online type. 2. Waveform: Pure sine wave. 3. Power factor correction. 4. Minimum 15 minutes power ride through of 100% of connected load without incoming power. a. Provide extended battery or batteries as necessary to achieve the specified battery run time. 5. For UPS and related components located within a server rack, install UPS and battery components at bottom of cabinet. 6. Frequency range: 45-65 Hz. 7. Input protection: a. Fuse or circuit breaker. 8. Output voltage regulation: Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY 40 67 63 - 2 a. ±1% online. b. ±2% on battery mode. 9. Battery: Sealed, lead-acid; maintenance free. 10. Three stage battery charging for prolonged battery life. 11. Battery over discharge protection. 12. Input power cord. 13. Output receptacles. 14. Efficiency: a. Normal mode, minimum: 89%. b. Efficiency mode, minimum: 95%. c. Battery mode, minimum: 83%. 15. Operating temperature: 32 to 104 degrees F. 16. Relative humidity: 5-95% non-condensing. 17. Integral bypass to automatically bypass UPS on selected fault conditions. 18. Front panel indication of UPS status and alarm conditions. a. UPS Fault. b. UPS on battery. c. UPS is online and operating normally. d. Battery low. e. UPS in bypass. 19. Utilize alarm contacts or Ethernet communication module to enable remote annunciation of the following conditions. a. UPS Fault. b. UPS on battery. c. Low battery. d. UPS in bypass. 20. Accessories: a. Communications Modules 1) Provide an Ethernet communications module for network connectivity. 21. Agency Approvals: a. Safety: UL 1778. b. Emissions: FCC Part 15 (Class A). PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Test UPS to verify the UPS switches power upon incoming AC power loss correctly while keeping all UPS powered loads online. B. Perform testing of the UPS to determine if each UPS is sized correctly to maintain the specified run time. END OF SECTION Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents FLOW INSTRUMENTATION 40 71 00 - 1 SECTION 40 71 00 FLOW INSTRUMENTATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Flow Transmitters: a. Magnetic Flow Meters (Inline). B. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Section 40 61 13 - Process Control System General Requirements. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Referenced Standards: 1. American Gas Association (AGA): a. Gas Measurement Committee Report #3. 2. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME): a. A126, Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges, and Pipe Fittings. b. A240, Standard Specification for Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General Applications. c. B16.5, Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings. d. B626, Standard Specification for Welded Nickel and Nickel-Cobalt Alloy Tube. e. PTC 19.5, Application of Fluid Meters, Part 2. 3. ASTM International (ASTM): a. A126, Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges, and Pipe Fittings. 4. American Water Works Association (AWWA). 5. National Sanitation Foundation (NSF). 6. US Department of Interior Bureau of Reclamation (USDIBR): a. Water Measurement Manual. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. See Specification Section 40 61 13 for general process control system submittal requirements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the manufacturers listed in the Articles describing the elements are acceptable. 2.2 FLOW TRANSMITTERS A. Magnetic Flow Meters (Inline): 1. Manufacturers: a. Endress + Hauser (ProMag). b. Krohne (OPTIFLUX). c. Rosemount (8700 Series). 2. Design and fabrication: a. Utilize characterized field principle of electromagnetic induction to produce signal directly proportional to flow rate. b. High input impedance pre-amplifiers. 1) Minimum impedance: 1010 ohms. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents FLOW INSTRUMENTATION 40 71 00 - 2 c. Provide flanged end connections per ASME B16.5 up to 24 inches rated for piping system operating and test conditions. Meter body shall be rated to same pressure as the flanges. d. Grounding requirements: 1) Nonmetallic or lined pipe: a) Inlet and outlet grounding rings of same material as electrode or as recommended by manufacturer to meet process requirements. 2) Conductive piping: a) Conductive path between the meter and the piping flanges. e. Provide cable between magnetic flow meter and transmitter. 1) Cable shall be potted and fitted by manufacturer at the factory. f. Pulsed DC magnetic field excitation. g. Automatic zero. h. Adjustable low flow cutoff. i. Minimum signal lock (empty tube zero) to prevent false measurement when tube is empty. j. Inaccuracy: ±0.4% of rate. k. 4-20 mA DC isolated output into maximum 800 ohms. l. Power supply: 117 V ±10%, 60 Hz. m. Indication of flow rate and totalized flow at transmitter. n. Meter operable as specified in liquids with 5.0 micro mho/cm or more conductivity. o. Transmitter electronics shall use microprocessor based architecture and be configured using parameters. 3. Schedule: TAG NUMBER SERVICE FLOW RANGE (GPM) METER SIZE (IN) TRANSMITTER MOUNTING FE/FIT-01 RAW SEWAGE (FORCE MAIN) 0 – 2,265 GPM 8 IN INTREGRAL PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.2 TRAINING A. Provide on-site training in accordance with Specification Section 01 75 00. END OF SECTION Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents LEVEL INSTRUMENTATION 40 72 00 - 1 SECTION 40 72 00 LEVEL INSTRUMENTATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Level Transmitters: a. Submersible Level Sensor and Transmitter. 2. Level Switches: a. Float-Tilt Type Level Switch. A. The instruments specified in this Specification Section are the primary element components for the control loops which are shown on the Control System Drawings. 1. These instruments are integrated with other control system components specified under Specification Section 40 61 13 to produce the functional control system defined in the Contract Documents B. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Section 40 61 13 - Process Control System General Requirements. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Referenced Standards: 1. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME): a. B16.5, Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings. 2. ASTM International (ASTM): a. A106, Standard Specification for Seamless Carbon Steel Pipe for High Temperature Service. b. A743, Standard Specification for Castings, Iron-Chromium, Iron-Chromium-Nickel, Corrosion Resistant, for General Application 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. See Specification Section 40 61 13 for general process control system submittal requirements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the manufacturers listed in the Articles describing the elements are acceptable. 2.2 LEVEL TRANSMITTERS A. Submersible Level Sensor and Transmitter: 1. Manufacturers: a. Endress + Hauser (Waterpilot FMX21). b. Druck (Series 1830/1840). c. In-Situ (PXD-261/461). 2. Specifications: a. General: 1) Measurement Principle: Differential-pressure (hydrostatic) based on the height of the liquid head with the use an integrated strain gauge or Ceramic Capacitive Sensor (CCS). a) Open (to atmosphere) or Closed Tanks. b) Fully submersible. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents LEVEL INSTRUMENTATION 40 72 00 - 2 c) Vented cable. 2) Minimum/Maximum Span: 1 to 100 psiG (2.31 to 230.67 feet). 3) Accuracy: ±0.25% of span. b. Process Connection: 1) None: Mount vertically at the bottom of tank. 2) Option: 1/4 inches NPT connection on tank. c. Display and Configuration: 1) Output variables: Pressure (converted to level). 2) Output Units: psi. d. Electrical: 1) Signal Power: Loop-powered, 2-wire, 24 VDC. 2) Current Output: Analog 4-20 Ma into a 600 ohm loop. 3) Cable entry: 1/4 inches NPT connection to attached jacketed cable. e. Materials of Construction: 1) Probe: 316SS, Viton, Titanium. 2) Cable: Hytrel, FEP, HDPE f. Environment: 1) Ambient Temperature: -40 to 212 degrees F (-40 to 1000 degrees C). 2) Humidity: Up to 100%, non-condensing. 3) Process Temperature: -4 to 104 degrees F (-20 to 60 degrees C). 4) Process Pressure: 0 to 35 psiG. 3. Schedule (or Instrument List): TAG NUMBER SERVICE RANGE AREA CLASSIFICATION LE/LIT-101 WET WELL LEVEL 0 – 25 FEET CLASS 1, DIV. 1 LE/LIT-102 WET WELL LEVEL 0 – 25 FEET CLASS 1, DIV. 1 2.3 LEVEL SWITCHES A. Float-Tilt Type Level Switch: 1. Manufacturers: a. Anchor Scientific Inc. b. Consolidated Electric. c. Contegra. 2. Materials: a. Float material: Polypropylene or Teflon coated type 316 stainless steel. b. Cable jacket: PVC, neoprene. c. Cable clamp: Polypropylene or 316 stainless steel. 3. Design and fabrication: a. Mercury-free switch. b. Provide switch complete with flexible electrical cables. c. DPST contact rated at 1 amp at 120 VAC. d. Direct acting float switch: 1) Switch actuates on rising level. 2) Switch deactuates when liquid falls 1 inch below actuation level. e. Terminate cables in junction box. f. Process temperature: max. 120 degrees F. g. Install floats per drawing details. 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Furnish all mounting brackets, hardware and appurtenances required for mounting primary elements and transmitters. 1. Materials, unless otherwise specified, shall be as follows: a. Bolts, nuts, washers, expansion anchors: 316 stainless steel. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents LEVEL INSTRUMENTATION 40 72 00 - 3 b. Mounting brackets: 1) Standard: 316 stainless steel. 2) Highly corrosive areas: Aluminum. c. Mounting plates, angles: 1) Standard: Carbon steel. 2) Corrosive areas: Aluminum. d. Instrument pipe stands: 1) Standard: Hot-dip galvanized 2 inches schedule 40, ASTM A106, Grade B carbon steel. 2) Corrosive areas: Aluminum. B. Provide handheld communicator compatible for all intelligent transmitters furnished. 1. Hand held communicator shall provide capability to check calibration, change transmitter range, and provide diagnostics. 2. If these features are provided with the intelligent transmitter that is accessible, the hand held communicator is not required. C. Cable lengths between sensors and transmitters shall be continuous (without splices) and as required to accommodate locations as shown on Drawings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install instrument mounting pipe stands level and plumb. C. Instrument Valves: 1. Orient stems for proper operation. 2. Install arrays orderly and neat in appearance with true horizontal and vertical lines. 3. Provide a minimum of 2 inches clearance between valve handle turning radii where there are multiple valve handles appearing in a straight line. 4. Valves shall have bonnets and any soft seals removed during welding or soldering into the line. a. When cool, reassemble the valves. 5. Support each valve individually. a. The tubing system does not qualify as support for the valve. D. Locate instrument piping and tubing so as to be free of vibration and interference with other piping, conduit, or equipment. E. Keep foreign matter out of the system. F. Remove all oil on piping and tubing with solvent before piping and tubing installation. G. Plug all open ends and connections to keep out contaminants. H. Threaded Connection Seals: 1. Use Tite-Seal or acceptable alternate. 2. Use of lead base pipe dope or Teflon tape is not acceptable. 3. Do not apply Tite-Seal to tubing threads of compression fittings. I. Instrument Mounting: 1. Mount all instruments where they will be accessible from fixed ladders, platforms, or grade. 2. Mount all local indicating instruments with face forward toward the normal operating area, within reading distance, and in the line of sight. 3. Mount instruments level, plumb, and support rigidly. 4. Mount to provide: a. Protect from heat, shock, and vibrations. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents LEVEL INSTRUMENTATION 40 72 00 - 4 b. Provide accessibility for maintenance. c. Free from interference with piping, conduit and equipment. 3.2 TRAINING A. Provide on-site training in accordance with Specification Section 01 75 00. END OF SECTION Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents PRESSURE INSTRUMENTATION 40 73 00 - 1 SECTION 40 73 00 PRESSURE INSTRUMENTATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Pressure Transmitters. a. Pressure Transmitters (Gauge). 2. Pressure Switches. a. Electro-Mechanical. b. Solid-state / Electronic. 3. Pressure Indicators. a. Pressure Gauges – Mechanical. b. Pressure Gauges – Digital. 4. Isolation Devices. a. Diaphragm Seals. b. In-Line Isolation Sleeve (Annular Seal). B. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Section 40 61 13 - Process Control Systems General Requirements. 1.2 REFERENCES A. eferenced Standards: 1. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME): a. B16.5, Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings 2. ASTM International (ASTM): a. A106/A106M, Standard Specification for Seamless Carbon Steel Pipe for High- Temperature Service. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. See Specification Section 40 61 13 for general process control system submittal requirements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the manufacturers listed in the Articles describing the elements are acceptable. 2.2 PRESSURE TRANSMITTERS A. Pressure Transmitters (Gauge): 1. Manufacturers: a. Emerson Rosemount (3051). b. Endress + Hauser (Cerabar S). c. Honeywell (ST 3000 Series 100). d. Schneider Electric / Foxboro (IGP/IAP). e. Siemens (SISTRANS P500). 2. Materials: a. Process flanges and adapters: 316 stainless steel. b. Vent/drain valve: 316 stainless steel c. Isolating diaphragm: 316 stainless steel. d. Housing: Aluminum. e. Fill fluid: Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents PRESSURE INSTRUMENTATION 40 73 00 - 2 1) Utilize halocarbon fill for process applications involving strong oxidizing agents. a) Agents include but are not limited to: Cl2, KMN04, FeCl, Na0H, and Na0Cl. 2) Utilize manufacturer's standard fill for other applications. a) Ensure fill is suitable for application temperatures. 3. Design and fabrication: a. Smart transmitters utilizing microprocessor based electronics. b. Signal Output: 4-20 mA DC proportional to pressure. c. Nonvolatile EEPROM memory. d. Power supply: 24 VDC Loop Power. e. Adjustable zero and span. f. Temperature limits: 1) -20 to 180 degrees F (without digital display). 2) -4 to 175 degrees F (with digital display). g. Overpressure limits: Withstand 150% of stated maximum service pressure without damage. h. Humidity limits: 0 to 100% relative humidity. i. Damping: Adjustable between 0 and 60 seconds. j. Accuracy (includes effects of linearity, repeatability and hysteresis): ±0.10% of calibrated span for 15:1 rangeability. k. Stability: ±0.2% of upper range limit for 12 months. l. Temperature effect: 1) Total effect including span and zero errors: + 0.2% of upper range limit per 100 DEGF for minimum 15:1 rangeability. m. Minimum 1/2 inches pressure connection. n. Equip with test jacks or accessible terminals for testing output. o. Equip with isolation valve and test connections with isolation valves and/or plugs. 2.3 PRESSURE SWITCHES A. Electro-Mechanical: 1. Manufacturers: a. Allen-Bradley (Model 836). b. Emerson / ASCO (S Series). c. Mercoid (Series DA/DS or SA1100). 2. Materials: a. Wetted switch elements: 316 stainless steel. b. Diaphragm seal housing: 316 stainless steel. c. Pressure snubber: 1) Filter disc: 316 stainless steel. 2) Housing: 316 stainless steel. 3. Accessories: a. Provide ball valve to isolate pressure switch from source. b. Utilize pressure snubber with porous metal discs to provide pulsation dampening on pressure switch as shown on schedule. 4. Design and fabrication: a. Utilize “Snap Action” type contact switches. b. No external power needed. c. One SPDT contact rated: 1) 0.5 amps inductive at 125 VDC. 2) 5 amps inductive at 120 VAC. d. Switch set points: 1) Above 1,000 psi: a) Between 30 and 35% of switch rated working range. b) Operating pressure range not to exceed 35% of switch rated working pressure. 2) Below 1,000 psi: a) Set points between 30 and 70% of switch rated working range. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents PRESSURE INSTRUMENTATION 40 73 00 - 3 b) Operating pressure not to exceed 75% of switch rated working range. e. Accuracy: ±1% of full scale. f. Process connection: Minimum of 1/4 inches. g. Conduit connection: Minimum of 1/2 inches. B. Solid State / Electronic. 1. Manufacturers: a. Allen-Bradley (836P). b. Ashcroft (N Series). c. Endress + Hauser (Ceraphant T). d. GEMS (3600 Series or PS98). 2. Materials: a. Wetted switch elements: 316 stainless steel. b. Diaphragm seal housing: 316 stainless steel. c. Pressure snubber: 1) Filter disc: 316 stainless steel. 2) Housing: 316 stainless steel. 3. Accessories: a. Provide ball valve to isolate pressure switch from source. b. Utilize pressure snubber with porous metal discs to provide pulsation dampening on pressure switch as shown on schedule. 4. Design and fabrication: a. No moving parts; fully hermetically sealed. b. 12 VDC or 24 VDC powered. c. Relay or Transistor outputs. d. Switch set points: Adjustable setpoints and deadbands. e. Accuracy: ±0.5% of full scale. f. Process connection: Minimum of 1/4 inches. 2.4 PRESSURE INDICATORS A. Pressure Gauge - Mechanical: 1. Manufacturers: a. Ametek / USGauge (Solfrunt Model 1980). b. Ashcroft (Type 1279 or 1379). 2. Materials: a. Bourdon tube, socket, connecting tube: 316 stainless steel. b. Case: Phenolic. c. Pressure snubber: 1) Filter disc: 316 stainless steel. 2) Housing: 316 stainless steel. 3. Accessories: a. Provide valve at point of connection to equipment and at panel if panel mounted. b. Utilize pressure snubber with porous metal discs to provide pulsation dampening on gauge applications as shown on schedule. c. Provide 1/2 inches stainless steel anti-siphon pigtail inlet connection for hot water and steam applications. 4. Design and fabrication: a. All components suitable for service at: 1) 250 degrees F. 2) The maximum process temperature to which the gauge is to be exposed. b. Provide viewer protection from element rupture. c. Calibrate gauges at jobsite for pressure and temperature in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. d. Unless otherwise required by codes, provide stem mounted or flush mounted, as required, with dial diameter as follows: Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents PRESSURE INSTRUMENTATION 40 73 00 - 4 PIPE SIZE DIAL SIZE GAUGE CONNECTION 1-1/2 inches or less 2-1/2 inches 1/4 inches Larger than 1-1/2 inches 4-1/2 inches 1/2 inches e. Equip with white faces, black numerals and black pointers. f. Gauge tapping position to be clear of equipment functions and movements, and protected from maintenance and operation of equipment. 1) Gauge to be readable from an accessible standing position. g. Gauge accuracy: 1% of full range. h. Select gauge range so that: 1) The normal operating value is in the middle third of the dial. 2) Maximum operating pressure does not exceed 75% of the full scale range. 5. Schedule (or Instrument List): TAG NUMBER SERVICE RANGE ANNULAR SEAL REQUIRED PE/PIT-101 RAW SEWAGE (FORCE MAIN) 0 – 100 PSI YES B. Pressure Gauge - Digital: 1. Manufacturers: a. APG (Series PG10). b. Ashcroft (Types 2074, 2174, and 2274). c. Omega (DPG9000 Series). 2. Specifications: a. Digital pressure display with Bar graph and Backlighting. b. Case Material: Stainless steel. c. Enclosure Rating: IP65, Weatherproof. d. Wetted materials: 17-4 SS, or 316SS. e. Socket size: 1/4 inches NPT. f. Operating Temperature: 14 – 140 degrees F. g. Accuracy: ±0.25% of full scale. h. Power source: 24 VDC loop power. i. Battery Life: >2000 hours. j. Menu driven configuration. 2.5 ISOLATION DEVICES A. Diaphragm Seal: 1. Manufacturers: a. Ametek. b. Ashcroft. c. Emerson Rosemount. 2. Materials: a. Lower housing: 316 stainless steel. b. Diaphragm material: 316 stainless steel. 3. Design and fabrication: a. Isolates instrument from process fluids which are corrosive or contain solids. b. Upper housing with bleed screw. c. Lower housing with flushing connection. d. Fill fluid: 1) Utilize halocarbon fill for process applications involving strong oxidizing agents. a) Agents include but are not limited to: Cl2, KMNO4, FeCl, NaOH, and NaOCl. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents PRESSURE INSTRUMENTATION 40 73 00 - 5 2) Utilize manufacturer's standard fill for other applications. a) Ensure fill is suitable for application temperatures. e. Process connections: 1) Instrument: 1/2 inches NPT. 2) Process: 0.5 inches female NPT. 3) PVC pipe applications: Use a socket weld connection. 4. Installed where specified or shown on Drawings. B. In-Line Isolation Sleeve (Annular Seal) for non-Sludge or Scum applications: 1. Manufacturers: a. Ametek. b. Red Valve. 2. Materials: a. Body: 316 stainless steel. b. Flanges: 316 stainless steel. c. Flexible liner: Buna-N. 3. Design and fabrication: a. Provide full 360 degree annular pressure sensor with flexible in-line sleeve. b. Sensor shall not restrict the process flow (non-intrusive). c. Seal shall have ANSI Class 150 flanges. 1) Line size as shown on the Drawings. d. Instrument connection: 0.25 inches female NPT. e. Fill fluid: 1) Utilize halocarbon fill for process applications involving strong oxidizing agents. a) Agents include but are not limited to: Cl2, KMNO4, FeCl, NaOH, and NaOCl. 2) Utilize manufacturer's standard fill for other applications. a) Ensure fill is suitable for application temperatures. f. Pressure rating: To meet requirements of schedule. C. Sludge or Scum Service Instrument Isolators: 1. Manufacturers: a. Ashcroft, Inc. (Model 106). b. Or equal. 2. Materials: a. Diaphragm: 316 stainless steel. b. Lower Housing: 316 stainless steel. 3. Design and fabrication: a. Isolates instruments from process fluids which are corrosive or contain solids. b. Upper housing with bleed screw. c. Lower housing with flushing connection. d. Fill fluid: 1) Utilize halocarbon fill for process applications involving strong oxidizing agents. a) Agents include but are not limited to: Cl2, KMNO4, FeCl, NaOH, and NaOCl. 2) Utilize manufacturer's standard fill for other applications. a) Ensure fill is suitable for application temperatures. e. Process connections: 1) 0.5 inches female NPT. 2) Process: In-lined flanged, match line size 2.6 ACCESSORIES A. Furnish all mounting brackets, hardware and appurtenances required for mounting primary elements and transmitters. 1. Materials, unless otherwise specified, shall be as follows: a. Bolts, nuts, washers, expansion anchors: 316 stainless steel. b. Mounting brackets: Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents PRESSURE INSTRUMENTATION 40 73 00 - 6 1) Standard: 316 stainless steel. 2) Highly corrosive areas: Aluminum. c. Mounting plates, angles: 1) Standard: Carbon steel. 2) Corrosive areas: 316 stainless steel. d. Instrument pipe stands: 1) Standard: Hot-dip galvanized 2 inches schedule 40, ASTM A106, Grade B carbon steel. 2) Corrosive areas: 316 stainless steel. B. Tubing Support Angles and Brackets: 1. Any of the following materials are acceptable: a. Aluminum support with dielectric material between support and tubing. b. Type 316 stainless steel. c. Fiberglass. C. Cable lengths between sensors and transmitters shall be continuous (without splices) and as required to accommodate locations as shown on Drawings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install instrument mounting pipe stands level and plumb. C. Instrument Valves: 1. Orient stems for proper operation. 2. Install arrays orderly and neat in appearance with true horizontal and vertical lines. 3. Provide a minimum of 2 inches clearance between valve handle turning radii where there are multiple valve handles appearing in a straight line. 4. Valves shall have bonnets and any soft seals removed during welding or soldering into the line. a. When cool, reassemble the valves. 5. Support each valve individually. a. The tubing system does not qualify as support for the valve. D. Locate instrument piping and tubing so as to be free of vibration and interference with other piping, conduit, or equipment. E. Keep foreign matter out of the system. F. Remove all oil on piping and tubing with solvent before piping and tubing installation. G. Plug all open ends and connections to keep out contaminants. H. Threaded Connection Seals: 1. Use Tite-Seal or acceptable alternate. 2. Use of lead base pipe dope or Teflon tape is not acceptable. 3. Do not apply Tite-Seal to tubing threads of compression fittings. I. Instrument Mounting: 1. Mount all instruments where they will be accessible from fixed ladders, platforms, or grade. 2. Mount all local indicating instruments with face forward toward the normal operating area, within reading distance, and in the line of sight. 3. Mount instruments level, plumb, and support rigidly. 4. Mount to provide: a. Protection from heat, shock, and vibrations. b. Accessibility for maintenance. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents PRESSURE INSTRUMENTATION 40 73 00 - 7 c. Freedom from interference with piping, conduit and equipment. 3.2 TRAINING A. Provide on-site training in accordance with Specification Section 01 75 00. END OF SECTION Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 This page intentionally left blank. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 DIVI SION 41 MATERIAL PROCESSING AND HANDLING EQUIPMENT Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 This page intentionally left blank. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents HOISTS 41 22 23 - 1 SECTION 41 22 23 HOISTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Davit cranes. B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Section 01 61 03 - Equipment - Basic Requirements. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards: 1. American Bearing Manufacturers Association (ABMA). 2. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME): a. B30.11, Safety Code for Underhung Cranes and Monorail Systems. b. B30.16, Safety Code for Overhead Hoists. 3. ASTM International (ASTM): a. A36, Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel. 4. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): a. 70, National Electrical Code (NEC). B. Comply with ASME B30.11 and ASME B30.16. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Hook Height: The minimum acceptable distance in feet from bottom of hook in full raised position to the nearest floor surface. B. Lift Height: The distance in feet from the bottom of the hook in full raised position to the surface of the lowest floor from which items may be hoisted. C. Ultimate Load-Carrying Capacity: Live load, weights of all equipment and an allowance for impact. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. See Section 01 61 03. 2. Product technical data including: a. Acknowledgement that products submitted meet requirements of standards referenced. 3. Fabrication and/or layout drawings. a. Track layout including supports, splices, connections, switches, and end trucks. 4. Test reports verifying strength of inserts and rail. 5. Load test results. B. Contract Closeout Information: 1. Operation and Maintenance Data: a. See Section 01 78 23 for requirements for the mechanics, administration, and the content of Operation and Maintenance Manual submittals. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents HOISTS 41 22 23 - 2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Davit Cranes: a. Thern. b. OZ Lifting Products. c. Or Approved Equal. 2.2 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Davit Cranes: 1. The davit crane and flush-mounted bases shall have a rated load capacity for total pump weight (P-01, P-02, and P-03) plus motor/cable weight (Contractor to confirm total motor/cable weight prior to ordering davit crane). 2. Crane boom, mast and base fabricated from heavy duty welded constructed structural steel pipe and tubing that meets ASTM standards. 3. Portable davit that allows 360° crane rotation under load with telescoping and adjustable boom angles. 4. Davit base: a. Flush-mounted base with base and mast caps with lanyard for weather/debris protection. b. Crane base shall allow for removal of the mast. c. Bearings: crane base shall have a Nylatron GSM bearing sleeve to support the mast at the top of the base. 5. Design factor: greater than 3:1 for all components including the lifting winch and base. 6. Boom Angle: boom angle shall be adjustable with a hand operated screw jack acting to raise or lower the boom between horizontal and 45 DEG from vertical. 7. Boom Sheave: wire rope shall pass over a sheave at the end of the boom. 8. Lifting Winch: spur-geared winch shall have machine cut gears, an adjustable handle that mounts securely to the drive shaft, bronze bearings, and a positive load holding Weston style brake able to stop and hold the load automatically if the winch handle is released. 9. Winch Location: lifting winches shall be located such that the center point of the drive shaft is no more than 18 inches in front of the centerline of the mast. 10. Cable Anchor: lifting winch shall include a quick disconnect feature allowing quick attachment and detachment of wire rope equipped with a swaged ball anchor. 11. Wire Rope: a. Wire rope construction shall be 304 stainless steel cable. b. Latch type hooks shall be used and shall be either non-rotating eye type or swivel type to allow 360-degree rotation under all load conditions. Hooks shall be heat-treated drop forged type 304/316 stainless steel. 12. Material and Finish: a. Crane boom, mast, base, and winch shall be electrostatic powder coated with stainless steel hardware and fasteners. 13. Nametag: a. Davit crane shall be labeled with a non-corrosive metal identification plate labeled or imprinted with the manufacturer’s name, model number, serial number, capacity rating, and other essential information. 14. Davit crane winch shall be manual. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Test davit crane using 110% rated load. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents HOISTS 41 22 23 - 3 B. Employ and pay for services of equipment manufacturer's field service representative(s) to: 1. Inspect equipment covered by this Specification Section. 2. Supervise pre-start-up adjustments, installation checks and all field tests. 3. Conduct initial start-up of equipment and perform operational checks. 4. Provide a written statement that manufacturer's equipment has been installed properly, started up and is ready for operation by Owner's personnel. 3.2 SCHEDULE A. Davit Cranes: 1. Provide at location indicated on Drawings. a. Number of Units: One (1). b. Number of Flush-mounted bases: One (1). END OF SECTION Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 This page intentionally left blank. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 DIVI SION 43 PROCESS GAS AND LIQUID HANDLING, PURIFICATION, AND STORAGE EQUIPMENT Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 This page intentionally left blank. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PROCESS LIQUID PUMPS 43 05 23 - 1 SECTION 43 05 23 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PROCESS LIQUID PUMPS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Pumping equipment. B. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Section 01 61 03 - Common Work Results for Equipment. 2. Section 03 15 19 - Anchorage to Concrete 3. Section 43 25 13 - Pumping Equipment - Submersible End-Suction Sewage Pumps 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards: 1. ANSI/Hydraulic Institute (ANSI/HI): a. 9.6.3, Rotodynamic (Centrifugal and Vertical) Pumps – Guideline for Allowable Operating Region. b. 9.6.4, Rotodynamic Pumps for Vibration Measurements and Allowable Values. c. 9.6.6, Rotodynamic Pumps for Pump Piping. d. 11.6, Rotodynamic Submersible Pump for Hydraulic Performance, Hydrostatic Pressure, Mechanical, and Electrical Acceptance Tests. e. 14.6, Rotodynamic Pumps for Hydraulic Performance Acceptance Tests. B. Coordinate all mechanical seal systems specified to ensure pump and seal compatibility. C. Pump/motor and VFD coordination: See Specification Section 01 61 03. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. The abbreviations used in this section are defined as follows: 1. AOR: Allowable Operating Range. 2. BEP: Best Efficiency Point. 3. IPS: Iron Pipe Size. 4. NPSH3: Net Positive Suction Head for 3% head loss. 5. POR: Preferred Operating Range. 6. TDH: Total Dynamic Head. 7. TEFC: Totally Enclosed Fan Cooled. 8. VFD: Variable Frequency Drive. B. Pump Service Category: Pump or pumps having identical names (not tag numbers) used for specific pumping service. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. See Specification Section 01 61 03. 2. Product technical data including: a. Performance data and curves with flow (GPM), head (FT), horsepower, hydraulic efficiency, rotating speed (RPM), AOR, BEP, POR, NPSH3 requirements, minimum bowl submergence requirements for vertical mixed flow, axial and turbine pumps. b. Pump accessory data. c. Bearing supports, shafting details and lubrication provisions. 1) Bearing life calculations. 2) Critical speed calculations. d. Solids passage information. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PROCESS LIQUID PUMPS 43 05 23 - 2 e. Anchor design information required by Section 03 15 19. 3. Certifications: a. Certified pump performance curves as described in the SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL Article. b. Verification of Primary and Secondary conditions in POR and AOR. 4. Test reports: a. Factory testing results. B. Contract Closeout Information: 1. Operation and Maintenance Data: a. See Specification Section 01 78 23 for requirements for the mechanics, administration, and the content of Operation and Maintenance Manual submittals. C. Informational Submittals: 1. Certifications: a. Provide a written statement that manufacturer's equipment has been installed properly, started up and is ready for operation by Owner's personnel. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Pumps: a. See individual pump Specification Sections. 2. Mechanical seals: a. Chesterton. b. John Crane. c. Garlock. d. Or as noted in the individual pump Specification Sections. 2.2 CENTRIFUGAL PUMP DESIGN A. Provide units with increasing head characteristics from the end run out portion of the curve to: 1. Shut-off condition. 2. For Mixed flow, Axial Flow and Propeller pumps to the right hand edge of the AOR. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. See Specification Section 01 61 03. B. Each Unit: 1. Lifting eye bolts or lugs. 2. Plugged gage cock connection at suction and discharge nozzles. 3. Tapped and plugged openings for casing and bearing housing vents and drains. 4. Fittings for properly adding flushing lubricant. 5. Pressure relief fittings for grease lubrication. C. Packing Seal: 1. Provide packing unless mechanical seal is specified in narrow-scope pump sections. 2. Minimum of five rings graphite impregnated synthetic packing. 3. Provide minimum 1/4 inches diameter supply tap and 1/2 inches diameter minimum drain tap. 4. Provide split Teflon or bronze water seal ring. 5. Adjustable split follower cast iron or bronze gland. D. Mechanical Seals: 1. Provide as specified in the narrow-scope pump sections. 2. Provide rotating balanced O-ring type. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PROCESS LIQUID PUMPS 43 05 23 - 3 3. Provide water lubrication - cooling. a. For submersible pumps utilize oil lubrication as recommended by manufacturer. 4. Materials: a. Metal parts except springs: 316 stainless steel. b. Springs: Hastelloy C. c. Seal faces: Unfilled carbon graphite versus silica-free Grade 99.5 ceramic. d. Elastomers: Viton. 2.4 FABRICATION A. Pump Support: 1. Design base to support weight of drive, shafting and pump. 2. Comply with HI vibration limitations. 3. Mount horizontal pump, motor and coupling on single piece drip lip type machine base. 4. Mount vertical pumps on single piece pedestal machine base. 5. Mount vertical turbine/propeller/can pumps on a rigid machined base plate attached to the discharge elbow. Base plate to be bolted to the pump can or an independent rigid machined sole plate grouted to the concrete substructure with anchor rods and leveled with jackscrews. 6. Fabricate to withstand all operating loads transmitted from the pump and drive. 7. On vertically configured end suction centrifugal pumps when supplied with a fabricated steel mounting frame and suction elbow, the suction elbow shall be a long radius reducing elbow with greater than 50% area reduction to comply with Table 9.6.6.3.2 of ANSI/HI 9.6.6 standard for straight pipe lengths. 2.5 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Verification primary design condition in POR. B. Verification secondary design condition in AOR. C. Factory hydrostatic test all pumps at 150% of shut-off head for a minimum of five minutes. D. If specifically required in the individual pump specification sections, provide factory tests: 1. All units: a. Conduct tests in accordance with HI. 1) Shut-off head and design conditions: Positive unilateral performance tolerances meeting Grade 1U per ANSI/HI 11.6 for Rotodynamic Submersible Pumps. 2. All pumps: a. Head (FT) versus flow (GPM) pump curves: 1) Efficiencies along curve. 2) Brake horsepower along each curve. 3. Submit factory test results. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. See Specification Section 01 61 03. B. Submersible Units: 1. Assemble connecting piping with gaskets in place and minimum of four bolts per joint installed and tightened. a. Test alignment by loosening flange bolts to see if there is any change in relationship of piping flange with equipment connecting flange. b. Realign as necessary, install flange bolts and make equipment connection. 2. Field paint units as defined in Specification Section 09 96 00. 3. Provide discharge pressure gage visible from grade or operating floor. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PROCESS LIQUID PUMPS 43 05 23 - 4 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide services of equipment manufacturer's field service representative(s) to: 1. Inspect equipment covered by this Specification Section. 2. Supervise pre-start adjustments and installation checks. 3. Conduct initial start-up of equipment and perform operational checks. B. If specifically required in the individual pump specification sections, provide field tests to: 1. Statically and dynamically balance each pump per ANSI/HI standards. a. To meet requirements of ANSI/HI 9.6.4 for Rotodynamic Pumps at any point on the pumps and motor. 2. To meet requirements of ANSI/HI 11.6 for Submersible Pumps. END OF SECTION Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents PUMPING EQUIPMENT - SUBMERSIBLE END-SUCTION SEWAGE PUMPS 43 25 13 - 1 SECTION 43 25 13 PUMPING EQUIPMENT - SUBMERSIBLE END-SUCTION SEWAGE PUMPS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Submersible sewage pumps in a wet pit application for pumping of unscreened wastewater. B. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Section 01 61 03 - Common Work Results for Equipment. 2. Section 08 31 00 - Access Doors. 3. Section 09 96 00 - High Performance Industrial Coatings. 4. Section 26 05 00 - Common Work Results for Electrical. 5. Section 26 05 19 - Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables. 6. Section 26 29 23 - Variable Frequency Drives - Low Voltage. 7. Section 26 24 19 - Motor Control Equipment. 8. Section 40 61 13 - Process Control Systems General Requirements. 9. Section 40 63 43 - Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) Control System. 10. Section 40 67 00 - Control Panels And Enclosures. 11. Section 43 05 23 - Common Work Results for Process Liquid Pumps. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards: 1. American Bearing Manufacturers Association (ABMA). 2. American National Standards Institute (ANSI). 3. ASTM International (ASTM): a. A48, Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings. 4. FM Global (FM). 5. Hydraulic Institute (HI): a. Standards for Centrifugal, Rotary and Reciprocating Pumps. 6. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): a. 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum). 7. National Fire Protection Agency (NFPA): a. 70, National Electrical Code (NEC): 1) Article 500, Hazardous (Classified) Locations, Classes I, II, and III, Divisions 1 and 2. 8. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL). a. 62, Flexible Cord and Fixture Wire. 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. The system includes three (3) submersible variable speed sewage pumps, with two (2) pumps operating in parallel (P-01 & P-02) to meet the design condition, and a third redundant pump (P- 03) to meet redundancy requirements. B. Provide single source coordination responsibility through the pump manufacturer for the entire system including but not limited to the following: 1. Pumps. 2. Motors. 3. Pump accessories, including discharge elbow, and a supervision relay for temperature monitoring and leak detection sensors. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents PUMPING EQUIPMENT - SUBMERSIBLE END-SUCTION SEWAGE PUMPS 43 25 13 - 2 1. Requirements in Section 01 61 03. 2. Requirements in Section 43 05 23. B. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: 1. See Section 01 78 23 for requirements for: a. The mechanics and administration of the submittal process. b. The content of Operation and Maintenance Manuals. C. Project Information: 1. Executed Manufacturer's Installation Certification Form. D. Informational Submittals: 1. A list of the pump manufacturer’s provided maintenance materials (spare parts). 1.5 SHIPPING A. Per Section 01 61 03. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Xylem (Flygt NP 3202 HT 3~ 462). 2. Or Approved Equal. 2.2 PERFORMANCE AND DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Submersible Sewage Pumps (P-01, P-02, and P-03): 1. Shutoff Head: 141 FT. 2. Primary Design Condition (100% Speed): a. Flow: 1,140 GPM b. Head: 86.4 FT. c. Minimum Hydraulic Efficiency: 75.8%. d. Maximum NPSH3: 17.1 FT. 3. Secondary Design Condition (70% Speed): a. Flow: 830 GPM b. Head: 41.0 FT. c. Minimum Hydraulic Efficiency: 75.8%. d. Maximum NPSH3: 10.1 FT. 4. Maximum Suction Diameter: 7.8 inches. 5. Minimum Discharge Diameter: 6.0 inches. 6. Pump Rotation: Per Drawings. a. Motor requirements: 1) Maximum Operating Speed: 1770 RPM. 2) Minimum motor efficiency at the Design Condition: 90.7%. 3) Minimum power factor: 0.91. 4) Maximum nameplate horsepower: 45 hp. b. Drive type: Variable speed. 2.3 MATERIALS A. Submersible Sewage Pumps (P-01, P-02 and P-03): 1. Pump case: Cast iron, ASTM A48, Class 35. 2. Motor housing: Cast iron, ASTM A48, Class 25 or Class 30. 3. Impeller: Cast Iron, ASTM A-532 Class III, Type A. 4. Shaft: Stainless Steel, Series 300 or 400. 5. Suction cover: Cast Iron, ASTM A-532 Class III, Type A. 6. O-rings: Nitrile (Buna-N) or fluorocarbon (Viton). Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents PUMPING EQUIPMENT - SUBMERSIBLE END-SUCTION SEWAGE PUMPS 43 25 13 - 3 7. Fasteners: Stainless steel. 8. Lower ring seal: Tungsten-carbide both faces or Silicon Carbide both faces. 9. Upper ring seal: Tungsten-carbide both faces or carbon and ceramic or carbon and Ni- resist. 10. Seal metal parts: Stainless steel. B. Wet Pit Applications: 1. Guide rails: Type 316 Stainless steel. 2. Lifting chains and cables: Type 316 Stainless steel. 3. Base elbow: Cast iron, ASTM A48, Class 35. 2.4 COMPONENTS A. General: 1. Provide pumps capable of handling raw, unscreened sewage. 2. Where watertight sealing is required, machine and fit mating surfaces with O-rings. 3. Provide with heavy duty lift lugs or hoisting bail designed for lifting the entire pump and motor assembly. B. Impeller: 1. Provide semi-open solids-handling type dynamically balanced impeller in accordance with HI standards. 2. Provide impeller and volute wear rings as necessary to assure efficient sealing between volute and impeller. C. Shaft: 1. Design shaft for a maximum deflection of 0.004 inches at the stuffing box as calculated at the design condition. D. Mechanical Seal: 1. Seal shaft with double mechanical seal running in an oil filled chamber. 2. Provide seals requiring neither routine maintenance nor adjustment, but capable of being easily inspected and replaced. 3. Hold interface in contact by its own spring system. E. Bearings: 1. Support shaft on upper and lower permanently lubricated bearings with a minimum ABMA L-10 life of 100,000 hours. F. Motors: 1. Provide pump with FM, UL, or CSA listed motor approved for Class 1 Division 1. 2. Provide induction type motor with a squirrel cage rotor, of totally submersible design without loss of watertight integrity to a depth of at least 65 feet, constructed with epoxy or poly-seal encapsulated windings, air-filled or dielectric oil filled, with Class H insulation rated for 180 degrees C and rated for continuous duty operation. 3. Motor shall be 3 PH, 60 cycle, 460 V. 4. Motor shall be capable of running continuously in an unsubmerged condition while pumping under load without damage to motor or seal. 5. The motor horsepower provided shall be adequate so that the pump is non-overloading throughout the entire pump performance curve from shut-off through runout. 6. The motor shall be designed and assembled by the same manufacturer as the pump. 7. The motor shall be equipped with a closed loop cooling system where the cooling medium is circulated through the pump motor cooling jacket. The pumped fluid shall not be circulated through the cooling jacket. An impeller in the lower motor coolant reservoir will circulate coolant around the motor housing. The cooling system shall provide sufficient cooling for continuous operation whether the pump is submerged in the pumped media or surrounded by air in liquid or ambient temperatures of up to 40 degrees C. 8. Cooling system will provide sufficient cooling for the entire range of pump operating speeds. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents PUMPING EQUIPMENT - SUBMERSIBLE END-SUCTION SEWAGE PUMPS 43 25 13 - 4 9. Suitable for use with VFDs. G. Power and Control Cables: 1. Provide power and control cables which are listed per NEC requirements and approved for the installation types indicated on the drawings. As a minimum the cable shall be suitable for installation in conduit and for submersible applications. 2. Size cables in accordance with applicable NFPA 70 specifications. 3. Provide 50 feet power cable and control cable. 4. Provide each cable with a strain relief, cord grip, and explosion proof seal installed in accordance with NFPA 70, Article 500. 5. Minimum acceptable cable type: "SO-Water Resistant" per UL 62. H. Temperature Monitor: 1. Furnish each phase of the motor with thermal switches embedded in the motor windings. 2. Thermal switch contacts shall open upon sensing high temperature be sensed in the windings. The thermal switches shall automatically reset once the stator temperature returns to normal. 3. Set temperature of the temperature monitors not higher than 90% of insulation temperature rating. I. Leak Detection: 1. Provide sensors inside the pump to detect water intrusion. 2. If water is detected, a switch will stop the pump and sound an alarm. J. Pump Monitoring Relay: 1. Monitor pump for leak. 2. Monitor motor for high temperature. 3. Provide relay to interface between control circuitry in the VFD and the pump motor temperature switches. 4. Integrate relay into VFD control circuitry. 5. Provide Form C relay contact outputs: a. Pump leak. b. Motor temperature high. K. Coatings: 1. Apply two-component oxirane ester or polyamidoamine epoxy system to the exterior of the pump casing and motor housing. L. Wet Pit Applications: 1. Provide sliding guide bracket integral to pump unit which properly aligns the pump discharge with the discharge connection elbow for watertight seal during pumping. 2. Guide the entire weight of the pumping unit to the base discharge elbow by guide rail(s). 3. The guide rail(s) shall not support any portion of the weight of the pump. 4. Provide chains or cable of sufficient strength to lift pumps from sump. 5. Furnish guiding rail assembly and the discharge flange assembly of nonsparking components. 6. Design pump to allow for removal without entering the wet well and without removal of bolts, nuts or other fastenings. 7. Provide pump unit connecting to discharge connection with a simple downward motion without rotation. The entire weight of the pumping unit shall wedge tightly against the discharge elbow flange forming a seal without the use of bolts, gaskets, or o-rings. 8. Provide necessary sliding guide bracket and discharge connection which, when bolted to the floor of the sump and to the discharge line, will receive the pump discharge connecting flange without need of adjustment, fasteners, clamp, or similar devices. 9. No portion of the pump shall bear directly on the floor. 2.5 ACCESSORIES A. See Section 43 05 23 - Common Work Results for Process Liquid Pumps. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents PUMPING EQUIPMENT - SUBMERSIBLE END-SUCTION SEWAGE PUMPS 43 25 13 - 5 B. Controls: 1. See Electrical and Instrument and Controls Designs for controls requirements. C. Access Doors and Frames for Wet Pit Applications: 1. Doors: See Section 08 31 00. 2.6 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Secure from the pump manufacturer the following inspections and tests on each pump before shipment from factory: 1. Check impeller, motor rating and electrical connections for compliance with this Specification Section. 2. Test motor and cable insulation for moisture content or insulation defects. 3. Prior to submergence, run pump dry to establish correct rotation and mechanical integrity. 4. Run pump submerged for 30 minutes. 5. After operational test #4, perform insulation test (#2) again. B. Factory test of head (FT) versus flow (GPM) for all pumps being provided as specified in Specification Section 43 05 23. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. See Section 43 05 23. B. For wet pit pumps, permanently install discharge connection elbow in wet well along with discharge piping. C. Seal pump cable end with a high quality protective covering, to make it impervious to moisture or water seepage prior to electrical installation. 3.2 PUMP TESTING A. Functional Test: 1. The pumping system shall be functionally field tested using clean water. Water shall be the Contractor’s responsibility and in accordance with requirements in Specification Section 40 05 01 / 2.4.A.4.a. The Contractor shall be responsible for conveying the water to the site and providing required meter and backflow prevention. Each pump shall be cycled through the sequence of operation for “Pump ON” as the level rises in the wet well and then “Pump OFF” during draw down. All lift station pump control set points shall be tested and verified during functional testing. B. Performance Test: 1. Conduct a performance field test for each pump in accordance with Hydraulic Institute (HI) Standards. At a minimum, each pump shall be performance tested for total dynamic head, capacity, efficiency, and power requirements at the operating points specified. The performance field test shall demonstrate that the pumps meet all specified performance criteria, are properly installed and anchored, and operate smoothly throughout the specified speed range without exceeding the full load amperage rating of the motor or excessive motor heating. a. Flow Output: Measured by pump station instrumentation and storage volumes. b. Operating Temperatures: Monitor bearing areas on pump and motor for abnormally high temperatures. C. Upon completion of pump installation, functional and performance testing, and before acceptance by the Engineer/City of Bozeman, the pump manufacturer or the authorized pump manufacturer’s representative shall submit a written statement that the pump installation has been completed in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 HDR Project No. 10375316 City of Bozeman July 2026 Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Conformed Documents PUMPING EQUIPMENT - SUBMERSIBLE END-SUCTION SEWAGE PUMPS 43 25 13 - 6 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. See Section 43 05 23. END OF SECTION Docusign Envelope ID: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 Certificate Of Completion Envelope Id: 2E6FAA2D-EE40-8E6E-8313-CC1244532F92 Status: Completed Subject: Complete with Docusign: City of Bozeman_Valley Center Lift Station and Force Main Project_Confo... Source Envelope: Document Pages: 1003 Signatures: 3 Envelope Originator: Certificate Pages: 4 Initials: 0 Mike Maas AutoNav: Enabled EnvelopeId Stamping: Enabled Time Zone: (UTC-07:00) Mountain Time (US & Canada) Stamps: 1 PO Box 1230 Bozeman, MT 59771 mike.maas@bozemanmt.gov IP Address: 155.190.3.7 Record Tracking Status: Original 9/1/2026 9:10:57 AM Holder: Mike Maas mike.maas@bozemanmt.gov Location: DocuSign Security Appliance Status: Connected Pool: StateLocal Signer Events Signature Timestamp PARKER BROWN p.brown@simeconst.com EVP sime construction Security Level: Email, Account Authentication (None) Signature Adoption: Pre-selected Style Using IP Address: 208.75.140.146 Sent: 9/1/2026 9:16:49 AM Viewed: 9/8/2026 11:47:33 AM Signed: 9/15/2026 2:31:42 PM Electronic Record and Signature Disclosure: Accepted: 9/8/2026 11:47:33 AM ID: 955fffb3-4aca-4000-a76b-5c8086c5aee9 Jon Henderson jon.henderson@bozemanmt.gov Assistant City Manager City of Bozeman Security Level: Email, Account Authentication (None) Signature Adoption: Pre-selected Style Using IP Address: 155.190.3.7 Sent: 9/15/2026 2:31:50 PM Resent: 9/15/2026 4:24:23 PM Viewed: 9/15/2026 4:31:09 PM Signed: 9/15/2026 4:31:21 PM Electronic Record and Signature Disclosure: Accepted: 2/4/2026 10:57:30 AM ID: f4b2a38b-ffb2-486e-af4f-e3c76ba69b5e Mike Maas mike.maas@bozemanmt.gov City Clerk City of Bozeman Security Level: Email, Account Authentication (None) Signature Adoption: Pre-selected Style Using IP Address: 155.190.3.7 Sent: 9/15/2026 4:31:27 PM Viewed: 9/18/2026 9:12:44 AM Signed: 9/18/2026 9:13:14 AM Electronic Record and Signature Disclosure: Not Offered via Docusign In Person Signer Events Signature Timestamp Editor Delivery Events Status Timestamp Agent Delivery Events Status Timestamp Intermediary Delivery Events Status Timestamp Certified Delivery Events Status Timestamp Carbon Copy Events Status Timestamp Bob Murray bob.murray@bozemanmt.gov Security Level: Email, Account Authentication (None) Sent: 9/1/2026 9:16:47 AM Viewed: 9/1/2026 3:18:58 PM Electronic Record and Signature Disclosure: Not Offered via Docusign Michelle Chapel michelle.chapel@bozemanmt.gov Records Coordinator City Bozeman Security Level: Email, Account Authentication (None) Sent: 9/1/2026 9:16:48 AM Electronic Record and Signature Disclosure: Not Offered via Docusign Witness Events Signature Timestamp Notary Events Signature Timestamp Envelope Summary Events Status Timestamps Envelope Sent Hashed/Encrypted 9/1/2026 9:16:47 AM Envelope Updated Security Checked 9/15/2026 4:24:22 PM Envelope Updated Security Checked 9/15/2026 4:24:22 PM Certified Delivered Security Checked 9/18/2026 9:12:44 AM Signing Complete Security Checked 9/18/2026 9:13:14 AM Completed Security Checked 9/18/2026 9:13:14 AM Payment Events Status Timestamps Electronic Record and Signature Disclosure ELECTRONIC RECORD AND SIGNATURE DISCLOSURE From time to time, City of Bozeman (we, us or Company) may be required by law to provide to you certain written notices or disclosures. Described below are the terms and conditions for providing to you such notices and disclosures electronically through the DocuSign system. Please read the information below carefully and thoroughly, and if you can access this information electronically to your satisfaction and agree to this Electronic Record and Signature Disclosure (ERSD), please confirm your agreement by selecting the check-box next to ‘I agree to use electronic records and signatures’ before clicking ‘CONTINUE’ within the DocuSign system. Getting paper copies At any time, you may request from us a paper copy of any record provided or made available electronically to you by us. You will have the ability to download and print documents we send to you through the DocuSign system during and immediately after the signing session and, if you elect to create a DocuSign account, you may access the documents for a limited period of time (usually 30 days) after such documents are first sent to you. After such time, if you wish for us to send you paper copies of any such documents from our office to you, you will be charged a $0.00 per-page fee. You may request delivery of such paper copies from us by following the procedure described below. Withdrawing your consent If you decide to receive notices and disclosures from us electronically, you may at any time change your mind and tell us that thereafter you want to receive required notices and disclosures only in paper format. How you must inform us of your decision to receive future notices and disclosure in paper format and withdraw your consent to receive notices and disclosures electronically is described below. Consequences of changing your mind If you elect to receive required notices and disclosures only in paper format, it will slow the speed at which we can complete certain steps in transactions with you and delivering services to you because we will need first to send the required notices or disclosures to you in paper format, and then wait until we receive back from you your acknowledgment of your receipt of such paper notices or disclosures. Further, you will no longer be able to use the DocuSign system to receive required notices and consents electronically from us or to sign electronically documents from us. All notices and disclosures will be sent to you electronically Unless you tell us otherwise in accordance with the procedures described herein, we will provide electronically to you through the DocuSign system all required notices, disclosures, authorizations, acknowledgements, and other documents that are required to be provided or made available to you during the course of our relationship with you. To reduce the chance of you inadvertently not receiving any notice or disclosure, we prefer to provide all of the required notices and disclosures to you by the same method and to the same address that you have given us. Thus, you can receive all the disclosures and notices electronically or in paper format through the paper mail delivery system. If you do not agree with this process, please let us know as described below. Please also see the paragraph immediately above that describes the consequences of your electing not to receive delivery of the notices and disclosures electronically from us. How to contact City of Bozeman: You may contact us to let us know of your changes as to how we may contact you electronically, to request paper copies of certain information from us, and to withdraw your prior consent to receive notices and disclosures electronically as follows: To contact us by email send messages to: information@bozeman.net To advise City of Bozeman of your new email address To let us know of a change in your email address where we should send notices and disclosures electronically to you, you must send an email message to us at information@bozeman.net and in the body of such request you must state: your Electronic Record and Signature Disclosure created on: 1/16/2026 3:06:06 PM Parties agreed to: PARKER BROWN, Jon Henderson previous email address, your new email address. We do not require any other information from you to change your email address. If you created a DocuSign account, you may update it with your new email address through your account preferences. To request paper copies from City of Bozeman To request delivery from us of paper copies of the notices and disclosures previously provided by us to you electronically, you must send us an email to information@bozeman.net and in the body of such request you must state your email address, full name, mailing address, and telephone number. We will bill you for any fees at that time, if any. To withdraw your consent with City of Bozeman To inform us that you no longer wish to receive future notices and disclosures in electronic format you may: i. decline to sign a document from within your signing session, and on the subsequent page, select the check-box indicating you wish to withdraw your consent, or you may; ii. send us an email to information@bozeman.net and in the body of such request you must state your email, full name, mailing address, and telephone number. We do not need any other information from you to withdraw consent.. The consequences of your withdrawing consent for online documents will be that transactions may take a longer time to process.. Required hardware and software The minimum system requirements for using the DocuSign system may change over time. The current system requirements are found here: https://support.docusign.com/guides/signer-guide-signing-system-requirements. Acknowledging your access and consent to receive and sign documents electronically To confirm to us that you can access this information electronically, which will be similar to other electronic notices and disclosures that we will provide to you, please confirm that you have read this ERSD, and (i) that you are able to print on paper or electronically save this ERSD for your future reference and access; or (ii) that you are able to email this ERSD to an email address where you will be able to print on paper or save it for your future reference and access. Further, if you consent to receiving notices and disclosures exclusively in electronic format as described herein, then select the check- box next to ‘I agree to use electronic records and signatures’ before clicking ‘CONTINUE’ within the DocuSign system. By selecting the check-box next to ‘I agree to use electronic records and signatures’, you confirm that: You can access and read this Electronic Record and Signature Disclosure; and You can print on paper this Electronic Record and Signature Disclosure, or save or send this Electronic Record and Disclosure to a location where you can print it, for future reference and access; and Until or unless you notify City of Bozeman as described above, you consent to receive exclusively through electronic means all notices, disclosures, authorizations, acknowledgements, and other documents that are required to be provided or made available to you by City of Bozeman during the course of your relationship with City of Bozeman.